RC Gem

ttt
GUIDING
ENGINEERING
MANUAL
Revision 0
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

October 2016
Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu.
Royal Commission in Jubail

GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL
3
0 Oct. 2016 %lie A do isi'-4
4,-...—
TQM MoTS MoE DoE GMTA
Revision Date
Prepared By Reviewed By Reviewed By Concurred By Approved By
\ .4-c.I .
.
KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA , 1.00=11 44)&11 1-410011
Royal Commission for Jubail & Yanbu ' 111.21111.
-q- V;49 JI.Y?•11 44Z
-. 4-0+6J1
-'
Royal Commission in Jubail
J-!#?•U
. 4-4I
-. 4.4-11
4 OF StO
Revision 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
1.1.1 Introduction/Background
1.1.2 Scope and Purpose of the Guiding Engineering Manual
1.1.3 Policies and Procedures
1.1.4 Regulatory Documents
1.1.5 Revisions to the Manual
1.1.6 Coordination with RCJ Guiding Procurement and Construction Specifications
1.1.7 Coordination with RCJ Typical Construction Details and Drawings
1.2 Manual Organization

1.2.1 Chapter 1 – Introduction
1.2.2 Chapter 2 – Definitions and References
1.2.3 Chapter 3 – Codes and Performance Standards
1.2.4 Chapter 4 – Project Submission Standards and Requirements
1.2.5 Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines
CHAPTER 2 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES

2.1 General
2.2 Definitions and References
2.3 SI Units and Conversions
2.4 References
CHAPTER 3 CODES AND PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
3.1 Building Codes

3.1.1 General Building Codes and Additional Standards
3.1.2 Additional Standards
3.2 Zoning Regulations

3.2.1 General
3.2.2 Coordination with Jubail Zoning Regulations
3.2.3 Coordination with Jubail Master Plans
3.2.4 Setback Requirements
3.2.5 Parking Requirements
3.2.6 Landscaping
3.3 Accessibility
3.3.1 General
3.3.2 Site Accessibility
3.3.3 Building Accessibility
3.4 Sustainability
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Sustainable “Green” Design
3.4.3 ASHRAE
3.4.4 Energy
3.4.5 Water Conservation
Revision 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.5 Environmental Protection and Preservation

3.5.1 General
3.5.2 Environmental Regulatory System and RCER
3.5.3 Environmental Regulations and Project Permitting
3.5.4 Construction Phase Environmental Controls
3.5.5 Hazardous Materials and Waste
3.5.6 Pollution Prevention
3.5.7 Petroleum and Chemical Bulk Storage
3.5.8 Site Cleanup and Remediation
3.6 Safety Standards

3.6.1 General
3.6.2 Safety in Design
CHAPTER 4 Project Submission Standards and Requirements
4.1 Standards and Requirements
4.2 Submission Requirements

4.2.0 Submission Requirements
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 Drawings
4.2.3 Specification Standards
4.2.4 Cost Estimate Standards
4.2.5 Calculations
4.2.6 Schedules of Quantities and Price
4.2.7 RFP Documents
4.2.8 Review / Approval Procedures and Milestones
4.3 Design Phase Requirements

4.3.0 Design Phase Requirements
4.3.1 General
4.3.2 Preliminary Studies
4.3.3 Environmental (Assessments, Studies and Permitting)
4.3.4 Sustainability Report
4.3.5 Value Engineering
4.3.6 Design Basis Reports (DBR’s)
4.3.7 Land Allocation Requests
4.3.8 Life Cycle Costing and Design Service Life
4.3.9 Risk Management and Emergency Planning
4.3.10 Third Party Contract Interface Coordination (and Interface Control Document)
4.3.11 Quality Assurance and Quality Control (QA/QC) Procedures
4.3.12 Bidding and Procurement Requirements
4.3.13 Contractual Restrictions
4.3.14 Special Procedures
Revision 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4 Field Investigations and Existing Conditions

4.4.1 Surveying
4.4.2 Geotechnical Investigations
4.4.3 Environmental Investigations and Studies
4.4.4 Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal
4.4.5 Existing Environmental Conditions Report
4.5 Construction Phase Requirements

4.5.0 Construction Phase Requirements
4.5.1 General
4.5.2 Design Change Notices
4.5.3 Labor Accommodations
4.5.4 Construction Administration
4.5.5 Construction Inspection
4.5.6 Environmental Compliance during Construction
4.5.7 As-Built Drawings
4.5.8 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
4.5.9 Startup, Commissioning and Training
4.5.10 Substantial Completion (Initial Acceptance)
4.5.11 Documentation and Archiving
CHAPTER 5 DESIGN GUIDELINES
5.1 Design Guidelines

5.1.1 General
5.1.2 Saudi Arabian Goods and Services
5.1.3 Standards of Quality
5.1.4 Third Party Requirements
5.1.5 Security Requirements
5.1.6 Local Climate Conditions
5.2 Structural
5.2.1 Building Structures
5.2.2 High Rise Building Structures
5.2.3 Non-building Structures
5.2.4 Transportation Structures
5.2.5 Foundations and Earth Retaining Structures
5.2.6 Corrosion Protection
5.3 Architectural
5.3.0 Architectural
5.3.1 General Architecture
5.3.2 Site Development for Buildings
5.3.3 Building Development
5.3.4 Building Components
5.3.5 Guidelines by Building Type
Revision 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4 Mechanical
5.4.1 Fire Suppression
5.4.2 Plumbing
5.4.3 HVAC
5.4.4 Guidelines By Building Type
5.5 Electrical
5.5.1 Electrical
5.5.2 Telecommunications
5.5.3 Instrumentation and Controls
5.5.4 Guidelines By Building Type
5.6 Civil, Sitework and Roads

5.6.1 Site Development Design
5.6.2 Traffic and Transportation
5.6.3 Streets and Roadways
5.6.4 Stormwater Drainage
5.6.5 Landscaping and Plant Irrigation
5.7 Utilities
5.7.0. Utilities
5.7.1 Potable Water
5.7.2 Sanitary and Industrial Sewer System
5.7.3 Recycled Water System (Irrigation)
5.7.4 Sea Water Cooling
5.7.5 Fuel Gas
5.7.6 Electrical
5.7.7 Communications
5.7.8 Hydronic Cooling
5.7.9 Pipeline Corridors
5.8 Coastal Marine

5.8.1 General
5.8.2 Natural Conditions
5.8.3 Land Reclamation
5.8.4 Breakwaters, Jetties, Quay Walls and Revetments
5.8.5 Dredging
5.8.6 Shoreline Protection
5.9 Environmental
5.9.1 General
5.9.2 Air
5.9.3 Water and Wastewater Discharges
5.9.4 Solid Waste Management and Recycling
5.9.5 Noise Management
5.9.6 Site Environmental Management Plan
5.10 Geotechnical
5.10.1 General
5.10.2 Geotechnical Conditions
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page No.
1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND .......................................................................................... 1

A. Purpose ................................................................................................................................... 1
B. National and Regional Framework .......................................................................................... 1
C. Master Plans ............................................................................................................................ 1
D. Industrial Cities ........................................................................................................................ 2
E. The Community Plan ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL ............................... 4
A. General .................................................................................................................................... 4
B. Applicability .............................................................................................................................. 4
C. Related Sections ..................................................................................................................... 4
1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ............................................................................................. 5
A. Responsibilities and Coordination ........................................................................................... 5
B. Document Submittal ................................................................................................................ 7
C. Quality Management System .................................................................................................. 7
D. Order of Precedence for Technical Conflicts ........................................................................... 7
1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS................................................................................................ 8
A. Applicability .............................................................................................................................. 8
1. All projects are to align with the following regulatory documents: ........................................... 8
1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL ............................................................................................... 9
A. Applicability .............................................................................................................................. 9
1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL GUIDING PROCUREMENT .AND
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................... 10
A. Guideline Procurement Construction Specifications .............................................................. 10
1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION
DETAILS AND DRAWINGS ................................................................................................... 12
A. Overview ................................................................................................................................. 12
B. Standard Drawings ................................................................................................................. 12
FIGURE 1.1.A: JUBAIL INDUSTRIAL CITY DISTRICT MAP.................................................................... 13
FIGURE 1.1.B: RAS AL-KHAIR DISTRICT MAP....................................................................................... 14
RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Rev. 0 1.1 - i
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND
1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND
A. Purpose
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail is currently engaged in the expansion and development
of Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities. In Jubail, the Royal Commission is engaged
in expansion of the city to meet future demands from existing and new industries in Jubail
1 and Jubail 2 Industrial Areas. In Ras Al-Khair, the Royal Commission is engaged in
development of the city by building the infrastructure to support existing and future
mineral industries to be built in the city.
B. National and Regional Framework
1. This Section provides important background information concerning the Royal
Commission and the industrial cities under its jurisdiction (specifically, Jubail Industrial
City and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City), and the significant urban planning and
infrastructure development context for the cities, for Consultant’s consideration in
preparation of engineering services.
2. In 1975, the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) completed its Second Development Plan for
economic diversification and industrialization. The central focus of the Plan was the
development of hydrocarbon-based and energy-intensive industries, including the
production, refining and manufacturing of fuels, petrochemicals, steel and aluminum. Two
cities were established to implement the Kingdom’s industrialization aspirations, including
one in Jubail in the Eastern Province and one in Yanbu in the Western Province.
3. The Royal Commission in Jubail and Yanbu (RCJY) was established in 1975 to develop
the infrastructure required to transform Jubail and Yanbu into planned industrial cities and
today, the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) continues to be responsible for planning
and implementing infrastructure plans and well integrated public services for the
development of Jubail. The mission of the RCJ is to, “Plan, promote, develop and
manage Petrochemicals and Energy intensive industrial cities through successful
customer focus and partnerships with Investors, employees, communities and other
stakeholders.” Accordingly, Jubail Industrial City (JIC) is now a well-established, world-
scale petrochemical industrial center. It is Saudi Arabia's leading center for foreign joint
venture capital and overall investment. Its vision is to be the best choice for investors in
petrochemical and energy-intensive industries and the leading contributor to the
Kingdom’s growth.
4. Due to the success that has been achieved by RCJ, in 2009, the Saudi Arabian
Government assigned the task of administration, management and development of Ras
Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) to the RCJ. Ras Al-Khair Industrial City, located
approximately 80 km North West of JIC is planned to be a leading minerals and metal
related industrial city in the region and the world. The vision for Ras Al-Khair Industrial
City is, “To be the center of excellence for metal and mineral industries by building a
world class complex that employs latest technologies and creates integrated industries
that leverage key resources of the Kingdom.”
C. Master Plans
1. The Jubail Industrial City Master Plan is the key strategic document for guiding the city’s
long term growth and development. It was originally prepared in 1978, updated in 1984
and 1999. The city’s rapid rate of development and current and forecasted outlook for the
oil and gas economy, led to the Master Plan Update in 2010. The plan outlook over the
projected horizon year of 2030 is to transform JIC into a “Complete and Sustainable City”
that has diversity of function, population and housing choices.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 1
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
2. In 2009, the first draft of Ras Al-Khair Industrial City, Initial Master Plan was prepared,
and ever since it has been undergoing updates with the latest being in 2011.
D. Industrial Cities
1. Originally conceived as part of the 1978 Jubail Master Plan (MP), Jubail 1 (J1) has been
the focus of JIC‘s industrial activity for over the years. It basically consists of three
industrial zones including Support and Light Manufacturing Industries, Secondary
Industries, and Primary Industries. Due to the rapid development of J1, a new
development area, Jubail 2 (J2), was identified as being required in the 1999 Master Plan
Update (MPU). In general, these industries convert natural resources, together with
certain required imports, to basic products. These products are intended to be utilized by
other Primary Industries or by the Secondary Industries for further in-Kingdom
conversion. Primary Industries are generally characterized by their relatively large
demands for infrastructure and utilities. Secondary Industries are mainly specialty
petrochemicals and plastics, and include enterprises that utilize – as their main feedstock
– primary industry output for conversion to downstream products. Light Manufacturing
Industries generally utilize the outputs of the existing or planned Primary and Secondary
Industries to produce finished goods for use in construction of industrial plants,
community development and for export. As the name implies, Support Industries provide
the goods and services necessary for construction and on-going support of the Primary,
Secondary and Light Manufacturing Industries. Jubail 2 leasable land is over 5,000
hectares.
2. The Ras Al-Khair Industrial City is located approximately 100 km to the north of JIC. The
new mineral city is proposed to include energy intensive developments related to
aluminum and phosphate production. An aluminum smelter and a phosphate plant are
both in production at Ras Al-Khair Industrial City. The total area to be developed in RIC is
approximately 5,335 hectares.
3. The Royal Commission in Jubail’s Urban Development Department has developed
additional Master Planning documents, including Northern Corridor Buffer Zone (NCBZ)
Master Plan, City Center Master Plan, West of Abu-Hadriah City Plan, and Jubail Airport
Master Plan. See Section 3.2 for zoning regulations.
E. The Community Plan
1. The 80 km2 peninsula shaped community area of Jubail Industrial City is situated in
unique location north of the industrial park. In the middle of it to the north lies a sea bay
called "Khaleej Mardumah" that divides the area into two "butterfly" shaped sections. A
cape extends from its right half toward the east into the Arab Gulf water forming a
continuous 45 km long coastal area of natural beauty. The city commercial and social
center is located in the peninsula entrance which is separated from the industrial park by
a wide desert strip. Choosing the community area took into consideration natural factors
of the city, the most important being wind direction. The community area is divided into
eight equal districts where four of them are located to the east of Khaleej Mardumah,
while the other four districts are located to the west of it. JIC City Center is located in the
middle of these districts to form in the end the "butterfly" design idea of the community
area.
2. The community area districts were planned on the modern style which combines the
Islamic morals and KSA old traditions on one hand and the advanced modern Standard
of living on the other hand. Each of the "1000 ha" districts is home for "31 to 38 thousand
people," as per the City Master Plan. These districts are connected to each other by a
network of roads separated by green strips of parks, recreational playgrounds and some
joint educational services.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 2
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
3. There is a clear hierarchy in the urban formation for each district as it is divided into four
or five residential sectors each is inhabited by "7,000 to 10,000" people. The sector
consists of several neighborhoods with resident population ranging from 2250 to 2750
per neighborhood. The neighborhood is the smallest unit in the district and it includes all
of utilities, facilities, and public services such as mosques, schools, health centers, and
commercial, social, and recreation centers to reduce pressure on the main city center,
prevent traffic jams, and ease residents so that the distance from any residential unit to a
district center would not take more than 10 minutes walking.
4. The districts of Jubail Industrial City (JIC) are characterized by low population density of
about 12 residential units per hectare, consisting of a mixture of attached and detached
residential units and block buildings in sector centers within a homogeneous urban
texture.
5. Today, Fanateer and Deffi are the oldest permanent districts in JIC. A large part of
Jalmudah district has already been developed. Mutrafiah and Mardumah districts are
being developed. Finally, Reggah district is currently being planned. Those developed
districts accommodate approximately 120,000 people. The RCJ has been working
actively to develop new districts in order to accommodate the population growth.
6. Refer to FIGURE 1.1.A at the end of this Section for the Jubail Industrial City District
Map. Refer to FIGURE 1.1.B at the end of this Section for the Ras Al-Khair District Map.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 3
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL
1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL
A. General
1. The General Design Guidelines as part of this Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) shall
be followed by Architectural/Engineering (A/E) and Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC)
Contractors for all projects in Jubail Industrial cities under the jurisdiction of the Royal
Commission in Jubail in the preparation of the Project Engineering Manual, calculations,
engineering studies, drawings, and specifications. To ensure uniformity throughout the
project and for compatibility within the Royal Commission in Jubail limits of jurisdiction,
these guidelines provide the framework within which all the Royal Commission in Jubail
Consultants, A/E Contractors, EPC Contractors and all others designing and constructing
facilities shall perform their works, including designers operating within a Procure and
Construct (PC) contract.
2. The General Design Guidelines in this Guiding Engineering Manual along with Guiding
Procurement Construction Specifications (GPCS) and the Typical Construction Detail
Drawings (TCDD) indicate the level of quality required by the Royal Commission, define
the responsibilities of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, and provide a reference basis for
Saudi Arabian and International Codes and Standards. The Guiding Engineering Manual
also provides a reference basis for the Building Codes, GPCS, and TCDD issued by the
Royal Commission in Jubail identifying the Standards and requirements by which the A/E
and EPC Contractors shall adhere to in their work, including emphasis on the utilization
of Saudi Arabian goods and services.
3. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Section, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
remain totally responsible for the design and the Contract Package provided by him.
B. Applicability
1. This and all other Chapters of the Guiding Engineering Manual apply to all the Royal
Commission in Jubail Consultants, A/E or EPC Contractors, and all others designing and
constructing facilities within Jubail, Ras Al-Khair, and all other sites that the Royal
Commission in Jubail has jurisdiction.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with all requirements given in the
Engineering Manual. Any conflict or any proposed deviation or non-compliance with this
manual shall be identified and submitted in writing for the Royal Commission’s evaluation
and written approval. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor may be allowed to deviate from
the Guiding Engineering Manual if engineering justification is provided.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with all Jubail Management Procedures
(JMPs) and Engineering Bulletins.
4. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall note that the Standards identified in this manual are
for reference only. The mere compliance with the Standards or declaration of deviations
from the Standards does not relieve the A/E and/or EPC Contractor from the obligation to
make sure that the work performed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is fit for the
intended use and meets the generally acceptable criteria for quality and safety. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor are the Design Authority and as such, shall be responsible for the
quality of Work and services performed by them as per the conditions of the Contract.
C. Related Sections
1. Refer to Chapter 2 for Definitions and References, including units and conversions.
2. Refer to Section 3.1 for Building Codes and other references as applicable.
3. Refer to Subsection 5.1.3 for Standards of Quality.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 4
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
A. Responsibilities and Coordination

1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are responsible to the Royal Commission in Jubail for the
completion of the work per his contract. The Royal Commission in Jubail is responsible
to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for oversight and general coordination of the work to
align with this manual. Each party’s responsibility is generally identified as follows.
2. Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractor
responsibilities:
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall guarantee and be responsible for the
professional quality, technical accuracy, completeness, and coordination of the work
in order that the Royal Commission in Jubail may rely upon the work for subsequent
procurement, construction, and implementation in the areas where the RCJ has
jurisdiction.
b. Each A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be required to coordinate and cooperate with
other A/E and/or EPC Contractors as well as project stake holders with whom he
has interfaces. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall work with the Royal Commission in
Jubail to define and clarify project limits and coordination between interfacing work
of other A/E and EPC Contractors.
c. Compliance with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations, and applicable Codes and
Standards is mandatory. Refer to Chapter 3 for more information.
3. Royal Commission in Jubail responsibilities:
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail shall conduct general coordination of the work of
the various A/E and/or EPC Contractors within Jubail Industrial City and the Royal
Commission in Jubail jurisdiction limits, in order to secure uniformity of design that
meets the requirements of the Royal Commission in Jubail.
b. The Royal Commission in Jubail will provide the A/E and/or EPC Contractors with
design guidance per the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), Guiding Procurement
and Construction Specifications (GPCS), and Typical Construction Detail Drawings
(TCDD). The Royal Commission in Jubail will be responsible for keeping these
documents up to date and informing the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of modifications
in writing.
c. Design criteria, calculations, drawings, specifications, schedules, estimates, and
other products of the engineering process and prepared by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor will be reviewed for compliance with this manual by the Royal
Commission in Jubail at intervals aligning with the document submittal schedule.
4. Duties of a Designer:
a. Whether working for the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, a Designer is someone who
has a trade or business that involves them in preparing designs for construction
and/or arranging for their employees or other people under their control to prepare
designs for construction.
b. The Designer is responsible for documenting the Design Criteria and Basis of
Design as part of the Design Basis Report (DBR). DBRs are described in detail in
Section 4.3.6 and are submitted in accordance with the Stage Submittal Schedule
listed in Section 4.2.C.
c. Information from the Designer shall be brief, clear, and precise so that it is suitable
for use and review by other users/designers. The Designer shall coordinate and

Rev. 0 1.1 - 5
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
cooperate with other designers as well as project stake holders with whom he has
interfaces.
d. Where many Designers are involved on a Project, the Design Team is encouraged
to appoint a Lead Designer to coordinate and oversee the Project’s Designers.
e. Early in the Design stages, Designers are expected to consider not only the design
of a structure, network or system but the ease and safety of that building’s or
facilities operation and maintenance.
f. For Procurement and Construction (P&C) Contracts the Designer shall provide
comprehensive, and complete design details that have been coordinated among all
disciplines, RCJ and stakeholders. Transferring of design to vendors, suppliers or
construction contractors is not permitted except under special waiver’s defined by
RC on a task-by-task basis. A safe, workable, practical,
buildable/erectable/installable solution with methodology is to be provided for all
systems. After P&C Contract Award the Construction Contractor(s) may submit
alternative proposals of buildable/erectable/installable solutions for RCJ
consideration.
g. For Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Contracts the Designer shall
provide a level of details equivalent to 60% construction design of "a" above unless
otherwise specified by the RCJ task release. A safe, workable, practical,
buildable/erectable/installable concept solution with methodology is to be provided
for all systems. After EPC Contract Award, the Construction Contractor(s) and their
A/Es may submit alternative detailed proposals of buildable/erectable/installable
solutions for RCJ consideration.
h. For Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Contracts for SEC related
work, the Designer shall provide a level of detail similar to "g" above and perform
necessary coordination with Saudi Electric Company (SEC).
i. The Designer is expected to design in a way that reduces or eliminates hazards and
the likely risks from hazards. Refer to Section 3.6.2 Safety in Design for more
information.
j. The designer shall build off Item-3d, above, and provide: Design philosophy/
strategy, design criteria, constructability methodologies, include design for safety,
installation /implementation methodology, hazard/ risk assessment/ analyses,
calculations, drawings, specifications, schedules, estimates,
k. The Designer is expected to design in a way that reduces or eliminates hazards and
the likely risks from hazards. Refer to Section 3.6.2 Safety in Design for more
information.
l. The Designer is not expected to:
1) Take into account or provide information about unforeseeable hazards and
risks. This does not mitigate the consideration and professional due diligence
required to be performed and undertaken by the Designer under Item-4f
2) Design for potential future uses of structures that cannot be reasonably
anticipated. This does not mitigate the consideration and professional due
diligence required to be performed and undertaken by the Designer under
Item-4f.
3) Specify construction methods (except where the design assumes or requires
a particular construction or erection sequence). This does not mitigate the
consideration and professional due diligence required to be performed and
undertaken by the Designer under Item-4f.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 6
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
4) Exercise any health and safety management function over Contractors or

others.
B. Document Submittal
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required by the Royal Commission in Jubail to submit
documentation progress at 10%, 30%, 60%, 90%, and 100% complete. Detailed
guidance is provided in Section 4.2 of this manual.
C. Quality Management System
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor, their sub-Consultants, suppliers, and sub-tiers thereof
shall establish and implement a Quality Management System (QMS) the complies with
the International Organization of Standards (ISO) 9001:2008 and an Environmental
Management System that complies with ISO 14001:2004 and meets the minimum quality
and environmental requirements set by the Royal Commission in Jubail. The systems
shall be capable of demonstrating that all the quality and environmental requirements of
the Contract are being complied with.
2. Note, the third party registration of assessed capability (i.e. approval to ISO 9001:2008
and 14001:2004 Standards) will not be considered sufficient to demonstrate that the
minimum requirements set by the Royal Commission in Jubail have been satisfied. Such
registration will, however, be considered as a significant contributing factor in assessing
the capability of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to meet the Royal Commission in Jubail’s
quality and environmental requirements.
D. Order of Precedence for Technical Conflicts
1. The general hierarchy or orders of precedence for conflict resolution for this Contract
apart from seeking advice from Senior Royal Commission in Jubail Management are as
follows:
a. Royal Commission in Jubail high level regulations, Royal Decrees.
b. Environmental Regulations, Safety and Security Directives (SSD), and relevant
Environmental Impact Assessments.
c. Royal Commission in Jubail Guiding Engineering Manual, Specifications (GEM),
Guiding Procurement Construction Specifications (GPCS), Typical Construction
Design Details (TCDD), and any agreed exceptions/exclusions/deviations with Royal
Commission in Jubail Senior Management and Third Party Utility Providers and
Stakeholders.
d. Royal Commission in Jubail Master Plans, Master Plan Updates, and associated
studies.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 7
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS
1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS
A. Applicability
1. All projects are to align with the following regulatory documents:
a. Royal Commission in Jubail high level regulations, Royal Decrees.
b. Environmental Regulations, Safety and Security Directives (SSD), and relevant
Environmental Impact Assessments.
c. Royal Commission in Jubail Guiding Engineering Manual, Specifications, and any
agreed exceptions/exclusions/deviations with Royal Commission in Jubail Senior
Management and Third Party Utility Providers and Stakeholders.
d. Royal Commission in Jubail Master Plans, Master Plan Updates, and associated
studies.
e. Other plans developed by the Royal Commission in Jubail’s Urban Development
Department. Refer to Section 3.2 for more detailed information.
f. Building Codes and performance Standards as referenced in Chapter 3.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 8
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL
1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL
A. Applicability
1. This manual may be updated by the Royal Commission in Jubail. Modifications are to be
considered an integral part of the manual itself, having the same power and validity.
2. Updates may come in the form of Engineering Bulletins or Jubail Management
Procedures (JMPs):
a. Engineering Bulletins are supplemental to data in the Guiding Engineering Manual
(GEM) and identify requirements and criteria for various specific engineering
applications.
b. Jubail Management Procedures provide information that may supersede information
within the Guiding Engineering Manual that identifies requirements and criteria for
various specific engineering applications.
3. Periodically, the Royal Commission in Jubail will reissue a revised Guiding Engineering
Manual (GEM) to incorporate all modifications to that point.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 9
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL GUIDING
PROCUREMENT AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL GUIDING PROCUREMENT AND

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
A. Guideline Procurement Construction Specifications

1. The Royal Commission in Jubail Guiding Procurement Construction Specifications
(GPCS) are issued by the Royal Commission in Jubail Engineering Department for a
wide range of construction and procurement activities. They ensure uniformity, quality,
safety, and economy as required by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
2. CSI Master Format is the standard format for all Royal Commission in Jubail GPCS
Sections. Refer to Subsection 4.2.3 for further detail on specification Standards.
3. The GPCS Sections are intended to be incorporated into the Project Engineering Manual
by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor as written, including the original Cover Sheet, Royal
Commission in Jubail Revision Number, and Page Number. It is understood that each
project may have different requirements that the GPCS may not fully address. Should a
Section require modification or augmentation to meet the needs of a specific project, the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit proposed changes in writing to the Royal
Commission in Jubail for written approval, If any Sections of the GPCS are deemed not
suitable or not applicable, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor will similarly submit a written
request to the Royal Commission in Jubail to exclude any Section. All modification
requests from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must be accompanied by an explanation or
rationale for modification.
a. Only when a modification receives written approval from the Royal Commission in
Jubail will it be deemed valid.
b. Written modification requests including proposed changes must be received by the
30% Submittal for Royal Commission in Jubail review and approval. Modification
requests received after the 30% Submittal will be reviewed only at the discretion of
the Royal Commission in Jubail.
c. Modified or excluded Sections are to be identified in the Specification Index. The
cover sheet of the modified or excluded Section shall be clearly marked to identify
the Section has been altered or excluded from the original GPCS. Submitted
rationales shall be included as an appendix to each modified Section or in place of
excluded Sections.
d. Modifications are approved as needed on a project-by-project basis. The A/E and/or
EPC Contractor is not to assume that a deviation, modification, or exclusion
approved on one project may be applied in whole or in part to another project.
4. Where GPCS Sections do not exist for items or procedures necessary for the design
work, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare the specifications in accordance with
the Royal Commission in Jubail guidelines. Written proposed additional Sections must be
provided by the 30% Submittal for Royal Commission in Jubail review and written
approval. Additional Sections received after the 30% Submittal will be reviewed only at
the discretion of the Royal Commission in Jubail.
5. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall identify the Construction Contract Package Number
on each page of the GPCS. Unless otherwise requested in writing as outlined above, no
other alteration, revision, exclusion, or addition shall be made.
6. When the A/E and/or EPC Contractor modifies a specification Section that is approved by
the Royal Commission in Jubail, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor retains responsibility for
this work. Refer to Subsection 4.2.3 for further detail on specification Standards.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 10
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL GUIDING
PROCUREMENT AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
7. Building Systems Design Inc. SpecLink-e is the Standard software for development of
Royal Commission in Jubail GPCS Sections. Refer to Subsection 4.2.3 for further detail
on specification Standards.
8. Similar to how the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) is updated, updates to the GPCS
may come in the form of Jubail Management Procedures (JMPs) or Engineering
Bulletins.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 11
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL TYPICAL
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS AND DRAWINGS
1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION

DETAILS AND DRAWINGS
A. Overview
1. Generally, Typical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD) are issued by the Royal
Commission in Jubail in the forms of drawings and corresponding explanatory notes for
specific Construction Details, Design Aids, and specific Lists of Equipment. They shall be
used and incorporated into the Contract Packages.
2. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize all applicable TCDD documents in preparing his
Contract Package. These are of the following types:
a. Standard Drawings.
b. Drafting Guidelines.
c. Sample Drawings.
d. Specific Equipment Lists.
3. Notwithstanding the provisions of the above article, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
remain totally responsible for the design provided by him.
B. Standard Drawings
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize related TCDDs in preparing the Contract
Packages.
2. TCDDs shall be incorporated as they are issued by the Royal Commission in Jubail
including drawing numbers, except that portion of a number and the Royal Commission in
Jubail revision number that are unique for a Contract. As an addition, the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall identify the Construction Contract Package number on each
drawing. No other alteration, revision, or addition shall be made.
3. In the event that the A/E and/or EPC Contractor concluded that a particular Guideline
Drawing or any portion of it will not be incorporated directly into the Contract Package he
shall submit the proposed revision with appropriate explanation in writing for the Royal
Commission in Jubail’s evaluation and written decision.

Rev. 0 1.1 - 12
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
FIGURES
FIGURE 1.1.A: JUBAIL INDUSTRIAL CITY DISTRICT MAP

Rev. 0 1.1 - 13
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
FIGURES
FIGURE 1.1.B: RAS AL-KHAIR DISTRICT MAP

Rev. 0 1.1 - 14
SECTION 1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 2

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 2
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 2
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 2
5. General Requirements .................................................................................................. 2
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 2
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 2
8. Related Sections ........................................................................................................... 2
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
1. Not Applicable................................................................................................................ 2
1.2.1 CHAPTER 1................................................................................................................... 2
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 CHAPTER 2................................................................................................................... 3
A. Definitions and References ........................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 CHAPTER 3................................................................................................................... 3
A. Codes and Performance Standards .............................................................................. 3
1.2.4 CHAPTER 4................................................................................................................... 3
A. Project Submission Standards and Requirements ........................................................ 3
1.2.5 CHAPTER 5................................................................................................................... 3
A. Design Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 3

Rev. 0 1.2 - 1
1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) shall serve as a framework for all projects
under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ). This Section
provides the A/E and/or EPC Contractors with an overview of the Manual
Organization.
2. Applicability
a. The chapter definitions contained in this Section provide a general understanding of
the content contained therein. For more thorough information, see the introductions
at the beginning of each chapter and Subsection.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Section 2.2, Definitions and Abbreviations.
4. Abbreviations
5. General Requirements
a. Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations
and applicable Codes and Standards. For information regarding the applicable
Codes and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. For information regarding Standards and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to
Section 3.1, General Building Codes and Additional Standards.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Chapter 2 for Definitions and References, including units and conversions.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for Codes and Performance Standards.
c. Refer to Chapter 4 for Project Submission Standards and Requirements.
d. Refer to Chapter 5 for Design Guidelines.
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and take action on all design reports,
drawings and specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable
1.2.1 CHAPTER 1
A. Introduction
1. Chapter 1 contains the overall description and applicability of the Guiding Engineering
Manual (GEM). This chapter also identifies regulatory documents, procedures for
modifications to the GEM and general requirements for coordination with the Guiding

Rev. 0 1.2 - 2
Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS) and Typical Construction Detail

Drawings (TCDD).
1.2.2 CHAPTER 2
A. Definitions and References

1. Chapter 2 contains general definitions, abbreviations and references; as well as the
requirement to utilize SI units.
1.2.3 CHAPTER 3
A. Codes and Performance Standards

1. Chapter 3 defines the Codes, regulations and Standards that apply to all of the projects
that are under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission in Jubail. This chapter also
identifies additional design requirements for Accessibility, Sustainability, Environmental
and Safety.
1.2.4 CHAPTER 4
A. Project Submission Standards and Requirements

1. Chapter 4 contains the submission requirements that the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall adhere to for the Design & Construction Phases of every project. Chapter 4 also
contains requirements for Surveying and Geotechnical Engineering.
1.2.5 CHAPTER 5
A. Design Guidelines
1. Chapter 5 contains the design guidelines for each design discipline; as well as,
containing the requirements for Saudi Arabian Goods and Services, Standards of Quality,
Third Party Requirements, Security Requirements and Local Climate Conditions.

Rev. 0 1.2 - 3
SECTION 2.1 GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.1. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1

Rev. 0 2.1 - i
SECTION 2.1 GENERAL
2.1. GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. General definitions and references are to be used by Architectural/Engineering (A/E)
and/or Engineer, Procure and Construct (EPC) Contractors for projects under the
jurisdiction of the RCJ in the preparation of the Engineering Manual. In order to
ensure uniformity throughout the project and for compatibility within the Royal
Commission in Jubail jurisdiction limits, these definitions and references shall
provide the framework within which all the Royal Commission in Jubail’s
Consultants, A/E and/or EPC Contractors and all other designing and constructing
facilities shall perform their works.
2. Applicability
a. General definitions and references provide a reference basis, highlighting certain
specific requirements of the Royal Commission in Jubail and shall emphasize the
utilization of Saudi Arabian goods and services.
b. Specific definitions and references are included in the Building Codes, Guideline
Specifications and Standard Drawings. In addition, the relevant Sections of the
updated Community Plan, Support Industry and Secondary Industry Master Plans
include other definitions and references that shall be adhered to by all designers of
community facilities.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Subsection 2.2.A.3.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Subsection 2.2.A.4.
a. Not Applicable.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding Codes and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to
Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. For information regarding Standards and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to
Section 3.1.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Sections 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 for simple definitions, abbreviations, SI units and
conversions and references.
9. Approvals
drawings and specifications, reference Section 1.1.

Rev. 0 2.1 - 1
SECTION 2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.2. DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES.............................................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 2
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 7
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 7
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 7
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 7
1. Not Applicable................................................................................................................ 7

Rev. 0 2.2 - i
2.2. DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section contains general definitions and abbreviations found in the manual.
b. Definitions and abbreviations apply to the following Chapters:
1) Chapter 1: Introduction
2) Chapter 2: Definitions and References
3) Chapter 3: Codes and Performance Standards
4) Chapter 4: Project Submission Standards and Requirements
5) Chapter 5: Design Guidelines
2. Applicability
a. The definitions and abbreviations contained in this Section apply to professionals,
organizations and authorities.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to design specific definitions and abbreviations in Chapters 3, 4 and 5.
b. The following list of definitions applies to Architectural Sections.
1) “Form” The size and shape of mass. Individual forms shall be designed to
complement one another and the environment.
2) “Function” The use of a space or area. Function is gauged by the degree to
which the space works in its intended purpose.
3) “Axis” An axis is a linear progression of space connecting two or more
dominant features.
4) “Terminus” A terminus is the end of an axis and is typically defined by a
dominant feature such as a building.
5) “Code” Legally binding rules enacted by an Authority that provide minimum
requirements for materials, design, and detailing of systems, equipment, and
components, to ensure acceptable performance levels and protect public
safety and health.
6) “Standards” A document established by consensus and approved by a
recognized body of experts that provides, for common and repeated use,
rules, guidelines or characteristics for activities or their results, aimed at
achievement of the optimum degree of order in a given context (economy,
safety, quality, etc..). Standards referenced by codes (incorporated by
reference) become part of the code and thus are legally enforceable.
7) “Regulations” Are Authority imposed requirements, which specifies product,
process or service characteristics, including the applicable administrative
provision, with which compliance is mandatory, such as building codes.
8) “Commissioning” The process of ensuring that all systems, subsystems, and
components of new/rehabilitated facilities and systems are designed,
installed, inspected, tested, and operated according to the design, installation,
inspection, testing, and operational requirements of the project, as specified
by the RCJ/Owner and as designed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. In

Rev. 0 2.2 - 1
this broad sense, commissioning and commissioning activities are applicable

to all phases of the project from design to handover.
4. Abbreviations
a. The following abbreviations is a list that apply to all Sections:
1) A/E: Architect/Engineer
2) AC: Actual Cost
3) ACWP: Actual Cost of Work Performed
4) ADAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines
5) AEP: Aggregate Exposure Protection
6) AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction
7) AEM: Area Engineering Manager
8) AR’s: Annual Reviews
9) BAC: Budgeted Cost at Completion
10) BCWP: Budgeted Cost of Work Performed
11) BLDG: Building
12) BoD: Board of Directors
13) BOQ: Bill of Quantities
14) BU: Business Unit of MARAFIQ
15) BCWS: Budgeted Cost of Work Scheduled
16) CAPEX: Capital Expenditure Project
17) CB: Circuit Breaker
18) CCDCU: City Center District Cooling Utility
19) CCO: Contract Change Order
20) CCTV: Closed Circuit Television
21) CFR: Contract Formulation Report
22) CoD: Concept of Design
23) COM: Council of Ministers
24) COO: Chief Operating Officer
25) CPI: Cost Performance Index (CPI = EV/AC)
26) CSA: Conditional Site Allocation
27) CSI: Construction Specification Institute
28) CSR: Construction Service Road
29) C Contracts: for Eventual Construction Award / Schedules Prepared
by Project Controls
30) CV: Cost Variance (CV = EV - AC)
31) DBR: Design Basis Report

Rev. 0 2.2 - 2
32) DCN: Design Change Notice

33) DCN: Drawing Change Notice
34) DoE: Director of Engineering
35) DG: Director General
36) D&P: Design & Project Department of MARAFIQ
37) DRM: Design Review Meeting
38) DX: Direct Expansion
39) EAC: Estimated Cost at Completion
40) EGL: Existing Grade Level
41) ECD: Environmental Control Department
42) EDD: Economic Development Department
43) EDMS: Electronic Document Management System
44) EE: Electrical Engineering
45) EIA: Environmental Impact Assessment
46) EIS: Environmental Impact Studies
47) EoI: Expression of Interest
48) EoT: Extension of Time
49) EP: Eastern Province
50) EPC: Engineer, Procure and Construct
51) EPCD: Environmental Protection Control Department
52) EPPR: Engineering Procurement Progress Report or
Engineering Progress and Performance Report
53) EPS: Enterprise Project Structure
54) EPtC: Environmental Permit to Construct
55) ESPD: Electrical / Site Preparation & Development (Also known
as Industrial)
56) ETC: Estimate to Complete
57) ETS: Energy Transfer Station
58) EV: Earned Value
59) FAC: Final Acceptance Certificate
60) FCD Field Change Notice
61) FD/FA: Fire Detection/ Fire Alarm
62) FFE: Furniture Fixtures & Equipment
63) FGL: Finish Grade Level
64) FOC: Fiber Optic Cable
65) FP: Facility Planning
66) FPD: Facility Planning Department

Rev. 0 2.2 - 3
67) GACA: General Authority for Civil Aviation

68) GBCI: Green Building Certification Institute
69) GBU: Global Business Unit
70) GDR: Geotechnical Design Report
71) GEM: Guiding Engineering Manual
2
72) GFA: Gross Floor Area (m )
73) GPCS: Guiding Procurement and Construction Specifications
74) GUD: General Utilities Department
75) HCIS: High Commission for Industrial Security
76) HDD: Horizontal Directional Drilling
77) HVAC: Heating Ventilation and Air-Conditioning
78) I/A: Initial Acceptance
79) IAC: Initial Acceptance Certificate
80) IAI: Initial Acceptance Inspection
81) IBC: International Building Code
82) ICC/ANSI: International Code Council/ American National
Standards Institute
83) IFC: International Fire Code or Issued for Construction
84) IECC: International Energy Conservation Code
85) IESNA: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
86) IIDD: Industrial Investment Development Department
87) IMC: International Mechanical Code
88) IPC: International Plumbing Code
89) IRR: Irrigation
90) ISF: Industrial Security Facility
91) ISS: Industrial Security Staff
92) ITP: Inspection Test Plan
93) IWMF: Industrial Waste Management Facility
94) JCP: Jubail Commercial Port
95) JIC: Jubail Industrial College
96) JIC Jubail Industrial City
97) JMP: Jubail Management Procedure
98) JTI: Jubail Technical Institute
99) JUC: Jubail University College
100) KFIP: King Fahad Industrial Port
101) KPI: Key Performance Indicator
102) KRT: Kuwait / RasTanura Pipeline

Rev. 0 2.2 - 4
103) LAN: Local Area Network

104) LAR: Land Access Request (RCJ Internal Document)
105) LCC: Life Cycle Cost
106) LEED: Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
107) L&I: Landscaping and Irrigation
108) LRD: Link Road Bridge
109) LUP: Land Utilization Permit (obtain Permit from Stakeholder
like ARAMCO)
110) LUR: Land Utilization Request
111) MAA: Maximum Authorized Amount (Estimate + 10% - From
RCJ) / Order of Magnitude (RoM – from SABCO)
112) MAC: Ma’aden Aluminum Company
113) MARAFIQ: Power & Water Utility Company in Jubail and Yanbu
114) MEL: Master Equipment List
115) MoF: Minister of Finance
116) MoI: Minister of Interior
117) MoL: Ministry of Labour
118) MoP: Manager of Project Controls
119) MoT: Ministry of Transport
120) MoU: Memorandum of Understanding
121) MPU: Master Plan Update
122) MS: Microsoft
123) MTO: Material Take Off
124) MSR: Material Services Requisition
125) NCBZ: Northern Corridor Buffer Zone
126) NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
127) NOC: Notice of Completion
128) Node 3: Engineering Package Sent to Supply Management
129) NTP: Notice to Proceed
130) O&M: Operations & Maintenance
131) OBS: Organization Breakdown Structure
132) OoM: Order of Magnitude
133) PAP: Permit Application Package
134) P&C: Procurement & Construction
135) PESSM: Pre-Engineered Steel Shade Structure Manufacturers
136) .Pdf: Portable Document File (Adobe)
137) PPT: Power Point Presentation

Rev. 0 2.2 - 5
138) PSIA: Power Supply Implementation Agreement

139) PSTS: Power Supply Technical Scope
140) PTS: Project Technical Scope
141) PV: Planned Value
142) QA/QC: Quality Assurance/ Quality Control
143) RCJ: Royal Commission in Jubail
144) RCJY: Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu
145) RC: Royal Commission
146) RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
147) RFC: Request for Change
148) RFP: Request for Proposal
149) RIC: Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
150) RIV: Rapid Intervention Vehicle
151) RMI: Risk Management International
152) ROAT: Record of Assets Transfer
153) RTC: Record of Transfer Of Custody
154) SABIC: Saudi Arabia Basic Industries Corporation
155) SAR: Saudi Railway/Site Allocation Request
156) SBC: Saudi Building Code
157) SCTA: Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities
158) SDR: Systems Design Report
159) SEAPA: Saudi Ports Authority
160) SEC-EOA: Saudi Electricity Company – Electrical Operating Area
161) SFF: Security Forces Facility
162) SLA: Service Level Agreement
163) SOQ: Schedule of Quantities
164) SoQ&P: Schedule of Quantities & Prices
165) SOW: Scope of Work
166) SPI: Schedule Performance Index (SPI = EV/PV)
167) SSOC: Six Sigma Operating Committee
168) SV: Schedule Variance (SV = EV - PV)
169) SVA: Security Vulnerability Assessment
170) SWCC: Saline Water Conversion Corporation
171) SWRO: Saline Water Reverse Osmosis
172) SWW: Sanitary Waste Water
173) TCDD: Typical Construction Details Drawings
174) TIA: Traffic Impact Assessment

Rev. 0 2.2 - 6
175) TOL: Turn-on Letter

176) TQ: Technical Queries
177) TS: Technical Submittals
178) TSP: Technical Studies & Planning
179) TSD: Technical Services Department of MARAFIQ
180) TSE: Treated Sanitary Effluent
181) TV: Television
182) TWO’s: Technical Work Orders
183) T Contracts: Technical Services (Engineering) / Schedules Prepared
by Engineering / Schedule Updated once a Month
184) UPD: Urban Planning Department
185) USGBC: United States Green Building Council
186) VAC: Cost Variance at Completion (VAC = BAC - EAC)
187) WAS: Waad Al Shamal
188) WPCR: Work Plan Change Requests (Planning & Budget Assign
the Contract Number)
189) WPCR (A): Work Plan Change Requests Approved
190) WPCR (C): Work Plan Change Requests Canceled
191) WPCR (I): Work Plan Change Requests In Process
a. Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. Refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. Refer to Section 3.1.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to specific Section
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and take action on design reports, plans
and specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable

Rev. 0 2.2 - 7
SECTION 2.3 SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3. SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS ................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. SI Units of merasurement .............................................................................................. 2
1. SI Base Units ................................................................................................................. 2
2. SI Supplementary Units ................................................................................................. 2
3. SI Derived Units ............................................................................................................. 2

Rev. 0 2.3 - i
2.3. SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS
A. General
1. Introduction
The directives contained herein have been compiled for the purpose of establishing and
defining Standards for the utilization, appearance, and conversion of units to be used for
the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by Architecture/Engineering
(A/E) or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
2. Applicability
The Standards and guidelines outlined in Section 2.3 are to be applied by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor on all projects under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
By Royal Decree, the Consultant shall use the National Institute of Standards and
Technology’s (NIST) Guide for the Use of the International System of Units (SI).
The Consultant shall provide Imperial equivalents in parenthesis if requested by the RCJ.
3. Definitions
Refer to Section 2.2, Definitions and Abbreviations.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall refer to the NIST Guide for the Use of the
International System of Units for all applicable definitions.
4. Abbreviations
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Section:
1) NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology
2) SI: International System of Units
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall refer to the NIST Guide for the Use of the
International System of Units for all applicable abbreviations.
Not Applicable
6. Codes
Not Applicable
7. Standards
Refer to Chapter 4, Project Submission Standards and Requirements, for related
Standards.
8. Related Sections
Refer to Subsection 4.2.2, Drawings, for additional guidelines.
9. Approvals
The RCJ will review all project submissions to ensure compliance to Section 2.3.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable

Rev. 0 2.3 - 1
C. SI Units of measurement
SI base, supplementary, and derived units of measurement occurring in this manual include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. SI Base Units
Unit Symbol Quantity
a. Meter (metre) m Length
b. Kilogram kg Mass
c. Second s Time
d. Ampere A Electric current
e. Kelvin K Thermodynamic temperature
f. Mole mol Amount of substance
g. Candela cd Luminous intensity
2. SI Supplementary Units
Unit Symbol Quantity
a. Radian rad Plane angle (2D angle)
b. Steradian sr Solid angle (3D angle)
3. SI Derived Units
Unit Symbol In SI Units Quantity
Mechanics
a. Pascal Pa kg·m-1·s-2 Pressure, Stress
b. Joule J kg·m2·s-2 Energy, Work, Heat
c. Watt W kg·m2·s-3 Power
d. Newton N kg·m·s-2 Force, Weight
Electromagnetism
e. Tesla T kg·s-2·A-1 Magnetic Field
f. Henry H kg·m2·s-2·A-2 Inductance
g. Coulomb C A·s Electric Charge

Rev. 0 2.3 - 2
h. Volt V kg·m2·s-3·A-1 Voltage
i. Farad F kg-1·m-2·s4·A2 Electric Capacitance
j. Siemens S kg-1·m-2·s3·A2 Electrical Conductance
k. Weber Wb kg·m2·s-2·A-1 Magnetic Flux
l. Ohm Ω kg·m2·s-3·A-3 Electric Resistance
Optics
m. Lux lx cd·sr·m-2 Illuminance
n. Lumen lm cd·sr Luminous Flux
Radioactivity
o. Becquerel Bq s-1 Radioactivity
p. Gray Gy m2·s-1 Absorbed Dose
q. Sievert Sv m2·s-1 Equivalent Dose
Other
r. Hertz Hz s-1 Frequency
s. Katal kat mol·s-1 Catalytic Activity

Rev. 0 2.3 - 3
SECTION 2.4 REFERENCES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.4. REFERENCES .............................................................................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 2
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 5
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 5
1. Not Applicable................................................................................................................ 5

Rev. 0 2.4 - i
2.4. REFERENCES
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The directives contained herein have been compiled for the purpose of establishing
and defining each discipline’s code, Standards, and guideline references to be used
for the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by
Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC)
Contractors.
2. Applicability
a. The references outlined in Section 2.4 are to be utilized, followed, and adhered to by
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor on all projects under the jurisdiction of the RCJ
throughout the design and construction of the project.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to General Requirements, Codes, and Standards below for additional
abbreviations.
a. The design of all RCJ projects shall conform to the following. These are applicable
to all disciplines:
1) The Royal Commission in Jubail Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM)
2) JMP – Jubail Management Procedures
3) Guiding Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS)
4) Typical Construction Drawing Details (TCDD)
5) Engineering Bulletins
6. Codes
a. The design of all RCJ projects shall conform to the RCJ adopted version of the
following Codes by discipline type. Refer to Section 3.1, Codes and Performance
Standards, for code hierarchy:
1) General:
(a) SBC – Saudi Building Code
(b) ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act
(c) IBC – International Building Code
(d) ICC A117.1 – International Code Council: Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities
(e) IECC – International Energy Conservation Code
(f) IFC – International Fire Code
(g) Others – subject to task requirements

Rev. 0 2.4 - 1
2) Civil:
(a) See General Requirements above
3) Structural:
(a) see General Requirements above
(b) SBC 2007: Saudi Building Code 2007 (MBC)
(c) ACI: American Concrete Institute
(d) AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction
(e) AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute
(f) ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
(g) ICC: International Code Council
(h) PCI: Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute
(i) AWC: American Wood Council
(j) AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
4) Mechanical:
(b) SBC - Saudi Building Codes 501, 601 & 701
(c) IMC – International Mechanical Code
(d) IPC – International Plumbing Code
5) Electrical:
(b) IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
6) Geotechnical:
7) Sustainability:
8) Third Party:
(b) The utility companies each have their own design Standards which shall
be applied and reviewed by each company prior to construction.
7. Standards
a. The design of all RCJ projects shall conform to the following standards by discipline
type. Refer to Section 3.1, Codes and Performance Standards, for code hierarchy:
1) General:
(a) AAMA – Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
(b) ANSI – American National Standards Institute
(c) ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials
(d) BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

Rev. 0 2.4 - 2
(e) DIN – Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industrial Standards)

(f) EN – European Standards
(g) ISO – International Organization for Standardization
(h) NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
(i) NCS – National CAD Standards
(j) NFPA – National Fire Protection Association
(k) NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology
(l) NRCA – National Roofing Contractors Association
(m) OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Standards
(n) SASO – Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
(o) TCA – Tile Council of America
(p) UL – Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(q) WDMA – Window and Door Manufacturers Association
(r) IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission Standards
2) Civil:
(a) AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
(b) ACI – American Concrete Institute
(c) ACPA – American Concrete Pipe Association
(d) AIMS – Asphalt Institute Manual Series
(e) ASCE – American Society of Civil Engineers
(f) ASSE – American Society of Sanitary Engineering
(g) AWWA – American Water Works Association
(h) EPA – Environmental Protection Agency
(i) FHWA – Federal Highway Administration
(j) FTA – Federal Transit Administration
(k) HI – Hydraulic Institute
(l) IFCA – International Erosion Control Association
(m) ITE – Institute of Transportation Engineers
(n) MOT – Ministry of Transportation, Saudi Arabia
(o) MPWH – Ministry of Public Works and Housing, Saudi Arabia
(p) PPI – Plastic Pipe Institute
(q) SCS – Soil Conservation Services
(r) SSPC – Society for Protective Coatings
(s) TRR – Transportation Research Record
(t) USDA/NRDS – United States Department of Agriculture / National
Resources Conservation Services

Rev. 0 2.4 - 3
(u) USDOT – United States Department of Transportation

3) Structural:
(a) AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
(b) AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction
(c) AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute
(d) API – American Petroleum Institute
(e) ASCE – American Society of Civil Engineers
(f) AWS – American Welding Society
(h) CRSI – Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
(i) NDS – National Design Standards (wood)
(j) PCA – Portland Cement Association
(k) PCI – Precast/ Pre-stressed Concrete Association
(l) PTI – Post Tensioning Institute
(m) SDI – Steel Deck Institute
(n) SJI – Steel Joist Institute
(o) SSPC – Society of Protective Coatings
4) Mechanical:
(a) ASHE – American Society for Healthcare Engineering
(b) ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers
(c) ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(d) ASPE – American Society of Plumbing Engineers
(e) ASSE – American Society of Sanitary Engineering
(f) ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials
(h) MSS – Manufacturers Standardization Society
(i) NADCA – National Air Duct Cleaning Association
(j) SMACNA – Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors
Association
5) Electrical:
(a) IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission
(b) IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(c) CIE – International Commission on Illumination
(d) IESNA – Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
(e) ISA – International Society of Automation
(f) ITU – International Telecommunication Union

Rev. 0 2.4 - 4
(g) TIA – Telecommunications Industry Association

6) Geotechnical:
(a) AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
7) Sustainability:
(a) CEEQUAL – Sustainable Assessment and Awards for Civil Engineering
(b) LEED – Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
8) Third Party:
(a) MARAFIQ – Power and Water Utility Company for Jubail and Yanbu
(b) SEC/EOA – Saudi Electricity Company/ Eastern Operating Area
(c) STC – Saudi Telecommunications Co.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Chapter 2 for Definitions and References, including units and conversions.
d. Refer to Chapter 5 for Design Guidelines.
9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review all project submissions to ensure compliance to Section 2.4.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable

Rev. 0 2.4 - 5
SECTION 3.1 BUILDING CODES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.1.1 GENERAL BUILDING CODES AND ADDITIONAL STANDARDS ............................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 3
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 3
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 3
1. Not Applicable. .............................................................................................................. 3
C. References .................................................................................................................... 3
3.1.2 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 4
A. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 4

Rev. 0 3.1 - i
SUBSECTION 3.1.1 GENERAL BUILDING CODES AND ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
3.1.1 GENERAL BUILDING CODES AND ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The purpose of this Section is to identify the Codes and Standards that establish the
minimum requirements to safeguard the public health, safety and general welfare in
the design and construction of the built environment.
2. Applicability
a. The Saudi Building Codes shall be the prevailing documents, as required by the
Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ), to be used in conjunction with the current
Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), Typical Construction Details Drawings (TCDD)
and Guiding Procurement & Construction Specifications (GPCS).
b. In all cases, the RCJ reserves the right to require the use of specific Codes and
Standards for systems and facilities for which continuity of practice is considered
necessary for safe and efficient operation.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to design specific definitions in Chapters 3, 4 and 5.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2
1) ANSI: American National Standards Institute
2) CIE: Commission Internationale De L’eclairage (International
Commission on Illumination)
4) IEC International Electro-technical Commission
5) IENSA Illumination Engineering Society of North America
7) ITU: International Telecom Unit
9) SBC Saudi Building Code
10) TIA/EIA: Telecommunication Industries Association/Electronics Industries
Alliance
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes
a. Compliance with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations and applicable Codes and
Standards is mandatory. Technical conflict resolution shall be performed per
Subsection 1.1.3.D.
b. In the absence of published Saudi Arabian Codes and Standards, the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall use Codes, Standards and publications published by the

Rev. 0 3.1 - 1
organizations listed in each Part of this Engineering Manual as well as the Building
Codes referenced in this Section.
c. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor may propose other International Codes and
Standards, provided two different types of Codes and Standards are not mixed for
the same building or facility. Proposals shall be accompanied by an English
language translation of the Codes or Standards but their use shall not be allowed
unless accepted in writing by the RCJ.
d. Unless otherwise directed by the RCJ, use the latest edition of all Codes. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall seek approval, in writing, from the RCJ should conflicts
between codes be present.
e. Code Hierarchy:
1) Royal Decrees
2) Saudi Building Codes
(a) SBC 201, Architectural
(b) SBC 301, Structural - Loading and Forces
(c) SBC 302, Structural - Testing and Inspection
(d) SBC 303, Structural - Soil and Foundations
(e) SBC 304, Structural - Concrete Structures
(f) SBC 305, Structural - Masonry Structures
(g) SBC 306, Structural - Steel Structures
(h) SBC 401, Electrical
(i) SBC 501, Mechanical
(j) SBC 601, Energy Conservation
(k) SBC 701, Sanitary
(l) SBC 801, Fire Protection
3) International Code Council Codes (ICC)
(a) International Mechanical Code (IMC)
(b) International Plumbing Code (IPC)
(c) International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
(d) International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC)
(e) International Fire Code (IFC)
(f) International Building Code (IBC)
4) Building Industries Consulting Services International (BICSI)
5) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Standards as
referenced in the above codes.
f. All construction shall conform to the Building Codes and Building Requirements
adopted by the Royal Commission, whichever is applicable. In addition, all
construction shall conform to Planning and Zoning Regulations adopted by the RCJ
in its "Planning Manual." Refer to Section 3.2 for Adopted Master Plans.

Rev. 0 3.1 - 2
g. Accessibility
1) Refer to Section 3.3.
h. Life Safety
1) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3. H
2) Refer to Chapters 3, 4 and 5 for design specific requirements.
i. The foregoing Codes are comprehensive and detailed documents. They cover a
wide range of building types, occupancies and hazards. Their purpose is to establish
minimum Standards to safeguard life, health, property and public welfare. They are
not intended to impose bureaucratic or financial burdens or set Standards of
elegance, lifestyle or quality.
j. The provisions of the adopted Codes shall not be construed to prohibit the use of
any material or method not specifically included therein, provided that the material or
method may be shown to be satisfactory for the intended purpose. The Royal
Commission may approve such materials or methods where the A/E and/or the EPC
Contractor finds that they meet the intent of the code, or the A/E and/or the EPC
Contractor may prescribe requirements for their use to assure that acceptable
Standards are met.
7. Standards
1) Refer to Subsection 3.1.2 Additional Standards.
8. Related Sections
a. Section 2.4, References
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and take action on design reports, plans and
specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable.
C. References
1. Refer to RCJ Standard format for Code Analysis and Code Review Checklist #CAM-001
form. Refer to Subsection 4.3.2 for detailed code analysis.

Rev. 0 3.1 - 3
SUBSECTION 3.1.2 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
3.1.2 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
A. Standards
1. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as
appropriate.
2. Unless otherwise directed by the RCJ or identified in Chapter 5, use the latest edition of
all Standards.
3. Additional Standards:
a. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
b. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
c. ACI American Concrete Institute
d. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
e. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
f. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
g. CIE International Commission on Illumination
h. IENSA Illumination Engineering Society of North America
i. SDI Steel Deck Institute
j. AWC American Wood Council
k. TMS The Masonry Society
l. Crane Manufacturers Association of America
m. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design
n. NDS Navigation Data Standards
o. API American Petroleum Institute
p. AWWA Standards – American Water Works Association
q. FHWA Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
r. ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
s. IEC International Electro-technical Commission
t. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineer
u. ISO International Organization for Standardization

Rev. 0 3.1 - 4
SECTION 3.2 ZONING REGULATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
10. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
B. Function of Zoning ......................................................................................................... 2
C. Urban Planning Department and Master Plan Updates ................................................ 2
3.2.2 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL ZONING REGULATIONS ......................................... 3
A. JIC Zoning Regulations ................................................................................................. 3
3.2.3 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL MASTER PLANS ...................................................... 4
A. Coordination Requirements ........................................................................................... 4
B. Conflicts ......................................................................................................................... 4
3.2.4 SETBACK REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 5
3.2.5 PARKING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 6
3.2.6 LANDSCAPING ............................................................................................................. 7

Rev. 0 3.2 - i
CHAPTER 3 – CODES AND PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
SUBSECTION 3.2.1 GENERAL
3.2.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining procedures, Standards, and requirements for zoning on Royal
Commission in Jubail (RCJ) projects prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E)
and/or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
2. Applicability
a. The zoning regulations outlined in Section 3.2 shall be used by A/E and/or EPC
Contractors on all projects under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. Exclusions or deviations from these requirements must be approved by the RCJ, in
writing, prior to executing any work not in alignment with this document.
3. Definitions
b. “Smart Code” Planning and zoning document based on environmental analysis. It
addresses all scales of planning, from the region to the community to the block and
building.
c. “Form Based Code” A land development regulation that fosters predictable built
results and a high-quality public realm by using physical form (rather than separation
of uses) as the organizing principle for the code. A form-based code is a regulation,
not a mere guideline, adopted by a city.
4. Abbreviations
1) ASP: Area Specific Plan
2) DGL: Design Guideline
3) FBC: Form Based Code
4) GIS: Geographic Information Section
5) MPA: Master Planning Amendment
6) MPS: Master Planning Section
7) MPU: Master Plan Update
8) SS: Survey Section
9) UPD: Urban Planning Department
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes
a. Not applicable
7. Standards

Rev. 0 3.2 - 1
a. Not applicable
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to the Jubail Industrial City (JIC) Zoning Regulations
b. Jubail Management Procedures:
1) JMP 060101 – Master Plan Administration (10/2/2013)
2) JMP 060306 – Variance to Zoning Regulations (3/2/2014)
9. Approvals
a. Zoning is governed and enforced by the Urban Planning Department (UPD).
10. Commissioning
a. Not applicable.
B. Function of Zoning
1. Zoning is a tool that imposes controls and regulations upon the use of land that are
implemented through the use of municipally enacted regulations approved by municipal
governments.
2. Zoning is intended to convey the specific use(s) that are permitted to occur on properties.
C. Urban Planning Department and Master Plan Updates
1. The Urban Planning Department (UPD) is responsible for updating the original 1978 JIC
Master Plan through Master Plan Updates (MPU) and/or Master Planning Amendments
(MPA).
2. Master Plan Policies for Land Use and Development are administered by UPD in
accordance with Jubail Management Procedure 060101 – Master Plan Administration
(10/2/2013).
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must coordinate with the UPD on all zoning requirements
unless otherwise directed in writing by the RCJ.

Rev. 0 3.2 - 2
SUBSECTION 3.2.2 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL ZONING REGULATIONS
3.2.2 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL ZONING REGULATIONS
A. JIC Zoning Regulations

1. The Zoning Regulations have been prepared by the Urban Planning Department as an
integral part of the Master Planning Process for Jubail Industrial City. They are the
primary guidelines for determining the use of land and for individual site planning.
Therefore they represent a major link between the Master Plan and physical development
within Jubail Industrial City.
2. The Zoning Regulations describe the uses allowed in each zone district and related
administrative procedures. The Zoning Maps overlay the zone districts on maps of Jubail
Industrial City and are considered and integral part of these Regulations.
3. The following zones are described and defined within the Zoning Regulations:
a. PC Preservation / Conservation
b. CB Community Buffer
c. IB Industrial Buffer
d. R-1LL Single-Family Residential, Large Lot
e. R-1SL Single-Family Residential, Small Lot
f. R-2 Single-Family Residential, Attached
g. R-3 Multiple-Family Residential
h. C-1 Neighborhood Commercial
i. C-2 Sector Commercial
j. C-3 District Commercial
k. C-4 Limited Commercial
l. C-5 Service Commercial
m. PF Public Facilities
n. I-1 Support Industrial
o. I-2 Light Industrial
p. I-3 Secondary Industrial
q. I-4 Primary Industrial
r. I-5 Waterfront Industrial
s. TD Transitional Development
t. PUD Planned Unit Development
u. D Special Design
4. Zoning Regulations are part of a series of municipal regulations and Codes that regulate
and control development in Jubail Industrial City. Others include Land Development
Regulations (Subdivision Regulations), the Technical Codes, and Environmental and
Health Regulations. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with all available
development guidelines and regulations as directed by the RCJ.
5. A/E and/or EPC Contractor to confirm zoning requirements on each project.

Rev. 0 3.2 - 3
SUBSECTION 3.2.3 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL MASTER PLANS
3.2.3 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL MASTER PLANS
A. Coordination Requirements
1. All A/E and/or EPC Contractor work completed for the RCJ shall be coordinated with the
most current MPU.
2. Master Plan Hierarchy:
There is one Master Plan for Jubail Industrial City. This plan is maintained by the UPD.
District Plans and Area Specific Plans complement the Master Plan. District Plans are
primarily residential.
Each District Plan is administered with Design Guidelines (DGL).
Furthermore, Smart Codes and Form Based Codes are provided per District and/or Area.
B. Conflicts
1. Shall the A/E and/or EPC Contractor find a conflict between the MPU, the GEM, Master
Plan and Site Development Regulations identified on the CAM-001 code review checklist,
and/or the JIC Zoning Requirements, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall seek direction
from the RCJ – in writing – before commencing work.
2. Any and all conflicts with the Zoning Regulations shall require direction from the UPD
Director as per Jubail Management Procedure 060101 – Master Plan Administration
(10/2/2013), 060306 – Variance to Zoning Regulations (3/2/2014), and Provisions of the
Zoning Ordinance, Part 4, Administration and Procedures.

Rev. 0 3.2 - 4
SUBSECTION 3.2.4 SETBACK REQUIREMENTS
3.2.4 SETBACK REQUIREMENTS
A. Setback Requirements are distances specified to provide adequate space between new
construction and existing buildings, roadways, and adjacent property lines.
B. Consult the UPD for all setback requirements.

Rev. 0 3.2 - 5
SUBSECTION 3.2.5 PARKING REQUIREMENTS
3.2.5 PARKING REQUIREMENTS
A. Parking Requirements shall address problems associated with an undersupply of

parking and ensure the A/E and/or EPC Contractor provides at least a certain number
of off-street parking.
B. Consult the Master Plans and the Urban Planning Department for all parking
requirements.
C. See Architectural Chapter 5, Subsection 5.3.1.

Rev. 0 3.2 - 6
SUBSECTION 3.2.6 LANDSCAPING
3.2.6 LANDSCAPING
In JIC there are zone types that govern the landscaping expectation that include but may not be
limited to:
 Residential (R-1LL, R-1SL, R-2, R-3)

 Commercial (C-1, C-2, C-3, C-4, C-5)
 Public Spaces (PC, CB, PF)
 Industrial (I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-5, IB)

Rev. 0 3.2 - 7
SECTION 3.3 ACCESSIBILITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
C. Signage.......................................................................................................................... 2
1. Mounting Location and Height ....................................................................................... 2
2. Interior Signage Adjacent to Doors ............................................................................... 2
3. Exterior Signage ............................................................................................................ 2
3.3.2 SITE ACCESSIBILITY: .................................................................................................. 3
A. Residential Pedestrian Access ...................................................................................... 3
B. Commercial Pedestrian Access..................................................................................... 3
C. Industrial Pedestrian Access ......................................................................................... 3
D. Parking........................................................................................................................... 3
1. Facility Parking .............................................................................................................. 3
2. Entrance to Parking Lot ................................................................................................. 3
3. Number of Accessible Spaces....................................................................................... 3
4. Space Location .............................................................................................................. 4
5. Parking Identification and Dimensions of Spaces ......................................................... 4
6. Van Accessible Parking Space...................................................................................... 4
7. Passenger Loading Zone .............................................................................................. 5
8. Curb Ramp Placement .................................................................................................. 5

Rev. 0 3.3 - i
9. Medical Facilities ........................................................................................................... 5

10. Valet Parking ................................................................................................................. 5
E. Walks, Curbs, and Ramps ............................................................................................. 5
1. Ground and Floor Surfaces ........................................................................................... 5
2. Changes in Surface Level ............................................................................................. 5
3. Sidewalk Widths ............................................................................................................ 5
4. Gratings ......................................................................................................................... 5
5. Width of Curb Ramps .................................................................................................... 6
6. Sides of Curb Ramps .................................................................................................... 6
7. Ramp Slope ................................................................................................................... 6
8. Landings ........................................................................................................................ 6
9. Ramp Handrails ............................................................................................................. 6
10. Handrail Location ........................................................................................................... 6
11. Protective Edges on Ramps .......................................................................................... 6
12. Temporary Ramps ......................................................................................................... 6
13. Ramps at Door Entrances ............................................................................................. 6
F. Entrances, Corridors, and Stairs ................................................................................... 8
1. Marked Route ................................................................................................................ 8
2. Signage at Entrances .................................................................................................... 8
3. Doorway Width .............................................................................................................. 8
4. Door Opening Force ...................................................................................................... 8
5. Doormats ....................................................................................................................... 8
6. Door Hardware .............................................................................................................. 8
7. Doors in Series .............................................................................................................. 8
8. Automatic and Power Assisted Doors ........................................................................... 8
9. 9. Revolving Doors and Turnstiles ............................................................................... 8
10. Threshold ....................................................................................................................... 9
11. Framed Glass Doors ..................................................................................................... 9
12. Stair Risers, Treads and Nosings .................................................................................. 9
13. Location of Handrails ..................................................................................................... 9
14. Handrail Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 9
15. Suspended Stairs .......................................................................................................... 9
16. Protruding Objects ......................................................................................................... 9
G. Public Restrooms ......................................................................................................... 10

Rev. 0 3.3 - ii
1. Restroom Identification ................................................................................................. 10

2. Restroom Entrance ....................................................................................................... 10
3. Restroom Mirror ............................................................................................................ 10
4. Lavatory Heights ........................................................................................................... 10
5. Protective Pipe Covering .............................................................................................. 10
6. Lavatory Space ............................................................................................................. 10
7. Faucet Controls ............................................................................................................ 10
8. Dispensers in Restroom ............................................................................................... 10
9. Stall Door ...................................................................................................................... 11
10. Standard Toilet Stall Size ............................................................................................. 11
11. Alternate Stall Size ....................................................................................................... 11
12. Dispensers in Commode Stall ...................................................................................... 11
13. Urinals ........................................................................................................................... 11
14. Water Closet Seat ........................................................................................................ 11
15. Grab Bars ..................................................................................................................... 11
16. Flush Controls............................................................................................................... 12
17. Clear Width for Toilet Room Doors and Floor Space ................................................... 12
H. Public Telephones and Water Fountains ..................................................................... 12
1. Telephone Mounting ..................................................................................................... 12
2. Access .......................................................................................................................... 12
3. Directory Access ........................................................................................................... 12
4. Auditory Amplification ................................................................................................... 12
5. Text Telephone ............................................................................................................. 12
6. Access to Water Fountain ............................................................................................ 13
7. Height ........................................................................................................................... 13
8. Hand Controls ............................................................................................................... 13
9. Existing Water Fountain ............................................................................................... 13
I. Meeting Rooms ............................................................................................................ 13
1. Accessible Rooms ........................................................................................................ 13
2. Location ........................................................................................................................ 13
3. Accessible Route .......................................................................................................... 13
4. Door Width .................................................................................................................... 13
5. Thresholds .................................................................................................................... 13
6. Amplifier and Sound System Equipment ...................................................................... 13

Rev. 0 3.3 - iii
7. Floor .............................................................................................................................. 14
8. Seating for People using Wheelchairs ......................................................................... 14
9. Table Placement ........................................................................................................... 14
10. Table Height ................................................................................................................. 14
11. Listening System .......................................................................................................... 14
12. Temporary Ramp .......................................................................................................... 14
13. Microphones ................................................................................................................. 14
J. Restaurants .................................................................................................................. 14
1. Entrance ....................................................................................................................... 14
2. Tables ........................................................................................................................... 14
3. Cafeteria/Buffet Lines ................................................................................................... 15
4. Menus ........................................................................................................................... 15
5. Lounge .......................................................................................................................... 15
6. Fixed Tables ................................................................................................................. 15
K. Guest Rooms ................................................................................................................ 15
1. Room Numbers ............................................................................................................ 15
2. Keys .............................................................................................................................. 15
3. Door .............................................................................................................................. 15
4. Bed Spacing ................................................................................................................. 15
5. Telephones ................................................................................................................... 15
6. Amplified Telephones ................................................................................................... 15
7. Protruding Objects ........................................................................................................ 15
8. Switch Access............................................................................................................... 15
9. Closet and Towel Racks ............................................................................................... 16
10. Space for Wheelchairs ................................................................................................. 16
11. Mirrors ........................................................................................................................... 16
12. Lavatory Clearance ...................................................................................................... 16
13. Exposed Hot Water and Drain Pipes ............................................................................ 16
14. Water Closet Seat ........................................................................................................ 16
15. Grab Bars ..................................................................................................................... 16
16. Faucet Controls ............................................................................................................ 16
17. Shower and Tub Combinations .................................................................................... 16
18. Grab Bars ..................................................................................................................... 16
19. Bath Tub Bench ............................................................................................................ 16

Rev. 0 3.3 - iv
20. Shower Stall and Flexible Shower Hose ...................................................................... 16

21. Number of Accessible Rooms ...................................................................................... 17
22. Sleeping Accommodations for Persons with Hearing Impairments ............................. 17
L. Hazards and Emergency Procedures .......................................................................... 18
1. Hazardous Vehicular Area............................................................................................ 18
2. Standard Warnings at Subsurface Pools ..................................................................... 18
3. Emergency Exits ........................................................................................................... 18
4. Audible and Visual Alarm Signals ................................................................................ 18
5. Area of Rescue ............................................................................................................. 18
M. Elevators and Automated Teller Machines ................................................................... 18
1. Elevators ....................................................................................................................... 18
2. Signal Identification ...................................................................................................... 19
3. Accessible Routes ........................................................................................................ 19
4. Call Buttons/Floor Buttons ............................................................................................ 19
5. Elevator Car Dimensions .............................................................................................. 19
6. Leveling ........................................................................................................................ 19
7. Space Between Elevator and Floor .............................................................................. 19
8. Floor Protective Re-Opening Device ............................................................................ 19
9. Handrails ....................................................................................................................... 19
10. Controls, Call Buttons and Alarms................................................................................ 19
11. Automated Teller Machines (ATM) ............................................................................... 19
3.3.3 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY ......................................................................................... 20
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 20

Rev. 0 3.3 - v
3.3.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Accessibility addresses the design and construction integration to promote equal
access to persons with disabilities to and through sites and buildings.
b. Accessible design responds to the physical conditions of each site and building to
allow equal access for ingressing and egressing a site and/or building.
2. Applicability
a. These general accessibility Standards are intended to provide the requirements and
design guidance for A/E and/or EPC Contractors for Site and Building Accessibility
on all projects.
3. Definitions
a. “Universal Design” A broad-spectrum of ideas meant to produce buildings, products
and environments that are inherently accessible to older people, people without
disabilities, and people with disabilities.
b. “Accessibility” The degree to which a product, device, service, or environment is
available to as many people as possible.
c. “Visitability” Similar to Universal Design in general intent, but more focused in scope.
Visitability features make buildings easier for people who develop a mobility
impairment to visit friends and extended family rather than having to turn down
invitations, or not be invited at all.
d. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional Definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
b. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
c. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
d. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional abbreviations.
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors are required to design all projects to meet the
accessibility requirements as described in Standards below.
6. Codes
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Section:
1) ADA
2) ICC/ANSI 117.1
3) ADAAG (ADA Standards for Accessible Design)

Rev. 0 3.3 - 1
4) “Universal Accessibility Built Environment (UABE) Guidelines for the Kingdom

of Saudi Arabia 1431 H-2010 G” by the Prince Salman Center for Disability
Research: http://accessibility.pscdr.org.sa/read-en/
5) Refer to Chapter 3 for additional performance Standards.
8. Related Sections
a. Not applicable.
9. Approvals
plans and specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for the RCJ’s commissioning requirements.
C. Signage
1. Mounting Location and Height
a. Provide adequate signage placed in standardized, appropriate locations throughout
the building or facility. (Signs can be used to designate permanent rooms or spaces,
or provide direction and information)
b. Provide signage which designates permanent rooms or spaces use raised letters
and numerals which are also accompanied by Braille characters.
c. Provide signage which designates permanent rooms or spaces mounted at a height
of 1525mm from floor surface to the centerline of sign.
2. Interior Signage Adjacent to Doors
a. Provide interior signage located on the walls adjacent to the latch side of the doors.
b. Provide door signage mounted 1525mm above the floor surface to the centerline of
the sign.
3. Exterior Signage
a. Provide exterior signage available at non-accessible entrances and along walks that
provides directions to the accessible routes and entrances.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 2
SUBSECTION 3.3.3 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY
3.3.2 SITE ACCESSIBILITY:
A. Residential Pedestrian Access

1. Sites shall be designed to be accessible to pedestrians with mobility limitations.
2. Access points shall be designed in accordance with ADA requirements.
3. The distance from public right of way to the building exterior doors shall not exceed 15 m.
B. Commercial Pedestrian Access
2. Designs shall provide at least two ingress/egress points from public right of way to the
site.
3. Designs shall provide at least two points from within the site to building exterior doors.
a. This includes single and family entrances, for example the site may have two access
points leading to separate entrances.
6. Emergency exits shall discharge to entrances designed to ADA requirements.
C. Industrial Pedestrian Access
2. Designs shall provide at least one ingress/egress point from public right of way to the
site.
3. Designs shall provide at least two points from within the site to building exterior doors.
6. Emergency exits shall discharge to entrances designed to ADA requirements.
D. Parking
1. Facility Parking
a. Provide parking spaces designated for individuals with disabilities.
b. Provide parking spaces designated with the International Symbol of Accessibility
2. Entrance to Parking Lot
a. Provide International Symbols of Accessibility used to designate the reserved
parking spaces clearly visible at the entrance to the parking area.
3. Number of Accessible Spaces
a. Provide parking area have the minimum number of accessible spaces specified in
the table below.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 3
Total Parking Spaces Designated Accessible Parking
1 to 25 1
26 to 50 2
51 to 75 3
76 to 100 4
101 to 150 5
151 to 200 6
201 to 300 7
301 to 400 8
401 to 500 9
501 to 1000 2% of total
1001 and over 20 plus 1 for each 100 over 1000
Note: One on every 8 parking spaces, but not less than one, shall be designated “van
accessible”.
4. Space Location
a. Provide accessible parking spaces on the shortest possible accessible route to an
accessible building entrance.
b. a. Provide the parking spaces located on level terrain with surface slopes that do
not exceed 2% in all directions. (2% slope = 2cm change in vertical elevation over a
100cm horizontal distance)
5. Parking Identification and Dimensions of Spaces
a. Provide a sign showing the international symbol of accessibility located above grade
and visible when a vehicle is parked in the designated space.
b. Provide parking spaces a minimum of 2440mm wide.
c. Provide an access aisle adjacent to the parking space having a minimum width of
1525mm
d. Provide accessible parking spaces not located adjacent to the accessible entrances
have signage that indicates the direction to these entrances.
6. Van Accessible Parking Space
a. Provide accessible parking spaces for vans have adequate vertical and horizontal
clearance (Minimum 2490mm high and minimum 405mm wide to accommodate
both parking space and access aisle).

Rev. 0 3.3 - 4
b. Provide e at least one parking space designated “Van Accessible” with signage and
space a minimum 2440mm wide access aisle.
c. Provide at least one van accessible space for every eight accessible parking
spaces.
7. Passenger Loading Zone
a. Provide the passenger loading zone with an unobstructed access aisle at least
1525mm wide and 6096mm long adjacent and parallel to the vehicle pull-up space.
8. Curb Ramp Placement
a. Provide curb ramps provided wherever an accessible route crosses a curb.
b. Provide curb ramps with a maximum slope of 1:12 and minimum width of 915mm.
c. If the curb ramp crosses a pedestrian route and is not protected by handrails or
guardrails, provide flared sides with a maximum slope of 1:10.
9. Medical Facilities
a. For facilities providing medical care or similar services for persons with mobility
impairments:
1) Provide 10% of the total spaces reserved for persons with disabilities at
outpatient facilities.
2) Provide 20% of the total spaces reserved for persons with disabilities at
facilities specializing in treatment of persons with mobility impairments.
10. Valet Parking
a. If valet parking is available, provide the passenger loading/unloading zone on an
accessible route complying with Section 7 above
E. Walks, Curbs, and Ramps
1. Ground and Floor Surfaces
a. Provide ground, walk and floor surfaces along accessible routes stable, firm and
slip-resistant under all weather conditions.
2. Changes in Surface Level
a. Provide all ground and floor surfaces free of abrupt changes in surface level that do
not exceed 6mm in height.
b. Where vertical elevation changes are between 6and 12mm in height, provide the
level change beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2.
c. Do not provide ramps with vertical elevation changes greater than 112mm in height.
3. Sidewalk Widths
a. Provide ramps with a minimum clear width of 915mm with an occasional space of
1525 x 1525mm located at reasonable intervals not exceeding 60m which is used
for turning and passing.
4. Gratings
a. Provide gratings located on walking surfaces designed so that openings do not
exceed 6mm in one direction.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 5
Note: If gratings have elongated openings, the openings must be placed so that the long
dimension is perpendicular to the direction of travel.
5. Width of Curb Ramps

a. Provide curb ramps a minimum of 915mm wide, exclusive of flared sides.
Note: Curb ramps shall not extend into traffic lanes.
6. Sides of Curb Ramps

a. If curb ramps cross the walking path of pedestrians, provide curb ramps with flared
sides with maximum slope of 1:10 (one cm vertical rise to every 10 cm of horizontal
distance).
7. Ramp Slope
Provide maximum slope of all ramps 1:12 (1cm of vertical rise to every 12cm of horizontal
distance)Note: Any part of an accessible route having a slope exceeding 1:20 is
considered a ramp and must comply with the requirements stated in Part 7, 8, 9, 10
and 11 of this Section.
8. Landings
a. Provide ramps and curb ramps with a 1525mm long level landing at the top and
bottom.
b. Provide ramps with a 1525mm level landing at locations where ramps change
direction (switchback) or at intervals of 760mm vertical rise.
9. Ramp Handrails
a. Provide ramps with a vertical elevation change (rise) greater than 150mm or
horizontal run greater than 1830mm with handrails on both sides.
10. Handrail Location
a. Locate the top surface of all handrails mounted between 865mm and 915mm above
ramp surface.
b. If wall mounted, provide the clear space between the handrail and the wall 38mm
(See figure in Section F, Part 14)
c. Provide the diameter of the handrail 32mm to 38mm or provide an equivalent
gripping surface.
11. Protective Edges on Ramps
a. For ramps and landings with drop-offs provide edge protection which is a minimum
of 50mm high on all exposed sides of the ramp or landing.
12. Temporary Ramps
a. Provide temporary ramps meeting standard ramp requirements. (See items 7, 8, 9,
10 and 11 in this Section)
b. Provide temporary ramps that are securely anchored.
13. Ramps at Door Entrances
a. Provide ramps at door entrances with adequate maneuvering clearances for a
person using a wheelchair (Refer to the diagrams provided on next page)

Rev. 0 3.3 - 6

Rev. 0 3.3 - 7
F. Entrances, Corridors, and Stairs

1. Marked Route
a. Provide at least one accessible route from the accessible parking areas or
passenger loading zones to the accessible building entrance having a minimum
clear width of 915mm
b. If the entrance is not visible from the parking or loading areas, mark the accessible
routes to the entrance clearly with appropriate signage.
2. Signage at Entrances
a. Provide International Symbol of Accessibility displayed at all accessible entrances
This is not required but helpful.
b. Make provision for a signaling device if the primary entrances must be locked during
certain hours for security purposes.
3. Doorway Width
a. Design the primary accessible entrance with a minimum clear opening (free of
protrusions and obstructions) of 813mm
b. Design the push and pull side of doors with minimum maneuvering clearances
conforming with the figure referred to in Section E Walks Curbs and Ramps, Part 13
(Exception: Automatic or power assisted doors)
c. Provide a minimum of 1525 x 1525mm of level space centered on the front of the
accessible entrance.
4. Door Opening Force
a. For doors at accessible, exterior entrances the opening force is not specified in
ADAAG. Please refer to the Saudi Building Code.
b. Specify hardware for interior doors to be opened with 2.25, or less, kgs of force.
5. Doormats
a. Doormats to be stationary, flat, or recessed and less than 12mm thick.
6. Door Hardware
a. Specify handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible
doors easily grasped with one hand, and require no tight grasping, pinching, or
twisting of the wrist to operate.
b. Specify hardware required for accessible door passage mounted no higher than
1220mm from the finished floor surface.
7. Doors in Series
a. Provide approximately 1220mm, plus the width of in-swinging door(s), between two
doors in a series to allow backing and turning space for a wheelchair or other
mobility aid to clear the in-swinging door.
8. Automatic and Power Assisted Doors
a. Specify automatic and power assisted doors operate in a manner and direction
which do not present a hazard.
9. 9. Revolving Doors and Turnstiles

Rev. 0 3.3 - 8
a. Provide an accessible door adjacent to all revolving doors and turnstiles

10. Threshold
a. Design thresholds at exterior doors flush with the floor surface.
b. For thresholds are higher than 12mm, detail them so they are beveled on both sides
to a slope of 1:2.
c. If thresholds on exterior sliding doors exceed 3/4 inches in height, are they beveled
on both sides at a slope of 1:2.
11. Framed Glass Doors
a. For framed glass swinging doors are on accessible routes, Specify a kick plate at
least 10 inches high mounted on the bottom of the push side of the door. This
feature is not required by ADAAG. This is a safety feature for people using
wheelchairs to prevent their footrest from striking the glass.
12. Stair Risers, Treads and Nosings
a. For all stairs and steps:
1) Detail risers closed and with uniform height. (Riser height: maximum 175mm,
minimum 100mm).
2) Detail treads have a uniform depth of 280mm or more.
3) Detail nosings to project no more 32mm and are the undersides free of
abrupt, sharp angles.
4) Design stair treads have non-slip surfaces.
13. Location of Handrails
a. Design handrails on sides of all stairs to extend at least 300mm beyond the top riser
and 300mm plus the width of one tread beyond 965mm above the tread.
14. Handrail Dimensions
a. Provide handrails 32 to 38mm in diameter and easy to grasp.
b. Provide a clear space of exactly 38mm between the handrail and the wall.
15. Suspended Stairs
a. Design all suspended (open) stairs provided with sufficient warning devices, for
example, railings, planters, etc., to alert people who are visually impaired. This
situation could constitute an overhead hazard
16. Protruding Objects
a. Locate protruding and hanging objects (such as telephones, water fountains, signs,
etc.) with their leading edge 686mm to 2032mm above the floor, protrude no more
than 100mm into the path of travel.
b. Design walks, halls, corridors, passageways, aisles or other circulation spaces have
a minimum head clearance of 2032mm.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 9
G. Public Restrooms
1. Restroom Identification
a. Provide an accessible restroom for each gender clearly marked with an International
Symbol of Accessibility mounted 1525mm above the finish floor to the centerline of
the sign.
b. Design the restroom identified with a sign having raised characters and Braille
mounted on the latch side of the door no higher than 1525mm above the finished
floor.
2. Restroom Entrance
a. Provide restroom entrances with a clear opening (free of protrusions and
obstructions) of 813mm and maneuvering clearance adjacent to the push and pull
side of doors conforming to Section E, Part 13
3. Restroom Mirror
a. Mount the mirror 1016mm from the floor to the bottom edge of the reflective surface.
4. Lavatory Heights
a. Mount the lavatory so that the counter (rim) surface is no higher than 864mm from
the floor surface.
b. Provide a clearance space of at least 737mm measured from the bottom of apron to
the floor.
c. Mount the drain pipe so that there is at least 230mm of clearance from the floor
surface.
5. Protective Pipe Covering
a. Specify insulation or other protective covering used on hot water and drain pipes
under the lavatory to prevent contact.
6. Lavatory Space
a. Provide clear floor space (762 x 1220mm) provided in front of the lavatory which
includes an extension of this space under the lavatory of 432mms minimum (483mm
maximum) to allow for forward approach.
7. Faucet Controls
a. At accessible lavatories, specify faucets controlled by a hand lever, push button, or
electronic control which is easily operated by one hand, not requiring tight grasping,
pinching, or twisting and requiring a maximum of 2.25 kg of force or less for
operation.
b. Note: Self-closing valves should stay open for a minimum of 10 seconds.
8. Dispensers in Restroom
a. Mount restroom dispensers and accessories so that there is no more than 1220mm
to the highest control or operable part.
Note: Dispensers which can be reached from a parallel (side) approach may be mounted
so that there is no more than 1372mm to the highest operable control or part of the
dispenser.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 10
9. Stall Door
a. At least one restroom stall available to have a clear opening (free of protrusions and
obstructions) of 813mm.
b. Does stall door swing outward. Note: For end-of-row wheelchair accessible toilet
stalls, the door may swing inward as long as sufficient maneuvering space is
provided inside the stall. See ADAAG Fig 30(a-1).
10. Standard Toilet Stall Size
a. Design the standard, accessible stall provide a minimum depth of 1422mm and a
width of 1525mm for wall mounted water closets. Note: Add 75mm to the depth if the
water closet is floor mounted.
11. Alternate Stall Size
a. Where a standard, accessible stall is technically infeasible, an alternate stall shall be
provided. If the stall has a wall-mounted water closet, design it to have a minimum
depth of 1675mm.
Note: Add 75mm to the stall depth if the water closet is floor mounted.
b. For alternate stalls allowing a forward approach to the water closet, provide a
minimum width of 915mm and grab bars mounted on both sides of the stall.
c. For alternate stalls allowing a side approach to the water closet, provide a minimum
width of 1220mm and grab bars mounted to the side and rear of the water closet.
d. Locate the center of the water closet a minimum of 460mmfrom the near side wall or
partition.
e. At conditions with six or more stalls, provide one additional stall provided which is
915mm wide with out-swinging door, grab bars on both sides, and is the seat of the
water closet 432 to 483mm from the floor.
12. Dispensers in Commode Stall
a. Locate toilet paper and seat cover dispensers within easy reach of a person using
the water closet.
b. Specify toilet paper dispensers to permit delivery of a continuous flow of paper and
are located within reach at a minimum height of 483mm above the floor.
13. Urinals
a. Provide the men’s restroom have at least one stall-type or wall-hung urinal with an
elongated rim which is mounted at a maximum of 432mm above the floor.
14. Water Closet Seat
a. Locate the top of the water closet seat 431 to 483mm from the floor surface.
15. Grab Bars
a. When a side transfer in a stall is required, provide two grab bars (a 1067mm long
bar to the side and a 915mm long bar to the back) mounted at 840 to 915mm from
the floor surface provided.
b. For alternate stalls (see item 11 above) provide two grab bars 42 inches in length
located on both sides of the stall and mounted 33 to 915mmes from floor surface.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 11
c. Specify the diameter of each grab bar 32 to 38mm, Detail the space between the
wall and each grab bar 38mm, and each grab bar able to support 113.5 kg.
16. Flush Controls
a. Locate the flush controls mounted no higher than 1118mm above the floor surface
on the wide side of the toilet area.
b. Specify flush controls operable with one hand, not requiring tight grasping, pinching,
or twisting of the wrist or more than 2.25 kg of force.
17. Clear Width for Toilet Room Doors and Floor Space
a. Provide a minimum door clear width of 813mm. ADAAG does not specify toilet room
dimensions. However, adequate clear floor space is required for approach and use
at fixtures and adequate turning space must be provided. See #6 - Lavatory Space
and the clearances required adjacent to the water closet in #10—Standard Toilet
Stall Size.
b. Provide adequate space allowed for a wheelchair to make a 180 degree turn.
[Minimum space of 1525mm diameter or a “T-shaped” space as shown in ADAAG
Fig 3(b)].
H. Public Telephones and Water Fountains
1. Telephone Mounting
a. If public telephones are provided, provide at least one accessible with phone dial
and coin receiver no higher than 1220mm (for forward approach) or 1320mm (for
parallel approach). If there occurs any obstruction then the allowable height shall be
1170mm (for side reach) or 1120mm (for forward reach).
b. Provide a min height of 225mm (for side reach).
c. Specify a cord at least 735mm long.
2. Access
a. Design or provide telephone enclosures with a minimum clear path width for forward
approach of 760mm. Provide a clear space of 760 x 1220mm at telephones.
3. Directory Access
a. Provide phone directories usable at wheelchair level.
b. Specify operation directions available in Braille and/or large print.
4. Auditory Amplification
a. Telephone shall be equipped with volume controls, capable of min. 12dbA and a
max. of 18dbA
b. Specify telephones equipped with an amplifier (25% of total phones but never less
than one must have amplification).
5. Text Telephone
a. Design for four or more public telephones, that is at least one is a public text
telephone (TT).
Note: Text Telephones are also known as Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
or Tele-Type Writers (TTY).

Rev. 0 3.3 - 12
b. Specify or provide signage for text telephones identified by the symbol shown below.
6. Access to Water Fountain

a. If free-standing or built-in water fountains do not have a clear, open space under
them, provide a clear floor space of 762 x 1067mm for parallel approach plus space
for maneuvering.
b. Specify the spout of the drinking fountain located in the front of the unit with a water
flow trajectory 100mm minimum in height that is parallel or nearly parallel to the front
of the unit.
7. Height
a. Locate and mount the water fountain available so that it is provides a minimum
clearance of 686mm and depth of 432 to 483mm so that it can be approached and
used by a person in a wheelchair.
b. Specify the width of the water fountain at least 762mm.
c. Locate the maximum height of the water spout 915mm, or less.
8. Hand Controls
a. Locate the controls on the water fountain located on the front or on the side near the
front, with the controls able to be operated with one hand, not requiring tight
grasping, pinching, or twisting, and can the controls be operated with 2.25 kg of
force or less.
9. Existing Water Fountain
a. Specify dispenser with drinking cups provided when water fountain exceeds
recommended height
I. Meeting Rooms
1. Accessible Rooms
a. Provide accessible meeting rooms.
2. Location
a. Locater the accessible meeting rooms centrally in the facility to prevent unnecessary
long travel for people with mobility impairments. Note: This is not a requirement.
3. Accessible Route
a. Provide hallways and corridors with a clearance of 915mm with an occasional space
allowance for turning and passing at intervals not exceeding 61M
4. Door Width
a. Provide the doors to meeting rooms have a clear opening of 813mm.
5. Thresholds
a. Detail thresholds of interior doors have a maximum edge height of 6mm. (See
Section F, Part 10)
6. Amplifier and Sound System Equipment

Rev. 0 3.3 - 13
a. Provide an amplifier and sound system equipment available with individual or

lavaliere microphones. Note: This is not a requirement but is often helpful.
7. Floor
a. Design the meeting room floor non-slip, level, and negotiable by persons in
wheelchairs and other mobility aids.
8. Seating for People using Wheelchairs
a. Provide adequate seating space for people using wheelchairs.
(For forward or rear access, total space 1220mm deep by 1676mm wide or for side
access, 1525mm deep by 1525mm wide.)
b. Provide the spaces for people using wheelchairs dispersed throughout the room
within easy viewing (line of sight) of the stage.
c. Provide the spaces for people using wheelchairs or other mobility aids near
accessible exits.
9. Table Placement
a. If tables are used in the meeting rooms, provide a 915mm aisle clearance and a
762mm wide space at the table for wheelchair access.
10. Table Height
a. Specify or provide tables with a clear opening for knee space of at least 686mm in
height, 762mm in width, and 483mm in depth.
b. Provide the top surface of the table 711 to 864mm from floor surface.
11. Listening System
a. If requested, participants are to be provided with interpreter services or a listening
system and are to be seated within 15.25M of the stage for viewing.
12. Temporary Ramp
a. Provide a temporary ramp for the podium or head table available.
Note: Maximum slope of ramp is 1cm vertical rise in every 12 cm of horizontal
distance.
13. Microphones
a. Provide accessible and flexible microphones.
J. Restaurants
1. Entrance
a. Provide entrances to food service establishments have a door with a 813mm clear
opening, single effort door pull, and negotiable thresholds of 6mm or less in height
and beveled at a slope of 1:2.
2. Tables
a. Provide accessible tables. (A 762mm width for individual seating, 686mm minimum
knee clearance, and minimum 483m depth under the table)
b. Are tables placed to provide a 915mm wide aisle clearance.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 14
c. Provide 28-864mm from the floor to the top of the table.

3. Cafeteria/Buffet Lines
a. Provide accessible cafeteria/buffet lines—at least 915mm clear opening with
adequate turning space at corners.
b. Provide tray slides mounted at a maximum of 864mm above the floor.
4. Menus
a. Provide restaurant \ menus in Braille and large print.
5. Lounge
a. Provide accessible lounge entrance, tables and aisles.
6. Fixed Tables
a. Where fixed tables are provided, provide at least 5 percent, but not less than one
table, accessible.
Note: The required number of accessible fixed tables or counters shall be
proportionally distributed between smoking and non-smoking areas.
K. Guest Rooms
1. Room Numbers
a. Provide guest rooms numbered in consecutive sequence (100, 102, 104, etc.) and
are with numbers raised for tactile identification.
2. Keys
a. Provide room keys available with a large fixed handle for easy handling.
3. Door
a. Provide entry, bathroom, and closet doors with a clear opening of 813mm with
maximum threshold height of 1/2 inch with beveled edges of 1:2 slope as necessary.
(See Section F, Part 10)
4. Bed Spacing
a. Provide a minimum clear opening of 915mm by at least one side of the bed.
5. Telephones
a. Provide one telephone in the room which is accessible from the bed.
6. Amplified Telephones
a. Provide amplified telephones and text telephones available for guests.
7. Protruding Objects
a. Provide rooms free of wall mounted protruding objects such as televisions, hanging
lamps, etc..
8. Switch Access
a. Provide light switches, heating, cooling, drapery controls, and other similar items
accessible and placed so that they will allow access by forward or parallel approach
in a wheelchair or other mobility aid.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 15
b. Provide tactile instructions available on controls.

9. Closet and Towel Racks
a. Provide towel and closet racks mounted at a maximum height of 1220mm.
10. Space for Wheelchairs
a. Provide guest rooms and bathrooms to allow sufficient turning space for wheelchairs
(1525mm diameter space is preferred).
11. Mirrors
a. Mount mirrors within 1016mm of the floor to the bottom of the reflective surface.
12. Lavatory Clearance
a. Is the lavatory mounted at least 737mm from the floor to provide knee clearance, at
a maximum height of 864mm to the top surface of the lavatory, and is the bottom of
the drain pipe at least 230mm from the floor surface.
b. See Section G – Public Restrooms.
13. Exposed Hot Water and Drain Pipes
a. Provide insulation or protective covering used on drain and hot water pipes under
the lavatory to prevent contact.
14. Water Closet Seat
a. Specify the top of the water closet seat between 432 to 483mm from the floor
surface.
15. Grab Bars
a. Provide grab bars of sufficient length and height (838 to 915mm) mounted adjacent
to the water closet having a diameter of 32 to 38mm, with a 38mm space between
the grab bar and the wall, and are the grab bars able to support 113 kg.
16. Faucet Controls
a. Provide faucets controlled by a hand lever, push button, or electronic control which
is easily operated by one hand, not requiring tight grasping, pinching, or twisting and
operable with 2.25 kg of force or less.
17. Shower and Tub Combinations
a. Provide shower and tub combinations with curtains rather than glass doors.
18. Grab Bars
a. Provide grab bars of sufficient length, height and strength mounted in tub or shower.
b. Provide grab bars with a diameter of 813 to 38mm, and a 38mm space between the
grab bar and the wall, and with the grab bars able to support 113 kg.
19. Bath Tub Bench
a. Provide a bench available for use in the tub.
20. Shower Stall and Flexible Shower Hose
a. Provide the floor space in the shower stall at least 915 x 915mm.
b. Provide the shower spray unit with a flexible hose of at least 1525mm long and so
the shower head can be used as both a hand-held and fixed unit.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 16
21. Number of Accessible Rooms

a. Provide accessible guest rooms available that comply with the table below.
Number of Rooms Accessible Rooms Rooms with Roll-in Shower
1 to 25 1 —–
26 to 50 2 —–
51 to 75 3 1
76 to 100 4 1
101 to 150 5 2
151 to 200 6 2
201 to 300 7 3
301 to 400 8 4
401 to 500 9 4 plus one for
each additional 100 over 400
501 to 1000 2% of total
1001 and over 20 plus 1 for
each 100
over 1000
22. Sleeping Accommodations for Persons with Hearing Impairments
a. Provide number of rooms with Visual Alarm Notification Devices and Text
Telephones comply with the following table.
Number of Rooms/Suites Rooms with Visual Alarms and
Text Telephones
1 to 25 1
26 to 50 2
51 to 75 3
76 to 100 4
101 to 150 5
151 to 200 6
201 to 300 7
301 to 400 8
401 to 500 9
501 to 1000 2% of total
1001 and over 20 plus 1 for each 100 over 1000

Rev. 0 3.3 - 17
L. Hazards and Emergency Procedures

1. Hazardous Vehicular Area
a. Provide boundary between the pedestrian and vehicle area marked with some type
of tactile warning if not separated by curbs, rails or similar element.
Note: Truncated domes having a diameter of 23mm, height of 5mm, center-to-center
spacing of 60mm, and of a color which contrasts with the walk surface may be used
as a tactile warning.
2. Standard Warnings at Subsurface Pools
a. Provide standardized textured surfaces for tactile warnings (i.e. rails, walls, curbs, or
truncated domes) present at subsurface pools.
3. Emergency Exits
a. Provide all emergency exit doors clearly marked, and with a a minimum opening of
813mm.
b. Provide exit doors equipped with tactile symbols to designate their location.
4. Audible and Visual Alarm Signals
a. Provide all audible alarms accompanied by visual alarms.
b. Specify audible alarms to produce a noise which exceeds the ambient noise level by
at least 15 decibels.
c. Specify visual alarms xenon strobe type (or equivalent) with intensity of 75 candela
and a flash rate of 1 per second minimum and 3 per second maximum.
d. Specify visual alarms not more than 15.25M apart and mounted 2032mm above
highest floor level or 150mm below the ceiling, whichever is lower.
5. Area of Rescue
a. Except in fully sprinkled buildings, provide an area of rescue assistance that meets
one of the following seven requirements specified in ADA Accessibility Guidelines
and is it identified by a sign.
1) Portion of a stairway landing within a smoke-proof enclosure.
2) Portion of an exterior exit balcony located adjacent to an exit stairway.
3) Portion of a one-hour fire restrictive corridor located adjacent to an exit
enclosure.
4) Fire-resistive vestibule located adjacent to an exit enclosure.
5) Portion of a stairway landing within an exit enclosure which is vented and
separated from the interior of the building with fire resistive doors (not less
than one hour).
6) An area or room separated from portions of the building by a smoke barrier.
7) An elevator lobby with shafts that are pressurized once activated by smoke
detectors.
M. Elevators and Automated Teller Machines
1. Elevators

Rev. 0 3.3 - 18
a. For facilities that have a passenger elevator provide elevator access to all levels of
the facility.
2. Signal Identification
a. Provide both visual and audible signals used to identify direction of elevator travel
(for example, for audible alarms, one sound for UP and two sounds for DOWN).
3. Accessible Routes
a. Provide the accessible elevators on a normally used accessible route.
4. Call Buttons/Floor Buttons
a. Provide call buttons in lobbies and halls mounted at 1067mm (on center) above the
floor with no access obstructions.
b. Provide raised and Braille floor destinations on both elevator jambs 1525mm above
the floor surface.
5. Elevator Car Dimensions
a. Specify the elevator with a minimum inside dimensions of 1372 x 2032mm and a
clear door opening of 915mm.
Note: If the elevator door is not on center of the elevator entrance, the interior dimensions
should be 1372 x 1727mm.
6. Leveling
a. Specify the elevator to stop within 12mm of the outside floor surface on each level.
7. Space Between Elevator and Floor
a. Provide the open space between the outside floor surface and the elevator platform
no greater than 32mm.
8. Floor Protective Re-Opening Device
a. Provide the elevators equipped with a safety system that automatically opens the
door when it becomes obstructed by an object or person.
9. Handrails
a. Specify the elevator interior have handrails mounted 864 to 915mm above the floor
and with a clear space of 38mm between the rail and the wall.
10. Controls, Call Buttons and Alarms
a. Provide controls, call buttons, and alarm buttons at least 19mm in diameter with
Braille and raised lettering located to the left of each control or button.
b. Provide all controls or buttons on the elevator control panel mounted no higher than
1220mm above the floor.
11. Automated Teller Machines (ATM)
a. Provide sufficient clear floor space (762 x 1220mm) adjacent to the ATM to allow for
forward or parallel approach by a wheelchair.
b. Design maximum height of all operable controls or buttons 1220mm for a front
approach or 1372mm for a parallel approach by a wheelchair.
c. Provide instructions and information for use of the ATM accessible to persons with
visual impairments.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 19
3.3.3 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY
A. General
1. Building Accessibility is a requirement of all new work within the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
Accessible design as it relates to buildings covers a wide range of components and
topics including but not limited to:
a. Smooth, ground level entrances with ramps as needed.
b. Surface textures that require low force to traverse on level, less than 2 kg force per
54 kg rolling force.
c. Surfaces that are stable, firm, and slip resistant per ASTM 2047.
d. Doors complying with minimum and maximum sizes along required egress paths.
e. Functional clearances for approach and use of elements and components.
f. Lever handles for opening doors rather than twisting knobs.
g. Single-hand operation with closed fist for operable components including fire alarm
pull stations.
h. Components that do not require tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist.
i. Components that require less than 2 kg of force to operate.
j. Light switches with large flat panels rather than small toggle switches.
k. Buttons and other controls that may be distinguished by touch.
l. Bright and appropriate lighting, particularly task lighting.
m. Contrast controls on visual output.
n. Clear lines of sight to reduce dependence on sound.
o. Signs with light-on-dark visual contrast.
p. Labels on equipment control buttons that is large print.
q. Operable parts being within prescribed reach ranges.

Rev. 0 3.3 - 20
SECTION 3.4 SUSTAINABILITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.4.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 2
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 3
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 3
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 4
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 4
3.4.2 SUSTAINABLE “GREEN” DESIGN: .............................................................................. 5
A. Sustainable Design ........................................................................................................ 5
B. LEED Requirements ...................................................................................................... 5
C. CEEQUAL Requirements .............................................................................................. 7
3.4.3 ASHRAE ....................................................................................................................... 10
A. ASHRAE ....................................................................................................................... 10
3.4.4 ENERGY....................................................................................................................... 11
A. Energy Efficiency .......................................................................................................... 11
3.4.5 WATER CONSERVATION ........................................................................................... 12
A. Water Conservation ...................................................................................................... 12

Rev. 0 3.4 - i
3.4.1 GENERAL
A. General
Sustainable Design addresses the design and construction integration to promote higher
performing buildings that reduce the building’s impact on the environment.
1. Introduction
a. Sustainable design responds to economic, environmental and cultural conditions
with respect to the local, regional and global context. Sustainable design and
construction practices significantly reduce or eliminate the negative impact of
buildings on the environment and occupants by addressing the following:
1) Sustainable site planning
2) Green infrastructure
3) Conservation of water and protection of water quality
4) Energy efficiency
5) Conservation of materials and resources
6) Indoor environmental quality
7) Optimization of operational and maintenance practices
8) Regional priorities, as applicable
9) Innovation in design
2. Applicability
a. These general energy conservation and environmental Standards are intended to
provide a framework for A/E and/or EPC Contractors as they pursue the
sustainability goals identified by the RCJ on a project-by-project basis.
3. Definitions
a. “Building Commissioning” A quality assurance process for design and during and
after building construction to ensure that appropriate systems and components are
installed, tested and maintained according to design requirements.
b. “Carbon Footprint” The total set of greenhouse gas emissions caused by an
organization, event, product or person.
c. “Chain-of-Custody Certificates” Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that
wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by a Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC)-accredited body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, “FSC
Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.” Certificates shall include evidence
that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body.
d. “Ecosystem” The complex of a community of organisms and its environment
functioning as an ecological unit.
e. “Ecological Footprint” Measure of human demand on the Earth’s ecosystems.
f. “Greenhouse Gas” An atmospheric gas that absorbs and emits radiation within the
thermal infrared range, a process that elevates the average surface temperature of
the Earth. The primary greenhouse gases in the Earth’s atmosphere are water
vapor, carbon dioxide, methane, nitrous oxide and ozone.

Rev. 0 3.4 - 1
g. “Greywater” Wastewater generated from domestic activities such as laundry,

dishwashing and bathing, which may be recycled on-site for uses such as landscape
irrigation and flushing toilets.
h. “Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA)” Method for assessing the total cost of facility
ownership, taking in to account first costs as well as operations and maintenance
expenses.
i. “Low-VOC” Materials with Volatile Organic Compound emissions that comply with
established limits, thus supporting indoor air quality.
j. “Recycled Content” The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be
determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the
cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value.
1) “Post-consumer” material is defined as waste material generated by
households or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their
roles as end users of the product, which may no longer be used for its
intended purpose.
2) “Pre-consumer” material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream
during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such
as rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being
reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
k. “Regional Materials” Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 800 km of project site. If only a fraction of a product or
material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that
percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.
l. “Peak Shaving” The process of shifting electrical demand from peak times to times
with lower demand
m. “Construction Waste Management” Developing and implementing a construction
waste management program shall be part of the standard scope for all projects. At
a minimum, the plan shall identify the non-hazardous materials to be diverted from
the waste stream through salvage or recycling activities and state whether materials
will be sorted on-site or comingled.
n. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
b. CEEQUAL: Civil Engineering Environmental Quality Assessment and Award
Scheme
c. ICC: International Code Council
d. EGBC: Emirates Green Building Council
e. FSC: Forest Stewardship Council
f. GHG: Greenhouse gas
g. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
h. LEED: Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
i. LCCA: Life cycle cost analysis

Rev. 0 3.4 - 2
j. MENA GBC: Middle East and North Africa Green Building Council
k. NEC: National Electric Code
l. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
m. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National
Association
n. USGBC: U.S. Green Building Council
o. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound
p. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional abbreviations.
a. Within the context of the project requirements, schedule and budget, RCJ desires
the A/E and/or EPC Contractors to create their project designs in accordance with
the Sustainable Design concept contained herein. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall create Sustainable Goals as a part of their 10% Submission; as well as, as a
Sustainability Report as a part of their 30% Submission.
6. Codes
b. Additionally, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with the following
regulations:
1) Ministry of Water & Electrical Requirements
2) SASO – Minimum Energy Performance Requirements
3) RCJ Urban Planning Sustainability Requirements
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Section:
1) ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005: The Commissioning Process
2) International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP)
3) Saudi Building Code 601 Energy Conservation
4) International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
5) ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings
(a) Establishes minimum requirements for energy efficient building design.
(b) Applies to building envelope, HVAC, hot water and lighting.
6) International Green Construction Code (IGCC)
(a) Seeks to decrease energy usage and carbon footprints.
(b) Addresses site development and land use, including preservation of
natural and material resources.
(c) Emphasizes building performance.

Rev. 0 3.4 - 3
7) ASHRAE 189.1 Standard for Design of High Performance Green Buildings

(a) Identifies an alternate method to the IGCC for achieving sustainable
building design.
8) Resource Conservation Standards / Environmental Quality Standards
(a) ASTM E2635-08 Standard Practice for Water Conservation in Buildings
Through In-Situ Water Reclamation
b. LEED Rating System
1) States the basic intent, requirements and documentation submittals
necessary to achieve each prerequisite and voluntary credit.
2) Projects earn one or more points toward certification by meeting or exceeding
each credit’s technical requirement.
3) All prerequisites must be achieved in order to qualify for certification.
4) Points add up to final score that relates to one of four possible levels of
certification: Certified, Silver, Gold or Platinum.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for Commissioning Requirements.
9. Approvals
plans and specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Commissioning is a part of the standard scope of all projects. Commissioning is a
quality-focused process that begins with review of decisions made in design and
continues to verify proper installation, operation and maintenance throughout
construction into operation. Energy efficiency, indoor environmental quality and
equipment are primary areas of concern for basic commissioning services. The four
stages of involvement on a new construction project are as follows:
a. Pre-Design
b. Design
c. Construction
d. Operations

Rev. 0 3.4 - 4
SUBSECTION 3.4.2 SUSTAINABLE “GREEN” DESIGN
3.4.2 SUSTAINABLE “GREEN” DESIGN:
A. Sustainable Design
1. Sustainable Design is a methodology of reducing the carbon-footprint of buildings by
consciously designing buildings to make the built environment have a better impact to our
planet. Sustainable design Standards and project design guides are also increasingly
available and are vigorously being developed by a wide array of private organizations
and individuals. There is also a large body of new methods emerging from the rapid
development of what has become known as 'sustainability science' promoted by a wide
variety of educational and governmental institutions. The design solutions will be project
specific but will evaluate and include many, if not all, of the following topics.
a. Low-impact materials: Choose non-toxic, sustainably produced or recycled materials
which require little energy to process
b. Energy efficiency: Use manufacturing processes and produce products which
require less energy
c. Durable design: Reducing consumption and waste of resources by increasing the
durability of relationships between people and products, through design.
d. Design for reuse and recycling: "Products, processes, and systems shall be
designed for performance in a commercial 'afterlife'." Cradle-to-Grave and Cradle-to-
Cradle analysis will inform design decisions in this category. Utilizing life-cycle
assessment to predict and reduce impacts for total carbon footprint are now
increasingly required.
e. Biomimicry: "Redesigning systems on biological lines and enabling the constant
reuse of materials in continuous closed cycles." Living Buildings and Net Zero
Buildings may require this type of design thinking.
f. Water Use Reduction: Create water harvesting systems, controlling water use in
buildings and the use of grey or black water on site are all methods used to reduce
the amount of water brought onto the site.
g. Renewability: Materials shall come from nearby (local or bioregional), sustainably
managed renewable sources that may be composted when their usefulness has
been exhausted.
h. Robust eco-design: Consider design principles that minimize resource consumption
and pollution sources when designing products.
i. Sustainable infrastructure: Use programs such as CEEQUAL to internally assess
and independently verify how well clients, design teams and/or construction teams
address environmental, sustainability, and social issues on projects.
B. LEED Requirements
1. LEED is a third-party certification product, of the United States Green Building Council,
for certifying Green Buildings. Although the RCJ has not officially adopted LEED as a
certification requirement for all of its projects, the RCJ does intend to use LEED as a
method to determine if a project shall pursue certification on a project-by-project basis.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall submit the sustainable design strategies and goals
at the 10% level and the sustainability report at the 30% level with a project specific
LEED Scoresheet. The RCJ will then determine if LEED Certification will be pursued on a
project by project basis. LEED is a point based system that has prerequisites and credits
in the following requirements and categories:

Rev. 0 3.4 - 5
a. Integrative Process - requirements, while not a credit category, promote reaching

across disciplines to incorporate diverse team members during the pre-design
period.
b. Location and Transportation - credits reward projects within relatively dense areas,
near diverse uses, with access to a variety of transportation options, or on sites with
development constraints.
c. Sustainable Sites - credits encourage strategies that minimize the impact on
ecosystems and water resources.
d. Water Efficiency - credits promote smarter use of water, inside and out, to reduce
potable water consumption.
e. Energy & Atmosphere - credits promote better building energy performance through
innovative strategies.
f. Materials & Resources - credits encourage using sustainable building materials, use
of recycled materials and reducing waste.
g. Indoor Environment Quality - credits promote better indoor air quality and access to
daylight and views.
h. Innovation in Design - credits address sustainable building expertise as well as
design measures not covered under the five LEED credit categories.
i. Regional Priorities - address regional environmental priorities for buildings in
different geographic regions.
j. Information regarding the prerequisites and credits may be found at
www.usgbc.com.
2. As a part of every project for the RCJ, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor are required to
submit Sustainable Design goals in the 10% submission and a Sustainable Design
Report in the 30%.
a. 10% Submission Requirements: At the outset of a project, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor will establish Sustainable Design Goals for the project. These goals
would identify the sustainable design components and practices that the design
team intends to include in the project. These goals shall be submitted in the form of
a LEED Scoresheet in the 10% submission. For the 10% submission, the RCJ
requires that all of the following LEED v4 pre-requisites be included in the goals for
the project:
1) Sustainable Sites - Construction activity pollution prevention
2) Water Efficiency – Outdoor water use reduction
3) Water Efficiency – Indoor water use reduction
4) Water Efficiency – Building-level water metering
5) Energy & Atmosphere – Fundamental commissioning and verification – Refer
to RCJ’s Commissioning Requirements in Subsection 4.5.9
6) Energy & Atmosphere – Minimum energy performance
7) Energy & Atmosphere – Building-level energy metering
8) Energy & Atmosphere – Fundamental refrigerant management

Rev. 0 3.4 - 6
9) Materials & Resources – Construction and demolition waste management

planning
10) Indoor Environment Quality – Minimum IAQ performance
11) Indoor Environment Quality – Environmental tobacco smoke control
b. 30% Submission: During the 30% phase of every project, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall create a Sustainability Report. The requirements for this report are
included in Subsection 4.3.4.
C. CEEQUAL Requirements
1. CEEQUAL is the Civil Engineering Environmental Quality Assessment and Awards
Scheme; third-party sustainability rating and award system focusing on site preparation,
site development and infrastructure projects.
The CEEQUAL Award Scheme is based on a self-assessment carried out by a trained
CEEQUAL Assessor that is then externally and independently verified by a CEEQUAL-
appointed Verifier.
Although the RCJ has not officially adopted a policy to seek CEEQUAL awards for all
infrastructure projects, the RCJ does intend to benefit from Award Scheme and use it
throughout a project’s duration as a checklist, and as part of the specification for delivery
of high environmental quality.
Therefore, the A/E shall use it as a tool to aid decision-making on environmental issues
related to the design, construction and operation of the project, to develop Sustainability
Goals for the project, and to produce the Sustainability Report. EPC Contractors shall
use it to fulfil their obligation to deliver the permanent works to the required environmental
quality.
2. The CEEQUAL scheme complements any statutory requirement or voluntary decision to
undertake an Environmental Impact Assessment or prepare an Environmental Statement
or Environmental Commentary.
CEEQUAL does not assess the environmental need for the project nor its social
acceptability, but supports clients, designers and contractors in dealing positively with
environmental quality and associated social issues relevant to the project, and helps to
integrate such thinking into the design and construction processes.
This integration includes issues such as protection of the surrounding natural
environment, mitigation measures, landscape design, nature and source of construction
materials, use of recycled materials, energy consumption, and environmental
management of the civil engineering or public realm project site. The CEEQUAL question
set can thus be used to influence the issues that are addressed in regulatory
Environmental Impact Assessments or less-formal environmental commentaries on
project proposals.
CEEQUAL can also be used to demonstrate that actions proposed or recommended in
an Environmental Impact Assessment or environmental commentary have actually been
delivered on the project.
3. The following are the twelve (12) sections of the Scheme comprising the question set.
The sections have been weighted by CEEQUAL, and these weightings are embedded in
the scores awarded for each question.

Rev. 0 3.4 - 7
a. Project Management – which covers the need for environmental risk assessments
and active environmental management, training, the influence of contractual and
procurement processes, delivering environmental and social performance,
construction issues, minimizing emissions.
b. Land Use – which covers design for minimum land-take, legal requirements, flood
risk, previous use of the site, land contamination and remediation measures.
c. Landscape – which covers covering consideration of landscape issues in design,
amenity features, local character, loss and compensation or mitigation of landscape
features, implementation and management, and completion and aftercare.
d. Ecology & Biodiversity – which covers impacts on sites of high ecological value,
protected species, conservation & enhancement, habitat creation measures,
monitoring and maintenance.
e. The Historic Environment – which covers baseline studies and surveys,
conservation and enhancement measures to be taken if features are found, and
information and public access.
f. Water resources and the Water Environment – which covers control of a project’s
impacts on, and protection of, the water environment, legal requirements,
minimizing water usage, and enhancement of the water environment.
g. Energy and Carbon – which covers life-cycle energy and carbon analysis, energy
and carbon emissions in use, and energy and carbon performance on site, but not
embodied energy, which is in Section 8.
h. Material Use – which covers minimizing environmental impact of materials used,
minimizing material use and waste, responsible sourcing of materials including
selection of timber, using re-used and/or recycled material, minimizing use and
impacts of hazardous materials, durability and maintenance, and future de-
construction or disassembly.
i. Waste Management – which covers design for waste minimization, legal
requirements, waste from site preparation, and on-site waste management.
j. Transport – which covers location of a project in relation to transport infrastructure,
minimizing traffic impacts of a project, construction transport, and minimizing
workforce travel.
k. Effects on Neighbors – which covers minimizing operation and construction-related
nuisances, legal requirements, nuisance from construction noise and vibration, and
from air and light pollution, and visual impact, including site tidiness.
l. Relations with the Local Community and other Stakeholders – which covers
community consultation, community relations programs and their effectiveness,
engagement with relevant local groups, and human environment, aesthetics and
employment.
4. The available CEEQUAL Awards are:
a. the Whole Project Award (WPA), applied for jointly by or on behalf of the Client,
Designer and Principal Contractor(s);
b. the WPA with an Interim Client & Design Award (the stage in the design process at
which the Interim Assessment is undertaken can be chosen by the applicant to best
suit their needs and procurement process)
c. the Client & Design Award, applied for jointly by the Client and Designer
d. the Design-Only Award, applied for by only the principal Designer;
e. the Construction-Only Award, to be applied for by the Principal Contractor(s);
f. Design & Construction Award for project teams that do not include the client, on
design & construct and other partnership contracts.
The Client & Design Award is available before construction has started as an award for a
client and designer, perhaps in a situation where the contractor has not yet been

Rev. 0 3.4 - 8
appointed or does not wish to participate in a Whole Project Award. An Interim Client &
Design Award is available on the way to a Whole Project Award. In this circumstance the
Interim Award is superseded once the project is finished and Whole Project Award
completed.
The Design-only, Construction-only and Design & Construction awards are offered for
situations where the client does not wish to participate in a Whole Project Award or where
the individual team members wish to apply separately for an award that is related directly
to their own contribution to a project.
5. There are four grades for all of the types of Awards: ‘Pass’, ‘Good’, Very Good’ and
‘Excellent’. The percentage scores necessary for these grades of award are:
a. Pass = over 25%
b. Good = over 40%
c. Very good = over 60%
d. Excellent = over 75%.
The CEEQUAL assessment has been designed to reward efforts that go beyond the legal
minima, striving for environmental best practice and “going the extra mile”. Therefore a
‘Pass’ at above 25% suggests that the project’s environmental performance is
approximately 25% of the way from minimum legal compliance to the pinnacle best
practice represented by the highest achievable score.
6. The timing of both the scoping and the assessment is important to the success of the
assessment and the level of Award achievable. Although it is possible for an Award to be
applied for after completion of the applicant project (a retrospective award), the
recommended process will involve:
a. Task formulation – pre-10% submission: a decision by the RCJ to consider
CEEQUAL at an early stage in the project’s development; preferably during the
Task formulation but no later than the 10% (concept) design phase.
b. 10% Submission:
1) The scoping-out process by the A/E to determine whether particular questions
do not apply. For this scoping-out information about contamination, results of
archaeological investigations, ecological assessments etc would have to be
available in order to decide whether these issues could be disregarded and
the questions scoped out. Therefore the scoping-out process shall be
completed during the 10% design phase.
2) Subsequent to the scoping-out-process the A/E will establish Sustainable
Design Goals for the project. These goals would identify the sustainable
design components and practices that the design team intends to include in
the project. These goals shall be submitted in the form of a CEEQUAL
Scoresheet during the 10% submission. The Scoresheet shall address the 12
sections of the Scheme identified by CEEQUAL.
c. 30% Submission:
1) During the 30% phase of every project the A/E or EPC Contractor shall create
a Sustainability Report. The requirements for this report may be found in
Subsection 4.3.4.

Rev. 0 3.4 - 9
SUBSECTION 3.4.3 ASHRAE
3.4.3 ASHRAE
A. ASHRAE
1. ASHRAE, the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, utilizes the ASHRAE Green Guide to assist designers on methods to save
energy through integrated design.
2. ASHRAE Requirements: All projects within the jurisdiction of the RCJ must use the
requirements of Climate Zone 1: Hot & Humid in the most recent version of ASHRAE
90.1 for the design of all building systems including but not limited to HVAC Systems,
Automated Controls, Building Glazing and Envelopes. Coordinate designs of these
systems with all disciplines.

Rev. 0 3.4 - 10
SUBSECTION 3.4.4 ENERGY
3.4.4 ENERGY
A. Energy Efficiency
1. The RCJ is committed to implementing Energy Efficiency in the designs of new projects.
Although energy resources are not currently expensive in Saudi Arabia, the long term
goal is efficient use of resources and diversification of energy supply. As such, energy
efficiency strategies need to be identified and implemented on all projects.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall identify which energy efficiency strategies will be
utilized for each project. These strategies may include:
a. Integrated Design and Load Reduction Strategies
1) Building solar orientation
2) Energy efficient lighting systems
3) Energy efficient office equipment (plug loads)
4) Efficient building envelop
b. Design Building Envelop to Optimize Energy Efficiency
1) Provide thermal breaks in window frames
2) Provide high performance durable weather stripping to minimize infiltration
3) Select glazing with high performance energy characteristics (U value, VLT
and SC
4) Use shading devices and light shelves to minimize solar heat gain
5) Specify effective building envelop insulation to minimize heating and
cooling loads
6) Glass on South, East and West façades shall be highly protective against
solar heat gains
7) Detail building envelop to minimize infiltration and to prevent moisture
build-up within the walls due to condensation
c. Highly Efficient and Optimized HVAC Systems
1) Heat Recovery
2) Use of Variable Frequency Drives for pumps and fans
3) Passive Ventilation Design
4) High efficiency HVAC equipment
5) Implement Demand Control Ventilation for variable occupancies
d. Utilizing Renewable Energy Sources
1) Solar Energy
2) Wind Energy
e. Solar Hot Water Systems

Rev. 0 3.4 - 11
SUBSECTION 3.4.5 WATER CONSERVATION
3.4.5 WATER CONSERVATION
A. Water Conservation
1. Water Conservation is critical in Saudi Arabia and is a major issue for the RCJ in all of its
developments. As the primary water supply to Jubail, Ras Al-Khair and the surrounding
areas are provided by desalinated water from Jubail, the costs of water are high and its
efficient use is paramount. As such, water conservation strategies need to be identified
and implemented on all projects.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall identify which water conservation strategies will be
utilized for each project. These strategies may include:
a. Commissioning new water infrastructure
b. Rain harvesting
c. Grey water reuse
d. Black water reuse
e. Low flow fixtures
f. Capture and reuse condensate drain from HVAC cooling systems
g. No potable water use for landscaping, use TSE water

Rev. 0 3.4 - 12
SECTION 3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.5.1. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 4
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 4
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 4
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 4
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 5
6. Codes and Standards .................................................................................................... 6
7. Related Sections and Subsections ................................................................................ 7
8. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 7
9. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 7
3.5.2. ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY SYSTEM AND RCER .......................................... 8
A. Royal Commission Environmental Regulations ............................................................ 8
1. Overview ........................................................................................................................ 8
3.5.3. ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS AND PROJECT PERMITTING ........................... 9
A. Environmental ................................................................................................................ 9
1. The Environmental Permit Program .............................................................................. 9
2. Environmental Screening Questionnaire (ESQ) ........................................................... 10
3. Permit Application Package (PAP) ............................................................................... 10
4. Best Available Techniques (BAT) Analysis .................................................................. 11
B. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards .................................... 11
1. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards: ................................... 11
2. Saudi National PME Standards: ................................................................................... 11
C. Archeological / Cultural Resource Clearances ............................................................. 19
1. Pre-Project Planning ..................................................................................................... 19
2. Further Investigations ................................................................................................... 19
3. Notification of Finding ................................................................................................... 19
3.5.4. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE ................................................................... 20
A. Hazardous Materials Management .............................................................................. 20
1. Description .................................................................................................................... 20
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Materials ................................................................................ 20

Rev. 0 3.5 - 1
3. Hazardous Materials Inventory ..................................................................................... 21

4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Materials .................................... 21
5. Transportation of Hazardous Materials ........................................................................ 21
6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal ................................................................................. 21
7. Building and Construction Hazardous Materials .......................................................... 22
B. Hazardous Waste Management ................................................................................... 22
1. Description .................................................................................................................... 22
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Wastes .................................................................................. 22
3. Hazardous Waste Inventory ......................................................................................... 23
4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Waste ........................................ 23
5. Transportation of Hazardous Waste............................................................................. 23
6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal ................................................................................. 23
3.5.5. POLLUTION PREVENTION ......................................................................................... 25
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 25
1. Basic Understanding .................................................................................................... 25
2. Design........................................................................................................................... 25
B. Life Cycle Assessments (LCA) ..................................................................................... 25
1. LCA Implementation ..................................................................................................... 25
C. Material Reduction, Substitution, and Elimination ........................................................ 25
1. Reduction...................................................................................................................... 25
2. Substitution ................................................................................................................... 25
3. Elimination .................................................................................................................... 26
D. Material Reuse.............................................................................................................. 26
E. Material Recycling ........................................................................................................ 26
1. Recycling ...................................................................................................................... 26
2. Upcycling ...................................................................................................................... 26
3. Downcycling.................................................................................................................. 26
4. Objectives ..................................................................................................................... 26
F. Energy Use ................................................................................................................... 26
1. Wasted Energy ............................................................................................................. 26
G. End-of-Pipe Controls .................................................................................................... 27
1. Air Discharges .............................................................................................................. 27
2. Water Discharges ......................................................................................................... 27
3. Solid Waste................................................................................................................... 27
H. Decommissioning, Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal ...................................... 27
3.5.6. PETROLEUM AND CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE ...................................................... 28

Rev. 0 3.5 - 2
I. General ......................................................................................................................... 28
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 28
J. Codes and Standards ................................................................................................... 28
1. Applicable Codes and Standards ................................................................................. 28
3.5.7. SITE CLEANUP AND REMEDIATION ......................................................................... 29
K. Contaminated Site Material Removal ........................................................................... 29
1. Requirements ............................................................................................................... 29
L. Asbestos Cement (AC) Pipe and Material Removal .................................................... 29
1. Applicable Codes and Standards ................................................................................. 29
2. General Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 29
3. Safe Work Procedure Checklist.................................................................................... 29
4. Required PPE ............................................................................................................... 30
5. Established Controlled Zone ........................................................................................ 30
6. Tools ............................................................................................................................. 30
7. Wet Methods................................................................................................................. 30
8. Disposal and Decontamination Procedures ................................................................. 31
M. Wastewater Disposal .................................................................................................... 31

Rev. 0 3.5 - 3
3.5.1. GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Section 3.5 provides guidance for Codes and Performance Standards related to
environmental protection and preservation. The Codes, Standards, and Guidelines
apply to:
1) Environmental Regulations and Project Permitting
2) Construction Phase Environmental Controls
3) Hazardous Materials
4) Pollution Prevention
5) Petroleum and Chemical Bulk Storage
6) Site Cleanup and Remediation
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to all projects within the cities under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
3. Definitions
a. “Asbestos Containing Material” Any material that contains or partly contains any
amount of asbestos fibers.
b. “Berm” Shaped dike or mound of material that separates two areas. When used for
containment the berm construction shall be impervious to material that it is
separating.
c. “Construction and Demolition Waste” (Debris) Concrete, brick, asphalt, and other
such building materials discarded in the construction or demolition of a building or
other alterations to property.
d. “Contaminant” Substance that is identified by the RCJ as having a regulatory
standard outlined in the Royal Commission Environmental Regulations (RCER).
e. “Cultural Resource” Historic physical objects such as remains, architecture, artwork,
or other items as designated by the Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities.
f. “Developer” Team responsible for planning, design, construction, and operation of
the proposed project.
g. “Geotextile” Permeable fabrics that when used with soil, have the ability to separate,
filter, reinforce, protect, or drain.
h. “Hazardous Material” Materials harmful to human health and/or the environment that
is solid, semi-solid, liquid, or gas and may include hazardous wastes. Also refer to
definition in RCER VOLUME I Section 4, Hazardous Materials Management.
i. “Impacted” Affected by an environmental contaminant(s) at a level equal to or
greater than that specified in RCER Volume I Tables.
j. “Impermeable” Not allowing a fluid to pass through.
k. “In-situ” Meaning to leave or treat in place, usually referring to earth material (soil,
groundwater, sediment) during construction or contaminants during remediation.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 4
l. “Landfill” A place, location, tract of land, area, or premises used for the disposal of
solid wastes. The term is synonymous with “solid waste disposal site” and is also
known as garbage dump and trash dump.
m. “Life Cycle” A series of stages through which a material or project passes from the
beginning of its existence to the end.
n. “Life Cycle Assessment” An assessment that analyzes and quantifies the life
cycle(s) of a material, facility, or process during its production, use, and disposal.
o. “Migrate/Migration” The movement of hazardous substances or petroleum products
in any form, including, for example, solid and liquid at the surface or subsurface, and
vapor in the subsurface.
p. “Mitigate” An act to make impacts less severe.
q. “Pollutant” A substance, condition, or energy introduced into the environment that
has undesired effects, or adversely affects the usefulness of a resource.
r. “Project Charter” A physical document that defines project scope, objectives,
participants, roles, responsibilities, authority, and other references that define the
project.
s. “Release” Any spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying, discharging,
injecting, escaping, leaching, dumping, or disposing into the environment (including
the abandonment or discarding of barrels, containers and other closed receptacles
containing any hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant).
t. “Secondary Containment” Safeguarding method used to prevent unplanned releases
of compounds into uncontrolled areas and which is external to and separate
from primary containment.
u. “Solid Waste” Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water
supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials
including solid, liquid, semi-solid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from
industrial, commercial, mining and agriculture operations and from community
activities.
v. “Source” The point of emission or discharge of a pollutant or effluent.
w. “Stage” A temporary location for storage of earthwork on a site with the future intent
to use, transport, or dispose of the material.
x. “Wastewater” Water that (1) is or has been used in an industrial or manufacturing
process, (2) conveys or has conveyed sewage, or (3) is directly related to
manufacturing, processing, or raw materials storage areas at an industrial plant.
4. Abbreviations
a. AC: Asbestos Cement
b. ACEEE: American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy
c. ACM: Asbestos Containing Material
d. AST: Aboveground Storage Tank
e. BAT: Best Available Technique
f. CFR: Code of Federal Regulations (USA)
g. EERP: Environmental Emergency Response Plan

Rev. 0 3.5 - 5
h. EIA: Environmental Impact Assessment

i. EMRP: Excavated Material Resource Plan
j. EPtC: Environmental Permit to Construct
k. EPCD: Environmental Protection and Control Department
l. EPP: Environmental Permitting Program
m. EPtO: Environmental Permit to Operate
n. ESQ: Environmental Screening Questionnaire
o. GEM: Guiding Engineering Manual
p. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
q. HMTP: Hazardous Material Treatment Plan
r. HWTP: Hazardous Waste Treatment Plan
s. HMDP: Hazardous Material Disposal Plan
t. HWDP: Hazardous Waste Disposal Plan
u. ICE: Internal Combustion Engine
v. ISSD: Royal Commission Industrial Security and Safety Department
w. LCA: Life Cycle Assessment
x. NESHAP: National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (USA)
y. PP: Pollution Prevention
z. PAP: Permit Application Package
aa. PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyl
bb. PME: Presidency of Meteorology and Environment
cc. PPE: Personal Protective Equipment
dd. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
ee. RCJ: Royal Commission for Jubail
ff. RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations – Most Current Version
gg. SCTA: Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities
hh. SDS: Safety Data Sheet
ii. SPCC: Spill Prevention, Countermeasure, and Control
jj. USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
kk. UST: Underground Storage Tank
a. Projects shall comply with all applicable requirements and regulations of the RCJ.
6. Codes and Standards
a. Refer to Subsection 3.5.2 Environmental Regulatory System and RCER.
b. Refer to applicable US Code of Federal Regulations.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 6
7. Related Sections and Subsections

a. RCER Volume I - Regulations and Standards
b. RCER Volume II – Environmental Permit Program
c. RCER Volume III – Penalty System
d. Chapter 2 Definitions and References
e. Section 4.2 Submission Requirements
f. Subsection 4.3.8 Life Cycle Costing and Design Service Life
g. Subsection 4.3.9 Risk Management and Emergency Planning
h. Subsection 4.5.6 Environmental Compliance During Construction
i. Subsection 5.1.6 Local Climate Conditions
j. Subsection 5.2.1.G.3 Culverts and Drainage Structures
k. Subsection 5.3.2.K Waste Collection Requirements
l. Subsection 5.3.2.L Screening of Waste, Utilities, and Service Areas
m. Subsection 5.6.1.E Erosion and Sediment Controls
n. Subsection 5.6.2.B.3.f Noise Barriers
o. Subsection 5.7.2 Wastewater
p. Subsection 5.9.2 Air
q. Subsection 5.9.4 Solid Waste Management and Recycling
8. Approvals
a. The RCJ has approval authority through the Environmental Permit Program.
9. Commissioning
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for the RCJ’s commissioning requirements.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 7
SUBSECTION 3.5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY SYSTEM AND RCER
3.5.2. ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY SYSTEM AND RCER
A. Royal Commission Environmental Regulations

1. Overview
a. The industrial cities under oversight by the RCJ are governed by a three-part
environmental regulatory system of documents that consists of Volume I –
Regulations and Standards, Volume II – Environmental Permit Program, and
Volume III – Penalty System. This regulatory system is in place to protect the
environment and regulate community, industrial, and other services in these cities.
Projects located within these cities are required to adhere to these regulations at all
times.
b. Volume I – Regulations and Standards is divided into eight Sections that cover in
detail the information and regulations related to the Environmental Regulatory
System, Air Environment Discharges, Water Environment Discharges, Hazardous
Materials Management, Waste Management, Dredging, Noise, and Reporting and
Record Keeping. Nearly all projects will encounter regulations that shall affect the
design, construction, and operation of a project. The most common areas of impact
for new projects or modification of existing facilities will be discharges to air, and
water, traffic, and noise generation, but other environmental impacts may also apply.
c. Volume II – Environmental Permit Program is an overview of the Environmental
Permitting Program (EPP), and Permit Application Package (PAP). Volume II also
contains valuable information on completing an Environmental Screening
Questionnaire (ESQ), Best Available Techniques (BAT) Analysis, Environmental
Impact Assessment (EIA), Environmental Emergency Response Plan (EERP), and
Groundwater Monitoring.
d. Volume III – Penalty System includes the description and application of the penalty
system. It contains information on calculating penalties, fixed fines and variable
fines.
e. Refer to the RCER Volumes I, II, and III for more detailed information on the system,
regulations, permitting, and penalties.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 8
SUBSECTION 3.5.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS AND PROJECT PERMITTING
3.5.3. ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS AND PROJECT PERMITTING
A. Environmental
1. The Environmental Permit Program
a. The permitting program for cities under the oversight of the RCJ is referred to as the
Environmental Permit Program (EPP). The EPP governs all applications, reviews
and approval procedures associated with obtaining the "Environmental Permit to
Construct" (EPtC) and "Environmental Permit to Operate" (EPtO), which are
required for facilities within the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. All communications with third parties shall be coordinated with the RCJ.
1) Further information on the EPP can be found in Table 3.5.3.A, below, and in
RCER Volume II, Introduction Section 1.
c. Program Process
1) While the project is in its concept and planning phase, a project charter and
schedule shall be created to establish a foundation for the project details,
ensuring that environmental responsibility is a priority. It is important to
generate these documents early in the project with the goal to limit scope and
schedule changes as the project progresses through to completion.
Preliminary engineering shall also be performed during this time in order to
accurately complete and submit the ESQ to the RCJ.
2) Upon RCJ review of the ESQ and approval of preliminary engineering, the
developer must begin preparing permit applications and supplemental
information that have been identified by the RCJ as well as begin facility
design. If the RCJ requests environmental studies be performed it is the
developer’s responsibility to ensure the studies are completed and the
environmental report submitted to the RCJ for review. Iterations with the RCJ
for environmental submittals and design may be necessary to reach 90%
design approval. Once the 90% design has been approved by the RCJ, and
all other requirements have been met, the EPtC will be issued and
construction may begin.
(a) Full explanation of the EPtC is in found in RCER Volume II Introduction
Subsection 1.3.1.
3) When construction is nearing completion, the Construction Contractor shall
apply for the EPtO for the facility. The RCJ will perform a site inspection to
confirm compliance to permits and will issue the EPtO if no issues are found.
(a) Full explanation of the EPtO is in found in RCER Volume II Introduction
Subsection 1.3.2.
4) Environmental Permit Program (EPP)
TABLE 3.5.3.A: ENVIRONMENTAL PERMIT RESPONSIBILITIES
Project Planning / Approval stages

1 The Applicant shall complete the ESQ
2 The Applicant shall complete the PAP based on ESQ
3 The RCJ will review and comment on the PAP and ESQ

Rev. 0 3.5 - 9
The RCJ will decide if an EIA is required and which additional

4
areas to discuss further
5 The Applicant shall prepare and submit an EIA Scope of Work
6 The RCJ will review and comment on the EIA Scope of Work
7 The Applicant shall complete a BAT analysis
8 The Applicant shall complete the approved EIA and EERP
9 The RCJ will review the EIA and EERP
10 The RCJ will decide if studies are complete
11 The RCJ will issue an EPtC
The Applicant shall install construction phase environmental
12
controls
The Applicant shall continue to meet all environmental
13
requirements during construction and completion of project
14 The RCJ will issue an EPtO
2. Environmental Screening Questionnaire (ESQ)

a. The ESQ is completed by the project applicant and is designed to provide the RCJ
with an overview of the project. The ESQ requires information on the process
design, material stocks and flows, energy, fuel, environmental discharges, and
general operations of the proposed project. This information is used by the RCJ
reviewers to determine if the project in question shall be considered a Type I, II, or III
facility, as defined in RCER Volume II, and if a PAP is required. In the case of the
designation of a Type I or Type II facility, the RCJ shall determine if preparation of
an EIA is required.
1) Further information on permitting for facility types is found in RCER Volume II-
A, Introduction Subsection 1.2.
2) Construction and modification projects for industrial facilities are required to
submit an Industrial Site Allocation Request Form, as found in RCER Volume
II-A, Introduction Appendix A along with the ESQ.
3. Permit Application Package (PAP)
a. If deemed necessary, after the RCJ has designated the facility type, the applicant
shall prepare and submit a PAP or required permit applications.
1) Instructions on how to fill out the PAP are found in RCER Volume II-A-
Introduction Section 2.
2) Permit applications for the PAP can be found in RCER Volume II-B through F.
b. An EERP shall be included in the PAP if the project is within the guidelines stated in:
1) RCER Volume II-A-Introduction Appendix D.
c. An EIA is also required to be submitted with the PAP for Type I and II facilities.
1) Information, instructions, and guidelines for the EIA are found in RCER
Volume II-A-Introduction Appendix C.
d. After the RCJ confirms in writing that the permit application(s) and analyses are
complete, an EPtC is issued and upon construction completion the EPtO is issued.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 10
These permits shall be pursuant to the RCER and with conditions as deemed
appropriate by the RCJ.
e. Information and regulations for the EPtC can be found in RCER Volume I
Subsection 1.2, Environmental Permit to Construct Regulations.
f. Information and regulations for the EPtO can be found in RCER Volume I
Subsection 1.3, Environmental Permit to Operate Regulations.
4. Best Available Techniques (BAT) Analysis
a. Project applicants are required to complete a BAT analysis for facilities with specific
discharges to the environment pursuant to RCER Volume I Clauses 1.1.11, 1.1.12,
and 1.1.13.
b. These discharges and information on completing a BAT analysis can be found in
RCER Volume II-A-Introduction Appendix B.
B. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards
1. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards:
a. In the event the RCER, or their amended version, do not specify a standard for a
specific emission source, discharge or environmental management practice, then
the Royal Commission shall use for reference other recognized regulations as a
basis for technical justification in the following order:
1) Saudi National PME Standards
2) U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA)
3) U.S. State environmental protection rules and guidelines
4) European Union members environmental rules and guidelines
5) Other internationally recognized and accepted regulatory bodies
2. Saudi National PME Standards:
a. In 2012 the PME developed twenty (20) Environmental Reference Standards to
represent the National Environmental Guidance Documents for KSA. The reference
standards revise the current General Standards for the Environment issued by the
PME. The PME Reference Standards complement, but to do not take precedence
over, the RCER:
b. Material recovery and recycling of waste
1) The document relates to the recovery and recycling of waste materials and
follows the internationally recognized waste management ‘hierarchy’ of:
(a) prevention (incorporating waste avoidance and waste reduction);
(b) recycling (incorporating reuse, recovery and waste utilization);
(c) treatment;
(d) disposal (as the last resort).
c. Mobile source emissions
1) This standard introduces emission limits for individual pieces of equipment
used outdoors and aims to protect, maintain and improve the Kingdom’s
quality of life, human health, occupational health and natural ecosystems

Rev. 0 3.5 - 11
including croplands, forests and deserts whilst maintaining appropriate

economic and social development.
2) This standard refers to air emissions from non-road engines, equipment and
vehicles. This includes sources such as mobile generators, agricultural
machinery and large earth-moving equipment.
3) This standard includes emission limits for diesel (compression-ignition)
engines, small and large petrol (spark-ignition) engines, and other
recreational vehicles not included in SASO standards.
4) This standard does not include emissions from road vehicles, marine vessels,
locomotives, and aircrafts
5) This standard sets out emission limit values depending on engine type and
capacity.
d. Environmental noise
1) The purpose of the General Environmental Standard for Noise.is to provide a
basis for statutory control to restrict and reduce the nuisance caused by
environmental noise. The framework does not address the issue of
occupational noise which falls under the jurisdiction of National Health and
Safety Law.
2) This standard relates to the following types of environmental noise:
(a) community noise;
(b) noise from industrial units in areas set aside primarily for industrial
facilities;
(c) noise from construction activities;
(d) noise from vehicles (including motorized vessels and recreational craft);
and
(e) noise from equipment used outdoors.
3) The standard does not extend to noise from public transportation, including
highways, railways and noise from commercial and private aircraft, including
helicopters, both in flight and operating on the ground.
e. Control of emissions to air from stationary sources
1) The objective of this standard is to set out point source air quality Standards
for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for sustainable management of air quality
within the Kingdom.
2) This standard introduces emission limits for individual facilities, and assists in
the protection of the Kingdom’s public health, occupational health and natural
ecosystems, including cropland, forest, desert and wetlands whilst allowing
economic and social development.
3) This standard shall obligate operators to apply effective process controls or
best available pollution abatement techniques to meet emission limit criteria.
4) This standard will establish individual facility monitoring program that provide
information to both operator and regulator and facilitate more effective
pollution control activities.
5) These standards apply to any facility, site, or premises whose activities give
rise to air emissions from a stationary source.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 12
6) The scope of this standard does not include emissions from residential
properties, natural events or mobile pollutant sources.
f. Prevention of major accidents
1) This standard is aimed to prevent major accidents, such as the release of
toxic materials, the release of flammable materials, fires, explosions, major
structural failures and those which involve dangerous substances.
2) Where accidents do occur, this standard sets out a framework and controls
for the mitigation of the impact on human health and the environment.
3) This standard applies to all facilities irrespective of size or location, that
produces, processes, uses, stores or otherwise handles dangerous
substances in quantities equal to or in excess of those specified in the
Standard.
g. Storage and material reclamation facilities- Design & Operation
1) The Standard for Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities Design and
Operation has effect for purposes connected with the regulation of waste and
hazardous waste, and in particular for the purposes of the:
(a) design of new Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities which accept
waste of all types from across the KSA whether a material or substance
is inert, non-hazardous or a hazardous waste, as the case may be;
(b) ii) operation of Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities to ensure that
the site is managed in a manner which will have least possible impact
upon the neighboring environment or human health; and accordingly the
Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities Design and Operation
Standard shall be recognized and used for those purposes.
2) The Standard guides those developing and operating Storage and Material
Reclamation Facilities to:
(a) understand the best practice requirements with respect to Storage and
Material Reclamation Facility (MRF) design and operation;
(b) ii) develop new storage and MRF sites with due regard to international
best practice; and
(c) iii) understand the necessary site development requirements for storage
and MRF sites dealing with different waste types.
3) The Standard is intended for use as a default position for Storage and MRF
design and operation. The Standard applies to all new Storage and MRFs
pre-development. However, existing storage and MRF operators must, as far
as practicable, implement the relevant best practice measures contained
within this Standard.
4) This Standard sets out the design parameters and operational requirements
for Storage and MRFs in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
5) This Standard does not apply to the:
(a) management of Radioactive waste;
(b) management of liquid wastes; or
(c) management of sludges, including sewage sludges and sludges from
dredging operations.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 13
6) This Standard does not provide detailed information or guidance on the

operation of different facilities, but instead concentrates on setting out the
Standards for the design and operation of generic Material Reclamation
Facilities (MRFs), Storage (TSD) Facilities and
h. Thermal treatment and incineration – Design & Operation
1) The Standard applies to all new incineration plant pre-development. However,
existing incineration plant operators must, as far as practicable, implement the
relevant best practice measures contained within this Standard.
through to site closure for non-mobile thermal treatment and incineration
processes in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
3) This Standard applies to mass burn incineration techniques, waste to energy
facilities and the advanced thermal treatment processes of pyrolysis and
gasification.
i. Waste acceptance criteria
1) This standard applies to waste Generators and TSD facility operators.
2) This standard extends to all waste types including hazardous, non-hazardous
and inert waste.
3) This standard provides Waste Acceptance Criteria (WAC) and Waste
Acceptance Procedures (WAP).
4) Where all the limit values for WAC are met, the waste will be acceptable for
final disposal at a hazardous waste landfill site. Where the limit values are not
met, then the waste must be treated to bring it within the required acceptance
limits or an alternative disposal route must be sought.
5) A waste material identified as a hazardous waste in the Waste Classification
Standard will not necessarily be accepted into a hazardous waste landfill.
Waste classification and WAC are not linked. The Waste Classification
Standard classifies the waste, whereas the WAC Standard defines what class
of landfill a waste is eligible for.
6) This standard outlines a nationally consistent approach for KSA for the
disposal of waste to landfill. It provides WAC for three classes of landfills
(hazardous, non-hazardous and inert), including concentration limits covering
a greater range of contaminants than those specified in the Waste
Classification Standard.
7) Under this standard, hazardous wastes will only be accepted at hazardous
waste landfills after it has been treated or stabilized to minimize hazards and
then disposed of at landfills that offer an appropriately high standard of
environmental protection.
8) There are three kinds of WAC including leaching limit values, limit values for
other parameters and a list of inert wastes which may be accepted without
testing.
9) There are a number of special provisions relating to stable, non-reactive
hazardous wastes, asbestos and gypsum wastes, and underground storage.
j. Waste Classification

Rev. 0 3.5 - 14
1) These Standards guide those generating, storing and handling wastes in

assessing their classification in terms of:
(a) The origin of the waste: whether waste is industrial, commercial or
municipal;
(b) The physical form of the waste: whether waste is a liquid or a solid
(gaseous waste is outside the scope of this standard);
(c) The character of the waste: whether waste is hazardous, non-hazardous
or inert.
(d) The type of hazardous waste: whether it is a listed hazardous waste,
contains a hazardous constituent or displays a hazardous property.
2) The assessment of waste will enable Waste Handlers to determine the overall
manageability of the waste to ascertain the level of control necessary and
allow for responsible practice to meet any associated environmental
obligations.
3) This Standard defines and classifies waste to be managed in KSA with
respect to the form of the waste material and its associated impact on human
health or the environment.
4) This Standard is relevant to all waste types currently produced within KSA as
well as any other waste streams which may be produced throughout the
period of operation of this Standard.
5) This standard does not apply to the following waste streams:
(a) Discharges of industrial and municipal wastewater to central treatment
works or directly to the environment – The Industrial and Municipal
Wastewater Discharges and Ambient Water Quality Standards control
and manage wastewaters discharges.
(b) Radioactive waste, other than that produced in the course of healthcare
treatment procedures.
k. Drinking water quality
1) With the exception of bottled or packaged water, the standards shall apply to
any water intended for drinking irrespective of the source (municipal supplies,
rainwater tanks, boreholes etc) or where it is consumed (including the home,
restaurants, camping areas, shops).
2) These standards do not address water used for specialized purposes such as
renal dialysis and some industrial purposes where water of a higher quality
may be required.
3) The quality of drinking water shall be regulated up to the point at which the
distribution system enters the boundary of a private property. The quality of
water should however be measured from the point of use (e.g. a kitchen tap).
4) Where more than one agency manages the water supply. Each individual
agency will be responsible for the quality of drinking water within and up to the
boundary of its network and the quality of drinking waters arising from its
actions.
5) These standards do not apply to private water supplies on the condition that
the volume of that supply does not exceed 10m3 per day on an annual
average.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 15
l. Biological Treatment – Design & Operation

1) This Standard applies to all new biological treatment pre-development.
for biological treatment facilities in the KSA.
3) This Standard applies to commercial and/or publicly operated biological
treatment facilities. The provisions of this Standard are therefore not
applicable to domestic biological processes such as home composting
initiatives operated by householders at their place of residence.
m. Waste regulatory control and compliance
1) This standard applies to all Generators, Transporters and TSD Facility
operators in KSA.
2) This standard extends to all waste types including hazardous, non-hazardous
and inert waste.
n. Waste handling and storage
1) This standard guides those handling and storing waste in good operating
practices, in managing effective waste storage and segregation systems, and
in detecting, containing and cleaning up any leaks that may occur.
2) This standard applies to Waste Handlers who handle and store waste from
the point of generation through to the storage of waste where it is held at a
facility prior to its onward transfer for recycling, treatment or disposal. This
Standard must therefore be read in conjunction with the specific requirements
for dedicated storage facilities which are detailed further in the Waste Storage
and Material Recycling Facilities – Design and Operation Standard.
3) The handling and storage of waste at recycling, treatment and disposal
facilities are covered in the design and operation waste standards for these
facilities that accompany this series of Waste Standards.
4) This Standard does not detail the requirements of protecting employees from
the effects of handling hazardous wastes in the workplace such as risk
assessments, monitoring, PPE or ventilation systems. These requirements
must be complied with separately as per health and safety related Standards.
o. Waste training and assessment of technical competence of operators
1) This standard is to be applied by PME or other PME approved body with
responsibility for assessing the technical competence of designated facility
operators.
2) The standard extends to all TSD Facilities required to be licensed under the
Waste Regulatory Control and Compliance Standard
3) This standard does not apply to industrial waste water facilities, sewerage
systems and waterworks treating liquid wastes, or to facilities used solely for
the disposal of liquid municipal or industrial wastes.
p. Waste transportation
1) This Standard utilizes the waste classification and definitions as stated in the
provisions of the Waste Classification Standard and does not extend to
provisions covering radioactive waste or explosives.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 16
2) For the purposes of this Standard, three main modes of transport have been
addressed, namely, transport by road, rail and sea.
3) This Standard does not apply to the on-site transportation of waste within a
facility’s property boundary.
4) This Standard incorporates the international requirements for dangerous
goods and substances in relation to the transportation of hazardous waste to
ensure consistency is achieved.
5) Requirements relating to the packaging, labelling, loading, stowage,
placarding and transportation of hazardous or dangerous substances apply as
much to hazardous wastes as they do to pure chemical substances. There
are also certain provisions that apply to hazardous wastes which take account
of particular problems encountered in dealing with dangerous goods for
transportation.
6) Waste classifications detailed in this Standard are specifically for the
purposes of labelling and packaging for transportation and, as such, are
distinct from the classification of waste as detailed in the Waste Classification
Standard.
7) This Standard makes provision for vehicle specifications, which have been
determined for minimum requirements to ensure the safety of hazardous
waste transport operation.
8) Transboundary waste movement provisions in this Standard are in line with
multilateral environmental requirements to establish a framework of control, in
relation to international recognized practice, whereby waste is disposed of in
a controlled manner. The provisions aim to prevent the unauthorized disposal
of international waste shipments and the unregulated recovery of waste
shipments, without hindering the legitimate trade in waste
q. Landfill – Design & Operation
through to site closure and aftercare for solid waste landfill in the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
2) This Standard does not apply to the:
(a) management of radioactive waste;
(b) management of liquid wastes;
(c) spreading of sludges, including sewage sludges and sludges from
dredging operations for the purposes of fertilization or land improvement;
or
(d) remediation of existing landfill sites.
r. Industrial and municipal wastewater discharges
1) Discharges shall include any liquid effluents or process water which is not
classified as clean unpolluted surface runoff including storm water. This may
include but is not restricted to:
(a) waste chemicals, including oils;
(b) liquid process wastes;
(c) detergents;

Rev. 0 3.5 - 17
(d) condensate water;

(e) cooling water;
(f) biodegradable substances;
(g) wash water;
(h) ballast water;
(i) liquid wastes or wash waters, domestic sewage, wastewater discharged
using sinks, basins or toilets;
(j) contaminated mine or quarry water;
(k) all sanitary wastewaters; and
(l) treated effluents from CTW (municipal and industrial),
(m) Desalination reject water.
2) These standards shall apply to any installation, site or premises that produce
discharges as defined in the Standard. These standards control discharges
into Central Treatment Works (CTW), unplanned emergency events
(overflows) and discharges to coastal waters, surface water, land and wadis.
3) It is the responsibility of the CTW to ensure that the final discharge from their
facility does not exceed any of the prescribed concentrations and values in
Appendix B of the Standard when processing domestic, commercial and / or
industrial wastewater.
4) Sanitary Wastewater discharges from off-shore facilities shall be governed by
the relevant regional marine discharge requirements
s. Best practicable environmental option (BPEO) for waste disposal
1) For each waste stream, as classified in the Waste Classification Standard,
there are a variety of alternative approaches available to ascertain the BPEO
for waste disposal.
2) The BPEO for a particular waste stream may vary determined by local
circumstances affecting the practicality, cost, and environmental and social
benefits that take into account national objectives for sustainable waste
management. The choice is therefore complex and considers many different
factors when recommending the preferred BPEO
t. Ambient air quality
1) This standard relates specifically to the ambient air quality.
2) This standard prescribes limit values for ambient air quality parameters.
3) This standard establishes the responsibilities of the Competent Agency with
regards to managing ambient air quality in the Kingdom.
u. Ambient water quality
1) These Standards refer to the safety, aesthetic, physical and chemical aspects
of ambient waters for the protection of human uses and the environment
including ecology and recreation.
2) these standards apply to all coastal and underground waters and include any
surface freshwater that may be present permanently or temporarily.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 18
C. Archeological / Cultural Resource Clearances

1. Pre-Project Planning
a. In order to avoid unnecessary interruptions during construction, and to prevent
damage to existing historic, archeological and cultural resource sites, applicants are
encouraged to plan accordingly. Appropriate identification of cultural resources shall
be conducted at the planning phase of a project. The Saudi Commission for
Tourism and Antiquities (SCTA) is the government agency responsible for the
inventory and protection of the archeological treasures and rare historic sites of
ancient civilizations across the Kingdom. The SCTA is the national authority
responsible for assessing how planning and development projects could impact the
archaeological and cultural resources. The applicant shall provide information to the
RCJ to allow them to assess potential impacts. The RCJ will notify SCTA as
necessary.
b. Applicants shall review historical information sources, consult with the RCJ, seek
information from knowledgeable parties, and conduct additional studies as
necessary or requested. Sites include not only visible architecturally-significant
sites, but also early human habitation sites, monuments, culture, and underwater
and other non-visible sites.
2. Further Investigations
a. Depending on the results of the pre-project planning background review, the RCJ
may request further studies or may ask the applicant to seek ways to avoid,
minimize or mitigate the adverse impacts of the project to the archeological and/or
cultural resource site(s). Further conditions for construction may be required by the
RCJ.
3. Notification of Finding
a. If a historic site or object is encountered during construction or operation of a facility,
intrusive or destructive work in the area shall stop immediately and the RCJ and the
SCTA shall be notified immediately to address the finding.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 19
SUBSECTION 3.5.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
3.5.4. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Hazardous Materials Management

1. Description
a. This Subsection pertains to the management of materials defined as hazardous that
are used in, but are not limited to, manufacturing and industrial processes.
Hazardous wastes, a subset of hazardous materials, are described in this
Subsection 3.5.5.B below.
b. A Hazardous material is defined as any material in a quantity or concentration that, if
improperly managed, can pose a hazard to public health or the environment. It can
occur in a number of forms such as solid, semi-solid, sludge, liquid or gas.
1) Hazardous materials are classified in RCER Volume I Section 4, Hazardous
Materials Management. Hazardous materials types include explosives,
gases, flammable liquids and solids, oxidizing agents, organic peroxides,
poisons, biohazards, radioactive and corrosive substances and hazardous
wastes.
c. In all situations, the hazardous materials need to be safely characterized and
identified, properly managed, isolated, classified, and transported to an appropriate
facility for treatment, storage and disposal.
1) Hazardous Material Classification relates to the following characteristics
which are described in the referenced documents:
(a) Ignitability
(b) Corrosivity
(c) Reactivity
(d) Toxicity
(e) Radioactivity
(f) Biohazard Ranking
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Materials
a. All portions of the life cycle of hazardous materials require safe handling, proper
procedures, documentation and coordination/approvals from the RCJ.
b. The general life cycle of hazardous materials includes:
1) Generation (or discovery of existing hazardous material)
2) Classification of level of hazard
3) Isolation, containerization and protection
4) Transportation to approved facility
5) Application at approved facility
6) Treatment at approved facility
7) Disposal (if hazardous material cannot be reused or recycled)

Rev. 0 3.5 - 20
3. Hazardous Materials Inventory

a. The operator of a facility shall maintain current SDSs on all containers of hazardous
materials.
b. The operator of a facility shall also maintain an active and complete inventory list,
(electronic and paper), of all stored hazardous materials in accordance with RCER,
Volume 1 Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Materials
a. Immediately upon generation or discovery of hazardous materials, they shall be
isolated and contained to prevent impact to the environment or harm to humans or
wildlife.
5. Transportation of Hazardous Materials
a. All hazardous materials that are moved from one location to another must be carried
in a safe manner by a licensed transporter with proper documentation. All hazardous
materials shall adhere to the following Transportation Standards.
1) The transportation requirements include, but are not limited to proper
containerization, truck or rail car placard marking, notifications to the RCJ,
Hazardous Material Manifests, and other shipping documentation.
2) The requirements for transportation of hazardous materials are described in
RCER Volume I Section 4.4, Hazardous Material Transportation Regulations.
For Hazardous Material Manifest requirements, refer to US 49 CFR Part 172
Subpart C.
3) In the event of an accident involving the transportation of hazardous
materials, the facility shall immediately notify the RCJ Industrial Security and
Safety Department (ISSD) and the Environmental Protection and Control
Department (EPCD) in the event of an accident, spill or discharge involving
hazardous materials within the Industrial City.
6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal
a. Industrial and hazardous materials that are disposed of illegally shall be retrieved by
the generator. Applicable fines and related costs shall be paid by the generators in
accordance with RCER.
b. The technology used to treat hazardous materials shall be proposed in writing by the
material generator for consideration by the RCJ. The generator shall review current
BAT and propose a method in a Hazardous Material Treatment Plan (HMTP). The
RCJ has the right to request feasibility reports, laboratory analyses, and the
proposed treatment methods prior to approval of the treatment. If approved,
progress reports and analytical testing are required to review the progress of the
treatment until deemed complete by the RCJ. Upon completion, the RCJ has the
right to require the residual hazardous material to be placed in an approved landfill.
The success level of the treatment shall determine if the hazardous material is
placed in a Class I or Class II landfill (or other appropriate facilities) as defined by
the RCER Volume I Section 5, Waste Management.
c. The Hazardous Material generator may also request permission for placement in an
approved class I landfill if no treatment method exists for the material. The
Generator shall prepare a Hazardous Material Disposal Plan (HMDP) for review by
the RCJ. The HMDP shall review containment requirements, compatibility with
landfill liners and any potential long-term issues. The RCJ shall review the report

Rev. 0 3.5 - 21
and reserves the right to require stricter methods of disposal based on analytical
testing results.
7. Building and Construction Hazardous Materials
a. Prior to any demolition of, or modifications to, existing facilities, surveys (including
sampling and analysis) for existence of hazardous materials such as ACM, lead
paint, mercury, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) shall be completed by
qualified personnel and documented as part of the project design. Design and
execution of any required abatement work shall be completed by qualified
environmental professionals and licensed contractors.
B. Hazardous Waste Management
1. Description
a. A Hazardous waste is defined in RCER Volume I, Section 5, Waste Management.
1) The definition of Hazardous Waste is given in RCER Volume I, Section 5 as
any solid, semi-solid, liquid, or contained gaseous waste, or combination of
such wastes, which may because of its quantity, concentration, physical or
chemical characteristics pose a hazard or potential hazard to human health or
the environment when improperly treated, stored, transported, disposed of or
otherwise managed.
2) Hazardous wastes are broken into four categories:
(a) Listed Wastes: These wastes have been identified by agencies such as
the US EPA as being hazardous. See USEPA Regulations 40 CFR
261.31-33.
(b) Characteristic Wastes: These wastes do not meet the above listed
thresholds but exhibit ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity and/or toxicity.
(c) Universal Wastes: These wastes include mercury containing equipment
(fluorescent bulbs and thermostats), batteries and pesticides.
(d) Mixed Wastes: These wastes include both radioactive and hazardous
waste components.
3) Refer to RCER Volume I Section 5.1, Waste Classification for four types of
waste including: Hazardous, Non-Hazardous Industrial Waste, Municipal
Waste and Inert. Additionally, refer to USEPA Regulations that identify solid
wastes and their specific definitions as specified in the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA): US 40 CFR Part 261 Subpart C.
b. In all situations, hazardous wastes need to be safely characterized and identified,
properly managed, isolated, classified, and transported to an appropriate facility for
treatment, storage and disposal.
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Wastes
a. All portions of the life cycle of hazardous wastes require safe handling, proper
procedures, documentation and coordination/approvals from the RCJ.
b. The general life cycle of hazardous waste includes:
1) Generation (or discovery of existing hazardous waste)
2) Classification of level of hazard
3) Isolation, containerization and protection

Rev. 0 3.5 - 22
4) Transportation to approved facility

5) Treatment at approved facility (within 180 days of generation)
6) Disposal
3. Hazardous Waste Inventory
a. The operator of a facility shall maintain current SDSs on all containers of hazardous
waste.
b. The operator of a facility shall also maintain an active and complete inventory list,
(electronic and paper), of all stored hazardous waste in accordance with RCER,
Volume 1 Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Waste
a. Immediately upon generation or discovery of hazardous waste, they shall be isolated
and contained to prevent impact to the environment or harm to humans or wildlife.
There are also specific time limit requirements (180 days maximum) that are
described in the RCER, Volume 1, Section 5, relating to completion of the handling,
transport, and disposal process for hazardous wastes.
5. Transportation of Hazardous Waste
a. All hazardous wastes that are moved from one location to another must be carried in
a safe manner by a licensed transporter with proper documentation. All hazardous
wastes shall adhere to the following Transportation Standards, (for example, all
hazardous waste must have a Hazardous Waste Manifest for approved
transportation). See RCER, Volume 1, Section 5.
1) The transportation requirements include, but are not limited to proper
containerization, truck or rail car placard marking, notifications to the RCJ,
Hazardous Waste Manifests, and other shipping documentation.
2) The requirements for transportation of hazardous wastes are described in
RCER Volume I, Section 5.2, Waste Manifest Regulations and 5.3, Waste
Transportation Regulations. For Hazardous Waste Manifest requirements,
refer to US 49 CFR Part 172 Subpart C.
3) In the event of an accident involving the transportation of hazardous wastes,
the facility shall immediately notify the RCJ Industrial Security and Safety
Department (ISSD) and the Environmental Protection and Control Department
(EPCD) in the event of an accident, spill or discharge involving hazardous
wastes within the Industrial City.
6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal
a. Treatment at an approved facility within 180 days of generation is the primary
method of handling hazardous wastes.
1) Hazardous wastes that are disposed of illegally shall be retrieved by the
generator. Applicable fines and related costs shall be paid by the generators
in accordance with RCER.
b. The technology used to treat the hazardous wastes shall be proposed in writing by
the material generator for consideration by the RCJ. The generator shall review
current BAT and propose a method in a Hazardous Waste Treatment Plan (HWTP).
The RCJ has the right to request feasibility reports, laboratory analyses, and the
proposed treatment methods prior to approval of the treatment. If approved,
progress reports and analytical testing are required to review the progress of the

Rev. 0 3.5 - 23
treatment until deemed complete by the RCJ. Upon completion, the RCJ has the
right to require the residual hazardous waste to be placed in an approved landfill.
The success level of the treatment shall determine if the hazardous waste is placed
in a Class I or Class II landfill (or other appropriate facilities) as defined by the RCER
Volume I Section 5, Waste Management.
c. The Hazardous Waste generator may also request permission for placement in an
approved class I landfill if no treatment method exists for the material. The
Generator shall prepare a Hazardous Waste Disposal Plan (HWDP) for review by
the RCJ. The HWDP shall review containment requirements, compatibility with
landfill liners and any potential long-term issues. The RCJ shall review the report
and reserves the right to require stricter methods of disposal based on analytical
testing results.
d. The disposal regulations for Industrial & Hazardous Waste Treatment are located in
RCER Volume I Section 5.4. Disposal regulations for Non-Hazardous Industrial
Waste are located in Volume 1, Section 5.6.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 24
SUBSECTION 3.5.6 POLLUTION PREVENTION
3.5.5. POLLUTION PREVENTION
A. General
1. Basic Understanding
a. Pollution prevention (PP) is concerned with avoiding the creation of pollution and
waste, rather than trying to clean it up or manage it after the fact.
b. Pollution prevention is essential on all projects and it is beneficial to all aspects of
the environment. Designers are required to incorporate PP into all project designs.
1) Some examples of the benefits of PP are:
(a) Minimizes or avoids the creation of pollutants;
(b) Accelerates the reduction and/or elimination of pollutants;
(c) Minimizes health risks; and
(d) Avoids costly future cleanup and disposal.
2. Design
a. Consider the following topics in the following paragraphs for pollution prevention
during concept design, process development, and project development.
B. Life Cycle Assessments (LCA)
1. LCA Implementation
a. These assessments are created to quantify inputs, internal processes, and outputs
for a facility and are useful for industrial applications. Having accurate knowledge of
an industrial facility allows processes to be targeted for PP measures. Used
properly, an LCA with application of PP technologies and techniques during the
planning phase of a project has the potential to make the EPP less complicated.
b. Many questions in the ESQ pertain to aspects of an LCA, making it beneficial to
perform a thorough LCA before filling out an ESQ to start the EPP.
c. More detailed information on LCAs and implementation thereof can be found in the
USEPA National Risk Management Research Laboratory’s Life Cycle Assessment:
Principles and Practice.
C. Material Reduction, Substitution, and Elimination
1. Reduction
a. The first step in PP is to reduce the material inputs to the process based on LCA
findings. Waste-generating processes within the facility shall be targeted for process
modifications that reduce input materials and subsequently reduce waste
generation.
2. Substitution
a. After material input reduction, the next step is to substitute hazardous materials with
less- or non-hazardous materials that have less stringent regulations. There are
many naturally-derived substitutes that have the potential to perform industrial
functions as well as chemically-derived materials.
b. Example: Dyeing products with chemically-created dye produces wastewater that
may need to be pre-treated before discharge to wastewater treatment plants.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 25
Chemical dye may potentially be replaced with a natural dye that may require little to
no pre-treatment onsite before discharge.
3. Elimination
a. A step beyond reduction and substitution can be eliminating materials from a
process entirely. Thorough analysis of industrial processes can sometimes yield
information suggesting that some material inputs are unnecessary for a specific
process.
D. Material Reuse
a. Reusing materials might reduce required raw material stock and waste generation.
As long as the reused material still meets Standards, Specifications and
Regulations, this option shall be considered when planning, designing and operating
a facility.
E. Material Recycling
1. Recycling
a. Recycling occurs when the use of a process-specific material is complete and it is
reformed to perform the same or equivalent function. The most desirable materials
and processes are ones where a material and application can be recycled
indefinitely without loss of quality.
b. Example: Used shoe rubber reformed to create shoe rubber for new shoes.
2. Upcycling
a. Upcycling occurs when a material at the end of its process-applicable life is
reformed to serve a purpose that is considered of higher quality than its prior use.
b. Example: Used shoe rubber reformed to serve as a material stock for industrial
product production.
3. Downcycling
a. Downcycling occurs when a material at the end of its process-applicable life is
reformed to serve a purpose that is considered lower quality than its prior use.
b. Example: Used shoe rubber reformed to create an athletic surface for walking or
running.
4. Objectives
a. An industrial facility pursuing recycling objectives shall strive for true recycling or
upcycling. In this way material inputs and waste generation are minimized with the
highest objective of the facility being to operate as a closed loop system.
F. Energy Use
1. Wasted Energy
a. Industrial processes use a large amount of energy. Identifying processes requiring
significant energy and addressing inefficiencies decreases energy production at
electricity generation facilities and thus decreases the pollution that the industrial
plant is indirectly creating. If electrical generation is onsite, fuel inputs and onsite
point source pollution can be reduced.
b. Areas to be considered to reduce energy demand:
1) Lighting

Rev. 0 3.5 - 26
2) Motors
3) Utility Services (compressed air, cooling water, etc.)
4) HVAC
5) Refrigeration
6) Insulation
c. The American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy (ACEEE) provides
publications, workshops, and further information on energy-efficient industries.
G. End-of-Pipe Controls
1. Air Discharges
a. Refer to Subsection 5.9.2, Air Environment for design guidance on air discharge
pollution controls for reduction of airborne contaminants to meet applicable
Standards and Regulations.
b. Refer to RCER Volume I Section 2, Air Environment.
2. Water Discharges
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.2, Sanitary Sewer System for design guidance on
wastewater treatment systems to reduce discharge contaminants to meet applicable
Standards and Regulations.
b. Refer to RCER Volume I Section 3, Water Environment.
3. Solid Waste
a. Refer to Subsection 5.9.4, Solid Waste Management and Recycling for design
guidance on post-process solutions for solid waste.
b. Refer to RCER Volume I Section 5, Solid Waste Management.
H. Decommissioning, Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal
1. Site Cleanup and Remediation
a. Refer to Subsection 3.5.7, Site Cleanup and Remediation, and Subsection 4.5.6.I.5,
Decommissioning, for guidance
2. Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal
a. Refer to Subsection 4.4.4, Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal, for guidance.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 27
SUBSECTION 3.5.7 PETROLEUM AND CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE
3.5.6. PETROLEUM AND CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE
I. General
1. Introduction
a. The prevention of leaks and spills of petroleum products and hazardous materials is
important to the RCJ for the protection of public health and welfare and the
environment. The owners of facilities are responsible for design and construction of
proper facilities and for implementing procedures to prevent spills or leaks in
accordance with the RCJ requirements.
b. In general the requirements include such provisions as secondary containment, leak
detection, corrosion protection and periodic testing. These requirements are
described in the RCER Volume I Section 4.3 Hazardous Materials Storage and
Handling Regulations, and Section 4.5 Underground Storage Tank Regulations.
J. Codes and Standards
1. Applicable Codes and Standards
a. The Codes, Standards and recommended practices of the following industry
organizations shall be referenced for applicable design guidance and criteria. There
might be others not specifically listed that may apply depending on the specific
facility and equipment. Recognized national and international Standards and
practices shall be adhered to.
1) American Petroleum Institute (API) 1220 L Street, NW, Washington, DC
20005-4070
2) Fiberglass Tank and Pipe Institute (FTPI) 11150 South Wilcrest Drive, Suite
101, Houston, TX 77099-4343
3) Petroleum Equipment Institute (PEI) P. O. Box 2380, Tulsa, OK 74101-2380
4) Steel Tank Institute/Steel Plate Fabricators Association (STI/SPFA) 944
Donata Court, Lake Zurich, IL 60047
5) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062-
2096
1) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
MA 02169-7471
2) NACE International (NACE) 1440 South Creek Drive, Houston, TX 77084-
4906

Rev. 0 3.5 - 28
SUBSECTION 3.5.8 SITE CLEANUP AND REMEDIATION
3.5.7. SITE CLEANUP AND REMEDIATION
K. Contaminated Site Material Removal

1. Requirements
a. See RCER Section 4.3, Hazardous Material Storage and Handling Regulations,
Section 4.4, Hazardous Material Transportation Regulations, and Section 5, Waste
Management.
b. Contaminated site material removal requires approval of the RCJ. An application for
removal of the contaminated site material shall include the following information:
1) Waste name
2) Waste quantity
3) Date of waste material production
4) Physical and chemical properties
5) Source of generation
6) Proposed recycle option review
7) Treatment or disposal method
8) Proposed waste management facility
9) Name of RCJ authorized waste transporter
c. The RCJ will evaluate the application and may request further information.
d. If the RCJ grants approval, a manifest for the transportation of the waste materials
shall be issued.
e. The transportation, treatment and disposal shall meet the requirements of RCER
Volume I Sections 5.2, Waste Manifest Regulations, 5.3, Waste Transportation
Regulations, and 5.4, Industrial and Hazardous Waste Treatment and Disposal
Regulations, and Section 8, Reporting and Record Keeping.
L. Asbestos Cement (AC) Pipe and Material Removal
1. Applicable Codes and Standards
a. OSHA’s Asbestos Standard for Construction, US 29 CFR 1926.1101
b. Work Practices for Asbestos-Cement Pipe, American Water Works Association,
Denver, CO, 1995
2. General Guidelines
a. The Guidelines listed below shall be followed for work with AC pipe; however,
applicable Codes and Standards take precedent.
b. Supervisor Qualifications and related field experience are necessary to perform AC
pipe removal work.
c. Each worker shall undergo a medical examination before the start of, and at the end
of AC pipe removal work.
3. Safe Work Procedure Checklist
a. The Supervisor shall generate, use, follow and document safe work procedures on a
checklist that addresses at a minimum the practices in this Subsection.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 29
4. Required PPE
a. Required PPE must be provided to employees on the work site working with AC pipe
and meet requirements of the recommended practices.
5. Established Controlled Zone
a. A controlled zone shall be established for work involving AC pipe.
b. The controlled zone perimeter shall be a minimum of two meters from the leading
edge of any excavation for AC pipe.
c. The controlled zone perimeter shall be marked with cones or barricades and danger
tape shall connect them.
d. “Authorized Personnel Only” signs shall be set along the perimeter and ensure that
only properly outfitted authorized personnel enter the zone.
e. Any personnel or equipment leaving the controlled zone must be subjected to
decontamination.
6. Tools
a. No power tools are permitted for work on AC pipe, only approved hand tools (listed
below) are allowed. Water shall be constantly sprayed on the AC pipe while using
tools.
b. Snap Cutters
1) These operate by means of cutting wheels mounted in a chair wrapper
around the pipe barrel. Hydraulic pressure, applied by means of a remote,
pneumatically- or manually-operated pump, squeezes the cutting wheel into
the pipe wall until the cut is made.
c. Roll Cutters
1) These cut the AC pipe as the cutting edge of the rollers are tightened down
and pressure is applied manually to the cutters as the cutter is rotated around
the pipe. The cutting wheels shall be wiped before use to remove material
that could bind to asbestos and washed after use to remove fibers attached to
the cutters.
2) Wash water must be properly contained and disposed.
d. Bristle Brush
1) Used to smooth the cutting surface.
e. Cold Chisel and Hammer for Coupling Removal
1) An attempt to remove intact sections of AC pipe that do not require coupling
removal shall be made. If a coupling must be removed, the top shall be
gradually split lengthwise using a chisel and hammer. After the top has been
split, the bottom shall be split with a lever tool such as a crowbar or similar
tool. Couplings must be appropriately stored immediately upon extraction.
7. Wet Methods
a. Potable water shall be used to prevent the release of airborne asbestos fibers. A
spray type applicator shall be used to wet the pipe before work, during work, and
until pipe is properly stored to prevent release of fibers to the air.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 30
8. Disposal and Decontamination Procedures

a. All tools shall be washed with water before and after use on AC pipe. After use,
equipment shall be cleaned while still in the controlled zone.
b. Removed AC pipe and debris shall be wetted, collected, and placed in asbestos
disposal bags.
c. Disposable coveralls and other non-washable PPE shall be placed in asbestos
disposal bags while in the controlled zone.
d. Proper bagging shall consist of placing AC pipe and debris in a yellow labeled
hazardous waste bag and sealing the top with duct tape. This bag shall be placed in
a clear bag to verify double bagging. The second bag shall also be sealed with duct
tape.
e. Asbestos Containing or Contaminated Material is classified as a hazardous waste
and shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable Regulations in RCER
Volume I Section 4 Hazardous Material Management and Section 5 Waste
Management.
M. Wastewater Disposal
a. Requirements
1) Prohibited discharge includes direct disposal of untreated or partially-treated
wastewater to any location other than a wastewater treatment facility
(including Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facilities and Sanitary
Wastewater Treatment Facilities).
2) Sanitary wastewater shall be properly treated at an approved operational
wastewater treatment plant via methods approved in RCER Volume I Section
3.8, Sanitary Wastewater Discharge Regulations.
3) Facilities that generate treated sewage effluent shall apply to the RCJ for
permission to transport and dispose of the effluent at an approved wastewater
treatment facility. RCER Volume I Section 3.8, Sanitary Wastewater
Discharge Regulations governs the handling and disposal of wastewater.

Rev. 0 3.5 - 31
SECTION 3.6 SAFETY STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.6.1. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
1. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for the RCJ’s commissioning requirements. ........................ 2
3.6.2. SAFETY IN DESIGN ..................................................................................................... 3
A. Safety in Design ............................................................................................................ 3
B. Duties of a Designer for Safety...................................................................................... 4

Rev. 0 3.6 - i
3.6.1. GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Safety in design is a process that encourages designers to "design out" health and
safety risks during design development. The concept supports the view that along
with quality, program and cost; safety is determined during the design stage.
2. Applicability
a. These general safety Standards are intended to provide the requirements and
design guidance for A/E and/or EPC Contractors for safety in design on all projects.
3. Definitions
a. "Employer" A person engaged in a business affecting commerce that has
employees.
b. "Employee" An employee of an employer who is employed in a business of his
employer which affects commerce.
c. "Commerce" Trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, or communication among
multiple entities.
d. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
b. HSE: Health and Safety Executive
c. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional abbreviations.
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall design all projects to meet the accessibility
requirements as described in the Standards below.
6. Codes
a. The A/E and/or Contractor shall comply with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations and
applicable Codes and Standards. For information regarding the applicable Codes
and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. For the design of project elements that are not prescribed directly in the Codes
identified in Section 3.1, the following is a list of Standards will apply:
1) OSHA
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for Commissioning Requirements.
9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and take action on all design reports, plans and specifications,
reference Section 1.1.

Rev. 0 3.6 - 1
B. Commissioning

Rev. 0 3.6 - 2
SUBSECTION 3.6.2 SAFETY IN DESIGN
3.6.2. SAFETY IN DESIGN
A. Safety in Design
1. Designing for safety is a requirement of all new work under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
Safety as it relates to design covers a wide range of components and topics including but
not limited to:
a. Asbestos
b. Brownfields
c. Carcinogens
d. Chemical Hazards and Toxic Substances
e. Computer Workstations
f. Confined Spaces
g. Crane, Derrick, and Hoist Safety
h. Demolition
i. Extremely Low Frequency Radiation
j. Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution Industry
k. Emergency Preparedness and Response
l. Ergonomics
m. Fall Protection
n. Fiberglass
o. Fire Safety
p. Formaldehyde
q. Green Roofs
r. Hazardous Waste
s. Healthcare
t. Highway Work Zones and Signs, Signals, and Barricades
u. Indoor Air Quality
v. Laboratories
w. Lead
x. Mold
y. Occupational Heat Exposure
z. Occupational Noise Exposure
aa. Oil and Gas Well Drilling, Servicing and Storage Tanks
bb. Personal Protective Equipment
cc. Radiation
dd. Radon

Rev. 0 3.6 - 3
ee. Scaffolding
ff. Sealant & Waterproofing
gg. Waste Management and Recycling
hh. Welding, Cutting, and Brazing
2. Hierarchy of promoting safety:
a. Avoid risks.
b. Evaluate risks that cannot be avoided.
c. Combat risks at the source.
d. Adapt the work to the individual to reduce effect of the risks on health.
e. Adapt the technical process.
f. Replace the dangerous by the non- or less-dangerous.
g. Develop a prevention policy to cover various factors relating to the work
environment.
h. Provide collective protective measures, then individual protective measures.
i. Provide appropriate instructions to employees.
B. Duties of a Designer for Safety
1. With regards to safety, Designers are responsible for:
a. Being competent and adequately resourced to address the health and safety issues
likely to be involved in the design.
b. Taking reasonable steps to make clients aware of their duty with regards to safety
before starting design.
c. Avoiding foreseeable risks to those involved in the construction and future use of the
structure, and in doing so, eliminate or reduce hazards and the likely risks
associated with those hazards.
d. Providing information to the RCJ in writing about remaining hazards or risks
associated with the design.
e. Coordination of design work with other Designers and stake holders to improve
management and control of hazards and risks. Regular reviews with the Design
Team are required.
f. Creating a design that may be constructed, maintained, used, and/or demolished
with reasonable safely.
g. Applying health and safety requirements of applicable Codes and Standards.
h. Providing permanent and safe means of access without fall arrest/restraint
equipment to support regularly planned maintenance activities unless not possible
for a documented reason. This includes avoiding access by means of removing
ceiling tiles.
2. With regards to safety, Designers are NOT responsible for:
a. Considering, addressing, or providing information on hazards or risks that cannot be
foreseen.

Rev. 0 3.6 - 4
b. Creating a “zero risk” design.

c. Exercising any health and safety management function over Contractors or others.
3. Design hazards or risks must be weighed against other relevant design considerations
including cost, purpose, aesthetics, constructability, maintainability, environmental
impact, etc.
4. Where identified hazards or risks cannot be eliminated, they are to be reduced as much
as practical weighing other design considerations. Methods for achieving this reduction
may include reducing the likelihood of harm, the potential severity of harm, the number of
people exposed to harm, and/or the frequency or duration of exposure to harm.
5. The greater the degree of risk, the greater effort the Designer shall expend to eliminate or
reduce that risk.
6. If a design contains a specific or unusual hazard or risk that may not be apparent to a
reasonably trained or competent person, the Designer must provide written information
explaining the hazard or risk to the RCJ as part of the:
a. Design Basis Report (DBR). DBRs are described in detail in Section 4.3.6 and are
submitted in accordance with the Stage Submittal Schedule listed in Section 4.2.C.
b. Design documentation as notes on drawings and/or written information provided with
the design.
7. Principles of Prevention: This requires the Designer to first attempt to eliminate hazards
and then to reduce the remaining risks following the “E.R.I.C.” method:
a. E – Eliminate: If an identified hazard that is not a mandatory requirement or specific
obligation may be eliminated, it shall be eliminated so far as reasonably practical.
b. R – Reduce: Reduce remaining risks associated with the hazard so far as
reasonably practical.
c. I – Inform: Provide information on the risks.
d. C – Control: Typically, control is a responsibility that resides with the Contractor or
client in the field.

Rev. 0 3.6 - 5
CHAPTER 4 PROJECT SUBMISSION STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 1

A. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
2. APPLICABILITY ............................................................................................................ 1
3. DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................ 1
4. ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................... 1
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 2
6. CODES .......................................................................................................................... 2
7. STANDARDS................................................................................................................. 2
8. RELATED SECTIONS ................................................................................................... 2
9. APPROVALS ................................................................................................................. 3
B. COMMISSIONING ......................................................................................................... 3
C. USING THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................................ 3
1. SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 4.2) ........................................................ 3
2. DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 4.3) .................................................... 3
3. FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS (SECTION 4.4) ................. 4
4. CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 4.5) ..................................... 4

Rev. 0 4.1 - i
4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining procedures, Standards, and requirements to be used for the Royal
Commission in Jubail (RCJ) Project Submissions prepared by
Architecture/Engineering (A/E) or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Submission requirements in Section 4.2, Design
Phase requirements in Section 4.3, Survey and Geotechnical requirements in
Section 4.4, and Construction Phase requirements in Section 4.5.
2. Applicability
a. The Standards and guidelines outlined in Chapter 4 are to be used by A/E and/or
EPC Contractors on all project submissions under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. Chapter 4 is to be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor as a collection of
requirements that govern the design process, documentation, submission, and
review.
c. Exclusions or deviations from these requirements must be approved by the RCJ, in
writing, prior to executing any work not in alignment with this document.
3. Definitions

b. “Core Group” The RCJ Engineering Department multidiscipline team (Civil,
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing) that provides
expertise for a wide variety of tasks such as planning, design, document review,
construction support, etc.
c. “Chief” The RCJ Manager of each discipline Section in the Core Group, for example,
Chief Architect or Chief Mechanical.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for General Abbreviations

b. The following abbreviations apply to this Chapter and/or Jubail Management
Procedures referenced in this Chapter:
1) ACM: Area Construction Manager
2) AEM: Area Engineering Manager
3) APE: Area Project Engineer
4) BEDD: Basic Engineering Design Data
5) BOQ: Bill of Quantities (same as Schedule of Quantities, SOQ)
6) CAS: Contract Administration Supervisor
7) CCO: Contract Change Order
8) CG: Core Group

Rev. 0 4.1 - 1
9) DBR: Design Basis Report

10) DCN: Design Change Notice
11) FCD: Field Change Design
12) FCS: Facility Contract Supervisor
13) FE: Facility Engineer
14) HCIS: High Commission of Industrial Security
15) ICD: Interface Control Document
16) ISD: Industrial Security Department
17) JMP: Jubail Management Procedure
18) LAR: Land Allocation Request
19) MoC: Manager of Construction
20) MoE: Manager of Engineering
21) MTO: Material Take Off
22) NCS: National CAD Standard
23) PDMC: Project Document Management Center
24) PFE: Project Field Engineer
25) P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram
26) QA/QC: Quality Assurance / Quality Check
27) QMS: Quality Management System
28) RFE: Responsible Field Engineer
29) RFP: Request for Proposal
30) RPE/A: Resident Project Engineer/Architect
31) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
32) SDR: System Design Report
33) SOQ: Schedule of Quantities (same as Bill of Quantities, BOQ)
34) TQM: Technical Quality Manager
a. Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. Not Applicable
7. Standards
a. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as
appropriate.
8. Related Sections
b. Chapter 1 Introduction
c. Subsection 3.1.1 Building Codes

Rev. 0 4.1 - 2
d. Jubail Management Procedures:

1) 010202 Engineering Drawing and Document Numbering System
2) 011501 Procedures Preparation, Revision, Distribution, and Control
3) 020136 Design Change Notices (DCNs)
4) 020105 Architect / Engineer (A/E) Contract Closeout
5) 020106 Architect/Engineer (A/E) Services Provided During Construction
6) 020301 Design Review
7) 020311 Review of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) Design Submittals
8) 020401 Preparation and Issue of Bid Documents
9) 040302 Development and Implementation of Design Standards,
Guideline Specifications and Standard Drawings
10) 060205 Contains drawing coding structure
11) 060301 Land Allocation within Jubail Industrial City
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and take action on all project submissions,
reference Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Using this Chapter
1. Submission Requirements (Section 4.2)
a. Design submissions to the RCJ are expected to be developed and processed in an
organized and auditable manner. CAD drawing guidelines have been provided in
alignment with the National CAD Standards. RCJ-specific title blocks, paper sizes,
and guidelines on file composition have been provided, along with detailed guidance
by discipline.
b. Requirements have also been provided for non-drawing deliverables, such as
specifications, cost estimates, and calculations.
c. Requests for Proposals (RFPs) are also required to be completed by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor as part of the design submission. Detailed information has been
provided on the process.
d. The RCJ will review and comment on progress at each stage of the design process.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will be required to respond to these reviews as
outlined in this Chapter.
2. Design Phase Requirements (Section 4.3)
a. This Section further details required processes and documentation for the design
phase such as studies, reports, and analyses. Delivery of these items is governed
by Section 4.2 and the detailed breakdown contained within the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor Technical Contract.
b. Preliminary studies – such as environmental assessments and sustainability reports
– are a pre-cursor to conceptual design and must be documented in accordance
with this Chapter.

Rev. 0 4.1 - 3
c. The Value Engineering process is defined and is to be included as needed on the

Project.
d. Design Basis Reports (DBR) are the product of preliminary studies and conceptual
analysis and form the basis for the design process and decisions. Though this
document is submitted early in the process, it is updated throughout to reflect
modifications. DBRs are project specific and customized per project.
e. Life Cycle Costs are to be evaluated to help make decisions that affect the Cost
Estimate and Value Engineering. The RCJ seeks a balance between efficient first
costs and effective life, operation, and serviceability of the final product.
f. Every design must consider the role of Risk Management and Emergency Planning
as a driver for decisions. Projects are to be designed as safe from numerous
situations and/or include provisions to provide safety.
g. Projects typically abut, adjoin, border, or overlap other RCJ projects or utilities
governed by other entities. These interfaces must be reviewed and managed using
the Interface Control Document (ICD) to track how such factors affect and are
accommodated by the design.
h. All design work must be Quality Checked. The RCJ requires documentation of these
reviews and reserves the right to conduct additional internal reviews.
i. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is also responsible for documenting the Project’s
Bidding and Procurement Requirements.
j. The RCJ may require additional or special procedures not covered in this Chapter or
the GEM. The RCJ reserves the right to identify in writing additional items in the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor’s Technical Contract.
3. Field Investigations and Existing Conditions (Section 4.4)
a. This Section provides guidelines for the performance of field and office survey work
which shall apply to all survey work.
b. The general state of the practice on the scope and specific elements of typical
geotechnical investigation programs, analyses, and designs required for the
construction of facilities is presented as well as the latest methodologies in the
planning, execution, and interpretation of the various investigation methods, and the
development of appropriate soil and rock parameters for engineering applications.
c. Guidance for Project Submission Standards and Requirements related to
environmental investigations and studies are provided.
4. Construction Phase Requirements (Section 4.5)
a. The RCJ requires that the A/E and/or EPC Contractor that designs the Project be
involved in a review and interpretation capacity during construction.
b. During construction, the A/E will not have interaction with the Contractor but will
interface with the RCJ and provide interpretation, response to queries, and design
modifications as directed by the RCJ and described in this Subsection.

Rev. 0 4.1 - 4
SECTION 4.2 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2.0. SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Stage Submissions ........................................................................................................ 1
4.2.1. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 6
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 6
4.2.2. DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 7
A. CAD Guidelines ............................................................................................................. 7
1. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 7
2. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 7
3. Drawing File Composition .............................................................................................. 7
4. Drawing Settings ........................................................................................................... 8
5. Reference Files, Support Files, and External References (XREFS) ............................. 8
6. Drafting Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 9
7. Drawing Sizes ................................................................................................................ 9
8. General Drawing Arrangement ..................................................................................... 12
9. Title Block ..................................................................................................................... 12
10. CAD Layer Standards ................................................................................................... 13
11. Drawing Conventions ................................................................................................... 15
12. Civil Engineering Drawing Requirements ..................................................................... 16
13. Landscape and Hardscape Drawing Requirements ..................................................... 23
14. Structural Engineering Drawing Requirements ............................................................ 24

Rev. 0 4.2 - i
15. Architectural Drawing Requirements ............................................................................ 27

16. Fixtures, Furnishings, and Equipment (FFE) Drawing Requirements .......................... 30
17. Mechanical Drawing Requirements .............................................................................. 30
18. Electrical Drawing Requirements ................................................................................. 34
19. Control Systems and Instrumentation Drawing Requirements .................................... 38
20. Telecommunications Drawing Requirements ............................................................... 41
21. Sample Schedules ........................................................................................................ 43
B. Submittal Organization ................................................................................................. 44
C. Sheet Numbering .......................................................................................................... 47
D. Typical Drafting Symbols .............................................................................................. 47
4.2.3. SPECIFICATION STANDARDS ................................................................................... 51
A. Guiding Procurement Construction Specifications (GPCS) ......................................... 51
B. Operations and Maintenance Manual .......................................................................... 51
4.2.4. COST ESTIMATE STANDARDS ................................................................................. 52
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 52
B. Overhead ...................................................................................................................... 52
C. Escalation ..................................................................................................................... 52
D. Contingency .................................................................................................................. 52
E. Life-Cycle ...................................................................................................................... 52
4.2.5. CALCULATIONS .......................................................................................................... 53
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 53
B. Content ......................................................................................................................... 53
C. Computer Aided Calculations ....................................................................................... 53
4.2.6. SCHEDULES OF QUANTITIES AND PRICE .............................................................. 56
A. Schedule of Quantities ................................................................................................. 56
B. Material Take Off .......................................................................................................... 56
4.2.7. RFP DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................... 57
A. PC Contracts ................................................................................................................ 57
B. EPC Contracts .............................................................................................................. 57
C. A/E Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 57
4.2.8. REVIEW/APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES ....................................... 58
A. Submissions ................................................................................................................. 58
B. Reviews ........................................................................................................................ 58

Rev. 0 4.2 - ii
SUBSECTION 4.2.0 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
4.2.0. SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining submission requirements to be used for the Royal Commission in
Jubail (RCJ) Project Submissions prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or
Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Design Phase requirements (Section 4.3), Field
Investigations and Existing Conditions (Section 4.4), and Construction Phase
requirements (Section 4.5).
2. Applicability
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to Section 3.5 for environmental-related submission abbreviations
c. Refer to Section 4.1 for Chapter 4 abbreviations
Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. A Code review is required to be submitted along with the design deliverables at the
10% and 30% stages.
7. Standards
a. Standards Specific to Discipline – see References in Sections of GEM as
appropriate.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Sections related to Chapter 4
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and take action on all project submissions,
reference Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Stage Submissions
1. All Projects under the Royal Commission’s jurisdiction will have required submission
stages. The information contained in this Section is to be an overview of those
submissions. Detailed submission requirements are designated within each A/E and/or
EPC Contractor’s Technical Contract.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 1
2. Submission requirements apply to all design disciplines under contract to perform the
work including but not limited to Civil, Landscape, Structure, Architecture, Interiors/FF&E,
Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Control/Instrumentation, and
Telecommunications.
3. Documents submitted at each stage will be reviewed by the RCJ. Comments will be
returned to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for reconciliation and inclusion into the next
submission stage. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must receive written direction to
proceed from the RCJ prior to commencing work on subsequent stages.
4. A Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC) Review must be completed at every
stage. Documentation that this check was completed must be submitted as part of the
stage submission. Refer to Subsection 4.3.11 for additional QA/QC information.
5. The stage submissions may occur at 10%, 30%, 60%, 90%, and 100% of completion,
which are generally defined by the RCJ as follows:
a. 10% Stage Submittal:
1) Quality hold point for design, pending Royal Commission Senior Management
Approval
2) This stage typically includes:
(a) Design Presentations
(b) Preliminary Design Basis Report
(c) Preliminary Code Review
(d) Sustainability goals outlined
(e) Preliminary layout drawings, elevations, and Sections
(f) Conceptual framing layout
(g) List of specifications to be included in final document
(h) Initial cost estimate
(i) Site condition and geotechnical report
(j) Preliminary interface points
(k) Preliminary code review
b. 30% Stage Submittal:
1) Quality hold point for design. A/E and/or EPC Contractor to close comments
from 10% stage and reach Code 2 status. (Status Codes are defined in JMP
020311, Subsection 5.2.2)
(a) Completed Design Basis Reports
(b) Completed Permit Application Package (PAP)
(c) Sustainability Report
(d) Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) scoping and initial work (as
needed)
(e) Refined layout drawings, elevations, Sections, and framing

Rev. 0 4.2 - 2
(f) Preliminary interior components of circulation, elevations, ceilings,

fixtures furniture and equipment (FFE), signage, and details
(g) Envelope development and details
(h) Preliminary structural, mechanical, electrical, telecommunications,
controls, plumbing, and fire protection plans, Sections, diagrams, details,
and calculations
(i) Preliminary schedules
(j) Preliminary project specifications
(k) Material Take Off (MTO)
(l) Preliminary documents for the Request for Proposal (RFP)
(m) Updated cost estimate
(n) Preliminary Interface Control Documents (ICDs)
(o) Final code review
c. Response to 30% RCJ Comments:
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor have 15 days from receipt of RCJ Comments
on the 30% submission to respond in writing to the comments. These
responses will be added to the same form given to the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor containing the RCJ Comments.
d. 60% Stage Submittal:
1) Mandatory Design Review Workshop
2) Intermediate stage review as determined by the RCJ
3) This stage is typically used for technical quality reviews as needed and design
revisions based on Value Engineering (VE) workshops and reports.
Otherwise, all previously submitted elements shall be 60% substantially
complete by this point.
e. 90% Stage Submittal:
1) Full detailed design. Quality hold point for A/E and/or EPC Contractor to
close all previous comments.
(a) Final and complete plans, Sections, elevations, details, diagrams,
schedules, and calculations for all disciplines
(b) Final project specifications
(c) Final RFP Documents
(d) Final cost estimate
(e) Final MTO
(f) Coordination between design disciplines completed
(g) Environmental Permit to Construct (EPtC) obtained
(h) Evidence of third party approvals
(i) Complete ICDs and interface integration into design

Rev. 0 4.2 - 3
f. 100% Stage Submittal:

1) Full and final compliance documents
2) This stage is typically used for the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to resubmit all
previously submitted documentation with all RCJ comments closed and
incorporated.
g. The submittal stages described above are generically shown for all disciplines in
TABLE 4.2.A as follows:
TABLE 4.2.A GENERIC SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
10% 30% (60%) 90% 100%
Design Presentations Final

QA/QC Review /
Include Include Include
Documentation
Design Basis Reports (DBR) Prelim Final
Code Review Prelim Final
A/E and/or EPC Contractor to respond in writing to all 30% RCJ Comments
Permit Application Package Prelim Final
within 15 days of A/E or EPC Contractor’s receipt of RCJ Comments.

Sustainability Report Prelim Final
EIA (as needed) Prelim Refine Final
Drawings Prelim Refine Final
Plan Layout Prelim Refine Final
Elevations Prelim Refine Final
Response to Value Engineering

Sections Prelim Refine 60% Design Review Workshop Final
or Other Intermediate Review
Final Compliance Documents

Framing Prelim Refine Final
Interior Prelim Final
Diagrams Prelim Final
Details Prelim Final
Envelope Prelim Final
FF&E Package Prelim Final
Calculations Prelim Final
Schedules Prelim Final
Specifications List Prelim Final
Material Take Off (MTO) Prelim Final
Cost Estimate Prelim Refine Final
Request for Proposal (RFP)
Prelim Final
documents
Interface Control Documents
List Prelim Final
(ICD)
Coordination Final
Environmental Permit to
Prelim Final
Construct
Third Party Approvals Final
Site condition / Geotech
Final
report

Rev. 0 4.2 - 4
*Note: Refer to Appendix D in the Technical Contract and the Submittal Checklist provided by the RCJ
for the specific requirements for each discipline at each stage of every Project.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 5
4.2.1. GENERAL
A. Introduction
1. This Section is intended to represent the general submission requirements for all projects
under the Royal Commission in Jubail jurisdiction.
2. A schedule of Contract Deliverables by submittal stage has been provided in Subsection
4.2.C which is intended to be used as a guide in concert with A/E and/or EPC Contractor
Technical Contracts.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 6
SUBSECTION 4.2.2 DRAWINGS
4.2.2. DRAWINGS
A. CAD Guidelines
1. Applicability
a. The intent of these CAD Guidelines is to assure that all Project Drawings are
accurate, have a uniform appearance, reflect high quality workmanship, avoid
complications due to differing drafting styles and CAD software, and to ensure
delivery of consistent digital Plans and other contractually required electronic data
submittals.
b. CAD Managers at the A/E and/or EPC Contractor office need to follow these
guidelines to ensure that the firm’s output is of a consistent high quality, no matter
who within their organization produced a particular drawing, or when.
c. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall meet with the RCJ’s Project Manager to discuss
specific CAD requirements for the Project at the initial negotiation meeting so that
the RCJ may furnish the reference/existing drawings that will benefit the design
team.
d. Although these CAD Guidelines are primarily designed for use on computer-
generated drawings, the symbols and line types shall also be used on manually
drawn plans, if the need arises, to maintain consistency.
2. Definitions
a. “As-built drawings” Incorporate all revisions, field changes and as-built surveys that
occur during the construction phase of the work. Also refer to Jubail Program
Procedure No. 4403 - "As-Built" Drawings.
b. “Design drawings” Design Drawings are those drawings that are not ready for
construction use.
c. “Contract drawings” Contract Drawings are those drawings intended for
construction.
d. “Engineering sketches” An engineering sketch is a drawing used to establish design
concepts and requirements and does not require the full approval and control
procedures of design drawings that are to be issued for fabrication or construction;
therefore, sketches shall never be used for fabrication or construction purposes.
Sketches shall be provided in standard drawing format, complete with title block and
sketch numbers assigned.
e. “Project drawings” Engineering Sketches, Design/Contract Drawings, and As-built
Drawings.
f. “Project name” The Project name implies the title of the project with “Arabic
Translation” provided by the RCJ. No other designation or definition shall be used.
g. “Shop drawings” The Drawings submitted by a Contractor, depicting the
construction/fabrication details of elements, and which are, upon approval, used for
the actual work on site.
3. Drawing File Composition
a. Prior to delivery to the Royal Commission in Jubail, CAD files containing multiple
drawing sheets shall be broken down into separate drawings containing single
sheets. Each CAD file shall contain only one drawing and one title block per file.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 7
b. All drawings shall be purged of empty, unused, or non-essential drawing data prior
to submittal. This includes all unused layers, line types, blocks, fonts, and entities.
CAD drawings shall not contain any frozen layers. All unused entities on frozen
layers shall be erased, and the empty layers purged.
c. CAD drawings shall not contain multiple overlaid lines or lines with multiple
segments unless the overlaid lines or adjacent line segments are assigned to
different layers.
4. Drawing Settings
a. The typical settings in Table 4.2.A below will be used in all drawings. If files are not
received from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor in the following format, final close out
of the project and final payment will be delayed until the A/E or EPC Contractor has
made the modifications to the files.
TABLE 4.2.A: TYPICAL DRAWING SETTINGS
MENU Acad
VIEWRES 500
BLIPS Off
UCSICON Off
COORDINATES On
GRID Off
SNAP Off
COLOR By Layer
LINETYPE By Layer
UNITS Decimal <MILLIMETERS>
<270> Direction for angle 0.00 (12 o’clock)
<Y> Angles measured clockwise
5. Reference Files, Support Files, and External References (XREFS)

a. If xrefs are included in submitted CAD files complete documentation, the path
established in the original drawing must be provided. Xrefs shall not be “bound” to
drawings prior to delivery. Layers containing xrefs inserted as blocks shall conform
to these RCJ guidelines. If requested by the RCJ, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall provide a technician, on site, to de-bug any xref insertions that may occur.
b. Reference files may consist of prototype data files, standard borders, project logos,
standard border text, and background drawings. All disciplines and agencies related
to the Project shall use these files as provided, without modification to name or
contents. Only the person providing the master source of the Reference files shall
modify them.
c. Drawings created using non-standard fonts, line types and hatch patterns could
result in content discrepancies in the delivered drawing set. To ensure the integrity
of the drawing set, and minimize potential problems:
1) Use the appropriate metric AutoCAD specific support files:
(a) Linetypes file: acadiso.lin
(b) Hatch file: acadiso.pat

Rev. 0 4.2 - 8
2) Only native fonts, line types and hatch patterns installed as standard features
during software installation shall be used.
3) Custom fonts, line types and hatch patterns, including those provided by third
party software shall not be used.
d. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide all support files wherever non-standard
entities have been utilized in the drafting process, including any plug-ins or routines
to generate schedules, areas, etc.
6. Drafting Guidelines
a. Drafting shall demonstrate a consistency in line weights, colors, line types/styles,
text, and standard sheet sizes regardless of the CAD application used, or manual
drafting. To obtain consistency, it is necessary to create tables that define the
relationships between the CAD drawing in the display and the finished plot. This
includes the mapping of drawing elements to plot elements using the proper pen
tables, color tables, and character tables. In addition, there must be consistency in
the size of the printed areas for standard sheet sizes.
b. Project Drawings for all disciplines shall adhere to the following:
1) The United States National CAD Standard® (NCS) which is comprised of The
American Institute of Architect's (AIA) CAD Layer Guidelines, the Construction
Specification Institute's Uniform Drawing System (Modules 1-8), and the
National Institute of Building Sciences Plotting Guidelines.
2) Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO), Standards Nos. 16 and 17.
3) The International System of Units (SI).
c. In terms of drafting scale, all drawings and details shall be drawn to REAL WORLD
DIMENSIONS.
d. To ensure the integrity of the original drawing when viewing or printing, it's essential
that CAD entities are created following these Standards:
1) Entity colors shall be defined by layer, not by entity.
2) Blocks shall be defined (created) on layer 0 (zero).
3) All attributes shall be defined on layer 0 (zero).
e. Model and Paper Space Usage
1) Sheet border, title block, attribute block, consultant’s stamp, logos and all
other components of the Sheet File shall be located in paper space. All
graphic representations of the project or facility and all related notes,
dimensions, symbols, etc., shall be constructed in model space.
2) Place title blocks, attribute block, schedules and general notes at full-scale in
paper space, whenever possible.
3) Label scaled viewports with the appropriate scale in paper space.
4) Do not place or draw model-related blocks, tags and objects in paper space.
5) Draw all model space objects at full scale.
6) Scale objects using paper space viewports - zoom viewports to the
appropriate scale.
7. Drawing Sizes

Rev. 0 4.2 - 9
a. The various paper sizes and their suggested typical use are provided for reference
in Table 4.2.B. Consultants shall however note that all plotted Project Drawings
shall be limited to four ANSI standard paper sizes: A, B, D and E. A/E and/or EPC
Contractors shall obtain the RCJ instructions regarding paper sizes to be used for
the hard copy submittals.
TABLE 4.2.B: SHEET SIZES
ANSI ISO Architectural
Size mm Size mm Size mm Typical Use

# # #
(inches) (inches) (inches)
A 216 x 279 A4 210 x 297 A 229 x 305 Project book, Supple-

(8.5 x 11) (8.3 x 11.7) (9 x 12) mental Drawings, Mock-
up Sheets.
B 279 x 432 A3 297 x 420 B 305 x 457 Reduced Drawings from
(11 x 17) (11.7 x 16.5) (12 x 18) ‘D’ Size and A1 originals.
Supplemental Drawings,
Mock-up Sheets.
C 432 x 559 A2 420 x 594 C 457 x 610 Not Allowed per RCJ
(17 x 22) (16.5 x 23.4) (18 x 24)
D 559 x 864 A1 594 x 841 D 610 x 914 Projects accommodating

(22 x 34) (23.4 x 33.1) (24 x 26) preferred plan scale.
E 864 x 1118 A0 841 x 1189 E 914 x 1219 Large projects
(34 x 44) (33.1 x 46.8) (36 x 48) accommodating preferred
scale. Mapping and GIS.
- - - - E1 762 x 1067 Alternate size for projects
(30 x 42) accommodating preferred
plan scale.
b. See Figure 4.2.A and Table 4.2.C for effective sheet size with metric scales. All
Design/Contract Drawings shall be "E" size unless otherwise directed by RCJ.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 10
FIGURE 4.2.A: EFFECTIVE SHEET SIZE
25
32
13 TYP. 3
25 B 160 SIDES
TITLE
BLOCK
25
TABLE 4.2.C: EFFECTIVE SHEET SIZES: (A X B)
Effective Drawing Space (In

Meters)
SCALE A B
1 : 50000 39355 44375
1 : 25000 19678 22188
1 : 5000 3935.5 4437.5
1 : 2000 1575 1775
1 : 1000 787.5 887.5
1 : 500 393.55 443.75
1 : 100 78.75 88.75
1:75 57.82 65.95
1 : 50 39.36 44.38

Rev. 0 4.2 - 11
8. General Drawing Arrangement

a. All plan sheets must share the same configuration and location on the drawing
sheet. The RCJ will provide a base layout and 0,0 insertion point for plan drawings.
9. Title Block
a. The RCJ shall provide a drawing title block in .dwg format. Do not explode and/or
modify the title block. Refer to Figure 4.2.B for a Typical Project Title Block.
b. All English lettering shall be vertical, capital Romans or Simplex.
c. The equivalent Arabic terms for the following spaces shown on the Typical Standard
Title Block per Figure 4.2.B shall also be provided:
1) Consultant Contract Number
2) Major Component or Element of Project
3) Particular Features and Type of Drawing
4) Program-Project-Facility Code
5) Contract Number
d. For the revisions attribute block, refer to Figure 4.2.B for the Typical Project Title
Block.
e. The initials of the name of the designer, drafter, checker QA/QC Manager shall be
shown on the Drawing. Refer to Figure 4.2.B.
f. The date shall be shown on all Drawings. The date shall be listed in the following
manner: JUL 2015. The month shall be abbreviated to three letters as follows:
JAN January
FEB February
MAR March
APR April
MAY May
JUN June
JUL July
AUG August
SEP September
OCT October
NOV November
DEC December
g. The Drawing Title shall be centered and shall include no more than 5 lines as
follows:
1) Lines 1 and 2 shall show the basic Project component or element.
2) Lines 3, 4 and 5 shall be used to indicate in more detail particular features
and type of Drawing. For example, Plan and Profile Drawings shall show the
limiting crossroads and the limiting stations. Titles shall agree with the
Drawing control log.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 12
3) See Figure 4.2.B for the Typical Project Title Block.

10. CAD Layer Standards
a. The RCJ requires the use of the AIA CAD Layer Guidelines, as described in this
sub-section. If the A/E or EPC Contractor does not use the AIA CAD Layer
Guidelines, the RCJ needs a list of layer names and the use of each as part of the
A/E or EPC Contractor’s electronic package submittal.
b. If novel layers must be created for a specific use on a project, they will follow the
AIA CAD Layer Guidelines naming convention of Discipline Designators, Major
Group, Minor Group, and Status (Phase).

Rev. 0 4.2 - 13
FIGURE 4.2.B: TYPICAL TITLE BLOCK

Rev. 0 4.2 - 14
11. Drawing Conventions

a. The following drawing conventions are detailed in the United States National CAD
Standard® (NCS) per the Uniform Drawing System (UDS) and are to be applied
consistently across disciplines:
1) Drawing Set Organization
2) Sheet Organization
3) Schedules
4) Drafting Conventions
5) Terms and Abbreviations
6) Symbols

Rev. 0 4.2 - 15
7) Notations
8) Code Conventions (as it applies to identifying necessary regulatory
information to be shown on documents)
b. Notes, references, etc., that apply to entire disciplines or multiple sheets, details, or
subjects shall only be shown on a General or Main Drawing. There will be no
repetition of note descriptions from sheet to sheet. All drawings that use the same
notes shall include the following text: “FOR GENERAL NOTES AND
REFERENCES, SEE DRAWING NO. ______”
c. All Drawings that contain plan views shall also contain a key plan. The appropriate
area of the key plan shall be crosshatched.
d. Arrange sections and other views to show the work clearly in relation to column
lines, steel framing, and finish floor elevations.
e. Except where required by other considerations, section cut lines on plan views shall
be shown looking up or to the left. Full height or full length sections shall be used
where practical. View-directions of developed elevations shall be clarified (North,
East, South, or West).
f. Sectional plans shall be cut looking down. Orientation of sections shall be consistent
with the reference view and the general plan orientation.
g. Standard NCS symbols and hatch patterns shall be used to identify materials,
components, etc., as needed.
h. General Drawings contain index, general notes, and symbols. Control Drawings are
overall plans of a design package indicating building location and orientation.
General and Control Drawings may be combined when Project size and volume of
information permits.
i. Blocks and Cells:
1) If blocks and cells are used, they are to be consistent throughout the project
without deviation.
2) Raster images are not acceptable. Any and all images are to vector based.
3) At a minimum, the following elements shall be blocks: symbols, doors, water
closets, windows, equipment, plumbing and bath fixtures, electrical devices,
hardware, mechanical equipment, furniture, all tags/marks, room numbers,
scales, and north arrows.
j. Scale:
1) Every drawing shall have the scale identified on the drawing. A graphic scale
is also to be provided.
2) Metric drawing scales in multiples of 1:2, 1:5, and 1:10 shall be used as
standard. Scales for particular types of drawings are outlined in the
respective discipline drawing requirements within this Section.
12. Civil Engineering Drawing Requirements
a. The Project Civil Engineering Drawings in the following categories shall conform to
the general procedures stated in this Section:
1) Site Work
(a) General Civil Notes

Rev. 0 4.2 - 16
(b) Topography
(c) Alignments; Roadway, Railway, and Runway
(1) Alignment Data
(2) Stationing
(d) Site Development
(1) Grading Plans
(2) Typical Cross Sections
(3) Typical Details
(4) Subdivision mapping
(e) Drainage
(1) Channels and Culverts
(2) Drainage Details
(3) Cross Sections
2) Bridges
(a) Approaches
(b) Bridge Plan and Elevation
(c) Foundation Plans
(d) Structural Layout
(e) Structural Details
b. The General Civil Notes sheet shall include notes, symbols, and abbreviations that
pertain in general to Civil Engineering.
c. Plan and Scale – The upper half of the sheet shall be a plan of scale 1:1000 or
1:500. The lower half of the sheet to be used for the vertical profile as referenced in
Subsection 4.2.2.A.12.h ‘Profile Grid.’
d. Stationing
1) Stationing shall be indicated in relation to the scale as follows:
1:10000 Each 1000 M

1:5000 Each 500 M
1:1000 Each 100 M
2) The station shall be identified by a tick mark 6 mm long. The numerals shall
be 5 mm high.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 17
STATIONING SAMPLE:
3) Station equalities shall be shown as a 3 mm open square. The equation shall

be shown on a line drawn perpendicular to the stationed line thus:
(a) RL 32+750 M BK
(b) RL 32+755 M AH
e. Roadways – Where perimeter roads, access roads, etc., are to be constructed,
these shall be shown by solid lines defining the edges of the proposed alignment.
The centerlines of roads or structures shall be shown where applicable.
f. Utilities – When a set of drainage plans is to be prepared, the plan and profile
sheets need show only utilities that have a major effect on the runways, roadways,
or structures.
g. Match Lines and Profiles
1) Each sheet shall bear match lines at each end, drawn perpendicular to the
alignment, preferably at a full station.
2) The match lines shall be labeled "MATCH LINE-STA 25+000 M" in letters and
numbers 5 mm high.
3) For Match Line Profiles, elevation of the profile grade shall be shown.
h. Profile Grid – The vertical scale of the profile shall be 1:100 and every meter interval
shall be labeled. Stationing labels shall be entered at the bottom of the profile grid
every 100 mm in actual length. Thus for scales of 1:1000, 1:5000, and 1:10000 the
distances shall be 100, 500, and 1000 m, respectively. The numbers for stationing
and elevations shall be 5 mm high.
i. Runway and Roadway Profiles
1) The profile shall be shown by a single solid line, the top edge of which defines
the top of runway profile.
2) Significant points designating changes in grade shall be shown by an open
circle of 3 mm diameter. These points shall be identified by a fine vertical line
drawn to the circle showing the station and the pertinent abbreviation:

Rev. 0 4.2 - 18
3) Profile tangent intersections shall be identified by open 3 mm triangles. A

vertical line shall be drawn to the triangle, and the station, abbreviation
(PIVC), and elevation shall be shown thus:
(a) Ground Line – The profile of the existing ground along the centerline of
the runway, road, etc., shall be shown by a freeform, broken line, and
shall be labeled "EXISTING GROUND."
(b) Utilities – The utility lines shown in plan are to be also shown in profile,
where they cross the runway or roadways.
j. Alignment Data – These sheets shall be arranged in tabular form showing all
horizontal points. The tables shall be arranged by runway, taxiway, etc., and read
from the top to the bottom of the page. Table headings are in Table 4.2.D below:
TABLE 4.2.D: TABLE HEADINGS FOR ALIGNMENT DATA
Station
Y X R  L E TS LS AS
Point
Where:
Y and X = coordinates
R = radius of curvature
 = intersection angle
L = total curve length
E = superelevation in mm
TS = total curve tangent
LS = length of spiral
AS = spiral intersection angle

Rev. 0 4.2 - 19
k. Roadway and/or Runway Sections

1) Identifying Symbols and Titles – Road and runway alignment sections shall
not be indicated on the plan by a section symbol, but shall be identified by
station below the section detail as follows: STATION 32 + 750 M
2) Orientation – Cross-sections shall be taken looking up stations on line. When
more than one cross-section is drawn on one sheet, the cross-section shall be
oriented so that the section stations increase from the bottom to the top of the
sheet.
3) Typical Cross-Sections – These shall be shown at appropriate points along
the roadway. They shall include the roadway, shoulders, and other
miscellaneous typical details. The scale shall be: 1:50 or 1:20.
4) Special Cross-Sections – These shall be provided in areas where they will be
useful in clarifying construction details. These sections shall be drawn at a
scale of 1:100, 1:40 or 1:20.
l. Typical Details – Typical details shall eventually become Project Standards. They
shall include runway, taxiway, apron, roadway, and miscellaneous civil details. The
scale shall be 1:50 or 1:20.
m. Drainage – Drainage layout sheets shall include detailed layout information for all
new utilities. These sheets shall be plan and profile sheets with 1:500 horizontal
scale and 1:100 vertical scale and shall be referenced by number to the layout
index.
n. Utility Lines – The location shall be shown by a 6 mm long-dashed line, broken in 25
mm lengths, with a single letter code designating the type of utility, at 100 mm
intervals.
o. Drainage Details – these details shall include typical and special details with scales
ranging from 1:500 to 1:200. Typical details will become Project Standards.
p. Subdivision Mapping
1) General – A subdivision is a parcel of land which has been divided into lots
and blocks along with street or road right-of-ways and any other tracts which
have been reserved for special use.
2) A map of the subdivision shall be prepared by the designer of the subdivision.
This map shall be prepared in accordance with the following specifications,
the intent of which is to insure that conformity of maps is maintained, and
mapping information is in such a form that it may be utilized in geo-location for
a database retrieval and storage system.
3) There is no intent in this Section to require that all subdivisions be similar in
layout, land use or configuration, but certain standard guidelines for elements
of the presentation are standardized to maintain minimum city planning and
architectural control. The guidelines are enumerated and discussed as
follows:
(a) All subdivision maps shall be plotted on "E" size. Line work shall vary in
width from very fine to heavy in the following ascending order:
(1) Dimension lines, center lines, tangent lines, radii lines and plant grid
lines at 100 m interval.
(2) Building lines and public structure lines.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 20
(3) Lot lines.

(4) Right-of-way lines and Block lines.
(5) Sector Lines (in Community only).
(6) Section or District lines.
(7) Area lines.
(b) All subdivision Drawings shall be oriented so that Plant North shall be up
and parallel to the end margin of the sheet. A dual north arrow shall be
provided and labeled with both plant North and true North with the angle
inscribed between. The bearing to Mecca shall also be shown.
(c) The scale of subdivision maps shall be 1:500. Subdivisions of only large
tracts, such as the primary industries in the Industrial Area may be
plotted at 1:1000. Where this scale is not sufficiently large enough to
show all detail, a larger scale (i.e., 1:200, 1:100, etc.) may be used.
(d) Every map sheet shall have a Key Map of sufficient scale locating the
individual sheet.
(e) Match lines between sheets, shall be along streets, other right-of-ways,
canals, railroads, lot lines or other physical barriers. Preferably entire
Blocks shall be shown.
(f) All boundaries (lots, rights-of-ways, blocks and public lands) shall be
mathematically closed.
(g) All boundary lines shall be dimensioned in meters, including curves and
segments of curves. Curve data shall include but not be limited to radius,
delta angle, length of curve, long chord, and tangent length. Curve data
may be identified and placed in tabular form.
(h) All right-of-ways shall be of constant width throughout their length, or at
least large segments if right-of-ways are very long.
(i) All computations shall be in plant grid, every corner, change in direction,
line intersection, point of curve, point of tangent and point of compound
curvature shall have coordinates. Coordinates shall be shown on the
map at all block corners. Every point having coordinates shall be
numbered on the map and identified with coordinates in tabular form on
the map or on documents other than the map.
(j) Monuments shall be established at all Block corners and Section and
District corners. All lot corners and intermediate changes in direction
shall be staked using iron rods or other durable material at least 20 mm
in least dimension and being 1 m in length.
(k) Control monuments of substantial construction shall be established on
plan and placed on site at the intersection of street center lines and
Block corners in sufficient numbers and locations, that if 25% of the
monuments were destroyed, it would still be possible to replace control
within any area so that any property point within the area may be
replaced.
(l) The area of each lot shall be provided in square meters.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 21
4) Figure 4.2.C shows a sample subdivision map for reference purposes only.
FIGURE 4.2.C: SAMPLE SUBDIVISION MAP
COWI
Alrabiah
In As so ciatio n with

Rev. 0 4.2 - 22
13. Landscape and Hardscape Drawing Requirements

a. All Project Landscaping Drawings shall adhere to the Drafting Guidelines specified
in this Section.
b. Drawings shall be categorized by type of information and level of detail and
numbers assigned in accordance with the Project numbering system. Depending on
complexity and Project requirements, all or part of the Drawings on the following list
shall be included. The general order shall be adhered to for uniformity; inapplicable
drawings shall be omitted from the sequence shown and types of information
combined when drawing compatibility permits.
1) Landscaping Plans
2) Plant Irrigation Plans
3) Plant Installation Details
4) Plant Schedule
5) Applicable notes from GEM Table 5.6.4-C “Standard Landscape and Planting
Notes”
c. Landscaping Plans:
1) shall be drawn at appropriate scale for legibility and to bid
2) shall indicate the following:
(a) Existing vegetation to remain
(b) Existing site conditions to remain
(c) Proposed site conditions (Site Plan)
(d) Proposed new landscape material with key call outs indicating botanical
name
(e) Plant Schedule with common and botanical names, container or box
size, form and special notes.
(f) Required Landscape buffers
(g) Required Screening
(h) Utilities: (lighting and conduits, joint utility trenches, transformers, vaults,
gas, water, sewer, storm drainage lines, manholes, easements)
(i) Planting details, Plant schedule, Applicable Standard Notes
(j) Fences and walls
d. Plant Irrigation Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a maximum scale of 1:30
2) Shall indicate the following:
(a) Location of water supply
(1) Recycled Domestic Waste Water
(2) Potable Water (if required)
(b) Irrigation controllers
(c) Pressure booster pumps, flow sensors, master valves

Rev. 0 4.2 - 23
(d) Valves and circuits

(e) Main lines
(f) Sprinkler heads and type of head
(g) Sleeving
(h) Quick couplers, gate/isolation valves
(i) Drip irrigation
(j) Pipe, valve, and sleeve sizes
(k) Underground systems and type
e. Details:
1) Shall be at a scale of 1:5, 1:2, or 1:1 as required to indicate detailed
construction requirements forinstalling plant material and plant irrigation
elements.
f. Schedules and Notes:
1) Plant material schedules shall list the types of plants (latin and common
names), size of plants, and quantities of plants required for the project. Notes
shall indicate other specific requirements to the project.
(a) Irrigation schedules shall list requirements controllers, valves, sprinkler
or drip zones, and underground irrigation systems with type. Notes shall
indicate other specific requirements to the project. Irrigation watering
schedule shall show each valve, run time per week and gpm at peak
season. Pressure calcaluations at critical valve and maximum l/min
system demand.
14. Structural Engineering Drawing Requirements
a. The Project Structural Engineering Drawings in the following categories shall
conform to the general procedures stated in this Section:
1) Index of Drawings
2) General Structural Notes and Symbols
3) General Structural Arrangement
4) Foundation
5) Concrete Outline
6) Concrete Reinforcement
7) Structural Steel
8) Roof Structural
9) Precast Concrete
10) Concrete Masonry
11) Miscellaneous Metal Work
12) Standard Details

Rev. 0 4.2 - 24
b. General Structural Notes

1) The general structural notes shall include notes, symbols, and abbreviations
that pertain to the structural Drawings only.
c. Structural Layout Drawings
1) Allow for a minimum of 25 mm clearance between the borderline and layouts.
The right hand side shall be reserved for notes, key plan, north arrow, etc.
2) All plans shall be labeled, i.e. "FOUNDATION PLAN," "SLAB ON GRADE
PLAN ," "PLAN AT ELEV. 6.95 m."
3) All partial plans shall be located with respect to column lines. Columns shall
be identified on all plan views. Columns shall be in numerical order from west
to east and in alphabetical order from north to south. Do not use the letters I,
and O.
4) All concrete and masonry walls shall be shown on Structural Drawings.
Architectural features shall be shown only where necessary.
d. Recommended scales in Table 4.2.E below shall be used for Structural Drawings
unless otherwise approved by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
TABLE 4.2.E: RECOMMENDED SCALES FOR STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
Structural Plans 1:200 or 1:100
Concrete and/or Masonry Sectional Elevation 1:200, 1:100, or 1:50
Concrete and/or Masonry Section and Details 1:50, 1:20, or 1:10
Steel Sectional Elevation 1:200, 1:100, or 1:50

Steel Sections and Details 1:20, 1:10, or 1:5
e. Structural Steel Drawings

1) Single lines for structural steel members shall be used, and a portion of the
member shown only where necessary for member orientation or clarity at
connections.
2) Structural shapes may be from any international source, such as American
Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), British Standards (BS), German
Institute for Standardization (DIN), etc. However, AISC equivalent
designations shall be used in parentheses when other sources are used.
3) All plate sizes shall be dimensioned in millimeters.
4) All welding and symbols shall be in accordance with American Welding
Society (AWS) Standards, except welding sizes shall be in millimeters.
5) Steel framing plans shall show the major floor openings or concrete outline (if
required) with dotted lines.
6) Top of steel (TOS) datum elevations shall be indicated on framing plans by
note. Deviations from the datum elevation shall be marked on the individual
beam(s) as plus or minus variations.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 25
f. Concrete Drawings
1) Reinforced concrete walls and concrete masonry walls shall be dimensioned
and detailed on the concrete Drawings.
2) Other partition walls shall be located on the architectural Drawings. Details
and engineering data shall be shown on the structural Drawings.
3) Structural anchors and expansion bolts shall be shown on the concrete
Drawings and/or standard detail Drawing.
4) All requirements for reinforcing steel shall be clearly shown. Reinforcing steel
shall be shown in elevation or plan by heavy solid lines and in section by a
solid dot. Size, grade, spacing and mark shall be shown once only, on either
the plan or on the elevation, and identified by mark only on the remaining
views.
5) Special treatment of reinforcing steel shall be clearly shown by note.
Example: BEND REINFORCING STEEL TO CLEAR PIPE.
6) Concrete structures shall be dimensioned to the nearest 5 mm.

7) Floor openings shall be shown on the concrete floor plans. Dimensions shall
be shown on the concrete outline Drawings.
8) Penetration in concrete walls shall be shown on the concrete outline
Drawings. If the number of openings is limited, their centerline elevations and
dimensions may be shown on the plans. Partial or full elevation of the wall
shall be shown whenever the required work may not be fully described in the
Concrete Outline or plan Drawings.
9) Temporary openings for equipment installation and knockout panels for
equipment removal shall be shown.
10) Openings through concrete block walls shall be shown on the Architectural
drawings.
g. Precast Concrete
1) Wherever feasible and economically viable, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall utilize precast elements in their design. Whenever feasible, precast
elements already manufactured in-Kingdom shall be utilized, taking into
consideration Saudi material availability and manufacturing capability.
2) All drawings shall be prepared basically as outlined above for concrete
drawings, as qualified:
(a) Structural components shall reflect the "modular concept", i.e. variation
of dimensions and details shall be minimized, and conversely, repetition
of dimensions and utilization of identical building components shall be
maximized.
(b) Connection details to be completely detailed using corrosion resistant
materials.
(c) Locate lifting inserts for major components for handling and lifting
purposes.
(d) Provide schedules, details, and elevations for the precast concrete with
dimensions.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 26
h. Concrete Masonry
1) Layout plan and/or wall runs using modular lengths of concrete masonry units
(CMU) to avoid cutting.
2) Dimension all CMU using nominal sizes.
3) Identify shear walls in plan.
4) Indicate type bond to be used for courses of CMU, i.e., running, stack, etc.
5) Show complete details for all vertical and/or horizontal reinforcement.
6) Show all details for interfaces with reinforced concrete and/or structural steel
frames and clearly detail each type connection.
7) Locate and detail all construction and expansion joints.
i. Miscellaneous Metalwork
1) The following listing of items are considered to be representative of
miscellaneous metalwork. This list is not exhaustive. These type of items shall
be completely detailed or described on the Drawings.
(a) Anchor bolts
(b) Handrails
(c) Steel stairs
(d) Floor plates and/or trench covers
(e) Grating
(f) Vertical and ships ladders
(g) Equipment support frames
(h) Hatches and/or roof scuttles
15. Architectural Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Architectural Drawings shall adhere to the Drafting Guidelines specified
in this Section.
b. Drawings shall be categorized by type of information and level of detail and
numbers assigned in accordance with the Project numbering system. Depending on
complexity and Project requirements, all or part of the Drawings on the following list
shall be included. The general order shall be adhered to for uniformity; inapplicable
drawings shall be omitted from the sequence shown and types of information
combined when drawing compatibility permits.
1) General/Control Drawings
2) Site Plans
3) Building Plans
4) Area Plans
5) Detail Plans
6) Reflected Ceiling Plans
7) Roof Plans
8) Building Sections

Rev. 0 4.2 - 27
9) Wall Sections
10) Exterior Elevations
11) Interior Elevations
12) Details
13) Schedules
c. Site Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale 1:200.
2) Shall indicate the location of the building relative to the project grid coordinate
system, the design package (building) boundary limits, and plan indications of
landscape and site work included in the Project.
d. Building Plans:
1) Shall be drawn to a scale of 1:200 or 1:100 and shall indicate general wall
and partition layouts and openings, door swings, floor finishes and finish floor
elevations.
2) Column indications and section indications shall correspond to structural
Drawings.
3) Door types, window types, building sections, exterior elevations, and interior
elevations shall be keyed on building plans.
4) The location of all fire-rated walls or partitions required by applicable code
and the hourly rating shall be identified.
e. Area Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 1:50 and shall indicate wall or
partition thickness and construction, flooring materials, location and outline of
counters and/or cabinets, or other architectural elements as required to
explain construction or fabrication requirements.
2) Detail plans, elevations, and construction details shall be keyed on area
plans.
3) All area plans must be located with respect to column lines.
f. Detail Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 1:25 and shall be used only to
described construction or fabrication requirements for architectural elements
that may not be sufficiently described in area plans.
g. Reflected Ceiling Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at the same scale as building plans.
2) Shall indicate ceiling finishes, layouts of ceiling systems, sprinkler heads, and
locations and outlines of major lighting fixtures.
3) Ceiling details shall be keyed on reflected ceiling plans.
h. Roof Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of 1:200.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 28
2) Shall indicate top of roof elevations, type of roof construction, location of

drains, scuppers, and/or downspouts, and roof slope direction.
3) Roof details shall be keyed on roof plans.
4) Where drawing scales, volume of information, and compatibility of drawings
permit, roof plan and site plan shall be combined in the same drawing.
i. Building Sections:
1) Shall correspond to views and locations in structural drawing.
2) Shall be drawn to a scale of 1:100 or 1:50 only, and shall reference wall
thickness, general dimensions, finish floor elevations, and column line
locations.
3) Wall sections and details shall be keyed on building sections.
j. Wall Sections:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of 1:25, 1:20, or 1:10 to describe construction
requirements for all building wall conditions.
2) Shall indicate materials, finish, construction thicknesses, and finish floor
elevations.
3) All wall sections must be located with respect to column lines.
k. Exterior Elevations:
1) Shall be drawn at the same scale as the building plan.
2) Dimensions on exterior elevations shall not duplicate dimensions shown on
plans or sections.
3) Exterior material finishes, exterior details, building signage locations, and
building sections shall be keyed on exterior elevations.
l. Interior Elevations:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of 1:50.
2) Shall describe wall and partition finishes and location and appearance of
architectural elements.
3) All interior elevations shall be keyed on building plans.
4) Dimensions on interior elevations shall not duplicate dimensions shown on
plans or sections.
5) Interior details shall be keyed on interior elevations.
m. Details:
1) Shall be drawn to a scale of 1:5, 1:2, or 1:1 as required to indicate detailed
construction requirements for architectural elements.
2) Shall reference materials, finishes, construction thicknesses, special
conditions, and fabrication instructions.
3) Where volume of information on a sheet permits, details shall be included with
drawings on which the details are keyed.
n. Schedules:
1) Shall list requirements for doors, windows, louvers, and room finishes.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 29
2) All schedules shall be keyed to reference symbols on either plans or

elevations.
16. Fixtures, Furnishings, and Equipment (FFE) Drawing Requirements
a. All FFE information documented by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be fully
coordinated with the permanent building construction.
b. Required drawings to document the Project FFE include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and schedules to fully describe the design intent.
c. Drawing scales are to match those used for Architectural.
d. Materials and hardware components shall be identified and scheduled.
e. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for submitting specification sheets for
actual selected products including Manufacturer, model number, photograph, and a
description of optional items or finish selections.
f. For detailed FF&E procedures and deliverables required by the RCJ, the A/E or
EPC Contractor shall reference the “Engineering FF&E Internal Procedure Work
Instruction” document from the RCJ (Document No. RCJ-GEX-3WI-G01-G0022).
17. Mechanical Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Mechanical Engineering Drawings shall follow the organization, scale,
and other requirements for architectural drawings except as otherwise specified in
this Section.
b. Plumbing
1) Plumbing drawings: shall include plumbing floor plans and isometric diagrams
of the piping. There shall be no Process and Instrumentation Diagrams
(P&ID's). Pipe diameters shall be given in the International System of Units
(SI) only.
2) Plumbing Floor Plans: The designer shall enlarge each toilet core to a scale
of 1:50 and the small scale plan shall have a note saying, "FOR PIPING SEE
LARGE SCALE PLAN." Do not repeat the piping on the small scale plan.
3) Piping Diagrams
(a) All piping (hot water, cold water, domestic waste and vent systems) shall
be shown in diagrammatic form. These diagrams shall be shown with all
the Plumbing fixtures including floor drains, floor sinks, oil and grease
separators and sand traps.
(b) Depending on the systems complexity, separate diagrams will be
required for each plumbing system.
(c) The diagrams shall show core isolation valves, hose bibbs, fixture stop
valves, traps, meters, shock absorbers, and the interface at public
systems.
c. Fire Protection
1) Fire protection drawings shall show all applicable fire protection components
such as wet standpipes, dry standpipes, sprinkler systems and deluge spray
systems. Smoke detectors, and fire alarm systems shall be shown on
electrical drawings.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 30
2) Each sprinkler shall be located on the floor plan of the fire protection drawing.
Sprinkler location shall also be shown on the Architectural reflected ceiling
plans.
d. HVAC
1) Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning shall be in accordance with the
HVAC Engineering Standards as described in the ASHRAE and SMACNA
Guides.
2) All work, equipment and material shall be governed by the applicable
Sections of Codes, Standards and guides.
3) High-Velocity, High-Pressure Ducts
(a) The specification shall call for a different type of construction when the
air in the duct is at a pressure of 748 Pa or more, or when its velocity
exceeds 10 m/s. It is consequently necessary to show on the drawing
which ducts are HVHP and which are LVLP.
(b) It is permissible to use both types of construction in the same run of
ductwork if the pressure is different.
(c) Equipment Rooms and Areas: All equipment rooms shall be enlarged to
at least 1:50 and all sections, elevations, and details included.
4) Flow Diagrams: Systems flow diagrams for air and water systems shall be
included, showing major equipment and flow medium and its quantities.
e. Designer's Check List: The following list of items shall be thoroughly checked by the
designer at the completion of each project:
1) Check to ascertain that every mechanical component on the project has been
detailed on the drawings.
2) Check every detail to see if the schedule thereon has been completed and is
accurate.
3) Check each room in the building to be sure that it has been adequately
heated, cooled, and ventilated.
4) Check to be sure that adequate space has been provided to pull the tubes for
boilers, chillers, convertors, or hot water generators.
5) Check to see if vibration eliminators have been properly indicated for each
piece of rotating equipment.
6) Check to see if adequate space has been provided to service all equipment.
7) Check to see if any ladders or catwalks are required for each piece of major
equipment.
8) Check all duct runs to be sure that the duct shown will fit into the available
space and does not interfere with pipes, lights, or structural members.
9) Check all pipe runs to be sure that the pipe will fit into the available space and
does not interfere with ducts, lights, or structural members.
10) Check to see if adequate combustion air openings have been provided in
boiler rooms.
11) Check the flue size and height to see if adequate draft has been provided.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 31
12) Check the boiler pressure rating to see if it is adequate for the static height of
the building.
13) Check the expansion tank calculation to be certain it is large enough and is
properly located in relation to the pump.
14) Check the piping system to see if adequate expansion loops and anchors
have been provided and detailed.
15) Check runouts to room terminal units to see if pipes may sleeve spandrel
beams or other obstructions.
16) Check project plans to see if the location of all ducts and pipes has been
indicated.
17) Check the project door schedule to see if all doors requiring ventilation
openings have been adequately undercut or louvered.
18) Check to see that there are no exhaust fans or return air openings in a room
were combustion is occuring.
19) Check to see that the control air compressor is shown on all pneumatic
control design drawings.
20) Check to see that all motors and motors starters are shown in the motor and
motor control schedule.
21) Check to see if temperature control diagrams have been shown for all
equipment requiring automatic control.
22) Check all ceilings to be sure that air outlets do not interfere with lights.
23) Check to see if sufficient valves have been placed in the system to allow
isolation of risers and mains for service and drain down.
24) Check head room available for all ceiling hung units such as unit heaters.
25) Check to be sure that all air flows shown balance. Check room by room
balance and check room totals against flow shown for air handling units and
fans.
26) Check to see if fire dampers have been shown in accordance with the local
Codes and ordinances.
27) Check acoustical requirements of the project to see if all required duct lining
and sound traps have been provided to give the required attenuation of noise.
28) Check to see that all pipes are continued to point of connection.
29) Check to see if all motors and other electrical information has been given to
the electrical designer.
30) Check the specifications for completeness and accuracy.
31) Check the project drawings to see that all room names and numbers and
column numbers have been properly included.
32) Check the design drawings for completion of the job name title blocks, and
required signatures.
33) Water and air balance and measuring fittings.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 32
f. Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P & IDs)

1) The purpose of the P & ID is to translate the process and operational
requirements, as established in the process Flow diagrams or otherwise, into
a design concept that shows basic equipment, piping and control
requirements which provide the basis for engineering and detail design of a
functional system.
2) Content:
(a) The process and instrumentation diagram must clearly present and
identify all pieces of operational equipment and control elements and
show all piping and other relationships that define the particular process
or operation covered by the P&ID, as follows. Each piece of equipment
to include:
(1) Service Names.
(2) Equipment Numbers.
(3) Number of units operating or standby.
(4) Sizes, duties or capacities.
(5) Material of construction.
(6) Insulation for thermal or personnel protection.
(7) Sizes and types of equipment connections if different from
associated piping.
(b) Process and Utility Piping, to include:
(1) Valves, manifolding, blinds, hoses and flow directions.
(2) Identification of main flow streams by heavy lines and auxiliary flow
streams by medium lines.
(3) Identification of flows from or to another P&ID.
(4) Special piping items such as expansion joints, strainers and special
valves.
(5) Identification of all sumps and sump sizes.
(6) Pipeline identification including facility number, line size and piping
material specification.
(7) Piping reducers (not shown at main line branches), line and
equipment drains, vents, sample points, traps, separators, relief
valves, equipment seal water and/or water purge connections, all
with sizes indicated.
(8) Insulation for thermal or personnel protection, steam or electric heat
tracing.
(c) Instrumentation, to include:
(1) Process control instrumentation, using symbols and letters shown in
the International Society of Automation (ISA) S5.1.
(2) Instrument signal lines (pneumatic, electric, capillary or other).
(3) Control Valves and Actuators with bypass manifolds.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 33
(4) Block valves for pressure tops.

(5) Instrumentation purchased with equipment packages that require
field mounting, piping or wiring.
(6) Instrument numbers.
(7) Control, safety and relief valve sizes and fail positions.
(8) Interlocks shown in simplified form.
(d) General
(1) Appropriate notes, reference drawings, and key.
18. Electrical Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Electrical Engineering Drawings shall be in accordance with the general
drawing procedure of this document.
b. The drawings shall show in sufficient detail for bidding and construction purposes
such features of lighting, motor, grounding, cable and raceway installation
considered essential to system physical, function and circuitry characteristics and
the interfaces with other disciplines.
c. The design drawings shall include:
1) Single line diagrams, showing: primary and secondary power distribution
systems; normal, stand-by, emergency and special power supply systems;
switch gear, equipment and cable sizes and ratings; power and lighting
systems; main and secondary distribution panels; and protective and control
devices. Where appropriate a protection and relay three line drawing shall be
provided. Plan and profile drawings of the cable layouts shall be provided
identifying other (crossing) utilities.
2) Layout drawings, showing: switchgear and equipment locations and room
layouts; primary and secondary power cable and raceway size and routing;
lighting panel, fixture and switch locations; distribution panel, motor control
center, motor, receptacle and miscellaneous power equipment locations and
sizes; grounding grids and local connections, all in sufficient detail to permit
coordination of the work with that of other disciplines and for construction.
3) Schematic, control, wire connection and riser diagrams; detail, typical and
standard drawings, showing necessary installation to supplement data
described above and in the specification to provide sufficient information for
bidding and construction of the complete electrical work.
4) Cable and conduit, lighting panel schedules shall be provided.
d. Provisions for Special Services
1) Certain provisions for special services will be included in the electrical
drawings. These services pertain to the telecommunication and control
systems design groups and in general involve the following systems:
(a) Telephone
(b) Public address
(c) Fire and life safety
(d) Security

Rev. 0 4.2 - 34
(e) Surveillance
(f) Master clock
(g) Process equipment and control
(h) Environmental equipment and control
(i) Directional signals
2) Raceway, wiring and physical location of electrical connections to equipment
and devices for the above services will be indicated on the electrical layout
drawings. The connections will be shown in the form of riser diagrams in
sufficient detail for the material take-off and for determining routing of the
raceway installation. The location of the equipment and instruments, type and
size of wiring and the block diagrams of interconnections will be marked by
the pertinent design groups on the electrical coordination prints, or sketches,
for inclusion in the electrical drawing package.
e. Electrical Standard Drawings, Details, Notes and Symbols
1) Installation arrangements, details and methods which are standard industry
practice and typical for use on the project, are to be identified, developed and
produced as standard or typical drawings for use in the individual packages,
as necessary.
2) Symbols: per Uniform Drawing Standards (UDS).
3) The electrical symbols, abbreviations, and notes of typical or repetitive nature
shall be shown on general or standard electrical drawings.
f. Single Line Diagrams
1) The single line shall include the interface with the supply service; the main
substation; stand-by generation plant; high and medium voltage switchgear;
and distribution circuits. Local substations and loads shall be indicated on the
diagram by a block identifying the substation and load size.
2) Single line diagrams shall also be prepared to detail each local substation
indicating the primary switches and circuit breakers, transformers, secondary
main and tie breakers, bus connections, feeder breakers, meters, relays,
protective devices, motor control centers, power distribution panels, and
auxiliary power services such as Alternating Current (AC) and Direct Current
(DC) lighting and control power sources.
g. Layout Drawings
1) Arrangement
(a) Layout drawings showing area plan views shall contain an overall key
plan. The appropriate area shall be cross hatched on the key plan to
provide quick reference to the area covered in the particular drawing. A
project north arrow shall be placed on the drawing for orientation.
(b) Column lines shall be shown and identified on all plan views. Partial
plans shall be located with respect to column lines. Sections and other
views shall be arranged to clearly show work in relation to column lines
and floor elevations.
(c) Except where required for clarity, sections shall be cut looking to the top
or to the left of the basic plan view sheet. Full height or full length

Rev. 0 4.2 - 35
sections shall be used where practical. View-directions of developed

elevations shall be identified.
(d) Sectional plans shall be cut looking down. orientation of-sections shall be
consistent with the reference view and the general plan orientation. The
scale shall be 1:50 or larger.
2) Dimensions
(a) Symbols identifying electrical equipment and apparatus shall have
horizontal dimensions shown on plan view only, except in the event
clarity is lost by this method. Vertical dimensions and elevations shall be
shown on all sections and elevations.
(b) Location of electrical equipment and raceways.
(c) Dimensions shall be shown by dimensions preferably from adjacent
column lines or floors and alternatively from adjoining major structures or
equipment.
(d) Repetition of dimensions within a single sheet shall be avoided. Where
necessary, dimensions of lines crossing matchlines shall be made to the
matchline to avoid overlapping of dimensions on matching sheets.
Dimensions Not To Scale shall be identified by "NTS."
(e) Every effort shall be made to produce drawings to scale.
(f) Dimension arrows shall be small, sharp and neat. Dimension figures
shall be lettered parallel to and above the dimension line and arranged to
read from the bottom border or right hand border.
3) Electrical Equipment and Raceway Layout
(a) Major electrical equipment such as switchgear, load centers, motor
control centers, transformers and raceways, shall be shown on electrical
layout drawings for the pertinent buildings. Items outside of the buildings
such as underground distribution including primary and secondary
power, street lighting, telecommunications and control cable shall be
shown on general utility drawings. Equipment and raceway numbers
(except for lighting) shall be indicated on the drawings.
(b) Cable trays, enclosed wireways and underground ducts will be shown on
the layout drawings with appropriate notations as to their type, size,
configuration and general location with respect to building lines and
grades.
(c) Conduits for power and power control cables shall be shown on the
layout drawings whether run exposed or embedded. The conduit runs
may be shown partially in a diagramatic form but in sufficient detail to
show location of connections at the motors and at the motor controllers.
The conduit runs between the motors and the remote controllers or
power source, may be shown as a complete run or a partial run,
assuming that, a suitable description of the destination of the "home
runs," such as to motor control centers or distribution panels, will be
given.
(d) Conduits for lighting, convenience outlets and special service
receptacles will be shown on the layout drawings only where embedded

Rev. 0 4.2 - 36
in floor, wall or ceiling. No exposed or hidden runs (such as above hung

acoustical ceilings) will be shown.
(e) Rules and Codes pertaining to the conduit type, size and installation and
the number, type and size of wires that may be intalled within the
conduits and methods of connection at the fixtures and devices, will be
shown in the standard drawings, specifications and design criteria, as
applicable. Where sizes, routing and destinations are shown on the
drawings they may be shown either directly on the layouts or in the
raceway schedules, whichever is considered more expeditious and
appropriate. However, once the method for describing these conduit runs
has been decided it shall be consistent within a given design package.
4) Lighting Layout Drawings
(a) All lighting fixtures, lighting panels, switches, and circuity shall be shown
on the drawings. When conduits are shown the number of wires in each
raceway shall be indicated with short diagonal lines crossing the raceway
and two lengths shall be used. The longer (about 6 mm) shall indicate
the number of phase wires and the shorter (about 3 mm) shall indicate
the number of neutral wires. Lighting panel designation and circuit
number shall be shown for each fixture, switch, and outlet served by the
particular panel and circuit.
(b) A lighting fixture symbol, identified and described in the "Lighting Fixture
Schedule" shall be shown for each fixture or group of fixtures on the
lighting layout drawings.
5) Power Layout Drawings
(a) All distribution panels transformers, switches, disconnets switches,
convenience outlets and circuity shall be shown on the drawings. When
conduits are shown the number of wires in each raceway shall be
indicated with short diagonal lines crossing the raceway and two lengths
shall be used. The longer (about 6 mm) shall indicate the number of
phase wires and the shorter (about 3 mm) shall indicate the number of
neutral wires. Power panel designation and circuit number shall be
shown for each device, disconnect switch, and outlet served by the
particular panel and circuit.
6) Arrangement Drawings and Details
(a) These drawings shall be prepared for electrical equipment rooms,
substations and any other areas where equipment location, arrangement
and other requirements, such as access and environmental conditions
are to be considered in detail.
h. Schematic Diagrams
1) Schematic diagrams showing connections between devices and illustrating
the scheme of operation shall be prepared for switchgear, generators, motor
drives and control devices where it is deemed necessary for the proper
description and coordination. Wherever possible, typical diagrams shall be
used. All connections shall be numbered.
2) Control circuitry for motors and major electrical equipment shall be shown
using, wherever possible, typical schematic diagrams of control and block dia-
grams to indicate connecting raceways and wiring. Where necessary, the
typical schematic control diagrams may be supplemented with dissimilarity

Rev. 0 4.2 - 37
tables and tables showing interlocking between the motors and control
devices. A typical schematic control diagram will be cross-referenced to the
particular motor by notation in the equipment list on the layout drawings, or in
the single line diagram drawing, whichever method is considered best for a
given design package.
i. Connection Diagrams (When Required)
1) Riser diagrams shall be prepared if necessary to supplement the layout
drawings in showing various systems. These would typically be fire alarm,
telephone, public address, security and systems controls.
j. Schedules (When Required)
1) Circuit schedules shall list all power, control, instrumentation, and
telecommunication cable showing origin, termination and cable description,
including number of conductors and conductor sizes. Lighting wires shall not
be shown in the circuit schedule.
2) Raceway schedules shall designate all raceways, showing their size, type,
origin and terminations.
3) Panel (lighting and power) schedules shall depict each panel in tabulation-
form, indicating type and size of main bus, main and branch circuit breakers,
voltage, phases, circuit'numbers and. service designation, watts per phase
and total watts.
19. Control Systems and Instrumentation Drawing Requirements
a. The Project Control Systems and Instrumentation Drawings shall conform to the
general procedures stated in the preceding text except if otherwise specified in this
Section.
b. Piping and Instrument Diagram (P&ID)
1) P&ID is a diagram which shows the interconnection of process equipment and
the instrumentation used to control the process. In the process industry, a
standard set of symbols is used to prepare drawings of processes. The
instrument symbols used in these drawings are generally based on
International Society of Automation (ISA) Standard S5. 1.
2) P&IDs play a significant role in control system. It provide basis for the
development of system control functionality, define the total instrumentation
and control requirements.
3) P&ID shall be jointly developed by process, mechanical and C&I.
c. Control System Architecture / Overall Riser Diagram
1) Control system architecture depicts the architecture of the plant control
systems and the interfaces amongst the systems required for overall
operation of process plant.
2) The required Control System is determined by the level of
functionality, complexity and safety of a plant. This may comprise of process
control system, safety instrumented system, building automation system, fire
alarm system, fire suppression system, SACDA control system.
3) Control system architecture drawings shall also show supervisory level
equipment such as operator workstation, engineering workstation, large
screen display, Instrument asset management server, historian server, cyber

Rev. 0 4.2 - 38
security server, control panel type, interface with other third party systems,
fire and gas system and also network equipment.
4) Control system architecture shall clearly define the locations, i.e. main
locations, remote I/O locations, indoor/outdoor location, control room/building
limit.
5) The major control, Ethernet and communication cables are to be shown and
specified.
6) The control system architecture is conceptual in nature and is used for
specifying the requirements of the control system to the PCS/SCADA
Supplier. This drawing is provided as supporting documentation for the
process control system requisition.
d. Instrument Schedules or I/O Summaries
1) Where applicable the following information shall appear on the Instrument
Schedules:
(a) Instrument identification number
(b) Service
(c) P & ID drawing number
(d) Data sheet number
(e) Location (panel or field)
(f) Location plan number
(g) Installation detail number
(h) Material requisition number
(i) Electrical schematic drawing number
(j) Instrument type
(k) I/O type
(l) Control system
(m) Signal level
(n) Instrument range
(o) Calibration range
(p) Alarm setting points
e. Data Sheets
1) Sufficient information shall be provided on instrument data sheets for
procurement of instruments. The following shall be included in the
information:
(a) Instrument identification number, service, and function
(b) Process conditions (normal, maximum and minimum)
(c) Scales
(d) Charts
(e) Materials

Rev. 0 4.2 - 39
(f) Signal levels

(g) Power sources
(h) Calibration
(i) Material requisition number
(j) Accessories
(k) Manufacturer and model number. (This information is to be completed
after award)
f. Installation Details
1) Sufficient information shall be provided to ensure proper field installation
including:
(a) Size of process connection
(b) Elevation of instrument with respect to sensing tap locations
(c) Material lists and material quantities
(d) Cable Block Diagram
(e) Cable Schedule
(f) Cable tray layout or cable conduit schedule.
g. Loop Diagrams
1) Loop diagrams shall be provided to show the interconnections and working
relationships of individual components with complex control loops.
2) Typical control loop drawings shall, generally, be provided for simple
repetitive control loops.
3) Loop diagrams may be either pneumatic or electronic, however, if electronic,
they shall not replace the electrical schematic, or connection diagrams, but
shall supplement such drawings.
h. Control Panels
1) Control panel drawings shall show overall size, cross-sections, general
arrangement of equipment and legend plates, but shall not include structural
fabrication information except where critical to appearance or functional
details.
2) A key plan shall be provided to show panel location relative or other panels,
building features, etc.
i. Logic Diagrams
1) Logic diagrams shall be used as a means of communication for complex
control circuits. Simple repetitive control circuits shall not require logic
diagrams.
2) Logic diagrams shall be developed prior to the preparation of associated
elementary electrical diagrams.
j. Location Plans
1) Location plans shall show the locations of individual sensing elements, control
elements and valves, pneumatic terminal boxes, and local control panels as

Rev. 0 4.2 - 40
required for field location and installation. Elevation of taps and components,
if critical, shall be shown. The areas covered by these locations shall conform
whenever possible to similar location drawings for electrical and mechanical
systems or to master plan divisions developed for the project areas.
2) Indication shall be given on the drawing of the type of electrical connection
required, i.e. power supply, control signal, instrumentation (4 to 20 mA),
instrumentation low level (e.g. thermocouple, RTD, MV etc).
20. Telecommunications Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Telecommunications Drawings shall adhere to general organizational and
project drafting Standards.
b. Organization
1) The drawings shall be categorized by systems or subsystems and numbered
in accordance with the project numbering system. Depending on complexity
and project requirements, system or subsystem drawings may include all or a
part of the drawings in the following list. The general order shall be adhered to
for uniformity. Inapplicable drawings shall be omitted from the sequences
shown.
(a) Block Diagram of the Telecommunication systems
(b) System or Subsystem Functional Block and Level Diagrams
(c) System or Subsystem Site Plans
(d) System or Subsystem Equipment Layouts
(e) System or Subsystem Grounding Details
(f) Underground Cable Routing Key Diagram
(g) Cable Schematics
(h) Cable Building Entrance and Termination Details
(i) Cable Building Vault Layout and MDF Layout
(j) Duct Plan
(k) Hardware Details
c. General Notes: The general telecommunications notes shall include all notes,
symbols, and abbreviations pertaining to telecommunications engineering.
d. Systems Block Diagram: The telecommunications systems block diagram is an
overall systems block diagram.
e. Functional Block and Level Diagram
1) The functional block and level diagram shall show major components or
functions of a system indicated by blocks of variable sizes and shapes and
the interconnecting path of the signal or electrical flow indicated by
arrowheads on connecting lines.
2) Internal connections within the major items are usually omitted.
3) For convenience or clarity, partial internal connections, schematic, or circuit
functions information may be included.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 41
4) Between each block shall be shown the proposed or expected level and
circuit impedance. The level will normally be shown in dBm or dBmO.
f. Layout Plans: The telecommunications site plan shall contain a plan view of the
installations, locations, and dimensions of major equipment, and buildings, location
of survey markers, and if applicable, antenna azimuths and take-off angles.
g. Equipment Location
1) The equipment location shall contain a plan view of a room or an area. The
drawing shall reference wall thickness, direction-of door swing, access
openings, location and height of all partitions, columns, and sufficient
dimensions to establish spatial limits in all directions.
2) All telecommunications equipment shall be shown to scale and identified in
the equipment list.
h. Grounding
1) The grounding system shall contain installation information for connections or
terminations of a general grounding system.
i. Cable Key Diagram
1) The underground cable routing key diagram shall be superimposed on an
Area Plan Layout. It shall show an overview of the cable routing from
distribution frame to various terminations.
2) Direct burial of cable may only be used with the express permission of the
Royal Commission in Jubail.
j. Cable Schematic
1) The cable schematic may include several sheets. The following includes, but
is not limited to, information that shall be shown:
(a) Cable lengths, cable types, cable sizes and gauges plus numbers and
counts
(b) Termination points and facility or building number
(c) Terminal counts and types of terminals
(d) Location of load coils if necessary
(e) Location of any MDF or IDF
(f) In some cases it will be necessary to show details of complex splicing
k. Cable Termination
1) The cable building entrance and termination details shall show the details
necessary to terminate cables on terminal blocks.
2) At locations other than buildings, structural details for the support of items or
structures to mount the terminating device shall be provided together with the
details of the device.
l. Cable Vault and MDF Layout
1) The cable vault and MDF layout shall show location layout racking, cabling,
splicing, steps and access ports. The drawing may show the relationship of
the vault to the building, an elevation view showing length, width, headroom
and duct arrangements.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 42
2) Main distributing frame drawing may show the placement, layout,

arrangement and numbering of wall or floor type main, intermediate and
combined distributing frames.
m. Duct Plan: The duct plan shall be a map type drawing (true to scale) of as many
streets as required, showing:
1) Interface cabinet with coordinates (not more than one per drawing set)
2) Cross connection cabinet(s)
3) Distribution point locations
4) Line of duct route
5) Number of ducts and formation in each section
6) Position, type, identification number and coordinates of each jointing chamber
7) Center-to-center distances between jointing chambers
8) Distance of duct rote center line from property line, center line of road or other
designated bench mark
n. Hardware Details: Detail drawings shall include sufficient information to clearly
define type, mounting, etc., as needed for purchase and installation.
21. Sample Schedules
a. Door and Frame Schedule: Table 4.2.F shows a sample of Door and Frame
Schedule.
TABLE 4.2.F: SAMPLE DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE
DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE

Door
Fire
Size Rating Hardware
Mark W H Thk. Material Glazing Label Group Notes
b. Window Schedule: Table 4.2.G shows a sample Window Schedule
TABLE 4.2.G: SAMPLE WINDOW SCHEDULE
WINDOW SCHEDULE
Size
Mark W H Type Material Hardware Group Notes

Rev. 0 4.2 - 43
B. Submittal Organization
1. All drawing information shall be submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail as
described below. All drawing information submitted shall be in accordance with the
Drawing Standards specified in this document and must comprise stamped and signed
record drawings.
2. Submissions to the RCJ by the A/E and/or EPC Contractors fall into formal and informal
submissions.
a. Informal Submissions may be made at any time during the process that the A/E
and/or EPC Contractors determine is appropriate with the RCJ for an interim review.
Initially these Design Drawings are not ready for construction issue. At this stage
these drawings may be issued as "Issued for Review," "Issued for Coordination" or
"Issued for Information.” The revisions shall be indicated alphabetically A, B, C, etc.
and dated at each revision.
b. Formal Submissions are for when completed Contract Drawings are issued for
construction. When the Design/Contract Drawing is "Issued for Construction,"
Revision 0 shall be indicated with subsequent revisions indicated numerically as 1,
2, 3, etc. Each revision shall be dated. Contract Drawings shall be approved by the
RCJ and issued as follows:
1) Delete all reference to revisions for preliminary issues
2) Assign the revision "0" (zero)
3) Fill in the revision description block "Issued for Construction" and complete
sign-off
c. A reproducible record copy (reproducible hard-copy) of every Drawing issued,
except those issued for interim review, must be made by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor for the permanent reference file.
d. All plotted drawings, when submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail, shall be
neatly fan-folded to a same size, and kept sequentially within each package.
e. Where applicable, issued prints shall be stamped to indicate the purpose of
restrictions on release of the drawing. Canceled, superseded, or superseding
drawings shall be clearly and boldly indicated on the Drawing and recorded in the
form of a revision note; such as “VOID - SUPERSEDED BY DWG. NO._____”, or
“SUPERSEDED DWG. NO._____.” File names and Drawing numbers of
superseded and voided drawings shall not be reused.
3. Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC) for CAD Documentation
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for checking the CAD documentation
for compliance with the Standards identified in this Engineering Manual. A signed
and dated statement of compliance from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must be
included with the “Issued for Construction” drawings.
b. At the close of the project, the Royal Commission in Jubail’s Project Manager will
conduct an audit that will include comparing the CAD documents with the built
Project. A visual examination of the CAD drawings will be conducted to ensure the
presence, location, and approximate dimensional accuracy of all significant features
including, doors, windows, walls, columns, stairs, ramps, and other general floor-
plan layout items. Obvious errors or omissions will be noted on a review sheet.
Depending on the results of the visual audit, the Royal Commission in Jubail’s
Project Manager may conduct field verification of actual dimensions to compare with

Rev. 0 4.2 - 44
the CAD drawings. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required to resolve all issues
identified by the RCJ Project Manager review.
4. In addition to the electronic copies of the Drawings, the electronic data deliverable
package shall include the files mentioned below. Files as described below and related
notes or specifications, if any, to be included in the deliverables are to be submitted in
Adobe .pdf format as well as a printed copy.
a. Letter size prints of each drawing file to be used for reference (no scale required)
b. File Description Sheets
c. Layering Documentation
d. QA/QC Documentation
e. Plot Style or plot configuration document as requested
f. Readme file as defined in Subsection 4.2.2.B.8.e
5. Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) documentation shall be in accordance with
Subsection 4.3.11.
6. It is the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to organize drawing information
coherently and maintain reasonable file sizes.
7. Graphic/Drawing Files
a. The two types of drawing files to be included in the deliverables are Sheet Files and
Model Files unless otherwise directed by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
1) A Sheet File is a single plot ready file. They are to be completely formatted
and plot-ready. One Sheet File is required for each drawing sheet included in
the construction document set. Sheet Files shall be formatted utilizing paper
space. Plotting shall be set to plot a layout with a plot scale formatted to
match the hardcopy submittals. Each sheet file must have all external-
referenced drawings bound to it.
2) A Model File describes a subset of a building’s geometry and its physical
components: walls, doors, windows, columns, beams, outlets, ducts, etc. A
Model File is always drawn at 1 = 1.
b. Any reference files pertinent to the content of the Model or Sheet File constitutes
required data and is to be included on the File Description print out. Drawings using
reference files are to list referenced files on the title block layer as well as on the File
Description sheet. This list shall give an account of dependent files for the complete
document. This information shall also be added to the file description for Model or
Sheet files. In all submittals reference files shall be located in the same directory as
the dependent files and shall NOT include path names in the reference file
attachment. Refer to Subsection 4.2.2.A.5.d for more information about referenced
files and xrefs.
c. Files submitted in AutoCAD, version approved by the RCJ, must be convertible to
Microstation without the loss of data which includes Line weights, Colors, or
Layering. The accurate translation of files submitted by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor and, if necessary, any required corrections, will be the responsibility of
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 45
8. File Transmittal
a. Electronic files shall be delivered on CD ROM in plastic cases, formatted using the
Windows platform.
b. Electronic files submitted on floppy disks, flash disks, zip drives, etc. are not
accepted.
c. All electronic file submittals shall be checked using latest anti-virus software prior to
delivery to the Royal Commission in Jubail.
d. CD ROM labeling for typical drawing files shall be as shown in Figure 4.2.D below:
FIGURE 4.2.D: CD ROM LABELING
Royal Commission
for Jubail
<Project Name & No.>
<Submittal
<Date> Stage >
Drawings:
<Discipline>
Disc 1 of 3
<Company Name>
<Telephone #>
<E-mail address>
<Website>
e. A readme file shall be included on disk number 1 that contains the above
information along with an index of drawings that includes drawing file name, drawing
title, drawing number within the set, scale, drawing date, and xref listing and their
paths. A hard copy of this readme file shall be delivered with the disks.
f. The content of electronic drawings must match the delivered original hard copy set.
To ensure the integrity of the electronic drawing set upon delivery to the Royal
Commission in Jubail, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall:
1) Ensure the drawings adhere to the guidelines presented in this document.
Review the procedures for preparing drawings for submittal as detailed in the
preceding paragraphs.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 46
2) Include a hard copy index containing filenames and sheet numbers for each
submittal. This ensures the completeness of the drawing set and assists in
archival procedures.
3) Include a transmittal sheet with all submittals indicating the Royal
Commission in Jubail’s Project Number, Project Name and complete listing of
all materials submitted.
4) Include hard copy half-scale prints of all drawing submittals, when so directed.
5) Include plot configuration files whenever possible. A copy of the Plot Style
(.ctb or .stb) shall be submitted. The .plt files shall be submitted when
requested.
g. The receipt of electronic drawings alone does not alleviate the responsibility of the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor for providing hard copy documentation to the Royal
Commission in Jubail.
h. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Construction Record Drawings shall include
updated drawings reflecting revisions issued during construction. The Contractor’s
As-Built Documentation shall be, both in electronic and hardcopy format, submitted
to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for approval. These as-built documents shall,
upon approval, be submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail for review. Further
definition of As Built drawings is provided in Subsection 4.5.7.
9. No compressed files will be acceptable on the CD ROM. To reduce disc space
requirements, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall keep drawing sizes to the minimum.
C. Sheet Numbering
1. Comply with the Sheet Numbering and Naming requirements as defined in JMP 010202.
D. Typical Drafting Symbols

1. General
Comply and follow the illustrations of these drafting symbols when drafting a drawing.
a. Dimension-1
b. Dimension-2

Rev. 0 4.2 - 47
c. Leader-1
d. Leader-2
e. Detail
f. Sub Title
g. Section Title

Rev. 0 4.2 - 48
h. Title for Standard Detail
i. Reference to Standard Detail
j. Reference to Details
k. Section Arrow

Rev. 0 4.2 - 49
l. Elevation Arrow
m. Elevation Symbol for Plan
n. Elevation Symbol for Section
o. Setting Out Point Coordination

Rev. 0 4.2 - 50
SUBSECTION 4.2.3 SPECIFICATION STANDARDS
4.2.3. SPECIFICATION STANDARDS
A. Guiding Procurement Construction Specifications (GPCS)

1. Standard GPCS Sections will be provided by the RCJ as described in Subsection 1.1.5.
The procedure for modifying or excluding Sections is also described in Subsection 1.1.5.
2. CSI MasterFormat is the standard format for all RCJ GPCS Sections.
3. Building Systems Design Inc. SPECLINK-e is the standard software for development of
RCJ GPCS Sections.
B. Operations and Maintenance Manual
1. All specifications shall include provisions for the supply of manuals outlining assembly,
operation, and maintenance procedures for all equipment, furnishings, appliances and
finishes. Translations into the Arabic language shall be provided for all such publications.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 51
SUBSECTION 4.2.4 COST ESTIMATE STANDARDS
4.2.4. COST ESTIMATE STANDARDS
A. General
1. Cost estimates are to be submitted according to the Contract Deliverables by submittal
stage per Subsection 4.2.C as well as required per individual A/E and/or EPC Contractor
Technical Contract.
2. Cost estimates submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail must have backup
documentation. Quotations shall not be more than three (3) months old.
3. A/E and/or EPC Contractors must remain aware of current market rates for labor and
materials. Material rates may be compared to the outside market (e.g.: London
exchange) as these are world-wide trends.
4. Estimates must use up-to-date information for materials, labor, and transportation.
5. Estimated prices submitted by A/E and/or EPC Contractors are not meant for competitive
bidding – they must be reasonable and justifiable.
6. All estimates shall be cross-checked for consistency.
7. All calculations and formulas shall be limited to two (2) significant figures to the right of
the decimal place.
B. Overhead
1. Overhead charges are to be calculated and not presumed as a lump sum percentage.
Example: Labor costs may be based on the organization chart included in the contract
proposal document
C. Escalation
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must use current data as a base and allow for escalation
of cost to the midpoint of the construction contract. The Royal Commission in Jubail will
provide the percentage to be used for calculating escalation cost.
D. Contingency
1. At the 30% design stage (or earlier), the A/E and/or EPC Contractor may use
contingency factors to allow for a lack of vendor quotations.
2. Contingency factors shall approach zero (0) as vendor quotations become firmer later in
design.
3. Contingency is applied to cost only and not estimated quantities.
4. If wastage is to be considered for an item it shall be carried out in the cost breakdown
and not the quantities.
E. Life-Cycle
1. Estimates shall include the effects of any value analysis recommendations required by
the Royal Commission in Jubail as a result of a value analysis-life cycle cost analysis
procedure.
2. Refer to Subsection 4.3.8 for more detailed information on life cycle cost analyses.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 52
SUBSECTION 4.2.5 CALCULATIONS
4.2.5. CALCULATIONS
A. General
1. All calculations used for design shall be submitted according to the Contract Deliverables
by submittal stage per Subsection 4.2.C and as required per the Saudi Building Code, the
International Building Code (IBC), and the individual A/E and/or EPC Contractor
Technical Contract. See Section 2.4, References, for additional Codes and Standards by
discipline.
2. Calculations are to be grouped by discipline and subject matter. A cover sheet is required
to precede each group and contain the following information:
a. Name of Company, Organization, or Consultant submitting the calculations
b. Contract title and number
c. Discipline and subject
d. Name, date, and signature of designer and checker
e. Name of discipline supervisor, his signature, and date of approval
f. List of references used such as Codes, Standards, textbook, etc.
g. Index that itemizes all major parts of the design
3. Calculations must be prepared in SI units. Conventional units are only permitted when
calculations are made in compliance with a code or using a computer program that has
not yet been matriculated to SI units. Regardless, end results shall be in SI units.
Calculations completed in conventional units must be converted.
4. All calculations must be clear, concise, and easily followed.
B. Content
1. Submitted calculation sheets shall contain or present the following information:
a. List of all design parameters and assumptions used
b. List of all information used in the calculations with proper referencing
c. Example: soil bearing capacity = 100 kPa, see foundation and subsurface
investigation report by __________, dated __________, page _____.
d. Subject and calculation number
e. Each sheet is to be numbered “Sheet No. _____ of _____”
f. Include the designer’s initial on every sheet
2. Anytime a previously calculated value is used in another set of calculations, it shall be
referenced with a page number of where it was previously made.
3. Include sketches as necessary.
4. Highlight all conclusive calculation results so that the checker may follow it with ease.
C. Computer Aided Calculations
1. The following are mandatory requirements for use of any computer software employed in
the preparation of calculations:
a. For commercially purchased software used in the analysis, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall submit a signed and dated statement that it is an up-to-date legally

Rev. 0 4.2 - 53
licensed copy of the software and properly installed on computer equipment that
meets the software vendor’s requirements.
b. If the design software is developed for the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s own use it is
necessary to submit a signed and dated statement of verification. Statements of
verification and validation with supporting documentation are required for all design
software on Royal Commission in Jubail projects as follows:
1) Verification: documentation that the software gives correct answers as judged
against standard problems with hand calculated solutions or against similar
software.
2) Validation: signed statements that the software is being properly applied to
the problems it was intended to solve.
3) Verification and validation shall pre-date the first use of the software on the
Project.
c. Calculation printouts shall be organized and shall include enough narrative to
explain what is being presented along with a summary of the results. A binder of
computer printouts without this narrative will not be accepted.
2. If structural engineering design software is used, the calculations shall include the
following:
a. Description of the software used in the analysis
b. Explanation of any non-industry standard vocabulary used in the software
c. Idealization of the structure or a brief explanation on how the structure is
mathematically modeled
d. Model showing the node, members, and element numbering and loads for each load
case
e. Input file and load analysis showing how the joint, member, and element loads are
calculated
f. Output summary showing the member forces, joint displacements, and support
reactions. If necessary, the governing forces and stresses shall be identified in the
output data
g. Design conclusion or the summary of adopted design results
h. Example: In a reinforced rectangular concrete beam design, the width and depth of
the section, size and number of longitudinal reinforcing bars, and size and spacing
of stirrups
3. Checking of Calculations:
a. All calculations prepared by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be checked for
completeness, accuracy, numerical and geometrical correctness, resolutions for
interfaces and for any details affecting quality, constructability, and function of the
end product.
b. This checking is a distinct form of review and shall be performed by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor for all documents regardless of whether the document is selected
by the Royal Commission in Jubail for review.
c. Checking is also part of the regular design process and shall be performed by
individuals with equal or senior professional experience and competence to the

Rev. 0 4.2 - 54
originator of the document. No calculations shall be computed and checked by the

same person.
d. Calculation checkers and their work shall be identified and documented with dates.
e. Special attention shall be paid to the identification of interfaces and interferences to
their coordination including proper sequencing of construction and to the solution
between interfering Contract Packages and prepared by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractors.
4. Approval of the Calculations by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor:
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall designate an Engineering Supervisor or a
Project Manager who shall be accountable for all calculations and calculation
checking.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Engineering Supervisor or Project Manager shall
assign senior discipline engineers to perform all checking activities, supervise work
to assure compliance with requirements herein, review the design work and check
the engineering work to his satisfaction, and finally, provide written approval prior to
calculation being submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail for review.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 55
SUBSECTION 4.2.6 SCHEDULES OF QUANTITIES AND PRICE
4.2.6. SCHEDULES OF QUANTITIES AND PRICE
A. Schedule of Quantities
1. The Schedule of Quantities (SOQ) shall be included in the Request for Proposal (RFP)
documents.
2. The SOQ shall be divided into divisions that follow the Construction Specifications Index
(CSI) list of works. A template SOQ form will be provided to the A/E or EPC Contractor
by the RCJ.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for providing building system estimates,
detailed component estimates, and material take off (MTO) information for all elements
within the Project. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is additionally responsible for
estimating the man hours to construct the Project based on the design documentation.
4. The supporting information, generated by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, is for the RCJ’s
reference only. The bidding Contractors will see the quantities but not the estimate
pricing.
B. Material Take Off
1. The Material Take Off (MTO) shall be included with every design submittal from the A/E
or EPC Contractor at 30%, 60%, 90% and 100% complete stage.
2. The AE or EPC Contractor shall include a Schedule of Floor Areas in the MTO.
3. The MTO shall be assembled with a QA/QC signature sheet; a clear index page;
numerically ascending page numbers; Pay Item numbers and Titles (which are to be
repeated in the SOQ); and measurement calculations for each Pay Item - fully cross
referenced against either Drawings, Specifications or Computer Aided Design summary
sheets.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 56
SUBSECTION 4.2.7 RFP DOCUMENTS
4.2.7. RFP DOCUMENTS
A. PC Contracts
1. Preparation of engineering input to RFP documents for PC Contracts is governed by JMP
020308.
B. EPC Contracts
1. Preparation of engineering input to RFP documents for EPC Contracts is governed by
JMP 020306.
C. A/E Responsibilities
1. Per the requirements of the A/E Technical Contract, the A/E completes various elements
to be included in the RFP, which may include the following:
a. Scope of work
b. Design calculations
c. Drawings and specifications
d. Schedule of Quantities and Price
e. Estimated man hours and preliminary construction schedule
2. The RFP document itself is created by the RCJ with the information provided by the A/E.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 57
SUBSECTION 4.2.8 REVIEW / APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES
4.2.8. REVIEW/APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES
A. Submissions
1. Design submissions are to be provided to the RCJ in alignment with the Contract
Deliverables by submittal stage table in Subsection 4.2.C as well as required by the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor’s Technical Contract.
2. Submitted drawings shall conform to guidelines identified in this manual including all
drafting guidelines in Chapter 4.
B. Reviews
1. Design Reviews – both internal, within the A/E and/or EPC Contractor firm, and external
are governed by JMP 020301. This JMP outlines the procedure, personnel
responsibilities, process, review items, and quality checking required.
2. Review of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor drawings or documents by the RCJ shall not
relieve the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of any of its obligations to meet all the
requirements of the Contract nor relieve the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of the
responsibility for the correctness of such drawings and documents. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall make any changes that are necessary to make the work conform to the
provisions and intent of the Contract.
3. Under no circumstances shall the requirement for reviewing the submitted Design
drawings be waived.
4. Standard review process of submittals made by A/E and/or A/E EPC Contractors requires
RCJ reviewers to make comments and assign codes on standard review forms, which
are then transmitted to the A/E and/or A/E EPC Contractor for responses. Depending on
the assigned review code, A/E and/or A/E EPC Contractor’s compliance is verified in a
resubmittal of the reviewed package or in the package submitted for the following stage.
At the discretion of the RCJ, the following nonstandard process may be requested for
some reviews.
a. Drawing reviewed by the RCJ’s Reviewer will be labeled “Review Print”, dated, and
initialed by the Reviewer and shall be used for review purposes only. While a drawing
is in review with the RCJ reviewer, no changes are to be made to that drawing
without full coordination with the Reviewer.
b. The RCJ’s Reviewer will review the drawing’s conformance to this manual and all
drafting guidelines identified in Chapter 4. The Reviewer will not propose changes to
arrangements, methods of presentation, or details unless they are in conflict with this
manual.
c. The RCJ’s Reviewer comments will be in the following format:
1) Red Pen: written comments for correction
2) Yellow Highlighter: correct work that has been checked
3) Red Highlighter: work that requires changes, additions, and/or deletions
(typically including red pen comments)
d. Upon receipt by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
scan the Reviewer’s marked up original hardcopy for record. Once changes have
been revised on the digital drawing, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall highlight
those items in green. Once all items are highlighted in green, the individual from the

Rev. 0 4.2 - 58
SUBSECTION 4.2.8 REVIEW / APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES
A/E and/or EPC Contractor who completed the revision work will sign and date the
hard copy adjacent to the Reviewer’s signature and scan for record.
e. Once the reviewer is satisfied that the drawings are in conformance with this manual,
the Reviewer will request the corrected drawing be resubmitted for record. This
drawing will be reviewed by the Reviewer’s supervisor for general conformance to
this manual.

Rev. 0 4.2 - 59
SECTION 4.3 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.3.0. DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Using this Section .......................................................................................................... 1
4.3.1. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 2
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
4.3.2. PRELIMINARY STUDIES .............................................................................................. 3
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
4.3.3. ENVIRONMENTAL (ASSESSMENTS, STUDIES AND PERMITTING) ....................... 4
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4
B. References .................................................................................................................... 4
4.3.4. SUSTAINABILITY REPORT.......................................................................................... 5
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 5
B. Submission Requirements............................................................................................. 5
4.3.5. VALUE ENGINEERING ................................................................................................. 6
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 6
B. Phasing .......................................................................................................................... 6
4.3.6. DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBR’S) ............................................................................ 7
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 7
B. DBR Contents ................................................................................................................ 7
C. Submission, Review, and Approval ............................................................................... 8
4.3.7. LAND ALLOCATION REQUESTS ................................................................................ 9

Rev. 0 4.3 - i
A. Definition ........................................................................................................................ 9
B. A/E Responsibilities ....................................................................................................... 9
4.3.8. LIFE CYCLE COSTING AND DESIGN SERVICE LIFE .............................................. 10
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 10
B. Phasing ......................................................................................................................... 10
4.3.9. RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING .............................................. 11
A. Civil Defense and Industrial Safety............................................................................... 11
B. Process Safety Management ....................................................................................... 11
C. Environmental Risk Management Planning ................................................................. 11
4.3.10. THIRD PARTY CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND INTERFACE CONTROL
DOCUMENT) ................................................................................................................................... 12
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 12
B. Interface Control Document (ICD) ................................................................................ 12
4.3.11. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROCEDURES ......... 14
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 14
B. Process ......................................................................................................................... 14
4.3.12. BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS................................................... 15
A. Alternates – To be included in GPCS Section 012300 ................................................ 15
B. Allowances – To be included GPCS Section 012100 .................................................. 15
C. Substitutions – To be included GPCS Section 012500 ................................................ 15
D. A/E Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 15
4.3.13. CONTRACTUAL RESTRICTIONS ............................................................................... 16
A. Contract Modifications .................................................................................................. 16
B. Work Restrictions ......................................................................................................... 16
4.3.14. SPECIAL PROCEDURES ............................................................................................ 17
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 17

Rev. 0 4.3 - ii
SUBSECTION 4.3.0 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS
4.3.0. DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining design phase requirements to be used for the Royal Commission in
Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E) or Engineer,
Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Drawing requirements in Subsection 4.2.2, Field
Investigations and Existing Conditions in Section 4.4, and Construction Phase
requirements in Section 4.5.
2. Applicability
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Chapter 4 abbreviations
Not Applicable
6. Codes
Not Applicable
7. Standards
1. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as
appropriate.
8. Related Sections
1. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Sections related to Chapter 4
9. Approvals
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and take action on all project
submissions, reference Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Using this Section
This Section further details required processes and documentation for the design phase and
the role the A/E and/or EPC Contractor design team plays in establishing a basis for the
Project, analyzing Project needs, evaluating options, and checking the results. This Section is
intended to be general for all disciplines. Refer to Chapter 5 for discipline-specific information.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 1
4.3.1. GENERAL
A. Introduction
1. Section 4.3 covers the requirements to be met by A/E and/or EPC Contractors in the
design of Projects for the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) and within their jurisdiction.
Additional requirements may be included in the A/E and/or EPC Contractor Technical
Contract.
2. Any exceptions or deviations from these requirements shall be submitted to the RCJ for
review. Only once written approval from the RCJ is received shall such modifications be
considered acceptable for the specified Project.
a. Exceptions or deviations are at the RCJ’s discretion and those permitted on one
Project may or may not be approved on other Projects.
b. All modifications must be clearly identified in the Design Basis Report, refer to
Subsection 4.3.6.
3. The design requirements are for reference only. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is not
relieved of the obligation to ensure that the work performed by them is fit for its intended
use and meets generally applicable criteria for quality and safety. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor are the Design Authority and as such, shall be responsible for the quality of
work and services performed by them as per the conditions of the Technical Contract.
4. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall give due consideration to good design practice that
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Design criteria
b. Material availability
c. Rapid construction (if applicable)
d. Maintainability
e. Energy and water conservation
f. Public safety and protection of property
g. Standardized components / equipment
h. Acoustics control
i. Corrosion protection and control
j. Third party approvals
k. End user document verification
l. Reference and as-built drawings
m. Existing facilities
1) Safety plan extension/improvement
2) Existing structure stability
3) Phasing and construction sequence
4) Conformance with existing
5) Demolition work

Rev. 0 4.3 - 2
SUBSECTION 4.3.2 PRELIMINARY STUDIES
4.3.2. PRELIMINARY STUDIES
A. General
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall conduct preliminary studies to validate the Project
scope and budget as defined in the Technical Contract. The intention is to generate
high-level information that will be the foundation for detailed design development for the
Project. These studies may include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Feasibility studies / reports
b. Master planning
c. Programming, space planning
d. Traffic and other site analyses
e. Concept design
f. Cost estimate / validation
g. Code Analysis
h. Water Usage Projections

Rev. 0 4.3 - 3
SUBSECTION 4.3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL (ASSESSMENTS, STUDIES AND PERMITTING)
4.3.3. ENVIRONMENTAL (ASSESSMENTS, STUDIES AND PERMITTING)
A. General
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail has always been recognized as a leader in
environmental performance management and has encouraged industrial growth in the
industrial cities while maintaining a fine-tuned balance and harmony between the
environmental protection and heavy industrialization. The RCJ continues to refine its
environmental management system to better support decision making and to enhance
the ability to protect the environment and the public health.
2. The industries and environment co-exist in an integrated fashion through transparency
and accountability with increasing use of cleaner and energy efficient technology,
reducing potential environmental impacts, influencing positively on local community and
upholding the highest ethical standards.
3. Within the Royal Commission in Jubail jurisdiction, environmental processes are
governed by the Royal Commission in Jubail Environmental Regulations document.
4. Aspects of the environment to consider include, but are not limited to:
a. Air Environment
b. Water Environment
c. Hazardous Materials Management
d. Waste Management
e. Dredging
f. Noise
B. References
See Subsection 4.4.3 Environmental Investigations and Studies for more detailed information.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 4
SUBSECTION 4.3.4 SUSTAINABILITY REPORT
4.3.4. SUSTAINABILITY REPORT
A. General
1. A/E and/or EPC Contractors are required to monitor sustainable features, products, and
systems designed into Projects and submit reports throughout the design process as
documentation.
2. Section 3.4 identifies detailed requirements for sustainability on projects within the RCJ’s
jurisdiction.
B. Submission Requirements
1. 10% Stage
Identify the Project’s sustainability goals in a report
2. 30% Stage
Provide information on how the Project design intends to achieve the sustainability goals
in a report
a. A LEED Checklist may be submitted as evidence. For infrastructure projects a

CEEQUAL Checklist or score sheet can be submitted in lieu of the LEED checklist.
b. Identify any additional first or life-cycle costs that may be incurred by implementing
each item
c. Each sustainability effort must be approved, in writing, by the RCJ in order to
proceed with them into detailed design
3. 100% Stage
Final design report indicating what sustainability measures were implemented in the
design
4. Substantial Completion
Validation report at the end of construction documenting what sustainability measures
were included and constructed in the final Project.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 5
SUBSECTION 4.3.5 VALUE ENGINEERING
4.3.5. VALUE ENGINEERING
A. General
1. Value Engineering (VE) is carried out when the design cost of a project is in excess of its
budgeted cost or when the A/E and/or EPC Contractor identifies areas for value
improvement. The goal is to optimize a project’s value by reducing its cost while
preserving basic functions and program requirements.
2. VE may be accomplished with alternate products, systems, or design strategies to affect
constructability, suitability, functionality, material availability, safety and reliability,
operations, maintenance, etc.
3. If VE efforts propose alternate strategies that are in conflict with Royal Commission in
Jubail Standards and Guidelines, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall have these
conflicts approved by the RCJ in writing prior to proceeding with any design
modifications.
B. Phasing
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will hold VE workshops at the 10% stage as needed to
improve the Project value.
2. A Value Engineering Report shall be submitted after the 30% stage submittal. This report
shall include a list of proposed VE efforts, complete technical explanation/impact of each
item, closure of all comments, proposed savings, and the RCJ’s approval of any
proposed items that deviate from the RCJ’s standards and guidelines.
3. VE is not to be carried out after the 30% stage (or 60% stage if applicable) of the Project.
VE after the 30/60% stage will not be included unless otherwise identified in the A/E
and/or EPC Technical Contract.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 6
SUBSECTION 4.3.6 DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBR’S)
4.3.6. DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBR’S)
A. Introduction
1. A Design Basis Report (DBR) is a document compiled by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
to convey the background, intent, references, and precedents used to design each
operational system and infrastructure component required for a design Project. The
objective of the DBR is to identify the Project objectives and parameters as well as define
all design requirements and constraints.
2. The DBR shall not be a copy of the GEM or other reference documents. DBRs are
Project specific and must be customized per Project.
B. DBR Contents
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize the Royal Commission in Jubail’s basic DBR
format and shall modify and augment it to address unique Project needs.
2. Every DBR shall contain the following descriptive items:
a. Introduction
1) Project overview (background, purpose, related and adjacent work)
2) Supporting documents
b. Scope of Work
1) Assumptions
2) Any relevant additional analysis or assessments
3) Risk assessment
c. Design Criteria
d. Basis of Design (discipline, system, and/or component specific)
1) Introduction (description)
2) Referenced Regulations, Codes, Standards, and Guidelines
3) Basis narrative for each component / assembly / system
e. Appendices, Abbreviations, and Definitions as needed
f. Any RCJ approved modifications of, exemptions to, or deviations from the RCJ
Standards and requirements as defined in the GEM, GPCS, and TCDD.
3. At a minimum, each DBR shall demonstrate that the A/E and/or EPC Contractor has:
a. Analyzed and defined all functional requirements.
b. Analyzed and defined the performance targets.
c. Considered the integration of all systems, sub-systems, and components and fully
identified and defined all interfaces.
d. Identified and mitigated risks and constructability issues related to the design.
e. Developed all relevant preliminary design drawings (e.g.: general arrangements,
location plans, schematics, single line diagrams, etc.).
f. Performed and recorded any studies required to support and or validate the design
basis.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 7
SUBSECTION 4.3.6 DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBR’S)
g. Identified and assessed all Environmental, Safety, and Health issues related to the
design including the sustainability of the system or component over its lifetime.
h. Identified and stated all the operational and maintenance documentation required
for the system or component.
i. Identified and considered the input of third-party stakeholders and obtained
approvals as required.
C. Submission, Review, and Approval
1. Each DBR shall be preceded by a standard cover sheet issued by the Royal Commission
in Jubail that lists project information and revisions/approvals for the document. The
DBR is a controlled document that contains the signatures of all preparers, reviewers,
and approvers at each stage of design.
2. As the DBR is the foundation of the design, it must be essentially completed and
submitted at the 10% stage.
3. Each DBR shall be revised and maintained throughout the total life of the Project – from
inception to completion – and capture all design and engineering changes for retention as
a record of the Permanent Work.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 8
SUBSECTION 4.3.7 LAND ALLOCATION REQUESTS
4.3.7. LAND ALLOCATION REQUESTS
A. Definition
1. A Land Allocation Request (LAR) is required to record, update, and control the allocation
of land used for any purpose – either temporary or permanent – within the Royal
Commission in Jubail jurisdiction.
2. Land allocation is administered by UPD, GIS Section, according to Jubail Management
Procedure 060301.
3. Land Allocation is governed by the Jubail Management Procedure (JMP) 060301.
4. LAR forms may be found in JMP 060301 Attachment A.
B. A/E Responsibilities
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor assesses the need for an LAR and defines the area
required for the Project. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will provide the RCJ with support
material for the RCJ to complete and submit and LAR.
2. At the completion of the LAR process, a parcel of land may be allocated for the specific
Project. If a request is denied, a resubmittal may achieve approval with exceptions,
revised time frame, alternate location, etc.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 9
SUBSECTION 4.3.8 LIFE CYCLE COSTING AND DESIGN SERVICE LIFE
4.3.8. LIFE CYCLE COSTING AND DESIGN SERVICE LIFE
A. General
1. Life Cycle Costing is a process by which competing systems and design options are
evaluated for cost effectiveness. Though one system may carry a higher first cost than
another, when considered in conjunction with other systems it may make the entire
project cost less or operate at a lower cost. The intent is to look at how systems work
together as well as holistic costs.
2. Design Service Life identifies the expected life of components and systems. The life
cycle cost analysis requires an evaluation of designed components, their designed life,
and the impact that lifespan will have on operations. Though a component may have a
low first cost, it may become prohibitively expensive if it needs to be replaced often due
to a low design service life.
B. Phasing
1. Life Cycle Costing analyses and Design Service Life evaluations are to occur only at the
30% and 60% (if applicable) phases of the project.
2. Wholesale modifications to systems and components after these phases will have a
significant impact on the design process efficacy and will not be included unless
specifically identified by the Royal Commission in Jubail in the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor’s Technical Contract.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 10
SUBSECTION 4.3.9 RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING
4.3.9. RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING
A. Civil Defense and Industrial Safety

1. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall incorporate in their design the High Commission of
Industrial Security (HCIS), Department of the Saudi Arabian Ministry of the Interior
“Security Directives for Industrial Facilities” requirements for civil defense and industrial
safety where applicable.
2. Areas of interest to the HCIS include by are not limited to:
a. Air raid shelters
b. Fire resistance of building materials
c. Spacing and isolation of high-risk facilities
d. Fire-fighting systems
e. Stand-by fire water systems
f. Fire exits from structures
g. Electrical wiring and color coding
h. Dikes and drainage systems for flammable liquids
i. Civil defense warning system
j. Fire alarm systems within facilities
k. Lightning protection systems
l. Earthquake design criteria
m. Industrial safety
n. Operating manuals for safety-related systems
o. Communications system
p. Emergency power systems
q. Security systems
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals from the HCIS for
the assessment and mitigating/counter security measures to be implemented as part of
the works. Where necessary the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall employ specialist sub-
consultants as required by the HCIS to perform the security vulnerability/risk
assessments and design of mitigation/counter measures.
B. Process Safety Management
1. OSHA PSM Standard
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall investigate the applicability of US OSHA
Process Safety Management (PSM) Program, and update the Risk Management
Plan accordingly. Refer to PSM requirements under USA 29 CFR1910.119.
C. Environmental Risk Management Planning
1. PME Major Accident Prevention Standard
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall investigate the applicability of the PME Major
Accident Prevention Standard and update the Risk Management Plan accordingly. Refer
to Subsection 3.5.3.B.2, Saudi PME National Standards, for guidance.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 11
SUBSECTION 4.3.10 THIRD PARTY AND CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND
INTERFACE CONTROL DOCUMENT)
4.3.10. THIRD PARTY CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND INTERFACE CONTROL

DOCUMENT)
A. General
1. Refer to Subsection 5.1.4 for the definition and requirements of Third Parties.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate and include all provisions necessary to
ensure that interfaces with third parties are successfully served and maintained
throughout the execution of the Project.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate all studies, reports, and design
documentation to propose tie-in locations for all utilities to the new facility or facilities with
the concerned utility agencies (see Subsection 5.1.4 for Third Party Requirements).
Furthermore, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor will work with the Royal Commission in
Jubail to obtain the necessary approvals from the concerned third parties to complete the
design.
B. Interface Control Document (ICD)
1. This document is prepared by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and is a collection of
information intended to document, control, and manage third party interfaces for the
Project.
2. Third Party Requirements are described in detail in Subsection 5.1.4.
3. All ICDs shall be complete and submitted as part of the 30% stage and are to be updated
and attached to the Issued for Bid and Issued for Construction documents.
4. List of Interfaces – a list of each interface with a unique identifier and appropriate
information necessary for the procurement and installation of the permanent work that is
affected by the interface, either directly or indirectly. Appropriate information shall cover
but not be limited to, the following types of information:
a. Contract and drawing references to as-built work
b. Drawings that show the physical limits and levels of the works to be constructed
c. Tolerance and geometric requirements of interface work
d. Construction tolerances that shall be incorporated into the work
e. Interface points with neighboring structures and systems
f. Sizes and capacities needed at interface points
g. Design loads and capacities of interface elements
h. Vendor and supplier information at the interface point
i. Roles and responsibility at the interface control point
5. Interface Points – defined wherever the permanent work requires interaction with the
following:
a. Existence of, connection to, and/or functional compatibility with existing fully
operational (verified by a site visit) infrastructure
b. Work in progress from other Royal Commission in Jubail contracts
c. An outside entity (third party) and/or a dependency on work to be completed by
others

Rev. 0 4.3 - 12
SUBSECTION 4.3.10 THIRD PARTY AND CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND
INTERFACE CONTROL DOCUMENT)
d. Any facility outside the scope of the design

6. Interface Drawings – each uniquely identified interface shown on a drawing where the
interface appears, tagged by the unique identifier to reference back to the List of
Interfaces.
7. Dependency Matrix – a form provided by the Royal Commission in Jubail, this document
allows the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to record all scope, contract dependencies, and
interfaces. This document is started at project inception and maintained throughout the
design process. Information in this document will be used to develop ICDs and the
detailed design.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 13
SUBSECTION 4.3.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROCEDURES
4.3.11. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROCEDURES
A. General
1. The quality of work expected from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall, at a minimum,
conform to Royal Commission in Jubail Standards, guidelines, requirements, and
specifications.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall nominate a Quality Control Manager that is
responsible for all quality matters on the designated Project. Sub-consultants, suppliers,
and sub-tiers thereof shall each also be required to nominate a Quality Control
Representative for the Project.
3. The Quality Control Manager and each Quality Control Representative will be responsible
for establishing and implementing a Quality Management System (QMS) as defined in
Subsection 1.1.3.C.
B. Process
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall perform quality checks internal to his own
organization before submitting it for review by the Royal Commission in Jubail, defined as
follows:
a. The review shall be completed by independent personnel within the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor’s organization and overseen by a senior manager that is not associated
with the team performing the work.
b. Checked work shall be signed as such by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s
Authorized Representative and co-signed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s
QA/QC Manager prior to its submission to the RCJ. In addition, the checked work
shall include evidence of checked documents, drawings, preliminary calculations,
etc. to demonstrate the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s overall compliance and
adherence to this procedure.
c. If an independent organization other than the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is used for
the quality check, then a letter on the company letterhead from the independent
organization is to be provided with a signature from that company’s management.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall maintain a database for the storage and control of
QA/QC information that will allow the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to control and retain all
documents such as drawings, specifications, calculations, reports, audits, requests, etc.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor, his sub-consultants, suppliers, and sub-tiers thereof
shall make available for audit all records necessary to demonstrate to the Royal
Commission in Jubail that the design services have been executed in accordance with
the Contract.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 14
SUBSECTION 4.3.12 BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
4.3.12. BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Alternates – To be included in GPCS Section 012300

B. Allowances – To be included GPCS Section 012100
C. Substitutions – To be included GPCS Section 012500
D. A/E Responsibilities
1. During the bidding process, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for responding
to bidder questions and preparing addenda, as required and directed by the RCJ. The
A/E will not have direct contact with the bidders.
2. Refer to JMP 020401 Preparation and Issue of Bid Documents for more information on
bidding requirements.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 15
SUBSECTION 4.3.13 CONTRACTUAL RESTRICTIONS
4.3.13. CONTRACTUAL RESTRICTIONS
A. Contract Modifications
1. Contract modifications may come in the form of Design Change Notices (DCN),
Technical Queries (TQ), Technical Submittals (TS), or as otherwise directed in writing by
the RCJ.
2. The A/E is required to produce documentation for RCJ production of DCNs as described
in Subsection 4.5.2.
B. Work Restrictions
1. The A/E has limited responsibility and Contractor contact during construction. The A/E
will interface with the RCJ only and produce information for DCNs and/or respond to a
Contractor TQ or TS at the RCJ’s discretion.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 16
SUBSECTION 4.3.14 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
4.3.14. SPECIAL PROCEDURES
A. General
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail reserves the right to identify Special Procedures on a
project-by-project basis. Special Procedures identified for one project may or may not be
applied to other projects.
2. Any special procedures shall be outlined in the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Technical
Contract prior to beginning work.

Rev. 0 4.3 - 17
SECTION 4.4 FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4.1. SURVEYING.................................................................................................................. 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 2
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 4
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 4
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 4
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 4
C. General Requirements .................................................................................................. 4
1. Land Surveyor ............................................................................................................... 4
2. Land Surveying Manager .............................................................................................. 4
3. Bathymetric and Hydrographic Surveying Manager ...................................................... 5
4. Senior Surveyor ............................................................................................................. 5
5. Instrument man/Rodman ............................................................................................... 5
D. Coordinate System ........................................................................................................ 5
1. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 5
2. Type of Coordinate Systems ......................................................................................... 5
E. Elevations and Survey Datum ....................................................................................... 6
1. Datum ............................................................................................................................ 6
2. Measurements ............................................................................................................... 6
3. Field Notes..................................................................................................................... 7
F. Hydrographic and Tidal Data ......................................................................................... 8
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 8
2. Standard References ..................................................................................................... 8
3. Survey Coverage ........................................................................................................... 8
4. Survey Equipment ......................................................................................................... 8
5. Survey Procedures ....................................................................................................... 10

Rev. 0 4.4 - i
G. Construction Staking .................................................................................................... 12

1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 12
2. Pre-construction ........................................................................................................... 12
3. Construction.................................................................................................................. 17
4. Post - Construction, As-built Surveys and Record Drawings ....................................... 26
H. Utility Rights of Way ..................................................................................................... 27
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 27
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 27
3. Establishing Rights-of-Way .......................................................................................... 28
4. Finalizing Rights-of-Way............................................................................................... 29
I. Digital Terrain Modeling (DTM) .................................................................................... 29
1. Synonyms ..................................................................................................................... 29
2. DEM .............................................................................................................................. 29
3. DTM Sources ................................................................................................................ 29
4. Methods ........................................................................................................................ 30
5. Accuracy ....................................................................................................................... 30
6. DTM Requirements for all Projects: ............................................................................. 30
J. Surveys ......................................................................................................................... 30
1. Aerial Survey ................................................................................................................ 30
2. Satellite Survey ............................................................................................................. 36
3. Bathymetric Surveys ..................................................................................................... 37
4. Geodetic Control Surveys ............................................................................................. 40
5. Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Control Surveys ...................................................... 41
6. Precise, Primary and Secondary Vertical Control Surveys .......................................... 42
7. Cadastral Control Surveys ............................................................................................ 42
8. Cadastral Lot Surveys .................................................................................................. 43
9. As-Built and Topographic Surveys ............................................................................... 46
10. Verifying Surveys by Others ......................................................................................... 48
11. Monitoring Large Area Subsidence .............................................................................. 48
12. Monitoring Horizontal and Vertical Movement of Structures ........................................ 49
13. Monitoring and Evaluating Ground Water Elevations and Data ................................... 51
14. New Witness Posts ....................................................................................................... 52
15. Fundamental Bench Mark ............................................................................................ 53
16. Geodetic Control Pillar .................................................................................................. 53
17. Second and Third Order Control Monuments .............................................................. 53

Rev. 0 4.4 - ii
18. First, Second, and Third Order Control Plaques .......................................................... 53

19. Boundary Marker .......................................................................................................... 54
20. Bronze Cadastral Survey Plaque ................................................................................. 54
21. Lot Monuments ............................................................................................................. 54
22. Underwater Surveys ..................................................................................................... 54
4.4.2. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION ............................................................................ 57
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 57
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 57
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 57
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 57
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 58
5. General Requirements ................................................................................................. 59
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 60
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 60
8. References ................................................................................................................... 62
B. Geotechnical Investigation ........................................................................................... 65
1. Background................................................................................................................... 65
2. Boring Requirements .................................................................................................... 68
C. Groundwater Conditions ............................................................................................... 74
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 74
2. Assessment of Groundwater Conditions ...................................................................... 74
D. Geotechnical Equipment .............................................................................................. 75
1. General Field Equipment .............................................................................................. 75
2. Personal Protective Equipment .................................................................................... 75
3. Drilling Equipment ........................................................................................................ 76
4. Sampling Equipment .................................................................................................... 77
5. Rock Core Sampling ..................................................................................................... 77
6. In-Situ Field Testing Equipment ................................................................................... 78
7. Laboratory Testing Equipment ..................................................................................... 78
E. Laboratory Testing ........................................................................................................ 78
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 78
2. Sample Selection .......................................................................................................... 78
3. Index and Classification Tests ...................................................................................... 79
4. Engineering Property Tests .......................................................................................... 81
F. Geophysical Testing ..................................................................................................... 83

Rev. 0 4.4 - iii
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 83
2. Geophysical Testing Methods ...................................................................................... 84
3. Conducting Geophysical Testing .................................................................................. 85
4. Reporting ...................................................................................................................... 85
G. In-Situ Testing............................................................................................................... 86
1. In-Situ Tests.................................................................................................................. 86
H. Off-Shore Geotechnical Investigations ......................................................................... 89
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 89
2. Useful Resources ......................................................................................................... 89
3. Key considerations ....................................................................................................... 90
4. Types of Investigation ................................................................................................... 90
5. Geophysical Investigation Techniques ......................................................................... 91
6. Geotechnical Investigation Techniques ........................................................................ 92
7. Vessels, Platforms and Deployment Systems for Investigation ................................... 92
8. Positioning .................................................................................................................... 92
9. Offshore Laboratory Testing ......................................................................................... 92
10. Offshore In-situ Tests ................................................................................................... 93
4.4.3. ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS AND STUDIES .............................................. 94
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 94
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 94
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 94
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 94
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 95
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 96
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 96
8. Related Sections .......................................................................................................... 96
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 96
B. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) ..................................................................... 96
1. Purpose and Summary ................................................................................................. 96
C. Environmental Site Assessment for Recognized Concerns and Conditions ................ 98
1. Environmental Site Assessment Report Standard ....................................................... 98
D. Geo-environmental Investigations (Surface and Subsurface Sampling Protocols) .... 104
1. Work Plan .................................................................................................................... 104
2. Examples of Investigations .......................................................................................... 106

Rev. 0 4.4 - iv
3. Investigation Report ..................................................................................................... 110

4.4.4. DECONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL ............................................... 112
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 112
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 112
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 112
3. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 112
4. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 112
5. General Requirements ................................................................................................ 112
6. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 112
7. Standards .................................................................................................................... 112
8. Related Sections ......................................................................................................... 112
9. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 113
B. Pre-Demolition Surveys ............................................................................................... 113
1. Asbestos Containing Material ...................................................................................... 113
2. Lead Based Paint ........................................................................................................ 113
3. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Survey and Sampling ............................................. 113
4. Universal Wastes and Other Materials ........................................................................ 113
C. Waste Handling and Disposal ..................................................................................... 113
1. Basics .......................................................................................................................... 113
D. Underground Storage Tank Removal .......................................................................... 113
1. Underground Storage Tank (UST) Closure ................................................................. 113
2. Tank Location Restoration........................................................................................... 114
4.4.5. EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT ............................................ 115
A. Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 115
B. Report Content ............................................................................................................ 115
1. Executive Summary..................................................................................................... 115
2. Introduction/Site Background ...................................................................................... 115
3. Methodology ................................................................................................................ 115
4. Previous Investigations ................................................................................................ 115
5. Investigation(s) Conducted for Project ........................................................................ 115
6. Summary of Conditions and Conclusions ................................................................... 115
7. Recommendations ....................................................................................................... 116
8. Tables, Figures, Appendices ....................................................................................... 116

Rev. 0 4.4 - v
SUBSECTION 4.4.1 SURVEYING
4.4.1. SURVEYING
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides guidelines for the performance of field and office survey
work.
b. The guidelines apply to all survey work.
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection 4.4.1 applies to surveying of new projects.
b. This Subsection 4.4.1 also applies to developed areas and existing infrastructure.
3. Definitions
a. Digital Elevation Model (DEM): A term generally used for the representation of the
earth in any form, such as rectangular grids, lattices, triangulated networks, irregular
spot heights or breaklines.
b. Digital Terrain Modeling (DTM): Similar to DEM, but incorporates the elevation of
significant land features (breaklines and spot elevations) at irregular spacing in order
to more accurately depict the character of the terrain.
c. “Azimuth” The direction of a line through a point with respect to the meridian through
the point expressed as the clockwise angle from north. Except where the line is
along a meridian or the equator, the azimuth of a straight line changes as the point
moves along the line.
d. Glossary of Surveying and Mapping Terms based on United States Bureau of Land
Management US BLM:
1) http://www.blm.gov/cadastral/Glossary/glossary.htm#
e. “Northing” Second measurement of a grid reference used to specify the location of a
point on a rectangular coordinate system. The distance measured northward from
the origin of a rectangular coordinate system (corresponds to a “Y” coordinate in a
Cartesian system).
f. “Easting” First measurement of a grid reference used to specify the location of a
point on a rectangular coordinate system. The distance measured eastward from the
origin of a rectangular coordinate system (corresponds to an “X” coordinate in a
Cartesian system).
g. “Elevation” a value determined by measuring the height of a point relative to the
datum
h. “Latitude” It is the angular position of a place north or south of the equator. Positive
values in the Northern hemisphere, negative in the South (i.e., the South Pole has
latitude = - 90°).
i. “Longitude” The angular location of a place on the Earth's surface measured east or
west of the Prime meridian through Greenwich. Longitudes W are positive, E are
negative.
j. “Lot” The smallest piece of land to be used for a specific purpose; i.e., the lot to be
occupied by a house, an apartment house, a business establishment, a mosque,
pump station, reserve tract, etc.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 1
k. “Lot Line” Any line bounding a lot as herein defined.

l. “Monument” A boundary or position marker.
m. “Neighborhood Center” An area containing commercial and public facilities for a
catchment area of approximately 10,000 to 15,000 people.
n. “Parcel” A unit of land, or tract of land in a subdivision with specified location and
boundaries, which is used or developed as a unit for a specific purpose.
o. “Plant Grid (PG)” A plane grid system established by the RCJ. All land and facilities
shall be located based on the PG system or any authorized agency’s system.
p. Rectangular northing and easting coordinates of any point give its positions with
respect to an arbitrarily selected pair of mutually perpendicular reference axes. The
Northing coordinate is the perpendicular distance, in meters, from the point to the
Easting axis; the Easting coordinate is the perpendicular distance to the Northing
axis.
q. “Reserve tracts” Are lots (or blocks) for future use, which use is unknown or cannot
be defined at the time of subdividing; i.e., land which may be needed at a future date
– for example expansion of a park, school grounds, commercial development, etc.
r. “Right-of-way” Public land reserved for roads, sidewalks, pedestrian and bicycle
paths, drainage and utility corridors, and pipelines.
s. “Subdivision” A group of one or more blocks which lie within a geographically
defined area, and where one or more of the blocks have been divided into lots, each
lot to be used for a separate purpose.
t. “Theodolite” A precision instrument for measuring angles to vertical and horizontal
planes. Consists, in its most basic form, of a telescope which can rotate horizontally
and vertically allowing readings to be taken from a calibrated circle. The instrument
has to be centered over a fixed (control) point.
u. “Traverse” A sequence of line segments of known length and direction that begin
and end at the same point (closed loop), or begin and end at points whose relative
positions have been determined by other surveys.
v. “Triangulation” Using a network of triangles to accurately plot positions.
w. “True Coordinate Position” The position of a point as determined by field survey
originating from a known control survey marker of Royal Commission or any
authorized agency, and performed to the precision and adjusted, as required for
second order surveys.
x. “Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)” A grid system based upon the Transverse
Mercator projection. The UTM grid extends North-South from 80°N to 80°S latitude
and, starting at the 180° Meridian, is divided eastwards into 60, 6° zones with a half
degree overlap with zone one beginning at 180° longitude. The UTM grid is used for
topographic maps and geo-referencing satellite images.
y. “Vertical Datum” A vertical datum is a surface of zero elevation to which heights of
various points are referred in order that those heights are in a consistent system.
1) The official datum shall be the Royal Commission Datum based on the
published elevation of existing fundamental vertical control benchmarks,
current at the time of the survey.
4. Abbreviations

Rev. 0 4.4 - 2
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.

1) AMG: Automated Machine Guidance
2) ASB: As-Built
3) CUBE: Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetric Estimator
4) DEM: Digital Elevation Model
5) DTM: Digital Terrain Modeling
6) E: East
7) F.C.: Field Change
9) GNSS: Global Navigation Satellite System
10) GPS : Global Positioning System
11) IHO: International Hydrographic Organization
12) km: Kilometer
13) m: Meter
14) MBES: Multi-Beam Echo Sounder
15) MnDOT Minnesota Department of Transportation
16) N: North
17) NGS: National Geodetic Surveying (US)
18) NSPS: National Society of Professional Surveyors
19) PCC : Portland Cement Concrete
20) PG: Plant Grid
21) PPE : Personal Protective Equipment
23) RICS Royal Chartered Institute of Surveyors
24) RTK: Real Time Kinematic
25) S: South
26) SGS Saudi Geological Survey
27) SBES: Single-Beam Echo Sounder
28) TPU : Total Propagated Uncertainty
29) USGS; United States Geological Survey
30) UTM; Universal Transverse Mercator
31) W: West

Rev. 0 4.4 - 3
a. Survey works shall be undertaken in accordance with the specified requirements as

detailed in the Contract Specification for Geotechnical Surveys and Environmental
Works. The following is a list of sources of information and manuals that are referred
to in this Section.
1) Saudi Geological Survey
(a) http://www.sgs.com/
2) Royal Chartered Institute of Surveyors
(a) http://www.rics.org/s
3) US Geological Survey
(a) http://www.sgs.com/
4) MnDOT Surveying and Mapping Manual
(a) http://www.dot.state.mn.us/surveying/manuals.html
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1
b. Saudi Arabia Survey Licensing Code
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Section, refer to Chapter 3 for
a list of additional Standards.
1) NGS - National Geodetic Survey
(a) https://www.ngs.noaa.gov/
2) NSPS Model Standards for Construction Layout Surveys
(a) http://www.truenorthsurvey.com/wp-content/uploads/2010/04/NSPS-
Standards-Construction-Layout-Surveys.pdf
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 5.6 for Civil, Sitework and Roads.
b. Refer to Section 5.7 for Utilities.
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and approve all design reports, plans and
specifications refer to Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for commissioning requirements.
C. General Requirements
1. Land Surveyor
a. As a minimum the Land Surveyor shall hold an bachelor’s of science degree in civil
engineering, or other approved degree in surveying
2. Land Surveying Manager

Rev. 0 4.4 - 4
a. All land survey works shall be managed by the Land Surveying Manager and shall
have a minimum of ten (10) years acceptable experience, University level education
in surveying of the types to be encountered on this site and professional
competency from an accredited institute for surveying works, At least five (5) years
must have been in responsible charge of survey crew and five (5) years of
experience in the Middle East.
3. Bathymetric and Hydrographic Surveying Manager
a. All bathymetric and hydrographic survey works shall be managed and overseen by a
Bathymetric and Hydrographic Surveying Manager and shall have a minimum of ten
(10) years acceptable experience, University level education in surveying of the
types to be encountered on this site and professional competency from an
accredited institute for surveying works, At least five (5) years must have been in
responsible charge of survey crew and five (5) years of experience in the Middle
East.
4. Senior Surveyor
a. All survey works shall be undertaken by Senior Surveyors shall have a minimum of
seven (7) years acceptable experience, University level education in surveying of
the types to be encountered on this site and professional competency from an
accredited institute for surveying works. At least five (5) years must have been in
responsible charge of survey crew. Three (3) years of experience in High Order
surveying is required and GPS System.
b. A Senior Surveyors shall have experience in the performing Geodetic Horizontal
Control Surveys and High Order Vertical Control Survey and GPS System or have
experience in the performance of off-shore Hydrographic Surveys. He shall know
how to operate, and perform field checks of calibration and field adjustments of all
instruments assigned to his crew.
5. Instrument man/Rodman
Instrument man/Rodman (Surveyor) shall be skilled in the operation and basic care
of all instruments and GPS System assigned to the survey crew of which he is a
permanent or temporary member.
D. Coordinate System
1. Definitions
a. See definition for Rectangular Northing and Easting coordinates.
2. Type of Coordinate Systems
a. Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM):
1) Saudi Arabian National Geodetic Network (SA.NGN) is based on Zone 39 of
the Universal Transverse Mercator Projection System. The origin of the
survey is at Ain Al Abd and the accepted origin data is as follows:
(a) Geodetic Latitude = 28 14' 06.171" (N)
(b) Geodetic Longitude = 48 16' 20.096" (E)
(c) Deviation of the vertical
(1) In the meridian = +0.08"

Rev. 0 4.4 - 5
(2) In the prime vertical = +0.075"

(d) Geoid-Spheroid separation: N = -8.4 meters
(e) Spheroid (International) = HAYFORD 1910
(1) Parameters
(i) a = 6378388 meters
(ii) F = 1/297
The above Spheroid and origin information constitutes the "Ain Al Abd" (1970)
Datum.
2) All offsite work shall be tied into the UTM Grid based on Hayford 1910
International Ellipsoid - Datum AIN Al ABD 1970, Saudi Arabia) Zone 39 (i.e.
Ras Al-Khair Industrial City, Jubail- Ras Al-Khair Highway, Jubail-Dammam
Mainline Railroad, offsite freeway, offsite environmental sampling station, etc.)
b. The Plant Grid System:
1) The entire site of Jubail Industrial City (Jubail1 and Jubail2) is covered by a
Plant Grid (PG) which is a plane grid. This grid is laid out so that it is generally
parallel or perpendicular to the blocks, lots and corridors within true north.
2) The most southerly grid line of the PG is south of the southeasterly corner of
Jubail Industrial City (Madinat Al-Jubail Al-Sinaiyah) increasing increments of
1,000 m (1 km), with the most northerly grid line having the coordinate
designate of N 64,000. Similarly, the most easterly grid line approximates the
north end of the most easterly boundary line of Jubail Industrial City (Madinat
Al-Jubail Al-Sinaiyah), said point lying east of the Open Sea Tanker Terminal,
and with this grid line having the coordinate designation of E 84,000. The grid
lines proceed westerly in decreasing increments of 1,000 m, with the most
westerly grid line (which lies generally about six kilometers west of the Tapline
Road) having the coordinate designation of E 40,000
3) All land and facilities within Jubail Industrial City (Madinat Al-Jubail Al-
Sinaiyah). Shall be located by coordinates based on the PG. No other
coordinates system or any other system shall be used for any purpose
whatsoever within the boundaries of this site.
4) All surveys shall use degrees (°) for azimuth and angles, and meters for both
vertical and horizontal measurement.
5) All off-site control shall be in UTM, and all on-site control shall be in PG. The
only interface between these two shall be the intersections of offsite street,
street and railroad centerline within the boundary lines of Jubail Industrial
City. These points shall have both PG and UTM coordinates
E. Elevations and Survey Datum
1. Datum
a. The official datum shall be the Royal Commission Datum based on the published
elevation of existing fundamental vertical control benchmarks, current at the time of
the survey.
b. The official datum in RIC shall be the Royal Commission Datum based to Ma'aden
vertical control benchmark 0 MSL.
2. Measurements

Rev. 0 4.4 - 6
a. Elevations can be measured using the following methods. The project accuracy
requirements and specific equipment manufacturer’s specifications will determine
what method(s) are acceptable for the task.
1) Differential levels using a digital level, spirit level or auto-level and graduated
rod.
2) Trigonometric levels calculated using measured vertical angles, such as
measurements with a theodolite or total station, and measured horizontal
distances.
3) Global positioning using two or more GPS receivers.
b. Elevations shall be measured relative to a project benchmark with a known
elevation. Prior to using the benchmark, the surveyor shall:
1) Verify and use the official published elevation of the benchmark, current at the
time of the survey.
2) Determine if the benchmark was set with methods and procedures necessary
to meet the required tolerances of the new measurements, such as
fundamental, second order, third order as described in Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
(a) Methods and procedures for establishing vertical control monuments are
described in Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
3) Inspect the benchmark to ensure that it has not been disturbed.
4) Check the elevation of at least one other project benchmark to verify:
(a) The survey instrument is calibrated
(b) The benchmarks have not been disturbed
5) Check the elevation of at least two other points or features with a known
elevation relative to the benchmark to determine if the new measurements will
be consistent with the other site plan elevations, where applicable.
3. Field Notes
a. Daily field notes shall include:
1) The date of the survey
2) The elevation benchmark name and/or identifier used for the survey
3) The benchmark elevation
4) The condition of the benchmark at the time of the survey
5) Any other notes of significance to the project such as if the benchmark is in
danger of being disturbed or destroyed due to construction or other site
conditions.
6) Electronic/digital field notes are encouraged and shall be used when working
with data collectors. The use of day files for electronic note keeping shall be
used. The instrument number, party chief and crew members shall be
inputted as electronic notes. The time stamp function shall be turned on at all
times.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 7
F. Hydrographic and Tidal Data

1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidelines for the performance of hydrographic surveys in port
and harbor areas and offshore locations up to a depth of 30 m. Hydrographic
surveys are generally undertaken for the following purposes:
1) To maintain safe navigation conditions for vessels, by ensuring adequate
under-keel clearances
2) To provide control for dredging operations
3) To allow monitoring of silt accumulation
4) To locate existing structures, objects and obstructions
5) To provide base mapping for design of proposed construction projects
2. Standard References
a. Hydrographic surveys will generally conform to accepted international and national
Standards, including but not limited to the following:
th
1) International Hydrographic Organization, Special Publication No. 44, 5
edition, IHO Standards for Hydrographic Surveys
2) FIG Publication No. 56, Guidelines for the Planning, Execution and
Management of Hydrographic Surveys in Ports and Harbours
3) US Corp of Engineers Manual No. 1110-2-1003, Engineering and Design –
Hydrographic Surveying
3. Survey Coverage
a. The required coverage of a hydrographic survey will be dictated by the end-use of
the data and by cost. The A/E shall determine which of the two survey coverage
options shall be utilized:
1) Cross-section surveys, at a pre-defined spacing, normally carried out using a
single-beam echo sounder (SBES). This method is most effective in shallow
draft projects or in deep draft areas with relatively uniform sea-bed
topography. Cross section surveys also provide a more rapid end-product and
are typically the most economical procedure.
2) Full-coverage surveys, using a multi-beam echo sounder (MBES), to achieve
complete bottom coverage. MBESs can provide bottom coverage up to
several times the depth of water and sufficient survey lines are run to ensure
complete coverage. This method is typically used for deeper water projects
where under-keel clearance is critical, for dredging maintenance and for
investigation of underwater structures or obstructions. MBES surveys are
more demanding and time consuming and therefore more expensive.
4. Survey Equipment
a. Survey equipment used during most surveys will fall into three main categories:
depth measurement, position fixing and water level (tidal data). In addition, for
MBES, the behavior of the survey vessel can be significant, requiring the integration
of motion sensor equipment. All equipment shall allow for continuous recording of
survey information to suitable electronic data loggers.
1) Depth Measurement Equipment

Rev. 0 4.4 - 8
(a) Depths are usually measured using SBES or MBES equipment. These
may be supplemented by side-scan sonar equipment to help detect
smaller objects.
2) Single-Beam Echo Sounders (SBES)
(a) To ensure that the equipment records the correct depths, the SBES
must be calibrated, using a bar check procedure, before and after each
segment of survey, or at a minimum on a daily basis, to correct for
potential errors due to speed of sound in the water column and to set the
correct depth of the SBES transducer. Similarly, a bar check must be
carried out if any modifications are made to equipment or equipment
mountings.
3) Multi-Beam Echo Sounders (MBES)
(a) MBES equipment shall be calibrated using a ‘patch test’ to determine:
(1) The mount angles of the multi-beam transducer relative to the
vessel’s axes (roll, pitch and heading).
(2) The latency (or time lag) between the MBES data and the position-
fixing data.
(b) Good practice would also involve the use of a reference surface (i.e. an
area of sea floor), where repeatable measurements can be made and
compared, in order to identify systematic errors.
4) Motion Sensor Equipment
(a) Motion sensor equipment (accelerometer) shall be used in conjunction
with MBES measurements to improve the quality of sounding data, by
correcting for variations in the vessel’s pitch, roll and heading. As a
lower-cost alternative, real-time kinematic (RTK) GPS or GNSS
measurements can be used in correcting for vessel motion, although the
resultant accuracy is limited by the GPS update rate.
5) Position-fixing Equipment
(a) For most applications, the preferred method of horizontal control will be
GPS or GNSS equipment in differential or RTK mode. In certain
circumstances (e.g. if insufficient satellites are available or local
conditions interfere with GPS reception), an auto-tracking total station
instrument may be used.
6) Tide Gauge Equipment
(a) Sea level measurements (i.e. water depth correlated to time of day) are
needed in order to relate the hydrographic survey data to a defined
vertical datum (chart datum). Typical methods for obtaining sea level
information are:
(1) Automatic recording tide gauge (preferred option). This equipment
must be regularly calibrated against a staff gauge to ensure its
accuracy.
(2) Manual tide pole (or staff gauge). If this method is used, the
frequency of measurement of the gauge must be such as to provide
an adequate representation of the tide curve.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 9
(3) Direct GPS RTK measurement of water level. If this method is used,
then the GPS measurements shall be regularly correlated with
conventional tide gauge measurements, to verify consistency.
5. Survey Procedures
a. Control
1) Survey control points and benchmarks will be installed, or existing control
points utilized, in accordance with established procedures and relative to
coordinate systems and datum’s outlined above. Horizontal control shall also
be based on King Fahd Industrial Port project datum and tied to the Royal
Commission Datum (RCD).
b. Planning
1) The project survey specification shall address the density of bottom coverage
required. This in turn will affect the choice of survey methodology to be
adopted (i.e. cross section survey or full bottom coverage) and will determine
survey line spacing. Planning will include direction of, and intervals between,
cross sections. With MBES systems this will be affected by water depth and
the cross section spacing must allow for an overlap of data, if full bottom
coverage is required. Typically, for MBES surveys the equipment shall be
restricted to obtain data up to 45° to 50°each side of the nadir. A minimum
overlap of 20% is recommended between adjacent sections.
c. Tidal Measurements
1) Tidal measurements will be made continuously throughout the duration of the
survey. If an existing tide gauge (automatic recording or manual observation)
is available, then its height needs to be verified relative to the project survey
datum. If not, then a tide gauge will be installed at a suitable location as close
to the work area as possible. For complex tidal areas, multiple gauges may be
appropriate. Automatically-recording tide gauges are recommended. If
manual tide gauges are the only ones available, then careful consideration
needs to be given to the frequency of recording, to ensure that the tidal curve
is accurately determined. Regular monitoring of the tide gauge elevation is
required to verify that outside factors are not affecting the measurements.
d. Positioning System
1) If possible, the on-board positioning system will be installed co-axial to the
echo sounding transponder. If this is not practicable, a survey of the vessel
shall be carried out to determine the relative locations of the positioning
system, echo sounding transponder and any other data collecting equipment.
The selected positioning system must be capable of continuous recording of
the vessel’s location. If MBES is used for soundings, then motion control
equipment must be installed and recorded together with the sounding data.
e. Soundings
1) Soundings will be run in accordance with the planned cross section layout, as
described in paragraph 4.4.1.F.3 for surveys extending over multiple days,
there shall be an overlap of soundings between daily mobilizations.
f. Ancillary Survey Data
1) Specific projects may require additional types of survey data collection, not
covered by this document, including:

Rev. 0 4.4 - 10
(a) Side scan sonar surveys, used to create an image of the sea floor for
detection of debris and obstructions
(b) Current measurements
(c) Water temperature profiling
(d) Sub-bottom profiling, used to indicate shallow structure of the seabed
(e) Magnetometer surveys, used in the detection of seafloor or sub-floor
objects.
g. Additional Calibrations
1) In addition to the various equipment calibrations mentioned above, it is
considered good practice to carry out the following checks, preferably on a
daily basis:
(a) An independent static GPS check of the vessel’s derived position, as
determined by on board GPS or auto-tracking total station, relative to a
control point on shore. This will provide a confidence level in the
performance of the vessel’s positioning system.
(b) A dynamic check against a distinctive bottom feature, for which a known
location has previously been derived. This may reveal latent errors not
apparent during the static check. Bottom features used for this purpose
shall be located in relatively shallow water (less than 10m) to avoid a
large echo sounder footprint and ensure that resolution of the target
feature is commensurate with the positioning system being used.
h. Data Processing
1) Survey data will be processed using approved software that combines
soundings, positions, tidal data and motion sensor data.
2) Processing will involve the preparation of a clean data set, which eliminates
erroneous data, based on the various check measurements built into the
survey, including elimination of any tidal data errors revealed by the practice
of running survey check lines.
3) Data sets from modern sounding equipment are very large and need to be
carefully managed. Software packages are capable of smoothing the survey
data, but this shall be avoided, unless the magnitude of the difference
between ‘raw’ and ‘smoothed’ data is clearly identified.
4) Processing software shall preserve data integrity and be capable of shoal bias
thinning (i.e. the production of a ‘thinned’ data set that maintains the accuracy
of the survey while reducing the amount of data that needs to be
manipulated). This is especially applicable to SBES surveys.
5) For survey data intended for the production of hydrographic charts, it is
recommended that a Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetric Estimator
(CUBE) surface is produced.
6) For data intended for volumetric calculations, a grid of average depths will
generally be required (a grid is not recommended for other uses, as it does
not preserve actual sounding locations or depths).
i. Data Analysis

Rev. 0 4.4 - 11
1) An assessment shall be made of the accuracy achieved during the

hydrographic survey, to provide a confidence level in the charts, sounding
sheets or other deliverables provided. The sources of all individual errors
need to be derived from the various calibrations conducted during the survey,
then statistically combined to derive the ‘Total Propagated Uncertainty’ (TPU)
for the data set.
j. Deliverables
1) Deliverables will include paper copies and digital data.
(a) Paper deliverables will include charts, plans and a comprehensive
survey report detailing methodology, results and accuracies.
(b) Digital data shall include point information for all soundings, together with
located features and tidal data. Soundings shall be provided in ASCII
format, using WGS84 latitude and longitude with depths below chart
datum. Line information and point relating to survey features other than
soundings shall be provided in an AutoCAD compatible format.
G. Construction Staking
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidelines for performing construction staking and layout as
required to establish horizontal and vertical positions of contract improvements. The
guidelines apply to all construction survey work within the Royal Commission’s
boundaries regardless of the responsible parties be they the controlling jurisdiction’s
forces, Contractor’s forces or sub contracted surveyors.
b. The responsible party for construction staking must be performed under the
supervision of the surveyor, as identified in subsection 4.4.1.C.
c. These guidelines for establishing lines, grades and construction stakes are minimum
Standards; additional contractual requirements or tolerances may be shown on
plans or included in special provisions for the work.
d. Surveyors shall only concern themselves with the direct interpretation of the
construction plans. It is not the responsibility of the Surveyor or the surveyor’s staff
to correct or revise erroneous architectural or engineering drawings. If the approved
design plans are found to lack sufficient information for proper layout, the Surveyor
shall immediately notify his client, the RCJ, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
responsible for the project.
2. Pre-construction
a. Pre-construction Conference
1) Prior to the commencement of construction activities, a conference shall be
held with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, the RCJ’s project manager, and
surveying personnel. This meeting is of particular importance to the
construction surveyor in order to plan and organize respective duties that
conform to the Contractor’s planned sequence of operations to avoid any
unnecessary delays or inconveniences. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will
outline the working schedule and methods of operations, and discuss
construction details. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be asked to furnish
the party chief a list showing the priority of staking needs. The Contractor
shall be advised of the requirement to give at least 24 hour notice for any
deviation from the list.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 12
2) The pre-construction meeting will determine who will authorize and control
requests for survey and receive survey data and field notes.
b. Safety
1) It is the Surveyor’s responsibility to adopt the project health and safety plan
and or provide an acceptable safety plan to ensure safety of survey crew.
2) The survey crew will attend specific site safety orientations per project
requirements.
3) Each survey vehicle will have a first aid kit and working fire extinguisher.
4) Each survey crew member will be outfitted and adhere to wearing the PPE
(personal protection equipment) required by the RCJ, EPC Contractor, A/E, or
survey company, whichever is more stringent.
c. Survey Instrument Selection
1) Conventional or GPS survey instruments or a combination thereof may be
used to meet the tolerances outlined in these construction staking guidelines.
2) Calibration certificates on applicable survey instruments will be made
available prior to construction to ensure equipment is in good working order.
(a) Levels will be checked for calibration using the two peg test; notes of the
procedure will be provided prior to work. Levels shall be tested at weekly
intervals and prior to layout of critical work.
3) GPS is not to be used to establish positions for the following:
(a) Structure layout horizontal or vertical positions.
(b) Concrete pavement vertical positions.
(c) Concrete curb, gutter and barrier vertical positions.
d. Pre-Construction Surveys
1) Pre-construction surveys incidental to construction staking may include but
are not limited to:
(a) Location of existing survey control monuments and boundary markers for
their referencing and perpetuation if disturbed by construction activities.
(b) Location of manholes or valves within construction areas to be adjusted
to future grades.
(c) Verification of location and grade where new improvements tie into
existing conditions.
e. Survey Control
1) It is the responsibility of the surveyor to locate, verify, and document the
accuracy of all existing control points before using them for construction
staking control work. The surveyor must notify the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
in writing of any discrepancies before using those points.
2) The elevations, dimensions, and horizontal alignment of structures,
earthwork, and roadways must be checked for plan errors, compatibility, and
consistency with existing field conditions. If any discrepancy is discovered, the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor must immediately be informed. New grades must

Rev. 0 4.4 - 13
be established from the approved plan with adjustments to match existing

roadway features as approved by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
3) The Surveyor will always consult with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor before
doing any staking or computations. Data availability, project staging, or plan
changes are all considerations that shall be discussed before starting initial
layout.
4) All field adjustments must be approved by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
The surveyor shall always check with the A/E for changes to the approved
plans before doing any staking or grade computations.
5) Vertical Control and Bench Level Circuits (Benchmarks)
(a) This activity consists of locating the existing benchmarks set during the
preliminary phases of the project, verifying their accuracy, correcting
errors if necessary, transferring benchmarks to new locations to prevent
conflict with construction, and establishing new benchmarks as needed.
(b) Additional benchmarks must be set so as not to conflict with the
construction operations. They shall be set with a spacing not to exceed
150 m or other spacing required by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
(c) Additional benchmarks must be of suitable material to endure the
duration of construction.
(d) Additional benchmarks shall be set in locations that will be convenient for
future work. It is also beneficial to alternate on left and right sides of the
roadway, particularly when work is to be done under traffic conditions.
(e) Benchmark number and elevation shall be written on the guard stake or
directly on the benchmark. All additional benchmarks set must be
recorded (number or name, description, location and elevation) in the
field book that is to be kept in the field office when not in use.
(f) Good guidelines for locating benchmarks are:
(1) At each end of large structures.
(2) At points of change from cut to fill.
(3) At high and low points.
(4) Locations that are handy for cross sectioning of side hills.
(5) Any time there is a difference of 8 m in elevation in rolling terrain.
(g) Before starting a bench level circuit (bench loop), the level must be
checked for accuracy. Along with peg testing the level (instrument), also
check the tripod head and shoes and level rod tape and shoes for wear.
If using a total station for setting benchmarks, ensure that the instrument
is calibrated. This information shall be recorded in the field notes.
(h) In order to verify or establish elevations for benchmarks, they must be
looped with a minimum of three benchmarks in the loop (two known).
(i) Minor errors in benchmark elevations shall be corrected in a manner that
will not materially affect the work and brought to the attention of the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 14
(j) Major errors or apparent discrepancies found affecting other bench

marks, existing plan information, and future work must be immediately
brought to the attention of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for correction
or interpretation before proceeding with the work.
6) Horizontal Control
(a) Horizontal control begins with field-locating the control points, traverse
points, section corners, etc., set by the original survey. These points will
be noted on the plans along with field ties or can be obtained from the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor. From these control points, the horizontal
alignment for construction is established.
(b) Additional control usually needs to be set outside the construction limits
and there are special requirements for machine control grading projects.
Consideration must be given to future use of these control points to
prevent loss during the life of the project, provide for easy access,
recovery, and inter-visibility.
(c) Care shall be taken when establishing these reference points to assure
their accuracy. When a control point is disturbed or destroyed, new
monumentation for the point must be set and new coordinates
established before any staking is accomplished in the area controlled by
the disturbed or destroyed point. A new point number shall be used and
the field notes shall be updated to note the disturbed or destroyed point,
the new point, and their locations.
(d) When the project is staked using coordinates, the staking must be
performed using the project control coordinates found in the plan or
provided by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Verify that the coordinates
provided are correct by checking the units, datum, and coordinate
system used on the project. Verify filed coordinates by performing
independent checks made from different control point set -ups. Consult
with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor regarding the frequency and areas
of the project that horizontal control needs to be maintained.
(e) All additional control points established are to be documented in the field
book with the point description, location, coordinates (ground values),
and station/offset for use during the life of the construction project. They
will be marked in the field for easy recovery. Crossed lath with
fluorescent pink ribbon and the control point number legibly written is a
standard practice.
f. Field Notes
1) Field notes are the written record of pertinent information, layout,
measurements and observations of the project. They shall be kept according
to uniform practices and conform, as a minimum, to the following general
requirements:
(a) Neatness - Use a sharp pencil of at least 3-H hardness. Avoid crowding
the information and keep the book as clean as possible.
(b) Legibility - Use standard symbols and abbreviations to keep notes
compact. Use plain lettering to avoid confusion.
(c) Clarity - Plan work ahead so that data can be clearly indicated. Do not
make ambiguous statements. Line up descriptions and make sketches

Rev. 0 4.4 - 15
for clarity. Record data in a consistent way. Assume that the person who
will use your notes has no familiarity with the work.
(d) Completeness - Show all pertinent measurements and observations. Use
a degree of accuracy consistent with the operation. If in doubt about the
need for the data, record it. Review data before leaving the field. All
entries must include:
(1) The date and weather conditions.
(2) Title of task.
(3) Names of all persons in the survey crew and their assignments.
(4) The title page must be completed as the book or project is started.
The District’s return address must be noted on the title page in case
the book is lost. The book must be adequately indexed, pages
numbered and cross-referenced to contents.
(e) Permanence - All entries shall be made directly into bound books. At the
completion of the project, the books shall be filed as part of the
permanent record in keeping with Department policy.
(f) Accuracy - Record exactly what was done at the time it was done rather
than depending on memory at a later time. Never erase in a field book. If
an item is incorrectly entered, draw a line through the item and insert the
corrected value immediately above. When it is necessary to add data to
notes previously prepared, the additional item shall be dated and
initialed. Always enter notes directly into the record.
(g) Self-checking - Notes shall be kept so that the work can be checked
without returning to the field. Any person familiar with the project shall be
able to verify the accuracy of the work from the information contained in
the notes.
(h) Electronic/digital field notes are encouraged and shall be used when
working with data collectors. The use of day files for electronic note
keeping shall be used. The instrument number, party chief and crew
members shall be input as electronic notes. The time stamp function
shall be turned on at all times.
g. Staking Requests
1) A staking request form is to be submitted by the authorizing party to the
surveyor containing the following information:
(a) Project information
(b) Priority
(1) If no priority is listed, the work will be performed in the order listed.
(c) Type of Staking
(1) Slope Stakes
(2) Curb Stakes
(3) Drainage
(d) Stakes are either Original or Reset

Rev. 0 4.4 - 16
(e) Location, Alignment, Beginning and Ending Stations, Drainage

Structures, etc.
(f) Date that the site will be ready for stakes
(g) Date when the Contractor intends to begin work using the stakes
(h) A Comments Section indicating requested offsets for the reference
points, and any other relevant instructions.
(i) Requestor’s signature and date of request
(j) Reasonable notice is required so that the survey work can be planned
and coordinated in accordance with the project schedule. The surveyor
shall be notified by staking request at least 2 working days before the
survey services will be required. Requested survey services of greater
difficulty may require more than the standard 2 working day notice.
3. Construction
a. Original Ground Measures
1) Cross section measures of original ground shall be taken at each 20 m station
as indicated on the Drawings. Intermediate stations shall be measured by
cross section wherever grade breaks occur. Additional cross sections shall be
taken at stations to include quantities measurement of retaining walls,
drainage structures, etc. Elevation shots for original ground cross sections
shall be taken at the centerline of construction according to the Drawings and
as a minimum, at the following points perpendicular to and on each side of the
centerline:
(a) grade breaks
(b) edge of pavement
(c) curb and gutter
(d) shoulder of road
(e) toe of slope
(f) centerline of ditch
(g) top of bank
(h) All other physical features within the project limits.
(i) In areas where overbreak or slides are anticipated, sections shall be
extended out from centerline to include the anticipated disturbed ground
area.
b. After Excavation Measures
1) Cross sections shall be taken at the same stations as the original ground
cross sections. Elevation shall be for the bottom, sides and top of excavation
at the following points on each side and perpendicular to the centerline:
(a) centerline
(b) grade breaks
(c) toe of excavation
(d) top edge of cut

Rev. 0 4.4 - 17
(e) Original ground at a minimum of 3.0 m beyond the limits of excavation.

2) Work not meeting these requirements shall not be accepted by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor for payment.
c. Slope Stakes
1) Slope stakes shall be required for each cross section station and at additional
intervals such as points of curvature and tangency of curves, street
intersections, vertical curve intermediate stations to include the high or low
point of the curve, and at grade breaks. The stakes are to be set at points
where the cut or fill slopes intersect the surface of original ground.
2) Staking notes shall record the location of the slope stake in relation to the
construction centerline, the existing elevation shot at the catch point, the
planned elevation that the slope stake is identifying, what level of the design
prism the catch point is identifying such as top of unclassified fill, top of sub-
base, etc., the percent of slope for cut/fill, the distance to point slope staked,
and the station of the slope stake.
3) The information to be shown on a slope stake is as follows:
(a) Distance from the catch point to the point being staked.
(b) Percent of slope of the cut/fill.
(c) Amount of cut/fill.
(d) Stake’s location in reference to the centerline.
(e) Centerline station of the slope stake written on the back of the stake.
4) A reference stake shall be set for each slope stake. The reference stake shall
be set a minimum of 3.0 m and a maximum of 5.0 m beyond the slope stake.
The reference stake shall re-state the slope stake information in the event the
slope stake is disturbed or destroyed. A hub shall be driven flush with the
ground at the reference stake and all elevations and distances referenced to
the hub.
d. Grade Stakes
1) Cut or Fill Stakes
(a) Vertical cut/fill stakes shall be used where the design prism does not
contain sloped shoulders and ditches and a slope stake would not be
needed. The cut/fill stake shall be comprised of a standard 13 mm steel
stake driven flush with ground surface and accompanied by a site map
with the following information written on it:
(1) Rebar number (#)
(2) amount of cut or fill
(3) distance to the point of cut/fill from the steel stake
(4) description of the cut or filled type, i.e. subgrade, top classified
(5) offset distance from construction centerline to the cut/fill point
(6) centerline station of cut/fill point
(7) Elevation of the top of steel stake.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 18
(b) Cuts shall be given to the nearest 10 mm. Elevations of the top of hubs
shall be given to the nearest 10 mm. Stakes shall be required at each 10
m station identified on the Drawings and at additional intervals such as
points of curvature and tangency of curves, street intersections, vertical
curve intermediate stations to include the high or low point of the curve,
and at grade breaks. A record of the cut/fill, the design grade, the
distance offset from centerline, the centerline station and the type of
cut/fill being staked shall be written in the survey field book.
2) Finish Grade
(a) Grade hubs shall be set to verify that the road prism is at the correct
elevation prior to the placement of leveling course material. Wooden
hubs, painted or topped with colored whiskers, shall be set at the top of
classified fill, within one hundredths of a meter tolerance (0.01 m).
Stationing shall be 20 m on tangent and 10 m on curves unless the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor approves otherwise. All grade breaks, vertical
curve intermediate points to include the high/low point of the curve, PC
and PT of horizontal curves, and street intersections shall be staked.
(b) Hubs shall be established on the centerline of the road prism as a
minimum where poured curb and gutter is incorporated into the designed
road prism. Otherwise, hubs shall be established at the shoulder of the
designed road prism, as well as the centerline of the road prism.
(c) When parking aprons are staked, hubs shall be set on a 20 m grid
pattern unless approved otherwise by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
The field book shall contain the centerline station, the design finish grade
elevation of the point staked, the elevation of the hub, and a description
of the material being staked.
e. Drainage Facilities
1) The location, type, size, length, and invert elevations for drainage facilities are
given on the Drawings. Minor changes in locations and grades to meet
existing field conditions may be made where necessary, but only with the
approval of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. If the planned design grade is
found to be unworkable in the field, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be
notified immediately and all grade staking of the facility shall cease until
further notice from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
2) Storm Drains, Cleanouts, Outfalls, Catch Basins, Oil and Grease Separators,
Manholes and Culverts
(a) A ground line profile shall be run directly above the centerline of the pipe
and recorded in the field book before trenching occurs. The line and
grade for storm drain pipe shall be given from reference hubs offset from
each manhole, catch basin, angle point, outfall or cleanout. Reference
hubs for culvert installation shall be offset from the pipe ends on the
extended centerline of the culvert. One reference hub is required at each
end of a culvert. Guard stakes shall be provided for each hub and shall
identify the following information:
(1) station
(2) size, length and type of pipe

Rev. 0 4.4 - 19
(3) the amount of cut or fill from the top of the hub to the invert at the
end of the pipe
(4) The horizontal distance from the reference hub to the center of a
manhole, cleanout, catch basin, angle point in a pipe, outfall or end
of a culvert pipe.
3) For each structure, the field book shall show the location, type, and size of the
structure with a staking diagram showing all distances and pertinent
elevations. Two (2) reference hubs shall be set for each manhole, cleanout,
catch basin, angle point, and outfall. The reference hubs shall be offset no
greater than 10m from the facility they are referencing.
4) Headwalls
(a) Headwalls for storm drains and culverts shall be staked by setting a hub
accompanied by a guard stake on each side of the storm drain or culvert.
The hubs shall be on line with the face of the headwall, or as directed by
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. An elevation shall be established on the
hubs and written on the guard stake along with the offset distance to the
center of the headwall.
5) Dikes and Ditches
(a) Dikes/ditches shall be staked to the alignment, grade and slopes shown
on the Drawings. Dikes/ditches shall be slope staked to the shoulder or
flow line of the improvement with distances referenced to the
improvement centerline. The criteria outlined under – Slope Stakes shall
govern the establishment of slope stakes for this Work.
6) Riprap and Slope Protection
(a) All rip rap and slope protection shall be staked as soon as possible after
the pipe, fill, channel change or dike has been constructed. Slope stakes
shall be set if needed. Refer to Subsection 4.4.1.G.3.c.
7) Curb and Gutter
(a) Reference stakes are typically set at even 10 m stations. All grade
breaks, PVCs, PVTs, low points and high points on vertical curves shall
also be staked. A hub and tack shall be set at an offset distance of one
meter to the top back of curb. A lath will be set behind the hub and tack
with the offset distance marked below the offset and the station marked
on the back of the lath. The cut and fill will be to the top back-of-curb
within 10 mm. All radius points at curb returns will be staked and
additional stakes set breaking up the arc of the curve between curb
returns. If valley gutters are to be built, they shall be staked and
referenced.
f. Water Systems
1) Pipe offset stakes are typically set at 20 m intervals with cuts to invert of pipe
as indicated on the plans. Two offset hubs and lath shall be set for each tee,
hydrant, water service, valve, or other water appurtenance, along with angle
points and grade breaks in the alignment. The lath shall identify the feature
being staked and state the elevation of the hub, the offset distance to the
center of the feature, and the station of the feature as shown on the Drawings.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 20
The offsets shall be set at a reasonable distance to protect them from

disturbance.
2) An original ground line profile directly above the water line shall be run prior to
excavation and recorded in the field book. The ground line profile refers to the
elevation of the ground directly above the centerline of pipe and the grade line
refers to the elevation of the bottom of pipe, except where otherwise noted.
The field notes shall record the profile, the hub elevations, offset of the hubs,
and the station of the feature being staked.
g. Sanitary Sewer Systems
1) Pipe offset stakes are typically set at 10 m intervals with cuts to invert of pipe
as indicated on the plans. A minimum of two reference hubs shall be set for
each manhole, outfall or cleanout. Guard stakes shall be provided for each
hub showing the information necessary to construct the facility. The minimum
information to be shown on the reference stakes and in the field book is as
follows:
(a) Sewer alignment station of referenced point
(b) Size and type of pipe
(c) Cut or fill from the hub to the pipe invert
(d) Offset distance from the hub to the centerline of pipe or center of the
structure
2) An original ground line profile directly above the sewer line shall be run prior
to excavation and recorded in the field book. The ground line profile refers to
the elevation of the ground directly above the centerline of pipe and the grade
line refers to the elevation of the bottom of pipe, except where otherwise
noted.
3) The field notes shall record the profile, the hub elevations, offset of the hubs,
and the station of the feature being staked.
h. Bridges
1) Set stakes, nails, or other devices to control the location and elevation of the
various parts of bridges and progressive phases of construction. Provide
horizontal and vertical control for all elements of bridge construction. Stake
drainage facilities, electrical and telecommunication conduits and ductbanks,
light poles, water and sewer pipes, pedestrian and bicycle facilities, traffic
signal and sign supports, illumination devices, and other items shown or
identified that are to be integrated into the construction of the bridge.
2) Bridge Survey Control Stations - Use the smallest number of original Project
control stations as is practical for establishing positions and reference points
for bridge construction on one bridge. Use of multiple control stations will
increase the probability of incorporating error into the construction. Use
control stations that are as closely related mathematically as practical. The
Contractor may establish additional control stations as necessary to complete
the survey work. Additional control stations shall be established in such a
manner as to provide the accuracy needed to meet the required tolerances.
3) Original Project control stations shall be used only after the following
evaluation is completed for each bridge:

Rev. 0 4.4 - 21
(a) Supply a list of original Project horizontal and vertical control stations
intended by the Contractor to be used in establishing positions on a
given bridge.
(b) Measure relative positions of original Project horizontal control stations
intended to be used.
(c) Measure elevation differences between original Project vertical control
stations intended to be used.
(d) Supply horizontal and vertical measurement data to the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor.
(e) Compare measured values with those computed from original horizontal
network coordinates and vertical network elevations.
(f) Any discrepancy of concern to either the A/E and/or the EPC Contractor
will be resolved before that combination of control stations is used.
4) Layout Marks and Reference Points - Substructure
(a) Stake, reference, or otherwise identify locations, orientations, and
elevations necessary for placement of substructure components,
including but not limited to cofferdams, pilings (including batter), drilled
shafts, footings, columns, abutments, caps, cross beams, bearing
devices, temporary supports or falsework, and excavations and
embankments associated with any of the above.
(b) Verify and document the locations, elevations and spatial relationships
with adjacent substructure components. On bridges where prefabricated
beams will be used, measure and document span lengths between
bearing devices at each beam location as soon as practical. Supply a
copy of such documentation to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for review
before the next stage of construction.
(c) Compute the final elevations after studying the plans, specifications, and
shop drawings. Adjust the grades as needed to compensate for camber
of prefabricated beams, chording of beams across the low side of
superelevations, width of flat beams on superelevated surfaces, and any
other factor resulting from design or construction methods.
5) Layout Marks and Reference Points - Superstructure
(a) Stake, reference or otherwise identify locations, orientations, and
elevations necessary for placement of superstructure components
including but not limited to beams, girders, diaphragms, earthquake
restraints, deck, rails, structure mounted traffic control and illumination
devices, and concrete forms, temporary supports and falsework
associated with any of the above.
(b) Stake alignment of structure as needed at each stage of construction.
Stake alignment of poured-in-place items at 5 m stations or as
established by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Stake alignment for the
following items as needed to maintain the horizontal tolerance defined in
this manual :
(1) Outside edge of girder(s)
(2) Face(s) or centerline(s) of internal girders or stem walls

Rev. 0 4.4 - 22
(3) Edge of deck

(4) Alignment of grade breaks
(5) Pedestrian and bicycle facilities
(6) Rails and railings
(c) Stake grades at each stage of construction. Stake grade of poured-in-
place items at 5m stations, or as established by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor. Apply corrections to design grades based on the dynamics of
the evolving structure. Corrections that may be required depend upon
the design of the bridge and the construction methods employed.
Provide correction values to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor at least 15
working days prior to incorporating into the structure. The following list is
examples of possible corrections:
(1) Design camber (upward adjustment to compensate for anticipated
deflection)
(2) Structural deflection (deflection of the bridge under its own
increasing weight)
(3) Post tensioning lift (upward movement of the bridge under post
tensioning forces)
(4) Structural shifting (dynamics of the bridge under eccentric loading).
(5) Falsework deflection (deflection of falsework beams under
increasing weight)
(6) Falsework crush (compression of falsework supports under
increasing weight)
(7) Form crush (compression of forms under increasing weight)
(8) Equipment deflection (deflection of deck finishing machine or deck
rails)
(9) Other adjustments to staked value to achieve the design grade
6) Bridge Deck Grades - Set stakes or other devices to control the deck grade
elevations. The exact process will depend upon the type of deck and the
equipment being used.
7) Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Deck - The surveyor and survey crew
leader shall attend the deck pre-placement conferences as required for each
deck placement.
(a) Control of a PCC deck may involve significant work with the deck
placement crew to establish control for a deck finishing machine. Rails
for supporting the deck finishing machine are generally set up on either
side of the deck. Each rail is held up by adjustable supports every 1.5
meters. Adjust the rail at each support to the desired grade while the rail
is supporting the weight of the finishing machine. Corrections may need
to be applied as previously mentioned.
8) Asphaltic Concrete (AC) Deck - Control of an AC deck will not generally
involve as many variables as PCC. An AC deck serves as a wearing surface,
but not a structural component. Asphaltic concrete will frequently be used as
filler to create the desired super-elevations when flat beams form the

Rev. 0 4.4 - 23
superstructure. Stake control of the finish grade like any asphalt finish grade.
Under some circumstances, design camber and structural deflection may
need to be considered.
i. Building Layout may include but not limited to:
1) Provide finish floor benchmark.
2) Staking for sub-basement rough grade
3) Stake and grade building corners for pad excavation and construction.
Provide finish pad grade stakes on pre-determined grid from A/E and/or EPC
Contractor. As-built finish pad grades; provide to A/E and/or EPC Contractor
for review.
4) Provide offsets to building corners and gridlines along each edge of building.
5) Provide offsets to centerline of building steel columns.
6) Provide staking for, shear walls, retaining walls and elevator cores.
7) Provide anchor bolt layout, check template layout, check post concrete pour
anchor bolt locations; provide as-built comparison to plan locations within 1
week of footing being poured.
8) Horizontal control lines for x and y axis for each floor
9) Vertical control benchmark for each floor
j. Miscellaneous Construction
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide sufficient stakes for adequate
control of all structures and incidental construction not specifically covered
above. A staking diagram with respect to centerline and measurements for
pay quantities shall be maintained in the field notes. Other items such as
horizontal and vertical control shall be shown in the field book and shall be
governed by procedures established in this GEM.
k. AMG (Automated Machine Guidance)
1) Under the Construction Staking Subgrade bid item the surveyor may
substitute global positioning system (GPS) machine guidance for conventional
subgrade staking on all or part of the work. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
may require the surveyor to revert to conventional subgrade staking methods
for all or part of the work at any point during construction if, in the A/E's and/or
EPC Contractor’s opinion, the GPS machine guidance is producing
unacceptable results.
2) No subgrade stakes are required for work completed using GPS machine
guidance. Coordinate with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor throughout the
course of construction to ensure that work performed using GPS machine
guidance conforms to the contract tolerances and that the methods employed
conform to the Contractor's GPS work plan and accepted industry Standards.
Address GPS machine guidance issues at weekly progress meetings.
3) GPS Work Plan - Submit a comprehensive written GPS work plan for
department review at least 5 business days before the preconstruction
conference. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will review the plan to determine
if it conforms to the contract. Construct the subgrade as the Contractor's GPS

Rev. 0 4.4 - 24
work plan provides. Update the plan as necessary during construction of the
subgrade.
4) The GPS work plan shall discuss how GPS machine guidance technology will
be integrated into other technologies employed on the project. Include, but do
not limit the contents to, the following:
(a) Designate which portions of the contract will be done using GPS
machine guidance and which portions will be done using conventional
subgrade staking.
(b) Describe the manufacturer, model, and software version of the GPS
equipment.
(c) Provide information on the qualifications of Contractor staff. Include
formal training and field experience. Designate a single staff person as
the primary contact for GPS technology issues.
(d) Describe how project control is to be established. Include a list and map
showing control points enveloping the site.
(e) Describe site calibration procedures. Include a map of the control points
used for site calibration and control points used to check the site
calibration. Describe the site calibration and checking frequency as well
as how the site calibration and checking information are to be
documented.
(f) Describe the A/E and/or EPC Contractor's quality control procedures.
Describe procedures for checking, mechanical calibration, and
maintenance of equipment. Include the frequency and type of checks
performed to ensure that the constructed subgrade conforms to the
contract plans.
5) Equipment
(a) Use GPS machine guidance equipment to meet the requirements of the
contract.
(b) Perform periodic sensor calibrations, checks for blade wear, and other
routine adjustments as required to ensure that the final subgrade
conforms to the contract plans.
6) Geometric and Surface Information
(a) Develop and maintain the initial design surface DTM for areas of the
project employing GPS machine guidance. Confirm that the design
surface DTM agrees with the contract plans.
(b) Provide design surface DTM information to the department in LandXML,
Bentley InRoads Version 8i or other A/E and/or EPC Contractor-
approved format.
7) Managing and Updating Information
(a) Notify the department of any errors or discrepancies in department-
provided information. The department will determine what revisions may
be required. The department will revise the contract plans, if necessary,
to address errors or discrepancies that the Contractor identifies. The
department will provide the best available information related to those
contract plan revisions.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 25
(b) Revise the design surface DTM as required to support construction

operations and to reflect any contract plan revisions the department
makes. Perform checks to confirm that the revised design surface DTM
agrees with the contract plan revisions. Provide a copy of the resultant
revised design surface DTM to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor in
LandXML, Bentley InRoads Version 8i or other A/E and/or EPC
Contractor-approved format. The department will pay for costs incurred
to incorporate contract plan revisions as extra work.
8) Site Calibration
(a) Designate a set of control points, including a total of at least 6 horizontal
and vertical points or 2 per km, whichever is greater, for site calibration
for the portion of the project employing GPS machine guidance.
Incorporate the department-provided control framework used for the
original survey and design.
(b) Calibrate the site by determining the parameters governing the
transformation of GPS information into the project coordinate system.
Use the full set of plan control points for the initial site calibration.
Provide the resulting site calibration file to the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor before beginning subgrade construction operations.
9) Daily Calibration Checks
(a) In addition to the site calibration, perform site calibration checks. Perform
these checks at individual control points not used in the initial site
calibration. At a minimum, check the calibration at the start of each day
as described in the A/E and/or EPC Contractor's GPS work plan. Report
out-of-tolerance checks to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. The
measured position must match the established position at each individual
control point within the following tolerances:
(1) Horizontally to 30mm or less.
(2) Vertically to 20mm or less.
(b) Discuss the previous week’s daily calibration check results at the weekly
progress meeting for monitoring the GPS work.
4. Post - Construction, As-built Surveys and Record Drawings
a. As-built survey measurements shall be required for all constructed facilities and
improvements to confirm the dimensions, lines, grades, locations, or materials as
shown on the Drawings. Survey measurements shall be taken, field notes shall be
kept, and accuracy shall be attained in accordance with this Division. As-built
information shall be marked on a clean set of full-size paper copy Drawings and be
submitted to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor at the completion of construction
activity. When Record Drawings are to be submitted on the original Mylar Drawings,
the as constructed changes are recorded on the paper copy and shall be transferred
to the mylar copy and both the paper copy and mylars submitted to the A/E. The
Drawings shall be clearly stamped "Record Drawings." No final project payment will
be made to the Contractor until the Record Drawings have been submitted to and
approved by the A/E.
b. The following abbreviations shall be used on the Record Drawings to denote a
deviation from the Drawings:

Rev. 0 4.4 - 26
1) ASB "As-Built" - The actual horizontal, vertical, dimension, or quantity

measured by survey after it has been constructed.
2) F.C. "Field Change" - Revision or change of original design made in the field.
3) "DELETED" - Not constructed.
c. Minimum requirements for construction of Record Drawings:
1) When original Mylar Drawings are used for Record Drawing purposes, all As-
built information shall be in drafting ink and all information shall conform in
size, type, and scale to the original. No stick-on information adhesives shall
be accepted on the original mylars submitted for filing of Record Drawings.
2) When paper copies are used for record Drawing purposes, As-built Work shall
be marked in red ink or red pencil to clearly identify the changes to the
original design.
3) A straight line drawn through stationing, elevations, and notes shall show a
change, deletion, or omission and shall be followed with the appropriate
symbol.
4) Storm sewer, water, sanitary sewer, gas lines, or any construction that has
been deleted or relocated will be crosshatched.
5) Crossed out information shall still remain legible.
6) The scale of new gas lines, water, sewer, or any new construction not shown
shall conform to the scale of the drawings.
7) Reference information used to prepare Record Drawings, such as change
orders, and field books, shall be noted on the drawings.
8) Profile changes will be made with elevations or stationing only. The profile line
need not be re-drawn unless the change is significant.
9) As-builts for water, sewer, gas lines, and storm drain systems shall be
accurate within 9 mm vertically and 150 mm horizontally.
10) As-built Information shall be referenced to existing subdivision survey control
and/or monumented centerline of the right-of-way control.
11) As-builts for structures shall be accurate to within 13 mm vertically and
horizontally.
12) The name of the Record Drawing preparer, the employer, and the date of the
preparation shall appear in the appropriate title block on each Record
Drawing sheet.
H. Utility Rights of Way
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides for the definition, use, and identification of Utility Rights-of-
Way, existing or to be established for the project.
2. Definitions
a. Rights-of-Way
1) The right to pass through the property owned by another.
2) The strip of land subject to a non-owners right to pass through.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 27
3) Public right-of-way; the right of passage held by the public in general to travel
on roads, freeways, and other thoroughfares.
(a) A right-of-way may be established by contract, by long standing usage,
or by public authority.
(b) Also termed a public right-of-way
(1) Refer to Black’s Law Dictionary, Eighth Edition
b. Easements
1) An interest in land owned by another, consisting in the right to use or control
the land, or in an area above or below it, for a specific limited purpose.
(a) The primary recognized easements are
(1) A right-of-way
(2) A right of entry for any purpose relating to the dominant estate
(3) A right to the support of land and buildings
(4) A right of light and air
(5) A right of water
(6) A right to do some act that would otherwise amount to a nuisance
(7) A right to place or keep something on the servient estate
(b) Also termed a private right-of-way
(1) Refer to Black’s Law Dictionary
3. Establishing Rights-of-Way
a. Right-of-Way for Existing Utilities
1) To establish a right-of-way for an existing utility that is not within a right-of-
way, the following shall be done:
(a) The existing utility shall be field surveyed to determine the location,
course and/or depth of the utility. (Refer to Post-Construction, As-built
Surveys, and Record Drawings Subsection 4.4.1.G)
(b) The field data shall be submitted to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for
confirmation and adherence to accuracy Standards. Once complete:
(1) the right-of-way width and length shall be determined;
(2) the right-of-way shall be added to the project drawings and/or to the
Record Drawings and shall clearly state the purpose of the right-of-
way;
(3) the ownership of the land affected by the utility shall be determined;
(4) the appropriate documentation shall be prepared to establish the
right-of-way, showing the purpose of the right-of-way, the legal
description of the right-of-way tied to the project control network, to
whom the right-of-way is granted (grantee), and the ownership of
the land (grantor);

Rev. 0 4.4 - 28
(5) the necessary signatures and acknowledgements shall be affixed to

the documents;
(6) the documents shall be recorded with the appropriate governmental
agencies.
b. New Rights-of-Way
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the location, width, course,
direction, depth and/or length of the new utility, using various criteria, which
shall include but not be limited to:
(a) the purpose of the utility within the right-of-way
(b) the depth or height of the utility
(c) the terrain across which the utility will pass
(d) the ownership of the land across which the utility will pass
(e) design elements of the project which may obstruct the utility
2) The appropriate documentation shall be prepared to establish the right-of-
way, showing the purpose of the right-of-way, the legal description of the
right-of-way tied to the project control network, to whom the right-of-way is
granted (grantee), and the ownership of the land (grantor).
3) The necessary signatures and acknowledgements shall be affixed to the
documents.
4) The documents shall be submitted for record and stored with the RCJ.
4. Finalizing Rights-of-Way
a. Once the location of the rights-of-way are determined and established by document:
1) Provide stakes and monuments in the field, per the specifications governing
the type and construction of monuments, as determined by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor;
2) Annotate the design drawings and/or the As-built drawings.
I. Digital Terrain Modeling (DTM)
1. Synonyms
a. Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
b. Digital Surface Model (DSM)
2. DEM
a. DEM shall serve as the base information for the development of the DTM and shall
be presented as the digital cartographic representation if the earth in rectangular
grid, lattice, triangular network, spot heights or breaklines.
3. DTM Sources
a. Existing Local DTM
1) Where available the RCJ shall provide available DTM’s based on completed
surveys.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 29
b. New Local job or Contract Specific DTMs

1) The local or job specific DTMs are collected locally as directed by the RCJ,
and can be as small as a single lot or several hectares or kilometers in size.
4. Methods
a. Several methods are available for collecting a DTM, including the following:
1) Lidar, Aerial photogrammetry, Radar
2) Real Time Kinematic GPS, Total Stations, Scanning
3) Topographic Maps
4) Doppler Radar, Focus Variation, Range Imaging
5. Accuracy
a. The accuracy of the DTM horizontally and vertically is affected by several factors,
including but not limited to the following: Method, equipment, weather, personnel.
b. When developing a DTM, qualified personal or subcontractors shall be used.
c. Once the DTM surface is created it shall be checked in the Field for accuracy.
6. DTM Requirements for all Projects:
a. Less than 1.0 hectare or single lot developments
1) Topographic survey shall be collected on all small lot developments to ensure
accurate design tie in locations and quantities.
(a) On small lot or parcels, it would be recommended to use a field survey
crew to obtain the desired grid and critical points for use in a DTM for the
site.
b. Large project sites
1) The DTM requirements for a larger project will be dependent on whether it is
a commercial site, larger residential or rural area.
(a) Methods for the larger sites will be dependent on the required accuracy
as required by the RCJ.
c. Quality Control
1) All DTM’s shall be checked for accuracy by taking ground field survey shots
on a minimum of 10 percent of areas in the DTM. Critical point locations shall
also be checked like curb tie-ins, driveways, building fronts, etc.
2) Third party DTM’s
(a) If a DTM is provided from a third party or other sources, a 15 percent
check shall be made to verify the accuracy of the provided DTM surface.
J. Surveys
1. Aerial Survey
a. Introduction - Photogrammetric surveys establish targeted, and occasionally non-
targeted, photo control on the ground to relate aerial photographs to a project’s
horizontal and vertical datum. The photo control is used by the Photogrammetrist to

Rev. 0 4.4 - 30
create topographic and planimetric maps for Design, Environmental, Traffic,

Hydrology, Planning, and other functional units within RCJ boundaries.
b. Field Surveys
1) All photo control surveys shall be conducted in accordance with all of the
pertinent requirements of Subsection 4.4.1, and comply with the requested
survey precision requested by the Photogrammetrist.
2) All “pre-mark” photo control targets shall be in place before photography is
acquired.
3) It is recommended that all photo control surveys be completed before
photography is acquired.
c. Placement of Photo Control
1) Setting Photo Control Targets
(a) Wherever possible, the photo control targets shall be set on pavement or
other hard surfaces. The targets shall be painted with flat black and flat
white paint. If it is not possible to set a target on a paved surface or other
hard surface then a cloth target shall be set.
(b) When the location of the target is likely to be disturbed by vandalism,
construction, agricultural or other activities, a durable reference
monument shall be set and the target placed accurately on this mark.
2) Photo Control Target Placement Tolerance
(a) Each flight plan shall list a positional tolerance that limits the movement
of the proposed photo control target from the flight plan location. This is
especially important with respect to the wing points. Properly positioned
wing points are critical to the aero-triangulation process. In general, the
wing points may be moved parallel to the flight line, but shall avoid
moving the wing points perpendicular to the flight line as the wing point
may then fall outside the photography or too close to the middle of the
photography, reducing the wing point’s effectiveness.
(b) Photo center (i.e. flight line) control monuments are established as close
to the center of the flight line as possible. Their location and configuration
is dependent upon the flight height. For highway work the closest to the
flight line center that is most often achievable on the ground is on the
shoulder of the highway. Whenever possible, Jubail Industrial City
primary control monuments that have been previously established on the
ground by a primary control survey shall be used for all photo center
control monuments. This allows the photo control survey to be
horizontally and vertically referenced and tied directly to the primary
control established on the ground as the framework for the survey control
network without having to install additional monuments. This also greatly
reduces the amount of field surveying needed to establish photo ground
control since the primary control monuments need only to be targeted.
(c) Photo wing control monuments are established at the extreme right or
left outer edge of the flight line in the area of the overlapping photos.
These points allow the control to be passed from one photo to another.
Their location and configuration is dependent upon the flight height.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 31
(d) If the limits shown on the flight plan must be exceeded, the Aerial
Mapping Contractor and Engineer shall be contacted to determine the
best location for alternate photo control.
3) Photo Control Target Location Tips
(a) The care exercised in targeting and positioning the photo control affects
all subsequent photogrammetric processes and the final delivered
products.
(b) The planned location of the photo control provided with the flight plan will
direct the general area where the targets are to be placed. Once in the
general area, the positional tolerance given on the flight plan and the
following tips shall be used to select the final target locations.
4) Tips on selecting locations for the setting of photo control targets:
(a) Use the flight plan to anticipate the position of the aircraft and avoid tall
objects between the plane and the targets. Stand on the proposed target
locations and imagine the plane traveling along the flight line while
looking for obstructions.
(b) Avoid tall objects that could obstruct the image of the target in one or
more exposures. If there are unavoidable tall objects near a target then
move the target within the tolerances indicated on the flight plan or set
additional targets to ensure that the area will be properly controlled for
the subsequent photogrammetric processes.
(c) Avoid shaded areas. Visit the tentative target locations at the
approximate time photography is to be obtained. Relocate the target to a
sunny spot if there are shadows in the planned location. Set additional
targets if needed.
(d) Avoid overhead wires. It is difficult for the Photogrammetrist to measure
the elevation of the photo control when there are wires suspended above
the targets.
(e) Remove grass from under cloth targets so that the growth of the grass
doesn’t distort the cloth target between the time it was set and the date
of photography. Check the cloth target for “ballooning” caused by
growing vegetation immediately prior to ordering photography.
(f) Choose a level spot if available. A hard surface that will accept paint is
ideal, as painted targets are more durable.
5) Orientation of the photo control targets shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a) Photo control targets shall be placed so that the legs are aligned
perpendicular and parallel to the flight line.
(b) Photo control targets must be placed on a steep slope, the target shall
be oriented so that two of the legs that form a straight line lie along the
slope at approximately the same elevation.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 32
d. Target Specifications
FIGURE 4.4.1.A TARGET DIMENSIONS
NJDOT Minimum Guidelines for Aerial Photogrammetric Mapping BDC98PR-009
1) The Figure 4.4.1.A shall be used as a guideline for target dimensions unless
specifically directed otherwise by flight plan directions from the
Photogrammetrist.
2) Where the white targets are similar in color or do not contrast with the
underlying surface they shall be outlined with flat black paint or black roofing
paper or similar material to create contrast and aid in identifying it on the
aerial photograph.
3) Painted targets may be used on local or private roads where permission has
been granted from the appropriate authority or owners.
4) Due care must be taken to ensure that materials used for targets will not
damage the environment or cause any harm to humans, animals or
machinery. Plastic targets must not be used in livestock areas.
5) All mapping control target material and fastenings (i.e. pins, wire, nails etc.)
must be removed from the field as soon as possible after the aerial
photography has been captured to minimize the impact on property owners.
However, preplanned control points (but not target material) may be retained
in urban areas if they are suitable for future works.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 33
e. Accuracy Requirements
1) All photo control horizontal and vertical surveys shall meet the positional
accuracy as specified by the Photogrammetrist and conform to Subsection
4.1.1.J.5.
f. Airborne GPS Surveys
1) It is the responsibility of the Aerial Mapping Contractor to:
(a) Coordinate the use of the Airborne GPS Surveys (ABGPS) for the
project.
(b) Coordinate the schedule of the ABGPS project.
(c) Coordinate the required target control layout, dimensions and accuracy
specifications.
(d) Coordinate the placement of check points to be targeted on the control
scheme for the project.
2) It is the responsibility of the Land Surveyor to:
(a) Set and survey, if needed, the monuments for the base stations.
(b) Ensure that the provisions of this appendix are met when performing
ABGPS surveys.
(c) Facilitate communication during the flight.
3) ABGPS Control Requirements
(a) The Land Surveyor shall perform the ABGPS field survey to the following
requirements:
(b) The base stations horizontal coordinates shall be produced from Jubail
Industrial City control monuments established by Primary Control Survey
procedures.
(c) The photo control horizontal coordinates shall be produced from Jubail
Industrial City control monuments established by Primary or Secondary
Control Survey procedures.
4) Base Station Location Requirements
(a) The base station locations shall be based upon the following criteria:
(1) One Station within 1 km of the Airport to be used for a static
initialization of the airplane GPS equipment.
(2) One Station within 1 km of each end of the project.
(3) Additional Stations a maximum of 40 km spacing throughout the
project.
(4) GPS suitability.
5) Equipment Requirements
(a) Base-Station Equipment Requirements - Surveys shall provide the
following equipment for use at each base-station location:
(1) A dual frequency GPS or GNSS Receiver

Rev. 0 4.4 - 34
(2) A data logger capable of logging data at 2 hertz or better and that
has adequate memory for logging data for up to 6 hours.
(3) A Geodetic Antenna.
(4) Batteries sufficient to power the GPS or GNSS equipment for up to
6 hours.
(5) A fixed height tripod.
(b) Airborne Equipment Requirements - The following equipment is required
for use in the aircraft:
(1) A dual frequency GPS or GNSS receiver.
(2) A data logger capable of logging data at 2 hertz or better and that
has adequate memory for logging data for up to 6 hours.
(3) An event marker.
(4) Batteries sufficient to power the GPS or GNSS equipment for up to
6 hours.
(5) All necessary cables and adaptors.
6) Aircraft Equipment Setup
(a) The Land Surveyor shall approve the aircraft antenna and camera
system prior to use on an ABGPS project. The aerial photography
Contractor shall provide the Land Surveyor with the GPS or GNSS
antenna specifications and offset survey data.
(b) The Land Surveyor and Aerial Photography Contractor shall coordinate
the following connections per the aircraft specific checklist provided by
the Engineer:
(1) Connect GPS receiver to the GPS antenna data only splitter port,
the data collector, the event marker, and the battery.
(2) Connect the event marker to the camera.
(3) If the receiver has a built in event marker then the Land Surveyor
and Aerial Photography Contractor shall make a direct connection
between the camera and the appropriate port or jack on the GPS or
GNSS receiver.
7) Pre-flight Check
(a) The Land Surveyor and Aerial Photography Contractor shall verify the
following for the aircraft GPS or GNSS equipment:
(1) Sufficient battery power for the ABGPS project.
(2) The GPS or GNSS satellite configuration and the reception of all
signals.
(3) The activation of the camera shutter causes events to be logged in
the GPS or GNSS receiver.
8) Pre-flight Static initialization
(a) The Land Surveyor shall collect GPS or GNSS data for 20 minutes prior
to the flying of the project for a preflight static initialization and again

Rev. 0 4.4 - 35
verify that the activation of the camera shutter causes events to be

logged. Also, they shall note the camera event number and the GPS or
GNSS receiver event number.
9) ABGPS Flight
(a) The aerial photography Contractor shall fly the flight paths shown on the
approved flight plan. Each flight line will be flown twice to minimize the
risk of having to repeat the project due to image errors or loss of GPS or
GNSS signal lock.
10) Post-flight check
(a) The Land Surveyor and Aerial Photography Contractor shall verify that
the camera events were logged in the GPS or GNSS receiver after the
ABGPS flight. If there is a discrepancy in the number of photographs
taken compared to the number of events logged, the discrepancy shall
be noted.
11) Post-flight Static initialization
(a) The Land Surveyor shall continue to collect GPS or GNSS data for an
additional 20 minutes after the ABGPS flight for a post-flight static
initialization.
12) Deliverable data to A/E and EPC Contractor or RCJ
(a) ABGPS Receiver Data
(b) Base-station Receiver Data
(c) Ground Control Data
(d) Mapping Epoch Coordinates
(e) Mission Epoch Coordinates
13) Post-mission GPS or GNSS Processing and Data Analysis
(a) The Land Surveyor will post process the kinematic data and confer with
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor the results of the GPS or GNSS
processing.
2. Satellite Survey
a. Definition
1) Satellite surveying is a form of surveying and mapping that uses information
derived from various satellite constellations, together referred to as GNSS
(Global Navigation Satellite System), consisting of the U.S. Global
Positioning System (GPS), the Russian GLONASS, the European Union’s
Galileo and the Chinese BeiDou systems, to provide spatial location on or
above the surface of the earth.
b. GNSS Standards and Specifications
1) GPS at: https://www.ngs.noaa.gov/PUBS_LIB/GeomGeod.pdf
2) GLONASS at: http://www.nis-glonass.ru/
3) Galileo at: http://www.esa.int/Our_Activities/Navigation/The_future_-
_Galileo/Galileo_satellites

Rev. 0 4.4 - 36
4) BeiDou at: http://www.beidou.gov.cn/

3. Bathymetric Surveys
a. Introduction – Bathymetric surveys may include, but not be limited to:
1) Surveys of original ground or sea bed in water depths between approximately
one (1) meter to thirty (30) meters.
2) Surveys and as-built mapping of dredged channels.
3) Monitoring of siltation.
4) Locations and elevations of underwater structures or objects.
b. All work will conform to the general requirements for hydrographic surveys required
above.
c. All survey work will be related to Plant Grid or UTM, as directed.
d. For safety considerations, all work will be carried out during daylight hours, unless
otherwise permitted.
e. An assessment must be carried out regarding prevailing water and weather
conditions, before embarking on any water-based survey work.
f. Survey Procedures
1) For surveys in up to 1 meter of water depth, conventional survey techniques
can be applied, providing that safe water and underfoot conditions apply.
(a) Horizontal position and elevation will be obtained simultaneously by total
station measurements from known control points or by differential or RTK
(Real-Time Kinematic) GPS or GNSS positioning.
(b) Survey data shall be recorded in a dedicated data logger, in real time.
(c) To ensure full coverage of the required area, it is recommended that
cross sections are carried out at a pre-determined spacing (minimum 25
meters).
(d) Survey points will be plotted and depth contours (isobaths) interpolated
at agreed vertical intervals (typically 0.25 meters for most applications,
but this may be increased to 0.5 meters for non-critical areas, subject to
agreement by RCJ).
(e) Existing sea bed conditions and approximate depth of silt shall be
recorded.
(f) There will be no requirement to record tidal data, although approximate
water level at the time of survey shall be noted.
2) For surveys in depths of 1 meter or more, survey equipment and personnel
will need to be located on a floating platform or boat, entailing the following
requirements for horizontal positioning, soundings, tidal data and motion
control:
(a) Horizontal position by total station measurements from known control
points:
(1) Horizontal position by total station will be restricted to close inshore
work

Rev. 0 4.4 - 37
(2) For total station measurements, the point of measurement must be

coaxial with the echo-sounder transponder, to enable simultaneous
recording of horizontal and vertical measurements.
(3) Both total station measurements and soundings must be accurately
time-related in order to combine horizontal positions with observed
depths.
(b) Horizontal position by GPS or GNSS measurements:
(1) Wherever practicable, in order to reconcile horizontal and vertical
measurements the GPS equipment and echo-sounder transponder
shall be installed co-axially.
(2) If co-axial mounting is not possible, then a minimum of two GPS
receivers shall be installed and spaced in such a way as to provide
a strong geometric relationship with the transponder location.
(3) Pre-survey determination of the relative locations of GPS receivers
and transponder on the vessel will be required during each
installation of the equipment.
(4) GPS observations shall be continuously recorded (preferred 10Hz).
(5) An independent daily check of the on-board GPS receiver shall be
carried out using a separate GPS receiver or total station, to verify
performance of the vessel’s position-fixing system.
(6) Regular dynamic checks of the GPS shall also be made against a
distinctive and permanent site feature (preferably in water of less
than 10-meter depth).
(c) Depth measurement using Single-Beam Echo Sounders (SBES):
(1) SBES equipment will typically be used in situations where full sea-
bed coverage is not required.
(2) Soundings will be obtained in the form of cross sections, at a pre-
determined spacing.
(i) For depths less than 10 meters, the maximum spacing of cross
sections shall be the lesser of 3x average depth or 25 meters.
(ii) For depths between 10 meters and 30 meters, the maximum
spacing of cross sections shall be 50 meters.
(3) Equipment must be calibrated using a standard ‘bar check’ routine.
(4) Bar checks must be carried out before and after each survey
mission, or, at a minimum, on a daily basis.
(5) The echo sounder must be accurately positioned relative to the
position-fixing equipment (see (b) above).
(d) Depth measurement using Multi-Beam Echo Sounders (MBES)
(1) MBES equipment will typically be used when full sea bed coverage
is required.
(2) MBES coverage shall be limited to between 45° and 50° each side
of the nadir.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 38
(3) MBES cross sections shall be spaced to provide at least 20%

overlap, to ensure full sea bed coverage.
(4) Equipment must be calibrated using a Patch Test, to determine the
mount angles of the transducer(s) relative to the vessel’s axes (roll,
pitch and heading).
(5) Wherever practicable, the equipment shall be tested using a
reference surface (i.e. a suitable area of sea floor that has been
previously surveyed), where repeated measurements can be
compared in order to identify systematic errors.
(6) For optimum results, motion sensor equipment shall be used to
correct for variations in pitch, roll and heading of the vessel
(otherwise the GPS measurements can fulfill this purpose, but
accuracy may be compromised due to the GPS update rate).
(e) Tidal Measurements
(1) All surveys carried out within tidal areas must be corrected for tidal
variation.
(2) Unless otherwise agreed, a continuously recording tide gauge must
be used for all bathymetric surveys.
(3) The tide gauge must be situated so as to provide representative
tidal information for the survey area.
(4) The elevation of the tide gauge must be verified relative to the
project datum.
(5) In the event that an automatically-recording tide gauge is
unavailable, a manual tide gauge will be installed. Manual recording
of tidal data must be of sufficient frequency to accurately depict the
tidal curve.
g. Survey Accuracies
1) For engineering surveys or for shallow water harbors, berths and associated
critical channels, with minimum under-keel clearances:
(a) Soundings – 1 meter horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical
(b) Features – 0.5 meters for horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical
2) For non-shallow water harbors, berths and associated critical channels, with
minimum under-keel clearances:
(a) Soundings – 1 meter horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical.
(b) Features – 1 meter for horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical
h. Survey Processing
1) Survey data processing will combine soundings, positions, tidal data and
motion sensor data, into a single data set.
2) A clean data set will be required, eliminating any erroneous data revealed by
the various check measurements.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 39
(a) Data smoothing will not be acceptable, without prior agreement. Data
smoothing, if agreed, must clearly identify the magnitude of
discrepancies between raw and smoothed data.
(b) Large data sets may be thinned using ‘shoal bias thinning’, provided the
accuracy of the survey data is maintained.
(c) For data that will be used for chart preparation, a Combined Uncertainty
and Bathymetric Estimator (CUBE) surface will be provided.
(d) For volumetric calculations a data set comprising a grid of average
depths will be required (grid spacing to be agreed on a project by project
basis).
3) A survey report will be required, including the following:
(a) Discussion of the methods used for the survey
(b) Analysis of the results, with an assessment of accuracies achieved
(c) Identification and quantification of all potential error sources, with
derivation of the Total Propagated Uncertainty (TPU) for the data set.
i. Deliverables
1) Hard copies of all plans and charts
2) Daily logs and reports
3) Evidence of equipment calibrations
4) Digital files including all soundings, located features and tidal data
4. Geodetic Control Surveys
a. Geodetic Control survey
1) The boundary of Jubail Industrial City.
2) Accuracy of Geodetic Control Surveys
(a) http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/tech_pub/1984-stds-specs-geodetic-
control-networks.htm
3) Survey shall be used to locate all on-shore boundaries of Jubail Industrial
City, as well as the boundaries of the following areas:
(a) Community Area
(b) Existing Industrial Area
(c) Airport Area
(d) New Industrial Area
(e) Rural Surveys as Required
4) As required, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor will obtain data on various
stations of the National Geodetic Network established by the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia, on the ARAMCO UTM coordinate system.
5) The Consultant will establish, maintain, and expand as per project
specifications where necessary, the Geodetic Horizontal Controls and the
Precise Vertical Control as required by the Royal Commission Jubail.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 40
6) Monuments shall be placed at all corners, angle points and at approximately

100 m intervals on tangents along these boundaries. Every Geodetic
monument shall have geographic coordinates, UTM coordinates with scale
factor, and Plant Grid coordinates.
5. Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Control Surveys
a. Primary Control Surveys
1) Primary Control Surveys are used to establish the initial Control for:
(a) The Boundaries of Sections and Districts
(b) Airports Primary and Secondary Control (PAC,SAC)
2) Survey shall be used within Community Area to locate the boundaries of
Districts that are developed. The boundaries shall be established and
monumented on each corner (on land only), and all angle points along the
boundary. Each point established shall be identified in Plant Grid coordinates.
3) Within Community Area, Airport Area and New Industrial Area all section
boundaries shall be established and monumented at each corner, along the
boundary lines (on land only), using primary order surveying. Each point
established shall be identified in Plant Grid coordinates.
4) All monuments established by primary order surveying shall have elevations
established using Precise Leveling accuracy methods.
b. Secondary Control Surveys
1) Secondary Control Surveys are to establish:
(a) Intersections of Street Centerlines
2) Survey shall be used for further subdivision of Sections and Districts. Within
Community Area, all sector boundaries, street centerlines and intersections
shall be established and monumented, as well as block boundaries, using
secondary order surveying. All points so established shall have Plant Grid
coordinates.
3) Secondary order surveying shall be used for further subdivision of Existing
Industrial Area, Airport Area and New Industrial Area. For each of these
Districts, each street centerline and centerline intersection shall be
established and monumented. A minimum of two monuments shall be
established within each primary industrial site. All other Districts, including
Support and Secondary Industries, shall have each block monumented, with
Plant Grid coordinates established for each point.
4) Each point, so established, shall have an elevation established in accordance
with Primary Leveling criteria.
c. Tertiary Horizontal Control Surveys
1) Tertiary horizontal Control Survey are to establish:
(a) Lot Lines
(b) Construction Surveys
(c) Local Project Control, etc.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 41
2) Survey shall be used for the final subdivision of blocks into lots, plots or
parcels for final usage. This covers all lot or plot boundaries within Community
Area which shall be established and monumented.
3) Each point shall have coordinates in Plant Grid. All the Royal Commission
facilities (i.e., pump stations, storage reservoirs, rest areas, O & M Centers,
etc.) shall have their boundaries established and monumented.
d. Accuracy Requirements
1) Standards and Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks
(a) http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/tech_pub/1984-stds-specs-geodetic-
control-networks.htm
6. Precise, Primary and Secondary Vertical Control Surveys
a. Benchmarks shall be installed where required as per the project specifications.
b. Benchmarks shall be established using differential leveling methods.
c. The order of accuracy shall be as required by the Royal Commission Jubail per
project specifications.
1) Geodetic Leveling Class and Accuracy Standards and Methods:
(a) http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/tech_pub/Fgcsvert.v41.specs.pdf
d. Monuments shall be set and constructed in accordance with the latest revision of
drawings as approved by the Royal Commission.
e. Equipment (Digital and Conventional Levels)
1) Use per manufacturer’s specifications.
2) Use all levels with methods as referenced in this Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.c.1)(a).
7. Cadastral Control Surveys
a. Introduction - Cadastral surveying is that branch of surveying which is concerned
with the survey and demarcation of land for the purpose of defining parcels of land
for registration in a land registry.
b. Every cadastral control survey shall be carried out in strict compliance with these
guidelines.
c. Before commencing a cadastral control survey, existing survey data relating to the
survey is to be obtained by consulting the records of the Authority or, if he is so
directed by the Authority.
d. Cadastral Project Control - A network or series of control points that are established
per procedures outlined in Subsection 4.1.1.J.5. The Cadastral Project Control is
adjusted independently of other cadastral measurements.
1) Standards For the Positional Accuracy of Cadastral Surveys When Using
Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS), February 23, 2009, Cadastral
Survey, Bureau of Land Management, Department of the Interior,
Washington, DC
2) Geo Information in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Municipal and
Rural Affairs, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, 2010

Rev. 0 4.4 - 42
3) Modernization of Saudi Cadastre Alrajhi, M., and Hawarey, M. Ministry of

Municipal and Rural Affairs, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia
4) Boundary and Surveys Maps Act, Chapter 25, 02/07/2007, Singapore
Attorney General’s Chambers
5) Cadastral Survey Guidelines, Government of South Australia, July 2014
8. Cadastral Lot Surveys
a. Survey Evidence
1) A surveyor must, before carrying out a cadastral survey, obtain all information
that is likely to provide evidence of the boundaries of land to be surveyed; and
that is reasonably accessible.
2) A surveyor must, in carrying out a cadastral survey, locate all existing survey
marks, reference marks, improvements and natural features likely to provide
evidence of the boundaries of the land; and connect the survey to all existing
surveys of land in the vicinity likely to provide evidence of the boundaries of
land by:
(a) connecting to at least 2 apparently sound survey marks or reference
marks placed or accepted in the existing survey; or
(b) if there are not 2 apparently sound survey marks or reference marks to
which the survey may be connected - by connecting to such apparently
sound survey marks as are available and to improvements in a manner
that enables the existing survey to be re-established.
3) If significant differences in the data from an existing survey are revealed then
perform further work as may be necessary to establish whether or not the
difference results from an error in measurement in the existing survey, the
placement or acceptance of the survey mark in the existing survey or the
siting of the improvement.
b. Marking of Boundaries
1) The boundaries in a cadastral survey must be marked with acceptable
monuments together with any additional markings as are necessary to assist
in locating the corners and the direction of boundaries.
2) The line identification and marking must be implemented in a manner so that
the defined boundary can be readily identified.
c. Survey Boundaries
1) The cadastral survey must relate to the boundaries referred to in the
documents of title of the subject land and adjoining parcels of land.
d. Field Requirements of a Cadastral Survey
1) A datum must be adopted and verified in accordance with a previous
cadastral survey or plan.
2) If an abstract of field records is to be lodged, bring the bearing and co-
ordinate datum on to the datum as called for in Cadastral Control Surveys,
per Subsection 4.4.1.J.7.d.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 43
3) If a connection is shown on the document of title, measure that connection

unless the position of the subject land can be satisfactorily determined
otherwise.
4) Connect the cadastral survey to relevant permanent marks, primary cadastral
marks and other relevant survey marks.
5) Locate and clearly describe any feature on or near the boundaries of the
subject land likely to affect those boundaries.
6) Locate and clearly describe any feature within the subject land the description
and position of which is necessary for the purpose of the survey.
7) Determine the length and bearing of each surveyed boundary of the subject
land and independently check the accuracy of each determination.
8) Ensure that an irregular boundary is determined at all conspicuous changes in
direction at such intervals as are necessary to accurately determine the
boundary.
9) If the survey of a subdivision is connected to a minimum of two permanent
marks or primary cadastral marks and one reference mark in situations where
they are unlikely to be disturbed, the placement of any further permanent or
primary cadastral marks within the subdivision may be postponed if the
construction of roads or buildings or other works are to be undertaken which
are likely to displace those permanent marks or primary cadastral marks
during construction.
10) If the placement of further marks is postponed a supplementary abstract of
field records showing the particulars and connections to the marks placed
must be lodged within one month after completion of construction.
e. Information to be recorded in the field records:
1) the recording of cadastral survey information gathered in the field is
undertaken in a systematic manner and is readily comprehensible; and
information in the field records includes:
(a) A list identifying the survey instruments used and their calibrations.
(b) All measurements made in the field and all corrections applied.
(c) Sufficient information to prepare an abstract of field records.
(d) All field records are kept so as to be readily available for submission to or
perusal by any person duly authorized by the Deputy Ministry of Land
Surveying.
2) the information to be recorded schematically on an abstract of field records of
a cadastral survey provides:
(a) Clear details of the cadastral survey datum and relationship to the
property boundaries.
(b) The method of marking the perimeter boundaries of the property under
survey.
(c) Any relevant information external to the property under survey which has
aided in the determination of property boundaries and the relationship
with existing and new survey marks.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 44
3) the information to be recorded on cadastral survey plan provides:

(a) That a plan of survey is prepared using conventional signs and symbols
as accepted by the controlling jurisdiction.
(b) The plan clearly portrays all relevant information which relates to the
property boundaries, road alignments and any registered easements or
reservations or conditions in the nature of an easement which relate to
the land under survey.
4) Certification of Abstract of Field Records and Survey Plan.
(a) The first sheet of an abstract of field records of a cadastral survey must
show a certification as follows:
(1) CERTIFICATE BY SURVEYOR FOR ABSTRACT OF FIELD
RECORDS
I, (insert full name) of (insert office address) certify that
this abstract of field records correctly represents the
results of the survey effected under my direction and
supervision and marked on the ground in accordance with
the (insert appropriate statute), that the survey accuracy
accords with that required for Cadastral Land Surveys as
defined in regulation (insert appropriate statute) and that
this abstract of field records correctly represents the
adopted boundaries and the related features existing on
(insert date).
Date: (insert date of certificate)
(signature)
(insert title)
(insert appropriate statute)
(b) If a plan references particulars of a cadastral survey carried out for the
purpose of making that plan, the surveyor must endorse it with a
certification referenced as follows:
(1) CERTIFICATE BY SURVEYOR FOR PLAN
I, (insert full name) of (insert office address) certify that
this plan has been prepared from a survey made under
my direction and supervision in accordance with the
(insert appropriate statute), and completed on the (insert
date of completion), that this plan is accurate and correctly
represents the adopted boundaries and the survey
accuracy accords with that required for Cadastral Land
Surveys as defined in regulation (insert appropriate
statute).
Date: (insert date of certificate)
(signature)
(insert title)
(insert appropriate statute)

Rev. 0 4.4 - 45
5) Reports to accompany an abstract of field records or survey plan may include:

(a) The relevant facts concerning abuttals and encumbrances, existing
occupation details, relationship with other relevant cadastral surveys and
the manner in which the boundaries of the property under survey have
been determined.
(b) Provide details on the date of calibration of measuring equipment used in
the cadastral survey.
(c) The appropriate marking out or definition of the roads, reserves,
boundaries, lots and common property has been made.
(d) The connection of the survey to permanent marks, primary cadastral
marks and reference marks as required or postponed in accordance with
item (9).
(1) Survey (Cadastral surveys) Regulations, SR No. 56/2005, Version
April 18 2008, National Mapping Council of Australia
f. Entry to Land / Property for the purpose of conducting Cadastral Lot Surveys shall
follow the procedures outlined below:
1) The surveyor shall give the occupant / owner a written notice of his intention
to enter the land / property to do the survey at least 3 working days in
advance.
2) At the appointed time, the surveyor or his approved assistant shall explain to
the occupant / owner his intention of entering the land to do the survey. He
shall produce an authority card on first entering and whenever subsequently
requested to do so.
3) If the surveyor or his approved assistant surveyor is denied entry, he shall not
force his way into the land but rather seek the help of the owner who engages
him to perform the survey to speak to the occupant / owner who has denied
entry, to gain access for the Surveyor. Refer to: Singapore Land Authority CS
Circular No. 3/2004.
9. As-Built and Topographic Surveys

a. As-built, topographic, spot height and contour surveys shall be carried out using
accepted horizontal and vertical survey control as described in Subsections 4.4.1.D
and 4.4.1.E. Automated data capture methods shall be used and final maps also
presented in a format compatible to Royal Commission systems and software.
b. Planimetric Mapping Information
1) The absolute paper plan position of any well-defined point of detail shall be
correct to within ± 0.3 mm RMSE (Root Mean Square Error) at the plan scale,
when checked from the nearest control station.
c. Height Information
1) Ground survey spot levels on hard surfaces shall be correct to ± 10 mm
RMSE and elsewhere to ± 50 mm, except on ploughed or otherwise broken
surfaces in relation to the nearest control station.
2) Height information shall be provided
(a) either as an elevation to depict details true to ground,

Rev. 0 4.4 - 46
(b) or as spot heights throughout the survey area,

(c) or as height of detail, i.e. from ground terrain to top level of the details,
e.g. height of a lamp post.
3) Elevations shall be surveyed such that the ground terrain of a feature which
attached or intersected with the ground is derived. Thus, when using
reflectorless Total Station, correct location(s) of detail point(s) must be
surveyed to feature from the ground terrain. For instance, the base of a street
lamp pole shall be surveyed instead of random point on the pole.
4) Generally, spot heights shall be taken at intervals of not more than 15 m to
allow capturing of possible discontinuities of terrain. Spot heights shall be
taken on all roads, at intersections, building corners, edges of carriageways,
invert of drains, footpaths, bridges, fire hydrants, other salient ground features
and at all changes in grade.
d. Level of details to be surveyed
1) All visible details shall be surveyed. Where relevant, indicate features that are
considered encroachments. If encroachment survey is to be carried out, it
shall be done according to cadastral survey Standards.
2) Saplings and trees where required shall be surveyed and described.
Generally, trees with girth 100mm and above (measured 1 m above ground
level) shall be surveyed.
3) List of features to be located and shown:
(a) Property and right-of-way monuments
(b) Visible boundary features, e.g. walls, fences, hedges
(c) Roads, tracks, footways, paths
(d) Buildings and ancillary facilities and structures
(e) Utility structures and above-ground evidence of underground utility lines
(f) Overhead lines drape, low points and level at insulator or support
(g) Landscape and vegetation
(h) Water features
(i) Earthworks
(j) Railway features
(k) For sewer manholes, electrical / telecommunication manholes and
inspection chambers, the cover levels and invert levels shall be surveyed
if accessible. The type of manhole and inspection chamber, pipe or
conduit size and material, and direction of flow shall be reflected in the
plan.
(l) For drains, invert levels and coping/top and linear features such as
berms, roads and fences levels shall be surveyed generally at 5 m
interval. For cascading drain, the coping and invert levels shall be
surveyed. Covered drains with iron grating shall be surveyed. pipe size
and material, and direction of flow shall be reflected in the plan.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 47
(m) Above-ground electric boxes, lamp/cable posts with numbers,

exposed/overhead cables, etc. shall be surveyed.
(n) Above-ground telecommunication FDT’s, RAN/ MSAN Cabinets and
GSM Towers etc. shall be surveyed.
4) Cross-sections must be right-angle to center line and shall be surveyed
generally at 25m interval and 5 m along curves, tunnels roads etc.
5) Road names and building/block numbers shall be noted in the field and
shown on the map.
6) Edges of ponds, lakes, streams, or other water bodies shall be surveyed.
10. Verifying Surveys by Others
a. All Consultants working for the Royal Commission shall perform check surveys on
the following types of surveys:
1) All previous surveys for the Royal Commission
2) All adjoining surveys
3) Other Survey Consulting Contractors working on the same projects
4) Roadway construction, drainage, utilities, airports, power lines, airports,
railroads, pipelines, right-of-way and property boundaries, and other surveys
common to construction and mapping.
b. Survey Verification as follows:
1) Minimum of 3 horizontal control points.
2) Minimum of 2 vertical control points.
3) On adjoining lots, at a minimum check property corners on coincident
property lines
4) On topography, construction, mapping, etc., at a minimum check tie in points,
outfalls, flowlines, angle points etc., to ensure your survey or the previous
surveys all match together and are using the same datum.
11. Monitoring Large Area Subsidence
a. Introduction – A network of subsidence benchmarks has been established
throughout Jubail. These benchmarks will be monitored for the purpose of detecting
any land movement.
b. Monitoring will include vertical measurements only.
c. Measurement of Subsidence Using GPS/GNSS
1) For initial detection of significant movements, static GPS/GNSS observations
will be used, including all existing subsidence benchmarks.
2) Repeat measurements will be made at agreed intervals.
3) A minimum of three (3) remote benchmarks will be identified or established,
situated on bed rock not liable to subsidence. These ‘controlling’ benchmarks
will be incorporated into the measurements, to enable detection of ground
movement within the area of interest.
4) Results will be tabulated (and graphed, if required), including apparent
differential movement between monitoring epochs.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 48
5) GPS/GNSS measurements are not as accurate as conventional leveling;

therefore any significant movement trends identified through the GPS/GNSS
data will be verified by leveling.
d. Conventional Leveling Measurements
1) Depending upon results from GPS/GNSS measurements, a determination will
be made as to whether a full- or partial- leveling regime will be required for the
subsidence benchmarks.
2) Monitoring shall be carried out using primary leveling procedures which will
comply with the requirements set out in Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
3) A proposed program of leveling observations will be developed based on the
existing network and focused on any apparent movements identified in
Subsection 4.4.1.J.11.c.3).
4) Subsequent monitoring visits will follow the same measurement protocol, to
enable direct comparisons between monitoring epochs.
5) The benchmark network data will be processed using an approved ‘least
squares’ adjustment process.
e. Results of each monitoring visit will be tabulated as noted in Subsection
4.4.1.J.11.c.3).
12. Monitoring Horizontal and Vertical Movement of Structures
a. Introduction - Monitoring of horizontal and vertical movement of structures may
include but is not limited to:
1) Mosques and minarets
2) Seawater cooling canal slabs (above and below water)
3) Control gates, pipes and pump houses
4) Bridges and towers
5) Tanks (elevated and ground)
6) Industrial facilities and equipment
7) Public buildings.
b. All monitoring carried out under this item will use first-order procedures and
equipment.
c. Precise leveling procedures will comply with requirements set out in Subsection
4.4.1.J.6.
d. Primary horizontal control procedures will comply with requirements set out in
Subsection 4.4.1.J.5.
e. Frequency of monitoring will be determined by the client on a case-by-case basis.
f. Survey Reference Monuments
1) Survey monuments used for monitoring measurement must be of stable and
durable construction. Some examples are as follows:
(a) Cast-in-place concrete pile with #16 diameter steel bolt (standard survey
fitting).

Rev. 0 4.4 - 49
(b) Steel pile driven to refusal with #16 diameter steel bolt.
(c) Steel bolt set into bed rock or existing stable concrete structure.
2) Whenever possible, the survey monument shall allow for forced-centering of
survey equipment. If not possible, and tripod-mounted equipment is needed,
then fixed-leg tripods shall be utilized.
3) Survey reference monuments must be located so as to provide a strong
geometric figure, consistent with optimization of measurements.
4) Unless site constraints dictate otherwise, each survey monitoring point shall
be visible from at least two reference monuments.
5) Local reference monuments, established to monitor a specific location, must
be related back to remote control points that are unlikely to be affected by
local movement.
g. Survey Monitoring Points
1) Points used for monitoring measurement need to be fixed, stable and capable
of being used for repeat measurements over a lengthy period of time.
Different types of points may need to be used and care needs to be taken to
minimize impact to the structure. Some examples are as follows:
(a) Survey prisms, directly attached to the structure.
(b) Flat survey targets, epoxied onto the surface of the structure (only use in
non-sensitive areas).
(c) Bolts drilled into the structure (capable of being occupied by a level rod).
(d) Fixed and well-defined points on the structure that can be reliably re-
measured.
h. Horizontal Monitoring
1) Control Network Measurement
(a) Measurements required to establish the reference control network will be
carried out in accordance with primary control procedures, refer to
(b) All possible cross measurements between reference points will be
obtained, in order to strengthen the network.
(c) Wherever possible, external reference objects will be included in the
control observations, to provide a gross check on the stability of the
control network.
(d) The control network data will be processed using an approved ‘least
squares’ adjustment protocol.
2) Monitoring Measurement
(a) All normal precautions will be observed to ensure that measurements
comply with first-order survey procedures, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.J.5.
(b) During each monitoring visit, care shall be taken to use the same base
station – reference station combination for each set of measurements.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 50
(c) Measurements shall be commenced at approximately the same time of

day and carried out in the same sequence, to minimize external
influences.
(d) Wherever possible, redundant measurements shall be made to
monitoring points from different points in the control network.
(e) Measurements to individual points can be angle and distance,
intersecting angles or intersecting distances, depending on
circumstances. Reflectorless instruments may be used over short
distances, providing the accuracy requirements stated herein are
complied with. However, the same combination of measurements shall
be maintained throughout the whole life-cycle of the monitoring.
(f) Results of each monitoring visit will be tabulated and compared to the
base value from the initial visit. Differential movement will be tabulated
and graphed, if significant.
i. Vertical Monitoring
1) Control Network Measurement
(a) Measurements required to establish the reference control network will be
carried out in accordance with precise leveling procedures, refer to
(b) A remote bench mark must be established in an area unlikely to be
affected by local movement.
(c) All possible cross measurements between reference points will be
obtained, in order to strengthen the network.
(d) The control network data will be processed using an approved ‘least
squares’ adjustment protocol.
2) Monitoring Measurement
(a) All normal precautions will be observed to ensure that measurements
comply with first-order leveling procedures, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
(b) Measurements shall be commenced at approximately the same time of
day and carried out in the same sequence, to minimize external
influences.
(c) Results will be tabulated as described in Subsection 4.4.1.J.12.h. 2) (f).
13. Monitoring and Evaluating Ground Water Elevations and Data
a. Introduction – Where there is a need to sample ground water and monitor water
elevations at groundwater abstraction wells, pumping wells and piezometer
locations, suitable monitoring controls shall be provided to ensure that:
1) Groundwater quantities and levels can be effectively managed and monitored.
2) Groundwater quality is maintained
3) Ground subsidence can be minimized.

b. Monitoring Control

Rev. 0 4.4 - 51
1) Benchmarks will be established at each well site, to use as a basis for ground
water elevation monitoring.
2) Benchmarks will consist of survey markers drilled into the concrete pad
around the well (if existing) or a punch mark on an accessible part of the well
assembly.
3) Benchmarks and piezometers will be connected to existing primary control;
using secondary leveling techniques, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
4) Ground elevation adjacent to the well head or piezometer will be measured.
5) Horizontal location will be established using methods outlined in Subsection
4.4.1.J.5.
6) A report will be compiled to include coordinates and elevations of benchmarks
and piezometers, with descriptions including photographs.
c. Ground Water Monitoring
1) Ground water elevation monitoring at well sites will be effected by direct
measurement between the well casing and pump column using a metal tape
or lead line (shallow wells) or electrical well-sounding equipment. Elevations
will be related to the well head benchmark.
2) Piezometer measurements will be recorded by a data logger or portable
readout unit.
3) Results will be provided in the form of a spreadsheet, including comparisons
between successive monitoring visits and incorporating the following
information:
(a) Name and location of well or piezometer
(b) Date of measurement
(c) Reference point to which measurements are related
(d) Ground surface elevation, depth to groundwater and elevation of
groundwater surface
14. New Witness Posts
a. Witness posts shall be set at all primary control points as follows:
1) All primary construction control points
(a) Horizontal
(b) Vertical
2) Airports
(a) All PACs (primary airport control)
(b) All SACs (secondary airport control)
(1) All witness post locations set on airports must be pre-approved by
the airport manager prior to setting.
3) Cadastral Corners
(a) All baseline points and corners

Rev. 0 4.4 - 52
b. Type of Posts
1) Metal post with Metal Sign
2) Fiberglass post
15. Fundamental Bench Mark
a. Bench marks shall be constructed in accordance with the RCJ’s standard drawings
and all subsequent revisions thereto. Installation, cleaning, priming, and painting of
the proper witness posts and monument shall be included.
b. A diagram shall be prepared for each permanent benchmark showing clearly its
general location, with dimensions to at least three easily recognizable and durable
reference points, together with its description and designation.
c. 3 Digital photographs of the bench mark shall be taken as follows:
1) 1 of the elevation mark, from a position that clearly shows the station
markings.
2) 2 of the benchmark structure, from 3 to 10 meters away and from two different
locations, showing the general location and surrounding features.
3) The elevation of the benchmark shall be measured in accordance with the
precise vertical control survey Standards described in Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
4) Photographs shall be annotated and submitted with the elevation report.
16. Geodetic Control Pillar
a. Geodetic Control Pillars shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ specifications
and all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be constructed of the highest quality materials and workmanship to
assure longevity and durability.
c. They shall be placed so as to be stable and protected from nearby activities
whenever and wherever possible.
d. Number and location of monuments shall be as directed by RCJ.
17. Second and Third Order Control Monuments
a. Second and third order control monuments shall be constructed in accordance with
RCJ specifications and all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be constructed of the highest quality materials and workmanship to
assure longevity and durability.
c. They shall be placed so as to be as stable as possible and protected from nearby
activities.
d. They shall be placed in locations with good visibility in all directions and intervisible
with a minimum of two other control monuments, and/or as directed by the RCJ.
e. They shall be completed with aluminum bronze plaques and witness posts.
18. First, Second, and Third Order Control Plaques
a. Plaques shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ specifications and all
subsequent revisions.
b. The plaques shall be stamped or otherwise marked with all pertinent information.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 53
19. Boundary Marker

a. Boundary Markers shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ specifications and
all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be placed so as to mark the boundary lines and corners as directed.
c. They shall be placed so as to be as stable as possible and protected from nearby
activities.
20. Bronze Cadastral Survey Plaque
a. The bronze cadastral survey plaques shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ
specifications and all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be stamped or otherwise marked with all pertinent information.
21. Lot Monuments
a. The lot monuments shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ specifications and
all subsequent revisions.
b. Shall be placed at all lot corners and/or along the lot lines as directed by the RCJ
22. Underwater Surveys
a. Introduction – Underwater Surveys may be required for inspection of existing
facilities or conditions, including but not limited to, the following:
1) Natural sea-bed materials, dredged channels, prepared gravel beds, rock or
concrete slope protection and the like.
2) Cooling system structures, moorings, foundations, piles, sheet pile walls,
intake and outlet structures, pipelines, retaining structures and other structural
elements.
3) Navigational equipment, buoys, hulls of barges and other vessels.
b. The purpose of such underwater surveys will be to provide information pertaining to
damage, corrosion, effectiveness of repairs, functionality of equipment and
evaluation of future maintenance requirements, and to facilitate an assessment of
whether work performed by others has been carried out in accordance with designs
and specifications.
c. The surveys will generally be limited to depths of up to thirty (30) meters.
d. Surveys in water depths of up to one (1) meter will be carried out by conventional
survey techniques, as detailed in Subsection 4.4.1.J.3.
e. Underwater surveys below 1-meter depth will be carried out by teams of qualified
divers, who shall include a qualified engineer. Appropriate certifications of
competence will be required.
f. Supporting survey measurements which may be required to supplement the
underwater survey below 1-meter depth will be performed as described in
Subsections 4.4.1.F and 4.4.1.J.3.
g. Underwater inspections will be carried out to one of three levels of detail, as
determined by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
1) Level 1: General Visual Inspection
(a) Confirm as-built structural plans

Rev. 0 4.4 - 54
(b) Detect obvious major damage or deterioration due to overstress (e.g.

collisions), severe corrosion or extensive biological attack.
(c) This level of inspection is generally regarded as an overview, used to
develop a subsequent inspection strategy, and shall reveal the following:
(1) Steel – extensive corrosion or severe mechanical damage.
(2) Concrete – Major failures, spalling and cracking, severe
reinforcement corrosion.
2) Level 2: Close-Up Visual Inspection
(a) A complete detailed inspection of selected components or critical areas
of structures.
(b) Identification of damaged or deteriorating areas hidden by surface
biofouling.
(c) Limited measurements of deteriorating areas (may be preceded by
cleaning), using measuring scales or calipers.
(d) Limited probing or testing for structural integrity.
(e) This level of inspection shall reveal typical defects such as:
(1) Steel – moderate mechanical damage, major corrosion pitting.
(2) Concrete – surface cracking and crumbling, rust staining, exposed
rebar or other reinforcing material
(3) Wood – External damage due to marine borers or pre-damage
infestation, splintered wood, loss of bolts or fasteners.
3) Level 3: Highly Detailed Inspection
(a) Level 3 inspections will only be carried out by qualified engineering and
testing personnel.
(b) This level is designed to provide data pursuant to a structural
assessment. Procedures, including non-destructive testing, will be used
to detect hidden or imminent damage, loss in cross-sectional area and
material homogeneity.
(c) Prior cleaning will normally be required.
(d) Partially destructive testing (e.g. sample coring) may be required.
(e) This level of inspection shall reveal the following information or defects:
(1) Steel – remaining thickness of material
(2) Concrete – location of rebar, extent of rebar corrosion, internal
voids, changes in material strength
(3) Wood – Internal voids and damage due to marine borers, changes
in material strength

Rev. 0 4.4 - 55
h. Frequency of Inspection
1) The frequency of inspection will vary, depending on the expected rate of
damage and deterioration. Active areas (e.g. ships’ berthing areas) are likely
to deteriorate more quickly.
(a) Recommended frequencies, per US Navy, ‘Volume 4 NAVFAC MO-322,
Inspection of Shore Facilities’ are as follows:
(1) Superstructure, piling and sheet piling above the water line –
annually
(2) Concrete/steel members at splash/tidal zones and downwards – at
least every 6 years
(3) In areas where marine infestation is known to be a problem, these
frequencies will be reduced accordingly.
i. Documentation
1) Documentation must be comprehensive and provide a full understanding of
location and condition of the various elements inspected.
2) Pre-planning shall include a scheme for designating structural elements or
other key items, for subsequent reference throughout the survey.
3) Documentation shall include daily logs of inspection findings, including
measurement data, locations of observations and water depth.
4) Wherever practicable, inspections shall be documented with photography
and/or video, referenced and labeled with the description and location of the
object. A slate, with reference information shall be included in each
photograph or video.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 56
SUBSECTION 4.4.2 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
4.4.2. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
A. General
1. Introduction
This Section of the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) provides general guidelines on
development of geotechnical investigations for the Royal Commission of Saudi Arabia in
Jubail (RCJ). The Manual presents the general state of the practice for the scope and
specific elements of typical geotechnical investigation programs and should be read in
conjunction with Section 5.X where analysis and design requirements for the construction
of RCJ facilities, including buildings, transportation, pipelines, etc are presented. The
manual presents the latest methodologies in the planning, execution of geotechnical
investigations investigation methods, and the development of appropriate soil and rock
parameters for engineering applications..
Any geotechnical engineering work is site specific in nature. It is understood that the
procedures discussed in this Subsection of the manual are subject to local variations.
Therefore, it is important for the geotechnical engineer to become thoroughly familiar with
the local practices. The proper execution of a geotechnical engineering scope of work
requires a thorough understanding of the principles and practice of geotechnical
engineering, subsurface investigation techniques and principles of design construction
methods and planned purpose of the facility supplemented with a working knowledge of
geology and hydrogeology.
2. Applicability
This section of the GEM is applicable to the geotechnical aspects of projects of the RCJ
in the Eastern Province of Saudi Arabia. RCJ is responsible for developing major
industrial cities. Typical projects include industrial, residential, utilities and civil works
such as parks, infrastructure and roadways.
3. Definitions
a. “Borehole” A hole drilled as part of geotechnical investigation to collect soil and/or
rock samples or in general to study the subsurface soils.
b. “Collapsible soil” Soils susceptible to large and sudden reduction in volume upon
wetting.
c. “Compaction” The process of improving the density (densification) and hence the
improvement of soil shearing strength and permeability characteristics by the use of
mechanical means such as rolling or vibration.
d. “Expansive soil” Soil that has a potential for swelling or shrinkage under changing
moisture conditions.
e. “Foundation” Part of a structure that supports the weight of the structure and
transmits the loads to underlying soil or rock.
f. “Karst formation (sometimes known as Carstic Limestone)” A geologic setting where
cavities are developed in massive beds of limestone, dolomite, gypsum, etc. by
solution in flowing water.
g. “Sabkha Soils (Sabkhas)” Sabkha is an Arabic term for coastal and inland saline
flats built up by deposition of silt, clay, and muddy sand in shallow, albeit sometimes
extensive, depressions. Sabkha deposits are usually saturated with brine and often
are barren and salt encrusted.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 57
h. “Slope” An inclined surface of the earth (manmade or natural).

i. “Water table” The subsurface elevation at which water will be present.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Subsection 2.2.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Chapter:
1) AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
2) ACI: American Concrete Institute
3) API: American Petroleum Institute
4) ARAMCO: Arabian-American Oil Company, officially Saudi Arabian Oil
Company
5) ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
6) ASD: Allowable Stress Design
7) ASTM: American Standard for Testing and Materials
8) Caltrans: California Department of Transportation
9) CPT: Cone Penetration Test
10) DM: NAVFAC Design Manual
11) EM: USACE Engineer Manual
12) FHWA: Federal Highway Authority
14) JIC: Jubail Industrial City
15) LRFD: Load and Resistance Factor Design
16) MARAFIQ: Power and Water Utility Company for Jubail and Yanbu
17) NAVFAC: Naval Facilities Engineering Command
18) NCMA: National Concrete Masonry Association
19) NHCRP: National Highway Cooperative Research Program
20) NHI: National Highway Institute
21) RCJ: Royal Commission in Jubail
23) RMR: Rock Mass Rating
24) RQD: Rock Quality Designation
25) SAR: Saudi Rail Company
27) SEAPA: Seaports Authority of Saudi Arabia
28) SEC: Saudi Electricity Company
29) STC: Saudi Telecom Company

Rev. 0 4.4 - 58
30) SPT: Standard Penetration Test

31) SWEC: Shuaibah Water and Electricity Company
32) SWCC: Saline Water Conversion Corporation
33) USACE: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
a. Geotechnical Requirements
Geotechnical work in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia shall include a proper
assessment of the subsurface conditions at the project site (including surficial
geology, active zone as defined in Sections 1 and 2 of the Saudi Building Code
(SBC 303). The assessment shall include an evaluation of the above key
geotechnical issues and their potential impact on the proposed development. For the
minimum scope of a geotechnical site investigation, including the compliance
requirements for geotechnical engineering reports in Saudi Arabia, refer to Chapter
2 and Table 2.1 of the SBC 303. Further detail on geotechnical boring requirements
is included in Subsection 4.4.2.B.2 – Boring Requirements.
For non-building facilities such as bridges, pipeline crossing, tower foundations, etc.,
the requirements of AASHTO, FHWA, and API shall be consulted in the
development of investigation proposals which shall be subject for review and
acceptance by the RCJ.
For particular problematic soils encountered in a given project, reference shall be

made to the minimum geotechnical requirements discussed in the following sections
of SBC 303:
1) Chapter 9 – Design for Expansive Soils

2) Chapter 10 – Design for Collapsible Soils
3) Chapter 11 – Design for Sabkha Soils
For projects including tunneling (micro tunneling and other trenchless methods), port
and marine works, overhead electrical distribution networks, potable water and
wastewater distribution networks, etc., the requirements of ARAMCO, MARAFIQ,
SAR, SEAPA, SEC, STC and SWCC shall be met together with an assessment of
the potential impact on third party assets and existing structures and services.
b. Seismic Considerations
1) General
Saudi Arabia is a country of relatively low seismic activity. According to the
World Health Organization, Saudi Arabia Seismic Hazard Distribution Map
(WHO 2010) most of the country is classified as having a very low (PGA ≤
0.02 g) to low (0.02 < PGA ≤ 0.08 g) seismic hazard. Here, the peak ground
acceleration (PGA) corresponds to a 10% probability of exceedance in 50
years. Local regions have PGA values as high as 0.2 g; West of Tabuk City,
north of the City of Al-Madinah, surrounding the City of Jeddah, and the
coastal region near the City of Jubail.
2) Geotechnical Investigation for Seismic Design

SBC 301 Sections and 303 provides guidance with respect to the
geotechnical investigation and assessment for seismic design

Rev. 0 4.4 - 59
3) Earthquake Hazard Assessment

For buildings with Seismic Design Categories C and D, the geotechnical
investigation shall address the following potential earthquake hazards:
(a) Slope Instability

(b) Liquefaction
(c) Lateral Spreading
(d) Surface Rupture
4) Seismic Lateral Earth Pressure
For retaining walls assigned to Seismic Design Categories C and D, the
combined static and seismic active earth pressure shall be calculated using
the method outlined in Section 7.2.6 of SBC 303. This design approach is
commonly known as the Mononobe-Okabe method.
6. Codes
a. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Standards for a list of applicable Codes.
b. In addition to the aforementioned, the following Codes apply:
1) Saudi Building Code National Committee. (2007). Saudi Building Code
Requirements (SBC 301): Structural - Loading and Forces. General
Secretariat of the Saudi Building Code National Committee.
Requirements (SBC 302): Structural - Testing and Inspection. General
Requirements (SBC 303): Structural - Soil and Foundations. General
4) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. (2007).
th
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 4 ed.
5) International Building Code (IBC). (2011). 2012 International Building Code®.
International Code Council, Inc.
7. Standards
a. All geotechnical investigations shall conform to the applicable industry Codes,
Standards and Associations.
b. The latest revision of the referred Codes and Standards shall be used whenever
applicable. In case of conflict, the A/E shall propose equipment or methods
conforming to one group of Standards.
1) ASTM D 1143: Standard Test Method for Piles under Static Axial
Compressive Load. American Association for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
2) ASTM D 1194: Standard Test Method for Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static
Load and Spread Footings (ASTM D 1194). American Association for Testing
and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 60
3) ASTM D 4750: Standard Test Method for Determining Subsurface Liquid

Levels in a Borehole or Monitoring Well (Observation Well). American
Association for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
4) ASTM D 5092: Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Ground Water
Monitoring Wells in Aquifers. American Association for Testing and Materials,
West Conshohocken, PA.
nd
5) ASTM Environmental Sampling, 2 Ed., ASTM Standards, Committee D-18
on Soil and Rock, American Society for Testing & Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
6) ASTM Environmental Site Characterization, ASTM Standards, Committees D-
18 on Soil & Rock, D-19 on Water, D-34 on Waste Management, E-47 on
Biological Effects and Environmental Fate, and E-50 on Environmental
Assessment, American Society on Testing & Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
7) ASTM D 420: Standard Guide to Site Characterization for Engineering Design
and Construction Purposes. American Association for Testing and Materials,
West Conshohocken, PA.
8) ASTM D 3441: Standard Test Method for Mechanical Cone Penetration Tests
of Soil. American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
9) ASTM D 4700: Standard Guide for Soil Sampling from the Vadose Zone.
American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
10) ASTM D 4719: Standard Test Methods for Prebored Pressuremeter Testing in
Soils. American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
11) ASTM D 6635: Standard Test Method for Performing the Flat Plate
Dilatometer. American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
12) ASTM D 2573: Standard Test Method for Field Vane Shear Test in Cohesive
Soil. American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
13) ASTM D 6151: Standard Practice for Using Hollow-Stem Augers for
Geotechnical Exploration and Soil Sampling, American Society for Testing
and Materials. West Conshohocken, PA.
14) ASTM D 1452: Standard Practice for Soil Exploration and Sampling by Auger
Borings. American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken,
PA.
15) ASTM D 2488: Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils
(Visual-Manual Procedure). American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
16) ASTM D 6907: Standard Practice for Sampling Soils and Contaminated
Media with Hand-Operated Bucket Augers. American Society for Testing and
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
17) ASTM D 1586: Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils. American Society for Testing and

Rev. 0 4.4 - 61
18) ASTM D 2487: Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering
Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). American Society for Testing
19) ASTM D 1587: Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils for
Geotechnical Purposes. American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
20) ASTM D 5778: Standard Test Method for Electronic Friction Cone and
Piezocone Penetration Testing of Soils. American Society for Testing and
21) ASTM D 5783: Standard Guide for Use of Direct Rotary Drilling with Water-
Based Drilling Fluid for Geoenvironmental Exploration and the Installation of
Subsurface Water-Quality Monitoring Devices. American Society for Testing
22) ASTM D 6282M: Standard Guide for Direct Push Soil Sampling for
Environmental Site Characterizations. American Society for Testing and
23) ASTM D 7383: Standard Test Methods for Axial Compressive Force Pulse
(Rapid) Testing of Deep Foundations. American Society for Testing and
8. References
a. Aas, G., Lacasse, S., Lunne, I., and Hoeg, K. (1986). Use of In Situ Tests for
Foundation Design in Clay. Proceedings, In Situ ’86, American Society of Civil
Engineers, pp 1-30.
b. Al-Refeai, T. and Al-Ghamdy, D. (1994). Geological and geotechnical aspects
of Saudi Arabia. Geotechnical and Geological Engineering, vol. 12: 253-276.
c. Amin, A. and Bankher, K. (2004). Geotechnical Aspects of Loess in in Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia. JKAU: Earth Sciences, vol. 15, pp. 163-179.
d. Baguelin, F., Jezequel, J.F., and Shields, D.H. (1978). The Pressuremeter and
Foundation Engineering. Trans Tech Publication, Switzerland.
e. Bjerrum, L. (1972). Embankments on Soft Ground, Proceedings of the ASCE
Specialty Conference on Earth and Earth-Supported Structures, Purdue
University, Volume 2, pp 1-54.
f. Bjerrum, L. (1973). Problem of Soil Mechanics and Construction on Soft Clays.
Proceedings 8th International Conference on Soil mechanics and Foundation
Engineering (ICSMFE), Moscow, State of the Art Report, Volume 3, pp. 111
159.
g. Briaud, J.L. (1989). The pressuremeter test for highway applications. Report
FHWA-IP-89-008, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, D.C., 148p.
h. CAPP. 2004. Planning Horizontal Directional Drilling for Pipeline Construction.
Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers.
i. Clarke, B.G. (1995). Pressuremeters in Geotechnical Design. International
Thomson Publishing/UK, and BiTech Publishers, Vancouver.
j. Dafalla, M.A. and Shamrani, M.A. (2012). Expansive Soil Properties in a Semi-
Arid Region. Research Journal of Environmental and Earth Sciences 4 (11):
930-938.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 62
k. Decourt, L. (1989). The Standard Penetration Test State-of-the-Art Report.

Proceedings 12th International Conference on Soil mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.
l. Douglas, B.J. and Olsen, R.S. (1981). Soil Classification using Electric Cone
Penetrometer. ASCE Geotechnical Engineering Division, Symposium on Cone
Penetration Testing and Experience, St. Louis, pp. 209-227.
m. Driscoll, F.G. (1986). Groundwater and Wells, 2nd ed., Johnson Filtration
Systems, St. Paul, MN.
n. Durgunoglu, H.T. and Mitchell, J.K. (1975). Static Penetration resistance of
Soils, Evaluation of Theory and Implication for Practice. Proceedings of the In-
situ Measurement of Soil properties, Raleigh, NC, ASCE, New York.
o. Dunnicliff, J. (1993). Geotechnical Instrumentation for Monitoring Field
Performance. Wiley.
p. Erol, A.O. (1989). Engineering Geological Considerations in a Salt Dome
Region Surrounded by Sabkha Sediments, Saudi Arabia. Engineering
Geology, vol. 26. Elsevier Science.
q. ESOPT II (1982). Proceedings of the Second European Symposium on
Penetration Testing. A.A. Balkema, Amsterdam.
r. FHWA. (1997). Subsurface Investigations - Training Course in Geotechnical
and Foundation Engineering. Publication No. FHWA HI-97-021, Authors: A.
Arman, N. Samtani, R. Castelli, and G. Munfakh. Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
s. FHWA. (2001). Manual on Subsurface Investigations. Publication No. FHWA-
NHI-01-031. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, D.C.
t. FHWA. (2002a). Geotechnical Circular No. 5 - Evaluation of Soil and Rock
Properties. Report No. FHWA IF 02 034. Federal Highway Administration,
U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
u. FHWA. (2002b). Subsurface Investigations - Geotechnical Site
Characterization. Publication No. FHWA NHI-01-031, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
v. FHWA. (2006a). Soils and Foundations Reference Manual - Volume I and II.
Report No. FHWA NHI 06 089. Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
w. Hanna, T. (1985). Field Instrumentation in Geotechnical Engineering.
Clausthal-Zellerfeld, Germany: Trans Tech Publications.
x. Harr, Milton E. (1962). Groundwater and Seepage, McGraw-Hill, New York.
x. International Society for Soil Mechanics and Geotechnical Engineering. (2005).
Geotechnical and Geophysical Investigations for Offshore and Nearshore
Developments. Technical Committee 1.
y. International Society for Trenchless Technology (http://www.istt.com/).
z. James, A.N. and Little, A.L. (1994). Geotechnical aspects of sabkha at Jubail,
Saudi Arabia. Quarterly Journal of Engineering Geology and Hydrogeology, 27,
83-121.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 63
aa. Jamiolkowski, M., Ladd, C.C., Germaine, J.T. and Lancellotta, R. (1985). New
Developments in Field and Laboratory Testing of Soils. Theme Lecture No. 2,
Proceedings of 11th International Council on Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, San Francisco, Volume 1, pp. 57-154.
bb. Janbu, N. and Senesset, K. (1973). Field Compressometer; Principles and
Applications. Proceedings 8th International Conference on Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering (ICSFME), Moscow, Volume 1.1, pp. 191-198.
cc. Kovacs, W.D., Salamone, L.A. and Yokel, F.Y. (1981). Energy Measurements
in the Standard Penetration Test. United States National Bureau of Standards,
Building Science Series 135.
dd. Leroueil, S. (2001). 39th Rankine Lecture – Natural Slopes and Cuts,
Movement and Failure Mechanisms. Geotechnique, Volume 51, No. 3, pp 197-
243.
ee. Leroueil, S. La Rochelle, P., Tavenas, F. and Roy, M. (1990). Remarks on the
Stability of Temporary Cuts. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Volume 27, No.
5, pp 687-692.
ff. Lunne, T., Robertson, P., and Powell, J. (1997). Cone Penetration Testing in
Geotechnical Practice. London: Spon Press.
gg. Lunne, T., Lacasse, S. and Rad, N.S. (1989). SPT, CPT, pressuremeter testing
and recent developments in in-situ testing – Part 1: All tests except SPT.
Proceedings, 12th International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering (ICSMFE), Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Volume 4, A.A. Balkema,
Rotterdam, pp 2239-2403.
hh. Mayne, P.W. and Mitchell, J.K. (1988). Profiling of Overconsolidation Ratio in
Clays by Field Vane. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Volume 25, No. 1, pp
150-158.
ii. Meyerhof, G.G. (1956). Penetration Tests and Bearing Capacity of
Cohesionless Soils. ASCE Journal for Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, Vol. 82, SM1, pp 1-19.
jj. Ministry of Interior (2015). Minimum Technical Requirements (MTR). Royal
Commission of Jubail.
kk. Mitchell, J.K. (1988). New Developments in Penetration Tests and Equipment.
International Symposium on Penetration Testing (ISOPT-1). Orlando, Florida,
USA, Proceedings Volume 1, pp 245-262, A.A. Balkema.
ll. Mitchell, J.K., Guzikowski, F. and Villet, W.C.B. (1978). The Measurement of
Soil Properties In-Situ. Report prepared for US Department of Energy, Contract
W-7405-ENG-48, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, University of California,
Berkeley, CA, 67 p.
mm. Nicholson, G.A. (1983b). In Situ and Laboratory Shear Devices for Rock: a
Comparison. Technical Report GL-83-14, US Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
nn. Robertson, P.K. (1986). In-Situ Testing and its Application to Foundation
Engineering. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Volume 23, No. 4, pp 573-594.
oo. Schmertmann, J.H. (1970). Static Cone to Compute Static Settlement over
Sand. ASCE Journal for Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Volume
96, SM3, pp 1011-1043.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 64
pp. Schmertmann, J. (1978). Guidelines for Cone Penetration Test: Performance

and Design, FHWA-TS-78-209. U.S. Department of Transportation.
qq. Schmertmann, J.H. (1979). Statics of SPT. ASCE Journal of Geotechnical
Engineering, Volume 105, GT5, pp 655-670.
rr. Schmertmann, J.H. (1986). Suggested method for performing the flat
dilatometer test. ASTM Geotechnical Testing Journal, Vol. 9 (2), 93-101.
ss. Seed, H.B. (1979). Soil Liquefaction and Cyclic Mobility Evaluation for Level
Ground during Earthquakes. ASCE Journal, Geotechnical Engineering
Division, Volume 105, No. GT2.
tt. Shehata, W. and Amin, A. (1997). Geotechnical Hazards associated with
desert environment. Natural Hazards, vol. 16, Issue 1, July 1997.
uu. Skempton, A.W. (1986). Standard Penetration Test, Procedures and Effects in
Sands of Overburden, Relative Density, Particle Size, Aging and Over-
consolidation. Geotechnique, Volume 36, No. 3, pp 425-447.
vv. Stipho, A.S. (1992). Aoelian sand hazards and engineering design for desert
regions. Quarterly Journal of Engineering Geology, 25, 83-92.
ww. SUT. (2014). Guidance Notes for the Planning and Execution of Geophysical
and Geotechnical Ground Investigation for Offshore Renewable Energy
Developments. Society for Underwater Technology Offshore Site Investigation
and Geotechnics Committee, London.
xx. Tavenas, F.A. (1971). The Standard Penetration Test. Discussion,
Proceedings 4th PanAmerican Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, Puerto Rico, Volume 3, pp 64-70.
yy. UFC. (2004). Dewatering and Groundwater Control, UFC 3-220-05. Unified
Facilities Criteria, Department of Defense, USA.
zz. US Department of the Army. (1983). Technical Manual TM 5-818-7:
Foundations in Expansive Soils. Head Quarters, Department of the Army.
aaa. USACE. (2001). Geotechnical Investigations. EM 1110-1-1804. U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers, Washington, D.C.
bbb. Ziegler, T.W. (1972). In Situ tests for the Determination of Rock Mass Shear
Strength. Technical Report S-72-12, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
B. Geotechnical Investigation
1. Background
a. Introduction
1) Geological Setting of Saudi Arabia
The geological features of the Arabian Peninsula have been detailed by
Powers et al. (1966), among others. Saudi Arabia is divided into two main
geological zones (Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy 1994 and Powers et al. 1966):
a) The Precambrian complex of igneous and metamorphic rocks (known

as the Arabian Shield) occupying roughly one-third of the Arabian
Peninsula in the west; and

Rev. 0 4.4 - 65
b) A broad expanse of relatively low-relief terrain (known as the Arabian

shelf), in which Tertiary and younger deposits overlie older units, in the
eastern two-thirds.
The Geology of Saudi Arabia may be divided into the following geographic
areas as summarized by Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy (1994):
c) The western region is mostly mountainous, with low-lying coastal areas

along the Red Sea.
d) The southern area is covered with extensive sand deposits in the Rub’
al Khali Desert.
e) The central areas consist of the relatively flat terrain of the Central
Plateau, with silt, sand, and gravel deposits, and limestone bedrocks of
Quaternary and Tertiary origin along erosion channels and wadis
between escarpments.
f) The northern areas form the Nafud sedimentary basin, with largely
Quaternary deposits of red to pink and grey marly to calcareous
sandstone, sandy marl with pinkish sandy shale, and clayey silty sand.
g) The eastern areas are covered by deposits of salt-bearing soils, sand
dunes, and outcrops of limestone and calcareous sandstones.
2) Geological Issues in Saudi Arabia
The primary geotechnical issues in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia include the
following (Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy 1994; Dafalla and Shamrani 2012; Stipho
1984, et al, and as referenced inSBC 303 2007):
a) Collapsible soils
These soils will compress when inundated with water, resulting in
settlements without additional applied stress. Water weakens or
destroys weak bonds between the soil particles, severely reducing the
bearing capacity of the original soil. Collapsible soils have low densities
(generally 1040 to 1600 kg/m or porosity of 0.6 to 0.4). Loose granular
sand deposits, sand dunes, and sand tracts in large areas of central,
eastern, and southern Saudi Arabia, including the Rub’al-Khali desert,
are generally susceptible to collapse when wetted. The collapse
potential of these soils must be considered in a foundation design.
b) Expansive soils
Expansive soils are clayey materials that shrink and swell (expand) with
changes in moisture content. These soils exist mainly in the central and
northern regions of Saudi Arabia, but are found in other areas across
the Kingdom, including Al Ghatt, Tabuk, Tayma, Al Jouf, Al Medinah, Al
Munuwarah, Al Hafuf, and Sharorah.
c) Karst Formations
A karst formation is characterized by solution features created by
percolating water that dissolves carbonate bedrock (usually limestone,
dolomite, marble, gypsum, anhydrite, halite or other soluble rocks).
Sinkholes and solution cavities at or near the ground surface are

Rev. 0 4.4 - 66
characteristic features of karst, and pose a hazard in the eastern and

central regions of Saudi Arabia, including the Jubail area.
d) Loess
Loess is an unstratified, geologically recent deposit of predominantly
silt-size material that is deposited by wind. Loess has a very loose
structure and low density, and is highly compressible. Loess deposits
are found extensively in the central and southern regions of Saudi
Arabia.
e) Sabkhas
Sabkhas are salt bearing, arid climate sediments that cover vast areas
of the coastal and inland plains of Saudi Arabia. Sabkhas contain
heterogeneous materials, primarily clays, silts, fine sands, and organic
matter that are randomly interlayered. Sabkha sediments are generally
characterized by high void ratios and low dry densities, and are
collapsible. They are generally considered among the poorest of
foundation materials. Sabkha terrains are known to exist in many parts
of Saudi Arabia: along the Arabian Gulf coast including Jubail,
Rastanura, Abqaiq, Dammam, and Shaibah; along the western coast
including Jeddah, Jizan, Qunfudah, Al Lith, Rabigh, and Yanbu; and
around Riyadh and Qasim in the central region.
f) Corrosive environment and potential for sulphate attack

Soils in Saudi Arabia, especially Sabkhas, are often high in water
soluble sulphate and chloride. Hence, there is a potential for sulphate
attack on concrete foundation elements and corrosion of metallic
materials in contact with these soils.
3) Geotechnical and Geological Conditions of the Eastern Region

(a) Jubail is located within the Arabian Gulf Coastal Region of the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia. The base geology of the area is similar to that of the
eastern plain which is composed of upper Tertiary sedimentary rocks
and marine sediments (Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy 1994). The Gulf region
geological setting is a result of continuous sediment accumulation since
Paleozoic times. The predominant Tertiary unit in the area is the Hadruk
Formation which typically consists of grayish-green, white, and pink
calcareous marly sandstone, sandy marl, sandy clay and sandy
limestone. The Tertiary sedimentary rocks and marine deposits in the
area are overlain by Quaternary deposits consisting of Sabkha and
aeolian deposits. The Sabkha flats occupy approximately two-thirds of
the area. The Sabkha deposits are characteristically gray and brown in
color. Sabkha is typically loose (or soft), has high salinity and water
content and often contains fine sands and clays. From foundation
engineering considerations, Sabkha is a problematic soil since it is highly
compressible and weak. The non-Sabkha terrain of the area is mostly
aeolian silty sand deposits and dune sands.
Significant areas of Jubail have been subjected to preparation works and
some alternations have already taken place, including reclaimed areas.
Geotechnical design in these areas shall also consider the construction
history of the site in addition to the geologic conditions.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 67
(b) Ras Al-Khair

The Ras Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) is currently the site of rapid
construction activity. It is understood that significant areas have been
reclaimed with/without removal of the underlying Sabkha, likely to a
greater extent than that at Jubail. In addition, the hinterland in the RIC
includes higher ground/dune environments. The geotechnical
investigation and design shall adequately characterize these conditions.
The following references provide additional information and relevant
discussions on the Sabkhas and dunes prevalent in the Jubail and Ras
Al-Khair regions, along with other regions of Saudi Arabia and the Middle
East with identical geologic conditions: Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy (1994),
Amin and Bankher (2004), Dafalla and Shamrani (2012), Erol (1989),
Fookes (1978), James and Little (1994), Shehata and Amin, and Stipho
(1992).
y. Applicability
The guidelines in this Subsection are applicable to geotechnical engineering projects
under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission of Jubail (RCJ) in Saudi Arabia. The
geotechnical engineering work shall comply with the requirements of this Subsection
of the manual and the appropriate sections of the codes and standards indicated.
z. Site Investigations
Requirements of site investigations are provided in Subsections 4.4.2.B.2, 4.4.2.C,
4.4.2.F, 4.4.2.G and 4.4.2.H.
aa. Laboratory Testing

Laboratory testing requirements are provided in Subsection 4.4.2.E and 4.4.2.H.
bb. Analysis and Design

Analysis and design requirements are provided in Section 5.10.2
2. Boring Requirements
a. General
As per Section 2.2 of the SBC 303, boring investigations are not required if all of the
following criteria are met:
1) The net load pressure on the foundation is less than 50 kPa.

2) There are no dynamic or vibratory loads on the building or structure.
3) Questionable or problematic soil is not suspected within the proximity of the
building or structure.
4) Cavities are not suspected underneath the footing of the building or structure.
If any of the above criteria are not met, a boring investigation must be carried out.
Depending on the availability of historical boring information in the area of the
proposed development, and its quality, a new boring investigation may not be
required. This determination shall be made by the Geotechnical Engineer.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 68
y. Types of Boring Investigations

The type of boring investigation will depend on the anticipated site soils, as well as
the objectives of the investigation. Soil boring and sampling requirements are
outlined in Chapter 2 of SBC 303, with more detailed descriptions of various boring
types can be found in AASHTO, FHWA, and USACE’s EM 1110-1-1804.
Some types of boring investigations include:
1) Auger borings
Auger borings, which can be either continuous or discontinuous flight, allow
for the collection of disturbed soil samples for laboratory testing, but give
limited information on the soil strata. They are typically used above the water
table (but may be used below the water table in the case of stiff clays).
2) Drive borings
Drive borings are advanced into the soil and allow for the collection of
disturbed soil samples for later testing; they also give some information on the
soil stratification, an advantage over auger borings. Types of drive borings
can include vibratory, Becker Hammer drill, and Standard Penetration Tests.
3) Test Pits
Excavation of test pits allows for determination of soil stratification at shallow
depths, and for relatively low cost. Samples can be obtained for laboratory
testing, including larger samples, such as cobbles and boulders, which may
not be obtained through auger methods.
4) Cone penetration testing

Cone penetration testing, or CPT, is an in situ test which is advanced
continuously into the soil and allows for determination of soil strata and
engineering properties without sampling.
5) Undisturbed borings
Undisturbed samples, which are typically obtained using push samplers (such
as Shelby tubes) or rotary samplers, allow for a detailed study of stratification,
and the determination of properties such as shear strength, consolidation,
permeability and density.
6) Rock core boring

Boring in rock is typically carried out through rotary drilling with hollow core
barrels fitted with diamond- or carbide-tipped bits (when rock samples are
required), or through percussive methods (to advance through hard rock to
install instrumentation). Rock core borings can be vertical, inclined, or
horizontal, depending on the stratigraphy and properties of the rock.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 69
z. Frequency and Depth of Boreholes

SBC 303 Table 2.1 specifies the following minimum requirements for borehole
investigations for buildings:
TABLE 4.4.2 A: MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS (SBC 303)
No. of Built Area No. of Minimum Minimum

2
Stories (m ) Boreholes Depth of Two Depth of One
Thirds of the Third of the
Boreholes (m) Boreholes (m)
2 or less < 600 3 4 6
600 – 5000 3 – 10 5 8
> 5000 Special Investigation
3–4 < 600 3 6-8 9 - 12
600 – 5000 3 - 10
> 5000 Special Investigation
5 or higher Special Investigation
Borehole depth shall be measured from the planned base of the foundation, as
opposed to ground surface. The selection of boreholes for buildings will depend on
the anticipated site soils, as well as the type of proposed development. Boreholes
shall fully penetrate all questionable or soft soil layers.
Borehole frequency shall be sufficient to define the geologic setting at the project
site, and will be dependent on both the anticipated soil conditions as well as the
phase of the investigation being performed; for more general planning
investigations, a wider spacing may be appropriate, while for detailed design
purposes, a closer borehole spacing shall be used.
Suggestions for borehole layout and frequency for road schemes are provided in
FHWA (2001). The following table outlines typical minimum boring depths for road
infrastructure works.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 70
TABLE 4.4.2 B: MINIMUM BORING DEPTHS (FHWA)
Area of Investigation Recommended Minimum Boring Depth (Bf)

Bridge Foundations – Spread • Lf ≤ 2Bf – Two footing widths below
Footings bearing level where Lf is footing breadth
• Lf ≥ 5Bf – Four footing widths below
bearing level
• 2Bf ≤ Lf ≤ 5Bf – Determined by linear
interpolation
Bridge Foundations – Deep • Soils – 6m beyond anticipated pile or
Foundations shaft tip, or two times the maximum pile
group dimension, whichever is deeper
• Bearing on Rock – 3m of rock core to
ensure boring has not terminated on a
boulder
• Extending into Rock – 3m of rock core, or
three times shaft diameter (for isolated
shafts) or two times maximum shaft
group dimension, whichever is deeper
Retaining Walls Between 0.75 and 1.5 times height of the wall
(below final ground line). If stratification indicates
possible deep stability or settlement problem,
extend to hard stratum.
Roadways 2 m below proposed subgrade level.
Cuts 5 m below anticipated cut at ditch line. Should be
increased in locations of base instability, or
where base of cut is below groundwater level.
Embankments Twice the embankment height, unless hard
stratum encountered above this depth. If soft
strata are encountered, extend to hard stratum.
Culverts Use criteria for embankments.
The number and depth of boreholes shall be determined by the registered

professional and subject to review and acceptance by RCJ.
aa. Where rock is encountered during the depth of investigation, a typical rock coring
length is a minimum of 1.5m into competent rock, to ensure auger refusal has not
occurred on a boulder. If structures are to be founded directly on rock, a minimum
rock core length of 3m into competent rock is appropriate (FHWA 2001). Borehole
Locations and Elevations
Boring locations and elevations shall be established. If a surveyor is unavailable,
the field engineer shall determine the location of all boreholes relative to known site
features, to an accuracy applicable to the project scope.
Boring elevations shall be to either a geodetic benchmark (BM) or a temporary

benchmark (TBM) which shall be included on the field report. Elevations are
typically reported to ±0.1meter (at a minimum). Borehole elevations shall be
referenced to the RC datum.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 71
bb. Questionable Soils

Additional boring frequency and procedures are required when questionable soils
are suspected beneath the proposed development.
1) Expansive Soils
Sampling requirements for expansive soils are outlined in SBC 303 Section
2.5.1.
2) Collapsible Soils
Sampling requirements for collapsible soils are outlined in SBC 303 Section
2.5.2.
3) Sabkha Soils
Sampling requirements for collapsible soils are outlined in SBC 303 Section
2.5.3.
cc. Sampling
Soil sampling during a boring investigation will depend on the type of boring
investigation being performed, and the information required from the samples.
Common sampler types include the following:
1) Split-Barrel (Split Spoon)

2) Thin-Walled Shelby Tube
3) Continuous Push
4) Piston
5) Pitcher
6) Denison
7) Modified California
8) Continuous Auger
9) Bulk
10) Block
The sampling interval will depend on the type of soil and will vary by project and by
region. Common intervals for Standard Penetration Testing using Split Spoon
samplers (which is the most common type of geotechnical sampling) include the
following: continuous SPT sampling over the initial 5 m, then 1 m intervals to 20 m,
followed by 1.5 m intervals to the bottom of the boring.
In cohesive soils, if encountered, at least one undisturbed sample (such as a Thin-

Walled Shelby Tube) shall be recovered from each layer or change in strata, Shelby
Tube samples shall alternate with SPT split spoon samples, or as directed in the
proposed scope of works . As required, in very soft to soft soils undisturbed samples
shall be recovered using thin wall piston samplers with continuous sampling.
Where samples are taken during a boring investigation, they shall each be assigned
a unique number to aid in identification. Care shall be taken to minimize disturbance

Rev. 0 4.4 - 72
of the sample, particularly undisturbed samples. Standard practices for handling

field samples are provided in FHWA (2001).
dd. Reporting
The following information shall be included on all field logs used during the boring
investigation, as per SBC 303 Section 2.6.0:
1) Boring or Test Pit number or designation and elevation of top of boring or test
pit.
2) Driller's name and field representative's name.
3) Make, size, and manufacturer's model designation of drilling, sampling, and
test pit excavating equipment.
4) Type of drilling and sampling operation by depth.
5) Boring diameter.
6) Dates and time by depths when test pit excavation, drilling, and sampling
operations were performed.
7) Time required for drilling each run.
8) Drill action, rotation speed, hydraulic pressure, water pressure, tool drops,
and any other unusual and non-ordinary experience which could indicate the
subsurface conditions encountered.
9) Depths at which samples or cores were recovered or attempts made to
sample or core including top and bottom depth of each run.
10) Classification or description by depths of the materials sampled, cored, or
penetrated using the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487) and
including a description of moisture conditions, consistency and other
appropriate descriptive information described in ASTM D2488. This
classification or description shall be made immediately after the samples or
cores are retrieved.
11) Classification and description by depths of rock materials sampled or cored,
including rock type, composition, texture, presence and orientation of
bedding, foliation, or fractures, presence of vugs or other interstices, and the
RQD for each cored interval.
12) Indication of penetration resistance such as drive-hammer blows given in
blows per increment for driving sample spoons and casing. Note that the
hammer type (i.e., donut, safety, or automatic) and the hammer efficiency
shall be reported to enable correction to N60 (blow count corrected with
respect to 60% hammer efficiency) used for design.
13) Weight of drive hammer.
14) Percentage of sample or core recovered per run.
15) Depth at which groundwater is encountered initially and when stabilized.
16) Depths at which drill water is lost and regained and amounts.
17) Depths at which the color of the drill water return changes.
18) Type and weight of drill fluid.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 73
19) Depth of bottom of hole.

20) Pressures employed in pressure testing.
(a)
C. Groundwater Conditions
1. General
Groundwater refers to the water located beneath the earth's surface in soil pore spaces
and in the fractures of rock formations. Groundwater has a significant influence on all
geotechnical projects. Conversely, development projects often have an impact on
groundwater. Groundwater can cause or contribute to failure because of excess
saturation and reduction of soil strength, seepage pressures), or uplift forces. In some
localities, groundwater may have elevated concentrations of pollutants or may contain
constituents in concentration sufficient to make it aggressive and cause damage to
construction materials such as concrete and steel. Groundwater affects the design,
performance, and constructability of project elements. Assessment of groundwater
conditions involves determination of groundwater levels and pressures, hydraulic
conductivity, and water quality in terms of chemical composition.
Experienced geoenvironmental/geotechnical engineers or hydrogeologists shall be

consulted when planning a groundwater characterization study. Guidelines and reference
standards (i.e. ASTM 1997a and b) shall be consulted during the planning stages for
groundwater characterization studies. Comprehensive reviews and discussions on
groundwater and wells are also provided in several reference works including Driscoll
(1986), UFC (2004), FHWA (2002), and Harr (1962).
Characterization of groundwater conditions is an important component of geotechnical

investigation of a project. The geotechnical investigation shall identify groundwater levels
and determine the range in seasonal fluctuations. If the geology or the groundwater
regime is complex, significant input from an engineering geologist and/or a
hydrogeologist is required.
2. Assessment of Groundwater Conditions

Detailed information regarding groundwater observations can be obtained from ASTM
D 4750 and ASTM D 5092. The geotechnical scope of works shall provide requirements
of groundwater measurement and monitoring for different applications, including
minimum requirements and frequency of monitoring.
The geotechnical scope of works shall assess the types of groundwater investigation
required: those used to determine groundwater levels and pressures, and those used to
determine the hydraulic conductivity (permeability) of the subsurface materials.
Determination of the hydraulic conductivity of soil or rock strata is required in connection
with seepage studies (refer to Section 5.X) for leakage through embankments, yield of
wells, piping assessment, groundwater control, temporary shoring design, and
assessment of soil susceptibility to liquefaction.
Groundwater levels and pressures may be measured in existing wells, in open borings,
and specially installed monitoring (observation) wells and piezometers. Hydraulic
conductivity shall be determined by means of various types of seepage, pressure and
pumping tests. Commonly used means of groundwater measurement are given below.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 74
3. Groundwater Measurement – Water Levels (Pressures)

1) Existing Wells. If records (including logs) of wells are available within close
proximity of the project, these shall be incorporated into the groundwater
study plan for the project. If such information is available, its acquisition shall
be coordinated with the owner of the well.
2) Open Boreholes. The water level shall be measured during drilling and after
completion of the borehole (if the borehole does not collapse). Groundwater
observations made in open boreholes shall be treated with care since the
length of time required for water levels in boreholes to stabilize at the
groundwater level is a function of the hydraulic conductivity of the site soil.
3) Monitoring Wells. These are wells installed for the purpose of longer-term
studies of groundwater levels. Details of the installation procedures are
available in the references listed in Subsection 4.4.2.C.1.
4) Piezometers. Piezometers are similar to monitoring wells except that the
former in general measure water pressures as opposed to water levels. Note:
standpipe piezometers are identical in performance to monitoring wells albeit
smaller in diameter. Available types of piezometers include pneumatic,
vibrating wire, and electrical resistance wire gauge piezometers.
Consideration of time lag effect is particularly important in the selection of the
appropriate type of piezometers for a given project. For further details on the
selection, installation and instrumentation of piezometers, refer to Dunnicliff
(1993).
4. Groundwater Measurement – Hydraulic Conductivity
In-situ hydraulic conductivity may be estimated using the following methods:
1) Falling Water Level Method – for low permeability soils

2) Rising Water Level Method – for low permeability soils
3) Constant Water Level Method – mainly for high permeability soils
4) Packer Tests – mostly for determining in-situ hydraulic conductivity in bedrock
For the selection and specific application procedures for these methods, refer to one
or more of the references listed in Subsection 4.4.2.C.1.
D. Geotechnical Equipment
1. General Field Equipment
General field equipment will be required to successfully complete the field investigation,
and shall include logging forms and tools, site information, and appropriate site manuals
and permits. A list of general field supplies is provided in Table 2.4 of FHWA (2002).
2. Personal Protective Equipment

Investigations shall include all required Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) necessary
to complete the work safely. This could include written documents, such as a properly
completed Health and Safety plan specific to the job, as well as field gear, such as safety
footwear, reflective clothing, and safety glasses. All safety gear shall conform to the
requirements of the appropriate Health and Safety authority.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 75
3. Drilling Equipment
Geotechnical drilling equipment is used to perform borings and obtain soil or bedrock
samples, and varies widely depending on the goals of the investigations. A summary of
common geotechnical drilling equipment (FHWA 2002), as well as any applicable
standards, is provided below.
3. Solid Stem Continuous Flight Augers (ASTM D 1452)

Solid stem augers act similarly to a screw, bringing soils to the top of the boring as
they are advanced. Although various sizes are available, the 100 mm diameter is
most common. Solid stem augers are commonly connected to the drill rig by means
of cotter pins.
4. Hollow Stem Continuous Flight Augers (ASTM D 6151)

Hollow stem augers are similar to solid stem augers, and often come in similar sizes.
They differ primarily in that hollow stem augers have a hollow core, which is typically
plugged with a center plug during advancement of the auger. The center plug is
removed when sampling.
5. Rotary Wash Borings (ASTM D 5783)

Rotary wash borings employ either casing or drilling fluid to support the sides of the
excavation. Casing sizes commonly range from 60 mm to 130 mm, and are often
chosen based on the diameter of sampling equipment which must be advanced
within. Drilling bits commonly consist of either drag bits or roller bits.
6. Bucket Augers (ASTM D 6907)

Bucket augers are used to obtain larger volumes of soil, and consist of a bucket
(diameter typically 600 mm – 1200 mm, length typically 600 mm – 900 mm)
advanced through the soil or rock with cutting teeth mounted to the bottom. Slots in
the base of the bucket allow it to collect samples.
7. Hand Augers/Excavators (ASTM D 1452)

Hand augers are typically used for shallow investigation, with several types
available, with the post hole type barrel auger recognized as the most common.
Hand held power augers are also available.
8. Mechanical Excavators
Mechanical excavators, such as backhoes, bulldozers and excavators are
commonly used to excavate test pits. Their size will depend on the type of soil,
depth of interest, and any site constraints.
9. Non-Core (Destructive) Drilling

Non-core drilling, also known as destructive drilling, is typically used in situations
where rock core samples are not required. The equipment used in such an
investigation can include:
1) Air-track drills
2) Downhole percussive drills
3) Rotary tricone (roller bit) drills

Rev. 0 4.4 - 76
4) Rotary drag bit drills

5) Carbide-tipped bits
10. Core Drilling
When intact rock samples are required, core drilling equipment is often used. A
summary of rock drilling equipment and procedures is provided in FHWA (2002).
Core drilling barrels are typically single-, double-, or triple-tube, with double tube the
most common.
Rock cores are typically brought to the surface using either conventional or wireline
equipment; conventional equipment requires the entire string of rods and core barrel
to be brought to the surface after each run to retrieve core samples, while wireline
equipment allows the inner core (on double- and triple-core barrels) to be brought to
the surface separately.
Core barrels and other rock sampling equipment come in a variety of sizes, which
are denoted by letters. Size NX core is typically the most common core barrel sizes,
although other sizes are also in use, and may be appropriate depending on the type
of rock encountered.
Coring bits are attached to the tip of the core barrel, and are discussed in
Subsection 4.4.2.D.5.
4. Sampling Equipment
Sampling equipment used in geotechnical field investigations is dependent on the
type of investigation being conducted; further information on boring investigations is
provided in Subsection 4.4.2.B.2 – Boring Requirements. Common soil sampling
methods for geotechnical investigations include:
1) Split-Barrel (Split Spoon) (ASTM D 1586)

2) Thin-Walled Shelby Tube (ASTM D 1587)
3) Continuous Push (ASTM D 6282)
4) Piston (ASTM D 6519)
5) Pitcher (ASTM D 4700)
6) Denison (FHWA 2002)
7) Modified California (FHWA 2002)
8) Continuous Auger (FHWA 2002)
9) Bulk (FHWA 2002)
10) Block (FHWA 2002)
5. Rock Core Sampling
Rock core sampling is typically achieved through the use of coring bits attached to
core barrels (see Subsection 4.4.2.D.3.h). The most common types of coring bits
(per FHWA (2002)) include:
1) Diamond
2) Carbide

Rev. 0 4.4 - 77
3) Sawtooth
6. In-Situ Field Testing Equipment
Refer to Subsection 4.4.2.G In-Situ Testing for equipment required to perform in-situ
testing.
7. Laboratory Testing Equipment

Geotechnical laboratory testing is discussed in detail in Subsection 4.4.2.E,
including references to the equipment required to carry out specific tests.
E. Laboratory Testing
1. General
Laboratory testing shall be specified to determine physical and hydrogeological
properties of soil and rock in order to classify and define engineering properties for
geotechnical design. Based on the anticipated ground conditions and required
parameters, the geotechnical engineer shall identify all the required tests to determine
design parameters. It is then the responsibility of the geotechnical engineer to use their
experience along with the data to perform their design. Procedures for specific laboratory
tests are not outlined in this manual; references to applicable standards and procedures
for laboratory tests are provided.
2. Sample Selection
The number of samples required is largely determined by the size and type of the project,
as well as the prevalent subsurface conditions in the area. Areas in which additional
indexing of soil and rock is required can be identified as samples are collected and
analyzed and testing requirements can be adjusted as needed. The following minimal
criteria to be considered when developing a laboratory testing program have been
developed by the FHWA (Manual on Subsurface Investigations, 2001):
1) Project type (bridge, embankment, rehabilitation, buildings, etc.)

2) Size of the project
3) Loads to be imposed on the foundation soils
4) Types of loads (i.e., static, dynamic, etc.)
5) Critical tolerances for the project (i.e., settlement limitations)
6) Vertical and horizontal variations in the soil profile as determined from boring logs
and visual assessments
7) Identification of soil types in the laboratory
8) Known or suspected peculiarities of soils at the project location (i.e. swelling soils,
collapsible soils, sabkha soils, organics, etc.)
9) Presence of visually observed inclusions such as buried sabkha deposits, disturbed
ground concretions and cemented layers, etc.
All soil samples shall be classified according to the Unified Soils Classification System
(ASTM D2487). Moisture contents shall be determined for both cohesive soils and
unsaturated granular soils with 12 percent or more fines. Rock core shall be fully
described and logged before laboratory testing.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 78
Most index testing is performed on disturbed samples that have not had any special
handling to preserve structural integrity (grain size distribution, liquid limit, etc.). It is
important that samples are properly sealed to prevent drying when collected in order for
moisture content to be determined in the laboratory. Soils can be sealed in metal tubes,
plastic bags or glass jars; rock samples are normally coated in a thin layer of wax.
Laboratory tests to determine engineering properties (consolidation, triaxial compression,

etc.) shall be performed on undisturbed samples. The geologist or engineer responsible
shall be responsible for specifying laboratory testing requirements. The Contractor
undertaking the geotechnical investigation for the project shall have control over the
sampling and shipping of samples.
Refer to SBC 303 Section 2.5 for proper sampling procedures for expansive, sabkha and
collapsible soils.
In order to satisfy project requirements, a suitable number of index and engineering

property tests need to be planned to adequately cover the proposed site. If it is found
during the course of the sampling program that the field coverage is uneven, or lacking in
certain stratigraphic units, field procedures shall be revisited.
3. Index and Classification Tests

1) Rock
The following index and classification tests are commonly performed on rock
samples obtained from geotechnical field investigations (including both intact and
crushed rock samples):
TABLE 4.4.2 C: ROCK INDEX CLASSIFICATION TESTS
Applicable
Test Purpose Significance
Procedure
Specific gravity and
absorption provide
To determine the bulk or
Specific valuable insight into a
ASTM apparent specific gravity
gravity and rocks ability to withstand
D 6473 and absorption of a rock
absorption weathering and
specimen.
evaluating potential
deterioration.
Provides an indirect
To determine the water
Water ASTM indication of porosity of a
(moisture) content of a
content D 2216 specimen, or clay content
rock specimen by mass.
of a sedimentary rock.
To determine the pulse
velocities of Useful for characterizing
Pulse
compression and shear the effects of uniaxial
velocities and ASTM
waves through a rock stress and water
elastic D 2845
specimen, as well as the saturation on pulse
constants
ultrasonic elastic velocity.
constant.
To determine the A simple and quick index
Rebound ASTM rebound hardness test of hardness,
hammer D 5873 number of a rock especially useful in the
specimen. field.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 79
Applicable
Procedure
To determine the
permeability (hydraulic
Hydraulic conductivity is
conductivity) of a small
ASTM important to
Permeability rock specimen (and a
D 4525 characterizing fluid flow
liquid permeability
through a rock mass.
equivalent through
extrapolation).
Porosity is intrinsic to
To determine the
Effective ASTM permeability, affecting
effective porosity of a
porosity D 7063 things such as fluid flow
rock specimen.
and drill penetration rate.
Provides an indication of
To determine the rock type, minerals
Petrographic physical and chemical present, chemical
ASTM C 295
examination characteristics of the reactivity (alkali-
rock specimen. carbonate etc.) among
other properties.
ASTM These tests characterize
D 4644 freeze/thaw durability of
To determine the
ASTM rocks (D 5312 & D 5240),
durability of a rock
D 5240 the slake durability of
Durability specimen exposed to a
ASTM shales and weak rocks
variety of physical and
D 5312 (D 4644) and
chemical conditioning.
ASTM wetting/drying durability
D 5313 of rocks (D 5313).
To determine a coarse relative quality of various
LA Abrasion ASTM C 535 aggregate’s resistance sources of aggregate that
to degradation. share similar mineral
compositions.
A simple and quick index
test of strength,
To determine the point-
Point load ASTM especially useful in the
load strength index of
testing D 5731 field. Can be correlated
the rock specimen.
to unconfined
compressive strength.
2) Soils
The following index and classification tests are commonly performed on overburden
samples obtained from geotechnical field investigations:
TABLE 4.4.2 D: SOIL INDEX CLASSIFICATION TESTS
Applicable
Procedure
Provides significant
To determine the water
Water ASTM information about the soil
(moisture) content of a
content D 4959 when combined with data
sample of soil.
obtained from other tests.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 80
Applicable
Procedure
To determine the liquid
limit, plastic limit and
Atterberg ASTM soil behavior and
plasticity index of the
Limits D 4318 consistency relative to
fine-grained portion of
moisture content.
the sample.
Provides a means for
classifying soil and
To determine grain size
Sieve ASTM D 422 aggregate based on the
distribution.
distribution of grain sizes
on each sieve.
To determine the Provides a means for
Hydrometer distribution of particle determining the
ASTM D 422
analysis sizes smaller than the percentage of clay
No. 200 sieve (75 μm). particles present.
Obtaining clay mineralogy
X-ray USACE EM To determine mineralogy is important for predicting
diffraction 1110-2-1906 of clay particles. behavior of clay under
various conditions.
Hydraulic conductivity is
ASTM one of the main
To determine the
D 2434 parameters used when
Permeability hydraulic conductivity of
ASTM selecting soil materials for
the soil sample.
D 5084 construction (backfill type
etc.)
Mitigating the effects of
To estimate the potential
Swell ASTM expansive soils and clay
for wetting-induced swell
potential D 4546 is an important
of the soil.
consideration in design.
At high moisture contents,
ASTM
collapsible soils such as
D 5333 To estimate the potential
Collapse Loess undergo a sudden
(Withdrawn) for wetting-induced
potential change in volume, posing
ASTM collapse of the soil.
a risk to the integrity of
D 4546
the structure.
4. Engineering Property Tests

a. Rock
The following tests are commonly performed to determine the engineering properties
of rock samples obtained from geotechnical field investigations:
TABLE 4.4.2 E: ROCK TESTS
Applicable
Procedure
The uniaxial compressive
To determine the
Uniaxial & strength is the most direct
strength of a rock
triaxial ASTM method of determining
specimen in uniaxial
compressive D 7012 rock strength.
and/or triaxial
strength The triaxial compressive
compression.
strength test can be used

Rev. 0 4.4 - 81
Applicable
Procedure
to calculate angle of
internal friction, angle of
shearing resistance and
cohesion intercept.
The procedure listed
provides a method for
calculating Young’s
Modulus and Poisson’s
Ratio from these two
tests.
Shear strength is an
important design
parameter in the
To determine the shear construction of
Direct shear ASTM
strength of a rock foundations and slopes.
strength D 5607
specimen. Discontinuities present in
a rock mass make this a
difficult parameter to
ascertain.
Provides quantitative
parameters for stability
To determine the strain
Creep in ASTM analysis of underground
of a rock specimen as a
compression D 7070 structures subjected to an
function of time.
approximately constant
load.
b. Soils
The following tests are commonly performed to determine the engineering properties
of overburden samples obtained from geotechnical field investigations:
TABLE 4.4.2 F: SOIL TESTS
Applicable
Procedure
To determine the
Unconfined Provides a good
ASTM unconfined compressive
compressive measure of shear
D 2166 strength of a cohesive
strength strength of the soil.
soil.
To determine the Certain triaxial tests can
ASTM
strength and stress- provide effective stress
Triaxial D 2850
strain relationship of an parameters of the soil
strength ASTM
undisturbed or remolded (cohesion and angle of
D 4767
cohesive soil. internal friction).
Provides a simple and
To determine the easy test for shear
ASTM consolidated, drained strength, though with a
Direct shear
D 3080 shear strength of a few shortcomings
cohesive soil. outlined in the referenced
procedure.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 82
Applicable
Procedure
To estimate the
Provides a quick field test
undrained shear
for estimating shear-
Miniature ASTM strength of a fine-
strength of a soil.
vane D 4648 grained, undisturbed,
remolded or
reconstituted soil.
F. Geophysical Testing
1. General
Geophysical testing shall be specified where necessary to determine the type, nature,
and characteristics of subsurface materials; determine the in-situ engineering properties;
and/or detect hidden cultural features. Geophysical testing shall supplement or aids in
the planning, execution and interpretation of the geotechnical drilling investigations.
Geophysical testing generally consists of measurement of mechanical waves (to

determine elastic properties of materials) or electromagnetic waves (to locate anomalous
objects such as cavities or buried objects).
As Per FHWA (2001, 2002), the advantages and disadvantages of geophysical testing
include:
1) Advantages
1) Non-destructive and/or non-invasive
2) Fast and economical testing
3) Theoretical basis for interpretation
4) Applicable to soils and rocks
5) Works well for large areas
6) Characterizes materials at very small strains – provides more accurate elastic
properties
2) Disadvantages
1) No samples or direct physical penetration
2) Models assumed for interpretation
3) Affected by cemented layers or inclusions
4) Results influenced by water, clay and depth
5) Works best when there are large differences in stiffness between adjacent
units
6) Does not work as well for hard strata layered over softer strata
7) Specialized equipment often required

Rev. 0 4.4 - 83
2. Geophysical Testing Methods

Common methods for geophysical testing are summarized below, along with the
appropriate standards.
1) Mechanical Waves
There are four main types of mechanical waves: compression (P-waves), shear
(S-waves) surface or Rayleigh (R-waves) and Love (L-waves). The first two are the
most commonly measured in geophysical investigations, particularly shear waves,
which can be directly linked to a soil’s shear modulus (Campanella 1994).
1) Seismic Refraction Method (ASTM D 5777)

This method is used to determine the depth, thickness and seismic velocity of
subsurface soil, rock or engineered materials. The method requires a seismic
energy source, trigger cable, geophones, geophone cable, and a
seismograph. Seismic Refraction commonly measures P-waves, although
recent technology has allowed S-waves to be measured as well (FHWA
2001).
2) Crosshole Testing Method (ASTM D 4428)

This method is used to determine the depth, thickness and seismic velocity of
subsurface soil, rock or engineered materials. The method requires a cased
pipe (usually PVC and grouted in place), a seismic energy source (downhole
hammer), trigger cable, a geophone, geophone cable, and a seismograph.
Multiple boreholes are required. Crosshole testing measures both P-waves
and S-waves (FHWA 2001).
3) Downhole Testing Method (ASTM D 7400)

The downhole testing method is very similar to the crosshole testing method
with the primary difference being that only one hole is required. The seismic
Cone Penetration Test (sCPTu) is a form of downhole testing, with an
accelerometer located within the piezometer.
4) Surface Wave Method

This method is used to determine the seismic profile (shear wave velocity) of
subsurface soil, rock or engineered materials. The method requires a pair of
geophones in a linear array, a transient force or vibrating mass to generate
surface waves, and a spectrum analyzer or other data logging equipment.
Surface wave methods analyze Rayleigh waves, which are converted to
obtain shear waves (S-waves).
2) Electromagnetic Waves
Electromagnetic methods measure electrical and magnetic properties of the soil to
determine subsurface conditions; types of electromagnetic properties include
resistivity, conductivity, magnetic fields, dielectric characteristics and permittivity
(FHWA 2001).
1) Surface Ground Penetrating Radar (ASTM D 6432)

The method is used to interpret geologic or subsurface conditions using
measurements of changes in electromagnetic wave properties (i.e.
permittivity) that are a function of the subsurface material’s type, density, and

Rev. 0 4.4 - 84
moisture content. The method uses transmitting antenna to radiate

electromagnetic waves. GPR is most effective in dry granular soils; in wet clay
soils, the accuracy is limited to shallow depths.
2) Direct Current Resistivity Method (ASTM D 6431)

The method is used to measure the resistivity of subsurface materials as an
indicator of the type of subsurface material present. The method requires a
source of current (battery or generator), high-impedance voltmeter or
resistivity unit, metal stakes for the current and potential electrodes, and
connecting wire.
3) Frequency Domain Electromagnetic Method (ASTM D 6639)

The method is used to characterize the subsurface materials and geology
based on their properties to conduct, enhance or obstruct the flow of electrical
currents induced in the ground. The method requires an energy source,
transmitter coil, receiver electronics, a receiver coil and connecting wire.
4) Gravity Method (ASTM D 6430)

The method is used to characterize the subsurface conditions by measuring
variations in the earth’s gravitational field caused by differences in density of
the subsurface soil or rock or the presence of voids or man-made structures.
3. Conducting Geophysical Testing

Geophysical testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM or other approved RCJ
standards. The equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for calibration and
standardization shall be followed; if no recommendations are provided, periodic checks of
the equipment operation shall be conducted, including after each equipment problem or
repair and before starting field work each day.
An initial site inspection to evaluate the survey plan shall be conducted, and the
instrumentation locations shall be laid out and surveyed. Calibration, standardization and
data interpretations shall be conducted by a geotechnical professional.
An experienced geologist or engineering geophysicist shall be involved in preparing the

scope and technical specification of a geophysical investigation. Additional guidelines on
geophysical testing are found in FHWA (2002) and EM 1110-1-1804 (USACE 2003).
4. Reporting
When conducting geophysical testing, accurate logs and records of all work
accomplished shall be kept. The following information shall be included in the final report
for the work:
a. Purpose and scope of the survey;

b. A description of the geologic setting;
c. Limitations of the survey;
d. A list of assumptions made;
e. A description of the field approach, including the equipment used and the data
acquisition parameters used;
f. A to-scale site map showing the instrumentation locations;

Rev. 0 4.4 - 85
1) A description of the approach used to perform the test, as well as a description of

corrections applied to field data and justification for their use;
2) Results of field measurements, raw record copies, and time-distance plots;
3) A description of the interpreted results;
4) A description of the data recording format;
5) A description of any variance from the Work Plan, Quality Control Plan or the ASTM
guide;
6) A list of references used; and
7) A list of the personnel conducting the field testing and data interpretation and their
qualifications.
G. In-Situ Testing
1. In-Situ Tests
a. Standard Penetration Test (ASTM D 1586)
The Standard Penetration Test, or SPT, is the most commonly used in-situ test. The
test allows soil samples to be obtained for further testing, and a wide variety of
correlations between the test and various engineering properties have been
published.
SPT is typically specified in granular soil (although correlations for clay exist) and
can be advanced in very weathered rock. The test is useful for preliminary analysis
of a site (Bowles 1996) and can guide placement of further undisturbed samples
(such as Shelby tubes or direct shear tests).
TheSPT is well-correlated to a number of index tests, including bearing capacity

(see Meyerhof 1956)unconfined compressive strength (see Mitchell, Guzikowski and
Villet, 1978), settlement (see Terzaghi, Peck and Mesri, 1996), and liquefaction
susceptibility (see Seed 1979).
The repeatability of the SPT can be questionable, and results shall be analyzed on a
qualitative basis (Schmertmann 1979, Skempton 1986) and where ground
conditions are suitable CPT profiling shall specified Numerous sampling procedures
can affect the results of the SPT, and are summarized in Skempton (1986) and
Decourt (1989). Corrected N-values shall be reported and used in subsequent
design and analysis to account for factors such as overburden stress, length of drill
rod, presence of a liner, diameter of the borehole, and energy use.
b. Field Shear Vane (ASTM D 2573)

Shear vanes are used to measure the in-situ strength of clay soils and where
required shall be specified in the geotechnical investigation scope of works.
Although a variety of vane sizes are available, the most common, or standard,
consists of a blade diameter of 65 mm, a height of 130 mm, and a blade thickness of
2 mm. Should another vane be used, the measured shear strength can be adjusted
using a vane factor, calculated either from ASTM D 2573, Bowles (1984)
The shear vane test shall be corrected to account for the Plasticity Index (see
Bjerrum, 1972, 1973) and for overconsolidation ratio (OCR) (see Aas et al. 1986).
Guidelines on the use of field shear vanes in soft or sensitive clays are provided by
Leoueil et al (1990) and Leroueil (2001). Shear vane tests can also be used to

Rev. 0 4.4 - 86
estimate the overconsolidation ratio of a particular clay deposit (see Mayne and
Mitchell 1988).
c. Cone Penetration Test (CPT) (ASTM D 3441)

Cone Penetration Testing allows for a continuous log of soil properties and
stratigraphy. Cone penetrometers typically consist of a rod with a 35.7 mm body (10
2 2
cm projected area), 60° apex angle, and 150 mm friction sleeve. A rod with a 43.7
2 2
mm body (15 cm projected area and 200 cm sleeve) is also available. The rod is
typically pushed at a rate of 20 mm/s.
d. CPT profiling can be used to determine the soil type (see Douglas and Olsen 1981),
the undrained shear strength for clays (see Jamiolkowski et al. 1985, Schmertmann
1970), and the relative density of sands (Durgonoglu and Mitchell 1975, Mitchell,
Guzikowski and Villet 1978, and Schmertmann 1978). Cone Penetration Testing
shall only be adopted in suitable site and ground conditions and cannot typically be
performed in dense to very dense granular deposits or hard cohesive deposits Cone
penetrometers with piezocone element shall be utilized to measure porewater
pressure, and geophones to measure seismic wave data. Direct Shear
Direct shear tests can be performed in situ where available shear strength data is in
doubt, or where thin, soft continuous layers exist within relatively stronger material
(USACE 2001). These tests are typically performed on rocks (as opposed to soil).
Further information regarding the in-situ Direct Shear test can be obtained from
Zieglar (1972), Nicholson (1983a,b) and the USACE Rock Testing Handbook
(USAEWES 1993).
e. Pressuremeter
The pressuremeter consists of a cylindrical probe expanded radially into the
surrounding soil to obtain a soil’s stress-strain curve. Pressuremeters can be used to
test soils which are not suitable for push-type tests (i.e. SPT, CPT, etc.), such as
hard clay, dense sands and gravels, and weathered rock. Four types of
pressuremeters are common:
1) Pre-bored (Menard) Pressuremeter (MPMT)

2) Self-boring Pressuremeter (SBP)
3) Push-in Pressuremeter (PIP)
4) Full-displacement Pressuremeter (FDP)
The most common pressuremeter test is the Menard, which is described in ASTM D
4719 and in Baguelin et al (1978). Further details on types of pressuremeters and
calibration can be obtained from Briaud (1989) and Clarke (1995).
f. Flat Plate Dilatometer (ASTM D 6635)

The flat plate dilatometer consists of a tapered blade with 18° wedge tip, which is
pushed vertically into the soil at either 200 mm or 300 mm depth intervals. The
typical rate is 20 mm/s, similar to the Cone Penetration Test. Pressures are taken
from a 60 mm diameter flexible steel membrane located on one side of the blade
(typical dimensions L = 240 mm, W = 95 mm, t = 15 mm).

Rev. 0 4.4 - 87
Further information on the flat plate dilatometer can be obtained from Jamiolkowski
et al. (1985), Robertson (1986), Schmertmann (1986), Mitchell (1988) and Lunne et
al (1989).
g. Plate Load Test (ASTM D 1194)

The plate load test is used to determine the bearing capacity of foundations, or for
obtaining the soil modulus. The test consists of measuring the applied load and
penetration of a plate pushed into soil or rock mass; typically a series of maintained
loads of increasing magnitude are applied. The test can be performed either
drained or undrained, in the case of cohesive soils.
The plate load test is typically valid only for the depth and location of a specified test;
to obtain representative results for a larger area or a full soil stratum, the test shall
be performed in multiple locations or at multiple depths. A variation on the plate
load test is the screw-plate test, which consists of a flat pitch auger which is screwed
into the soil at the desired depth. Further information concerning the screw-load test
is provided in Janbu and Senesset (1973).
h. Aquifer Characterization (ASTM D 4043)

An aquifer test method is a controlled field experiment utilized to determine the
approximate hydraulic properties of water-bearing material. The hydraulic properties
that can be determined are specific to the test method selected, dependent upon the
instrumentation of the field test, knowledge of the aquifer system at the site, and
conformance of the hydrogeologic conditions at the site to the assumptions of the
test method. Hydraulic conductivity and storage coefficient of the aquifer are the
basic properties determined by most test methods. The appropriate test method
shall be selected based on site geological conditions encountered. Refer to
Subsection 4.4.2.C Groundwater Conditions for information on design and
installation of wells.
i. Slope Inclinometers (ASTM D 6230)

Slope inclinometers generally consist of grooved PVC casing that is grouted to a
target depth near or on a slope to measure movements that may occur in the slope.
A baseline reading is obtained shortly after instrument installation and is compared
to subsequent readings to determine deflection in the slope (both vertical and
horizontal directions). Both two- and three-dimensional readings can be obtained
depending on the depth of the instrument.
j. Geophysical testing
Geophysical tests can be used to characterize soils and rock in situ; these methods
are summarized in Subsection 4.4.2.F.
k. Other Tests
Less common in situ tests include the following:
1) Becker Penetration Test (BPT)

5) Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (DCPT)
6) Plate Bearing/Jacking
7) Uniaxial Compressive Testing

Rev. 0 4.4 - 88
8) Borehole Direct Shear

9) Borehole Jacking
Further information on these tests may be obtained from USACE (2001) and FHWA
(2002).
H. Off-Shore Geotechnical Investigations

1. Introduction
Offshore investigations (i.e., for deep-water structures and oil production platforms)
including those for near shore structures (i.e., breakwaters and sheet pile walls for
harbors) are highly specialized, and although the basic procedures for geotechnical site
investigation (i.e., refer to SBC 303 and ASTM D 420) shall be adhered to, several other
requirements related to Saudi and international waters shall be considered. There are
many additional statutes and regulations which apply to offshore geotechnical
investigation work (especially those involving international waters). Applicable standards
and regulations are included in, but not limited to, the following:
1) American Petroleum Institute

2) International Association of Oil and Gas Producers
3) International Association of Oil and Gas Producers and International Marine
Contractors Association
4) International Cable Protection Committee / Society for Underwater Technology
5) International Marine Contractors Association
6) International Organization for Standardization (ISO 19900 series)
In addition, other applicable offshore codes of practice shall be considered as found
appropriate to a specific project. Due consideration needs to be given to shipping, harbor
and other regulations with respect to developing investigation proposals and carrying out
the investigation at the site and for permission to use the overwater facilities proposed.
For simple cases, such as shallow-water offshore and near-shore investigations, a land-
type investigation can be used with additional facilities needed for access and the depth
of water. As the difficulties associated with access and depth of water increase,
techniques for offshore investigations shall be specified including provisions for use of
static and floating platforms..
2. Useful Resources
Several reference materials and guidance documents are available containing
information on the planning and execution of offshore explorations. A partial list is
provided below (in chronological order):
1) Geotechnical & Geophysical Investigations for Offshore and Nearshore

Developments, by TC 1 of ISSMGE (2005)
2) Offshore Geotechnical Engineering: Principles and Practice, by E.T.R. Dean (2010)
3) Offshore Geotechnical Engineering, by M. Randolph and S. Gourvenec (2011)
4) Guidance Notes for the Planning and Execution of Geophysical and Geotechnical
Ground Investigations for Offshore Renewable Energy Developments, by the
Society for Underwater Technology (2014)

Rev. 0 4.4 - 89
A complete reference to these documents is provided in Subsection 4.4.2.A.8.
3. Key considerations
Offshore investigations involve greater uncertainties and cost and therefore require more
extensive planning of the scope of works and preparation for mobilization and completion
of the works. To control the variables and associated risks/hazards and to ensure that
these do not adversely impact a project and subsequent design, it is recommended that a
project specific geological and geotechnical risk register be created and maintained as
soon as the project commences. Typical risks/hazards that may be present at an offshore
geotechnical investigation site include the following (SUT 2014):
1) Areas of soft soils (i.e., channel fill), the presence of which may affect foundation
placement and installation depths and may also restrict the selection of installation
vessels.
2) Areas of mobile seabed, the presence of which affect foundation behavior, loads
and installation depths and may also affect cable routing, installation and long-term
burial/protection.
3) Very hard soils or bedrock, the presence of which may affect foundation installation
methods, installation depths as well as cable routing and burial/protection options
and methods.
4) Rapid change in foundation conditions that may determine the selection of more
than one foundation type for a development area.
5) Surface (i.e., at seabed) or buried obstructions, boulders, unexploded ordinance,
etc.
6) Shallow gas, presence of which may impact foundation stability and the safe
execution of geotechnical soil borings.
7) Seismic risk and the potential for soil liquefaction.
8) Environmental issues that can impact or be impacted by the project.
4. Types of Investigation
In order to manage offshore ground investigations effectively, all investigations must be
planned with very clear aims and objectives. The sequence of an offshore investigation
program, which shall be identified and planned at the planning stage, shall involve the
following:
a. Preliminary Study (desktop study). This is mainly to determine and compile existing
information in published documents, company archives (if any), online sources, and
from technical data providers. The preliminary study shall address the following
items, among others (SUT 2014):
1) Definition of area to be investigated
2) Geodetic datum and projection to be used
3) Vertical (tidal) datum to be used
4) Project requirements
5) License and consenting requirements pertinent to the area to be investigated
6) Conceptual foundation selection studies
7) Existing geophysical and/or geotechnical data

Rev. 0 4.4 - 90
8) Existing site investigation data and reports for nearby sites

9) Environmental issues (marine mammals, seabed ecology, etc.)
10) Public domain data, i.e., winds, waves, tides, weather, climate, etc.
11) Any other local experience or knowledge
12) A hazard register including all hazards to public safety, the project and the
environment
A site reconnaissance is usually required as part of the desktop study.
2) Topographical and shallow geophysical survey. This involves the use of non-
intrusive devices to get a general understanding of the nature or characteristics of
the seabed. An experienced marine engineering geophysicist shall be involved in
preparing the geophysical survey scope and technical specifications.
3) Shallow-penetration geotechnical investigation. This involves in-situ testing and soil
sampling to relatively shallow depths (a few meters) below the seafloor, with
subsequent laboratory testing. This step is generally required for pipelines and small
structures.
4) Deep-penetration geotechnical investigation and laboratory testing. This involves a
significant amount of field work with in-situ testing and soil sampling to a depth of up
to 120 m or greater below the seafloor, with extensive laboratory testing. This is
usually done for sites of fixed and mobile offshore platforms.
5) Additional geophysical and/or geotechnical surveys and/or laboratory testing as
required.
5. Geophysical Investigation Techniques
Geophysical techniques commonly used for offshore investigation are given below. For a
detailed treatment, refer to the resources listed in Subsection 4.4.2.H.2. For a general
background on, and advantages and limitations of geophysical testing, refer to
Subsection 4.4.2.F.
In general, offshore geophysical techniques shall allow the investigation of geological

features such as shallow gas, infilled channels, rock head, very dense sands, geological
faults, etc.
a. High-resolution reflection systems. These systems use sound or short range laser
light to take measurements of the seabed and the sub-seabed:
1) Seabed measuring systems, i.e. echo sounders, multi-beam sounders
2) Imaging sensors, i.e., sidescan sonar, laser scan, acoustic scanning systems
3) Sub-bottom profilers, i.e., pingers, boomers, sparkers, and CHIRP system
b. Seismic refraction systems. A high-resolution seismic refraction is an efficient
technique for acquiring detailed information in the top few meters of the sub-seabed
(layering and quantitative characterization, i.e., compressive and shear wave
velocities of materials).
c. Electrical resistivity systems. These are semi-continuous techniques of measuring
the bulk resistivity of a volume of soil near the seabed.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 91
d. Remotely operated geophysical platforms

1) Remotely Operated Vehicles (ROV) with umbilical connection and constant
source of power
4) Autonomous Underwater Vehicles (AUV) with onboard power requiring no
umbilical connection
6. Geotechnical Investigation Techniques
The aim of geotechnical site investigation is to determine the soil layering at the proposed
structure locations and to measure engineering properties of the soils. Detailed
description of the various geotechnical drilling techniques are provided in ISSMGE (2005)
and Dean (2010). Common offshore drilling and coring systems include the following:
a. Drill mode borings from vessels

b. Rock corer (seabed unit)
c. PROD™ seabed drilling/coring
d. Basic gravity corer
e. Piston corer
f. Vibrocorer
g. Box corer
h. Seabed push-in sampler
i. Grab sampler (mechanical and hydraulic systems)
7. Vessels, Platforms and Deployment Systems for Investigation
The choice of deployment systems depends partly on the type of information needed,
partly on the environment, and on the availability of suitable equipment. Common
deployment systems include the following:
a. Ships and barges for geophysical and geotechnical surveys/investigations

b. Geotechnical drill ships
c. Geotechnical jack-up platforms
d. High-wheeled vehicles and other trucks
e. Remotely controlled systems
For a detailed description, refer to ISSMGE (2005), and Dean (2010).
8. Positioning
Offshore and nearshore geophysical or geotechnical investigations require accurate
positioning systems. Positioning of locations is controlled using data from Differential
Global Positioning System (DGPS), a system of satellites and onshore stations around
the globe. Where underwater positioning is required, acoustic positioning systems such
as Ultra Short Baseline (USBL), Long Baseline (LBL) or special variations of these may
be employed. For more detail on offshore positioning, refer to ISSMGE (2005).
9. Offshore Laboratory Testing

Laboratory techniques for offshore site investigations essentially do not differ from those
applied to investigations for onshore developments and generally follow the same

Rev. 0 4.4 - 92
standards (refer to Subsection 4.4.2.E). Some tests are carried out offshore during the
field work. However, test results can be affected by vibrations and by the rocking motions
of a ship in bad weather. For this reason, most of the laboratory tests are carried out
onshore.
10. Offshore In-situ Tests

Routine offshore in-situ testing includes the following:
a. Seabed Cone penetration test (includes piezocone, i.e., PCPT and seismic PCPT).
This is the most common offshore in-situ test with extensive experience available.
b. ROV penetration test units
c. Minicone test
d. Vane shear test
e. T-bar and ball penetration tests
f. Other in-situ tests
1) Standard Penetration Test – can provide a measure of static and cyclic
(liquefaction) soil strength assessment.
2) Pressuremeter Test – used for measuring soil stiffness and strength at a
selected depth.
For additional information on offshore in-situ tests, refer to ISSMGE (2005) and
Dean (2010).

Rev. 0 4.4 - 93
SUBSECTION 4.4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS AND STUDIES
4.4.3. ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS AND STUDIES
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidance for Project Submission Standards and
Requirements related to environmental investigations and studies. The Guidelines,
Codes and Standards apply to:
1) Environmental Regulations and Project Permitting;
2) Construction Phase Environmental Controls;
3) Pollution Prevention;
4) Petroleum and Chemical Storage; and
5) Site Cleanup and Remediation.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to all projects within the cities under jurisdiction of the RCJ.
3. Definitions
a. “Adjoining Property” Any real property or properties, the border of which is
contiguous or partially contiguous with that of the Applicant’s property, or that would
be contiguous or partially contiguous with that of the Applicant’s property but for a
street, road, or other public thoroughfare separating them.
b. “Area of Concern” Geographic areas that fail to meet the general or specific
objectives of environmental regulations where such failure has caused or is likely to
cause impairment of beneficial use of the area’s ability to support life.
c. “Controlled Recognized Environmental Conditions” A Recognized Environmental
Condition resulting from a past release of hazardous substances or petroleum
products that has been addressed to the satisfaction of the applicable regulatory
authority with hazardous substances or petroleum products allowed to remain in
place subject to the implementation of required controls.
d. “Drum” A container (typically, but not necessarily, holding 208 L of liquid) that may
be used to store hazardous substances, petroleum products, or other materials.
e. “Environmental Concern” An environmental matter for consideration, suggesting that
a recognized environmental condition may be applicable to a site.
f. “Environmental Site Assessment” The process by which a person or entity seeks to
determine if a particular parcel of property (including improvements) is subject to
recognized environmental conditions.
g. “Geotechnical” Of or pertaining to practical applications of geological science in civil
engineering, mining, etc.
h. “Geo-environmental” Of or pertaining to practical applications of geological science
in environmental engineering, mitigation, remediation, etc.
i. “Investigation Derived Waste” Waste that may include drilling muds, cuttings, and
purge water from test pit and well installation; purge water, soil, and other materials
from collection of samples; residues (e.g., ash, spent carbon, well development
purge water) from testing of treatment technologies and pump and treat systems;
contaminated personal protective equipment (PPE); and solutions (aqueous or

Rev. 0 4.4 - 94
otherwise) used to decontaminate non-disposable protective clothing and

equipment.
j. “Material Threat” A physically observable or obvious threat which is reasonably likely
to lead to a release that, in the opinion of an environmental professional, is
threatening and might result in impact to public health or the environment.
k. “Occupant” Those tenants, subtenants, or other persons or entities using the
property or a portion of the property in question.
l. “Pits, Lagoons, or Ponds” Man-made or natural depressions in a ground surface that
is likely to hold liquids or sludge containing hazardous substances or petroleum
products. The likelihood of such liquids or sludge being present is determined by
evidence of factors associated with the pit, lagoon, or pond, including, but not limited
to, discolored water, distressed vegetation, or the presence of an obvious
wastewater discharge.
m. “Recognized Environmental Condition” The presence or likely presence of any
hazardous substance or petroleum products in, on, or at a property: (1) due to a
release to the environment; (2) under conditions indicative of a release to the
environment; or (3) under conditions that pose a material threat of a future release
to the environment.
n. “Release” Any spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying, discharging,
injecting, escaping, leaching, dumping, or disposing into the environment (including
the abandonment or discarding of barrels, containers and other closed receptacles
containing any hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant).
o. “Site Reconnaissance” Includes, but is not limited to, a site visit, with the objective of
obtaining information indicating the likelihood of identifying recognized
environmental conditions in connection with the property.
p. “Site Visit” The visit to the property during which observations are made constituting
the site reconnaissance section of this Section.
q. “Sump” A pit, cistern, cesspool, or similar receptacle where liquids drain, collect, or
are stored.
r. “Wastewater” Water that (1) is or has been used in an industrial or manufacturing
process, (2) conveys or has conveyed sewage, or (3) is directly related to
manufacturing, processing, or raw materials storage areas at an industrial plant.
4. Abbreviations
a. AOC: Area of Concern
b. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials
c. EIA: Environmental Impact Assessment
d. ESA: Environmental Site Assessment
e. GDMS: General Directorate of Military Survey
f. PID: Photoionization Detector
g. RCJ: Royal Commission for Jubail
h. RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations – Most Current Version
i. REC: Recognized Environmental Condition

Rev. 0 4.4 - 95
j. RMP: Risk Management Plan

k. SCTA: Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities
l. STDB: Saudi Topographic Database
m. USACE: United States Army Corps of Engineers
n. USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
6. Codes
7. Standards
b. USACE Engineering and Design Manual, Dredging and Dredged Material Disposal,
EM 1110-2-5025
8. Related Sections
a. RCER Volume I – Regulation, Standards, and Guidelines
d. Section 4.2 Submission Requirements
e. Subsection 4.3.8 Life Cycle Costing and Design Service Life
f. Subsection 4.3.9 Risk Management and Emergency Planning
g. Subsection 4.5.6 Environmental Compliance During Construction
h. Subsection 5.1.6 Local Climate Conditions
i. Subsection 5.2.1.G.3 Culverts and Drainage Structures
j. Subsection 5.3.2.J Waste Collection Requirements
k. Subsection 5.3.2.K Screening of Waste, Utilities, and Service Areas
l. Subsection 5.6.1.E Erosion and Sediment Controls
m. Subsection 5.6.2.A.3.b Environmental Impact, Air
n. Subsection 5.6.2.B.3.f Noise Barriers
o. Subsection 5.7.2 Wastewater
p. Subsection 5.9.2 Air
q. Subsection 5.9.4 Solid Waste Management and Recycling
9. Approvals
B. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
1. Purpose and Summary

Rev. 0 4.4 - 96
a. The EIA is a mandated step in the environmental regulatory process for the
development of Type I and Type II facilities as detailed in the RCER Volume II, but
could potentially be mandated by the RCJ for other types of projects. The objective
of the study is to assess the environmental impacts of a project to the site whether
they are positive or negative.
b. As per the RCER, a third party consultant or team of consultants with no known
conflicts of interests must be hired to complete the assessment. This will mitigate
bias in the assessment and report and help uphold the highest national
environmental Standards.
c. The EIA forms a basis of information for environmental design for projects with
identified future environmental impacts. It is necessary to accurately report these
potential impacts to properly mitigate their effects during design, construction, and
operation to conform to the RCJ Standards. The EIA is ultimately reviewed by the
RCJ and is a large part of the decision to grant a permit to the facility. Ensuring
potential environmental impacts have been thoroughly reviewed, and that
alternatives or mitigation techniques are proposed at the end of the EIA, will help the
RCJ review and permitting process.
d. At a minimum, the EIA will contain the following as detailed in the RCER:
1) Executive summary
2) Introduction
3) Policy, Legal, and Administrative Framework
4) Description and Layout of Proposed Development
5) Air Quality and Meteorology
6) Terrestrial Environment
7) Biological Resources
8) Noise and Vibration
9) Waste Management
10) Water Quality Management
11) Marine Environment
12) Socio-Economic Aspects
13) Traffic and Transportation Infrastructure
14) Utilities Usage and Infrastructure
15) Archaeology and Cultural Heritage
16) Health and Safety Aspects
17) Sustainable Development Assessment
18) Analysis of Alternatives
19) Cumulative Impacts Assessment
20) Determine Significance of Effects
21) Mitigation Measures
22) Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan

Rev. 0 4.4 - 97
23) Risk Management Plan

(a) A Risk Management Plan (RMP) shall be developed and submitted to
the RCJ for any stationary facility that is using more than a threshold
quantity of a controlled substance in a process. An RMP shall be
developed to assist local fire, police, and emergency response personnel
in responding to a possible spill or release of the controlled substance(s)
at the facility.
(b) Refer to USEPA’s General Risk Management Program Guidance
(http://www2.epa.gov/rmp/guidance-facilities-risk-management-
programs-rmp) document for further information into what qualifies as a
regulated substance and a threshold quantity.
(c) RMP’s shall contain, at minimum, the following three sections:
(1) A hazard assessment detailing potential worst-case and alternative
accidental substance releases, potential effects of an accidental
release, and a history of accidental releases over the last five years;
(i) At a minimum, the RMP shall cover both a toxic release, and
flammable (explosive) release.
(2) A prevention program including safety actions such as precautions,
maintenance, monitoring, and staff training measures; and
(3) An emergency response program spelling out employee procedures
for contacting and communicating with response agencies,
emergency health care representatives, and the public should a
substance release occur.
e. The full explanation, description, and guidance for completion of the EIA to the RCJ
Standards are detailed in the RCER Volume II-A-Introduction, Appendix C.
C. Environmental Site Assessment for Recognized Concerns and Conditions
1. Environmental Site Assessment Report Standard
a. Purpose
An ESA is conducted to assess potential or existing environmental
contamination liabilities prior to site development or sale. It generally involves
identifying potential impacts to underlying land as well as improvements on
the property. Sampling is not typically performed during an ESA.
The ESA is an observational study intended to form the basis for future and
more comprehensive investigations such as geo-environmental
investigations, marine investigations, or tank removals.
b. Reference
1) Refer to ASTM E1527-13 Standard Practice for Environmental Site
Assessments: Phase I Environmental Site Assessment Process (2013) for
specifics and details for conducting an assessment.
c. Table of Contents
1) A table of contents shall be provided in the report containing at a minimum the
following categories.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 98
d. Summary
1) This section shall summarize the ESA that was conducted for the subject
property and shall contain at least the following:
2) A section discussing why the assessment was conducted, who was involved,
and under what regulatory requirements and/or guidance it was conducted;
3) A property description;
4) A summary of Recognized Environmental Conditions (RECs) and
recommended further studies or a statement that none were identified; and
5) Recommendations for additional studies, if warranted.
e. Introduction
1) Objective of the ESA, regulatory description, and definitions of important
ideas and terms.
2) Property Description
(a) Describe the subject property and surrounding properties. This shall
include a description of the facility and general descriptions of the
surrounding facilities as well as buildings and physical attributes of the
site.
(b) The description shall also make reference to site maps created and
pictures taken during the site reconnaissance.
3) Special Terms, Conditions, and Significant Assumptions
(a) Describe terms, conditions, or assumptions that may limit the ESA’s
findings.
4) Exceptions and Limiting Conditions
(a) Include stipulations, legal agreements, or legal clarifications.
5) Personnel Qualifications
(a) Affirm that the ESA was performed by or under supervision of qualified
personnel that meet the ASTM definition of an Environmental
Professional. Personnel who were involved in the ESA must list their
credentials in an appendix.
f. User-Provided Information
1) This information is provided by the property owner or manager when asked by
those performing the ESA. This information consists of at least a User
Questionnaire, Environmental Liens or Activity Use Information, Previous
Environmental Permits or Reports, and the Purpose of the ESA. This section
lists the user-provided information and key findings; the full information is
provided in an appendix.
g. Records Review
1) Physical Setting
(a) A summary of the setting of the site.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 99
2) Property Topography and Surface Water Flow

(a) Describe the topography of the Property here using a Saudi Topographic
Database (STDB) topographic map. At a minimum describe
approximate elevation (mean sea level), topography, surface drainage
pattern, distance and direction to nearest surface water body.
3) Regional and Site Geology
(a) Describe known geologic deposits from surface downward: soil and
unconsolidated materials, bedrock type and depth to bedrock. Detail on
underlying bedrock is not required unless it’s less than 7.5 m below
grade (identification of uppermost bedrock formation is sufficient unless
additional information is available, i.e. test boring data).
4) Regional and Site Hydrogeology
(a) Describe the water table topography and flow direction. Estimate depth
to the water table and contrast the regional groundwater flow trend with
the site flow. Describe manmade structures, utilities, or natural surface
features in the area that may influence groundwater flow.
5) Environmental Records
(a) Listing for Property
(1) State and summarize if property has previously been identified to
have RECs by the RCJ.
(b) Listings for Adjoining Sites with Potential to Impact Property
(1) State and summarize if adjoining properties are identified to have
RECs by the RCJ.
(2) This is intended to evaluate the potential impact that adjoining sites
may have had/will have on the property as well as RECs.
(c) Health Department or Fire Department Records
(1) This section includes a summary of responses to medical
emergencies, fires, or spills that may have occurred previously. It is
intended to track potential exposure or spill events that may have
occurred on the property.
(d) Building and/or Planning Department Records
(1) This section summarizes records of potential environmental concern
that involve the property such as, but not limited to, aboveground or
underground storage tanks or historical site usage.
6) Historic Records Review
(a) Land Title Records/Deeds
(1) A summary of previous owners and time periods of their ownership.
(b) Aerial Photographs
(1) Dates and summaries of observations from review of aerial
photographs of the site throughout the site’s history.
(c) Historical and Archeological Records

Rev. 0 4.4 - 100
(1) Describe and summarize investigations or records pertaining to

historical or archeological resources obtained from the Saudi
Commission for Tourism and Antiquities (SCTA) or the RCJ.
h. Site Reconnaissance
1) Site Reconnaissance Methodology
(a) Describe the method used to evaluate the property such as mode of
transportation, travel paths and locations, types of areas observed, etc.
Summarize weather conditions and physical site restrictions or lack of
access that may have resulted in inability to view all portions of the site.
2) General Description
(a) The general description shall include a short summary of key features,
and descriptions of the following:
(1) Site Operations;
(2) Structures, Roads, Other Improvements;
(3) Site Size (Hectares);
(4) Estimated % of Site Covered by Buildings and/or Pavement;
(5) Observed Current Site Use/Operations;
(6) Observed Evidence of Past Site Use(s);
(7) Sewage Disposal Method;
(8) Potable Water Source and
(9) Electric Utilities.
3) Hazardous Substances and Petroleum Products
(a) This section shall list and describe, at a minimum, the following
observations;
(1) Hazardous Substances and Petroleum Products as defined by the
RCJ;
(2) Drums larger than 20 l;
(3) Strong, Pungent, or Noxious Odors;
(4) Pools of Liquid with Potential Source (Water or chemical);
(5) Unidentified Substance Containers;
(6) PCB-Containing Equipment and
(7) Other Observed Evidence of Hazardous Substances or Petroleum
Products.
4) Interior Observations
(a) Interior observations shall list and describe, at a minimum, the following:
(1) Heating / Cooling Method;
(2) Surface Stains or Corrosion;
(3) Floor Drains and Sumps and

Rev. 0 4.4 - 101
(4) Other Interior Observations.

5) Exterior Observations
(a) Exterior Observations shall list and describe, at a minimum, the
following:
(1) On-Site Pits, Lagoons, Ponds;
(2) Stained Soil or Pavement;
(3) Stressed Vegetation;
(4) Waste Streams and Waste Collection Areas;
(5) Solid Waste Disposal Areas;
(6) Potential Areas of Fill Placement;
(7) Cooling/Wastewater Discharges;
(8) Stormwater Discharges;
(9) Wells;
(10) Septic Systems and
(11) Other Exterior Observations.
6) Underground Storage Tanks/Structures
(a) Describe, at a minimum, the following:
(1) Existing Underground Storage Tanks;
(2) Previous Underground Storage Tanks and
(3) Other Underground Structures.
7) Aboveground Storage Tanks
(a) Describe, at a minimum, the following:
(1) Existing Above Ground Storage Tanks and
(2) Former Above Ground Storage Tanks.
8) Adjoining Properties
(a) Current Uses of Adjoining Sites;
(b) Observed Evidence of Past Use of Adjoining Sites and
(c) Pits, Ponds, or Lagoons on Adjoining Sites.
9) Observed Physical Setting of Adjoining Sites
(a) Brief description of the visible topographic features, general slope and
gradients.
i. Interviews
1) Findings from Interviews with Occupants or Other Involved Parties
(a) Interviews shall be conducted with occupants of the property about the
type of work performed and materials used in an effort to ascertain the
potential for environmental concerns. A representative sample of the
occupants must be interviewed to cover different types of work

Rev. 0 4.4 - 102
performed on the property. If there is more than one tenant at the

property, occupants at each tenant shall be interviewed to achieve a
representative sample.
(b) Interviewees shall be at the level of owner, key tenant, operator, or
regulator and have knowledge of the facility.
(c) List names and titles of people interviewed and describe the major
findings of the interviews.
2) Findings from Interviews with Property Neighbors
(a) If deemed necessary, adjoining property occupants must be interviewed
to ascertain the potential for environmental concerns either on the site or
the adjoining property.
(b) Interviewees shall be at the level of owner, key tenant, operator, or
regulator and have knowledge of the facility.
(c) List names and titles of people interviewed and describe the major
findings of the interviews.
j. Evaluation
1) Findings and Opinions
(a) This shall list and summarize major findings from the assessments
conducted at the property as well as the professional’s opinion of those
findings.
2) Data Gaps
(a) Identify data gaps present within the assessment. This includes
information that might be important for a complete assessment but was
unobtainable at the time despite of good faith efforts made to obtain the
information.
(b) Identify and summarize the data gaps for each section listed above.
3) Conclusions
(a) Include conclusions regarding RECs, historic RECs, controlled RECs,
currently regulated RECs, or the lack of identified RECs.
k. Non-Scope Considerations
1) Identify environmental work and findings not related to the above sections that
were performed at the property that were agreed upon between the client and
performing consultant.
l. References
1) List any material references used for the assessment.
m. List of Figures
1) Property Location Map
2) Property Vicinity Map
n. List of Appendices
1) Photographs of the Property and Vicinity

Rev. 0 4.4 - 103
2) Historical Records
3) Archeological/Cultural Resource Records
4) Environmental Agency Database Search Report
5) Agency Records
6) User-Provided Records
7) Interview Forms
8) Investigating Personnel Qualifications
D. Geo-environmental Investigations (Surface and Subsurface Sampling Protocols)
1. Work Plan
a. Purpose
1) The purpose of developing a work plan prior to performing work is to ensure
that the investigation proposed will meet the RCJ requirements and directives.
Work plans for investigations shall be developed and submitted to the RCJ for
comment and approval. Work may not start until the work plan has been
approved in writing.
b. Reference
1) Refer to ASTM E1903-11 Standard Practice for Environmental Site
Assessments: Phase II Environmental Site Assessment Process (2011) for
specifics and details for developing a work plan.
c. A work plan for geo-environmental investigations shall include, but is not limited to,
the following sections:
d. Introduction
1) Describe the purpose of the investigation, including regulatory requirements
and site-specific conditions (i.e. as described in ESA).
2) Summarize the site background. Include location, physical setting, current site
and surrounding land use, water supply in surrounding area, past uses for the
site and adjoining properties, and previous investigations (i.e. ESA) and
activities that influence how the investigation will be performed.
e. Planned Investigation Activities
1) Overview and Discussion of Areas of Concern
(a) Develop an overview of the site and use existing investigations and
studies to determine areas of concern. Discuss the potential impacts to
these areas, the speculated origin of the impacts, and the extent of the
impacts. Provide site drawings and maps.
2) Mobilization
(a) Identify parties that will participate in completing the investigation. These
would be the parties performing the work as well as assistance of utility
companies, facility personnel, etc.
3) General Sampling Considerations
(a) Identify the potential contaminants regulated in the RCER that will be
tested for, the method of those tests, the qualified laboratory that will

Rev. 0 4.4 - 104
perform the analysis, and quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC)

measures to be taken.
4) Testing and Sampling
(a) Describe the types of testing and sampling proposed for the
investigation. This could span multiple sections as each must contain a
detailed explanation supporting why the method(s) were chosen, the
goals, how the work will proceed, and other information that describes
the method of investigation.
(b) This section may include investigations such as:
(1) Geophysical Survey, i.e. electromagnetic or ground-penetrating
radar,
(2) Soil Gas Survey
(3) Surface and Subsurface Soil Sampling
(4) Soil Borings and Sampling
(5) Test Pits
(6) Well Installation and Monitoring
(7) Hydraulic Conductivity Testing
(8) Groundwater Sampling
(9) Marine Sediment Data Collection
(10) Marine Sampling Equipment and Protocols
(11) Marine Sediment Characterization
(12) Evaluation of Dredged Material Pollution Potential
5) Decontamination
(a) Describe the decontamination procedures that will be implemented to
prevent cross-contamination of samples and protect personnel from
exposure. If testing and sampling materials are chosen that do not
require decontamination (i.e. use of disposable equipment), summarize
these materials and methods.
6) Investigation-Derived Waste
(a) Describe the plan to contain and disposed of waste derived from the
investigation.
(b) Refer to USEPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response’s
Guide to Management of Investigation-Derived Wastes (1992,
publication 9345.3-03FS) for methods and requirements.
7) Sampling Location Survey
(a) Describe the plan to survey the investigation and sample locations.
8) Field Quality Assurance / Quality Control Samples
(a) Describe how many and what type of quality control samples (field
duplicates, trip blanks, etc.) will be taken during the investigation.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 105
f. Laboratory Analytical Program

1) Describe the laboratory’s qualification(s) and applicable certification(s).
2) Describe the analytical program that will be adhered to during the
investigation and what deliverables will be generated from the analysis.
g. Documentation and Reporting
1) Describe the methods of documentation that will be used during the
investigation. These methods include documentation such as:
(a) Field Notebooks
(b) Project Photographs
(c) Calibration Records
(d) Geologic Logs
(e) Safety Forms
(f) Chain-of-Custody Forms
(g) Laboratory Reports
(h) Other Field Documentation deemed necessary
2) Describe the contents of the report that will be generated to summarize the
investigation.
h. Project Organization
1) Identify individuals that will be involved in the project and what roles they will
have.
2) Identify subcontractors that will be involved in the investigation and their
role(s) and qualification(s).
i. Project Schedule
1) Include a project schedule to be followed once the work plan has been
approved.
2. Examples of Investigations
a. Soil borings
1) Use of rotary or “direct-push” drilling methods, such as core samplers, augers,
or other sampling tools, is appropriate for sampling soil. In these methods, soil
cores are brought to the surface to be characterized and potentially submitted
for lab analysis.
2) Observations of soil conditions as well as methods and tools used must be
documented for submission, including;
(a) Visual, odors, PID readings, soil types and stratigraphy, non-native
material, etc.
(b) Rig type, tools, decontamination procedures, sampling methods,
locations, personnel performing the shallow subsurface excavation, etc.
3) Follow soil boring procedures and protocols outlined in Subsection 4.4.3.D.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 106
b. Surface and Subsurface Soil Sampling

1) Protocols
(a) Refer to the USEPA Office of Research and Development’s Preparation
of Soil Sampling Protocols: Sampling Techniques and Strategies (1992,
EPA/600/R-92/128) for sampling theory, statistical evaluation, designs,
and collection of samples.
(b) Refer to USEPA Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory’s Soil
Sampling Quality Assurance User’s Guide Second Edition (1989, EPA
600/8-89/046) for detailed explanation of record keeping protocols and
procedures.
(c) Refer to USACE’s Dredging and Dredged Material Disposal (1983, EM
1110-2-5025) for marine sampling protocols, equipment, characterization
and evaluation.
2) Surface Soil Sampling
(a) Surface sampling is performed to characterize contaminants in soil that
has the greatest potential for human contact. This type of sample shall
contain soil no deeper than 150 mm below the surface.
(b) Observations of soil conditions as well as methods and tools used shall
be documented, including:
(1) Visual, odors, PID readings, soil types, non-native material, etc.
(2) Tools, decontamination procedures, sampling methods, locations,
personnel performing the shallow subsurface excavation, etc.
(c) Surface soil sampling results and observations must be summarized on
a standard log form.
(d) Surface soil sampling results shall be submitted to the RCJ with a
standard reporting form.
3) Subsurface Soils
(a) Use of an auger or core sampler shall be used for soil samples at depths
greater than 300 mm. Hand augers disturb the soil and create a “mixed”
sample that may not be suitable for correctly evaluating site conditions.
(b) Observations of soil conditions as well as methods and tools used shall
be documented, including:
(1) Visual, odors, PID readings, soil types, non-native material, etc.;
(2) Indications of groundwater presence; and
(3) Tools, decontamination procedures, sampling methods, locations,
personnel performing the shallow subsurface excavation, etc.
(c) Subsurface soil sampling results and observations shall be summarized
on a standard log form.
(d) Soil sampling results must be submitted to the RCJ with a standard
reporting form.
4) Test Pits

Rev. 0 4.4 - 107
(a) Test pits or trenches can be performed for detailed characterization of

site stratigraphy, for direct observation of soil conditions, and for
understanding of behavior of soil materials upon excavation. Test pits or
trenches are usually performed with the use of an excavator, are roughly
one meter wide, and dug to below the desired sampling depth.
(b) Record visual observations, odors, instrument readings, soil types
(stratigraphy and thickness), non-native material, decontamination
procedures, sampling methods, and location data for test pits. Record
depths to stratigraphic contacts.
(c) Record personnel performing the test pit excavation and sampling.
c. Soil Gas Survey
1) Objective
(a) ‘Soil gas’ refers to the atmosphere present in soil pore spaces. Volatile
organic compounds introduced into the subsurface can be present in the
gas phase and have the potential for intrusion into occupied structures.
A soil gas survey may be used to screen a site for potential
contamination.
(b) The survey uses a number of sample points in the subsurface to collect
soil gas for analysis. These points can be positioned at a specific depth
depending on the target.
2) Procedures and Methods
(a) Refer to USEPA’s Soil Gas Measurement (March 2003) for procedures
and methods to reference.
3) Requirements
(a) When performing a soil gas survey, a map with the GPS or surveyed
location of each soil gas sample must be generated.
(b) Observations and depths of the soil shall be recorded in the field for
submission.
d. Groundwater Monitoring
1) Objectives
(a) Groundwater monitoring is important for understanding groundwater
quality and movement and for protection of groundwater resources.
Contamination can exist in the groundwater most frequently near
commercial and industrial sites. Contaminated groundwater poses a
threat to plants, animals, and people who use the groundwater.
Standardizing sampling and analytical protocols will facilitate
development of a thorough and effective system for evaluating
contaminated sites. Groundwater monitoring is used to identify
groundwater impacts from surface or subsurface contaminant releases.
The data can be used to develop mitigation of current or potential
negative impacts to groundwater.
(b) Refer to RCER Volume II Appendix E, Groundwater Monitoring
Guidelines for more information.
2) Requirements

Rev. 0 4.4 - 108
(a) The RCJ has established a Well Construction and Sampling record sheet
in the RCER (Annexure 3 of RCER Volume II Appendix E, Groundwater
Monitoring Guidelines). The record sheet is required for sampling
programs and will be submitted to the RCJ.
(b) Refer to RCER Vol. II Introduction, Appendix E for specific groundwater
monitoring methods and procedures.
(c) Using the sampling record established in RCER Volume II–A-
Introduction Appendix E, field parameters including temperature, pH, and
conductivity must be recorded while purging a well for sampling. These
parameters shall be recorded prior to starting purging and again after
one, two, and three well volumes have been purged, sampling the well
after the third well volume is purged. If the RCJ requests more frequent
field parameter records, a table that prompts the sampler for the same
information as the imbedded table in the established record sheet will be
attached for submission and contain basic site and well identifying
information.
(d) The sampling record sheet also serves as a chain-of-custody for sample
transportation to laboratories. Standard chain of custody procedures
shall be followed during sample handling and transportation.
3) Well Monitoring Network
(a) A site plan showing the network of monitoring wells shall be generated
for RCJ submission and field use. This plan must show existing
structures and well locations with well IDs at a minimum. The plan shall
also include location data such as GPS coordinates or tie-off
measurements to facilitate quicker location in the field.
e. Groundwater Sampling and Analytical Testing
1) Objectives
(a) Each lab typically has its own format for reporting analytical results. To
expedite data evaluation, analytical reports submitted to the RCJ must
be in a standard format.
2) Requirements
(a) Laboratory data must be transferred to the RCJ Groundwater Standard
Reporting Form for submission with the consultant’s analytical report. A
copy of the laboratory analysis report shall be attached to the standard
form for RCJ verification.
(b) The standard form is Annexure 4, located in RCER Vol. II Appendix E.
3) Groundwater Quality – Baseline Conditions
(a) Understanding existing groundwater conditions is important for
developing a remediation strategy. The same sampling protocols and
procedures are to be used for determining baseline conditions and for
continued periodic monitoring events. Baseline conditions are necessary
for comparison to future sampling events. Refer to RCER Volume II
Appendix E, Groundwater Sampling Guidelines for more information.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 109
f. Marine Surveys
1) Hydrographic
(a) Surveys shall meet the requirements of the Saudi Arabia General
Directorate of Military Survey, Ministry of Defense & Aviation and
Inspectorate General. All surveys (including hydrographic surveys) shall
be completed in the Saudi Topographic Database (STDB). The surveys
shall also meet current General Directorate of Military Survey (GDMS)
Standards and Specifications. Current horizontal and vertical datum,
scale, metadata designations, resolution, table of entities, and other
parameters shall be confirmed with the RCJ and the GDMS. The
existing survey and a map with proposed improvements shall be
provided to the RCJ. Hydrographic surveys shall also be provided to the
RCJ.
(b) Refer to Subsection 4.4.1, Surveying and Subsection 4.4.1.D for more
information on survey datums and product format prior to submittal of
surveys to the RCJ.
2) Marine Boreholes
(a) The locations and depths of Surface Water Sampling shall be surveyed
and added to the survey mapping created for the project. The work shall
be completed in a manner that does not damage the environment.
3. Investigation Report
a. After the geo-environmental investigation has been completed, a report shall be
generated to summarize the findings of the investigation.
b. The report will at a minimum, contain the information outlined in the Documentation
and Reporting section of the work plan.
c. The report shall include, but is not limited to, the following sections:
d. Introduction
1) Similar to the work plan, it will include the purpose of the investigation and
background information for the site.
e. Investigation Program
1) Summarize the scope of the investigation and methodologies used. Describe
the work performed including variations from the work as proposed in the
work plan.
f. Investigation Results
1) Describe and summarize the data collected, including, but not limited to, the
subsurface conditions, work logs, and specific features or areas of concern.
2) This data shall be separated into two sections; one for the physical
characteristics of the site and the other for analytical data.
g. Quality Control Evaluation
1) Describe data usability problems, if any, which may impact the conclusions of
the investigation.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 110
h. Exposure Assessment
1) Based on the data collected, perform an exposure assessment for humans
and ecological resources in and around the site. This shall include an
identification of potential exposure pathways and mitigation techniques for
these potential exposures.
2) The summary shall include current potential exposures as well as exposures
that could result during the remediation and development of the site.
i. Summary and Conclusions
1) Briefly summarize the investigation that took place and the data generated for
each area of concern. Develop conclusions based on these data and
observations for each area of concern.
j. References
1) Include references used for the report.
k. Figures, Tables, Appendices
1) Include figures, tables, and appendices referenced in the body of the report.
2) Figures shall include sheets such as site maps, facility maps, sample location
maps, or necessary details.
3) Tables are generally used to show analytical data and comparisons to
national environmental Standards.
4) Appendices include log sheets, previous reports, chains of custody, and other
items that must be submitted with the report for reference.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 111
SUBSECTION 4.4.4 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
4.4.4. DECONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidance for Project Submission Standards and
Requirements related to Demolition and Removal. The Guidelines, Codes, and
Standards apply to:
1) Environmental Regulations and Project Permitting
2) Demolition Phase Environmental Controls
3) Site Environmental Cleanup and Remediation
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to all projects within the cities under jurisdiction of the RCJ.
3. Definitions
a. “Asbestos Containing Material” Any material that contains or partly contains any
amount of asbestos fibers.
b. “Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (1986)” US legislation requiring the
cataloging of asbestos containing building materials in schools.
c. “Underground Storage Tank” Any tank, including underground piping connected to
the tank, that is or has been used to contain hazardous substances or petroleum
products and the volume of which is 10% or more beneath the surface of the
ground.
d. “Universal Wastes” Hazardous waste streams, such as batteries, pesticides,
mercury-containing equipment, and lamp bulbs, which a generator can choose to
manage in an alternative manner in place of the more complex hazardous waste
requirements.
4. Abbreviations
a. PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyls
b. USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
c. UST: Underground Storage Tank
6. Codes
7. Standards
8. Related Sections
a. RCER Volume I - Regulation, Standards, and Guidelines

Rev. 0 4.4 - 112
d. Subsection 3.5.8 Site Cleanup and Remediation

e. Section 4.2 Submission Requirements
f. Subsection 5.1.6 Local Climate Conditions
g. Subsection 5.3.2.J Waste Collection Requirements
h. Subsection 5.3.2.K Screening of Waste, Utilities, and Service Areas
i. Subsection 5.6.1.E Erosion and Sediment Controls
j. Subsection 5.9.2 Air
k. Subsection 5.9.4 Solid Waste Management and Recycling
9. Approvals
B. Pre-Demolition Surveys
1. Asbestos Containing Material
a. A survey shall be completed using the inspection Guidelines established by the
USEPA’s Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances in USEPA 560/5-85-024:
Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings, and US 40
CFR 763 - Asbestos.
2. Lead Based Paint
a. Paint shall be tested for lead using the inspection Guidelines established in US 29
CFR 1926.62 – Lead and/or US 29 CFR 1910.1025 – OSHA’s Lead Standards.
These guidelines shall also be used for the removal of any paint found to be lead
based.
3. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Survey and Sampling
a. Survey and sampling for PCB’s shall be completed utilizing appropriate USEPA
Standard Methods and ASTM methods. Samples shall be prepared according to
USEPA Method 3550B (1996). Samples shall be analyzed according to USEPA SW
846-8082A (2007).
4. Universal Wastes and Other Materials
a. Universal Wastes (such as mercury-containing equipment) shall be sampled and
removed according to USEPA Guidelines and US 40 CFR 273 – Standards for
Universal Waste Management.
C. Waste Handling and Disposal
1. Basics
a. Waste Handling and Disposal shall be completed according to RCER Volume I
Section 4, Hazardous Material Management and Section 5, Waste Management.
D. Underground Storage Tank Removal
1. Underground Storage Tank (UST) Closure
a. Removal of Materials
1) Accumulated materials, including the UST, secondary containment, and
fencing, shall be removed from the tank location at the completion of the
project or at the time of the UST decommissioning. Upon removal from the

Rev. 0 4.4 - 113
site the materials shall be disposed of in a properly licensed landfill or

properly reused on another site.
b. Removal of Impacted Soil
1) Soil that is impacted by a release (i.e. spills, leaks, etc.) from the UST shall be
removed and disposed of according to RCER regulations.
c. Applicable Codes and Standards
1) Refer to US 40 CFR Part 280 Subpart G - Out-of-Service UST Systems and
Closure; Subsection 3.5.7, Petroleum and Chemical Bulk Storage; and RCER
Volume I Section 4.5, Underground Storage Tank Regulations for detailed
information on UST removal and closure protocol.
2. Tank Location Restoration
1) Upon the removal of the UST, the subsurface and surface soils tested and
determined to be unimpacted (clean) shall be used to restore the UST site to
its original condition unless written permission by the RCJ is given to do
otherwise. If the subsurface and/or surface soils are found to be impacted,
clean soil shall be brought to the UST site and used for restoration of the site.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 114
SUBSECTION 4.4.5 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT
4.4.5. EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT
A. Purpose
1. The purpose of an existing environmental conditions report is to collect and summarize
data and findings from previous site investigations. This data will serve as the basis for
design of environmental aspects of the project.
2. The report includes a summary of tangible data to be used for project design. The report
shall contain summaries of previous reports such as ESAs, geo-environmental
investigations, marine investigations, or other site activities in which data was recorded
and/or a report was generated.
B. Report Content
1. Executive Summary
a. Briefly summarize the key information of the report.
2. Introduction/Site Background
a. Describe the purpose of the investigation; provide a general site description; and list
the parties involved in the investigation and reporting.
3. Methodology
a. Describe the methodology and sources used for obtaining existing reports and
information for the site.
b. Describe the methodology used in performing any site-specific field investigations
that were conducted.
4. Previous Investigations
a. List and describe previous environmental investigations at the site, including a
summary of the activities and their findings and conclusions.
b. Include historic and archeological studies that have been conducted at the site.
5. Investigation(s) Conducted for Project
a. Describe the environmental investigations conducted specifically for the proposed
project, making sure to summarize the activities conducted for these investigations.
6. Summary of Conditions and Conclusions
a. This section shall include the findings and conclusions from all site investigations
completed by the Applicant.
b. An example list of conditions may include, but are not limited to the following:
1) Surface Conditions
2) Subsurface Conditions
3) Existing Infrastructure and Utilities
4) Air Quality
5) Water Quality
(a) Groundwater
(b) Surface Water

Rev. 0 4.4 - 115
SUBSECTION 4.4.5 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT
(c) Marine
6) Historic and Archeological Resources
7) Need for additional/supplemental investigations
7. Recommendations
a. Summarize how findings impact the proposed development.
b. Recommend alternatives, mitigation, avoidance, remediation, or other measures for
each environmental concern identified in the existing conditions report. These are
potential paths the owner/developer/client may take to conform to RCJ
environmental regulations.
8. Tables, Figures, Appendices
a. Include Tables, Figures, and Appendices referenced in the report. Copies of
previous reports shall be included in the appendices.

Rev. 0 4.4 - 116
SECTION 4.5 CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.5.0. CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Using this Subsection .................................................................................................... 1
4.5.1. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 2
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
4.5.2. DESIGN CHANGE NOTICES ....................................................................................... 3
A. Definition ........................................................................................................................ 3
4.5.3. LABOR ACCOMMODATIONS ...................................................................................... 4
A. A/E Responsibility.......................................................................................................... 4
4.5.4. CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................... 5
A. Submittals ...................................................................................................................... 5
B. Reviews and Approvals ................................................................................................. 5
C. Responses ..................................................................................................................... 5
4.5.5. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION................................................................................... 6
4.5.6. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................. 7
B. Stormwater Control ........................................................................................................ 7
C. Noise Control ................................................................................................................. 7
4.5.7. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................................. 15
A. A/E Responsibility......................................................................................................... 15
4.5.8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .......................................................... 16

Rev. 0 4.5 - i
A. Specifications................................................................................................................ 16
4.5.9. STARTUP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING ......................................................... 17
A. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 17
B. Facility Operation .......................................................................................................... 17
C. Facility Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 17
4.5.10. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (INITIAL ACCEPTANCE)........................................... 18
4.5.11. DOCUMENTATION AND ARCHIVING ........................................................................ 19

Rev. 0 4.5 - ii
4.5.0. CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining construction phase requirements to be used for the Royal Commission
in Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or
Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Drawing requirements in Subsection 4.2, Design
Phase requirements in Subsection 4.3, and Field Investigations and Existing
Conditions in Subsection 4.4.
2. Applicability
a. The Standards and Guidelines outlined in Chapter 4 are to be used by A/E and/or
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Chapter 4 abbreviations
Not Applicable
6. Codes
Not Applicable
7. Standards
a. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as
appropriate.)
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Sections related to Chapter 4
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and take action on all project
submissions, reference Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Using this Subsection
The RCJ requires that the A/E that designs a Project be involved in a review and interpretation
capacity during construction.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 1
4.5.1. GENERAL
A. Introduction
1. Per JMP 020106 Architect/Engineer (A/E) Services Provided During Construction, the
A/E’s responsibilities during construction will be negotiated as part of the A/E’s Technical
Contract on a project by project basis. The extent of required services will vary depending
upon the complexity of the construction.
2. The A/E will not have direct interaction with the Contractor but will interface with the RCJ
and provide interpretation, response to queries, and design modifications as directed by
the RCJ as defined in this Section.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 2
SUBSECTION 4.5.2 DESIGN CHANGE NOTICES
4.5.2. DESIGN CHANGE NOTICES
A. Definition
1. A Design Change Notice (DCN) is a means to control revisions of Technical Contract
documents, including drawings and specifications.
2. DCNs are governed by JMP 020136.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 3
SUBSECTION 4.5.3 LABOR ACCOMMODATIONS
4.5.3. LABOR ACCOMMODATIONS
A. A/E Responsibility
1. The A/E shall have no responsibility for labor accommodations. The A/E shall refer to his
Technical Contract for any project specific requirements.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 4
SUBSECTION 4.5.4 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
4.5.4. CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
A. Submittals
1. To be included in GPCS Section 013300 Submittal Procedures
2. When a Technical Submittal (TS) is made by the Contractor to the RCJ, the RCJ Field
Engineer (FE) will decide if the review may be accomplished by the RCJ team or if the TS
needs to be reviewed by the A/E.
B. Reviews and Approvals
1. The RCJ will provide the A/E with a form to respond to any TS deemed necessary for the
A/E to review.
2. If a response time for the A/E to review a TS is not included in the A/E’s Technical
Contract, the review time will be limited to ten (10) business days. If the A/E requires
more time to review, the A/E shall submit a request in writing to the RCJ for an extension
and indicate a future date when the review is expected to be completed.
3. The A/E may additionally be asked to respond to Contractor Technical Queries (TQ) and
Field Change Design (FCD) requests. Reviews will be limited to ten (10) business days
unless otherwise identified in the A/E’s Technical Contract and shall be submitted in
writing via the RCJ’s provided form.
C. Responses
1. Technical Contract documents (i.e., drawings, specifications) shall not be altered by
response to TQ or FCD. Formal Issuance of a DCN is the only means to alter technical
Contract documents.
2. Responses to TQ and FCD shall be only address the subject raised by the Contractor
and shall not comment on cost or schedule.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 5
SUBSECTION 4.5.5 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
4.5.5. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
1. To be included in GPCS Section 014500 Quality Control
2. In general, the A/E is not responsible for conducting construction inspections. However,
shall the design or detail complexity warrant a site review by the A/E, the RCJ will notify
the A/E in writing.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 6
SUBSECTION 4.5.6 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
4.5.6. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
1. Refer toTo be included in GPCS Section 013543 Environmental Protection Procedures
2. The A/E is not directly responsible for the Contractor’s environmental compliance during
construction, however, the A/E or EPC Contractor prepares the environmental guidelines
and requirements for the Project as directed in Task Release, this Manual and the A/E’s
Technical Contract..
3. The Contractor awarded the Project is responsible for submitting his compliance plan to
the RCJ. The RCJ may have the A/E review the Contractor’s plan to confirm the
compliance path with the previously established guidelines
B. Stormwater Control
1. Stormwater Runoff
a. Stormwater has the potential to pick up contaminants and sediment from an open
construction site and transport them offsite, causing environmental impacts. Best
efforts shall be made to retain stormwater runoff onsite and minimize offsite
discharges. Stormwater that flows offsite constitutes a water discharge. Such
discharge must adhere to RCER Volume I Subsections 3.2, Water Quality Discharge
Standards, 3.3, General Water Quality Regulations, and 3.7, Storm Water Runoff
Regulations.
b. Guidance for the design for stormwater and sediment control and stormwater
drainage can be found in Subsection 5.6.1.L, Erosion and Sedimentation Controls,
and Subsection 5.6.3, Site Stormwater Drainage.
C. Noise Control
1. Construction Noise Control
a. Noise control measures and methods shall be included in construction planning.
Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.D, Noise Barriers for the objectives, acoustical
considerations, and barrier types that are to be utilized as noise control measures
and methods, and Subsection 5.9.5.F, Equipment Enclosures for further detail on
noise control measures for equipment use on site.
b. Construction shall be conducted during normal working hours where possible.
1) Any equipment that is intended to be run on-site shall have engine mufflers
installed to lower noise to values referenced below. If mufflers cannot
sufficiently lower noise generation levels, noise barriers shall be erected in
addition to the engine muffler to lower noise to mandated levels.
2) Special attention must be paid to equipment placement on the site in order to
keep noise levels at a minimum along the site perimeter.
c. Vibration from equipment shall also be mitigated.
2. Compliance
a. Noise generated on site must remain below values specified in the Presidency of
Meteorology and Environment (PME)’s Environmental Standard 3 Article VI, Noise
from Construction Activities and/or the World Health Organization’s Guidelines for
Community Noise Document, Table 4.1: Guideline values for community noise in

Rev. 0 4.5 - 7
specific environments, whichever is lower at a given time of day. When the values
specified in the above documentation are likely to be, or are continually, breached, a
construction noise permit shall be required.
b. Noise created on site must adhere to regulations and monitoring requirements in the
US 23 CFR 772.19 - Construction Noise. Refer to the US Federal Highway
Administration’s Construction Noise Handbook (last updated 05/07/2011), Chapter 5
for specifics in measurement of construction noise, and Chapter 7 for methods of
mitigating construction noise.
c. If necessary, noise barriers shall be erected to maintain compliance with regulations.
Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.D, Noise Barriers for design guidelines for noise barriers.
d. Designs of noise barriers for roadways in Subsection 5.6.2.B.3.F may be adapted to
serve this purpose.
D. Asbestos
1. Control Guidelines
a. When working with suspected and/or confirmed Asbestos Containing Materials
(ACMs), the work area shall be properly cordoned off and controlled by encasing the
work area with plastic sheeting and maintaining negative air pressure in the work
space. Workers shall wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and wet
ACMs appropriately before contact or handling.
b. Work practices pertaining to ACMs shall adhere to US 29 CFR 1910.1001 Asbestos.
c. Use of ACMs shall adhere to RCER Volume I Subsection 2.3.5, Air Environment,
and applicable tables.
E. Pollution Control
1. Solid Waste
a. Onsite waste shall be disposed of in a proper receptacle.
b. Waste receptacles for municipal solid waste shall be present onsite for laborer waste
generated from personal activities i.e. food, drink, litter, non-construction and
demolition. These shall be covered with a tarp daily and emptied when they are at
capacity.
c. Construction and Demolition Waste containers staged onsite shall not exceed the
height dimension of the waste container. These containers shall be emptied or
replaced when they are at capacity.
d. Waste management shall adhere to all applicable regulations in RCER Volume I
Section 5, Waste Management.
2. Wastewater Discharges
a. General Wastewater Composition
1) When referring to wastewater on the site of Construction work, liquid
produced from sanitary and domestic functions and that produced from
construction functions such as washing down equipment is subject to
compliance requirements.
b. Compliance

Rev. 0 4.5 - 8
1) Wastewater shall be collected in proper receptacles, taking care to keep

wastewaters of different processes segregated to the maximum extent
possible.
2) Wastewater generated shall be subject to wastewater treatment regulations
as detailed in RCER Volume I Sections 3.2, Water Quality Discharge
Regulations and 3.3, General Water Quality Regulations.
3) The contents of Construction and Demolition Wastewater staged onsite shall
not exceed the height and/or volume dimension of the wastewater vessel to
prevent spillage and allow for proper pouring or pumping out of the
wastewater per the manufacturers recommendations.
4) Wastewater shall not be mixed with stormwater runoff for any reason.
5) Wastewater discharges to the land or any body of water are prohibited.
6) Wastewater management shall adhere to all applicable regulations in RCER
Volume I Section 4, Hazardous Materials Management and Section 5, Waste
Management.
3. Spill Prevention
a. Machinery
1) Machinery shall be maintained so that no fluid (fuel, lubrication oil, hydraulic
oil, grease, coolants, and other fluids) leakage occurs during construction.
2) In the case of unrepairable leakage, a non-flammable, metal drip pan or tear
resistant, impermeable plastic sheeting (minimum 6 mil thick) shall be placed
beneath the machinery to contain leaks during operation. Sheeting placed in
this manner shall be bermed continuously on all sides to prevent escape of
contained fluid from the plastic.
3) Routine inspections of the containment system shall be performed and
documented for RCJ review, shall the RCJ request proof of inspection.
4) After transfer of contained fluids to a proper container, used plastic sheeting is
considered Non-hazardous Industrial Waste and shall be handled and
disposed of as such in accordance with RCER Volume I Section 5, Waste
Management.
b. On Site Storage
1) Refer to Subsection 3.5.7, Petroleum and Chemical Bulk Storage.
4. Spill Control
a. Upon discovery of a release, the owner of or party responsible for the released
material shall:
1) If possible and safe, shut off the source of the leak i.e. valves, switches, etc.
2) Create a perimeter around the released material to prevent further migration.
The perimeter could be made of such materials as:
(a) Bermed, plastic-covered soil or sand,
(b) Plastic sheeting,
(c) Absorbent pads or booms, or bulk absorbent material, and/or

Rev. 0 4.5 - 9
(d) Other materials or equipment that is effective at preventing flow or

infiltration of leaked material.
3) Notify the RCJ immediately upon discovery of a release.
5. Cleanup
a. Spills and Impacted Soil
1) Use absorbents to capture as much of the released material as feasible.
Cleanup material containing absorbed fluids shall be considered Non-
hazardous Industrial Waste and shall be handled, and disposed of as such in
accordance with RCER Volume I Section 5, Waste Management.
2) Remove impacted soil and stockpile on and under tear-resistant,
impermeable plastic sheeting (minimum 6 mil thick) that is bermed and
weighted down at the perimeter and protected from wind damage.
3) Soil and impacted plastic shall be characterized and shall be handled, and
disposed of as such in accordance with RCER Volume I Section 4,
Hazardous Materials Management and Section 5, Waste Management.
b. Waste
1) Trash, litter, and construction and demolition waste shall be cleaned up and
disposed of in proper solid waste containers at the end of every work day.
c. Migration of Soil Offsite
1) Earth material that has been transferred beyond site boundaries (such as
onto public roads adjacent to site entrance) shall be cleaned up and returned
to the site as needed. Measures shall be taken to prevent reoccurrence of
material being conveyed outside the site boundaries. This shall include dust
suppression with potable water, or vehicle wheel-washing equipment.
F. Environmental Emergency Response Plan (EERP)
1. EERP
a. An EERP shall be developed and included with the PAP.
b. The EERP shall include provisions covering construction and startup phases of the
project.
c. In case of an environmental emergency during construction, trained onsite
personnel shall adhere to the RCJ-approved EERP for the project and facilities.
G. Dust Control
1. Excavated Material Resource Plan (EMRP)
a. An EMRP must be included with the PAP and shall include the following:
1) Maps showing existing onsite material types, and the proposed limits of areas
to be stripped or left in-situ.
2) Methods for stripping, stockpiling, spreading and improving/amending soils.
3) Locations and content of material stockpiles.
4) Schedules of volumes for each material.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 10
5) Expected post-excavation use or disposition of each material type, e.g.

transported offsite, used as structural fill onsite, used for landscaping onsite,
or other uses.
6) Identification of personnel responsible for supervising material management.
b. An EMRP shall not be so complicated that it is unworkable in practice.
c. If impacted or contaminated soil is encountered during excavation that was not
generated from current construction activities, refer to Subsection 3.5.8, Site
Cleanup and Remediation for guidance.
d. Stockpiles shall be staged and covered/controlled such that erosion from stormwater
and wind does not occur, and sediment runoff and dust generation is prevented.
2. Dust Control Measures
a. Haul roads
1) Haul roads shall be constructed and maintained in a manner that minimizes
potential dust generation.
b. Speed Reduction
1) Reducing vehicle speeds on roads shall reduce the generation of dust.
Maximum onsite speed limits shall be posted and enforced.
c. Temporary Geotextile
1) Temporary geotextile may be placed on the ground or used to cover soil piles
to reduce ground disturbance and dust generation.
d. Wind Breaks
1) Wind breaks may be used on construction sites to prevent wind from blowing
away loose material. Wind breaks shall be placed upwind of the target dust
prevention area (such as to the South West (SW) side of a haul road if the
prevailing wind direction is from the SW). Wind breaks may be created from
onsite soil, or they may be temporarily erected structures strong enough to
withstand maximum expected wind speeds.
2) If wind breaks are created from onsite soil, they must also be covered and/or
stabilized to prevent erosion from wind and water.
H. Waste Management
1. Reuse and Recycling
a. When possible, materials from the construction project shall be reused and recycled.
Reused/recycled materials must adhere to applicable Regulations, Guidance,
Specifications, and Details.
2. Disposal
a. Waste receptacles and containers shall not be filled beyond capacity. Capacity is
considered to be the level at which the contents of the container can be reasonably
anticipated not to have the potential to fall out during transport of the container.
Waste receptacles and containers or vehicle “boxes” shall be covered while being
stored and during transportation.
b. The facility developer shall coordinate with authorized waste management entities to
transport and dispose of waste regularly in accordance with the applicable RCER
Regulations and Standards Volume 1, Sections 5.5 Municipal Waste Collection, 5.6

Rev. 0 4.5 - 11
Non-Hazardous Industrial Waste & Municipal Waste Disposal Regulations, 5.7 Inert
Waste Disposal Regulations, 5.8 Waste Transporter Registration Regulations and
5.9 Waste Disposal Facility Closure / Post Closure Care Regulations.
I. Maintenance and Monitoring
1. Stormwater Discharges
a. Stormwater Discharges offsite shall be monitored in accordance with RCER Volume
I Section 3.7, Storm Water Runoff Regulations, 3.13, Water Quality Monitoring
Requirements and any other applicable regulations.
2. Wastewater Discharge Monitoring
a. Discharge of wastewater generated during Construction and Demolition shall be
periodically monitored via the Standards set by RCER Volume I Section 3.13, Water
Quality Monitoring Requirements.
b. Wastewater discharge monitoring results are to be reported to the RCJ in the format
and at the frequency specified by the RCJ.
3. Groundwater Protection and Monitoring
a. For project sites housing more than 5000 liters of hazardous, chemical, and/or
petroleum-based liquids, regardless of the longevity of the project, there must be a
Spill Prevention, Countermeasure and Control (SPCC) plan established.
1) The SPCC shall follow the guidelines above in Subsections 3.5.4.D.3, Spill
Prevention and 3.5.4.D.4, Spill Control.
2) Additionally, sites that meet the volume criteria above, and where the planned
site is anticipated to exceed more than one (1) year shall also follow the
Specifications detailed in RCER Volume I Subsection 3.11.2 and Subsection
3.11.3 for performing groundwater quality monitoring by installing
groundwater monitoring wells.
J. Construction Camps and Laydown Areas
1. Structures
a. Housing
1) Housing structures shall meet applicable building and fire protection Codes.
b. Wastewater Disposal
1) Wastewater shall be contained in appropriately sized and constructed storage
tanks, and be transported to and disposed of at an operating wastewater
treatment plant that is licensed to accept waste.
c. General Storage
1) Storage areas shall be protected and shall prevent spillage or other harm to
the environment.
d. Equipment Loading Facilities
1) Loading facilities shall be placed to minimize impact to surrounding land uses
and pedestrians.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 12
2. Construction Machinery
a. Storage
1) Storage areas shall be secure and fenced.
b. Maintenance
1) Maintenance areas shall be underlain by waterproof barriers (pavement,
cement, poly-lined stone, etc.) to prevent discharges or leakage of any fluids
from impacting existing soil or groundwater.
c. Leakage
1) Leakage of chemicals or petroleum-based fluids from any equipment shall be
mitigated immediately. The equipment shall be repaired and used only over
impermeable barriers.
d. Emission Standards
1) All machinery on a construction site operating with a stationary Reciprocating
Internal Combustion Engine (RICE) shall meet limitations for hazardous air
pollutants emitted from the machinery. All such machinery shall also meet
applicable requirements and it shall be demonstrated to the RCJ that initial
and continuous compliance of the RICE with the established pollutant
emission limitations has been met. Refer to US 40 CFR Part 63 Subpart
ZZZZ, established by NESHAP for RICE, for the operating pollutant emission
limitations and the initial and continuous demonstration requirements.
2) All machinery on a construction site operating with a Spark Ignition Stationary
Internal Combustion Engine (SI SICE) shall meet limitations for hazardous air
pollutants emitted from the machinery. All such machinery shall also meet
applicable requirements and it shall be demonstrated to the RCJ that initial
and continuous compliance of the SI SICE with the established operating
pollutant emission limitations has been met. Refer to US New Source
Performance Standards (NSPS) for SI SICE in US 40 CFR Part 60 Subpart
JJJJ for the operating pollutant emission limitations of SI SICE and the initial
and continuous demonstration requirements.
3) All machinery on a construction site operating with a Compression Ignition
Stationary Internal Combustion Engine (CI SICE) shall meet limitations for
hazardous air pollutants emitted from the machinery. All such machinery
shall also meet applicable requirements and it shall be demonstrated to the
RCJ both initial and continuous compliance of the CI SICE with the
established operating pollutant emission limitations has been met. Refer to
US Standards of Performance for CI SICE in US 40 CFR Part 60 Subpart IIII
for the operating pollutant emission limitations of SI ICE and the initial and
continuous demonstration requirements.
4) Sulfur Emissions Standards are excluded from machinery using diesel fuel.
e. Age
1) All equipment being operated on a site shall have been constructed on or
after the year 2000.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 13
3. Fuel Storage
a. Fuel Storage Tanks
1) All fuel storage tanks, including Aboveground Storage Tanks and
Underground Storage Tanks, shall include secondary containment with 110%
of tank capacity plus water accumulation from a 100 year storm event and
shall be fenced in and locked to prevent vandalism.
b. Releases
1) All releases shall be reported to the RCJ and cleaned up immediately in
accordance with RCER Regulations.
4. Construction Debris
a. Excess Material
1) Excess material shall be removed from the project site and shall be either
recycled, reused on another site or disposed of in a properly-licensed landfill.
5. Decommissioning
a. Removal of Materials
1) Accumulated materials shall be removed from the project site at the
completion of the project. The materials shall be removed from the project
site and reused on another site or disposed of at an authorized waste
management facility.
b. Removal of Impacted Soil
1) Soil that is impacted by the construction process (i.e. spills and uncontained
releases) shall be removed and disposed of according to RCER Regulations.
6. Restoration
a. Site Restoration Timing
1) Upon completion of the construction, the Construction Camps, contractor
staging areas, and other areas shall be disassembled, demolished, and
restored in conformance with the RCJ-approved restoration plan. In the
cases where no restoration plan has been required, the area shall be restored
to the original condition.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 14
SUBSECTION 4.5.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
4.5.7. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
1. To be included in GPCS Section 017800 Closeout Submittals
2. The A/E is not responsible for completing As-Built drawings as this responsibility rests
with the Contractor alone.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 15
SUBSECTION 4.5.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
4.5.8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Specifications
1. All specifications prepared by the A/E for the Project shall include provisions for the
supply of manuals outlining assembly, operation, and maintenance procedures for all
equipment, furnishings, appliances and finishes. Translations into the Arabic language
shall be provided for all such publications by the A/E.
2. The A/E is not responsible for generating or submitting the operation and maintenance
manuals. The RCJ Field Engineer (FE) will receive and coordinate this information from
the Contractor.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 16
SUBSECTION 4.5.9 STARTUP, COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING
4.5.9. STARTUP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING
A. Commissioning
1. To be included in GPCS Section 019100 General Commissioning Requirements
2. The A/E prepares this information as part of the Project specifications on startup and
commissioning. The A/E is not responsible for receiving or coordination this information
with the Contractor.
B. Facility Operation
1. To be included in GPCS Section 019200 Facility Operation
2. Where necessary, the A/E shall solicit training to be provided to the owner's designated
personnel in the initial operation of the facilities' equipment as part of the Project
specifications.
C. Facility Maintenance
1. To be included in GPCS Section 017900 Demonstration and Training
2. Where necessary, the A/E shall solicit training to be provided to the owner's designated
personnel in the initial maintenance of the facilities' equipment.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 17
SUBSECTION 4.5.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (INITIAL ACCEPTANCE)
4.5.10. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (INITIAL ACCEPTANCE)
1. To be included in GPCS Section 017700 Closeout Procedures
2. The A/E shall have no role in initial acceptance. The RCJ FE will be supported by various
RCJ departments to complete this task.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 18
SUBSECTION 4.5.11 DOCUMENTATION AND ARCHIVING
4.5.11. DOCUMENTATION AND ARCHIVING
1. To be included in GPCS Section 017800 Closeout Submittals
2. The A/E is not responsible for documenting and archiving the as-built condition or
drawings. The RCJ FE and Contractor are required to keep full documentation of their
work as described in the A/E’s Technical Contract.

Rev. 0 4.5 - 19
SECTION 5.1 DESIGN GUIDELINES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.1.1. GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
10. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
5.1.2. SAUDI ARABIAN GOODS AND SERVICES ................................................................ 3
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
5.1.3. STANDARDS OF QUALITY .......................................................................................... 4
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4
5.1.4. THIRD PARTY REQUIREMENTS................................................................................. 6
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 6
5.1.5. SECURITY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 7
A. Risk Assessment and Mitigation.................................................................................... 7
5.1.6. LOCAL CLIMATE CONDITIONS................................................................................... 9
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 9

Rev. 0 5.1 - i
5.1.1. GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides A/E and/or EPC Contractors with an overview of the Design
Guidelines for all Projects.
2. Applicability
a. The guidelines apply to all disciplines including but not limited to :
1) Structural Engineering
2) Architecture
3) Interior Design
4) Mechanical Engineering
5) Electrical Engineering
6) Civil Engineering
7) Landscape Architecture
8) Environmental
9) Geotechnical
10) Coastal Marine
b. This Section applies to utilities, sites, road systems, industrial developments and to
proposed types of facilities including but not limited to those defined in Subsection
5.3.5.
3. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Section 2.2.
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), refer to Section
3.1.
7. Standards
a. Refer to the most recent version of ISO 31000 - Risk Management for requirements
related to risk assessment and management.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Standards:
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 5.2 for Structural
b. Refer to Section 5.3 for Architecture

Rev. 0 5.1 - 1
c. Refer to Section 5.4 for Mechanical

d. Refer to Section 5.5 for Electrical
e. Refer to Section 5.6 for Civil, Sitework and Roads
f. Refer to Section 5.7 for Utilities
g. Refer to Section 5.8 for Costal Marine
h. Refer to Section 5.9 for Environmental
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission for Jubail will review and take action on all design reports,
plans and specifications. Refer to Section 1.1.
10. Commissioning
a. Refer to the RCJ’s Commissioning requirement in Subsections 4.5.9.

Rev. 0 5.1 - 2
SUBSECTION 5.1.2 SAUDI ARABIAN GOODS AND SERVICES
5.1.2. SAUDI ARABIAN GOODS AND SERVICES
A. General
1. On all projects, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall specify and require the use of
materials, supplies, goods, equipment, fabrications, crafts and services of Saudi Arabian
origin for incorporation into the Design and Specifications. Specified products must also
be approved by the RCJ.
2. A list of Saudi Arabian manufacturing firms may be obtained from the Ministry of Industry
and Electricity or the RCJ. The Specifications for goods produced by these
manufacturers shall be incorporated in the design work for the Project provided they meet
basic Standards of quality as established by the RCJ Each Specification prepared by the
Consultant shall include the following standard clause in Part 2, - "Products":
a. “All goods and products covered by these Specifications shall be procured, when
available, from an in-Kingdom manufacturer. Procurement of all goods and products
manufactured out-of-Kingdom must be approved by the Royal Commission for
Jubail.”
3. If the A/E and/or EPC Contractor determines that the use of these Specifications would
be detrimental to the work, he shall report this to the RCJ, supported by a complete
justification of this determination, and await further instructions. Decisions by the RCJ
shall be final and binding. Notwithstanding the above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall remain entirely responsible and liable for the Specifications.

Rev. 0 5.1 - 3
SUBSECTION 5.1.3 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
5.1.3. STANDARDS OF QUALITY
A. General
1. It is the intent of the RCJ that a high Standard of Quality be achieved at a reasonable
cost. All design work shall be provided with professional Standards of skill, care and
diligence. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall consider, in performing the work, the
current best practices known and successfully employed in the industry.
2. The Design shall accomplish the following general objectives:
a. Saudi Standards
1) Utilize all Standards issued by Saudi Arabian Government Agencies.
b. Saudi Products
1) Utilize Saudi Arabian products and services to the greatest extent possible by
using the specifications of Saudi Arabian manufacturers and requiring the use
of all Saudi Arabian manufactured products.
c. Suitability
1) Provide materials and equipment suitable for the desired use and life of the
facility and its exposure to the environmental conditions of this location.
d. Practicality
1) Be practical for implementation at the jobsite in areas of both procurement
and construction.
e. Reliability
1) Incorporate particular attention to reliability and accessibility of all
components, simplicity of operation and maintenance and safety of operators
and the public.
f. Aesthetic
1) Be aesthetically pleasing and harmonious with other facilities in the Project.
g. Expansion
1) Where appropriate, provision shall be made for future expansion and
loadings.
h. Life Safety
1) Ensure life safety of the occupants and users throughout the life of the
building and meet all accessibility Standards.
i. Economy of Design
1) Meet all budget restrictions with regard to life cycle cost, and ensure a
lifespan that meets the needs of the building type and/or the project
requirements.
3. Systems shall be designed to be as simple and as durable as possible. Even in areas
where highly trained operators are available, experience has proven that they are apt to
make mistakes during emergencies. Simple systems are easy to understand and operate
during both normal and emergency conditions and consequently are considered more
desirable.

Rev. 0 5.1 - 4
SUBSECTION 5.1.3 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
4. Different types of systems shall be compared on the basis of cost, function and operation.
In making cost comparisons, it is important to include all parts of the system from the
power source to and including the utilization of equipment. Cost comparison shall include
equipment, its installation, operation, maintenance, and replacement costs.
5. All permanent facilities, buildings, components and systems shall be designed to keep
their structural, operational and aesthetic integrity for a minimum of 30 years.

Rev. 0 5.1 - 5
SUBSECTION 5.1.4 THIRD PARTY REQUIREMENTS
5.1.4. THIRD PARTY REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. A Third Party is a stakeholder other than the Royal Commission for Jubail’s Engineering
Department and the Consultant, such as a Saudi governmental/regulatory agency,
including, but not limited to:
a. Saudi Aramco (SA)
b. Saudi Electricity Company (SEC)
c. Marafiq
d. Saudi Private Telecom Companies (STC, Mobily)
e. Ministry of Transportation (MOT)
f. Ministry of Defense and Aviation (MODA)
g. Coast Guard, National Guard, Civil Defense, High Commission for Industrial
Security (HCIS)
h. Saudi Railway Company (SAR)
i. Saudi Sea Ports Authority (SEAPA)
j. The Ministry of Interior (MOI)
2. The design work for third party approval shall be in conformance with Standards and
requirements of the relevant third party and the RCJ. However, drawing sizes, lettering,
drawing numbering systems and title blocks shall conform to the RCJ Standards.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors are responsible for all submissions to any and all third
parties and for obtaining approved and stamped drawings. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractors shall undertake all necessary steps – including visits to the third party’s
offices, follow-up submissions, etc. to obtain approvals. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall ensure that design approvals are obtained before submission of the RFP Package
for bid and approved drawings are included in the RFP Package. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractors shall obtain letters from third parties that their designs have appropriate
capacities to support the proposed development. These final letters shall be submitted to
the RCJ no later than the 90% submittal stage.
4. The monthly Engineering Progress Report (EPR) shall have a Third Party Approvals
Summary Table indicating the 30% submission, final 30% comments return, and IFB
dates. In addition, the monthly report shall have the following two logs:
a. A Third Party Follow-Up Log containing a record of every communication event
(phone call, email, visit, letter submission etc.) with names of the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor and all of the third party people involved, date, and brief outcome / result;
and
b. A Third Party Approvals Current Status Log as a record of the status at the current
design stage.

Rev. 0 5.1 - 6
SUBSECTION 5.1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
5.1.5. SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Risk Assessment and Mitigation

1. The A/E and/or EPC Consultant shall perform Project risk assessments prior to
performing the detailed design of the works. The risk assessment shall consider the
following impacts for the full Project life cycle from design through long term operation
and maintenance of the works:
a. Safety
b. Constructability
c. Environmental
2. The A/E and/or EPC Consultant shall develop and submit for the RCJ’s agreement the
processes and procedures to be implemented for the risk assessment to be implemented
for each design performed under this Contract. The processes and procedures for all risk
assessments shall be in general conformance with ISO 31000: 2009 (or current edition),
or an equivalent internationally accepted standard.
3. In addition the A/E and/or EPC Consultant shall include the following as part of the risk
assessment process:
a. Incorporation of lessons learned from similar work conducted by the RCJ and A/E
and/or EPC Consultant which as a minimum shall include:
1) Assessment of Design Change Notices (DCN’s), and
2) Change notifications from previous similar Projects executed by the RCJ.
3) Technical Queries (TQ) provided from the RCJ to the A/E or EPC Contractor.
4) Field Change Design (FCD) provided from the RCJ to the A/E or EPC
Contractor.
4. Safety and Constructability Workshops involving all affected parties:
a. A/E and/or EPC Consultant
b. RCJ Engineering (All Disciplines)
c. RCJ Construction
d. Affected Royal Commission for Jubail Departments
e. End User
f. Affected Third Parties
g. Operating and Maintenance Organizations
5. Depending on the nature of the design and interfaces with existing conditions affecting
the design the A/E and/or EPC Contractor may be required to employ specialist sub-
consultants to perform all or part of the risk assessment. Where this is necessary the A/E
and/or EPC Consultant shall advise the RCJ of the need to employ a specialist sub-
consultant and shall employ such specialist sub-consultant following agreement with the
RCJ. The outcome of the risk assessments shall be formally documented by the A/E
and/or EPC Consultant and submitted for the RCJ’s agreement. A comprehensive report
documenting the outcome of the risk assessment shall be provided and include:
a. A detailed written report of the following:

Rev. 0 5.1 - 7
SUBSECTION 5.1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
1) Process
2) Finding and strategies
3) A risk matrix
4) A risk register
b. The risk matrix shall be divided into three parts:
1) Risks mitigated within the design
2) Risks transferred to Construction Management
3) Risks transferred to the End User’s Operations and Maintenance
Management
c. The risk register shall clearly identify for each risk:
1) Hazard associated with the risk
2) The probability of the hazardous event occurring
3) The consequences of the hazardous event
4) The ranking of the risk
5) Proposed mitigation measure
6) Responsibility for the implementation of the mitigation measure
7) Evidence of implementation where risks have been mitigated within the
design

Rev. 0 5.1 - 8
SUBSECTION 5.1.6 LOCAL CLIMATE CONDITIONS
5.1.6. LOCAL CLIMATE CONDITIONS
A. General
1. Jubail has a desert climate, with little rainfall. The Köppen-Geiger climate classification is
BWh. The average annual temperature in Jubail is 25.2 °C. The average annual rainfall is
88 mm, typically with heavy rains occurring between November and January. The entire
year's rainfall may consist of one or two local rain events
2. With the exception of the province of Asir on the western coast, Saudi Arabia has a
desert climate characterized by extreme heat during the day, an abrupt drop in
temperature at night, and very low annual rainfall. Because of the influence of a
subtropical high-pressure system, there is considerable variation in temperature and
humidity. The two main differences in the climate of Saudi-Arabia may be felt between
the coastal areas and the interior.
3. The average summer temperature is about 45° C, but readings of up to 54° C are not
unusual. The heat becomes intense shortly after sunrise and lasts until sunset, followed
by surprisingly cool nights. In the winter, the temperature seldom drops below 0° C, but
with low humidity and high winds-chill factor make a quite cold atmosphere. In the spring
and autumn the heat is temperate. Temperatures average around 29° C.
4. JUBAIL:
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Avg. Temperature (°c) 15.8 15.9 19.9 28.5 32.4 35 37.7 36.7 32.7 27.9 21.3 17.8
Max Temperature (°c) 28.3 31.7 38.6 37.7 45.4 46.8 48.7 47.5 45.3 41.9 35.6 23.8
Min Temperature (°c) 10 8 9.8 14.5 28.4 24.9 27.9 25.8 20.7 18.8 9.3 4.5
Avg. Rain Fall (mm) 41.4 0.7 0.3 3.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Avg. Snow Days 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
5. Refer to Subsection 5.3.1.C for design guidance for local conditions.

Rev. 0 5.1 - 9
CHAPTER 5 – DESIGN GUIDELINES
SECTION 5.2 STRUCTURAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2. STRUCTURAL............................................................................................................... 1
5.2.1 BUILDINGS STRUCTURES.......................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Scope ............................................................................................................................. 1
3. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
4. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
5. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 3
7. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 5
8. Related Sections: .......................................................................................................... 8
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 8
C. Related Specifications and Details ................................................................................ 9
1. Related Guideline Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS) ................... 9
2. Related Technical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD) ............................................ 9
D. General Design Requirements ...................................................................................... 9
E. Design Loads ................................................................................................................ 13
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 13
2. Special Considerations ................................................................................................. 13
3. Applicable Loads .......................................................................................................... 14
4. Dead Loads (D) ............................................................................................................ 14
5. Live Loads (L) ............................................................................................................... 15
6. Roof Live Loads (Lr) ..................................................................................................... 15
7. Rain Loads (R).............................................................................................................. 16
8. Flood Loads (Fa) .......................................................................................................... 16
9. Wind Loads (W) ............................................................................................................ 16
10. Seismic Loads (E) ........................................................................................................ 17
11. Self-Straining Loads (T)................................................................................................ 17
12. Loads Due to Lateral Earth Pressure, Ground Water (H) ............................................ 18
13. Hoisting Devices Loads ................................................................................................ 18
14. Crane Loads ................................................................................................................. 19
15. Vibration Loads ............................................................................................................. 23
Guiding Engineering Manual

Rev. 0 5.2 - i
16. Railway Loads .............................................................................................................. 23

17. Areas Accessible to Vehicular Loads ........................................................................... 23
F. Load Combinations ....................................................................................................... 24
G. Geotechnical Information.............................................................................................. 24
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 24
2. Geotechnical Investigation ........................................................................................... 24
3. Geotechnical Design Report......................................................................................... 24
H. Concrete Design ........................................................................................................... 25
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 25
2. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 25
3. Concrete Durability ....................................................................................................... 25
4. Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................................................................ 26
5. Precast / Pre-Stressed Concrete .................................................................................. 28
6. Precast Architectural Concrete ..................................................................................... 28
7. Pre-Engineered/Pre-Fabricated Precast Buildings....................................................... 28
8. Post-Tensioned Concrete ............................................................................................. 28
9. Composite Construction ............................................................................................... 28
10. Slab on Grade............................................................................................................... 29
11. Joints ............................................................................................................................ 29
I. Masonry Design ............................................................................................................ 31
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 31
2. Composite Construction ............................................................................................... 31
3. Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) Masonry Units.................................................... 32
4. Approval of Special Systems of Design or Construction .............................................. 33
5. Design Basis ................................................................................................................. 33
J. Steel Design ................................................................................................................. 35
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 35
2. Structural Steel ............................................................................................................. 35
3. Steel Joists ................................................................................................................... 35
4. Cold Formed Steel ........................................................................................................ 36
5. Pre-Engineered / Pre-Fabricated Metal Buildings (PEMB) .......................................... 36
K. Wood Design ................................................................................................................ 38
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 38
5.2.2 HIGH RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES ....................................................................... 39
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 39

Rev. 0 5.2 - ii
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 39
2. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 39
3. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 39
4. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 39
5. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 39
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 39
8. Related Sections: ......................................................................................................... 40
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 40
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 40
C. Related Specifications and Details ............................................................................... 40
1. Related Guideline Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS) .................. 40
2. Related Technical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD) ........................................... 40
D. Structural Design and Design Considerations .............................................................. 40
1. Structural Design .......................................................................................................... 40
2. Design Considerations ................................................................................................. 40
3. High Rise Building Limits .............................................................................................. 41
E. Damping System .......................................................................................................... 42
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 42
5.2.3 NON-BUILDING STRUCTURES .................................................................................. 43
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 43
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 43
2. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 44
3. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 44
4. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 44
5. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 44
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 44
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 47
C. Related Specifications and Details ............................................................................... 47
D. Principles and Guidelines ............................................................................................. 47
1. Concrete ....................................................................................................................... 47

Rev. 0 5.2 - iii
2. Structural Design .......................................................................................................... 48

E. Design Standards and Requirements .......................................................................... 50
1. Culverts and Drainage Structures ................................................................................ 50
2. Catch Basins and Manholes ......................................................................................... 52
3. Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures Including Shades ................................................. 53
4. Shade Structures .......................................................................................................... 54
5. Water and Wastewater Structures................................................................................ 54
6. Liquid Retaining Structures .......................................................................................... 55
7. Flow Chambers ............................................................................................................ 58
8. Valve Chambers ........................................................................................................... 58
9. Thrust Blocks ................................................................................................................ 59
10. Mechanical Equipment Support Structures .................................................................. 62
11. Pipeline Corridor Structures ......................................................................................... 63
12. Electrical and Communication Structures .................................................................... 68
13. Generator Support Structures ...................................................................................... 70
14. Concrete Duct Banks .................................................................................................... 72
15. Security Crash Barriers ................................................................................................ 73
16. Supports for Signs, Luminaries, Traffic Signals ........................................................... 74
5.2.4 TRANSPORTATION STRUCTURES ........................................................................... 78
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 78
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 78
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 78
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 78
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 79
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 79
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 80
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 80
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 81
C. Structures Groups ........................................................................................................ 81
D. Related Specifications and Details ............................................................................... 81
E. Preliminary Design and Planning ................................................................................. 81

Rev. 0 5.2 - iv
1. Scoping ......................................................................................................................... 81
2. Structure Geometry ...................................................................................................... 82
F. Structure Selection ....................................................................................................... 87
1. Material ......................................................................................................................... 87
2. Concrete Superstructure .............................................................................................. 87
3. Steel Superstructure ..................................................................................................... 89
4. Abutments..................................................................................................................... 90
5. Wingwalls ...................................................................................................................... 91
6. Piers .............................................................................................................................. 92
7. Cap Beams ................................................................................................................... 92
8. Foundations .................................................................................................................. 93
9. Bearings ........................................................................................................................ 95
10. Expansion Joints .......................................................................................................... 96
G. Principles and Guidelines ............................................................................................. 97
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 97
2. Depth/Span Ratios ....................................................................................................... 97
3. Design Life .................................................................................................................... 98
4. Skew ............................................................................................................................. 98
5. Abutments..................................................................................................................... 98
6. Bearings ........................................................................................................................ 98
7. Arrangement ................................................................................................................. 98
8. Expansion joints ........................................................................................................... 98
9. Diaphragms .................................................................................................................. 98
10. Piers .............................................................................................................................. 98
11. Railing ........................................................................................................................... 99
12. Approach Slab .............................................................................................................. 99
13. Environmental and Safety ............................................................................................ 99
H. Design Standards and Requirements ......................................................................... 100
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 100
2. Design Standards ........................................................................................................ 100
3. Analysis Methods ........................................................................................................ 101
4. Design Methods ........................................................................................................... 101
5. Strength Requirements ................................................................................................ 101
6. Concrete Cover Requirements .................................................................................... 102

Rev. 0 5.2 - v
7. Design Loads ............................................................................................................... 103

8. Deformation limits ........................................................................................................ 112
9. Fatigue ......................................................................................................................... 113
10. Bearings ....................................................................................................................... 113
11. Concrete Box Culverts ................................................................................................. 113
12. Concrete Superstructure ............................................................................................. 114
13. Concrete Deck ............................................................................................................. 114
14. Deck Drainage ............................................................................................................. 114
15. Piers ............................................................................................................................. 114
16. Approach slab .............................................................................................................. 115
17. Fill material .................................................................................................................. 115
18. Highway surcharge ...................................................................................................... 115
19. Abutments.................................................................................................................... 115
20. Retaining walls ............................................................................................................ 116
21. Wingwalls ..................................................................................................................... 116
22. Cut and Cover Tunnel Structures ................................................................................ 117
23. Retaining Wall Drainage .............................................................................................. 117
24. Waterproofing of Structures ......................................................................................... 117
25. Foundation ................................................................................................................... 117
26. Load combinations ...................................................................................................... 118
27. Temporary Structures .................................................................................................. 118
I. Aesthetics .................................................................................................................... 119
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 119
2. Incorporation ................................................................................................................ 119
3. Aesthetic Design .......................................................................................................... 119
4. References: ................................................................................................................. 119
5. Design Guidelines: ..................................................................................................... 119
5.2.5 FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES ...................................... 122
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 122
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 122
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 122
3. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 122
4. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 122
5. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 122

Rev. 0 5.2 - vi

7. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 122
8. Related Sections: ........................................................................................................ 122
9. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 123
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 123
C. Related Specifications and Details .............................................................................. 123
1. Related Guideline Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS) ................. 123
2. Related Technical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD) .......................................... 123
D. Design Requirements .................................................................................................. 123
1. Bearing Pressure ......................................................................................................... 123
2. Water Table ................................................................................................................. 123
3. Buoyancy ..................................................................................................................... 123
4. Hydrostatic Pressure ................................................................................................... 124
5. Hydrodynamic Pressure .............................................................................................. 124
6. Adjacent Loads ............................................................................................................ 124
7. Existing Construction ................................................................................................... 124
8. Founding Depth ........................................................................................................... 124
9. Stability ........................................................................................................................ 124
E. Foundation Structures Types and Selection ............................................................... 125
1. Shallow Foundation ..................................................................................................... 125
2. Deep Foundation ......................................................................................................... 125
F. Earth Retaining Structures Types and Selection......................................................... 128
G. Construction Requirements ......................................................................................... 128
1. Foundations ................................................................................................................. 128
2. Retaining Walls ............................................................................................................ 128
5.2.6 CORROSION PROTECTION ...................................................................................... 129
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 129
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 129
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 129
3. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 129
4. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 129
5. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 129
7. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 131
8. Related Sections: ........................................................................................................ 132

Rev. 0 5.2 - vii
9. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 132

B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 132
C. Related Specifications and Details .............................................................................. 132
1. Related Guideline Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS) ................. 132
2. Related Technical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD) .......................................... 132
D. Protection of Concrete Structures ............................................................................... 132
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 132
2. Forms of Concrete Deterioration ................................................................................. 133
3. Exposure Conditions ................................................................................................... 133
4. Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures ........................................................ 133
5. Summary of Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures ................................... 137
E. Protection of Steel Structures ...................................................................................... 139
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 139
2. Forms of Corrosion of Steel......................................................................................... 139
3. General Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel ...................................................... 140
4. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel Structures .................................................. 141
F. Protection of Pipelines ................................................................................................. 142
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 142
2. Non-metallic Piping System......................................................................................... 143
3. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Pipes ................................................................... 143
G. Protective Coatings ..................................................................................................... 144
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 144
2. Coating Selection Criteria ............................................................................................ 144
3. Coating Systems for Various Structures ..................................................................... 145
H. Cathodic Protection ..................................................................................................... 146
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 146
2. Cathodic Protection Systems Design Criteria ............................................................. 146
3. Cathodic Protection Systems for Different Structures ................................................. 147
4. Monitoring of Cathodic Protection Systems ................................................................ 148
APPENDIX I CALCULATIONS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS ................................. 149
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 149
B. General Items & Design Criteria .................................................................................. 149
C. Gravity Design ............................................................................................................. 150
D. Lateral Design.............................................................................................................. 151
E. Footing & Foundation Design ...................................................................................... 151

Rev. 0 5.2 - viii
F. Computer Aided Design .............................................................................................. 152

APPENDIX II SPECIFIC DRAWINGS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS ...................... 154
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 154
B. General Items .............................................................................................................. 154
C. Foundation Plans ......................................................................................................... 154
D. Framing Plans of Floors, Roofs Walls and Ancillary Structures .................................. 155
E. Column Information Showing ...................................................................................... 155
F. Sections and Details .................................................................................................... 156
G. Other Information ......................................................................................................... 156

Rev. 0 5.2 - ix
SUB-SECTION 5.2.1 BUILDING STRUCTURES
5.2. STRUCTURAL
The principles, guidelines, and requirements for design and construction of RCJ structures and
structural systems are provided in this section. The provisions of the Saudi Building Code
(SBC), unless otherwise specified herein, except as modified by this design criteria and the
RCJ Guideline Specifications (GPCS), shall constitute the RCJ Structural building code in
Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities (JIC and RIC). The section has six subsections
organized based on the following classification:
5.2.1 Building Structures.

5.2.2 High Rise Building Structures.
5.2.3 Non-Building Structures.
5.2.4 Transportation Structures.
5.2.5 Foundation and Earth Retaining Structures.
5.2.6 Corrosion Protection.
Each of the six subsections (5.2.1 to 5.2.6) has an “Applicability” section defining the type of
structures and structural systems for which the provisions of the subsection apply.
Requirements for structural calculations and drawings are included in the Appendices to this
section.
5.2.1 BUILDINGS STRUCTURES
A. General
1. Introduction
This subsection mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for design and
construction of the RCJ building structures. Building structures are defined as those structures
enclosed by walls and roofs, and constructed to provide support or shelter for an intended
occupancy. The subsection provides the minimum technical requirements to be adopted by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractors to enable safety, quality, and cost effectiveness in the design and
construction of building structures and building systems that meet the needs and expectations
of the RCJ.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of building
structures and building systems constructed of concrete, masonry, steel and wood. The design
requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on a Model Building Code
(MBC), industry standards, and best practices embraced by the RCJ.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall govern all RCJ
building structures and building systems, as defined in the introduction herein.
4. Definitions
a. "Allowable Stress Design" : A method of proportioning structural members, such that
elastically computed stresses produced in the members by nominal loads do not exceed
specified allowable stresses (also called "working stress design").
b. "Dead Loads": The weight of materials of construction incorporated into the building and
other structures, including but not limited to walls, floors, roofs, ceilings, stairways, built-
in partitions, finishes, cladding and other similarly incorporated architectural and structural
SUBSECTION 5.2.1 BUILDING STRUCTURES
items, and the weight of fixed service equipment, such as cranes, plumbing stacks and
risers, electrical feeders, heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems and automatic
sprinkler systems.
c. "Diaphragm" : A horizontal or sloped system acting to transmit lateral forces to the
vertical-resisting elements. When the term "diaphragm" is used, for steel structures, it
shall include horizontal bracing systems.
d. “Diaphragm Chord” : A diaphragm boundary element perpendicular to the applied load
that is assumed to take axial stresses due to the diaphragm moment.
e. “Flexible Diaphragm” : A diaphragm is flexible for the purpose of distribution of story
shear and torsional moment.
f. “Rigid Diaphragm” : A diaphragm is rigid for the purpose of distribution of story shear
and torsional moment when the lateral deformation of the diaphragm is less than or equal
to two times the average story drift.
g. "Duration of Load" : The period of continuous application of a given load, or the
aggregate of periods of intermittent applications of the same load.
h. "Essential Facilities" : Buildings and other structures that are intended to remain
operational in the event of extreme environmental loading from flood, wind, snow or
earthquakes.
i. "Factored Load" : The product of a nominal load and a load factor.
j. "Impact Load" : The load resulting from moving machinery, elevators, crane ways,
vehicles and other similar forces and kinetic loads, pressure and possible surcharge from
fixed or moving loads.
k. "Limit State" : A condition beyond which a structure or member becomes unfit for
service and is judged to be no longer useful for its intended function (serviceability limit
state) or to be unsafe (strength limit state).
l. "Live Loads": Those loads produced by the use and occupancy of the building or other
structure and do not include construction or environmental loads such as wind load, snow
load, rain load, earthquake load, flood load or dead load.
m. "Live Loads (Roof)": Those loads produced (1) during maintenance by workers,
equipment and materials; and (2) during the life of the structure by movable objects such
as planters and by people.
n. "Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)": A method of proportioning structural
members and their connections using load and resistance factors such that no applicable
limit state is reached when the structure is subjected to appropriate load combinations.
The term "LRFD" is used in the design of steel, concrete and wood structures.
o. "Load Effects" : Forces and deformations produced in structural members by the applied
loads.
p. "Load Factor" : A factor that accounts for deviations of the actual load from the nominal
load, for uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect, and for
the probability that more than one extreme load will occur simultaneously.
q. "Loads" : Forces or other actions that result from the weight of building materials,
occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential movement and
restrained dimensional changes. Permanent loads are those loads in which variations
over time are rare or of small magnitude, such as dead loads. All other loads are variable
loads.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 2
r. "Nominal Loads" : The magnitudes of the loads specified in this section (dead, live, soil,
wind, snow, rain, flood, and earthquake).
s. "Occupancy Category" : A category used to determine structural requirements based on
occupancy.
t. "Other Structures" : Structures, other than buildings, for which loads are specified in this
section
u. "Resistance Factor" : A factor that accounts for deviations of the actual strength from
the nominal strength and the manner and consequences of failure (also called "strength
reduction factor").
v. "Strength, Nominal" : The capacity of a structure or member to resist the effects of the
loads, as determined by computations using specified material strengths and dimensions
and equations derived from accepted principles of structural mechanics or by field tests or
laboratory tests of scaled models, allowing for modeling effects and differences between
laboratory and field conditions.
w. "Strength Required" : Strength of a member, cross section or connection required to
resist factored loads or related internal moments and forces in such combinations as
stipulated by these provisions.
x. "Strength Design" : A method of proportioning structural members such that the
computed forces produced in the members by factored loads do not exceed the member
design strength [also called "load and resistance factor design" (LRFD)]. The term
"strength design" is used in the design of concrete and masonry structural elements.
5. Abbreviations
Refer to Section 2.2 for additional definitions and abbreviations.
a. "AAC" Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Masonry Units.
b. “MBMA” Metal Building Manufacturers Association.
c. “MEPS” Mechanical Electrical Plumbing Structural
d. "PEMB" Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings.
e. “PECS” Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures.
a. Industrial buildings may be classified as non-building structures in certain situations for
the purposes of determining seismic design coefficients and factors, system limitations,
height limits, and associated detailing requirements. Therefore, when the occupancy is
limited primarily to maintenance and monitoring operations, these structures may be
designed in accordance with the provisions of the SBC 2007-301, Chapter 13 for non-
building structures (non-buildings similar to buildings).
b. Buildings designers must understand how the building responds to vertical and lateral
loads, and follow all loads through the structure to ensure that all structural elements and
connections along the load path have sufficient strength and stiffness to maintain
structural integrity. Direct and continuous load paths from the roof to foundation must be
provided. Building configuration, continuous and redundant load paths, connection
detailing, system ductility, quality of materials, and construction are very important to
overall building performance, and should properly addressed in the design.
c. In accordance with the MBC, building structures are designed to sustain local damage
under extreme loading conditions with the structural system as a whole remaining stable.
Rev. 0 5.2 - 3
This objective of structural integrity can be achieved by an arrangement of structural

elements which ensures loads can be transferred from any locally damaged region to
adjacent regions capable of resisting the acting loads. This can be accomplished by
providing sufficient continuity, redundancy, and energy dissipating capability (ductility) in
the design.
d. Lateral loads must be transferred from their point of application to the foundation. All
structural elements and connections along the load path must have sufficient strength,
sufficient ductility to transfer the lateral loads in a manner that does not impair structural
performance. The AE and/or EPC Contractor shall provide detailed design and drawings
which reflect lateral load paths, such as:
1) Transfer shear from floor and roof diaphragms to the lateral load resisting system.
2) Transfer shear from the lateral load resisting system to the foundations.
3) Transfer shear between individual wall panels (for precast wall panel systems).
4) Transfer tension caused by overturning forces.
5) Transfer shear, bending, and axial loads between beams and columns and
between beams and walls.
e. The AE and/or EPC Contractor shall also provide detailed design and drawings for
connections between structural elements, including:
1) Column to foundation.
2) Column to column.
3) Beam to column.
4) Slab to beam.
5) Beam to girder.
6) Beam to beam.
7) Slab to slab.
8) Wall to foundation.
9) Slab to wall.
10) Beam to wall.
11) Wall to wall.
f. Stability
1) Stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of its elements.
Any method that considers the influence of second-order effects (including P-δ and
P-∆ effects), flexural, shear and axial deformations, geometric imperfections, and
stiffness reduction due to residual stresses on the stability of the structures and its
elements is permitted.
2) The building foundation must be capable of safely transferring all vertical and
horizontal forces, due to specified design load combinations, to the supporting soil
or rock. The mechanism used for the transmission of horizontal forces may be
friction between the bottom of the footing and ground, friction between the floor
slab and ground, and/or lateral resistance of soil against vertical surfaces of grade
beams, basement walls, footings, piles, or pile caps. Net upward forces on footings
and piles, which must be resisted to prevent overturning and/or flotation, are

Rev. 0 5.2 - 4
discussed in the foundation design subsection (5.2.5). Structures shall be

designed to resist overturning effects caused by seismic forces. Building structures
shall have a minimum safety factor of 1.5 against sliding, overturning, and flotation.
g. The following requirements shall be reflected in the design and construction of the RCJ
building structures covered under this subsection:
1) Structures shall have adequate structural configurations acceptable to the RCJ and
shall meet architectural and functional requirements of the project.
2) Structures shall demonstrate the high standards for safety, durability, and cost
effectiveness required by the RCJ.
7. Codes
Design and construction of all RCJ building structures shall be based upon the requirements of
this subsection and existing buildings standards; these shall be from the Model Building Code
(MBC), the Saudi Building Code 2007 (SBC 2007), as published by the Saudi Building Code
National Committee (SBCNC). The MBC for all structures not addressed by the SBC 2007
shall be the International Building Code 2009 (IBC 2009) as published by the International
Code Council (ICC), except as modified by the SBC 2007 for regional and local information
and amended in this manual.
The material building codes and standards for all structures shall be those versions referenced
by the MBC. Where a code or standard is not referenced by the MBC, but is referenced by a
material building code, the adopted version of the code shall be that is referenced by the
material building code. If a later version of a code or standard has provisions which improve
safety or quality of construction, such improvements may be implemented with RCJ approval.
Adopted codes for RCJ building-type structures include:
a. SBC 2007: Saudi Building Code 2007 (MBC)

1) SBC 301 Loads and Force Requirements
2) SBC 302 Testing and Inspection Requirements
3) SBC 304 Concrete Structures Requirements
4) SBC 305 Masonry Structures Requirements
5) SBC 306 Steel Structures Requirements
b. ACI: American Concrete Institute
1) ACI 117M Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials and Commentary (Metric)
2) ACI 207.1R Guide to Mass Concrete
3) ACI 207.2R Report on Thermal and Volume Change Effects on Cracking of
Mass Concrete
4) ACI 207.4 Cooling and Insulating Systems for Mass Concrete
5) ACI 313 Standard Practice for Design and Construction of Concrete
Silos and Stacking Tubes for Storing Granular Materials
6) ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

Rev. 0 5.2 - 5
7) ACI 318M Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary
8) ACI 350M Metric Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering
Concrete Structures and Commentary
9) ACI 350.2R Concrete Structures for Containment of Hazardous Materials
10) ACI 351.1R Grouting between Foundations and Bases for Support of
Equipment and Machinery
11) ACI 351.2R Foundations for Static Equipment
12) ACI 351.3R Foundations for Dynamic Equipment
13) ACI 360R Guide to Design of Slabs-on-Ground
14) ACI 371R Guide for the Analysis, Design, and Construction of Elevated
Concrete and Composite Steel-Concrete Water Storage Tanks
15) ACI 530/530.1 Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry
Structures and Companion Commentaries
16) ACI 544.1R Report on Fiber Reinforced Concrete
17) ACI 544.2R Measurement of Properties of Fiber Reinforced Concrete
18) ACI 544.3R Guide for Specifying, Proportioning, Mixing, Placing and
Finishing Steel Fiber Reinforced Concrete
19) ACI 544.4R Design Considerations for Steel Fiber Reinforced Concrete
20) ACI SP 226 Autoclaved Aerated Concrete-Properties and Structural Design.
c. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction
1) LRFD/ASD Manual of Steel Construction
2) AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
3) AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
4) Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
5) AISC Design Guide Series Numbers 1- 29.
d. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute
1) AISI S100 North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members and Commentary
2) AISI D100 Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
3) AISI S200 North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing
e. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
1) ANSI/ASCE3 Standard for the Structural Design of Composite Slabs
f. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
1) ASCE 10 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures
2) ASCE 20 Standard Guide for the Design and Inst. of Pile Foundations
g. ASCE/SEI: American Society of Civil Engineers - Structural Engineering Institute

Rev. 0 5.2 - 6
1) ASCE 5/ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

2) ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
3) ASCE/SEI 8 Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless
Steel Structural Members
4) ASCE/SEI 11 Guideline for Structural Condition Assessment of
Existing Buildings
5) ASCE/AF&PA 16 Standard for Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
for Engineered Wood Construction
6) ASCE/SEI 19 Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings
7) ASCE/SEI 23 Specifications for Structural Steel Beams with Web
Openings
8) ASCE/SEI 24 Flood Resistant Design and Construction
9) ASCE/SEI 37 Design Loads on Structures During Construction
10) ASCE/SEI 48 Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures
11) ASCE/SEI 49 Wind Tunnel Testing for Buildings and Other Structures
12) ASCE/SEI 52 Design of Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Stacks
13) ASCE/SEI 55 Tensile Membrane Structures
14) ASCE/SEI 59 Blast Protection of Buildings
15) ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire
h. AWS: American Welding Society
1) AWS D1.1M Structural Welding Code
2) AWS D1.4M Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
i. CRSI: Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
1) Manual of Standard Practice
2) CRSI Design Handbook
3) Reinforcing Bars: Anchorages and Splices
j. ICC: International Code Council
1) ICC IBC International Building Code
2) ICC IEBC International Existing Building Code
3) ICC IECC International Energy Conservation Code
4) ICC ICCPC Performance Code for Buildings and Facilities
5) ICC IRC International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings
6) ICC ISPSC International Swimming Pool and Spa Code
k. MBMA: Metal Building Manufacturers Association
1) MBMA Manual Metal Building Systems Manual
l. MSMA: Metal Stud Manufacturers Association

Rev. 0 5.2 - 7
m. AWC: American Wood Council

1) National Design Specification for Wood Construction - ASD/LRFD
n. PCA: Portland Cement Association
o. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
1) OSHA 1910 Regulations for General Industry
2) OSHA 1926 Regulations for Construction
p. PCI: Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute
1) PCI TR-7 PCI Standard Design Practice
2) PCI MNL-116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Structural Precast Concrete Products
q. PCI: Precast Concrete Products
1) PCI MNL-117 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Architectural Precast Concrete Products
2) PCI MNL-119 PCI Drafting Handbook - Precast and Pre-Stressed Concrete
3) PCI MNL-120 PCI Design Handbook
4) PCI MNL-123 Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and
Pre-Stressed Concrete
r. PCI: Pre-Stressed Concrete
1) PCI MNL-124 Design for Fire Resistance of Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete
2) PCI MNL-129 Precast Pre-Stressed Concrete Parking Structures:
Recommended Practices for Design and Construction
3) PCI MNL-138 PCI Connections Manual for Precast & Pre-Stressed Concrete
Construction
8. Related Sections:
a. Refer to Chapter 2 for definitions and references, and units conversions.
d. Refer to Chapter 4 for geotechnical investigation.
e. Refer to Chapter 5 for Design Guidelines related to all disciplines.
9. Approvals
The RCJ reviews and approves all reports, drawings and specifications related to design of
building structures within the RCJ jurisdiction. This is shared with the building owner, if other
than the RCJ.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated building structure achieves project
requirements as intended by the RCJ/building owner and as designed by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 8
C. Related Specifications and Details

1. Related Guideline Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS)
a. Under development.
2. Related Technical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD)
a. Under Development.
D. General Design Requirements

1. General
a. The adopted Model Building Code (the Saudi Building Code 2007) provides absolute
minimum design requirements for RCJ buildings structures. However, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor may resort to the codes and standards listed in Section 5.2.1.A for design
requirements not adequately addressed by the MBC.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop cost-effective designs that provide the RCJ
with the most efficient buildings structures. Therefore, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
incorporate repetitive/modular structural members and components in designs.
c. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall design all structures in the scope of work, and shall
not relegate this task, directly or indirectly, to a Fabricator or Contractor. Use of the word
“Similar” in description of details is discouraged. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
provide sufficient details on the drawings so that structural work can be accurately priced
and constructed.
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate structural work with all other disciplines,
and be “proactive” in this by reviewing all other disciplines’ related drawings, and be aware
of revisions in the other disciplines designs at the various design stages (10%, 30%, 60%,
90% and 100%). This would ensure incorporation of all coordination-related revisions in
the final structural design.
e. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of all loads and requirements of other
disciplines, including those for housekeeping, inertia bases, operating weights and
equipment, window washing equipment etc..
f. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall verify that there are no conflicts of “space” in the
design and that structural framing is not clashing with any other components of the
building introduced by other disciplines’ designs.
g. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall show all structural penetrations, due to above
conflicts, on the drawings and show sections through the building in critical areas
indicating the location on the structure and its relation in space to the conflicting
components.
h. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall review and design all “secondary” structures detailed
on other disciplines’ drawings, such as stairs shown on architectural drawings, retaining
walls shown on landscape drawings, mechanical platforms shown on mechanical
drawings.
i. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate, design, and detail all connections of non-
structural elements to supporting structural elements.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 9
j. Building structures shall be configured to comply with the Fire and Smoke Protection
Features chapter of the MBC, and as directed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
k. Other structures shall be configured for fire and smoke protection in accordance with
industry standards, or as directed by the RCJ.
l. Design Details:
Proper drainage shall be provided for the following conditions or locations:
1) All surfaces of the structure exposed to weather shall be sloped to drain.
2) Intersecting surfaces forming valleys or pockets that may retain water shall be
arranged to provide proper drainage of the surfaces.
3) Structural steel and wood members shall be designed so that they would not retain
moisture or, when arranged in pairs or multiples, water or moisture is not trapped
between the members.
4) Structural items such as expansion plates, rocker joints, and surfaces intended to
permit movement shall be designed so that they are protected against direct contact
with water or condensation and shall be detailed to readily drain water.
5) Surfaces and members shall be designed so that water may be drained from points
where steel contacts or enters into masonry or concrete.
2. Strength
Buildings and other structures, and all parts thereof, shall be designed and constructed to
support safely the factored loads in the load combinations defined in this subsection without
exceeding the specified strength limit states for the materials of construction. Alternatively,
buildings and other structures, and all parts thereof, shall be designed and constructed to
support safely the nominal loads in the load combinations defined in this subsection, without
exceeding specified allowable stresses for the materials of construction.
3. Serviceability
Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance, maintainability,
durability and comfort of its occupants are preserved under normal usage. Limiting values of
structural behavior for serviceability (such as maximum deflections and accelerations) shall be
chosen with due regard to the intended function of the structure. Serviceability shall be
evaluated using appropriate load combinations for the specified serviceability limit states.
Serviceability limit states, service loads, and appropriate load combinations for serviceability
requirements can be found in ASCE/SEI 7-05, Appendix C and Commentary to Appendix C.
Service loads, as stipulated herein, are those that act on the structure at an arbitrary point in
time and are not usually taken as the nominal loads.
a. Camber
Where camber is used to achieve proper position and location of the structure, the
magnitude, direction and location of camber shall be specified in the structural drawings.
1) For Reinforced Concrete Members:

(a) Beam and Slab Form Cambers:
(1) Where beams and/or slabs have centerline to centerline support spans
greater than or equal to 9 m, the forms shall be cambered up 3 mm for
each 3 m of span.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 10
(2) Where cantilevered beams and/or slabs have centerline of support to end
of member spans greater than or equal to 3 m, the forms shall be
cambered up 25 mm for each 3 m of cantilever span.
2) For Pre-Cast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Members:
(a) Camber for all pre-cast/pre-stressed members shall be designed in accordance
th
with the PCI design hand book, 6 edition, Chapter 4, Section 4.8.
3) For Structural Steel Members:

(a) Camber for all structural steel members shall be designed in accordance with the
SBC 2007-306, Chapter 12, Section 12.1 and AISC DG-3, Chapter 5.
b. Deflections
Deflections in structural members and structural systems under appropriate service load
combinations shall not impair serviceability of the structure. Generally, deflection of
structural members shall not exceed the more restrictive of the limitations specified in:
1) SBC 2007-301 Table 1.4-1.
2) SBC 2007-304 For Concrete Structural Members.
3) SBC 2007-305 For Masonry Structural Members.
4) SBC 2007-306 For Steel Structural Members.
Conditions to be considered include levelness of floors, alignment of structural members,
integrity of building finishes, and other factors that affect normal usage and function of the
structure. For composite members, additional deflections due to shrinkage and creep of
concrete shall be considered in the design.
c. Drift
Drift of a structure shall be evaluated under service loads to provide required serviceability
performance of the structure, including integrity of interior partitions and exterior cladding.
Drift under strength load combinations shall not cause collision with adjacent structures or
exceed the limiting drift values specified by the MBC.
1) Drift of a structure shall not exceed the limitations outlined in the SBC 2007-301
Chapter 10, Section 10.12 for seismic loading concerning stability under ultimate
loading condition.
2) Drift due to wind shall be checked under service level loads and shall not exceed
h/500, where “h” is story height of the structure with the following exceptions:
(a) For brittle cladding, story drift shall not exceed h/600.
(b) For glazed cladding, maximum story drift shall be limited to 10 mm.
d. Vibration
1) Floor systems susceptible to vibration shall be designed so that vibrations would have
no significant adverse effects on the intended occupancy of the building.
2) Where the fundamental vibration frequency of a structural system supporting an
assembly occupancy used for rhythmic activities such as jumping exercises,
gymnastics, pedestrian loading, vibrating machinery, etc. is less than 6Hz, the effects
of resonance shall be investigated by means of dynamic analysis.
(a) For Concrete Structural Members:

Rev. 0 5.2 - 11
Pre-Cast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Structural Members shall be designed for

th
vibration in accordance with PCI Design Hand Book, 6 edition, Chapter 9,
Section 9.6.
(b) For Steel Structural Members:
Steel Structural Members shall be designed for vibration in accordance with AISC
DG-3, Chapter 6 and DG-11.
e. Expansion and Contraction
The effects of thermal expansion and contraction of a building shall be considered in the
design. Damage to building cladding can cause water penetration and may lead to
corrosion-related problems.
f. Connection Slip
The effects of connection slip shall be included in the design where slip at bolted
connections may cause deformations that impair serviceability of the structure. Where
appropriate, the connection shall be designed to preclude slip in accordance with the SBC
2007-306, Chapter 10, Section 10.3.
4. Analysis
a. Load effects on individual structural members shall be determined by methods of structural
analysis that take into account equilibrium, general stability, geometric compatibility, and
both short- and long-term material properties.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop an accurate 3D model of the structure which
captures actual rigidities of the lateral force resisting systems and accurate load
application. The total lateral force is generally distributed to the various elements of the
lateral-force-resisting system in proportion to their rigidities, including rigidities of horizontal
bracing systems and diaphragms.
5. Risk Category
Each building and structure shall be classified in accordance with the SBC 2007-301 Chapter
1, Section 1.6 for the purposes of applying “Importance Factor” in flood, wind and earthquake
provisions. Where a referenced standard specifies an occupancy category or the risk category,
it shall not be taken as lower than the occupancy category specified therein.
6. Counteracting Structural Actions
All structural members and systems, and all components and cladding in a building-type or
other structure, shall be designed to resist forces due to earthquake, wind, soil and hydrostatic
pressure and flood loads, with consideration of overturning, sliding, and uplift, and continuous
load paths shall be provided for transmitting these forces to the foundation. Where sliding is
used to isolate the elements, the effects of friction between sliding elements shall be included
as a force. Where all or a portion of the resistance to these forces is provided by dead load,
the dead load shall be taken as the minimum dead load likely to be in place during the event
causing the considered forces. The effects of vertical and horizontal deflections resulting from
such forces shall be considered in the design.
7. Self-Straining Forces
In addition to the self-straining effects from restrained dimensional changes due to
temperature, moisture, shrinkage, creep, and similar effects described in the previous sections,
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also consider the self-straining effects on structural
members due to:

Rev. 0 5.2 - 12
a. Angular Distortion Due to Differential settlement:

Building or other structures shall be designed such that angular distortion of the structure
is within the limits specified in the SBC 2007-303, Chapter 5, Table 5.2. In case these
limits cannot be met, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the effect of angular
distortion to structural elements in the design.
b. Sensitivity Analysis:
The value for Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (ks) shall be verified from in situ tests for
sensitive and important structures. Where ks cannot be verified, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall perform sensitivity analysis with a minimum of two different values of the
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction values. Selected ks values for sensitivity analysis shall be
minimum ½ ks and maximum 2ks, where ks is the best estimated subgrade modulus
recommended in the GDR.
E. Design Loads
1. General
a. Design loads, load combinations, and design methods shall be as provided in the MBC
and in the respective standards and material building codes referenced by the MBC.
Any conflicts in definition, notation, terminology, or methodology between the MBC and
the other codes and standards referenced in the MBC shall be evaluated and
reconciled.
b. Design loads not provided in the MBC shall be determined and established in
accordance with the references and standards listed in this subsection. Loadings not
covered by the references and standards in this manual shall be obtained from
available technical literature, manufacturer’s data, or be carefully formulated. Such
formulation shall be described in the design basis report and detailed in the
calculations. Where there is conflict between standard and other available data, the
most current acceptable data or practice shall be used, subject to RCJ approval.
c. Design loads and their sources shall be clearly indicated on construction documents in
accordance with the provisions of the MBC. Dead weights of prefabricated components,
unit and concentrated live loads, dead and operating weights of fixed equipment, and
any loadings that are in excess of the code prescribed weights and loads shall be
indicated in the General Notes section of the drawings and referenced in the floor plans
drawings.
2. Special Considerations
a. Factors that may result in differences between actual and calculated loads, which shall be
considered in the design include:
1) Actual weights of members and construction materials may exceed the values used
in design due to such conditions as increased member thickness resulting from
deflections of formwork and supports.
2) Allowance shall be made for the weight of future wearing, protective, or finish
surfaces where there is high probability that such surfacing may be applied.
3) Special consideration shall be given to the likely types and positions of partitions.
Insufficient provision for partitioning may reduce future utilization of the building.
b. Future Change of Occupancy

Rev. 0 5.2 - 13
1) Where use and/or occupancy of all or part of a building structure could be changed
in the future, design loads shall be increased as required to those of the anticipated
future use and occupancy.
2) The above increase in design loads shall only be made when such changes are
reflected in the architectural design. Increased design loads and architectural
changes implemented for this purpose shall be described in the design basis report
and detailed in the calculations.
3. Applicable Loads
a. Dead load (D).
b. Live load, except roof live load, including any permitted live load reduction (L).
c. Roof Live load including any permitted live load reduction (Lr).
d. Combined effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake induced forces (E).
e. Load due to fluids with well-defined pressures and maximum heights (F).
f. Flood load (Fa).
g. Load due to lateral earth pressures, ground water pressure or pressure of bulk materials
(H).
h. Rain load (R).
i. Self-straining force (arising from contraction or expansion resulting from temperature
change, shrinkage, moisture change, creep in component material, displacements due to
differential settlement, or combinations thereof) (T).
j. Load due to wind pressure (W).
Members of the structure shall be designed for the combination of loads and forces that can
occur simultaneously to produce the most critical design conditions as specified in the MBC
code.
4. Dead Loads (D)
a. For purposes of design, the actual weights of materials of construction and fixed service
equipment shall be used. In the absence of definite information, values used shall be
subject to the approval of the RCJ.
b. Where tanks, vessels, bins, or other containers of significant weight are located in a
structure, the dead weight of the item shall be applied to the structure at the points of
support. The dead weight reactions of connected pipelines and supported conveyance
systems shall also be included the design.
c. Minimum allowance of 0.2 kN/m² shall be added to self-weight of floor or roof system to
account for weight of mechanical ducts, electrical cabling and plumbing runs, etc..
d. Minimum allowance of 0.5 kN/m² shall be added to self-weight of floor or roof system to
account for additional weight due to unpredicted increase in slab thickness. Actual weight
shall be used if predictable,
e. The structural design shall consider “sloped screed” weight for roof as dead load. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall clearly indicate minimum and maximum “screed” thicknesses
on construction drawings.
f. Where a roof garden is located in a structure, self-weight of soil (wet) shall be applied to
the structure.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 14
g. In areas of a building where partitions other than permanent partitions are shown on the
drawings, or where partitions might be added in the future, the following allowances shall
be made for the weight of partitions:
1) For Light Gauge Steel Framed partitions: 1.0 kN/m²
2) For Masonry partitions: 2.0 kN/m²
Partition allowance used in design shall be shown on the drawings, including type of
partition anticipated.
In cases where dead load of partitions is counteractive, the load allowances shall not be
included as counteracting dead load in design calculations.
5. Live Loads (L)
a. Live loads used in the design of buildings and other structures for uses and occupancies
which are not specified in the MBC shall be based on the maximum loads expected for
the intended use or occupancy, but shall in no case be less than a uniformly distributed
unit load of 1 kN/m² or a line load of 1 kN/m.
b. Handrails, guards, grab bars, accessible seats, accessible benches, and vehicle barrier
systems shall be designed and constructed to the more stringent of the structural
requirements of the SBC 2007, IBC 2009.
c. Where tanks, vessels, bins, or other containers of significant weight are located in a
structure, those items and their content shall be treated as live loads, calculated based on
operating weight of the item and the fluid/infill material in the filled item. The minimum live
load calculated as such shall not be less than 1 kN/m².
d. Where moveable (on wheels) tanks, vessels, bins, or other containers of significant
weight are located in a structure, those items and their contents shall also be treated as
live loads, calculated based on operating weight of the item and the fluid/infill material in
the filled item. The live load calculated as such for an item shall be divided by the number
of wheels and applied as concentrated loads placed on the structure in a manner that
maximizes load effects. The minimum live load on each wheel in kN shall not be less than
the area of the item divided by the number of wheels. Floor systems shall be evaluated
for punching, as warranted by the magnitude of the applied load.
e. For listing of minimum uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads, refer to the SBC
2007-301 Chapter 4, Table 4-1 / 4-2 / 4-3.
f. For occupancies or uses not designated herein, the specified live loads due to use and
occupancy of the area shall be determined from analysis of the loads resulting from the
weight of :
1) The probable assembly of persons.
2) The probable accumulation of equipment and furnishing.
3) The probable storage of materials.
Analysis methods and results shall be subjected to RCJ approval.
6. Roof Live Loads (Lr)
a. Minimum uniformly distributed Roof Live Load to be used for Structures in JIC and RIC:
1) Flat Roof = 1.0 kN/m²
2) Sloped Roof = 1.0 kN/m² for slope ≤ 20°

Rev. 0 5.2 - 15
= 0.6 kN/m² for slope > 20°

3) Minimum Roof Live Load for accessible roofs, Lr = 2.0 kN/m²
4) For Roofs used for promenade purposes, Lr = 3.0 kN/m²
5) For Roofs used for Roof Garden and Assembly purposes, Lr = 5.0 kN/m²
b. Minimum specified concentrated live loads on an area of roof shall be:
1) 1.3 kN over an area of 750 mm x 750 mm.
7. Rain Loads (R)
a. Reference SBC 301 Chapter 8.
b. Coordinate with RC for expected rainfall in specific project area and the minimum rain
load to be used in design.
8. Flood Loads (Fa)
a. Reference SBC 301 Chapter 5, Section 5.3.
b. Use of ASCE 7-05, Chapter 5 is permitted with local data provided by the MBC.
c. Army Corps of Engineers Publication, EM-1110-2-2502, Engineering and Design of
Retaining and Flood Walls
9. Wind Loads (W)
Buildings and other structures, including the main wind force-resisting system and all
components and cladding thereof, shall be designed and constructed to resist wind loads as
specified herein with reference to the SBC 2007-301, Chapter 6.
a. The Basic Wind Velocities for Jubail Industrial City (JIC) and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
(RIC) are as follows:
1) 3 Second Gust Wind Velocity (km/hr.)
(a) Jubail Industrial City = 155
(b) Ras Al Khair Industrial City = 160
b. The wind exposure condition for all building sites shall be Exposure D. For modifications
to existing structures, the wind exposure may be that of the original design, unless
directed otherwise by the RCJ.
c. Story Drift due to Wind Loads.
1) Story drift limitations shall be in accordance with Section 5.2.1.D.
2) For structures supporting steel pipelines, story drift limitations shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the Process Industry Practices Guidelines.
d. The design wind pressure for components and cladding shall be calculated in accordance
with the SBC-301, Chapter 7, but shall not be less than 0.5 kN/m² acting in either
direction normal to the surface.
e. In the design of interior walls and partitions, consideration shall be given to differences in
air pressure on opposite sides of the wall or partition which may result from:
1) Pressure differences between the windward and leeward sides of a structure.
2) Stack effects due to a difference in air temperature between exterior and interior of
the structure.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 16
3) Air pressurization by the mechanical services of the structure.

10. Seismic Loads (E)
a. Design Seismic Acceleration Parameters:
The seismic acceleration parameters, SS and S1, for Jubail Industrial City (JIC) and Ras
Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) are as follows:
1) Seismic Acceleration Parameters (in %g)
(a) Ss: 0.2 Second Response Spectra Mapped Acceleration
(b) S1:1.0 Second Response Spectra Mapped Acceleration
Ss S1
Jubail Industrial City 10% 3.1%
Ras Al- Khair Industrial City 10% 3.2%
b. Every building structure, and portion thereof, shall be designed and constructed to resist
the effects of earthquake motions. Certain non-building structures, as described in the
MBC, are similar to buildings in seismic behavior and as such shall be designed using
similar seismic requirements.
c. Seismic design shall be taken to completion in the calculations regardless of whether the
wind base shear exceeds the seismic base shear. (The specified earthquake loads are
based on post-elastic energy dissipation in the structure, and because of this fact, the
provisions for design, detailing, and construction shall be satisfied even for structures and
members for which load combinations that do not contain the earthquake effect indicate
larger demands than combinations including earthquake).
d. Additions to existing structures shall be designed and constructed to resist the effects of
earthquake motions in accordance with the provisions of the MBC. Existing structures
and alterations to existing structures need only comply with these provisions when
required by the MBC.
e. Story drift due to seismic loads limitations shall be in accordance with the provisions of
the SBC 2007-301, Chapter 10, Section 10.9.7 or 10.10.6 depending on analysis
procedure.
f. For structures supporting steel pipelines, story drift limitations shall be in accordance with
the provisions of the Section 5.2.3.H.
11. Self-Straining Loads (T)
a. Self-Straining Thermal Forces:
1) Provision shall be made for stresses or movements resulting from variations in
temperature. The rise and fall in temperature shall be fixed for the locality in which
the structure is to be constructed and shall be computed from an assumed
temperature at the time of erection. Due consideration shall be given to the lag
between air temperature and the interior temperature of massive concrete members
or structures.
o
(a) Thermal expansion change in temperature shall be 25 C.
o
(b) Thermal contraction change in temperature shall be 15 C.
Rev. 0 5.2 - 17
b. Thermal Reactions from Piping, Ductwork, or Other Systems.

1) Thermal loads from any source other than ambient atmospheric temperature
changes shall be treated as dead loads.
2) The thermal load effects of a mechanical system on a structure shall be based on
the actual design temperatures of the system and the type of support utilized. The
following cases shall be considered in the load combinations:
(a) Maximum expansion of the system with the maximum expansion
of the structure.
(b) Maximum expansion of the system with the maximum contraction
of the structure.
(c) Maximum contraction of the system with the maximum expansion
of the structure.
(d) Maximum contraction of the system with the maximum contraction
of the structure.
Where it is not possible for the conditions to occur simultaneously, the case may be
omitted. Justification for omission of any load case shall be provided to RCJ for
approval.
3) The load induced by each condition shall be considered in the load combinations, as
well as the condition of no thermal reactions.
4) Where sliding connections are used, the friction force shall be considered in the
design of the supporting structural elements.
5) Where slotted connections are used, the slots shall be of sufficient length to
accommodate maximum displacements of the system. Bolts used in slotted
connections shall be finger tight (very slightly loose) and restricted from loosening -
either by the use of double nuts (interlocked) or nylon insert lock-nuts, by thread
deformation, or by tack-welding.
12. Loads Due to Lateral Earth Pressure, Ground Water (H)
Load effect on basement walls and/or underground structures due to lateral earth pressure and
ground water shall be calculated in accordance with the SBC 2007-301, Chapter 5, Section 5.1
and 5.2.
13. Hoisting Devices Loads

Structures that support hoisting devices (cranes, monorails, jibs, etc.) shall be designed for the
forces induced by the operation or movement of the components of the hoisting device.
a. Hoisting device loads shall be considered live loads.

b. Impact, braking, and other relevant dynamic forces shall be considered in the design.
c. For exterior devices, the effect of wind shall be considered in the design.
d. For devices that can move freely when exposed to wind, safety restraint mechanisms
shall be provided.
e. For hoisting devices that are exposed to the local environment such that dust, sand,
and windborne corrosive chemicals can accumulate on the device, the most robust
protective coating system available from the manufacturer shall be used, subject to RCJ
approval. Sealed protective covers shall be used to prevent dust and sand intrusion into
Rev. 0 5.2 - 18
the electrical motors and mechanical gears of the device. The effect of continuous
exposure to elevated temperatures and of the contained heat from enclosure of the
motors shall be considered in the selection of the device.
f. Hoisting device loads shall be combined with other design loads in accordance with
ASCE 7. Any load combinations that could produce the maximum stress or govern for
stability shall be considered in the calculations.
g. Anchorage of jib cranes to a structure shall be based on the forces generated by the
dead weight of the jib mechanism plus the rated load plus 25% impact. The anchorage
shall be capable of supporting the jib crane with the jib located at all of the possible
angular positions and with the hoist (if movable) located at the position that causes the
most unfavorable effect.
h. Cranes: Engineering and configuration of the supporting crane rail runway girders and
the loads imparted to the building structure shall be established in accordance with the
more conservative of the provisions of the AISE (Technical Report 13), and the
provisions in the Crane Loads section of the report.
i. Vibration Loads: Where vibration is induced by equipment such as pumps, blowers,
fans and compressors, supporting members shall be designed to prevent fatigue failure
and to avoid misalignment or malfunction of machinery and equipment. Refer to AISE
Technical Report No. 13 for guidelines on vibratory loadings.
14. Crane Loads
All vertical, lateral, and longitudinal crane forces (reactions) shall be transferred through a
clearly defined and continuous load path to the ground. All lateral forces shall be transferred
through frame action to the transverse bracing system of the building. All longitudinal forces
shall be transferred as axial loads through girders and brace members. Brace systems shall
preferably be tension-only X-braces. Brace connections shall be designed as slip-critical and
configured with minimal eccentricity, and shall transfer forces into rigid elements of the main
structural members.
The crane live load shall be the rated capacity of the crane. Design loads for the runway
beams, including connections and support brackets, of moving bridge cranes and monorail
cranes shall include the maximum wheel loads of the crane and the vertical impact, lateral, and
longitudinal forces induced by the moving crane.
a. Maximum Wheel Load. The maximum wheel loads shall be the wheel loads produced by
the weight of the bridge, as applicable, plus the sum of the rated capacity and the weight
of the trolley with the trolley positioned on its runway at the location where the resulting
load effect is maximum.
b. Vertical Impact Force. The maximum wheel loads of the crane shall be increased by the
following percentages to determine the induced vertical impact or vibration force:
1) Monorail cranes (powered) 25%
2) Cab-operated or remotely operated Bridge cranes (powered) 25%
3) Pendant-operated bridge cranes (powered) 10%
4) Bridge cranes or monorail cranes with hand-geared bridge, trolley, and hoist 0%
c. Lateral Force. The lateral force on crane runway beams with electrically powered trolleys
shall be calculated as 20 percent of the sum of the rated capacity of the crane and the
weight of the hoist and trolley. The lateral force shall be assumed to act horizontally at the

Rev. 0 5.2 - 19
traction surface of a runway beam, and shall be distributed with due regard to the lateral
stiffness of the runway beam and supporting structure.
d. Longitudinal Force. The longitudinal force on crane runway beams, except for bridge
cranes with hand-geared bridges, shall be calculated as 10 percent of the maximum
wheel loads of the crane, and assumed to act horizontally at the top of the runway beam.
e. Crane Loading Condition:
For a bridge crane, the location and lateral movement of the trolley produces 4 crane
conditions which shall be considered in the design of crane buildings:
1) The maximum wheel loads at the left end truck and the minimum wheel load at the
right end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the left.
2) The maximum wheel loads at the left end truck and the minimum wheel load at the
right end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the right.
3) The maximum wheel loads at the right end truck and the minimum wheel load at the
left end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the left.
4) The maximum wheel loads at the right end truck and the minimum wheel load at the
left end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the right.
f. Design Loads for Runway Beams and Suspension Systems:
1) Cranes shall be located longitudinally in the aisle in the positions that produce the
most unfavorable effect on the runway beam, runway beam connections, and
support brackets or suspension systems. Consideration shall be given to eccentric
loads which may be induced by a single crane.
2) The following recommendations are applicable to the design of runway beams and
their connections and support brackets or suspension systems for single or multiple
cranes:
(a) Single Crane
The runway beam, including its connections and support bracket or
suspension system, shall be designed for the maximum wheel loads plus
100% of the vertical impact, acting simultaneously with 100% of the lateral
force assumed to act horizontally in either direction.
(b) Multiple Cranes

(1) If the runway beams are simple span and the cranes are separated by
spacer struts or electronic spacer controls so the minimum distance
between the nearest end truck wheels of any two adjacent cranes equals
or exceeds the span of runway beam, only the crane loads for the crane
producing the most severe effect need be considered for the design of
the runway beam.
(2) If the runway beam is continuous or the cranes are not separated as
described above, the runway beam, including its connections and support
brackets or suspension system, shall be designed for the worst case
crane loads of: a single crane producing the most unfavorable effect, or
for any two adjacent cranes producing the most unfavorable effect. For
the two crane condition, the maximum wheel loads without vertical impact
for the two cranes shall be used simultaneously with 50% of the lateral
force for each of the two cranes or 100% of the lateral force of either of

Rev. 0 5.2 - 20
the cranes, whichever produces the most unfavorable effect. For

continuous runway beams, the lateral force of adjacent cranes shall be
considered to act in the same direction or opposing directions.
g. Design Loads for Building Frames and Support Columns:
1) The crane or cranes shall be located longitudinally in the aisles in the positions that
produce the most unfavorable effect on the building frame or support columns.
Consideration shall be given to eccentric loads which may be induced by a single
crane operating in a crane aisle, or by a crane or cranes operating in one crane aisle
of a building with multiple crane aisles.
2) The following requirements are applicable to the design of building frames and
support columns for crane buildings with single or multiple cranes acting in one or
more aisles:
(a) Single Crane Aisle with One Crane
The frame and support columns shall be designed for the 4 crane loading
conditions. The wheel loads without vertical impact shall be used with 100% of the
lateral force.
(b) Single Crane Aisle with Multiple Cranes

(1) If the runway beams are simple span and the cranes are separated by
spacer struts or electronic spacer controls so the minimum distance
between the nearest end truck wheels of any two adjacent cranes
equals or exceeds the largest bay of the building, only the crane loads
for the crane producing the most severe effect need be considered for
the design of the building frame and support columns.
(2) If the runway beams are continuous or the cranes are not separated as
described above, then the frame and support columns shall be designed
for the worst case crane loads of: a single crane producing the most
unfavorable effect, or of any two adjacent cranes producing the most
unfavorable effect. For the two crane condition, the wheel loads without
impact shall be used simultaneously with 50% of the lateral force from
both of the two cranes, or with 100% of the lateral force from either of
the two cranes, whichever produces the most unfavorable effect.
(3) The crane loading conditions shall be used for each crane. When the
lateral forces for two cranes are used, only those conditions in which
lateral forces act in the same direction need be considered.
(c) Multiple Crane Aisles with Single Cranes
(1) Frame and support columns shall be designed for the single crane
producing the most unfavorable effect or for any one crane acting in
each of any two aisles. For the two cranes, the wheel loads without
impact shall be used with 50% of the lateral force from both of the two
cranes or 100% of the lateral force from either of the two cranes.
(2) The crane loading conditions shall be used for each crane. When the
lateral forces for two cranes are used, only those conditions in which the
lateral forces act in the same direction need be considered.
(d) Multiple Crane Aisles with Multiple Cranes

Rev. 0 5.2 - 21
(1) If the runway beams are simple span and the cranes in all aisles are
separated by spacer struts or electronic spacer controls so the minimum
distance between the nearest end truck wheels of any two adjacent
cranes equals or exceeds the largest bay of the building, only the crane
loads for the crane producing the most unfavorable effect in each aisle
need be considered for the design of the building frame and support
columns.
(2) If the runway beams are continuous or the cranes are not separated as
described above, then the frame and support columns shall be designed
for the most unfavorable effects of crane loads of:
(i) A single crane,
(ii) Any two adjacent cranes in any one aisle,
(iii) Any two adjacent cranes in one aisle acting simultaneously with
one crane in any other non-adjacent aisle, or
(iv) Any one crane acting in each of any two adjacent aisles.
(3) The crane arrangement producing the most unfavorable effect on the
frame and support columns shall be used. For these conditions, the
wheel loads without impact for each crane shall be used with 50% of the
lateral force from each of the cranes acting simultaneously, or with
100% of the lateral force from any one of the cranes.
(e) The crane loading conditions shall be used for each crane. When the lateral
forces for two or more cranes are used, only those conditions in which lateral
forces act in the same direction may be considered.
h. Crane Supports:
1) Vertical deflection of support runway girders shall not exceed the following limits due
to maximum wheel load(s), without impact (where L = the span length):
(a) Top running CMAA Class A, B, and C cranes L/600
(b) Top running CMAA Class D cranes L/600
(c) Top running CMAA Class E and F cranes L/1000
(d) Under running CMAA Class A, B, and C cranes L/1000
(e) Monorails L/1000
2) Vertical deflection of jib cranes shall not exceed L/225 (where L = the maximum
distance from the support column to load location along the length of the jib beam)
due to the maximum lifted load plus hoist load(s), without impact.
3) Lateral deflection of support runway girders for cranes with lateral moving trolleys
shall not exceed L/400 (where L = the span length) based on a total crane lateral
force not less than 20% of the sum of the weights of the lifted load (without impact)
and the crane trolley. The lateral force shall be distributed to each runway girder with
due regard for the lateral stiffness of the runway girders and structure supporting the
runway girders.
4) Bumper Force. Crane stops shall be designed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements, or, if not specified, the following load:

Rev. 0 5.2 - 22
𝑊𝑊 𝑉𝑉²
F=
(2 𝑔𝑔 𝑇𝑇 𝑛𝑛)
where:
F = Design force on crane stop, kN
W = 50% of bridge weight+90% of trolley weight, excluding the lifted load,
kN
V = Rated crane speed, m/s
g = Acceleration of gravity, 9.81 m/s2
T = Length of travel (m), of spring or plunger required to stop crane, from
crane manufacturer (usually 50 mm)
n = Bumper efficiency factor (0.5 for helical spring, see mfg. for hydraulic
plunger)
15. Vibration Loads
Refer to vibration requirements above (13.i).
16. Railway Loads
a. Design buildings and other structures interfacing with railway traffic shall be based on
AREMA.
b. Building structures supporting railway traffic on curved tracks shall be designed to resist
centrifugal forces due to railway traffic by shear walls or braces, with a clearly defined and
continuous load path to the foundation.
c. Building structures supporting railway traffic shall be founded on deep foundations, unless
recommended otherwise in the GDR.
d. Surcharge load due to railway traffic on supporting and adjacent building structures shall
be considered in the design of these structures.
17. Areas Accessible to Vehicular Loads
a. Areas in building structures accessible to vehicular traffic shall be designed with
consideration for permitted vehicular loads.
b. Floors in garages or portions of building used for storage of motor vehicles shall be
designed for the uniformly distributed live loads shown in SBC 2007-301, Chapter 4, Table
4-1 or the following concentrated load:
1) For garages restricted to passenger vehicles accommodating not more than nine
passengers, 13.0 kN acting on an area of 100 mm by 100 mm, footprint of a jack.
2) For mechanical parking systems without slab or deck which are used for storing
passenger cars only, 10 kN per wheel.
c. Areas accessible to pedestrian traffic, but not to vehicular traffic, shall be designed for their
intended use, but not for less than the greater of:
1) The live load of 12.0 kN/m².
2) Rain load prescribed in Section 5.2.1.E.
d. Transportation structures shall be designed in accordance with Subsection 5.2.4.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 23
F. Load Combinations
Buildings and other structures shall be designed using the allowable or ultimate strength
provisions of Section 2.3 or 2.4 of the SBC 2007, with the exceptions listed in this sections.
Either Section 2.3 or 2.4 of the SBC 2007 shall be used exclusively for proportioning elements
of a particular construction material in the structure.
G. Geotechnical Information
1. General
The information in this section is intended to provide the A/E and/or EPC Contractor with the
basic understanding of the geotechnical investigation process and the Geotechnical Design
Report (GDR).
2. Geotechnical Investigation
Geotechnical investigation is required for all projects, unless otherwise waived by the RCJ.
Specific requirements for geotechnical investigation are included in this manual.
3. Geotechnical Design Report
For all projects, a GDR is prepared based on geotechnical investigation at the project
site and submitted to the RCJ for review and approval. The report generally include:
a. A plot showing the location of all test borings and/or excavations.
b. Elevation of the water table, if encountered.
c. Recommendations for foundation type and design criteria, including net allowable bearing
pressure and the allowable peak bearing pressure of the stratum of soil where shallow
footings would normally be founded, and provisions to mitigate the effects of expansive
and highly plastic soils.
d. Recommend type of cement for foundation and protection degree for concrete surfaces in
contact with soil, such as:
1) Retaining, basement, pit, and other walls.
2) Soil densities for dry, moist, and saturated conditions.
3) Active and passive pressure coefficients for the soil.
4) Recommended procedure for combining hydrostatic pressure with lateral soil
pressure.
e. For walls resisting lateral forces transmitted through soil resulting from the presence of
distributed or concentrated surcharge loads, the report provides recommended procedures
for determining resulting vertical and horizontal pressures on vertical and horizontal
surfaces.
f. Where soil stratigraphy or presence of fills is indicated, and the potential for non-uniform
settlement is high, the GDR provides instructions on how to achieve uniform foundation
settlement.
g. Where existing structures are adjacent to new construction, the GDR provides instruction
on how to mitigate the effects of new construction on the existing structures.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 24
h. When expansive and highly plastic soils are present, special provisions are usually made
in the foundation design and construction to safeguard against damage due to these soils.
In such cases, the GDR provides design and construction criteria to mitigate the prevailing
conditions.
H. Concrete Design
1. General
Engineering and configuration of concrete structures shall be as provided in the SBC 2007-304
& 304C and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC.
The design, construction, maintenance and selection of materials covered herein shall comply
with the SBC 2007-304, Chapter 3, Section 3.8.
For RCJ specifications and typical construction detail drawings refer to Section 5.2.1.CC.
2. Materials
a. For reinforced concrete structures, Portland Pozzolan Cement concrete (Type I Cement)
shall be used in accordance with RCJ guideline specifications for structural concrete for
the following types of structures:
1) All concrete structures in contact with the ground or the ground water – up to 1 m
above finished grade.
2) All waterfront structures in contact with seawater or in a location subject to seawater
spray.
3) All mass-concrete construction (mass concrete is defined here as monolithically
poured structural elements with least dimension over 1m in thickness). Construction of
mass concrete elements shall comply with ACI provisions for casting and curing of
mass concrete. Where mass concrete is required in a project, the drawings shall
include locations, notes, and construction instructions. Due to the increased cost,
effort, and time associated with the casting and curing of mass concrete, A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall make an effort to avoid proportioning structural members as
mass concrete.
b. For reinforced concrete not in contact with the ground, Type I Cement shall be used in
accordance with the RCJ guideline specification for structural concrete.
c. For plain concrete blinding, Type V Cement shall be used in accordance with the RCJ
guideline specification for structural concrete.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.2.6.D and TABLE 5.2.6.A, for additional requirements on corrosion
protection.
3. Concrete Durability
a. Concrete Durability shall meet the requirements of the SBC 2007-304, Chapter 4.
b. Engineering of concrete structures shall be performed with due consideration of the

corrosive nature of the local environment. Unless conditions warrant a more aggressive
treatment, details for the protection of concrete shall meet the requirements of the RCJ,
guideline specifications, and typical construction details drawings.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 25
4. Cast-In-Place Concrete
a. Reinforced Concrete
1) Reinforcing steel details shall be in accordance with the provisions of the SBC 2007-
304, Chapter 7. Use of ACI 315 is allowed where the specific design requirements are
not addressed by the MBC.
2) Tolerances for fabrication and placement of reinforcing steel bars shall be in
accordance with ACI 117M, “Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction
Materials and Commentary [Metric]”. The effect of these tolerances shall be
considered in the design.
3) The minimum yield strength of reinforcing steel shall be as follows:
(a) Reinforcing Steel Bars : 414 MPa (60 ksi)
(b) Welded Wire Fabric : 240 MPa (36 ksi)
4) Epoxy coated reinforcing steel shall be used for those portions of structures situated
below grade and up to 1m above grade, provided that the reinforcement is not
cathodically protected.
5) The maximum size of reinforcing steel bars to be used shall be Ø32 mm and the
minimum shall be Ø10 mm. Larger reinforcing steel sizes shall be used only when
technically feasible, design cannot be achieved, and only upon approval of the RCJ.
6) Configuration of structural members such that they have the maximum code permitted
ratio of reinforcing steel area to concrete area shall be avoided. For members that
intersect with other members, the preferred maximum ratio shall be 75% of the
maximum code permitted ratio. Exceptions are permissible for isolated cases.
7) Particular care shall be exercised in the configuration of joints that have members
framing from multiple directions.
(a) Bar spacing limitations shall apply to all splices and laps in the joint.
(b) Curvature of bends of bars larger than 12mm shall be considered.
(c) Positions of offset bends of column bar splices shall be considered.
(d) When multiple beams frame horizontally into a joint, beams other than the primary
beam shall be configured with the top longitudinal reinforcing steel positioned
successively below the longitudinal steel of the primary beam.
(e) Longitudinal beam reinforcing steel cannot be in the same position in space as the
longitudinal column steel. Size and spacing of members shall be selected such
that reinforcing steel does not have to be reoriented or repositioned at the joint.
Bunching of bars at the joint shall not be permitted.
(f) Bottom reinforcing steel that terminates at a joint shall be hooked only if required
by structural analysis or by structural integrity provisions.
8) Concrete Compressive Strength to be Used in Building Structures
The following shall govern the uses of concrete for the design of reinforced concrete
Building Structures:
(a) Structural Concrete

Rev. 0 5.2 - 26
The minimum design compressive strength (ASTM C39M) of structural concrete,

including those with minimum reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature
control, shall be 25 MPa.
(b) Pre-cast/Pre-stressed Concrete
The minimum design compressive strength (ASTM C39M) of Pre-cast/Pre-
stressed Concrete, shall be 35 MPa.
(c) Non-Structural Concrete
The minimum design compressive strength (ASTM C39M) of unreinforced
concrete of no significant structural value such as concrete blinding or lean
concrete, and concrete for duct banks shall be 20 MPa.
b. Plain Concrete
1) Engineering of plain concrete structures shall be in accordance with the Structural
Plain Concrete chapter of the MBC and/or codes and standards referenced in the
MBC.
(a) Structural plain concrete basement walls shall be exempt from the requirements
for special exposure conditions.
(b) Design and construction of soil-supported slabs, such as sidewalks and slabs–on-
ground, shall not be governed by ACI 318-08 unless they transmit vertical loads or
lateral forces from other parts of the structure to the soil.
2) For special structures, such as arches, underground utility structures, gravity walls,
and shielding walls, provisions of this subsection shall govern where applicable.
3) Minimum Concrete compressive strength for plain concrete shall be no less than 20
MPa.
c. Architectural Concrete
1) A cast-in-place architectural concrete structure shall be any structure indicated on the
Architectural drawings that does not participate in the resistance of loads as an
element or a component of the building structure, and that is not an off-the-shelf
architectural element. They exist independently and resist no loads other than those
applied directly to them. Examples are concrete steps, benches, signs, fences,
screens, artwork, etc.. that are of such nature that only minimal and repetitive grid
reinforcement is required. They shall not be shown on the structural drawings unless it
is deemed that there is complexity or potential risk to human life to warrant more
careful detailing.
2) Engineering of architectural concrete structures shall be directed by the A/E and or
EPC Contractor’s Architectural Engineer.
3) The finished surfaces of a cast-in-place architectural concrete structure shall be as
specified on the architectural design drawings.
d. Concrete Finishing
1) Concrete finishes exposed to view in the finished structure shall be as specified in the
Architectural construction documents. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D for fair-face
concrete color finish requirements.
(a) For all concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished structure, a rough-
formed finish, defined as having an as-cast concrete texture imparted by the form
facing material, tie holes filled, defects repaired, and fins and other projections

Rev. 0 5.2 - 27
removed, shall be acceptable. Unformed surfaces shall be struck off smooth,

unless additional concrete is to be cast against the surface, whereupon the
surface shall be struck off and intentionally roughened. Surface roughness shall
be as provided in ACI 318-08.
(b) The finished surface for cast-in-place concrete that will have an architectural finish
adhered shall be coordinated with the supplier of the finish product.
5. Precast / Pre-Stressed Concrete
a. Precast/pre-stressed concrete structures shall be fabricated at an off-site, certified
manufacturing facility.
b. Engineering of Precast/pre-stressed concrete structures shall be performed by the
manufacturer, unless noted otherwise.
c. Engineering of Precast/pre-stressed concrete structures shall be as provided in the SBC
2007-304, Chapter 16 & 18 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the
MBC, and in accordance with the provisions and recommendations of the PCI Design
Handbook, MNL 120.
d. Fabrication, rebar placement, embedment placement, and erection tolerances shall be in
accordance with PCI MNL 116.
6. Precast Architectural Concrete
Engineering of precast Architectural concrete shall be in accordance with the provisions and
recommendations of the PCI Architectural Precast Concrete Manual, MNL-122.
7. Pre-Engineered/Pre-Fabricated Precast Buildings
Modular building design for utilization of precast concrete elements, the following directive for
designing of reinforced concrete buildings shall be adopted as a favored construction method.
a. Whenever feasible and economically viable, precast elements shall be utilized in the
design. Whenever feasible, precast elements already manufactured in the Kingdom shall
be utilized, taking into consideration Saudi material availability and manufacturing
capability. Design of structural details such as connections shall be complete.
b. A complete single set of structural design calculations and contract drawings shall be
developed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor such that the construction contractor can
submit an alternative proposal for structural systems and components, which are shown
on the Contract bid package with minimum alterations and additional calculations. The
alternative proposal may consist of either a modified cast-in-place or precast concrete
structural system. To comply with this requirement, the general layout, structural details
and dimensions of structural components shall reflect the modular concept (i.e., variation
of dimensions and details shall be minimized, and conversely, repetition of dimensions and
utilization of identical building components shall be maximized).
8. Post-Tensioned Concrete
Engineering of post-tensioned concrete structures shall be as provided in the SBC 2007-304,
Chapter 18 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC, and in
accordance with the provisions and recommendations of the PTI Post-Tensioning Manual,
TAB.1.
9. Composite Construction
a. Engineering and configuration of composite steel and concrete structures shall be in
accordance with the SBC 2007-306, Chapter 9.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 28
b. Specific products used in the implementation of a composite system that are not in direct
compliance with the building codes shall be certified by the ICC Evaluation Service.
Engineering shall be based on the values and limitations provided in the ICC Evaluation
Service Report (ESR). Applications outside of the range of testing shall not be permitted.
Test reports and design values produced by other independent product testing and
certification organizations may be used, subject to RCJ approval.
10. Slab on Grade
a. Design Requirements:
1) In general, slabs on grade structures are designed for bending stresses due to uniform
loads and concentrated loads and for in-plane stresses due to drying shrinkage and
subgrade drag resistance. When appropriate for the type of facility being designed,
slabs are designed for the effects of warehouse loadings involving aisles, posts and
racks, etc. In such instances, particular attention shall be given to the design for
negative moment in aisles.
2) Proper construction methods, workmanship, and concrete mix proportioning generally
follow the guidelines of ACI Committee 302 Report, "Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab
Construction". Slabs are required to have a minimum thickness of 100 mm. TABLE
5.2.1.A provides a criteria for selection of slab thickness based on design live load, for
3
slabs on grade having a reaction modulus (ks) of at least 2.75 kg/cm .
TABLE 5.2.1.A SLAB ON GRADE LIVE LOAD.
Maximum Uniform Design

Thickness of Slab
Live Load
100 mm 7 kN/m²
150 mm 12 kN/m²
200 mm 20 kN/m²
Unless otherwise specified above, the correct slab thickness shall be determined in
accordance with the Portland Cement Association (PCA) Publication, "Slab Thickness
Design for Industrial Concrete Floors on Grade." In the PCA design process
compressive strength is converted to modulus of rupture, which is then reduced by a
factor of safety to obtain the maximum allowable flexural tensile stress. The maximum
allowable flexural tensile stress is then used to determine the required slab thickness.
3) When partition walls are situated over slab on grade, the slab on grade shall be
thickened under partition wall.
4) Mechanical equipment pads shall be isolated from slab on grade.
11. Joints
a. Slab on Grade Joints:
1) Expansion Joints (EJ)
(a) Expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate the effects of displacements
caused by shrinkage, temperature, creep, and settlement.
Rev. 0 5.2 - 29
(b) Expansion joints shall be located such that they divide the slab on grade into a
number of approximately equal individual sections.
(c) Expansion joints shall be provided at approximately 50 m centers both
longitudinally and transversely. For exposed slabs, expansion joints shall be
provided at approximately 25 m spacing.
(d) Expansion joints shall be at least 25 mm wide.
2) Contraction/Control Joints (CCJ)
(a) Contraction joints shall be provided to accommodate the effects of shrinkage,
temperature, and settlement. Contraction joints attempt to control the location of
cracks that occur due to contraction of the slab.
(b) Contraction joints shall be located such that they divide the slab on grade into a
number of approximately equal individual sections between edges and expansion
joints.
(c) Contraction joints shall preferably be straight, located on or near building grid
lines, and at approximately equal intervals between grid lines.
(d) The location of contraction joints shall be clearly indicated on the plans.
3) Construction Joints (CJ)
(a) Construction joints shall be provided to facilitate separate casting of different
sections of a slab. A construction joint may be used as a contraction joint provided
that the contraction joint features are implemented.
(b) Construction joints shall preferably be straight.
(c) The location of construction joints shall be clearly indicated on the plans.
4) All Joints
(a) Where the use of the slab involves the movement of traffic or heavy equipment
across the joint, provisions shall be made to transfer shear across the joint. The
shear transfer mechanism shall permit free movement (opening and closing) of the
joint, and, where required, lateral translation.
(b) Joints shall preferably be straight and located on or near building grid lines.
b. Structure Movement Joints:
1) Movement joints shall be provided in structures to accommodate the effects of
displacements caused by wind, seismic, other lateral loads, shrinkage, temperature,
creep, and settlement. Joint width shall be determined based on the calculated service
displacements of the structures on both sides of the joint. The minimum clearance
between deflected structures shall be 12 mm. Expected maximum and minimum
deflected joint widths shall be indicated on the structural drawings.
2) For reinforced concrete structures, movement joints allowing for at least 25 mm shall
be provided at approximately 50 m centers both longitudinally and transversely.
3) Movement joints shall be located such that they divide the structure into a number of
individual sections.
4) The joints shall pass through the height of the structure above ground level in one
plane – preferably straight. Joints must be designed to accommodate all expected
movements at the joint.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 30
5) The structure shall be framed on both sides of a movement joint.

6) Details for accommodating finished floor, internal and external wall, and other sliding
joints per architectural requirements shall be provided.
7) Movement joints shall be provided where there is significant change in the type of
foundation.
8) Movement joints shall be considered where there is significant change in the height of
the structure.
9) Joint spacing in exposed parapets shall be approximately 12 m.
10) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with all disciplines to ensure that all
systems crossing the joints are configured correctly to accommodate the expected
range of movement. This includes mechanical services pipes, ducts, and wires;
electrical services; architectural finish, glazing, and cladding systems; and any other
elements or systems that cross or are near a movement joint.
I. Masonry Design
1. General
a. Engineering and configuration of masonry structures shall be as provided in the SBC
2007-305 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC. Any
conflicts in definition, notation, terminology, or methodology between the MBC and the
codes and standards referenced by the MBC shall be evaluated and reconciled.
For RCJ specifications and typical construction detail drawings refer to Section 5.2.1.C.
b. This section provides engineering, planning and design guidelines for masonry structures
including:
1) Reinforced Concrete masonry.
2) Non-Reinforced masonry.
3) Load Bearing Masonry.
4) Non-Load bearing masonry.
5) Composite Construction.
c. Engineering of masonry structures shall be performed with due consideration of the
corrosive nature of the local environment. Unless conditions warrant a more aggressive
treatment, details for the protection of exposed masonry shall be in accordance with RCJ
specifications and details.
2. Composite Construction
a. Composite masonry wall systems are comprised of multiple masonry wall units set side by
side and tied together utilizing metal ties.
b. Metal ties transfer shear stress between wythes allowing interaction between masonry wall
units.
c. Composite masonry is usually constructed without vertical steel bar reinforcement, but
cores may or may not be fully grouted depending on the required wall geometry and
loading.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 31
d. Refer to the National Concrete Masonry (NCMA) TEK Notes and SBC 2007-305 for
general design guidance.
3. Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) Masonry Units
a. AAC masonry units are ultra-light concrete blocks with a unique cellular structure which
provides increased energy efficiency, fire resistance and acoustical properties.
b. Structural Properties
AAC masonry units may be used in low-rise load-bearing buildings as shear walls, partition
walls, and infill walls. See TABLE 5.2.1.B for AAC Physical Properties.
TABLE 5.2.1.B – AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
ASTM C1693 – PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS

Average
Compressive
Nominal Dry Drying
Strength Density Limits
Strength Bulk Density, Shrinkage
(MPa)
Class %
≤0.02
3 3
minimum kg/m kg/m
AAC-2 2.0 400 350-450 ≤0.02
500 450-550 ≤0.02
AAC-4 4.0 500 450-550 ≤0.02
600 550-650 ≤0.02
700 650-750 ≤0.02
800 750-850 ≤0.02
AAC-6 6.0 600 550-650 ≤0.02
700 650-750 ≤0.02
800 750-850 ≤0.02
c. Mortar
1) The first course of AAC units may be placed on a thin mortar set consistent with ASTM
C270.
2) The remaining courses are set on thin bed mortar fabricated from Portland cement
based adhesives consistent with ASTM C1660.
3) Moisture

Rev. 0 5.2 - 32
(a) AAC Unit moisture content is in the range of 25% to 30% at fabrication and
reduces to 4% to 6% within four years. The linear shrinkage is 0.02%.
(b) It is recommended that a breathable coating be applied to the AAC Units to

facilitate moisture dissipation.
4. Approval of Special Systems of Design or Construction

Comply with the SBC 2007-305 Section 1.3.5.
a. Design Load
1) Design loads shall be determined and established in accordance with
Section E5.2.1.E.
b. Basic Design References
1) SBC 2007-305 and/or The Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI
530/ASCE 5/TMS 402), Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS
602) shall be the basic references for design of masonry structures.
5. Design Basis
a. General
1) Masonry walls used as a part of the structural system shall be reinforced.
2) Un-reinforced masonry walls shall be used for non-structural applications, but such
walls shall be designed to sustain lateral loads.
3) Structures of masonry construction shall be designed such that the masonry is not in
contact with the soil.
b. Control Joints
1) Cracking of walls constructed of concrete masonry units is caused by the development
of tensile stresses within the wall assembly which exceed the tensile strength of the
materials comprising the assembly. Generally, it is due to tensile stresses which
develop when wall movements accompanying temperature and moisture change as
restrained by other elements, or when concrete masonry places restraint on the
movements of adjoining elements. Moisture loss depends on the shrinkage potential of
the masonry units and the drying conditions at the building site, expressed in terms of
relative humidity. Major methods employed to control cracking in masonry structures
are:
(a) Materials specifications to limit the drying-shrinkage potential,
(b) Reinforcement to increase crack resistance, and
(c) Control joints to accommodate movement.
2) Any crack control measure taken shall be compatible with the structural design for
lateral forces. Control joints provide a complete separation of the masonry. Hence,
location of control joints fixes the length of wall panels and, in turn, the rigidity of the
walls, the distribution of lateral forces and the resulting stresses. Therefore, adding,
eliminating or relocating control joints shall not be permitted once the structural design
is completed.
3) Control joints shall never be assumed to transfer bending moments or diagonal
tension across the joint. Joint reinforcement and bars in nonstructural bond beams
shall be terminated at control joints; deformed bars in structural bond beams shall be
Rev. 0 5.2 - 33
made continuous for length of the diaphragm. Using quality controlled concrete-
masonry-units and the prescribed minimum reinforcement for lateral forces, cracking is
not normally a problem when maximum horizontal spacing of control joints is limited to
4 times the diaphragm-to-diaphragm height or 30 m on center, whichever is less.
c. Connection to other Elements
1) Connections between vertical resisting elements (shear wall-panels) and horizontal
resisting elements (floor and roof diaphragms) shall be designed to make the walls
integral parts of the structural system. Positive means shall be provided for transferring
shear from the plane of the diaphragm into the shear wall-panels.
2) In designing connections or ties, it is necessary to carry out the forces and their stress
paths, and to make connections along each path consistent with the basic
assumptions of behavior and distribution of forces according to relative rigidities.
Connections contribute to integrity of the structure, and therefore they shall be properly
designed and fabricated. Design and detailing of connections shall be based on the
actual nature of forces transmitted through the connection (static/dynamic,
tensile/compressive, etc..).
3) Connections Design
(a) Forces to be considered in the design of joints and connections are gravity loads;
temporary erection loads; horizontal loads normal to wall; horizontal forces parallel
to wall; and creep, shrinkage, and thermal forces – separately or combined, as
applicable.
(b) Bond beams acting as flange (chord) for horizontal diaphragms shall be reinforced
at dummy control joints to resist chord stresses induced by diaphragm-beam
action.
(c) Maximum spacing of anchor dowels or bolts used in connections shall not exceed
1.2 m, and connections shall designed based on rational analysis in accordance
with well-established principles of mechanics. Anchor dowels or bolts shall not be
used in structural applications where they are subjected to tensile forces.
(d) Strength of connections, as a general rule, shall be sufficient to develop useful
strength of connected structural elements. Joints and connections for elements
resisting lateral forces shall be designed for at least 2 times the calculated shear
when using the prescribed lateral loads, except that the connection need not be
required to develop forces greater than the ultimate capacity of the connected
elements.
4) Cautionary Notes for Designers and Detailers
Avoid connection and joint details which could result in stress concentrations that
might cause spalling or splitting at contact surfaces. Liberal chamfers, adequate
reinforcement, and cushioning materials are a few means by which adverse effects of
stress concentrations may be reduced. Avoid direct bearing of heavy concentrated
loads on concrete masonry units. Avoid welding to any embedded metal items which
might cause damage to the adjacent masonry by spalling, in particular where the
expansion of the heated metal is restrained by masonry. All bolts and dowels which
are embedded in masonry shall be grouted solidly in place with not less than 25 mm of
grout between bolt or dowel and the masonry. At tops of piers and columns, vertical
bolts shall be set inside the horizontal ties.
d. Reinforcements around Openings

Rev. 0 5.2 - 34
1) Since the area around wall openings is vulnerable to failure, at least two (2) Ø12 mm
diameter reinforcing bars shall be provided around the perimeter of openings.
2) The lintel bars above the opening may serve as the top horizontal reinforcing bars.
J. Steel Design
1. General
a. Engineering of steel structures shall be as provided in the SBC 2007-306 and in the
respective material building codes referenced by the model building code. Any conflicts in
definition, notation, terminology, or methodology between the MBC and the codes and
standards referenced in the MBC shall be evaluated and reconciled with the model
building code.
For RCJ specifications and typical construction detail drawings refer to Subsection 5.2.1.C.
b. Either the Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or the Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) method may be used for design of steel structures. The entire structural system
shall be designed based on the selected method.
c. Engineering of steel structures shall be performed with due consideration of the corrosive
nature of the local environment. Unless conditions warrant a more aggressive treatment,
details for the protection of steel shall be in accordance with the RCJ specifications, or as
noted in Subsection 5.2.6, Corrosion Protection. Any deviations from the specified
corrosion protection methods shall require RCJ approval.
d. Guidance related to engineering, planning, and design of structural steel frames and
elements, including structural steel, steel joists, steel decks, composite construction, cold
formed steel, and pre-engineered buildings is provided in the next sections.
2. Structural Steel
a. Engineering and configuration of steel structures shall be as provided in the SBC 2007-
306 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC. Shape
designations shall be based on the metric system.
b. All structural steel exposed to the weather shall be galvanized or coated per the corrosion
protection subsection of this manual (5.2.6). Exposed anchor rods/bolts shall be provided
with an allowance for corrosion of 2 mm (i.e., required d + 4 mm, where “d” is diameter of
the anchor rod/bolt). Refer to Section 5.2.6.E for additional requirements on corrosion.
c. Steel structures shall be designed such that the steel is not in contact with soil.
d. Hot-rolled structural steel shape elements (such as webs, flanges, legs) shall have a
minimum thickness of 4 mm for use in bolted connections.
3. Steel Joists
a. Engineering and configuration of steel joists shall be as provided in the SBC 2007-306 and
in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC.
b. Joists used in floor systems shall be sized to minimize perceptible vibration.
1) K-Series joists are lower capacity joists ideally suited for roof systems.
2) LH and DLH are joists with higher capacity suitable for longer spans or for shorter
spans and heavier loads.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 35
3) Joist Girders are designed to carry reaction loads from joists or other members.
Economy is provided through the open web system of construction.
4) Refer to Standard Specifications from the Steel Joist Institute for design guidance such
as:
(a) Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series.
(b) Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, LH-Series.
(c) Standard Specifications for Joist Girders.
4. Cold Formed Steel
a. Cold formed steel shall be engineered in accordance with AISI S-100 and D-100. It shall
not be engineered in accordance with AISC.
b. Cold formed steel framing is an inexpensive structural system for the purpose of
constructing lightly loaded structures. The system is non-combustible and requires minimal
training and equipment to install. Capacity of studs, beams, and walls increases
substantially when adequate bracing is provided. Cold formed steel systems include the
following:
1) Loadbearing Wall Framing: System is capable of carrying horizontal and vertical load
systems when properly braced.
2) Exterior Non-Loadbearing Wall Framing: Able to carry wind and seismic horizontal
forces when utilized as exterior cladding system with brick, masonry or other
cementations material.
c. Cold formed steel members may be used to construct steel roof trusses for various spans.
d. Cold formed steel stud members shall meet the requirements of the “Steel Stud
Manufacturers Association.”
5. Pre-Engineered / Pre-Fabricated Metal Buildings (PEMB)
a. Engineering and configuration of pre-engineered metal buildings shall be as provided in
the Structural Steel sections of the SBC 2007-306 for hot-rolled steel members and AISI
S-100 for Cold Formed Steel members, and in the respective material building codes and
standards referenced by the MBC.
b. Additional design information and recommendations available from the Metal Building
Manufacturers Association (MBMA) may be used.
c. Engineering of the PEMB system - steel frame structure, girts, purlins, metal deck (roof
and side); all appurtenances, appendages, and accessories attached to the steel
frame; the connections of all system components; and the provision for connections to
attach all A/E and/or EPC Contractor coordinated building system components
(MEPS) - is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the PEMB system. The loading
effect of the functioning of all building components and systems attached to the PEMB
shall be considered for all operating conditions (doors opened or closed, monorail at
critical locations, motor start-up torque, etc.).
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with all relevant internal disciplines and
the PEMB Manufacturer to ensure that the PEMB is engineered and configured to function
with all interfacing building systems. The PEMB Manufacturer shall indicate on the
drawings the locations and magnitudes of all concentrated loads agreed upon in
coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and as provided in construction
documents.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 36
e. The PEMB Manufacturer shall provide to the RCJ and A/E and/or EPC Contractor all
PEMB reactions as service loads such that all load combinations required by the building
codes may be calculated. Factored loads may additionally be provided, if available.
f. The PEMB Manufacturer shall provide to the RCJ and A/E and/or EPC Contractor the
required layout of the anchor rods for the PEMB, including the required sizes, projections,
and other anchorage details for the PEMB member base attachments.
g. The PEMB Manufacturer shall provide erection and shop drawings to RCJ and A/E and/or
EPC Contractor for approval before commencing any physical work.
h. Engineering of substructure elements of a PEMB system is the responsibility of the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor’s structural engineer. Provision shall be made to resist all reactions
from the PEMB structural system and to transfer these reactions to the ground. Where
tension ties are used in the slab- on-ground or structural slab, A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall consider the presence of trenches or building MEPS services in the design.
Engineering and configuration of the anchor rods below the base plate of the PEMB
members shall be the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Engineering and
configuration of the attachment of the base member of the side deck to the supporting
base shall be the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and shall be consistent
with the PEMB system details.
i. Features of a PEMB System:
1) The PEMB superstructure steel is approximately 30% lighter than conventional
construction due to the tapered fabrication of structural steel and the use of light gage
members in roof and wall construction.
2) Delivery and installation time is reduced significantly for PEMB construction versus
conventional construction.
3) PEMB structures are approximately 20% less expensive to construct than
conventional construction for the following reasons:
(a) Installers are preapproved to construct PEMB facilities, and they are usually well
experienced in this type of construction.
(b) Installation details are the same over thousands of buildings. Repetition makes for
expertise in installation.
(c) Products used in the construction of PEMB such as doors, windows, roofing and
siding are the least expensive products available for the proposed facility use.
4) PEMB Manufacturer is generally concerned with the design of the superstructure, as
design of the substructure is the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
However, success of any PEMB project requires close coordination between the two
parties during both design and construction stages.
5) PEMB facilities may be a good fit for simple structures such as warehouses, industrial
centers, and trucking stations.
6) PEMB structures may not be applicable to more complex facilities where architectural
features drive the facility superstructure layout such as schools, courthouses, office
buildings, or hospitals.
7) The use of other more architecturally pleasing facade systems and other building
amenities may be utilized in PEMB facilities, however cost savings usually associated
with PEMB facilities may not always be realized.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 37
K. Wood Design
1. General
a. Engineering of wood structures shall be in accordance with the Wood Chapter of the IBC
2009.
b. All connection hardware shall be galvanized or stainless steel.
c. All lumber exposed to the weather and not within the closed airspace of a building
structure, shall be treated with preservatives consistent with AASHTO-M133 for
preservatives and pressure treatment processes.

Rev. 0 5.2 - 38
SUBSECTION 5.2.2 HIGH RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES
5.2.2 HIGH RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES
A. General
1. Introduction
This subsection mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for design
and construction of the RCJ high rise building structures, and provides the
minimum technical requirements to be adopted by the A/E and/or AE EPC
Contractors to enable safety, quality, and cost effectiveness in the design and
construction of high rise building structures and high rise building systems that
meet the needs and expectations of the RCJ. High-rise buildings are defined as
structures with an occupied floor located more than 23 m above the lowest level of
fire department vehicle access.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of
high rise building structures constructed of concrete and steel materials. The
design requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on a Model
Building Code (MBC) and industry standards.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall
govern all RCJ high rise building structures, as defined in the introduction herein.
4. Definitions
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for definitions.
b. Refer to Section 5.2.1.A for definition.
5. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for abbreviations.
b. Refer to Section 5.2.1.A for abbreviations.
a. Engineering of high rise buildings shall be as provided in the structural
design chapter of the MBC and in the respective material building codes and
b. Complete description of the lateral force resisting systems and of any special
mechanisms used for the dampening or control of lateral response in high
rise building structure shall be provided in the design basis report. The
systems shall be analyzed and detailed in the calculations, and their
important structural design parameters and limitations included in the general
notes section of the drawings.
7. Codes
High-rise buildings shall be designed based on the ASCE 7-05. Design and
construction of all RCJ high rise building structures shall be based upon the
requirements of this subsection and existing buildings standards. These shall
follow the provisions of the ASCE 7-05 and the special requirements specified the
MBC.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 39
d. Refer to chapter 4 for geotechnical investigation.
9. Approvals
The RCJ reviews and approves all studies, drawings and specifications related to
design of high rise building structures and systems within the RCJ jurisdiction.
This responsibility is shared with the high rise building structure owner, if other
than RCJ.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated high rise building structure
achieves project requirements as intended by the RCJ/building owner and as designed
by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.

D. Structural Design and Design Considerations

1. Structural Design
a. Engineering of high-rise buildings shall be as provided in the Structural Design
chapter of the MBC and in the respective material building codes and
b. Complete description of the lateral force resisting systems and of any special
mechanisms used for the dampening or control of lateral response shall be
provided in the design basis report, in the calculations, and in the structural
general notes on the construction drawings.
2. Design Considerations
a. High-rise buildings shall be designed as performance based structures as
outlined in various chapters of ASCE 7-05.
b. Linear seismic response spectra analysis shall be conducted using three
dimensional structural modeling.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 40
c. Nonlinear dynamic behavior of structure is required when the response

spectra analysis exceeds demand to capacity ratio outlined in the ASCE 7-05,
AISC 341, and AISC 360.
d. Site specific response spectrum to be used in structural design shall be as
e. Spectrum used in seismic design shall conform to the requirements of the
ASCE 7-05.
f. Non-Linear dynamic shaking motion is required, using the Maximum
Considered Earthquake shaking motion with a 5% damped acceleration.
g. Determine required wind speeds and associated pressures per the base wind
speeds specified in this section.
h. Consider wind tunnel studies that accurately model dynamic behavior.
i. Slab-Wall Connections
1) Concrete core walls provide substantial building support making
connections an important consideration.
2) Tower sway induces lateral deformation creating shear and rotation
forces in these connections.
j. Story Drift shall not exceed 0.5% of story height of any story for service level
shaking.
3. High Rise Building Limits
a. Concrete Structures
1) Construction
(a) Concrete rigid frame buildings are the preferred system for up to 20
stories.
(b) Concrete shear wall structures are the preferred system from 21 to 35
stories.
(c) Combination frame-shear wall structures are the preferred system
from 36 to 50 stories.
(d) Perimeter Concrete formed tube or bundled tube construction is the
preferred system from 50 stories to 75 stories.
b. Steel Structures
1) Construction
(a) Steel Staggered truss is the preferred system for up to 20 stories.
(b) Steel Rigid frame is the preferred system from 21 to 30 stories.
(c) Steel Rigid frame combined with concrete shear wall is the preferred
system from 31 to 40 stories.
(d) Steel belt truss is the preferred system from 41 to 60 stories.
(e) Steel framed tube and bundled tube arrangements are the preferred
system from 61 stories to 140 stories.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 41
E. Damping System
1. General
Dampers assist in the dissipation of energy generated by seismic shaking and
wind gust frequency.
a. Types of dampers are as follows:
1) Passive Dampers are uncontrolled and require no power to work.
(a) Examples of passive dampers are as follows:
(1) Viscous dampers.
(2) Friction dampers.
2) Active Dampers generate forces on a structure to counter wind or
seismic imposed disturbance.
(a) Examples of active dampers are as follows:
(1) Tuned mass damper.
(2) Tuned liquid damper.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 42
SUBSECTION 5.2.3 NON-BUILDING STRUCTURES
5.2.3 NON-BUILDING STRUCTURES

This subsection provides structural design criteria for structures other than buildings,
furnishes design guidance for various types of non-building structures, and identifies
special considerations with regard to certain materials in specific applications.
The non-building structures and systems covered under this subsection include:
• Drainage Structures.
• Catch Basins and Manholes.
• Pre-engineered Canopy Structures.
• Shade Structures.
• Water and Wastewater Structures.
• Liquid Retaining Structures.
• Flow Chambers.
• Valve Chambers.
• Thrust Blocks.
• Mechanical and Process Structures.
• Pipeline Corridor Structures.
• Electrical and Communication Structures.
• Generator Support Structures.
• Concrete Duct Banks.
• Security Crash Barriers.
• Supports for Signs, Luminaires, Traffic Signals.
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This subsection mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for
design and construction of the RCJ non-building structures, and provides the
minimum technical requirements to be adopted by the A/E and/or AE EPC
Contractors to enable safety, quality, and cost effectiveness in the design
and construction of non-building structures that meet the needs and
expectations of the RCJ. This subsection provides structural design criteria
for structures other than buildings, and furnishes design guidance on
materials and applications for these structures.
b. Non-building structures include all self-supporting structures that are not
included under the purview of the MBC, that resist gravity loads and
environmental and/or other lateral loads.
c. Engineering and configuration of non-building structures shall be in
accordance with the applicable provisions of the MBC and the standards of

Rev. 0 5.2 – 43
the various organizations referenced in this subsection, and as amended

herein.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of
non-building structures, constructed of various materials. This scope is limited to
non-building type structures and systems defined in the introduction to this
subsection. The design requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are
based on applicable provisions of the MBC, industry standards, and best practices
embraced by the RCJ.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall
govern design and construction of all RCJ non-building type structures and
systems listed in the introduction to this section and discussed herein.
4. Definitions
5. Abbreviations
a. For non-building structures not listed in this subsection, design requirements,
specifications, and construction details for such structures shall be developed
by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, for review and approval by the RCJ.
b. Although this section covers certain materials and special considerations for
those materials when used in particular applications, the category of
structures classified as "non- buildings" shall not be limited in materials to
those discussed in this subsection.
7. Codes
Design and construction of all RCJ non-building structures and systems shall be
based upon the requirements of this section and existing standards; these shall be
from the applicable requirements of the MBC and the codes and references
included herein.
a. Subsection 5.2.1.A: General Reference.
b. ACI: American Concrete Institute
1) ACI 554 Specification for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete
Materials and Commentary (Metric).
2) ACI 350M Metric Code Requirements for Environmental
Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary.
3) ACI 350.2R Concrete Structures for Containment of Hazardous
Materials.
4) ACI 351.1R Grouting between Foundations and Bases for Support
of Equipment and Machinery.
5) ACI 351.2R Foundations for Static Equipment

Rev. 0 5.2 – 44
6) ACI 351.3R Foundations for Dynamic Equipment

7) ACI 371R Guide for the Analysis, Design, and Construction of
Elevated Concrete and Composite Steel-Concrete Water Storage
Tanks
8) ACI 544.1R Report on Fiber Reinforced Concrete
9) ACI 544.2R Measurement of Properties of Fiber Reinforced Concrete
c. American Concrete Pipe Association
1) Concrete Pipe Design Manual
d. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association
1) AREMA: American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way
Association Manual for Railway Engineering.
e. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
1) ASCE 10 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures
2) ASCE/SEI: American Society of Civil Engineers – Structural
Engineering Institute
3) ASCE/SEI 48 Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures
4) ASCE/SEI 74 Guidelines for Electrical Transmission Line Structural
Loading
5) ASCE Publication Structural Reliability Based Design of Utility Pole
Structures
6) ASCE Design of Circular Concrete Tanks
7) ASCE Considerations for Rectangular Concrete Tanks
8) ASCE Engineering Practice Report 113
9) ASCE/SEI 49 Wind Tunnel Testing for Buildings and Other
Structures
10) ASCE/SEI 52 Design of Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Stacks
f. American Water and Waste Water Association
1) AWWA M42 Steel Water Storage Tanks
g. NACE RP0193 External Cathodic Protection of on Grade Carbon Steel tank
bottom
h. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1) ASTM A775M Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel
Reinforcing Bars
2) ASTM A934M Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated
Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
3) ASTM C478M Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced
Concrete Manhole Sections
i. API: American Petroleum Institute

Rev. 0 5.2 – 45
1) API 650 Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage

2) API 651 Cathodic Protection Systems
3) API RP 615 Installation of Underground Petroleum Storage
Tanks and Piping Systems
4) API RP 1632 Cathodic Protection of Underground Petroleum
Storage Tanks and Piping Systems
5) API STD Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage
Tanks
j. AWWA: American Water Works Association
1) M11 Steel Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation
2) M42 Steel Water Storage Tanks
k. PCA: Portland Cement Association
1) PCA Design of Rectangular Concrete Tanks
2) PCA Design of Circular Concrete Tanks
l. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
1) AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports of Highway
Signs, Luminaries and Traffic Signals, 5th Edition.
2) AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th Edition.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO), 2002.
3) AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification, American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 7th edition,
2014, with 2015 and 2016 interim revisions.
4) AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Drainage Structures
m. PCI: Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute
1) PCI MNL-120 PCI Design Handbook
n. PIP: Process Industry Practices
o. PTI: Post-Tensioning Institute
1) PTI TAB 1.0 Post-Tensioning Manual
p. STI: Steel Tank Institute
q. US Government Agencies
1) US Department of Defense, UFC-4-022
2) US Department of State, SD-STD-02.01
3) FEMA 430, Perimeter Security Design
r. TIA: Telecommunications Industry Association
1) TIA-222G Structural Standards for Antenna Supporting Structures
.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 46
9. Approvals
The RCJ reviews all studies, drawings and specifications related to design of non-
building structures within the RCJ jurisdiction. This responsibility is shared with
the structure’s owner, if other than RCJ.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated non-building structure and
systems achieve project requirements as intended by the RCJ/building owner and as
designed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Specific commissioning requirements for
systems are described in respective specifications.

D. Principles and Guidelines

1. Concrete
a. General
1) Concrete properties shall be selected to suit the expected conditions. For
discussion of considerations in selecting appropriate composition and
properties of concrete, refer to the RCJ specifications.
2) Portland-Pozzolan cement shall also be used for non-building structures.
For unreinforced concrete in contact with the earth, Type V cement
shall be used.
3) TABLE 5.2.3.A and Subsection 5.2.6.D shall be used for selection of
minimum concrete classes.
4) Refer to Subsection 5.2.6.D for additional guidance and requirements on
corrosion protection.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 47
TABLE 5.2.3.A – MINIMUM RECOMMENDED CONCRETE CLASSES
Mass concrete not exposed to deteriorating agents where mass

C20
rather than strength is the principal consideration
Drainage and Utility Structures C25
Structures to contain non-corrosive fluids (tanks and reservoirs) C30
Waterfront structures on fresh water C30
Reinforced concrete structures over seawater which are

sufficiently elevated so that they are ordinarily wetted by salt C30
water
Reinforced concrete decks of waterfront structures where the

C35
underside is frequently wetted by salt water
5) Concrete reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the RCJ

specifications. Epoxy coated reinforcement shall be used for the
following structures, provided that reinforcement is not cathodically
protected (Refer to Subsection 5.2.6.D):
(a) Portions of structures situated below grade and up to 1 m above
finished grade. Where splices with uncoated reinforcement occur,
splicing shall begin above this location.
(b) Drainage structures.
(c) Bulk structures to contain liquid and corrosive materials.
(d) Water related structures.
(e) Waterfront structures.
6) Concrete cover for protection of reinforcement shall be in accordance
with the RCJ specifications.
b. Fiber Reinforced Concrete:
Concrete and cementitious mortar may be reinforced with alkali-resistant,
chopped-glass fibers, short steel fibers, or various organic plastic fibers to
obtain enhanced strength, ductility, and toughness when compared to plain
concrete and mortar. Fiber reinforced concrete shall be used only if it is
approved by the RCJ. Design guidance and typical material properties are
found in the SBC 2007-304.
Requirements and limitations for use of Fiber Reinforced Concrete, are
included in the ACI 554.
2. Structural Design
a. Design Loads

Rev. 0 5.2 – 48
1) Design loads shall be in accordance with the guidelines listed in

Subsection E5.2.1, and as modified in this subsection.
2) Loadings not covered by the criteria in this section shall be obtained from
available technical or manufacturer’s literature, or carefully formulated
with RCJ approval.
3) Particular attention shall be given to wind, seismic, dynamic, and fatigue
loads on cable-supported structures and other similar force-oscillating
structures.
b. Design Stresses
1) Conform to MBC and referenced codes and standards.
c. Design Requirements:
1) Design shall conform to the general concepts and practices of the proper
design specification cited in this subsection. Where the design of a
particular structure or of a special case is not covered, the design
approach and technical formulae shall be based on available technical
literature or shall be carefully formulated, with to RCJ approval. If
formulated, such formulation shall be included in the design basis report
and related calculations.
2) Wherever possible, standard, readily available materials, units, and
systems of construction shall be specified. New materials, units, and
systems of a progressive nature or creative design concepts that are
economically and structurally sound may be used, subject to RCJ
approval.
3) Structural systems and materials shall be selected based on safety,
quality, and cost effectiveness.
4) Industrial buildings may be classified as non-building structures in certain
situations for the purposes of determining seismic design coefficients
and factors, system limitations, height limits, and associated detailing
requirements. Therefore, when the occupancy is limited primarily to
maintenance and monitoring operations, these structures may be
designed in accordance with the provisions of the SBC 2007-301,
Chapter 13 for non-building structures similar to buildings.
d. Stability:
1) Factor of Safety Against Overturning, Sliding, and Uplift
(a) Unless noted otherwise, stability relates to sliding, overturning, and
other sources of gross displacement and not to stability as related to
buckling. Structure or any of its elements shall be designed to
provide a minimum safety factor of 2.0 against failure to sliding,
overturning, or uplift. This required degree of stability shall be
provided solely by dead load plus any permanent anchorage.
(b) Stability calculations shall be based on service loads.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 49
(c) Soil shall not be considered unless it is directly supported by the

foundation and it is certain that the soil cannot be removed. Soil
wedges shall not be considered.
(d) For tanks, vessels, bins, etc. structures both cases (empty and with
content) shall be considered for stability analysis. Structural design
shall be based on the most significant load effects under the two
cases.
(e) Overturning, sliding, and uplift stabilities shall be evaluated with and
without the effects of buoyancy.
2) Factor of Safety Against Buoyancy
(a) The safety factor against buoyancy shall be at least 1.2 against the
highest anticipated hydrostatic uplift pressure. Where the weights
calculated are well established, this factor may be reduced to 1.1. In
determining the safety factors, allowance shall be made for future
removal of weights, removal of soil, for example.
E. Design Standards and Requirements
1. Culverts and Drainage Structures
a. Culverts convey surface water through a roadway or other structure into a
channel. The culvert fulfills both structural and hydraulic guidelines. When
designing a culvert, the following must be considered:
1) The most common shapes used are:
(a) Circular (most common shape)
(b) Pipe Arch and Elliptical (used where there is limited cover)
(c) Box (singular or multiple boxes)
(d) Three Sided Arch (used for spanning water with natural bed as the
bottom)
2) Shape selection shall be based on:
(a) Materials may be corrugated steel, precast concrete, or cast-in-place
concrete.
(b) Corrugated Steel structures may not be utilized without authorization
by the RCJ
(c) Material selection is governed by opening size and cost requirements
(d) Upstream elevation
(e) Embankment height
(f) Hydraulic performance
3) The selection of material for the culvert is based on the following:
(a) Structural strength (fill height, loading condition, foundation condition)
(b) Durability (considering water and soil environment)
(c) Availability of materials

Rev. 0 5.2 – 50
(d) Roadway or feature profile

(e) Channel characteristics
(f) Construction and Maintenance costs
(g) Service Life
Structural design of culverts is generally preceded with hydraulic design,
where the culvert material shape, and other related design parameters are
determined. Depending on the site and nature of the flow, the culvert
hydraulic design may call for additional measures such as protection against
scour due to high discharge velocity. Such protection may be in the form of rip
rap, concrete mats, or stone fill.
b. Loading
Drainage and culvert structures shall be designed for the loadings defined in
the AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges and in accordance
with the design requirements presented herein (See also Subsection 5.2.4).
c. Methodology
1) Design of circular and elliptical culverts are based on the Marson-
Spangler Design procedure, as detailed by the American Concrete Pipe
Association, Concrete Pipe Design Manual or the FHWA procedures.
(a) This procedure is based on the following criteria:
(1) culvert backfill,
(2) trench size,
(3) culvert geometry,
(4) culvert materials
2) Design of Concrete Box Culverts
(a) The principal criteria of design for culverts and drainage structures
are as follows:
(1) Depth of backfill over structure: 0 to 2.5 m.
(i) The greater the depth, the higher the lateral soil pressure
on the walls and the more soil weight on the culvert top
(ii) Truck loading is superimposed on the culvert side walls via
surcharge and is distributed through the backfill to the top of
the culvert.
(2) Depth of backfill over structure: Greater than 2.5 m
(i) Truck live load dissipates and does not need to be
considered
(ii) Soil weight on culvert top and passive pressure on side
walls governs the design
(3) Soil pressures shall be considered fully saturated unless a
drainage system is installed with the culvert system.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 51
(4) Interior culvert water pressure is required to be considered, but

rarely governs the design of culverts and drainage structures.
a. Design Considerations
Applicable loads and load combinations shall be analyzed per AASHTO
Standard Specification for Highway Drainage Structures (See Subsection
5.2.4). Additional design considerations include:
1) Drainage Structures are also referred to as manholes inlets vaults and
valve boxes. Drainage structures shall be designed to resist earth, water,
temperature, and other loads to which they will be subjected. Structural
design of concrete structures shall be in accordance with the SBC 2007,
ACI 350 or other applicable Codes and Standards.
2) Special consideration shall be given to the effect of proper allowance for
differential movement due to settlement, thermal expansion, etc., between
manholes and interconnecting elements and vaults. To the extent
practical, precast and prefabricated components for manhole construction
shall be used. Precast components shall be furnished in accordance with
ASTM C478M.
3) Design of underground precast structures shall include ground floatation:
(a) Downward gravity forces including the weight of walls, slabs, inverts,
and soil
(b) Weight of earth fill and overburden on extended base
(c) Frictional resistance of the soil on an extended edge
(d) Buoyant forces
4) The factor of calculated safety will determine if the structure complies with
the factor of safety required in ACI 350M.
5) The factor of safety against buoyancy may be addressed by increasing
member thickness, deeper placement or by anchors.
2. Catch Basins and Manholes
a. General:
1) Catch basins are vertical flow chambers for routing water to drainage
structures. Manholes are vertical access chambers for maintenance
personnel.
2) Structures may be reinforced precast concrete or reinforced cast-in-place
concrete and can be designed as round or rectangular in shape.
b. Design Requirements:
1) Catch Basins and Manholes are required to be watertight.
2) Resist buoyant forces.
3) Resist vertical Truck and/or Construction Loading and horizontal
surcharge loads when placed in vehicle right-of-way.
4) Design for lifting lugs and associated forces if structure is precast
construction.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 52
5) Minimum interior spacing between pipe openings shall be 150 mm.

6) Required structural design data
(a) Soil investigations are required to determine the following information:
(1) Soil and groundwater profile
(2) Strength parameters for natural soils and engineered fills
(3) Soil density (dry, moist, and saturated)
(4) Coefficients of lateral earth pressure
7) Design Loads:
(a) Rectangular Structures
P= Soil Weight x Active pressure Coefficient x Height + Water
Weight x Wall Height
(b) Round Structures
Hoop Stress = Pressure x Diameter / ( 2 x Wall Thickness)
(c) Add Truck Loading surcharges if needed per MOT
3. Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures Including Shades
a. General: Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures are those that are pre-
manufactured for assembly on any site. While some purchase contracts
provide for supply only, others provide for supply and installation, in the
appropriate situation, off-the-shelf structures may provide a readily available,
cost-effective method of shade provision.
b. References and Standards:
1) Saudi Building Code SBC-301 – Loads and Force Requirements
2) Saudi Building Code SBC-304 – Concrete Structures Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code SBC-305 – Masonry Structures Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code SBC-306 – Steel Structures Requirements
5) American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE-7 – Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures
6) Guidelines for Shade Planning and Design Grounded
c. Purpose:
1) The purpose of Canopy Structures is to provide maximum protection of
the public from UV rays and weather. Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures
(PECS) provide a cost and effective means to installing schedule, shade,
and weather protection.
d. The following preliminary steps are recommended in developing a Pre-
Engineered Canopy structure design.
1) Shade Audit
2) Opinion of Cost
3) Geotechnical Report

Rev. 0 5.2 – 53
4) Approval of the RCJ

5) Architectural/Landscape Architecture Layout of Canopy
e. Materials: Canopy materials are to be determined and shown on architectural
layout drawings.
f. Components of Canopy Structures: All superstructure components of the
canopy shall be designed, shipped, and installed by the Pre-Engineered
Canopy supplier including:
1) All member sizes and materials
2) Connections
3) Decking and Waterproofing
4) Engineering
5) Certificates and Warranties
g. Design and Construction:
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for supplying the following
information:
(a) Design Loads per the SBC-301 including with initial tensile forces for
tensile structures and possible ponding over canopies.
(b) Size, location and materials of proposed canopy structure
(c) Foundation design of proposed canopy structure
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible to review and approve
shop drawings prior to construction, verify materials and certifications
meet required parameters.
4. Shade Structures
Shade structures shall be designed based on the requirements of the proprietary
shade structure manufacturer, the soil parameters recommended in the GDR, and
the wind speed included in this manual.
5. Water and Wastewater Structures
a. General:
Water and Wastewater structures are required to have the following
characteristics:
1) Serviceability.
2) Durability.
3) Limited deflection and cracking in concrete structures
b. References:
1) ACI 350M, Metric Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering
Concrete Structures & Commentary.
2) Rectangular Concrete Tanks, Portland Cement Association (1994).
3) Circular tanks without Pre-stressing, Portland Cement Association (1993).

Rev. 0 5.2 – 54
4) Moments and Reactions for Rectangular Plates, US Bureau of

Reclamation.
c. Steel Reinforcement:
1) ASTM A775 Epoxy Coated reinforcing bars
2) Minimum Concrete Cover:
(a) Concrete Base = 75 mm.
(b) Concrete Wall = 50 mm.
(c) Stilling Basin = 150 mm.
d. Flotation Criteria (Flotation Stability Criteria for Concrete Hydraulic Structures,
US Army COE).
Loading Conditions FS
Construction 1.3
Normal Operation 1.5
Extreme (max. pool) 1.1
e. Crack Reduction:
1) Reinforcement Distribution - use smaller diameter reinforcement and
reduce bar spacing not to exceed 300 mm.
2) For additional requirements related to crack reduction, refer to following
standards:
(a) ACI 207 / ACI 224 / ACI 350.4 / ACI 350
f. Temperature and Shrinkage Reinforcement:
1) Refer to ACI 350M for minimum of reinforcement requirement.
g. Minimum Thickness:
1) As required by ACI 350M, wall with height greater than 3 m shall be a
minimum of 300 mm in thickness and shall have reinforcement on both
faces.
2) A minimum of 200 mm is required where 50 mm concrete cover is
desired.
6. Liquid Retaining Structures
a. General: Liquid retaining structures may comprise the following:
1) Concrete tanks;
(a) Buried or below ground
(b) Above ground
2) Structural steel:
(a) Buried or below ground
(b) Above ground
b. Concrete tanks shall conform to the following:

Rev. 0 5.2 – 55
1) ASCE – Design of Circular Concrete Tanks

2) PCA – Circular Concrete Tanks
3) ASCE – Considerations for Rectangular Tank Design
4) PCA – Rectangular Concrete Tanks
5) ACI 350M
In addition, the following parameters / considerations shall be incorporated
into the design:
6) Minimum steel for crack control
7) Concrete mix design
8) Minimize shrinkage effect by pouring the sections of the work between
construction joints in a sequence such that there will be suitable time
delays between adjacent pours
9) Curing methodology
c. Joint Sealing:
1) Provide PVC water-stops for all cast-in-place joint interfaces. Hydrophilic,
mastic type, water-stops shall not be used.
2) Interfaces between Precast and cast-in-place to be detailed on the design
drawings.
3) Where joint sealing is to include a primary and secondary seal, water
tightness test is to be completed and passed prior installation of
secondary seal.
d. Concrete Repairs:
1) Repair all air voids, bolt holes, and honeycombs using a suitable epoxy
mortar applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2) Repairs by bagging using cement mortar, etc. isl not be permitted. A work
method statement should be submitted to the RCJ for approval 48 hours
prior to undertaking repairs.
3) Other repair methodologies may be acceptable, subject to RCJ approval,
such as injection methods.
e. Water tightness Test:
1) Refer to ACI 350.1
2) Determine evaporation during testing period by direct measurement of
evaporation losses in a manner approved by the RCJ.
f. Steel tanks shall conform to the following:
1) API 650 - Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage
2) AWWA M42 - Steel Water Storage Tanks
3) Special corrosion resistant materials shall be used to protect steel tanks
including:

Rev. 0 5.2 – 56
(a) Cathodic Protection Systems. Per API-651 or NACE RP0193 External

Cathodic Protection of on-grade carbon steel tank bottoms.
(1) A steel tank that is coated and cathodically protected;
(2) A steel tank jacketed or clad with a non-corrodible material;
(3) A steel tank that is cathodically protected and internally-lined.
g. Tank Type Descriptions:
1) Protected Steel: Steel tank coated at the factory and built with sacrificial
(galvanic) anodes, and usually equipped with dielectric nylon bushings in
the bungholes.
2) Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic: While the term Fiberglass-Reinforced
Plastic (FRP) is technically correct, these tanks are more commonly
referred to as fiberglass tanks.
3) Polyethylene-Jacketed Steel Tank: This is a double-wall tank with a steel
inner wall and a plastic outer wall.
4) Fiberglass-Jacketed Steel Tank: This is a double-wall tank with a steel
inner wall and an outer wall made of fiberglass reinforced plastic material.
5) Clad Steel Tank: this is a steel tank that has a thick layer of non-
corrodible material such as fiberglass or urethane that is mechanically
bonded to the outer wall of the steel tank which protects the outer part of
the steel wall from corroding.
6) Steel with Impressed Current: These tanks are either:
(a) Bare steel tanks that have been retrofitted with an impressed current
system
or,
(b) Protected steel tanks that had an anode failure that could not be
remedied by addition of one or more galvanic anodes, and
consequently were retrofitted with impressed current.
h. In addition, the following parameters shall be incorporated into the wall and
floor plate design:
1) A minimum corrosion allowance of 2 mm for all plates.
2) Design limiting stress for base bending up to 0.5 x Yield Stress is
considered acceptable.
3) The maximum additional horizontal deflection due to filling shall be the
lesser of height/250 and 20 mm.
4) Careful handling methodologies or procedures are to be developed and
employed on-site to minimize plate buckling / deformation.
i. Bolted Steel Tanks:

1) Bolted steel tanks are not acceptable except for shorter design life
applications such as 15 years.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 57
7. Flow Chambers
a. General:
Flow chambers route water or wastewater.
1) Chambers are constructed from reinforced concrete – precast concrete or
cast-in-place concrete.
2) For size and dimensions of chambers, structural designer shall coordinate
with mechanical discipline and obtain required sizes.
3) Chambers shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of ACI-
350.
4) Chambers are required to be watertight, to prevent leakage of water or
wastewater.
5) Access in and out of valve chambers shall be in accordance with the
requirements of OSHA 1910.27 using FRP ladder and minimum 900 mm
diameter manhole opening.
6) Most Flow chambers have interior walls routing water to different sections
of the chamber. Therefore, Interior Walls are required to be designed for
unbalanced water levels.
7) Exterior walls are to be designed for interior water /wastewater levels.
8) Similar forces to catch basins and manholes apply to valve chambers.
(a) Soil Surcharge (assume saturated)
(b) Hydrostatic pressure (assume based on finished grade level)
(c) Buoyancy
(d) Truck Loading as per MOT
8. Valve Chambers
a. General:
Valve Chambers house buried high pressure utility control gates and valves
such as water mains or sanitary sewer control housing.
1) Chambers are constructed from reinforced cast-in–place concrete or
precast concrete.
2) For size and dimensions of chambers, structural designer shall coordinate
with mechanical discipline and obtain required sizes.
3) Chambers shall be designed in accordance with requirements of ACI-350.
4) Chambers are required to be watertight.
5) Access in and out of the valve chambers to be in accordance with the
requirements of OSHA 1910.27 using FRP ladder and minimum 900 mm
diameter manhole opening.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 58
6) Gate valves and bends in pressure pipe result in large reaction loads
superimposed on the chamber walls, floor, or both. Pipe supports and
associated attachments must be designed to resist these forces.
7) Concrete chamber walls, floors, and roof must be designed for pipe thrust
reaction forces.
8) Recommend incoming pressure pipe to be supported on interior of
chamber instead of on perimeter walls to prevent chamber water
penetration and wall damage.
9) Where environment around chamber is unknown and surcharge loads
cannot be established, a minimum surcharge of 15 kN/m² shall be
considered in the design of chamber walls.
10) Similar forces to catch basins and manholes apply to valve chambers.
(a) Soil Surcharge (assume saturated)
(b) Hydrostatic pressure (assume based on finished grade)
(c) Buoyancy
(d) Truck Loading as per MOT
(e) Interior water forces do not apply – Valve Chambers are required to
remain watertight.
9. Thrust Blocks
a. General:
1) When thrust blocks are required (Refer to Section 5.7.1.H.4) at tees, elbows,
wyes, caps, valves, hydrants, reducers, and caps, etc.. they should be
designed and constructed per the requirements of this subsection.
2) Inertial thrust forces act during the following situations:
(a) Change in fluid velocity
(b) Change in pipe size
(c) Change in pipeline direction
(d) Connection at different pipe types and connection diameters.
FIGURE 5.2.3.A depicts the net thrust force at various configurations. In each
case the expression for T can be derived by the vector addition of the axial
forces.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 59
FIGURE 5.2.3. A THRUST BLOCK TYPES.
1) For pipe diameter up to 300 mm, thrust block size shall be in accordance
with table shown on the RCJ standard details. For pipe diameter larger
than 300mm shall be designed in accordance with requirements listed
herein.
2) Internal design pressures and test pressure shall be specified by the
designer of the pipeline.
3) Locate the thrust block such that its passive pressure zone of influence
does not affect other utilities or structures. Thrust blocks should not be
placed in close proximity to each other to prevent overlap of passive
pressure soil zones.
4) Provide a minimum soil cover of 600 mm over all thrust blocks. For
pipelines under roadway right–of-way, provide a minimum 900 mm soil
over thrust block.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 60
5) Elevation of groundwater table must be below the bottom of the block for
upper vertical bends or the invert of the pipe for all other blocks. If the
actual groundwater table is higher than the above, then evaluate the
standard block size for submerged conditions and note that a special
design block may be required.
6) There are two possibilities for design of the thrust block. The first design
allows for small movement of the thrust block and the second does not
allow for such movement. The designer of the pipeline system shall
decide between the two possibilities based on the assumptions made at
the thrust block location in the pipeline analysis. Thrust blocks which rely
on lateral resistance of the soil will generally undergo small movement
before passive soil resistance is developed. On the other hand, thrust
blocks which rely on soil frictional force will generally develop frictional soil
resistance practically without any slippage or movement. Thrust blocks
shall be designed considering either lateral or frictional soil resistance,
and never both of them together.
7) For thrust blocks designed to rely on lateral soil resistance, soil
investigation is required to determine the following information:
(a) Soil and groundwater profile
(b) Strength parameters for natural and engineered fills
(c) Soil Classification
(d) Soil density (dry, moist and saturated)
(e) Coefficients of lateral pressure
Depending on the lateral soil pressure assumed in the design (full passive
or fraction of it), the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall include the
displacement associated with the assumed soil pressure in the analysis of
the pipeline.
This design follows the NFPA 24 Code, and is commonly used for thrust
blocks associated with small diameter pipes commonly used in residential
and commercial areas. (a)
Groundwater elevation must be determined and if applicable, buoyancy

effects must be considered in the design.
8) General considerations and earth pressure theories to be used when

designing thrust blocks.
(a) Horizontal bends, reducers, tees, TS&V, TA&V, plugs and caps.
(1) Design horizontal bends, reducers, tees, TS&V, TA&V, plugs and
caps using the appropriate earth pressure theories and state the
specific references if used in the design calculations.
(2) For blocks in cohesive soils, evaluate the soil resistance in terms
of short and long term shear strengths and use the lowest
resistance between the two for the design.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 61
(3) Calculated net soil resistance for the block is to be at least 1.5
times the design pressure thrust force and 1.2 for the test
pressure force.
(b) Upper vertical bends: Design the thrust blocks for upper vertical
bends such that the sum of the effective weight of the concrete, bend
and fluid is equal to or greater than the vertical component of the
design thrust force.
(c) Lower vertical bends: Design the thrust blocks for lower vertical bends
such that the contact pressure at the bottom of the block is within the
allowable soil bearing capacity.
9) Earth bearing surface of thrust block shall be cast against either
undisturbed soil or structural fill.
10) Concrete strength of thrust block encasement shall be no less than 25
MPa.
11) Thrust blocks shall generally be configured similar to those shown in the
RCJ standard details. A rectangular shaped front face shall be used for
the blocks for horizontal bends, reducers, tees, plugs and caps if possible.
The reasonable range of depth to width ratio for the rectangular face shall
be between 1 and 3.
10. Mechanical Equipment Support Structures
a. General: This section includes design requirements for the following:
1) Static Equipment Support Structure including Foundation
2) Dynamic Equipment Support Structure including Foundation
3) Pipe Supports
b. References:
1) ACI 351.1R – Grouting Between Foundations and Bases for Support of
Equipment
2) ACI 351.2R – Foundations for Static Equipment
3) ACI 351.3R – Foundations for Dynamic Equipment
c. Static Equipment Foundation:
1) Static Equipment Foundations shall be designed in accordance with the
provisions of the SBC and the following publications:
(a) ACI 351.2R – Foundations for Static Equipment.
(b) ASCE-7
d. Dynamic Equipment Foundation
1) Dynamic Equipment Foundations shall be designed in accordance with
the provisions of the SBC and the following publications:
(a) ACI 351.3R – Foundations for Dynamic Equipment
(b) ASCE-7

Rev. 0 5.2 – 62
2) Foundations for vibrating machinery shall be isolated from adjacent

foundations via expansion joints or other systems which allow
independent system movement.
e. Pipe Support Systems:
1) Pipe support systems shall be designed in accordance with the following:
(a) SBC-301
(b) ASCE-7
2) Structural Engineer shell collect information for pipe stress analysis
performed by others for all pipe support systems including thermal forces,
gravity forces, and pressure piping forces.
3) Pipe supports shall be provided based on the pipe stress analysis
reactions.
4) Pipe Support Analysis shall including the following
(a) Guide Pipe Supports
(b) Hanging Pipe Supports
(c) Feed Pipe Supports
11. Pipeline Corridor Structures
a. General
1) Introduction
(a) This section establishes minimum safety requirements for existing
and new pipeline support structures for the pipeline corridors under
the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
(b) Review of submittals for design and installation of pipeline
structures in the pipeline corridors requires coordination with other
disciplines’ designs (mainly, Civil Mechanical, and Electrical
design).
b. Applicability
1) This section is applicable to the following in the RCJ area of jurisdiction:
(a) Pipeline assets operated by Industries in the pipeline corridors.
(b) Pipeline systems that transport hazardous liquids, petrochemicals and
gases.
2) This section does not apply to the following pipeline facilities:
(a) In-plant piping systems as defined in the Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and
Utility Corridors (UC) Regulations
(b) Pipelines outside the limits of the RCJ Pipelines and Utility Corridors
(c) Pipelines that have been exempted by the RCJ
c. Pipeline Support Structures
1) Structural Supports

Rev. 0 5.2 – 63
(a) Industries shall always remain responsible for ensuring that their
designs and construction conform to their contract obligations and all
applicable regulations, Codes, and Standards. The design of pipe
supports, pipe racks, pipe sleepers, cross access structures,
expansion loops, intersection support structures, foundations, and
other related supports carrying, anchoring, and guiding pipes shall
be made to acceptable industry Standards.
(b) Horizontal expansion loops may be used in the areas where such
loops currently exist and where there is sufficient space in
accordance with the applicable standards to allow their use without
harming future expansion; otherwise, vertical expansion loop
systems shall be adopted by all projects throughout Pipeline
Corridors and Utility Corridors.
(c) The industry is responsible for providing its own anchors that are
required based on their own analysis of load conditions on the
pipeline. Anchors are not allowed to be added to any existing RCJ
structure.
(d) All Pipe Supports shall be designed and constructed to resist
stresses produced by load combinations in accordance with the SBC
2007 and the requirements of this section.
(e) Any new structure or extension of an existing structure (except for a
cantilevered member that can accommodate only one pipe) must be
designed for full pipe load of 5 kN/m².
2) Design Loads and Load Combinations
(a) Symbols and Notations
(1) D = Dead load, including load of empty piping and equipment
(2) E = Seismic load effect, which shall include both Eh and Ev
with
ρ = 1.0 for SDC = B
(3) F = Load due to fluids in piping and equipment at hydro-test
conditions
(4) H = Load due to lateral earth and groundwater pressures
(5) L = Live load due to occupancy; uniform, concentrated,
impact, and vibratory
(6) T = Self-restraining force; thermal expansion and contraction;
and friction
(7) W = Wind load
(b) Load Combinations for Factored Loads Using Strength Design
(1) 1.4(D + F)
(2) 1.2(D + F + T) + 1.6(L + H)
(3) 1.2(D + F) + 1.6W + 0.5L
(4) (1.2 + 0.2SDS)(D + F) + 1.0E + .05L

Rev. 0 5.2 – 64
(5) 0.9D + 1.6W + 1.6H

(6) (0.9 – 0.2SDS)D + 1.0E + 1.6H
(c) Load Combinations for Nominal Loads Using Allowable Stress
Design
(1) D + F
(2) D + H + F + L + T
(3) D + H + F + W
(4) (1.0 + 0.14SDS)(D + F) + H + 0.7E
(5) D + H + F + 0.75W + 0.75L
(6) (1.0 + 0.105SDS)(D + F) + H + 0.75(0.7)E + 0.75L
(7) 0.6D + W + H
(8) (0.6 – 0.14SDS)D + 0.7E + H
3) Exceptions to Factored and Nominal Load Combinations
(a) Where lateral earth pressure provides resistance to structural
actions from other forces, it shall not be included in H but shall be
included in the design resistance. H shall be set to zero if the
structural action due to H counteracts that due to the other load
cases.
(b) Effects of one or more loads not acting in whole or in part shall be
investigated. This includes patterning transient loads in continuous
and cantilever framing.
(c) Increases in allowable stress shall not be used with the load
combinations given for Allowable Stress Design.
(d) E and W are permitted to be applied independently in each of two
orthogonal directions and orthogonal interaction effects are
permitted to be neglected.
(e) Minus E and minus W directions shall be investigated.
4) Stability against Overturning, Uplift, Sliding, and Buoyancy
(a) Stability analyses shall demonstrate the ability of the structures to
resist overturning, uplift, sliding, and buoyancy, and that the
allowable soil bearing values are not exceeded. Stability shall be
provided solely by dead load plus permanent mechanical
anchorages. In determining the safety factors, allowance shall be
made for the potential removal of resisting dead loads (i.e.,
excavation, erosion, etc.).
(b) Retaining wall sliding resistance shall be developed by friction (and
passive soil pressure where necessary) utilizing particularly detailed
shear keys to engage the friction-resistance plane below the plane
of the waterproofing and protection.
5) Deflections

Rev. 0 5.2 – 65
(a) The maximum allowable vertical deflection of Pipe Supports

determined from ASD Load Combinations shall be L/400 (where L
is the beam length), except L/600 shall be used for pipe supports
for fixed service equipment and high temperature or pressure
piping.
(b) Acceptable deflection shall also consider the parameters used in
the design of the piping and the pipe supports. Coordination
between the structure design and piping design is critical.
6) Materials
(a) All materials shall conform to the Specifications and Serial
Designations herein. All steel materials shall be new.
(b) Structural design and material selection shall conform to the
requirements of the latest Industry Standards, RCJ specifications,
standards published by the Saudi Arabian Standards
Organization (SASO), and the documents listed in Section 5.2.3.A
herein.
(c) Design calculations shall conform to the RCJ requirements
stipulated in this manual, without exceptions.
(d) Civil Reference datum for all elevations shall be based on the
Royal Commission Datum.
7) Concrete Design
(a) All concrete Pipe Support elements shall be designed in
accordance with ACI 318 with load factors and combinations
given in this Guideline.
(b) Concrete formwork, constituents, proportions, and maximum
water-cement ratios shall be in accordance with the RCJ
specifications.
(c) Reinforcing steel shall be fusion bonded epoxy-coated (FBEC) in
accordance with ASTM A775M and RCJ specifications.
(d) The classes of concrete for Pipe Support foundations shall be as
in TABLE 5.2.3.B:
TABLE 5.2.3.B PIPE SUPPORT FOUNDATIONS.
Minimum Cylinder
Structure Class of Concrete Compressive Strength
at 28 Days
Structural concrete in contact with

C35 minimum with Type I Portland
soil or exposed to weather, salt,
cement and silica fume pozzolanic
salt water, brackish water, 35 MPa
replacement as per GS 03310,
seawater, or spray from these
Table 1C
sources

Rev. 0 5.2 – 66
C30a or C30b minimum with Type I

Portland cement and pozzolanic
All other structural concrete 30 MPa
replacement as per GS 03310,
Table 1C
Blinding Slabs, Mud Mats, and C20 with Type V Portland cement as
20 MPa
Lean Concrete per GS 03310, Table 1C
(e) The concrete cover for reinforcing bars shall be 75 mm.

(f) The height of pipe support foundations above adjacent, finished
grade shall be 300 mm minimum.
(g) Pipe support drawings shall explicitly show and specify the
foundation waterproofing and protection, blinding slab, sand-
cement screed, chamfers, fillets, reglets, counterflashing, coal tar
epoxy coating, concrete class, concrete mix design, cementitious
material, and FBEC reinforcing requirements.
(h) Material designations for steel material in the pipeline corridor
shall be as shown in Table 5.2.3.C.
TABLE 5.2.3.C MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and

ASTM A36 or A992
Fittings
Hollow structural shapes (HSS) square,

ASTM A500 Grade B
rectangular, and round
Pipes ASTM A53 Type E, Grade B
ASTM A325, Type 1; Nuts – ASTM A563, Grade

High-strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers for
DH; Washers – ASTM F436, Type 1; all hot-dip
Joints
galvanized
Anchor Rods (headed-type or ASTM A36 or F1554 Grade 36; Double nuts –
threaded/nutted with double nuts and plate ASTM A563, Grade DH; Plate washers – ASTM
washers) A36; all hot-dip galvanized
AWS D1.1, D1.4, and D1.6. Low hydrogen

Welding Processes and Electrodes electrodes with a minimum tensile strength of
480 MPa, (e.g., “E7018” for SMAW)
ASTM C150 Type I and V Cements; ASTM

Cementitious Materials C618, C989, and C1240 Pozzolanic
replacements

Rev. 0 5.2 – 67
ASTM C1107 with minimum 7 day compressive

Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout strength at least twice the base concrete
strength
ASTM A615, Grade 60 (414 MPa); ASTM

Reinforcing Steel A775M Fusion bonded epoxy-coated reinforcing
(FBECR)
Epoxy adhesives with hot-dip galvanized or

stainless steel high-strength bolt assemblies as
Chemical Anchors
manufacturer by Hilti Corp. or approved
equivalent
12. Electrical and Communication Structures

a. Substation electrical and communication structures are used to support
above-grade components and electrical equipment such as cable bus, rigid
bus, and strain bus conductors; switches; surge arresters; insulators; and
other equipment. Substation and switchyard structures may be fabricated from
latticed angles that form chords and trusses, wide flanges, tubes (round,
square, and rectangular), pipes and polygonal tubes (straight or tapered).
Common materials used are concrete, steel, aluminum, and wood.
b. References and Standards:
1) Saudi Building Code SBC-301 – Loads and Force Requirements
2) Saudi Building Code SBC-304 – Concrete Structures Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code SBC-305 – Masonry Structures Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code SBC-306 – Steel Structures Requirements
5) American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE-7 – Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures
6) ASCE Engineering Practice Report 113
7) ASCE 48 - Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures
8) ASCE Report No. 74 - Guidelines for Electrical Transmission Line
Structural Loading
9) ASCE Publication - Guide to Improved Earthquake Performance of
Electric Power Systems
10) ASCE Publication - Structural Reliability Based Design of Utility Pole
Structures
11) ASCE-10
12) ASCE/SEI 48
c. Materials of Electrical and Communication Structures:
1) Steel Structures

Rev. 0 5.2 – 68
(a) ASCE 10 is recommended for design of lattice structures using

angles.
(b) AISC is recommended for design of structures using standard
structural shapes.
(c) ASCE/SEI 48 is recommended for design of structures using hollow
tubular member shapes.
2) Concrete Structures:
(a) Concrete Structures are designed to accommodate cracking behavior.
In a corrosive environment, water may be absorbed into the open
cracks and corrode the reinforcing steel. Typical substation concrete
structures shall provide enough concrete cover to protect the
reinforcing steel. For structural members subjected to sustain flexural
loading, such as dead-end structures, it may be desirable to allow no
tensile stress along the member cross section under everyday loading
conditions. This zero-tension criterion will prevent cracks from staying
open under normal situations and will preclude the reinforcing steel
from corroding.
(1) Reinforced Concrete Structures – Reinforced concrete structures
shall be engineered and configured in accordance with ACI 318.
(2) Pre-stressed Concrete Structures – Pre-stressed concrete
structures shall be engineered and configured in accordance with
PCI MNL-120. This handbook uses the ultimate strength method
with factored deign loads, linear material properties, and second-
order elastic analysis. Member capacity reduction factors shall be
used as specified in PCI MNL-120.
(3) Pre-stressed Concrete Poles – The pre-stressed concrete pole
type structures, either static cast or spun cast, should be
engineered and configured in accordance with PCI. This guideline
uses the ultimate strength design method and, in general, follows
all ACI and PCI recommendations.
3) Aluminum Structures:
The United States Aluminum Association’s design criteria for aluminum
structures are recommended in this manual.
(a) Aluminum with Dissimilar Materials – Aluminum corrodes when in
contact with dissimilar materials such as steel, wood, or concrete.
These dissimilar materials have a different pH than that of aluminum.
Aluminum Functions best when in contact with material having a pH
range of 5 to 9.
(1) Steel – Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with steel
should be given one coat of a zinc chromate primer or the
equivalent, or one coat of a suitable non-hardening joint
compound that may exclude moisture from the joint during
prolonged service. Additional protection may be obtained by
applying the joint compound in addition to the zinc chromate
primer. The zinc chromate paint should be allowed to dry before
the parts are assembled. Aluminum surfaces to be placed in

Rev. 0 5.2 – 69
contact with stainless, aluminized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-

galvanized steel need not be painted.
(2) Wood – Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with wood
should be given a heavy coat of an alkali-resistant bituminous
paint before installation. The paint should be applied in the
condition in which it is received from the manufacturer without the
addition of any thinner.
(3) Concrete – Aluminum should not come into contact with wet
concrete. Aluminum reacts with the alkaline constituents of the
cement and generates hydrogen gas. They hydrogen gas will
cause expansion of the mortar and reduce the concrete’s
compressive strength.
4) Wood Structures:
(a) Ultimate Strength Design – Wood structures and poles shall be
engineered and configured in accordance with IEEE 751 and NESC.
IEEE 751 describes a probabilistic and a deterministic method for
designing wood structures. ANSI-05.1 and O5.1c may be used for
wood pole stresses with the NESC 0.65 strength factor. Additional
design information may be found in NDS.
d. Design Loading:
1) All structures shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of
5.2.1.B.
2) The following loads described in ASCE 113 shall be included:
(a) Wire Tension Loads
(b) Terminal Connection Loads
(c) Concentrated Loads on Strain Bus Systems
(d) Substation Dead-End Structure Forces
13. Generator Support Structures
a. The generator shall be provided with a foundation and housekeeping pad
sufficient to support the weight of the equipment. This shall include the
engine-generator, fuel storage, batteries, and engine exhaust silencer and
piping.
b. Vibration isolation shall be provided to avoid the transmission of vibration to
the surrounding occupancies. The selection of the vibration isolation shall
address any applicable seismic requirements and the sensitivities of the
adjacent facilities.
c. Rotating and vibrating loads shall be individually considered and, where
feasible, shall be independently supported.
d. Natural Frequency

Rev. 0 5.2 – 70
1) Structural supports of rotating and vibrating equipment shall be

designed to avoid resonant vibration with the equipment and limit
amplitude to acceptable values.
2) Acceptable values shall be verified with suppliers of individual
equipment such as motors, drives, etc.
3) Appropriate models considering mass, stiffness, and damping shall be
used. The equipment operation shall be examined to understand the
acting forces.
4) If the design considers only the supporting beams, they shall be
designed with a ratio between the natural frequency (fn) and the
equipment frequency (fe) equal to or larger than the values given
below. fe /fn
Beam Span Type of Support Ratio fe /fn
< 5.0 m Directly connected to columns 1.5
> 5.0 m 2.0
< 5.0 m Not directly connected to columns 2.0
> 5.0 m 2.5
Otherwise a complete 3D model is required for the supporting structure and corresponding
vibrations need to satisfy the vendor allowable criteria for vibrations. If this criteria is not
available, the Richard Chart presented below needs to be satisfied.
5) When detailed evaluation is warranted, the Designer shall ensure the

separation of the fundamental mode structural frequency from the
machine frequency. The recommended criteria is as follows:
(a) Structure frequency < 1/2 of machine operating frequency
(b) Structure frequency > 1.5 times machine operating frequency
6) Structures that shall be verified are those that support equipment that
may induce excessive vibration to the supporting structure, as for
example: fans, pumps, blowers, compressors and other similar
equipment.
7) The global sway modes of the entire structure shall be calculated by
means of a structural model with concentrated masses on node points.
Masses and stiffness used for modeling shall be those needed for
obtaining representative frequencies of the dynamic response.
Unbalanced forces, generated as a result of operations, such as
material build up on pulleys, belt misalignment, uneven wear, shall be
considered in analysis and design.
8) The soil/structure interaction shall be evaluated in the determination of
structural natural frequency.
e. Allowable Equipment Vibration
1) The below Richart Chart (FIGURE 5.2.3.B) sets general guidelines for
vibration amplitude. However, equipment and its functional activity
must be carefully considered in setting design amplitude to assure

Rev. 0 5.2 – 71
proper functioning and personnel comfort in its operation. Vibration

limits set by equipment suppliers shall be verified and complied with.
FIGURE 5.2.3.B RICHART CHART.
14. Concrete Duct Banks

a. General:
Concrete encased duct banks are a group of conduit or pipes that are fully
encased in concrete. The purpose of the encasement is to protect the utility
lines from superimposed ground loading and from being pierced by future
excavation equipment.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 72
1) Concrete strength of duct bank encasement shall be no less than 20 MPa.
2) All concrete duct banks shall be reinforced with minimum temperature
reinforcement in accordance with ACI 350.
3) All reinforcement shall be epoxy coated.
4) Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross concrete area
shall be based on the length between movement joints, and shall conform
to ACI 350 Section 7.12. Maximum spacing of reinforcement bars shall be
450 mm; minimum of one bar in each corner of duct bank.
5) Provide steel tie bars in the transverse direction enclosing the longitudinal
bars minimum size of 10 mm bars. Contractor is to determine the
minimum spacing of bars based on proper support of ducts during
placement of concrete minimum clear concrete cover over reinforcement
steel shall be 75 mm where concrete is cast directly against earth.
6) Special consideration requires where duct bank enters rigid underground
structures. Structural engineer shall provide details indicating method
employed to prevent differential settlement from damaging duct bank.
7) Top surface of duct bank shall be dyed red.
8) Ducts shall be installed with duct separators with no less than 5
separators in 3 m.
(a) Secure separators to earth to prevent uplift during concrete
installation.
(b) Tie assembly together using fabric straps – metal ties are not to be
used to prevent conductive loops.
(c) Minimum duct spacing in banks 30 mm.
(d) Ducts should be placed no less than 500 mm below grade.
15. Security Crash Barriers

a. General:
Security crash barriers are designed to protect employees, visitors, and
building functions from unauthorized vehicle approach.
1) Security crash barriers are designed to meet crash test standards based
on the following publications:
(a) ASTM F 2656
(b) United States Department of State, SD-STD-02.01
(c) USA Department of Defense, UFC – 4-022
(d) FEMA 430, Perimeter Security Design
2) Security crash barriers are designed for the following load classification:
(a) K12: 6803 kg Truck traveling 80 Kph

Rev. 0 5.2 – 73
(b) K8: 6803 kg Truck traveling 65 Kph

(c) K4: 6803 Kg Truck traveling 48 Kph
3) Project specifications dictate the required load level of design.
4) Barrier Materials
(a) Steel or cast iron is the most effective barrier material and the most
easily installed, but requires regular maintenance.
(b) Reinforced Concrete barrier systems are more costly and require
more time to install but are maintenance free.
5) Types of Barriers
(a) Passive Barriers
(1) Fixed in Place Barriers preventing vehicle access.
(2) Walls, Berms, Fixed bollards, Engineered Planters, Fences.
(b) Active Barriers
(1) Used at vehicle access and control points
(i) Retractable bollards
(ii) Crash Gates
(iii) Rotating Wedge Systems
16. Supports for Signs, Luminaries, Traffic Signals
a. General: This provision applicable to structural support for Highway Signs,
Luminaries and traffic signals.
b. Type of supports:
1) Sign Supports:
(a) Overhead Signs:
Refer to FIGURE 5.2.3.C for types of overhead sign support
structures used in RCJ.
(b) Roadside Signs:
Refer to FIGURE 5.2.3.D for types of roadside sign support structures
used in RCJ.
2) Luminaire:
Luminaires are complete lighting units to illuminate highways, bridges,
streets, parks, playgrounds, etc. Types of street lightings used in RCJ are
shown on FIGURE 5.2.3.E.
3) Traffic Signals:
Refer to FIGURE 5.2.3.F for types of traffic signals support structures
used in RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 74
FIGURE 5.2.3.C OVERHEAD SIGNS STRUCTURES.

A A
A A
Section A-A
OVERHEAD CANTILEVER
OVERHEAD BRIDGE SIGN SUPPORTS SIGN SUPPORTS
FIGURE 5.2.3.D ROADSIDE SIGNS.
SINGLE POST MULTI POST

ROADSIDE SIGN Side View ROADSIDE SIGN
FIGURE 5.2.3.E LUMINARIES.
STREET LIGHT STREET LIGHT TOP MOUNTED TOP MOUNTED

SINGLE ARM DOUBLE ARM LOW LEVEL HIGH LEVEL

Rev. 0 5.2 – 75
FIGURE 5.2.3.F TRAFFIC SIGNALS.
c. Design Requirements:
1) The Support Structures for signs, luminaires and traffic lights to be designed
in accordance with the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural
th
Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals (5 Edition).
2) Wind speed based on 3-second gust of 155 km/h for JIC and 160 km/h RIC
shall be used.
3) The Design Life/Recurrence Interval shall be 50-years.
4) For overhead sign structures, cat walk to be added for future maintenance
and lighting fixture installation. Structural engineer shall design cat walk for
min of 2 kN live load over 750 mm x 750 mm area.
5) Hot-dipped galvanized or protected steel and hardware shall be used for
support structures. For corrosion protection for steel support structures, refer
to Subsection 5.2.6.
6) Luminaire structures may be Standard Aluminum Light Poles, Standard High
Mast Lighting, or custom design. In any case, structural engineer shall provide
full analysis and design calculation for RCJ approval.
7) Fluted poles luminaires support are only allowed on vertical posts that have a
single luminaire load at the top. No fluted vertical poles are allowed on the
Highways with luminaire arms that produce torsion in the vertical shaft.
8) A fluted shell cover that fits around the standard round pole can be used. The
fluted shell has a different drag coefficient and calculations are required for
the pole and foundation.
9) Structural engineer shall consider future addition, galloping, wind drag, truck
induced gust and fatigue in the design.
10) Full geotechnical investigation and geotechnical report required for foundation
design of support structures.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 76
11) Foundation design of support structures shall be designed in accordance with

th
Sections 5.2 and 5.10 of this manual and Section 13.6 of the 4 Edition 2001
AASHTO.
12) Any foundation to be designed for support structures height higher than 10 m
shall be designed without contribution of passive soil pressure.
13) AASHTO Specifications require damping or energy absorbing devices on
aluminum overhead sign support structures to prevent vibrations from causing
fatigue failures.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 77
SUBSECTION 5.2.4 TRANSPORTATION STRUCTURES
5.2.4 TRANSPORTATION STRUCTURES

A. General
1. Introduction
This subsection mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for design and
construction of the RCJ structures carrying highway traffic loads, and provides:
a. Guidance on preliminary planning, selection, design, and construction of these structures.
b. Minimum technical requirements to be adopted by Consultants and/or AE Contractors to
enable safety, quality, and cost effectiveness in the design and construction of structures
that meet the needs and expectations of the RCJ.
2. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall govern structures
on regular truck route sections of the RCJ highway network. This excludes structures on the
RCJ Module Path sections of the network, which are designed based on the Module Path
System Design Report.
3. Definitions
a. “Abutment” : Substructure unit supporting the ends of a bridge and, usually, retaining the
approach embankment.
b. “Backwall” : The portion of the abutment above the level of the bridge seat that primarily
acts as a retaining wall. It may also act as a support for the bridge deck and/or the
approach slab.
c. “Bearing” : A support element used to transfer loads from superstructure to substructure
while permitting some rotation and horizontal movement of the superstructure.
d. “Bridge seat” : Horizontal surface of the abutment stem upon which rest the pedestals
and/or the bearings.
e. “Brush curb” : A curb used with steel railing to channel water off of a bridge and
preventing it from falling onto the feature crossed.
f. “Cofferdam” : A watertight enclosure which permits dewatering of an excavation and for
construction in a waterway.
g. “Cross Section” : A view taken transverse to the longitudinal axis of an element.
h. “Culvert” : A structure that provides passage of water or utilities through an embankment.
Usually constructed of precast concrete boxes, round concrete pipe, or elliptical concrete
pipe (Usually with a clear opening of less than 6.2 m).
i. “Deck” : That portion of a bridge that provides a riding surface for vehicular and/or
pedestrian traffic.
j. “Fascia” : The outside vertical edge of a concrete deck.
k. “Fascia Girder” : The outermost girder on each side of a bridge.
l. “Feature Crossed” : The roadway, railway, ravine, stream, or other physical feature that
is crossed over by the bridge.
m. “Feature Carried” : The roadway, railway, or pathway that is carried by the bridge.
n. “Fixed Support” : In terms of bridge bearings, a support that allows rotation only. In
analysis, this type of connection is commonly defined as ‘pinned’.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 78
o. “Substructure” : Any supporting member below the superstructure (such as abutments,

piers, and wingwalls).
p. “Superelevation” : The cross slopes of a roadway at a horizontal curve.
q. “Superstructure” : That part of the structure above and supported by, the bearings.
r. “Surcharge” : Load that acts on a retaining wall in addition to normal soil forces, such as
a vehicular load or a building load.
s. “U-wingwall” : A wingwall that is parallel to the feature carried.
t. “Underdrain Filter” : A method of conveying groundwater away from behind a wall or
abutment through the use of porous medium and weep hole.
u. “Vertical Clearance” : The minimum vertical distance between the bottom of the structure
and the surface of the feature crossed.
v. “Wingwall” : A retaining wall placed adjacent to an abutment stem to retain the fill behind
an abutment (See in-line wingwall, flared wingwall, and U-wingwall).
4. Abbreviations
a. Technical requirements for the RCJ transportation structures shall not preclude highway
traffic interoperability within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
b. The following requirements shall be reflected in the design and construction of the RCJ
transportation structures covered under this subsection:
1) Structures shall have adequate configurations acceptable to the RCJ and shall meet
aesthetic and functional requirements of the project. Minimum aesthetic design
requirements are included in this section and detailed in the “RCJ Guidelines for
Aesthetic Design of Transportation Structures”.
2) Structures configurations shall include features such as simplicity, regularity, integrity,
redundancy, and ease of inspection, maintenance, and repair.
3) Structures shall demonstrate the high standards for safety, durability, and cost
effectiveness required by the RCJ.
6. Codes
Design and construction of all RCJ transportation structures shall be based upon the
requirements of this subsection and existing highway standards; these shall be from Saudi
Ministry of Transportation (MOT) to ensure interoperability, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), or those of the authority having jurisdiction
over the structure such as ARAMCO and SAR, as most appropriate to the individual
application. Where the requirements stipulated by these standards are in conflict, the most
stringent shall govern unless otherwise noted herein and shall require the RCJ approval. A
listing of the adopted codes follows.
a. Volume 3 - Structural Design Specifications, Highway Design Manual, Ministry of
Transportation (MOT), the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, 1992.
b. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th Edition. American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 2002.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 79
c. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification, American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 7th edition, 2014, with 2015 and 2016 interim
revisions.
d. AASHTO Manual for Condition Evaluation and Load and Resistance Factor Rating (LRFR)
of Highway Bridges. American Association of State Highway, Federal Highway
Association and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), with current interim revisions
e. AASHTO Manual for Bridge Evaluation, 2nd Edition, with 2011, 2013, 2014, 2015, and
2016 Interim Revisions.
f. AASHTO Steel Guide Specifications for Horizontally Curved Steel Girder Highway
Bridges. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
g. LRFD Guide Specifications for the Design of Pedestrian Bridges, 2nd Edition, 2015 Interim
Revisions.
h. FHWA publication - FHWA - NH1-10-034 Technical Manual for Design and Construction of
Road Tunnels.
i. Manual for Railway Engineering, the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-
Way Association (AREMA), 2016 Edition.
7. Standards
a. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)/National
Steel Bridge Alliance (NSBA) Steel Bridge Collaboration documents for steel bridges
“AASHTO/NSBA”.
b. AASHTO Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Structures.
c. Federal Highway Association FHWA Office of Bridge Technology Report No. FHNA-1F-02-
034.
d. Manual of Standard Practice, Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).
e. PCI Bridge Design Manual, First Release, PCI, November 2011.
f. Royal Commission for Jubail, Guidelines for Aesthetics Design of Transportation
Structures, 1st edition, 2016.
g. Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges of Federal Highway
Projects, FP-03, Publication No. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) A-FLH-03-002.
d. Refer to Chapter 4 for bridge geotechnical investigation.
9. Approvals
The RCJ will review and take action on all design reports, drawings and specifications.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 80
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated structure achieves project requirements as
intended by the RCJ and as designed by the Consultant and/or AE Contractor.
C. Structures Groups
The principles, guidelines, and requirements specified under this subsection shall apply to the RCJ
transportation structures groups defined in TABLE 5.2.4.A. The table provides concept designs for
the types of structures that would be required to carry RCJ highways over existing roadways and
terrain. Additional structures also covered under this subsection include pedestrian bridges, earth
retaining structures and cut and cover tunnel structures.
TABLE 5.2.4.A APPLICABLE STRUCTURES.
Structure
Configuration Structure type
Group Designation
1 Drainage/utility Culvert Roadway over Precast box/three-sided/arch/ reinforced
culvert concrete/unreinforced concrete culvert
structures
2 Bridge over pipelines Roadway over Three-sided/arch reinforced concrete
pipelines culvert structures
3 Bridge over drainage Roadway over Prestressed/reinforced/three-sided/arch
channel/terrain drainage reinforced concrete structure
channel/terrain
4 Bridge over roadway Roadway over
Prestressed/reinforced concrete structure
roadway
5 Bridge over rail Roadway over Prestressed/three-sided/arch reinforced
railway track concrete structure/reinforced concrete
structure
D. Related Specifications and Details

E. Preliminary Design and Planning

1. Scoping
During scoping/early planning phase of the project the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
establish genuine consensus about the nature of the proposed project and what is to be
accomplished regarding:
a. Project objectives.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 81
b. Design criteria.
c. Feasible alternates, and reasonable cost estimate(s) for each.
2. Structure Geometry
a. Alignment and Layout
1) Alignment and layout of structures shall be established based on the geometry of the
feature the structure carries and crosses, and the structure’s aesthetics design criteria
of the project.
2) Structure’s horizontal alignment for centerline and foundation setout points, shall be
established in accordance with the structure’s alignment and layout.
3) Vertical alignment for RCJ Groups 3, 4, and 5 structures shall be established in
accordance with the profile of the roadways they carry, and shall meet controlling
vertical clearance requirements for the features the structures cross.
4) Vertical alignment and profile for Groups 1 and 2 structures, profile and vertical
clearance requirements shall be governed by the type of application and/or those of
the authorities having jurisdiction over the structures.
5) Horizontal and vertical alignments for all structures shall meet the horizontal and
vertical clearance requirements of the geometric design criteria of the project.
6) Structure’s length shall be determined based on the roadway alignment, width of the
feature crossed, geotechnical site conditions, economy, and aesthetic requirements of
the project.
7) Structure's width shall be determined based on the width of the roadway the structure
carries and the specific requirements in the project objectives.
8) Structures area shall be calculated based on abutment centerline to centerline length
and structure’s width.
b. Vertical Clearance
1) Vertical clearance to sign supports and pedestrian overpasses shall be 500 mm
greater than highway structure clearance and vertical clearance from the roadway to
overhead cross bracing of through truss structures shall not be less than 5.5 m.
2) Structures over navigable waters shall have a minimum vertical clearance of 6.5 m
above maximum navigable pool elevation or as determined based on the design
vessel. Specified minimum clearance is estimated based on clearance requirements
for common barges with tug boats, sailing boats, and yachts navigating similar
waterways to those crossed by the RCJ structures. Water depth shall be no less than
4.5 m from normal pool elevation or as determined based on investigation of the
specific site. Actual vertical clearance for a bridge over navigable waterway may be
investigated based on, but not limited to, existing, upstream and downstream
clearances, and type and size of vessels utilizing the waterway. The RCJ shall make a
determination on increasing the specified minimum vertical clearances based on the
outcome of the investigation. Ordinary high water elevation for non-tidal or mean high
water for tidal areas shall be used when determining minimum vertical clearance.
Water depth shall be determined from normal pool elevation in non-tidal waters or
mean sea level in tidal areas.
3) Navigational clearances, both horizontal and vertical, shall be established in
cooperation with the Kingdom Coast Guard and coordinated with other agencies
having jurisdiction over the structure.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 82
4) Reduction in vertical clearance due to support settlement shall be accounted for in the
vertical clearance calculations, if such settlement exceeds 25 mm.
c. Hydraulic Clearance
1) Hydraulic structures falling under Group 1 shall be designed such that adequate
opening is provided for a 100-years design flood and for the passage of debris. A
minimum freeboard of 300 mm for the 100-years flood shall be considered as
satisfying normal hydraulic clearance requirements for Jubail and Ras Al-Khair. The
freeboard may be increased to 750 mm for sites where the risk of debris clogging the
structure is high. This requirement follows common practice in the US which calls for a
minimum of 60 cm of freeboard, and allowing for an additional 15 cm for sand/debris
depositing in the bottom of the culvert.
2) The minimum freeboard may be increased, based on additional investigation at the
site's history of debris, changes in water surface elevations, consequence of debris
clogging, potential damage, and the degree of difficulty of performing necessary
repairs.
d. Structure Roadbed
1) Width
The full road cross section is to be carried over bridge structures. Concrete bridge
railing shall be installed under the following scenarios:
(a) At outer edges.
(b) On all roads in the Industrial area and on freeways in the community area, where
the median is at least 8 m wide, bridge railing shall be placed 1 m behind the side
walk. This 1 m shall be constructed as a raised sidewalk, locally across the
structure only, in which utility ducts/troughs may be provided for street lighting and
emergency telephone cables.
(c) On community roads other than freeways, the bridge railing may be located
behind the normal 1 m sidewalk.
2) Median Edge
(a) On freeway bridges, railing shall be located immediately behind the 1 m paved
shoulder.
(b) On expressways, where the normal cross section has a raised median with no
hard shoulder, the median curb shall be carried over the structure with the bridge
railing located 1 m behind the face of the curb.
(c) In case of collector roads or other situations with narrow medians, the median
shall be decked unless directed otherwise by the RCJ.
3) Alignment at Structures
(a) Superelevation transitions almost always result in an unsightly appearance of the
bridge and the bridge railing. Therefore, if possible, horizontal curves should
begin and end a sufficient distance from the bridge so that no part of the
superelevation transition extends onto the bridge.
(b) If the superelevation transition is unavoidable because of alignment and/or safety
considerations, the A/E and or EPC Contractor shall prepare special rendering of
the structure with proposed treatment to reduce the superelevation impact on the
structures’ aesthetics.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 83
4) Depressed grade line under structures

It frequently simplifies bridge design if the low point in the grade line is set a sufficient
distance from the intersection of the centerlines of the structure and the highway so
that drainage structures clear the structure footings.
5) Grade line on bridge decks
Vertical curves on bridge decks shall provide a minimum fall of 70 mm per 100 m. The
flattest allowable tangent grade shall be 0.12%, but on long bridges where drainage is
confined to the bridge deck, this shall be increased to 0.25%.
e. Structures over Existing Roads
Every effort shall be made to phase work in such a way that traffic may be re-routed away
from bridges which have to be constructed over existing roads. Alternatively, and subject
to available right of way (ROW), the AE and/or EPC Contractor may include temporary
details in the Contract. As a last resort, where falsework has to be erected over traffic
during construction, the following criteria shall be followed:
1) The minimum width of traffic opening through falsework for various lane and shoulder
requirements is shown in TABLE 5.2.4.B
TABLE 5.2.4.B: FALSEWORK SPAN AND DEPTH REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Resulting Minimum

Facility Opening Width
Width of Falsework Depth
to be
Traffic Provides For Normal Span Required for
Spanned 2 1
Opening (m) Falsework
1 Lane + 2.4 m &
1.5 m Shoulders
7.6 2 Lane + 2.4 m & 9.8 m 0.5 m
11.3 1.5 m Shoulders 13.4 m 0.7 m
Freeway
14.9 3 Lane + 2.4 m & 17.1 m 0.8 m
18.6 1.5 m Shoulders 20.7 m 1.0 m
4 Lane + 2.4 m &
1.5 m Shoulders
1 Lane + 0.6 &
1.2 m Shoulders
2 Lane + 0.6 &
6.1 8.2 m 0.5 m
1.2 m Shoulders
9.8 11.9 m 0.6 m
Non- 2 Lane + 0.6 &
12.2 14.3 m 0.7 m
Freeway 2.4 m Shoulders
15.8 18.0 m 0.8 m
3 Lane + 0.6 &
19.5 21.6 m 1.0 m
2.4 m Shoulders
4 Lane + 0.6 &
2.4 m Shoulders
1. Includes 2.1 m for 2 temporary metal beam guardrails.

2. No temporary railing provided.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 84
2) When metal beam guardrail is used to protect the false work, space must be provided
for its bending/deformation as per the Kingdom – Highway Design Manual.
3) In special cases, where existing restraints make it impractical to comply with the
minimum widths of traffic openings set forth in TABLE 5.2.4.B, a lesser width may be
used if approved by the RCJ.
4) The minimum temporary vertical clearance shall be 4.5 m.
5) The use of temporary vertical clearances less than 4.5 m shall require approval by the
RCJ.
6) To establish the grade of a structure to be constructed with a falsework opening,
allowance must be made for the depth of the falsework. The minimum depths required
for various widths of traffic opening are shown in Appendix I.
7) Where vertical clearances, either temporary or permanent, are critical, close
coordination shall be required during the early design stage when the preliminary
grades, structure depths and falsework depths may be adjusted without incurring
major design changes.
8) Because the width of traffic openings through falsework may significantly affect costs,
special care shall be given to determining opening widths. The following shall be
considered:
(a) Staging and traffic handling requirements.
(b) The width of approach roadbed at the time the bridge is constructed.
(c) Traffic volumes.
(d) Controls in the form of existing facilities.
(e) Desires of the Roads Department.
9) Practical problems of falsework construction:
(a) After establishing the opening requirements, a field review of the bridge site shall
be made to ensure that existing facilities (drainage, other bridges or roadways) are
not in conflict with the falsework.
(b) Advance warning devices shall be specified or shown on the plans. Such devices
may consist of flashing lights, overhead signs, over-height detectors, or a
combination of these or other devices.
(c) Placement and removal of falsework requires special consideration. During these
operations, traffic shall either be stropped for short intervals or diverted away from
the span where placement or removal operations are being performed.
f. Railing
1) General
(a) Concrete safety bridge railing shall be used on all bridges as per MOT and
AASHTO standards.
2) Approach Railings
(a) Approach railings shall be provided at the ends of bridge railings, exposed to
approach traffic. On divided highways, railings shall be placed to the left and right

Rev. 0 5.2 – 85
of approach traffic. On two way roadbeds, railings shall be placed on both sides of
each end of the structure.
(b) Metal beam guardrail, with cable anchor breakaway, shall be used for bridge
approach railing. However, concrete “safety shape” rail may be used for better
appearance where long structures/viaducts are involved and the structure has
concrete bridge railing.
(c) When long runs of guardrail (such as embankment guardrail) precede the bridge,
the guardrail shall connect to the bridge railing and thus serve the approach railing
function. Approach railings shall be flared at their exposed end.
(d) Physical connection shall be provided between approach rails and bridge rails to
prevent vehicles from deflecting the guardrail and continue driving onto the end of
the more rigid bridge railing.
g. Drainage
1) Transverse drainage of the bridge roadway shall be accomplished by providing a
suitable crown in the roadway surface and longitudinal drainage shall be accomplished
by camber or gradient. Water flowing downgrade in a gutter section shall be
intercepted and not permitted to run onto the bridge.
2) Short continuous span bridges, particularly overpasses, may be built without inlets and
the water from the bridge roadway carried downslope by open and closed chutes near
the end of the bridge structure. Longitudinal drainage on long bridges is accomplished
by means of scuppers or inlets, of the required sizes and numbers to drain the gutters.
3) Downspouts, where required, shall be of rigid corrosion-resistant materials shall be
provided with cleanouts. The details of deck drains shall be such as to prevent the
discharge of drainage water against any portion of the structure and to prevent erosion
at the outlet of the downspout. Overhanging portions of concrete deck shall be
provided with a drip notch located 100 mm from the edge of the deck.
4) The number and size of deck drains shall be kept to a minimum and be consistent with
hydraulic design requirements.
5) The minimum internal dimension of the downspout shall be not less than 300 mm.
6) Proper drainage details shall be provided behind abutment wingwalls such that runoff
water is not collected at the back of the walls (behind the walls).
7) Proper drainage details shall be provided behind culvert end walls and wingwalls such
that runoff water is not collected at the back of the walls. Grouted riprap 500 mm wide
or concrete swale of similar width shall be provided at these locations.
8) Additional drainage considerations:
(a) Provide a minimum 100 mm projection below the lowest superstructure
component.
(b) Location of pipe outlets shall be such that a 45 degree splash zone will not
dampen structural components.
(c) Use slots in parapets where practical and permissible.
(d) Provide drain clean-outs.
(e) Provide pipe drain bends no greater than 45 degrees.
(f) Route bridge drainage runoff in a manner meeting safety and environmental
requirements.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 86
F. Structure Selection
1. Material
a. Although concrete is the preferred material for the RCJ transportation structures, steel may
be considered as an alternative material for certain structures. This section provides
guidance on use of steel for these structures. Other factors related to consideration of
steel for RCJ transportation structures include structure’s relationship to the total project,
aesthetics, geographical location, site accessibility, and constructability.
b. Steel structures may be considered for the following situations:
1) For curved spans with mid-ordinate corrections exceeding 300 mm, if their advantages
over prestressed/reinforced concrete construction could be established.
2) For spans with restricted clearances, if their smaller depth advantages over
prestressed concrete is demonstrated.
3) For locations where either long piles or poor bearing capacity is anticipated, if their
lighter weight advantages over prestressed concrete could be substantiated.
4) For pedestrian skyways between buildings, pedestrian bridges, and for carrying utility
lines over terrain.
5) For spans on vertical curves, since the camber can be fabricated and controlled with
greater accuracy, if advantages over prestressed concrete could be demonstrated.
Accommodating curve correction by placing a variable depth deck slab, generally, is
not desired as it results in considerable additional dead load and hence deeper
structures.
2. Concrete Superstructure
a. Precast or cast-in-place concrete units
1) Four-sided boxes have a maximum practical single cell span of approximately 7.5 m.
Their concrete inverts may raise objections in sensitive fishing areas, where a natural
stream bed is preferred. Various methods may be used to design these boxes which
could be used for spans ranging from 3 m (single cell) to 30 m (multiple cells).
2) Three-sided units, with a frame or arch corner shape, have a maximum span of
approximately 12 m. These units are usually supported on strip footings founded on
rock or piles. A precast or cast-in-place full invert slab/footing unit may also be used.
3) Both of the above units shall be used with a minimum fill of 600 mm.
b. Precast Arches
1) Precast arch units are generally available as proprietary systems of standard geometry
designed for use with specified fill properties. Industry standards should be consulted
for available arch sizes and limitations on customization of those systems.
2) Three-sided and precast arches units may be used for many of the same situations
identified for large pipes. In order to obtain the necessary headroom for some cases,
the units may be raised by supporting them on pedestals or conventional retaining
walls.
3) Use of multi-cell units to convey waterways may not be appropriate when the risk of
debris catching and accumulating at the intermediate piers is high.
c. Spans Between 3 m and 30 m

Rev. 0 5.2 – 87
1) Prestressed concrete voided slabs of standard AASHTO sections may be used to a

maximum span of about 17.5 m. Prestressed concrete box units, concrete I-beams,
bulb-tee sections are used for longer spans.
2) Prestressed box and voided slab systems, are generally designed with diaphragms
provided within unit sections at each support to resist transverse rotations,
displacements and cross sectional distortion. And designed to resist torsional
moments and transmit vertical and shear forces from the superstructure to the
bearings.
3) Prestressed box and voided slab structures must be analyzed for construction loads
and forces that arise during jacking of the structure during bearing maintenance and
replacement.
4) Intermediate diaphragms are required for box and voided slab structures. Diaphragm
requirements and layout are described in this manual.
d. Spans Between 31 m and 60 m
1) Modified prestressed concrete box beams (modified shapes of standard AASHTO
sections) up to 1.4 m deep may be used for spans up to 30 m. Modified prestressed
concrete box beams up to 2 m deep may be used for continuous arrangements for
spans up to 45 m. Prestressed concrete I-beams and bulb-tee beams ranging from
1.4 m to 2.0 m in depth may be used for spans up to approximately 46 m. Composite
steel plate girder systems can easily and economically span this range. Once the
single span exceeds 50 m, alternate multiple span arrangements shall be considered.
The cost of additional substructures must be compared to the greater superstructure
cost.
2) Precast concrete beams are not recommended for spans over 50 m.
e. Multiple Span Arrangements.
1) For multiple span bridges, a continuous design shall be adopted whenever possible to
eliminate deck joints. In the case of multiple simple span prestressed bridges, the
deck slab shall be made continuous for live load over the intermediate supports.
2) If aesthetically acceptable, arrangements ranging from equal span viaduct type
structures to proportionally increasing span ratios shall be evaluated during preliminary
design.
3) Required beam depth for multiple span, prestressed box and voided slab structures is
the same as for a single span with the identical span length.
f. Spans over 90 m
1) Multiple span arrangements in this range generally involve balancing superstructure
and substructure costs to achieve an optimum design. Site restrictions often hamper
efficient substructure placement.
2) Long multiple span structures can utilize a variety of construction types and materials.
(a) Segmental box designs consisting of precast match cast or cast-In-place.
(b) Cable-stayed trapezoidal boxes.
(c) Deck arches.
(d) Segmental viaduct and variable depth units.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 88
3. Steel Superstructure
a. Spans less than 12 m
1) Prestressed concrete voided slab units and concrete decks with steel girders cover
this entire span range. Conventional reinforced concrete slabs, however, are
inefficient for spans greater than 7.5 m due to their excessive depth and heavy
reinforcement.
b. Spans Between 12 m and 60 m
1) Conventional composite design systems utilizing concrete decks and steel stringers
may be used for the entire span range. At the lower end of the span range, rolled
beam sections are typically used. Fabricated, welded plate girders are more likely be
used at the upper end.
2) Special prefabricated bridge panels with composite concrete decks and steel beams
may reach spans approaching 30 m. They have the advantage of reduced field
construction time.
c. Span Between 61 m and 90 m
Single span bridges in this range have few options. For the majority of the cases only a
thru or deck truss shall be considered. Plate girders may be used at the lower end of this
span range. Special designs utilizing arches, slant leg rigid frames, and concrete or steel
box girders are also viable options. These types of special structures are used to address
limited member depths, aesthetics and compatibility with site conditions. The RCJ will
have a greater input into these larger structures. Constructability concerns and possible
alternatives shall be discussed, in detail, with the RCJ for structures in this span range.
d. Multiple Span Arrangements
Continuous design using steel rolled beams or built-up plate girders takes into account the
continuity over the interior support points. Based on the span arrangements and the span
ratios, the largest span of a continuous layout may be equated to a smaller equivalent
simple span. This reduces the required beam depth for the span. Poor continuous span
ratios may result in uplift. Tie-down system and anchored end spans are two means of
addressing uplift. Refer to TABLE 5.2.4.C.
TABLE 5.2.4.C. MULTIPLE SPAN ARRANGEMENTS
Span to Depth Ratios

Number Equivalent
Ratio of Spans
of Spans Simple Span
Desired Maximum
1 2
2 1.0:1.0 0.90 X 1.0 span 27.5 30
0.75 : 1.0 : 1 2
3 0.85 x 1.0 span 27.5 30
0.75
0.8 : 1.0 :1.0 : 1 2
4 0.75 x 1.0 span 27.5 30
0.80
0.6 : 0.80 : 1.0 1 2
5 0.60 x 1.0 span 27.5 30
: 0.80 : 0.60
1
For span arrangements with less efficient ratios, the equivalent factor may be adjusted
proportionally upward (i.e., 0.85 up to 0.90, 0.75 up to 0.85 and 0.60 up to 0.75).

Rev. 0 5.2 – 89
2
Ratios greater than 30 may be used as long as the live load deflection criteria are not
exceeded.
e. Spans over 90 m
1) Multiple span arrangements in this span range generally involves balancing
superstructure and substructure costs to achieve an optimum design. Site restrictions
will often hamper efficient substructure placement.
2) Long multiple span structures may utilize a variety of construction types and materials.
(a) Thru or deck trusses with girder approach spans.
(b) Trapezoidal box beams.
(c) Variable depth girders (“I” shaped beams and box girders).
(d) Cable-stayed girders or box beams.
(e) Deck or thru arches.
(f) Suspension bridges.
4. Abutments
a. General
Abutments serve two principal functions. They support the bridge superstructure and
retain earth of the roadway approach immediately adjacent to the bridge. Therefore, a
bridge abutment combines the functions of a pier and a retaining wall.
1) Cantilevered Abutment
(a) Cantilevered abutments consist of a central stem supporting the bridge seat
backwall and pedestals. A backwall on top of the stem and wingwalls on either
side of the stem retains the fill behind the abutment. The stem and wingwalls rest
upon a continuous footing that may be either soil or pile supported.
The structural reinforcing steel in a cantilevered abutment is designed to withstand
the overturning forces that cause tension in the back of the stem and backwall.
Also, design of footing reinforcement is required and depends on the type of
foundation selected.
(b) Cantilevered abutments have no limit on the skew angle; however, bridges with
less skew perform significantly better than highly skewed bridges.
(c) There is no limit on span for superstructure used with cantilevered abutments.
The abutment shall be designed to support all applied superstructure loads.
Thermal expansion of the superstructure shall be accounted for by the use of an
expansion joint or appropriate jointless details.
(d) There are three different forms of the cantilevered abutment:
(1) When the abutment is placed so that the abutment has as little reveal above
the ground surface as allowed, it is called a stub cantilevered abutment.
(2) When the abutment has the largest possible reveal with respect to the
clearances required for the feature crossed, it is called a cantilevered high
abutment.
(3) An abutment that falls between these two extremes is called a cantilevered
semi-high abutment.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 90
2) Isolated Pedestal Stub Abutment

(a) Isolated pedestal stub abutments have tall pedestals that rest directly on the
footing and have no bridge seat. They have a backwall between the pedestals
and wingwalls on each side to retain the fill. The footing may be either soil or pile
supported.
3) Spill Through Abutment
(a) Spill through, or open, abutment consists of two or more vertical columns carrying
a beam that supports the bridge seat and pedestals. The fill extends on its natural
slope from the bottom of the beam through the openings in the columns. In an
extreme form the spill through abutment is no more than a row of vertical piles
driven through the fill and supporting a bridge seat and pedestals. The stem is
usually provided with small wingwalls to keep the bridge seat free of soil. Spill
through abutments are economical, however, they require proper drainage details
be provided for the structure and approaches, to prevent water penetration and
washout of the fill soil.
5. Wingwalls
a. General
1) Wingwalls are retaining walls placed adjacent to the abutment stem to retain the fill
behind the abutment. The orientation of the wall in relation to the centerline of
bearings or centerline of the roadway determines the wingwall type.
2) When the wingwalls are parallel to the roadway, they are called U-wingwalls. U-
wingwalls are used primarily in fill situations where there are obstructions or limited
right of way on either side of the roadway to build a wide embankment. The length of
the U-wingwall is determined by equating the point where the embankment slope
meets the shoulder break (where the roadway shoulder changes slope at the
embankment) elevation from the roadway. The intersection shall occur at the inside
corner of the top of the wingwall. The elevation of the end of the U-wingwall shall be
set at this intersection and stated on the plans.
3) When the wingwalls are parallel to the centerline of bearings they are called in-line
wingwalls. These wingwalls are used when the abutment is relatively short and there
are no obstructions or right of way limitations on either side of the highway. The end
of an in-line wingwall is located where the slope from the shoulder break meets the
under-bridge embankment slope. The intersection shall occur at the rear corner of the
wingwall. Elevation of the top of the wingwall shall be 200 mm higher than this
intersection and stated on the plans.
4) When the wingwalls are turned back towards the retained fill but not parallel to the
roadway, they are called flared wingwalls. These wingwalls are used when the
abutment fill would spill out too far for in-line wingwalls, but there are not enough
restrictions to justify U-wingwalls. The end of a flared wingwall is located where the
shoulder break from the roadway meets the under-bridge embankment slope. The
intersection shall occur at the rear corner of the wingwall.
5) Curved wingwalls shall be avoided whenever possible. If it is absolutely necessary to
provide a curved wingwall, it is best to place a widened footing on a chord and only
curve the top portion of the wall. Curved wingwalls should never be battered since the
forming is extremely difficult.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 91
6. Piers
‘Pier’ is used here to refer to an intermediate support for a bridge superstructure, between the
abutments, extending from below the ground surface to the bottom of the superstructure.
Piers may be required because of long spans, beam depth restrictions, or both. The pier may
be a support point along a continuous superstructure, or it may be at the end of one simple
span and the beginning of another. In either case, the pier must be designed to safely resist
the dead, live, seismic and other loads introduced from the superstructure while resisting any
loads acting on the pier from flood water, ice flow, wind, and vehicular or ship impact.
a. Pier Types
1) Solid Piers
A solid pier (pier wall) consists of a solid mass of reinforced concrete, without
overhangs, that is usually rectangular in plan. Solid piers are used primarily for river or
stream crossings, low clearance bridges, bridges over divided highways with narrow
medians, and where short columns on wide bridges would have high stress due to
shrinkage. Solid Piers may also be used to meet crash protection requirements
adjacent to railroads.
2) Hammerhead Pier
With increasing pier height and narrow superstructures, the hammerhead pier
becomes more economical by reducing the required amounts of material and
formwork. Hammerhead piers consist of a single large column with a cap beam
overhanging on either side. Both the column and cantilevered ends of the cap beam
support the superstructure beams. When located in a waterway, pier protection may
be required.
3) Multiple Columns
When piers need to be tall and wide, a multiple column pier is usually the best choice.
This pier type consists of two or more columns that may be either rectangular or
circular. The columns are usually connected by a cap beam that supports the
superstructure at points between the columns. For some highly skewed bridges with
large beam spacing, it may be necessary to place individual columns under each
bearing and to connect the top of the columns with a simple tie strut. When there are
only two columns with overhangs, this pier is called a pi pier. Circular piers are
aesthetically less attractive than rectangular piers, and are not recommended for use
in residential areas.
4) Free Standing Columns
This type of pier consists of free standing individual columns usually supporting a
voided slab or box type continuous superstructure. Unlike multiple columns, the free
standing columns are not connected with a cap beam which transmits superstructure
loads to the columns. Instead, superstructure loads are transmitted to the columns
through an interior diaphragm embedded in the superstructure.
7. Cap Beams
A feature of most multi-column piers is the presence of the cap beam. This cap beam is
subject to many design considerations that are not applicable to any other type of pier. The
width of the cap beam is governed by the necessary width to support the bridge bearings with
sufficient cover for the anchor bolts and the required support length for the beams. When the
simply supported end of a beam rests on a pier, seismic criteria dictates the support length
required. Support length (N) in the longitudinal direction shall be measured perpendicular to

Rev. 0 5.2 – 92
the centerline of bearings. Support length (N) in the transverse direction shall be measured
perpendicular to the centerline of the beam. Round columns require that the cap beam be a
least 50 mm wider than the columns on all sides.
For cap beam cantilever ends where the fascia beam loads fall within a distance “d” form the
column face, the actual behavior of the cantilever end may not be compatible with beam theory
and must be checked against the requirements of AASHTO, Special Provisions for Brackets
and Corbels. An alternative method to analyze such cantilever ends is the strut and tie method
described in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Both the Bracket and Corbel
and the Strut and Tie methods recognize that direct shear is the primary behavioral mode
instead of flexure, and is resisted by tension reinforcement across the shear plane. As a result
of these methods, more reinforcement may be required in the top of the overhang than would
be required if a normal cantilevered beam is assumed.
8. Foundations
a. Substructure Location
When deciding where to locate the substructures, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
identify all appropriate horizontal offsets, standards and requirements. Utilizing these
constraints and the shoulder break length, the determination of whether a single or
multiple span arrangements is the most appropriate shall be made. The available beam
depth is factored in along with any special concerns such as:
1) Sheeting requirements for staging and substructure construction. Cantilever sheeting
design vs. tied-back sheeting vs. pile and lagging wall costs.
2) Deep water cofferdam construction vs. shallower depths or causeway construction.
3) Treatments such as high abutments with large reveal heights for masonry or brick
treatments.
4) Wetland or corridor encroachments – Longer spans would require additional beam
depth. This might raise a profile and move the toe of slope out or require a retaining
wall. Shorter spans may require more disturbance of the area and also require
retaining walls at the toe.
5) Staging problems – includes interference between the existing and new features, such
as substructures, beams and pier caps, as well as utilities that must remain in service.
6) Utility Conflicts – The avoidance of utilities that would require costly relocations may
further restrict the location of substructures. Pile driving and sheeting placement may
be limited by overhead or underground interference.
b. Foundation Assessment
The substructure design shall be based on available borehole logs for the bridge and
earthworks. These logs shall be evaluated with regard to:
1) Their location with respect to the proposed bridge, and shall be assessed by the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor to confirm there is sufficient information to develop the
substructure design.
2) Where necessary the A/E and/or the EPC Contractor shall specify additional
exploratory holes to develop and/or validate the substructure design.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall review the borehole and supporting laboratory
test data to confirm soil and rock profiles to develop the design ground model.
4) The ground shall be assessed to determine the appropriate foundation type,
constructability and temporary works.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 93
c. Foundation Selection
Water Crossings – The following criteria shall be applied to all structures crossing water:
1) Unless founded on rock, all structures crossing water shall be supported on piles or
have other positive protection to maintain the elevation at which the bottom of the
substructure unit is founded. In concrete lined channels where there is no scour risk,
this requirement may be waived with approval of the RCJ.
2) The minimum pile length to pile diameter shall be > 12.
3) Piles shall be socketed into rock if a stilt effect is possible due to scour.
4) Cofferdams shall be evaluated with regard to need, type, size, constructability and
cost. Alternative types of construction such as causeways, caissons or drilled shafts
shall be considered and compared to conventional cofferdam costs.
5) The estimated maximum depth of scour shall be used to determine the overall
structure stability.
d. Grade Separations
1) Use of continuous structures will normally require unyielding foundations. Differential
settlement is not acceptable since it may result in secondary stresses that may be
detrimental to the structure.
2) In cases where the abutment or wingwall heights exceed 9 m, alternate system other
than cantilevered, cast-in-place concrete wall systems shall be considered. This is
especially true in fill areas. Several modular wall systems are available which may
provide a more economical system.
e. Orientation, Configuration, and Details
1) Skew
(a) The orientation of the substructure units is greatly dependent upon the type of
feature crossed. Whenever possible, the skew of the structure shall be kept at 30°
or less.
(b) Skews in excess of 30° may cause uplift problems, cracking of the concrete deck
in the acute corners, and require larger bridge seats and pedestal bearing areas.
(c) Sharp acute corners shall be avoided, and radial supports are preferred for curved
structures. If possible, skews of 10° or less should be eliminated, unless it creates
problems of misalignment with the feature crossed.
2) Water Crossings
Whenever possible piers should be aligned with the stream flow to avoid the creation
of eddies and turbulence which could result in scour. The placement of abutments or
piers should not result in pockets where water turbulence could increase the potential
for scour. The following guidelines for substructures need to be considered:
(a) Two piers close to each shore line may be more hydraulically efficient and
economical to build than one deep water pier.
(b) The pier shall be made solid to a height of 1 m above the maximum navigable
elevation or 600 mm above the 100 year flood or the flood of record, whichever is
higher. If the remaining height of pier above the solid stem is 5 m or less, the pier
shall be made completely solid.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 94
(c) The upstream face of piers shall be rounded or V shaped to improve hydraulics
and debris problems.
(d) In cases where the wingwalls of an abutment are at or near the water’s edge, the
wingwalls shall be flared to improve the hydraulic entrance condition. If possible,
the elevation at the end of the wingwall should be higher than design high water or
as a minimum, the ordinary high water.
(e) The wingwalls on the upstream side should be aligned to direct the flow through
the bridge opening. For the ease of construction, the downstream wingwalls may
be made mirror images. Scour protection should be provided in the form of rip-rap
wherever risk of scour is identified.
3) General Details
(a) U-wingwalls may be used when there is interference between the existing and the
proposed structure or some other site restriction. They may also be used when a
certain aesthetic effect is requested. Flared or in-line wingwalls are generally
more cost effective. Corrosion environment for sheeting. Durability for precast.
(b) When the length of a wingwall exceeds 8 m, use of an alternate type of wingwall
system shall be investigated. MSE walls or other modular wall systems may prove
to be more economical than a cast-in-place cantilever design. However, MSE
walls shall never be used in proximity to a hydraulic environment where there is
risk of scour or underpinning. Commercially available proprietary MSE wall
systems specifically developed for use in marine environments may be used with
RCJ approval.
(c) Special details such as below ground cast-in-place or masonry block sills may be
used to support architectural stone or brick facings. If form inserts are used to
obtain an aesthetic appearance, wall thickness must be increased by an amount
equal to the relief of the insert.
(d) Narrow roadway medians will generally require the alignment of a median pier to
approximate the skew of the roadway. In wider medians, 18 m or more, pier
skews may be modified. In narrow highway medians where a pier will be subject
to road spray, a solid pier shall be considered.
9. Bearings
Bearings allow controlled bridge movement, and thus reducing the stresses induced on the
bridge superstructure and substructure.
a. Design references for the design of bridge bearings are:
1) Bearing Design, Publication No. FHWA-IF-12-052-Vol. 15
2) AASHTO Bridge design Specifications.
b. Types of Bearings
1) Elastomeric Bearings
Plain elastomeric pads rely on friction at contact surface to prevent bulging. Pads are
thin to prevent slip of pads under strain and therefore may accommodate small
horizontal translation.
Steel Reinforced elastomeric bearings rely on steel reinforcing pads and contact
surface friction to prevent budging. Steel reinforced elastomer may carry larger strains
and rotations than unreinforced bearing pads.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 95
2) Multi-Rotational Bearings
(a) Pot bearings provide a contained elastomer disc to high loading pressures,
causing the disc to behave as a fluid. Vertical force is transmitted through
elastomeric disc via a piston. Horizontal loads are transmitted by contact of the
piston face against the pot wall.
(b) Disc bearings are stiff to compression and rotation forces but are free to bulge.
Horizontal forces are distributed from a load plate to a center shear pin or
restricting ring.
3) Mechanical Bearings
Mechanical bearings distribute vertical and horizontal forces through metal to metal
contact. Most mechanical bearings provide a pin or knuckle to allow for rotation while
restricting translation. Rockers, rollers or sliding type bearings are common types of
bearings allowing required translation
10. Expansion Joints
Bridge expansion joints are designed to allow for continuous traffic between structures
accommodating movement, shrinkage, temperature variations on reinforced and prestressed
concrete, composite and steel structures. They stop the bridge from bending out of place in
extreme conditions and allow enough vertical movement to permit bearing replacement without
the need to dismantle the bridge expansion joint.
a. Types of joints
1) Small movement Joints:
(a) Compression Seals
Compression seals are continuous manufactured elastomeric elements installed
within an expansion joint gap to seal the joint against water and debris infiltration.
Compression joints are held in place by utilizing wall friction of vertical surfaces
(b) Silicone Sealants
Silicone sealants are durable watertight sealants that are efficient for rehabilitation
and repair projects. System has less service life than compression seals but is
easier to install and maintain.
2) Medium Movement Joints:
(a) Sliding Plate Joints
Two overlapping plates attached to the superstructure on each side of the plate.
Joints do not provide an effective barrier against water infiltration, however, they
provide a smooth driving surface across joints. Corrosion protection/mitigation
shall be considered when using sliding plate joints, and shall be used only with the
approval of the RCJ.
(b) Strip Seal Joints
Elastomeric strip seal system consists of preformed gland mechanically locked
into steel angles or members embedded in slab or abutment concrete. 180 mm
block-out in concrete is required for installation.
(c) Large Movement Joints
(1) Steel Finger Joints

Rev. 0 5.2 – 96
Are the most common type of joints and are installed in cantilever situations
on bridges. Steel finger joints are designed to carry superimposed traffic
loads. However, they do not provide an effective seal against water and
debris infiltration. This type of joint shall only be used with RCJ approval.
(2) Modular expansion Joints
Comprise a series of steel or concrete center beams oriented parallel to the
expansion joint axis. Elastomeric strip seals or box-type seals attach to
adjacent center beams, preventing infiltration of water and debris. The center
beams are supported on support bars, which span in the primary direction of
anticipated movement. The support bars are supported on sliding bearing
mounted within support boxes. Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) – stainless
steel interfaces between elastomeric support bearings and support bars
facilitate the unimpeded translation of the support bars as the expansion gap
opens and closes. The support boxes generally rest on either cast-in-place
concrete or grout pads installed into a preformed block out.
G. Principles and Guidelines

1. General
The principles and guidelines included in this section shall apply to all the RCJ structures in
TABLE 5.2.4.A.
Concrete is the material of choice for RCJ transportation structures. As appropriate,
superstructures and substructures shall be designed as reinforced or prestressed concrete
members. Structures and components covered under this subsection include reinforced
concrete bridges, pre-tensioned and post-tensioned concrete beams, unreinforced and
reinforced concrete culverts, and reinforced concrete piers, foundations, retaining walls,
spread footings, drilled shafts, driven pile foundations, and cut and cover tunnel structures.
Although concrete is the preferred material for RCJ transportation structures, steel material
might be more appropriate in some cases.
2. Depth/Span Ratios
The depth to span ratio for each structure is dependent on many factors. Some of these are
span, type of construction, aesthetics, cost, and false work and vertical clearance limitations.
For purposes of preliminary planning and design, the depth to span ratio listed below may be
used in setting grade lines at grade separations:
a. Highway Bridges:
1) Multiple spans 35 m or less, use 0.06.
2) Multiple spans over 35 m, use 0.045.
3) Single spans up to 55 m, use 0.045.
b. Railroad Underpasses (not including the 0.6 m dimension between the top of bridge deck
and top of track for ballasted rails):
4) Single spans up to 25 m, use 0.08.
5) Multiple spans 25 m or less, use 0.075.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 97
3. Design Life
All RCJ transportation structures covered under this section shall have a target minimum life of
75 years.
4. Skew
Maximum skew for Groups 3, 4, and 5 structures shall not exceed 30 degrees, unless
restricted by extreme conditions at the structure’s site. Any skew greater than 30 degrees
shall require the RCJ approval. Severely skewed alignments may cause uplift, seismic design
issues, and maintenance problems.
5. Abutments
Wingwall foundations shall match the abutment foundation type, and a pile supported
abutment shall always have pile supported wingwalls, except when MSE wall is used in
combination with a piled abutment.
6. Bearings
a. Elastomeric bearings shall be considered first, and other types may be used if their
advantages over elastomeric bearings are demonstrated during preliminary design. Pot
bearings shall be considered as second best choice. Spherical bearings shall not be used
on Royal Commission structures.
b. Multiple span substructures shall have fixed type bearings at only one pier support and
expansion types at all others. The fixed pier shall be centrally located, or close thereof,
between the two expansion joints.
c. Wide seats shall be provided at expansion span ends at abutments and piers to allow for
large displacements without unseating the spans. The minimum seat width shall be the
greater of 220 mm or that determined based seismic analysis.
7. Arrangement
a. For single span bridges, simply supported or integral abutment structures shall be used.
b. Multiple span bridges shall be made continuous for live load over interior supports, with the
maximum span length meeting the requirements stipulated in this section and
configurations meeting aesthetics requirements of the project.
8. Expansion joints
The distance between any two expansion joints on the deck shall not exceed 90 m. Modular
type joints are the expansion joints of choice for RCJ structures, unless dictated by design or
advantages of other systems are demonstrated to RCJ satisfaction.
9. Diaphragms
All Groups 3, 4, and 5 superstructures shall be designed with two end diaphragms and at least
one intermediate diaphragm, depending on the structure’s span length. For spans shorter than
17 m, at least one intermediate diaphragm shall be specified at the center of the span. For
spans 17 m or longer, at least 3 intermediate spans shall be provided at span mid- and quarter
points.
10. Piers
a. Piers over navigable water shall be placed with their longitudinal axes parallel to the
principal direction of water flow.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 98
b. The need to protect bridge piers from ship impact shall be determined based on
investigation of the specific site for the probability of occurrence of such event.
11. Railing
a. Brush curbs/sidewalks with curbs shall be used directly in front of concrete barriers, guard
fences, or traffic rails on all structures. Curb height shall meet or exceed height of
approach roadway.
b. Both bridge rails and transition rails on structures shall meet crash testing requirements of
NCHRP Report 350 or others acceptable to the RCJ.
12. Approach Slab
Approach slabs behind abutments shall be provided to guard against susceptibility of backfill
soil material to settlement behind abutments and smooth the transition from structure to
pavement and vice versa.
13. Environmental and Safety
a. Corrosion control
1) RCJ transportation structures shall be designed to endure corrosive or marine
environments or any other severe exposure conditions. Concrete protection shall be
suitably addressed by controlling concrete and steel materials, cover thickness, and/or
providing other protection methods. Concrete corrosion protection is included in this
manual.
2) Exposed reinforcing bars, inserts, and plates intended for bonding with future
extensions shall be protected from corrosion by concrete or other adequate covering
acceptable to the RCJ.
3) Anchorages, end fittings, couplers, and exposed tendons shall also be protected from
corrosion by adequate means acceptable to the RCJ.
4) Burning or welding operations in vicinity of prestressing tendons shall be carefully
performed, so that tendons are not subjected to excessive temperatures, welding
sparks, or ground currents.
5) Tendon wrapping, sheathing, or coating shall be continuous over entire debonded
length, and shall prevent intrusion of cement paste during concrete placement.
b. Elements Control
1) Closed box beam sections shall be provided with bottom vent openings of 25 mm
diameter located at the lowest ends of the beams, to relief air pressure and prevent
accumulation of water accidentally entrapped inside a box.
2) Structures in arid regions are expected to be influenced by the following three
processes associated with wind action on the topography of such regions: deflation,
abrasion, and dunes. Deflation is the lifting or rolling and subsequent removal of loose,
dry sediments (fine silt to coarse sand) by wind action. As the wind-driven silt and
sand impact an exposed surface of the structure it creates a form of natural
sandblasting effect called abrasion. Dunes are formed when a wind carrying a load of
sediment encounters an obstructing barrier, the wind velocity decreases and the
sediment is subsequently deposited in the form of a hill of sand on the lee side of the
barrier. Design and construction of RCJ structures in arid regions shall incorporate, as
reasonably practicable, provisions to mitigate the adverse effects of deflation,
abrasion, and dunes on the structures and their maintenance. An example of such
provisions is increasing culvert depth to account for sand accumulation on inlet.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 99
c. Noise control
The effect of highway noise within urban areas shall be mitigated by providing sound
barrier systems, designed to meet RCJ requirements for noise abatement at the bridge
site.
d. Safety
1) Structures over rail shall be designed with provisions to protect their substructure
elements from being impacted by a derailed train. Such provisions are included in
AREMA.
2) Structures shall be designed to withstand the forces induced in structural members as
a result of accidental truck impact. The members covered under these requirements
include deck cantilevers due to accidental impact on concrete barrier, and pier bents
consisting of two columns or less, including hammer heads, laying within less than 9 m
from the edge of a roadway and not protected by other means from accidental truck
impact. The impact force and point of application on a pier shall be as specified for
traffic barriers.
3) Piers in navigable waters shall be protected from ship impact whenever probability of
occurrence of such an event is established. The reference document on this is the
AASHTO Guide Specifications and Commentary for Vessel Collision Design of
Highway Bridges, 2nd Edition, 2010 Interim.
H. Design Standards and Requirements

1. General
a. Purpose
This section mandates the standards and design requirements for the RCJ transportation
structures to meet the requirements specified herein for durability, strength, stiffness,
stability, and serviceability to ensure long and safe operation of highway vehicles on those
structures.
b. Applicability
This section shall apply to all RCJ transportation structures, except those excluded in
Section 5.2.6.B.
2. Design Standards
a. Main standards
Design and construction of all applicable RCJ transportation structures shall be based
upon the requirements of this section and existing structures standards; as stated in this
section. Where the requirements stipulated in any reference document are in conflict with
the requirements of this section, the stricter shall govern unless otherwise noted herein
and shall require the RCJ approval. The AASHTO Standard Specifications and MOT are
the main standards for design and construction of RCJ transportation structures.
b. Authorities standards
Design and construction of Groups 1 and 2 structures, as applicable, shall be based upon
the design standards of the authority having jurisdiction over the structures.
c. Alternative Standards
Rev. 0 5.2 – 100
In the absence of appropriate standards, because of unconventional design or introduction

of uncommon features, alternative standards may be proposed. However, documents and
evidence in support of the proposed standards must be submitted to the RCJ for review
and approval.
d. No appropriate Standards
Where no appropriate standards exist (e.g. due to the introduction of new technology,
components or a novel application of such) then risk assessments shall be carried out,
supported by experimental and development data, before the component or technique is
adopted for RCJ use
3. Analysis Methods
a. Member forces, stresses, and deformations under the design loads specified in this
section shall be obtained through recognized elastic analysis methods accepted by the
RCJ.
b. Inelastic analysis methods shall only be used where noted in this section, or
required/recommended in the design standards referred to in the section.
c. Soil structure interaction shall be considered in the design of flexible buried structures,
such as proprietary precast arch systems.
4. Design Methods
a. Design of RCJ transportation structures shall be based on the following methods:
1) Reinforced concrete structures - Load Factor Design Method
2) Prestressed concrete structures – Service Load Design Method with check for
Ultimate Strength
3) Abutments, capbeams, pilecaps, and piers - Load Factor Design Method with check
for Serviceability.
4) Foundations – Service Load Design Method
5) Drilled shafts - Service Load Design Method
6) Driven piles– Service Load Design Method
7) Steel structures - Load Factor Design Method
b. Groups 1 and 3 structures over drainage channels shall be designed with attention to
neighboring drainage structures, to prevent potential for channel overflow and flooding.
c. Groups 1 and 3 structures over drainage channels shall be sized based on hydraulic
design demand and specified freeboard. Selection of RCJ unreinforced culvert structures
sizes shall also be based on hydraulic design, and not on height of the fill above the
culvert.
d. Cut and cover tunnel structures shall be designed in accordance with FHWA publication –
FHWA – NH1-10-034, “Technical Manual for Design and Construction of Road Tunnels”.
5. Strength Requirements
a. Steel
1) Reinforcing Steel

Rev. 0 5.2 – 101
(a) Reinforcing steel used for constructing RCJ transportation structures substructures
shall as per the requirements of Subsection 5.2.6.
(b) Minimum steel yield strength = 420 MPa
2) Prestressing Steel
(a) Prestressing steel used for constructing RCJ transportation structures shall be
12.5 mm diameter “Uncoated Seven-wire high Tensile Cold Drawn Low Relaxation
strand for Prestressed Concrete” as specified in ASTM A416, Grade 270 with fu’
= 1801 MPa.
(b) Use of 15.20 mm strands shall be allowed for cast in place post-tensioned
members only.
b. Concrete
1) Reinforced Concrete Applications:
Concrete strength used for constructing RCJ reinforced concrete transportation
structures shall have the following minimum cylinder strength:
(a) Decks except barriers fc’ = 40 MPa
(b) Abutments fc’ = 35 MPa
(c) Piers except footings fc’ = 35 MPa
(d) Drilled shafts fc’ = 35 MPa
(e) All others fc’ = 27.5 MPa
2) Post-Tensioned Concrete Applications:

Concrete strength used for constructing RCJ post-tensioned concrete transportation
structures shall have the following cylinder strength:
(a) Min. initial fc’ = 28.5 MPa
(b) Min. final fc’ = 35 MPa
(c) Max. final fc’ = 41 MPa
3) Pre-Tensioned Concrete Applications:

Concrete strength used for constructing RCJ prestressed concrete transportation
structures shall have the following minimum cylinder strength:
(a) Min. initial fc’ = 28.5 MPa
(b) Max. initial fc’ = 31.4 MPa
(c) Min. final fc’ = 35.3 MPa
(d) Max. final fc’ = 41 MPa
Use of higher concrete strength than those specified in this section shall require
6. Concrete Cover Requirements
a. The following minimum concrete clear cover shall be provided:

Rev. 0 5.2 – 102
1) Concrete exposed to salt water & splash zone 75 mm

2) Concrete of all substructure elements in contact with earth soil 75 mm.
3) Concrete of all substructure elements exposed to weather 75 mm.
4) Superstructure cast-in-place concrete exposed to weather 50 mm.
5) Inside faces of post-tensioned concrete boxes 50 mm.
6) Prefabricated superstructure elements, outside 50 mm
7) Prefabricated superstructure elements, inside faces 40 mm.
7. Design Loads
RCJ transportation structures shall be designed for all the loads listed under this section.
a. Standard loads
RCJ transportation structures shall be designed for the applicable of the following loads:
1) Dead load and superimposed dead load (D)
2) Live load (L)
3) Impact load (I)
4) Wind load on structure (W)
5) Wind Load on live load (WL)
6) Centrifugal force (CF)
7) Longitudinal force from live load (LF)
8) Earth lateral load (EH)
9) Longitudinal force due to friction or shear resistance at expansion bearings (F)
10) Other forces (Rib shortening, Shrinkage, Temperature and/or Support Settlement)
(OF)
11) Earthquake forces (EQ)
12) Stream flow pressure (SF)
13) Buoyancy (B)
14) Prestressing forces (PS).
Members of the structure shall be designed for the combination of loads and forces that
can occur simultaneously to produce the most critical design conditions as specified in the
standard codes. In addition, RCJ transportation structures shall also be designed for the
non-standard loads specified in this section.
1) Dead load (D)
(a) Dead load shall consist of the structure’s estimated self-weight and the
superimposed dead load it supports, such as weigh of concrete deck,
diaphragms, utilities, and rail system. The unit weights below shall be used to
calculate dead load on structures.
3
(1) Steel 78 kN/m
3
(2) Reinforced Concrete 24 kN/m
3
(3) Pre-stressed Concrete 24 kN/m
Rev. 0 5.2 – 103
3
(4) Earth-Fill 19 kN/m
3
(5) Asphalt Concrete 22 kN/m
3
(6) Water 9.81 kN/m
(b) Structures designed with concrete wearing surface for riding surface shall be
designed for an additional future wearing surface weight calculated based on 7.5
kg/m3.
(c) Superimposed load due to lighting poles, utility lines, fences, noise barriers, etc..
carried on a structure shall be calculated based on specific materials volumes
and unit weights.
(d) The minimum superimposed dead load due to waterproofing and protective
covering shall be 1 kN/m2.
2) Live load (L)
(a) Groups 1, 2, and 3 Structures
RCJ Groups 1, 2, and 3 culvert-type transportation structures shall be designed
using the MOT live load models in FIGURE 5.2.4.A and the standard AASHTO
culvert design requirements for consideration and distribution of live load.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 104
FIGURE 5.2.4.A MOT DESIGN LIVE LOAD.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 105
(b) Groups 3, 4, and 4 Structures

RCJ Groups 3, 4, and 5 transportation structures shall be designed using the
MOT live load models in FIGURE 5.2.4.A and the standard AASHTO bridge
design requirements for distribution of live load.
(c) Configuration for the MOT truck is similar to that of the HS-20, however, total
gross weight for the MOT truck is much higher than that of the HS-20.
(d) All RCJ structures laying on a Module Path shall be designed based on the live
load criteria specified in the RCJ’s Module Path System Design Report.
(e) Railing and Sidewalks Live Load
(1) The minimum live load on bridge sidewalks shall be as specified in the
AASHTO Standard Specifications.
(2) In addition to standard live loads on traffic lanes, one lane structures with
sidewalks shall be analyzed for incidental truck traffic on the sidewalk.
(3) Lateral loading on railing from pedestrian traffic shall be 1.5 kN/m applied at
the top of the rail.
(f) Governing Live Load (L)
(1) Design live load for Groups 1 to 5 shall include various loading scenarios to
maximize the load effects on the member to be designed. This shall include,
eccentric loading, alternate lane loading, alternate span loading, and
eccentric wind loading.
(2) For bridges on curves, provision shall be made for the increased proportion of
the load carried by main structural members due to eccentricity of the load.
(g) Distribution of Live Load
(1) For Groups 1 to 5, live load distribution shall be based on AASHTO Standard
Specifications.
(2) In line girder analysis, live load for Groups 3, 4, and 5 shall be distributed in
accordance with the AASHTO Standard Specifications requirements.
3) Impact load (I)
(a) Impact load for Groups 1 to 5 structures shall be calculated based on the
AASHTO Standard Specifications requirements.
(b) The span length L in AASHTO impact factor equation, defined as the length of the
effective free span between columns or supports, shall be determined as follows:
(1) For simple structures, as the length of the span analyzed for positive moment,
(2) For continuous structures, as the average length of the neighboring spans
analyzed for negative moment.
(3) For continuous structures, the impact value calculated for the shortest span
shall be applied for the remaining spans in the structure.
(c) Impact load shall not be included in the design of foundations, abutments, and
other earth retaining structures.
4) Wind Load

Rev. 0 5.2 – 106
The maximum wind speed used for determining wind load on structures and live load
shall be 160 kmh, unless directed otherwise by the RCJ.
(a) Wind load background
(1) According to AASHTO, the wind velocity of 160 kmh was used to determine
the base wind load.
(2) When a design wind velocity greater than 160 kmh is advisable; the base
wind load may be increased by the ratio of the square of the design wind
velocity to the square of the base wind velocity. This increase shall not apply
to Group III and Group VI Loadings of the AASSHTO Standard
Specifications.
(3) If an increase in the design wind speed is accepted by the RCJ, the increased
wind speed shall be recorded on the design documents and shown on the
plans.
(4) The wind loads in the next sections are based on AASHTO, AREMA, and ACI
358.
(b) Wind load on structure (W)
(1) Wind load on superstructure
Wind pressures on structures shall be included as part of the W loads as
follows:
(i) For structures where the bottom of the beams is located at a height (H)
not exceeding 9.0 m above natural ground, fill or water level, a uniform
transverse wind pressure of 2.36 kN/m², and a longitudinal wind pressure
of 0.59 kN/m2 shall be applied simultaneously on the superstructure.
The pressures shall be applied at the exposed area of the superstructure
projected upon a vertical plane running parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the structure. For taller structures of height exceeding 9.0 m, the above
specified pressures shall be as follows:
• H = 9.0 m to 17.0 m:
2
Transverse wind pressure 2.65 kN/m
2
Longitudinal wind pressure 0.69 kN/m
• H = 17.0 m to 25.0 m:
2
Transverse wind pressure 2.9 kN/ m
2
Longitudinal wind pressure 0.74 kN/ m
(ii) For structures higher than 25.0 m, wind pressures shall be determined on
a structure by structure basis, as specified under adopted design codes.
For special structures, the RCJ might request further investigation of wind
loads using methods other than those specified under adopted design
codes.
(iii) The resultant of transverse wind pressures shall be assumed to act in
any transverse direction, acting through the centroid of the exposed area
running parallel to the longitudinal axis of the structure.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 107
(iv) In the design of the substructure, an additional wind load shall be

considered as an upward force in the form of a lineal load applied at the
windward quarter point of the transverse width of the superstructure,
measured from the upwind surface. The magnitude of this vertical force
shall be 0.98 kN/m² of the exposed plan area of the structure.
(2) Wind load on substructure
Wind upon the substructure shall be included in load as follows:
(i) The substructure shall be designed to withstand the preceding loads from
the superstructure in addition to live load. Further, a uniform and
perpendicular wind pressure of 1.92 kN/m², acting in any direction, shall
be applied acting at the centroid of the exposed face of the substructure
projected onto a vertical plane.
(3) Wind load on live load (WL)
(i) For traffic on structures where the height (H) does not exceed 9.0 m
above grade, natural ground, fill or water level the wind on live load (WL)
shall consist of a transverse wind load of 1.45 kN/m and a longitudinal
wind load of 0.58 kN/m. These loads shall be applied simultaneously.
The transverse force shall be applied to the superstructure as
concentrated loads acting through a plane located 1.8 m above the top
elevation of the superstructure. The longitudinal force shall be applied to
the superstructure as a uniformly distributed load along the length of the
span, acting within a horizontal plane located 1.8 m above the top
elevation of the superstructure. For structures taller than 9.0 m, the
transverse and longitudinal values of WL shall be as follows:
• H = 9.0 m to 17.0 m:
• H = 17.0 m to 25.0 m:
(ii) For traffic on structures higher than 25.0 m, wind pressures shall be
determined on a structure by structure basis, as specified under adopted
design codes. For special structures, RCJ might request further
investigation of wind loads using methods other than those specified
under adopted design codes.
(iii) The above loads shall be considered in the design of substructure
elements that support one single lane of traffic.
(iv) For the design of substructure elements that support two lanes, the loads
shall be increased by 30 percent when two lanes are loaded.
5) Centrifugal Force (CF)
(a) On curves, structures shall be designed for a horizontal radial force (centrifugal
force/CF) determined as the percentage of the live load, without impact, in all
traffic lanes obtained as described below (AASHTO).

Rev. 0 5.2 – 108
-3 2
C = 7.865 x 10 S /R
where:
C = Centrifugal force in percentage of the live load
R = Radius of curvature (m)
S = Permissible speed (km/hr)
(b) The centrifugal force obtained using the above percentages shall be applied
horizontally through a point 1.8 m above the top surface of the roadway
measured along a line perpendicular to the centerline of the roadway.
(c) Traffic lanes shall be loaded in accordance with the provisions of AASHTO with
one standard truck on each traffic lane placed in position for maximum loading.
6) Longitudinal force (LF)
Design of structures shall consider a longitudinal force due to acceleration and
deceleration of traffic equal to 5 percent of those determined for live load in all lanes
carrying traffic and headed in the same direction, regardless of the direction of travel
on the lanes. Live load shall be based on lane load plus the concentrated load for
moment specified in FIGURE 5.2.4.A, without impact and with reduction for multiple
loaded lanes as specified in AASHTO. The force shall be applied as a longitudinal
force assumed to act within a horizontal plane located (1.8 m) above the floor slab
and to be transmitted to the substructure through the substructure. The force shall be
considered to act in any direction along the structure.
The effective longitudinal force shall be distributed to the various components of the
supporting structure, taking into account their relative stiffness. The resistance of the
backfill behind the abutments shall be utilized where applicable. The mechanisms
(bearings, load transfer devices, etc.) available to transfer the force to the various
components shall also be considered in the analysis to distribute the longitudinal
force.
In torsion sensitive structures such as single column piers, the design shall consider
the scenario of the longitudinal force applied simultaneously in opposite directions.
7) Earth lateral load (EH)
(a) RCJ structures, as applicable, shall be designed to resist lateral load due to soil
pressure. When the retained soil could become saturated, those forces shall be
estimated based on Rankine equation, neglecting wall friction:
Pa = 0.5 γ H2 Ka
Where:
Pa = Active thrust (kg/m)

γ = Unit weight of retained soil fill (kg/m3)
H = Height upon which earth thrust acts (m)
Ka = Active pressure coefficient
Ka = Ka (β, φ)
β = Angle of inclination of slope to horizontal

Rev. 0 5.2 – 109
φ = Angle of internal friction

(b) For dry retained soil, wall friction shall be included, and the earth pressure shall
be estimated based on Coulomb equation given by:
Pa = 0.5 γ H2 Ka
Where:
Pa = Active pressure (kg/m)
γ = Unit weight of retained soil fill (kg/m3)
H = Height upon which earth pressure acts (m)
Ka = Active pressure coefficient
Ka = Ka (α,δ)
α = Angle of inclination of the back face of the wall with

respect to horizontal
δ = Wall friction angle
(c) According to AASHTO Section 3.11.5, the earth pressure coefficients adopted in
design are dependent on the wall type and degree of movement. The earth
pressure coefficients further depend on soil types (granular or cohesive),
consolidation state, etc. Rankine equation may not be appropriate depending on
the above, sloping ground, etc.. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be able to
identify such limitations on Rankine equation, and recommend alternative
methods to RCJ for approval should they arise.
8) Shear resistance at expansion bearings (F)
Structures shall be designed with provisions to accommodate forces due to friction or
shear resistance at expansion bearings.
9) Other forces (OF)

Rev. 0 5.2 – 110
RCJ transportation structures shall be designed to resist all applicable forces due to
concrete shrinkage (S)), settlement of supports, rib shortening (R), erection, or any
other loads expected to act on the structure and not included in this manual.
10) Thermal forces (T)

(a) Forces and deformations resulting from temperature variations shall be
accounted for.
(b) The maximum expected temperature differential and coefficients of thermal

expansion shall be considered as follows:
(i) Concrete:
•
o
Temperature differential 70 C between max. and min.
•
-5 o
Expansion coefficient 1.08x10 cm/(cm- C)
•
o
Temperature rise 40 C
•
o
Temperature fall 30 C
•
-5 o
Expansion coefficient 1.17x10 cm/(cm- C)
(c) The 40oC rise and 30oC fall in temperature assumes that the stress free
temperature (temperature at which the structure is cast) is around 30oC.
(d) Thermal forces in concrete box girder bridges due to temperature differential
between the top of the deck and bottom slab shall be based on a temperature
gradient of 20o C.
(e) Air humidity to be considered in the design shall be 70 percent.
11) Earthquake forces (EQ)
(a) RCJ transportation structures carrying highway loads shall be designed for
seismic loads based upon the MOT requirements. Structures designed as such
shall satisfy the specified performance criteria to ensure safety of the traveling
public and minimize the costs of damage, and loss of use caused by potential
earthquakes.
(b) The soil supporting the RCJ transportation structures shall be analyzed for
liquefaction hazard and, as appropriate, mitigation measures shall be taken.
12) Stream flow pressure (SF)

(a) All piers and other portions of RCJ structures which are subject to the force of
flowing water or drift shall be designed to resist the maximum stresses induced
thereby.
(b) The effect of flowing water on piers and drift build up, assuming a second-degree
parabolic velocity distribution and thus a triangular pressure distribution shall be
computed using the following equation:
2
P = KV
Where:

Rev. 0 5.2 – 111
P = Average stream pressure in Pa

K = A constant, being 725 for all piers subjected to drift build up and
square-ended piers, 360 for circular piers, and 260 for angle-ended
piers where the angle is 30 degrees or less.
V = average water flow velocity in m/sec.
(c) The maximum stream flow pressure P max, shall be computed using the above
equation as twice the average stream flow pressure, Pavg. Stream flow pressure
shall be a triangular distribution with P max located at the top of water elevation
and a zero pressure located at the flow line.
(d) The stream flow forces shall be calculated as the product of the stream flow
triangular pressure distribution by the exposed pier area. If the corresponding top
of water elevation is above the low beam elevation, stream flow loading on the
superstructure shall be investigated. Then the stream flow pressure acting on the
superstructure shall be taken as P max with a uniform distribution. When stream
flow is not normal to the pier, directional component of the pressure shall be
investigated.
(e) When it is anticipated that the flow area under a structure will be significantly
blocked by drift build up, increases in high water elevations, stream velocities,
stream flow pressures, and the potential increases in scour depths shall be
investigated.
13) Buoyancy (B)
Design of foundations is negatively impacted by buoyancy. RCJ foundation
structures shall be designed assuming the negative effects of buoyancy, unless water
below the foundation level is effectively removed.
14) Prestressing Forces (PS)
Design of RCJ transportation structures shall consider the forces created in those
structures due to prestressing. Those shall include 1) primary forces occurring in any
prestressed structure and secondary forces occurring in prestressed concrete
continuous structures and 2) forces arising during construction due to temporary
restraint of post-tensioned members. The latter shall be considered under erection
loads during construction. Movement due to shortening during prestressing shall
never be obstructed.
b. Nonstandard loads
1) In addition to the loads defined herein, RCJ may request that Groups 3, 4, and 5
highway structures be designed for loads other than those previously defined to
assess ultimate strength or stability of the structures.
2) Construction Loads
All RCJ transportation structures shall be designed to safely and adequately resist
construction loads specified under adopted design codes.
8. Deformation limits
a. Flexural members of bridge structures shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit
deflections or any deformations which may adversely affect the strength or serviceability of
the structure at service load levels. Deflection of main structural flexural members carrying
live load shall not exceed L/800 where L is the member’s span length.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 112
b. RCJ transportation structures shall be designed for a minimum of 25 mm vertical

differential settlement at any single pier foundation. Based on geological and geotechnical
assessment of the structure’s site, RCJ may change this differential settlement
requirement.
9. Fatigue
RCJ Groups 3, 4, and 5 shall be verified to have adequate fatigue life under highway traffic.
The aim of performing fatigue–safety verification is to demonstrate that the fatigue effects due
to traffic loads will not impair the safety of the highway bridge during its intended service life.
Fatigue requirements specified under AASHTO Standard Specifications may be used for
adequate fatigue life verification.
10. Bearings
a. All bridge bearings shall be designed and constructed according to AASHTO and as
specified in this manual. Bearings articulation shall be shown on plans and be consistent
with the structure’s kinematics under applicable design loads.
b. Uplift
Design of the RCJ transportation structures shall include provisions for adequate
attachment of superstructure members to the substructure to resist uplift. Anchorage or tie
down elements shall be designed to provide 150 percent of the uplift forces calculated
under Group I loading and 125 percent of that calculated under all other service load
combinations of the AASHTO. Anchorage devices shall be designed for a minimum force
of 100 kN per beam support location for Group I where uplift is identified.
c. Uplift requirements mandated under the seismic design criteria shall govern over those
specified in this section.
11. Concrete Box Culverts
a. Concrete box culverts shall be fully designed and constructed in accordance with AASHTO
and as amended by this manual.
b. A culvert shall be defined as any structure, whether of single or multiple-span construction,
with an interior width of 6.0 m or less, measured horizontally along the center line of the
roadway from face-to-face of abutments or sidewalls. Structures spanning more than 6.0
m along the centerline of the highway shall be considered bridges. More complex hydraulic
and design analysis is generally required for bridge-size culverts. The information in this
section shall apply to both culvert and bridge size culverts.
c. Hydraulic analysis of culverts is generally based on the span length, and any sophisticated
backwater analysis program shall be used to determine the size and shape of RCJ culvert
structures.
d. Hydraulic analysis shall be performed on all culverts over drainage or seawater cooling
channels, including the RCJ standard un-reinforced culvert structures.
e. Four-sided (box), three-sided, and arch types of concrete culverts are often provided as
proprietary products with adjustable basic geometries, and designed using specialized
software. A/E and/or EPC Contractor proposing such products shall include in the
submittal to RCJ design basis report, sample calculations, and foundation reactions for the
proposed system.
f. The maximum clear span (the perpendicular distance between the inside face of the
sidewalls for nonskewed culverts, or for the perpendicular distance between the
centerlines of the sidewalls for skewed culverts) for a cast in place concrete box culvert
shall not exceed 7.3 m.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 113
g. Before a final determination is made to use a large concrete culvert, the use of a short-
span bridge with laid-back slopes and integral abutments shall be investigated.
12. Concrete Superstructure
Design and construction of concrete superstructures shall be based upon the standards and
specifications included in this section. Concrete superstructures shall be designed to resist all
applicable standard and nonstandard loads at the required performance levels mandated by
AASHTO and amended by this manual.
13. Concrete Deck
a. For multispan structures, the concrete deck shall be designed to be continuous for live
load, and the top of the deck shall be appropriately reinforced to locally resist all applicable
standard and nonstandard loads specified in this section.
b. On skewed decks, main deck reinforcement shall be placed normal to the girders/bridge
centerline when the skew angle does not exceed 30 degrees.
c. For skew angles greater than 30, main deck reinforcement shall be placed parallel to the
skew at the obtuse triangles formed at the ends of the deck, and parallel to the
girders/bridge centerline past the areas of the triangles.
d. Design of expansion joints
Joint design shall be based on:
1) Bridge shrinkage effects.
2) Thermal effects.
3) Bridge geometry.
14. Deck Drainage
Deck drainage shall be based on proper calculations of storm water runoff, and can be
accomplished by sloping the top of the pavement transversely by not less than 1.0 percent to
direct the runoff to brush curbs and collecting the water at low points located close to the lower
end of the span within the fascia beams of the structure. A properly designed collection
system, consisting of scuppers and downspouts shall be used to dispose off the runoff water,
with the pipes descending down the nearest pier and the water discharged away from the
structure. Scuppers or inlets shall be of corrosion resistant materials, of size and number that
adequately drain the structure, shall be provided. Downspouts also made of corrosion
resistant material, not less than 100 mm in the least dimension, and having cleanouts, shall be
provided to prevent discharge of water against any portion of the structure and detailed to
prevent soil erosion at ground level.
15. Piers
a. Bridge piers shall be designed for expected loads from the structure, wind load, stream
flow pressure, longitudinal forces due to traffic, earthquake, thermal forces, torsional
forces, and any additional forces that might act on them. Additionally, piers shall be
designed to meet the requirements on deformations and stiffness specified in this manual.
b. Design of piers shall be based on load factor design method and in accordance with the
reinforced concrete design section of the AASHTO and checked for serviceability.
c. Pier protection
In order to limit damage by the redirection and deflection of highway traffic and equipment,
piers supporting bridges over highways shall be protected by a reinforced concrete crash

Rev. 0 5.2 – 114
barrier or wall. Protection of piers shall be provided as outlined in the RCJ Standard
Details, which bases protection strategy on median width, roadway classification, and area
(residential or industrial).
In general, crash walls for piers are provided unless the pier has a heavy built - have a
cross-sectional area equal to or greater than that required for the protective crash wall and
the larger of its dimensions is parallel to the roadway.
1) Crash walls for piers generally specified of a minimum height above the top surface of
the roadway and width.
2) For a pier made of two or more columns, the crash wall usually connects the columns
and extends parallel to the roadway at least 300 mm beyond the outermost columns,
and 150 mm beyond the face of the column facing traffic.
3) The crash wall could be anchored to the footings and columns, if applicable, with
adequate reinforcing steel.
16. Approach slab
Transition approach slabs behind abutments shall be provided to guard against susceptibility
of backfill soil material to settlement and smooth the transition for the ride as it changes from a
rigid to a flexible and vice versa, such as between a concrete superstructure and an
embankment. In the case of bridge abutments, a subsurface approach slab shall be
adequately designed and reinforced with a varying thickness over a distance away from the
abutment.
17. Fill material
The following values shall be used to estimate lateral soil pressure, unless instructed otherwise
by the Geotechnical Design Report:
3
Weight of fill material: 1,900 kg/m
o
Angle of internal friction: 30
18. Highway surcharge
Surcharge load on earth retaining structures due to truck traffic shall be determined based on
MOT loading, and total surcharge load on the structures shall also include that contributed by
adjacent foundations and structures. Highway surcharge load due to traffic shall be calculated
as an equivalent surcharge load due 600 mm soil overfill.
19. Abutments
a. Abutments shall be designed to support loads applied by the bridge superstructure and
sustain those exerted by the retained earth of the highway/roadway approach immediately
adjacent to the bridge.
b. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall pay special attention to abutment behavior and design of
elements when the abutment is analyzed as part of 3-D model including the wingwalls. In
such cases, traditional analysis and design methods of the abutment are no longer valid.
c. Design of bridge abutments shall be such that the resultant of all loads acting on the
abutment is located within the middle one third of the footing, when the abutment is not
resting on rock or piles. A factor of safety against overturning of 1.7 shall be used. For
abutments bearing on rock, the resultant may be located within the middle one half of the
footing, and a factor of safety against sliding of 2.0 at the base of the footing shall then be
used.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 115
d. Piled integral abutments shall be supported on a single row of piles.

e. Abutments supporting multiple span structures shall have the stem and wingwalls
designed to rest upon a continuous footing that can be either soil or pile supported.
f. Appropriate provisions for drainage shall be provided at the back of abutments, for back fill
materials to be analyzed using its dry fill properties in the design of the abutment.
g. Abutments shall be designed based on load factor design method and checked for
serviceability.
20. Retaining walls
a. Design of reinforced concrete retaining walls shall be based on the lateral earth pressure
and surcharge load calculated based on standard methods, and shall meet acceptable
design and stability requirements. A retaining wall structure shall be properly designed to
ensure that it will not fail by overturning, sliding, excessive settlement, excessive bearing
pressures, or overloading of piles, and shall possess adequate strength to resist applied
earth pressure, live load, and surcharge load.
b. The passive earth pressure of the soil in contact with the face of the retaining wall shall
consider the effects of unplanned and planned excavation works, such as installation of
new services and maintenance of existing services when calculating wall stability. Unless
otherwise approved by RCJ, the passive earth pressure shall be neglected when
computing the wall resistance against sliding.. Cantilever retaining walls shall be used for
a maximum height of 9 m, and counterfort walls shall be used for structures in excess of 9
m in height.
c. Use of cantilevered sheet pile retaining walls shall be limited to temporary construction
work. These walls are generally efficient for wall height in the range 2-5 m. For temporary
construction when wall heights is in excess of 5 m, tied back sheet pile and tied back
soldier pile or lagging can be used.
d. Mechanically Stabilized Retaining shall be used, as appropriate, as alternate systems to
traditional retaining walls.
21. Wingwalls
a. Wingwalls, retaining wall structures adjacent or abutting a bridge abutment, shall be
designed based on the stipulation in the previous section for retaining walls, and for the
types and requirements included in this section. Wingwalls used in RCJ transportation
structures shall be limited to the three types: U-wing walls, in-line wingwalls, and flared
wingwalls. Selection of a wingwall type is dictated by the conditions at the site, including
clearance and right of way constraints.
b. Wingwall foundation shall match the abutment foundation requirements (pile-supported
abutments shall have pile-supported wing walls, for example, except when MSE wall is
used in combination with a piled abutment).
c. The elevation of the top of the wingwall shall be 250 mm higher than the fill level and be
shown on the plans.
d. For integral abutments, in-line wingwalls cantilevered from the abutment are the preferred
arrangement. Flared wingwalls cantilevered from the abutment may also be used on a
case by case basis, especially at stream crossings where the alignment and velocity of the
stream increase risk of in-line walls to scour.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 116
22. Cut and Cover Tunnel Structures

a. RCJ transportation tunnel structures constructed by cut and cover methods shall be
designed as reinforced concrete box-type earth-retaining structures which are not free to
yield significantly. In addition to the weight of the basic structure, dead load for these
structures shall include weight of secondary elements supported by the structure and the
earth cover gravity load acting on the roof structure.
Cut and cover tunnel structures are generally less than 12 meters deep below grade, and
constructed using open excavation, with temporary support of the excavation during
construction operations. Round or horseshoe shaped structures are often used for
efficiency, and rectangular configuration may also be utilized.
b. The following loading scenarios for structures shall be investigated at working stress
levels, and additional loading scenarios shall be investigated as deemed necessary based
on the specific site and loading conditions (construction and permanent loads): Vertical
and long-term horizontal loads; vertical long term on one side and short term horizontal
load on the other side applied simultaneously.
c. For structures subjected to unequal lateral pressure, analysis for axial, shear, and moment
effects shall consider the top slab as being both restrained and unrestrained against
horizontal translation; and vertical load and short-term horizontal load, neglecting ground
water pressure on both sides. Cut and cover tunnels shall also be designed for hydrostatic
pressures, including uplift/flotation and provision of piles to resist uplift and/or drainage
measures.
d. The analysis shall consider variations in the stiffness and elastic properties of the
supporting subgrade soil. Compression forces shall not be considered in the shear design
of the top slab and invert.
e. Ventilation shaft structures shall be designed similar to cut and cover structures, and
installed utilizing similar construction methods requiring support of excavation with soldier
piles or sheet piles.
23. Retaining Wall Drainage
The fill material behind abutments, wingwalls, and retaining walls shall be effectively drained
using weep holes placed at a maximum spacing of 8 m. The water behind the wall may be
collected using a filtering system of coarsely-graded soil with water receptors behind the wall
at the weep hole locations. Counterfort retaining walls shall have at least one weephole for
each pocket formed by the counterforts. Location of weepholes shall be established such that
their invert is at 150 mm above finished grade or low water in the case of stream bridges.
Back-fill material may also be drained by means of pipe drains or gravel drains, or by
perforated drains.
24. Waterproofing of Structures

a. Waterproofing of the RCJ structures shall be based on the recommendations of the
corrosion protection subsection (5.2.6).
b. Waterproofing methods, details, and application on structural members shall follow
standard RCJ specifications and details.
25. Foundation
a. Geological and geotechnical investigation at the bridge site shall be performed to provide
the soil parameters and soil stratification information for foundation design. Soil
parameters shall be determined based on recognized standard laboratory testing methods

Rev. 0 5.2 – 117
and field testing. The soil parameters and stratification information shall be investigated for
the expected load effects transmitted to the foundation from the structure, foundation
deformation limits, and site restrictions to determine the most suitable foundation type for
the bridge site.
b. Shallow foundations shall be spread or combined footing type, on treated or untreated soil
to improve soil properties. Deep foundation shall be of driven piles, cast in place drill
shafts, or any other type of foundation involving piles.
c. Footings and piles shall be designed to keep maximum soil stresses within allowable
limits. To prevent uneven settlement, the footings shall be designed such as to maintain
uniform stresses in the soil and on piles.
d. Long-term differential settlement between adjacent piers on any RCJ transportation
structures shall not exceed 1/2750 of the sum of the adjacent spans lengths or any other
limit set by the RCJ based on the results of the site geotechnical investigation.
e. Design of foundations, including spread footings, drilled shafts, and driven piles shall be
based on service load method.
f. Pile shall be used for foundation at any structures site where scour risk is identified.
g. Pile foundations supporting fixed columns shall be battered, if necessary, to provide
adequate resistance for longitudinal forces on the structure.
26. Load combinations
a. Service Load Design:
The various groups representing all the various combinations of loads and forces to which
a structure may be subjected are included in the AASHTO Standard Specifications.
Components of the structure and foundation shall be proportioned for the applicable loads
and group of loads that produce the most critical design condition.
Service load design shall be based on the groups in the AASHTO, and the allowable
overstress limits shown in the table (allowable percentage of basic unit stress is referred to
as “Allowable over stress”).
b. Load Factor Design:
The loading group combinations for Load Factor Design are included in the AASHTO
Standard Specifications. The factors are only intended for designing structural members
based on the load factor method.
When designing for foundations (soil pressure, pile loads, etc.), the actual loads shall not
be increased by the factors in the table. The factors are not intended to be used when
checking for foundation stability (safety factors against overturning, sliding, etc.) of a
structure. The factors in the code represent usual conditions and should be increased, if it
is judged that predictability of loads is different than that anticipated by the specifications.
27. Temporary Structures
Temporary structures, including false work, and shoring systems consisting of cantilevered
sheet piling, anchored sheet piles, cantilevered and anchored soldier beams with lagging,
braced excavation, and cofferdams, shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
AASHTO requirements for temporary structures.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 118
I. Aesthetics
1. General
Bridges have more than just transportation functions. They also function socially, visually and
symbolically as significant elements in their communities and environments. Every project will
be different and will possess its own unique characteristics. Nevertheless there will be some
commonality in the steps that engineers may apply in considering aesthetic bridge design.
Following these steps will help ensure a successful bridge that its owner and community will be
proud of. Basic aesthetic features of bridge elements are included in this section, and for
additional guidance on proportioning and selection of these elements for aesthetic values are
included in the “Royal Commission for Jubail, Guidelines for Aesthetics Design of
Transportation Structures, 1st edition, 2016” and the AASHTO references listed below.
2. Incorporation
Incorporated aesthetics in the design process from the early preliminary design stages and
shall be submitted to the RCJ for review and approval.
3. Aesthetic Design
As detailed on AASHTO BAS-1, the following steps shall be executed in the Aesthetic Design
of Bridges:
a. Site Goals.
b. Develop a Design Vision.
c. Engineering Study.
4. References:
a. AASHTO BAS-1 Bridge Aesthetics Source Book, 1st Edition.
b. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
c. Royal Commission for Jubail, Guidelines for Aesthetics Design of Transportation
Structures, 1st edition, 2016.
5. Design Guidelines:
a. Horizontal and Vertical Geometry
Before there is a concept for a bridge, the roadway geometry creates a ribbon in space
that can be either attractive or unattractive. The geometry establishes the basic lines of
the structure, to which all else must react. A graceful geometry will go a long way toward
fostering a successful bridge, while an awkward or kinked geometry will be difficult to
overcome.
b. Superstructure Type
The superstructure type defines the structural system used to support the bridge self-
weight and applied loads. It may be an arch, girder, rigid frame, truss or cable-supported
type structure. The most memorable aspect of the structure is determined when the
overall shape of the structural members is established.
1) Multiple girder systems such as steel plate or box girders, prestressed concrete
girders and concrete box girders are common structural systems for everyday
bridges.
2) Arches or rigid frames are occasionally used in situations where visual features,
atypical site conditions or project requirements make their use appropriate.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 119
3) Cable-supported bridges are often used in special situations where visual impact is
important or where site conditions require long span solution.
c. Abutment Placement and Height:
Abutment placement and height determine how a bridge begins and ends and, for shorter
bridges, how the structure is framed. The abutment placement also establishes the
shape of the end-span opening, which may have a significant influence on what can be
seen beyond the structure and how well the structure relates to adjoining uses.
1) An abutment is where a bridge touches the ground and the transparency of the
structure transition to the mass of the surrounding walls or topography. Abutments
may have an important symbolic function, as these are the points where travelers
begin and end their passage over a bridge. This is particularly true when pedestrian
traffic crosses a bridge. Abutments frame the landscape or cityscape behind the
bridge much like a picture frame defines the view of the picture it encloses.
Depending on the under clearance and superstructure width, spaces under bridges
may be very dark even during daytime. Security or maintenance considerations may
influence abutment type selection.
2) Stub-type or flow-through end bent abutments are located at the top of an approach
embankment or at the top of a cut slope. From a visual perspective, the spaces
adjacent to stub abutments are often slivers that are dark and distant to the observer.
This may not be desirable on bridges where security or maintenance considerations
may discourage the creation of spaces that are not easily viewed from a distance.
3) Mid-height abutments are typically located within the limits of the side slopes and
have a vertical surface whose height is a significant percentage of the overall bridge
opening. This abutment type may better frame the view beyond the bridge and be
more suitable for use on bridges in close proximity to the public, such as over
recreational trails.
4) Full-height abutments extend from the ground line to the bottom of the superstructure.
They are typically more massive than other abutment types and often create a very
strong definition of the bridge ends. This may be desirable for gateway bridges or for
locations where framing the view of the background is important. They may also
provide for improved security beneath urban bridges.
d. Superstructure Shape (including parapets, overhangs and railings):
The superstructure shape establishes the form of the structural members, including deck
overhangs, parapets and rails. The superstructure may be shaped to respond to the
forces on it, and the shapes of these elements and the shadows they cast determine the
intrinsic interest of the structure.
e. Pier Shape:
The pier shape defines the form and details of the piers. From many viewpoints,
particularly at oblique angles to the structure, the shapes of the piers will be a major
influence on the impression created. The majority of workhorse bridge piers are structural
frames consisting of circular or rectangular columns with a cap beam, which supports the
superstructure girders. Typically, the exterior columns are inset from the fascia girder for
reasons of structural efficiency, and the cantilevered portions of a cap beam are often
tapered to reduce the depth and mass at the ends.
f. Abutment Shape:
Abutments may become visually massive structures or secondary structures, depending
on the nature of the grading at the bridge ends and the bridge layout geometry. Abutment
Rev. 0 5.2 – 120
shapes are typically more visually important on shorter bridges than on longer bridges,
since an observer is more likely to view a short bridge in its entirety. From viewpoints near
the ends of longer structures, the shape and detail of the abutment will also be important.
For structures involving pedestrians, the provisions made for them at the ends of the
bridge can be among the most memorable aspects of the structure.
g. Color
Colors have a long history of application on bridges due to their large visual impact with a
correspondingly low cost relative to that associated with other bridge features and
treatments. The colors of uncoated structural materials as well as coated elements and
details need to be considered. Color, or lack thereof, will influence the effect of all the
decisions that have gone before. It provides an economical vehicle to add an additional
level of interest.
h. Texture, Ornamentation and Details
Texture, ornamentation and details are elements that can add visual interest and
emphasis. Structural elements, such as stiffeners and bearings, may serve this function.
Indeed, traditional systems of architectural ornamentation started from a desire to visually
emphasize points where force is transferred, such as from beam to column through an
ornamental capital. Patterns of grooves or insets and similar details are other examples.
i. Lighting, Signing and Landscaping
Though not actually part of the structural system, these elements may have great influence
on the aesthetic impression a bridge makes.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 121
SUBSECTION 5.2.5 FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES
5.2.5 FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES

A. General
1. Introduction
This section mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for design and construction
of the RCJ foundation and earth retaining structures, and provides the minimum technical
requirements to be adopted by the A/E and/or EPC Contractors to enable safety, quality, and
cost effectiveness in the design and construction of foundation structures that meet the needs
and expectations of the RCJ.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of foundation
and earth retaining structures, constructed of concrete and steel materials. This scope is
limited to building and non-building type structures and systems. The design requirements
provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on the MBC, industry standards, and best
RCJ practices.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall govern design of
and construction of foundations and earth retaining structures for all RCJ building and non-
building structures and systems.
4. Definitions
5. Abbreviations
a. Foundations and retaining walls shall be designed based on the allowable soil pressure
b. Foundations shall be designed with due consideration of the fact that soil cannot be
engaged in tension. However, a region of zero pressure in a foundation design is
acceptable provided that stability of the footing is confirmed.
c. The highest elevation of the water table shall be as provided in the GDR. Soil condition,
dry or saturated and the need to consider buoyancy in the analysis shall be based on this
elevation.
7. Codes
Design and construction of all RCJ foundation and earth retaining structures shall be based on
the requirements of this section and existing standards; these shall be from the MBC. Analysis
of these structures shall be based on standard methods acceptable to RCJ and the soil
parameters recommended in the GDR for the specific structure’s site.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 122

9. Approvals
The RCJ is responsible for review and approval of all studies, drawings and specifications
related to design of foundation and earth retaining structures within the RCJ jurisdiction. This
responsibility is shared with the structure’s owner, if other than RCJ.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning of foundation shall be performed after their construction is completed to verify that
the new/rehabilitated foundation structure achieves project requirements as intended by the
RCJ/building owner and as designed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.

D. Design Requirements
1. Bearing Pressure
a. Foundations and retaining walls shall be designed using an allowable soil pressure and
soil parameters recommended GDR.
b. Foundations shall be designed with due consideration of the fact that soil cannot be
engaged in tension. Regions of zero pressure are acceptable provided that stability is
maintained.
2. Water Table
a. The highest elevation of the water table shall be as provided in the GDR.
b. For structural design, water table elevation shall be at the elevation provided in the GDR or
at the finished grade elevation, whichever is higher.
c. Structures shall be designed for the most severe ground water conditions, including the
condition of no ground water.
d. For retaining walls, the ground water on the toe side and the soil on top of the toe shall be
ignored in structural design and in the overturning, sliding, and buoyancy stability
calculations.
3. Buoyancy
a. In the design of foundations, retaining walls, pits, pipes, and buried structures, the upward
buoyant force of ground water shall be taken as the volume of water displaced by the
structure and air space multiplied by the density of water. Interactions of structural systems
shall be considered, such as empty pipeline buoyant reactions on walls.
b. The dead weight of the structure shall be considered in the resistance to buoyant force
calculations. Soil shall not be considered unless it is directly supported by the foundation
Rev. 0 5.2 – 123
and it is certain that the soil would not be removed. Soil wedges shall not be considered in
the design. For soil that is directly supported by the foundation and that could possibly be
removed, the weight of water may be substituted for the weight of the soil.
c. For structures wherein water is expected on the inside of the structure, such water shall be
ignored in the calculation of the resistance to buoyant force.
4. Hydrostatic Pressure
a. For retaining, basement, tank, and pit walls, hydrostatic pressure shall be considered in
the design of the wall elements.
b. Base slabs of basements, tanks, and pits shall be investigated for upward shear and
bending due to hydrostatic pressure. The hydrostatic pressure shall be based on the water
table being at the finished grade elevation.
c. Water-stops shall be provided as specified in the RCJ specifications and at the locations
shown on the drawings.
5. Hydrodynamic Pressure
If hydrodynamic pressure due to flowing water is possible, then this pressure shall be
considered in the structural design of impacted elements.
6. Adjacent Loads
Where footings are placed at varying elevations, the effects of adjacent loads shall be
considered in the foundation design.
7. Existing Construction
a. New footings shall not be placed in locations which would increase soil pressure on
existing structural elements. Where the situation is unavoidable, the existing foundation
shall be evaluated for the impact of the new foundation, and the new foundation system
shall be configured to have the least negative effect on the existing foundation.
b. The effect on existing structures of surcharges relating to service and construction loads
shall be considered in the design. Limits shall be indicated on the construction drawings
that define the zones in which cranes and heavy equipment may not operate. Where the
condition is unavoidable, the A/E and or EPC Contractor shall provide an engineered
solution and submit to RCJ for approval.
8. Founding Depth
a. Unless a deeper depth is established as a result of the geotechnical investigation, the
minimum depth for shallow foundations shall be based on the recommendations of the
SBC 303, Chapter 5; min footing depth not less than 1.2 m below natural ground for
cohesionless soils, 1.5 m for silty and clay soils, and 0.6 to 1.2 m for rocks depending on
quality and strength of rock.
b. For strip footings supporting walls of light-frame construction, foundation width and
thickness shall be as provided in the MBC.
9. Stability
a. General
1) Stability calculations shall be based on service loads.
2) Except for retaining walls, soil shall not be considered unless it is directly supported by
the foundation and it is certain that the soil would not be removed. Soil wedges shall
not be considered.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 124
3) For tanks, vessels, bins, etc.., both cases (empty and with content) shall be
considered for all stability analysis. Structure shall be designed for the most significant
effect from the two cases.
4) Overturning and sliding stabilities shall be evaluated with and without the effects of
buoyancy.
b. Factor of Safety for Overturning
1) The factor of safety for overturning shall not be less than 1.5.
2) For irregular or special-use structures where loads other than wind and seismic
contribute significantly to the overturning effect, a higher factor of safety shall be
considered.
3) Weights of equipment that can be removed shall not be considered in the overturning
resistance.
c. Factor of Safety for Sliding
1) The factor of safety for sliding shall not be less than 1.5.
2) A value of 0.40 shall be used for the coefficient of friction, unless specified otherwise in
the GDR.
d. Factor of Safety for Buoyancy

1) The factor of safety for buoyancy shall be at least 1.2 for the highest anticipated
buoyant force effects. Where the dead weights calculated are well established, such
as for concrete components, this factor may be reduced to 1.1.
E. Foundation Structures Types and Selection

1. Shallow Foundation
a. Ground supported concrete mat, combined, isolated, and strip foundations are
recommended where the soil at shallow depths has sufficient bearing capacity for the
applied structural loads.
b. Shallow foundations shall be configured such that the gravity load bearing pressures for all
foundations will produce uniform settlement of the structural system. Combined
foundations shall be configured such that the dead load bearing pressure is approximately
uniform.
c. For foundations that support a lateral force resisting system of a structure, all tensile and
shear forces shall be resisted by the foundation and transferred to the ground through a
well-defined load path. Any uplift shall be resisted by concrete mass and soil, if it could not
be removed.
d. Shallow foundations shall be reinforced to resist the maximum loads required by design.
Steel reinforcement in shallow foundations shall be hooked only if required by analysis.
2. Deep Foundation
a. Deep Foundations are recommended when there are large design loads, poor soil at
shallow depth, or site constraints. Piles are generally driven into the in-situ ground; other
deep foundations are typically installed using excavation and drilling. Deep foundations
may be composed of either treated timber, reinforced concrete, or pre-stressed concrete.
A pile cap shall be used when the required loads exceed single pile capacity
Rev. 0 5.2 – 125
recommended in the GDR. Pile caps and isolated piles are typically connected with grade
beams to tie the foundation elements together. Lighter structural elements are usually
supported on the grade beams, while heavier elements bear directly on the pile cap.
b. There are different terms used to describe different types of deep foundations as follows:
1) Driven Piles
2) Drilled shafts or caissons
3) Helical or Screw piles
c. Pile Types are as follows:
1) Concrete Driven Piles
(a) Precast / Pre-stressed concrete round reinforced shafts ranging in size from 150
mm to 600 mm.
(b) Depths of soil embedment are optimal when greater than 5 m and may range in
depth to over 30 m.
(c) Concrete piles are typically designed with steel reinforcing bars and/or pre-
stressing tendons to develop the strength required for handling and driving, and to
provide required bending resistance.
(d) Long piles may be difficult to handle and transport. Pile joints may be used to join
two or more short piles to form one long pile. Pile joints may be used with both
precast and pre-stressed concrete piles.
2) Treated Timber Driven Piles
(a) Timber piles shall not be used unless specific authorization by the RCJ is
provided.
(b) Timber piles have significantly less strength than steel or concrete piles.
(c) Timber piles are more durable than steel piles in a corrosive environment.
3) Steel Driven Piles
(a) Structural Steel piles are subject to severe corrosion and shall be used only with
RCJ authorization.
(b) Steel piles are most economical for depths greater than 5 m and may range in
depth to over 30 m.
(c) Wide flange and Pipe profiles provide the most economical sections for use as
piles.
(d) See corrosion protection subsection (5.2.6) for Corrosion Protection requirements.
4) Drilled Piers/Caissons
(a) Drilled piers range in size from 450 mm to 2000 mm. Drilled shafts have the ability
to generate large passive pressure forces based on their diameter and depth of
embedment and should be considered for sign, flag pole and high mast lighting
foundations due to their significant lateral load capability.
5) Soldier Piles
(a) Soldier pile systems are utilized extensively in temporary works such as support of
excavation during project construction phases.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 126
(b) Other applications of Soldier Pile systems are not allowed and require
authorization by the RCJ.
(c) Soldier pile systems are constructed of wide flange steel H sections spaced about
2 to 3 m apart and are driven prior to excavation. As the excavation proceeds,
horizontal timber sheeting (lagging) is inserted behind the H pile flanges.
(d) Horizontal earth pressure is generally attracted to the soldier pile locations
because of their relative rigidity in comparison to the lagging. Soil movement is
minimized by maintaining the lagging in firm contact with the soil.
6) Helical Piles
(a) Helical piles are subject to severe corrosion and shall be used only with RCJ
authorization.
(b) Helical piles are a steel screw-in piling and ground anchoring system used for
building deep foundations.
(c) Helical Piles are manufactured using varying sizes of tubular hollow sections for
the pile or anchor shaft.
(d) The pile shaft transfers the structural load into the pile. Helical steel plates are
welded to the pile shaft in accordance with the intended ground conditions, and
transfer the shaft load into the soil. Helices may be press formed to a specified
pitch or simply consist of flat plates welded at a specified pitch to the pile's shaft.
(e) Helical piles may be installed at reduced cost and time of installation as compared
to competing pile systems.
(f) Helical piles can be installed in low overhead situations where there is insufficient
access for pile driving equipment.
7) Auger-cast Piles
(a) Auger-cast piles require specific soil and geotechnical parameters to be utilized
effectively and shall be used only with RCJ authorization.
(a) Auger-cast piles are formed by drilling into the ground with a hollow stemmed
continuous flight auger to the required depth or degree of resistance. No casing is
required. A cement grout mix is then pumped down the stem of the auger. While
the cement grout is pumped, the auger is slowly withdrawn, conveying the soil
upward along the flights. A shaft of fluid cement grout is formed to ground level.
Reinforcement may be installed after removal of the auger.
(b) Auger-cast piles cause minimal disturbance, and are often used for noise and
environmentally sensitive sites.
(c) Pile Testing
(1) All pile projects shall have load testing and inspection per the requirements of
the MBC.
(2) Dynamic pile testing shall be required for all driven piles.
(3) Load testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1143 and ASTM
D3689 for piles which have been augured or drilled.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 127
F. Earth Retaining Structures Types and Selection

Earth retaining structures shall be designed based on the GDR recommendations for the specific
type of structure and acceptable analysis and design methods included in the geotechnical design
section of this manual.
G. Construction Requirements
1. Foundations
The top elevation of pedestals supporting steel bases such as structural columns, pipe
supports, and equipment shall be at least 150 mm above finished grade level.
2. Retaining Walls
a. Accumulation of water behind retaining walls shall be prevented by providing a drainage
system consisting of adequately spaced weep holes and coarse gravel filter to collect the
water behind the wall.
b. The depth of backfill material in front of a retaining wall shall be at least 600 mm from the
bottom of the footing and at least 300 mm from the top of the footing.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 128
SUBSECTION 5.2.6 CORROSION PROTECTION
5.2.6 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Concrete and steel structures in Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are subjected to
one of the most severe exposure conditions in the world, and therefore, require special
considerations in design, detailing, and construction to achieve the acceptable standards
for protection and long term durability required by the RCJ.
b. This subsection covers the corrosion protection guidelines for the Royal Commission
facilities during design, construction, and operation and maintenance stages, to achieve
long service life, durability, and low maintenance cost.
2. Scope
a. The scope of this subsection is to provide the principles, guidelines, and requirements for
corrosion protection of RCJ facilities and systems constructed of concrete and steel
materials. The facilities and systems covered under this subsection include reinforced
concrete and steel structures including buildings, bridges, culverts, marine structures,
water storage tanks, wastewater handling structures, pipelines, pipe supports, pipe racks,
drainage channels, and others.
b. The requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are based onthe Saudi Building
Code (MBC), industry standards, and best practices adopted by the RCJ for over four
decades.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements in this subsection shall apply to all RCJ facilities
and systems included in the above scope. For structures and systems not specifically
mentioned in the scope, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall direct questions on applicability
to the RCJ.
4. Definitions
5. Abbreviations
a. For non-building structures not listed, specifications and construction details shall be
generated by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, subject to RCJ approval.
b. Although this ssubsection covers certain materials and special considerations for those
materials when used in particular applications, the category of structures "other than
buildings" includes possible applications for virtually any material type.
c. Exposure Conditions
1) Jubail Industrial City (Jubail 1 and Jubail 2)
The exposure conditions for reinforced concrete and steel structures in Jubail 1 and 2
are severely corrosive. The parameters which are relevant to performance of concrete
and steel structures are listed herein.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 129
(a) According to the Soil Corrosivity Survey Report conducted under Contract No.
001-T20 in 1981 for Jubail 1, the characteristics of the soil conditions of Jubail 1
are as follows:
(1) About 63% of the area is covered with sabkha (flat and very saline areas of
sand or silt lying just above the water-table).
(2) Chloride content in soil exceeds the critical value for corrosion at 21% of the
area.
(3) Sulfate content in soil exceeded the critical value for sulfate attack for
concrete at 52% of the area.
(4) Soil resistivity at 3 m depth was lower than 500 ohm-cm at 18% of the area.
(b) According to the Report on Characterization of Soil and Groundwater Conditions
in Jubail 2 conducted under Contract No 202-T03, Task 10, the characteristics of
the soil conditions of Jubail 2 are as follows:
(1) The soil conditions above the groundwater table are very severely to
moderately corrosive.
(2) The soil conditions below the groundwater table are very severely to severely
corrosive.
(3) Only 6% of the area is covered with sabkha.
(4) Chloride content in soil exceeded the critical value of 0.1% for corrosion of
reinforcing steel at 15% of the area. The chloride concentration in soil varied
from 0.01 to 0.6%.
(5) Sulfate content in soil exceeded the critical value of 0.1% for sulfate attack of
concrete at 15% of the area. The sulfate concentration in soil varied from
0.01 to 0.6%.
(6) Soil resistivity at 5 m depth was lower than 1000 ohm-cm at 25% of the area.
(7) The depth of groundwater table varies from 0.3 to 5.8 m from the finished
ground level (after the proposed filling).
(8) Chloride and sulfate contents in groundwater are more than the critical values
for concrete deterioration. The chloride and sulfate concentrations in
groundwater varied from 0.05 to 1% and 0.02 to 0.38% respectively.
The atmospheric conditions in Jubail 1 and Jubail 2 are characterized by high
day-time temperatures during summer, high humidity in winter season, high
temperature difference between summer and winter seasons, high temperature
and humidity fluctuations during day and night in summer season, high winds and
sandstorms, and atmosphere heavily laden with slat and dust. The average
minimum and maximum temperatures are 8 and 46°C respectively.
2) Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
Ras Al-Khair Industrial City is located about 65 km North-west of Jubail 1. The
exposure conditions are similar to those in Jubail and can be considered as severely
corrosive for reinforced concrete and steel structures.
(a) According to the Report on Geotechnical Investigation for Site Development of
Area B in Ras Al-Khair Industrial City conducted under Contract No. 001-T01,
Task Release 54, January 2013, the characteristics of the soil conditions in Ras
Al-Khair Industrial City can be summarized as follows:

Rev. 0 5.2 – 130
(1) The soil comprises predominantly granular soil deposit with clay deposits at
some locations.
(2) Groundwater table is located at 2 to 9 m from the surface.
(3) pH of soil varies from 7.02 to 7.36 and that in the groundwater varies from
7.03 to 8.37.
(4) Chloride content in soil (as NaCl) varies from 0.04 to 0.13% whereas in
groundwater it varies from 0.2 to 1.0%.
(5) Sulfate (SO3) content in soil and groundwater ranges from 0.01 to 0.38% and
0.08 to 0.25%.
7. Codes
a. Industry Standards
1) Saudi Building Code, Chapter 4.
2) American Concrete Institute, ACI 214R Evaluation of Strength Test Results of
Concrete.
3) American Concrete Institute, ACI 224R Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures.
4) American Concrete Institute, ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
5) American Concrete Institute, ACI 318M Building Code Requirements for
6) Structural Concrete and Commentary.
7) American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM C76 Standard Specification for
Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
Portland Cement.
Coal Fly ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use in Concrete.
10) American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM Standard Test Method for Water-
Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete.
Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures.
12) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, AASHTO T277
Standard Method of Test for Rapid Determination of the Chloride Permeability of
Concrete
13) American Water Works Association, AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for
Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
14) American Water Works Association, AWWA C151 Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast.
15) American Water Works Association, AWWA C301 Prestressed Concrete Pressure
Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type.
16) American Water Works Association, AWWA C303 Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar
Wrapped, Steel-Cylinder Type.
17) Society for Protective Coatings, SSPC SP-5 White Metal Blast Cleaning.
18) Society for Protective Coatings, SSPC SP-10 Near-White Blast Cleaning.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 131
b. Royal Commission Issued Reports

1) Report on “Characterization of Soil and Groundwater Conditions in Jubail 2”, Contract
No. 202-T03, Task Release No. 10, 2006.
2) Report on “Corrosion Control Guidelines for Concrete Structures in Jubail 2”, Contract
No. 202-T03, Task Release No. 10, 2006.
3) Report on “Corrosion Control Guidelines for Concrete Structures in Ras Al-Khair
Industrial City (RIC)”, Contract No. 027-T01, Task Release No. 2, 2013.
4) Report on “Soil Corrosivity Study, Contract No. 001-T20, by Research Institute, King
Fahd University of Petroleum and Minerals for Royal Commission, Jubail Project,
1981.
5) Report on Geotechnical Investigation for Site Development of Area B in Ras Al-Khair
Industrial City conducted under Contract No. 001-T01, Task Release 54, January
2013.
9. Approvals
The RCJ is responsible for review and approval of all corrosion protection related designs,
details, specifications, and studies for facilities and structures constructed within the jurisdiction
of the RCJ. This responsibility is shared with the structure’s owner, if other than the RCJ.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning for corrosion protection shall be performed during or after construction, depending
on the structural systems or elements, to verify that the new/rehabilitated systems or elements meet
the corrosion protection requirements of this subsection.

D. Protection of Concrete Structures
1. General
Concrete structures in Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are subjected to one of the
most severe exposure conditions in the world and therefore, require special considerations to

Rev. 0 5.2 – 132
achieve the intended durability. The guidelines provided herein include all reinforced concrete
structures.
2. Forms of Concrete Deterioration
a. Reinforcement Corrosion
This is the most predominant type of deterioration of concrete structures in Jubail and Ras
Al-Khair Industrial Cities. Chloride salts from soil, groundwater, seawater, and other
sources ingress into concrete and cause breakdown of the protective oxide film on
reinforcing steel and cause onset of active corrosion. Accumulation of corrosion products,
which occupy more volume than the steel, cause tensile stresses in the cover concrete.
When these tensile stresses exceed the tensile strength of concrete, the cover concrete
suffers cracking, delamination, and spalling. This causes loss of serviceability and may
lead to a reduction in the structural capacity of the reinforced concrete member.
b. Sulfate Attack
Sulfate attack is caused in concrete exposed to soil, groundwater and seawater by
chemical reaction between hydrated cement and sulfate ions. Sulfate attack results in
formation of expansive products which cause expansion of concrete leading to cracking.
Sulfate attack can also cause progressive loss of strength and mass due to deterioration in
the cohesiveness of the cement hydration products.
c. Salt Crystallization
This is caused in concrete exposed to wetting and drying by groundwater and seawater. It
is caused by ingress of salts into concrete which crystallizes on drying leading to
progressive crumbling or scaling of concrete. Salt crystallization leads to erosion of
concrete surface and exposes the aggregate.
d. Thermal Cracking
Cracking of concrete may be caused due to plastic shrinkage in freshly poured concrete or
drying shrinkage in hardened concrete. Plastic and drying shrinkage are physical
phenomena and cause tensile strain in concrete. When the associated tensile stress in
concrete exceeds its tensile strength, cracking occurs.
3. Exposure Conditions
Concrete structures exposed to the following conditions shall be considered as severe
exposure:
a. Below ground and up to half meter above ground level
b. Seawater and spray from seawater (splash zone, tidal zone and structures located within
500 m from the seashore)
c. Interior of chambers (valve chambers, manholes etc.)
d. Wastewater and chemicals
Concrete exposed to atmosphere and interior of air conditioned areas shall not be considered
as exposed to severe conditions.
4. Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures
a. General
Design and construction of durable concrete structures involve selection of adequate
materials, adoption of proper design and construction techniques and provision of additional
protection measures, as required, to prolong the service life to the design service life.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 133
b. Material Selection
1) Cement Type
The SBC recommends ASTM C150 Type I cement with mineral admixture for concrete
exposed to very severe chloride exposure and ASTM C150 Type V cement with
mineral admixture for concrete exposed to very severe sulfate exposure. Similarly ACI
318 recommends ASTM C150 Type V cement with pozzolan or slag for concrete
exposed to very severe sulfate exposure.
Cement with a high tricalcium aluminate (C3A) content is more resistant to chloride
exposure than that with a low C3A content. This is due to the influence of C3A in
binding more chlorides and reducing chloride diffusion coefficient of concrete. Mineral
admixtures increase resistance to reinforcement corrosion as well as sulfate attack
due to improvement in impermeability of concrete.
Type of cement for different exposure conditions shall be as follows:
(a) For reinforced concrete exposed to severe conditions, use ASTM C150 Type I with
mineral admixture.
(b) For reinforced concrete not exposed to severe conditions, use ASTM C150 Type I
cement without mineral admixture.
(c) For unreinforced concrete exposed to severe conditions, use ASTM C150 Type V
cement with mineral admixture.
(d) The mineral admixture shall be silica fume conforming to ASTM C 1240. Class F
fly ash conforming to ASTM C 618 may be used as an alternative.
2) Water Cementitious Materials Ratio
(a) The maximum water-cementitious materials ratio for all concrete shall be limited to
0.40.
(b) Water-cementitious material ratio is the ratio of water to the sum of cement and
mineral admixture. The SBC recommends maximum water-cementitious material
ratio of 0.4 for concrete exposed to very severe chloride exposure and 0.45 for
concrete exposed to very severe sulfate exposure. ACI 318 recommends
maximum water-cementitious material ratio of 0.45 for concrete exposed to very
severe sulfate exposure.
3) Compressive Strength
(a) The minimum specified compressive strength for reinforced concrete exposed to
severe conditions shall be 35 MPa.
(b) A lower strength may be specified for un-reinforced concrete.
(c) The SBC requires minimum compressive strength of concrete of 35 MPa for
concrete exposed to very severe chloride exposure and 30 MPa for concrete
exposed to very severe sulfate exposure. ACI 318 recommends minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 5000 psi or 35 MPa for corrosion protection of
reinforcement in concrete exposed to moisture and chlorides from de-icing
chemicals, salt water, brackish water, seawater, or spray from these sources.
4) Cement Content
(a) A minimum cement content of 370 kg/m³ shall be used for all reinforced concrete.
(b) A lower cement content value may be used for unreinforced concrete.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 134
(c) Minimum cement content requirement is governed by maximum water

cementitious material ratio, minimum compressive strength and workability. For a
required water cementitious material ratio and compressive strength, a certain
amount of cement is required to obtain a workable concrete mix.
(d) The SBC recommends minimum cementitious material (cement plus mineral
admixture) content of 370 kg/m³ for concrete exposed to very severe chloride
exposure and 350 kg/m³ for concrete exposed to very severe sulfate exposure.
c. Design
1) Cover
(a) For concrete exposed to severe conditions, the minimum cover shall be 75 mm.
(b) The cover over the reinforcing steel plays a very important the role in protection of
reinforcement against corrosion. ACI 318 specifies a minimum cover of 75 mm for
concrete cast against and exposed to earth.
2) Crack Control
(a) The minimum crack width shall be 0.15 mm for structures exposed severe
conditions and 0.30 mm for superstructures exposed to atmosphere.
(b) One of the major causes of concrete deterioration in otherwise durable concrete is
cracks. The cracks allow ingress of chlorides at an accelerated rate through
concrete cover. Cracks are caused by stresses in concrete due to drying
shrinkage, loads, and settlement.
(c) ACI 214R “Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures” provides a general guide
for tolerable crack widths in reinforced concrete for different exposure conditions.
A tolerable crack width of 0.30 mm is recommended for concrete structures
exposed to humidity, moist air, and soil, and 0.15 mm for structures exposed to
seawater and seawater spray.
(d) The above crack width limits shall be used for the design. However, ACI 224R
cautions that these values of crack width are not always a reliable indication of the
corrosion and deterioration to be expected. In particular, a larger cover, even if it
leads to a larger surface crack, may sometimes be preferable for corrosion control
in certain environments. Thus, engineering judgment must be exercised on the
extent of crack control to be used. ACI 224R also provides recommendations for
controlling cracks in different structural members.
3) Reinforcement Detailing
Good detailing helps in minimizing reinforcement corrosion risk. Using a large number
of smaller diameter bars is preferable to small number of larger diameter bars. The
maximum spacing between the bars shall be limited to 300 mm. Large diameter bars
shall be avoided in thin sections.
d. Construction Practice
1) Curing
(a) Curing is essential to develop the potential properties of concrete. Concrete
containing mineral admixtures is more sensitive to curing. Strength development of
fly ash blended cement concrete is slower than plain concrete and hence, a
prolonged curing period is required. Silica fume blended cement concrete has
higher potential of cracking due to plastic shrinkage and its strength development
Rev. 0 5.2 – 135
is sensitive to early curing. Therefore, efficient curing during early days is

required. The rate of strength development of concrete containing silica fume is
either equal to or better than concrete without silica fume.
(b) The minimum curing period shall be 14 days for all reinforced concrete with and
without silica fume. However, the minimum curing period shall be extended to 21
days for concrete containing fly ash as mineral admixture.
2) Hot Weather Concreting
Precautions shall be taken for concreting during hot weather. Recommendations
provided by ACI 305R “Hot Weather Concreting” shall be followed. The temperature
of concrete at delivery shall be limited to 30°C.
3) Chloride and Sulfate Limits
(a) The SBC and ACI 318 recommend maximum water soluble chloride ion content,
as measured in accordance with ASTM C1218, of 0.15% by weight of cement for
reinforced concrete exposed to very severe chloride exposure. This limit is
reduced to 0.06% for pre-stressed concrete. As the exposure conditions in Jubail
1, Jubail 2 and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are characterized by presence of
sulfates in soil and high ambient temperatures, which adversely affect chloride
diffusion in service and reinforcement corrosion process, a more stringent value is
applicable. Therefore, a value of 0.10% water soluble chloride content is adopted
for Jubail and Ras Al-Khair. For pre-stressed concrete, the limit shall be reduced
to 0.06%.
(b) Sulfate (SO3) content of cement allowed by ASTM C150 is 3% for Type I cement
with C3A content of 8% and less, and 3.5% for C3A content of more than 8%.
This is equivalent to about 4% of SO4 content. Therefore, SO4 content of
hardened concrete shall be limited to a maximum of 4% for all concrete (reinforced
and unreinforced).
4) Chloride Permeability
Chloride permeability, as measured by procedures described in AASHTO T277, is a
convenient quality control test for concrete durability. Typical values of chloride
permeability for 0.40 water cement ratio concrete made with ASTM C150 Type I
cement varies from 3500-5000 Coulombs. These values for 10% silica fume concrete
range from 500-1000 Coulombs. Therefore, the maximum chloride permeability for
plain, fly ash, and silica fume concrete shall be 4,000, 2,000, and 1,000 Coulomb
respectively.
5) Mass Concrete
(a) Excessive cracking that occurs as a result of improper casting and curing of mass
concrete significantly increases the ingress of corrosive contaminants. The
presence of cracks can rapidly accelerate the deterioration process.
(b) The configuration of structural elements with proportions that qualify as mass
concrete shall be avoided. Engineering shall employ “strut and tie” or “truss
analogy” techniques, where applicable, to keep member sizes below the mass
concrete threshold.
(c) Any concrete structural element for which the least dimension exceeds 1 m shall
be considered mass concrete and shall be subject to the requirements of this
subsection. The presence of mass concrete shall be declared in the general
concrete notes and specifically identified on the plans of the construction

Rev. 0 5.2 – 136
drawings. Instructions for casting and curing the mass concrete shall be provided
in the notes.
(d) Mass concrete is defined by ACI Committee 207 as “any volume of concrete with
dimensions large enough to require that measures be taken to cope with the
generation of heat from hydration of cement and attendant volume change to
minimize cracking.”
(e) Casting and curing of mass concrete elements shall comply with the
recommendations and provisions of ACI 207.1R, 207.2R, and 207.4.
e. Additional Protection Measures
Depending on the design service life requirement, it may be necessary to provide
additional protection systems. Some of the commonly used measures are using fusion
bonded epoxy (FBE) coated reinforcement, concrete surface coating, tanking, and
cathodic protection. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall assess the exposure conditions
and the design life and decide upon the required additional protection measures.
5. Summary of Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures
a. The guidelines on water-cementitious material ratio, compressive strength, cement
content, cover, crack control, reinforcement detailing, curing, hot weather concreting,
chloride and sulfate limits, and chloride permeability shall be followed for all concrete as
discussed in the above sections.
b. A summary of the guidelines for protection of concrete structures is given in TABLE 5.2.6.A.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 137
TABLE 5.2.6.A SUMMARY OF GUIDELINES FOR PROTECTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Type of
Exposure Cement
S. No Structure Reinforce Additional Protection
Condition Type
ment
Superstructures (located
1 over 500 m away from Atmosphere TYPE I Uncoated NONE
seashore)
Superstructures (located TYPE I
2 within 500 m from Atmosphere Plus Mineral Uncoated Concrete Surface Coating
seashore) Admixtures*
Interior of air-
3 Superstructures TYPE I Uncoated NONE
conditioned areas
Foundation of buildings,
bridges, culverts and
TYPE I
other structures (buried Buried (soil / FBE
4 Plus Mineral Waterproofing Membrane
and up to 0.5 m above groundwater) Coated
Admixtures*
ground/finished floor
level)
Immersed in
seawater and Spray TYPE I
Impressed current
5 All Reinforced Concrete from seawater Plus Mineral Uncoated
cathodic protection
(splash, tidal & Admixtures*
atmospheric zones)
Waterproofing membrane
for buried concrete up to
Partially buried & TYPE I
FBE 150 mm above ground
6 Pipe Supports exposed to Plus Mineral
Coated level and concrete
atmosphere Admixtures*
surface coating for
exposed concrete
TYPE I
Buried (soil / FBE
7 Piles Plus Mineral NONE
groundwater) Coated
Admixtures*
TYPE I
Chambers and Interior of non-air- FBE
8 Plus Mineral Concrete Surface Coating
manholes conditioned areas Coated
Admixtures*
Interior of chambers TYPE I
Wastewater/chemic FBE
9 handling wastewater Plus Mineral Concrete Surface Coating
als Coated
and chemicals Admixtures*
TYPE I
Potable/reclaimed FBE
10 Tanks (internal) Plus Mineral Concrete Surface Coating
water Coated
Admixtures*
Waterproofing membrane
for buried concrete up to
TYPE I
Tanks (bottom & Potable/reclaimed FBE 150 mm above ground
11 Plus Mineral
external) water Coated level and concrete
Admixtures*
surface coating for
exposed concrete
Unreinforced concrete TYPE V
12 (mud-mat, anchor blocks All conditions Plus Mineral NONE NONE
etc.) Admixtures*
* Mineral admixture shall be 7% silica fume conforming to ASTM C1240 as cement replacement

Rev. 0 5.2 – 138
E. Protection of Steel Structures

1. General
Steel structures in Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are subjected one of the most
severe exposure conditions in the world and therefore, require special corrosion control
measures to achieve the intended durability. The guidelines provided herein include steel
framed structures (such as buildings, pipe racks, bridges etc.), tanks, vessels, and piles.
2. Forms of Corrosion of Steel
a. Galvanic Corrosion
Galvanic corrosion occurs when two dissimilar metals come in contact in a conducting
corrosive environment. The corrosion is stimulated by the potential difference that exists
between the two metals. The more active metal acts as anode and the other acts as
cathode.
Galvanic corrosion can be minimized by selecting suitable metal couples in system design.
If sufficient experience is not available to select compatible couples, the selection may be
confirmed through laboratory testing. Wherever dissimilar metals are used, they shall be
separated electrically with an electrical insulator. When insulation is not practical, the area
ratio method may be used in the design. Coating the cathode only, or coating both the
anode and the cathode, is generally preferable to avoid the unfavorable area ratio effect in
a galvanic corrosion situation.
b. Pitting
Pitting corrosion is localized accelerated dissolution of metal that occurs as a result of a
breakdown of the otherwise protective passive film on the metal surface. Pitting can be
avoided/minimized by coating the metal surfaces, periodic cleaning and designing shapes
that prevent liquids or solids to collect.
c. Crevice Corrosion
Crevice corrosion refers to corrosion occurring in confined spaces to which the access of
the working fluid from the environment is limited. These spaces are generally called
crevices. Examples of crevices are gaps in contact areas between parts, under gaskets or
seals, inside cracks and seams, in spaces filled with deposits, and under sludge piles.
Crevice corrosion can be avoided by minimizing and sealing crevices and cavities where
the metal is susceptible to corrosion. The use of double butt or double lap weld joints,
continuous welds, or nonporous filler materials is recommended to seal the crevice
openings.
d. Intergranular Corrosion
Intergranular corrosion, also known as intergranular attack, is a form of corrosion where
the boundaries of crystallites of the material are more susceptible to corrosion than their
insides. This situation can happen in otherwise corrosion-resistant alloys, when the grain
boundaries of the corrosion-inhibiting elements are depleted, such as chromium by some
mechanism. To minimize the effects of intergranular corrosion, the base metal and weld
filler material shall be selected to be compatible with the specific environment. Laboratory
tests, if necessary, may be specified as part of the materials selection process.
Additionally, a qualified corrosion or metallurgical engineer shall be consulted on the need
of other control measures such as stress relieving and heat treatment of susceptible
metals.
e. Stray Current Corrosion

Rev. 0 5.2 – 139
Stray current corrosion, also called interference corrosion, is corrosion caused by direct
current from an external source that travels through paths other than the intended circuit.
Accelerated corrosion may result if the current is collected by a structure and discharges to
the soil. Preventive measures include electrical insulation of the structure, equipotential
bonding, shielding, or cathodic protection.
3. General Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel
a. General
Steel structures shall be designed to resist the exposure conditions to achieve the
intended design service life of the structure. The most commonly used method of design
and construction of durable steel structures involve material selection, protective coatings,
cathodic protection, and environment treatment.
b. Material Selection
Material selection shall consider the service conditions to which the structure will be
exposed to and shall involve a qualified metallurgical engineer. Suitable corrosion
protection techniques shall be selected by a qualified corrosion control and coatings
specialist.
Following guidelines shall be followed in selection of materials:
1) Materials Selection Process
Most corrosion patterns are not uniform but highly localized. Therefore, it is important
that all materials be evaluated on maximum penetration rates especially when
considering structures containing products. Care shall be taken when substituting
more noble alloys; while general corrosion rates are substantially lower, the mode of
failure can be catastrophic (i.e. stress corrosion cracking, hydrogen embrittlement,
etc.).
2) Galvanic Corrosion
When selecting materials for various components of a unit (ex. body and trim materials
for valves or connecting pipework), care shall be taken to ensure use of galvanically
compatible materials. Electrical insulators and insulating sleeves shall be used to
separate dissimilar metals from each other. In cases where providing insulation is not
feasible, more noble metals shall be used for joining or fastening.
3) Ferrous Alloys
Ferrous alloys that are buried in soil or exposed to marine environment are expected
to corrode at higher rates. Therefore, such ferrous alloys shall be protected against
corrosion by coating or cathodic protection.
4) Galvanized Steel
Galvanizing alone cannot be expected to provide adequate protection for metals in
outdoor, buried, or submerged applications. Particular attention shall be given to
conditions where galvanized components are electrically continuous with a large
structure, since the galvanizing will provide very little advantage. Wherever galvanized
steel is buried in soil or exposed to the splash zone or below, it shall be protected
against corrosion by coating or cathodic protection.
5) Aluminum
Aluminum shall not be buried, embedded in concrete, or submerged in brine or
chlorinated water.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 140
c. Protective Coatings
Application of protective coatings is the most commonly used method for corrosion
protection of steel structures. Coatings may be used in conjunction with other methods,
such as cathodic protection. Discussion on protective coatings is provided in detail the
following sections.
d. Cathodic Protection
Cathodic protection is one of the most commonly used methods for corrosion protection of
steel structures exposed to aggressive conditions. Discussion on cathodic protection is
provided in detail the following sections.
e. Environmental Treatment
The treatment of environment shall be viewed as part of an overall strategy to enhance the
performance of a system. Several control methods may be adopted, depending on the
type and function of the systems. Typical treatment methods are oxygen removal, pH
adjustment, dehydration, water removal, velocity control, sludge removal, temperature
control, pressure control, addition of inhibitors, use of biocides and bactericides, entrained
solid removal, etc.
4. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel Structures
a. General
1) Steel structures exposed to atmosphere shall be protected by hot dip galvanizing or
protective coating. The most suitable coating is epoxy with a top coat of polyurethane.
2) Buried steel structures shall be protected by protective coating and cathodic
protection.
3) Steel structures immersed in potable and reclaimed water shall be protected by
protective coating, the most suitable coating being epoxy.
4) Steel structures exposed to seawater or other corrosive environment shall be
protected by protective coating plus cathodic protection.
5) Stainless steel structures exposed to seawater shall also be protected with cathodic
protection.
b. Steel Framed Structures
1) Structures shall be designed to eliminate or minimize crevices and features that trap
and hold dust and water. All crevices shall be suitably sealed.
2) Steel framed structures shall not be buried and shall be protected against atmospheric
corrosion by protective coatings. The most suitable coating is epoxy with a top coat of
polyurethane.
3) Steel members shall be embedded in concrete foundation. A base plate with anchors
into the concrete foundation shall be used. The exposed anchor bolts shall also be
coated with the protective coating.
4) Provision shall be made for inspection and re-coating of the structures after the design
life of the coating is exhausted.
c. Tanks and Vessels
1) Tanks and vessels shall be protected internally as well as externally.
2) Design of vessels shall include eliminating or minimizing crevices. All crevices shall
be suitably sealed.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 141
3) Internal of potable and reclaimed water storage steel tanks shall be protected by
protective coatings. The most suitable coating is epoxy.
4) Internal of vessels handling corrosive media (other than potable and reclaimed water)
shall be protected by coating plus cathodic protection.
5) External of potable and reclaimed water storage steel tanks shall be protected by
protective coatings. The most suitable coating is epoxy with a top coat of
polyurethane.
6) Tank bottoms (underside of the tank floors) shall be protected by impressed current
cathodic protection to avoid corrosion due exposure of the steel to soil.
d. Steel Piles, if approved by the RCJ
1) Steel piles and the steel casing pipe driven in soil of cased concrete piles shall be
protected by protective coating and cathodic protection (coating is prone to damage
during driving). Piles exposed to atmosphere shall be protected by protective coating.
2) Steel piles driven in seabed shall be protected by protective coating and cathodic
protection. The cathodic protection shall be provided to the buried as well as
immersed portions of the piles.
3) Piles in the splash zone shall be corrosion protection tape or protective coating or
cathodic protection (jacket-type system). Piles exposed to atmosphere shall be
protected by protective coating.
e. Other Steel Structures
1) Suitable corrosion protection shall be provided for steel structures exposed to
corrosive environments.
2) Light poles shall be protected by hot dip galvanizing. The base plates shall be
protected by protective coating, epoxy being the most suitable coating.
3) Metallic structures in seawater intake and discharge structures shall be protected by
protective coating plus cathodic protection.
F. Protection of Pipelines
1. General
Buried pipelines in Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are subjected to one of the most
severe exposure conditions in the world and therefore, require adequate corrosion protection
and provisions for inspection during service. The guidelines provided herein include ductile
iron, prestressed concrete, concrete cylinder, reinforced concrete, carbon steel and cement
lined carbon steel pipes.
Recommendations on protection of pipelines are given in TABLE 5.2.6.B.
TABLE 5.2.6.B RECOMMENDATIONS ON PROTECTION OF PIPELINES
S. No Pipe Type Recommended Use External Protection Internal Protection
Pure metallic zinc (200 High alumina cement

Ductile iron (conforming Potable water g/m2) plus bituminous mortar applied
1
to AWWA C151) Reclaimed water paint (120 micron) plus centrifugally and sealed
polyethylene sleeve (200 with 400 micron thick

Rev. 0 5.2 – 142
micron) epoxy coating
Pre-stressed Concrete Potable water Coal tar epoxy coating

Epoxy coating (400
2 Pipe (conforming to Reclaimed water (400 micron) Plus
micron)
AWWA C301) Seawater Cathodic protection
Concrete Cylinder Pipe Potable water Coal tar epoxy coating

Epoxy coating (400
3 (conforming to AWWA Reclaimed water (400 micron) Plus
micron)
C303) Seawater Cathodic protection
Reinforced Concrete
Storm drains Coal tar epoxy coating Coal tar epoxy coating
4 Pipe (conforming to
Culvert pipe (400 micron) (400 micron)
ASTM C76)
Potable water Epoxy or polyethylene Cement mortar lining

Cement Lined Carbon coating
5 Reclaimed water plus epoxy coating (400
Steel Pipe
Seawater Plus Cathodic protection micron)
Glass-fiber Reinforced
Potable water
Polyester Pipe (GRP)
Reclaimed water
6 (conforming to AWWA NONE NONE
Seawater
C950 and ASTM
Wastewater
C3517)
Potable water
Plastic Pipe (PVC)
Reclaimed water
7 (conforming to SASO NONE NONE
Seawater
14)
Wastewater
2. Non-metallic Piping System

Non-metallic piping systems shall be considered for use wherever applicable. All factors, such
as service, exposure conditions, life, cost (initial and life-cycle cost), maintenance
requirements, and other factors shall be considered for selection of the piping system.
3. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Pipes
a. Ductile Iron Pipes (conforming to ISO 2531 and AWWA C151)
1) Ductile iron pipes are recommended for potable, reclaimed and sea water. They shall
not be used for wastewater.
2) Ductile iron pipes have been successfully used and have good track record in Jubail
Industrial City.
3) Ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be lined internally with high alumina cement mortar
applied centrifugally and sealed with 400 micron thick epoxy coating.
4) Buried ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be protected externally by pure metallic zinc
at the rate of 200g/m2 and covered by a bituminous paint of 120 microns. Additionally,
the pipes and fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene sleeving conforming to ISO
8180 and AWWA C 105. The sleeve is made of a tubular film of 200 micron thick low
density polyethylene slipped over and snugly fitted to a pipe at the time of laying. The
sleeve is fitted to the pipe by means of adhesive plastic tape at each end and
intermediate tie fasteners.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 143
5) Cathodic protection is not required for internal nor external protection of ductile iron
pipes.
b. Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipes (PCCP) (conforming to AWWA C301)
1) PCCP are recommended for potable, reclaimed and sea water service and are
suitable for large diameter pipes. They shall not be used for wastewater.
2) PCCP shall be protected internally by 400 micron thick epoxy coating.
3) Buried PCCP shall be protected externally by 400 micron thick coal tar epoxy plus
cathodic protection.
c. Concrete Cylinder Pipes (CCP) (conforming to AWWA C303)
1) CCP are recommended for potable, reclaimed and seawater service and are suitable
for large diameter pipes. They shall not be used for wastewater.
2) CCP shall be protected internally by 400 micron thick epoxy coating.
3) Buried CCP shall be protected externally by 400 micron thick coal tar epoxy plus
cathodic protection.
d. Reinforced Concrete Pipes (RCP) (conforming to ASTM C76)
1) RCP are recommended for storm drains and culvert pipes.
2) RCP shall be protected internally and externally by 400 micron thick coal tar epoxy
coating.
e. Carbon Steel Pipes
1) Carbon steel may be used for potable, reclaimed and sea water service.
2) Carbon steel pipes shall be protected internally by cement mortar lining and 400
micron thick epoxy coating.
3) Buried carbon steel pipes shall be protected externally by epoxy or polyethylene
coating plus cathodic protection.
G. Protective Coatings
1. General
Protective coating is one of the most commonly used corrosion control methods. Protective
coatings are used for steel as well as concrete structures. Supplemental protection, such as
cathodic protection, may be required for coated steel structures. A typical coating system
includes primer, intermediate coat and top coat. All components of the coating system shall be
compatible and shall be obtained from the same manufacturer.
2. Coating Selection Criteria
Protective coating systems design shall take into consideration the following factors:
a. Location: Whether seacoast, inland, industrial, or rural.
b. Climate: Temperate, humid, dry, wetting, and drying.
c. Type of Service: Exterior/interior or immersed.
d. Service Life: Level of performance desired, life of protection or time to first maintenance,
and color/gloss retention.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 144
e. Surface Preparation: Types and condition of substrate, degree of cleanliness, and anchor
profile.
f. Chemical Exposure: Severe/moderate/mild and immersed.
g. Physical Requirements: Impact resistance, flexibility, abrasion resistance, adhesion, and
hardness.
h. Compatibility: Lifting/hiding power.
i. Curing Schedule: Minimum temperature required, pot life restriction, and re-coat limitation.
j. Application Methods: Spray, brush, roller, field or shop application, and thinner required.
k. Economics: Initial cost and cost of maintenance.
3. Coating Systems for Various Structures
Recommended coating systems for various reinforced concrete and steel structures are given
in Table Given in TABLE 5.2.6.C.
a. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned prior to coating to remove loose material, oil, grease,
and dust. Imperfections in the surface shall be filled with epoxy filler. The coating system
shall comprise penetrating epoxy sealer, intermediate and top coat.
b. Steel surfaces shall be prepared by grit blasting to the required finish (SSPC SP 5 for
internal surfaces and SSPC SP10 for external surfaces). Pits and surface imperfections
shall be filled with epoxy filler. The coating system shall comprise zinc phosphate epoxy
primer, intermediate, and top coat.
c. The coating shall be tested for dry film thickness, pin holes, and adhesion.
TABLE 5.2.6.C RECOMMENDATIONS ON COATING SYSTEMS FOR VARIOUS STRUCTURES

Recommended Recommended Coating
S. No Type of Structures Exposure Condition
Surface Preparation System
Epoxy sealing primer
Amine cured epoxy
Reinforced Concrete Clean surface and fill
(2 coats, 400 micron
1 Structures within 500 Marine imperfections with
DFT) Re-coatable
m from seashore epoxy filler
polyurethane (1 coat, 60
micron DFT)
Clean surface and fill Epoxy sealing primer
Reinforced Concrete Exterior (above
2 imperfections with Coal tar epoxy (2 coats,
Pipe Supports ground)
epoxy filler 400 micron DFT)
Reinforced Concrete Clean surface and fill Epoxy sealing primer
3 Chambers and Interior imperfections with Coal tar epoxy (2 coats,
Manholes epoxy filler 400 micron DFT)
Reinforced Concrete
Chambers Handling
4 Interior imperfections with Coal tar epoxy (2 coats,
Wastewater and
epoxy filler 400 micron DFT)
Chemicals
Epoxy sealing primer
Clean surface and fill
MIO epoxy (2/3 coats,
Interior imperfections with
400 micron DFT)
Reinforced Concrete epoxy filler
5
Tanks
Exterior imperfections with MIO epoxy (1/2 coats,
epoxy filler 200 micron DFT) Re-
Rev. 0 5.2 – 145
coatable polyurethane (1
coat, 60 micron DFT)
Epoxy zinc phosphate
Primer (75 micron DFT)
6 Structural Steel Atmosphere SSPC SP-10
200 micron DFT) Re-
coatable polyurethane (1
coat, 60 micron DFT)

Buried
primer (75 micron DFT)
7 Piles Seawater (submerged SSPC SP-10
& exposed)
400 micron DFT)

Interior (potable & primer (75 micron DFT)
SSPC SP-5
reclaimed water) MIO epoxy (2/3 coats,
400 micron DFT)
8 Steel Tanks
Primer (75 micron DFT)
MIO epoxy (1/2 coat, 200
Exterior SSPC SP-10
micron DFT) Re-coatable
polyurethane (1 coat, 60
micron DFT)
MIO: Micaceous iron oxide; DFT: Dry film thickness
H. Cathodic Protection
1. General
Cathodic protection design, installation, and commissioning shall be carried out by qualified
engineers and contractors. Various factors to be considered prior to design of a cathodic
protection system are type of structure to be protected, electrolyte resistivity, presence of other
facilities and cathodic protection systems and stray current, right of way for locating cathodic
protection hardware, availability of ac power, and other factors. Design information provided
shall include design calculations, material and installation specifications, commissioning
requirements and provisions for monitoring. All cathodic protection systems shall be monitored
by the installation contractor for one year prior to handing over the system to the Royal
Commission.
2. Cathodic Protection Systems Design Criteria
1) Design current density for new reinforced concrete shall at least be 5 mA/m2 of steel
reinforcement area.
2) Design current density for existing reinforced concrete shall at least be 20 mA/m2 of
steel reinforcement area.
3) Protection criteria shall be an instant off potential of -720 mV or more negative with
respect to silver-silver chloride electrode or potential decay of at least 100 mV over a
period of 24 hours or 150 mV over extended period of time.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 146
b. Steel Structures
1) Design current density for tank bottoms, buried piles, and buried bare pipelines shall at
least be 20 mA/m2 of steel area. For coated steel piles and pipes, the value shall
depend on the type of coating; a value of 0.1 to 1 mA/m2 can be adopted.
2) Design current density for bare steel piles exposed to seawater shall at least be 150
mA/m2 (initial) and 70 mA/m2 (mean) of steel area. For coated steel, the design
current density can be based on a coating breakdown factor of 10%.
3) Protection criteria for steel exposed to soil and seawater shall be an instant off
potential of -800 mV or more negative with respect to silver-silver chloride electrode.
3. Cathodic Protection Systems for Different Structures
1) For new reinforced concrete, mixed metal oxide coated titanium expanded mesh
ribbon anodes from a qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record shall be used.
The anodes shall be placed in the cover concrete or between two layers of the
reinforcement. Titanium conductor bar shall be used for current distribution.
2) For existing reinforced concrete, mixed metal oxide coated titanium mesh anodes from
a qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record shall be used. The anodes shall
be placed on the existing concrete surface and covered in a cementitious overlay.
Titanium conductor bar shall be used for current distribution.
3) The structure shall be divided in zones of suitable sizes and each zone shall be fed
from a dedicated power supply channel.
b. Steel Tanks and Vessels
1) For new tanks, mixed metal oxide coated titanium ribbon anodes from a qualified
manufacturer with sufficient track record shall be used. The anodes shall be placed in
soil under the tank in the form of parallel strips running in one direction. Titanium
conductor bar shall be used for current distribution and shall be placed perpendicular
to the anodes.
2) For existing tanks, mixed metal oxide coated titanium tubular or high silicon cast iron
anodes from a qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record shall be used. The
anodes shall be placed in drilled holes around the tank. The depth of the anodes shall
be determined in the design calculations.
3) Each tank shall be fed from a dedicated transformer rectifier or a dedicated channel of
a multi-channel transformer rectifier.
c. Steel Pipelines
1) For new and existing pipelines, different types of anodes can be used. The type of
anode shall be manufactured by a qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record.
2) Use of deep well anodes may be used for cross country pipelines, however, distributed
anodes shall be used for pipelines inside plants and if other structures exist in the
vicinity of the pipeline.
d. Steel Piles
1) For new and existing steel piles buried in soil or submerged in seawater, sacrificial or
impressed current anodes may be used. Sacrificial aluminum anodes shall preferred
for piles in seawater. The impressed anodes may include mixed metal oxide coated

Rev. 0 5.2 – 147
titanium tubular anodes for seawater, and mixed metal oxide coated titanium tubular
and high silicon cast iron anodes for soil.
4. Monitoring of Cathodic Protection Systems
a. All cathodic protection systems shall be regularly monitored to ensure proper functioning of
the systems and to establish upgrade needs.
b. The frequency of monitoring for sacrificial anode systems shall be six months. The
monitoring shall include measuring anode current and structure-to-soil potentials.
c. The frequency of monitoring for impressed current systems shall be as follows:
1) Monthly: Inspect condition of the hardware and measure transformer rectifier output.
2) Semi-Annually: Inspect condition of the hardware, measure transformer rectifier
output and structure-to-soil potentials (on, instant-off and decay).
3) Three-years: Conduct complete system check including analysis of the monitoring
data for the previous period.
END OF CHAPTER 5.2 STRUCTURAL

Rev. 0 5.2 – 148
APPENDIX I CALCULATIONS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS
A. General
In addition to requirements listed in Section 5.2 of this manual, structural calculations submitted to
RCJ for review shall also include the guidelines and requirements provided in this appendix.
B. General Items & Design Criteria

1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must prepare calculations to support the design of the
structural system and connections. The calculations should contain a table of contents or index
and must clearly show and delineate service loads, factored loads, and factored load
combinations. The structural calculations should be dated, legible and retained in a project file.
2. Analysis and design calculation package shall be provided with direct contact information of
Design Engineer and Lead Structural Engineer in order to enable RC Structural Engineer to
discuss issues directly with them.
3. Prepared package shall be free from vague statements, self-explanatory and conclusive.
4. Provide linkage between Drawings and calculations for all structural members and
connections. This can be with clear location descriptions in the calculations.
5. A discussion and description of the design basis including assumptions and clarification for
why these assumptions used in design.
6. List of Building Codes, Standards and Specification (including their editions) for the materials
used in design. Providing irrelevant codes, standards and specification will cause rejection of
submittal.
7. Geotechnical report information, design criteria and correct reference to Geotechnical Report.
8. Limitations of deflection for structural elements and lateral drift limitations for entire structure.
9. Documentation of Design Loads:
a. Dead Loads: Dead loads shall include self-weight of all items of permanent nature that will
act continuously throughout the service life of the building. Dead Load shall be well
itemized for each type of assembly including with proper sketch, for example;
50mm Thick Gravel

Geotextile Seperation Layer
150mm Thick Thermal Insulation
Roof Dead Load
Waterproofing Membrane
50 mm Thick Gravel xxx kPa
Geotextile xxx kPa
150 mm Thick Thermal Insulation xxx kPa
Waterproofing Membrane xxx kPa
Screed (Ave. Thick: [50+150]/2=100 mm xxx kPa
200 mm Thick RC Slab xxx kPa
Suspended Ceiling MEP Allowance xxx kPa
200mm Thick RC Slab
Screed (Min Th: 50mm, Max Th:150mm) Suspended Ceiling xxx kPa
TOTAL Roof Dead Load xxx kPa
ROOF DECK SECTION

Rev. 0 5.2 – 149
b. Live Loads: Structural Engineer shall list live loads for each location where purpose of use
differs.
c. Wind Loads: Structural Engineer shall document all parameters required for wind load
calculation for Main Wind Force Resisting System and Components & Cladding.
Parameters shall include:
1) Design wind speed
2) Exposure category
3) Risk Category
4) Importance Factor
All parameters shall be clearly identified and referenced to relevant sections of codes and
standards.
d. Seismic Load: Structural Engineer shall document all parameters required for seismic load
calculation for the structure including:
1) Risk Category
2) Importance Factor
3) Lateral Load Resisting System
4) Response Reduction Factor (R)
5) System Over strength Factor (Ω0)
6) Deflection Amplification Factor (Cd)
7) Site Class (Should be referenced to Geotechnical Report)
8) Site Coefficients
9) Mapped Spectral Response Accelerations
10) Spectral Response Coefficients
All parameters shall be clearly identified and referenced to relevant sections of codes and
standards.
e. Temperature Load: Consideration for loads and effects of contraction or expansion from
temperature changes shall be clearly documented.
f. Equipment Loads: All MEP equipment planned to be used in structure shall be listed with
their location and operating weight.
g. Structural Engineer shall clearly list all other loads including with locations to be applied,
magnitude and explanation for resource of loads.
10. Load combinations used in design shall be clearly documented.
11. Structural Engineer shall list all fire rating requirements throughout the structure.
12. Consideration and information for Buoyancy and Flood shall be documented.
C. Gravity Design
1. Analysis and Design of the Primary Structural Components. This design should document the
location, tributary area, span, loading and controlling condition, load combination for each
member designed. Also effects of temperature loads shall be identified.

Rev. 0 5.2 – 150
2. Structural Engineer shall provide list for used material and their grades used in design for each
structural components.
3. Calculations should note the final member size as shown on the plans, including the support
condition. Structural Engineer shall also note any eccentric loading conditions which creates
torsion effect on member and design member accordingly.
4. All design calculation shall be conclusive, highlighted that Resistance of member satisfactory
against analysis results. Also each step of design shall be referenced to related design
standards or codes.
5. Deflection of member shall be checked against allowed deflection criteria.
6. Calculations for design of the connections between the Primary Structural Components.
7. Calculation for design of the connection between Secondary and or non-structural elements to
primary structural components.
8. If vendor supplied elements used in design, Structural Engineer should still provide full
analysis and design calculations as explained here in.
D. Lateral Design
1. Factors used in determining overall wind load should be indicated as required in section B.9c
of this appendix.
2. Factors used in determining base shear should be indicated in addition to the required seismic
design criteria required in section B.9d of this appendix.
3. Clearly defined type of Lateral-Force-Resisting System used and which Primary Structural
Components are part of the system.
4. Analysis and design results should be submitted with a sketch showing geometry, loading,
boundary conditions, etc.
5. Design of Primary Structural Components relating to the Lateral Force Resisting System.
These components would include, but are not limited to, diaphragms, collectors, drag struts,
out-of-plane anchorage and connection design.
6. Design of Secondary Structural and Non-Structural Components and their connections to
Primary Structural Components shall be provided.
E. Footing & Foundation Design
1. Clearly documented horizontal and vertical service loading on pile, pile group or foundation.
2. Design of the primary footing and foundation components.
3. Calculation or reference for sub grade modulus (ks) used in design.
4. Information and reference about Allowable Bearing Pressure for soil shall be provided.
5. Provide footing schedule including with information for, size, service loads, reinforcement,
bearing pressure, estimated settlement, etc.
6. Design of Secondary Structural Components required at the interface between foundation and
structure above. These components would include base plates, anchor bolts and embed
plates.
7. Effects of lateral loading including uplift, overturning and shear transfer to soil must be
included.
8. Effects of buoyancy and flood should be included in foundation design.
9. The requirements for engineered fill or other specific placement criteria should be noted in the
calculations and on the plans.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 151
10. Unless otherwise approved by RCJ, "assumed" soil properties (bearing pressure) shall not be
used in the design. Where assumed parameters have been approved then field verification
shall be undertaken, as determined by the size and complexity of the project. The RCJ shall
approve all proposals for site validation, field records and analysis shall be submitted to the
RCJ prior to the commencement of work to demonstrate site conditions can support the
specified foundation design, similar to a deferred submittal.
F. Computer Aided Design
In addition to the requirement listed in section 4.2.5.C.2 of this manual, the followings are
additional requirement for use of computer software in analysis and design.
1. For computer software that has built-in algorithms to implement the provisions of particular
versions of model or material building codes, an analysis of the methodologies of the selected
building code and the building code used in the software shall be performed to ensure
consistency of methodology. The methodology of the software shall be reconciled with the
selected building code(s) either through the use of modified input data or through the use of
modified load factors within the load combinations, or both.
2. The method of reconciliation of the building code selected for design and the building code
implemented in the software, as well as the determination of the modified input data and/or
load combination factors that are utilized shall be included in the design basis reports and in
the calculations. Notes shall be included as comments in the software input that describe why
the input information and/or load combination factors are different than the normal values.
3. 3D structural skeleton of total structure shall be provided (All four isometric view).
4. Structural Engineer shall itemize all input variables and provide clear explanations for each
variables (Loads, load combinations, defined section name, properties and modifications, etc.).
Acronyms and abbreviations used in software shall be listed.
5. Plan view (including with grid lines and dimensions) for each level of structure showing each
applied area loads and area section names.
6. Elevation view at each gridline showing each applied line loads and frame section names.
7. Plan view showing location and section name of lateral load resisting system(s) at each level
of structure.
8. If software used has auto lateral load calculation function, list all input variables for wind and
seismic parameters with clear explanations.
9. If hand calculation method used for lateral loads, provide comprehensive calculation of loads
and show how and where loads applied to structure. Structural engineer shall also provide
calculation for fundamental period of structure.
10. Information about assigned diaphragm shall be provided including with location of connection
for diaphragm to lateral load resisting system.
11. Output summary for lateral loads including but not limited to following information:
a. Story shear shown on elevation view of structure
b. Base shear
c. Drift for each level of structure
12. Structural Engineer shall provide analysis and design outputs for each primary structural
members (beams, columns, slab, foundation, shear walls, etc.). Design outputs should be
conclusive and results should be highlighted.
13. Most of structural analysis and design software in market performs only macro level analysis
and design, meaning, detailed analysis of connections, checks for code requirements, etc. are
left Structural Engineer to design either with hand calculations or other special software.
Rev. 0 5.2 – 152
Therefore, Structural Engineer shall provide comprehensive report including but not limited to
the following:
a. Beam-Column, Slab-Column Joint Design
b. Punching shear checks for flat slabs and footings
c. Code requirement checks for size of elements, grades, etc.
d. Steel column – concrete foundation connection including with base plate, anchor bolt
designs.
e. Cladding connections to primary structural members
f. Corbel, Ledge designs
g. Diaphragm design

Rev. 0 5.2 – 153
APPENDIX II SPECIFIC DRAWINGS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS
A. General
In addition to the general requirements listed in Subsection 4.2 of this manual, structural
drawings shall also include the specific information provided in this appendix.
B. General Items
1. Date & Purpose of each issue;
2. Applicable design and construction codes, standards and bylaws governing the work;
3. Materials to be used, including standards and grades;
4. Description of the lateral load resisting system under General Notes / Seismic section;
5. Provisions for future extensions, if applicable;
6. Sequence of work, if this is critical to the function of the finished structure;
7. Expansion, construction and control joint locations and details;
8. Existing structural drawings, condition surveys and special reports prepared by others,
when necessary;
9. Structurally derived dimensions (generally, grid line and overall building dimensions
should preferably be shown, or the architectural drawings, to avoid the duplication of
dimensions and possible errors);
10. Design criteria giving the appropriate information for all vertical and horizontal loads,
designating them as live or dead and specified or factored;
11. Design criteria shall include Seismic and Wind load information. Wind load shall be
clearly identified for MWFRS and Components & Claddings. Include pressure diagrams if
appropriate, and
12. Location and specification of temporary shoring / bracing if required.
C. Foundation Plans
1. Grid lines and grid line dimensions as well as overall dimensions and structurally derived
dimensions;
2. Type, sizes, details and locations of foundations for columns, walls, piers, special
equipment and other structural load bearing components;
3. Drainage and dewatering requirements, if critical to the structural design;
4. The anticipated bottom elevation of foundations;
5. Sub-grade preparation for slabs-on-grade, as well as the thickness, reinforcing and
elevation of the slabs-on-grade;
6. Waterproofing details for foundations, if required;
7. Design soil or rock bearing values, with reference to pertinent geotechnical reports;
8. The location of existing adjacent services, foundations and site information made known
to structural Engineers by others, which may conflict with structural footings or
foundations;
RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual 5.2 - 154

Rev. 0
9. In addition, where underpinning and/or shoring is specified to be designed by others,
structural engineers should indicate on the drawings the areas to be underpinned or
shored, the maximum allowable deflections and settlements, and other restrictions or
criteria. When structural engineers are designing underpinning, they should indicate on
the drawings adequate details and construction sequences, and
10. Foundation for vendor supplied structures: Structural engineer shall provide full design
drawings for foundation and capacity table for the foundation. Also structural engineer
should clearly note that the construction contractor shall review and confirm foundation
size and capacity with superstructure which vendor shall provide.
D. Framing Plans of Floors, Roofs Walls and Ancillary Structures

1. Grid lines and structurally derived dimensions, dimensions to outside of structural floor
plate from grid or overall dimensions of floor plate;
2. Size and location of all structural framing components for the Building Structure must be
shown for each direction and at all levels of structure;
3. Indicate location of each lateral force resisting component such as, but not limited to,
lateral bracing, shear walls, moment frames.
4. Location and magnitude of additional loads, such as mechanical unit, considerably heavy
architectural futures, special equipment, etc. The drawing must indicate whether loads
noted are service or factored loads;
5. Slopes and depressions or references to drawings by others that show that information;
6. Locations, sizes and framing details or reinforcing around openings on structural
members;
7. Reference elevations of floors or roof(s);
8. Reinforcing bar sizes and spacing for concrete members;
9. Conditions at change of elevation of the structure, conditions at intersections of different
structural materials, and at interaction of structural and non-structural components;
10. Direct forces, moments, shears or torsion required for the preparation of shop and detail
drawings;
11. Standards to which detailing should conform;
12. Sufficient detail cuts, references to schedules and specific information identifying the
Structural Components.
13. Connections between similar materials and materials manufactured offsite are generally
designed by the supplier’s engineer. Therefore, structural engineer shall differentiate
between live and dead and specified and factored loads, to avoid possible confusion.
14. Framing plans for vendor supplied structures: Structural engineer shall provide schematic
frame plan with adequate sizing of all structural members, however, Structural engineer
shall also provide note to clarify that shown design on framing plan is indicative and it is
vendor’s responsibility to provide full design.
E. Column Information Showing

1. Elevations of top and bottom of columns;
2. Member sizes;

Rev. 0
3. Reinforcing steel details for concrete columns;
4. Proposed splice locations for structural steel and concrete columns, and
5. Column axial loads and bending moments to be resisted.
F. Sections and Details

1. Elevations, sections, and details are to be at an appropriate scale to portray the
relationship of structural elements to each other and their interconnection(s). Sections
and details are to be in sufficient number to show all non-typical conditions, their
locations and extent.
2. Primary Structural Component connections required to transfer gravity load from roof to
floor to foundation must be detailed. These connections would include, but are not limited
to, joist to beam or wall, beam-to-beam, beam to column and column to foundation.
3. Structural detailing of Secondary Structural Components such as parapets, fascias and
canopies must be included in the structural drawings.
4. Details must be shown for all lateral force resisting connections. These types of
connections are; diaphragm shear transfer, out of plane anchorage, bracing connections,
moment frame connections and force transfer to foundations.
5. Typical details should be used where appropriate, however, care should be taken to
determine that details noted as "typical" are applicable to the condition being portrayed
and that their locations and extent are explicit.
G. Other Information
1. Structural details of masonry bearing and shear walls, including details of reinforcing,
support of loads, lintels and grouting procedures.
2. Structural details of reinforced concrete elements, openings in members, change in floor
elevations, sufficiently detailed to enable others to prepare shop drawings.
3. Elevations and details of custom designed trusses, including direct forces, moments,
shears and torsion to be resisted by each member.
4. Subgrade preparation for slabs on grade, based on the geotechnical engineer’s
recommendations, and slabs on earth thickness and elevation of main slab. Drawings
should also make reference to other contract drawings for such additional details as
recesses, depressions, pits.
5. Design loadings, details of reinforcing steel, if any, and the location and details of control
and expansion joints.

Rev. 0
SECTION 5.3 ARCHITECTURAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.3.0 ARCHITECTURAL ........................................................................................................ 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 7
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 7
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 7
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 8
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 8
5.3.1 GENERAL ARCHITECTURE ........................................................................................ 9
A. Architectural Design Principles ...................................................................................... 9
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 9
2. General Design Components ........................................................................................ 9
B. Cultural Context ............................................................................................................ 10
1. Privacy .......................................................................................................................... 10
2. Screening...................................................................................................................... 11
3. Gender Separation ....................................................................................................... 11
C. Local Conditions ........................................................................................................... 12
1. Elements ....................................................................................................................... 12
2. Design ........................................................................................................................... 12
3. Operation and Maintenance ......................................................................................... 12
4. Location ........................................................................................................................ 12
5. Blending ........................................................................................................................ 12
6. Emphasis ...................................................................................................................... 12
7. Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 12
8. Transient Styles ............................................................................................................ 12

Rev. 0 5.3 - i
9. Quality........................................................................................................................... 13
D. Standardization ............................................................................................................. 14
1. Criteria .......................................................................................................................... 14
E. Facility Life Cycle .......................................................................................................... 14
1. Design ........................................................................................................................... 14
2. Operation and Maintenance ......................................................................................... 15
3. Demolition and Salvage ................................................................................................ 15
F. Space Allocation and Programming ............................................................................. 15
1. Nomenclature ............................................................................................................... 15
2. Process ......................................................................................................................... 15
G. Pest Control .................................................................................................................. 16
1. Chemical Treatment ..................................................................................................... 16
2. Preventative Measures ................................................................................................. 17
3. Inspections.................................................................................................................... 19
5.3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR BUILDINGS .................................................................... 20
A. Building Site Planning ................................................................................................... 20
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 20
2. Planning Guidelines ...................................................................................................... 20
3. Site Drainage ................................................................................................................ 21
4. Landscape Scheme ...................................................................................................... 22
5. Open Spaces ................................................................................................................ 22
6. Special Site Features ................................................................................................... 22
7. Site Plan Content .......................................................................................................... 23
B. Building Orientation ...................................................................................................... 23
1. Site Plan Considerations .............................................................................................. 23
C. Setback Criteria and Placement of Structures ............................................................. 24
1. Definition ....................................................................................................................... 24
2. Location ........................................................................................................................ 24
3. Purpose ........................................................................................................................ 24
4. Context ......................................................................................................................... 24
5. References ................................................................................................................... 25
D. Building Approaches and Entrances ............................................................................ 25
1. Street Access................................................................................................................ 25
2. Entrance Approaches ................................................................................................... 25

Rev. 0 5.3 - ii
3. Parking Areas ............................................................................................................... 26

E. Walkways, Paving and Pedestrian Safety .................................................................... 26
1. Walkways...................................................................................................................... 26
2. Paving ........................................................................................................................... 26
3. Pedestrian Safety ......................................................................................................... 26
4. Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 27
F. Site Lighting .................................................................................................................. 27
1. Location ........................................................................................................................ 27
2. Design ........................................................................................................................... 27
G. Services Access ........................................................................................................... 28
1. Access and Location .................................................................................................... 28
H. Vehicle Access and Parking ......................................................................................... 28
1. Vehicle Access ............................................................................................................. 28
2. Parking.......................................................................................................................... 28
I. Loading and Off-Loading Areas.................................................................................... 29
1. Loading and Off-Loading Area Design ......................................................................... 29
J. Waste Collection Requirements ................................................................................... 29
1. Location and Design ..................................................................................................... 29
K. Screening of Waste, Utilities and Service Areas .......................................................... 29
1. Location and Design ..................................................................................................... 29
5.3.3 BUILDING DEVELOPMENT ........................................................................................ 30
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 30
1. General Themes and Concepts ................................................................................... 30
B. Height, Mass and Scale ................................................................................................ 30
1. Height ........................................................................................................................... 30
2. Mass ............................................................................................................................. 30
3. Scale ............................................................................................................................. 30
C. Architectural Context .................................................................................................... 31
1. Cultural Considerations ................................................................................................ 31
2. City and Community Context ........................................................................................ 31
D. Architectural Concept and Consistency ....................................................................... 33
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 33
2. Design Considerations ................................................................................................. 33
3. Aesthetic Requirements of Visual Elements ................................................................ 36

Rev. 0 5.3 - iii
4. Building Style and Elevations ....................................................................................... 41

5. Color ............................................................................................................................. 42
E. Human Scale ................................................................................................................ 42
1. Scale ............................................................................................................................. 42
2. Human Scale ................................................................................................................ 43
F. Building Entrances ........................................................................................................ 43
1. Natural Access Control ................................................................................................. 43
2. Entry Signage ............................................................................................................... 43
3. Orientation .................................................................................................................... 44
4. Design ........................................................................................................................... 44
5. Emergency and Fire Department Access..................................................................... 44
6. Sand Control ................................................................................................................. 45
7. Exterior Door Hardware ................................................................................................ 45
8. Accessibility .................................................................................................................. 46
9. Security Systems .......................................................................................................... 46
G. Acoustic Design Requirements .................................................................................... 47
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 47
2. Acoustically Sensitive Spaces ...................................................................................... 47
3. Sound Control Devices ................................................................................................. 47
4. Demolition and Construction Activities ......................................................................... 48
5. Sound Transmission Limitations................................................................................... 48
H. Life Safety Requirements ............................................................................................. 49
I. Rooftop Equipment ....................................................................................................... 55
1. Rooftop Equipment Screening...................................................................................... 55
2. Design, selection and location of rooftop equipment ................................................... 56
3. Extent of screening ....................................................................................................... 56
4. Satellite Dishes ............................................................................................................. 56
5. Antennae ...................................................................................................................... 57
J. Electrical Rooms ........................................................................................................... 57
1. Electrical Room Sizing .................................................................................................. 57
2. Electrical Room Stacking.............................................................................................. 57
3. Access .......................................................................................................................... 57
4. Life Safety ..................................................................................................................... 57
5. Fire Protection .............................................................................................................. 57
K. Telecom Rooms ........................................................................................................... 57

Rev. 0 5.3 - iv
1. Telecom Room Sizing .................................................................................................. 57

2. Telecom Room Stacking .............................................................................................. 58
3. Access .......................................................................................................................... 58
4. Fire Protection .............................................................................................................. 58
L. Mechanical Rooms ....................................................................................................... 58
1. Mechanical Room Sizing .............................................................................................. 58
2. Access .......................................................................................................................... 58
M. Restrooms .................................................................................................................... 58
1. Restroom Room Sizing ................................................................................................. 58
2. Restroom Stacking ....................................................................................................... 58
3. Access .......................................................................................................................... 58
N. Accessibility .................................................................................................................. 58
5.3.4 BUILDING COMPONENTS .......................................................................................... 60
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 60
B. Unit Masonry................................................................................................................. 60
4. Clay Unit Masonry ........................................................................................................ 61
C. Stone ............................................................................................................................ 61
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 61
2. References ................................................................................................................... 61
3. Exterior Stone Cladding ................................................................................................ 62
D. Metals ........................................................................................................................... 62
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 62
2. References ................................................................................................................... 62
3. Shop Applied Coatings ................................................................................................. 62
4. Pipe and Tube Railings ................................................................................................ 63
5. Metal Specialties .......................................................................................................... 63
6. Criteria .......................................................................................................................... 63
E. Wood, Plastics and Composites ................................................................................... 63
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 63
2. References ................................................................................................................... 64
3. Finish Carpentry ........................................................................................................... 64
4. Architectural Woodwork ................................................................................................ 64
F. Thermal and Moisture Protection ................................................................................. 65
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 65
2. References ................................................................................................................... 65

Rev. 0 5.3 - v
3. Damp proofing and Waterproofing ............................................................................... 65

4. Thermal Insulation ........................................................................................................ 65
5. Metal Roof and Wall Panels ......................................................................................... 65
6. Membrane Roofing ....................................................................................................... 66
7. Fire and Smoke Protection ........................................................................................... 66
8. Joint Protection ............................................................................................................. 67
G. Openings ...................................................................................................................... 67
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 67
2. References ................................................................................................................... 67
3. Door and Window Design ............................................................................................. 67
4. Entrances, Storefronts and Curtain Walls .................................................................... 68
5. Hardware ...................................................................................................................... 68
6. Glazing.......................................................................................................................... 68
7. Louvers and Vents ........................................................................................................ 68
H. Finishes ........................................................................................................................ 69
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 69
2. References ................................................................................................................... 69
3. General Criteria ............................................................................................................ 69
4. Exterior Finish Materials and Colors ............................................................................ 69
5. Interior Finishes Materials and Colors .......................................................................... 69
I. Specialties .................................................................................................................... 70
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 70
2. References ................................................................................................................... 70
3. Signage......................................................................................................................... 70
4. Toilet and Bath Accessories ......................................................................................... 70
5. Safety Specialties ......................................................................................................... 71
6. Sun Control Devices ..................................................................................................... 71
7. Vehicle Shelters ............................................................................................................ 71
J. Equipment..................................................................................................................... 71
K. Furnishings ................................................................................................................... 72
L. Conveying Systems ...................................................................................................... 73
M. Special Construction ..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.5 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE ............................................................................. 75
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 75
B. Public/Government ....................................................................................................... 75

Rev. 0 5.3 - vi
1. Athletic Venues ............................................................................................................. 75

2. Aviation ......................................................................................................................... 78
3. Community Center ........................................................................................................ 81
4. Hospital ......................................................................................................................... 83
5. Libraries ........................................................................................................................ 87
6. Mosque ......................................................................................................................... 89
7. Museum ........................................................................................................................ 91
8. Ports/Docks .................................................................................................................. 94
9. Schools ......................................................................................................................... 96
C. Commercial................................................................................................................... 99
1. General Commercial ..................................................................................................... 99
2. Hospitality ..................................................................................................................... 99
3. Office ........................................................................................................................... 102
4. Cafeteria/Restaurants .................................................................................................. 104
5. Auditoriums .................................................................................................................. 105
D. Residential ................................................................................................................... 109
1. Multi-Family Housing ................................................................................................... 109
2. Single-Family Housing ................................................................................................. 111
E. Industrial ...................................................................................................................... 113
1. General Industrial ........................................................................................................ 113
2. Chemical Processing ................................................................................................... 117
F. Specialty Applications .................................................................................................. 118
1. Military ......................................................................................................................... 118
2. Water Treatment (Desalination) .................................................................................. 120

Rev. 0 5.3 - vii
SUBSECTION 5.3.0 ARCHITECTURAL
5.3.0 ARCHITECTURAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section covers requirements for the architectural design and planning of
residential, commercial, institutional and industrial facilities, including aesthetic,
functional, life safety, and accessibility aspects of buildings and their relationship to
their respective environments.
b. This Section provides the basis for design of Building Projects including their Site
Development; Building Components, Materials and Systems; and provides general
Guidelines by Building Type.
c. This section does not apply to aesthetic of bridge designs, which are covered in
chapter 5.2
2. Applicability
a. The criteria in this Section apply to all buildings unless noted as only applicable to a
specific building type.
b. This Section applies to buildings and industrial developments. Parks and open
spaces, as well as streetscapes, are addressed elsewhere as listed under “Related
Sections”.
c. This Section shall apply to all proposed building projects exceeding a certain
designated construction cost or plan area as determined by the Royal Commission
in Jubail and shall apply equally to all renovation and /or building addition projects as
determined by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
d. The Guiding Engineering Manual applies to the following areas within the sites and
premises of Residential, Commercial, Institutional, and Light Industrial facilities:
1) General architectural design principles Subsection 5.3.1
2) Site development for buildings design principles Subsection 5.3.2
3) Building development Subsection 5.3.3
4) Building components Subsection 5.3.4
5) Guidelines by building type Subsection 5.3.5
3. Definitions
a. The following are intended as a general guide only. Refer to applicable Codes for
specific definitions and requirements. Refer to Section 2.2 – Definitions and
Abbreviations.
1) “Accessory Structure” a structure that is adjacent to, is subordinate to, and
has a service function in support of a primary use or structure, also typically
but not necessarily, subordinate in size.
2) “Accessory Use” the function of an Accessory structure, typically one which
differs from that of the primary structure and/or is very specialized.
3) “Adjacent Uses or Adjacent Lots” lots that share a common lot line or are only
separated by a public way.
4) “Alteration” means any physical change to a building, structure, or site.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 1
5) “Anti-Slip” floor friction characteristics intended to minimize slip and fall

accidents
6) “Assembly” A Use that consists of the congregation of people. (see applicable
code for various categories and specific definitions from SBC 201:
(a) 2.2.2.1, accessory area
(b) 2.3, occupancy
(c) 2.14.4.3, egress
(d) 2.22.2, proscenium
(e) 3.7.5,
(f) 3.8.2,
(g) Table 8.4.1.2, occupancy load
(h) 8.4.3, signage
(i) 8.6.2, illumination
(j) 8.7.1, egress
(k) 8.9.3, stairs
(l) 8.10.1, ramps
(m) 8.12.1, guards
(n) 8.12.2, guard height
(o) 8.12.3, guard openings
(p) 8.13.4, aisles
(q) 8.14.6.1 egress
(r) Table 8.15.1, travel distance
(s) 8.16.1, wall rating
(t) 8.19.1.1, openings and penetrations
(u) 8.24, Assembly Requirements
(v) Table 8.24.6.2 egress
(w) 9.2.1 definition
(x) 9.4.3, accessibility
(y) 9.4.3.2, press boxes
(z) 9.8.2, seating
(aa) 9.9.2.1, toilets
(bb) 9.9.10, seating
(cc) 9.10.3, signage
(dd) SBC 801:
(ee) 2A.3
(ff) 8.24

Rev. 0 5.3 - 2
7) “Block” A site or group of contiguous properties that are bounded on all sides
by a street, public way or other geographically separating feature, forming a
planning unit, typically a repeated organizing element creating an urban or
land use pattern
8) “Buffer” A strip or area of land that separates one use, occupancy, road, or
other type of land use from another, typically provided with landscaping or
other forms of screening.
9) “Building” An architectural structure housing or supporting human activity,
though not necessarily occupied, that is governed by applicable building
Codes.
10) “Building Line” The line beyond which a building or structure is not permitted
to encroach.
11) “Building Types” Classifications of buildings according to their principal
activity. These include but are not limited to Public/Government, Commercial,
Residential, Industrial, etc. See SBC
12) “Carport” A covered area or shelter, often open on one or more sides, used
for the parking of one or more motor vehicles.
13) “Cartway” A strip of pavement designed primarily for public vehicular traffic
circulation, defined as the area from curb to curb or edge to parallel edge of
pavement.
14) “Communication Tower” Public or private vertical structure intended for
telecommunications transmission, reception, and/or relay.
15) “Contextual Setback” A theoretical line offset and parallel to a property line,
established with the intended purpose to align the faces of buildings or
structures with the adjacent building(s) or structure(s).
16) “Contextual Height” A building structure’s height dimension from a base plane
or grade, established with the intended purpose to establish a visual
consistency in height among adjacent developments.
17) “Contour Lines” Graphic lines on a grading plan that connect points of
identical elevation, expressed in values relative to a standard such as sea
level.
18) “Density” Within a development with a defined geographic area, such as the
ratio dwelling units per given area of land, or of the total floor areas of all
buildings on a site to the land area.
19) “Development”
(a) The total of all improvements to a site, or any substantial change in the
use or appearance of any structures or land.
(b) In connection with the use of land, substantial disturbance of existing
vegetation, tree cover, site contours, watercourses, parking areas, and/or
structures.
20) “Driveway” A privately developed and maintained strip of pavement intended
for vehicular circulation or access.
21) “Dwelling Unit” A building or portion thereof designed and used for residential
occupancy by a single family and that includes exclusive sleeping, cooking,

Rev. 0 5.3 - 3
eating and sanitation facilities or as otherwise defined by Code in SBC 201

4.2, 9.2, and 2.10.2 SBC 801 1.2.
22) “Elevation”
(a) A view of a building seen from one side as a flat representation of one
façade, commonly used to depict the external appearance of a building
or series of adjacent buildings.
(b) Height above sea level elevation.
23) “Façade” The exterior elevation of a structure or building as viewed from any
single vantage point.
24) “Facility” Building and/or enclosed or unenclosed industrial processes as well
as all its site features.
25) “Flamespread Rating” Classifications of interior building materials that
evaluates their surface burning characteristics by means of a specific certified
test assembly.
26) “Floor Area, Gross” The sum total horizontal area of all floors of a building,
measured from the exterior face of exterior walls or from the center line of
walls separating two (2) abutting buildings, including or excluding such areas
as defined by applicable code or ordinance SBC 201 8.2.1 and SBC 801
8.2.1.
27) “Floor Area, Net” The horizontal area of all floors of a building, measured from
face-of-wall to face-of-wall in each space, totaled together, including or
excluding such areas as defined by applicable code or ordinance SBC 201
8.2.1 and SBC 801 8.2.1..
28) “Floor Area Ratio (FAR)” The amount of gross floor area of all principal
buildings on a lot divided by the total area of the lot on which such buildings
are located.
29) “Garage” A structure or any portion thereof designed for the parking of one (1)
or more motor vehicles, not including vehicle repair, exhibition, or showrooms.
30) “General Requirements” Requirements necessary to carry out the
construction, such as start-up mobilization; construction trailers; temporary
offices, toilets, and utilities; site stake-out; dumpsters and trash removal;
security; and various other overhead items. These are typically referred to as
the “General Requirements of the Contract for Construction”.
On all building projects, the A/E and EPC Contractors shall illustrate that the
proposed construction work plan takes adequate financial and logistic account
of the General Requirements.
31) “Grading Plan” A site plan or drawing that illustrates an intended physical
change in a land surface, typically by means of contour lines and spot
elevations.
32) “Height, Building” The vertical distance between the finished grade and a
defined point at the top of a building or structure. Refer to the applicable code
for what constitutes ‘finished grade’ and what is the defined point at the top of
a building or structure. See SBC 801 3.3 and SBC 201 3.3. See also GEM
Section 5.3.3.B for Height, Bulk, and Scale.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 4
33) “Helipad, Heliport, Helistop, or Helicopter Landing Area” An area specifically

designed for the landing of public, private, or medical assistance helicopters.
34) “Impervious Surface” Area covered by pavement, roofs, or other surface that
inhibits ground absorption of water.
35) “Site improvements” All changes and additions to the natural ground surface,
or to the site surface prior to the proposed development.
36) “Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA)” Method for assessing the total cost of
facility ownership, taking in to account first costs as well as operations and
maintenance expenses.
37) “Lots”
(a) Lot Area – the total area of a piece of property lying within the lot lines,
not including any portion of a street or way.
(b) Corner Lot – means a lot abutting two (2) or more streets at their
intersection.
(c) Lot Depth – the horizontal distance between front and rear lot lines
measured as noted in the applicable ordinance.
(d) Lot Size – the area of a parcel of land within its defined boundaries.
(e) Lot Width – the horizontal distance between the side lot lines measured
as noted in the applicable ordinance.
38) “Master Plan”
(a) A conceptual or detailed site plan document produced by the Developer,
A/E, and/or EPC Contractor that defines the entire intent of the proposed
development to the level of detail appropriate to the site plan review
process.
(b) An established document controlling proposals for development as
endorsed by the RCJ to demonstrate that a superior development is
intended. The master development plan shall contain all that information
required by the zoning administrator to support the application. Refer to
Section 1.1 A for the National and Regional Framework and 1.1 B and D
for Master Plans and Community Design.
39) “Mixed Use Development” The development of a tract of land, a building, or a
structure with a variety of complementary and integrated uses, such as, but
no limited to, residential, office, manufacturing, retail, public, or assembly.
40) “Open Space” That portion of a lot or property which is not occupied by
buildings. By definition it may or may not include parking areas, driveways,
streets or loading areas.
41) “Ordinance” A general term for any applicable rule of law or governing code.
42) “Overlay District” Zoning regulation that imposes additional requirements or
provisions above that required by the underlying district based on specific or
special conditions.
43) “Owner” The controlling partner in a development.
44) “Parking Area” An uncovered open space other than a street or way, used for
the parking of motor vehicles.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 5
45) “Plat” A map or plan of a subdivision of land parcels.

46) “Plot Plan” A drawing used for the purposes of identifying the intended use or
occupancy of a particular plot of land, and to facilitate administrative review,
showing the location of the property boundary, structures, streets and other
important features.
47) “Positive Drainage” Drainage that occurs in a downhill/downslope direction
away from a structure or site improvement to help prevent water infiltration
and damage.
48) “Public Way” Any area of land whose designated purpose is vehicular or
pedestrian circulation or a publicly available space that is capable of vehicular
or pedestrian circulation.
49) “Ramp” A walking surface that has a running slope steeper than one vertical
unit in 20 horizontal units (5-percent slope), or as elsewhere defined.
50) “Right-of-way” A strip of land acquired by reservation, dedication, forced
dedication, prescription, condemnation, or decree, intended to be occupied
by a road, crosswalk, railroad, electric transmission lines, oil or gas pipeline,
water line, sanitary storm sewer, and other similar uses, typically defined with
specific boundaries that define its width.
51) “Setback” A specific line fixed by regulatory action, parallel to the property line
at the street right-of-way that defines a zone wherein a defined level of
improvement may not occur.
52) “Shaft” An enclosed space extending vertically through one or more stories of
a building.
53) “Solar Orientation” The compass direction a building or site element faces (for
example north, south, east, or west), considered in reference to the sun and
solar heat gain considerations.
54) “Spot Elevation” Numeric notation on a grading plan that indicates the height
above sea level elevation at a specific point.
55) “Story” That portion of a building included between the surface of any floor
and the surface of the next floor or roof above it.
56) “Street” This term may be used to describe one of the following depending on
the regulatory context:
(a) Cartway
(b) Right-of way
57) “Structure” Anything constructed or erected by means of a secure connection
to or fixture on the ground, and intended for a non-temporary function or
location.
58) “Subdivision” A legally obtained division of a property into separate uses or
parcels.
59) “Topology” The functional relationship of one or more architectural spaces
due to related use, necessary interconnectedness, grouping in a spatial
arrangement, or other organizational criteria.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 6
60) “Tower” For the purpose of this Section, any structure that is designed and
constructed primarily for the purpose of supporting one (1) or more antennas,
or telecommunications apparatus.
61) “Tree Protection Zone” An area surrounding an individual tree or group of
trees to be preserved during construction; defined by the drip line of an
individual tree or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees.
62) “Use” The function purpose for which land or a building is intended.
63) “UV Degradation” Cracking, bleaching or disintegration that results in
materials after exposure to sunlight.
64) “Yard” The unobstructed open space that exists or that is proposed between a
setback line and a lot line.
65) “Zoning District” An area of land consisting of multiple properties for which a
common general use is defined and specific constraints to development are
given based on this use.
66) “Zoning Ordinance” A legal document consisting of verbiage, maps, and in
some cases, details that govern all developments in a given area. Refer to
Section 3.2.
4. Abbreviations
1) BAS: Building automation system
2) FAR: Floor Area Ratio (see ‘Definitions’)
3) GR’s: General Requirements of the Contract for Construction
4) LCCA: Life-Cycle Cost Analysis
5) PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
6) R.O.W: Right of Way
7) S.O.F or S.O.P: Scope of Facility, or Program
8) STC: Sound transmission class
9) UV: Ultra-violet radiation
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to:
1) Section 3.1 for Building Codes
2) Section 3.2 for Zoning Regulations
7. Standards
1) GEM Urban Planning Requirements

Rev. 0 5.3 - 7
2) Area Master Planning Requirements

b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Standards:
1) Section 3.2 – Zoning Regulations
2) Section 3.3 – Accessibility
3) Section 3.4 – Sustainability
4) Section 3.5 – Environmental Protection and Preservation
5) Section 3.6 – Safety Standards
c. Refer to Chapter 4 for Project Submission Standards and Requirements
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 1.1 – General, for Definition of the scope and Purpose of the
Guiding Engineering Manual.
b. Refer to Subsection 1.1.6 for Typical Construction Details Drawings.
c. Refer to Section 2.2 for general Definitions and Abbreviations.
a. Refer to Section 3.2 for Zoning.
b. Refer to Section 3.3 for Accessibility.
c. Refer to Subsection 3.3.2 for Site Accessibility.
d. Refer to Subsection 3.2.6 for Landscaping.
e. Refer to Section 5.4 for Fire Protection, Plumbing and HVAC.
f. Refer to section 5,5 for Electrical, Telecommunications and Instrumentation
g. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3 for Streets and Roadways.
h. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4 for Site Stormwater Drainage.
i. Refer to Subsection 5.6.5 for Landscaping and Plant Irrigation.
j. Refer to Section 5.7 for Utilities.
k. Refer to Section 5.7.3 for Recycled Water (Irrigation)
9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and take action on all design reports, plans and Specifications,
refer to Section 1.1.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be obligated to observe and adhere to the
Construction Standards and Guiding Engineering Manual of the RCJ, procedures
and its design review and construction management process for demolition, new
construction, renovations, and any work, study, or services related to such work that
the A/E and/or EPC is performing for the RCJ
B. Commissioning
a. Not Applicable

Rev. 0 5.3 - 8
SUBSECTION 5.3.1 GENERAL ARCHITECTURE
5.3.1 GENERAL ARCHITECTURE
A. Architectural Design Principles

1. Introduction
a. All development shall be generated with explicit response to:
1) The applicable overall Master Plan for the area where the development is
located.
2) The local conditions in terms of building character; access, circulation; and
the visual effect of the development.
3) The cultural context.
4) Requirements specific to the building type.
b. A/E and/or EPC Contractor are to meet the design criteria requirements herein
provided in order to ensure a high level of architectural design quality.
c. Professional competence in the uniformity of practical approaches, compatibility of
design, and coordination of interfaces among the other design disciplines and third
party services, shall be required.
d. Designs must protect the unique character of the area, and create compatibility in
the environment through architectural treatment and site design.
e. Designs must develop an architectural character and site design that creates a
sense of place,
f. Designs must screen and protect privacy, frame and enhance views, and
appropriately accommodate uses and activities.
g. Design Criteria:
1) The overall goal of these criteria is to provide the user with buildings and
spaces that provide the best possible environment that will support their
mission, functions and needs. Overall site organization criteria include: well-
planned circulation that is adequately sized for both current and future needs;
creative use of landscape elements, and building siting and orientation for
energy efficiency and sustainability.
2) Section 5.3.0 Architectural, of Chapter 5 - Design Guidelines, governs the
selection of materials to be used in the construction of the RCJ projects.
These guidelines set minimum Standards for quality; energy efficiency; life
cycle cost; color and texture; scale, proportion and massing; graphics and
signage; as well as safety statements.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall identify, designate, and protect
historically significant resources by complying with the provisions set forth.
This document establishes the Standards and guidelines for site work and
alterations within the historic district, including both the interior and exterior
renovation/rehabilitation of the properties identified in the memorandum and
any major projects affecting these structures. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall also adhere to the RCJ’s Construction Standards regarding energy
conservation requirements and current Code Standards. See SBC 601.
2. General Design Components

Rev. 0 5.3 - 9
a. Form, Scale and Proportion

1) The form and proportion of buildings shall be consistent or compatible with
the scale, form and proportion of existing development in the immediate area,
or as otherwise directed by the RCJ.
b. Mass and Voids
1) The rhythm of structural mass to voids, such as windows and glass doors, of
front facades shall relate to those established in adjacent buildings.
c. Architectural Design
1) Architectural design shall create harmony through the use of textures,
complementary colors, shadow lines and shapes.
d. Monotony
1) Monotony of design in single or multiple building projects shall be avoided.
Variation of form, detail, and siting shall be used to provide visual interest.
Large unarticulated or monotonous forms are discouraged.
e. Design Uniformity
1) Architectural elements such as building materials, finishes, colors, facade and
roof lines, and screening shall be consistent and compatible.
2) Design and architectural elements that are consistent on all sides may be
used to meet the requirements of these principles and criteria.
Adjacent land uses, visibility from public streets and use of screening devices
such as walls, fences, berms, and landscaping are to be considered when
varying this treatment. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will justify the reasons
for differing treatment on different sides such as the need for automobile
access on one side and pedestrian access on another.
B. Cultural Context
All facilities shall be designed keeping in mind the Saudi Arabian heritage, and culture.
Architectural aesthetics and layout shall reflect Saudi needs and values through the use of
both traditional and modern designs, motifs and influences. Local materials and products shall
be considered first, to the greatest extent possible, when designing.
The overall facility shall be sensitive to and reflect the local culture.
Architectural design shall be respectful and relate to the building location and surroundings
through the use of design elements including appropriate color, materials, and detailing.
Overall architecture shall enhance the environment by honoring local architectural, historical,
cultural, and community themes.
1. Privacy
a. Buildings such as mosques, government facilities, commercial facilities and
permanent private residences may or may not be provided with privacy walls or
fences, as determined by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
When privacy walls or fences are not provided, the area between the building and
the lot boundary must be landscaped.
b. Fenced security enclosures, including lockable gates and security lighting, shall be
provided around all facilities requiring the exclusion of unauthorized persons. All
walls around Saudi Girls’ Schools shall be of solid construction and shall be 3.75

Rev. 0 5.3 - 10
meters high so that the interior is screened from public view. All school sites shall
have two exits through the wall for fire ingress/egress.
c. The site or location of all building or other improvements must be approved by the
RCJ. The RCJ will take into consideration the height, profile and proposed
placement of buildings on the units in relation to the height, profile and location or
potential location of other buildings or improvements on adjacent portions of the
units in an effort to minimize obstruction of the view from other parts as much as
possible.
d. Notwithstanding the above, the RCJ, as defined in Standards, may construct, or
require construction of, a perimeter wall on or near the property line of a lot or a
screening wall within the setback area of a lot as a special condition.
2. Screening
a. All screening elements, walls, and fences shall be within the lot lines.
b. The area between the lot line and a wall or fence set back from the lot line shall be
landscaped.
c. All wall and fence material shall be compatible with the exterior building finishes.
d. Boundary wall height overlooking the road shall not be more than 2.5 m high, except
for Saudi Girls Schools mentioned in previous section. Internal walls may be up to 3
m high as measured from adjacent walkway.
e. A boundary wall overlooking the road, or the main boundary wall which encloses car
parks, shall have 50% open area above half of the front wall, or planting adjacent to
that portion of the boundary from outside the lot to cover 50% of the wall area by any
type of steel or wooden bars, or decorative material.
f. Notwithstanding the above, the RCJ may construct, or require as a special condition
of construction, a perimeter wall on or near the property line of a lot or construction
of a screening wall within the setback area of a lot.
g. Garbage and Trash Containers shall be kept within an enclosure.
h. Preserving trees is highly desirable where there is existing tree cover. Large
artificial landscape areas and foreign flora are not considered to be desirable.
i. Retaining walls shall be limited to an exposed height of 1 meter unless it may be
shown that a higher wall is necessary. In this event, stepped terracing will be
required to reduce visual mass. All retaining walls shall complement the exterior
building finishes and blend with the landscape. Locally available Riyadh stone,
masonry, brick or concrete walls may be used. Concrete shall be textured,
articulated, sandblasted or bush hammered. Plantings of vines, bushes or trees shall
be placed so as to minimize the visual effect of large unbroken surfaces.
j. Privacy issues related to zoning and the Design Guidelines are to be reviewed with
the RCJ as part of the 30% Submission.
k. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with any additional requirements from
the Department of Education.
3. Gender Separation
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall incorporate gender separation on all projects
with public access. Separate entrances for males and family, restricted visual
access (screening) separate waiting areas, and separate work areas are some of

Rev. 0 5.3 - 11
the elements that may be incorporated. The project types that require such gender
separation includes, but is not limited to:
1) Restaurants
2) Offices
3) Residences
4) Mosques
5) Medical clinics
b. Submit the goals and objectives related to gender separation at the 10% stage to
the RCJ for review and approval. Clearly demonstrate the strategy intended and
include the elements to accomplish it.
c. Submit the methodologies related to gender separation at the 30% stage with a
more fully developed design.
C. Local Conditions
1. Elements
a. Elements of an environment or site have numerous physical and environmental
effects. These elements include man-made and natural features with inter-
relationships that may be difficult to anticipate.
2. Design
a. Design shall consist of low maintenance/vandal-resistant interior finishes and
building systems comprised of materials that are commonly available for repair and
replacement. The design of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems shall be
based on simple, reliable components.
3. Operation and Maintenance
a. All material and systems shall be reliable and easy to use or operate and maintain.
Materials shall be environmentally sound.
4. Location
a. The Building and Site Design shall reflect the location and surroundings in terms of
color, materials, and detailing, and shall preserve and build upon those architectural
themes.
5. Blending
a. The Architectural design shall result from the successful blending of local culture,
function, environment, economy, durability, operation and maintenance.
6. Emphasis
a. The Architectural design shall place appropriate weight and emphasis on each
element, and shall not let one of these elements become overly dominant.
7. Characteristics
a. The Architectural design shall reflect and support the characteristics and function
with the exterior of the structure not disguising the function of the structure.
8. Transient Styles
a. The Architectural design must avoid following transient architectural styles which are
short-lived.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 12
9. Quality
a. The Architectural design shall provide quality to enhance safety, productivity, and
quality of life. In this light, the architectural design shall:
1) Be functional
2) Be intended for an extended life. Building systems and materials shall have a
demonstrated longevity, durability, and reliability
3) Be conceived, designed, and constructed to provide ease of operations and
maintenance
4) Be conceived, designed, and constructed for ease of alterations and
expansions
5) Be conceived, designed, and constructed to provide a quality cost effective
facility
6) Be respectful of the cultures of those it is intended to serve
7) Be expressive of its function and of the services it provides
10. Control Joints
a. Large thermal expansions and contractions tend to occur due to temperature
differentials. These may happen in a short period of time. Careful study of the use of
materials, their exposure to sun and counteracting-measures, such as expansion
joints and control joints, shall be made at all levels of architectural and structural
detailing. The resulting expansion joints must accommodate all movements without
compromising the strength, stability, weather tightness, or integrity of the building
envelope, as well as aesthetics.
b. Special care shall be taken when designing with metal cladding to avoid buckling,
deformation, and “oil canning”, or movement-generated noise resulting from
uncontrolled rapid thermal expansion. It is also essential that heat gain and radiation
due to the intense sun be minimized.
c. Low heat absorbing materials, light colors, natural/passive air flow between building
components, orientation of buildings and surfaces, and angling of surfaces are
examples of measures designs shall consider in addressing the local climate thereof
are prime considerations. Materials and colors which do not fade or degrade due to
ultraviolet light shall be specified.
d. Refer to section 5.2.1.H.11 for additional design requirements.
11. Corrosion
a. The humid saline atmosphere tends to corrode metals and stain other materials. It is
imperative that guarding against such effects be at all levels of architectural and
structural detailing and selection of materials.
b. Mitigation of corrosive effects on cladding materials, hardware, finishes, sealants,
joints, connectors, and detailing must be ensured. This is most important on the
exterior of buildings but shall be recognized as a potential problem in the interior of
buildings as well. When dealing with metals, the use of heavily anodized aluminum,
galvanized and properly coated steel, as well as stainless steel, is recommended.
Exterior stainless steel must be Grade 316 or higher corrosion –resistant grade, and
a lacquer or polyurethane clear coat is recommended.
c. Refer to section 5.2.6 for additional design requirements.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 13
12. Sand Control

a. The prevention of sand and dust infiltration is essential throughout the design of a
facility. Blowing dust particles tend to infiltrate through minute cracks, joints and
openings. The accumulation of sand and its harmful abrasive effects must be
countered. Joints and connections shall be designed to prevent dust and sand
infiltration.
b. High quality weather stripping, gaskets and tight connections and tolerances shall be
provided for. Materials resistant to sand abrasion, sand blasting effect during heavy
sand storms and high saline content in sand shall be specified.
c. All main entrances and all other entrances to public buildings which may be
frequently used (except certain emergency exits), shall have vestibules with
adequately separated doors to serve as an air lock to check sand accumulation.
Tight weather-stripping completely around all doors, windows, roll-up doors, sliding
doors, industrial doors, and other openings shall be incorporated.
d. Mechanical intake and exhaust louvers and grills shall be protected or placed in
such a way as to minimize infiltration of wind, water, and sand.
13. Summary
a. In summary, acceptable architectural design shall reflect the function of the
structure, the environment and culture of the people being served, respect and
enhance its immediate environment, and achieve its mission in a quality and cost-
effective manner.
D. Standardization
1. Criteria
a. Uniformity and standardization of materials, equipment, hardware and finishes so as
to minimize and simplify service and maintenance. Effort shall be made to design
structures and elements to be compatible with their environment and adjoining
buildings.
b. The architectural design shall include the selection of materials based upon location,
quality, energy efficiency, life cycle costs, safety and environmental impact.
c. Throughout the design review and construction management process, the RCJ will
implement its Construction Standards. The design review process shall also inform
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of any adjustments to the Design Guidelines or
Construction Standards.
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall implement provisions of the RJC Construction
Standards, Exterior Signage, and Interior Signage to address the needs of exterior
and interior signage. The signage design shall meet the graphics requirements in
the Construction Standards.
e. All signage require approval from the RCJ as to size, material, graphics, color,
reflectivity, and illumination. Most signs are no permitted with the exception of
identification signs showing the name and the address of the owner or occupant of
the building or unit.
E. Facility Life Cycle
1. Design

Rev. 0 5.3 - 14
a. All permanent facilities, buildings, components and systems shall be designed to

maintain their structural, functional, operational, and aesthetic integrity for a
minimum of 30 years. All material and systems shall be cost effective and efficient.
b. The evaluation of life cycle costs for building materials, systems and equipment, will
continue to be an issue in preparing construction drawings and specifications for the
foreseeable future. Life cycle cost analysis (LCCA) is a valuable tool for evaluating
appropriate/durable materials based upon their longevity and expected maintenance
costs. While LCCA has traditionally addressed mechanical, electrical and plumbing
equipment/systems, it may also be used to evaluate major civil, structural and
architectural envelope systems.
2. Operation and Maintenance
a. Designs shall deliver low maintenance/vandal-resistant interior finishes and building
systems that are commonly available for necessary replacement. Designs of
mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems shall be based on reliable components.
b. All material and systems shall be reliable and easy to operate, access, and maintain.
Materials shall be environmentally sound.
3. Demolition and Salvage
a. Designs shall consider demolition and construction activities and strive to minimize
the amount of construction debris. Construction waste of any type shall be prohibited
from entering the municipal waste stream. Salvage, reuse, repurposing, and
recycling of materials are highly encouraged.
F. Space Allocation and Programming
1. Nomenclature
a. The terms “Space Allocation Program”, “Architectural Program”, and “Architectural
Brief”, and “Scope of Facility” (or SOF) may be interchangeable and shall be
considered herein to have identical meaning.
b. See Subsection 5.3.A.3, Definitions, for additional terminology.
2. Process
a. Goals
1) The goals of the building owner or developer are expressed in written form.
b. Statement of intent
1) The building owner or developer initially provides a written statement noting
the type of building or its purpose, an approximate size, and a budgeted
construction cost.
c. Project Requirements / “Basis of Design”
1) Provide general design intent information, including the intended design
character, preferred materials, etc.
2) Submit the applicable parking, loading, and site requirements.
3) Provide specialized information such as industrial process equipment, support
and utility infrastructure, material handling and storage, and vehicular and/or
user traffic that may be generated.
4) Programming shall respond to additional requirements of the Department of
Education.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 15
d. Information Gathering
1) Specify the needs of the building as defined by means of meetings with the
owner/developer, investigative studies of their current facilities and needs,
and other means as required.
2) The types, functions, and approximate sizes of spaces are to be defined. The
topology or functional relationships of the spaces and circulation are to be
indicated, and circulation, production, and /or industrial process flow is to be
delineated.
3) Any specific functional needs of specific spaces are to be defined.
4) Orientation and orientation requirements such as the following, are to be
defined:
(a) Spatial orientation
(b) Solar orientation
(c) Ceremonial / Religious orientation
5) The utility needs of the spaces are to be defined.
6) The technology, security, and/or telecommunications needs of the spaces are
to be defined.
7) Any special disability/accessibility requirements or challenges are to be
defined.
8) Any special hazardous material requirements are to be defined.
9) Site access, delivery, and service requirements are to be defined.
e. Compilation
1) Typically, a “bubble diagram” showing the connectivity of spaces shall be
illustrated to define room and space arrangements, and their topology.
2) The resultant or intended hierarchy of spaces in terms of function or size shall
be described.
3) Coupled with the topology, “stacking diagrams”, or three dimensional or cross
sectional diagrammatic drawings shall be created to show the vertical
topology and the beginning of a volumetric arrangement organizing the
spaces in multi-story buildings.
4) Diagrams of special areas shall be included.
5) Submit a detailed spreadsheet of spaces with their areas, with provisions for
support, circulation, and net/gross area factors indicated.
G. Pest Control
1. Chemical Treatment
a. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider in the design of all buildings, facilities and
the sites surrounding them as well as in the use of materials, steps and procedures
to combat and exclude all rodents, termites and insects. Particular problems with
subterranean termites, cockroaches and rats exist in the area.
b. Any anti-pest substance or material must be a substance approved by local health
authorities, and the RCJ and the Standards referenced therein. Substances must be

Rev. 0 5.3 - 16
employed strictly according to health regulations and manufacturer’s

recommendations.
c. Anti-pest substances or materials typically require specialized approved chemical
agents in significant quantities which must be applied only by licensed professionals.
d. Typical termite and insect treatment techniques include soil trenching and injection
into the effected materials via drilling or other invasive methods.
e. Soil Treatment
1) A zone of treated soil shall be created around the building perimeter. Soil
shall be treated with an approved termiticide, prior to the concrete slab
construction, for control of subterranean termites, as best method for the
control of subterranean termite is prevention.
f. Chemicals for treatment must conform to all applicable product and application
restrictions. The A/E and/or EPC must only use approved substances, chemicals,
and/or materials, and is responsible for all permitting. Some chemicals may include
the following list, subject to the above,
1) Organophosphates and synthetic pyrethroids (modified).
2) Reticulated Chemicals are proprietary systems that use a piping distribution
network installed at strategic points under concrete slabs and around the
perimeters of buildings. At completion of Construction, chemicals are injected
to reach each distribution point. Retreatment may be applied at any time.
g. Chemically impregnated membranes for under-slab and perimeter protection may be
provided with a proprietary system where a vapor barrier membrane is laminated to
a synthetic fibrous web impregnated with synthetic chemicals,
h. Stainless steel mesh (‘termimesh’) is a proprietary system that consists of a fine
woven marine grade stainless steel mesh used as a physical barrier. The stainless
steel mesh is too narrow for intrusion and incapable of being chewed through. The
mesh may be under the entire concrete slab or as a partial system in conjunction
with a concrete slab barrier that allows for construction of a perimeter barrier only.
Installations must comply with the manufacturer’s requirements.
2. Preventative Measures
a. Recommended preventative measures during construction:
1) Construction site garbage, food, and food or drink container refuse, shall not
be mixed with construction material waste, and shall have separate
receptacles subject to frequent pick-up.
2) Temporary Construction toilets shall be maintained and regularly refreshed.
3) The observed presence of rodents, termites, insects and other pests shall be
immediately reported to the appropriate on-site personnel who shall address
the situation by employing professional exterminators as necessary.
4) Removal of all form boards and grade stakes used in construction activities.
5) Sites shall be cleared of vegetation and/or ripped and grubbed to remove
roots etc. prior to commencing earthworks. Vegetation, tree stumps, and roots
shall be removed from site as soon as practical, and shall not be incorporated
in any fill.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 17
6) Any wood that contacts the soil, such as fence posts and foundation elements
shall be made of pressure treated wood.
b. General Construction techniques
1) Construction techniques shall employ deterrents to rodent entry, avoidance of
wood or wood products near the ground or water sources within the building
such as showers, toilets, sinks and drain lines.
2) There shall be no contact between the building woodwork and the soil or fill
materials.
c. Types of Potential Termites
1) There are two main types of termites capable of attacking buildings:
(a) Drywood termites, which do not have ground contact, and
(b) Subterranean termites, which require contact with the ground or some
other moisture source. Subterranean termites are found to be most
responsible for termite damage of economic significance.
d. Protection Options
1) Termite or Ant Shields
(a) These are continuous metal barriers or shields acting as physical
barriers.
(b) Materials may be of aluminum, stainless steel, sheet copper or an alloy.
(c) These elements shall be installed with a continuous protruding
metal edge turned down at an angle of no less than 45° from the
horizontal. The protruding edge must not be less than 38 mm from the
vertical pier or wall.
(d) The shields' main value is that of detection rather than protection. They
force the termites to construct their tubes in a visible area where they
may be treated or removed.
e. Inherent Deterrents
1) Monolithic Concrete Slabs form an inherent barrier; however, construction
joints and service penetrations must be handled properly to prevent intrusion.
2) Ventilation of crawl spaces and cavities, and the proper installation of under-
slab vapor barriers deter moisture and build-up of humidity that attract
termites. A minimum of 400 mm vertical clearance is recommended for
proper maintenance inspections.
3) The use of termite resistant and wolmanized lumber.
4) Strip footings and slabs shall be continuous to minimize construction breaks
that may allow intrusion.
5) Utility penetrations shall be provided with both physical and chemical
deterrents.
6) Walls with masonry veneers shall not allow the air cavity (‘finger space’) to
extend below grade.
7) Ventilation opening in foundations shall be designed to prevent dead air
pockets. These helps to keep the ground dry and unfavorable for termites.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 18
f. Create proper grading to direct water away from the structures so as to eliminate
favorable conditions for pests.
3. Inspections
a. Where termite shields exist, particularly when there has been a history of termites in
the immediate neighborhood, properties shall be inspected regularly, approximately
every six to twelve months by a qualified professional experienced in termite
detection.
b. Thorough annual inspections shall be conducted to detect evidence of termite
activity such as shelter tubes on foundation surfaces, discarded wings or adult
termites.
c. Foundation area shall be designed and constructed to be accessible for inspection if
possible.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 19
SUBSECTION 5.3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR BUILDINGS
5.3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR BUILDINGS
A. Building Site Planning

1. Introduction
a. This Section provides the basis for Site Planning for Building Projects. The
Guidelines apply to the following features:
1) General Building Site Planning
2) Building Orientation
3) Setback Criteria and Placement of Structures
4) Building Approaches and Entrances
5) Walkways Paving and Pedestrian Safety
6) Site Lighting
7) Services Access Hydronic Cooling
8) Vehicle Access and Parking
9) Loading, Off-Loading, and Delivery Areas
10) Waste Collection Requirements
11) Screening of Waste Utilities and Service Areas
b. Refer to Section 5.3.0 for abbreviations.
2. Planning Guidelines
a. General
1) Site Planning shall strive to provide social, environmental, and economic
benefits for each project in keeping with physical site conditions, public
expectations, market realities, and environmental constraints. Refer to Master
Plans, the Urban Planning Department, and Section 3.2 for Zoning
Regulations.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide an accurate Site Survey of the Existing
Conditions.
1) A site survey including topographic information, utilities, existing site features
and similar detail is a necessary prerequisite to the planning process.
2) An accurate survey is to be carried out to define the boundary of the site and
identify existing features within and adjacent to the site. The survey shall be
comprehensive and detailed.
c. Property lines, setbacks, and other physical constraints of the site shall be
diagrammed. These include, but are not limited to, adjacent buildings, traffic flow
around the site, pedestrian paths, natural features, views, solar orientation and the
like. Refer to Master Plans, the Urban Planning Department, and Section 3.2 for
Zoning Regulations.
d. Issues to be considered include, but are not limited to:
1) Setbacks and Placement of Structures, refer to Subsection 5.3.2.C.
2) Building Approaches and Entrances, refer to Subsection 5.3.2.D.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 20
3) Walkways, Paving, and Pedestrian Safety, refer to Subsection 5.3.2.E.

4) Architectural Context, refer to Subsection 5.3.3.C.
5) Visual Elements refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.3
e. The positioning of entrances, the ability of building exits to exit onto a public way or
appropriate open space, pedestrian and vehicular traffic flow within the site and
connecting beyond, the availability of useable open space, the proximity of parking
to building entrances all must be coordinated.
f. Site composition is a paramount issue. The character of the development, its
“sense of place”, the organization of buildings, the creation of outdoor spaces by
framing and forming it with structures, the reinforcement and treatment of existing
axes, edges and boundaries (refer to Section 5.3.3.D.2.h), and the creation of new
ones, all shall be thoughtfully considered and skillfully addressed to lead to a
successful and harmonious development plan.
g. All site improvements including: pavements, garden walls, all constructed elements,
and even automatic irrigation systems, shall be designed to maintain their structural,
functional, operational and aesthetic integrity for a minimum of 30 years.
3. Site Drainage
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4 Site Stormwater Drainage for guidance on the design of
stormwater facilities.
b. Special attention shall be given to the facility system for site drainage. A positive site
drainage system must be coordinated with the adjacent off-site drainage system at
points of discharge and interface. The external/off-site system capacity shall be
verified.
c. Ground absorption or percolation areas are not a suitable or acceptable method for
managing rain water. A positive rain water drainage system is required.
d. Erosion protection shall be provided for all drainage slopes and landscape
embankments.
e. Proposed site grades and landscaping, including future development, shall
emphasize the intent to minimize changes to the natural drainage patterns and
contours. Any proposed changes to existing grades, swales or existing drainage
patterns must be accompanied by a proposed method of handling changes in the
direction, quantity, or subsurface loading of water. All such proposals for change
must be approved by the RCJ and by an independent engineering consultant
retained by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Such engineering consultant shall be
approved in advance by the RCJ.
f. All buildings shall conform to the typical grading plans provided by the Royal
Commission in Jubail. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall confirm all finished floor
elevations with the Royal Commission in Jubail.
g. Existing trees and vegetation shall be retained whenever possible. Cuts and fills
shall be designed to complement the natural topography of the site. Existing
drainage structures shall not be altered or affected in any way.
h. Flow of water shall be directed to existing or proposed drainage structures in such a
manner as not to allow run-off onto adjacent property nor allow puddles or ponding
in paved areas, channels or swales. Surface runoff is not allowed to drain to the
adjacent street or road.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 21
i. Grades shall be nominally sloped away from building entrances providing drainage
away from buildings at 2% for 2m minimum. The overall parking lot shall be
generally sloped by a minimum of 0.5% towards the rainwater drainage or collection
system elements.
j. Rain Water Drainage at roofs
1) When roof drainage is achieved through internally concealed pipes, an
additional overflow shall be provided at each roof sump or drain in case
concealed pipes are blocked. The overflow shall be located 100 mm above
the top surface of the associated roof sump or drain.
2) Subsurface drainage shall be provided for those areas where it becomes
necessary to control perched water or ground water (“water table”) elevations
at foundation walls, cut areas, and landscape areas.
4. Landscape Scheme
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.5 Landscaping and Plant Irrigation for guidance on the
details of landscaping and plant irrigation systems.
b. A detailed landscape plan is required. This scheme shall show the hard landscape
layout detailing surface treatments, boundary types, earthwork design and changes
of level, proposed levels, artifacts such as walls, steps etc., plant beds and grass
areas, services and site furniture. Details shall also be provided as necessary.
c. A complete automatic irrigation system, if required, shall be fully specified and
detailed. It shall serve all plantings. The planting schedule shall be coordinated with
irrigation water availability volumes and schedule.
5. Open Spaces
a. Pedestrian open spaces shall be provided consisting of pedestrian courts, yards,
plazas, greens, and linear open spaces. Greens shall serve as social congregation
areas. Linear open spaces shall consist of pedestrian ways and shall provide
linkages between facilities or amenities and potentially serve as recreational assets.
b. The potential of open spaces for the use and enjoyment of its inhabitants shall be
fulfilled by the judicious planning, design, and installation of appropriate landscape
materials.
6. Special Site Features
a. Swimming Pools and Enclosures
1) All swimming pools and bathing facilities shall conform to the RC currently
adopted edition of the Uniform Swimming Pool SPA and Hot Tub Code by the
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO), local
customs, and all applicable Codes and Standards
2) Total separation of sexes, both for the swimming and bathing facilities
associated with such establishments, is necessary. The design must
incorporate facilities to enable users to shower or bath before and after the
use of the swimming pools and/or hot tubs.
3) All swimming pools must be in ground. Raised decks, spa areas, etc. shall
not project more than 600 mm above the established grade. Pools shall not
be permitted on the street side of the residence and no screening of a pool
area may stand beyond a line extended and aligned with the side walls of

Rev. 0 5.3 - 22
the dwelling. No portion of any pool, decking, or enclosure shall be permitted

to extend outside the building setback lines.
b. Tennis Courts
1) Tennis court to be constructed on any lot shall be subject to approval by the
Royal Commission in Jubail. Any lighting shall be designed so as to buffer the
surrounding residences from the lighting and must be approved by the Royal
c. Play Equipment Accessory Structures, and Decorative Objects
1) No basketball-backboard, swing set other fixed game or play structure,
platform, dog house, tool shed or structure of a similar kind or nature shall be
constructed on any part of a home site except when approved by the Royal
2) No decorative objects such as sculptures birdbaths fountains, flagpoles, and
the like shall be placed or installed on the street side of any lot without
approval of the Royal Commission in Jubail.
d. Games and Play Structures
1) All basketball backboards and any other fixed game structures shall be
located at the rear of the dwelling, or on the inside portion of corner lots within
the setback lines. No platforms, playhouses, or structures of a similar kind or
nature shall be constructed on any part of a lot located in front of the rear line
of the residence constructed thereon, and any such structure must have prior
approval of the Royal Commission in Jubail.
e. Play Surfacing Treatments
1) A key consideration in the design of accessible playground areas is the type
of surfacing to use. It is important that play surface materials be suitable for
cushioning falls, yet firm and stable enough to provide access for persons
with disabilities.
2) Children's play facilities shall be located with shaded areas. The surfaces
beneath the equipment shall be sand or other approved material. Natural turf
is not sufficiently durable for use beneath play equipment.
7. Site Plan Content
a. Ultimately the Site Plan shall be a comprehensive layout drawing or drawings
showing the detailed site design and development of all project components. It shall
describe the design thoroughly with specific details, from entrance feature design
and the selection of materials for walkways to storm water management design and
subsurface utility plans. Renderings and final presentation materials may also need
to be developed to present the design concept to the Royal Commission in Jubail in
the approval process.
b. Proposed plant species, density and microclimate factor; irrigation efficiency; and
use of captured rainwater shall also be included.
B. Building Orientation
1. Site Plan Considerations
a. Solar orientation

Rev. 0 5.3 - 23
1) South-facing orientations receive sunlight vertically, so horizontal elements

may provide shading.
2) East and west-facing orientations receive horizontal solar rays. West
exposures typically have stronger solar gain than east-facing exposures.
3) North-facing orientations typically have the least direct solar gain.
b. Sun Angles
1) Study the sun angles for proposed designs. Use these in determining basic
building orientation, as well as selecting both active and passive shading
devices.
2) Sun angles vary by latitude, by season, and by time of day.
c. Solar Path
1) Solar Path refers to the relative position of the sun during the course of a day
at a particular selected date or during a particular season. Charts and
diagrams are available from various sources to inform this study. The relative
position of the sun at various times of day shall be a consideration for both
interior and exterior spaces of a building. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.4.d for
Design of Shading Systems.
2) Consideration shall be given to the Solar Path at various seasons in order to
understand the effects of light and shading on the development as it relates to
the building and site functions and to the selection of landscaping species.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.4.d for Design of Shading Systems.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F for Orientation of Entrances.
C. Setback Criteria and Placement of Structures
1. Definition
A Setback is a specific line fixed by regulatory action, parallel to the property line at the
street right-of-way, abutting property that defines a zone wherein a defined level of
improvement may not occur.
2. Location
Typically, a site has specific setbacks along each property line that are defined by the
applicable zoning ordinance. These are set by zoning district. These will consist of front
yard setbacks, side yard setbacks, and rear yard setbacks, which may differ
dimensionally from one another.
3. Purpose
The purpose of setbacks is to keep developments from infringing on the use, function, or
views of adjacent developments and in some cases to implicitly set density, daylighting,
or open space requirements.
4. Context
Contextual setbacks must also be considered. A contextual setback is an imaginary line
determined by the designer or the reviewing agency intended to align the face of a
building or structure with the adjacent building(s) or structure(s) to establish a visual
commonality.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 24
Effort shall be made to design structures and the elements to be compatible with their
environment and adjoining buildings. Design excellence reinforces and enhances the
urban fabric, scale, and coherence of architectural treatments.
5. References
Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.B for Height, Mass, and Scale considerations.
Refer to Master Plans, the Urban Planning Department, and Section 3.2 for Zoning
Regulations.
D. Building Approaches and Entrances
1. Street Access
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3 Roads for design criteria to locate entrances to sites from
roadways.
b. Consideration must be given to the location of driveways. The speed of traffic and
number of lanes may affect the radius of the curb cut of the driveway based on the
expected speed of an entering vehicle.
c. The presence of medians or barriers may restrict turning in and out to one direction.
d. The queuing distance of vehicles at an adjacent intersection may necessitate setting
the access point further from the intersection.
e. The horizontal and vertical location of an entrance drive may typically be affected by
sight lines from a vehicle awaiting exiting, based on adjacent topography,
obstructions, and anticipated street vehicle speed. Sight line studies are mandatory.
f. Consideration must be given to the anticipated turning radii of trucks, delivery and
service vehicles.
g. Sidewalks, street crosswalks and on-site pedestrian paths may also affect entrance
drive design.
2. Entrance Approaches
a. The requirements of the drive approaches to building entrances vary greatly
between building types.
b. Consideration shall be given to the following:
1) Delivery vehicle needs
2) Emergency vehicle requirements
3) Vehicle drop-off of pedestrians
4) Accessibility
5) Adjacent parking
c. Emergency vehicle requirements
1) Emergency access-ways shall be located and designed in an appropriate
manner to ensure safe ingress to and egress from facilities.
d. Landscaping at Entrances
1) Entry drives in vehicular use areas shall be landscaped with approved trees
and shrubs in a manner that visually emphasize the areas and offer the driver
and pedestrian an attractive appearance from the street.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 25
2) The landscape plan shall identify a visibility triangle at all intersections

including parking access aisles and roads. No trees, shrubs or other materials
shall be placed where this will impede visibility.
3. Parking Areas
a. Trees shall be planted in parking areas to provide shade, windbreaks, spatial
enclosure and to provide a visual and acoustical buffer of parking areas.
b. All visible parking lots shall be designed to be screened from the public street or
adjacent property owners that are located in a different zone district.
a. Refer to Subsections 5.3.2.I and 5.3.2.J. for Service and Loading Requirements.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F for Orientation of Entrances.
E. Walkways, Paving and Pedestrian Safety
1. Walkways
a. Walkways are the paths for pedestrian circulation within the site.
b. Refer to Section 3.1 for Building Code Requirements, Section 3.2 for Zoning
Requirements, and Section 3.3 for Accessibility Requirements.
c. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.3.d.1 (i) for Circulation Systems.
2. Paving
a. Durability and longevity shall be considered in selecting walkway paving materials.
Proper sub-base, control joint spacing, and pavement thicknesses are required.
b. Refer to Pavement Guideline 2015 document no. RCJ-3DG-3DJ-GEX-AA01 for
general paving recommendations.
3. Pedestrian Safety
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.1 for requirements to show vehicular and pedestrian
accessibility requirements.
b. Vehicular Dangers
1) Separation of motorized vehicle and pedestrian circulation shall be
incorporated into the landscape development plan.
2) The layout of pedestrian walkways must consider vehicular danger potential.
Intersections must be carefully planned and kept clear of visual obstructions
for both driver and pedestrian. Analyzing pedestrian site distances to on-
coming vehicles is critical to pedestrian safety.
3) Guardrails, railings, walls, or other physical barriers or reasonable distances
shall be provided at walkways along streets or major thoroughfares.
4) Painted or physically defined pedestrian crosswalks may be needed at key
locations.
5) Consideration shall be given to establishing on-site speed limits, caution
signs, and crosswalk signs or pavement markings.
6) Detectable warning pavement needs to be provided in accordance with
accessibility Codes. See 2010 ADA - Standards for Accessible Design.
c. Fall Potential

Rev. 0 5.3 - 26
1) Sidewalks and patios shall be constructed of textured or sandblasted

concrete, brick, interlocking pavers, or stone. The coefficient of friction of a
proposed walking surface shall be a factor in its selection, particularly with
brick, stone, ceramic, and certain other paver types. Concrete masonry units
typically are more slip-resistant than fired clay units.
2) All walking surfaces shall have a non-slip finish. Tiled and slab paving shall be
solid bedded with fully grouted joints. Colored paving shall only be provided in
light-reflective colors, resistant to fading from strong sunlight. Adequate
provisions shall be made for expansion and cracking due to temperature and
moisture changes in paving materials. The coefficient of friction of a proposed
walking surface shall be a factor in its selection
3) Maintenance of walking surfaces is critical to pedestrian safety.
4) Storm water deflection and collection shall be designed to minimize the fall
potential due to wet pavement. The possibility of standing water shall be
eliminated.
5) Shielding from blowing sand shall be provided periodically along longer
pedestrian paths. Sun-shading is also a strong consideration.
6) Slopes beside walkways shall not exceed 1:20 for the first 500 centimeters.
Railings or other guards shall be provided where this may not be achieved.
7) Guards and rails shall be provided in accordance with building Codes where
walking surfaces are elevated above the grade plane. See SBC 201 2.18.2.3
and SBC 801 2B.6.2.3
4. Lighting
a. All outdoor lighting shall be designed to provide sufficient security for all facilities.
Reference 5.5.1 M 4 a. This system shall, by its design, style, material, color and
function, serve as a unifying element of the visual character of the areas developed
by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
b. Illumination levels shall be within the limits prescribed by applicable code, but must
be appropriate for the function to be illuminated, and adequate for security and
safety. Reference Table 5.5.1.J.
F. Site Lighting
1. Location
a. Provide street lighting at all intersections of street and access drives. Reference
5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting
b. Provide lights in parking areas, along sidewalks, between buildings, and at loading
areas as needed for safety and convenience.
2. Design
a. The placement, height, and shielding of light Standards shall provide adequate
lighting without hazard to drivers or nuisance to nearby residents.
b. No spillover of light onto adjoining properties is permitted.
c. Lighting shall not glare so as to hinder pedestrians or drivers either on or off the site.
d. Light standard size shall reflect use, use taller street lights in vehicular areas and
shorter pedestrian scaled lights along sidewalks, plazas, and building entrances.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 27
G. Services Access
1. Access and Location
a. Vehicular access for service vehicles is desirable from a secondary entrance rather
than the primary entrance.
b. Segregate service vehicle route from user vehicle circulation to the degree practical.
c. The service route and loading area shall be designed to accommodate the
maneuvering requirements of the largest anticipated vehicles.
H. Vehicle Access and Parking
1. Vehicle Access
a. Location
1) Access drives shall enter public streets at safe locations with adequate sight
distances, capacity for anticipated traffic flow, and sufficient spacing from
other intersections.
b. Design
1) Access drives shall consist of a well-defined roadway separate from the
parking area.
2) Access drives shall not have excessive grades and shall provide a level area
at intersections.
3) The angle of intersection between the access drive and the public street shall
be as close to 90 degrees as possible.
4) The number of access points to a development shall be based on the number
of users needing egress at specific times as approved by the RC.
2. Parking
a. Location
1) Parking spaces shall be “off-street”, that is located on the same lot as the
principal use.
2) Spaces shall not be directly accessed from the public street.
b. Design
1) Off street parking lots shall be graded, surfaced, drained and suitably
maintained.
2) Double loaded parking bays with parking spaces arranged at 90 degrees to
the drive aisle is an efficient and preferred arrangement.
c. Quantity
1) The quantity of parking to be provided shall be calculated based on the
number of anticipated users arriving by private vehicle at peak time and any
overlap between user or shifts.
2) Where parking use times are complementary between adjacent uses, the
potential for joint use parking shall be considered to reduce the overall
number of spaces.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 28
3) Handicap parking spaces shall be provided and be the closest spaces to the
building accessible entrance and shall have an accessible path of travel to the
building entrance.
4) Visitor parking spaces shall be provided according to 3,2 Zoning Regulations.
d. Landscaping and Buffers
1) Canopy trees shall be provided in parking medians.
2) Parking lots shall be buffered around the perimeter with suitable landscaping
or a fence.
I. Loading and Off-Loading Areas
1. Loading and Off-Loading Area Design
a. An off-street loading and unloading space shall be provided and sized to
accommodate the anticipated loading requirement.
b. The loading area shall be located and/or screened to be hidden from view of the
public street and main building entry.
c. The loading area shall have direct access to a public street without the use of
parking spaces.
d. All loading spaces shall be independently accessible such that a vehicle may enter
or exit without the necessity of moving another vehicle.
e. Provide bollards as needed to protect the building, stairs, and loading dock from
being hit by maneuvering service vehicles.
J. Waste Collection Requirements
1. Location and Design
a. Provide dumpsters and/or enclosed storage for all waste as determined by the
amount of waste generated.
b. All dumpsters and waste storage shall be enclosed on all sides with walls, and an
operable gate shall be provided for access from waste collection vehicles.
c. An off-street waste collection area shall be provided and adequately sized to
accommodate dumpsters, stored waste, and enclosure and the maneuvering
requirements of collection vehicles.
d. Separate dumpsters or storage areas shall be provided for recycling.
e. Coordinate the location, arrangement, and spatial requirements of dumpsters with
the type and loading characteristics of the anticipated collection vehicle.
K. Screening of Waste, Utilities and Service Areas
1. Location and Design
a. To the greatest extent practical, locate waste, utilities, and service areas out of view
of from public streets, building entrances, and pedestrian amenities.
b. Waste, utilities, and service areas shall be screened by vegetation, fencing, and/or
grade changes.
c. Maintained existing vegetation may be used to fulfill screening requirements.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 29
SUBSECTION 5.3.3 BUILDING DEVELOPMENT
5.3.3 BUILDING DEVELOPMENT
A. General
1. General Themes and Concepts
a. This Section provides general themes and concepts that shall be considered in the
design of all projects commissioned by the RCJ.
B. Height, Mass and Scale
1. Height
a. Building height shall be determined with due consideration to the function of the
building, activities in the building, aesthetics and economy.
b. Height restrictions for buildings as defined in local Codes and Standards shall be
strictly adhered to. These restrictions set parameters to avoid blocking the views
from nearby buildings and to meet life safety requirements. See SBC 201 & 801 3.3
& 3.4.
c. It shall be acknowledged that height restrictions are designated in zoning Codes to
be contextual – to create harmonious visual environments.
d. Height restrictions also may be in place to enable light and air to reach the
streetscape below, again enhancing the environment.
e. Setbacks may also be in place to mitigate the ‘canyon effect’ of streets between tall
buildings or to enable green spaces to thrive.
f. Developments on the edge of zoning districts with different height restrictions shall
be designed with sensitivity to the inherent height transition.
2. Mass
a. The size and shape of a mass is known as the form. The individual forms that
comprise a building or occur within a multi-building development shall be designed
to complement one another and the overall environment.
b. The massing of a building shall be developed as a harmonious composition of
elements. The massing shall also take into consideration the massing of the
adjacent buildings to create a skyline.
c. The building mass must work in harmony with the natural environment in terms of
site location, density, color, form, function and materials.
d. The form and proportion of buildings shall be consistent or compatible with the
scale, form and proportion of existing development in the immediate area.
e. The rhythm of structural mass and voids, such as windows and glass doors of a
front façade shall be related to the rhythms established by adjacent buildings.
3. Scale
a. Scale is the proportional relationship of a person to his spatial environment. The
scale of a design shall result in a comfortable relationship for the user in his
environment, and will vary as space, size and activities vary.
b. The most common scales used in the built environment are monumental and human
scales. Monumental scale is used to make a dramatic statement or to be viewed
from a distance creating a landmark or point of orientation. Human scale is used to

Rev. 0 5.3 - 30
create comfortable spaces for people to live and work in and respond to the physical
and emotional needs of the typical man.
c. Monumental and human scales may be used independently or together in the
design of a facility. The application of these different scales is often used to define
public versus private areas. For example, monumental scales may be more likely to
be used for large buildings, lobbies, and gathering places for larger groups of people
or to create more formal settings within public areas or structures; while human
scale is more likely to be created in spaces designed for smaller groups of people or
more private places. Sometimes buildings of more monumental overall stature may
be made up of spaces and volumes of moderate or human scale that serve the
needs of the users while creating a more monumental overall structure.
d. A third type of scale is the automotive scale. This scale relates to the perception of
form and space due to potential speed of movement. At higher speeds, human
perception of form, space and detail diminishes. Building designed to be viewed at
automotive scale may have simpler features or may be more iconic to give
recognition at a glance.
e. Streetscapes need to take into account automotive scale at closer proximity. The
character of the lowest levels of structures may require more detail to enhance the
quality of the transportation experience. Building entrances and parking locations
must be identifiable physically as well as by signage.
f. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3 E for a further description of Human Scale.
C. Architectural Context
1. Cultural Considerations
a. All facilities shall be designed keeping in mind the Saudi Arabian heritage and
culture. Architectural aesthetics and layout shall reflect Saudi needs and values
through the use of both traditional and modern designs, motifs and influences. Local
materials and products shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible.
b. The overall facility shall be sensitive to and reflect the local culture.
c. Architectural design shall be respectful and relate to the building location and
surroundings through the use of appropriate color, materials, and detailing. Overall
architecture shall enhance the environment by honoring and preserving significant
architectural, historical, cultural, and community themes which bring consistency.
d. Architectural design shall result from the successful blending of local culture,
function, environment, economy, durability, operation and maintenance and location.
e. Refer to Subsection 1.1 B for the National and Regional Framework and
Subsections 1.1 C and E for master plans and Community plan design.
2. City and Community Context
a. Architectural design is the creation of the physical language that becomes part of a
city or community identity. New construction will inevitably be set in an environment
of other structures, circulation, and spaces. It will both respond to and affect the
environment where it is constructed. Consideration must be given by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor to both the response and effect of any proposed design on its
environment. These existing structures will have varying characteristics to which the
new design must be sensitive. One of the characteristics of this environment is the
architectural context.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 31
b. The role of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is to work thoughtfully to incorporate new
designs into the unique local character using the best qualities of the regional and
cultural forms found in this region.
c. The overall context is comprised of many things, including its character or “sense of
place”; the cultural context of the locale; architectural features of adjacent structures;
the contextual history of the site area; circulation routes; building massing and
alignments; and the specific aesthetics of adjacent structures such as forms and
spaces, materials and colors, and scale.
1) Character and “sense of place”: Is the character industrial, high-tech,
picturesque, or urban? “Sense of place” is its identity as an area or
neighborhood with identifiable differentiating characteristics.
2) “The cultural context”: of the locale relates to historic precedents and the
related architectural forms and features with which people culturally or
religiously identify.
3) “Contextual history”: The built environment is constantly changing and
growing through various transformations whether rapid or prolonged. Existing
cities and communities have unique cultures and pasts called “contextual
history”. Future designs of buildings and spaces weave their way into this
context and become a part of the whole.
4) “Circulation routes”: must not be overlooked as key components of context,
since the enhancement or alteration of pedestrian or vehicular circulation may
drastically affect the way spaces are used and how access is facilitated.
5) “Adjacent building massing and alignments”: may also create context which a
proposed development shall respond to by aligning the new forms with
existing, picking up horizontal lines, or otherwise placing the new forms and
surfaces in a composition with the adjacent existing structures.
6) “The aesthetics of adjacent structures”: forms, spaces, materials, colors, and
scale - are discussed elsewhere, but they contribute significantly to the
context of a new structure and a new structure’s relationship to the aesthetic
characteristics of its neighbors must enhance and not detract visually from the
common good.
7) “Regional motifs”: are recognizable combinations of forms, surface textures,
colors, and patterns that are indigenous to the locale. These shall be
analyzed and studied in order to be responsive in the new design which now
will contribute to the regional motif.
d. Every building design must give full consideration to its context so as to create an
environment that will enrich the lives of the people and respond to the vision, history,
beliefs, and identity of a particular place and time.
e. In the somewhat unique situation of the creation of a new city, community or
development, the architect must identify the context from which to draw the style and
culture to base design upon. The architect must work with the Royal Commission in
Jubail to identify the contextual model that the new development is to become.
f. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall continue to identify, respond to, and protect
the region’s historically significant resources by complying with the provisions set
forth. This agreement establishes the Standards and guidelines for site work and
alterations within the historic district, including both the interior and exterior
renovation/rehabilitation of the properties identified in the memorandum and any
major projects affecting these structures. The Designer shall also utilize the Royal

Rev. 0 5.3 - 32
Commission in Jubail Construction Standards to help address energy conservation

requirements and current code Standards. See SBC 601.
g. Refer to Subsection 5.6.1.H for Land Use Compatibility.
h. Refer to Subsection 1.1 B for the National and Regional Framework and
D. Architectural Concept and Consistency
1. General
a. After the architectural context is defined, the architectural design shall be used to
create harmony within the context through the use of textures, forms, colors, shadow
lines and both complimentary and contrasting shapes to meld the new design into
the existing locale.
b. All permanent facilities, buildings, components and systems shall be designed to
keep their structural, operational, aesthetic, and contextual integrity for a minimum of
30 years.
c. Effort shall be made to design structures and elements thereof to be compatible with
their environment and adjoining buildings. Design excellence reinforces and
enhances the urban fabric, scale, and coherence of architectural treatments.
d. Monotony of design in single or multiple building projects shall be avoided.
e. Variation of detail, form and siting shall be used to provide visual interest.
f. Architectural materials shall be of high caliber. Material and color selection shall
create a harmonious composition. While visual variety and interest is encouraged,
the architect shall be judicious in the number of types of materials, textures, finishes,
and colors used.
2. Design Considerations
a. Activity
1) The design shall provide a physical development that encourages and
enhances the importance of movement and fosters an interest using urban
spaces.
2) Internal activity is encouraged by creating interest through the use of
attractive detailing and the provision of a spatially comfortable environment.
3) External activity shall be fostered with adequate consideration of the solar
environment. Spaces with specific purposes and features designed to
encourage social interaction and use of outdoor space are encouraged.
Daytime shading and nighttime lighting are encouraged to promote usability.
b. Community
1) The design shall provide development that produces a sense of pride and
commitment to the awareness of quality of life issues.
2) The design shall create opportunities that invite public use, except where
inappropriate, and sharing of spaces within a complex of structure in order to
encourage personal interaction.
3) The design shall visually “be a good neighbor” to surrounding developments
by favorable juxtaposition of its design components to its neighbors.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 33
4) Refer to Subsection 1.1 B for the National and Regional Framework and
c. Harmony
1) The design shall assure that the proposed design is compatible with existing
development and the natural environment in terms of site location, mass,
density, color, form, function and materials.
d. Livability
1) The design shall provide an environment that is sensitive to natural elements
such as topography, vegetation, light, water and views.
2) The design shall have features that enhance the quality of life for the users.
e. Maintenance
1) The design shall promote ease of maintenance, operation, and management.
2) This entails choosing materials and surfaces that have low replacement or
refinishing requirements, that weather well, and utilization of forms that allow
ease of access to maintainable areas of components.
3) Design to deliver low maintenance/vandal-resistant interior finishes and
building systems that are commonly available for necessary replacement.
Base the design of mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems on simple,
reliable components.
4) Provisions for window cleaning are highly recommended and may be required
for taller buildings at conditions that make accessing windows for cleaning
unsafe, or at the discretion of the RC.
f. Security
1) The design shall provide an environment that is safe and secure.
2) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F.9 for specific considerations.
g. View
1) The design shall provide physical development that frames and enhances
desirable vistas and screens undesirable vistas.
h. Design Principles
1) The visual inventory and analysis requires an understanding of basic design
principles. The primary principles are:
(a) Scale
(1) The proportional relationship of a person to their spatial
environment. The scale shall result in a comfortable relationship for
the user and will vary as space, size and activities vary.
(2) Refer to Subsections 5.3.3.B.3 and 5.3.3.E for further discussion of
Scale.
(b) Form
(1) The size and shape of mass. Individual forms shall be designed to
complement one another and the environment.
(2) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.B for Height, Mass, and Scale.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 34
(c) Function
(1) Function is the use of a space or area. Function is gaged by the
degree to which the space works in its intended purpose.
(2) Aspects of design that facilitate function are the size and shape of
the volume of space for each activity; amenities and features within
the space; appropriate connection to other spaces of related
function; access to and from the space; and appropriate degree of
light and air.
(d) Color
(1) All elements of the visual environment have color. The use and
arrangement of colors greatly determine the visual impact of all
elements.
(2) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.5 for additional detail on color.
(e) Texture
(1) All elements of the visual environment have texture. The use and
blending of textures greatly impact the visual environment.
(f) Unity
(1) All elements of the visual environment shall blend to complement
one another. Repetition of scale, form, color and texture results in a
unified visual impression and a sense of composition to the design.
(g) Framing
(1) Positioning architectural elements in such a way as to direct
attention to views of other elements, spaces or vistas is referred to
as “framing”. All views typically include a ground plane, side planes,
and overhead plane. These are the primary tools to employ. The
relationship of planes changes as the individual moves through the
environment, which may create opportunities to enhance the user’s
experience of the architecture.
(h) Axis
(1) An axis is a linear progression of space connecting two or more
dominant features. It has a definite planning function in creating
connectivity and organizing architectural elements, but shall also
have an experiential characteristic to persons moving along it or
having their views drawn by it.
(i) Terminus
(1) A terminus is the end of an axis and is typically defined by a
dominant feature such as a building.
(j) Balance
(1) Visual elements are composed to be symmetrical or asymmetrical.
In either case, visual elements shall be sized and located to provide
visual balance.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 35
(k) Economic Issues

(1) The facility shall be sensitive to the cost of materials, building layout,
and operations and maintenance of building systems, yet not
jeopardize aesthetics, function and environmental impact.
(l) Durability
(1) The facility shall be constructed for a 30-year life. All materials and
systems shall be cost effective and resource efficient.
(m) R/U Values
(1) Refer to Section 3.4 for building envelope design requirements.
3. Aesthetic Requirements of Visual Elements
a. Basic design principles are utilized to define visual elements and assess their
character. The assessment and classification of visual elements follows basic design
principles describing “good” and “not so good” design. Their assessment becomes
the design criteria used to determine the visual character of the installation. Visual
inventory and analysis rely on an understanding of the installation’s visual elements,
and an understanding of the principles of design. The visual elements for principles
of design are described in the following paragraphs.
b. Proposed designs are encouraged to find ways to create Visual Elements to
enhance the urban character and create visual interest and dynamic character.
c. Design is more than the sum of the parts. It is acknowledged that it is possible to
create “not so good” designs with “good” materials and individual features
juxtaposed in awkward or unsightly ways, and it is sometimes possible to create
“good” design compositions with an array of lesser elements. However, the following
visual elements are to be considered.
d. Visual Elements
1) Visual elements of a city or development include a myriad of physical and
environmental impacts. These elements include man-made and natural
features and their inter-relationship. The visual inventory shall include review
and assessment of the following elements of the installation.
(a) Natural Characteristics
(1) Includes the regional and site characteristics that have been
preserved and enhanced. These include topography, natural or
man-made watercourses, and adjacent natural or man-made
landscape features.
(b) Edges and Boundaries
(1) Linear elements such as walls, fences, or a tree line create
separation of use and activities. Streets, rail lines, transit corridors,
edges of adjacent developments, and natural characteristics are
other typical elements that form edges and boundaries.
(c) Buildings and Structures
(1) Typically the most dominant features of a city or development
installation. Their location and design characteristics determine the
primary visual image.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 36
(d) Materials
(1) The Designer shall implement existing provisions of the Royal
Commission in Jubail Construction Standards which address the
selection of materials based upon location, quality, energy
efficiency, life cycle costs, and safety statements.
(2) Material selection is primarily done for visual reasons. Therefore,
the appropriateness of materials is paramount. Color, texture,
pattern, and reflectivity must be considered. The site context may
suggest, dictate or negate certain choices.
(3) Effort shall be made to design structures and elements thereof to be
compatible with their environment and adjoining buildings. Design
excellence reinforces and enhances the urban fabric, scale, and
coherence of architectural treatments.
(4) A sense of uniformity and standardization of materials, equipment,
hardware and finishes is desirable.
(5) Material selection shall enhance the overall composition of the
building or complex. Consistency through the application of certain
materials in certain ways is desirable.
(6) Material selection shall minimize service and maintenance.
(7) Materials shall be environmentally sound, in other words have
sustainable attributes such as recycled material content, low volatile
organic compound (VOC) content, and non-hazardous
characteristics when returned to the environment.
(e) Exterior Lighting
(1) Exterior site lighting must conform to applicable Codes and
ordinances in terms of “lux” levels, light pole heights, and cut-off at
the property lines.
(2) Comply with all light pollution laws, ordinances, and decrees.
(3) Building up-lighting may be in color or white, and must be designed
in keeping with the building composition.
(4) Beacons, lasers, and other similar light types are prohibited.
(f) Nodes
(1) Centers of activity that attract people on a daily basis.
(2) Nodes may be physical elements, functional foci, or both.
(3) Nodes by definition tend to be concise elements or points in the
urban fabric such as a traffic circle, plaza, or tower.
(4) They may be the focus of elements or activities directed toward
them, or the origin of elements or activities radiating out from them.
(5) A node as a physical element may be a tower or landmark structure
that stands out amidst its context.
(6) A node may also be a “void” such as a traffic circle, green area or
depression in the urban fabric.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 37
(7) Nodes are typically reinforced by axes or radiating elements such as

boulevards or linear structures of some kind.
(g) Landmarks
(1) Visually or historically prominent features such as towers, statues or
buildings that provide identity and orientation of place.
(2) Landmarks are universally recognizable buildings or features whose
status is based on monumentality, prominent function, physical
character, or other significant attributes.
(3) Special care must be taken in the design of landmarks to create the
appropriate character and scale.
(4) Acknowledgment of existing landmarks shall be displayed by site
and building designs that enhance and do not diminish or conflict
with their stature.
(h) Entrances and Gates
(1) Provide the first and last impression of the facility. These may also
be elements that consciously or subtly form gateways.
(2) By definition, an “Entrance” is the sense of visual passage through
an element such as a group of buildings or into an area. It implies
that upon “entering”, a place of recognizable character is entered.
(3) Gates or gateways tend to imply the penetration of a boundary or
edge which may lead to access for a larger zone or sense of
existing one. Again, it implies that upon “entering”, a place of
recognizable character is entered.
(i) Circulation System
(1) Vehicular includes streets, service roads, mass transit lines, parking
lots, and driveways. Delivery areas utilize a large amount of space
and create significant visual impact that needs to be screened.
(2) Pedestrian includes sidewalks, walking pathways and bicycle paths.
(3) Circulation elements shall be designed with architectural character
to enhance the experience of movement, and shall not just be a
means to an end to get from place to place.
(4) Lining vehicular circulation with attractive and reinforcing features is
encouraged.
(5) Coupling vehicular and pedestrian circulation must be done with
care from a safety standpoint but the visual strength gained from
this mutual reinforcement is to be encouraged.
(6) Pedestrian circulation as a visual element shall be enhanced with
detail that enriches the experience. Variety in spaces along
circulation, paths, framed views and vistas, places to stop and rest
or gain shade or shelter, features such as water, bridges.
(7) Refer also to Subsection 3.3 Pedestrian Accessibility.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 38
(j) Trees and Other Vegetation

(1) Trees and other vegetation frame views provide visual screens;
provide shade, color, and interest in the environment.
(2) These may also be used to create rest stops and add interest to the
circulation experience.
(3) Refer to Subsection 5.6.5, Landscaping and Irrigation, for additional
requirements.
(k) Street Trees
(1) Street trees soften, complement, and define the road hierarchy, and
improve the overall visual quality of the installation.
(2) The biological needs to facilitate growth of the street trees are light,
access to water, adequate growth material, all of which must be
designed to enable longevity.
(3) Refer to Subsection 5.6.5, Landscaping and Irrigation, for additional
requirements.
(l) Views and Vistas
(1) Scenic and attractive views and vistas shall be enhanced.
Unattractive views shall be screened.
(2) Views may be toward natural or man-made features, or both.
(3) Both natural vegetation and man-made walls, edges or other
architectural elements may be used to frame the views and vistas.
(m) Open Spaces
(1) Open space areas create visual impact and serve to separate or join
adjacent uses according to how they are designed.
(2) The character of open spaces is critical to be consciously created.
(i) Plazas are more open and are generally devoid of internal
barriers. This enables larger gatherings to take place there or
large numbers of people to traverse through them. Plazas
typically have a character of monumentality to them.
(ii) Courtyards are smaller spaces designed for fewer people.
These may be “way stations” for respite, zones designed for
contemplation, or simply pleasant smaller spaces.
(iii) Open spaces may be bounded on two or more sides with the
other direction(s) opening to greater vistas and views
(n) Signage
(1) A coordinated installation signage plan, addressing both exterior
and interior signage, shall be developed to facilitate circulation and
provide useful information.
(2) Appropriate directional, safety and identity signs shall be provided in
all public and industrial facilities.
(3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall implement provisions of RCJ’s
Construction Standards, Exterior Signage, and Interior Signage to

Rev. 0 5.3 - 39
address the needs of both exterior and interior signage respectively.

The RCJ’s existing design review process policy shall continue to be
utilized to facilitate the coordination of exterior and interior graphics
in accordance with Construction Standards.
(4) All signs require approval from the RCJ as to size, material,
graphics and color. Normally, signs will not be permitted with the
exception of identification signs showing the name and the address
of the owner or occupant of the unit.
(5) Signs shall be clearly visible, contrasting with their immediate
environment and generally follow established international
principles.
(6) Signs may be both graphic and written, provided graphic signs are
clearly identifiable, simple and stylized.
(7) Arabic is the official language for all public signs and instructions
such as traffic signs, warning signs, and street signs.
(i) Written signage shall firstly be in the Arabic language, followed
by the English language. The use of any other language shall
be approved by the RCJ prior to implementation.
(ii) The Arabic shall always be to the right or above the English.
The Arabic lettering shall be 1.5 times as high as the English
and the style of Arabic lettering for all signs shall be in
"NASKH" characters. When appropriate the use of graphics
shall be maximized. See the "Planning Manual" of the RCJ for
other details.
(8) Internally lit building identification signs such as corporate logos or
names must be mounted in the top 10% of the height of the
building. The size of such signs is subject also to applicable Codes
and ordinances.
(9) Refer also to Subsection 5.6.2 for information regarding Street and
Roadway Signage.
(10) Refer also to Section 3.2 for Zoning Requirements for Signage.
(11) For high way sign structures, please refer to chapter 5.2.
(o) Utility Corridors
(1) Utilities shall be in corridors.
(i) Utility corridors are comprised of land designated for the
installation of utility infrastructure that serves one or more
buildings. These “corridors” are typically strips of land that may
be so designated for common use.
(2) Utility corridors shall NOT become visual elements in the landscape
or streetscape.
(i) Unsightly above ground utilities shall be minimized.
(3) Where it does not inhibit use, tapping, or access, utility corridors
may sometimes be overlaid with pedestrian or vehicular circulation
elements, landscaping, or elements forming axes in their own right
which happen to have a utility corridor alongside or within them.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 40
4. Building Style and Elevations

a. Each architectural design shall be considered on an individual basis with specific
emphasis on impact and harmony with surrounding buildings and styles. Elevations
that are similar in appearance are prohibited on adjacent lots. Notwithstanding the
above, similar elevations in the same parcel section will be limited to a maximum of
three.
b. Elevation approval shall consist of a review of front, side, and rear elevations. All
elevation treatments shall follow the common architectural design theme of the local
buildings as closely as possible.
c. Design Uniformity
1) Architectural treatments (e.g., building materials, colors, facade design, roof
lines, and screening) shall be consistent and compatible on all sides, i.e. there
shall be no side or portion of the building treated as the “back”. Treatment that
is uniform on all sides will be deemed to meet the requirements of these
principles and criteria.
2) Adjacent land uses, visibility from public streets, and use of screening devices
(walls, fences, berms, landscaping) are criteria to be considered when varying
the treatment on different facades. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors will have
the burden of demonstrating the reasons for differing treatment on different
sides (for example, the need for automobile access on one side and
pedestrian access on another).
d. Designing Shading Systems
1) Sun shading is a critical element in building design. However explicit
consideration need be given based on the building function, design and solar
orientation.
(a) South-facing orientations receive sunlight vertically, so horizontal
elements such as fixed overhangs on south-facing glass shall be used to
control direct solar radiation.
(b) East and west-facing orientations receive horizontal solar rays.
Therefore, it is advisable to limit the amount of east and west-facing
glass since it is harder to shade than south-facing glass. Vertical building
elements or site features such as the use of landscaping may be used to
shade east and west exposures. West exposures typically have stronger
solar gain than east-facing exposures.
(c) North-facing glass may be used for natural daylighting since this
orientation receives much less direct solar gain.
(d) Consider ways to shade the roof even if there are no skylights since the
roof is a major source of transmitted solar gain into the building.
(e) Study the sun angles for proposed designs. Use these in determining
basic building orientation, as well as selecting shading devices,
photovoltaic panels, or solar collectors.
2) For shading systems for most buildings in this solar environment, the
following design recommendations generally hold true:
(a) Light shelves bounce natural light deeply into a room through high
windows while shading lower windows.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 41
(b) Indirect radiation shall be controlled by other measures, such as the

choice of glass.
(c) Do not expect interior window shading devices such as blinds or vertical
louvers to reduce cooling loads since the solar gain has already been
admitted into the space.
(d) Interior window shading devices do offer glare control and may
contribute to visual acuity and visual comfort.
(e) Consider operable of electronically controlled shading devices where
feasible.
5. Color
a. General Requirements
1) Colors used on the project shall be in accordance with the overall project
scheme and the local context and shall be subject to project approval prior to
use on the project.
2) Color schemes developed as part of systems for the protection of health,
safety and welfare shall be coordinated with the overall color scheme in order
to maintain project continuity and maximum aesthetic impact.
b. The guidelines for the color and texture of new and renovated or expanded facilities
have been established to provide continuity between the new and existing facilities.
In addition to providing aesthetic harmony in the appearance, this approach allows
more cost-efficient maintenance of all facilities.
1) Exception to this requirement shall be piping corridors shared by the
Industries in the Industrial Area, on the Causeway and in the Port Area.
c. Fair-Face Concrete Color Finish
1) Natural gray color finish for the Fair-Face concrete shall not be used for
exterior facades of buildings. Some examples of systems, which may be
considered, are as follows:
(a) Use of low-volatile organic compound (VOC) Spray Paint.
(b) Use of white cement per ASTM C150, Type V.
(c) Use of color pigments like titanium dioxide, zirconium orthosilicate, cobalt
oxide, etc.
(d) Combination of white cement and color pigments like natural yellow iron
oxides, nickel titanate yellow, natural brown iron oxides, etc.
(e) Plaster in colors other than gray.
2) A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall submit their proposed system for the RCJ
approval.
E. Human Scale
1. Scale
a. The proportional relationship of a person to their spatial environment. The scale
shall result in a comfortable relationship of the user and will vary as space, size and
activities vary.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 42
b. Multiple scales may coexist together creating drama and harmony at the same time.
These scales which all have a place in the built environment include: monumental
scale, human scale and micro scale.
c. Typically monumental scale is for public spaces, human scale is for private people
spaces and micro scale is for fine details of parts and pieces.
2. Human Scale
a. Human scale is designed to enable personal physical interaction with the built
environment based on physical dimensions of one’s surroundings. It may be the
creation of “personal space” which implies a sense of ownership, an intimately sized
environment that implies a sense of shelter, or simply a space whose elements are
proportionate to the human body.
b. What differentiates human scale from monumental or micro scales is the detail in
building components. Human scale components fit the human hand, foot, stride,
reach, visual acuity and mental comprehension. Human scale creates places for
people.
c. Building components scaled to the human physical capabilities include stairs, ramps,
railings, doors, seating, work surfaces, finish patterns, ceiling heights, building
component modules, distances, heights, mass and many other features that fit the
human eye and perception of comfort and ease.
d. Human scale may exist in the entirety of a building such as a single family
residence, or as a component of a larger monumental structure such as an office
building, apartment building or a shopping mall.
e. Human scale is also a sensory quality that reflects comfort in the built environment
such as: acoustic comfort, pleasing sightlines, lighting levels that deliver visual and
temperature comfort, finishes that are pleasing to the touch and to the eye and
spatial qualities that put the mind in a safe and comfortable state.
F. Building Entrances
1. Natural Access Control
a. The normal users of the space shall be made to feel welcome and secure, while
discouraging the entry of undesirable users. Access to the site, parking areas and
accompanying structures shall be well defined and incorporate a celebration of a
sense of arrival.
b. The main entrance to a site, parking area or structure shall be sufficiently sized to
accommodate the normally expected ingress and egress demands. Supplemental
entry and exit ways shall be securable or have the ability to be closed off.
c. All buildings shall have a minimum of two entrance/exit points.
2. Entry Signage
a. Signage size, type, and lighting must conform to applicable Codes and ordinances.
b. Identity signs for public buildings shall be located at eye level on the entrance door
or on the wall adjacent to it, or as required by accessibility requirements.
c. Accessible signage shall meet applicable code requirements for braille, pictorial
icons, and graphics. See 2010 ADA - Standards for Accessible Design.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 43
d. Signage and natural barriers shall inform normal users of the space of appropriate
directions and the rules pertaining to the areas, while eliminating excuses for the
abnormal user’s unacceptable behavior.
e. Flashing, animated, and electronic signs with moving graphics, and motionless
digital flat-screen signs, require special approval.
3. Orientation
a. Whenever possible, passive strategies, such as utilizing shade to minimize heat
gain, radiation and glare or positioning a building entrance to take advantage of
existing topography or opportunities for natural ventilation afforded by prevailing
winds, shall be accommodated into the design of all facilities.
b. Structures shall be oriented to take advantage of such conditions, and excessively
glazed surfaces, particularly when un-shaded or directly facing toward the sun, shall
be avoided.
c. Seasonal wind rises, showing a predominance of west-north-west to north-north-
west winds both in frequency and velocities as referred to in the Environmental
Chapter shall also be consulted when orienting facility entrances.
d. Properly designed exterior sun control devices for entry vestibules and other
openings are strongly encouraged. A study of their optimum shape in relation to the
sun, as well as their initial economic impact, and maintenance costs as related to
HVAC equipment and operation costs, shall be made. Such devices shall have low
heat absorptive qualities and minimal contact with the building surfaces to which
they are attached.
4. Design
a. A building entrance provides the first impression and the last impression of the
building, the operations taking place in the building and the people working or living
there. This first and last impression is essential to the success of a building design.
b. The building entrance shall be very obvious, well lighted and inviting to all visitors,
users, and residents.
c. The Scale of the entrance needs to respond to the human scale of the users versus
monumental scale for larger buildings.
d. Materials shall be appropriate to the local land and building scape of the region,
neighborhood or individual streets.
5. Emergency and Fire Department Access.
a. Entrances and entrance canopies, porte-cocheres, and marquees must be designed
to allow unfettered emergency vehicle access. Height and width of these elements
must allow passage of emergency vehicles. The space between the closest access
point of an emergency vehicle and the doorway must be clear and capable of
enabling emergency personnel to transport gurneys smoothly.
b. Fire department access must be provided in accordance with the IBC and applicable
building Codes. See SBC 201 2.15.13, & 2.27.9.5.2.2 and 801 5C.3 Appendix D.
c. Both the local emergency response team and fire departments must be contacted to
verify requirements and approve building configurations at access points.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F.9 for architectural Security System information. Refer to
Section 5.5 for electrical information regarding Safety and Security Systems.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 44
e. Refer to Section 5.4 for information regarding Fire Department Connections.

6. Sand Control
a. The prevention of sand and dust infiltration is essential throughout the design of a
facility entrance. Blowing dust particles tend to infiltrate through minute cracks, joints
and openings. The accumulation of sand and its harmful abrasive effects must be
countered. Joints and connections shall be designed to prevent dust and sand
infiltration.
b. High quality weather-stripping, gaskets and tight connections and tolerances shall
be provided for. Materials resistant to sand abrasion, sand blasting effect during
heavy sandstorms and high saline content in sand shall be specified.
c. All main entrances and all other entrances to public buildings, which are frequently
used except emergency exits, shall have vestibules with adequately separated
doors to check sand accumulation. Tight weather-stripping all around all doors,
windows, roll-up doors, sliding doors and other industrial doors shall be installed.
d. Inner and outer doors located in sequence that are on automatic operators or motion
sensors shall be timed to minimize the time both sets of doors are open
simultaneously. At heavy-use entrances in areas of high winds, automatic sliding
doors shall be used.
e. Mechanical intake and exhaust louvers and grilles shall be protected or placed in
such a way as to minimize these effects.
7. Exterior Door Hardware
a. Door hardware for main entrances and monumental entrances shall be
commensurate with the character of the building.
b. Exterior hardware shall be chosen for its ability to operate in a dusty environment,
therefore dustproof keyways shall be provided. All doors shall be provided with
appropriate hardware including hinges or pivots, locksets or latchsets, closers, door
stops, weather-stripping, kickplates, push-pull plates, flush or surface bolts,
coordinators and roller latches.
c. Hardware for each door shall be set-up in "Hardware Sets" and the sets shall be
included in the appropriate specification. Each Hardware Set shall identify every
item of hardware required for the particular door.
1) In public buildings, latchsets and locksets shall feature lever operators instead
of knobs for accessibility.
2) All knuckle-type hinges shall be of the 5-knuckle design and all out swinging
exterior doors shall have hinges with non-removable pins. All doors up to a
height of 2150 mm shall be provided with 1½ pair (3) hinges, and 2 pair (4)
hinges shall be provided for doors whose height is in excess of 2150 mm up
to a height of 2700 mm.
3) “Piano hinges”, offset pivot hinges, and bi-parting automatic doors are
allowable.
4) Auto-operators are encouraged for main entrances, subject to Subsection
5.3.3 F.6 – Sand Control.
5) Mortise type locksets are preferred for exterior doors with cylinders having a
minimum of 6 pins.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 45
d. Mechanical or electrified automatic closers are required for all exterior doors. Closer
tension is subject to Accessibility requirements.
e. Hardware using any plastic components is unacceptable. All hardware shall be low
maintenance, rugged and of durable materials. Hardware which may be exposed to
excessive humidity and all exterior hardware shall be corrosion resistive.
8. Accessibility
a. Building entrances shall meet all applicable Codes, Standards and guidelines for
accessibility including ramps, doors, handrails, signage, communication and safety.
See 2010 ADA - Standards for Accessible Design and Saudi Building Code 201,
Chapter 9.
b. All clearances required for accessibility must be provided.
c. Door width, hardware type, mounting heights, and door closer tension setting must
comply with applicable accessibility requirements. Automatic entrances with motion
sensors or paddle type activation are recommended typically and required where
required by code.
d. Refer to Section 3.1, Building Codes for other applicable Accessibility requirements.
9. Security Systems
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are expected to consider security as part of the
Project design process. The designer’s approach shall be holistic and consider
security risks that may affect the Project and mitigation strategies to accommodate
those risks.
b. Each building entrance is required to have an electronic security Access Control
System installed by a security Service Company approved by the RCJ. The RCJ
shall set the minimum system capabilities and approve the design and installation of
each system. Each system shall be placed in service upon completion of the
building.
c. 24-hour CCTV surveillance is to be provided at building entrances and parking
garages and parking lots that are included in the arrival and departure sequence to
and from the building, and elsewhere as deemed desirable.
d. Lighting shall be uniform, consistent and contain overlapping zones of coverage to
avoid any dark or shadowed areas that could conceal a possible threat. Lighting
levels shall coordinate with security camera capabilities.
e. The designer shall consider on a Project-by-Project basis physical security
measures to plan for, protect from, and prevent security threats by the physical
design in place. Physical security measures to be considered shall include but are
not limited to:
1) Maintaining appropriate distances from a security risk or blast potential
2) Line of sight
3) Barrier design (bollards, berms, vehicular access prevention, etc.)
4) Sally ports
5) Blast resistance
6) Envelope hardening strategies
7) Opening protection

Rev. 0 5.3 - 46
f. “Security, Safety, and Fire Protection Strategy and Approvals:

1) The High Commission for Industrial Security (HCIS), part of the Ministry of the
Interior, is the Authority Having Jurisdiction responsible for the development
and implementation of security, safety, and fire protection strategies kingdom-
wide. Industrial projects and other select building development projects are to
be submitted to the HCIS by the Owner for review and approval.
2) Refer to HCIS security directives SEC-01 to SEC-12, and Safety Directives
SAF-01 to SAF-12 for requirements. Owner shall follow HCIS workflow
requirements stated in SEC-01, section 5.0.”
3) For ballistic protection, the following test protocols and information may be
used:
(a) GSA Test Protocol: GSA-TS01-2003
(b) Ratings of bullet resistant materials per UL 752, ASTM F-1233, or BS
5051
G. Acoustic Design Requirements
1. General
a. All significant spaces in buildings and facilities shall be designed to provide an
acoustically controlled environment in relation to exterior noise from adjacent interior
spaces and exterior influences.
b. Placement of significant spaces shall be strategically planned during the
development of the project’s site plan and floor plans to avoid having to take
extraordinary measures to sound isolate a space.
2. Acoustically Sensitive Spaces
a. All acoustically sensitive spaces such as mosques, school music rooms, sound
studios, laboratories, concert halls and auditoriums shall be designed with the aid of
qualified acoustical consulting firms.
b. Spaces with high levels of sound control requirements such as classrooms,
conference rooms, offices, sleeping rooms, audiology testing rooms, laboratories
and special healthcare spaces shall be designed by the architect or engineer to
achieve the required sound isolation.
c. Indoor locations containing generators or other noise-generating equipment shall
have the room designed to reduce and/or prevent transmission of the equipment
noise to the adjacent spaces. The level of sound attenuation is dependent on the
criticality of the adjacent spaces. The designer shall define mitigation strategies for
high frequency and low frequency transmission.
3. Sound Control Devices
a. Exterior spaces shall strive to control sound created within them by using strategies
that include planting materials, non-paved areas and the use of sound absorbent
materials.
b. Interior spaces shall strive to prevent sound generation within the space and absorb
the sound generated that may not be avoided by using sound absorbing materials
such as planting materials, carpeting, draperies, acoustic ceiling systems and fabric
covered furnishings.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 47
4. Demolition and Construction Activities

a. Demolition and new construction activities shall seek to minimize the amount of
construction noise generated. Work restrictions on items such as time frame for
certain work activities, tool usage, and equipment operation, as imposed by
applicable ordinances and laws, shall be strictly adhered to.
5. Sound Transmission Limitations
a. Mechanical equipment shall be located and installed to minimize transmission of
objectionable sound to the surrounding area. Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall
be determined with ASTM E90 and E413 Standards.
b. Mechanical equipment shall be placed on sound and vibration isolators to mitigate
structure borne vibration and noise being transferred from one space to another.
c. Ductwork shall be wrapped with sound attenuation/thermal insulation to control
airborne ductwork noise and expansion and contraction noise.
d. Acoustic baffles and equipment screens may be required per Subsection 5.3.3.I.
e. Mechanical equipment shall be commissioned by a certified commissioning agent
before Owner acceptance to assure that equipment is operating properly, efficiently
and quietly. Regular maintenance is required to assure that the commissioned
operating levels are maintained.
Refer to Table 5.3.3.A below for additional sound transmission limitations between
important spaces defined as “Sound Transmission Class” (STC).
TABLE 5.3.3.A: SOUND TRANSMISSION LIMITATIONS
Minimum Sound
SEPARATION BETWEEN Isolation
Requirement (STC)
ROOM ADJACENT AREA
Bedroom, bathroom of separate

Dwelling Units Bedroom occupancy, living room, kitchen, 47
Except Private corridors, public spaces.
Residence Mechanical equipment room, high
Bedroom 52
noise public and service spaces
Executive Areas, Private offices, corridors, lobby,

Office 47
Doctor’s Suites, toilets, kitchens, dining areas.
Confidential Privacy
Requirements Office General offices, exterior of building 42
Private offices, general offices,

Normal Office Areas, Office 37
corridors, lobby, exterior of building
Normal Privacy
Requirements Conference rooms, offices, General
Conference 42
office areas, corridors, lobbies

Rev. 0 5.3 - 48
Class rooms, corridors, public areas,

Class Room 37
Normal School exterior of building
Buildings Shops, recreational areas, music
Class Room 47
rooms, drama areas
Similar areas, recreational areas,

Theaters, mechanical, equipment rooms,
52
Performing Arts Concert Halls shops, toilet rooms, exterior of
Buildings and buildings
Theaters Public spaces, classrooms,
Theaters,
laboratories, arts and Concert Halls, 47
Lecture Halls
areas
H. Life Safety Requirements

1. All public facilities shall comply with the Life Safety Requirements adopted by the RCJ.
Refer to Section 3.1.0, “Codes and Performance Standards” for a more detailed listing.
2. Some significant aspects of the applicable Life Safety Codes and Standards relative to
RCJ GEM are discussed below. However at a minimum all applicable provisions of the
Codes adopted by the RCJ are to be followed.
a. Saudi Building Code
1) The Saudi Building Code covers numerous aspects of design and
construction, all of which shall be considered applicable to projects reviewed
under this GEM. Specific topics include but are not limited to the following:
(a) Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Energy Conservation,
Sanitary, and Fire Protection
(b) Building design restrictions based on Height and Area
(c) Use/Occupancy and Construction Type as generators of Fire Resistance
rating requirements
(d) Requirements for high-rise buildings
(e) Fire Protection/sprinkler system requirements.
(f) Means of Egress design and capacity
(g) Accessibility
(h) Emergency Planning and Preparedness
(i) Fire Service Features
(j) Fire Safety During Construction And Demolition
(k) Design Criteria for Aviation Facilities
(l) Requirements for Various Types Of Industrial And Fabrication Facilities
(m) Requirements for Tents, Canopies and Other Membrane Structures

Rev. 0 5.3 - 49
(n) Requirements for buildings containing Hazardous Materials and

Aerosols; Combustible, Flammable and Toxic Materials; and other
Industrial Substances
(o) Fire Apparatus Access Roads; Fire Hydrant Locations And Distribution;
Fire-Flow Requirements For Buildings
(p) Standards of the Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO) apply
as cited in the Saudi Building Code
b. International Codes
1) International Building Code (IBC)
(a) IBC deals with multiple topics of special interest, including:
(1) Building design restrictions based on Height and Area
(2) Use/Occupancy and Construction Type as generators or Fire
Resistance rating requirements
(3) Requirements for high-rise buildings
(4) Fire Protection/sprinkler system requirements
(5) Means of egress design and capacity
(6) Accessibility
(7) Energy efficiency requirements
(8) Exterior wall and roof assemblies
(9) Structural Design and Testing; Soils and Foundations
(10) Design with steel, masonry, and other materials
(11) Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing systems
(12) Additionally, the Sections on Fire Districts, Safeguards during
Construction, and Encroachments into the Public Way may have
special applicability.
2) International Mechanical Code
(a) Governs heating, ventilating, and air conditioning requirements
3) International Plumbing Code
(a) Governs plumbing system design
(b) Particular attention is to be paid to the following:
(1) Plumbing Fixture Count calculations which may be modified by
Saudi and local law.
(2) Certain fixture types and privacy features
4) International Energy Conservation Code
5) International Electric Code
6) International Fuel Gas Code
7) International Fire Code
8) International Green Construction Code

Rev. 0 5.3 - 50
9) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72)

c. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes
1) There are numerous NFPA Codes covering a variety of applicable topics.
Many of these are cited by direct reference in the IBC or other primary Codes
in effect. Some significant aspects of these relative to the RCJ GEM are
discussed below. However all applicable provisions of the most current
versions of the Standards that are in effect are to be followed.
(a) The Life Safety Code Handbook and NFPA 101
(1) Sections deal with specific requirements based on Occupancy
Classification. The Section on Hazardous Contents is to be applied
to industrial, laboratory, and storage of certain materials.
(2) Means of Egress including additional requirements on travel
distance to exits, emergency lighting, and Special Provisions for
Occupancies with High Hazard Contents.
(3) Smoke barriers and compartmentation, fire barriers and opening
protectives.
(4) Special provisions by occupancy type, including high-rise buildings,
assembly occupancies, childcare and healthcare facilities, dorms
and apartments, business and mercantile facilities, and industrial
and storage facilities.
(b) NFPA 5000 – Building Construction and Safety Code, includes additional
coverage of many of the issues above, plus the following among others:
(1) Special structures such as membrane structures; tents; awnings
and canopies; pools and spas; towers; high-rise buildings; spires
and other tall structures; heliports.
(2) Underground structures; open-air facilities including processing
facilities; and structures surrounded by water.
(3) Quality assurance during construction
(4) Structural requirements for various materials and building systems.
(5) Interior environment and energy efficiency
(6) MEP and Fire Protection
(7) Enhanced Fire Compartment Requirements based on construction
type.
(c) ASTM International
(1) ASTM International was formerly known as the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM).
(2) ASTM designations relate to numerous testing that materials and
systems must pass to qualify as acceptable in the IBC family of
Codes and other applicable Codes. Compliance with specific ASTM
tests as cited in the applicable Codes imposes those requirements.
The detail of the requirements may be accessed in the referenced
ASTM Standard.
d. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

Rev. 0 5.3 - 51
1) ANSI Standards cited in the applicable Codes are imposed on the

development in a similar way to the ASTM Standards noted above.
2) Of particular interest shall be ANSI A117.1 Accessibility Standards, and ANSI
A17.1 Elevator Standards.
e. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)
1) IAPMO requirements may be accessed at www.iapmo.org. These include:
(a) Product evaluations, Standards and testing
(b) IAPMO Green, including the Green Plumbing Institute. The Uniform
Plumbing Code (UPC) mandates water efficient plumbing fixtures and
fittings.
(c) The Backflow Prevention Institute
(d) Uniform Swimming Pool, Spa, and Hot Tub Code (USPSHTC)
(e) Uniform Solar Energy & Hydronics Code (USEHC)
(f) IAPMO Uniform Solar Energy Code
3. Code requirements are achieved by showing compliance in the following 16 areas. For
each area of compliance provide source of guideline. For example, under Classification
of Occupancy and Hazard a Business Group B the source is SBC 2007 Section 201 2.4.
a. Applicable Master Plan, Zoning and \ Or District Guidelines
1) Identify the applicable Master Plan
2) List any zoning / district guidelines
3) List any special guidelines such as mosque, fuel stations, etc.
4) List any special site provisions such as variances, easements, LAR’s.
b. Site/ development regulations
1) For each regulation identify the code allowable/required and the proposed.
(a) Lot coverage
(b) Density / FAR (Floor Area Ratio)
(c) Structure height
(d) Setbacks at front, side, and rear.
(e) Landscaping (ground cover, trees, etc.)
(f) Open space
(g) Parking
(h) Accessible parking
c. Classification of Occupancy and Hazard
1) Identify the primary occupancy of the building and secondary occupancies for
spaces within the building per floor
d. Type of Construction
1) Construction Classification
(a) Type of construction

Rev. 0 5.3 - 52
(b) Material combustibility

2) Fire resistance rating requirements for building elements
(a) Structural frame
(b) Bearing Walls- exterior
(c) Interior
(d) Partitions Exterior
(e) Floor construction
(f) Roof construction
(g) Wall separating occupancies
3) Required separation of occupancies
e. Building Heights and Areas – provide per floor
(a) Construction type
(b) Allowable height
(c) Allowable area
(d) Allowable increases
(e) Total height and stories allowed
(f) Proposed height and number of stories
(g) Proposed area
f. Fire and smoke protection requirements and measures
1) Fire suppression system
(a) Occupancy
(b) Fire area (sq meters)
(c) Fire suppression system (e.g. sprinkler, fire extinguisher)
(d) code reference
2) Fire separation
(a) For each exterior elevation (e.g. North, East, South, West)
g. Interior Finish Requirements
1) Floor or space in building
2) Occupancy classification
3) Sprinklers Y/N (yes or no)
4) Finish class required. Also provide a table showing what each class requires
for flame spread and smoke developed.
h. Exits and Egress Requirements – for each space and per floor
1) Floor, Area/Space
2) No. of Occupants
3) No. Exit Doors Required

Rev. 0 5.3 - 53
4) No. Exit Doors provided

5) Egress Width per Occupant
6) Total Width Required
7) Total Width Provided
i. Stair Number and Width Calculations
1) List each stair by room number
2) No occupants served
3) No. stairway required
4) No. stairways provided
5) Width per occupant requirement
6) Total width required
7) Minimum code width per each stairway required
8) Total width provided
j. Exit Access Design
1) Maximum Travel Distance
2) Maximum Dead End
3) Maximum Common Path of Egress per occupancy classification
k. Specific Occupancy Egress Requirements
1) Assembly occupancies have additional requirements related to Travel
Distance, Common Path of Egress Travel, and Aisle Width.
l. Area of Refuge Calculation
1) List the code requirement
m. Occupant Load Calculation
1) Floor level
2) Area or space
3) Occupancy classification
4) Proposed area
5) Occupant load factor
6) Total occupant load
n. Sound Isolation Requirements
1) See GEM 5.3 G and Table 5.3.3.A: SOUND TRANSMISSION LIMITATIONS
o. Energy Efficiency – Building Envelope Summary
1) Glazing area % of floor
2) Building element (e.g. roof, wall, mass wall, wall below grad, floor, etc)
3) Assembly maximum U-value
4) Insulation minimum R-Value

Rev. 0 5.3 - 54
5) Proposed Assembly
6) Assembly R-value or U-value
7) Note: U and R values are to be based on the Saudi Building Code and IECC
Requirement
p. Plumbing Fixture Requirement
1) Floor
2) Occupancy group
3) No. Occupants
4) Water closets required
5) Water closets required
6) Lavatories required
7) Lavatories provided
8) Showers required
9) Showers provided
10) Drinking fountain required
11) Drinking fountain provided
12) Other (e.g. service sink)
I. Rooftop Equipment
1. Rooftop Equipment Screening
Rooftop equipment shall be screened from view from the ground near the building. A
variety of strategies may be employed to meet this screening requirement.
a. Vertical extensions of the building walls may be used as a device for screening
rooftop equipment if it fits within the context of the design and does not result in a
large cost increase to the structure. Wall extensions shall be reviewed with a
structural engineer who will prepare a lateral force analysis to determine the lateral
bracing required to adequately handle local wind loads. Protection from sand is also
a major consideration.
b. Parapet walls may be extended to provide screening of rooftop equipment. If
parapet walls are extended more than 1 meter above the roof surface, a structural
engineer shall review and prepare a lateral force analysis and determine the
required lateral bracing to adequately handle local wind loads. Parapet walls are
also subject to building code
c. requirements related to fire-rating of structural elements and fire-separation
requirements at adjacent buildings.
d. Architectural design features using the same family of materials as on the exterior
walls of the building shall be used to screen rooftop equipment if they fit within the
context of the design.
e. Locate rooftop equipment in a roofed penthouse when possible to avoid the need for
screening and noise control.
f. Screening materials with acoustical properties shall be considered for use when
detailing screen walls to also absorb equipment noise at the source. The Royal

Rev. 0 5.3 - 55
Commission in Jubail reserves the right to require acoustic enclosures at its sole
discretion.
g. Mounding or dense evergreen vegetation as part of a Green Roof installation.
2. Design, selection and location of rooftop equipment
a. All attempts shall be made to locate rooftop equipment as close as possible to the
center of the roof to reduce the viewing angles from adjacent properties.
b. Careful design and selection of rooftop equipment shall be made to select the lowest
profile equipment available that may be used to allow screening height to be
minimized.
3. Extent of screening
a. Where topography permits, it is desirable to screen rooftop equipment from adjacent
properties, but it is not the intent of this requirement to increase the height of the
screening significantly above that of the equipment in order to screen it from view
from high rise buildings or from higher ground.
b. Screening of rooftop equipment shall extend minimally 150 mm above the highest
element on the equipment. The highest element is defined to include piping,
ductwork, and all other elements serving the piece of equipment.
c. Screening shall occur on all sides of all rooftop items.
d. Items that need not be screened include:
1) Plumbing vent pipes,
2) Exhaust fans less than 650mm tall,
3) Satellite dishes less than 650mm in diameter whose tops are less than
1000mm off the roof.
4. Satellite Dishes
a. Size and height requirements
1) The maximum permissible size for rooftop satellite dishes is 1,100mm in
diameter.
2) The top of the dish may be no more than 1,250mm above the roof surface at
the satellite dish location.
b. Large satellite dishes shall be set in toward the center of the roof, screened behind
larger building forms, or located within roof screens where possible. All building-
mounted satellite dishes shall be located and designed as follows:
1) Roof-mounted satellite dishes less than 650mm in diameter shall be located
no closer than 2m to the nearest edge of the roof, unless screened by a
parapet or other building element meeting the requirements of Subsection
5.3.3.I.3.b.
2) Roof-mounted satellite dishes greater than 650mm in diameter shall be
located no closer than 5m to the nearest edge of the roof.
3) Wall-mounted satellite dishes of any size are prohibited unless a special
exception is applied for and granted by the RCJ.
4) All obsolete or unused satellite dishes shall be removed within sixty (60) days
of cessation of use.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 56
5. Antennae
a. Antennae include radio, television, cellular phone, and telecommunications
antennas, and their complete support structures.
b. All building-mounted telecommunications antennas shall be located and designed as
follows:
1) Roof-mounted antennas shall be located no closer than 2m to the nearest
edge of the roof;
2) Wall-mounted antennas are prohibited unless a special exception is applied
for and granted by the RCJ.
c. No antenna located in a Residential District shall exceed 5m in height.
d. No antenna located in any other District shall exceed 10m in height.
e. All obsolete or unused antennas shall be removed within 60 days of cessation of
use.
J. Electrical Rooms
1. Electrical Room Sizing
a. Electrical Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all electrical equipment
and also provide all code required clearances and egress routes. See SBC 401.
2. Electrical Room Stacking
a. Electrical Rooms shall be stacked (aligned vertically from floor to floor) to facilitate
vertical distribution of feeders where possible.
3. Access
a. Electrical Rooms shall be designed to restrict access to only authorized personnel
experienced with operation and maintenance of electrical equipment.
b. Electrical Rooms shall be located and arranged to facilitate installation and
replacement of equipment. The doors and removal path shall accommodate the
largest electrical equipment items.
4. Life Safety
a. For Electrical Rooms containing equipment rated 1200 amperes or more, the means
of egress shall swing in the direction of the egress from the room and shall not
require the operation of keys, operable latches, or other mechanisms to exit the
space, but shall employ “Panic Hardware” or similar devices.
5. Fire Protection
a. For Electrical Rooms in sprinklered buildings use a clean agent system unless
directed otherwise by the RCJ.
K. Telecom Rooms
1. Telecom Room Sizing
a. Telecom Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all equipment and also
provide all code required clearances including entrance facilities (EFs). The room
shall have adequate space for cable vaults, isolated racks and cabinets not
dedicated to telecommunications.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 57
2. Telecom Room Stacking

a. Telecom Rooms shall be stacked (aligned vertically from floor to floor) to facilitate
vertical distribution of feeders where possible.
3. Access
a. Telecom Rooms shall be designed to restrict access to only authorized personnel
experienced with operation and maintenance of telecom equipment.
b. Telecom Rooms shall be located and arranged to facilitate installation and
replacement of equipment. The doors and removal path shall accommodate the
largest Telecom equipment items.
4. Fire Protection
a. For Telecom Rooms in sprinklered buildings use a clean agent system unless
directed otherwise by the RC.
L. Mechanical Rooms
1. Mechanical Room Sizing
a. Mechanical Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all equipment and
also provide all code required clearances. See SBC 501.
2. Access
a. Mechanical Rooms shall be designed to restrict access to only authorized personnel
experienced with operation and maintenance of electrical equipment.
b. Mechanical Rooms shall be located and arranged to facilitate replacement of
equipment. The doors and removal path shall accommodate the largest installed
equipment items. Space must be provided for the removal of coils from air handling
units and tube bundles from chillers.
M. Restrooms
1. Restroom Room Sizing
a. Restrooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all fixtures and partition doors
to fixtures and also provide all code required clearances.
2. Restroom Stacking
a. Restrooms shall be stacked (aligned vertically from floor to floor) to facilitate vertical
distribution of sanitary sewer where possible.
3. Access
a. Restrooms shall be located to provide convenient access for all users and meet
code requirements
N. Accessibility
a. Building shall meet all applicable Codes, Standards and guidelines for accessibility
including restrooms, ramps, stairs, doors, handrails, signage, communication and
safety. See 2010 ADA - Standards for Accessible Design and Saudi Building Code
201, Chapter 9.
b. All clearances required for accessibility must be provided.
c. Door width, hardware type, mounting heights, and door closer tension setting must
comply with applicable accessibility requirements. Automatic entrances with motion

Rev. 0 5.3 - 58
sensors or paddle type activation are recommended typically and required where
required by code.
d. Refer to Section 3.1, Building Codes and Section 3.3 Accessibility for other
applicable Accessibility requirements.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 59
SUBSECTION 5.3.4 BUILDING COMPONENTS
5.3.4 BUILDING COMPONENTS
A. General
1. The Design Guidelines below are intended to be general in nature. The purpose of these
guidelines is to provide the A/E and/or EPC Contractor with the requirements of the RCJ
for specific building components. These guidelines are not intended to provide design
usage or specifications but rather to indicate additional information, provisions and
considerations for each building component. The building components are separated into
the following categories:
a. Unit Masonry
b. Stone
c. Metals
d. Wood, Plastics and Composites
e. Thermal and Moisture Protection
f. Openings
g. Finishes
h. Specialties
i. Equipment
j. Furnishings
k. Conveying Systems
l. Special Construction
2. Each of these categories is broken down further into sub-categories for specific building
components. If the A/E and/or EPC Contractor retained is asked to use a building
component the type of which is not contained in this Section, he must then request
specific guidelines from RCJ prior to commencing the work.
3. Quality of Material
a. The Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO), the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI), Underwriters Laboratories (Ul) and the American Society
for Testing Materials (ASTM) are recognized as the industry standard for
establishing the performance requirements for various building materials.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the quality of design and relationship
and compatibility to other building materials in the immediate neighborhood for each
building component. Durability of materials takes precedence over matching existing
material.
4. Refer to Section 2.4, References, and Section 3.1, Codes and Performance Standards,
for all related requirements, Codes and Standards for each building component.
B. Unit Masonry
1. General
This Section is intended to provide general design guidelines and provisions for all
allowable unit masonry types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any project
under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 60
2. References
The information in this Section coordinates and applies to the following Guiding
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Concrete Unit Masonry
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize and document all of the following
provisions that apply to each project in the 90% submission. Refer to Section 4.2 for
additional submission requirements:
1) All visible masonry shall be void of any defects, blemishes or discolorations.
2) Coordinate the design of all structural masonry with a structural engineer.
3) Select materials and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the
environment including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content
in the air and sandstorms.
4) When utilizing masonry, horizontal and vertical dimensions of all building
elements, such as windows, doors, and walls shall be designed with
consideration to the modular masonry size wherever possible. This will help
maintain aesthetics and decrease labor costs.
5) Mortar joints, control joints and relief angles shall be considered during the
design process and integrated in the aesthetic of the building.
6) Consideration for ease of maintenance shall be given for all exposed
masonry.
7) Utilize air space, weeps and vents to achieve proper air flow in masonry wall
systems.
8) Design consideration shall be given to the top, bottom and side terminations,
flashing, penetrations, vertical and horizontal transitions and cladding/roofing
interface.
9) Refer to section 5.2.1.I for additional design requirements.
4. Clay Unit Masonry
a. In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
comply with the following in the design of Clay Unit Masonry:
1) Selection of clay masonry over concrete masonry shall be considered based
on their cost, availability, thermal performance, moisture absorption, strength
and durability required for the application.
2) Utilize clay masonry in areas that will be exposed to excessive temperatures,
such as a fireplace.
C. Stone
1. General
allowable stone types for the A/E and EPC Contractors working on any project under the
jurisdiction of the RCJ.
2. References

Rev. 0 5.3 - 61
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Exterior Stone Cladding
a. Stone Materials
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize and document all of the following
provisions that apply to each project in the 90% submission. Refer to Section
4.2 for additional submission requirements:
(a) All visible stone shall be void of any defects, blemishes or discolorations.
(b) Select materials and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the
environment including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt
content in the air and sandstorms.
(c) When utilizing stone, horizontal and vertical dimensions of all building
elements, such as windows, doors, and walls shall be designed with
consideration to the modular stone size wherever possible. This will help
maintain aesthetics and decrease labor costs.
(d) Mortar joints, control joints and relief angles shall be considered during
the design process and integrated in the aesthetic of the building.
(e) Consideration for ease of maintenance shall be given for all exposed
stone.
(f) Utilize air space, weeps and vents to achieve proper air flow in wall
systems.
(g) Design consideration shall be given to the top, bottom and side
terminations, flashing, penetrations, vertical and horizontal transitions
and cladding/roofing interface.
b. Attachment Methods
1) In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall comply with the following in the design of attachment methods:
(a) Coordinate the support of all exterior stone cladding with a structural
engineer.
(b) Coordinate anchor type with stone and mortar types to prevent corrosion.
D. Metals
1. General
allowable metal types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any project under
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Shop Applied Coatings

Rev. 0 5.3 - 62
in the air and sand storms.
4. Pipe and Tube Railings
a. In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall
comply with the following in the design of pipe and tube railings:
1) Consideration shall be given to the location of exterior metal stairs, pipe and
tube railings so as to minimize their exposure to direct sunlight.
2) Pipe and tube railings exposed to long periods of sunlight shall receive a
suitable heat reducing coating.
5. Metal Specialties
a. Metal Grilles
1) In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall comply with the following in the design of metal grilles:
(a) Metal gratings and cover plates shall be flush, shall have a non-slip finish
and shall be removable to allow access for adequate maintenance.
(b) Perforated cover plates and gratings in public circulation areas shall be
designed to avoid items such as women’s heels, canes, crutches or
fingers from becoming stuck in them.
(c) When placed in areas of potential bike traffic, grilles, cover plates, and
gratings shall be designed to prevent bicycle wheels from lodging in
them.
6. Criteria
comply with the following in the design of all metals:
1) Coordinate the use of all metals with a structural engineer.
2) Aluminum shall never be in direct contact with concrete. Gaskets or other
separation devices shall be utilized in all occurrences.
3) All metal building components shall be checked on both the galvanic
corrosion chart and anodic index to prevent corrosion with any other
connecting metal building components.
4) Exterior metals shall be evaluated by a corrosion specialist for their exposure
to salts and chlorides, especially at ocean-front locations. Appropriate alloys
and coatings shall be used for long-term resistance to corrosion.
E. Wood, Plastics and Composites
1. General
allowable wood, plastics and composite types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
working on any project under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 63
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Finish Carpentry
1) All visible wood shall be void of any defects, blemishes or discolorations.
in the air and sandstorms.
3) Plastic laminate finishes shall be considered in heavily utilized areas for ease
of maintenance, durability, and cost.
4) Water resistant materials such as solid surface counters, granite, quartz
surfacing, marble, or tile shall be used exclusively around sinks or other
surfaces that are subjected to significant moisture. Laminate finishes in these
areas shall not be accepted.
5) The core or substrate material of millwork or cabinet panels shall be plywood
or high-density particle board. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) is not
acceptable.
4. Architectural Woodwork
comply with the following in the design of architectural woodwork:
1) All exposed millwork and cabinetry shall be smoothly finished with rounded
corners and eased edges for safety and good appearance.
2) Woodwork exposed to the highly saline and humid atmosphere shall be
treated to resist degradation in accordance with the Standards of the
American Wood Preservers Association.
3) Refer to the National Hardwood Lumber Association’s (NHLA) Rules for the
Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress to select the proper grade
of lumber appropriate for the application. The grades recognized are as
follows:
(a) FAS – First and Seconds
(b) F1F – First and Seconds One Face
(c) Selects
(d) No. 1 Common
(e) No. 2A Common
(f) No. 2B Common
(g) No. 3A Common
(h) No. 3B Common
(i) Below Grade

Rev. 0 5.3 - 64
(j) Sound Wormy

(k) WHND – Worm Holes No Defect
F. Thermal and Moisture Protection
1. General
allowable thermal and moisture protection types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
working on any project under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
a. ASHRAE
1) 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings
2) 90.2 Energy Efficient Design of Low Rise Residential Buildings
3. Damp proofing and Waterproofing
1) Continuity of both the damp and waterproofing shall be maintained in both
plan and section across the entirety of the building envelope.
2) Provisions shall be made for protection of slabs on grade from the effects of a
high water table and mineral content. Slabs for wet areas, such as bathrooms,
shall be waterproofed.
3) Dew point calculations shall be made for all exterior wall types to ensure
condensation occurs outside of the damp and waterproofing.
4) Flashing, weeps, and vents shall be utilized and integrated with the damp and
waterproofing.
4. Thermal Insulation
comply with the following in the design of thermal insulation:
1) Thermal resistance value of insulation shall be determined by using the
prescriptive requirements of SBC section 601 Energy Conservation. The
degree days are determined from Table 2.2.2 using Dhahran = 3,500 degree
days. Table 5.2.1 has metric R-Values for building components including
glazing, roof, walls, and floor .
2) Continuity of the thermal insulation shall be maintained in both plan and
section across the entirety of the building envelope.
3) Select insulation appropriate for their resistance to fire, rot and vermin.
4) Consider utilizing passive solar design strategies for the exterior envelope to
enhance the energy efficiency characteristics of the building’s overall
performance.
5. Metal Roof and Wall Panels

Rev. 0 5.3 - 65
comply with the following in the design of metal roof and wall panels:
1) Select roofing materials appropriate for their resistance to the environment
including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content in the air and
sand storms.
2) Storm water flow must be directed to and conform to the approved drainage
plan and requirements. Coordinate all storm water flow elements with the
plumbing and civil engineer.
3) No wood shingle or wood shake shall be permitted on any pitched roofs.
6. Membrane Roofing
comply with the following in the design of membrane roofing:
1) Inverted Membrane roofing shall be utilized on flat or low sloped roofs.
2) Design flashing around all roof penetrations and edge conditions to ensure
continuity of waterproofing.
3) Roofs shall be designed with proper drainage and to eliminate any standing
water.
4) All layered insulation shall be designed to create staggered joints.
5) Inverted roof system shall use sloped lightweight concrete screed with an
adhered membrane directly applied. A polyethylene sheet or geotextile fabric
shall be used directly above the membrane, covered by loose-laid rigid
insulation of the thickness required to meet R-values. Provide a layer of
geotextile fabric and concrete pavers or round river stone ballast .
6) Consider the membrane roofing system’s performance in UV radiation to
minimize degradation.
7) All roofing system elements including the insulation, membranes, protection
boards, flashing, and decking shall be designed to prevent wind uplift.
b. TPO
1) Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO).
c. PVC
1) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) is also known as vinyl roofing.
d. Built-up
1) Two and three ply modified bitumen roofing systems. Ballasted roofs shall not
be used.
7. Fire and Smoke Protection
comply with the following in the design of fire and smoke protection:
1) Refer to the Saudi Building Code (SBC), International Building Code (IBD)
and the International Fire Code (IFC) for all regulations regarding fire and
smoke protection.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 66
8. Joint Protection
comply with the following in the design of joint protection:
1) Consideration to all thermal and waterproofing joints shall be given to ensure
continuity through the building envelope.
2) Utilize expansion joints to prevent damage from the expansion and
contraction of building components.
G. Openings
1. General
allowable opening types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any project
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Door and Window Design
additional submission requirements. Refer to section 5.3.3.f for additional design
requirements:
1) Horizontal window mullions shall not block views from either interior standing
or seated positions.
2) Include sill pan flashing with integral end dams for all window openings.
3) Integrate both thermal and air barriers into all door and window framing
elements (heads, jambs, sills) to ensure the continuity of both barriers.
4) Coordinate the support of all openings with a structural engineer.
5) Coordinate any access control requirements with security design.
6) Design all exterior doors, openings, louvers, vents, and penetrations with
protection from sand storms.
7) Select materials, hardware and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the
8) Utilize overhangs, horizontal and vertical sun shading elements to protect
openings from solar heat gain.
b. Materials – The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall select door and window materials,
from the list below, that are appropriate for their location on the building, security
requirements, blast requirement, longevity and budget:
1) Steel
2) Wood
3) Aluminum

Rev. 0 5.3 - 67
4) Fiberglass
4. Entrances, Storefronts and Curtain Walls
comply with the following in the design of entrances, storefronts and curtain walls:
1) Utilize overhangs and canopies to provide occupants exterior protection from
the elements.
2) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F, Building Development, for additional design
guidelines regarding entrances.
5. Hardware
comply with the following in the design of hardware:
1) Plastic door hardware shall not be accepted.
2) Coordinate any hardware requiring power with the electrical design.
3) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F.7, Exterior Door Hardware, for additional design
guidelines regarding hardware.
6. Glazing
comply with the following in the design of glazing:
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall select glazing types from the list below,
that are appropriate for their location on the building, security requirements,
blast requirement, longevity and budget:
(a) Fire Rated
(b) Tempered
(c) Laminated
(d) Wired
(e) Insulated
2) Utilize low emissivity, tinted or reflective coatings on exterior glazing to reduce
solar heat gain. Refer to SBC 601 and ASHRAE 90.1 and 90.2.
3) When utilizing spandrel glazing, the coating shall be placed on either surface
2 or 3 of the glazing unit.
4) Insulated glass units shall comply with criteria in RC specification XXXXXX.
7. Louvers and Vents
comply with the following in the design of louvers and vents:
1) Utilize bug screens on all exterior louvers and vents.
2) Coordinate all related exterior openings with the HVAC design.
3) Provide sand control louvers on buildings in undeveloped desert areas, or as
required by project.
4) Maintain minimum height of louvers and vents.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 68
H. Finishes
1. General
allowable finish types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any project under
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. General Criteria
2) Select materials intended for hygienic purposes in food preparation areas,
health care facilities and toilet rooms.
3) All selected finishes shall adhere to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
for slip resistance.
4. Exterior Finish Materials and Colors
comply with the following in the design of exterior finish materials and colors:
1) Light coloring, heat reflecting, thermal insulating qualities, and low
maintenance shall be the major considerations in the selection of all exterior
finishes.
2) Materials – The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall select exterior materials
from the list below, that are appropriate for their location on the building, blast
requirement, longevity, budget and overall cohesion with the design concept:
(a) Stucco.
(b) Masonry – stone or brick.
(c) Wood – timbers, boards, board and batten, tongue and groove, solid
wood siding, and rough sawn lumber.
(d) Metals – factory finished in durable anodized or polyvinylidene difluoride
(PVDF) based paint.
5. Interior Finishes Materials and Colors
comply with the following in the design of interior finishes materials and colors:
b. Floors
1) Utilize non slip surfaces on any areas subject to wetting such as toilet rooms,
locker rooms, and showers.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 69
2) Choose finishes that counter the effects of sand abrasion, sand accumulation
and wheel traffic.
c. Walls
1) Consider the integration of way finding elements when choosing wall and floor
finishes.
2) Utilize water resistant materials on any surfaces subject to wetting.
3) Utilize impact resistant elements such as chair rails, impact resistance
gypsum board or crash rails in areas more susceptible to damage.
d. Ceilings
1) Coordinate ceiling design and layout with any above ceiling mechanical,
electrical, or plumbing equipment requiring access.
2) All toilet room ceilings for public building types shall be PVC ceiling tiles.
Smoke developed and Flame Spread criteria for PVC ceiling tiles shall meet
the requirements of ASTM E84.
I. Specialties
1. General
allowable specialties types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any project
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Signage
1) Utilize appropriate directional safety and identity sign in all public and
industrial facilities as required by building type.
2) The design of all signs shall maximize visibility and contrast with the
immediate environment.
3) Utilize both graphic and written elements on signs where possible.
4) Written signage shall firstly be in the Arabic language, followed by the English
language.
5) Refer to Section 2.4, References, for additional design Codes and Standards
regarding signs.
4. Toilet and Bath Accessories
comply with the following in the design of toilet and bath accessories:
1) Partitions provided around all public water closets and shower stall shall
extend from floor to ceiling.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 70
2) To reduce water damage and provide air circulation, doors shall be undercut
to a maximum of 30 mm.
3) Privacy screens shall be installed between all urinals, extending from
approximately 600 mm above the finish floor to a height of 1500 mm.
4) Each shower or bath stall shall have adequate room for dressing and
undressing in private, as well as for clothes storage.
5) Steel toilet partitions are not acceptable.
6) All exposed metal parts of toilet accessories and hardware shall be stainless
steel or chrome plated. Painted metal accessories shall not be acceptable.
7) All showers shall have bathtub or shower tray.
5. Safety Specialties
comply with the following in the design of safety specialties:
1) All safety equipment shall be installed in strict compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. Sun Control Devices
comply with the following in the design of sun control devices:
1) Utilize sun control devices to protect doors and windows from solar heat gain.
2) A study of their optimum shape in relation to the sun, as well as their initial
economic impact and maintenance costs as related to HVAC equipment and
operation costs shall be made.
3) Select materials and finishes to have low heat absorptive qualities.
4) Minimize contact with the building surfaces to which there are attached.
5) Utilize interior shading such as blinds and curtains. Select materials,
hardware and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the environment
including UV exposure and intense solar heat gain.
7. Vehicle Shelters
comply with the following in the design of vehicle shelters:
2) Tensile Fabric canopies shall be designed to quickly shed rain and avoid any
possibility of ponded water.
3) Design antecedents for vehicular shelter structures con be fined in chapter
5.2.
J. Equipment
1. General

Rev. 0 5.3 - 71
allowable equipment types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any project
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Criteria
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize and document all of the following provisions
that apply to each project in the 30% submission. Refer to Section 4.2 for additional
submission requirements:
a. All equipment shall be specified only from manufacturers with a proven record of
reliability, service and replacement parts supply.
b. All equipment shall conform to applicable safety regulations and shall be installed in
strict compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. Equipment shall be designed for a service life appropriate to the building type.
d. Where possible, exterior equipment shall be designed to be kept away from public
spaces. Landscaping and/or screen walls shall be utilized to minimize the visual
impact of exterior or roof top equipment.
e. Exterior equipment shall be protected appropriately for resistance to the
environment including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content in the
air and sand storms.
f. Utilize sound separation from large equipment to minimize disturbance to public
spaces or neighboring occupied spaces.
K. Furnishings
1. General
allowable furnishing types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any project
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Criteria
a. General Furniture
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize and document all of the following
1) Consideration shall be given to numerous factors of the users that include, but
are not limited to, the following:
(a) Functions and types of spaces.
(b) Number of assigned staff and visitors.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 72
(c) Types and quantities of items to be stored.

(d) Signage requirements.
(e) Quantity, condition, and type of furniture to be reused.
2) Select furniture and furnishings with function, durability, aesthetics, and
budget as a primary consideration.
3) Flexible, replaceable and modular furniture and furnishing construction shall
be considered based on the current or potential future project needs.
4) Select furniture and furnishing materials appropriate for their resistance to fire.
5) Select furniture and furnishing materials that reduce the maintenance to clean
and/or repair them.
6) Select furniture and furnishing materials that complement the project design,
provide aesthetic consistency, and have proper scale, size, and proportion for
the space.
b. Other Furniture
In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall
comply with the following in the design of other furniture:
1) Classroom furniture shall be designed with durability as a primary concern.
L. Conveying Systems
1. General
allowable conveying system types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any
project under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. Elevators
1) Alphanumeric lettering for elevator call buttons shall be as follows:
(a) Basement (when applicable): B
(b) Ground Floor: 1
(c) Subsequent Floors: 2, 3, etc.
(d) The letter “G” shall not be used for Ground Floor.
(e) The Arabic alphanumeric shall be used and be 50% larger in size and
stroke and written to the right of the English alphanumeric.
2) Coordinate all elevator design with a structural engineer.
3) Coordinate any access control requirements with security design.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 73
4) Select materials, hardware and finishes appropriate for the aesthetic design,
intended usage and necessary durability of the elevator and building type.
5) Elevators intended primarily for public or passenger use shall be placed to
maximize accessibility and occupant flow and its location shall coordinate with
the lobby, stairways and/or corridors.
6) Elevators intended primarily for private or freight use shall be located away
from the public circulation if possible, and its location shall correspond with
any spaces intended to utilize it, such as mechanical rooms, shipping, and
maintenance.
7) Consider the building type and elevator function when choosing elevator type
and speed.
8) Consider the required vertical height clearances to ensure elevators have the
necessary space above their highest landing.
4. Elevator car to accommodate ambulance stretcher per IBC 2009 3002.4Lifts
comply with the following in the design of lifts:
1) Lifts shall be designed to minimize the visual impact on the aesthetic design.
M. Special Construction
1. General
allowable special construction types for the A/E and/or EPC Contractors working on any
project under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
2. References
Drawings (TCDD):
3. General Criteria
1) Utilize qualified acoustical consulting firms for the design of all acoustically
sensitive spaces such as mosques, music rooms, sound studios and
laboratories, concert halls, meeting rooms with 50 or more occupants, and
auditoriums. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit a report reflecting
how each of these spaces have been addressed.
2) Total separation of sexes, both for the swimming and bathing facilities
associated with such establishments, is necessary. The design must
incorporate facilities to enable users to shower/bath before and after the use
of the swimming pools.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 74
SUBSECTION 5.3.5 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE
5.3.5 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE
A. General
1. The Design Guidelines below are intended to be general in nature. The purpose of these
guidelines is to provide the A/E and/or EPC Contractors with the requirements of the RCJ
for specific building types. These guidelines are not intended to provide design
knowledge but rather to indicate additional information, provisions and submissions for
each building type. The Building Types are separated into the following categories:
a. Public/Government
b. Commercial
c. Residential
d. Industrial
e. Specialty Applications
2. Each of these categories is broken down further into sub-categories for specific building
types. If the A/E and/or EPC Contractor retained to design a building whose type is not
contained in this Section, then they must request specific design guidelines from RCJ
prior to commencing the work.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall submit, in each of the design phase submissions,
how they have addressed each of the provisions for their respective building type.
Additionally, every project and every design submission must address the following:
a. Gender Separation – Provide separate entrances and functional spaces to ensure
appropriate privacy between men and women. Employ walls and screens to
enhance this effect.
b. Accessibility – Provide for handicap access that meets the Standards and
requirements. Refer to Section 3.3 for additional requirements.
4. Basic Interior Plan Development
a. Refer to Subsection 5.3.1.F Space Allocation and Programming, to develop interior
plan arrangements.
B. Public/Government
1. Athletic Venues
1) Goals and purpose of the facility
(a) Goals
(1) Define the goals of the facility. These shall include but are not
limited to the following:
(i) To support the playing and viewing of a sport with all the
necessary amenities for the athletes as well as the spectators.
(b) Type of facility
(1) The type of Athletic Venues may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Baseball

Rev. 0 5.3 - 75
(ii) Soccer/Football
(iii) Basketball
(iv) Swimming
(v) Gymnastics
(vi) Hockey
(vii) Rugby
(viii) Cricket
(ix) Track and Field
(x) Tennis
(xi) Golf
2) Building and Siting
(a) Provide a site line analysis from spectators to the playing surface.
(b) Consider the solar orientation and impact on the sport.
(c) Consider the experience of the arrival to provide a safe, memorable and
unique experience that is accessible to all visitors.
(d) Consider the location of parking lots and the approach to the venue.
(e) Select locations that provide related services such as restaurants and/or
retail.
(f) Consideration shall be given to the effects of wind on the facility and the
design shall mitigate its impact on the playing surface.
(g) Public access shall begin with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is
used to reach the facility. Consider locations that provide accessible
routes to the venue and adjacencies to public transportation.
(h) Considerations shall be given to the acoustics within the facility and
noise to and from the surrounding neighborhood.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of Athletic Venues may include but are not limited to
the following:
(1) Player’s facilities such as locker rooms, showers, medical areas and
training rooms.
(2) Public facilities such as food stands, restrooms, and merchandise
retail.
(3) Media spaces such as press box, camera stands, and offices.
(4) The seating areas shall consider the following:
(i) Sight lines and distance to playing surface.
(ii) Sight to scoreboard.
(iii) No obstructions.
(iv) Expansion capabilities.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 76
4) Responsiveness to Audience
(a) Field access shall be provided for emergency and construction vehicles.
(b) Entrance and exit circulation plans shall consider that all spectators will
be arriving and departing en masse.
5) Provide accessible seating for persons with disabilities.
6) Environmental Considerations
(a) The Athletic Venue shall protect the athletes and spectators from
weather, sand, extreme temperatures and direct sun.
(b) Consideration shall be given to the material of the playing surface to
maximize durability, minimize maintenance, and provide adequate
drainage.
7) Traffic Flow and Way-finding
(a) Maximize way-finding to minimize confusion of the people in circulation.
8) Security
(a) Controlled access points into the building shall be provided.
(b) Private access for athletes, coaches, referees and emergency personnel
shall be provided.
(c) Secured access to and from the play surface for players shall be
provided.
(d) Consideration shall be given to maintain separation between the
spectators and the playing surface.
(e) Consideration shall be given to maintain separation between the home
and visiting team/players. Provide separate facilities for each.
9) Specialized Amenities
(a) Additional amenities may include, but are not limited to, the following:
(1) Night time lighting for exterior facilities
(2) Furnishings and finishes that are durable and reduce maintenance
(3) Crush load considerations for circulation areas and toilet facilities
(4) Creation of premium spaces such as luxury boxes
(5) Video and scoreboards
(6) CCTV amenities
(7) Public address system
10) References
(a) Consult the appropriate sport governing body and adhere to all
applicable regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These
include but are not limited to the following:
(1) IOC – International Olympic Committee
(2) ITF – International Tennis Federation
(3) FINA – Federation Internationale de Natation

Rev. 0 5.3 - 77
(4) NCAA – National Collegiate Athletic Association

(5) IAAF – International Association of Athletics Federations
(6) FIFA – Federation Internationale de Football Association
(7) FIBA – Federation Internationale de Basketball
(8) IFAF – International Federation of American Football
(9) NABBP – National Association of Base Ball Players
(10) IIHF – International Ice Hockey Federation
2. Aviation
(a) Goals
(1) Define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not limited
to the following:
(i) Provide a safe and secure place for flight.
(ii) Comply with all requirements of the General Authority of Civil
Aviation of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
(1) The type of Aviation building may include but is not limited to the
following:
(i) Airports
(ii) Heliports/helipads
(a) Consideration shall be given to solar orientation to maximize visibility
during landing and takeoff at all times of the day.
(b) Wind studies shall be performed for optimal positioning of runways or
landing decks.
(c) Proper flight clearances shall be designed for takeoff and landing.
(d) Consideration shall be given for all sizes of planes that will be utilizing
the building.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of Aviation buildings may include but are not limited
to the following:
(1) Terminal
(i) Provide jet bridges as required
(2) Beacons
(3) Tower
(i) Provide direct sight lines to runways and approaches
(4) Hangar

Rev. 0 5.3 - 78
(5) Runways, aprons, tarmacs

(i) Design to meet appropriate structural loads
(6) Fuel
(i) Location and access to refueling stations
(ii) Provide refueling system
(iii) Location and type of fuel storage
(7) Retail
(8) Food and beverage
(a) Design of all Aviation facilities shall consider accessibility for people with
disabilities.
(b) Provide adequate space for operations and maintenance personnel.
(c) Provide dedicated area for worship.
(d) Provide dispersed restrooms for ease of accessibility.
(e) Provide provisions for dining.
(f) Provide provisions for baggage handling.
(g) Public access shall begin with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is
(a) Consider environmental elements such as sand and rain and provide
means to mitigate their impact on the runway and the processes of the
aviation facility.
(a) Establish control points into main terminal to create security stations.
(b) Include people movers (moving walkways and escalators) as required.
(c) Areas for people to check flight and gate information shall be designed to
allow adequate circulation around a potentially congested area.
(d) Gates and terminals shall be marked with clearly visible signage.
(e) Information desks/kiosks shall be made available to assist passenger
way-finding.
7) Security
(a) Restrict access from unauthorized persons or vehicles to runways or
private areas from both the interior and exterior.
(b) Create controlled access points for entry into terminals for security
checks.
(c) Provide provisions for security equipment.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 79
(a) Additional amenities considerations may include, but are not limited to,
the following:
(1) Technology
(i) Radio and satellite monitoring equipment
(ii) Public address system
(iii) CCTV system
(iv) Accessible outlets for personal electronic devices
(2) Lighting
(i) Night lighting
(ii) Safety lighting
(iii) Natural day lighting with runway views
(3) Furnishings
(i) Durability shall be a primary concern when selecting
furnishings
(4) Other
(i) Wildlife deterrents
(ii) Blast requirements for entries
(iii) Noise abatement
9) Submittal Requirements
(a) Flight path studies.
(b) Goals of the facility/target user group(s)
(c) Primary functions provided at the facility
(d) Support functions such as locker rooms, computers, etc.
(e) Statement of the environmental considerations as described in
Subsection 5.3.5.B.3.a.4.
(f) Building Description Summary
(1) Gross floor area
(2) Number of stories
(3) Building Code categories
(4) Structural system
(5) Exterior façade and roof systems
(6) HVAC system(s)
(7) Special technical requirements or features
(8) Land survey and landscape provisions
10) Definition Statement of the target market

Rev. 0 5.3 - 80
11) Definition of affiliations with other institutions

12) Description of features
13) Description of HVAC system
14) Description of security measures
15) References/Standards
(a) Federal Aviation Administration.
3. Community Center
1) Goals of the facility
(a) Define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not limited to
the following:
(1) Target user population: by locale, gender, age, organizational
membership, or religious group.
(2) Benefits the facility intends to bring to the target user population.
(3) How the facility plans to provide these benefits.
(a) Provide a Program of Spaces that lists the predominant activity zones,
and their sizes and attributes.
(b) Define the intended relationship of primary spaces and for activity areas.
(c) Site the building for the appropriate level of community interface.
3) Features
(a) For facilities devoted exclusively for religious gathering, see Subsection
5.3.5.B.6 – Mosques. Spaces for religious usage within a multi-use
Community Center shall likewise be designed in accordance with that
Section.
(b) Athletic Functions
(1) Spaces designed for indoor athletic competition shall be designed to
accommodate the designated sport according to established
guidelines. These include floor area, flooring type, sports line
markings, equipment specific to the sport, vertical height and
peripheral area of the sport surface or court.
(2) Spaces designed for indoor recreational games involving small
groups, pairs of people or individuals shall be planned to
accommodate the game equipment and adequate space to utilize it.
(3) Spaces designed for personal fitness must be designed for the
workout equipment designated, including the equipment, access to
it, and proper circulation around it. Physical requirements such as
floor and wall materials, equipment supports, and electric power are
to be taken into consideration.
(4) Adequate locker rooms and changing facilities shall be provided
with consideration given for appropriate gender separation.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 81
(c) Meeting Rooms

(1) Meeting rooms shall be designed to suit the anticipated function.
(2) Multi-purpose or multi-use spaces shall be in keeping with both the
expected functions and potential future ones.
(3) Audio-visual and sound systems shall be adequate for the expected
uses including consideration of speakers, projection screens,
projectors, and televisions or monitors.
(4) Consider manually or electrically operated folding partitions to
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities. Both acoustic
separation and durability of surfaces and latches shall be
considered in their selection.
(5) Storage for chairs on racks and tables plus any specific use
equipment must be provided.
(6) Certain types of meeting rooms may require a permanent or
demountable platform or dais. The latter will also require adequate
storage.
(d) Data Systems
(1) Wired and wireless data systems shall be considered where
appropriate.
(2) Consideration may be given to shared computer banks.
(e) Entertainment
(1) In addition to the audio/visual elements described earlier, some
facilities may want to include auditoria with fixed seating.
Consideration shall be given to projection rooms, screens, sound
systems, and seating types. Occupant sight lines are a critical
consideration.
(f) Libraries
(1) Library areas within Community Centers shall conform to
Subsection 5.3.5.B.5 – Libraries.
(g) Rest Rooms
(1) Consideration shall be given to the central location of rest rooms in
a multi-function facility.
(a) Areas for religious use shall be appropriately lit and ventilated as an
assembly space.
(b) Athletic functions
(1) Gymnasiums and spaces of active competitive or fitness uses
require proper air changes, conditioned air, and general air
movement.
(2) Indoor Swimming Pool areas require dedicated ventilation to deal
with moisture and humidity.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 82
(c) Meeting room mechanical system design shall consider noise and
vibration that could disturb the users.
(a) Consideration shall be given to outdoor signage to direct people to the
desired portion of the building.
(b) Consideration shall be given to multiple entrances for varied functions.
(c) The interior floor plan shall include clear and discernable way-finding by
means of visual cues and signage.
(d) Consideration shall be given to having a central information desk.
(e) Displays and kiosks with places to advertise events are a consideration
also.
6) Security
(a) Consideration may be given to sectioning off the building to enable
shutting down areas that are not in use at a particular time.
(b) Submittal Requirements
(1) Goals of the facility/target user group(s)
(2) Primary functions provided at the facility
(3) Support functions such as locker rooms, computers, etc.
(4) Statement of the environmental considerations as described in
Subsection 5.3.5.B.3.a.4.
b. Submittals
1) Building Description Summary
(a) Gross floor area
(b) Number of stories
(c) Building Code categories
(d) Structural system
(e) Exterior façade and roof systems
(f) HVAC system(s)
(g) Special technical requirements or features
(h) Land survey and landscape provisions
5) Description of HVAC system
4. Hospital

Rev. 0 5.3 - 83

(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Create a safe and healthy environment for the care of patients.
(ii) Promote staff efficiency by minimizing travel distances.
(iii) Offer flexibility of spaces and opportunities for expansion.
(iv) Create a therapeutic space for both patients and visitors.
(v) Maximize cleanliness and sanitation.
(vi) The site and building shall be readily accessible to the
community it serves.
(1) The type of Hospital facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) General
• Nursing Units
• Diagnostic and Treatment Facilities
• Freestanding Emergency Departments
• Critical Access Hospitals
• Rehabilitation Hospitals and Other Facilities
• Children’s Hospitals
• Laboratories
• Clinics
• Pharmacy
(ii) Outpatient Facilities
• Primary Care Facilities
• Freestanding Outpatient Diagnostic and Treatment
Facilities
• Freestanding Birth Centers
• Freestanding Urgent Care Facilities
• Freestanding Cancer Treatment Facilities
• Outpatient Surgical Facilities
• Office-Based Procedure and Operating Rooms
• Endoscopy Facilities
• Renal Dialysis Centers
• Outpatient Psychiatric Centers

Rev. 0 5.3 - 84
• Outpatient Rehabilitation Therapy Facilities

• Mobile, Transportable, and Re locatable Units
• Dental Facilities
(a) All hospitals shall be located so as to maximize visibility and accessibility
to the area which it serves.
(b) Consideration shall be given to entrance and exit of emergency vehicles
when choosing a building site.
(c) Provide adequate parking for staff and guests.
(d) Provide signage in the following locations:
(1) Way-finding to the hospital
(2) On the hospital at key entrances such as emergency department
(3) Within the facility
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of Hospital facilities may include but are not limited
to the following:
(1) Patient Rooms
(2) Operating Rooms
(3) Laboratories
(4) Cafeteria/ Kitchen
(5) Classrooms
(6) Auditoriums
(7) Courtyards
(8) Storage (equipment, supplies, etc.)
(9) Morgue
(10) Room for Worship
(11) Exam Rooms
(12) Procedure/ Treatment Rooms
(13) Consultation Rooms
(14) Mechanical and Electrical Services
(15) Offices
(16) Gift Shop
(17) Lobby/ Waiting
(18) Laundry clean/dirty
(19) Instrument Cleaning
(20) Pharmacy

Rev. 0 5.3 - 85
(a) All hospitals shall comply with the requirements of the Americans with
Disability Act (ADA).
(b) Entrances shall be highly visible to improve way-finding to the facility.
(c) Understanding the processes of the healthcare facility is paramount in
order to create a proper flow of circulation for both patients and
employees that is optimized to be clear and efficient.
(d) Patient rooms shall be designed to be homelike and intimate in scale
whenever possible.
(a) Airflow, pressure, and air quality shall be designed to prevent
contamination or spread of any bacteria or disease.
(b) Create quality views to the outdoors and maximize daylighting as both
have been shown to have positive effect on patients.
(c) Utilize soothing color schemes to create a therapeutic environment.
(d) Make provisions for medical waste sanitation, including sinks.
(a) Way-finding shall be clear and easily identifiable to reduce confusion and
travel time.
(b) Consider the processes of each individual hospital department when
designing patient, employee and supply flow through the facility so as to
reduce travel distances and prevent contamination.
7) Security
(a) Utilize systems in order to protect hospital properties and assets
including drugs.
(b) Provide personal protection and privacy of patients, especially children.
(c) Limit proximity to building from unauthorized vehicles and design
applicable areas with appropriate blast requirements.
(d) Protect information related to patients so it remains secure.
(e) Protect mental health patients from endangering themselves or leaving
the facility.
(1) All furnishings and fixtures shall be selected with consideration for
cleanability, durability, and anti-microbial properties
(2) Patient monitoring systems
9) References
(a) Facility Guidelines Institute “Guidelines for Design and Construction of
Hospitals and Outpatient Facilities”

Rev. 0 5.3 - 86
(b) Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

5. Libraries
1) Goals and Purpose
the following:
(1) Target user population: by locale, gender, age, organizational
membership, religious group or educational levels.
(2) Purpose: for example: research, education, literacy, culture,
religion.
(3) Intended benefits to the target population.
(b) Type of library
(1) Define the type of library, such local, regional or other.
(2) Define any joint use intent with other facilities.
(3) Define any affiliation with other institutions
(c) Planning
(1) Provide growth projections for current, short-range, and longer
range growth or expansion.
2) Location
(a) Consideration shall be given to the locations of the target user group(s)
likely to use the library.
(b) Consider proximity to public transportation.
(c) Provide signage to increase public awareness of the facility.
3) Planning
(a) Space requirements shall consider at minimum the following:
(1) Collection space
(2) Public-access computer space
(3) Meeting room spaces
(4) Reference and/or study areas
(5) Informal reading areas
(6) Staff space
(7) User support
(8) Multipurpose space
(9) Community and cultural needs
(10) Provide space for larger print and over-sized collections, audio
books, and video resources
(11) Other specialized requirements

Rev. 0 5.3 - 87
(b) Design for future flexibility.

4) Environmental
(a) Humidity control shall receive special consideration. Common practices
include an ambient temperature of 20-32c and 30-50% relative humidity
for collection areas, or as prescribed by the facility’s library consultant.
(b) Special consideration shall be given to the electrical and data
requirements of technology and computers including individually owned
electronic devices (power for laptop and electronic pad chargers).
(c) Energy conservation features such as motion sensors in stacks and
meeting rooms, and the ability to comprehensively power down
computers off hours shall be considered.
(d) Consider HVAC control systems that maintain the required temperature
and humidity on off-hours.
(e) Acoustics in libraries are very important. Consider acoustic surfaces and
acoustic separation of zones or rooms.
5) Technology
(a) Consider and plan for changes in technology.
(b) Consider providing flat screens for web-meetings, teaching, and distance
learning.
(c) Provide adequate infrastructure for data, wireless usage, and
automation.
(d) Consider powered compressible stacks when appropriate.
6) Lighting
(a) Provide appropriate lighting levels and fixture positions in the lighting
design for stacks, reference areas, reading areas, meeting rooms, and
computer banks.
7) Accessibility for Libraries
(a) Provide accessible work areas, computer stations, and
service/circulation desks.
(b) Consider seating for the elderly or infirm and space for wheelchairs
anywhere lines of patrons may form.
(c) Space between book stacks shall maintain the required wheelchair
clearances.
(d) Consider the age of users. Provide child-size and child-reach
environments in areas designed for children.
(e) Provide storage for courtesy wheelchair storage if applicable.
(f) Make provisions for service animals such as seeing eye dogs.
(a) Consider space for literacy training and computer technology training,
and distance learning.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 88
9) Furnishings shall be ergonomically designed and appropriate to the space

and function.
b. Submittals
(f) HVAC system(s)
6. Mosque
1) Goals of the Facility
(a) Provide a safe and spiritual place to practice Islam.
(a) Consideration shall be given to the direction of Mecca.
3) Features
(a) Minarets
(b) Prayer Hall
(1) Provide only enough furniture as required to assist elderly or
disabled worshippers.
(c) Mihrab
(1) The Mihrab shall face Makkah. Consideration shall be given to the
layout of other features knowing worshippers will be facing the
Mihrab.
(2) The interior face/wall edge of the Mihrab shall be flush with the wall
closest to Makkah. The depth of this wall shall be approximately 2
m.
(d) Minbar
(1) The Minbar shall be located to the right of the Mihrab.
(2) Consideration of the mosque’s acoustical properties shall be given
to a speaker atop of the Minbar.
(e) Dome

Rev. 0 5.3 - 89
(f) Courtyard
(1) The gate to the interior courtyard is not required to be solid or
opaque. A well designed screen or mesh shall also be acceptable.
(2) Provide a covered walkway around the courtyard.
(g) Ablution Fountain
(1) Hot water set at tepid temperature shall be supplied to all ablution
taps and perineal spray. Sinks shall be equipped with both hot and
cold water.
(a) Provide protection from wind and sand.
(b) Storm water control for open areas.
(a) Public access begins with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is
used to reach the facility. Entry is typically restricted to a specific area in
order to control access.
(b) Public circulation through the facility may be uni-directional (basically one
way to travel) or multi-directional with multiple choices along the way.
6) Security
(a) Gates shall be provided into the courtyard.
(b) Consideration shall be given to the blast requirements when designing
the exterior structure and vehicular access to the mosque.
(a) Design of Hilal (crescent moon)
(1) There shall be no point or “spear” rising above the Hilal. The Hilal
shall act as a lightning terminal removing the need for additional
lightning rods. The Hilal shall be aligned towards Mekkah.
(b) Chandeliers or Special Lighting
(1) Lighting levels shall be sufficient for reading at near floor level. The
use of chandeliers or special lighting is not needed.
(c) Sound System
(1) The sound system shall be simple in design, installation, operation,
and maintenance.
(d) Prayer Rugs
(1) Consideration shall be given to the cleanliness of the floor. Provide
large prayer carpets and/or smaller prayer rugs for individual use.
Allocate a space where small prayer rugs may be stacked.
(e) Shoe Storage
(1) Provide shoe racks for approximately 60% of the total number of
worshipers. They shall be located in the interior courtyard by the
main entrance.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 90
(f) Book Shelves

(1) Book shelves shall be located on side walls around interior columns.
(g) Exit Signs on Exit Doors
(1) Provide code required exit signs at emergency and side doors.
Provide an adequate number of main entrance doors to meet code
and functional requirements.
(h) Urinals
(1) No urinals shall be provided.
(i) Water Closets
(1) All mosques, except Grand Friday Mosque and Friday Mosque,
shall be provided with the required number of eastern toilets plus
one western toilet.
(2) For Grand Friday Mosque and Friday Mosque, two western toilets
and one western toilet modified for the use of handicapped persons
shall be provided out of the total number of required toilets.
(3) Ablution areas shall be separated from water closet areas. Indirect
access shall be provided to both areas.
(j) Clocks
(1) Clocks shall be provided to show worshippers the proper times for
prayers.
7. Museum
1) Goals of the Museum
(a) Consideration to defining the goals of the museum such as theme, target
audience, civic purpose, historic preservation, education, research, and
religious orientation. A definition of the target audience shall also be
established.
2) Building
(a) Architectural space shall be designed to be appropriate to display the
intended exhibits, transport them to and from their locations, and to
provide some flexibility for change over time. This includes the gallery
layout and sequence, the plan geometry of spaces, and the volumes of
spaces.
3) Exhibits
(a) Presentation
(1) Arrangement considerations: Exhibits shall be arranged in a
recognizable orderly pattern or sequence.
(2) Exhibits shall be appropriately lit. The goals of lighting design are to
enhance the viewing experience. Lighting considerations include:
the amount of illumination; the fixture and lamp selection; the
positioning of fixtures and direction of lighting.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 91
(3) Use of graphics, movement, and technology, shall be considered

where appropriate. Graphics include the backdrops and settings as
well as the signage. Exhibits that employ physical motion may have
clearance or viewing issues. Technology considerations include but
are not limited to visual computer animations, flat screen
presentations, video feeds, and computer-controlled technical
effects, and motion-sensor activated exhibits.
(4) Sound and acoustic considerations include such things as audio
feeds for the above and acoustical separation from neighboring
exhibits that may be adversely impacted.
(a) Availability for classes and groups
(1) If consistent with the museum’s goals, meeting and/or gathering
spaces shall be considered for groups of varying sizes. Certain
exhibits may require positioning to allow presentation to a group.
(2) Consider interactive activity / classroom spaces, if appropriate.
Interactive activity spaces may be situated among or as part of the
exhibits, or as separate educational components, staffed or self-
guided. If classroom spaces are to be provided, appropriate support
spaces shall be considered.
(b) Special Accessibility Considerations
(1) Visually and hearing impaired considerations include enhancing the
experience of visually impaired persons by auditory or tactical
means. For the hearing impaired, portable audio devices may
enable access to exhibit audio feeds or live presentations. Various
technologies exist for text renditions of auditory tracts.
(2) Exhibit accessibility for the physically elderly includes seating areas
to view exhibits so as to avoid the need to stand, as well as seating
along museum circulation routes.
(3) Children in strollers and patrons in wheelchairs need to be
considered in the positioning of exhibits and viewing areas.
5) Environmental considerations
(a) Environmental criteria used to govern the design of the overall building,
specific galleries, and storage spaces, include ambient temperatures and
humidity levels required for the storage and display of exhibits. The
appropriate allowable levels of VOC’s in adhesives and paints used in
storage rooms and display areas shall be evaluated by professional
experts and records of requirements kept to inform subsequent
renovations to these areas. Ultraviolet (UV) and ambient light may
seriously affect paintings and artifacts and likewise warrants professional
consideration.
6) Traffic Flow and Way-Finding
(a) Public access begins with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is
used to reach the facility. Entry is typically restricted to a specific area in
order to control access and collect fees for entry.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 92
(b) Public circulation through the facility may be uni-directional (basically one
way to travel) or multi-directional with multiple choices along the way.
(c) Depending on the floor plan layout and the number of levels, typically a
three-dimensional circulation concept is required. It is important to allow
museum patrons to understand where they are at any given time
according to some recognizable frame of reference, independent of
maps and diagrams to whatever extent is practical. This frame of
reference may be the front entry, vertical circulation elements such as
stairs or elevator towers, or some other feature(s) of the building.
(d) Physical cues such as flooring, wall panel orientation, lighting, ramps,
and colors may assist way-finding and directionality of the intended
circulation.
(e) Exhibit progression may also be considered as a way to encourage
intended traffic flow. Both exhibits and architectural elements may serve
as visual cues for both traffic flow and way-finding.
(f) Lighting and illumination may create accents that draw attention to areas
or exhibits and thereby prompt movement.
(g) Signage and Facility Maps are the most obvious ways to illustrate layout
and circulation, and to define potential destinations within the facility. To
the user, the clear correlation of signage and facility maps to visual
elements such as exhibits and physical cues as noted above shall be
considered in the implementation of these elements.
7) Security
(a) Exhibit security
(1) Exhibit security is typically a high priority in museums due to the
value of objects and the irreplaceability of historic treasures.
Security typically revolves around theft prevention and the
prevention of vandalism. Electronic detection devices, camera
systems, motion sensors, physical barriers and observation by
security personnel are among the ways this may be done.
Restricted access, alarmed exits with delayed egress hardware are
among the possibilities.
(b) Storage security
(1) Many of the same elements are required for storage security as
exhibit security, but the physical barriers and locking arrangements
are necessarily more elaborate.
(c) Fire safety for prize collections
(1) Fire safety for collections and storage may entail providing fire-rated
enclosures over-and-above code requirements and vapor fire
suppressant systems.
8) Museum Functions
(a) Entrances - consider security, accessibility and emergency egress.
(b) Public Amenities
(1) Consider placement and distribution of toilet facilities especially in
proximity to public amenities and entrances.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 93
(2) Eating areas are a typical need for a facility that typically attracts
visitors for longer durations.
(3) Stores / Merchandising may be provided if appropriate.
(4) Consideration shall be given to provisions for religious activities and
for the religious character of certain exhibits.
(5) Auditoriums shall be considered for museum-related programs.
b. Submittal Requirements
(f) HVAC system(s)
2) A narrative of the Goals and Theme of the Museum per Subsection
5.3.5.B.7.a.1)
3) Describe the design features allowing flexibility for change over time.
4) Listing of proposed Exhibits, identified as Permanent Exhibits, Rotating
Exhibits (within the museum’s permanent collection), Travelling Exhibits
(prospective outside touring exhibitions), and Other.
5) A brief Narrative on the museum’s availability for classes and groups, as well
as special accessibility considerations per Subsection 5.3.5.B.7.a.3.
6) Environmental criteria used to govern the design of the overall building,
specific galleries, and storage spaces, such as: ambient temperatures;
humidity levels; allowable VOC’s of adhesives and paints; UV and light.
7) Floor plans illustrating diagrammatically the exhibit layout and traffic flow.
8) Describe the general systems to be employed for fire safety for collections
and storage, over-and-above code requirements.
9) Describe entrance security, accessibility and emergency egress.
10) List and describe the Public Amenities
8. Ports/Docks
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Administrative – ensuring proper laws are being followed
(ii) Industrial – import and export of goods

Rev. 0 5.3 - 94
(iii) Commercial – trade and sale of goods and transport of people

(iv) Development – promote and stimulate the regional economy
(a) Consider locations that offer natural protection from storms and rough
waters.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of Ports and Docks may include but are not limited
to the following:
(1) Terminal
(i) Ticketing
(ii) Food and beverage
(iii) Retail
(2) Port structures
(i) Wharf
(ii) Berth
(iii) Quay
(iv) Pier
(v) Jetty
(vi) Dock
(vii) Mole
(viii) Breakwater
(ix) Dock basin
(a) Public access shall begin with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is
(a) Resistance to salt
(b) Resistance to storms
(c) Depth of water and types of boats to be used
(d) Attempt to mitigate oily water
(e) Reduction of noise from surrounding environment
(f) Mitigation of air emissions
(g) Consideration of sea level changes

(h) Protection from coastal erosion
(i) Protection from tides

Rev. 0 5.3 - 95
(j) Protection from wave impacts

(a) Establish control points into main terminal to create security stations.
(b) Docks shall be marked with clearly visible signage.
(c) Information desks/kiosks shall be made available to assist passenger
way-finding.
7) Security
(a) Consider required blast criteria for portions of the facility near public
vehicular traffic.
(a) Additional amenities considerations may include, but are not limited to,
the following:
(2) Safety lighting
(3) Light house or beacon
(4) Furnishing shall be chosen with durability and water resistance as
primary concerns
(5) Impact resistant elements to protect dock structures
(6) Provide structural analysis for dock ties
9) References
(a) Consult naval architects for unattached structures/docks.
(b) Consult marine engineer for all attached structures/docks.
9. Schools
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) To create a secure and nurturing environment for the civic,
emotional, cognitive, vocational and social development of
students.
(1) The type of Schools may include but are not limited to the following:
(i) Pre-primary (kindergarten)
(ii) Primary (grade school)
(iii) Intermediate (middle school)
(iv) Secondary (high school)
(v) Technical institutes

Rev. 0 5.3 - 96
(vi) College/university
(a) Consideration shall be given to the school’s location so as to provide a
safe and secure environment for the students and offer the greatest
accessibility to the community which it shall serve.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of Schools may include but are not limited to the
following:
(1) Offices
(2) Cafeteria
(3) Classrooms
(4) Laboratories
(5) Common areas
(6) Gymnasium/pool/lockers
(7) Healthcare
(8) Theater/stage/auditorium
(9) Art Exhibit Hall
(10) Locker Area
(1) Provide accessible circulation throughout the facility for persons with
disabilities in accordance with ADA Standards.
(a) Consideration shall be given to classroom acoustics and the mitigation of
noise through walls.
(b) Indoor air quality shall be a primary concern for school design.
(c) Rooms shall be provided with individual lighting and temperature
controls.
(d) Consideration shall be given to the connection of the interior to the
exterior with gardens or courtyards accessible from classrooms
whenever possible.
(a) Consideration of space adjacencies; classrooms to one another and
common spaces etc.
(b) When designing a School for younger children, consider using simple
and easily identifiable way-finding elements such as bright colors or
patterns.
7) Security
(a) Safety and security of the students shall be the highest priority in the
design of schools.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 97
(b) Provide highly visible entrances and exits.

(c) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized individuals
and vehicles.
(d) Provide areas for emergency shelter in areas where natural disasters are
more prominent.
(e) Consideration for safe and hasty egress
(f) Utilize both interior and exterior cameras.
(a) Technology
(1) Flexible system that may update as technology improves
(b) Lighting
(1) Utilize diffuse, uniform lighting that eliminates glare and reduces
fatigue.
(2) Maximize day lighting while reducing glare and optimizing visual
comfort.
(c) Furnishings
(1) Sized appropriately for age of students
(2) Durability from heavy use and vandalism
(3) Cleanable and easily maintained
(d) Other
(1) The design shall be flexible and offer the ability to adapt and change
to the use such as through the use of operable walls in the
gymnasium, cafeteria, and large classrooms.
(2) Ventilation and air flow in areas of increased activity such as the
gymnasium shall be increased.
(3) Provide a sight line and distance analysis for classrooms and
auditoriums from the students to the teachers or performers.
(a) Coordination with the Ministry of Education
10) References
(a) Consult all appropriate educational bodies for any additional applicable
regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These include but are
not limited to the following:
(1) Ministry of Education
(2) Ministry of Higher Education
(3) General Organization for Technical Education and Vocational
Training

Rev. 0 5.3 - 98
(4) ANSI/ASA Standard, Acoustical Performance Criteria, Design

Requirements and Guidelines for Schools
C. Commercial
1. General Commercial
a. Shall a control room be required in a commercial structure, refer to Subsection
5.3.5.E.1.a.9.
2. Hospitality
(a) Identify the project type.
(1) Hotel
(2) Resort
(3) Conference Center
(4) Other
(b) Define the target client market.
(c) Identify the franchise involved in the development.
(d) Identify the type of facility within the franchise.
2) Building and Siting Considerations
(a) Provide access for limousine and taxi cab service including a taxi stand if
applicable.
(b) Consider volume of use in determining number and position of lobby
entry doors.
(c) Consider surface garage and underground parking options for vehicles.
(d) Consider staff commuting (mode of transportation).
3) Development Types
(a) Hotels
(1) Consider franchise requirements for interior and exterior design and
signage.
(2) Consider number and types of rooms, including accessible guest
rooms.
(3) Consider suite rooms, business travel and long term stay potential
when determining room count by type.
(b) Resorts
(1) Resort units may be similar to timeshare units, again influenced by
the franchise requirements.
(c) Conference Centers
(1) Conference centers are typically business related. Consider type of
units and necessary amenities for conference gatherings.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 99
4) Features
(a) Consider the following as appropriate:
(1) Lobby and general gathering space
(2) Indoor and/or outdoor swimming pools
(3) Exercise/fitness center
(4) Spa and related services
(5) Personal grooming services
(6) Personal dry cleaning/laundry services
(7) Retail venues
(8) Concierge/travel services
(9) Religious amenities
(10) Restaurant(s) – Refer to Subsection 5.3.5.C.4
(11) Game room/activity areas
(12) Large meeting rooms
(13) Small and medium meeting rooms and “break out” space for
conferences
(14) Other amenities as appropriate
5) Technical and Space Requirements
(a) Consider the following as appropriate:
(1) For lobbies and gathering space, consider:
(i) Circulation
(ii) Seating types and arrangements
(iii) Front desk configuration
(iv) Bell stand and concierge locations
(2) For swimming pools consider:
(i) Size and depth of pool
(ii) Accessibility
(iii) Circulation and sitting areas
(iv) Adjacent changing rooms
(v) Adjacent toilet and shower facilities
(vi) Chemical and equipment rooms
(vii) Ventilation requirements
(3) For exercise/fitness centers consider:
(i) Intended users
(ii) Types of equipment provided
(iii) Spatial relationships needed for the uses

Rev. 0 5.3 - 100
(iv) Electric loads and power feeds for equipment

(v) Ventilation
(vi) Adjacent changing rooms
(vii) Adjacent toilet rooms
(4) Spa and related facilities
(i) Plumbing, electrical and ventilation
(ii) Storage
(iii) Consider gender separation
(5) Grooming Services
(i) Appropriate service requirements
(ii) Consider gender separation
(6) Personal Dry Cleaning
(i) Access to public
(ii) Garment Care
(iii) Garment Storage
(iv) General Storage
(7) Retail Venues
(i) Refer to Subsection 5.3.5.C.4
(8) Concierge
(i) Locate in visible area
(9) Religious Amenities
(i) As appropriate
(10) Restaurant
(i) Refer to Subsection 5.3.5.C.4
(11) Game Room
(i) Consider space needs
(ii) Lounge/seating areas
(iii) Adjacent toilet rooms
(12) Meeting Room
(i) Size according to group expectation.
(ii) Subdivide as appropriate.
(iii) Provide acoustic separation as required.
(iv) Consider adjacency to food service, lobby, and toilet facilities.
(b) Submittals
(1) Building Description Summary

Rev. 0 5.3 - 101
(i) Gross floor area

(ii) Number of stories
(iii) Building Code categories
(iv) Structural system
(v) Exterior façade and roof systems
(vi) HVAC system(s)
(vii) Special technical requirements or features
(viii) Land survey and landscape provisions
(2) Define target market.
(3) Identify franchise.
(4) Identify project type.
(5) Describe amenities.
3. Office
(a) Define whether the building is a single-tenant or multi-tenant building.
(b) Define the building as a low-rise, (1-2 stories), mid-rise (3 and up to 10
stories), or high-rise (buildings having occupied floors located more than
23 m above the lowest level of fire department vehicle access). Provide
building and zoning code categorization as well.
(a) Consider zoning restrictions on floor area ratio (F.A.R.), lot coverage,
and open space requirements.
(b) Consider zoning day lighting restrictions, in terms of any increased
setbacks that relate to building height.
(c) Consider navigation easements (air travel flight path height restrictions) if
near airfields.
(a) Define whether a stand-alone or part of a mixed use development.
(b) Low-Rise Considerations.
(1) Lobby/elevator needs
(2) Screening of rooftop mechanical and communication equipment
(c) Mid-Rise Considerations
(1) Consider elevator type: traction, hydraulic, or other.
(2) Screening of rooftop mechanical and communication equipment.
(3) Views
(d) High-Rise Considerations

Rev. 0 5.3 - 102
(1) Consider engaging an elevator consultant for number, type, speed,

and floor distribution of elevators.
(2) Consider inclined mechanical stairs (escalators) for multi-story
lobbies.
(3) Consider views from the building.
(4) Consider adjacencies to other structures when determining building
configuration.
(5) Consideration of stair wall and elevator shaft pressurization.
4) Features
(a) Design configuration.
(1) Consider parking needs. Determine amount of surface versus
garage or underground parking.
(2) Consider building population when sizing the lobby or lobbies.
(3) Consider access for emergency vehicles.
(4) Consider loading dock and delivery needs, including tenant moving
van access, regular deliveries and overnight express pick-up and
delivery.
(5) Consider utility issues: Capacity of utilities, ground mounted
equipment such as transformers and emergency generators, or
other considerations.
(b) Exterior Envelope
(1) Consider the appropriate glazing for environmental considerations
and life-cycle costing.
(2) Consider appropriate roofing system.
(3) Consider tie-offs for window cleaning apparatus.
(4) Consider solar shading devices.
(5) Consider solar effects on exterior material when selecting.
(c) Mechanical and Electrical Systems
(1) Consider building operation management systems.
(2) Provide utility analysis and life cycle cost considerations.
(3) Provide smoke evacuation systems per code requirements.
b. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.3 - 103
(f) HVAC system(s)

2) List zoning restrictions.
3) Provide solar characteristics of exterior glazing systems.
4) Submit elevator study.
4. Cafeteria/Restaurants
(a) Define the market group for the development.
(b) Define the development as a:
(1) Single establishment
(2) Multiple service retail development
(3) Mixed-use development
2) Building and Siting Considerations
(a) For single establishments, define the retail, commercial, or residential
context of the proposed development.
(b) For multiple service retail establishments, define the retailing concept
such as:
(1) Mall/indoor access facility
(2) Shopping center/exterior access facility
(3) Mixed use (define the scope and function of the entire development)
(a) Standalone Food Service/Cafeteria (supporting residential, educational,
governmental, etc.)
(1) State the name of the overall development.
(2) Identify the franchise name if applicable.
(3) State the square footage proposed.
(4) State and illustrate any interior or exterior design Standards of the
retail franchise.
(5) State the exterior design Standards of the retail development
location.
(6) Consider parking, and both pedestrian and vehicular access.
(7) Provide adequate delivery/loading dock space.
(8) Provide adequate storage space for inventory or food storage.
(9) Provide employee and patron restrooms.
(b) Restaurants

Rev. 0 5.3 - 104
(1) Determine the target user group menu options.

(2) Determine the appropriate decor and furnishings.
(3) Provide adequate waiting area for patrons.
(4) Consider the menu when determining the food service equipment
necessary to support the menu offerings.
(5) Provide adequate refrigerator and freezer food storage. Consider
emergency power for walk-in and bulk refrigerators and freezers.
(6) Adequately ventilate food preparation areas.
(7) Adequately condition the public and prep areas.
(8) Be sure sewage system and grease interceptors are adequately
provided.
(9) Ensure appropriate lighting fixtures and illumination levels are
provided for both preparation and eating areas.
(10) Consider all special dietary restrictions in food storage and
preparation.
(11) Consider the fire hazard risks with appropriate detection and
suppression systems.
(f) HVAC system(s)
2) Define the user group.
3) Define the development type.
4) Define the service concept.
5) Provide descriptions and responses to items 3.a. and 3.b. above.
5. Auditoriums
(a) Define the goals of the facility in terms of auditorium type and
prospective audience.
(1) Auditoriums types may include but not be limited to the following:
(i) Presentations of slide shows and video
(ii) Theaters for live performance and/or lectures

Rev. 0 5.3 - 105
(2) Target audience categorization may include, but not be limited to

the following:
(i) Age group(s)
(ii) Religious groups
(iii) Special interest groups
(iv) Educational groups
(v) Combinations of the above
2) Building Configurations
(a) Define in general terms the Building Program as it addresses the Goals
outlined above.
(b) Determine the number, type, and size of the auditoria.
3) Theater Types
(1) Presentations of slide shows and video Seating arrangements:
(i) Consider standard arrangements of 1.1 to 1.2 meters from seat
back to seat back.
(ii) Approximate areas for general planning purposes:
•
2
75 seats: 125 m ;
•
2
150 seats: 190 m ;
•
2
200 seats: 270 m .
(2) Sound
(i) Consider external sound mitigation in regard to street noise, rail
lines, bus routes, and airplane flight paths when designing the
exterior envelope.
(ii) Internal sound isolation – consider proximity to other adjacent
theaters when designing acoustic separation walls.
(iii) Service and equipment noise such as HVAC systems,
plumbing, rain leaders, and elevators shall be isolated.
(3) Sound Systems
(i) Digital sound, “surround sound”, and the character of the audio
portion of motion pictures have advanced rapidly. This
requires appropriate acoustic design within the theater and
appropriate acoustic separation.
(ii) Speaker arrays shall consider the inherent digital distribution of
film audio tracks, such as left, center, right, and multiple station
audio tracks.
(iii) Theater sound systems shall consider the appropriate sound
processor to go with the projection system.
(4) Video
(i) Digital technology: Consider provisions for the necessary digital
input including portable hard drives and encrypted files.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 106
(ii) Older analog formats, DVD, Blu-Ray and other media may
need to be provided for.
(5) Projection
(i) Consider the video formats potentially to be accommodated
when selecting projection equipment.
(6) Screens
(i) Consider the size of theater and the intended viewing angles
when selecting screen size.
(ii) Consider all the possible projection types selecting the screen
type. Certain venues may utilize rear-screen projection.
(7) Projection Booths
(i) The size and volume of the projection booth shall consider the
equipment, the operations, and space for access and egress.
(b) Theaters for Live Performance and or Lectures
(1) Proscenium Theaters - General Layout:
(i) Consider the type of performance when selecting a proscenium
theater. Drama, musical theater, ballet, opera, and symphonic
/ choral performances are among the more typical activities for
this venue.
(ii) Proscenium theaters are those that involve an elevated stage
at one end of an assembly area. The stage is characterized by
a proscenium opening, some form of apron across the front at
the ceiling, and some closure to the sides that results in a
stage opening facing the audience.
(iii) Proscenium theaters often have an additional stage extension
that projects toward the audience.
(iv) A “fly gallery” or tall volume over the stage and behind the
proscenium opening is used to raise and lower various types of
backdrops and provide theatrical lighting.
(c) Thrust Stage and Arena Theaters (“Theater in the Round”) – General
Layout
(1) Consider whether potential uses may be better served with a thrust
stage, whether temporary or permanent.
(2) Thrust stages are platform stages that extend out into the audience
area and typically allow seating around three sides. Thrust stages
often are located at or only slightly above the bottom row of seating.
4) Program Spaces
(a) Consider the range of types of performances when creating the Program
of Spaces. These may include but not be limited to the following:
(1) Size of the stage
(2) Height of the stage performance area

Rev. 0 5.3 - 107
(3) Potential use of riser platforms for seated performers, their quantity,
type and storage needs
(4) Chair storage for seated performers
(5) Equipment storage, such as music stands
(6) Proper storage for drama and theater elements
(7) Carpentry shop for set construction
(8) Paint booth for sets and props
(9) Costume creation areas
(10) Costume storage areas
(11) Dressing rooms
(12) “Green Room” for musician preparation area
(13) Practice rooms
(14) Toilet rooms for performers
(15) Off-stage areas for moving and relocating props during a
performance
5) Technical Requirements
(a) Stage Flooring – Consider the use when selecting the stage flooring.
(b) Consider options for an orchestra pit such as fixed, on hydraulic lifts, or
backstage.
(c) Consider the acoustics of both the performance area and the seating
area.
(d) Consider the use when selecting sound and lighting systems.
(e) Consider projection screens and other options needed for alternate uses.
6) Seating
(a) Consider sight lines, both horizontally and vertically.
(b) Consider seat types and spacing allowing for access and egress as well
as comfort.
(c) Provide handicap accessible seating.
7) Amenities
(a) Consider size, capacity, and placement of restroom facilities.
(b) Consider ushers’ rooms and janitorial needs.
(c) Consider areas for food, beverage, or merchandise sales, either
temporary or permanent in nature.
b. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.3 - 108

(f) HVAC system(s)
2) Define target users
3) Describe amenities
4) Floor plans and sections illustrating diagrammatically the site lines, showing
accessibility routes and features.
5) Describe the design features allowing flexibility
6) Describe seating system and any features, such as writing tablets
7)
D. Residential
1. Multi-Family Housing
1) Goals
(a) Define the target user population. This may include:
(1) Location/Neighborhood factor.
(2) Family unit demographics such as individuals, families, or seniors.
(3) Social demographics such as workers, executives, or religious.
(b) Define the intended facility response to the above.
(1) Replicate adjacent housing markets.
(2) Provide living unit sizes and amenities.
(3) Provide living unit sizes, features, and number of bedrooms based
on family demographics.
(4) Define unit types and building amenities.
2) Building Configuration
(a) Determine from the applicable zoning ordinance what the maximum lot
coverage, floor area ratio, or other density restrictions are.
(b) Develop an appropriate unit count and building “stacking”, meaning
numbers of stories and units per floor.
(c) Provide appropriate vehicle parking whether via garage or surface
parking. Parking counts must, at a minimum, address zoning
requirements and market study recommendations.
3) Features
(a) Consider amenities and features appropriate to the target population.
These may include but not be limited to the following:

Rev. 0 5.3 - 109
(1) Room(s) for parties and social gatherings

(2) Religious spaces
(3) Exercise/work out rooms
(4) Lounges and lobby space for informal interaction
(5) Exterior public patios
(6) Walking paths
(7) Swimming pool
(8) Outdoor recreation areas
(9) Gardens and grounds
(10) Playgrounds
(11) Trash Room with Chute
(12) Recycling Storage Areas
4) Environment
(a) The selection of the mechanical/HVAC system(s) shall be suited to the
building configuration. Energy efficient systems are vital. Selection of the
HVAC system(s) shall consider multiple viable options for which a
detailed life-cycle cost analysis is performed. Consider central vs.
individual HVAC systems
(b) Consider central vs. individual hot water heaters
(c) Consider motion sensors for the lighting and HVAC for infrequently used
spaces.
(d) The amount of window area and glass selection shall consider energy
conservation.
(e) The acoustic environment is a paramount consideration. Wall types,
particularly unit-separation walls and corridor walls, and floor/ceiling
assemblies shall be constructed of assemblies with tested acoustic
values. An STC rating of 50 shall be considered a minimum, or as
otherwise prescribed by building code. See SBC 201 7.7.
(f) Detailing of construction must be configured to maintain the acoustic
value when joining different wall and/or floor/ceiling assemblies.
(g) Penetrations through walls with acoustic criteria must not void those
criteria. Electric outlets, blocking, and attachment of architectural
elements such as toilet accessories are included in this consideration.
(h) Position of rooftop equipment or HVAC condensers shall not create
acoustic or vibration issues for sleeping areas.
(i) Toilet rooms and laundry exhaust grilles on the exterior shall be
positioned away from operable windows.
(j) Mechanical room should be provided as necessary with separate
entrance.
5) Traffic and Circulation

Rev. 0 5.3 - 110
(a) An elevator study shall be considered to establish the number, type, and
speed of elevators.
(b) Consideration of requirements for moving vans, loading and unloading
furniture and elevator size and type, are necessary for occupants moving
in and out.
6) Security
(a) Define the salient security issues of the building and select systems to
adequately address building and occupant security. These may include,
but are not limited to the following:
(1) Gated entry or secure lobby.
(2) Camera system in vestibule tied to occupant television or
computers, to allow observation of entrants.
(3) Intercom system to lobby with electronic access triggered by the
building occupant.
(4) Exterior and interior public space video monitoring.
(5) Emergency call stations, if appropriate.
(6) On-site security personnel.
(7) Keyed and keyless access controls.
b. Submittals
(f) HVAC system(s)
3) Copy of the Market Study
4) Description of Features
5) Description of Security measures
6) Description of HVAC and Plumbing Systems
2. Single-Family Housing
1) Goals
(a) Define the target user population. This may include:
(1) Location/Neighborhood factor

Rev. 0 5.3 - 111
(2) Family unit demographics such as individuals, families or seniors

(3) Social demographics such as workers, executives, or religious
(b) Define the intended response to the above.
(1) Provide living unit sizes and amenities.
(2) Provide room sizes, features, and number of bedrooms based on
family demographics.
(3) Define common amenities.
2) Configuration
(a) Determine from the applicable zoning ordinance what the maximum lot
coverage, floor area ratio, or other density restrictions are.
(b) Develop an appropriate unit count and density.
(c) Provide appropriate vehicle parking whether via garage or surface
parking. Parking counts must, at a minimum, address zoning
requirements and market study recommendations.
3) Features
(a) House Units:
(1) Kitchen – cabinet and counter types, appliances, and special
features
(2) Bathroom – number, and spas and other amenities
(3) Living spaces
(4) Special indoor and outdoor features
(b) Development Amenities
(1) Gated Communities
(2) Swimming Pool
(3) Community Building
(4) Walking and Recreation
(5) Gardens and Grounds
4) Environment
(a) The selection of the mechanical/HVAC system shall be suited to the
housing type. Selection of the HVAC system shall consider multiple
viable options for which a detailed life-cycle cost analysis is performed.
(b) Consider motion sensors for the lighting.
(c) The amount of window area and glass selection shall consider energy
conservation.
(d) The acoustic environment is a consideration. Wall types, particularly
unit-separation walls and corridor walls; and floor/ceiling assemblies
shall be constructed of assemblies with tested acoustic values.
(e) Position of mechanical equipment or HVAC condensers shall not create
acoustic or vibration issues for sleeping areas, or adjacent houses.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 112
(f) Toilet rooms and laundry exhaust grilles on the exterior shall be
positioned away from operable windows and from adjacent housing unit.
5) Traffic and Circulation
(a) Consider emergency vehicle access and trash removal.
(b) Consideration of requirements for moving vans, loading and unloading
furniture and elevator size and type, are necessary for occupants moving
in and out.
6) Security
(a) Define the salient security issues of the development and select systems
to adequately address building and occupant security. These may
include, but not be limited to the following:
(1) Gated entry
(2) Camera systems
(3) Emergency call stations, if appropriate
(4) On-site security personnel
b. Submittals
(f) HVAC system(s)
(h) Special technical requirements or features
(i) Land survey and landscape provisions
2) Description of Development amenities
3) Description of Security measures
E. Industrial
1. General Industrial
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Creating an economically optimized facility that ensures the
safety of the environment, personnel, and surrounding
community.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 113
(ii) Provide the easy movement and storage of commercial goods

that maximizes ease of loading and unloading.
(iii) Provide proper display of goods for ease of inventory and/or
sale.
(iv) Provide areas for future facility expansion.
(1) The type of Industrial facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Distribution
(ii) Manufacturing
(iii) Warehouse
(iv) Assembly
(v) Processing
(vi) Telecomm
(a) Consideration shall be given during plot selection so as to minimize the
leveling of grades.
(b) Consideration shall be given to the business process of the facility and
the required adjacencies to other aspects of the business or community.
(c) Provide adjacency to roads, trains, ports and airports as necessary for
the facility’s accessibility needs.
(d) Siting of the building shall consider areas of the facility with prolonged
exposure to the environment, such as dock doors, so as to maximize the
protection from sand and weather infiltration.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of General Industrial facilities may include but are
(1) Interior/exterior storage
(2) Assembly lines
(3) Administrative space
(a) Centralization of the facility’s primary function shall be considered for
accessibility purposes.
(b) In spaces containing assembly lines or conveying systems, consideration
shall be given to the accessibility of the facility either under or over such
systems.
(a) Goods and wares shall be protected from the environment.
(b) Measures shall be taken to prevent sand infiltration into the facility.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 114
(c) Consideration shall be given to the proper interior environment, such as

temperature, humidity and air flow, needed for the processes of the
facility.
(d) Consideration shall be given to pest control measures.
(e) Floors shall be properly designed to resist crush loads of equipment,
wares, and vehicles.
(f) Lighting shall be designed appropriately for the process of the facility and
shall consider reducing worker fatigue.
(a) Emergency egress plans shall consider equipment, stored goods and
assembly lines when determining egress routes.
(b) Consideration shall be given for vehicular access on the interior of the
facility that may include trucks or forklifts.
(c) Signage and way-finding shall be designed with an understanding of the
functional process of the facility and shall demonstrate clarity in the
separation of spaces.
(d) Consideration shall be given to worker, pedestrian, vehicular, and visitor
traffic as it relates to the function of the facility.
(e) Consideration shall be given to the selection of finishes to help convey
the way-finding or functional process of the facility. This may include
pavement or floor markings.
7) Security
(a) Restrict access from unauthorized persons and vehicles.
(b) Consideration for the privacy of the process shall be given and sensitive
spaces shall be properly shielded from public view and be separated
from public spaces whenever possible.
(1) Firefighting systems
(2) Security cameras
(3) Storage racks and/or conveying systems
(4) Smoke ventilation system
(5) Automated storage system
(6) Flooring systems that reduce joints and thus reduces maintenance.
Joints shall be epoxy grouted. Flooring material shall be chosen to
maximize flatness
(7) Impact resistant finishes
9) Control Rooms
(a) Control rooms may be required for various reasons and shall be
designed to meet the specific Project requirements as well as applicable
code and industry standard requirements.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 115
(b) Shall a control room be required, considerations may include, but are not
limited to, the following:
(1) Safety and security measures to protect the room and its occupants
from anticipated risks, hazards, and other events. Measures shall
be diverse and redundant to ensure that control may be maintained
in an emergency situation.
(2) Structure of control room to withstand major hazard events.
Construction materials shall be fire resistant for the duration of
possible fire events.
(3) Ability to seal control room from ingress of toxic gases, as required.
(4) Layout derived from an appropriate task analysis method, such as
link analysis or hierarchical task analysis. The layout shall be
effective under high and low staffing levels, enable verbal and non-
verbal communication, and facilitate team working.
(5) Appropriate lines of sight and view of monitoring systems and
displays.
(6) Lighting shall be adequate for the tasks with no perceptible flicker
and no veiling reflections created.
(7) Noise levels shall not interfere with communications, warning
signals, or mental performance.
(8) Ergonomic considerations to promote operator effectiveness, good
posture, and appropriate reaches.
(9) Provide adequate access and protection of equipment so that
inadvertent operation during maintenance is not possible.
10) Battery Rooms
(a) Battery room locations within a building shall meet applicable code and
industry standard requirements and are to be approved by the RCJ. See
SBC 801 5A.9, 5D, 7.7.2.23
(b) Shall a battery room be included within an Industrial Project,
considerations may include, but are not limited to, the following:
(1) Depending on the size/quantity of batteries stored, the room may be
considered a hazardous occupancy. Refer to the applicable code
governing the Project for detailed requirements.
(2) If more than one type of battery chemistry (e.g.: lead-acid, nickel-
cadmium, etc.) are being used, each type shall be located in a
separate battery room.
(3) OSHA requirements for ventilation, installed personal safety
measures (e.g.: safety showers), etc. as required.
(4) Spill control/containment measures as required by applicable fire
code.
(5) Seismic requirements as identified in the applicable building code.
(6) Appropriate signage.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 116
(7) Refer to SBC, IBC, IFC and IMC and NFPA 111 for system
requirements.
2. Chemical Processing
(a) Refer to General Industrial Subsection 5.3.5.E.1.a.1) for design
considerations pertaining to goals and purpose of the facility.
(a) In addition to the building and citing considerations in the General
Industrial Section, building and siting of Chemical Processing facilities
may include but are not limited to the following:
(1) Wind study to protect surrounding community from emissions
(2) Distance from neighboring community
3) Features
(a) In addition to the space requirements in the General Industrial
Subsection 5.3.5.E.1, space requirements of Chemical Processing
facilities may include but are not limited to the following:
(1) Consideration for the types of chemicals being used/stored and their
volatility with other materials.
(2) Consideration for the required separation of chemicals from one
another and from certain processes of the facility.
(3) Consideration for containment areas.
(a) Refer to the General Industrial Subsection 5.3.5.E.1.a.4) for design
considerations pertaining to responsiveness to the audience for the
facility.
(a) In addition to the environmental considerations in the General Industrial
Subsection 5.3.5.E.1.a.5), environmental considerations of Chemical
Processing facilities may include but are not limited to the following:
(1) Materials shall be chosen to prevent chemical corrosion.
(2) Protect processes from extreme solar gain, wind, sand and weather.
(3) Air flow, exhaust, ventilation and filtration shall maximize air quality
at the facility and in the neighboring community.
(4) Consider provisions for any liquid discharge to prevent soil and
ground water contamination.
(5) Proper accommodations for the disposal of hazardous materials.
considerations pertaining to traffic flow and way-finding of the facility.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 117
7) Security
considerations pertaining to security for the facility.
(a) In addition to the specialized amenities in the General Industrial
Subsection 5.3.5.E.2, specialized amenities of Chemical Processing
facilities may include but are not limited to the following which shall
consider the chemicals being used/stored when selecting the appropriate
system:
(1) Fire suppression system.
(2) Fire protection system.
(3) Fire containment system.
(4) Chemical suppression systems.
(5) Exterior and interior disaster response systems.
(a) Block Flow Diagrams indicating major material or energy flows.
(b) Process Flow Diagrams showing more complex diagrams of major unit
operations as well as flow lines.
(c) Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams showing all pipelines, piping
classes and pipe sizes.
(d) Specifications of all major equipment.
(e) Anticipated quantities of chemical and hazardous classifications.
10) References
(a) Chemical Engineers shall be consulted on all chemical processing
facilities.
F. Specialty Applications
1. Military
the following:
(1) Creating a secured and private environment for the housing and
operation of the military or one of its branches.
(1) The type of Military facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Administrative purposes.
(ii) Storage such as ammunition, vehicles, and/or equipment.
(iii) Base.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 118
(iv) Housing.
(v) Training Facility.
(vi) Weapons and ammunition production.
(a) Limit the facilities proximity to taller buildings.
(b) Consider the landscape and vegetation to prevent visual security
breaches.
(c) Locate such as to limit accessibility to the public.
(d) Comply with all Saudi Arabian military requirements.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of Military facilities may include but are not limited to
the following:
(1) Blast Protection. Provide structures that eliminate progressive
failure and are blast resistant.
(a) Inaccessible to general public.
(b) Clearly marked as private.
(a) Consider the mitigation of environmental concerns that may hinder the
privacy or security of the facility.
(b) Floors shall be properly designed to resist crush loads of equipment,
wares, and vehicles.
(a) Control traffic flow to and from facility.
7) Security
(a) Automated information systems and screening areas.
(b) Limit and secure entry points.
(c) Security towers shall provide sight lines to the entirety of the facility and
neighboring area as necessary.
(d) Warning signs shall provide clear boundaries for the facility.
(e) Security fencing shall block views as necessary for the privacy of the
facility’s operations.
(f) Perimeter barriers, where provided, shall offer appropriate blast and
ballistic requirements.
(g) Perimeter roads and clear zones.
(h) Alarm systems.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 119
(1) Security system

(2) Security lighting
(3) Camera monitoring system
2. Water Treatment (Desalination)
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Uninterrupted water supply
(ii) Create an effective distribution system
(iii) Optimize supply capacity
(iv) High water quality and protection of supplies
(1) The type of Water Treatment may include but are not limited to:
(i) Water treatment facility
(ii) Wastewater treatment plant
(iii) Pump Station
(a) Coordinate all incoming or outgoing utilities with the utility infrastructure.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements of Water Treatment may include but are not limited
to the following:
(1) Pools/ponds
(2) Chemical storage
(3) Water towers
(4) Treatment pipe and tank system
4) Chlorination Facilities Environmental Considerations
(a) Consideration shall be given to prevent contamination of water from the
environment.
(b) Consideration shall be given to prevent contamination of environment by
chemicals or unclean water.
(c) Air flow, ventilation and exhausted air filtration shall be utilized to
maximize air quality at facility and in neighboring community.
(d) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(e) Refer to IBC, IFC and IMC and NFPA 55 for system requirements.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 120
(a) Maximize sight lines for ease of operation and maintenance.

(b) Provide road/gravel access to pools for cleaning/grit removal.
6) Security
(a) Prevent access of unauthorized persons or vehicles.
(b) Provide screening from neighboring community.
(1) Integrated automated control and electrical systems.
(2) Remote monitoring and control.
(a) Flow chart analysis
(b) Computational fluid-dynamics modeling of all on-site or off-site airborne
or water borne containments.

Rev. 0 5.3 - 121
SECTION 5.4 MECHANICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION ................................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Scope ............................................................................................................................. 1
2. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 2
4. Definitions (specific to this Section) ............................................................................... 2
5. Codes and Standards .................................................................................................... 3
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 3
C. Fire Protection Specialties ............................................................................................. 3
1. Valves ............................................................................................................................ 3
2. Backflow Preventer ........................................................................................................ 4
3. Fire Department Connection ......................................................................................... 4
4. Roof Manifold................................................................................................................. 5
5. Floor Control Assembly ................................................................................................. 5
6. Flow Switch Tester ........................................................................................................ 5
D. Sprinklers ....................................................................................................................... 6
1. System Design............................................................................................................... 6
2. Types ............................................................................................................................. 6
E. Piping and fitting material .............................................................................................. 9
1. Pipe ................................................................................................................................ 9
F. Fire Suppression Standpipes ........................................................................................ 9
1. Fire Suppression Standpipe Design .............................................................................. 9
G. Fire Pumps .................................................................................................................... 9
1. Design ............................................................................................................................ 9
H. Fire Suppression Systems............................................................................................ 10
1. Automatic Wet Systems ............................................................................................... 10
2. Dry Systems ................................................................................................................. 10
3. Pre-Action System ........................................................................................................ 11
4. Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems ..................................................................... 11
5. Fire Suppression Systems for Commercial Kitchen Hoods ......................................... 12

Rev. 0 5.4 - i
5.4.2. PLUMBING ................................................................................................................... 13

A. General ......................................................................................................................... 13
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 13
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 13
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 14
5. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 15
6. Standards and References ........................................................................................... 15
7. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 16
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 16
1. Requirements ............................................................................................................... 16
C. Sustainability Design For Plumbing Systems ............................................................... 16
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 16
2. Strategies for Increasing Water Efficiency ................................................................... 16
D. Piping Systems ............................................................................................................. 17
1. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 17
2. Installation..................................................................................................................... 17
3. Domestic Hot Water and Cold Water Piping ................................................................ 17
4. Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping .................................................................................. 18
5. Storm and Secondary (Emergency) Storm Drainage Piping ........................................ 19
6. Compressed Air Piping ................................................................................................. 20
7. Natural Gas Piping ....................................................................................................... 22
8. Vacuum Piping ............................................................................................................. 22
E. Equipment..................................................................................................................... 23
1. Water Softeners ............................................................................................................ 23
2. Water Heaters............................................................................................................... 24
3. Pumps........................................................................................................................... 27
4. Facility Water Storage Tanks ....................................................................................... 31
5. Interceptors ................................................................................................................... 32
6. Special Waste Systems ................................................................................................ 35
7. Backflow Preventers ..................................................................................................... 37
8. Trap Seal Primer Valve ................................................................................................ 37
9. Water Meters ................................................................................................................ 37
10. Pressure Gauges .......................................................................................................... 38

Rev. 0 5.4 - ii
11. Thermometers .............................................................................................................. 38

F. Plumbing Fixtures ......................................................................................................... 39
1. Quantities...................................................................................................................... 39
2. Quality........................................................................................................................... 39
3. Type .............................................................................................................................. 39
G. Laboratory Piping And Appurtenances ......................................................................... 43
1. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 43
2. Installation..................................................................................................................... 44
3. Non-Potable Hot and Cold Water Piping ...................................................................... 44
4. Tepid (Emergency) Water Piping ................................................................................. 45
5. Laboratory Grade Water Piping .................................................................................... 45
6. Laboratory Waste and Laboratory Vent Piping ............................................................ 46
7. Laboratory Compressed Air Piping .............................................................................. 48
8. Laboratory Vacuum Piping ........................................................................................... 49
9. Specialty Piping ............................................................................................................ 50
H. Laboratory Equipment And Appurtenances ................................................................. 51
1. Tepid (Emergency) Water Mixing Valve ....................................................................... 51
2. Laboratory Neutralization Tanks................................................................................... 52
3. Laboratory Grade Water Systems ................................................................................ 53
4. Laboratory Compressed Air System ............................................................................ 54
5. Laboratory Vacuum System ......................................................................................... 57
6. Laboratory Nitrogen System ......................................................................................... 57
I. Medical Piping And Appurtenances ............................................................................. 57
1. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 58
2. Installation..................................................................................................................... 58
3. Nitrous Oxide Piping ..................................................................................................... 58
4. Carbon Dioxide Piping .................................................................................................. 59
5. Oxygen Piping .............................................................................................................. 59
6. Medical Air Piping ......................................................................................................... 60
7. Medical Vacuum Piping ................................................................................................ 61
8. Specialty Systems Piping ............................................................................................. 61
J. Safety Equipment ......................................................................................................... 62
1. Eyewashes ................................................................................................................... 62
2. Emergency Showers .................................................................................................... 62
K. Vibration........................................................................................................................ 62

Rev. 0 5.4 - iii
1. Control .......................................................................................................................... 62
L. Condensate Drainage And Collection Systems ........................................................... 63
1. Refer to GEM Section 5.4.3 HVAC. ............................................................................. 63
M. Specialty Plumbing Systems ........................................................................................ 63
1. Water Hammer Arrester ............................................................................................... 63
2. Strainers ....................................................................................................................... 63
N. Valves ........................................................................................................................... 64
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 64
2. Butterfly Valve............................................................................................................... 64
3. Gate Valve .................................................................................................................... 64
4. Ball Valve ...................................................................................................................... 65
5. Check Valve.................................................................................................................. 65
6. Plug Valves ................................................................................................................... 66
7. Balancing Valve ............................................................................................................ 66
5.4.3. HVAC ............................................................................................................................ 67
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 67
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 67
2. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 68
3. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 68
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 68
5. Definitions (specific to this section) .............................................................................. 70
6. Codes and Standards ................................................................................................... 71
7. Design Criteria .............................................................................................................. 72
8. Heating Load Calculations ............................................................................................ 73
9. Cooling Load Calculations ............................................................................................ 74
10. Energy Modeling ........................................................................................................... 76
11. Building Envelope Thermal and Moisture Properties ................................................... 79
12. Refrigerants .................................................................................................................. 80
13. Sustainability................................................................................................................. 81
14. Redundancy.................................................................................................................. 81
15. Units and Conversions ................................................................................................. 83
16. HVAC Software ............................................................................................................ 83
B. HVAC SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................... 83
1. Central Heating and Cooling ........................................................................................ 84
2. Air Handling Distribution ............................................................................................... 86

Rev. 0 5.4 - iv
3. In-Room Terminal Systems .......................................................................................... 90

4. Applied Heat Pump and Heat Recovery Systems ........................................................ 92
5. Forced Air Heating and DX Cooling Systems .............................................................. 93
6. Steam Systems ............................................................................................................ 93
7. Hydronic Heating and Cooling ...................................................................................... 96
8. Condenser Water Systems.......................................................................................... 100
9. Variable-Refrigerant Flow Systems ............................................................................. 101
10. Dust Collection Systems.............................................................................................. 103
11. Stair Pressurization Systems....................................................................................... 105
12. District Cooling and Central Plant Systems................................................................. 105
13. Building Automation (Management) System ............................................................... 110
C. HVAC EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES ................................................................ 113
1. Air Handling Equipment and Accessories ................................................................... 113
2. Heating Equipment and Accessories .......................................................................... 124
3. Cooling Equipment and Accessories ........................................................................... 126
4. Common System Components.................................................................................... 130
D. HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS .............................................. 135
1. General Design Considerations................................................................................... 135
2. Building Operations ..................................................................................................... 165
5.4.4. GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE ............................................................................ 169
A. Public/Government ...................................................................................................... 169
B. Commercial.................................................................................................................. 170
C. Residential ................................................................................................................... 170
D. Industrial ...................................................................................................................... 171
1. Reference to other sections of the GEM ..................................................................... 171
2. General ........................................................................................................................ 171
3. Ventilation System Design........................................................................................... 171
4. Industrial Air Conditioning............................................................................................ 172
E. Specialty Applications .................................................................................................. 172
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 172

Rev. 0 5.4 - v
SUBSECTION 5.4.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION
5.4.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. General
1. Scope
a. This Guiding Engineering Manual establishes the Royal Commissions mandatory,
minimally acceptable, requirements for new and renovation projects. This Manual
provides:
1) The criteria for planning, design, construction, sustainment, restoration, and /
or modernization for building fire suppression systems.
2) The policies and technical information to be used, however project conditions
may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of Guiding Engineering Manual are not intended to prohibit the use of
alternative systems, methods, or devices not specifically described; however, the
use of alternative systems, methods, or devices can be used upon approval from the
Royal Commission.
c. If a conflict is discovered between the Guiding Engineering Manual, the Guiding
Procurement and Construction Specification, and the Typical Construction Details or
Drawings, the Guiding Engineering Manual shall take precedence.
d. The RCJ is the final Authority Having Jurisdiction in Jubail Industrial City.
e. The design of fire suppression system requires coordination and integration with
other disciplines such as, but not limited to, the fire alarm electrical design for alarms
related to tamper and flow switches, the plumbing design for drains from various
elements of the fire suppression system, the electrical design for power to the fire
pump and automatic transfer switch and all disciplines for space to install piping and
equipment.
2. Introduction
a. The Guiding Engineering Manual:
1) This Subsection establishes the uniform design criteria and standards for fire
suppression systems and equipment to enable quality, and cost effective
buildings and facilities that meet the needs and expectations of the end users.
2) Provides explicit design criteria that will be used by the Royal Commission to
evaluate if all fire suppression design criteria goals and requirements have
been met.
b. The following objectives shall be reflected in the fire protection programming and
design:
1) Design Quality – The Royal Commission is committed to excellence in the
design and development of its sites and buildings. This requires an integrated
approach by all disciplines to achieve the highest quality pipe work design
while providing cost effective fire suppression systems.
2) Flexibility and Adaptability is required to accommodate renovations and future
expansion without replacement of central building equipment or components.
3) Sustainability - The essential principles of sustainable design shall address:
Energy, materials, water, environmental quality, operations, and maintenance.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 1
3. Abbreviations
a. Abbreviations in general are referenced in Section 2.2.
b. Abbreviations (specific to this Section)
2) ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
4) ASPE: American Society of Plumbing Engineers
6) FM: Factory Mutual
7) GPCS: Guiding Procurement and Construction Specification
9) IFC: International Fire Code
10) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fitting
Industry
11) OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
12) RCJ: Royal Commission of Jubail
14) TCDD: Typical Construction Detail Drawings
15) UL: Underwriters Laboratories
4. Definitions (specific to this Section)
a. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements.
b. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements.
c. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
d. Concealed Interior: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants.
e. Concealed Exterior: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures.
f. Exposed Interior: Exposed to view indoors (not concealed).
g. Exposed Exterior: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions.
h. Finished Space: Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, space above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, tunnels, and interstitial spaces.
i. Conditioned: Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling.
j. Unconditioned: Spaces without heating or cooling including ceiling plenums.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 2
k. Indoors: Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
l. Outdoors: Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
m. Atmosphere: The same as outdoors.
a. The following documents establish the minimum requirement for the design of fire
suppression systems:
1) Saudi Building Code 801- Fire Protection Requirements
2) NFPA 1 – Fire Code
3) NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
4) NFPA 13 – Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems
5) NFPA 13D – Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems for One and Two
Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes
6) NFPA 13R – Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and
including Four Stories in Height
7) NFPA 14 – Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
8) NFPA 20 – Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps
9) NFPA 22 – Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
10) NFPA 24 – Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and
Their Appurtenances
11) International Building Code
b. In the event of conflict between Codes and this document, the Saudi Building Code
shall govern.
B. Commissioning
Refer to Section 4.5.9 – Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning
requirements.
C. Fire Protection Specialties
1. Valves
a. Control Valves
1) Provide control valves at the inlet and outlet of all items of equipment that
may require maintenance and/or testing to avoid the need to drain the
upstream and downstream piping when maintenance or testing is performed.
Items of equipment requiring upstream and downstream control valves
include, but are not limited to fire pumps, alarm check valves, backflow
preventers, and pressure regulating valves.
2) All valves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 12 Bar. In the event fire
pump operation or building height results in pressures exceeding 12 Bar, the
valve pressure rating shall be 14 Bar.
3) All control valves shall have a monitor switch to indicate if the valve is not in
the full-open position. Monitor switches shall be single pole, double throw

Rev. 0 5.4 - 3
(SPDT) type switch with contacts for interconnection to the building fire alarm
system.
4) Valves size 65 mm and smaller shall be UL listed/FM approved butterfly
valves with wheel operator and integral, tamper resistant SPDT monitor
switch for interconnection with building fire alarm system.
5) Valves size larger than 65 mm shall be UL listed/ FM approved listed butterfly
valves with integral tamper resistant SPDT monitor switch.
6) Outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) gate valves, UL listed/FM approved are
permitted for use upstream and downstream from backflow preventers and
fire pumps. OS&Y gate valves shall have resilient seats.
b. Pressure Regulating Valves
1) For small portions of the system or where system pressure exceeds the
pressure rating of the sprinklers, provide a pressure regulating valve in the
branch or cross main feeding those components. Provide regulating valve
complete with a pressure gauge up and down stream of the valve, and a
pressure relief valve with its discharge piped to a floor drain or mop sink.
2) For large sections of the fire protection system that exceed the pressure
rating of the components, provide a pilot operated pressure regulating valve.
Valve body shall be epoxy coated. Provide regulating valve complete with a
pressure gauge up and down stream of the valve, and a pressure relief valve
with its discharge piped to a floor drain or mop sink.
c. Post Indicator Valves
1) Post indicator valves shall be provided on the fire water service entrance to
the building. The valve shall be a post mounted non-rising stem gate valve
that extends to bury depth of the pipe and provided with a supervisory switch.
Post valve shall be provided a minimum of 12 m from building. Switch shall
be wired to building alarm system.
d. Check Valves
1) General purpose check valves shall be provided in the fire protection system
where flow direction is regulated. Valves shall be UL Listed/FM Approved
swing check valves.
(a) Typical locations requiring check valves include but are not limited to,
piping between fire department connection and sprinkler supply piping,
downstream from a fire pump.
2) Riser check valves shall be provided at the base of all fire protection system
risers. Valves shall be UL Listed/FM Approved swing check valves.
2. Backflow Preventer
a. Backflow preventer shall be provided in the water service to the fire protection
system. The backflow preventer shall be detector double check style with stainless
steel body and low pressure loss characteristics. The backflow preventers shall be
insulated with fiberglass or rubber cellular insulation to prevent condensation.
3. Fire Department Connection
a. A fire department connection shall be provided for each building to facilitate the fire
department connecting to the building fire suppression system. The fire department

Rev. 0 5.4 - 4
connection shall be selected in accordance with the RC Guideline Specification for

Fire Protection.
b. The fire department connection shall be located street side where the fire
department will respond to the building in the event of a fire. The fire department
connection shall be easily visible and accessible. The location shall be a minimum
of 12 m from the building, preferably in the same general location as the post
indicator valve.
c. The inlet of the fire department connection shall be 500 mm above grade.
d. The fire department connection shall have an escutcheon plate labeled
“STANDPIPE AND AUTO SPKR”.
e. The fire department connection shall be protected by 100 mm carbon steel pipe
bollards to prevent it from being damaged by vehicles.
f. Fire department connections shall be post mounted, siamese type, and shall be 65
mm x 65 mm x 100 mm. Inlet shall be furnished with a self-closing clapper valve,
and shall have threads suitable for coupling to fire department hoses.
g. A UL listed check valve and a 20 mm ball drip shall be provided where the piping to
the fire department connection joins the sprinkler supply piping system. Ball drip
shall be piped to floor drain or to exterior.
4. Roof Manifold
a. A roof manifold shall be provided where required by NFPA 14 and/or the Saudi
Building Code 801 Fire Protection, as well as by the AHJ, for addressing a fire from
the roof level.
b. Roof manifold shall be a two-way Hydrant, 100 mm x 65 mm x 65 mm with caps and
chains. Manifold shall be supplied with a plate lettered "WALL HYDRANT."
Threads shall be compatible for coupling to fire department hoses.
c. Roof manifold shall be UL Listed / FM Approved automatic ball drip for roof manifold.
Drain line shall be extended to, and terminate in, a floor drain or at roof with splash
block.
5. Floor Control Assembly
a. A floor control assembly shall be provided at each sprinkler branch connection to a
standpipe or sprinkler riser.
b. Floor control assembly shall comprise of a control valve, a riser manifold, and a test
and drain assembly to provide for testing and drainage of the sprinkler system. The
floor control assembly shall have threaded connections and be FM approved. The
outlet of the test and drain assembly shall be piped to a drain riser
6. Flow Switch Tester
a. The flow switch tester shall be provided to test the flow switch without the need to
spill the test water to drain. The unit shall consist of a water flow switch, pump,
isolation ball valves, check valve and fittings. The unit shall be rated for a working
pressure of 12 Bar at 50° C.
b. Manifold piping shall be schedule 10. Pump shall be fitted with 230 volt motor (this
shall match SEC requirements) and be controlled with a local key switch also rated
for 230 volts. Key switch shall be furnished with a back box capable of surface or
recessed mounting. Unit shall be UL listed and FM approved. Provide one flow
switch tester manifold for each floor level of the facility.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 5
D. Sprinklers
1. System Design
a. Provide sprinkler systems for buildings where required by the Saudi Building Code
801 Fire Protection, the International Building Code or NFPA. The Saudi Building
Code 801 Fire Protection, Section 7.3 Automatic Sprinkler Systems, shall be the
primary reference for sprinkler system design. The International Building Code and
NFPA shall be referenced for subjects and issues not addressed in the Saudi
Building Code.
b. Types of fire suppression systems are discussed further in Subsection 5.4.1.H.
c. The entire sprinkler system shall be hydraulically designed based on the results of
the new water supply flow test conducted by the contractor or the local water
authority. The consultant shall make arrangements with Marafiq, the local water
authority, for the flow test and shall witness the test. A minimum of 0.7 Bar cushion
shall be provided between the water supply curve and the system design point.
1) Hydraulic sprinkler design software shall meet the requirements established
by NFPA.
d. Hydraulic calculations shall be approved by the RCJ and meet the requirement
established by NFPA 13.
e. Fire water flow design criteria shall be based on the requirements established in the
Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection, Appendix B.
f. Water velocity in pipes shall not exceed 6 m/s.
g. Special Occupancies
1) The Saudi Building Code Fire Protection 801 addresses the design of fire
protection for special occupancies in dedicated Chapters relating specifically
to each occupancy type. Design fire protection for special occupancies in
strict accordance with the Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection.
(a) Design fire protection for paint shops and other finishing operations in
strict accordance with the Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection
Chapter 12 Flammable Finishes.
(b) Design fire protection for storage of flammable liquids and chemicals in
strict accordance with the Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection
Chapter 32 Flammable and Combustible Liquids
2. Types
a. Standard response
1) Exposed (upright or pendant) sprinklers
(a) Exposed sprinklers shall only be used in applications where there are no
ceilings.
(b) Exposed sprinklers shall be large glass bulb operated automatic
sprinklers with chrome finish. Temperature rating shall be 68°C at 12
bar, unless the application dictates the need for a higher temperature
and or pressure rating.
(c) Provide wire sprinkler guards on sprinklers where subject to mechanical
damage.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 6
(d) Provide escutcheon to match adjacent finishes for semi-recessed

applications.
2) Concealed sprinklers
(a) Concealed sprinklers shall be used only in special architectural finish
areas.
(b) Concealed sprinklers shall be chosen in accordance with NFPA 13,
Chapter 6.
(c) Cover plate color shall match ceiling color.
3) Horizontal sidewall
(a) Horizontal sidewall sprinklers shall only be used only in light hazard
applications where they will eliminate the need for ceiling mounted or
exposed overhead sprinklers entirely, and either reduce the total number
of sprinklers required, or eliminate aesthetic issues of ceiling mounted or
exposed overhead sprinklers.
(b) Horizontal sidewall sprinklers shall be glass bulb operated automatic
sprinklers rated for 68°C at 12 bar, unless the application dictates a
higher temperature and/or pressure rating.
4) Dry-type sprinklers
5) Where sprinklers must be installed in areas subject to freezing and requiring
minimum area coverage, dry pendent, dry concealed or dry sidewall
sprinklers may be used.
(a) Dry pendant sprinklers
(1) Dry pendent sprinkler shall be chrome plated large glass bulb
operated, rated for 68°C at 12 bar.
(2) Sprinkler going from a warm space into a cold space shall be
installed with a manufactured sprinkler boot or appropriate calking
and insulation.
(b) Dry concealed sprinklers
(1) Dry concealed sprinkler shall be large glass bulb operated, rated for
68°C at 12 bar.
(2) Cover plate color shall match ceiling color and be rated for 57°C.
(3) Sprinkler going from a warm space into a cold space shall be
installed with a manufactured sprinkler boot or appropriate calking
and insulation.
(c) Dry horizontal sidewall sprinklers
(1) Dry horizontal sidewall sprinkler shall be chrome plated large glass
bulb operated, rated for 68°C at 12 bar.
(2) Provide with factory made adjustable chrome plated escutcheon.
(3) All dry type sprinklers going from a warm space into a cold space
shall be installed with a manufactured sprinkler boot or appropriate
calking and insulation.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 7
b. Quick response
1) Quick response sprinklers maybe used in place of standard response
sprinklers where permitted by the referenced Codes and Standards, and
where approved by the AHJ.
2) Exposed (upright or pendant)quick response sprinklers
(a) Exposed quick response sprinklers shall be chrome plated, glass bulb
automatic sprinklers rated for 68°C at 12 Bar.
3) Concealed quick response sprinklers
(a) Concealed quick response sprinklers shall be solder link operated
automatic sprinkler rated at 71°C at 12 Bar. Cover plate color shall be
selected by the architect and be rated at 57°C.
4) Horizontal sidewall quick response sprinklers
(a) Horizontal sidewall quick response sprinklers shall be chrome plated,
solder link sprinkler rated at 68°C at 12 Bar.
5) Semi-recessed quick response sprinklers
(a) Semi recessed quick response sprinklers shall be chrome plated, glass
bulb operated rated at 68˚C at 12 Bar.
6) “Sealed” concealed quick response sprinklers
(a) Sealed concealed quick response sprinklers for areas where room
pressurization with respect to surrounding spaces must be maintained by
the mechanical systems shall be fusible solder link recessed sprinkler
with gasketed cover plate rated for 71˚C at 12 Bar.
c. Early Suppression Fast Response Sprinklers
1) Early suppression fast response systems are quick responding, high volume
systems that provide protection for high piled storage occupancies. They
suppress a fire by discharging a high volume of water directly to the fire to
reduce the heat release rate. They deliver large droplets of water at high
velocity to knock down the fire plume.
2) Early suppression fast response sprinklers deliver water at an output rate of
6.3 L/S, which is as much as four times the delivery rate of a standard
sprinkler.
3) Early suppression fast response heads are available in pendant or upright
configurations
4) Properly design early suppression fast response systems can be installed at
the ceiling, and can eliminate the need for in-rack sprinklers in warehouse
spaces
5) Early suppression fast response sprinklers are available at temperature
ratings of 74˚C and 101˚C.
6) ESFR type sprinklers are recommended to be used in large storage areas
with high storage racks

Rev. 0 5.4 - 8
E. Piping and fitting material

1. Pipe
a. Design of all fire suppression systems shall be based on the material requirements
set forth in the NFPA Standards.
b. Material requirements for sprinkler systems shall be as set forth in NFPA 13 –
Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
c. Material requirements for standpipe systems shall be as set forth in NFPA 14 –
Standard for the installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
d. Material requirements for dry chemical extinguishing systems shall be as set forth in
NFPA 17 – Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
e. Supports and anchors for fire suppression system piping and equipment shall be
coordinated with the design requirements in Section 5.2, Structural.
F. Fire Suppression Standpipes
1. Fire Suppression Standpipe Design
a. Fire suppression standpipes shall be designed in strict accordance with the Saudi
Building Code 801 Fire Protection, Section 7.5 Standpipe Systems, with the
International Building Code and with NFPA 14 – Standpipe and Hose Systems. The
Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection shall be the primary reference for sprinkler
system design. The International Building Code and NFPA 14 shall be referenced
for subjects and issues not addressed in the Saudi Building Code.
b. Standpipe classifications shall be in accordance with NFPA 14 – Standpipe and
Hose Systems and the International Building Code Section 905.
c. Provide a standpipe of the proper classification for the given construction in
accordance with the Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection.
d. Provide fire hose valves and cabinets in accordance with the Saudi Building Code
801 Fire Protection and NFPA 14 – Standpipe and Hose Systems.
G. Fire Pumps
1. Design
a. Design fire pumps in strict accordance with the Saudi Building Code 801 Fire
Protection, Section 7.13 Fire Pumps and with NFPA 20 – Installation of Stationary
Pumps. The Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection shall be the primary reference
for fire pump design. NFPA 20 shall be referenced for subjects and issues not
addressed in the Saudi Building Code.
b. Where the building has an emergency generator and the generator can be selected
with adequate capacity to support an electric fire pump, the fire pump should be
electrically driven. Otherwise the fire pumps shall be diesel engine driven.
1) Fuel storage, piping and delivery for diesel driven fire pumps shall be
designed in strict accordance with NFPA 20, and shall be approved by the
RCJ and the AHJ. Single wall fuel storage tanks shall be provided with spill
containment in accordance with NFPA 20.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 9
c. The pump room shall be ventilated in accordance with NFPA 20. For an electric
driven fire pump, provisions shall be made to prevent the room temperature from
exceeding the maximum temperature rating of the motors or any controls in the
room.
1) Ventilation from outdoors shall be drawn through sand trap louvers (refer to
Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.k
d. A jockey pump shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 20. The
minimum flow requirement for the jockey pump shall be based on allowable leakage
per NFPA 20, but shall not be less than the sprinkler flow equivalent of one sprinkler
head.
H. Fire Suppression Systems
1. Automatic Wet Systems
Code 801 Fire Protection Requirements shall be the primary reference for sprinkler
system design. The International Building Code and NFPA shall be referenced for
subjects and issues not addressed in the Saudi Building Code 801.
b. Sprinkler systems for all spaces shall be wet systems unless the release of wet
sprinklers would cause irreparable harm to high value equipment housed in the
space (such as a data processing center). In this instance, a dry-type system shall
be considered. The RCJ shall be consulted and its approval obtained where
designs include dry-type sprinkler systems.
2. Dry Systems
Code 801 Fire Protection shall be the primary reference for sprinkler system design.
The International Building Code and NFPA shall be referenced for subjects and
issues not addressed in the Saudi Building Code.
b. Dry-pipe systems shall be used in areas subject to freezing. In a dry-pipe system,
the piping is charged with compressed air or nitrogen, and the pressure holds a
remote valve, known as a dry-pipe valve closed and prevents the piping from being
charged with water.
1) Dry-pipe systems shall utilize regular closed sprinkler heads
2) The dry-pipe valve must be located in a secure, heated space.
3) Provide means of pressure maintenance in the piping system.
4) Provide monitoring to indicate a reduction of air or nitrogen pressure in the
piping system.
5) The time limits for charging all dry-type sprinkler systems and maximum water
velocities in piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 – Standard for
Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
6) Water filling the piping rapidly causes significant vibration that can cause
poorly anchored pipe to fail. Assure that piping is properly supported and
anchored.
7) Design guidelines are provided in Subsection 5.4.1.D.1.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 10
3. Pre-Action System
Code 801 Fire Protection shall be the primary reference for sprinkler system design.
The International Building Code and NFPA shall be referenced for subjects and
issues not addressed in the Saudi Building Code.
b. Pre-action systems shall be used where release of water over energized equipment
may cause irreparable or costly damage.
1) Pre-action systems shall have dual, cross-zoned detection and shall be
charged through an electrically released pre-action valve.
2) Pre-action systems shall utilize regular closed sprinkler heads
3) Provide alarm after the first zone of detection is activated. Provide abort
switch and 60 second count-down timer for aborting filling the system with
water for up to one minute after second zone of detection.
4) The pre-action valve must be located in a secure space where it can be
maintained. Provide an adequate drain in the space. A floor sink with 75 mm
drain pipe is preferred.
5) Provide means of pressure maintenance in the piping system.
6) Provide monitoring to indicate a reduction of air or nitrogen pressure in the
piping system.
7) The time limits for charging all dry-type sprinkler systems and maximum water
velocities in piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 – Standard for
Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
8) Water filling the piping rapidly causes significant vibration that can cause
poorly anchored pipe to fail. Assure that piping is properly supported and
anchored.
9) Design guidelines are provided in Subsection 5.4.1.D.1.
4. Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
a. Clean agent fire extinguishing systems shall be used in lieu of pre-action sprinkler
systems where release of water over energized equipment may cause irreparable or
costly damage. Obtain the approval from the RCJ and the AHJ prior to designing or
specifying clean agent systems.
b. Clean agent systems shall be designed in strict accordance with Saudi Building
Code 801, Fire Protection Systems, Section 7.4 and NFPA 2001 – Standard for
Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
c. Agent release shall be initiated through a system of dual cross-zoned smoke
detectors.
d. Design shall be designed on the “total flooding” principal.
e. Provide alarm after the first zone of detection is activated. Provide abort switch and
60 second count-down timer for aborting release of agent for up to one minute after
second zone of detection.
f. Coordinate the location of the clean agent canisters with the architect and the
structural engineer, addressing the size and weight of the canisters.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 11
g. Assure that all canisters and piping are properly supported and anchored.
Significant forces result in the piping system when the agent is released.
h. Provide the proper volume of agent plus an acceptable safety factor to provide the
concentration required to extinguish the fire.
i. Confirm with the architect that the volume where the agent will be utilized will be
properly sealed to allow the agent to maintain adequate concentration for sufficient
time to extinguish the fire.
j. Identify on the construction documents the path and means to exhaust the volume
when the fire is extinguished.
5. Fire Suppression Systems for Commercial Kitchen Hoods
a. Fire suppression systems for kitchen hoods shall be designed in strict accordance
with Saudi Building Code 801, Fire Protection Systems, Section 7.4 and NFPA 96 –
Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Appliances.
b. Coordinate the system requirements with the kitchen equipment designer.
c. Assure that grease filters comply with UL 1046 – Standard for Grease Filters for
Exhaust Ducts
d. Assure proper provisions have been made in the design to shut off fuel to the
cooking appliance upon activation of the fire extinguishing system. Shut-off devices
shall be manually reset.
e. Coordinate the requirements for the operation of the ventilation system upon
activation of the extinguishing system with the HVAC designer. Some extinguishing
systems require the ventilation system to continue to operate, while others require
the ventilation system to be de-energized upon activation of the extinguishing
system.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 12
SUBSECTION 5.4.2 PLUMBING
5.4.2. PLUMBING
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection of the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) establishes the Royal
Commission (RCJ) mandatory, minimum accepted plumbing requirements for new
and renovation projects. This section provides:
or modernization for building plumbing systems.
2) The policies and technical information are to be used; however project
conditions may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of GEM are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative systems,
methods, or devices not specifically described herein however the use of alternative
systems, methods, or devices must have prior approval from the RCJ.
c. If a conflict is found between the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), the Guiding
Procurement and Construction Specification (GPCS), and the Typical Construction
Details or Drawings (TCDD), the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the
Royal Commission. The Royal Commission shall provide resolution or direction on
how to proceed.
d. In the event there is a conflict between the GEM and the requirements of the RCJ,
the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ. The Royal Commission
shall provide resolution or direction on how to proceed.
e. The design of RCJ plumbing system requires coordination and integration with other
disciplines such as, but not limited to, the architectural design, structural design,
HVAC design, electrical design, and other disciplines.
2. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2.
b. Atmosphere: The same as outdoors.
c. Concealed Exterior: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures.
d. Concealed Interior: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants.
e. Conditioned: Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling.
f. Exposed Exterior: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
g. Exposed Interior: Exposed to view indoors (not concealed).
h. Finished Space: Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, space above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, tunnels, and interstitial spaces.
i. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,

Rev. 0 5.4 - 13
j. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly,

k. Indoors: Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
l. Outdoors: Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
m. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
n. Unconditioned: Spaces without heating or cooling including ceiling plenums.
3. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Section 2.2.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this section:
1) AGA: American Gas Association
3) ASPE: American Society of Plumbing Engineers
4) ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers
6) AWWA: American Water Works Association
7) ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
8) AWS: American Welding Society
9) CISPI: Cast Iron Soils And Pipe Institute
10) DFU: Drainage Fixture Unit
12) GPCS: Guideline Procurement and Construction Specification
13) IAPMO: International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
14) IP: Ingress Protection
16) NSF: National Standards Foundation
17) OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administrations
18) PPFA: Plastic Pipe and Fitting Association
19) PDI: Plumbing and Drainage Institute
21) SASA: Saudi Arabian Standards Association
23) TCDD: Typical Construction Details or Drawings
24) TDS: Total Dissolved Solids
25) UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
26) WSFU: Water Supply Fixture Unit

Rev. 0 5.4 - 14
a. Material, equipment, products and appurtenances, when available, shall be provided
from an In-Kingdom Manufacturer. Procurement of material, equipment, products
and appurtenances manufactured Out-of-Kingdom shall be approved by the RCJ.
b. Plumbing work shall be completed in full accordance with the respective health and
safety requirements established by:
1) Kingdom of Saudi Arabia – Legislation, Regulation, Standards, and Codes
2) Royal Commission Regulations – Standards, Contractual Conditions, Health
and Safety
c. Drawing Guidelines
1) Plumbing drawings shall follow the organization, scale, and other
requirements for architectural drawings except as otherwise specified in this
Section 5.4.2
5. Codes
a. Plumbing Codes establish the minimum acceptable standard for design and
installation of plumbing systems.
b. The information provided in this Section shall be used to augment sizing methods,
sizing procedures, and design methods and should not be used as the primary basis
of the plumbing design.
c. The latest version of the following Codes establish the minimum requirement for the
design of plumbing systems:
1) Saudi Arabia Building Code 701- Sanitary Requirements
3) International Plumbing Code
4) International Fuel Gas Code
d. In the event of conflict between Codes and this document, the Saudi Building Code
shall govern.
e. For information regarding the Authority Having Jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
6. Standards and References
a. The following is a list of standards which apply to this Section,
1) American Gas Association
2) American Society Of Plumbing Engineers
3) American National Standards Institute
4) American Society Of Sanitary Engineers
5) American Society For Testing And Materials
6) American Society If Testing And Materials
7) American Water Works Association
8) American Welding Society
9) Cast Iron Soils Pipe Institute

Rev. 0 5.4 - 15
10) International Association Of Plumbing And Mechanical Officials

11) National Standards Foundation
12) International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC)
13) National Fire Protection Association
14) National Standards Foundation
15) Occupational Safety And Health Administrations
16) Plastic Pipe And Fitting Association
17) Plumbing And Drainage Institute
18) Saudi Arabian Standards Association
19) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional standards.
c. In the event of conflict between these standards and this document, the more
stringent requirement shall govern.
7. Approvals
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsections 4.2.5, 4.5.9, 5.4.3.B.13
B. Commissioning
1. Requirements
a. Refer to Section 4.5.9
C. Sustainability Design For Plumbing Systems
1. General
a. Refer to Section 3.4 for sustainability requirements.
b. The Royal Commission is committed to energy-efficient design within the limits of
budget constraints and within the bounds of good practice and conforming to Energy
Codes.
c. Buildings shall use water efficient plumbing fixtures, solar water heaters,
components, and appurtenances to reduce:
1) Operating costs
2) Water consumption
3) Sewage discharge
4) Energy
2. Strategies for Increasing Water Efficiency
a. Building Sewage Conveyance
1) Use of water-conserving fixtures
2) Use of captured rain water

Rev. 0 5.4 - 16
3) Use of recycled gray water

b. Do not design or specify
1) Equipment or components that utilize potable water for cooling
2) Water-cooled ice machines
D. Piping Systems
1. Materials
a. Shall be selected using mechanical properties and other specifications in the latest
issue of ASTM Standards Specifications.
b. Shall be selected in consideration of the environmental conditions, ease of
shipment, installation and maintenance.
c. Shall meet applicable system temperature, pressure, and content requirements.
d. Shall meet the requirements of the contract.
e. Due to high ground water aggressiveness, all pipes placed below grade shall have
external protection by using epoxy coating or tape wrap.
f. Supports and anchors for plumbing and other system piping and equipment called
out in this section, shall be coordinated with the design requirements in Section 5.2,
Structural.
2. Installation
a. Pipe shall be installed within shafts, chases, ceiling cavities, or other accessible
locations.
b. No piping shall be embedded in wall or floors.
3. Domestic Hot Water and Cold Water Piping
a. Building hot water piping, cold water piping, and fittings shall conform to NSF 61 and
one of the standards listed in the Saudi Building Code 701, Section 3.5, Materials,
Joints and Connections.
b. Potable water supply shall be determined as potable hot water and cold water by the
RCJ.
c. Structures equipped with plumbing fixtures utilized for human occupancy or
habitation shall be provided with a potable supply of hot and / or cold water in the
volume and pressure required for operation.
d. Where the water pressure is not sufficient to supply the minimum pressure and
quantities require for proper operation of plumbing fixtures and components, the
potable water supply shall be supplemented with a building water storage tank
connected to a hydro-pneumatic pressure booster system, a water pressure booster
system, or an elevated water tank.
e. Piping design shall include provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping
systems, to prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points, and
connections to equipment.
f. Because of the variable conditions encountered in hydraulic design, it is impractical
to provide detailed requirements and rules for sizing water system piping. The water
distribution systems shall be designed and pipe sizes selected based on peak
demand.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 17
g. Design criteria for hot water and cold water piping

1) Determine the minimum static pressure available from the supply source.
(a) It is essential that enough pressure is available to overcome all system
pressure drop caused by friction and building height.
(b) The water systems shall be designed based on the lowest pressure
available to ensure proper operation of plumbing fixtures; Refer to the
Saudi Building Code 701, Section 3.4, Table 3.4.3.
2) Determine the plumbing fixture demand
(a) When determining peak demand, Water Supply Fixture Units (WSFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used; Refer to the International
Plumbing Code, Appendix E - Load Values Assigned to Fixtures Table.
(b) The WSFU is a numerical factor that measures the load producing effect
of a single plumbing fixture.
(c) The WSFU shall then be converted into liters per minute flow rate for
determining pipe sizes; Refer to the International Plumbing Code,
Appendix E – Tables for Estimating Demand.
3) Determine pipe sizes
(a) Based on system pressure requirements and loses
(b) The sum of the liters per minute required for each pipe branch and main
(c) Water flow velocities between 1.5 to 2.4 m/sec
4. Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
a. Building sanitary piping and fittings shall conform to one of the standards listed in
the Saudi Building Code 701, Chapter 4 – Sanitary Drainage Systems.
b. Building vent piping and fittings shall conform to one of the standards listed in the
Saudi Building Code 701, Chapter 5 – Sanitary Drainage Venting Systems.
c. Structures equipped with plumbing fixtures utilized for human occupancy or
habitation shall be connected to the public sewer or an RCJ approved disposal
system.
d. Horizontal drainage piping shall be designed with uniform alignment at uniform
slopes. The minimum velocity of flow to achieve scouring action is 0.60 m per
second.
e. Waste water discharging into the sanitary drainage system shall have a temperature
of 60° C or less. When higher temperatures exist, an approved cooling method
shall be provided.
f. Building sanitary that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly
covered and vented sewage ejector from which the effluent shall be lifted and
discharged into the gravity sanitary system by automatic pumping equipment and
components.
g. Connections and changes in direction shall be designed with drainage fittings. The
fittings shall not have interior ledges, shoulders, or reductions capable of retarding or
obstructing flow.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 18
h. Cleanouts
1) Shall be indicated at every change of horizontal direction greater than 45
degrees. Where more than one change of direction occurs in a run of
piping, only one cleanout is required for each 12 m of developed length of
sanitary pipe.
2) Shall be provided at the base of each drainage stack or riser.
3) At the junction of the building drain and building sewer. The cleanout shall
be located on either the inside or outside of the building wall.
i. Sanitary drainage systems within a building shall be completely independent of the
storm drainage system.
j. Design criteria for sanitary piping
(a) When determining peak drainage demand, Drainage Fixture Units (DFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used. The DFU is a numerical
factor that measures the load producing effect of a single plumbing
fixture; Refer to the Saudi Building Code 701, Section 4.10 - Drainage
System Sizing.
(b) Values for continuous and semi-continuous flow into the drainage system
shall be computed on the basis that 0.06 liters per second is equivalent
to two DFU.
(a) Each pipe branch and main shall be determined based the number of
DFU’s connected; Refer to Saudi Building Code 701, Tables 4.10.1(1)
and 4.10.1(2).
(b) Horizontal stack offsets shall be sized as required for building drains.
(c) Vertical stack offsets shall be sized for straight stacks.
k. Design criteria for vent piping
1) The diameter of individual vents, branch vents, circuit vents, and relief vents
shall be at least one half the required diameter of the drain served.
2) Vent pipes shall not be less than 30 mm in diameter.
3) Vent exceeding 12 m in developed length shall be increased by one nominal
pipe size for the entire developed length of the vent pipe.
5. Storm and Secondary (Emergency) Storm Drainage Piping
a. Building storm and secondary (emergency) storm piping and fittings shall conform to
one of the standards listed in the Saudi Building Code 701, Chapter 6 – Storm
Drainage Systems.
b. Roofs, paved areas, yards, courts, and courtyards shall be drain into the public
storm system or an approved place of disposal.
c. Horizontal drainage piping shall be designed with uniform alignment at uniform
slopes. The minimum velocity of flow to achieve scouring action is 0.60 m per
second.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 19
d. Building storm drains that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly
covered and vented sump from which effluent shall be lifted and discharged into the
gravity drainage system by automatic pumping equipment.
e. Building secondary (emergency) storm discharge shall have a point of discharge
above grade in a location that would typically be observed by building occupants or
maintenance personnel.
f. Connections and changes in direction shall be designed with drainage fittings. The
obstructing flow.
g. Cleanouts
1) Shall be indicated at every horizontal change of direction greater than 45
sanitary pipe.
2) Shall be provided at the base of each drainage stack or riser.
3) At the junction of the building drain and building sewer. The cleanout shall
be located on either the inside or outside of the building wall.
h. Storm drainage and secondary (emergency) storm systems within a building shall be
completely independent from each other and the sanitary drainage system.
i. Design criteria for storm piping
1) The size of vertical storm stacks, horizontal storm mains, and branches shall
be based the local weather data shown in Subsection 5.6.4, Site
Stormwater Drainage. The most stringent criteria shall be used as the basis
of design; Refer to Saudi Building Code 701, Tables 6.6.2 and 6.6.3.
2) Determine the maximum projected square meter drain area for each drain
3) One half of the area of any vertical wall that diverts storm water into the
storm drainage system shall be included into the calculation.
j. Design criteria for secondary (emergency) storm piping
1) The size of the secondary (emergency) storm shall be sized in accordance
with the requirements of the storm drainage system.
6. Compressed Air Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for compressed
air systems however the Compressed Gas Association, The National Fire Protection
Association Standards and ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume
3 – Special Plumbing Systems, Chapter 9 – Compressed Air Systems shall be used
for the basis of design.
b. The compressed air system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that
an adequate volume of air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user requirements, is
delivered during peak demand.
c. The entire compressed air system, including but not limited to air dryer, pre-filters,
after filters, controls shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty structural steel support
frame.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 20
d. Design criteria for compressed air piping

1) Identify each process, work station, or piece of equipment requiring
compressed air.
2) Determine the volume of air and pressure required for each location.
3) Determine the condition requirements for each location, such as the
allowable moisture content, particulate size, and oil content.
4) Determine how much time the individual tool or process will be in actual use
for a one minute period of time (duty cycle).
(a) To determine the duty cycle, the user should be consulted, they are the
only authority capable of providing the length of time an individual tool is
in use
5) Determine maximum number of locations that may be used simultaneously
on each branch and main (use factor).
(a) It may be difficult to accurately determine the simultaneous use factor so
sufficient receiver capacity or larger compressor capacity must be
provided to allow for variances in use.
6) Determine the extent of allowable leakage.
(a) Leakage is a function of the number of connections to the system and
the quality of the pipe assembly.
(b) Many smaller tools and operations will generally have a greater leakage
than a few larger ones.
(c) Leakage rates
(1) A well maintained system may have a leakage rate of approximately
2 to 5 percent.
(2) A typical system may have a leakage rate of approximately 10
percent.
(3) A poorly maintained system may have a leakage rate of
approximately 25 percent.
7) Determine an allowance for future expansion.
8) Determine the developed length of pipe (The length of pipe measured along
the centerline of the pipe and fittings).
9) Determine the equivalent length of pipe (The length of pipe of a specific
diameter that would produce the same frictional resistance of a particular
pipe or line comprised of pipe and fittings).
10) Select the air compressor type, conditioning equipment, equipment location,
and air inlet, making sure that cubic meters / minute, liters / minute, or liters /
second is consistently used for both the system and compressor capacity
rating.
e. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
1) Maximum of 7 kPa pressure drop per 30 m.
2) Maximum friction loss to the furthest outlet of 35 kPa.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 21
f. A properly sized, constantly working air compressor usually requires less

maintenance than a compressor that runs intermittently.
7. Natural Gas Piping
a. Building natural gas piping and fittings shall conform to one of the standards listed in
the International Fuel Gas Code, Chapter 4 – Gas Piping Installation.
b. The system shall be designed to provide a supply of gas sufficient to meet the
maximum demand at no less than the minimum supply pressure associated with
each piece of equipment or component.
c. The two most commonly used gases are natural gas and liquefied petroleum gas.
d. Design criteria for gas piping
1) Determine the minimum gas pressure available.
2) Identify each process, work station or piece of equipment requiring a gas
source.
3) Determine the volume of gas required for each location.
(a) Total connected load based on cubic meter per hour of every device
requiring gas in the building.
4) Determine the pressure range for each location.
(a) The available pressure after the meter could be quite low and requires
that the friction loss through the piping system be kept low.
(a) It may be difficult to accurately determine a simultaneous use factor.
(b) Include Plumbing and HVAC equipment demand.
9) Select the meter, regulator, equipment, equipment location, and
components, based on the equivalent length and total cubic meters / hour
demand.
e. Design criteria for liquefied petroleum gas piping
1) The design criteria for liquefied petroleum gas is similar to natural gas and
natural gas sizing charts however a conversion factor of 0.63 must be
applied to reduce the indicated flow rate.
8. Vacuum Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for vacuum
systems however ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 2 –
Plumbing Systems, Chapter 10 – Vacuum Systems shall be used for the basis of
design.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 22
b. The vacuum system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate vacuum is provided during peak demand.
c. The entire vacuum system shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty structural steel
support frame.
d. Design criteria for vacuum piping
1) Identify each process, work station or piece of equipment requiring vacuum.
2) Determine the vacuum required for each location.
(a) Total connected load based on cubic meter per minute of every device
requiring vacuum in the building.
(a) It is difficult to accurately determine a simultaneous use factor so
sufficient receiver capacity must be provided to allow for variances in
use.
components, based on the equivalent length and total cubic meters per hour
demand.
e. Cleanouts shall be strategically located throughout the piping system to allow for the
removal of debris.
f. A properly sized, constantly working vacuum pump usually requires less
g. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
1) 10 mm for a single connection or short piece of pipe.
2) 20 mm for multiple connections on branch piping.
3) 25 mm for main piping.
E. Equipment
1. Water Softeners
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for water
softeners however the ASPE Plumbing Engineered Design Handbook, Volume 4 –
Plumbing Components And Equipment, Chapter 10 – Water Treatment shall be
used for the basis of design.
b. Water softening, when required, shall reduce and remove dissolved impurities that
cause hardness in water. Water softening shall occur by passing the raw water
through an ion exchange process.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 23
c. Design criteria for water softeners

1) Perform a water analysis.
(a) Check with local authorities for water analysis.
2) Determine water consumption.
(a) Based on ASPE or Manufacturer sizing charts.
3) Determine continuous and peak flow rates.
(a) Use the fixture count flow rate from domestic hot water and cold water
sizing information.
(b) Obtain flow rates for equipment requiring softened water.
4) Determine water pressure.
(a) Water pressure at the service entrance.
(b) Water pressure at the most remote plumbing fixture or piece of
equipment.
(c) Determine the capacity of the softener.
(1) Liters per day x grains per liter = Grains per day.
(2) Select the smallest unit that can handle the maximum capacity
between regeneration with a low salt dosage.
(3) Avoid sizing unit with a high dosage requirement unless there is a
reason to do so, such as high pressure boilers.
2. Water Heaters
1) No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for water
heaters however the ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications, Chapter 50
– Service Water Heating shall be used for the basis of design.
2) Shall be sized based on the total volume of hot water required for the
estimated duration of maximum demand. This total volume shall be
determined based on a combination of hot water storage and the water
heater recovery rate.
3) The objective for a domestic hot water distribution system includes:
(a) Providing adequate quantity of hot water at prescribed temperatures to
all fixtures and equipment at any time.
(b) Provide a system that will perform its function safely.
(c) Utilizes an economical heat source.
(d) Provide a cost-effective, efficient, and durable installation.
(e) Provide an economical operating system with reasonable maintenance.
4) Water heater sizing shall be determined by one of the following:
(a) Number of hot water plumbing fixtures - This sizing method calculates
anticipated volume in liters of hot water for the peak duration of use and
storage tank capacity.
(b) Population - This sizing method calculates anticipated volume when the
quantity of plumbing fixtures does not correlate to the quantity of people.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 24
(c) Pluming fixture flow rates - This sizing method is typically utilized for
specialized buildings, such as convention centers, sports areas,
gymnasiums, etc…. where peak usage periods occur.
b. Storage Tank Water Heaters
1) Design criteria based on quantity of fixtures
(a) Determine total number of each type of plumbing fixture and assign the
liter per hour value for each fixture based on building type and system
demand value.
(b) Multiply the quantity of each fixture by the building type system demand
value.
(c) Add the sum of all individual fixtures system demand together to obtain a
total connected load in liters of water per hour.
(d) Find the actual hourly demand by multiplying the total connected load by
a demand factor. This calculation will provide the actual volume of hot
water that will be required during a one hour period of time.
(e) In addition to the hourly hot water demand determine the quantity of hot
water that will be stored.
(1) Storage capacity shall be determined by multiplying the total
connected hot water demand by a storage capacity factor.
(2) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold
water correction factor.
2) Design criteria based on population
(a) Determine the population of the building.
(b) Using a recovery, storage capacity curve chart, determine the desired
storage and recovery per person.
(c) Determine the total required recovery, storage capacity by multiplying the
population.
(d) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold water
correction factor.
(e) Add a system heat loss of 15 kJ / meter run of pipe to the gallon per hour
recovery to make up for the heat loss of the entire system. Note: This is
only required in the population method because no consideration for heat
loss was made in the hot water usage criteria.
3) Design criteria based on flow rate
(a) Determine the hours or minutes of peak use.
(b) Determine the typical flow rate for all fixtures contributing to flow during
peak duration.
(c) Determine the amount of time the fixtures will actually be utilized during
the peak duration.
(d) Select a combination recovery rate and storage tank capacity that will
supply the calculated amount of hot water during the peak duration.
c. Instantaneous and Semi-Instantaneous Water Heaters

Rev. 0 5.4 - 25
1) Instantaneous and semi-instantaneous water heater sizing shall be

determined by the quantity of plumbing fixtures. This sizing method
calculates anticipated volume in liters of hot water for the peak duration of
use and storage tank capacity.
2) Design criteria based on number of fixtures
(a) Count the total number of each type of fixture and assign the liter per
hour value for each fixture based on building type and demand value.
(b) Multiply the quantity of each fixture by the building type demand value.
(c) Add the sum of all individual fixtures together to obtain a total connected
load in liters of water per hour.
d. Solar Water Heaters
1) Efficiency cost of solar collectors, system installation costs, and availability of
other fuels shall determine whether solar energy collections units should be
used as a primary heat source.
2) Solar energy equipment and components can also be utilized to supplement
other energy source water heaters.
3) The basic elements of a solar water heater include solar collectors, storage
tank, piping, controls, and transfer medium.
4) Collector design shall provide uniform flow distribution in the collector bank
and stratification in the storage tank.
5) Application of solar water shall depend on
(a) Auxiliary energy requirements
(b) Collector orientation
(c) Temperature of the cold water
(d) Site conditions
(e) Installation requirements
(f) Available area for collectors
(g) Amount of storage required
6) Three types of active solar water heating systems include
(a) Direct circulation system: Use pumps to circulate pressurized potable
water directly through the collectors.
(b) Indirect circulation system: Pump heat transfer fluids through the
collectors.
(c) Passive solar systems: Rely on gravity and the tendency for water to
naturally circulate as it is heated.
7) Design criteria based on number of fixtures
(a) Determine total number of each type of plumbing fixture and assign the
liter per hour value for each fixture based on building type and system
demand value.
(b) Multiply the quantity of each fixture by the building type system demand
value.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 26
(c) Add the sum of all individual fixtures system demand together to obtain a
total connected load in liters of water per hour.
(d) Find the actual hourly demand by multiplying the total connected load by
a demand factor. This calculation will provide the actual volume of hot
water that will be required during a one hour period of time.
(e) In addition to the hourly hot water demand determine the quantity of hot
water that will be stored.
(1) Storage capacity shall be determined by multiplying the total
connected hot water demand by a storage capacity factor.
(2) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold
water correction factor.
(f) Determine quantity of solar collectors, storage tank size, and component
requirements.
8) Design criteria based on population
(a) Determine the population of the building.
(b) Using a recovery, storage capacity curve chart, determine the desired
storage and recovery per person.
(c) Determine the total required recovery, storage capacity by multiplying the
population.
(d) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold water
correction factor.
(e) Add a system heat loss of 15 BTU / meter run of pipe to the gallon per
hour recovery to make up for the heat loss of the entire system. Note:
This is only required in the population method because no consideration
for heat loss was made in the hot water usage criteria.
(f) Determine quantity of solar collectors, storage tank size, and component
requirements.
9) Design criteria based on flow rate
(a) Determine the hours or minutes of peak use.
(b) Determine the typical flow rate for all fixtures contributing to flow during
peak duration.
(c) Determine the amount of time the fixtures will actually be utilized during
the peak duration.
(d) Select a combination recovery rate and storage tank capacity that will
supply the calculated amount of hot water during the peak duration.
(e) Determine quantity of solar collectors, storage tank size, and component
requirements.
3. Pumps
a. Domestic Water Booster Pumps
1) Building domestic water booster pumps shall conform to the requirements of
the International Plumbing Code, Chapter 6 – Water Supply And Distribution

Rev. 0 5.4 - 27
and the ASPE Plumbing Engineered Design Handbook, Volume 2 –

Plumbing Systems, Chapter 5 – Cold Water Systems.
2) Two types of pressure booster pump drives can be utilized for adjusting the
pressure and flow in the building water distribution system:
(a) Constant speed drive – This type of drive is recommended where water
demands are relatively constant and low-to-medium boost pressure is
required.
(b) Variable speed drive – This type of drive is recommended where there
are large fluctuations in the water main supply pressure to the pump,
there is a requirement for a high pressure boost, or there is a great
variation expected in the system water demand.
3) Water pressure booster pump shall be a multiplex packaged system
provided with pump suction to facility water storage holding tank, motors,
control equipment, ASME hydro-pneumatic tank, valves, fittings, manifolds
and associated appurtenances.
4) It should be assumed that a water pressure booster pump is required. The
water pressure booster pump selection shall be determined based on the
following design criteria
(a) Determine the minimum static pressure available from the supply source.
(b) Determine the building height.
(c) Determine the developed length of pipe (The length of pipe measured
along the centerline of the pipe and fittings).
(d) Determine the equivalent length of pipe (The length of pipe of a specific
(e) Determine the minimum operating pressure of the farthest plumbing
fixture from the booster pump.
(f) Calculate total dynamic head for the booster pump based on available
pressure, pressure loss through system, and minimum pressure required
at the most remote plumbing fixture.
(g) A hydro-pneumatic tank should be incorporated into the booster pump
system design to meet low flow demand without operating a pump.
b. Sump Pumps
1) Building sump pumps shall conform to the requirements of the International
Plumbing Code, Chapter 11 – Storm Drainage and the ASPE Plumbing
Engineered Design Handbook, Volume 2 – Plumbing Systems, Chapter 1 –
Sanitary Drainage Systems.
2) Building drains that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly
covered and vented receiver from which effluent shall be lifted and
discharged into the gravity drainage system by automatic pumping
equipment.
3) There are three types of pumps that can be utilized
(a) Submersible pump with receiver – The submersible pump system is
totally submerged in the effluent within a receiver.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 28
(b) Wet-pit receiver with vertical lift pump – The vertical lift system utilizes a
vertical shaft centrifugal pump and separate driver, both mounted on the
receiver cover.
(c) Wet-pit receiver with cantilever, self-priming pump – The cantilever type
utilizes horizontal centrifugal pump and close-coupled driver mounted on
the receiver cover. A suction pipe is cantilevered from the pump down
into the receiver.
4) The pump type shall be determined by
(a) Range of head and capacity for the motor and impeller combinations.
(b) Floor space requirements.
(c) Pump and bearing construction.
(d) Type of liquids to be pumped.
(e) Headroom available to remove pump and impeller.
5) Duplex pumping systems shall be provided and control shall be based on
level of effluent in the basin.
6) Design criteria for sump pumps
(a) Pump head shall be calculated by adding the static height from the
bottom of the basin to a level one meter above the anticipated highest
point of discharge and friction loss of effluent through the pump
discharge system. The calculation shall be calculated based on both
pumps running.
(b) The pump shall be sized based on the pump running time of 1 to five
minutes, with an optimum of six starts per hour. If these conditions
cannot be achieved, the least amount of starts per hour shall be the
basis of design.
(c) The receiver shall be sized based on
(1) From the invert of the inlet pipe, allow approximately 150 mm to the
high water alarm.
(2) From the high water alarm, allow approximately 150 mm to pump
two starts.
(3) From pump two start, allow approximately 150 mm to pump one
start.
(4) Below pump one start, the dimension of liquid capacity shall be
determined based on a 1 to 5 minute operating period for a pump.
The lower level of the storage portion is pump stop.
(5) Allow approximately 150 mm from pump stop to inlet of pump.
(6) Allow approximately 300 mm to the receiver bottom from the inlet of
the pump.
(d) Sump pump discharge pipe shall be a minimum of 50 mm. Pipe sizes
can be larger to lessen the friction loss in the discharge piping system, if
this results in a reduction of the motor size.
c. Sewage Ejector Pumps

Rev. 0 5.4 - 29
1) Building sewage ejector pumps shall conform to the requirements of the

International Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 – Sanitary Drainage and the ASPE
Plumbing Engineered Design Handbook, Volume 2 – Plumbing Systems,
Chapter 1 – Sanitary Drainage Systems.
2) Building sanitary that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a
tightly covered and vented receiver from which effluent shall be lifted and
discharged into the gravity sanitary system by automatic pumping
equipment.
3) There are three types of pumps that can be utilized, all of which shall be
non-clogging and be able to pass a 75mm solid.
(a) Submersible pump with receiver: The submersible pump system is
totally submerged in the effluent within a receiver.
(b) Wet-pit receiver with vertical lift pump: The vertical lift system utilizes a
vertical shaft centrifugal pump and separate driver, both mounted on the
receiver cover.
(c) Wet-pit receiver with cantilever, self-priming pump: The cantilever type
utilizes horizontal centrifugal pump and close-coupled driver mounted on
the receiver cover. A suction pipe is cantilevered from the pump down
into the receiver.
4) The pump type shall be determined by
(a) Range of head and capacity for the motor and impeller combinations.
(b) Floor space requirements.
(c) Pump and bearing construction.
(d) Type of liquids to be pumped
(e) Headroom available to remove pump and impeller.
5) Duplex pumping systems shall be provided and control shall be based on
level of effluent in the basin.
6) Design criteria for sewage ejector pumps
bottom of the basin to a level one meter above the anticipated highest
point of discharge and friction loss of effluent through the pump
discharge system. The calculation shall be calculated based on both
pumps running.
(b) The pump shall be sized based on the pump running time of 1 to five
minutes, with an optimum of six starts per hour. If these conditions
cannot be achieved, the least amount of starts per hour shall be the
basis of design.
(c) The receiver shall be sized based on:
(1) From the invert of the inlet pipe, allow approximately 150 mm to the
high water alarm.
(2) From the high water alarm, allow approximately 150 mm to pump
two starts.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 30
(3) From pump two start, allow approximately 150 mm to pump one
start.
(4) Below pump one start, the dimension of liquid capacity shall be
determined based on a 1 to 5 minute operating period for a pump.
The lower level of the storage portion is pump stop.
(5) Allow approximately 150 mm from pump stop to inlet of pump.
(6) Allow approximately 300 mm to the receiver bottom from the inlet of
the pump.
(d) Sewage ejector pump discharge pipe shall be a minimum of 100 mm.
Pipe sizes can be larger to lessen the friction loss in the discharge piping
system, if this results in a reduction of the motor size.
d. Elevator Pit Pumps
1) Building elevator pit pumps shall conform to the requirements of the
International Building Code, Chapter 30 – Elevators And Conveying Systems
And ASME Safety Code For Elevators And Escalators.
2) Permanent provisions shall be provided to prevent the accumulation of
ground water in the elevator pit.
3) Design criteria for elevator pit pumps
bottom of the elevator pit to a level one meter above the anticipated
highest point of discharge and friction loss of effluent through the pump
discharge system.
(b) The elevator pit pump shall have the capability to discharge 11,356 LPH
4) Sump pump discharge pipe shall be a minimum of 50 mm.
4. Facility Water Storage Tanks
a. The capacity of the facility water storage tank shall be determined based on the type
of building and number of units shown for that type of building shown in the table
below and storage requirements.
Water Flow (L / d / unit)

Source Unit Range Typical
Airport Passenger 8 - 15 10
Automobile service station Vehicle 30 - 50 40
Employee 35 - 60 50
Hotel Guest 150 - 220 190
Employee 30 - 50 40
Industrial Building Employee 3 -65 55
Laundry Machine 1800 - 2595 2195
Wash 180 - 200 190
Motel Person 90 -150 120
Motel with Kitchen Person 190 -220 200
Office Employee 30 - 65 55

Rev. 0 5.4 - 31
Water Flow (L / d / unit)

Source Unit Range Typical
Restaurant Meal 8 - 15 10
Rooming House Resident 90 - 190 150
Toilet
Store Department Room 1600 - 2400 2000
Employee 30 - 50 40
Parking
Store Center space 2-8 4
Employee 30 -50 40
Hospital, medical Bed 500 - 950 650
Employee 20 - 60 40
Hospital, mental Bed 300 - 650 400
Employee 20 - 60 40
Rest Home Resident 200 - 450 350
Employee 20 -60 40
School, day
With cafeteria, gym, shower Student 60 - 115 80
With cafeteria only Student 40 - 80 60
Without cafeteria, gym, shower Student 20 -65 40
School, boarding Student 200 - 400 40
Apartment Person 200 - 280 220
Cafeteria Customer 4 - 10 6
Employee 30 - 50 40
Meal
Dining Hall served 15 - 50 30
Dormitory Person 75 - 175 150
Theater Seat 10 - 15 10
a. Design criteria for facility water storage tanks

1) Determine the total units required for the building type.
2) Multiply the total number of units by the typical water flow value.
3) This will be the daily water use. Determine the number of days of storage
required and multiply by the daily water use.
4) Add the constant uses of water, such as HVAC make-up, fire protection
water storage, and any process requirements to the plumbing water storage.
5) Select a tank size equal to or exceeding the total of the sum of the quantities
stated above.
5. Interceptors
a. Types include but are not limited to
1) Grease Interceptor

Rev. 0 5.4 - 32
(a) Building grease interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the

Saudi Building Code 701, Section 4.19.
(b) A grease interceptor shall receive the drainage form fixtures and
equipment with grease-laden waste located in food preparation areas.
Grease interceptors shall receive waste only from fixtures and equipment
that allow fats, oils or grease to be discharged.
(c) Where food grinders connect to grease interceptors, a solids interceptor
shall separate the discharge before connecting to grease interceptor.
(1) Solids separators and grease interceptors shall be sized and rated
for the discharge of the food waste grinder.
(2) Emulsifiers, chemicals, enzymes and bacteria shall not discharge
into the food waste grinder.
(d) Grease interceptors shall have the grease retention capacity comparable
with the established flow-through rates.
(e) Grease interceptors shall be designed so as not to become air bound
where tight covers are utilized. Each interceptor shall be vented where
subject to a loss of trap seal.
(f) Grease interceptors shall be equipped with devices to control the rate of
water flow so it does not exceed the rated flow. The flow-control device
shall be vented and terminate not less than 150 mm above the flood rim
level or be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(g) Design Criteria
(1) Determine cubic volume of each plumbing fixture that will connected
to the grease interceptor.
(2) Convert cubic volume of each plumbing fixture that will connect to
the grease interceptor into liters.
(3) Determine the actual drainage load. Typically the drainage load is
equivalent to 75% of the fixture capacity.
(4) Determine flow rate and drainage period. Typically a one minute
drain period is utilized however a two minute drainage period is
permitted based on project limitations.
(5) Select grease interceptor based on calculated flow rate.
2) Solids Interceptors
(a) Building solids interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the
(b) Solids interceptors for heavy solids shall be designed and located so as
to be provided with ready access for cleaning, and shall have a water
seal of not less than 150 mm.
(c) Design Criteria
(1) Determine the liters-per-minute rate of flow through the drainage
piping into the interceptor.
(2) Determine the probable amount of substances to be separated.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 33
(3) Select interceptor size based on flow rate and separation

requirements. Solids interceptors shall be sized to ensure solids
will not be carried through the interceptor.
3) Lint Interceptors
(a) Building lint interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi
Building Code 701, Section 4.19.
(b) Laundry facilities not installed within individual dwelling units or intended
for individual family use shall be provided with an interceptor with a wire
basket or similar device, removable for cleaning, that prevents passage
of solids 10 mm or larger in size, string, rags, buttons or other materials
detrimental to the public sewage system.
(c) Design Criteria
(1) Determine quantity of washing machines that will be connected to
the interceptor.
(2) Select interceptor size based on quantity of washing machines
connected, flow rate and pipe connection size.
4) Sediment Interceptors
(a) Building sediment interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the
(b) Sands and sediment interceptors shall be designed and located so as to
be provided with ready access for cleaning, and shall have a water seal
of not less than 150 mm.
(c) Design Criteria
(1) Determine the liters-per-minute rate of flow through the drainage
piping into the interceptor.
(2) Determine the probable amount of substances to be separated.
(3) Select interceptor size based on flow rate and separation
requirements. Sediment interceptors shall be sized to ensure
sediments will not be carried through the interceptor.
5) Types include but are not limited to
(a) Oil Separators
(1) Building oil interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the
(2) Oil separators shall be required at repair garages, car-washing
facilities, at factories where oily and flammable liquid wastes are
produced and in hydraulic elevator pits, before emptying the
discharge into the building drainage system or other point of
disposal.
6) Design Criteria
(a) The American Petroleum Institute (API) has established criteria for the
large scale removal of globules larger than 150 micrometers and shall be
used when sizing oil separators:

Rev. 0 5.4 - 34
(1) The horizontal velocity through the separator may be up to 15 times

the velocity of the slowest-rising globule, up to a maximum of 0.91
m per second).
(2) The depth of flow in the separator shall be within 0.9 to 2.4 m.
(3) The width of the separator shall be between 1.8 to 6.1 m.
(4) The depth-to-width ratio shall be between 0.3 and 0.5
(5) An oil retention baffle shall be located no less than 305 mm
downstream from the skimming device.
(6) Separators shall be designed so as not to become air bound where
tight covers are utilized. Each separator shall be vented where
subject to a loss of trap seal.
6. Special Waste Systems
a. Infectious and biological waste systems have the same basic characteristics as
other types of laboratory and production facility waste, but with the addition of bio-
hazardous materials. Bio-Hazardous material is material suspended in the waste
stream with live organisms that, if not contained, have the potential to cause
infection, sickness, and other various diseases.
b. Bio-hazardous waste may be discharged from many sources including
1) Fermentation tanks and equipment
2) Process centrifuges
3) Sink, both hand washing and process
4) Containment area floor drains
5) Janitor closet drains
6) Necropsy table drains
7) Autoclave drains
8) Contaminated condensate drains
c. Containment design shall conform to acceptable and appropriate containment
practices based on the hazard potential.
d. The classifications for biological containment consist of four different bio-safety
levels
1) Biosafety Level 1 (BSL1) Containment: This is typical biological research
facility classification for work with low hazard agents.
(a) Viable microorganisms not known to cause disease in healthy adults.
(b) Standard features consist of easily cleaned, impervious bench surfaces
and hand wash sinks.
(c) Contaminated liquid and solid waste shall be treated to remove biological
hazards before disposal.
2) Biosafety Level 2 (BSL2) Containment: This level is similar to biosafety
level 1 except the microorganisms may pose some risk.
(a) Equipment and work surfaces shall be wiped down with a suitable
disinfectant.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 35
(b) All liquid wastes shall be immediately decontaminated by mixing with a

suitable disinfectant.
3) Biosafety Level 3 (BSL3) Containment: Involves organisms posing a
significant risk or represents a potentially serious threat to health and safety.
(a) Liquid waste is kept within the space or facility and steam sterilization
prior to discharge or disposal.
(b) A hand washing sink routed to sterilization shall be locate adjacent to the
facility.
(c) Vents from plumbing fixtures shall be filtered.
4) Biosafety Level 4 (BSL4) Containment: Activities in this type of facility
require a very high level of containment.
(a) The organisms present have life threatening potential and may initiate a
serious epidemic disease.
(b) All BSL3 requirements apply plus showers shall be provided for
personnel at the air lock where clothes are changed upon entry and exit.
(c) A bio-waste treatment system shall be provided within a facility to
sterilize liquid waste.
e. Liquid waste decontamination system shall be provided to collect and sterilize
decontaminants in liquid waste. System components include
1) Sump Pit: Shall consist of a gasketed water proof cover with controls
similar to those provided for a plumbing sump pump with the provisions for
chemical treatment and sterilization.
2) Kill Tank Assembly: Shall consist of a duplex tank arrangement, allowing
one batch to be decontaminated while the other is filling.
(a) Tank size shall be based on facility type however common practice is for
each tank to have the capacity to contain one day’s effluent plus the
chemicals used for decontamination.
(b) A fully automatic control system shall be provided to ensure that
chemicals are injected in the correct amounts and for the required
duration for deactivation of the bio-matter.
3) Drainage System: The drainage system shall be closed with sealed floor
drains and valved connections to equipment when not in use.
(a) Floor drains shall have a minimum seal of 65 mm deeper than the
negative difference in air pressure.
(b) Floor drains shall be filled with a disinfectant solution when not used to
eliminate the possibility of spreading organisms between different areas
served by the same connected sections of the piping system.
(c) Drainage pipe material shall be based on the expected chemical
composition of the effluent and the sterilization method.
(d) Treated discharge from a containment system shall be piped completely
separate from the sanitary piping until it reaches the exterior of the
facility. Prior to connecting to the sanitary drainage system, the treated
discharge shall be provided with a monitoring system and sampling port.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 36
7. Backflow Preventers
a. Building backflow preventers shall conform and be provided in accordance with the
requirements of the Saudi Building Code 701, Section 3.8.
b. The potable water system shall be designed to prevent contamination from non-
potable liquids, solids, or gases being introduced into the potable water system
supply through cross contamination.
c. Backflow preventers shall be “Lead Free” and selected based on degree of hazard
1) Reduced pressure backflow preventer for high and low hazard applications
(a) Shall conform to ASSE 1013; AWWA C511-92, NSF 61, and be certified
for continuous application.
(b) Shall be provided with non-rising stem shut off valves on inlet and outlet;
test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with air-gap fitting
located between two positive-seating check valves.
2) Dual Check backflow preventer for low hazard applications
(a) Shall conform to ASSE 1012, ASSE 1024, NSF 61 and be certified for
continuous pressure application.
(b) Shall be provided with inlet screen, two independent check valves, and
intermediate atmospheric vent.
d. Clearances
1) Location of backflow preventers shall be designed not to require platforms,
ladders, or lifts to access. Adequate clearances from floors, ceilings and
walls is as follows:
(a) Backflow assemblies shall be designed with a centerline height from 760
mm to 1525 mm above the floor.
(b) RPZ backflow assemblies shall be designed with a 460 mm minimum
clearance between the bottom of the relief valve and the floor.
(c) A minimum of 300 mm of clear space shall be maintained above
backflow assemblies to allow for servicing check valves and for operation
of shut-off valves.
(d) A minimum of 200 mm of clearance shall be maintained from the back
side of the backflow assembly to the nearest wall or obstruction.
8. Trap Seal Primer Valve
a. Each fixture trap shall have a liquid seal of not less than 50 mm and not more than
100 mm, or deeper for special design related to accessible fixtures.
b. Where trap seal is subject to loss by evaporation, a trap seal primer valve shall be
provided.
c. Trap seal primer valves shall connect to the trap at a point above the level of the
trap seal.
d. Shall conform to ASSE 1018 or ASSE 1044.
9. Water Meters
a. Domestic water meters are available in four different types:

Rev. 0 5.4 - 37
1) Disc Meter: This type of meter shall be provided for residential and small
commercial installations and is adaptable for remote readout systems
2) Compound Meter: This type of meter shall be provided when most of the
water flow is low, but flows are anticipated.
3) Turbine Meter: The type of meter has the characteristics of a compound
meter, but is more suitable for systems associated with a variety of flows.
4) Propeller Meter: This type of meter shall be provided where low flow never
occurs
b. Requirements
1) Shall have capability of continuous operation up to the rated maximum flow
as listed by the manufacturer without effecting accuracy or any component
wear.
2) Measuring chamber shall consist of measuring element, removable housing,
and electric register
3) Shall operate properly without leakage, damage, or malfunction up to a
maximum working pressure at 1379 KPA
4) Shall be located outside of building in a meter vault. Exact location shall be
coordinated with Civil Engineer. See Civil Section 5.7.1.H.7 Flow Meters and
Services.
c. Design Criteria
1) The following shall be used in selecting a water meter
(a) Building type
(b) Minimum and maximum demand in liters per minute
(c) Water pressure available where the meter will be installed
(d) Size of building water service
(e) Pressure loss related to system piping, valves, and elevation pressure
loss.
(f) Refer to AWWA M22 for additional guidelines
10. Pressure Gauges
a. Pressure gauges shall be installed so as to be readable from the floor.
b. Shall be provided where differential pressure information is needed such as on
suction and discharge connections to pumps, at domestic water heaters, strainers,
etc.
c. Shall be capable of reading to approximately twice the working pressure with an
accuracy +1/2 of 1 percent.
d. Shall be provided with:
1) 115 mm diameter aluminum case with chrome slip ring, white face, with
black figure gradations.
2) High-grade shutoff cocks shall be provided between gauge and piping to
permit gauge removal while system is under pressure.
11. Thermometers

Rev. 0 5.4 - 38
a. Thermometers shall be installed so as to be readable from the floor.

b. Shall be provided where temperature information is needed such as at domestic
water heaters, hot water systems, hot water return systems, discharge temperature
of mixing valve, water service entrance, etc.
c. Shall be provided with
1) Shall be 225 mm scale, organic liquid filled thermometers with cast
aluminum case and clear glass window, and shall read degrees Celsius.
2) 150 mm stem and 65 mm brass extension neck.
3) Scale range shall be -1°C - 85°C
4) 2°C scale divisions.
F. Plumbing Fixtures
1. Quantities
a. Building plumbing fixtures and quantities shall conform to the requirements of the
Saudi Building Code 701, Chapter 2- Fixtures, Faucets and Fixture Fittings.
b. Coordinate plumbing fixture location, style, quantities, and clearance requirements
with architect.
2. Quality
a. Plumbing fixtures shall be constructed of approved materials, with smooth,
impervious surface, free from defects and concealed fouling surfaces.
3. Type
a. Accessible plumbing facilities and fixtures shall be provided in accordance with the
Saudi Building Code 201, Chapter 9- Accessibility.
b. Water Closets
1) Flush Valve Type, wall or floor mounted:
(a) Water closet shall be 3 LPF vitreous china with elongated bowl, siphon
jet flush action, and 40 mm inlet spud.
(b) Standard mounting height (wall mounted) shall be 380 mm from rim to
floor.
(c) ADA mounting height (wall mounted) shall be 430 mm rim to floor.
(d) Toilet seat shall be extra heavy weight, solid plastic injection molded,
elongated open front, with external stainless steel check hinges and
posts.
(e) Flush valve shall be manual or sensor operated based on building type.
2) Flush Tank Type, floor mounted:
(a) Water closet shall be 3 LPF vitreous china with tank and elongated bowl,
with flushing device, trip lever, and flow control.
(b) Toilet seat shall be extra heavy weight, solid plastic injection molded,
elongated closed front with cover, external stainless steel check hinges
and posts.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 39
c. Bidet, floor mounted

1) Bidet shall be vitreous china with flushing rim, vertical cleansing spray,
integral overflow, with deck mounted controls.
d. Sink
1) Toilet Room
(a) Wall Hung
(1) Vitreous china, with front over flow, self-draining deck area with
contoured back and side splash shields and faucet ledge.
Mounting height shall be 865 mm rim to floor.
(2) Faucet shall be manual or sensor operated. Type of faucet shall be
determined based on project type and Owner requirements.
(b) Countertop Drop-In
(1) Vitreous china with front over flow, self-draining deck area, and
faucet ledge.
(c) Under Countertop Mount
(1) Vitreous china, front over flow, and unglazed rim for under
countertop mount.
2) Kitchen
(a) Countertop Drop In
(1) Type 302 nickel bearing stainless steel self-rim sink. Sink shall be
seamlessly drawn, with undercoated bottom. Compartment and
deck shall be recessed 5 mm below outside edge of sink.
(b) Under Countertop Mount
(1) Type 302 nickel bearing stainless steel. Sink shall be seamlessly
drawn, with under countertop mount and under coated bottom.
3) Bathtub
(a) Shall be one piece recess bath with acid resisting heavy gauge porcelain
enameled steel, sloped back, and patterned slip resistant bottom.
(b) Shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z112.19.4M and ASTM F-462 slip
resistance.
(c) Shall have outside dimensions of 1524 mm long x 762 mm wide x 356
mm high.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 40
(d) Shall be provided with tempering water valve, integral volume control,
built-in temperature limit stop, shower head, arm, and flange.
4) Showers
(a) Rectangular Enclosure
(1) Shower shall be a molded seamless acrylic enclosure with integral
soap tray.
(2) Shower shall have a backside flame spread rating of less than 30
and shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z124.2.
(3) Shower shall have outside dimensions of 1040 mm wide x 940 mm
wide x 2135 mm high.
(4) Shower shall be pre-drilled and provided with:
(i) One 610 mm vertical grab bar with mounting plates
(ii) One 787 mm x 381 mm wrap around grab bar with mounting
plates.
(iii) Molded soap tray
(iv) One stainless steel curtain rod with mounting plates
(v) Brass drain with stainless steel strainer
(5) Shower shall be provided with a tempering water valve, integral
volume control, built-in temperature limit stop, shower head, arm,
and flange.
(b) Square Enclosure
(1) Shower shall be a molded seamless acrylic shower enclosure with
integral soap tray and fold up seat.
and shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z124.2
(3) Shower shall have inside dimensions of 915 mm x 915 mm x 2135
mm high.
(4) Enclosure shall be pre-drilled and provided with:
plates
(iv) One stainless steel curtain rod with mounting plates
(v) Brass drain with stainless steel strainer
(5) Shower shall be provided with a tempering water valve, integral
volume control, built-in temperature limit stop, shower head, arm,
and flange.
(c) Roll In Enclosure (Handicapped)
(1) Shower shall be a molded seamless acrylic shower enclosure with
integral soap tray.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 41
and shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z124.2
(3) Shower shall have inside dimensions of 915 mm x 915 mm x 2135
mm high.
(4) Enclosure shall be pre-drilled and provided with:
plates
(iv) One fold up seat
(v) One stainless steel curtain rod with mounting plates
(vi) Brass drain with stainless steel strainer
(vii) Provide with tempering water valve, integral volume control,
built-in temperature limit stop, shower head, arm, flange, and
hand held shower.
e. Electric Water Coolers
1) Single (Wall Mounted)
(a) Self-contained, wall hung electric refrigerated water cooler with self-
closing push bars on front and both sides.
(b) Provide with stainless steel finish and stainless steel bubbler.
(c) Standard mounting height shall be 1015 mm from bubbler top to floor
(d) ADA mounting height shall be 915 mm from bubbler top to floor.
2) Bi-Level (Wall Mounted)
(a) Self-contained, bi-level wall hung electric refrigerated water cooler with
self-closing push bars on front and apron for upper unit.
3) Single (Recessed)
(a) Self-contained, recess mounted electric refrigerated water cooler with
self-closing push bars on front.
4) Bi-Level (Recessed)
(a) Self-contained, bi-level recess mounted electric refrigerated water cooler
with self-closing push bars on front and apron for upper unit.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 42
f. Service Sinks
1) Floor Mounted (Square)
(a) Terrazzo mop basin, 610 mm x 610 mm x 305 mm with, integral drain.
(b) Provide with Service Faucet, Hose / Bracket, and Mop Hanger, stainless
steel caps on all curbs, and stainless steel wall guards.
2) Floor Mounted (Rectangular)
(a) Terrazzo mop basin, 915 mm x 610 mm x 305 mm with, integral drain.
(b) Provide with Service Faucet, Hose / Bracket, and Mop Hanger, stainless
steel caps on all curbs, and stainless steel wall guards.
3) Wall Mounted
(a) Enameled cast iron service sink with, 610 mm x 510 mm bowl with 230
mm back splash, wall hanger, rim guard, and trap.
(b) Provide with Service Faucet, Hose / Bracket, and Mop Hanger.
g. Floor Drain
1) Toilet Room
(a) Cast iron body with bottom outlet, trap primer connection, combination
membrane clamp and adjustable collar with strainer.
2) Mechanical Room
(a) Cast iron body with bottom outlet, seepage pan, combination membrane
clamp and cast iron slotted grate.
h. Roof Drains
1) Primary
(a) 380 mm diameter with cast iron body, roof sump receiver, under deck
clamp, adjustable extension, and combination membrane flashing
clamp/gravel guard.
2) Secondary (Emergency)
(a) 380 mm diameter with cast iron body, roof sump receiver, under deck
clamp, adjustable extension, 50 mm water dam and combination
membrane flashing clamp/gravel guard.
G. Laboratory Piping And Appurtenances
1. Materials

Rev. 0 5.4 - 43
2. Installation
locations.
b. No piping shall be in-bedded in wall or floors.
3. Non-Potable Hot and Cold Water Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed for non-potable hot and cold
water piping and fittings however they shall conform one of the standards listed in
the Saudi Building Code 701, Section 3.4.
b. Non-Potable Hot and Cold Water Piping
1) Each laboratory, animal vivarium, or other critical facilities shall be provided
with a dedicated non-potable hot water and non-potable cold water piping
system that is isolated from the domestic water system.
2) A non-potable laboratory water backflow preventer shall be arranged parallel
with the domestic water service backflow preventers, to eliminate the
cumulative pressure drop of backflow preventers in series.
3) A non-potable hot and cold water system shall be designed for research
laboratories teaching laboratories, vivariums, and other similar type buildings
and spaces.
4) The non-potable water distribution systems shall be designed and pipe sizes
selected based on under peak demand and shall conform to accepted
engineering trade practices and sizing.
5) Where street water main pressure fluctuates, the building non-potable water
distribution system shall be designed for the minimum pressure.
6) Where the water pressure is not sufficient to supply the minimum pressure
and quantities require for proper operation of laboratory plumbing fixtures
and components, the non-potable water supply shall be supplemented with a
hydro-pneumatic pressure booster system, a water pressure booster system,
or an elevated water tank.
7) Design shall include provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping
systems, to prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points,
and connections to equipment.
8) Water velocities in excess of 1.5 to 2.5 m per second are not permitted
inside the building.
c. Design criteria for hot water and cold water piping
(b) The water systems shall be designed based on the lowest pressure
available to ensure proper operation of plumbing fixtures; Refer to the
Saudi Building Code 701, Section 3.4, Table 3.4.3- Water Distribution
System Design Criteria Required Capacity At Fixture Supply Pipe
Outlets.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 44

(a) When determining peak demand, Water Supply Fixture Units (WSFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used; Refer to the International
Plumbing Code, Appendix E - Load Values Assigned to Fixtures Table.
(b) The WSFU is a numerical factor that measures the load producing effect
of a single plumbing fixture.
(c) The WSFU shall then be converted into liters per minute flow rate for
determining pipe sizes; Refer to the International Plumbing Code,
Appendix E – Tables for Estimating Demand.
(a) Based on system pressure requirements and losses
4. Tepid (Emergency) Water Piping
a. Building hot water piping, cold water piping, and fittings shall conform to NSF 61 and
one of the standards listed in the Saudi Building Code 701, Section 3.4.
b. Tepid water supply shall be determined as potable by the RCJ.
c. Structures equipped with emergency plumbing fixtures such as emergency showers,
emergency eyewashes, and / or emergency face washes shall be provided with a
tepid water supply in the volume and pressure required by ANSI Z-358.1.
d. The tepid water distribution systems shall be designed and pipe sizes selected
based on peak demand and shall conform to accepted engineering trade practices
and sizing.
e. Design shall include provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping systems,
to prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points, and connections
to equipment.
f. Design criteria for tepid water piping
2) Determine the emergency plumbing fixture demand:
(a) Emergency Showers: 75.7 lpm for 15 minutes.
(b) Emergency Eye/Face Wash: 11.4 lpm for 15 minutes
(c) Emergency Eye Wash: 1.5 lpm for 15 minutes
5. Laboratory Grade Water Piping

Rev. 0 5.4 - 45
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for laboratory

grade water systems however water treatment shall comply with one or more of the
following, depending on the purity of the water desired:
1) ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 4 – Plumbing
Components And Equipment, Chapter 10 – Water Treatment shall be used
2) College of American Pathologists (CAP) and American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM) reagent grade water.
3) U.S. Pharmacopeia (USP) standards for water purity
4) Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation (AAMI)
standards
5) Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) standards
6) Semiconductor Equipment and Materials International (SEMI) and ASTM
electronics grade water.
b. Pipe material
1) High purity water is very aggressive and therefore corrosive.
2) The following are some recommended pipe materials that can be used with
laboratory grade water:
(a) Stainless Steel Tubing
(b) Stainless Steel Pipe Type 304 and Type 316L
(c) Polyvinyl fluoride
(d) Polypropylene
(e) Polyethylene
(f) Polyvinyl chloride
(g) Aluminum Type 3003
3) Design shall include
(a) Piping in a loop and / or continuously recirculating configuration to the
faucet to eliminate stagnant water conditions.
(b) Provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping systems, to
prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points, and
connections to equipment.
(b) Flow rates shall be based on 1.9 lpm per faucet and a minimum flow
velocity of 1.5 m/sec.
(c) The sum of the liters per minute required for each pipe branch and main
6. Laboratory Waste and Laboratory Vent Piping
a. Laboratory waste and vent piping shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi
Building Code 701, Section 4.17. Additional requirements can be found in the ASPE
Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 3 – Special Plumbing Systems,

Rev. 0 5.4 - 46
Chapter 2 – Plumbing Design for Healthcare Facilities and the standards listed in the
International Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 – Sanitary Drainage and Chapter 9 – Vents
shall be used for the basis of design.
b. Structures equipped with laboratory plumbing fixtures shall be connected to the
laboratory waste drainage system or an RCJ approved disposal system.
c. Horizontal laboratory waste drainage piping shall be designed with uniform
alignment at uniform slopes. The minimum velocity of flow to achieve scouring
action is 0.60 m per second.
d. Laboratory waste discharging into the sanitary drainage system shall have a
temperature of 60° C or less. When higher temperatures exist, an approved cooling
method shall be provided.
e. Building laboratory waste that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a
tightly covered and vented sewage ejector from which the effluent shall be lifted and
discharged into the gravity laboratory waste system by automatic pumping
equipment and components.
f. Connections and changes in direction shall be designed with drainage fittings. The
obstructing flow.
g. Cleanouts
1) Shall be indicated at every change of horizontal direction greater than 45
sanitary pipe.
2) Shall be provided at the base of each laboratory waste drainage stack or
riser.
h. Laboratory waste drainage systems within a building shall be completely
independent of the sanitary and storm drainage system.
i. Design criteria for sanitary piping
(a) When determining peak drainage demand, Drainage Fixture Units (DFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used. The DFU is a numerical
factor that measures the load producing effect of a single plumbing
fixture; Refer to the International Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 - Drainage
Fixture Units For Fixtures And Groups Table.
(b) Values for continuous and semi-continuous flow into the drainage system
shall be computed on the basis that 0.06 liters per second is equivalent
to two DFU.
(a) Each pipe branch and main shall be determined based the number of
DFU’s connected; Refer to International Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 -
Building Drains And Sewers Table and Horizontal Fixture Branches And
Stacks Table.
(b) Horizontal stack offsets shall be sized as required for building drains.
(c) Vertical stack offsets shall be sized for straight stacks.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 47
j. Design criteria for vent piping

1) The diameter of individual vents, branch vents, circuit vents, and relief vents
shall be at least one half the required diameter of the drain served.
2) Vent pipes shall not be less than 30 mm in diameter.
k. Vent exceeding 12 m in developed length shall be increased by one nominal pipe
size for the entire developed length of the vent pipe.
7. Laboratory Compressed Air Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for compressed
air systems however the Compressed Gas Association, The National Fire Protection
Association Standards and ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume
3 – Special Plumbing Systems, Chapter 9 – Compressed Air Systems shall be used
b. The laboratory compressed air system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to
ensure that an adequate volume of air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
requirements, is delivered during peak demand.
c. The entire laboratory compressed air system, including but not limited to air dryer,
pre-filters, after filters, controls etc. shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty
structural steel support frame.
d. Design criteria for laboratory compressed air piping
1) Identify each process, work station, or piece of equipment requiring
compressed air.
2) Determine the volume of air and pressure required for each location.
3) Determine the condition requirements for each location, such as the
allowable moisture content, particulate size, and oil content.
4) Determine how much time the individual tool or process will be in actual use
for a one minute period of time (duty cycle).
(a) To determine the duty cycle, the user should be consulted, they are the
only authority capable of providing the length of time an individual tool is
in use.
(a) It may be difficult to accurately determine the simultaneous use factor so
sufficient receiver capacity or larger compressor capacity must be
provided to allow for variances in use.
6) Determine the extent of allowable leakage.
(a) Leakage is a function of the number of connections to the system and
the quality of the pipe assembly.
(b) Many smaller tools and operations will generally have a greater leakage
than a few larger ones.
(c) Leakage rates
(1) A well maintained system may have a leakage rate of approximately
2 to 5 percent.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 48
(2) A typical system may have a leakage rate of approximately 10

percent.
(3) A poorly maintained system may have a leakage rate of
approximately 25 percent.
10) Select the laboratory air compressor type, conditioning equipment,
equipment location, and air inlet, making sure that cubic meters / minute,
liters / minute, or liters / second is consistently used for both the system and
laboratory compressor capacity rating.
(a) Systems are typically sized based on no more than three starts per hour.
(b) Quantity of compressors shall be determined based on a project basis
however the minimum shall be a duplex system.
e. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
f. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
1) 15 mm for single connections on branch piping
8. Laboratory Vacuum Piping
vacuum systems however ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume
2 – Plumbing Systems, Chapter 10 – Vacuum Systems shall be used for the basis of
design.
b. The laboratory vacuum system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure
that an adequate vacuum is provided during peak demand.
c. The entire laboratory vacuum system shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty
structural steel support frame.
d. Design criteria for vacuum piping
1) Identify each process, work station or piece of equipment requiring vacuum.
2) Determine the laboratory vacuum required for each location.
(a) Total connected load based on cubic meter per minute of every device
requiring vacuum in the building.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 49
(a) It is difficult to accurately determine a simultaneous use factor so

sufficient receiver capacity must be provided to allow for variances in
use.
components, based on the equivalent length and total cubic meters per hour
demand.
(a) Systems are typically sized based on no more than three starts per hour.
(b) Quantity of vacuum pumps shall be determined based on a project basis
however the minimum shall be a duplex system.
e. Cleanouts shall be strategically located throughout the piping system to allow for the
removal of debris.
f. A properly sized, constantly working laboratory vacuum pump usually requires less
g. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
9. Specialty Piping
specialty gas systems however the Compressed Gas Association and the National
Fire Protection Association Standards shall be used for the basis of design.
b. Typically used for organic and inorganic chemistry, physics, and biological
laboratories, and those used for research and development. The gases used in
these types of facilities are characterized by low delivery pressure, low and
intermittent volume, and high purity requirements of the specialty gas and delivery
system
c. It is extremely rare that the quantity of specialty gases for laboratory and research
laboratories would justify large central systems. Specialty gas systems typically
refer to point-of-use cylinder bottles, manifolds, piping, and appurtenances.
d. Specialty gases are classified in the following categories:
1) Oxidizers: These are non-flammable gases but they support combustion.
No oil or grease is permitted to be used with any device associated with the
use of this gas, and combustibles cannot be stored near these types of
gases.
2) Inert Gases: These are gases that do not react with other materials. If
released into a confined space, the will reduce the oxygen level to a point
that asphyxiation could occur. The room or area where inert gases are
used shall be provided with oxygen monitor and be well ventilated.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 50
3) Flammable Gases: These are gases that when combined with air or
oxidizers, will form a mixture that will burn or possibly explode if ignited.
The room or area where flammable gases are used shall be well ventilated;
use approved electrical devices for explosive atmospheres, and be restricted
from ignition sources.
4) Corrosive Gases: These are gases that will attack the surface of rubber,
metals, and will damage human tissue on contact. Protective clothing and
equipment shall be used around these types of gases.
5) Toxic and Poisonous Gases: These gases will harm human tissue by
contact or ingestion. Protective clothing and equipment shall be used
around these types of gases.
6) Pyrophoric Gases: These gases spontaneously ignite upon contact with air
under normal conditions.
7) Cryogenic Gases: These gases are stored as extremely cold liquids under
moderate pressure and are vaporized when used. Protective clothing and
equipment shall be used around these types of gases.
e. There are numerous grades of pure and mixed gases. The end user shall be
consulted for the maximum acceptable level of impurities permissible base on the
type of instrument used and the analytical work being performed.
f. Design criteria for laboratory compressed air piping
1) Identify each process, work station, or piece of equipment requiring type of
specialty gas.
2) Determine the quantity and grade of specialty gas required for each location.
7) Select the specialty gas, manifold, controls, and appurtenances.
g. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
h. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
H. Laboratory Equipment And Appurtenances
1. Tepid (Emergency) Water Mixing Valve

Rev. 0 5.4 - 51
a. Tepid (emergency) water mixing valve shall meet ANSI Standard Z358.1 and shall
be capable of providing a minimum of:
1) 75.5 lpm for of water for 15 minutes at 18° - 35° C to serve an emergency
showers.
2) 11.4 lpm of water for 15 minutes at 18° - 35° C to serve an emergency eye / face
washes.
3) 1.5 lpm of water for 15 minutes at 18° - 35° C to serve an emergency
eyewashes.
b. Tepid (emergency) water mixing valve shall employ two fully independent control
mechanisms which split the water flow in half, blend each half to the design
temperature and then integrates each stream at the outlet. The valve shall control
outlet temperature over a wide range of flow and shall be suitable for deluge
emergency showers and/or emergency eyewashes applications.
c. Tepid (emergency) water mixing valve shall include three thermometers to measure
the temperature of each stream and the merged flow. Temperature adjustment shall
be vandal resistant.
d. Each independent control mechanism shall employ a liquid-filled thermostatic motor
to drive the valve. Each control mechanism shall employ a stainless steel sliding
piston control device with reverse seat closure and both fixed and variable cold
water bypass.
e. In the event that one liquid motor fails, the control mechanism shall close off the hot
water port with the reverse seat and shall fully open the internal variable bypass to
allow cold water flow. The other control mechanism shall be unaffected by the
failure and shall maintain design temperature.
2. Laboratory Neutralization Tanks
a. Corrosive liquids, spent acids or other harmful chemicals that will destroy or
compromise the sanitary drainage system, create noxious or toxic fumes, or
interfere with the sewage treatment process shall not discharge into the sanitary
drainage system without being thoroughly diluted, neutralized, or treated by passing
through a neutralization tank.
b. Neutralization requirements shall be determined based on the chemical properties
being discharged.
c. Laboratory waste neutralization can be accomplished utilizing:
1) Dilution – The mixing of chemical waste with water in order to stabilize the
laboratory waste prior to discharge into the sanitary drainage system.
2) Limestone – Laboratory waste is drained through a neutralization tank filled
with high purity limestone.
3) Chemical dosing – Laboratory waste is drained through a neutralization tank
that is injected with sodium hydroxide solution to automatically raise the pH
when required and sulfuric acid solution to automatically lower the pH when
required.
4) Design Criteria:
(a) Maintain an effluent pH downstream of the neutralization system
between 5.5 and 8.5.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 52
(b) Neutralization tank size shall be determined by the quantity and type of
laboratory fixtures connected to the neutralization system.
(c) Neutralization tank shall have a minimum dwell time of 2-1/2 to 3 hours.
3. Laboratory Grade Water Systems
a. The degree of water purity required for a building depends on the intended use of
the water. There are primarily four grades of laboratory water typically used in most
hospitals, clinical laboratories, research laboratories, teaching laboratories, and
industrial type buildings.
1) Type I Reagent Water (Ultrapure): Used when maximum accuracy and
precision are required. The grade water is produced by distillation of supply
water with a maximum resistivity of 0.05 megohm-cm at 25°C Followed by
polishing with a mixed-bed ion exchange system to 16.7 megohm-cm and
0.2-um filter.
2) Type II Reagent Water: Use for all procedures requiring organic-free,
sterilized, pyrogen-free water. The grade of water is produced by distillation
through the use of still designed with special baffling and degassing features
or by double distillation to produce water with a resistivity greater than 1.0
megohm-cm at 25°C.
3) Type III Reagent Water: Used for general laboratory purposes, including the
preparation of solutions, routine quality control tests, washing and rinsing of
laboratory glassware. This grade is produced by ion exchange, distillation,
or reverse osmosis followed by polishing with 0.45-um membrane filter.
4) Type IV Reagent Water: Used when large amounts of moderate-purity water
are required, particularly in the preparation of test solutions for wash test or
ion exchange resin evaluation. This grade is produced by ion exchange,
distillation, reverse osmosis or electro dialysis.
b. Water treatment process consists of three primary type of systems
1) Ion Exchange (Deionization / Demineralization): Removes impurities by
passing water through synthetic resins which have an affinity for dissolved
ionized slats and gases.
(a) This type of system will not remove bacteria, pyrogens, particulates, or
dissolved organic compounds.
(b) Can generate a 15 – 18 megohm-cm purity
(c) Requires regeneration with sulfuric acid and caustic
2) Distillation: Removes impurities from water by converting a liquid to a gas
and then recondensing it as distilled water.
(a) This type of system removes pyrogens, bacteria and viruses except
dissolved ionized gases.
(b) Can generate 1 – 800,000 megohm-cm purity if the system supply water
has been pretreated.
3) Reverse Osmosis: Utilizes hydraulic pressure to force pure water through a
membrane and is usually used in water with high TDS.
(a) This type of system removes some bacteria, pryrogens and viruses but
will not remove dissolved ionized gases.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 53
c. Design Criteria
1) Ion Exchange (Deionization / Demineralization) System
(a) Confirm the capacity of the floor drain that will be receiving the backwash
from the demineralization. Backwash rates are typically several times
higher than the demineralizer flow rate.
(b) The equipment shall be completely automatic
(c) If specific demand requirements are not available for the project,
demineralizer equipment, components, and appurtenances shall be
sized based on
(1) Assume 2 – 3.8 lpd per student station for classroom laboratories.
Assume two classes per day if exact number of uses is not known.
(2) Assume 3.8 – 5.6 lpd per person for non-classroom laboratories.
(3) Assume 19 lpd for classroom preparation room pipette washers
(4) Assume 95 lpd for pipette washers
(5) Add feeding still and glass-washer demand to total based on
manufacturer requirements.
2) Distillation System
(a) If specific demand requirements are not available for the project,
distillation tanks, equipment, components, and appurtenances shall be
sized based on
(1) Assume two people per 3 m x 6 m module
(2) Assume 2- 3.8 lpd per person plus 50% for future
(3) Assume 3.8 - 5.6 lpd per person for non-classroom laboratories.
(4) Assume 170 lph for each glass-washer or 606 lpd
3) Reverse Osmosis System
(a) Confirm the capacity of the floor drain that will be receiving the backwash
from the reverse osmosis filters. Backwash rates are typically several
times higher than the demineralizer flow rate.
(b) The equipment shall be completely automatic
(c) If specific demand requirements are not available for the project, reverse
osmosis equipment, components, and appurtenances shall be sized
based on
(1) Assume 2 – 3.8 lpd per student station for classroom laboratories.
Assume two classes per day if exact number of uses is not known.
(2) Assume 3.8 – 5.6 lpd per person for non-classroom laboratories.
(3) Assume 19 lpd for classroom preparation room pipette washers
(4) Assume 95 lpd for pipette washers
(5) Add feeding still and glass-washer demand to total based on
manufacturer requirements.
4. Laboratory Compressed Air System

Rev. 0 5.4 - 54
a. There are two general categories of air compressors

1) Positive displacement: Operates at a constant volume and are capable of
operating over a wide range of discharge pressures at a relatively constant
capacity
2) Dynamic: Operates over a wide range of capacities at a relatively constant
speed.
b. Compressor Types
1) Reciprocating: This type of compressor is recommended where the potential
for a trace of oil in the discharge air is not a problem however “oil free”
compressors are manufactured.
2) Sliding Vane: This type is recommended where low capacity is required in
the range of 2832 lpm to 517 lpm.
3) Liquid Ring: This type is recommended for hospital and laboratory use.
4) Straight Lobe: This type of compressor is available as “oil free” and are
recommended for pressures up to 1379 kPa and 4285 lpm
5) Rotary Screw: This type of compressor produce pulse free air and are
available for pressures from 1304 – 2068 kPa and 8496 lpm.
6) Centrifugal: This type of compressor produces large volumes of air at
relatively low pressures. Higher pressures can be attained by adding
stages with intercooling between stages.
c. Compressor Accessories (when provided)
1) Silencers: There are two types of silencers
(a) Reactive: This type of silencer shall attenuate low frequency sound in
order of 500 hertz and are most often used with reciprocating
compressors
(b) Absorptive: This type of silencer shall attenuate higher frequency sound
above 500 hertz and are most often used with screw and centrifugal
compressors
2) After-coolers
(a) Shall lower temperature of compressed air immediately after leaving the
compressor.
(1) The discharge air temperature shall be provided between 21.1°C
and 43°C.
(2) The primary reason to lower the discharge air temperature is to
remove moisture that would otherwise condense elsewhere in the
piping system
(3) Select the after-cooler based on pressure drop through the unit,
space, and clearance requirements for maintenance.
3) Filters
(a) Filters shall remove or reduce impurities or contaminants in the air
stream to an acceptable or predetermined level.
(b) Filters can consist of:

Rev. 0 5.4 - 55
(1) Inlet filters: Shall remove large amounts of contaminants and

particles from the inlet of the compressor.
(2) Pre-filters: Shall remove contaminants and particles from the inlet
of a dryer.
(3) After-filters: Shall be placed after the dryer to remove contaminants
and particles that the pre-filter was not able to remove
(4) Point-of-Use filters: Shall be placed immediately prior to the tool or
individual piece of equipment that requires removal of particulates,
oil, or moisture to a greater extent than was done by the after-filter.
4) Separators
(a) Shall remove large quantities of liquid water or oil from the air steam.
(b) Shall be located downstream of the air compressor and after cooler.
5) Compressed Air Dryers
(a) Are provided to remove water vapor from the air steam.
(b) There are five categories of dryers:
(1) High pressurization of the compressed air: Reduces the quantity of
water vapor by compressing air to pressure greater than those
required for actual use.
(2) Condensation: Lower the temperature of the air stream through a
heat exchanger to produce a lower dew point.
(3) Absorption: Uses either a solid or liquid medium and operate when
the airstream containing water vapor passes through or over a
deliquescent material.
(4) Adsorption: Uses a porous, non-consumable material that causes
water vapor to condense as a very thin film on the desiccant
materials surface.
(5) Heat of compression: Uses a desiccant to absorb the moisture in
the compressed airstream.
(c) The most important requirement in the selection of a dryer is to
determine the lowest required temperature dew point for the intended
application.
(1) Refrigerated dryers shall be provided for dew point temperatures
down to 4°C.
(2) Desiccant dryers shall be provided for dew point temperatures 3°C
and below.
6) Receivers
(a) Air receivers shall be provided for
(1) Storage of air
(2) Equalization of the pressure variations (pulsations)
(3) Collection of residual condensate
(4) Reduction of compressor cycling / run time

Rev. 0 5.4 - 56
(b) Determination of need for a receiver shall be based on the type of

regulation the system uses.
7) The compressed air system shall be provided with an air intake that extends
to the exterior of the building.
5. Laboratory Vacuum System
a. Vacuum Types (two most commonly used)
1) Liquid Ring: This type is recommended for hospital and laboratory use.
2) Sliding Vane: This type is recommended where low capacity is required.
b. The vacuum system shall consist of:
1) Two or more pumps designed to operate as system requires
2) A receiver to provide a vacuum reservoir to separate liquids from the air
stream.
3) Interconnect piping and alarms.
c. Laboratory vacuum typically serves general chemical, biological, and physics
laboratories for the purposes of drying, filtering, fluid transfer, and evacuating air
from apparatuses.
1) Standard vacuum system working pressure is typically in the range of 40.6
kPa to 67.7 kPa.
2) High vacuum working pressure is typically in the range of 81.3 kPa to 98.2
kPa.
d. The vacuum pump system shall be provided with an exhaust pipe that extends to
exterior of the building.
6. Laboratory Nitrogen System
a. Nitrogen is an inert, colorless, and tasteless gas used primarily to control the
atmosphere for high sensitive equipment and procedures.
b. Nitrogen gas shall be provided to control oxygen levels, humidity, and temperature
in laboratory equipment and tests.
c. Nitrogen supply shall be provided through either point-of-use:
1) Nitrogen cylinders: Available in various sizes and pressure ratings.
(a) A manifold with regulators, shut off valves, gauges, pig tails, interconnect
piping, and appurtenances shall be provided when connecting multiple
cylinders together to meet the demand requirement.
(b) When intermittent demand is low, a single cylinder shall be provided.
2) Nitrogen generator: The generating units have their own filters and purifiers
that generate high purity nitrogen.
(a) Shall be provided where the installation of cylinders is inconvenient and
the change out will cause disruption of continuing work and / or
experiments.
(b) Typically these units provide pressures around 415 kPa and flow rates
up to 300 cc/min.
I. Medical Piping And Appurtenances

Rev. 0 5.4 - 57
1. Materials
2. Installation
locations.
b. No piping shall be in-bedded in wall or floors.
3. Nitrous Oxide Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for nitrous oxide
systems however the National Fire Protection Association Standard 99 and ASPE
Chapter 10 – Plumbing Design for Healthcare Facilities shall be used for the basis of
design.
b. The nitrous oxide system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate volume of nitrous oxide, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
c. Design criteria for nitrous oxide piping
1) Determine the volume of nitrous oxide and pressure required for each outlet.
If a specific flow is not requested, typically 0.28 lpm is assigned to each
outlet.
d. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
1) Maximum friction loss of 6.90 kPa per 30 m.
e. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:

Rev. 0 5.4 - 58

4. Carbon Dioxide Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for carbon
dioxide systems however the National Fire Protection Association Standard 99 and
ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 3 – Special Plumbing
Systems, Chapter 10 – Plumbing Design for Healthcare Facilities shall be used for
the basis of design.
b. The carbon dioxide system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that
an adequate volume of carbon dioxide, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
c. Design criteria for carbon oxide piping.
1) Determine the volume of carbon dioxide and pressure required for each
outlet. If a specific flow is not requested, typically 28 lpm is assigned to
each outlet.
requirement:
5. Oxygen Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for oxygen
design.
b. The oxygen system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate volume of oxygen, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user requirements, is
delivered during peak demand.
c. Design criteria for oxygen piping.
1) Determine the volume of oxygen and pressure required for each outlet. If a
specific flow is not requested, typically 28 lpm is assigned to each outlet.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 59

requirement:
6. Medical Air Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for medical air
design.
b. The medical air system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate volume of medical air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
c. Design criteria for medical air piping.
1) Determine the volume of medical air and pressure required for each outlet.
If a specific flow is not requested, typically 28 lpm is assigned to each outlet.
requirement:

Rev. 0 5.4 - 60

7. Medical Vacuum Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for medical air
design.
b. The medical vacuum system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that
an adequate volume of medical air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
c. Design criteria for medical vacuum piping.
1) Determine the volume of medical vacuum required for each outlet. If a
d. Cleanouts shall be strategically located throughout the piping system to allow for the
removal of debris.
requirement:
(a) 20 mm for multiple connections on branch piping.
(b) 25 mm for main piping.
8. Specialty Systems Piping
a. Waste Anesthesia Gas Disposal Piping
1) No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for waste
anesthesia gas disposal systems however the National Fire Protection
Association Standard 99 and ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design
Handbook, Volume 3 – Special Plumbing Systems, Chapter 10 – Plumbing
Design for Healthcare Facilities shall be used for the basis of design.
2) The waste anesthesia gas disposal system shall be controlled, regulated,
and sized to ensure that an adequate volume of medical air, at a pressure
and purity to satisfy user requirements, is delivered during peak demand.
3) Design criteria for waste anesthesia gas disposal piping.
(a) Determine the volume of medical vacuum required for each outlet. If a

Rev. 0 5.4 - 61
(b) Determine maximum number of locations that may be used

simultaneously on each branch and main (use factor).
(c) Determine an allowance for future expansion.
(d) Determine the developed length of pipe (The length of pipe measured
along the centerline of the pipe and fittings).
(e) Determine the equivalent length of pipe (The length of pipe of a specific
4) Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
(a) 20 mm for multiple connections on branch piping.
(b) 25 mm for main piping.
J. Safety Equipment
1. Eyewashes
a. Shall be provided:
1) Within 10 seconds (approximately 17 m) of hazard.
2) On the same level as the hazard and with no obstructed path.
3) With “hands-free” stay-open valve activates in one second or less.
b. Unit must provide a minimum of 1.5 liters of tepid water per minute for 15 minutes.
2. Emergency Showers
a. Shall be provided:
1) Within 10 seconds (approximately 17 m) of hazard.
2) On the same level as the hazard and with no obstructed path.
3) With “hands-free” stay-open valve activates in one second or less.
b. Unit must provide a minimum of 75.5 liters of tepid water per minute for 15 minutes.
c. Shower shall be installed between 2083 mm and 2438 mm above floor.
K. Vibration
1. Control
a. Effective vibration control is required to reduce noise transmission through the piping
systems. Machines, equipment, and components shall be provided with vibration
and shock mounting through the use of:
1) Compressed Cork
(a) Is typically manufactured of pure granules of cork without any foreign
binder that is compressed and baked under pressure with accurately
controlled density.
(b) Compressed cork is typically used for floor slab isolation.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 62
2) Elastomers and Neoprene Rubber

(a) Has very good sound isolation characteristics and is acceptable for low
frequency shock absorption and is useful as vibration isolators for
frequencies above 1,200 cpm.
(b) Molded elastomer mountings are generally only used for light and
medium weight machines.
3) Steel Spring Isolators
(a) Steel spring isolators provide the most efficient method of isolating
vibration and shock.
(b) Steel spring isolation can provide deflection up to 255 mm.
(c) Rubber spring sound isolation pads shall be provided under spring
isolators to prevent high frequency noise transmission into the floor or
other critical installations.
L. Condensate Drainage And Collection Systems
1. Refer to GEM Section 5.4.3 HVAC.
M. Specialty Plumbing Systems
1. Water Hammer Arrester
a. Shall be provided on water distribution systems to reduce water flow velocities
immediately adjacent to equipment and where quick-closing valves are installed.
1) Water hammer arrestors for piping serving equipment shall be provided
within a few meters of the equipment isolation valve
2) The location of the water hammer arrestor associated with plumbing fixtures
shall be determined based on the start of the horizontal branch pipe to the
last plumbing fixture on that branch. If the branch pipe exceeds 6.1 m in
length, an additional water hammer arrestor shall be provided and each
water hammer arrestor shall be sized based on half of the fixture unit value.
b. Shall conform to ASSE 1010.
c. Shall be nested stainless steel bellows type contained within a sealed stainless steel
chamber.
d. Sizing
1) Obtain the total number of fixture units on each branch pipe. This
information is then applied to manufacturer sizing charts to determine the
required size
2) When water pressure exceeds 448 kPa, select the next larger size water
hammer arrestor.
3) If the fixture unit value total includes a decimal, the number shall be rounded
up to the next largest whole number.
4) Flow velocities shall not exceed 2.5 m/sec.
2. Strainers
a. Strainers shall be provided on the incoming building water service to protect the
check valves of the backflow preventer from fouling due to foreign matter and debris
in the building water supply.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 63
b. Shall conform to ASTM A-126 Class B.

c. Strainers shall be arranged to permit the flushing of accumulated debris and to
facilitate removal and replacement of strainer screen without disconnecting from
piping system.
1) Valved dirt flush out connections for strainers shall be installed such that the
valve is located 153 mm to 305 mm below the strainer.
2) Flush out connection shall be terminated in an approved manner at a point
where there shall be no risk of flooding or damage.
N. Valves
1. General
a. Valves for potable water systems shall comply with United States Public Law 111-
380 “Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act”
b. Valves shall be of same minimum working pressure and materials as specified for
fittings of the system in which they are installed. Regardless of service, valves shall
be designed for a minimum 862 kPa psi working pressure.
c. Provide shut-off valves at each plumbing fixture and / or equipment requiring
plumbing service.
d. Valves shall be provided in accessible locations and so that the tops of the valve
stems are above the horizontal.
e. Valves shall be provided with stem extensions when installed on insulated piping.
2. Butterfly Valve
a. Butterfly valves provide bubble-tight closure with excellent throttling characteristics.
They can be used for full open/closed and throttling applications. Required when
using flanged piping.
b. Has two primary body types
1) Lug: Body has tapped lugs matching up to bolt circle of Class 125 / 150
flanges.
2) Grooved: Direct connect to pipe using iron pipe size couplings
c. Has a thin rotating disk which operates with a quarter turn from fully open to fully
closed; however, the disk is always in the flow path.
d. Primary Function
1) Start and stop fluid flow
2) Used either as fully open or fully closed
3) Used for high temperatures and / or corrosive materials
3. Gate Valve
a. Gate Valves provide full flow, minimum pressure drop, minimum turbulence, and
minimum fluid trapped in piping
b. Use a wedge shaped disk or gate as the closure member that operates
perpendicular to the flow.
c. Primary Function

Rev. 0 5.4 - 64

3) Flow can be bi-directional
4. Ball Valve
a. Ball valves are light, easily installed and provide tight closure
b. Has three primary body types
1) One-piece: Has no potential body leak path, but requires use of reduced
port ball.
2) Two-piece: Most commonly used ball valve that can be provided as a
reduced port, standard port, or full port ball.
3) Three-piece: Is a repairable valve that can be provided as a reduced port,
standard port, or full port ball.
c. Port Sizes
1) Reduced Port: Have more than one pipe size flow restriction and are not
recommended for building service piping, have a high pressure drop, but
recommended for process piping in hazardous material transfer.
2) Standard Port: Are up to one pipe size smaller than the nominal pipe size,
have a better pressure drop than reduced ports, but have significantly better
flow characteristics than globe valves.
3) Full Port: Have pressure drop equal to equivalent length of pipe and have
better flow characteristics than gate valves.
d. Primary Function
5. Check Valve
a. Check valves are designed to prevent backflow by automatically seating when the
direction of fluid is reversed.
b. Automatically check or prevent the reversal of flow.
c. Have three basic types
1) Swing Check: Has a hinged disk that swings on a hinge pin. When flow
reverses, the pressure pushes the disk against the seat. This type of check
valve has little resistance to flow.
2) Lift Check: Has a guided disk that is raised from the seat by upward flow
pressure. Reversal of flow pushes the disk against the seat, stopping
backflow. This type of check valve has considerable resistance to flow and
is suited for high pressure service.
3) Wafer Check: Are manufactured in two types:
(a) A dual flapper that is hinged on a center post
(b) A single flapper that is hinged on a pin.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 65
These types of check valves are generally used in piping 100 mm and larger
because they are lighter than traditional flanged end swing check valves.
6. Plug Valves
a. Is a quarter turn valve that uses a tapered cylindrical plug that fits a body seat of
corresponding shape.
b. Are manufactured in two types
1) Lubricated: Designed with grooves in the surface of the plug. The grooves
are connected to a lubricated channel in the stem. When the grooves are
filled with lubricant, a tight seal develops between the plug and valve body.
2) Non-Lubricated: Have two basic types
(a) Lift: Is mechanically lifted while being turned to disengage it from the
seating surface.
(b) Sleeved: Has a fluorocarbon sleeve that surrounds the plug, providing a
continuous seal.
7. Balancing Valve
a. Is a measurement and regulation devise and are required to balance hot water and
hot water return systems.
b. The main purpose of a balancing valve is to provide a consistent flow through the
hot water return system.
c. Balancing valves generally shall be bronze body, brass ball valve with differential
pressure read out ports, check valve, tapped drain / purge port, memory stop, and
calibrated nameplate.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 66
5.4.3. HVAC
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection of the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) establishes the Royal
Commission (RCJ) mandatory, minimum accepted HVAC requirements for new and
renovation projects. This section provides:
or modernization for building HVAC systems.
2) The policies and technical information are to be used; however project
conditions may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of GEM are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative systems,
methods, or devices not specifically described herein however the use of alternative
systems, methods, or devices must have prior approval from the RCJ.
c. If a conflict is found between the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), the Guiding
how to proceed.
d. In the event there is a conflict between the GEM and the requirements of the RCJ,
the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ. The Royal Commission
shall provide resolution or direction on how to proceed.
e. The design of RCJ HVAC system requires coordination and integration with other
disciplines such as, but not limited to, the architectural design, structural design,
plumbing design, electrical design, and other disciplines.
f. The following objectives shall be reflected in the HVAC programming and design:
1) Design Quality – The RCJ is committed to excellence in the design and
development of its sites and buildings. This requires an integrated approach
by all disciplines to achieve the highest quality HVAC design while providing
cost effective HVAC systems.
2) Flexibility and Adaptability are required to accommodate renovations and
future expansion without replacement of central building equipment or
components.
3) Sustainability- The essential principles of sustainable design shall address:
Energy conservation, materials selection, water use reduction, environmental
indoor air quality, operations, and maintenance.
(a) All building design must meet the requirements of Saudi Building Code
601 and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings.
Jubail is considered Climate Zone #1.
All equipment must meet the efficiency requirements established in
ASHRAE Std. 90.1
Fan horsepower must not exceed the limitations established in ASHRAE
Std. 90.1

Rev. 0 5.4 - 67
(b) The local Ministry of Electricity and Water establishes requirements for
water use.
(c) All building design must comply with all minimum requirements of Saudi
Building Code 501, Chapter 2 and ASHRAE 62.1, Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
(d) Mechanical systems selection shall be based on life cycle cost analysis
over the entire expected life of the buildings or systems
2. Commissioning
a. Refer to Section 4.5.9 – Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning
requirements.
3. Scope
a. This Guiding Engineering Manual establishes the Royal Commission of Jubail’s
(RCJ’s) mandatory, minimally acceptable, requirements for new and renovation
projects. This Manual provides:
or modernization for building HVAC systems.
2) The policies and technical information to be used, however project conditions
may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of Guiding Engineering Manual are not intended to prohibit the use of
alternative systems, methods, or devices not specifically described; however, the
use of alternative systems, methods, or devices must have prior approval from the
RCJ.
c. If a conflict is discovered between the Guiding Engineering Manual, the Guiding
Details or Drawings (TCDD), the Guiding Engineering Manual shall take
precedence.
d. The RCJ is the final Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) in Jubail Industrial City.
e. The design of HVAC systems requires coordination and integration with other
disciplines such as, but not limited to, the fire alarm design discipline for alarms
related to smoke control and duct smoke detectors, the plumbing design discipline
for make-up water supply to hydronic systems and various drains, the electrical
design discipline for power to the HVAC equipment and all disciplines for space to
install piping and equipment.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for general Definitions and Abbreviations
b. The following documents establish the minimum requirement for the design of HVAC
systems:
1) ABMA: American Boiler Manufacturers Association
2) ADC: Air Diffusion Council
3) AGA: American Gas Association
4) AIA: American Institute of Architects
5) AIHA: American Industrial Hygiene Association

Rev. 0 5.4 - 68
6) AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association

8) ARI: Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
10) ASA: Acoustical Society of America
11) ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning
Engineers
12) ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers
13) ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
17) CGA: Compressed Gas Association
18) EPA: Environmental Protection Agency
19) EUI: Energy Utilization (or Use) Index
21) HEI: Heat Exchange Institute
22) HI: Hydraulics Institute
23) HI: Hydronics Institute
24) I2SL: International Institute for Sustainable Labs
26) IEC: International Electro-Technical Commission
29) ISA: Instrument Society of America
st
30) Labs21: Laboratories for the 21 Century
31) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings
Industry
32) NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau
34) NSF: National Sanitation Foundation
35) NWWA: National Water Well Association
37) PPFA: Plastic Pipe and Fittings Association

Rev. 0 5.4 - 69
40) SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association
41) SSPC: Steel Structures Painting Council
42) STI: Steel Tank Institute
43) TCDD: Typical Construction Detail Drawings
44) UEC: Uniform Electric Code
45) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
46) UMC: Uniform Mechanical Code
5. Definitions (specific to this section)
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for general Definitions and Abbreviations
systems:
1) "Furnish" Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
2) "Install" Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly,
3) "Provide" Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
4) "Concealed Interior" Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants.
5) “Concealed Exterior” Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures.
6) "Exposed Interior" Exposed to view indoors (not concealed).
7) “Exposed, Exterior” Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
8) “Finished Space” Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms,
furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, space
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, tunnels, and interstitial
spaces.
9) "Conditioned" Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling.
10) "Unconditioned" Spaces without direct heating or cooling including ceiling
plenums.
11) "Indoors" Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
12) "Outdoors" Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
13) “Atmosphere” The same as outdoors.
14) “Energy Utilization Index” The measure of the total energy consumed by a
building expressed as energy consumed per gross building area (kJ/M²)

Rev. 0 5.4 - 70

a. Refer to Section 3.1 for general Codes and Standards
systems:
1) Saudi Building Code 501 - Mechanical Requirements
2) Saudi Building Code 601 - Energy Conservation Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code 801 – Fire Protection Requirements
4) AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities
5) ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation
6) ASHRAE Handbook – Fundamentals
7) ASHRAE Handbook – Refrigeration
8) ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications
9) ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Systems and Equipment
10) ANSI/ASHRAE/ASHE Standard 170 – Ventilation of Health Care Facilities
11) ASHRAE Standard 15 – Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration
12) ASHRAE Standard 34 – Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants
13) ASHRAE Standard 52.2 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning
Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
14) ASHRAE Standard 62.1 – Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
15) ASHRAE Standard 62.2 – Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in
Low-Rise Residential Buildings
16) ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise
Residential Buildings
17) ASHRAE Standard 90.2 – Energy Efficient Design of Low Rise Residential
Buildings
18) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
19) NFPA 30 – Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
20) NFPA 45 - Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
21) NFPA 90A – Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation
Systems
22) NFPA 92 – Standard for Smoke Control Systems
23) NFPA 96 – Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations
24) NFPA 99 – Health Care Facilities Code
25) NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
27) (IEC) – International Electro-Technical Commission
28) International Mechanical Code

Rev. 0 5.4 - 71
c. In the event of conflict between Codes and this document, the Saudi Building Code
shall govern.
7. Design Criteria
a. Outdoor Design Criteria
1) For Buildings:
(a) Cooling – Standard Design
Dry Bulb: 46 C
Wet Bulb: 30 C
Daily Range: 13 C
Wind Velocity: 16 kM/hr
(b) Cooling – Critical Facilities
Dry Bulb: 50 C
Wet Bulb: 32 C
Daily Range: 15 C
(c) Heating
Dry Bulb: 5 C
2) For air cooled condensers
(a) 50 C
3) For cooling towers and evaporative condensers
(a) 32 C Wet Bulb
4) Sun Days per year
(a) Assume 300 sun days per year
5) Wind
(a) Assume frequent sustained and gusty winds to velocities of 18 m/s
b. Indoor Design Criteria
1) For commercial, religious, educational, government, health care and
laboratory facilities:
(a) Cooling
(1) 22 C +/- 1 C
(2) 45% RH
(b) Heating
(1) 21 C +/- 1 C
Note that heating is not provided for commercial facilities.
2) For retail and residential facilities:

Rev. 0 5.4 - 72
(a) Cooling
(1) 23 C +/- 2 C
(2) 50% RH
3) For all industrial, maintenance and service type facilities or spaces that are
normally occupied:
(a) Cooling
(1) 26 C +/- 2 C
4) For normally unoccupied mechanical and electrical spaces:
(a) Cooling
(1) 28 C +/- 2 C to protect electronics that may be part of the
mechanical or electrical equipment.
5) For warehouses
(a) Cooling
(1) 28 C
c. Ventilation
1) The outdoor air ventilation rates from Saudi Building Code 501, Chapter 2-
Ventilation shall be used for all spaces unless otherwise directed by the RCJ.
2) Ventilation rates from ANSI/ASHRAE/ASHE Standard 170 – Ventilation of
Health Care Facilities shall be used for design of hospital spaces.
3) Ventilation for variable air volume systems shall ensure proper ventilation
rates at low and high system airflow.
4) Instrumentation and controls shall be provided to assure outdoor air intake
rates are maintained during occupied hours.
5) The placement and location of outdoor air intakes are critical to the safety of
the occupants inside a building and must be in compliance with the security
requirements of the building.
6) Fresh air intakes shall be designed and located to minimize dust entrainment.
7) A minimum separation distances between ventilation air intakes, exhausts
and other building features shall be kept as per the International Building
Code for non-hospital applications and the AIA Guidelines for Design and
Construction of Health Care Facilities for hospital applications.
8) Ventilation shall be used for Potable Water and Irrigation Water Pump
Rooms. These rooms shall not be air conditioned.
8. Heating Load Calculations
a. General
1) Heating is rarely designed into buildings in Jubail with the exception of
hospitals and residences, or where reheat of minimum air change rates or
make-up air is required such as laboratories.
(a) Reheat systems are prohibited except for applications meeting the
exceptions listed in ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy Standard for
Buildings except Low-Rise Buildings.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 73
2) Since heating and cooling load calculations are normally completed with a
single computer program, the software and procedure requirements are listed
in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9 – Cooling Load Calculations in the Guiding
Engineering Manual.
3) For reheating in non-hospital spaces, the capacity calculation shall be based
on increasing the supply air temperature from the design temperature leaving
the air handling unit to 21 C.
4) For reheating in hospital spaces, the capacity calculation shall be based on
increasing the supply air temperature from the design temperature leaving the
air handling unit to 25 C.
b. Heating Load Components
1) Heating load calculations shall include heat losses from outside surfaces
(roofs, walls, windows, raised floors); interior non-conditioned spaces
(partitions, ceilings, floors); make up air and infiltration; duct and plenum
losses.
2) The heating load calculations shall be done without credit for occupants and
internal gains.
9. Cooling Load Calculations
a. General
1) HVAC loads calculations must be performed with a computer-based program
in accordance with the Saudi Building Code 501, Section 1.12- Heating and
Cooling Load Calculations.
2) Submit the final load calculations to the RCJ prior to the completion of the
final design phase for RCJ review and acceptance.
3) The HVAC loads calculations report shall include all input and output used in
the heating and cooling calculation program, and shall include zone peak
heating and cooling loads results, and whole building “block” loads, air-
handling unit coil selections, and psychrometric process charts.
4) Zoning for the load calculations shall match the temperature control zoning.
5) Block and zone peak loads shall be calculated.
6) Residential method shall only be used for residential application.
7) For open spaces deeper than 8-meters, a separate perimeter control zone
shall be assumed in the design and calculation. The depth of the perimeter
zone shall not exceed 4-meters.
8) Account for anticipated supply duct leakage and supply duct heat gain or loss
in the load calculations
9) For final cooling load calculations, base the lighting heat gain on the actual
lighting design.
10) Base the occupancy load on the code allowable square foot per person
criteria, assuming that the building could be occupied to that maximum at
some time.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 74
b. Loads Calculations Computer-Based Program

1) Load and energy software programs shall be created specifically for the
HVAC system design.
2) The program shall be capable of calculating each zone’s peak heating and
cooling load as well as the whole-building “block” loads. Each zone, room and
portion of room with different load profile, orientation or sensible load shall be
calculated. A separate block load for each air handling system shall also be
calculated.
3) The program shall, at a minimum, calculate:
(a) solar gains through fenestration, internal gains from occupants including
latent heat for cooling purposes, internal gains from lighting and
equipment, outside air loads (sensible and latent) from ventilation and
infiltration, and heat gains or losses through fenestration, walls, floors
and roofs.
4) Software Program Features
(a) Store all necessary databases in addition to provision for editing.
(b) Calculates from manually entered data or directly from floor plans
(c) Automatically admits correction factors necessary for computing loads
(d) Analyzes up to 12 months per calculation
(e) Calculates 24 hours per design day
(f) Links with energy program software
(g) Transfers data to energy analysis programs
(h) Calculates in both metric and English units
(i) Allows entry of an HVAC system type from a menu and automatically
differentiates between block and peak loads depending on the type of
HVAC system chosen.
(j) Allows for roof and wall color effects
(k) Allows varying indoor conditions within a project
(l) Proper handling of return air plenum loads
(m) Accounts for people diversity in total building load
(n) Automates compliance with ASHRAE Standard 62
(o) Allows different summer and winter air rates
(p) Allows simultaneous infiltration, return air, exhaust air and ventilation air
(where applicable)
(q) Computes supply fan horsepower and heat gains
(r) Accounts for both draw-thru and blow-thru fans
(s) Computes supply and return duct gains and losses
(t) Lighting and equipment watts along with number of people can be
entered directly or on a per square foot basis.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 75
(u) Leaving coil conditions can be specified with a desired dry bulb
temperature or a relative humidity.
(v) Allows heating and cooling safety factors
(w) Calculates reheat requirements, if necessary
(x) Provision for both VAV and constant volume systems
(y) Performs complete psychrometric analysis
(z) Computes CFM air quantities with psychrometrics
(aa) Allows specification of minimum supply air quantities
(bb) Selects equipment from ARI databases
(cc) Calculates runout and main trunk duct sizes
(dd) Allows an unlimited number of zones which can be grouped into as many
as 100 air handling systems
(ee) Calculates chilled and hot water coil flow rates
(ff) Printable comprehensive reports list the general project data, detailed
zone loads, air handler summary loads, outside air loads, total building
loads, building envelope analysis, tonnage requirements, CFM air
quantities, chilled water flow rates (if applicable), and complete
psychrometric data with entering and leaving coil conditions.
c. Cooling Load Components
1) During load calculations, all sensible and latent heat sources shall be
considered.
2) Sensible cooling load shall be calculated for building envelope, people, lights,
equipment, outside air that is introduced into the system by air make-up or by
infiltration and duct heat loss/gain.
3) Latent cooling load shall be calculated for people, outside air and any process
in which moisture is given up to the air.
10. Energy Modeling
a. General
1) Building energy modeling during the design of a building or renovation shall
serve several purposes. The primary objective is to inform design decisions in
a way that guides the design toward RCJ goals for building energy
consumption performance. It is recognized that the detail and resolution of the
model will refine as the design progresses from concept to design
development. The objective of this modeling guideline is to yield results that
are consistent between projects and more representative of eventual metered
utility data. The process is one of continuous improvement; refinements will
be made to the modeling guidelines as operating data is collected on modeled
buildings.
b. Buildings Requiring Energy Modeling
1) All projects, new construction and renovations, require an energy model, with
the exception of storage facilities, maintenance facilities or facilities that do
not require cooling or heating.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 76
c. Modeling Software
1) The RCJ prefers that modelers use Trane Trace 700, Carrier HAP or eQuest,
a US DOE based energy modeling software package, to execute energy
models. The modeler will make available the input and output files for the
RCJ’s review and use. The use of other modeling software packages may be
approved by the RCJ upon specific request.
d. Climate Data
1) The RCJ recommends the use of TMY/2 climate data generated specifically
for Al Jubail. Deviation from using this data set requires approval by the RCJ.
e. Modeling Plan
1) During the concept stage, prior to Schematic Design, the consultant shall
present an energy modeling plan that describes the intended modeling
approach through the course of design. This plan must be approved by the
RCJ prior to starting the Schematic phase. The plan shall define the following
for each phase of design:
(a) Model inputs that are anticipated to be known or assumed at that point of
design
(b) Modeling software to be used
(c) The anticipated building and system options that will be evaluated at
each phase
(d) Model result level of detail, format and presentation method
f. Concept/Schematic Design Phase Model
1) During this phase, decisions will be made that include building site,
orientation, glazing, and massing. The intent of energy modeling at this phase
is to evaluate concept variations relative to inherent differences in energy
consumption of these variations.
2) Evaluate the shape and orientation of the building for impact on cooling loads.
As part of this phase, the architect may generate different massing concepts
for the building. Each of these conceptual designs will be modeled during this
phase.
3) Provide key input assumptions for review by the RCJ. Assumptions should
be in line with ASHRAE Std. 90.1 Appendix G modeling protocols so as not to
yield misleading results early in the design analysis process. Not all Appendix
G detail will be used in this early modeling.
4) It is preferred to model three HVAC system options (as appropriate). Inform
the RCJ of the three options to be modeled beforehand.
5) Model wall insulation material and glazing options to optimize the cost/benefit
of the envelope. (Coordinate glazing options with the architect.
6) Model ventilation airflow reduction strategies such as carbon dioxide sensors.
7) Model opportunities for electric lighting power density reduction and use of
daylighting as much as possible. Consider high efficacy lighting and efficient
ballasts. Focus on lighting control strategies for each space based on the
energy model, such as occupancy and daylight sensors.
8) Consider renewable energy possibilities wherever possible.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 77
9) Values for schedules, setpoints, occupancy density, and space loads shall be
documented clearly and confirmed with the RCJ so there is consistency
between modeling phases.
g. Baseline Model
1) Using the Performance Approach, appropriate for the building type, per the
Saudi Building Code 601, Chapters 4 through 6, create a preliminary baseline
building model for benchmarking. The baseline model shall comply with the
provisions of these chapters, as applicable. The model is to be used as a tool
to inform design decisions, so it will transform as the process proceeds.
(a) All associated energy use and costs must be included. This baseline
model should establish basic load calculation parameters using the
conceptual / pre-schematic design.
(b) The model shall reflect the same values for schedules, setpoints,
occupancy density, and space loads as the Concept/Schematic Design
Phase model so there is consistency between modeling phases.
(c) Simulation output shall include the Energy Use Intensity (GJ/M²), total
annual consumption of all utilities (monthly and annual), and central plant
efficiencies. These values shall be compared to the results from the
Concept/Schematic Design Phase model. The annual energy cost for
the Concept/Schematic Design Phase model must be less than the
annual energy cost for the Baseline Model.
(d) Alternatives shall be evaluated using a life cycle cost analysis. The
energy model shall be used to determine differences in performance
between options and the project cost consultant shall provide input on
cost premiums of options.
h. Owner Review
1) Provide documentation summarizing all of the results of the energy modeling
exercise for review by the RCJ.
i. Design Development/Construction Phase Models
1) During the Design Development and Construction Document phases, final
decisions will be made on equipment sizing and selection. Sizing of ductwork
and piping will result in a refined value for systems pressures and
horsepower. Continued work with the RCJ will result in better information on
equipment loads, occupancy schedules and space conditions. The models
developed in Schematic Design should be updated with this new information
and included with the DD and CD document submissions. Control system
optimization strategies will be evaluated during these phases of design.
Decisions made regarding glazing, insulation systems and lighting should be
tested as part of this updated model. During these phases cost estimates will
be refined and life cycle cost analysis of options should be updated.
2) Simulation output shall include the Energy Use Intensity (GJ/M²), total annual
consumption of all utilities (monthly and annual), and central plant efficiencies.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 78
3) Where specific high performance components, such as heat recovery, are

evaluated a parametric analysis may be used. This analysis is not a complete
run of the building model but is a differential analysis of the performance
improvement and cost premium for this component.
(a) Examples of components that may best be evaluated by a parametric
analysis are: heat recovery options, glazing options, wall and roof
insulation, and boiler options.
j. Owner Review
1) Provide documentation summarizing all of the results of the energy modeling
exercise for review by the RCJ.
k. LEED Energy Model (where applicable)
1) This phase of the modeling effort prepares the model to be submitted as an
important part of establishing the LEED certification for the facility.
2) Make final modifications to the DD/CD model to finalize for LEED, (or other
Environmental Standards entity recognized by the RCJ incorporating
comments made in previous phases.
3) Document the Energy Model per the requirements of LEED EA Prerequisite 2:
Minimum Energy Performance; and EA Credit 1: Optimize Energy
Performance.
l. Post Occupancy Verification
1) The RCJ will compare the final LEED model results and actual metered
energy use after 2 years of occupancy, or to coincide with the time period
prescribed in the LEED Measurement & Verification Plan. The results will
subsequently be shared with the consultant, who will provide the following
post design services:
(a) If results are within 10% of total energy use, and metered use is
consistent with the model breakdown, no further follow up will be
required.
(b) If results vary from the model by 10 – 20% of total energy use, or
metered use is not consistent with the model breakdown, the consultant
shall respond in a written report to reconcile the discrepancy.
(c) If results vary by more than 20%, the consultant shall conduct a building
walkthrough, participate in a reconciliation session, and issue a written
report detailing their findings.
11. Building Envelope Thermal and Moisture Properties
a. General
1) Building envelope materials and assemblies must comply with the
performance requirements specified in Chapters 4 and 5 of Saudi Building
Code 601.
(a) The requirements the Climate Zone must comply with Saudi Building
Code 601, Chapter 2.
2) The Prescriptive Path, Building Envelope Trade-off Option and Energy Cost
Budget Method, as outlined in Chapters 4 and 5 of Saudi Building Code 601
are all acceptable methods of compliance.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 79
3) Coordinate with the Architect in the Concept/Schematic Design phase to

assure the performance requirements for envelope materials and assemblies
are understood.
4) As part of either the cooling/heating load calculation effort or the energy
modeling effort, provide confirmation that the building envelope complies with
Saudi Building Code 601.
12. Refrigerants
a. General
1) All new refrigeration equipment shall utilize compounds that are CFC and
HCFC free and have an ozone depletion potential of zero (0).
2) Use of ammonia refrigerant is discouraged, and approval must be obtained
from the RCJ before considering any refrigeration installations utilizing
ammonia.
3) All installations of refrigeration equipment must comply with ASHRAE Std. 15
b. Secondary Coolants (Brines)
1) In some refrigeration applications such as food processing and freezing,
secondary coolants (brines) are used. The selection of secondary coolants
shall be carefully analyzed for each application. For example, for freezing
unpackaged fish and other foods calcium chloride cannot be tolerated.
Instead, ordinary salt (sodium chloride) brine may be used.
2) Table 5.4.3.A provides guidance for typical brine systems applications.
TABLE 5.4.3.A: TYPICAL BRINE SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS
Chlorinated or
Sodium Calcium Propylene Methanol Ethanol Fluorinated
Application Chloride Chloride Ethylene Glycol Water Water Hydrocarbons
Chemical Plant X X X X X X
Dairies X X X
Food Freezing X X X X
Meat Packing X X
Preheat Coils X X
(AC Systems)
Skating Rings X X X
Low X X X
Temperature
Systems
Ice Cream X X X

Rev. 0 5.4 - 80
3) In selecting brine, toxicity, flash point, specific heat, density, stability,

viscosity, freezing point, vapor pressure, water solubility, and foaming shall be
considered.
4) Sizing of brine piping systems shall be such that brine velocity is sufficiently
low as to prevent erosion of piping by entrained air. To reduce the possibility
of dirt and rust plugging in large salt brine systems, branch lines and valves
smaller than 25 mm shall not be used.
5) To protect brine piping systems from corrosion, the refrigerating brine shall
not be allowed to turn from all alkaline to an acid solution. Therefore, pH brine
solution shall be kept at 7 or above. Brine pH can be raised by addition of
caustic soda which has been dissolved in warm water. When pH can be
controlled, brass valves and bronze fitted pumps may be used.
6) Steel, iron, or copper piping can be used with most of the brines, except salt
brines where all-iron or steel piping shall be employed. All-iron or steel pumps
and valves shall be employed with calcium chloride brine, in order to prevent
electrolysis in the event of acidity.
13. Sustainability
a. Sustainability relating to HVAC design involves the implementing strategies to
reduce energy, improve indoor air quality, and water consumption. Directions for
minimizing energy, improving air indoor air quality and water use are addressed in
numerous sections for this Guiding Engineering Manual.
1) Designs must meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 –
Energy Standard for Buildings, ASHRAE Standard 62.1 as well as the Saudi
Building Code 601 and the local Ministry of Electricity and Water.
2) Strategies that exceed the minimum requirements of these codes and
standards will be considered based on the results of life cycle cost analysis.
Strategies should be proposed and analyzed during the initial phases of
design to minimize the cost of implementation and optimize the effectiveness
of the strategies.
b. Refer to the Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 3 – Codes & Performance
Standards; Section 3.4 –Sustainability for more guidelines regarding sustainability
relating to HVAC design.
14. Redundancy
a. General
1) To maintain cost control, redundancy is mandated only in the case of critical
systems and/or equipment.
2) When a system failure would result in unusually high repair costs or costly
replacement of process equipment, when activities would be disrupted that
are vital to an application or the health/welfare of humans, a costly production
process being manufactured; redundant systems or units are recommended.
3) All redundant items of equipment shall have dedicated starters or VFD’s,
depending on the application.
4) Controls shall be provided to operate the redundant equipment and
automatically equalize the runtime of all identical items of equipment. The
intention is to prevent premature bearing failure.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 81
b. Redundancy Requirements
1) Regardless of the system redundancy requirements of the program
document, the design shall provide for redundancy in the following items of
mechanical equipment. There is nothing in this document that prevents any
equipment redundancy dictated by particular system requirements.
(a) Chilled Water Pumps
(1) In single chiller applications, a second, full sized pump/motor
assembly shall be designed.
(b) Primary Chilled Water Pumps
(1) In multiple chiller/dedicated pump applications, one spare primary
chilled water pump motor shall be designed. The piping and valving
arrangement shall accommodate the redundant pump operating
with each of the chillers.
(c) Secondary Chilled Water Pumps
(1) Where used, secondary chilled pumps shall typically be a single
pump, VFD controlled, unless additional pumps are required to
satisfy the flow volume range.
(2) A standby secondary pump is required.
(d) Condenser Water Pumps
(1) In single chiller/tower applications, a second condenser water pump,
full size shall be designed.
(e) Condensate (Steam) Return Units
(1) Duplex pumps with automatic alternators are required. The design
shall be such that design flows will be handled by a single pump
with 33% run time. This equipment shall be powered from the
emergency generator, if an emergency generator is part of the
project.
(f) Primary Hot Water Pumps
(1) In single boiler applications, a second, full sized pump/motor
(2) In multiple boiler operations, there shall be one full size redundant
primary hot water pump.
(g) Control Air Compressors
(1) A single tank is acceptable.
(2) The design shall incorporate duplex air compressors/motors with
automatic alternator.
(3) The design shall be predicated on one-third run time and no more
than six starts per hour for one compressor, with the second
compressor designed as a full standby.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 82
2) Standby Air Conditioning Capacity

(a) All critical HVAC systems shall be provided with standby
units/equipment.
(1) Critical applications include hospitals, laboratories, data centers,
UPS rooms and any application where the health and welfare of
humans or animals or the longevity of expensive or critical
equipment would be threatened by the failure of the HVAC system.
(b) If the maximum design capacity of the system is supplied by 2 or more
normally operating units, the capacity of the standby unit(s) shall be at
least equal to the capacity of one of the normally operating units.
(c) In case the maximum system demand is satisfied by one operating unit
only, the capacity of the standby unit shall be equal to the capacity of the
operating unit.
15. Units and Conversions
a. All units of measure utilized in documentation for RCJ projects shall be based on the
International System of Units (SI), better known as the metric system.
b. Conversion factors for converting units of measure for HVAC applications shall be
from the Units and Conversions Chapter of the ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
16. HVAC Software
a. Reference to Other Sections of the GEM
1) Software is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9 – Cooling Load Calculations
and in Subsection 5.4.3.A.10 – Energy Modeling.
b. General
1) It is preferred that any software used for completing HVAC designs or drafting
be commercially available or public domain software available to the general
public. The use of software developed in-house by the consultant is
discouraged.
2) Provide a list of any software that will be used for the HVAC system design or
the drafting of the construction documents to the RCJ at the beginning of the
project for approval.
3) Where the design involves calculations for which ASHRAE has prescribed
procedures, such as cooling/heating load calculations, ductwork or piping
pressure drop calculations, or acoustic calculations, the software algorithms
and subroutines be based on the procedures prescribed by ASHRAE.
4) Provide the input and output files for all software programs utilized in each
design phase for HVAC calculations to the RCJ for review and approval in pdf
format so they are readily viewable by the RCJ without purchasing the
software licenses.
c. CADD
1) Provide all CADD drawing files and record documents in DWG format at the
completion of the project.
B. HVAC SYSTEMS

Rev. 0 5.4 - 83
1. Central Heating and Cooling

a. General
1) Guidelines related to individual items of central heating and cooling
equipment are addressed in those items’ respective Sections in this
Document.
2) Guidelines related to central heating and cooling are covered in Subsection
5.4.3.B.7. – Hydronic Heating and Cooling.
b. Mechanical Space Design
1) All mechanical rooms shall be designed and located to facilitate the removal,
transport and replacement of the largest equipment component housed within
each room. The fire rating of all mechanical rooms shall be in accordance with
the IBC.
2) For early planning purposes, a minimum of 5% of the total building area for a
new building shall be reserved for air handling equipment, and a minimum of
3% of the total building area for a new building shall be reserved for the
central heating and cooling plant.
3) The minimum clear height beneath the structural steel within a mechanical
room shall be 4.0 m.
4) Follow the egress requirements established by the International Building
Code. Egress doors shall be double doors, 2.0 m in total width.
5) Mechanical room locations shall be illustrated in the plan view at a scale of no
less than 1:50
6) A minimum of two composite floor-to-ceiling sections shall be illustrated for
each mechanical room at a scale not less than 1:50.
7) All ductwork and piping larger than 15 mm in width shall be shown double
line.
8) Provide adequate space for maintaining all items of equipment. The
clearances shall be measured from the edge of the equipment housekeeping
pad.
(a) Observe any code required clearance requirements, such as the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
(b) The minimum clearance around pumps and similar size equipment shall
be 0.5 m, unless the manufacturer’s recommendations require greater
clearance.
(c) The minimum clearance around large equipment such as chillers, boilers
and air handling units shall be 1.0 m.
(1) Adequate space shall be maintained at one end of chiller evaporator
and condenser bundles, and at one end of fire tube boilers for
pulling tubes.
(2) Adequate space shall be maintained at the side of air handling units
for pulling coils.
(3) Where multiple items of equipment having tube or coil pull clearance
requirements are provided, arrange the equipment wherever

Rev. 0 5.4 - 84
possible so that the clearance requirements can be shared by

multiple items of equipment.
(d) Provide ladders and catwalks for any equipment requiring regular
maintenance that cannot be maintained from floor level.
(1) Provide ladders and catwalks for boilers in accordance with the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
(e) The minimum clear head height within the clearance space around
equipment shall be 2.0 m.
9) The designated space for any future equipment and its service space
requirements shall be clearly identified on the design drawings.
(a) Show the intended path for moving the future equipment into the
mechanical space, from the point of entry into the building to the
equipment’s final resting place.
(b) Coordinate any requirements for removal wall panels or other special
means of entry with the Architect.
10) Wherever possible, mechanical rooms shall be located at grade. In multi-
level buildings, a freight elevator stop shall be provided at each level with a
mechanical room housing equipment with components weighing more than
45 kg.
11) When mechanical equipment must be roof mounted, structural considerations
must be coordinated early in the design. Dunnage and roof curbs
requirements shall be addressed.
(a) Address manufacturers required clearances
(b) Coordinate fall protection as required, depending on the proximity of the
equipment to the roof edge.
(c) Access to roof mounted equipment shall be by permanent stairs.
(d) Doorways leading to roof mounted equipment shall be of adequate size
for replacement of the equipment.
12) Below grade equipment should be avoided, with the exception of sump
pumps.
13) Mechanical rooms shall not be used as return air, outdoor air or mixed air
plenums.
14) Mechanical rooms shall have floor drains located in close proximity to
hydronic type equipment.
(a) Condensate drain from cooling coils shall be connected to floor drain
with indirect waste funnel with an air gap as per SBC 501 and 701
requirements.
15) Housekeeping pads shall be provided under all items of equipment. The pads
shall be 150 mm thick, and shall extend 150 mm beyond all sides of the
equipment.
16) Ventilate all mechanical rooms in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 85
(a) Refrigeration rooms shall be ventilated in accordance with Saudi Building

Code 501, Sections 9.5 and 9.6 and ASHRAE Standard 15 – Safety
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
17) Coordinate the design with all disciplines to assure that size and location of all
required chases, soffits, access panels, louvers, etc. are indicated on the
drawings.
2. Air Handling Distribution
a. General
1) Air handling distribution consists of ductwork, duct accessories such as
balancing and fire dampers, constant and variable air volume terminals for
controlling air flow for maintaining temperature or pressure relationships, and
air inlet and outlet devices such as diffusers, registers and grilles.
(a) Ductwork design is addressed in this Section.
(b) Selection of terminal units is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.b –
Room Air Distribution Equipment
b. Pressure Drop Calculations
1) All pressure drop calculations for sizing ductwork and selecting fans shall be
based on the data and procedures outlined in the Duct Design Chapter of the
ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, or the SMACNA HVAC Systems Duct
Design Manual.
2) Submit pressure drop calculations to the RCJ prior to the completion of the
final design phase for RCJ review and acceptance.
3) Complete pressure drop calculations utilizing computer based software that
has the ability to evaluate all circuits in a distribution system and identify the
circuit with the greatest flow resistance.
4) Give careful considerations to safety factors in the calculations, recognizing
that ductwork is rarely installed as designed, and that the addition of only a
few fittings to a distribution system can have a significant effect on the overall
flow resistance.
5) Careful considerations shall be given to conditions which fall outside the
fittings and arrangements listed in that reference such as multiple fittings in
series and poor inlet and outlet conditions.
(a) Provide added pressure drop allowance for fittings in series. Failure of
the air to achieve uniform velocity across the ductwork prior to entering
the second fitting will cause the pressure loss in the second fitting to be
greater than that calculated by the ASHRAE method.
(b) Losses related to fan inlet and outlet conditions, better known as System
Effect, shall be based on the data from AMCA Fans and Systems
Publication 201.
c. Duct Design Criteria
1) Duct work is classified in accordance with its working pressure as follows:
(a) Low Pressure: Below 500 Pa.
(b) Medium Pressure: 500 to 2500 Pa.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 86
(c) High Pressure: Above 2500 Pa.

2) The allowable air velocities for each of the duct pressure classifications are as
follows:
(a) Low Pressure: 8.6 m/S and lower
(b) Medium Pressure: 8.7 m/S to 12.7 m/S
(c) High Pressure: 12.8 m/S to 17.8 m/s
3) The allowable friction loss rates for each of the duct pressure classifications
are as follows:
(a) Low Pressure: 0.8 Pa/m and lower
(b) Medium Pressure: 0.9 Pa/m to 2.0 Pa/m
(c) High Pressure: 2.1 Pa/m to 4.0 Pa/m
4) Ductwork shall be sized using equal friction or static regain methods. The
equal friction method shall be based on a pressure drop of 0.65 Pa per meter
for supply, return, and exhaust ducts.
5) Duct air velocity shall be limited as shown in Tables 5.4.3.B, 5.4.3.C and
5.4.3.D in order to limit noise to acceptable levels.
TABLE 5.4.3.B: MAIN DUCT AIR VELOCITIES IN SHAFT OR ABOVE DRY WALL CEILING
RECTANGULAR DUCT ROUND DUCT

Space over or in which Max Acceptable Duct Max Acceptable Duct
Duct will run Velocity (m/s) Velocity (m/s)
Conference Rooms 8 10
Teleconference Rooms 6.5 8
Training Rooms 8 10
Auditoriums 8 10
Hospital/Clinic Rooms 8 10
Private Offices 8 10
Open Plan Offices 9 10
Corridors and Lobbies 10 12
Mosque 8 10
TABLE 5.4.3.C: MAIN DUCT AIR VELOCITIES ABOVE SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING
Space over or in which Max Acceptable Duct Max Acceptable Duct

Duct will run Velocity (m/s) Velocity (m/s)
Conference Rooms 7.5 7.5

Teleconference Rooms 4.7 7.5
Training Rooms 7.5 7.5

Rev. 0 5.4 - 87
Auditoriums 7.5 7.5

Hospital/Clinic Rooms 7.5 8
Private Offices 7.5 7.5
Open Plan Offices 8.9 8
Corridors and Lobbies 8.9 10
Mosque 7.5 7.5
TABLE 5.4.3.D: MAIN DUCT AIR VELOCITIES LOCATED WITHIN OCCUPIED SPACE
Space Over or in Max Acceptable Duct Max Acceptable Duct

which Duct will run Velocity (m/s) Velocity (m/s)
Conference Rooms 6.1 7.5

Teleconference Rooms 3.5 6.3
Training Rooms 6.1 7.5
Auditoriums 6.1 7.5
Hospital/Clinic Rooms 6.1 7.5
Private Offices 6.1 7.5
Open Plan Offices 7.4 8
Corridors and Lobbies 8.8 10
Mosque 6.1 7.5
6) Duct design shall be in accordance with the following:

(a) All galvanized sheet metal ducts and plenums which are not wrapped
with insulation shall be field coated with epoxy.
(b) Round ducts shall be used as much as possible.
(c) Aspect ratios shall not be more than 4:1, unless space consideration is a
governing factor.
(d) Reduction in area due to obstructions shall not be more than 20%.
Obstructions inside ducts shall be streamlined.
(e) Where duct work is connected to any fittings or equipment such as
heating coils, cooling coils or filters, the transitions shall be as smooth as
possible. Diverging transitions shall have a slope not exceeding 20º.
Converging transitions shall have a slope not exceeding 30º.
(f) Increments in duct work sizes preferably shall be in one dimension only
and shall not be less than 50 mm.
(g) Smooth radius elbows, round heal round throat, with a centerline radius
equal to 1.5 times the duct diameter or width shall be used as much as
possible. For round ducts, if a smooth elbow is not available, 3-piece
elbow for velocity below 9 m/s and 5-piece elbow for velocity above

Rev. 0 5.4 - 88
9 m/s shall be used. In all cases, the throat radius shall not be less than
3/4 of the duct diameter or width.
(h) Long conical tee shall be used for systems having a velocity above 8 m/s
and a 45° tee for systems having a velocity below 8 m/s.
(i) Access doors or panels shall be provided in duct work for maintenance
and service of the following equipment:
(1) Filters.
(2) Cooling coil.
(3) Heaters.
(4) Sound absorbers.
(5) Volume and splitter dampers.
(6) Fire dampers.
d. Special Applications
1) Kitchen Exhaust Systems
(a) Kitchen ventilation systems shall be designed in strict accordance with
the Saudi Building Code 501, Section 3.5 regarding Domestic Kitchen
Exhaust Equipment or Section 3.6 regarding Commercial Kitchen Hood
Ventilation System Ducts and Exhaust Equipment. Exhaust systems for
commercial cooking operations shall also be designed in accordance
with NFPA 96 – Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations.
2) Paint Spray Operations
(a) Minimum ventilation rates for paint spray operations shall be 6 air
changes per hour. All air must be exhausted. Recirculation is not
permitted.
(b) Where solvent based paints are used, exhaust fans shall be Type A
Spark Resistant Construction. All electrical components exposed to the
paint vapors shall be explosion proof.
(c) Exhaust inlets for exhaust systems serving paint spray operations shall
be filtered with minimum MERV 8 filters.
(d) The maximum air velocity at the filter face shall be 2.5 M/S.
(e) See Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines;
Section 5.4.1 Fire Protection; Paragraph 5.4.1.D.1.g.1)(a) regarding fire
protection requirements for paint spray operations.
3) Flammable Storage
(a) Ventilation for flammable storage areas shall be designed in accordance
with Saudi Building Code 801, Sections 32.4, 33.4 and 34.4 and NFPA
30 – Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
(b) See Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines;
Section 5.4.1 Fire Protection; Paragraph 5.4.1.D.1.g.1)(b) regarding fire
protection requirements for flammable storage.
4) Battery Rooms

Rev. 0 5.4 - 89
(a) Ventilation for Battery Rooms shall be designed in accordance with

International Mechanical Code, Section 502, International Fire Code,
Section 608 and NFPA 111, Chapter 7.
5) Class I Division I and Division II Explosion Hazard Environments
(a) Exhaust fans for Class I Division I (Zone 0, Zone 1) and Division II (Zone
2) applications shall be Type A Spark Resistant Construction. Electrical
components in the Class 1 Division I or Division II atmosphere shall be
explosion proof or selected in accordance with IEC 60079for use in a
Zone 1 or Zone 2 area as applicable with appropriate Gas Group and
Temperature Class rating.
6) Class II Environments Involving Explosive Dusts
(a) Exhaust fans for Class II explosive dust applications shall be Type A
Spark Resistant Construction. Electrical components in the explosive
dust atmosphere shall be explosion proof or selected in accordance with
IEC 60079 for use in a Zone 20, Zone 21 or Zone 22 area as applicable
with appropriate Dust Group and Temperature Class rating.
(b) Ductwork shall be bonded and grounded to prevent the build-up of static
electricity.
7) Spaces Utilizing Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems
(a) Provide means to purge spaces protected by clean agent fire
suppression chemicals after the chemicals have been released and the
fire is extinguished.
(1) Purging can be accomplished with the building HVAC system if the
flow to the space is adequate, and if the system can be controlled
so that 100% of the chemicals can be exhausted and not returned
to the HVAC air supply system. Generally an air flow rate of 6 air
changes per hour is considered adequate to purge the clean agent
fire extinguishing chemicals.
(2) If the building HVAC system does not have adequate capacity or
cannot be arranged to prevent recirculation of the chemicals back
into the building, a dedicated purge system capable of producing 6
air changes per hour in the space protected by the clean agent fire
suppression chemicals shall be provided.
(3) The clean agent fire suppression purge system shall be tested to
prove effectiveness before the building is occupied.
(b) See Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines;
Subsection 5.4.1.H.4. Clean Agent Systems for design requirements
related to clean agent fire extinguishing systems.
3. In-Room Terminal Systems
a. Reference to other Subsections of the GEM
1) Variable refrigerant flow systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.9 –
Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems
b. General
1) In-Room Terminal Systems typically do not have the required capacity to cool
and dehumidify ventilation air, with the exception of perhaps unit ventilators.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 90
Therefore, ventilation shall be provided by a separate dedicated outdoor air

system (DOAS) where in-room terminal units are used.
(a) Some terminals systems have ventilation air provisions, however, rarely
do they have capacity to cool and dehumidify the ventilation air in the
Jubail climate.
(b) Before using any in-room terminal units to supply and condition
ventilation air, obtain the approval of the RCJ.
2) In-room terminal units require special maintenance such as regular filter
replacement and cleaning of cooling coils and cooling coil drain pans at each
unit.
(a) HVAC system selection shall be based on a complete life cycle cost
analysis. Include the maintenance and equipment replacement costs for
all equipment in the analysis.
3) Sloped tops are recommended for any floor mounted in-room terminal units to
prevent room occupants from placing materials on the top of the units that
would impede airflow.
4) All in-room terminal units shall have minimum MERV 8 filters.
5) In-room terminal units shall be controlled from wall mounted controls in lieu of
unit mounted controls.
c. Types of In-Room Terminal Systems
1) Fan Coil Units
(a) Units may be floor or ceiling mounted. Floor mounted units are preferred
for ease of maintenance.
(1) Where ceiling mounted units are used, provide clear unobstructed
access to the filter rack and the condensate drain pan.
(2) Avoid locating ceiling units over desks and other furniture or
equipment as dust and dirt almost always precipitate when the units
are accessed.
(3) Ceiling mounted units may require condensate pumps to transfer
the condensate to the drain risers. Rarely is the adequate height
above a ceiling to develop the proper slope for condensate
drainage.
(i) Provide a condensate drain pan overflow switch to sense the
condensate before the drain pan overflows, de-energize the
unit fan and signal an alarm to the building management
system.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 91
2) Unit Ventilators
(a) Unit ventilators are generally only used for primary and secondary school
applications. Unit ventilators may have self-contained DX cooling or
have chilled water coils for cooling.
(1) Special attention shall be given to the noise levels generated by
self-contained DX units. Most manufacturers offer options to reduce
the noise level produced by the unit.
(i) Confirm the unit noise levels are within the limits established
for the specific application in the ASHRAE Applications
Handbook. Often times, all of the options are required to
achieve acceptable noise levels.
(b) If unit ventilators are used to supply ventilation air to occupied spaces,
each outdoor air intake must be protected by a sand trap louver.
3) Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units (PTAC’s)
(a) The noise levels generated by PTAC’s vary considerably from
manufacturer to manufacturer. Clearly specify the acceptable noise
levels for these units in accordance with the limits set forth in the
ASHRAE Applications Handbook.
4) Chilled Beam Systems
(a) Chilled beam systems are very sensitive to room humidity conditions.
The fluid temperature passing through the secondary coil must be
maintained above the wet-bulb temperature of the space.
(b) Chilled beams shall only be used in buildings where infiltration may be
minimized.
(c) Passive chilled beams will not have adequate cooling capacity for most
applications in Jubail, so use of chilled beams shall be limited to active
chilled beams
(d) Provide a condensation sensor on at least one chilled beam in each
room. Condensation sensors are less expensive and more reliable than
dew point sensors.
(e) For larger rooms (50 m² and larger), provide a two-position supply air
terminal and occupancy sensors to interrupt the flow of primary air to the
chilled beams and shut off the secondary chilled water flow to the chilled
beams whenever the space is unoccupied.
4. Applied Heat Pump and Heat Recovery Systems
a. Reference to other Sections of the GEM
1) Refrigerant compounds are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.12 –
Refrigerants
2) Direct expansion cooling coils are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.e.2) –
Finned Cooling Coils – Direct Expansion Type
3) Heat recovery is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.g. – Air-to-Air Energy
Recovery Devices
4) Direct expansion cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.l) – DX
Packaged and Split

Rev. 0 5.4 - 92
5) Residential heating is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.2.b. – Residential

Heating
b. Residential Applications
1) If heating is required for applications, air-source heat pumps shall be used.
Heat pumps for residential applications should be selected to have adequate
cooling capacity to meet the cooling load. The resulting heating capacity of
the selected equipment is normally more than adequate to meet heating
requirements for the application.
c. Healthcare and Industrial Applications
1) Applications that have a simultaneous need for heating and cooling may
provide opportunities for heat recovery chillers or water-to-water heat pumps.
Examples would be:
(a) HVAC supply air reheating for hospitals and labs where air is cooled and
dehumidified and then reheated for temperature control.
(b) Industrial process where there is a simultaneous demand for cool water
and warm water, either for space conditioning or for process use.
2) Hot water delivery temperatures of 40.5 C are possible from heat recovery
chillers.
3) If the heat demand involves a critical application, consider providing a
redundant heat recovery chiller.
5. Forced Air Heating and DX Cooling Systems
a. Reference to other Sections of the GEM
1) Refrigerant compounds are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.12 –
Refrigerants
2) Heat pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.4. – Applied Heat Pump
and Heat Recovery Systems
3) Direct expansion cooling coils are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.e.2) –
Finned Cooling Coils – Direct Expansion Type
4) Direct expansion cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.l. – DX
Packages and Split
5) Forced air heating is typically only used in residential applications.
(a) Residential heating is typically done with heat pumps (see Subsection
5.4.3.C.2.b. – Residential Heating)
6) Reheating is done in Hospitals (see Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.n. – HVAC for
Hospitals and Clinics) and in Laboratories (see Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.o. –
HVAC for Laboratories).
6. Steam Systems
a. Reference to other sections for the GEM
1) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9 – Redundancy
2) Boilers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.2.a. – Boilers
3) Heat exchangers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.d – Heat Exchangers

Rev. 0 5.4 - 93
4) Water Treatment is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.f – Water Treatment

b. General
1) The use of steam shall be limited to applications for which there are no
substitutes, such as large scale humidification, sterilization and laundry
applications in hospitals, and some industrial applications.
2) Confirm the availability of fuel for a steam boiler with the RCJ. Boiler fuel will
likely be fuel oil or natural gas.
3) All steam systems and equipment shall be designed in strict accordance with
the requirements of the ASME Codes and Standards.
c. Operating Pressure and Pressure Control
1) The operating pressure shall not be higher than 1 Bar above the minimum
pressure required for the application.
(a) Humidification can usually be served with 1 Bar steam pressure.
(b) For hospital laundry and sterilization applications, a steam pressure of
5 Bar is usually adequate.
(c) Industrial applications may require higher steam pressures. Confirm the
required pressure with the RCJ.
2) Steam pressure reducing valves shall be self-powered pilot-operated type.
(a) Single-stage pressure reducing valves are permitted for low pressure
applications operating at 1 Bar or lower pressure.
(b) Two-stage pressure reducing valves are required for high pressure
applications.
(c) Pressure reducing stations shall be located such that they can be
serviced from the floor for safety purposes.
d. Steam Demand Profile
1) Develop a full steam demand profile for the system.
2) Utilize the steam demand profile to determine the number and capacities of
boilers required to meet the demand.
3) Critical systems shall have one redundant boiler.
4) Boilers shall be sized so that one boiler remains online at low fire when
demand is lowest. Boiler efficiency drops dramatically when boilers cycle on
and off. If demand is seasonal, it is acceptable to cycle all boilers off when
there is no steam demand.
e. Feedwater Heating and Deaeration
1) Feedwater for a steam boiler must be heated to prevent shocking a boiler with
cold water.
(a) Cold water shocking could cause tube leakage and may cause water
contraction in a boiler, causing water level fluctuations.
2) Live steam from the system to shall be used to heat feedwater.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 94
3) Specify a spray-type deaerator with the capacity to remove all carbon dioxide
from the feedwater and reduce oxygen levels in the feedwater to
0.005 CC/Liter (7 ppb).
4) Boiler feedwater pumps shall be modulating flow type with variable frequency
drives.
(a) Operating pump capacity shall be 1.25 times the boiler capacity.
(b) Design feedwater pump head shall be equal to the boiler safety relief
valve setting.
(c) Confirm the inlet pressure at the feedwater pump is greater than the net
positive suction head requirement for the pump.
(d) Provide one redundant feedwater pump.
f. Steam Traps
1) All steam traps shall have a capacity to load factor of 2:1.
2) Provide thermodynamic traps for all high pressure drip legs.
3) Provide float & thermostatic traps for all heat exchangers.
4) Protect all steam traps with strainers. Strainers shall have valves on the
cleaning ports
g. Pressure relief valves
1) All sections of the steam piping system shall be protected by ASME pressure
relief valves with adequate capacity to relieve the upstream steam capacity of
the system.
(a) The discharge of all safety relief valves shall be piped to the outdoors.
h. Shutoff Valves
1) Shutoff valves 50 mm diameter and smaller for low pressure steam shall be
ball valves with bronze body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, and reinforced
Teflon 15% glass-filled double seal seat.
2) Shutoff valves 50 mm and smaller of high pressure steam shall be ball valves
with ASTM A216 WCB carbon steel or stainless steel body, 316 stainless
steel ball and stem, and high temperature reinforced Teflon double seal seat.
3) Shutoff valves larger than 50 MM for low pressure and high pressure steam
shall be AANSI 150 high performance butterfly valves with carbon steel
tapped lug full flange body, 316 stainless steel disc and double offset stem,
and high temperature reinforced Teflon fully bidirectional seat design for
dead-end service in either direction.
i. Piping Materials
1) Steam supply piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel.
2) Condensate return piping shall be Schedule 80 black steel.
j. Steam Piping Design
1) Steam supply piping shall be designed in strict accordance with the guidelines
established in the ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 95
2) Specify pipe insulation in strict accordance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 –

Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
k. Expansion Compensation
1) Expansion loops are preferred over expansion joints.
2) Fully detail the dimensions of all expansion loops on the construction
drawings.
3) Clearly show anchor and guide locations on the construction drawings.
4) If adequate space cannot be provided for expansion loops, expansion joints
may be used. Provide means of shutting off steam service within the general
vicinity of expansion joints on both the upstream and downstream sides to
avoid shutting down the entire system to service a joint.
7. Hydronic Heating and Cooling
a. Reference to other sections for the GEM
2) Condenser Water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8 –
Condenser Water Systems
4) Conventional chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.a – Chillers
(Vapor Compression)
5) Absorption chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.b – Chillers
(Absorption)
6) Cooling towers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.c – Cooling Towers
7) Centrifugal Pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.a – Pumps
(Centrifugal)
8) Turbine pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.b – Pumps (Turbine)
b. General
1) Hydronic systems are preferred for cooling large buildings because they are
more efficient for cooling large buildings than DX systems, and cooling may
be provided through a central chiller plant which provides an efficient method
for addressing variable cooling loads
c. Volumetric Expansion Compensation
1) Bladder-type diaphragm expansion tanks are to be utilized wherever possible.
(a) Consider locating the tank at the top of the building to minimize size.
2) Expansion Joints shall be used when piping flexibility design is impractical.
Otherwise piping loops with appropriate guides and anchors shall be
provided.
d. Make-Up Water/System Pressure.
1) Backflow prevention devices shall be provided per code.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 96
2) A pressure control valve shall provide make-up water and consequently

operate to maintain system pressure.
3) Make-up water shall be provided near the suction side of the system primary
pumps, such that, the system pressure will always be above atmospheric
pressure.
4) System Pressure will always remain positive at the high point of the system.
e. Air Removal/Drainage
1) Automatic and Manual Air Vents shall be provided at all system high points.
(a) Provide shut-off valves at the inlets of air vents,
2) Venting is intended to be utilized during system fill and operation.
3) Automatic Air Vents are NOT to be placed over critical areas.
4) Drain Valves shall be piped to floor drains when practical.
f. Pumping System Configuration
1) Variable primary pumping systems are preferred for large chilled water
systems.
2) Primary/secondary systems are preferred for hydronic heating systems
(a) Secondary pumps shall utilize variable frequency drive control via
system differential pressure (sensors shall be placed near the end of the
piping system).
(b) Two-way control valves at the system loads and control system bypass
shall be utilized.
(c) Primary Pumps shall be matched one pump per boiler,
g. Chilled Water Plants
1) The systems will generally supply water between 4 C and 7 C.
2) Cooling coils should be designed for a chilled water temperature rise of 9 C to
11 C.
3) Multiple Chiller Applications should use the same capacity model/type of
chillers, however, large tonnage applications should consider different size
machines and prime movers depending upon the facility load profiles and
available fuel sources.
4) Consider providing at least one chiller in each chiller plant with a variable
frequency drive. An economic analysis shall be done to determine if this is
warranted on larger chillers.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 97
h. Water Velocities in Piping

1) Water velocity in HVAC piping shall not exceed the values shown in
Table 5.4.3.A in order to limit noise levels, avoid excessive energy
consumption and pipe erosion:
TABLE 5.4.3.A: RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM WATER VELOCITY IN HVAC PIPING
MAXIMUM VELOCITY
SERVICE IN M/SEC
Hot Water
50 mm Pipe and Under 1.2
Above 50 mm Pipe 1.8
Cold Water
Pump Suction without Head 1.2
Drain Line 1.2
i. Piping Design
1) Piping design shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) Water flow, especially through heat transfer equipment, shall be in a
direction to permit natural air venting. Typically, the water outlet shall be
higher than the water inlet to promote air elimination.
(b) Pipe friction loss for general applications shall not be more than 350 Pa
per 1 m length of pipe.
(c) Reverse return piping arrangements may be acceptable for small
hydronic systems, but is generally not cost effective for large systems.
Provide adequate means for manual balancing and flow measurement.
(d) Supports and anchors for HVAC piping and other system piping and
equipment called out in this section, shall be coordinated with the design
requirements in Section 5.2, Structural.
2) Components for piping systems shall be as follows:
(a) Long radius elbows shall be used wherever possible. For offsets, 45°
elbows instead of 90° elbows shall be used.
(b) Unions shall be provided for screwed pipes, where equipment and piping
accessories have to be disconnected for service.
(c) Flanges shall be provided for welded pipes, where equipment and piping
(d) Ball, globe or butterfly valves shall be used for throttling services. 10 mm
globe valves shall be provided as bypass valves for all globe valves
above 200 mm.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 98
j. Valves and Accessories

1) Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet of each item of HVAC equipment,
including but not limited to pumps, coils, fin-tube convectors, cabinet heaters,
unit heaters, heat exchangers, and other similar equipment.
2) Provide valves at the top and bottom of all risers.
3) Provide valves at all branch take-offs from piping mains.
4) Provide non-slam check valves as indicated at pump discharges.
5) Locate valves so that the tops of the valve stems are above the horizontal.
6) Valves for equipment, coils, specialties, etc., shall meet the component's
pressure rating listed, and as required for system pressures and
temperatures.
7) Valves shall be same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
8) In general and unless otherwise noted, shut-off valves 50 mm size and
smaller shall be ball valves. Shut-off valves 62 mm size and larger shall be
butterfly valves.
k. Pumps
1) Pumps 3.75 kW and larger shall have variable speed drives for variable flow
designs and shall be arranged so that flow is matched to the demand.
2) Pumps shall be selected so that that flow may be increased by 15% with a
corresponding increase in pump head by simply changing the impeller.
Neither a change in the pump body size or pump a motor replacement shall
be required.
3) Select pumps for operation within a range of 66% to 115% of the flow at the
point of highest efficiency
4) Select pump motors to prevent overloading over the entire flow range of the
selected impeller, as well as for the entire flow range of one impeller size
larger.,
5) For pumps operating in series or parallel, the series or parallel curves shall be
plotted to confirm proper flow with multiple pumps operating.
l. Mechanical System Configurations
1) Water Coils
(a) All hydronic water coils shall have two-way valves. Bypass valves shall
be provided at the end of circulation circuits to provide minimum flow
when all 2 – way valves are closed.
(b) A shutoff valve shall be installed on each supply and return pipe at each
coil to allow for servicing of the coil without tampering with water
balance.
(c) Coils shall have means for independent balancing for each coil.
(d) A strainer shall be provided for each coil bank to protect the 2 – way
valve.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 99
8. Condenser Water Systems

a. Reference to other sections of the GEM
(Centrifugal)
b. General
1) Water of acceptable quality for a water cooled condenser systems is in scarce
supply in Jubail
(a) A life cycle cost analysis shall be performed to determine the overall cost
effectiveness of a cooling tower system over air cooled condensing for
refrigeration. The life cycle cost analysis shall include all cost associated
with treating the water and disposing of blowdown.
2) Because of the environment in Jubail, cooling towers shall be constructed
from stainless steel or fiberglass.
3) All cooling towers shall have variable frequency drives controlling fan speed.
4) Condenser water systems employing open cooling towers shall have side
stream filtration to remove particulates from the condenser water. Side
stream filtration systems shall filter between 5% and 10% of the total
condenser water flow on each pass.
5) All sections of the piping system except the return line to the upper tower
basin shall be kept below the basin level.
6) An approach of 4 C to the design wet-bulb temperature is frequently
considered an economically sound design.
7) Piping from the tower sump to the pump is basically flowing due to gravity.
The sump level shall be above the top of the pump casing for positive prime,
and piping pressure drop shall be minimized such that there is always
adequate net positive suction on the pump.
8) All sections of the piping system except the return line to the upper tower
basin shall be kept below the basin level.
9) Confirm the water flow rate at the tower basin outlet does not exceed the
manufacturer’s recommended maximum in order to avoid vortexing.
10) Piping to be sized for water velocities between 1.0 m/s and 2.5 m/s.
11) Multiple cooling towers are to be connected; the piping shall be designed so
that the pressure loss from the tower to the pump suction is exactly equal for
each tower.
12) Provide adequate equalizing piping between sumps for multiple tower cells.
Size equalizing piping liberally for gravity flow.
13) For tower arrangements with multiple cells, provide individual valving and
level control for each cell so that any individual cell may be isolated for
maintenance without completely interrupting the operation of all towers.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 100
14) Closed circuit evaporative fluid coolers shall be used for hydronic heat pump
and other systems water cooled unitary refrigeration equipment.
15) Where a condenser water system serves multiple pieces of refrigeration
equipment, provide flow meters and balancing valves to assure the proper
flow rate to each piece of equipment. Provide motorized isolation valves to
modulate flow to each piece of equipment that may operate with variable flow,
and to isolate refrigeration equipment when it is de-energized.
9. Variable-Refrigerant Flow Systems
a. General
1) Variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems may be used in various applications,
such as
• Multiple-tenant residential buildings
• Retail stores
• Hospitality centers, restaurants, banquet halls, hotels, and motels
2) Indoor units constantly react to changes in the zone’s cooling loads, and
maintain conditions. The inverter compressors or combination of inverter and
constant-speed compressors generally found in the VRF systems modulate
refrigerant flow, and work in unison with the refrigerant volume required by the
indoor units.
3) Ventilation air for a facility served by a VRF system should be provided by a
direct outdoor air system.
4) VRF fan coil units should be equipped with MERV 8 filters.
5) The refrigerant expansion valve shall be a modulating valve responding to
superheat at the refrigerant piping leaving the fan coil unit. Capillary tubes
are not acceptable thermal expansion control devices.
6) For applications involving high occupant densities, select equipment with a
“dry mode”, where the indoor unit fan operates at a low fan speed to keep the
coil air flowing at sufficient capacity to remove moisture from the space
without significantly lowering room temperature. If the zone temperature
drops below a designated set point shall off.
7) VRF systems can utilize air-cooled or water-cooled condensers. Complete a
life cycle cost analysis addressing all cost associated with purchasing and
treating water, as well as with disposing of blowdown water prior to design a
water-cooled system.
8) Follow the VRF equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for refrigerant
piping sizes and maximum to minimum vertical and horizontal lengths, based
on refrigerant volumes and velocities required for efficient and stable system
operation. System refrigerant charge is a calculated value, whereas
additional charge is determined by liquid-line volume.
9) Given the complexities of integrating the operation of the indoor and outdoor
units, the entire control package for the VRF system should be furnished by
the VRF system manufacturer.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 101
10) Safety Considerations for Refrigerants

(a) As with any HVAC equipment, VRF systems must include design and
application safeguards that protect occupants. ASHRAE Standard 15
applies to the design, construction, testing, installation, operation, and
inspection of mechanical refrigeration systems. This standard specifies
safe design, construction, installation, and operation of refrigeration
systems.
(b) Also refer to ASHRAE Standard 34, which lists the most current
information related to refrigerant designations, safety classifications, and
refrigerant concentration limits (RCL). ASHRAE Standard 34 refers to
common names of refrigerants used in HVAC systems, instead of using
the chemical name, formula, or trade name. The standard establishes a
uniform system for assigning reference numbers and safety classifications
to refrigerants (including blends).
(c) The smallest space in which any of the indoor units or piping could be
located must be capable of safely dispersing the refrigerant charge of the
entire VRF system in the unlikely event of a catastrophic leak or failure.
Examples of spaces that may require additional consideration include
(1) Bathrooms
(2) Electrical rooms
(3) Closets
(4) Small offices
(5) Egress
(d) Several options are available to manage smaller spaces; however, care is
needed not to violate other standards such as IEC. Options available to
manage smaller spaces where the RCL would otherwise be exceeded
include the following:
(1) Do not install an indoor unit, but allow the code-required ventilation
to maintain conditions in the space.
(2) If cooling is required in the occupied space, one option is to
increase the actual space volume by providing a permanent
opening or connecting to an adjacent room, as described in
ASHRAE Standard 15. A permanent opening can be included
along the common wall between an electrical room and janitor
closet to increase the size of the space; alternatively, install the
ceiling high enough to provide the necessary volume, or omit the
ceiling entirely.
(3) A ducted indoor unit could serve several smaller offices, thus
increasing the overall occupied space served by the system.
(4) Central VRF systems can be subdivided into a series of smaller
systems so that the total charge in a given system does not exceed
the RCL limitations for a given space.
(e) System Expansion or Reconfiguration
(1) The modular nature of VRF systems lends itself to easy system
expansion or reconfiguration as building needs change. During the

Rev. 0 5.4 - 102
design phase, consider any possible future or changing needs

within the building envelope.
(2) VRF outdoor units can be upsized according to manufacturers’
recommendations to anticipate supplementary indoor units without
affecting the performance of initially installed indoor units. Indoor
units can be added to the VRF system (up to the manufacturer’s
recommended limits) to address cooling needs in an adjacent space
while the primary space is unoccupied. Indoor units can be
exchanged for different models or capacities. Nonducted indoor
units such as ceiling cassette and wall-mounted units can be
relocated within a given space as occupancy needs change.
(3) Indoor units are usually added, relocated, or exchanged with
minimal disruption by simply reconfiguring indoor unit refrigerant
piping, electrical wiring, control wiring, and drain piping. Note,
however, that in some applications, piping sizes may change as
capacity sizes change. Review manufacturer’s recommendations
on piping design and diversity parameters before performing any
type of indoor unit installation or relocation.
10. Dust Collection Systems
a. General
1) Design all dust collection systems in strict accordance with Industrial
Ventilation – A Manual of Recommended Practice, published by the American
Council of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.
2) When collecting different types of dust in a single system, assure there is no
fire or explosion danger when the materials mix.
3) If a facility has operations that require intermittent operation of the dust
collection system and other operations that require round-the-clock operation
of the dust collection system, consider providing two separate dust collection
systems. Dust collection systems, due to the resistance of airflow in the ducts
and the collectors, may be significant consumers of electricity. Having the
option of shutting one of the systems off part time could save substantial
energy.
4) Provide a full acoustical analysis for dust collection systems to assure
objectionable sound levels will not result in the area where the collector is
located, or in adjacent areas.
b. Collector Air to Cloth Ratio
1) Recommended air to cloth ratio values vary depending on the dust material
and the method of cleaning the collector.
(a) For collectors with shaker and reverse air cleaning, air to cloth rations
range from 2 to 3.
(b) For collectors with pulse jet cleaning air to cloth ratios vary from 5 to 12.
c. Collector Cleaning
1) Select the cleaning option that is best suited to the application and the budget
(a) Shaker cleaning may be manual for small dust collectors, or motorized
for larger collectors. Motorized shakers may be controlled to initiate

Rev. 0 5.4 - 103
automatically based on time intervals or pressure drop through a

collector. Airflow is typically interrupted during the shaking process.
This type of cleaning is the most economical, especially for small dust
collectors.
(b) Reverse air cleaning baghouse dust collectors are usually used in
applications where hard dust cake would develop on the dirty side of the
filter. These types of a dust collectors use fans to blow air in the opposite
direction to remove the dust cake from the filter bag. These dust
collectors are meant for continuous use and may clean without
interrupting the production process. The pulse opposes and interrupts
airflow for only a few tenths of a second.
(c) Pulse jet cleaning uses compressed air to force a burst of air down
through the bag and expand it violently. The filters maybe cleaned one
row at a time, so an entire dust collector does not have to have airflow
interrupted for cleaning.
2) Provide clear space beneath the collector for a storage container to collect the
dust filtered by the collector. Provide a clear access path to remove the
storage container from the facility. If the dust material is hazardous, provide a
path for container removal that does not present a hazard for building
occupants.
d. Fire and Explosion Protection
1) If the dust material offers any risk of fire or explosion, provide fire suppression
to protect the inlet ducts at the collector and explosion venting for the
collector.
(a) Chemical suppression is preferred.
(b) For collectors located outdoors, direct explosion venting in a safe
direction away from buildings or personnel. For collectors located
indoors, direct the explosion venting through the roof in a direction that
will not be a threat to other buildings or personnel. The collector shall be
located so that the explosion vent is within 1.5 m of the roof.
e. Fan Selection
1) Provide complete duct pressure drop calculations for review by the RCJ.
2) Account for system effect at the fan inlets and outlets
3) Select fans with at least a 20% safety factor for the fan total pressure.
4) Fans shall be capable of material handling.
(a) Radial Blade centrifugal fans are preferred.
5) Provide variable frequency drives for duct collector fans 3.75 kW and larger.
f. Ductwork
1) Dust collection ductwork shall be round to so that uniform velocity is
maintained over the entire cross section of the duct.
2) Size duct and duct hangers based on an assumption of 10% fill in the bottom
of the duct from dust that dropped out of entrainment in the airstream.
3) If the dust material offers any risk of fire or explosion, the ductwork material
must be of spark proof construction.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 104
4) Fans for systems handling dusts that present an explosion hazard shall be
Type A spark resistant construction.
11. Stair Pressurization Systems
a. General
1) Stair pressurizations systems shall be designed in strict accordance with
Saudi Building Code 801, Section 7.9.20- Smokeproof Enclosures and NFPA
92 – Standard for Smoke Control Systems.
2) Design of stair pressurization systems is complex. The design must be
completed by an experienced professional engineer.
b. Design Considerations
1) Confirm with the RCJ the number of doors to be considered open in
calculating the airflow requirements. It should be assumed that at minimum,
the fire floor, plus the floors above and below the fire floor will be evacuated in
the event of a fire. In addition, occupants will be exiting the egress door at the
base of the stair. It probably is not prudent to assume a steady stream of
occupants passing through all of these doors simultaneously, but at least
three doors should be assumed to be open at any given time.
2) Confirm the allowable door opening force that will be permitted in the
completed facility.
c. Control
1) Control fans via pressure differential sensors and variable frequency drives.
For very tall buildings, multiple pressure zones may be required.
2) A relief damper is recommended, in addition to the variable speed control of
the fans, to stabilize the pressure as doors are opened and closed. The relief
dampers should have a fast acting actuator that can operate full stroke in 4
seconds or less.
3) The relief airflow should discharge in multiple directions to eliminate the effect
of wind on the discharge.
d. Commissioning
1) Stair pressurization systems should be commissioned rigorously. Specify
commissioning of each system independently. Numerous combinations of
stair doors should be open simultaneously to test for proper pressurization.
Also test the system with fewer than design number of doors open to assure
over-pressurization does not occur, and test the system with more than the
design number of doors open to determine under what conditions the system
becomes ineffective.
2) The results from all of the testing shall be reported to the RCJ for review and
acceptance.
12. District Cooling and Central Plant Systems
a. Reference to other sections of the GEM:
2) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7 – Hydronic
Heating and Cooling

Rev. 0 5.4 - 105
3) Condenser Water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8 –

5) Conventional chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.a – Chillers
(Vapor Compression)
6) Absorption chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.b – Chillers
(Absorption)
(Centrifugal)
b. General
1) District cooling systems are most applicable when used in areas where the
thermal load density is high and the annual load factor is high. Both of these
conditions will exist in areas of Jubail. A high load density is needed to cover
the capital investment for the transmission and distribution system, which
usually constitutes most of the capital cost for the overall system, often
ranging from 50 to 75% of the total cost for district cooling systems.
2) District Cooling system shall be used when:
a. District cooling demand is 15,000 TR or more
b. District Building Coefficient (Total Built-up Floor Area / Total Site Area)
of 1.5 or more
c. TSE is available as the source for district cooling system make up water
3) The central plant may be any type of chiller system (or thermal energy).
Combined heat and power (CHP) plants have a high energy utilization
efficiency. If natural gas is available, electricity could be produced by a gas
fired turbine generator. The exhaust from the turbine could pass through a
waste heat boiler which could produce high pressure steam.
4) Chilled water may be produced by:
d. Absorption refrigeration machines
e. Electric-driven compression equipment (reciprocating, rotary screw or
centrifugal chillers).
f. Gas and/or steam turbine or engine-driven compression equipment.
g. Combination of mechanically driven systems and thermal-energy-driven
absorption systems.
5) The distribution or piping network that conveys the energy usually consists of
a combination of pre-insulated and field-insulated pipe in both concrete tunnel
and direct burial applications.
c. Economic Analysis
1) Provide a complete life cycle cost for the RCJ to demonstrate the feasibility of
a district energy system.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 106
2) A larger central plant may achieve higher efficiencies than the sum of several
smaller plants. Partial load performance of central plants may be more
efficient than that of many isolated, small systems because the larger plant
may operate one or more capacity modules as the combined load requires
and may modulate output. Central plant systems will often operate at 0.90
kw/ton or less whereas smaller systems at 1.2 kW/Ton.
3) Construction cost for the local construction environment and site conditions
such as these cited below need to be considered:
(a) Labor rates
(b) Distance to ship equipment
(c) Permits and fees
(d) Local authorities and regulations
(e) Soil conditions
(f) Quality of equipment and controls
(g) Availability of materials
(h) Size of distribution piping system
(i) Type of insulation or cathodic protection for buried and above-ground
piping system
(j) Leak detection
(k) Type of distribution system installation (e.g., direct buried, tunnel)
(l) Distribution system depth of burial and restoration of existing conditions
(e.g., city streets, green areas)
(m) Distribution systems below-grade conflict resolutions
(n) Economies of scale
(o) Capital costs
(p) Energy and utility costs
(q) Operations and maintenance costs
(r) Energy and resource usage
d. Central Utility Plant
1) The chilled-water supply temperature shall range from 4.5 to 7 C. Chilled
water return temperatures shall be set as high as practical to minimize the
quantity of chilled water circulated in the system. The minimum temperature
difference between chilled water supply and return shall be 8.3 C resulting in
a flow rate of 0.13 LPS/Ton of refrigeration.
2) Consider thermal storage for district chilled water systems. Thermal storage
may reduce chiller equipment requirements and lower operating costs by
shifting part of the chilling load.
3) Both ice and chilled-water storage have been applied to district-sized chiller
plants, however stratified chilled water is much more common as a thermal
storage medium and is preferred.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 107
4) The expansion tank for the entire system shall be located in the central plant
building. Recognize that operating pressure will be lower than fill pressure, so
the system requires a pressure reducing valve for initial fill which will be
valved off after fill is complete and all air is purged, and then a second
pressure reducing valve set at a lower operating pressure to account for the
contraction of the chilled water as it cools.
5) On large chilled-water systems, consider a makeup water pump to overcome
water loss. Control the pump from level switches on the expansion tank or
from a desired pump suction pressure.
e. Distribution Design Considerations
1) The water distribution system shall be variable primary design.
2) For very large systems serving large buildings, distributed pumping may be
used. For this approach, the distribution pumps in the central plant are
eliminated and relocated to the buildings, so all the electrical energy is borne
by the pumps in the user buildings. When this approach is utilized, consider
future system loads carefully when sizing the building pumps, so the pumps
may properly share the pumping duty as the overall system flow rate
increases in the future.
3) For systems with high rise buildings, account for the static head the tall
buildings will create on the system. Consider using plate and frame heat
exchangers in tall buildings to prevent the static head of the tall buildings from
being imposed on the entire system.
f. Hydraulic Considerations
1) For systems with large distribution networks, model the flow hydraulics with a
computer modeling program.
2) Distribution pipe sizing shall be based on a maximum friction loss of 350
Pa./ m of pipe.
g. Thermal Considerations
(a) All piping shall be insulated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
(b) No insulation system is totally water and vapor tight.
(1) Corrosion may be minimized by making the insulation system highly
water resistant through the use of a closed-cell insulation material
coupled with a high-performance vapor retarder, and paint the pipe
exterior with a strong rust-preventative costing (two-cost epoxy)
before insulating. In addition, a good vapor retarder is required on
the exterior of the insulation.
(2) Underground piping shall be a pre-engineered double-wall material
with closed cell foam insulation between the carrier pipe and the
outer pipe, and water proof joints.
(c) Provide adequate means of expansion and contraction compensation.
h. Distribution System Construction
1) Provide access ports for underground systems at critical points, such as
where there are:

Rev. 0 5.4 - 108
(a) High or low points on the system profile that vent trapped air or where
the system may be drained.
(b) Elevation changes in the distribution system that are needed to maintain
the required constant slope.
(c) Major branches with isolation valves.
2) Gravity venting of tunnels is good practice, and access ports and tunnels shall
have lighting and convenience outlets to aid in inspection and maintenance of
piping elements.
i. Leak Detection
1) Techniques for leak detection vary from periodic pressure tests on the piping
system to installing a sensor cable or wire along the entire length of the piping
to continuously detect and locate leaks.
j. Valve Vaults and Entry Pits
1) The optimum number of valve vaults is that which affords the lowest life-cycle
cost and still meets all design requirements, typically around 100 m. apart but
usually no more than 150 m apart in the absence of other requirements, such
as isolation valves for a building service.
k. User Interface
1) The connection of a district energy system to a building is commonly called an
energy transfer station (ETS).
2) Provide a cathodic isolation flange at the ETS to preserve system pipe
integrity.
3) Consider a plate and frame heat exchanger at the ETS for high rise buildings
to prevent imparting the tall building static pressure head on the entire district
system. This may prevent the requirement and associated cost of rating the
entire distribution system for a higher pressure.
(a) If water quality and the potential fouling of a heat exchanger is a concern
provide two heat exchangers so that one may be removed from service
for cleaning while the other heat exchanger remains in operation.
4) Provide flow and temperature measurement devices at each ETS for
assigning costs to each customer.
l. Control Valves
1) All control valve actuators shall take longer than 60 seconds to close from full
open to mitigate pressure transients or water hammer, which occurs when
valves slam closed. Actuators shall also be sized to close against the
anticipated system pressure so the valve seats are not forced open, thus
forcing water to bypass and degrading temperature differential.
2) Electronic control valves shall remain in a fixed position when a power failure
occurs and shall be manually operable. Pneumatic control valves shall close
upon loss of air pressure.
3) Avoid oversizing control valves as this limits flow control.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 109
13. Building Automation (Management) System

a. Building Automation System Architecture
1) The building automation and control networking protocol shall be truly open,
standard, interoperable, integrated architecture, in full conformance to current
ANSI/ASHRAE 135.
2) The system must be fully BACnet compliant which means that the system
must use BACnet as the native communication protocol between servers or
workstations on the network. The system should be duly listed as FM/UL
listed for building control system package.
3) A web server with a network interface card shall gather data from this system
and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on
each PC connected to the network.
4) Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the
web browser interface.
5) The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of
DDC controllers and a web-based operator interface.
6) Schedules, setpoints, trends and alarms specified as per sequences of
operation shall be BACnet objects.
7) Where packaged mechanical equipment is supplied with its own local control
panel, the building automation system shall only interface with this local
control panel for remote start/stop and status acquisition. Refer to paragraph
5.5,3.L.1.n.2) in Electrical for additional information.
8) . For Exhaust Fans individually used for toilets, tea rooms, changing rooms,
etc. and are not involved with the BMS sequence of operation or interlocks,
these fans will be manually controlled through wall mounted on/off switches
and shall not be connected to BAS,Refer to paragraph 5.5.3.L.1.n.2) in
Electrical for additional information.
9) Air handler unit shut down from smoke detectors, as required by NFPA 90A,
shall be the function of the fire alarm control panel, not the building
automation system. e.g. The FACP will provide shutdown signal to respective
PACU / AHU DDC control panel, but the shutdown logic shall through DDC
control panel relay logic to stop the HVAC package directly, not through the
DDC software logic. FACP common shutdown signal will be monitored by
BMS, and shall have alarm lamp on HVAC DDC Controller panel.
b. BACnet Device Object Naming Conventions
1) Device Object Naming Convention Plan (DONCP)
(a) The BAS manufacturer shall submit a BACnet Device Object Naming
Convention Plan to the Royal Commission.
(b) The DONCP shall be designed to eliminate any confusion between
individual points in a facility wide EMCS system.
(c) It shall be designed for future expansion and consistency.
(d) Each device on a BACnet internetwork (including other manufacturer’s
devices) must have a unique device instance.
c. BACnet Addressing

Rev. 0 5.4 - 110
1) Three types of addresses are important in and BACnet system, though all
three can be thought of as addresses, they are very different, both in how
they function and how they are assigned, they are as follows:
(a) Network Numbers – identify the network to which a BACnet device
belongs. Every network on a BACnet LAN has a unique numerical
identifier, a network number. This network number shall be used by
BACnet devices only; it shall not rely on, nor does it affect any other
network protocols. LANs connected by a router must have different
network numbers. No interconnected BACnet network can have the
same network number.
(b) Media Access Control (MAC) Addresses
(c) Device Instances
d. System Performance
1) Performance Standards
(a) System shall conform to the minimum standards over network
connections.
(b) Systems shall be tested using manufacturers recommended hardware
and software for server and browser for web-based systems (or
operating workstation).
e. Communication
1) Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and
routers shall comprise a BACnet network.
2) Ethernet backbone for network segments should be provided for the existing
or proposed network.
f. Operator Interface
1) BACnet system shall be accessed anywhere on the network, through
standard browser interface. View a graphical menu system and dynamic
color graphic screens that paint a picture of conditions throughout the facility.
2) Acknowledge alarms; track personnel; open and close controlled doors;
adjust setpoints and comfort levels; turn lighting and equipment on and off;
run reports; modify schedules; make and edit personnel records; and access
pop-up windows of live trend data and event logs through one efficient
interface.
3) Web browsing functionality shall be added to even the smallest existing
system with ease, using the same graphic displays, user profiles and system
database as a standard.
g. System Software
1) Operating System
(a) Web server shall have an industry-standard professional-grade operating
system
(b) Acceptable systems shall be Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 111
h. Controllers
1) Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC),
Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart
Sensors (SS) as required.
i. BACnet Communication
1) Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using ISO
8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP
addressing.
2) BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device routers as
necessary to connect BCs to networks of AACs and ASCs.
j. Controller Software
1) Reside and operate in system controllers
2) Applications shall be editable through operator workstation, web browser
interface, or engineering workstation.
k. Input and Output Interface
1) Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs or SAs.
l. Web Server
1) Web servers shall provide the interface between the LAN or Wan and the field
control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the
control devices connected to the web servers.
2) Web servers shall provide interface between BACnet based automation
systems and popular color-graphic web pages that can dynamically display
BACnet information.
3) Web servers shall support both a VNI (Virtual Network Interface) and RNI
(Remote Network Interface) to ensure that an open solution is being provided
and to ensure that the Royal Commission has flexibility and choice for future
network upgrades and additions.
m. Web Browser
1) Browser technology shall have the ability to interface with facility system from
any on-line PC.
2) System shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 20 simultaneous client
connections (or otherwise requested by the Royal Commission) using
standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer
3) Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system
configuration that is supported by the Web browser.
n. Power Supplies and Line Filtering
1) Wiring and Raceways
(a) Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in
applicable sections of NEC.
(b) Insulated wire shall use copper conductors and shall be UL listed for
90°C (200°F) minimum service (local ambient temperatures shall also be
considered).

Rev. 0 5.4 - 112
2) Fiber Optic Cable System

(a) Optical cables shall be duplex, tight-buffer construction designed for
intra-building environments.
(b) Sheath shall be UL listed OFNP (Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum) in
accordance with NEC Article 770.
(c) Optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data
Interface), ANSI X3T12 within the LAN network and shall meet Gigabyte
Ethernet for WAN network. Fiber cable shall be ITU-T 652.D single mode
9/125µm.
3) UPS
(a) Uninterruptible Power Supply shall be required for Building Controller(s),
and Application Controllers that monitor emergency equipment, if
Normal/Emergency Power is not available in the building.
(b) UPS back up time shall be 1 hour.
C. HVAC EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
1. Air Handling Equipment and Accessories
a. Duct Construction
1) All duct construction should be in strict accordance with the requirements of
SMACNA. The applicable SMACNA standard shall depend on the service,
operating pressure and application. Clearly specify the pressure class and
seal class for each duct system so there is no misunderstanding on the part of
the sheet metal fabricator regarding the duct pressure requirements.
2) Calculate the percent leakage based on the specified pressure and seal
classes and include the calculated leakage percentage in the specifications.
3) Clearly specify the insulation requirements for duct systems.
(a) Duct systems for cooling and heating applications must have external
insulation. Internal lining is not accepted to avoid problems with the
harboring of bacteria, dust and mold in the airstream.
4) Show all duct accessories such as balancing dampers, fire dampers, access
doors, etc. required for code compliance and proper operation of the systems.
Relying on drawing notes and specification clauses to cover these items is not
acceptable.
5) For exhaust of corrosive fumes, provide the proper duct construction (the
proper grade of stainless steel or non-ferrous material) to avoid deterioration
due to corrosion of the duct.
6) Provide fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers
in strict accordance with the Saudi Building Code 501, Section 4.7, the Saudi
Building Code 801, Section 4B.16 and NFPA Standard 90A.
(a) Coordinate smoke damper and combination fire smoke damper control
with the building fire alarm system and the building automation system.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 113
b. Room Air Distribution Equipment

1) Select constant volume, variable volume and fan powered terminals within the
controllable flow range published by the manufacturer
(a) Schedule each terminal unit for a project individually, listing all
performance criteria including maximum and minimum airflow, static
pressure drop through the terminal at maximum airflow, inlet duct size,
sound criteria, heating capacity of the terminal has a reheat coil, and fluid
flow and temperature for the reheat coil.
(b) Select terminals within the flow ranges listed by the manufacturer for
each terminal size. The maximum design flow for a given terminal shall
not exceed 80% of the manufacturer’s published maximum flow.
Minimum flow shall not be less than the manufacturer’s listed minimum
controllable airflow.
(1) Many manufacturers list 0.0 L/S as the minimum airflow for their
terminals, but this indicates that the terminal can be modulated to
shut-off. Manufacturers also list a minimum controllable airflow
range, and the minimum design airflow for a given terminal shall not
be less than the minimum value in that listed range.
2) Select room air inlets and outlets with careful consideration to uniform air
distribution, low resistance to airflow, and acceptable sound generation.
(a) The direction of air flow into a room shall be toward the faces of the
occupants whenever possible. Air flow from the side may be acceptable
under extenuating circumstances. Under no circumstances shall there be
air flow toward the backs of occupants.
(b) Air distribution shall be as uniform as possible. In no case shall
temperature variation in the air conditioned space exceed 2 C.
(c) Minimum room air movement shall be 0.1 m/s. Air outlets shall be
provided proper throw, drop and spread at or above the 0.1 m/s.
(d) The air conditioning system sound generation shall be within the limits
established in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.d – Noise Control.
(e) Location of air distribution devices shall be coordinated with the
architectural features of the space, such as columns, doors and
windows.
(f) For uniformly distributed loads, supply outlets shall be distributed
uniformly within range of their throw as published by the manufacturer.
(g) Where heating loads are of the concentrated type, supply outlets shall be
located near the source. Air around high heat load equipment shall be
returned through grilles located near the equipment, to avoid mixing with
room air.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 114
(h) Supply and return outlets shall be located to obtain complete coverage of
the entire space. There shall be no short circuiting between supply and
return outlets.
c. Fans
1) In general, fans for HVAC applications should be centrifugal fans with airfoil
blades for maximum efficiency.
(a) Centrifugal fans with radial blades can be used for material handling
applications where airfoil blades may clog from the materials in the
airstream.
(b) Axial fans may be used for industrial applications with limited static
pressure requirements
(c) Propeller fans may be used for through-the-wall exhaust ventilation of
unconditioned spaces.
2) For a given air volume flow rate and static pressure, fans of several sizes may
provide the desired performance. Larger fans operate at slower speeds and
higher static efficiencies, and therefore require less power than smaller fans.
Select fans for maximum static efficiency, which will generally result in
selecting the larger fan for a given application.
3) The following criteria should be considered in fan selection, and should be
included in the fan schedule in the construction documents:
(a) Air volume flow rate (L/s)
(b) Static pressure (Pa)
(c) Fan type
(d) Drive type
(e) Fan class
(f) Number of fans in series
(g) Air density (temperature and altitude)
(h) Type of service (supply, return lab exhaust, toilet exhaust)
(i) Noise criteria
(j) Discharge direction
(k) Fan rotation
(l) Motor position/arrangement
4) Wherever possible, direct drive fans should be used. Arrangement 8 is
preferred for large centrifugal fans.
5) Fans larger than 3.75 kW should be controlled through a variable frequency
controller for variable flow systems.
6) Fans should be carefully selected to operate close to their maximum
efficiency condition.
7) Consider system effect in accordance with AMCA Fans and Systems
Publication 201 when selecting fans.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 115
8) Provide a graphical analysis of the system curve vs. the fan curve for all fans
to illustrate the overall performance.
9) For fans operating in parallel, graph the parallel fan operation fan curve(s) for
the maximum number of fans that will be operating simultaneously with the
system curve to determine the actual performance of the combined group of
fans.
10) Account for duct leakage in fan selection.
11) Total fan power requirements for any given project should be in accordance
with the limits set forth in ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
12) Provide vibration control in accordance with Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.d. – Noise
and Vibration Control.
d. Humidifiers
1) For hospitals, laboratories and similar facilities requiring wide area humidity
control, provide humidifiers mounted in the central air handling units.
2) For areas where isolated humidity control is required, such as in libraries and
museums, booster cooling coils, humidifiers, and reheat coils shall be
installed in the duct work supplying air to these specific areas.
3) Humidifiers shall be steam dispersion type. Humidifiers that rely on
evaporation of water directly in the airstream (ultrasonic) should not be used
due to the water quality in Jubail.
4) Select the humidifier for the specific application, including airflow and air
temperature.
5) Account for the impingement distance when determining the placement of a
humidifier in an air handling unit or supply air duct. Allow the manufacturer’s
recommended impingement distance plus 300 mm wherever possible
between the humidifier and downstream obstructions in the duct or air
handling unit.
6) Specify the modulating humidifier control valve to be supplied with the
humidifier by the humidifier manufacturer.
7) Provide a separate motorized two-position on-off control valve upstream from
the manufacturer’s modulating control valve to provide positive shut-off when
additional humidity is not required. The manufacturer’s valves do not provide
tight shut-off.
8) Pay careful attention to the manufacturer’s requirements for steam
condensate drainage from the humidifier, and condensate trapping.
Condensate must drain by gravity from the humidifier. Do not try to lift the
condensate with steam pressure to a drain location.
9) Coordinate carefully the path for condensate drainage from duct mounted
humidifiers. Condensate drainage is frequently a problem with duct mounted
humidifiers, and the coordination of the drain piping route must not be left to
the construction team. It must be part of the design.
10) The section of duct or the air handling unit section in which the humidifier is
mounted shall be constructed from Type 304 stainless steel and must have a

Rev. 0 5.4 - 116
drain leading to a floor drain or a sanitary safe waste. Refer to the TCDD(s)
listed at the end of this Section.
e. Air Cooling Coils
1) Finned Cooling Coils-Chilled Water Type
(a) Cooling coils shall be selected for the specific application of air velocity,
entering and leaving air conditions, entering and leaving fluid conditions
and maximum air and fluid pressure drops. Selections shall be made
utilizing a manufacturer’s computerized coil selection program.
(b) In general, it is desirable to maximize the cooling fluid temperature rise in
a cooling coil. This minimizes pumping energy and typically maximizes
the chiller efficiency. Temperature rises of 9 C at maximum airflow and
peak outdoor conditions are achievable in hot, humid climates. That
should be the goal.
(c) The face velocity of air through cooling coils shall not be less than 1.75
m/s and not more than 2.25 m/s. Face velocities higher than 2.25 m/s
increase moisture carryover, while velocities lower than 1.75 m/s
increase the dehumidification effect and cost of the coil.
(d) Air pressure drop through cooling coils shall be limited to 250 Pa when
the coil is wet.
(e) Coil rows shall be even and shall be selected from the manufacturer’s
data to give the required cooling capacity and sensible heat ratio.
Maximum cooling coil depth shall be 10 rows to facilitate cooling.
(f) No more than 10 fins per 25 mm shall be used.
(g) Where more than two sections are required, coils with the maximum
tubes across the face shall be selected to reduce the number of sections
and piping cost.
For multiple vertically stacked sections, provide valves for balancing the
coil sections with parallel fluid flow.
(h) Coils using any other cooling medium (brine or well water) except clean
water shall have cleanout plugs at both ends of every tube on the
headers, to permit cleaning at regular intervals.
2) Finned Cooling Coils-Direct Expansion Type
(a) When selecting cooling coils of the direct expansion type, the following
factors of performance, size, and design which must be considered in
relation to intended use:
(1) The face velocity of air through a cooling coil shall not be less than
1.75 m/s and no more than 2.25 m/s. Face velocities, in the higher
range increase moisture carryover, while in the lower range they
increase the dehumidification effect and cost of the coil.
(2) Air pressure drop through cooling coils shall be limited to 250 Pa
when the coil is wet.
(3) The number of rows selected shall be based on consideration of
evaporating temperature to give required cooling capacity and
sensible heat ratio. For a given coil performance, reducing the
number of rows will necessitate lower evaporating temperature.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 117
(4) An even number of rows shall be provided so that inlet and outlet
connections shall be on the same end of the coil. No more than 10
fins per 25 mm shall be used. If additional rows are required to
achieve the desired laving air conditions, multiple coils in series
shall be used. Provide adequate space upstream and downstream
of each coil for cleaning.
(5) Cooling coils shall be selected so that a coil and compressor
combination will have the required cooling capacity at their
respective suction pressures. The system will then balance at the
designed suction pressure.
(6) The suction pressure or the corresponding evaporator temperature
shall depend on the sensible heat ratio of space to be conditioned,
and shall be determined from the manufacturer's data.
(7) In order to find balancing suction pressure curves, the capacity
versus suction pressure shall be plotted for a compressor and coil. If
the curves are not available from the manufacturer, they shall be
developed from manufacturer's equipment data.
(8) When compressors are provided with step capacity regulation,
cooling coils shall be divided into a number of sections so that each
section will be equal to a compressor capacity step. Where an
installation has more than one compressor, the minimum number of
cooling coil sections and the cooling capacity of each shall be the
same as that of the compressors. This arrangement will provide a
positive method of dividing the load among the compressors and will
also permit step capacity regulation. Each coil section shall be
provided with its own expansion valve and distribution header.
(9) Both fins and tubes shall be made from copper to prevent corrosion
on condenser coils, and evaporator coils shall be seamless copper
tubing with copper fins. Phenolic shall be applied at a dry film
thickness of 75 microns.
(10) When using packaged air conditioning units, the selected units shall
meet both sensible and total heat loads. The unit manufacturer
standard rated air quantity shall be used for sizing the fan motor,
ductwork and related appurtenance.
f. Dehumidifiers and Related Components
1) Dehumidification shall be provided where control of room humidity or removal
of moisture is the main consideration; for example, in dehumidified
warehouses used for preservation and long term storage of materials.
2) The dehumidifiers shall be a dual bed, dry desiccant type. The total installed
capacity shall be 1.5 to 2 times the calculated normal operating load, in order
to provide capacity for initial pull-down and some standby capacity after pull-
down. The lower factor of 1.5 shall be used where the space has two or more
machines, and the higher factor of 2 shall be used when the operating load
requires only one machine.
3) The capacity factors listed above must also be applied to regeneration
capacity.
4) Proper air filtering must be provided upstream from all dehumidification.
Upstream filtering should be minimum MERV 10.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 118
5) Account for the air pressure drop through the dehumidification, as well as for
dirty filter pressure drop in the fan system design.
6) It is recommended that bypasses be provided around dehumidification where
the system is also used for other HVAC purposes, so that the
dehumidification can be bypassed when not required to reduce fan energy
requirements
7) Provide highest quality temperature and humidity sensors upstream and
downstream of dehumidifiers and regeneration systems. Accurate sensing
are critical to proper functioning of the equipment
8) Provide complete graphical psychrometric analysis for all dehumidification
and regeneration.
g. Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Devices
1) Provide exhaust air energy recovery in accordance with the requirements of
ASHRAE Standard 90.1. Provide exhaust air energy recovery when the
system air volume flow rate exceeds the limit established by the Standard.
Exhaust air energy recovery systems shall meet the minimum efficiency
requirements of the standard.
2) Air-to-air energy recovery devices for applications in Jubail should be
refrigerant phase-change heat pipes. Heat wheels are not an acceptable heat
recovery strategy for Jubail.
3) Filtering equivalent to MERV 10 must be provided upstream from all air-to-air
energy recovery devices, both in the make-up airstream and the exhaust
airstream.
4) Consideration should be given to evaporating the cooling coil condensate in
the exhaust airstream upstream of the heat recovery coil. This will lower the
exhaust air temperature prior to entering the exhaust heat recovery coil and
can significantly increase the overall efficiency of the heat recovery system.
5) Provide temperature sensors upstream and downstream of heat recovery
coils in both the exhaust airstream and the supply airstream to control the
operation of the heat recovery and to calculate the real-time energy being
recovered. Calculation should include instantaneous and cumulative energy
recovered.
6) In the life cycle cost analysis for the air-to-air energy recovery devices,
account for the air pressure drop of the energy recovery device and the air
filter in the fan selection.
h. Air Heating Coils
1) Heating is used in very limited number of applications in Jubail. Heating coils
will primarily be:
(a) Residential heating coils that will be part of a heat pump system. In this
application, the indoor coil will serve as the evaporator coil during cooling
and the condenser coil during heating. Therefore the coil design should
be in accordance with Subsection 5.4.3.C.1. – Air Cooling Coils,
Paragraphs 2)(a)(1) through 2)(a)(10).
(b) Outdoor air preheat coils for hospital, laboratory and other similar
applications where large quantities of outdoor air are introduced. Given
the climate and the hours of operation per year, these coils can be

Rev. 0 5.4 - 119
electric preheat coils. Given the nature of the application, the coils
should be tubular sheath electric resistance coils. The potential for sand
entering the intake would preclude the use of open elements that could
build-up on the element and finned sheath coils where the fins could clog
with sand.
(1) Assure that an electric disconnect switch is within close proximity to
the coil.
(2) Control should be silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) or solid state
relay (SSR) for infinite control staging. Step control will not react
fast enough for the sheathed element to provide the necessary
temperature control stability.
(3) The coils should be protected by minimum Merv 10 filters upstream.
(c) Reheat coils for hospital, laboratory and similar applications where
reheating of minimum air change or make-up air is required. These coils
can be electric or hydronic hot water coils.
(1) Electric coils may be open element or finned sheath. Assure that an
electrical disconnect is within close proximity to the coil. Control
should be silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) or solid state relay (SSR)
for infinite control staging and proper response and temperature
stability.
(2) Hydronic coils shall be copper tubes and copper fins. Hydronic hot
water temperature should not exceed 60 C.
i. Make-up Air Units
1) Reference to other sections of the GEM
(a) Fans are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.c. – Fans
(b) Air cooling coils are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.e. – Air Cooling
Coils
(c) Energy recovery is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.g. – Air-to-Air
Energy Recovery Devices
(d) Air Filtration is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.1.j. – Air Filtration
2) Provide dedicated make-up air units for applications where there is no central
HVAC air handling systems capable of providing the required make-up air,
where the requirement for make-up air is intermittent, or where the required
quality or temperature/humidity conditions for the make-up air are different
from the air provide by the central HVAC system.
(a) Examples of applications for make-up air are industrial processes and
kitchens.
3) Consider the required differential pressure condition in the spaces served
relative to adjacent spaces when sizing make-up air systems, as well as the
associated exhaust volume. It is generally prudent to provide some excess
capacity in the make-up air system if the desire differential pressure condition
is positive, as the space may not pressurize as well as expected as building
and space envelopes generally leak more than expected.
4) Fans 3.75 kW and larger shall have variable frequency drives.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 120
5) If direct expansion cooling is used, use cooling equipment especially

designed for the sensible to latent heat ratio encountered with 100% outdoor
air systems. Normal building direct expansion cooling equipment will not
have the capacity to provide the required latent heat removal.
6) Consider energy recovery for make-up air systems. Submit a life cycle cost
analysis to the RCJ to demonstrate the cost effectiveness of providing vs. not
providing heat recovery.
j. Air Filtration
(a) Sandstorm provisions are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.a. –
Sandstorm Provisions, Design Criteria and Objectives.
(b) Air intake and exhaust considerations are addressed in
Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. – Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design.
2) All re-circulating and outside air systems shall be provided with air filters.
3) All air filtration shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
4) All filters shall be tested by the manufacturer to demonstrate performance in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52 – Method of Testing General
Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
5) Built-up central HVAC systems shall be provided with pre-filters and final
filters.
6) Filter racks shall be designed to minimize the bypass of air around the filter
media with a maximum bypass leakage of 0.5%.
7) Differential pressure gages shall be provided across the filter assemblies.
8) Where occupancy requirements are likely to generate high levels of airborne
particles, special air filtration shall be provided on the return air system, or
dedicated and localized exhaust systems shall be utilized to contain airborne
particulates.
9) Due to the decrease in system airflow as the pressure drop across the filter
increases, size fans for the “dirty” filter condition. This will ensure that each
fan has adequate capacity to deliver the design airflow as the filter becomes
loaded. The “dirty” pressure drop is usually considered to be two times the
clean pressure drop.
10) The recommended average air velocity over the filter face area is 1.25 m/S,
and shall not exceed 2.5 m/S.
11) All filters shall conform to UL 900 Class 2 for combustibility and smoke
generation. Systems serving areas carrying flammable gases shall have the
additional fire resistance of Class 1 filters, where specified.
k. Sand Filtration Equipment
1) General
(a) Sand filtration equipment is generally utilized for removing particulate
from circulating water systems for chillers, condensers, heat exchangers
and cooling towers.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 121
(b) Sand filtration is most effective on fine light particles down to 0.45
microns. Avoid sand filtration for applications with a high concentration
of coarse particles larger than 40 microns. Centrifugal separators are
more effective for these applications.
(c) Sand filtration system should be packaged with dedicated pump, pipe
manifolds, pressure gauges and strainer.
Pump shall be end suction for flooded suction applications
Pump shall be self-priming for negative suction applications
(d) Sand filtration system shall have backwash cycle automatically initiated
based on pressure difference across the filter media. Pressure
difference setpoint for initiating backwash shall be adjustable.
(e) Minimize the piping between the sand filtration equipment and the
recirculating water system.
(f) Coordinate the placement of a sanitary drain with the plumbing
consultant for discharge of backwash water.
l. DX Packaged and Split
(a) Refrigerant compounds are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.12 –
Refrigerants
(b) Heat pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.4. – Applied Heat
Pump and Heat Recovery Systems
(c) Direct expansion cooling coils are addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.C.1.e.2) – Finned Cooling Coils – Direct Expansion Type
2) Equipment Selection
(a) All equipment efficiencies shall meet the requirements of the latest
edition of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
(b) Design of refrigeration piping for split systems shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Pay particular
attention to length of piping and changes in elevation.
(c) The capacities for DX packaged and split equipment are typically listed
at Standard ARI conditions in the manufacturers’ catalogs and literature.
These conditions are radically different from the outdoor design
conditions in Jubail. Selections for all units must be specific to RCJ
requirements/applications. Correct the catalog capacities to reflect
Jubail outdoor design conditions. The correction factors are available
from the equipment manufacturers.
(d) DX packaged and split equipment usually has limited ability to address
high latent cooling loads. The equipment has fixed cooling coil and
compressor capacity, and the sensible heat capacity ratio can be
changed somewhat by varying the supply air volume across the cooling
coil; however, the variability is minimal. Frequently the sensible heat
ratio for the application will be lower than the actual sensible heat
capacity ratio of the equipment. Match the actual sensible heat capacity
ratio of the equipment as closely as possible to the sensible heat ratio of

Rev. 0 5.4 - 122
the application. This again requires correcting the catalog capacities of

the equipment to reflect the outdoor design conditions for Jubail.
(1) Care should be taken to avoid oversizing of DX package and split
equipment. Oversizing will result in short cycling of the equipment,
and will further reduce the latent cooling capacity of the equipment.
(e) DX and package equipment has limited ability to address part load
conditions. This is further reason to avoid oversizing of the equipment.
Consider multiple pieces of equipment where the equipment does not
have the capacity range to address part load conditions.
(f) If the DX packaged or split equipment does not have the ability to
properly address part load conditions or the desired latent cooling
capacity, options are available from some manufacturers to compensate
for these problems. The options include:
(1) Staged multiple compressors
(2) Humidistat control with hot gas reheating
(3) Variable speed evaporator fans
(4) Wrap-around heat pipes or air-to-air heat exchangers at the
evaporator coil to provide free reheating of the air after
dehumidification.
3) Variable Air Volume Applications
(a) Where packaged DX or split equipment provides the cooling for a
variable air volume air handling system, special provision must be made
for the cooling capacity control. Variable air volume applications usually
operate with constant supply air temperature; however, cycling stages of
refrigeration on and off for DX refrigeration can result in supply air
temperature changes as great as 3 C. Most manufactures of DX
refrigeration offer an optional controller that is specifically designed for
variable air volume applications. Specify this controller with the
equipment.
(1) Where the manufacturer does not offer an optional variable air
volume controller, a method of false loading the evaporator known
as “outdoor air trim” can be utilized. In this control method, as a
stage of refrigeration is staged on, the outdoor air volume passing
through the evaporator is increased to false load the refrigeration
and prevent the refrigeration from cycling off. The same tactic can
be used as the refrigeration load decreases to prevent the stages of
refrigeration from cycling off prematurely.
4) Ducted Applications
(a) Most DX packaged and split equipment evaporator fans have limited
capacity to overcome static resistance in the supply air duct system.
Design supply air duct carefully to minimize resistance to airflow,
calculate the air pressure drop in accordance with Subsection
5.4.3.B.2.b. – Pressure Drop Calculations.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 123
2. Heating Equipment and Accessories

a. Boilers
(a) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9. - Redundancy
2) General
(a) Heating is rarely used in Jubail. Heating applications that may require
the use of boilers would be reheating and humidification for hospital and
laboratory HVAC systems, sterilization and laundries for hospital
applications and industrial heating applications.
(1) Humidification, sterilization, laundries, and some industrial
applications require steam boiler.
(2) Hot water boiler systems are preferred for all other applications
because of reduced maintenance requirements and generally
higher efficiencies.
(b) Before designing boiler systems, confirm the availability of adequate fuel.
3) Pressure and Temperature
(a) Boilers must be constructed in strict accordance with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV (SCIV), Rules for Construction of
Heating Boilers (low-pressure boilers), or Section I (SCI), Rules for
Construction of Power Boilers (high-pressure boilers).
(1) Low-pressure boilers are constructed for maximum working
pressures of 1 Bar for steam and up to 10 Bar for hot water.
Hot-water boilers are limited to 120 C operating temperature.
(i) Low pressure boilers require less supervision and are more
efficient to operate than high pressure boilers, and are
therefore preferred over high pressure boilers.
(2) High-pressure boilers are designed to operate above 1 Bar for
steam, or above 10 Bar and/or 120 C for water boilers.
(i) High pressure steam boilers are typically required for
sterilization and laundry applications.
4) Fuel Used
(a) Oil fired boilers or Electric are typically used in Jubail.
5) Boiler Types
(a) Hot water boilers shall be modular high efficiency condensing type
boilers or steel fire tube boilers.
(1) Condensing boilers are subject to corrosion. Specify condensing
boilers that are available with a minimum 10 year warranty.
(b) Steam boilers shall be steel fire tube boilers or industrial water tube
boilers.
6) Boiler Burners
(a) Modular high efficiency condensing boilers, steel fire tube boilers and
industrial water tube boilers will all utilized forced draft burners.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 124
(b) Burners shall have a minimum 10:1 turndown ratio, and shall operate
efficiently through all firing rates within that turndown ratio.
(c) Boiler burners shall also be Low NOx emissions type burners.
7) Boiler Controls
(a) Given the complexity of maintaining fire rates for installations with
multiple boilers to meet the load, it is recommended the boiler controls
be supplied by the boiler manufacturer.
(1) The controls must have the ability to stage all of the boilers in the
installation through the full range of firing rates.
(2) The controls shall equalize the runtime for all boilers, and shall
signal the failure of any boiler through an audible and visible alarm.
(3) The controls shall have graphic capability to display all boiler
functions
(4) The controls shall communicate with the building automations
system through a serial interface, and all data including graphics
that are available through the boiler controls shall also be available
through the building automation system.
8) Selection Parameters
(a) Boiler selection depends on many variables of the individual application,
including operating characteristics of actual loads, load distribution; total
heating demand on the boiler plant, number of boilers in the plant,
operational characteristics of individual boiler, reliability factors and the
whole boiler burner and control package.
(b) Develop a detailed load profile for a boiler installation
(c) The boiler plant must be sized for the maximum system load. This is not
merely the sum of connected loads, but shall also take in to account
piping loss, warm-up loads, possible diversity standby requirements, etc.
(d) Select the boiler equipment so that one boiler can be kept on line without
cycling at the lowest load conditions. Efficiency drops dramatically when
boilers cycle due to purging prior to and after a firing cycle.
9) Boiler Breechings and Flues
(a) Specify breeching and flue material that is compatible with the
combustion gases leaving the boilers
(1) There are a limited number of breeching and flue materials that are
compatible with combustion gases from condensing boilers.
(2) Design breechings and flues in strict accordance with the guidelines
in the ASHRAE HVAC Systems and Equipment Handbook.
b. Residential Heating
1) Reference to Other Sections of the GEM
(a) Residential heating is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.3 – Heating Load
Calculations and Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.h. – Air Heating Coils

Rev. 0 5.4 - 125
2) Design
(a) Residential heating equipment should be air source heat pumps. Since
heating is rarely required, sizing of the heat pump shall be based on the
required cooling capacity to meet cooling load.
(b) Controls shall be wall-mounted 7-day programmable electronic
thermostats with night setback provisions and manual change-over from
cooling to heating.
3. Cooling Equipment and Accessories
a. Chillers (Vapor Compression)
1) Reference to other sections of the GEM:
(a) Refrigerants are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.7. – Refrigerants
(b) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9. - Redundancy
(c) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7. –
Hydronic Heating and Cooling
(d) Condenser water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8. –
(e) District cooling and central plants are addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.B.12. – District Cooling and Central Plant Systems
2) General
(a) Vapor compression chillers can be either air-cooled or water-cooled, and
can have reciprocating, scroll, rotary screw or centrifugal compressors.
3) Air cooled vs. Water Cooled
(a) This topic is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8. – Condenser Water
Systems
(1) Water cooled equipment is more efficient than air cooled equipment,
but water for condenser water systems is in short supply in Jubail.
(2) A life cycle cost analysis shall be performed to determine the overall
cost effectiveness of a cooling tower system over air cooled
condensing for refrigeration. The life cycle cost analysis shall
include all cost associated with treating the water and disposing of
blowdown.
4) Compressor Types
(a) Reciprocating compressors tend to be noisy, and cannot match the
efficiency of other compressor types due to the general nature of the
reciprocating cycle and the required clearance volume in the cylinders.
Reciprocating compressors shall therefore be avoided if at all possible.
(b) Scroll compressors are efficient, quiet and reliable, but are only available
in single compressor capacities up to 75 tons. They are used in modular
chiller arrangements, which can provide an inexpensive level of
redundancy by simply adding one compressor to a unit. Capacity control
is also provided by hot gas bypass and variable speed controls. Banks
of scroll compressors are acceptable for loads up to 300 Tons.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 126
(c) Rotary screw compressors are efficient, and provide very good part load
efficiency; however, they can be noisy. Rotary screw compressors are
acceptable for loads up to 750 Tons.
(d) Centrifugal compressors provide the greatest overall flexibility with
regard to capacity and efficiency, and shall be used for machines larger
than 750 Tons.
(1) In the Jubail environment, hermetic machines have an advantage
due to the fact the motor is refrigerant cooled, and not subject to the
potentially high temperatures in the equipment room.
(2) Consider dual compressor machines to provide a higher level of
redundancy.
5) Heat Recovery Chillers
(a) Consider providing a heat recovery chiller for hospital or laboratory
applications where hydronic reheating is required.
6) Chiller Controls
(a) Purchase all chiller controls from the chiller manufacturer.
(b) The chiller control system must interface to the building automation
system through a serial interface. All points and graphics available
through the chiller control system shall be able to be viewed through the
building automation system.
b. Chillers (Absorption)
(a) Refrigerants are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.7. – Refrigerants
2) General
(a) Absorption chillers shall only be considered where “free” waste steam or
high temperature hot water is available, such as waste heat from a
turbine generator or an industrial process.
(b) The inherent inefficiencies of absorption chillers eliminate any potential
economic justification unless the heat to operate them is totally free.
(c) Prepare a full life cycle cost analysis and obtain RCJ approval prior to
designing a system with absorption chillers.
(d) Gas fired absorption chillers are complex to operate and have relatively
short life spans, and shall not be provided.
3) Absorption Chiller Types
(a) Absorption chillers shall be double-effect type for maximum efficiency.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 127
(b) The heating chamber shall be designed and constructed in strict

accordance with the requirements of ASME for Pressure Vessels.
c. Cooling Towers
(a) Outdoor design conditions are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.2. –
Design Criteria
(f) Vibration control is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.c. – Noise and
Vibration Control
(g) Water Treatment is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.d. – Water
Treatment
2) General
(a) Given the limited availability of water for cooling tower makeup in Jubail,
cooling towers are typically only used in applications where TSE
(Treated Sewage Effluent) water is available for cooling tower make-up
water.
(b) Towers shall be constructed of non-corrosive material, stainless steel or
fiberglass for the Eastern Region environment.
(c) Cooling tower fans shall have variable speed drives.
(d) Provide generously sized equalization piping between tower cells.
(e) Provide level controls and isolation valves for each cell of a cooling tower
installation so cells can be taken out of service without shutting down the
entire installation.
(f) Provide walking platforms with railings around the complete periphery of
cooling towers at the basin level. Provide ladders to the top of cooling
tower and railings around the entire top periphery of all towers
3) Open Cooling Towers
(a) Forced-draft cross flow towers have the greatest overall efficiency of all
tower types, and given the climate and water availability in the Eastern
Region shall be used in lieu of other options.
4) Closed Circuit Fluid Coolers
(a) Closed circuit fluid coolers shall be used for hydronic heat pump and
other water cooled HVAC refrigeration equipment with tube-in-a-tube
coaxial refrigeration condensers, where particulate in the condenser
water from a cooling tower would clog the condensers.
(b) Industrial fluid coolers shall have centrifugal fans for maximum efficiency.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 128
d. Thermal Storage
1) General
(a) Thermal storage can be utilized to reduce cooling equipment
requirements and/or electrical demand where peak cooling demands are
uncharacteristically high and of relatively short duration.
(1) Consultants proposing the use of thermal storage must demonstrate
past experience with design of similar systems of the type and
capacity being proposed.
(b) Where the use of thermal storage appears justifiable, first propose the
concept to the RCJ. If the RCJ concurs, they will authorize a preliminary
design and life cycle cost analysis to determine the economic justification
prior to authorizing the detailed design for the thermal storage system.
(c) Although ice storage systems have been used in Jubail, stratified water
thermal storage systems are much preferred.
(1) The life cycle cost analysis for ice storage systems must account for
the inefficiency of operating refrigeration equipment at low
temperatures to produce ice, as well as any parasitic losses
inherent in thermal storage systems.
2) System Design
(a) The following criteria must be specified in the design of a thermal storage
system:
(1) Thermal Storage System Load for each hour of the design day, kW.
(2) Operating mode of the Thermal Storage Refrigeration Equipment
(charge, partial cooling or off) for each hour of the design day.
(3) Design Heat Sink Rejection Temperature, C, for each hour of the
design day.
(4) Supply temperature to the Load during the hour of maximum load,
T1, C, for each hour of the day.
(5) Return temperature from the Load during the hour of maximum
load, T2, C, for each hour of the day.
(6) Flow rate (LPS) to the Load during the hour of maximum load and
for each hour pumping is used.
(7) Maximum time (Hours) available to charge from fully discharged
condition.
(8) Minimum temperature available to charge from fully discharged
condition, C.
(9) The Charge and Discharge fluids (e.g., water, 25% ethylene
glycol/75% water, etc.).
(10) Parasitic and accessory heat load allowance (e.g., air compressor,
dedicated recirculation pump, etc.) into the storage device, tons.
(11) Ambient Heat Load allowance into the storage device due to
ambient air temperature and solar radiation.
(12) Net Storage Inventory, kWH.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 129
(13) Saturated suction temperature and refrigeration load or other design

parameters for the refrigeration plant, when this equipment is to be
supplied by other than the thermal storage supplier.
(14) Temperatures of Fluid entering and leaving the Thermal Storage
Device, and any other heat exchanger(s) included in the system, C.
(15) Flow rate of Fluid through the Thermal Storage Device and any heat
exchanger(s) included in the system, L/S.
(16) Pressure drop across the Thermal Storage Device and any heat
exchanger(s) included in the supplier's scope of supply, KPa.
(17) Energy input to thermal storage refrigeration equipment included in
the supplier's scope of supply, kWh (for electric chiller) or kBJ (for
gas-fired chiller).
(18) Total heat rejection, kJ, and condensing temperature for the
refrigeration system, C.
(19) Energy input to essential storage device parasitics and accessories,
i.e. air compressors or air pumps, in kWh.
4. Common System Components
a. Pumps (Centrifugal)
(a) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9. - Redundancy
(b) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7. –
(c) Condenser water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8. –
(d) District cooling and central plants are addressed in Subsection
(e) Vibration control is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.c. – Noise and
Vibration Control
2) General
(a) Pumps coupled to motors with a replaceable coupler are preferred for
large pump and critical applications, as the motor or the pump may be
repaired or replace separately. Pumps with the impeller mounted on the
motor shaft are more difficult and costly to repair or replace, and
frequently require a special motor with a longer than normal shaft that
may be a long lead delivery item.
(b) Variable frequency drives shall be utilized for variable flow systems.
(c) Select pumps near the points of maximum efficiency on the pump
curves. Best selections are usually between the ¼ and ¾ points on the
pump curves. Avoid selections with flat performance curves.
(d) For parallel or series pump arrangements, plot the parallel or series
curves to demonstrate how the pumps will perform in combined
operation.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 130
(e) Select pump motors to be non-overloading over the entire range of

operation for one impeller size larger than the selected size impeller.
(f) Select pumps seals for the intended duty. Stuffing box seals should not
be used due to wasting water.
(g) For cooling tower and other open pumping arrangements, demonstrate
there is adequate net positive suction head.
3) In-Line Pumps
(a) Pipe mounted horizontal shaft in-line pumps should be limited to sizes
1 kW and smaller.
(b) Vertical shaft inline pumps may be used where space is at a premium for
flow rates to 150 LPS and pump heads of 10 Bar. Motor sizes may be
as large as 45 kW. Recognize the impellers are typically attached
directly to the motor shaft in these applications.
4) Base Mounted End Suction Pumps
(a) Base mounted pumps are preferred due to their reliability and
serviceability.
(b) Base mounted end suction pumps may be used for flow rates up to
250 LPS and pump heads up to 15 Bar. Motor sizes may be as large as
110 kW.
5) Horizontal Split Case Pumps
(a) Horizontal split case pumps are used for industrial and large central and
district applications. The may be used for flow rates up to 400 LPS and
pump heads up to 12 Bar. Motor sizes may be as large as 225 kW.
They provide the advantage of being able to service the bearings, seals
or impeller without affecting the piping.
6) Vertical Split Case Pumps.
(a) Vertical split case pumps are also used for industrial and large central
and district applications. The may be used for flow rates up to 250 LPS
and pump heads up to 18 Bar. Motor sizes may be as large as 225 kW.
Like the horizontal split case pumps, they provide the advantage of being
able to service the bearings, seals or impeller without affecting the
piping. However, they have the additional advantage of requiring less
space due to the pipe connections being vertical. There just has to be
adequate height to accommodate the flex connections, valve train,
strainers and other pump accessories.
b. Pumps (Turbine)
(a) Centrifugal pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.a. – Pumps
(Centrifugal)
2) General
(a) Turbine pumps are centrifugal pumps with multiple impellers stacked in
series to increase the pump’s head capacity, and should be used for
applications where the pump head is greater than the head capacity of a
single impeller pump with identical flow rate.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 131
(b) Vertical turbine pumps are the most common type of turbine pump,
where the impellers stack in a vertical arrangement.
(c) In HVAC applications, vertical turbine pumps are most often used for
large cooling tower applications and other “open system” applications
where the pumping circuit is not a closed loop and open static head
exists.
(d) Vertical turbine pumps should also be used for any applications utilizing
underground tanks for water storage
(e) Because of the multiple impeller arrangement, turbine pumps tend to
have steep performance curves. Large changes in head have minimal
effect on flow. This generally makes balancing more simple; however, it
can also make the pump less forgiving is the flow requirement is
underestimated. Estimate flow requirements carefully for turbine pumps.
c. Pumps (Positive Displacement for Fuel Oil)
1) General
(a) Fuel oil pumps are generally gear pumps.
(b) By design, positive displacement pumps are overloading. The pump
horsepower increases exponentially as the pump head increases. For
that reason it is prudent to oversize the pumps somewhat, and to use
balancing valves to obtain the desired flow. Fuel systems should
typically include a return line to adjust for modulating flow requirements.
d. Heat Exchangers
(a) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7. –
(b) District cooling and central plants are addressed in Subsection
2) General
(a) Heat exchangers may be used in HVAC applications for steam-to-hot
water production for hydronic reheat water in hospitals. These heat
exchangers shall be shell and tube type.
(b) Heat exchangers may also be used to decouple tall buildings from
campus and district chilled water systems. To achieve the minimum
approach temperature, these heat exchangers should be plate and frame
heat exchangers.
(c) Design fouling factors for steam, hydronic hot water and chilled water
-5 2
should be 9x10 m /kW.
(d) Plate and frame heat exchangers are subject to fouling. Consider
providing two heat exchangers so one can be taken out of service for
cleaning while the other heat exchanger remains in service.
(e) Where tandem heat exchangers are used, provide motorized isolation
valves to stop flow through heat exchangers not required at low flow
conditions.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 132
e. Motors and Motor Controllers

1) Motors
(a) Coordination
(1) Provide a complete list of all anticipated motors, complete with the
HVAC system the motors will serve, the motor location, voltage,
phase, kW rating and starter type, for the Electrical Engineer prior to
the completion of the Schematic Phase of design. Update the list
with each design phase as the design progresses.
(b) Ratings of Motors
(1) Motors 0.37 KW and smaller shall be single phase.
(2) All other motors shall be 3-phase. Table 5.4.3.B is a guide to the
range of sizes of 3-phase induction motors at the various system
voltages. This is intended as a guide only and may be relaxed or
made more restrictive depending on actual supply conditions.
TABLE 5.4.3.B: THREE PHASE MOTOR VOLTAGE RATINGS
Nominal 3-Phase Motor Voltage

Motor Rating System Voltage Rating
0.5 – 150 kW 400Y/230 400
160 – 3000 kW 4160 4000
Above 3000 kW 13800 13200

2) Motor Controllers
(a) General
(1) Appropriate type of motor starters shall be selected for starting and
smooth running of motor. The type of the starter depends on the
type of motor it is starting and the means of control desired.
(2) Small fractional horsepower motors such as exhaust fan motors can
be operated from simple wall switch without conventional starter.
(3) For motors 3.75 kW and larger, a “soft start” type starter shall be
used where calculated starting volt-drop exceeds specified limits.
(i) Consider using variable frequency drives (VFD’s) for motors
3.75 kW and larger, even in applications which do not require
variable operation such as pumps and fans. They offer the
opportunity to start the device at low RPM and ramp to the
desired speed, and they simplify balancing.
(4) Variable Frequency Drives
(i) VFD’s shall be based on pulse width modulation technology,
minimum 12 pulse type, and shall have the following features:
• Automatic restart after a power line transient
• Adjustable number of restarts after a drive fault

Rev. 0 5.4 - 133
• Auto/Off/Manual switch, local speed control, adjustable

current limit, and adjustable acceleration and deceleration
rates
• “On the fly” restart into a coasting load
• Phase loss and voltage over/under voltage protection
• Ground fault protection
• Output over current trip
• Stall protection
• Capability to accept external normally closed permissive
contacts such as static pressure safeties
• Input power disconnect
(ii) Where there is a central building automation system (BAS),
VFD’s for HVAC application shall interface with the BAS. Any
interface devices (hardware or software) required for the VFD
interface with the BAS should be provided by the BAS
manufacturer.
(iii) All VFD’s provided on a single project should be furnished by
the same manufacturer.
(5) Reversing Starters
(i) Reversing starters for motors are used for various applications
such as opening or closing of valves.
(b) Starter type selection is dependent on the motor size and the application.
Table 5.4.3.C provides guidance on the selection of the starter types for
the various motor sizes, voltages and applications. The final selection
shall be determined by the engineer designing the specific application.
TABLE 5.4.3.C: STARTER SELECTION
Reduced Voltage
Frequency Drive
Across the Line
Motor
Voltage Application
Star Delta
Rating
Variable
0.5 kW to
400 All 
4 kW
Constant
≥ 4 kW 400  
Speed
Variable
≥ 4 kW 400 
Speed
< 37 kW 400 Fire Pump 

Rev. 0 5.4 - 134
≥ 37 kW 400 Fire Pump  
(c) Motor Control Center (MCC)

(1) When it is required to control multiple motors, it is preferred to
control them from a centralized location such as a motor control
center.
(2) Motor control center is comprised of individual controllers for various
motors mounted on a fixed or draw-out type of chassis with each
controller located in separate compartment.
(d) Medium Voltage Controllers
(1) 4160 V motors shall use combination controllers with current limiting
fuses and contactor. Standard motor controllers available for
squirrel cage, wound rotor and synchronous motors shall be
specified. Medium voltage circuit breakers may be used as motor
starters, but are not preferred since they are not suitable for
repetitive starting duty.
D. HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
1. General Design Considerations
a. Sandstorm Provision, Design Criteria and Objectives
1) Frequent high wind gusts, often of long duration and well in excess of 18 m/s,
produce humid, salty, dusty and sandy atmosphere. Provisions must be
made to eliminate sand from outdoor air intakes prior to the air entering the
HVAC filters, or the filters will clog quickly.
2) Where space is available, orienting the intake so that the air must rise
vertically up into the intake, and orienting the intake louver in a horizontal
plane helps to drastically reduce the volume of sand that is entrained in the
airstream.
3) All intakes, regardless of whether the louver is in the vertical or horizontal
orientation, should have prefabricated sand trap lovers at the face of the
intake. Sand trap louvers shall have self-emptying sand drain holes at the
base. Sand trap louvers shall be backed with 50 mm thick washable
aluminum filters. The filters shall be washable for cleaning. Behind that and
trap louvers and filter shall be a plenum with the same basic height and width
dimensions as the louver, minimum 0.6 m deep with access doors for
removing sand.
4) Maximum air velocity at the sand trap louver face shall be 1.0 m/s for general
HVAC applications and 2 m/s for non-HVAC applications, such as a generator
intake.
b. Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design
(a) Building air intake design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.a. –
Sandstorm Provisions, Design Criteria and Objectives
(b) The design of laboratory exhaust is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.o.
– HVAC for Laboratories

Rev. 0 5.4 - 135
2) Intake height and orientation

(a) Locating intakes 8 M above grade greatly reduces the exposure to wind
driven sand. Many buildings are less than 8 M in height; however,
intakes should be located as high as practical to minimize the intake of
wind driven sand.
(b) Locating intakes on the prevailing leeward side of the building further
reduces the exposure to wind driven sand.
3) Intake Isolation Distances
(a) Isolation for outdoor air intakes for non-healthcare applications shall be
in accordance with the International Mechanical Code
(b) Isolation distances for healthcare applications shall be in accordance
with the AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care
Facilities and with ANSI/ASHRAE/ASHE Standard 170 – Ventilation of
Healthcare Facilities
4) Intake Velocity
(a) The velocity over the entire face of the intake shall not exceed 2 m/S,
with the exception of packaged HVAC equipment where the intake
velocity shall not exceed 1.25 m/S.
5) Exhaust Discharge
(a) All exhaust must be discharged outdoors. Discharge to attics or crawl
spaces is prohibited.
(b) The location of exhaust outlets shall comply with the International
Mechanical Code
(c) The height and velocity of laboratory exhaust discharges shall comply
with ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation.
(d) Exhaust from cooking and food preparation applications shall be directed
up and away from any building components or neighboring buildings
6) Nuisance or hazardous exhaust
(a) Exhaust from diesel engines such as trucks in a loading dock or diesel
generators are detectable and objectionable at concentrations well below
the concentration that would constitute a health hazard.
(b) Exhaust from cooking operations with high concentrations of spices are
detectable and objectionable to many building occupants
(c) Exhaust from laboratory or industrial applications involving hazardous
chemicals can pose a health risk if drawn into an intake and distributed in
a building, especially in the event of a chemical spill.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 136
(d) For applications in the vicinity of nuisance or hazardous exhausts,

sometimes allowing the isolation distances between exhaust discharges
and outdoor air intakes is not sufficient to prevent nuisance or even
hazardous concentrations of fumes in a building. For these applications,
careful consideration should be given to providing a higher level of
design analysis such as computational Fluid dynamic (CFD) analysis or
a wind tunnel study.
(1) CFD analysis and wind tunnel studies involve complex science and
must be completed by persons understanding the science and the
application. Submit the names and resumes of the persons who will
be completing the analysis to the RCJ for approval.
c. Design and Application of Controls
1) DDC Systems Controls
(a) All non-residential systems shall be direct digital type, distributed controls
systems.
(b) All actuators shall be electronic type.
(c) For chillers, boilers and similar large items of equipment requiring control
of integral components in the equipment such as compressors, inlet
vanes, burners, motors, etc., it is preferable to have the controller for that
equipment supplied by the equipment manufacturer. In such case, the
controllers supplied by the equipment manufacturer must be compatible
with the central control system provided for the building. The controller
for the individual equipment must be supplied with any required interface
gateways so the manufacturer’s controller can communicate seamlessly
with the building automation system.
(d) Provide complete drawings for the control system. The drawings shall
consist of:
(1) A drawing illustrating the control system architecture representing
each floor of the facility and complete with the control network, all
major expandable controllers, representative unitary controllers
(multiple similar application unitary controllers on each floor can be
represented by a symbol for the unitary controller application and
then a note indicating that symbol is typical for a specific number of
controllers, any necessary routers, all interfaces with other systems
such as fire alarm or security, and all desired human machine
interfaces.
(2) Complete control diagrams for all systems and equipment
illustrating all required control devices to accomplish the desired
sequences of operation.
(3) Complete written sequences of control for all systems and
equipment. Sequences should be arranged so that short
segregated paragraphs are provided for each component in a
system. Long paragraphs specifying sequences for multiple
components are confusing, and difficult for the programmers to
follow. Programming is accomplished in short step function format,
and the sequences should be arranged accordingly.
(4) Complete input/output (I/O) summary listing all control system
components, the desired control functions and all desired alarms.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 137
d. Noise Control
1) General
(a) The ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook – Sound and Vibration chapter
and the ASHRAE Application Handbook – Sound and Vibration Control
chapter; and this document shall constitute the noise and vibration
control design criteria for RCJ Projects.
(1) See the Table entitled Design Guidelines for HVAC-Related
Background Sound in Rooms in the ASHRAE Applications
Handbook – Noise and Vibration Control chapter for specific HVAC
sound guidelines for various occupancy types. Table 5.4.3.D lists
HVAC sound guidelines for some representative spaces:
TABLE 5.4.3.D: DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR HVAC RELATED BACKGROUND SOUND IN ROOMS
Octave Band Approximate Overall Sound Pressure
Space Type Analysis Level
NC/RC dBA dBC
Private Offices 30 35 60
Open Offices 40 45 65
Conference Rooms 30 35 60
Libraries 25 35 60
Laboratories 50 55 75
Places of Worship 25 30 55
Classrooms 25 35 60
(b) Sound and vibration are created by a source, transmitted along one or
more paths, and reach a receiver.
(c) Any sound analysis shall include source-path-receiver chain.
(d) Treatments and modifications can be applied to any or all of these
elements to achieve an acceptable acoustical environment.
(e) It is most effective and least expensive to reduce noise at the source.
(f) Adequate noise and vibration control in the mechanical systems is best
achieved during the design phase.
(g) The way the HVAC components are assembled into a system affects the
sound level generated by the system and accordingly shall be
considered in the design.
(h) The basic elements of acoustics should be understood and used in order
to work intelligently with SPL (Sound Power Level), PWL (Sound
Pressure Level) and SIL (Sound Intensity Level) data for many types of
electrical and mechanical noise sources, know the effects of distance
(both indoors and outdoors), appreciate the significance of noise criteria,
and be able to manipulate acoustic data in a meaningful and rational
way.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 138
2) The primary objective for the acoustical design of mechanical systems and
equipment is:
(a) Ensure that the acoustical environment in a given space meet the design
criteria.
(b) Consider practicality and simplicity.
(c) Consider total economy.
3) Several background sound rating methods are used to rate indoor sound.
4) They include the A-weighted sound pressure level (dBA) and noise criteria
(NC), the more recent room criteria (RC), balanced noise criteria (NCB) and
the new RC Mark II.
5) Not all methods are equally suitable for the rating of sound in the variety of
applications encountered.
6) The desired noise criterion curves for various indoor areas are published in
the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals and shall be used as the design
criteria for RCJ Projects.
7) It should be understood that lower values are quieter.
8) Select quieter equipment. Select manufacturers that involve ANSI, ISO, ARI,
ASHRAE and ASTM standards to set up the equipment noise specifications
and to evaluate acoustical equipment and products performance in the
laboratory and in the field.
9) Equipment shall be oriented so that maximum sound radiation, such as from
air intake and exhaust, is directed away from points of possible complaints.
10) Regular maintenance procedures such as tightening of loose parts and
replacement of damaged components shall be enforced.
11) If areas have ambient noise levels exceeding 90 dBA; it shall be classified as
Noise Hazard Areas.
12) Enclosures and Barriers
(a) Enclosing a sound source is a common means of controlling airborne
sound transmission.
(b) Adequate wall and floor-ceiling constructions shall be designed to
contain the noise and limit its transmission into adjoining areas.
(c) Acoustic absorption material shall be used, if needed in either or both the
sound transmitting room and the sound receiving room to absorb some
of the sound energy that “bounces” around the room.
(d) The sound transmission class (STC) rating of a partition or assembly is a
single number rating used in architecture to classify sound isolation for
speech (ASTM E90, ASTM E413).
(e) Transmission loss data shall be used to select various types of
construction materials for the design of noise enclosures.
(f) Select partitions and floors on the basis of their one-third octave or
octave band sound transmission loss values rather than single number
ratings, especially when frequencies below 125 Hz are important.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 139
(g) Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Transmission Loss Values of

typical mechanical equipment room wall, floor, and ceiling types in dB
are found in ASHRAE Applications Handbook.
13) Noise Control in Duct Systems
(a) System sound levels at maximum flow shall be carefully evaluated to
ensure required acoustic levels.
(b) The ductwork design shall appropriately consider and address airborne
equipment noise, equipment vibration, duct-borne fan noise, duct
breakout noise, airflow generated noise and duct-borne crosstalk noise.
(c) Duct noise control shall be achieved by controlling air velocity.
(d) Reduce fan-generated noise immediately outside of any mechanical
room wall by acoustically coating or wrapping the duct.
(e) Use sound attenuators for critical areas.
(f) Terminal units shall be selected so that design air volume is
approximately three-quarters of the terminal box’s maximum capacity.
(g) Volume dampers shall be located at least 1.8 m from the closest diffuser.
14) Isolation from Exterior Noise Sources
(a) Buildings located near airports, highways, rail corridors or other sources
of significant environmental noise levels shall have exterior wall and
window assemblies controlling noise intrusions.
e. Vibration Control
1) Design Objective
(a) All vibrating, reciprocating, or rotating equipment shall be mounted such
that it does not transmit significant levels of vibration into the surrounding
or supporting structure.
(b) Provide vibration isolation for all attachments to a vibrating machine,
including structural mounts, cooling or drainage pipe connections,
exhaust air ductwork, and electrical connections.
(c) It is very important that equipment operating frequencies be isolated from
natural frequencies of the building.
(d) Ensure that the supporting structure has sufficient stiffness and mass.
(e) Ensure that where machinery operations or vibrations are transmitted
through the foundations and support structure they are designed in
accordance with SBC 303, Sections 12.2 through 12.4.7
(f) Where it might be impractical or too expensive to meet the design
criteria, then sound engineering judgment shall be applied to limit noise
and vibration effect on building occupants and to protect the equipment.
2) Vibration Criteria
(a) Design Criteria shall be as per ASHRAE Fundamentals and Applications
Handbooks, recommended acceptable vibration criteria for vibration in a
building structure.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 140
3) Vibration Isolators Selection

(a) Vibration isolators must be selected not only to provide required isolation
efficiency but also to compensate for floor stiffness.
4) Vibration Control
(a) General
(1) Provisions shall be made to control equipment induced vibration.
(2) Refer to and incorporate the basic design techniques as described
in ASHRAE Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control.
(3) The use of vibration isolators between equipment and foundations
and/or building structures shall be required to minimize transmitted
vibration.
5) Vibration Isolators
(a) Vibration isolation mounts shall be used for the support of mechanical or
vibrating equipment.
(b) Isolators shall be specified by type and by deflection, not by isolation
efficiency.
(c) Refer to ASHRAE Fundamentals for Selection of Vibration Isolators and
ASHRAE Application Handbook for types and minimum deflections.
(d) All vibration isolators shall be selected according to ASHRAE and
(e) Isolation performance shall be within the responsibility of the equipment
supplier.
6) Rotating Equipment
(a) All rotating equipment within the housing of units shall be mounted on
vibration isolators.
(b) Reciprocating compressors shall be vibration isolated from the unit, and
frame shall have vibration isolation (such as a vibration pad) between
equipment and equipment base.
(c) All air handling units and fans casing shall be isolated from their ducts by
flexible connections.
7) Ductwork
(a) The ductwork design shall appropriately consider and address
equipment vibration.
(b) All ductwork connections to equipment having motors or rotating
components shall be made with 150 mm length of flexible connectors.
(c) All ductwork within the mechanical room or serving critical rooms shall be
supported with isolation hangers.
8) Piping Hangers and Isolation
(a) Isolation hangers shall be used for all piping in mechanical rooms and
adjacent spaces, up to a 15 m distance from vibrating equipment.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 141
(b) The pipe hangers closest to the equipment shall have the same
deflection characteristics as the equipment isolators.
(c) Other hangers shall be spring hangers with 19 mm deflection.
Positioning hangers shall be specified for all piping 200 mm and larger
throughout the building.
(d) Spring and rubber isolators are recommended for piping 50 mm and
larger hung below noise sensitive spaces.
(e) Floor supports for piping may be designed with spring mounts or rubber
pad mounts.
(f) For pipes subject to large amounts of thermal movement, plates of
Teflon or graphite shall be installed above the isolator to permit
horizontal sliding.
(g) Anchors and guides for vertical pipe risers usually must be attached
rigidly to the structure to control pipe movement.
(h) Flexible pipe connectors shall be designed into the piping before it
reaches the riser.
9) Piping Supports
(a) Provide channel supports for multiple pipes and heavy duty steel
trapezes to support multiple pipes.
(b) Hanger and support schedule shall have manufacturer’s number, type
and location.
(c) Comply with MSS SP69 for pipe hanger selections.
(d) Spring hangers and supports shall be provided in all the mechanical
rooms.
10) Mechanical Equipment Isolation
(a) Floating isolation bases shall be considered for major mechanical
equipment located in critical areas.
11) Concrete Inertia Bases
(a) Inertia bases shall be provided for reciprocating and centrifugal chillers,
air compressors, all pumps, axial fans above 300 RPM, and centrifugal
fans above 37.3 kW.
12) Mechanical Shafts and Chases
(a) Mechanical shafts and chases shall be continuous and closed at the top
and bottom.
(b) Any piping and ductwork shall be isolated as it enters the shaft to prevent
propagation of vibration to the building structure.
(c) All openings for ducts and piping must be sealed.
(d) Shafts dedicated to gas piping must be ventilated.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 142
f. Water Treatment
1) Water quality for the HVAC system shall minimize corrosion, scale build-up
and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without
creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.
2) Specify water treatment systems for the following HVAC systems:
(a) Closed loop chilled water
(b) Closed loop heating water
(c) Open loop cooling tower water
(d) Steam boilers
3) Base all HVAC water treatment on the quality of water available at the project
site, HVAC system and equipment material characteristics and functional
performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities and
requirements and guidelines of AHJ.
4) Obtain water samples at the site for testing to determine the required water
treatment. Contract for an analysis of the water sample and a complete
report of the water characteristics to be included with the specifications for the
water treatment.
5) Specify water treatment requirements related to initially flushing all HVAC
piping, for initially filling the piping systems and for maintaining the systems
free of scale, corrosion and bacteria, and at the proper chemical
concentrations and pH for efficient operation.
6) Water treatment shall maintain the following water quality parameters:
(a) Closed Systems
(1) Conductivity: 1200 to 2500 µmhos
(2) pH: Not less than 7.5 or greater than 8.5 (except for piping flush
and clean setup where the pH level shall be in the alkaline range of
9.5 to 10.5)
(3) Hardness: < 5 ppm
(4) Fouling factor: < 0.0005
(b) Condenser Water
(1) Conductivity: 1500 to 1600 µmhos
(2) pH: Not less than 8.0 or greater than 9.5
(c) Steam Boiler
(1) Boiler Conductivity: 3000 to 4000 µmhos
(2) pH: Not less than 9.0 or greater than 12.5
(3) Hardness: < 5 ppm
7) Refer to GCPS Section 232500 – Water Treatment Chemicals for HVAC
Systems
g. Evaporative Cooling

Rev. 0 5.4 - 143
1) Evaporative cooling loses effectiveness at wet bulb temperatures above 26ºC.

Therefore it is not an appropriate strategy in Jubail for applications requiring
year-round comfort conditioning to temperatures close to 24ºC.
2) Evaporative cooling can be effective for providing spot cooling in kitchens,
laundries and industrial applications where higher than normal comfort
temperatures are acceptable and delivering air at higher temperatures than
would be delivered from refrigerated cooling equipment can have benefit.
3) Complete a life cycle cost analysis addressing the operating and maintenance
cost of evaporative cooling to the RCJ prior to starting detailed design.
4) Evaporative cooling should be done with 100% outdoor air.
(a) Provide a relief air path with proper controls to avoid over pressurization
of the space served.
5) The air to be conditioned in an evaporative cooling process must first pass
through filters with a minimum performance of MERV 8.
6) The water passing through the evaporative cooling device shall be passed
through a Class 1 water filter with a minimum efficiency of 97% for particles
1 micron and larger in size.
7) Direct evaporative cooling or two-stage indirect/direct evaporative cooling are
most effective for the applications listed previously.
(a) Rigid media or spray type direct evaporative coolers are preferred over
wetted pad type because of the relative short life of the wetted pads (1 to
2 years).
8) The air velocity through the wet chamber shall be less than 2.5 m/s. Higher
velocities can result in moisture carryover, as well as excessive fan
horsepower requirements.
9) The wet chamber of the evaporative cooler shall be constructed of
noncorrosive material. Stainless steel is preferred, but plastic or fiberglass
may be accepted, based on review by the RCJ. Approve acceptance for use
of materials other than stainless steel for the wet chamber prior to bidding.
10) For evaporative coolers with rigid media, it is recommended the circulating
pump remain operational even when the unit is not in use to avoid mineral
deposits in the media.
11) A method must be provided for minimizing solids build-up in the sump. Time
sequenced bleed-off or controls that activate bleed-off based on solids
concentration are preferred because the limit water use.
12) Refer to GCPS Section 232500
h. Fire and Smoke Management
(a) Stair pressurization systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.11 –
Stair Pressurization Systems.
2) General
(a) Fire and smoke management systems shall be designed in strict
accordance with Saudi Building Code 801 Section 7.9 – Smoke Control
Systems and NFPA 92 – Standard for Smoke Control Systems.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 144
(1) The SBC and NFPA are very specific regarding the a number of
factors relating to fire and smoke management system design,
including but not limited to: building stack effect, temperature effect
of the fire, wind effect on the building, pressure differences across
smoke barriers, velocity through intake openings, allowable height
of smoke layer, fire heat release, exhaust fan capacity and
construction, duct construction, damper ratings and control,
electrical power sources, fire and smoke detection and control
sequences and ratings. Design the systems in strict accordance
with each and every one of these requirements.
(b) Design of fire and smoke management systems is complex. the design
must be completed by an experienced fire protection engineer.
(c) The preferred method of analysis for designing fire and smoke
management systems is computational fluid dynamics (CDF) modeling.
CFD modeling will normally result in the lowest overall airflow
requirements which usually results in the simplest and lowest cost
systems. CFD modeling must be completed by persons having
experience with the science and the software.
(1) Submit the names and resumes of the persons who will be
performing the CFD modeling.
(2) If a method of analysis other than CFD modeling is being proposed
for designing fire and smoke management systems, submit the
proposed method of analysis, as well as the names and resumes of
the persons who will performing the analysis to the RCJ for
approval.
3) Coordination
(a) Early coordination of the fire and smoke management system
requirements with other design disciplines is critical to achieving effective
functioning of the systems
(1) Coordinate location of air intakes, fan locations and support, and
discharge locations with the Architect. Quite often doors and
windows must be motorized to open when smoke exhaust is
activated in order to provide adequate intake area. Strategically
locating doors and windows that will be used for air intake is crucial
to effective smoke exhaust, so coordinating early in the design
process helps assure the optimum locations can be accommodated
in the design.
(2) Fire and smoke management systems must have at least two
sources of power, and one source must be from a standby system.
Coordinate the power requirements and the locations of the
equipment needing power with the Electrical Engineer early in the
design process to assure optimum design of the power sources.
4) Design Considerations
(a) Confirm with the RCJ all design parameters that are influencing the
design of the fire and smoke management systems.
(b) Where egress time is a design parameter, assure that the egress time
calculations are acceptable to the RCJ prior to using them as a design
parameter.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 145
(c) Where door opening force will be affected by the operation of the fire and
smoke management system, confirm the allowable door opening force
that will be permitted in the completed facility.
5) Control
(a) It is preferred that fire and smoke management systems be controlled
from the building automation system, although all controls must have the
proper listing and monitoring in accordance with NFPA 92.
6) Commissioning
(a) Fire and smoke management systems should be commissioned
rigorously. Specify commissioning of each system independently.
Prepare a comprehensive testing procedure to be used by the
commissioning agent.
(b) Assure that the system is operating properly through all sequences of
operation prior to the final testing which will be reported to the AHJ.
(c) The system must pass one complete final test through all sequences of
operation without any functional problems.
(d) The results from all of the testing shall be reported to the RCJ.
7) Refer to GCPS Section 236005 – Smoke Extraction Fans
(a) 236005 – Smoke Extraction Fans
i. Electrical Considerations
(a) Motors and motor starters are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.f. –
Motors and motor controllers
2) General
(a) Consult the electrical consultant regarding the proper voltages for motors
and equipment
(b) Provide a complete list of HVAC equipment requiring electrical service
with proposed voltage, phase and kW or maximum amperage to the
electrical consultant during the Schematic Design phase of the project.
Update the list through each phase of the design process.
(c) Provide a complete list of equipment requiring power from an emergency
source with proposed voltage, phase, kW of maximum amperage and
starting priority to the electrical consultant during the Schematic Design
phase of the project. Update the list through each phase of the design
process.
3) Generators
(a) Installation Requirements
(1) Ventilation
(i) The ventilation air shall satisfy the manufacturer’s requirements
for combustion and cooling.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 146
(ii) Intake and exhaust louvers shall be located with sufficient

separation to avoid short circuiting of the air which would result
in equipment overheating.
(iii) Ventilation intakes shall incorporate motor operated dampers to
close off the intake when not in use. These dampers shall be
electrically held shut so that they will automatically open when
the power fails.
(iv) The intake shall also be provided with filters to maintain clean
air to the equipment room and to avoid degradation of
equipment performance.
(v) Indoor locations shall be selected to ensure that there is
adequate intake and exhaust air to address the combustion
and cooling air requirements.
(vi) Outdoor locations shall be coordinated with the surrounding
facilities to ensure that adequate ventilation can be provided to
address the combustion and cooling air requirements.
(2) Fuel Supply
(i) Diesel engine driven generators shall be used. Storage of
diesel fuel shall be sufficient to support the back-up power
loads for a minimum duration of 1 ½ hours but shall also
accommodate routine exercising of the generator without
requiring the fuel to be replenished after every routine test.
Fuel storage tanks shall include capacity for 24 hours operation
at full load or more as established by the criticality of the
facility. The final storage capacity shall be confirmed for each
facility with the Royal Commission.
(ii) Fuel storage tanks shall be located above ground and they
shall be double wall construction with integral leak detection to
indicate if the fuel oil has entered the cavity between the inner
and outer tank walls.
(iii) Fuel storage tanks may be base mounted below the generator
or separate from the generator depending on the capacity and
space requirements.
• Indoor tanks are preferred. Outdoor tanks near traffic
areas must be protected by bollards from being impacted
by vehicles.
• Fuel tanks must be contained by a dyke to limit amount of
fuel spill in case of fuel leakage. Dyke must be sized to
contain min of 110% of the full fuel tank volume.
(3) Engine Exhaust
(i) The engine exhaust system consists of the silencer and piping.
These components will reach high temperatures and must be
carefully designed to ensure that they will not impact the safety
of the occupants or the building structure.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 147
(ii) The location of the discharge shall be carefully coordinated to

ensure that the discharge will not affect the intake air to the
building or the adjacent facilities.
(iii) The exhaust silencer is typically provided with the generator
unit and shall be specified with the sound attenuation
characteristic suitable for the installed environment as follows:
• Residential grade silencer shall be utilized in light
industrial areas where the background noise is relatively
high and constant and the requirement for a higher level of
silencing is minimal.
• Critical grade silencer shall be utilized for quiet residential
areas where background noise is relatively low and critical
grade silencing is required.
• Hospital grade silencer shall be utilized for noise reduction
in heavy industrial areas where machinery operates in a
quiet locality including, hospitals, schools, and quiet
residential districts.
(iv) The exhaust system piping shall be designed by the
mechanical engineer.
(4) Structural and Vibration
(i) The generator shall be provided with a foundation and
housekeeping pad sufficient to support the weight of the
equipment. This shall include the engine-generator, fuel
storage, batteries, and engine exhaust silencer and piping.
(ii) Vibration isolation shall be provided to avoid the transmission
of vibration to the surrounding occupancies. The selection of
the vibration isolation shall address any applicable seismic
requirements and the sensitivities of the adjacent facilities.
(5) Noise:
(i) The engine exhaust noise is addressed by the silencer as
described above. The radiated engine noise shall be
addressed as follows:
• Indoor locations shall have the room designed to prevent
transmission of the equipment noise to the adjacent
spaces. The level of sound attenuation is dependent on
the criticality of the adjacent spaces.
• Outdoor locations shall incorporate sound attenuation into
the enclosure. The level of attenuation is dependent on
the criticality of the adjacent facilities and control shall limit
the sound level at the property line to meet all local codes
and ordinances. In the absence of any ordinance, the
sound attenuated enclosure shall be selected to limit the
maximum noise at the property line to the following levels:
• Residential – 45 dBA
• Hospitals - 45 dBA

Rev. 0 5.4 - 148
• Light Industrial – 55 dBA

• Heavy Industrial – 60 dBA
j. Integrated Building Design
1) Integrated building design is a process in which multiple disciplines and
seemingly unrelated aspects of design are integrated in a manner that permits
synergistic benefits to be realized.
2) It is a highly collaborative process that emphasizes the development of a
holistic design
3) The key to successful integrated building design is the participation of people
from different specialties of design such as : general architecture, HVAC,
lighting and electrical, interior design, and landscape design in a highly
collaborative arrangement beginning at the very initiation of the concept
design phase.
4) The key objectives in the design of any building include:
(a) Accessibility for people with special needs
(b) Aesthetics including physical appearance and image
(c) Economy relating to life cycle cost in addition to first cost
(d) Functionality in meeting the needs and requirements of the occupants as
well durability and efficient maintenance
(e) Productivity of the occupants which is dependent on physical and
psychological comfort
(f) Secure and safe from natural and human threats
(g) Sustainable as it relates to the occupants and the environment
5) Each design objective is significantly important in any project, yet a truly
successful one is where project goals are identified early on and held in
proper balance during the design process; and where their interrelationships
and interdependencies with all building systems are understood, evaluated,
appropriately applied, and coordinated concurrently from the planning and
programming phase. A truly high-performance building cannot be achieved
unless the integrated design approach is employed.
6) By working together at key points in the design process, the design team can
often identify highly attractive solutions to design needs that would otherwise
not be found.
7) To accomplish truly integrated design, the engineering team must engage
with the architectural team at the beginning of the concept design, and each
team needs to understand the project program as well as each other’s needs
and constraints with regard to the project design. The engineering team
cannot allow the architect to design to some early level of completion before
they become engaged in the project.
8) In an integrated design approach, the engineering team will calculate energy
use and cost very early in the design, informing designers of the energy-use
implications of building orientation, configuration, fenestration, mechanical
systems, and lighting options. The energy model will be used to inform the
design, not simply confirm it.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 149
9) Integration/collaboration must continue through all design phases of the

project, although the effort has its greatest impact in the early stages of
design where changes have lesser impact on the design production.
k. Fume Hood Exhaust Systems
(a) Exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. –
Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design.
(b) Laboratory exhaust is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.o. – HVAC for
Laboratories.
2) General
(a) Fume hood exhaust systems shall be designed in accordance with the
following codes and standards:
(1) Saudi Building Code 501
(2) International Mechanical Code
(3) NFPA 45 – Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using
Chemicals
(4) NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
(5) ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation
(b) Complete the calculations to confirm if the exhaust airstream is or is not
hazardous in accordance with the criteria listed in the Saudi Building
Code 501, Section 3.10.
(c) Wherever possible, fume hood exhaust systems shall be manifolded
systems to provide greater dilution of chemical fumes in the exhaust
airstream, especially in the event of a spill, and for simplicity of providing
exhaust fan redundancy.
(1) One redundant exhaust fan should be provided with each
installation of laboratory exhaust fans.
(d) Fume hood exhaust can be combined with laboratory exhaust in the
manifolded system, but should not be combined with other building
exhaust systems such as cooking, toilet or locker room exhaust systems.
(e) Hoods which are high hazard or unique use, such as perchloric or other
acid digestive systems, radio-iodination hoods, etc., shall not be installed
in a manifolded system and must be separately exhausted.
(f) Where the use of hoods reduces significantly at night, consider providing
a lower capacity exhaust fan for night time operation, so the primary
exhaust fans can be de-energized to reduce energy consumption.
(g) For installations involving five or more fume hoods, the fume hood
exhaust system should be variable air volume type.
(1) Coordinate with the consultant specifying the fume hoods to assure
that restricted bypass hoods suitable for variable air volume
operation are specified.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 150
(2) Where any single laboratory contains two or more hoods, consider
motion and proximity sensors to reduce the airflow through the hood
when no one is standing or moving near the hood.
(h) The design exhaust air volume for each fume hood is generally based on
operating at a maximum 45 CM height. Confirm this is appropriate for
the applications involved in the project.
3) Materials
(a) Duct materials between the fume hood and the exhaust mains shall be
constructed of welded Type 316 stainless steel, unless it can be
demonstrated that the vapors from the fume hoods are not corrosive.
(b) If the exhaust main exhaust ducts convey fume hood exhaust only, they
shall also be constructed of welded Type 316 stainless steel. If the main
exhaust ducts convey general exhaust as well as fume hood exhaust,
they may be constructed of galvanized steel in accordance with the
SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
(1) For systems conveying fume hood and general exhaust consider
constructing the risers Type 316 stainless steel, since they will be
completely enclosed in the building construction, surrounded by
other systems and nearly impossible to replace in the future should
they corrode.
4) Fans
(a) Fume hood exhaust fans should be constant volume to achieve constant
dispersion of the effluent.
(1) Provide a modulating dilution damper for each fan to dilute outdoor
air with the exhaust air dilution damper and maintain constant
airflow through each exhaust fan as the fume hood and lab general
exhaust airflow rates vary. The design pressure drop for the dilution
damper at full flow shall be equal to the pressure drop in the
exhaust duct system from the lab to the exhaust fan.
(b) All fans for fume hood exhaust shall be AMCA Type B spark-resistant
construction.
(c) Many manufacturers produce high induction fans specifically designed
for laboratory applications. Experience has shown that the performance
of these fans with regard to dispersion varies with ambient wind velocity
and direction, as well as the density of the exhaust and ambient air.
When using these fans, the exhaust stack location, height and velocity
requirements from the codes and standards sited at the beginning of this
Section must still be followed. A wind tunnel or computational fluid
dynamic dispersion study is still recommended.
(d) Many manufacturers produce fan assemblies where multiple fans are
factory assembled on a single intake plenum. Experience has shown
that the manufacturers rarely account properly for system effect resulting
from less than ideal inlet conditions to the fans. This can result in the
actual exhaust capacity falling far short of the desire capacity. Address
the results of system effect in every fume hood exhaust system design.
Do not rely on the manufacturer of multiple fan assemblies to account for
system effect.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 151
(e) Provide a low leakage isolation damper at the inlet of each fume hood
exhaust fan. Where multiple exhaust fans are manifolded together or
mounted on a single intake plenum, account for leakage through the
isolation damper of any normally inoperable of redundant fans in the
overall exhaust volume determination.
5) Controls
(a) All fume hoods, constant or variable volume) shall have an airflow
monitor confirming the exhaust airflow rate through the hood is
maintained at a velocity that provides a safe condition for anyone using
the hood. The monitor shall have an audible and visible alarm indication
of unsafe conditions, and shall transmit the alarm to the building
automation system.
(b) Variable air volume controls shall be designed specifically for laboratory
fume hood applications and shall provide the response time and
performance required by ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation.
(c) Variable volume fume hood controls shall include the following
components:
(1) Face velocity display
(2) Visible and audible alarms for high and low face velocity
(3) Local alarm reset
(4) Standby velocity setting (for unoccupied mode)
(5) Sash position sensor
(6) Hood exhaust air volume feedback
(7) Dry contact for alarming transmission to the building automation
system.
6) Refer to GCPS Sections:
(a) 236003 – Chemical Exhaust Fans
(b) 233816 – Chemical Lab Fume Exhaust Hood
l. Lift Station Ventilation and Odor Control Systems
1) Methane gas is the primary byproduct of the biological degradation of waste
that occurs in lift stations.
2) Methane gas is highly flammable and poses a potential for severe explosion
in the presence of a spark.
3) Lift station ventilation systems shall be designed in strict accordance with
NFPA 820 – Standard for Fire Protection in Waste Treatment and Collection
Facilities.
4) Enclosed lift stations must be provided with Odor Removal Units capable of
providing continuous lift station ventilation at minimum rate of 12 air changes
per hour.
5) Fans for lift station ventilation shall be AMCA Type A Spark Resistant
Construction.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 152
6) Low and high exhaust shall be drawn from within 300 mm of the lowest
maintenance access of the lift station space, and from within 300 mm of the
ceiling of the lift station enclosure
7) See Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. – Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design
m. HVAC for Data Centers
1) General
(a) The most defining HVAC characteristic of data and communications
equipment centers is the potential for exceptionally high sensible heat
loads. In addition, the equipment installed in these facilities typically:
(1) Serves mission-critical applications (i.e. 24/7/365 operation)
(2) Has special environmental requirements (temperature, humidity,
and cleanliness)
(3) Has the potential for disruptive overheating and equipment failure if
cooling service is interrupted
(b) Expect that most computer equipment will be replaced multiple times
with more current technology during the life of the facility. Typical
equipment product cycles are 1 to 5 years, whereas facilities and
infrastructure have life cycles of 10 to 25 years. Replacement equipment
has historically required more demanding power and cooling
requirements; therefore, expect the data center cooling load to increase
over time. Plan how additional cooling capacity will be provided.
(c) Data Center Classification and Design Criteria.
(1) Work with the RCJ to identify the environmental requirements for all
data centers. A consortium of server manufacturers has agreed on a
set of four standardized conditions (Classes 1 to 4), listed in
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments prepared by
ASHRAE Technical Committee 9.9 in 2011.
(i) Class 1 – A data center facility with tightly controlled
environmental parameters (dew point, temperature, and
relative humidity) and mission-critical operations; types of
products typically designed for these environments are
enterprise servers and storage products.
(ii) Class 2 – A data center space or office or lab environment with
some control of environmental parameters (dew point,
temperature, and relative humidity); types of products typically
designed for this environment are small servers, storage
products, personal computers, and workstations.
(iii) Class 3 an office – A home, or transportable environment with
little control of environmental parameters (temperature only);
types of products typically designed for this environment are
personal computers, workstations, laptops, and printers.
(iv) Class 4 – A point of sale or light industrial or factory
environment with weather protection, sufficient winter heating
and ventilation; types of products typically designed for this
environment are point-of-sale equipment, industrial controllers,
or computers and handheld electronics such as PDAs.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 153
(v) NEBS – A telecommunications central office with some control

of environmental parameters (dew point, temperature and
relative humidity); types of products typically designed for this
environment are switches, transport equipment, and routers.
• Since Class 3 and 4 environments are not designed
primarily for data center equipment, they are not covered
further in this chapter.
2) Environmental Conditions
(a) Table 5.4.3.E lists recommended and allowable conditions for Class 1,
Class 2, and NEBS environments, as defined by the footnoted sources.
Note that dew-point temperature and relative humidity are also specified.
Table 5.4.3.E - CLASS 1, CLASS 2, AND SELECTED NEBS DESIGN CONDITIONS
Classes 1 and 2 NEBS
Recommended
Condition Allowable Level Level Allowable Level Recommended Level
Temperature control range 15 to 32 C (Class 1) 18 to 27 C 5 to 40 C 18 to 26.7 C

10 to 35°C (Class 2)
Maximum temperature rate of change 5 C/Hr (cooling) 5 C/Hr
Relative humidity control range 20 to 80%, Dew point 5.5 to 5 to 85% Max 55%
17 C max. dew point 15 C, 27.7 C max. dew
(Class1) RH less than point
21 C max. dew point 60%
(Class 2)
Filtration quality 65%, min. 30% Min. 85%

(MERV 11, min. MERV 8) (Min. MERV 13)
NOTE: The stated environmental conditions are measured at the inlet to the data and communications
equipment, and not average space or return air conditions.
(b) Outdoor Air Ventilation
(1) Provide adequate ventilation to pressurize the data center to aid in
temperature and humidity control, dilute VOC’s from the data center
equipment, and provide acceptable indoor air quality conditions for
human inhabitants in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. Ventilation air is
typically cooled, dehumidified, filtered and delivered separately from
the data center HVAC system
(2) Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) using vented flooded lead-
acid batteries shall be exhausted at a minimum rate of 6 air changes
per hour or 0.15 m³/s, whichever is greater. UPS utilizing valve
regulated lead acid batteries (VRLA) or modular cartridge batteries
do not require special ventilation, other than the normal ventilation
required to meet the ventilation requirements for human occupants.
(3) Refer to Paragraph 5.4.3.B.2.d.6) for requirements relating to
purging clean agent fire suppression chemicals.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 154
(c) Flexibility
(1) As mentioned earlier, technology is continually changing and data
center equipment in a given space is frequently changed and/or
rearranged during the life of a data center facility. In critical
applications, it shall be possible to modify the system without
shutdown. Modular in-rack cooling options provide the greatest
overall flexibility. They can utilize chilled water or variable flow
refrigerant for cooling.
(d) Redundancy
3) Provide N+1 redundancy for each item of equipment in a data center HVAC
system. HVAC Load Considerations
(a) Calculate cooling loads in data center facilities in the same manner as for
any other facility. Typical features of these facilities are a high internal
sensible heat load from the data center equipment itself and a
correspondingly high sensible heat ratio. However, other loads exist and
it is important that a composite load comprised of all sources is
calculated early in the design phase, rather than relying on a generic
overall “watts per square meter” estimate that neglects other potentially
important loads.
(b) In addition, if the initial deployment or first-day data center equipment
load is low because of low equipment occupancy, the effect of the other
loads (envelope, lighting, etc.) becomes proportionately more important
in terms of part-load operation.
(c) In some cases, power distribution units (PDUs) are located in the data
center equipment room as the final means of transforming voltage to a
usable rating and distributing power to the data center equipment. The
heat dissipation from the transformers in the PDUs shall be accounted
for by referencing the manufacturer’s equipment specifications.
(d) Heat gains through the building envelope shall be included.
(e) Lighting is normally a small part of the overall heat gain for a data center,
but needs to be included in the HVAC load calculation.
4) Reheat
(a) Reheat is needed in data centers for humidity control when the supply air
must be overcooled to remove humidity. Electric resistance reheat
provides the best control and is the most economic method of reheating.
5) Humidification
(a) The data center envelope shall be carefully constructed of extremely low
permeability materials to avoid humidity from permeating into or out of
the data center. Work with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to ensure
envelope materials and construction details result in a “humidity tight”
facility.
(b) Humidification shall be provided by electric steam generators. Electric
steam generators shall be provided with disposable water canisters that
may be replaced when they become caked with precipitate from the
water being evaporated.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 155
6) Energy Conservation
(a) Power usage effectiveness (PUE) is a metric for characterizing and
reporting overall data center infrastructure efficiency, and is defined by
the following formula:
Total data center energy consumption or power
PUE =
IT energy consumption or power
(b) When calculating PUE, IT energy consumption shall be measured
directly at the IT load. If necessary, at minimum, it could be measured at
the output of the UPS.
(c) The design goal for data center PUE shall be within a range of 1.3-2.0.
7) HVAC Systems, Components and Arrangements
(a) Consider the data center cooling load, the equipment density, the
mission critical nature of the equipment, and the size of the data center.
(1) Computer room air conditioning (CRAC) and computer room air
handling (CRAH) units are the most common data center cooling
units. However, they are not necessarily the most efficient,
especially at serving dense equipment loads
(1) Some larger data centers use central-station air handling units.
These may not work well for getting the conditioned air to densely
packed equipment, and it may be expensive to provide a high level
of redundancy. If multiple air handling units can be manifolded
together, only one additional AHU may be required to provide
redundancy. Another option for manifolded air handling units is to
oversize the units then operate them at reduced capacity when all
units are operational. Then if one units fails or is taken out of
operation for maintenance purposes, the capacities of the remaining
units can be ramped up to meet the load.
(b) Chilled-water distribution loops are frequently provided with taps and
valves for future local fan coil units that are designed especially for data
center applications. Careful design of the loop may provide for flow from
either direction in the loop if a section must be isolated to provide a new
tap.
(1) Chilled-water pipe insulation with a vapor barrier is required to
prevent condensation, but not to prevent thermal loss in a cold
plenum; therefore, minimum insulation thickness shall be
considered as insulated piping may restrict underfloor air
distribution.
(c) Controls and Monitoring
(1) Control systems shall be capable of reliable control of temperature,
relative humidity, and, where required, pressurization within
tolerance from set point. Specify the required control accuracy to
maintain the desired temperature and humidity tolerances.
(2) Monitoring shall include control system sensors as well as
independent “monitoring-only” sensors and shall include data center
equipment areas, critical infrastructure equipment rooms,

Rev. 0 5.4 - 156
command/network operations centers, etc., to ensure critical

parameters are maintained.
(3) As a minimum, alarms shall be provided to signal when temperature
or humidity limits are exceeded. Properly maintained and accurate
differential pressure gages for air-handling equipment filters may
help prevent loss of system airflow capacity and maintain design
environmental conditions. All monitoring and alarm devices shall
provide local indications as well as interface to the central
monitoring system.
(d) Data center equipment is typically mounted in racks or cabinets arranged
in rows. In a typical configuration, the “front” of cabinets, racks, or
frames faces one aisle, and the rear, which includes cable connections,
faces another aisle. The cabinets or racks in a data center environment
are usually 2 M high. Each cabinet or rack may contain a single piece of
equipment, or it may contain any number of individual items of
equipment.
(e) Typically, supply air is drawn into the inlet of the equipment cabinet or
rack, picks up heat internal to the equipment, and is then discharged,
typically from a different side of the equipment. The air then travels back
to the HVAC cooling coil, where the heat is absorbed.
(1) Hot Aisle/Cold Aisle Configuration. Using alternating hot and cold
aisles promotes separation of the cool supply and warm return
streams which generally leads to lower equipment inlet
temperatures and greater energy efficiency.
(i) Data center facilities often use an underfloor plenum to supply
cooling air to the equipment. CRAC units push cold air into the
plenum, from which it is introduced into data and
communications equipment rooms via perforated floor tiles, tile
cutouts, and other openings. The raised-floor design offers
flexibility in placing computer equipment above the raised floor.
Cool air can, in theory, be delivered to any location simply by
replacing a solid floor tile with a perforated tile.
(ii) With a hot-aisle/cold aisle configuration, perforated tiles are
placed in the cold aisle. Cool air delivered by the perforated tiles
is drawn into the front of the racks. Warm air is exhausted from
the back of the racks into the hot aisle and is ultimately returned
to the CRAC units.
(iii) The underfloor plenum is often used for cables, electrical
conduits, and pipes. These obstructions in the plenum may
interfere with airflow. When determining plenum depth, below-
floor obstructions shall be considered. It is recommended that
the height of underfloor plenums be at least 300 mm.
(iv) When adequate airflow is not supplied through the perforated
tiles, internal fans in the equipment racks tend to draw air
through the front of the cabinet from the path of least resistance,
which typically includes the space to the sides of and above the
racks. Because most of this air originates in the hot aisle, its
temperature is high. Thus, cooling of the sides and upper
portion of the equipment racks could be seriously compromised.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 157
n. HVAC for Hospitals and Clinics

(b) Stair pressurization system design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.11
– Stair Pressurization Systems
(c) Fire and smoke control system design is addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.D.1.h.-Fire and Smoke Management Systems
2) General
(a) HVAC systems for hospitals and clinics shall be designed in accordance
with the following codes and standards:
Saudi Building Code 501- Mechanical Requirements
International Mechanical Code
AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities
NFPA 92 – Standard for Smoke Control Systems
NFPA 99 – Healthcare Facilities Code
(b) Refer to the ASHRAE Applications Handbook Health Care Facilities
Chapter for further information and guidance regarding laboratory HVAC
design.
(c) The cooling demand for hospitals will usually dictate a central chilled
water system.
(1) Where chillers with water cooled condenser are utilized, consider
collecting cooling coil condensate to be used for cooling tower
make-up water. The peak production of cooling coil condensate will
normally coincide with peak demand for cooling tower make-up
water.
3) HVAC Air Handling System
(a) Central air handling systems are preferred for hospitals. The central
systems consolidate most of the equipment requiring maintenance into
large mechanical rooms, and minimize the number of satellite equipment
requiring maintenance, as well as the complexity of that maintenance.
(1) Central air handling systems should be variable air volume systems
that meet the airflow requirements of the International Mechanical
Code and the AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health
Care Facilities.
(2) Zone reheating for space temperature control shall be accomplished
by electric resistance heaters.
(b) The central air handling system should be comprised of several identical
air handling units. Units can be staged off as the supply air demand
diminishes during periods of low occupancy. Multiple air handling units
can be designed to operate at low velocities through coils and filters
during normal operation for energy savings, and then ramped up to
adjust for a unit that fails or is taken out of service for maintenance.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 158
(c) In air handling units, locating the supply fan downstream from the cooling
coil but upstream from the final filters provides reheating of the cooled air
before it enters the final filters and typically eliminates the risk of
condensation in the final filters.
(d) Energy recovery will generally be cost effective for large heath care
facilities. Complete a life cycle cost analysis to determine the cost vs.
benefit of an energy recovery system. Where practical, consider
collecting condensate from the air handling unit cooling coils, and then
passing the condensate through an evaporative cooling unit in the
exhaust airstream upstream from the exhaust heat recovery coil. This
will lower the exhaust air temperature and improve the overall
performance of the heat recovery system.
(e) Packaged terminal equipment and fan coil units are acceptable for clinics
and small heath care facilities.
(1) Consider a dedicated outdoor air system for supplying the required
ventilation air. Packaged terminal equipment and fan coil units
rarely have adequate capacity to condition the ventilation air.
4) Air distribution System Design
(a) Hospitals have rather high supply, return and exhaust air volume
requirements. Careful design of the distribution ductwork can
significantly reduce the fan horsepower, and the resulting electrical
energy use.
(1) The velocity in the duct system should systematically step down
from the risers to the air outlets in the rooms. Maximum velocity in
risers should be 10 m/S. Maximum velocity in main ducts should be
7.5 m/S. Maximum velocity in branch ducts to variable volume and
constant volume terminals should be 6 m/S. Maximum velocity in
duct downstream of the variable volume and constant volume
terminals should be 5 m/S. Maximum velocity in diffuser necks
should be 2.5 m/S. This systematic decreasing of velocity results in
a phenomenon known as “static regain” which reduces the overall
resistance to flow, and the corresponding fan horsepower.
(b) Locate supply air diffusers and registers in patient rooms to avoid drafts
at the patient bed.
5) Room Environmental Control
(a) An individual room controller should be provided as part of the building
automation system for each room in a hospital.
(b) Individual temperature (and humidity control where required) should be
provided for occupied space.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 159
(c) Some spaces in hospitals require pressure control with respect to

surrounding spaces. Examples are infectious isolation rooms, protective
isolation rooms, operating rooms, other invasive procedure rooms,
sterilization rooms and morgues. This is best accomplished by
maintaining a constant offset between the supply and return/exhaust
airflows for these spaces. The airflow can be measured by the airflow
sensors in the supply and exhaust air volume control terminals and the
offset can be controlled by the room controller.
(1) Differential pressure monitoring between a space and a corridor is
useful for indicating and alarming a condition where the airflow
tracking has failed. However, for pressure control, airflow tracking is
much more reliable than active pressure control.
o. HVAC for Laboratories
(b) Exhaust systems for fume hoods are addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.D.1.k. – Fume Hood Exhaust Systems
2) General
(a) HVAC systems for laboratories shall be designed in accordance with the
following codes and standards:
(1) Saudi Building Code 501- Mechanical Requirements
(2) International Mechanical Code
(3) NFPA 45 – Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using
Chemicals
(4) NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
(5) ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation
(b) Refer to the ASHRAE Applications Handbook Laboratory Chapter for
further information and guidance regarding laboratory HVAC design.
(c) There are four fundamental concerns in the design of laboratory HVAC
systems:
(1) Safety is paramount.
(2) Functionality – many processes and procedures in a lab are critical,
and the systems must function and provide the support needed.
(3) Flexibility – Over time the experiments in the labs will change.
Some changes will be significant. The lab HVAC system must be
able to adapt to those changes.
(4) Energy Efficiency – Laboratory buildings consume more energy
than most other building types. Careful attention must be paid in
the design phase to minimize energy consumption.
(d) An initiative cosponsored by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
and the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) known as Labs for the 21st

Rev. 0 5.4 - 160
Century (Labs21) promotes the sharing of information related to reducing

energy and water consumption in laboratories. This initiative has been
continued by the International Institute for Sustainable Labs(I²SL).
Labs21 and I²SL distribute Best Practice Guides with information on the
design, construction, and operation of specific technologies that
contribute to energy efficiency and sustainability in laboratories. The
following Best Practice Guides should be considered in laboratory
design:
(1) Energy Recovery in Laboratory Facilities
(2) Chilled Beams
(3) Optimizing Laboratory Ventilation Rates
(4) Commissioning Ventilated Containment Systems in the Laboratory
(5) Laboratory Guidelines Using ASHRAE 90.1—2007 Appendix G
(6) Metrics and Benchmarks for Energy Efficiency in Laboratories
(7) Manifolding Laboratory Exhaust Systems
(8) Efficient Electric Lighting in Laboratories
(9) Minimizing Reheat Energy Use in Laboratories
(10) Right-Sizing Laboratory Equipment Loads
(11) Modeling Exhaust Dispersion for Specifying Acceptable
Exhaust/Intake Designs
(12) Water Efficiency Guide for Laboratories
(13) Low-Pressure-Drop HVAC Design for Laboratories
(14) Daylighting in Laboratories
(15) Onsite Power Systems for Laboratories
3) HVAC System Capacity and Right Sizing
(a) It is typical that the airflow requirements for some labs is determined by
the exhaust demand, usually based on the number of fume hoods. The
airflow requirements for other labs will be determined by the internal heat
gain from equipment. Analyze the lab program to determine the
determining factor for the airflow design and size the HVAC accordingly.
Apply typical diversity factors for lab equipment as found in ASHRAE
Applications Handbook Laboratories Chapter.
(1) For labs with high concentrated sensible heating loads from
equipment, consider chilled water fan coil units to provide
supplemental cooling and meet peak cooling demands.
(2) Provide a secondary chilled water distribution system in lab
buildings for supplemental sensible cooling and for equipment
cooling.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 161
(b) The air handling system for a laboratory building should be one single
central system wherever possible. Issues of redundancy and flexibility
can be addressed more simply if the building is served by one system.
(1) Air from uncontaminated spaces such as offices, classrooms,
conference rooms usually comprises a relatively small percentage
of the total air requirement for a lab building, and 100% of this air
can be returned to the central air handling system.
(c) The central air handling system should be comprised of several identical
air handling units. Units can be staged off as the supply air demand
diminishes during periods of low occupancy. Multiple air handling units
can be designed to operate at low velocities through coils and filters
during normal operation for energy savings, and then ramped up to
adjust for a unit that fails or is taken out of service for maintenance.
(d) In air handling units, locating the supply fan upstream from the cooling
coil imposes the fan heat directly to the cooling heat transfer fluid. This
usually results in a higher acceptable leaving air temperature from the
cooling coil, which in turn results in increased efficiency in the
refrigeration equipment.
(e) Energy recovery will generally be cost effective for large laboratory
buildings. Complete a life cycle cost analysis to determine the cost vs.
benefit of an energy recovery system. Where practical, consider
collecting condensate from the air handling unit cooling coils, and then
passing the condensate through an evaporative cooling unit in the
exhaust airstream upstream from the exhaust heat recovery coil. This
will lower the exhaust air temperature and improve the overall
performance of the heat recovery system.
4) Air Distribution System Design
(a) Laboratory buildings tend to be “supply air intensive”. Careful design of
the distribution ductwork can significantly reduce the fan horsepower
requirement, and the resulting electrical energy use.
(1) The velocity in the duct system should systematically step down
from the risers to the air outlets in the rooms. Maximum velocity in
risers should be 10 m/S. Maximum velocity in main ducts should be
7.5 m/S. Maximum velocity in branch ducts to variable volume and
constant volume terminals should be 6 m/S. Maximum velocity in
duct downstream of the variable volume and constant volume
terminals should be 5 m/S. Maximum velocity in diffuser necks
should be 2.5 m/S. This systematic decreasing of velocity results in
a phenomenon known as “static regain” which reduces the overall
airflow resistance in the ductwork, and reduces the required fan
horsepower and resulting electrical energy use.
(b) Consider using “extended plenum” sections in the supply and exhaust air
duct where the duct remains the same size for extended lengths. This
will reduce the resistance, and will also contribute to the flexibility of the
system. Sometimes heavy demands are imposed in the middle or at the
ends of the distribution system. The extended plenum concept will
accommodate high demands in almost any portion of the distribution
system.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 162
(c) Opinions vary regarding safe minimum airflow rates for laboratories
where chemicals are used. Unless active air monitoring is employed in
labs where chemicals are present, the airflow rates shall not be less than
6 air changes per hour when the lab is occupied, and not less than 4 air
changes per hour when the lab is unoccupied.
(d) Supply air registers and grilles must be located carefully so as not to
create air currents that will spread chemical fumes or cause fume
spillage from fume hoods.
5) Room Environmental Control
(a) An individual room controller should be provided as part of the building
automation system for each lab.
(b) Individual temperature (and humidity control where required) should be
provided for each lab room.
(c) In general, it is desirable to maintain most labs at a negative pressure
with respect to the adjacent corridor. This is best accomplished by
maintaining a constant offset between the supply and exhaust airflows to
each lab. The airflow can be measured by the airflow sensors in the
supply and exhaust air volume control terminals and the offset can be
controlled by the lab room controller.
(1) Differential pressure monitoring between a lab and a corridor is
useful for indicating and alarming a condition where the airflow
tracking has failed. However, for pressure control, airflow tracking is
much more reliable than active pressure control.
(d) Because of the high air change rates in laboratories, as well as the
characteristics of lab equipment to transfer heat to the space, location of
temperature and humidity sensors must be considered carefully.
6) Lab Hoods
(a) Lab hood types include fume hoods and canopy hoods.
(1) Fume hood types include full bypass constant volume hoods and
restricted bypass variable volume hoods. Coordinate with the
consultant selecting the fume hoods to assure the proper hood is
selected for the type of exhaust system being designed. Auxiliary
air fume hoods should not be used for laboratory applications.
(2) Ductless fume hoods are gaining popularity for applications with
minimal chemical use. Recognize the chemical absorbing filters in
these hoods will have to be changed while the hoods are in place.
Provide proper access to the hoods, and confirm the maintenance
staff who will be servicing the hoods has the staffing and the
expertise needed to change the filters. Ductless fume hoods must
comply with all applicable codes. Perform an assessment of the
chemicals that will be used in a laboratory vs. the effectiveness and
life of the ductless fume hood filters prior to specifying the ductless
fume hood for any application.
(3) Canopy hoods typically do not provide adequate capture for most
applications in laboratories; however, they are used for some
applications to remove sensible heat from ovens and similar
equipment.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 163
(4) For applications where perchloric acid is used in experimentation

and laboratory procedures, hoods specially design for perchloric
acid should be used. Perchloric acid is a strong oxidizing agent,
and the hood and connected ductwork must be constructed of
materials that will resist attack from the chemical. The ductwork
must be constructed of welded Type 316 stainless steel, and must
have complete washdown capability.
(5) Air flow through the open hood face area shall be 500 L/S-M² for
fume hoods and canopy hoods adjacent to a wall. Air flow through
the open face area of island canopy hoods shall be 625 L/S-M².
(6) Biological safety cabinets are enclosures that employ an internal fan
and filtration system to protect the environment inside the cabinet,
as well as the environment in the lab. They are not fume hoods,
and should not be used as such. There are several types of
biological safety cabinets.
(i) Class II Type A cabinets are unducted.
(ii) Class II Type B1 cabinets have an exhaust duct connection,
but the connection usually includes a bypass where some
exhaust air is drawn from the room. They therefore do not
impart any airflow resistance to the lab exhaust air system.
(iii) Class II Type B2 cabinets are hard connected to the exhaust
system and impart as must as 500 Pa of resistance to the
exhaust system. It is therefore advisable that a dedicated
exhaust system be provided for Class II Type B2 cabinets to
avoid operating the entire lab exhaust system at a much higher
static pressure.
p. Contamination Control
(a) Air filtration is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.j. – Air Filtration
(b) Building automation systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.b.13 –
Building Automation System
(c) Building air intake and discharge design considerations are addressed in
Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. – Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design
(d) Design of building automation systems is addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.D.1.b.1. – Design and Application of Controls
2) General
(a) HVAC systems can assist in contamination control in research and
healthcare facilities.
(1) The air must be free from contaminants, must be distributed in a
space in a uni-directional flow pattern to prevent contamination of
occupants or processed in the room, and must provide the desired
pressure relationship in the room with respect to surroundings.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 164
3) Filtration
(a) MERV 15 (95% efficient) filters are acceptable for most hospital
applications in providing contamination control. MERV 15 filters are
effective in removing bacteria from airstreams
(b) MERV 20 (HEPA) shall be utilized for protective isolation rooms for
patients with suppressed immune systems or burn patients.
(c) MERV 20 filters shall be used for contamination control in manufacturing
processes or research related to electronic or computer equipment.
4) Uni-Directional Airflow
(a) In the healthcare environment, contamination control shall be provided to
protect the patient or the healthcare worker.
(1) In either case, the desire is to deliver filtered and conditioned air
from high in the space, and to have the filtered air pass to the
protected occupant, to the contaminated occupant, and then to the
room return or exhaust air terminal.
(2) For most healthcare applications, the desired airflow rate to
maintain contamination control is 12 air changes per hour.
(b) In the product manufacturing and research environment, the intent of the
contamination control is to protect the product from dust and other
contaminants. The desire is to create a “shower” of clean air passing
from the ceiling, over the product, and then to low, floor-level return air
outlets.
(1) MERV 20 filters are typically located at the ceiling level.
(2) The airflow rate and ceiling filter coverage varies depending on the
level of cleanliness desired.
(3) Refer to the ASHRAE Application Handbook Chapter regarding
Clean Spaces
5) Room Pressurization
(a) Pressurizing a room to a pressure higher than the adjacent spaces will
help prevent contaminants from entering the space; whereas,
maintaining a contaminated room at pressure less than the adjacent
spaces will prevent contaminants from migrating from the space.
(1) It is generally accepted that a differential pressure equal to 12.5 Pa
is adequate for contamination control.
(b) Work with the Architect to ensure construction materials and methods to
contain and maintain the desired pressure relationship.
2. Building Operations
a. Energy Use and Management
(a) HVAC equipment room design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.1. –
Central Heating and Cooling
(b) Building Automation is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.13. – Building
Automation

Rev. 0 5.4 - 165
(c) Control system design and applications are addressed in Subsection

5.4.3.d.1.b.1 – Design and Applications of Controls
2) The following are guidelines for minimizing energy use.
(a) The energy consumption for most buildings in Jubail is dominated by
refrigeration systems and supply air fans.
(1) Optimize the selection of all components. Provide life cycle cost
analysis for options to optimize the energy consumption.
(2) Review the results of all energy modeling with the building operators
so they become familiar with assumptions made regarding how the
building is to be operated, in order to understand how to operate the
building efficiently.
(3) Specify adequate training for the building operators on the
programming and functions of the building automation system so
they can monitor the HVAC systems and energy use closely and
make necessary adjustments to the programming and functions to
reduce energy use.
(4) The Sequences of Controls in Section 230993 of this document
include special strategies to optimize the operation of systems and
equipment. These strategies go beyond the normal functions
required to achieve comfort in buildings. Review the building
automation system shop drawing submittals in detail to ensure the
vendor providing the system understands the sequences and is
incorporating them properly in the HVAC systems. Many building
automation system vendors have standard, pre-programmed basic
sequences for controlling different types of HVAC systems, and they
will often substitute those standard sequences for the custom
sequences specified in the construction documents.
(5) Clearly illustrate all of the required control devices on the control
drawings, the plans and the TCDD’s. Do not rely on the control
sequences or standard notes to cover the requirement to provide
control devices.
(6) Illustrate and specify all metering required to monitor energy use.
Accurate monitoring will aid the building operators in determining
how to fine tune the building operation to minimize energy use.
(7) Consider providing a central “energy dashboard” to display the
energy use of the systems and equipment, as well as the
performance of any energy savings strategies such as photovoltaic
or active solar systems, heat recovery and variable frequency drives
for pumps and fans.
b. Owning and Operating Costs
1) Owning and operating costs include maintenance costs and replacement
costs for equipment, in addition to the energy cost for operating the facility.
(a) The GPCS provides a standard of quality for systems and equipment
that helps ensure cost effective reliability and longevity for HVAC
Systems and equipment. Do not compromise on the standard of quality
established in the GPCS during the shop drawing submittal review and
approval process.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 166
(b) The TCDD’s illustrate the features and accessories required for systems
and equipment so they may be properly maintained. Failure to provide
these features and accessories could limit the building operators’ ability
to properly maintain systems, which could seriously increase owning and
operating cost over time. Failure to provide valves in proper locations, or
valves that provide tight shut-off could limit the ability to provide
maintenance, and could create the need for widespread system
shutdown to replace one item of equipment, which will significantly
increase maintenance costs. Failure to provide flow and pressure
readout ports in proper locations could limit the ability to balance
systems properly, which could lead to a long term increase in owning
and operating costs.
c. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
1) General
(a) Systems that control the environment in a building change with time and
use and must be rebalanced accordingly. The designer must consider
initial and supplementary testing and balancing requirements for
commissioning carefully when developing the design documents.
(b) Clearly illustrate all devices required for proper balancing on the
construction documents. These devices include, in addition to valves
and dampers, ports and flow meters required in the hydronic systems to
properly measure flow rates. It is almost impossible to install ports and
flow meters in a hydronic system after it is filled and operational. Surface
flow measurement devices (Doppler type) have limited accuracy.
(c) Create documents that clearly list the design air and water flow rates for
each item of equipment. These documents may be riser diagrams
illustrating each item of equipment and/or terminal, or spreadsheets that
list each item of equipment or terminal with an identifying number that
corresponds to the information on the HVAC plans.
(1) Where items of equipment and terminals operate over a range of
flow, list the maximum and minimum flow rates for each item.
(2) Where flow rates vary for occupied vs. unoccupied periods, list both
the occupied and unoccupied flow rates.
(d) Specify balancing tolerances. Minimum flow tolerances are + 10% for
individual terminals and branches in on-critical applications and + 5% for
main air ducts. For critical water systems where differential pressures
must be maintained, tolerances of + 5% are suggested. For critical air
systems, recommendations are the following:
(1) Positive zones:
(i) Supply air 0 to 10%
(ii) Exhaust and return air 0 to -10%
(2) Negative zones:
(i) Supply air 0 to -10%
(ii) Exhaust and return air 0 to +10%

Rev. 0 5.4 - 167
d. Operation and Maintenance Management

1) Documentation
(a) Information on the facilities, collateral equipment, and intended operation
procedures is essential for planning facilities maintenance actions,
efficiently performing facilities maintenance, documenting maintenance
histories, following up on maintenance performance, energy reporting,
and management reporting.
(b) Specify detailed Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for all
HVAC systems and equipment. Deliverables shall support the expected
maintenance strategy, skills of the maintenance and operation staff, and
anticipated resources to be committed to performing operations and
maintenance.
(c) The information shall be provided in hard copy and digital format.
(d) Information shall be compiled into the manual as soon as it becomes
available. This information may be used to support design and
construction activities, systems commissioning, training of operation and
maintenance staff, start-up and troubleshooting. It is critical that all
information required to operate the systems and maintain the equipment
be compiled prior to project turnover to the owner’s staff and be available
to the entire facilities department.
(e) A complete operation and maintenance documentation package is to
include following documents:
(1) The operation and maintenance document directory provides easy
access to the various sections within the document.
(2) Emergency information, which shall include emergency and staff
and/or agency notification procedures. In addition to being directly
distributed to emergency response personnel, including emergency
information in the operation and maintenance documents enables
this critical information to be kept in a single place and be
immediately available during emergencies.
(3) The operating information, which shall contain the following
information:
(i) General Information:
• Building function
• Basis of design
• Building description
• Operating standards and logs
(ii) Technical information:
• System description
• Operating routines and procedures
• Seasonal start-up and shutdown
• Special procedures

Rev. 0 5.4 - 168
• Basic troubleshooting
(iii) The maintenance information:
• Equipment data sheets (specific to installed equipment)
• Operating and nameplate data
• Warranty information
• Manufacturer’s installation, operation, and maintenance
instructions
• Spare parts information
• Corrective, preventive, and predictive maintenance
actions, as applicable
• Schedule of actions, including frequency
• Action descriptions
(iv) Test reports with a record of observed performance during
start-up and commissioning.
(v) Copies of construction documents (“As-Built”).
2) Staffing and Training
(a) Training is a critical component in the overall operating and maintenance
plan. Assess the skills and experience and knowledge of the operating
and maintenance staff, and specify adequate training for them to become
completely familiar with the requirements for the building. Specify for the
training to be videotaped for review and refresh by the staff, as well as
for training future recruits. Training may be done in-house or by a
contracted third party who provides training as a business.
e. Supervisory Control Strategies and Optimization
1) General
(a) Confirm in the shop drawing review and commissioning that the building
automation system vendor has followed the sequences to the letter.
5.4.4. GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE
A. Public/Government
1. DX systems are most suitable for buildings with cooling demand 200 Tons or less. For
buildings with cooling demands greater than 200 Tons, consider a chiller water system
2. Ventilation systems shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy
Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings.
3. All outdoor air intakes shall have sand trap louvers.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 169
4. Temperature control zones for public/government buildings should not exceed 200 sq m
in floor area, except for large open assembly areas. Smaller control zones will generally
provide better comfort, but may not be economical. For large open assembly areas,
temperature control zones can be as large as 1000 sq m. Assembly areas with multiple
levels should have a separate temperature control zone for each level.
a. For large assembly areas, air should be supplied so that it is directed at the front of
the occupants’ bodies. If air cannot be adequately distributed from the front of the
occupants, it may be distributed from the side at a velocity not exceeding 0.15 m/S.
In no case should air be delivered from the occupants’ backs.
5. All supply air shall be ducted.
6. Ceiling plenums may be used for return air paths in accordance with the International
Mechanical Code.
7. Means must be provided for de-energizing HVAC when their space is unoccupied.
Preference would be that the HVAC can be de-energized on a zone-by-zone basis.
B. Commercial
1. DX systems are most suitable for buildings with cooling demand 200 Tons or less. For
buildings with cooling demands greater than 200 Tons, consider a chiller water system.
2. Ventilation systems shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy
Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings.
3. All outdoor air intakes shall have sand trap louvers
4. Temperature control zones for commercial buildings should not exceed 200 sq m in floor
area. Smaller control zones will generally provide better comfort, but may not be
economical.
5. All supply air shall be ducted.
6. Ceiling plenums may be used for return air paths in accordance with the International
Mechanical Code. A single ceiling return air plenum must not serve multiple tenants.
Return air for each tenant must be kept separate back to the return fan or air handling
unit.
7. Means must be provided for de-energizing each tenant’s HVAC when their space is
unoccupied.
C. Residential
1. Residential HVAC shall consist of DX cooling, with independent blower coil/air handling
units for each dwelling unit.
a. Where heating is required, utilize a heat pump.
2. Any equipment requiring maintenance shall be located in an area that is accessible
without entering the dwelling unit. Violating the privacy of the dwelling unit occupants is
not acceptable. Equipment requiring maintenance includes Compressors, condensers,
blower coil/air handling units and filters.
3. All supply air shall be ducted to the spaces served. Supply air system shall include an
outdoor air intake with sand trap louver, minimum MERV 8 filters, DX cooling coil,
centrifugal cabinet fan, supply air ducts and return air ducts.
4. Return air shall be ducted and shall not be transferred room-to-room.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 170
5. Each dwelling shall have a minimum of one temperature control zone.

6. Residential bathrooms shall have an exhaust.
a. Control individual exhaust fans with a dedicated switch adjacent to the light switch.
D. Industrial
1. Reference to other sections of the GEM
a. Dust collection is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.10 – Dust Collection Systems
b. Air intake and exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. –
c. Fans are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.c. – Fans
d. Make-up air units are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.i. – Make-up Air Units
e. Sandstorm design criteria are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.a. – Sandstorm
Provision design Criteria and Objectives
f. Air intake and exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. –
2. General
a. Industrial HVAC typically involves ventilation for the removal of excess heat or
airborne contaminants that are generated in the workplace.
1) Contaminants are generally airborne particulate, chemical contaminants or
odors.
2) All ventilation for industrial operations shall be designed in strict accordance
with the following references:
(a) Industrial Ventilation – A Manual of Recommended Practice, published
by the American Council of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
(b) ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook Chapter regarding Ventilation of
the Industrial Environment
(c) ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook Chapter regarding Industrial
Local Exhaust
b. Occasionally industrial HVAC will involve temperature and/or humidity control to
support a production process.
3. Ventilation System Design
a. Dilution ventilation is marginally effective for most applications, and is highly
inefficient.
b. Design ventilation systems that capture contaminants and/or heat as close to the
source of generation as possible, and exhaust the contaminants and/or heat directly
from the building.
1) Reference Industrial Ventilation – A Manual of Recommended Practice,
published by the American Council of Governmental Industrial Hygienists for
guideline information regarding capturing contaminants such as ducts and
vapors.
c. Design make-up air systems to adequately replace the exhausted air and maintain
the desired pressure relationship relative to adjacent spaces.

Rev. 0 5.4 - 171
d. Where ventilation is provided for worker comfort, local area and spot
ventilation/cooling are preferred as methods of minimizing energy consumed for
ventilation
1) Reference the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook Chapter regarding
Ventilation of the Industrial Environment for guideline information on local
area and spot cooling.
e. Where hot industrial processes or equipment expose workers to intense radiant
heat, consider providing shielding to reduce the effect of the heat felt by workers in
the area. Ventilation has little effect on workers comfort when intense radiant heat
sources are present. The only effective method for reducing radiant heat gain is to
shield workers from the radiant source.
4. Industrial Air Conditioning
a. Occasionally an industrial process will require specific temperature and/or humidity
conditions to support the process and achieve the desired results.
b. Where special industrial air conditioning is required to support a production process,
work with the process engineers to determine the specific conditions required, as
well as the tolerances or limits associated with those conditions.
c. Frequently, special control sequences will be provided to maintain the conditions
within the limits or tolerances needed to support the industrial process.
d. Prior to developing the detailed HVAC design, develop Process and Instrumentation
Diagrams (P&ID), and get sign-off from the process engineers that the process is
understood and the design concept meets the requirements of the process.
E. Specialty Applications
1. General
a. Specialty applications include places of worship or assembly, educational facilities,
museums, libraries and clean spaces.
1) All of these spaces have specific requirements for temperature and humidity
control, as well as ventilation rates.
2) Refer to the ASHRAE Application Handbook for guidelines regarding the
design of HVAC for each of these specialty applications. There is a dedicated
chapter in the Applications handbook for each of these facility types.
3) Refer to the other sections of this GEM regarding the design conditions and
guidelines relating to the equipment and systems design for the HVAC
required to serve these facilities

Rev. 0 5.4 - 172
SECTION 5.5 ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5.1. ELECTRICAL................................................................................................................. 8
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 8
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 8
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 9
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 9
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 13
6. Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................. 16
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 17
8. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 18
10. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 21
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 21
1. References ................................................................................................................... 21
C. Power Systems ............................................................................................................. 21
1. Electrical Characteristics .............................................................................................. 21
2. Site Power Distribution ................................................................................................. 24
3. Equipment..................................................................................................................... 24
4. Equipment Derating ...................................................................................................... 24
5. Power Calculations and Analyses ................................................................................ 26
D. Electrical Rooms ........................................................................................................... 30
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 30
2. Main Electrical Rooms .................................................................................................. 31
3. Distribution Electrical Rooms........................................................................................ 31
E. Backup Power Systems................................................................................................ 32
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 32
2. Sources ......................................................................................................................... 35
3. Emergency Systems ..................................................................................................... 38
4. Standby Systems .......................................................................................................... 39
F. Transfer Switches ......................................................................................................... 40
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 40
2. Types ............................................................................................................................ 40
3. Operation ...................................................................................................................... 40

Rev. 0 5.5 - i
4. Configuration ................................................................................................................ 41
5. Applications .................................................................................................................. 41
G. Electrical Distribution Equipment .................................................................................. 42
1. Medium Voltage Switchgear ......................................................................................... 42
2. Low Voltage Switchgear and Switchboards ................................................................. 42
3. Panelboards.................................................................................................................. 47
4. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers ....................................................................................... 47
5. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 49
6. Motors ........................................................................................................................... 49
7. Motor Controllers .......................................................................................................... 49
8. Wiring Devices .............................................................................................................. 50
9. Power Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 50
H. Transformers ................................................................................................................ 50
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 50
2. Community Area Transformer ...................................................................................... 51
3. Industrial Area Transformer .......................................................................................... 51
4. Transformers for Existing Facilities with Discontinued Voltages .................................. 52
5. References ................................................................................................................... 52
I. Conduits, Ducts and Busways ...................................................................................... 52
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 52
2. Selection of Raceway Type .......................................................................................... 52
3. Raceway Types ............................................................................................................ 53
4. Surface Installations ..................................................................................................... 54
5. Underfloor Installations ................................................................................................. 54
6. Underground Installations ............................................................................................. 55
7. Cable Trays and Cable Trenches ................................................................................. 55
8. Wires and Cables ......................................................................................................... 56
9. Busways ....................................................................................................................... 57
10. Conduit Fill .................................................................................................................... 57
J. Grounding ..................................................................................................................... 57
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 57
2. System Grounding ........................................................................................................ 58
3. Equipment Grounding ................................................................................................... 58
4. Grounding System Calculations ................................................................................... 58
5. Grounding of Various System Installations .................................................................. 58

Rev. 0 5.5 - ii
6. Installation Requirements ............................................................................................. 59

7. Grounding to Eliminate Hazards from Static Electricity ................................................ 59
8. Corrosion Protection for Grounding Systems ............................................................... 59
9. Additional Grounding Protection by Residual Current Devices (RCD)......................... 61
10. References ................................................................................................................... 61
K. Lightning Protection Systems ....................................................................................... 62
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 62
2. Applications .................................................................................................................. 62
3. Principal Components for Lightning Protection System ............................................... 62
4. Minimum Lightning Protection Features ....................................................................... 63
L. Surge Protection Devices ............................................................................................. 63
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 63
2. Types of surge protection: ............................................................................................ 64
M. Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 65
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 65
2. Light Source.................................................................................................................. 66
3. Interior Lighting ............................................................................................................. 72
4. Exterior Lighting ............................................................................................................ 79
5. Lighting Calculations .................................................................................................... 85
N. Lighting Control Systems.............................................................................................. 86
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 86
2. Interior........................................................................................................................... 86
3. Exterior ......................................................................................................................... 90
4. Lighting Control Strategies ........................................................................................... 90
5.5.2. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................... 93
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 93
1. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 93
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 93
3. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 107
4. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 118
5. Standards and References .......................................................................................... 119
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 123
1. References .................................................................................................................. 123
C. Communications Systems ........................................................................................... 123
1. Local Area Network ..................................................................................................... 123

Rev. 0 5.5 - iii
2. Metropolitan Area Network .......................................................................................... 126

3. FTTH............................................................................................................................ 129
4. Data Centers................................................................................................................ 138
5. Wireless Local Area Network ...................................................................................... 145
6. Telephone and Intercom .............................................................................................. 153
7. Structured Cabling ....................................................................................................... 169
8. Distributed Television System ..................................................................................... 177
9. Master Clock System ................................................................................................... 184
10. Public Address and General Alarm ............................................................................. 186
11. Audio/Visual Systems .................................................................................................. 189
D. Safety and Security Systems....................................................................................... 195
1. Access Control System ............................................................................................... 195
2. Automatic Number Plate Recognition (ANPR) ............................................................ 197
3. Intrusion Detection Systems ........................................................................................ 200
4. Vehicle Barriers ........................................................................................................... 207
5. Video Surveillance Systems ........................................................................................ 208
6. Security Screening ...................................................................................................... 210
E. Utilities ......................................................................................................................... 210
1. Outside Plant Infrastructure ......................................................................................... 210
2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ............................................ 216
3. Earthing and Bonding .................................................................................................. 216
5.5.3. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS .................................................................... 219
A. General: ....................................................................................................................... 219
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 219
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 219
3. Exclusions.................................................................................................................... 220
4. References – Units of Measurement ........................................................................... 220
5. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 221
6. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 225
7. Codes And Standards ................................................................................................. 228
8. Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................ 230
B. Control System Architectures ...................................................................................... 233
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 233
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 234
3. Building Automation System (BAS) Architecture......................................................... 234

Rev. 0 5.5 - iv
4. Process Control System (PCS) Architecture ............................................................... 235

5. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA ..................................................... 237
6. Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System ..................................................... 238
C. Control Strategies ........................................................................................................ 239
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 239
2. Principals of Automation .............................................................................................. 240
3. Advanced Control Systems ......................................................................................... 242
4. Equipment Operating Modes ....................................................................................... 242
5. Consoles, Workstations and Control Networks ........................................................... 243
6. Redundancy – Fault Tolerance ................................................................................... 244
7. Centralized Enterprise, MIS/ERP System ................................................................... 245
8. Segregation - Risk Levels – Safety Integrity levels ..................................................... 248
9. Spare and Expansion Capabilities .............................................................................. 250
D. Instrumentation – Basic Design Criteria ...................................................................... 251
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 251
2. Online Continuous Measurement or Analog Type Instrumentation ............................ 254
3. Online Discrete Type Instrumentation ......................................................................... 255
4. On-line Final Control Elements.................................................................................... 255
5. Custody Metering ........................................................................................................ 258
E. Instrumentation and Control System Cabinets ............................................................ 259
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 259
F. Electrical Systems for Instrumentation ........................................................................ 261
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 261
2. Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................... 261
3. Power Supply............................................................................................................... 262
4. Power Distribution within PCS Cabinets ..................................................................... 262
5. Power Supply and Distribution to PCS Consoles and Workstations ........................... 263
6. Utility Power ................................................................................................................. 263
7. Grounding .................................................................................................................... 263
G. Process Automation Network (PAN) ........................................................................... 264
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 264
2. Process Automation Network Design .......................................................................... 264
3. Physical and Logical Separation ................................................................................. 264
4. Engineering and Maintenance Network (E&MN)......................................................... 264
5. Wireless Communications ........................................................................................... 264

Rev. 0 5.5 - v
6. HART ........................................................................................................................... 265

7. Profibus ........................................................................................................................ 266
8. BACNET ...................................................................................................................... 267
9. Control Network Cabling .............................................................................................. 267
H. Control System Access and Security .......................................................................... 268
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 268
2. Foundational Requirements: ....................................................................................... 268
3. Defense in Depth: ........................................................................................................ 268
4. Countermeasures: ....................................................................................................... 269
5. Security Zones: ............................................................................................................ 269
6. Conduits:...................................................................................................................... 270
7. Local and Remote Access ........................................................................................... 270
8. Data Protection and Retention .................................................................................... 271
I. System Integration ....................................................................................................... 271
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 271
2. DCS, PLC and SCADA (MTU, RTU) ........................................................................... 272
3. Historian....................................................................................................................... 272
4. Instrumentation Asset Management Systems (IAMS)................................................. 273
5. Condition Monitoring Systems (CMS) ......................................................................... 273
6. Emergency Shutdown and Isolation Systems (ESD) .................................................. 274
J. Control System Software ............................................................................................. 277
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 277
2. Standards .................................................................................................................... 278
3. Licensing...................................................................................................................... 278
K. Control Buildings and/or Control Rooms ..................................................................... 278
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 278
2. Control Room requirements ........................................................................................ 279
3. Server (Rack) Room requirements .............................................................................. 280
4. Engineering Room requirements ................................................................................. 280
5. Electrical – Power, Wiring, Lighting, Grounding requirements .................................... 280
6. UPS and Battery Room requirements ......................................................................... 281
7. Environmental requirements........................................................................................ 281
L. Fire Alarm and Gas Detection Systems and Fire Suppression Control System ......... 281
1. Fire Alarm System ....................................................................................................... 281
M. Documentation ............................................................................................................ 297

Rev. 0 5.5 - vi
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 297

2. Required Instrumentation Documents ......................................................................... 298
5.5.4 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE ............................................................................ 304
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 304
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 304
2. Definitions and Abbreviations: ..................................................................................... 304
B. Public/Government ...................................................................................................... 304
1. Athletic Venues ............................................................................................................ 304
2. Aviation ........................................................................................................................ 307
3. Community Center ....................................................................................................... 309
4. Hospital ........................................................................................................................ 310
5. Libraries ....................................................................................................................... 313
6. Mosque ........................................................................................................................ 315
7. Museum ....................................................................................................................... 317
8. Ports/Docks ................................................................................................................. 319
9. Schools ........................................................................................................................ 320
C. Commercial.................................................................................................................. 323
1. Hospitality .................................................................................................................... 323
2. Office ........................................................................................................................... 325
3. Retail/Restaurants ....................................................................................................... 327
4. Theaters....................................................................................................................... 328
D. Residential ................................................................................................................... 330
1. Multi-Family Housing ................................................................................................... 330
2. Single-Family Housing ................................................................................................. 332
E. Industrial ...................................................................................................................... 333
1. General Industrial ........................................................................................................ 333
2. Chemical Processing ................................................................................................... 335
F. Specialty Applications .................................................................................................. 337
1. Military ......................................................................................................................... 337
2. Water Treatment and/or Power Plants (Desalination) ................................................. 339

Rev. 0 5.5 - vii
SUBSECTION 5.5.1 ELECTRICAL
5.5.1. ELECTRICAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. General
1) This Section provides the basis for design and installation of electrical systems
and services. The guidelines apply to the following systems within the sites and
premises of Residential, Commercial, Institutional and Light Industrial facilities:
(a) Primary and Secondary Power Distribution Systems:
(1) 34.5 kV and 13.8 kV for Jubail Industrial City
(2) 33 kV and 34.5 kV for Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
(b) Low Voltage Power Distribution
(c) Lighting Systems
b. Health Safety and Welfare Considerations
1) All work undertaken in relation to these guidelines shall be completed in full
compliance with the respective health and safety requirements established by
the following:
(a) Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) Legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes
(2) Royal Commission’s Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM)
(3) Royal Commission’s Guiding Procurement and Construction
Specifications (GPCS)
(4) Royal Commission’s Typical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD)
(b) A/E and/or EPC Contractor
(1) Health and Safety Standards, and System as accepted by the Royal
Commission
2) In the absence of any or all of the above, best international industry practices,
with reference to health, safety and welfare, shall be employed and utilized
throughout.
c. Electrical systems designed using these Guidelines shall consider the following
features:
1) Safety of personnel, building and plant.
2) Design with consideration for energy efficiency and sustainability.
3) Compliance with standard voltage levels established for the development, as
detailed in this Guideline and the latest SEC Standards DPS-02 and SDMS-01.
4) A design arrangement that allows minimum interruption to the system during
maintenance that is carried out on a part of the system.
5) Allowances for future load growth and system expansion.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
6) Economy, considering overall building and plant cost as well as electrical

system costs.
7) Adequate interrupting capacity for circuit interrupting devices.
8) Proper coordination of all elements of the system with regards to insulation
levels, protective relaying, fusing and mechanical strength.
9) Power factor correction to address concerns associated with the electrical
distribution network.
10) Consideration for minimizing the impacts harmonics associated with non-linear
loads.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to facility types defined in Subsection 5.5.4 Guidelines by
Building Type.
3. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
b. This Section contains definitions for acronyms, abbreviations, words, and terms as
they are used in this Chapter. For definitions not listed, the latest issue of the
following Documents shall apply:
1) Saudi Building Code
2) International Electrotechnical Commission Glossary
3) IEC Electropedia, http://www.electropedia.org
4) Comprehensive Dictionary of Measurement and Control, International Society
for Measurement and Control
c. Definitions Specific to the Subsection:
1) “Ambien t Temperature” Average temperature of air or another medium in the
vicinity of the luminaire. Ambient temperature is expressed in degrees Celsius.
2) “Ampacity” The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry continuously
under the conditions of use without exceeding its temperature rating.
3) “Backup Power System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for
automatic, delayed, or manual connection to the alternate power source and
that serves all of the loads identified as essential for the facility.
4) “Bonded (Bonding)” Connected to establish electrical continuity and
conductivity.
5) “Bonding Jumper” A reliable conductor to ensure the required electrical
conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.
6) “Bonding Jumper, Equipment” The connection between two or more portions of
the equipment grounding conductor at the service.
7) “Cabinet” An enclosure that is designed for either surface mounting of flush
mounting and is provided with a frame, mat or trim in which a swinging door or
doors are or can be hung .

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
8) “Circuit Breaker” A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-

automatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined
overcurrent without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating.
9) “CIE color group” a grouping system for the color rendering and color
appearance of light sources.
10) “Classified Areas” An area where the hazardous classification is defined by
three main criteria as follows: 1) The type of hazard (groups), 2) The auto-
ignition temperature of the hazardous material (temperature or “T” rating), and
3) The likelihood of the hazard being present in flammable concentrations
(zones).
11) “Color Rendering Index” Quantitative measure of the ability of a light source to
reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or
natural light source.
12) “Concealed” Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building.
Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may
become accessible by withdrawing them.
13) “Conduit” Part of a closed wiring system of general circular cross-section for
insulated conductors and/or cables in electrical or communication installations,
allowing them to be drawn in and/or replaced.
14) “Continuous Load” A load where the maximum current is expected to continue
for 3 hours or more.
15) “Coordination (Selective)” Localization of an overcurrent condition to restrict
outages to the circuit or equipment affected, accomplished by the choice of
overcurrent protection devices and their ratings or settings.
16) “Critical Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of feeders
and branch circuits supplying energy to task illumination, special power circuits,
and selected receptacles serving areas and functions related to patient care
and that are connected to alternate power sources by one or more transfer
switches during interruption of normal power source.
17) “DALI” a lighting control protocol that allows the use of digital addressing of
lighting components to function and to communicate using 2 way digital
communications specified by IEC62386.
18) “Demand or Diversity Factor” - The ratio of the maximum demand of a system,
or part of a system, to the total connected load of a system for the part of the
system under consideration.
19) “Device” A unit of an electrical system that carries or controls electric energy as
its principal function.
20) “Disconnecting Means” or “Isolator” A device, or group of devices, or other
means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their
source of supply.
21) “Distribution Board (DB)” A single panel or group of panel units designed for
assembly in the form of a single panel, including buses and automatic
overcurrent devices, and equipped with or without switches for the control of
light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box
placed in or against a wall, partition, or other support; and accessible only from
the front.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 10
22) “Duct” A pipe provided to facilitate the installation of cables and provides
protection for the cables.
23) “Duct Bank” A multiple array of ducts.
24) “Emergency Systems” Electrical systems legally required to be installed and
that supply loads essential to safety and life.
25) “Enclosed” Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that prevents
persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
26) “Enclosure” The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting
energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical damage.
27) “Equipment” A general term, including material, fittings, devices, appliances,
luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like used as a part of, or in
connection with, an electrical installation.
28) “Equipment System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for delayed,
automatic, or manual connection to the alternate power source and that serves
primarily 3-phase power equipment.
29) “Feeder (Electrical)” All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the
source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and the
final branch-circuit overcurrent device.
30) “Handhole” A small jointing chamber of the joint box category but restricted to
footway use only.
31) “Interface Point (I.P.)” A location established for demarcation of contractual
responsibilities.
32) “Interrupting rating” The highest current at rated voltage that a device is
intended to interrupt under standard test conditions.
33) “Isolator” Refer to “Disconnecting Means”.
34) “Joint (splice)” The connection of two or more lengths of wire or cable at a
single point.
35) “Joint Box” A jointing chamber the top of which consists of fully removable
covers.
36) “Labeled” Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol,
or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Royal
Commission and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic
inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, and by whose
labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or
performance in a specified manner.
37) “Life Safety Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of
feeders and branch circuits intended to provide adequate power needs to
ensure safety to building occupants and that are automatically connected to
alternate power sources during interruption of the normal power source.
38) “Luminaire” Apparatus which distributes, filters or transforms the light emitted
from one or more lamps and which includes all the parts necessary for fixing
and protecting the lamps and, where necessary, circuit auxiliaries together with
the means for connecting them to the electric supply. The words "luminaire"
and "lamp system" are often assumed to be synonymous. For the purposes of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 11
this standard, the word "luminaire" is restricted to apparatus used for

distributing light in general lighting, while "lam p system" implies use of lamps
in other than general lighting applications.
39) Luminaire Efficacy: Quotient of the luminous flux emitted by the power
consumed by the Iuminaire. The efficacy is ex pressed in lm /W.
40) “Luminaire Lifetime” Length of time during which 70% of the measured initial
luminous flux value are provided, as a function of maximum operating
temperature range. The luminaire lifetime of the module is expressed in hours.
41) “Lumen Maintenance” Value of the luminous flux at a given time in the life of a
Iuminaire divided by the initial value of the luminous flux of the luminaire and
expressed as a percentage “x” of the initial luminous flux value. The lumen
maintenance of a Iuminaire is the effect of decrease of lumen output which is
sometimes referred to as depreciation or lumen loss factor.
42) “Manhole” A jointing chamber, accessed via a restricted opening in the top.
43) “Main Distribution Board” Board in the building which fulfills all the functions of
a main electrical distribution for the supply building area assigned to it and
where the voltage drop is measured for operating the safety services.
44) “Main Incomer” Refer to “Service”.
45) “Neutral Conductor” The conductor connected to the neutral point of a system
that is intended to carry current under normal conditions.
46) “Nonlinear Load” A load where the wave shape of the steady-state current
does not follow the wave shape of the applied voltage.
47) “Operating Temperature Range” Ambient temperature range within which the
luminaire with regard to the specification can be operated. The operating
temperature range is expressed in degrees Celsius.
48) “Overcurrent” Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the
ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload, short circuit, or ground
fault.
49) “Panelboard” Refer to “Main Distribution Board”, “Sub Main Distribution Board”
and “Distribution Board”.
50) “Residual Current Device” A mechanical switching device or association of
devices intended to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual
current attains a given value under specified conditions.
51) “Ring Main Unit” A Ring Main Unit includes two load break switches for the
connection of the substation to the ring and a transformer protection unit.
52) “Separately Derived System” A premises wiring system whose power is
derived from a source of electric energy or equipment other than a service.
Such systems have no direct electrical connection, including a solidly
connected ground conductor, to supply conductors originating in another
system.
53) “Service” The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the
serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. Also referred to as
“Supply Intake” or “Main Incomer”.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 12
54) “Short Circuit Current Rating” The prospective symmetrical fault current at a
nominal voltage to which an apparatus or system is able to be connected
without sustaining damage exceeding defined acceptance criteria.
55) “Splice” See Joint.
56) “Standby Systems” Include alternate power systems for such applications
where interruption of normal power would cause discomfort to personnel or
damage to product.
57) “Sub Main Distribution Board” Any distribution board which is neither a Main
Distribution Board nor a Distribution Board
58) “Surround Ratio” The average illuminance just outside the edge of the
carriageway in proportion to the average illuminance just inside the edge of
carriageway. Acceptable surround ratio values allows drivers to see
pedestrians and other road users who may be about to cross the road.
59) “Switchboard” A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on which are
mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent and other protective
devices, buses, and usually instruments. Switchboards are generally
accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not intended to be
installed in cabinets.
60) “Task lighting” is lighting directed to a specific surface or area to provide
illumination for visual and/or manual tasks.
61) “TN-C System” A system in which neutral and protective functions are
combined in a single conductor throughout the system.
62) “TN-S System” A system having separate neutral and protective conductors
throughout the system.
63) “Vacuum Interrupter Switch” A current interrupting switch for power distribution
systems comprising an outer case and a plurality of vacuum interrupter bottle
switches positioned in the case.
64) “Voltage (of a circuit)” The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned.
65) “Voltage, Nominal” A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the
purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (such as 400/230 volts).
The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within
a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2 Definitions and
Abbreviations.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection :
1) A: Amperes
2) AC: Alternating Current
3) ACB: Air Circuit Breakers
5) AFF: Above Finished Floor

Rev. 0 5.5 - 13
6) AFFL: Above Finished Floor Level

7) AGL: Above Ground Level
9) ATF: Active Tracking Filters
10) ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch
11) AVG: Average
12) BAS: Building Automation System
13) BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level
14) BITS: Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
15) BMS: Building Management System
16) CB: Circuit Breaker
17) CCT: Correlated Color Temperature
18) CAD: Computer Aided Design
19) CEN European Committee for Standardization (Lighting control
protocol)
20) CIE: Commission Internationale De L’eclairage (International
Commission on Illumination)
21) CR: Critical
22) CRI: Color Rendering Index
23) CT: Current Transformer
24) DALI Digital Application Lighting Interface
25) DB: Distribution Board
26) DP: Distribution Panel
27) ECG Electronic Control Gear (Lighting)
28) EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing
29) EPC: Engineering Procurement and Construction
30) EPR: Ethylene Propylene Rubber
31) FLA: Full Load Amps
32) FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit
33) FNC: Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit
36) HID: High Intensity Discharge
37) HVAC: Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
38) HZ: Hertz
39) IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

Rev. 0 5.5 - 14

41) IFC: Issued for Construction
43) KA: Kilo-amperes
44) KW: Kilo-watts
45) KV: Kilo-volts
46) KVA: Kilo-volt-amperes
47) LED: Light Emitting Diode
48) LFMC: Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit
49) LMS Lighting Management System
50) LS: Life Safety
51) LV: Low Voltage
52) MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker
53) MCCB: Molded Case Circuit Breaker
54) MDB: Main Distribution Board
55) MIN: Minimum
56) MIS: Metering Installation Standard
57) MIS1: Metering and Interface Standards
58) MTS: Manual Transfer Switch
59) MV: Medium Voltage
60) NA: Not Applicable
61) NEC: National Electrical Code
63) OS: Optional Standby
65) RCD: Residual Current Device
66) RCJ: Royal Commission for Jubail
67) RMU: Ring Main Unit
68) RMS: Root Mean Squared
69) RNC: Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
70) RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit
71) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or Saudi Standards,
Metrology and Quality Organization
73) SDS: Saudi Distribution Standards

Rev. 0 5.5 - 15
74) SDCS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Construction Standard

75) SDMS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
76) SDPS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Planning Standard
78) SEC-EOA: Saudi Electricity Company – Eastern Operating Area
79) SMDB: Sub Main Distribution Board
80) SMSS: Saudi Electricity Company Material Standard Specification
81) SPD: Surge Protection Device
82) TCDD: Typical Construction Detail Drawing
83) UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply
84) V: Volts
85) VIS: Vacuum Interrupter Switch
86) XLPE: Cross-linked Polyethylene
a. Equipment and Material Selection
1) Equipment and materials manufactured in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia which
meet the GPCS and Standards shall be used.
2) All equipment and materials shall be selected in consideration of the following:
(a) Performance
(b) Ability to withstand the environmental conditions
(c) Availability and ease of shipment
(d) Ease of installation
(e) Maintenance characteristics
3) All equipment and materials shall be the standard products of approved
manufacturers, regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and
materials and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design.
4) Specifications shall clearly state all requirements to meet environmental
conditions and special provisions for equipment installed outdoors. Refer to
Subsection 5.2.1.H Corrosion Protection for additional information.
6. Environmental Conditions
a. All parts of an Electrical Installation must be suitably designed, constructed and
maintained so as to operate safely and carry out their designated function in the
expected operating environment in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
b. Equipment Enclosures
1) All equipment enclosures shall meet the following Ingress Protection rating as
defined by IEC 60529. The object of these standards is to give:
(a) Definitions for degrees of protection provided by enclosures of electrical
equipment as regards:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 16
(1) Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts inside the

enclosure;
(2) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of
solid foreign objects;
(3) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against harmful
effects due to the ingress of water.
(b) Measures to protect both the enclosure and the equipment inside the
enclosure against external influences or conditions such as:
(1) Mechanical impacts
(2) Corrosion
(3) Corrosive solvents (for example, cutting liquids)
(4) Fungus
(5) Vermin
(6) Solar radiation
(7) Icing
(8) Moisture (for example, produced by condensation)
(9) Explosive atmospheres
(10) And the protection against contact with hazardous moving parts
external to the enclosure
2) The following IP Ratings shall apply as a minimum requirement for the
following equipment.
(a) Low Voltage Switchgear (Indoor) – IP52
(b) Sub Main Distribution Board (Indoor) – IP52
(c) Sub Main Distribution Board (Outdoor) – IP65
(d) Distribution Board (Indoor) – IP52
(e) Distribution Board (Outdoor) – IP65
For SEC related equipment, follow SEC Standards and Specifications for IP
ratings.
3) All enclosures located outside which are not sheltered or made from stainless
steel shall have a white finish to lower the internal temperature.
4) All enclosures with a lens or transparent display cover subject to direct sunlight
shall be glass or as a minimum UV resistant.
7. Codes
a. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Performance Standards for a list of applicable Codes.
b. In addition to the aforementioned - All electrical equipment and material and its
installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code 401 Electrical
2) Occupations Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 17
3) Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements

4) Saudi Building Code 201 Architectural Requirements
5) Saudi Building Code 701 Sanitary Requirements
6) Saudi Arabian Distribution Code
7) Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection Requirements
8) Civil Defense Department (CDD)
8. Standards
a. All work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations.
b. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used wherever
applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate the priority
for application with regards to design of the electrical systems. In case of conflict,
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose equipment conforming to one group of
Codes and Standards.
1) CIE International Commission on Illumination
2) EN Euro-norms published by CEN
3) EN 13201 Road lighting
4) EN 12464 Workplace Lighting Outdoor Spaces
5) EN 12193 Light and Lighting Sports Lighting
6) IEC International Electro-Technical Commission
7) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
8) NFPA National Fire Protection Association
9) SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
10) SDCS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Construction Standards
11) SDMS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
12) SDPS Saudi Electrical Company Distribution Planning Standard
13) SDS Saudi Electric Company Distribution Standard
c. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Section of the guidelines include the
following:
1) BS 7430 Code of practice for protective earthing of electrical installations
2) CIE 115 Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic.
3) IEC 60076 Power transformers
4) IEC 60079 Explosive atmospheres
5) IEC 60227 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 V
6) IEC60228 Conductors of insulated cables
7) IEC 60332 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions

Rev. 0 5.5 - 18
8) IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installation - Electrical installations of

buildings (including all sub-parts)
9) IEC 60427 High-voltage alternating current circuit-breakers
10) IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
11) IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
12) IEC 60644 Specification for high-voltage fuse-links for motor circuit
applications
13) IEC 60715 Dimensions of low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
Standardized mounting on rails for mechanical support of electrical devices
in switchgear and control gear installations.
14) IEC 60724 Short-circuit temperature limits of electric cables with rated
voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3.6 kV)
15) IEC 60754 Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from
cables
16) IEC 60787 Application guide for the selection of fuse-links of high-voltage
fuses for transformer circuit application
17) IEC 60898, Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for household and
similar installations.
18) IEC 60981 Extra heavy duty rigid steel conduits
19) IEC 61000-3-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – part 3-3
20) IEC 61034 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined
conditions
21) IEC 61340 Electrostatics
22) IEC 61386 Conduit systems for electrical installations
23) IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
24) IEC 61537 Cable management – Cable tray systems and cable ladder
systems
25) IEC 61643 Low-voltage surge protective devices
26) IEC 62031 LED Modules
27) IEC 62305 Lightning Protection
28) IEC 62384 Performance Requirements for Electrical Control Gear for LED
Modules
29) IEC 62471 Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamps Systems
30) IEC62504 General Lighting – LEDs and LED Modules – Terms and
Definitions
31) IEC 62560 Self-ballast LED Lamps (>50V)
32) IEC 62717 LED Modules Performance
33) IEC 62722-2-1 LED Luminaires Performance

Rev. 0 5.5 - 19
34) IEEE STD 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

35) IEEE STD 142 Recommended practice for grounding of industrial and
commercial power systems
36) IEEE STD 1453 Recommended Practice for Measurements and Limit of
Voltage Fluctuations and Associated Light Fluctuations and Associated Light
Flicker on AC Power Systems
37) IESNA Lighting Handbook
38) IESNA LEM-3 Design Considerations for Effective Building Lighting Energy
Utilization
39) IESNA LM-5 Guide for Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports
Lighting Installation
40) IESNA RP-1 Practice for Office Lighting
41) IESNA RP-7 Practice for Industrial Lighting
42) IESNA RP-16 Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering
43) IESNA RP-24 Practice for Lighting Offices Containing Computer Visual
Display Terminals
44) IESNA RR-96 Lighting Ready Reference / Energy Management
45) IES/IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Measurement of Solid-State Lighting Products
46) IES/IESNA LM-80-08 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance
of LED Light Sources
47) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) ( Applicable only if guidance is not
available in IEC)
48) NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
49) NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
50) NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
51) NFPA 111 Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby
Power Systems
52) AASHTO LTS-2 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway
Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals
53) AASHTO GTB-77 Guide for Selecting, Locating, and Designing Traffic
Barriers
54) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
55) SASO 55 PVC-insulated cables with circular copper conductors
56) SEC SDCS-02, Distribution Construction Standard – Construction Standard
for Underground Distribution Network
57) SEC DPS-01, Distribution Planning Standards – Estimation of Customer
Load Guideline
58) SEC DPS-02, Distribution Planning Standards – Design Guideline of
Underground Low Voltage Network to Supply Customers

Rev. 0 5.5 - 20
59) SEC DPS-09, Distribution Planning Standards – General Guidelines for

Design of Electrical Distribution Networks of Private Plot Plans
60) SEC SDMS, Distribution Material Specification
61) SEC SDS-5, Metering Installation Standard
9. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 3.4 Sustainability.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.E.4 Lighting.
c. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.F Site Lighting
d. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting.
e. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7 Electrical for information regarding service utilities.
f. Refer to Section 5.4 Mechanical.
g. Refer to Subsection 5.2.1.I Corrosion Protection.
10. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications. Refer
to Section 1.1 Introduction/Background.
B. Commissioning
1. References
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning
requirements.
C. Power Systems
1. Electrical Characteristics
a. General
1) The frequency of all alternating current power systems shall be 60 Hz.
2) Phase rotation shall be in accordance with latest SEC Standard DPS.
3) All systems shall be grounded. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.J Grounding.
b. System Voltage Level and application
1) Nominal voltages, standard for all new projects shall be in accordance with the
latest SEC Standard DPS-02 and as indicated in Table 5.5.1.A Standard
Voltages and Applications.
c. Voltage Identification
1) All voltage levels shall be identified in accordance with the values provided in
the latest SEC Standard DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01.
d. Voltage Range
1) Minimum and maximum permitted service voltage ranges are identified in the
latest SEC Standards DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01. The designer shall ensure
that the distribution system design shall provide proper utilization voltage at the
consumer appliances and equipment.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 21
TABLE 5.5.1.A: STANDARD VOLTAGES AND APPLICATIONS
Nominal System
Application
Voltage (V)
All facility types, - this voltage is being discontinued

120 Note 1, 2 and is only to be used for specific applications as
approved by the RCJ.
240 Note 1, 2 and is only to be used for specific applications as
220/127 Note 1, 2 and is only to be used for specific applications as
Residential, - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,
receptacles and miscellaneous.
Commercial - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,

400/230 Institutional - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,

Healthcare Facilities – Lighting, Air Conditioning,
motors, receptacles and miscellaneous.
Industrial – Lighting, Air conditioning, and motors.
All facility types, this voltage is being discontinued

Industrial and Large Commercial applications.

4160
Large motors over 150 kW and other loads.
Main Distribution in Community, Institutional, and

13800
Light Industrial Areas.
Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Ras Al-Khair

33000
Industrial City.
Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Jubail

34500
Industrial City.
Sub Transmission Network in Community and

115000
Industrial Areas

Rev. 0 5.5 - 22
Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary

230000
Industries.
Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary

380000
Industries.
Table 5.5.1.A Notes:

1- Discontinued voltage may be allowed only if all following conditions
are met:
A- Electrical service with the discontinued voltage is already
existing.
B- Requested service is for a new facility which is located in an area
that is served by a discontinued voltage.
C- Newly added equipment to be compatible with existing and
current in county voltage (400/230V).
2- Discontinued voltage will be dealt with in the following two phases:
A- Preliminary Stage Voltage change: The change of system
voltage, to customers in existing area, shall take place by
9/20/1441H. The change requires that all added (new)
equipment to be compatible with both existing and current in
county voltage (400/230V).
B- Final Stage Voltage change: The final stage of system voltage
change, to customers in existing area, shall take place between
9/20/1441H and 9/20/1456H. The change requires upgrading all
electrical system to the current in county voltage (400/230V).
e. Voltage Drop
1) The electrical system shall be designed to account for voltage drop for the
entire electrical distribution system. The electrical components including
feeders and branch circuits shall be sized and selected to limit the total voltage
drop from source to loads as follows:
(a) For network voltage drop design shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the latest SEC Distribution Planning Standard DPS-02.
(b) For Consumers’ (customers) installations voltage drop design shall be in
accordance with SBC 401, section 52-5.
f. Power Factor
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the utilization power factor for
the facility and determine whether power factor correction is required to
maintain operation within the required power factor ratio of 0.95.
g. Fault Levels
1) Fault levels for facilities with all voltage ratings including 400/230 V, 4.16 kV,
13.8 kV, 33 kV and 34.5 kV systems shall utilize the maximum allowable
symmetrical short circuit values from the latest SEC as the available fault level
to the facility.
2) Fault levels for facilities with discontinued voltage ratings including 240 V, 120
V, 220Y/127 V, and 380Y/220 V (where used with specific approval from the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 23
RCJ) may not be identified in the latest SEC Standards. For these systems the
designer shall select the equipment to limit the fault current to a reasonable
value and ensure that interrupting devices have the required ratings for the
available short circuit.
2. Site Power Distribution
a. Site development power distribution at 380 kV, 230 kV, 115 kV, 34.5 kV, 33 kV and
13.8 kV are developed by the Royal Commission in accordance with the latest SEC
Standards including but not limited to the following SDCS-02, 01-SDMS-01, DPS-01,
DPS-02, and DPS-09. The system improvements are completed and turned over to
the SEC for operation and maintenance.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7. Electrical for a description of the electric service utility for
the various types of facilities.
3. Equipment
a. Uniformity and Standardization
1) Uniformity in the design of electrical system components is important to
minimize the number of spare parts required to be stocked for maintenance
and repairs.
2) The design for the electrical system shall be standardized to reduce the
number of different types of transformers, switchgear, panelboards and cable
sizes used.
b. Insulation Levels
1) The BIL ratings for equipment shall be specified to be in accordance with the
latest SEC Standard 01-SDMS-01
4. Equipment Derating
a. General
1) The high temperatures prevalent in Saudi Arabia must be considered when
selecting the appropriate capacities of electrical cables and equipment. When
ambient temperatures exceed a certain threshold, the current carrying capacity
shall be derated to compensate for the environmental conditions. The
standard service conditions for electrical system design are identified in latest
SEC Standards DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01.
2) Derating of electrical system components shall be determined in accordance
with latest SEC Standard DPS-02.
3) The manufacturers of all specified electrical system components and
equipment shall be consulted to ensure that the proper derating factors are
applied to the electrical equipment.
b. Derating of Cables
1) Temperature Correction Factor
(a) The rate of heat dissipation from cable to surrounding depends upon the
temperature difference between them. If the temperature of surrounding
is high, then the temperature difference between cable and surrounding
will be less resulting in less heat dissipation from cable to surroundings.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 24
(b) The cable ampacities are specified at certain ambient temperature. It is

required to correct the cable ampacities by applying temperature
correction factor depending upon surrounding ambient temperature.
(c) Ampacity of the cable passing through different temperature zones shall
be corrected by applying appropriate temperature correction factor for
highest zone temperature through which the cable is passing.
(d) SBC 401 Tables A.52-14 to A.52-16 shall be used as reference.
2) Group Derating Factor
(a) Where a number of circuits are installed in close proximity to one
another, consideration must be given to the mutual heating effect.
(1) Cables installed on the outside of the group will be able to dissipate
heat outwards, but will be restricted in dissipation towards other
warm cables.
(2) Cables installed between others near the center of the group may
be challenged to dissipate heat at all and will rise further in
temperature.
(b) The cables in the group shall be derated by applying appropriate group
derating factor.
(c) Selection of cable derating factors shall consider the following:
(1) Method of installation of the cables: i.e. whether the cable is laid in
trench, duct bank or surface mounted.
(2) Group and loading of cables: may contain cables carrying load
current and standby cables not carrying current. Under such
circumstances consider the number and configuration of load
carrying cables only.
(d) SBC 401 Tables A.52-2 to A.52-17 shall be used as reference.
3) Cable Derating for SEC feeders:
(a) LV cables shall be derated in accordance with SEC Standard DPS-02
Rev. 02.
(b) MV cables up to 38kV shall be derated in accordance with SEC
Standard DPS Rev. 01.
4) Calculations
(a) Cable capacity calculations for services and feeders shall be in
accordance with latest SEC Standard DPS-01.
c. Derating of Transformers
1) Transformers shall be derated for the environmental conditions where they are
installed.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 25
2) Where a transformer serves non-linear, high-harmonic loads, the transformer

shall be derated to account for excessive heat associated with the increase in
harmonic currents.
(a) Loads with these non-linear, harmonic-rich currents include electronic
lighting ballasts, computers, adjustable frequency drives, and other
switch mode power supplies.
(b) These types of loads are common for commercial and small industrial
facilities and the design of the electrical systems for these facilities shall
consider the adverse effects on the electrical transformers.
3) Operating limits of transformers shall be derated in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 60076.
d. Derating of Distribution Equipment – Switchgear and Switchboards
1) Switchgear and switchboards shall be derated for the environmental conditions
where they are installed.
2) Where distribution equipment serves non-linear, high-harmonic loads, the
equipment shall be derated to account for excessive heat associated with the
increase in harmonic currents.
(a) Loads with these non-linear, harmonic-rich currents include electronic
lighting ballasts, computers, adjustable frequency drives, and other
switch mode power supplies.
(b) These types of loads are common for commercial and small industrial
facilities and the design of the electrical systems for these facilities shall
consider the adverse effects on the electrical transformers.
e. Equipment Labeling Requirements
1) Equipment nameplates shall be provided to indicate the capacity rating of the
equipment for the ambient temperature to which the equipment is designed.
5. Power Calculations and Analyses
a. The responsible A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare calculations as required to
support the selection and sizing of the electrical equipment and components for
each facility. Power calculations shall justify the size of cables, raceways,
equipment bus, transformers, overcurrent protective devices, generator(s), etc.
1) Calculations shall be prepared in accordance with the latest SEC and IEC
Standards.
2) Calculations shall be prepared for all new construction and renovation projects.
3) Submit all calculations to the Royal Commission for approval.
4) Submit calculations required by the utility company, SEC, to obtain the
necessary approvals for service and equipment sizing.
b. Voltage Drop Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which confirm compliance with the voltage drop limitations
identified in the latest SBC 401 52-5, SEC Standards DPS-02 and DPS-09.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 26
c. Power Factor Assessment and Calculations

1) Prepare a power factor assessment summary which identifies the loads served
and anticipated power factor for the facility. The results of this assessment
shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to provide a recommendation
on whether power factor correction shall be provided for the facility. The
assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to obtain confirmation
of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) For facilities where power factor correction is anticipated to be below 0.9
lagging, The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit calculations
which identify the magnitude and approach for this equipment. Refer to SBC
401, Chapter 801.
d. Fault Level Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which identify the available fault levels throughout the
electrical system for a facility. The results of the calculations shall be used to
identify the required equipment ratings on the drawings and equipment
specifications.
2) The requirement for provision of an independent study is recommended to be
provided for each facility to ensure compliance with the original design, identify
the required ratings for the provided equipment, and provide a level of quality
assurance for the electrical installation. Include the requirement for this
independent study in the project specifications.
e. Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
1) An overcurrent protective device coordination study shall be prepared to
demonstrate the proposed system performance for the specified overcurrent
protective devices. This study shall be utilized for comparison of the provided
electrical equipment to ensure that the intent of the original design is closely
replicated by the manufacturer of the provided equipment.
2) The requirement for provision of an independent study is recommended to be
provided for each facility to ensure compliance with the original design,
demonstrate appropriate coordination of the provided equipment, and provide a
level of quality assurance for the electrical installation. Include the requirement
for this independent study in the project specifications.
f. Harmonic Distortion Calculations
1) Prepare a harmonics assessment summary which identifies the potential
source and extent of non-linear, high harmonics loads for each facility. The
results of this assessment shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to
provide a recommendation on whether further harmonic calculations are
required. The assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to
obtain confirmation of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) For facilities that are determined to have non-linear, high harmonic loads which
exceed 15%, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit
calculations for reduction in cable capacities in accordance with the latest SBC
401, Annex D.52.
3) For facilities that are determined to have non-linear, high harmonic loads which
exceed 33%, prepare and submit calculations which identify the anticipated
voltage and current total harmonic distortion (THD) at the various electrical
equipment throughout the facility. The results of these calculations shall be

Rev. 0 5.5 - 27
utilized by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to develop a strategy for application
of active and/or passive components to mitigate harmonic distortion.
g. Load Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which identify the connected and demand electrical loads
for each facility. The calculations shall identify the electrical loads by type and
size and shall identify all diversity factors applied in accordance with the latest
SEC Standard DPS-01.
2) Calculations shall be prepared for each piece of electrical distribution
equipment and also summarized for the service entry.
h. Backup Power Assessment Analysis
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare an assessment of the
requirement for provision of backup power for each facility. The assessment
shall identify the occupancy for the facility and establish the critical functions
which may warrant the provision of backup power. The assessment shall
summarize the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation for application of
backup power which will be reviewed by the Royal Commission.
i. Generator Calculations
1) Generator Sizing
(a) Prepare calculations which justify the selection of generator, or paralleled
generators to supply the backup electrical loads for each facility.
(b) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required
and to demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the
load types that are supplied.
(c) The calculations shall account for the specific load types and adverse
effects that may result for motors, non-linear loads, uninterruptable
power supplies, etc.
(d) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized,
etc. to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence
to be applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
(e) Calculations shall be performed with the generator manufacturer’s
software and shall include the following:
(1) Generator sizing with running kW, starting kW, running kVA, starting
kVA, voltage dip, and frequency dip for each load starting step.
2) Sound Performance
(a) Prepare calculations to identify the anticipated sound levels for the
backup generator installation. The calculations shall be used to
demonstrate compliance with IEC Standard 60034, all local ordinances,
and the sound performance requirements identified herein this
document. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.b.5.b Noise.
j. Transfer Switch Application
1) Prepare transfer switch application recommendations for Royal Commission
approval. Refer to Table 5.5.1.D Transfer Switch Application
Recommendation.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 28
k. Battery System Calculations

1) Prepare calculations which justify the sizing of the battery system to supply the
backup electrical loads for each facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
also submit recommendations for modifications to the backup duration which is
different than the minimum identified in this document. Refer to Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.c.3).
2) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required and to
demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the load types that
are supplied for the desired duration.
3) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized, etc.
to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence to be
applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
l. Uninterruptible Power Supply Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which justify the selection of the UPS to supply the
backup electrical loads for each facility.
2) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required and to
demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the load types that
are supplied for the desired duration.
3) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized, etc.
to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence to be
applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
4) Prepare calculations which justify the sizing of the battery system to support
UPS loads for each facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also submit
recommendations for modifications to the backup duration which is different
than the minimum identified in this document. Refer to Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.d.4)(a).
m. Lightning Protection Calculations
1) Prepare a lightning risk assessment in accordance with the latest SBC 401
Chapter 802 to demonstrate the potential exposure for each facility. The
results of these calculations shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to
provide a recommendation on whether a lightning protection system is
required. The assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to
obtain confirmation of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
n. Electrostatic Discharge Assessment
1) For facilities where electrical installations are classified as hazardous in
accordance with the latest SBC 401, Chapter 720, prepare an assessment
regarding the potential risks associated for electrostatic discharge for each
facility in accordance with IEC Standard 61340. The results of this assessment
shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to provide a recommendation
on whether an electrostatic discharge control system is required. The
assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to obtain confirmation
of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) Hazardous Area Classification;
3) For classified area refer to IEC 60079

Rev. 0 5.5 - 29
D. Electrical Rooms
1. General
a. Electrical Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all electrical equipment
and also provide all appropriate clearances for access and maintenance in
accordance with IEC 60364 for low voltage electrical installations and in accordance
with the following Table 5.5.1.B for Working Clearances around exposed live part of
electrical equipment.
TABLE 5.5.1.B: WORKING CLEARANCES
600 V and 601 V to 9.0 kV to

Working Condition
below 9.0 kV 25.0 kV
Exposed live parts on one side of the

working space and no live or grounded
parts on the other side of the working
900 mm 1200 mm 1500 mm
space, or exposed live parts on both
sides effectively guarded by wood or
other insulating materials.
Exposed live parts on one side of the
working space and grounded parts on
the other side of the working space. 1100 mm 1500 mm 1800 mm
Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be
considered grounded.
Exposed live parts on both sides of the

working space (not guarded as
1200 mm 1800 mm 2800 mm
provided in the first working condition)
with operator between.
b. Electrical Rooms shall be provided with adequate illumination to facilitate

maintenance procedures. The lighting for these rooms shall include at least one
fixture supplied from the backup power source to facilitate trouble shooting during
power interruptions. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.M Lighting for additional information
regarding illumination for Electrical Rooms.
c. Normal and backup power equipment shall be located in separate Electrical Rooms
for the main service equipment. This will prevent the catastrophic failure of one
system from damaging the alternate power source.
1) Exception: Where the transfer function between power sources utilizes
devices which are mounted integral in the normal equipment.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.3. Architectural for additional guidance on the design of
Electrical Rooms.
e. Refer to Section 5.4 Mechanical for additional guidance on heating, ventilation and
air conditioning provisions for Electrical Rooms.
f. Refer to Section 5.4.1 Fire Suppression for additional guidance on fire protection for
Electrical Rooms.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 30
2. Main Electrical Rooms

a. The Main Electrical Room shall be located at the service entrance and shall house
the normal electric service equipment including but not limited to the following:
1) Main switchgear
2) Main distribution boards
3) Sub main distribution boards
4) Distribution boards
5) Switchboards
6) Motor control centers
7) Lighting control relay panels
8) Individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers
9) Individually mounted disconnect switches
10) Individually mounted motor controllers
11) Power factor correction equipment
12) Harmonics mitigation equipment
13) Surge protective devices
14) Electrical metering equipment
15) Spare fuse cabinet
16) Grounding bus bar
b. Service transformers are typically located outside of the building however, a
situation may arise that warrants installation inside of the building to address
aesthetic or security concerns. In this situation, the service transformer shall be
located in a separate dedicated room constructed with adequate fire rating,
ventilation, access and working clearances for the installed equipment. For indoor
installations, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consult with the SEC to determine
the specific requirements for the service installation.
1) Refer to Table 5.5.1.B Working Clearances.
c. Where the building is supported by a backup power source, the electrical equipment
associated with the backup power source shall be housed in an Electrical Room
separated from the normal electrical equipment.
1) Exception: Where the transfer function between power sources utilizes
devices which are mounted integral in the normal equipment.
3. Distribution Electrical Rooms
a. Distribution Electrical Rooms shall be provided throughout the facility as necessary
to accommodate the distribution electrical equipment including but not limited to the
following:
1) Sub main distribution boards
2) Distribution boards
3) Lighting control relay panels

Rev. 0 5.5 - 31
4) Individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers

5) Individually mounted disconnect switches or isolators
6) Individually mounted motor controllers
7) Harmonics mitigation equipment
8) Surge protective devices
9) Electrical metering equipment
10) Grounding bus bar
E. Backup Power Systems
1. General
a. Emergency and standby power systems shall comply strictly with the following
directives issued in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
1) Council of Ministers Decision No. 27 of 20 December 1980.
2) Ministry of Interior Decision No. 2847/401 of 14 June 1981.
3) Minister of Industry and Electricity Ministerial Decision No. 924 of 6 July 1981.
b. The power distribution system provides for parallel feeders from two different source
substations to most of the institutional, commercial and industrial facilities. In case
of failure of power on one feeder, the facility can be switched to the other feeder.
This dual feeder arrangement provides an inherent service redundancy; however the
provision of a backup power system shall be carefully evaluated and provided where
necessary.
c. The requirement for a backup power supply will depend on the facility type and
particular application. The provision of backup power for each facility requires
careful determination during the early stages of the design. A list of loads proposed
to be supplied from the backup power source shall be provided to the Royal
Commission to obtain confirmation prior to proceeding with the design. Table
5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix has been developed to assist the consultant with the
determination of the backup power loads for each facility.
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the backup power source
configuration to determine the best approach for the facility.
1) Where the facility is a single building, the source configuration would be a
single location with one or more backup power source devices as required to
satisfy the loads.
2) Where the development is multiple buildings, the following backup power
source configurations shall be considered:
(a) Distributed Backup Power Source: A separate backup power source
dedicated for each building and distributed throughout the development.
(b) Regional Backup Power Plants: Multiple regional plants with one or more
backup power sources to supply a district of the development. An
underground feeder network would be used to distribute the backup
power to the various buildings in each region of the development. This
approach shall consider the various distribution voltage opportunities to
optimize the feeder network. Medium voltage backup power sources

Rev. 0 5.5 - 32
may be suitable but will require careful consideration and may

necessitate the provision of transformers at each building.
(c) Central Backup Power Plant: One central plant with one or more backup
power sources to supply the buildings throughout the entire
development. An underground feeder network would be used to
distribute the backup power to the various buildings in the development.
This approach shall consider the various distribution voltage
opportunities to optimize the feeder network. Medium voltage backup
power sources may be suitable but will require careful consideration and
may necessitate the provision of transformers at each building.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 33
TABLE 5.5.1.C: BACKUP POWER MATRIX MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Facility Types
Load Description Commercial Schools University Civic Public Safety Health Safety Infrastructure Religious
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
Fire Alarm        
Egress Lighting & Exit Signs        
Elevators (< 5 Stories)        
Elevator (5 Stories or more)        
Security Systems                
Hazardous Gas Monitoring    NA    NA
HVAC
Controls        
Smoke Control        
Stair Pressurization        
Chiller        
Chilled Water Pumps        
Laboratory Exhaust NA   NA  NA NA
Fumehood Exhaust NA   NA  NA NA
Hazardous Exhaust NA   NA  NA NA
Supply Air       
Cooling Towers       
Electrical
Switchgear Controls        
Generator Accessories
Controls        
Battery Charger        
Motorized Louvers        
Fuel Supply        
Plumbing
Sump Pumps        
Water Purification       
RO Water System NA   NA NA NA NA NA
RO System Pumps NA   NA NA NA NA NA
Domestic Water Pumps        
Tepid Water Pumps NA   NA NA NA NA NA
Fire Supression
Fire Pump        
Jockey Pump        
Dry/Pre-Action Compressors        
Fire Suppression Controls        
IT Systems and Equipment

Data Center Servers & Drives        
Data Center Air Conditioning        
Data Center Fire Supression        
Essential Computers              
Non-essential Computers        
Network Switch        
Infrastructure
Traffic Signals NA NA NA NA NA NA  NA
Pumping Stations NA NA NA NA NA NA  NA
ABBREVIATIONS: FACILITY TYPE DESCRIPTIONS:

LS Life Safety Commercial Office Buildings, Retail Shops, Hotels, Restuarants, Athletic Clubs
CR Critical Schools Facilities for Pre-primary, Primary, Intermediate and Secondary Education
OS Optional Standby University College and University Buildings for Instruction, Research, Residency, and Support Activities
U Uninterruptible Power Supply Civic Theaters, Exhibition Halls, Museums, Libraries, Municipality Offices
N Normal Public Safety Police Stations, Fire Stations
NA Not Applicable Health Safety Hospitals, Health Centers, Outpatient Facilities
Infrastructure Traffic Signaling, Pumping Stations, Sewage Treatment
Religious Mosques

Rev. 0 5.5 - 34
e. Additional Provisions
1) In all cases, each important sub-system in all facilities such as fire alarm,
telephone, public address, intercom, emergency and exit lights, and security
system shall be provided with an individual, integral, rechargeable battery pack
and charger.
2) All critical equipment such as computers and life support systems shall be fed
from a UPS system, which is generally integral with such equipment.
f. Backup power systems shall be configured with separate branches for the various
load types. Categories for load segregation shall include emergency and standby.
Refer to the descriptions for each of these categories in Subsections 5.5.1.E.3
Emergency Systems and 5.5.1.E.4. Standby Systems.
2. Sources
a. The following are the various types of backup power sources which are available.
They can be used individually or in combination as required by the facility.
1) Local Generators
2) Batteries
3) Uninterruptible Power Supply
b. Generators
1) Local generation is advisable where emergency power is required for power
and lighting loads.
(a) Generators shall be engine driven.
(b) Fuel source for engine driven units shall be diesel. The of the fuel
source needs to consider fuel availability, capacity and storage
requirements. Fuel source shall comply with the Royal Commission
Environmental Regulations.
(c) Generator circuit breaker shall be included in the generator set and shall
be suitable, specifically designed and tested for the application.
2) Generators are available in various ratings as follows:
(a) Standby Rated: Application is to supply emergency power for a limited
duration during a power outage. Standby generators shall be used for
applications where operation is roughly 200 hours per year and they are
not recommended for parallel operation with the utility source.
(b) Prime Rated: Application is to supply loads for an unlimited number of
hours per year in a variable load setting. It is not advisable to that the
variable load exceed 70% average of the prime power rating during any
operation period of 250 hours. If operating at 100% of prime power
rating, yearly hours should not exceed 500.
(c) Continuous Rated: Application to supply a constant 100% load for an
unlimited number of hours each year. Continuous power rated units are
most widely used in applications where the power grid is unreachable.
Such applications include mining, agriculture or military operations.
3) Generators for backup power to most facilities shall be standby rated unless
there is a specific critical need as determined by the A/E and/or EPC

Rev. 0 5.5 - 35
Contractor. The justification for use of prime or continuous rated generator(s)

shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
4) Generator voltage, frequency and phase relationship shall be the same as the
normal system. Size shall be adequate to carry the required emergency loads
of the facility. Where the backup power loads exceed the capacity of a single
generator, multiple units shall be operated in a parallel configuration.
Paralleled units may also be justified for extremely critical loads such as
hospitals or data centers. Automatic transfer shall be provided for all
emergency loads.
5) Backup generators with standby rating shall be sized to be loaded between
50% minimum and 80% maximum of their nameplate rating. Calculations shall
be performed to justify the equipment selection and performance. Refer to
Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.i Generator Sizing.
(a) Generator sizing shall include 10% spare capacity for load growth.
6) Installation Requirements
(a) Enclosure
(1) For outdoor installations, the enclosure shall be design to withstand
the environmental conditions and provide a minimum protection
rating of IP65. All openings for ventilation and access shall be
designed to maintain the weather-proof requirement.
(2) Weather-proof enclosures shall be walk-in type where space
permits. If adequate space is not available for the walk-in
enclosure, a skin tight enclosure with access doors is permitted with
the approval of the Royal Commission.
(b) Noise:
(1) The radiated engine noise shall be addressed as follows:
(i) Outdoor locations shall incorporate sound attenuation into the
enclosure. The level of attenuation shall limit the sound level at
the property line to meet the requirements of the Royal
Commission Environmental Regulations.
7) Refer to Chapter 5.2 Structural for additional information regarding installation
requirements for generators including:
(a) Structural
(b) Vibration
8) Refer to Chapter 5.3 Architectural for additional information regarding
installation requirements for generators including:
(a) Indoor space
(b) Acoustical considerations
9) Refer to Chapter 5.4 Mechanical for additional information regarding
installation requirements for generators including:
(a) Ventilation
(b) Fuel supply

Rev. 0 5.5 - 36
(c) Engine exhaust

c. Batteries
1) Where the load requirements are not large enough to require local generators,
centrally located batteries may be provided as the backup power source.
Sealed lead acid, nickel-lead-alkaline or nickel cadmium types may be used.
Ampere-hour capacity shall be adequate for power requirements. Battery
charging equipment shall be included.
2) The initial battery system shall be sized to provide 20% spare capacity to
accommodate additional loads in the future.
3) Battery storage shall be sufficient to supply the loads (connected and initial
spare capacity) for a minimum duration 1.5 hours . Longer backup durations
may be desirable or recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for
unique conditions. These special considerations shall be presented to the
Royal Commission for review and approval.
4) Batteries shall be located in well ventilated rooms, and mounted on racks to
facilitate regular maintenance.
d. Uninterruptible Power Supply
1) UPS systems shall be battery - static inverter type, packaged pre-engineered
units. kVA and time rating shall be adequate for the application.
2) UPS systems are costly and shall only be applied for critical loads which
cannot tolerate even extremely short power interruptions including but not
(a) Hospital life support systems
(b) Critical data centers
(c) Critical computer systems
(d) Critical security systems
(e) Critical building control systems
(f) Critical communications systems
3) The initial UPS system shall be sized to provide 20% spare capacity to
accommodate additional loads in the future.
4) Battery Storage
(a) The battery storage for the UPS shall be sized to provide the appropriate
backup duration for the application. Battery storage shall be sufficient to
supply the loads (connected and initial spare capacity). The minimum
duration for a stand-alone UPS system shall be 1.5 hours for the full
capacity of the UPS. Longer backup durations may be desirable or
recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for unique conditions.
These special considerations shall be presented to the Royal
Commission for review and approval.
(b) The UPS may also be supported by a backup generator as another level
of redundancy. When this configuration is implemented, the battery
storage associated with the UPS system shall be sized to provide the
appropriate duration of backup. Typically this would include a reduced
duration to allow these critical loads to remain operational while the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 37
generator is activated and is ramping up to accept the loads. For this

situation, a minimum battery backup of 15 minutes for the full capacity of
the UPS shall be provided to bridge the outages between the normal and
emergency power sources. Longer backup durations may be desirable
or recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for unique
conditions. These special considerations shall be presented to the Royal
5) UPS units are available with modular construction and hot swappable modules.
This configuration is beneficial to facilitate system expansion and also allows
maintenance to be performed without interruption to the critical loads. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall evaluate the use of these equipment features and
provide recommendations to the Royal Commission for approval prior to
developing the specifications for this equipment.
6) UPS systems shall be installed in clean dry locations away from occupied
areas.
7) UPS systems shall be located in well ventilated rooms, and mounted in
cabinets to protect the equipment.
8) There are additional special occupancies associated with telecommunication
systems that warrant the application of a dedicated UPS. These special
conditions and the associated requirements are described further in Paragraph
5.5.2.E.2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
3. Emergency Systems
a. Electrical systems legally required to be installed and that supply loads essential to
safety and life. This load category is typically referred to as the Life Safety Branch
and supplies the following loads:
1) Egress lighting and exit signs
2) Fire alarm
3) Security systems
4) Generator accessories: controls, fuel supply, and motorized dampers
5) Fire pumps
6) Dry/Pre-action fire protection system compressors
7) Fire suppression controls
8) Smoke control systems
9) Stair pressurization systems
10) Elevators (Highrise Buildings)
11) Generator battery charger
12) Hospital communication systems
13) Sewage disposal
14) Dangerous industrial processes
b. Refer to Table 5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix for guidance on emergency power
requirements for each building type.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 38
4. Standby Systems
a. Alternate power systems for such applications where interruption of normal power
would cause discomfort to personnel or damage to product. This load category is
typically broken into Critical Equipment and Optional Standby. The loads associated
with each of these branches are described as follows:
1) Critical Equipment
(a) Task Illumination and selected receptacles for the following areas and
functions related to patient care in healthcare facilities:
(1) Critical Care
(2) Patient Care
(3) Infant Nurseries
(4) Medication Prep
(5) Pharmacy Dispensing
(6) Selected Acute Nursing Areas
(7) Psychiatric Bed Areas
(8) Ward Treatment Rooms
(9) Nurses Stations
(b) Hospital communications systems including nurse call and telephones.
(c) Security systems.
2) Optional Standby
(a) Building management and control systems
(b) Security systems
(c) Data Center air conditioning systems
(d) Laboratory exhaust air systems
(e) Laboratory supply air systems
(f) Chilled water generation – chillers, cooling towers, and pumps
(g) Water purification systems
(h) Domestic water pumping system
(i) Essential computers
(j) Elevators (other than Highrise Buildings)
(k) Supply, return and exhaust systems for healthcare facilities including:
(1) Operating Rooms
(2) Delivery Rooms
(3) Airborne Infectious/Isolation Rooms
(4) Protective Environment Rooms
(5) Clinical Laboratories

Rev. 0 5.5 - 39
(6) Nuclear Medicine Areas

b. Refer to Table 5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix for guidance on emergency power
requirements for each building type.
F. Transfer Switches
1. General
a. A transfer switch is an electrical switch that is able to transfer electrical loads
between two sources. There are several types and numerous features for this
equipment that shall be considered when selecting the appropriate equipment for
each application.
2. Types
a. Manual transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied from multiple sources
and facilitates manual transfer from one source to another when there is a failure of
one source or there is some other special situation to initiate this transfer. Examples
for special situations include load balancing between service feeders or in response
to a request from the utility company to avoid an overload condition. Manual transfer
switches are not used for life safety or critical backup power loads but may be
applied to optional standby loads.
b. Automatic transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied from multiple
sources and facilitates automatic transfer from the primary to the secondary source
when the primary source fails. The automatic transfer also occurs from the
secondary to the primary source when the primary source returns to normal.
Automatic transfer switches are commonly used for all backup power loads including
life safety, critical and optional standby.
c. Bypass isolation automatic transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied
from multiple sources and, in addition to the automatic transfer capability, provides a
means to manually bypass and isolate the transfer switch to allow for maintenance
procedures. The bypass isolation switch is connected both in series and in parallel
with the automatic transfer switch to facilitate this operation. Bypass isolation
transfer switches are used for all backup power loads where the criticality of the load
warrants this additional feature to allow for routine maintenance without interruption
to the equipment operation. This equipment is most commonly utilized for health
safety type facilities such as hospitals but can also be applied to other facilities
where the occupancy or function is determined to be critical.
3. Operation
a. Single operator transfer switches utilize a single electrical component to initiate the
transfer from one source to the other. This method of operation does not provide
the capability to incorporate any delays in the transfer process and is appropriate for
the most critical loads which need to transfer as quickly as possible.
b. Dual operator transfer switches utilize two electrical components to initiate the
transfer between power sources. The first initiates the break from the connected
source and the second initiates the connection to the alternate source. The dual
operator provides flexibility for programming delays that may be desirable for certain
types of loads to avoid detrimental impacts to the power distribution system.
c. Open transition transfer includes a break-before-make operation where there is a
delay between separation from one source and connection to the next. This is the
typical operation and shall be the normal selection for all facilities.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 40
d. Closed transition transfer includes a make-before-break operation where the two

sources are momentarily paralleled to avoid outages to the critical loads. Use of this
operation method requires careful consideration and shall only be selected when it
has been justified for the critical application. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
provide documentation to support the selection of this operating means to the Royal
Commission for review and approval. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also
coordinate with the SEC to establish the acceptability of closed transition transfer
and the protective safety features required for implementation of this operation.
4. Configuration
a. Four (4) pole transfer switches include separate poles for all three phases and the
neutral. This transfer switch provides isolation of source neutrals and is the
preferred configuration. Four (4) pole transfer switches shall be the normal selection
for all facilities. This approach requires special attention to the grounding of the
backup power source. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2 Backup Power Source.
b. Three (3) pole transfer switches include separate poles for all three phases but the
neutral is solid and does not have the capability to be isolated between the normal
and emergency power sources. Applications for this configuration shall be limited to
existing facilities where the existing transfer switches are 3 pole type and their use
will maintain the electrical system consistency and avoid confusion for maintenance
procedures. The selection of this configuration shall be reviewed with the Royal
Commission to obtain approval. Refer to the transfer switch application
recommendation process described in Subsection 5.5.1.F.5 Applications and Table
5.5.1.D Transfer Switch Application Recommendation.
5. Applications
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider all of the backup power applications
for a facility and shall provide the Royal Commission with recommendations for the
transfer switch application utilizing the following Table 5.5.1.D. Typical
recommendations for transfer switch applications are provided as follows:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 41
TABLE 5.5.1.D: TRANSFER SWITCH APPLICATION RECOMMENDATION

Config-
Type Operation Optional Features
uration
Transfer
Switch Branch
Transition
Transition
Operator
Operator
No.
Closed
Single
3 Pole
4 Pole
Open
BITS
Dual
MTS
ATS
D
1 Life Safety      
Critical
2     
Equipment
Optional
3      
Standby
ABBREVIATIONS: OPTIONAL FEATURES:

MTS Manual Transfer Switch A Engine-Generator Exerciser
ATS Automatic Transfer Switch B Digital Metering
BITS Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch C Programmed Neutral Switch Position
D In-Phase Monitor
G. Electrical Distribution Equipment

1. Medium Voltage Switchgear
a. General
1) All medium voltage switchgear and cables shall be designed in accordance
with the latest SEC Specifications SDMS.
2) This includes the following medium voltage electrical equipment:
(a) Ring Main Units (RMU)
(b) Interrupter Switches
(c) Oil-filled switches
(d) Manual Transfer Switches
(e) Automatic Transfer Switches
(f) Metal Clad Distribution Switchgear
(g) Relays, Instruments and Meters
2. Low Voltage Switchgear and Switchboards
a. General
1) All low voltage switchgear and controlgear shall be designed in accordance
with the IEC 60439 and IEC 60947.
2) Low voltage switchgear and switchboards are utilized for distribution of power
to the panelboards and electrical loads throughout a facility. This equipment is

Rev. 0 5.5 - 42
critical to the operation of the facility and shall be carefully designed to best
meet the operational requirements and budget limitations for the facility.
3) Switchgear construction offers the following characteristics:
(a) Lower maintenance costs
(b) Higher interrupting ratings
(c) Enhanced coordination capabilities and operational safety
(d) Higher quality and reliability
4) Switchboard construction offers the following characteristics:
(a) Lower equipment costs
(b) More compact dimensions
b. Construction
1) Switchgear
(a) Self-supporting, free-standing equipment with metal enclosure to
accommodate the overcurrent protective devices, metering equipment,
surge suppression devices and other auxiliary components.
(b) Modular construction with individual compartments for each overcurrent
protective device.
(c) Forms of internal separation between components within the Low
Voltage Switchgear shall conform to IEC 60439-1 7.7. This provides
higher degree of protection based on the requirement.
(d) Integral steel channel base for increased rigidity.
(e) Overcurrent protective devices are draw-out type to facilitate
maintenance of the devices.
2) Switchboards
(a) Self-supporting, free-standing equipment with metal enclosure to
accommodate the overcurrent protective devices, metering equipment,
surge suppression devices and other auxiliary components.
(b) Separate cubicles for main circuit breaker and distribution feeder circuit
breakers.
3) Fault current ratings for equipment shall be in accordance with the results of
the fault calculations. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.e Fault Level Calculations.
Equipment ratings shall be selected for the next standard level above the
calculated levels.
c. Application
1) The type of distribution equipment shall be selected to satisfy the requirements
of the facility and the application. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall make
recommendations regarding the appropriate equipment type based on
consideration for the following criteria:
(a) Magnitude of the loads served

Rev. 0 5.5 - 43
(c) Budget limitations

(d) Maintenance capabilities and procedures
(e) Economic impact of interruptions
(f) Space availability
2) Table 5.5.1.E Switchgear Vs. Switchboard Application Guide has been
developed to assist the A/E and/or EPC Contractor with the determination of
3) the selection for distribution equipment for each facility type.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 44

Rev. 0 5.5 - 45
TABLE 5.5.1.E: SWITCHGEAR VS. SWITCHBOARD APPLICATION GUIDE

Main Circuit Feeder Circuit
Construction Access
Breakers Breakers
Equipment
Individual Fixed
Individual Fixed
Group Mounted
Front and Rear
Facility Type Rating
Switchboard
(Amps)
Switchgear
Front Only
Drawout
Drawout
≤ 2000    
Commercial > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Schools > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
University > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Civic > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000   
Public Safety > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Health Safety > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Infrastructure > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Religious > 2000    
≥ 4000    
FACILITY TYPE DESCRIPTIONS:

Commercial Office Buildings, Retail Shops, Hotels, Restaurants, Athletic Clubs
Schools Facilities for Pre-primary, Primary, Intermediate and Secondary Education
University College and University Buildings for Instruction, Research, Residency, and Support
Activities
Civic Theaters, Exhibition Halls, Museums, Libraries, Municipality Offices
Public Safety Police Stations, Fire Stations
Health Safety Hospitals, Health Centers, Outpatient Facilities
Infrastructure Traffic Signaling, Pumping Stations, Sewage Treatment
Religious Mosques

Rev. 0 5.5 - 46
3. Panelboards
a. General
1) Electric systems in commercial and industrial buildings shall include
panelboards, which utilize circuit breaker devices. Fused devices are not
recommended unless specifically required for specific protection requirements
or coordination purposes. An example is fuses may be used for control circuits
of instrument or monitoring devices.
2) Panelboards are generally classified into the following categories:
(a) Main distribution boards
(b) Sub main distribution boards
(c) Distribution boards
b. Features
1) Panelboards and associated circuit breakers shall be fully rated for available
fault current. Series rating of the equipment is not acceptable.
2) Panelboards shall be rated to accept the calculated loads and shall include
20% spare capacity for future growth.
3) Panelboards shall be provided with 20% bussed space suitable to accept
future circuit breakers.
4) Panelboards shall be provided with 10% spare circuit breakers. Provide at
least (1) spare breaker with rating to match the other active breakers in the
panelboard.
5) Panelboards shall include door-in-door construction with hinged door to
facilitate access to the breakers and wireways.
6) Fault current ratings for panelboards shall be in accordance with the results of
the fault calculations. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.e Fault Level Calculations.
Panelboard ratings shall be selected for the next standard level above the
calculated levels. Minimum ratings shall be as follows:
(a) Bracing – 20 kA
(b) Overcurrent Protective Devices – 14 kA
c. Selection of Installation
1) Surface mounted panelboards shall be used in electrical rooms and other
spaces where the surface mounted enclosure is not aesthetically objectionable.
2) Recessed mounted panelboards shall be utilized where installed in finished
spaces and where surface mounting is undesirable.
4. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
a. General
1) Low voltage circuit breakers used in the Royal Commission installations are
used at the voltage levels below 600 V. These circuit breakers generally fall
under 3 classifications.
(a) Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
(b) Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 47
(c) Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)

2) Circuit breakers shall be a quick-make and quick-break switching device, which
will operate both manually for normal switching functions and automatically
under overload and short-circuit conditions.
3) Circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically trip free. The RMS
symmetrical interrupting capacity for each breaker shall be adequate for the
available fault but shall have a minimum rating of 14 kA for 400 V systems.
Circuit breakers shall be either de-rated or calibrated if installed in an ambient
temperature higher than 40°C.
(a) When ambient temperature is within allowable limits, the circuit breakers
shall have electronic trip with long and short time uniform tripping
characteristics throughout the temperature range from 25 to 50°C.
(b) Circuit breakers located in environments where the temperature varies,
while the load is in constant, such as submersible pumps, shall be
ambient temperature compensated to 50°C.
(c) Refer to Paragraph 5.5.1.C.4 Equipment Derating.
4) Circuit breaker selection and application shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a) Residential facilities – IEC Standard 60898.
(b) Commercial, education, public safety, health safety, religious and
industrial facilities – IEC Standard 60947.
(c) Circuit breaker trip ratings shall be industry standard in accordance with
the IEC Standards. The standard ampere rating for circuit breakers shall
be considered are1.6, 2, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32,
40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 225, 25, 320, 400, 500, 630, 800,
1000, 1250, 1600
b. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
1) Miniature circuit breakers are preferred for residential, commercial, institutional,
and industrial branch circuit loads feeding lighting loads, small receptacle loads
etc.
c. Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
1) Molded case circuit breakers are preferred to fuses and shall be used in
distribution panelboards for distribution of power to various loads such as
lighting panelboards, power panelboards, motor loads, etc.
d. Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)
1) For low voltage switchgear with higher ratings (greater than 1000 amps),
drawout type air circuit breakers are preferred over molded case circuit
breakers.
2) Air circuit breakers shall be provided with microprocessor based trip units to
facilitate the adjustment of the tripping characteristics to best suit the
application. These trip units vary in sophistication, communications and
metering capabilities including the following:
(a) Adjustable protection and coordination
(b) System diagnostics

Rev. 0 5.5 - 48
(c) System monitoring

(d) System communications
(e) Optional features for enhanced maintenance
3) The type of microprocessor trip unit used for each application shall be
determined by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and recommendations shall be
submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
5. Fuses
a. General
1) Low voltage fuses used in the Royal Commission installations are used at the
voltage levels below 600 V. Fuses are generally available with the following
operating characteristics:
(a) Fast-acting which open quickly when their current rating is exceeded.
These fuses are generally used for resistive or other type loads with low
inrush currents.
(b) Time-delay which are designed to open only on an excessive current
draw for a defined of time. These fuses are typically used for protection
of inductive and capacitive loads that experience heavy inrush currents.
2) The use of fuses for overcurrent protection shall be on a limited basis
determined by the specific application. The Royal Commission prefers the use
of circuit breakers for overcurrent protection but understands that there may be
applications which warrant the use of fuses. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall submit recommendations for fuse applications to the RCJ for review and
approval.
3) Fuse selection and application shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) All facility types – IEC Standard 60269.
(b) Fuse ratings shall be industry standard in accordance with the IEC
Standards.
6. Motors
a. General
1) Motors requirements are addressed in Section 5.4 Mechanical. Refer to
Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.f Motors and Motor Controllers.
7. Motor Controllers
a. General
1) Motors controller requirements are addressed in Section 5.4 Mechanical.
Refer to Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.e Motors and Motor Controllers.
b. Motor Control Centers
1) Where multiple motors are located in the same space or area, it is preferred to
control them from a centralized location such as a motor control center.
2) A motor control center is an assembly of individual starters for various motors
mounted on a fixed or draw-out type of chassis and located in a common
enclosure. Motor control centers shall be modular construction with a separate
compartment for each starter. Common wireways shall be provided in each

Rev. 0 5.5 - 49
cubicle of the motor control center and shall be utilized for low voltage control
wiring.
8. Wiring Devices
a. The wiring devices for facilities throughout Jubail Industrial City shall be provided
with the ratings and configurations associated with the standard 400/230 volt, 60 Hz
electrical system.
b. All wiring devices shall be selected to meet the requirements of the latest applicable
SASO 444 standard. These standards shall guide the A/E and/or EPC Contractor in
the selection of wiring devices for the following:
1) Plugs and socket-outlets for domestic and similar general use
2) Plugs and socket-outlets for commercial and similar purposes
3) Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes
4) Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations
c. The selection of wiring devices and installation methods shall be coordinated with
the raceway system to facilitate a physically and aesthetically acceptable result.
9. Power Monitoring
a. Power Monitoring System shall be provided as required by the RCJ.
b. Power Monitoring Equipment shall be provided to the following as minimum;
1) MV and LV Switchboard main and the distribution circuit breakers.
2) Secondary low voltage circuit breaker of unit/packaged substation.
3) Automatic Transfer Switches.
4) Generator Paralleling Switchboards.
5) Major distribution panel boards as maybe required by RCJ.
c. Power Monitoring functions shall include but not limited to the following;
1) Voltage
2) Current
3) KWh
4) kW, kVA and kVAR.
5) Power Factor
6) Total Harmonic Distortion (Voltage and Current)
H. Transformers
1. General
a. All service transformers and associated medium voltage switchgear for all
residential, commercial, institutional, and industrial facilities shall be in accordance
with the latest SEC Specification SDMS.
b. All features for the service transformers and associated equipment shall be in
accordance with the latest SEC Specifications SDMS.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 50
c. Sizing of all transformers shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Standards
DPS-01 and DPS-02.
d. Configuration and arrangements for transformers and associated equipment shall be
in accordance with the latest SEC Standard SDCS-02.
e. Transformer application restrictions:
1) Liquid filled transformers shall not use polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) fluid.
2) Oil filled transformers shall not be utilized for indoor applications to the extent
possible.
3) Installation of oil filled transformers for indoor application shall meet NFPA fire
protection installation and vault requirement.
4) Dry type transformers shall only be used when approval has been obtained
from the Royal Commission and they shall not be installed outdoors.
f. Transformer Noise Levels
1) Service transformer noise levels shall be in accordance with the latest SEC
Specifications SDMS.
2. Community Area Transformer
a. Community area includes residential, commercial, and institutional facilities.
b. The standard service transformer for facilities in the Community Area shall be
outdoor type, liquid filled, self-cooled, dead front, and pad mounted.
c. Exceptional cases may allow the use of indoor transformers. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations regarding the indoor transformer (liquid
filled or dry type) and justification for this application to the RCJ for approval. Indoor
installations will require special provisions for fire separation, noise control, and
ventilation. Refer to Section 5.3 Architectural and 5.4 Mechanical for additional
information regarding special provisions for indoor installations.
d. Installation Requirements
1) All terminations shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Specifications
SDMS.
2) All transformers and associated equipment shall be installed on a concrete pad
3. Industrial Area Transformer
a. The standard service transformer for facilities in the Industrial Area shall be outdoor
type, liquid filled, self-cooled, dead front, and pad mounted.
b. Exceptional cases may allow the use of indoor transformers. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations regarding the indoor transformer (liquid
filled, dry type, or cast coil) and justification for this application to the RCJ for
approval. Indoor installations will require special provisions for fire separation, noise
control, and ventilation. Refer to Section 5.3 Architectural and 5.4 Mechanical for
additional information regarding special provisions for indoor installations.
c. Installation Requirements
1) All terminations shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Specifications
SDMS.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 51
2) All transformers and associated equipment shall be installed on a concrete pad

3) The secondary winding of all industrial transformers shall be grounded wye
connection.
4. Transformers for Existing Facilities with Discontinued Voltages
a. The Royal Decree for transition to the new standard voltages for all RC facilities has
eliminated various voltage ratings. There are existing facilities which will not be
required to transition to the new standard voltage ratings until economically justified.
b. For work in existing facilities, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop
modification concepts and make recommendations regarding the economic
justification for converting from the discontinued voltages to the new standard
voltage. This justification shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review
and approval.
c. When determined that the discontinued voltages are to remain, transformers shall
be used to establish the required voltages for existing equipment and loads. These
transformers shall have the following characteristics:
1) Indoor
2) Dry type
3) Enclosed ventilated
4) Encapsulated type is acceptable in controlled environments for ratings 112.5
kVA or less
5) Cast coil type for industrial polluted areas
5. References
1) Refer to Chapter 5.2 Structural for additional information regarding foundation
requirements for transformers.
I. Conduits, Ducts and Busways
1. General
a. This Section addresses the application requirements for electrical raceways, ducts
and busways for Royal Commission facilities.
b. An electrical raceway is any channel of metallic or non-metallic materials designed
expressly for holding wires, cables or busbars.
c. Electrical raceways and shall be applied in accordance with the latest edition of SBC
401, IEC 61386, and IEC 60529.
2. Selection of Raceway Type
a. The type of raceway shall be selected to suit the location and method of installation
which are grouped in the following basic classifications:
1) Surface mounted installations include:
(a) Raceways concealed in plenums and hollow spaces for residential,
commercial and institutional type facilities.
(b) Raceways exposed in utility type spaces for residential, commercial and
institutional type facilities.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 52
(c) Raceways exposed in industrial type facilities.

2) Embedded installations include raceways in floor slabs or walls.
3) Underground installations include raceways located below the floor slabs inside
a building and raceways located below grade outside of the building.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the following when selecting the
appropriate electrical raceway for each RCJ facility:
1) Protection of personnel against electrical injury.
2) Protection of property from damage resulting from a fire.
3) Protection of circuitry against mechanical damage or injury.
4) Atmospheric conditions such as corrosive or hazardous environment.
3. Raceway Types
a. The electrical raceway types that are typically used for installation and protection of
electrical wiring include the following:
1) Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC)
(a) Rigid steel conduit shall conform to IEC 61386 and IEC 60981 for extra
heavy duty electrical rigid steel conduits.
(b) Rigid steel conduit larger than Trade Size 6 shall not be used for routing
the cables.
2) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
(a) Electrical metallic tubing larger than Trade Size 2 shall not be used.
(b) Electrical metallic tubing shall generally be used for routing the cables for
branch circuits, control circuits and signal circuits.
3) Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC)
(a) Rigid non-metallic heavy wall conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.
(b) The conduits and fittings shall be made from suitable non-metallic
material such as PVC that is resistant to moisture and chemical
atmospheres.
4) Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)
(a) Flexible metal conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.
(b) Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection between equipment
that is subject to vibration such as motors or which requires movement
for adjustment and permanent raceways or for connecting two parts of
the building across an expansion joint.
(c) The flexible metal conduit shall be circular in cross section and made of
helically wound, formed, interlocked metal strip.
5) Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)
(a) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 53
(b) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection between
equipment that is subject to vibration such as motors or which requires
movement for adjustment and permanent raceways or for connecting two
parts of the building across an expansion joint.
(c) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for outdoor installations
and other applications subject to ingress of solid objects and/or water in
accordance with IEC 60529.
6) Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit (FNC)
(a) Flexible non-metallic conduit (spiral wound) shall be manufactured in
accordance with IEC 61386.
(b) Flexible non-metallic conduit shall be used for connection between
equipment which requires movement for adjustment and permanent
raceways.
(c) These conduits shall be used in the places where there is no danger of
mechanical damages such as connection between outlet boxes and
luminaires in false ceilings.
4. Surface Installations
a. Industrial Facilities
1) Surface raceway installations shall utilize extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit
which satisfies the requirements of IEC Standards 60981 and 61386.
b. Residential, Commercial and Institutional Facilities
1) Electrical raceways shall be concealed above ceilings, in walls or in shafts
wherever possible. These raceways shall be medium duty steel conduit which
satisfies the requirements of IEC Standard 61386.
2) Surface raceway installations in areas subject to physical damage shall utilize
extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit which satisfies the requirements of IEC
Standards 60981 and 61386.
3) Cable trunking or gutters may be used for installations where accessibility of
the cables is of prime importance. Cable trunking shall not be used where
subjected to corrosive vapors or severe physical damage. Cable trunking shall
be steel with painted finish and removable or hinged cover.
4) Cable trunking shall conform to IEC 61084.
5. Underfloor Installations
a. Applications
1) In commercial and institutional facilities where large open areas are required
and/or moveable systems furniture is utilized, underfloor raceways and ducts
shall be used for distribution of electrical cables.
2) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall be used to support electrical cables for
power, lighting, signal, and telecommunications to workstations, work benches
and tables which are not located adjacent to a wall.
3) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall not be used for hazardous locations or
where subject to corrosive vapors or severe physical damage.
b. Underfloor Raceway Characteristics

Rev. 0 5.5 - 54
1) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall utilize welded rectangular steel

construction with multiple compartments as necessary to accommodate the
various electrical wiring.
2) Underfloor raceways shall be sized to accommodate the installed cables. Size
of raceways with a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable installation.
3) Underfloor raceways shall be provided with continuous separators between all
different cable types.
4) Underfloor raceway system shall include junction boxes to facilitate access to
cables and activation fittings to accommodate devices for the various electrical
services.
6. Underground Installations
a. Applications
1) Underground raceways in areas which are not subjected to traffic and/or
severe physical damage may be direct buried conduit.
2) Underground raceways in traffic areas or others areas subject to disruption or
severe physical damage shall be concrete encased.
b. Raceway Characteristics
1) Direct buried raceways in residential, commercial and institutional areas shall
be PVC conduit.
2) Direct buried raceways in industrial areas shall be PVC coated extra heavy
duty rigid steel conduit.
3) Concrete encased raceways shall be PVC conduit.
4) Raceways installed in structural or reinforced concrete envelope shall be PVC
conduit.
5) Underground raceways (direct buried and/or concrete encased) in hazardous
areas shall be PVC coated extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit.
6) Raceways installed below roadways shall be concrete encased.
7. Cable Trays and Cable Trenches
a. Applications
1) Industrial Facilities
(a) In substations and mechanical and electrical rooms, cable trays and
cable trenches may be used.
(b) Cable trays shall not be used for outdoor applications unless specifically
approved by the Royal Commission.
2) Residential, Commercial and Institutional Facilities
(a) In substations and mechanical and electrical rooms, cable trays and
cable trenches may be used.
(b) Cable trays shall not be used for interior distribution of electrical cables
where they are exposed to view unless specifically approved by the
Royal Commission.
b. Cable Tray Characteristics

Rev. 0 5.5 - 55
1) Cable trays shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 61537.

2) Cable trays shall be ladder type, aluminum with natural finish or steel with hot-
dipped galvanized finish.
3) Cable trays shall be of the width and depth required to accommodate the
installed cables plus a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable
installation. Minimum depth shall be 100 mm. Rung spacing shall be
adequate for support of installed cables but shall not exceed 230 mm.
c. Cable Trench Characteristics
1) Cable trenches shall be of the width and depth required to accommodate the
installed cables plus a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable
installation.
2) Cable trenches shall include removable covers to facilitate access to the
cables. Covers shall be rated to withstand the environmental conditions.
8. Wires and Cables
a. Copper Conductors
1) All wires and cables shall have copper conductors.
2) Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with SASO and IEC Standards.
3) Cable installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest
SEC Standards and Distribution Materials Specifications.
4) Standard millimeter size cables shall be used and shall be in accordance with
IEC 60228.
5) Minimum size power cable used shall be 2.5 mm².
b. Low Voltage Wires and Cables for Major Feeders
1) Low voltage wires and cable (600 V and below) for major feeders installed in
underground ducts and for indoor installation in raceways, conduits and
wireways shall be 90°C rated, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated
andPVC sheathed in accordance with IEC 60502 and flame retardant per IEC
60332-3, B
c. Low Voltage Building Wiring
1) General purpose low voltage building wiring for use in conduit (for receptacle
and lighting circuits) shall be PVC Insulated, 85Deg C, 450/750V (IEC 60227 &
SASO 55) wires flame retardant in accordance with IEC 60332-1
d. Low Voltage Cables for Direct Burial
1) Low voltage cables for direct burial shall be armored, minimum 90°C rated,
PVC or XLPE insulated and PVC jacketed in accordance with IEC 60502
e. High Voltage Cables
1) High voltage cables (above 1000 V) shall be 90°C rated, be EPR or XLPE
insulated and have metallic shield. Cables used for direct burial purposes shall
have an outer jacket.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 56
f. Cable Ampacity and Electrical Characteristics

1) Cable ampacity, electrical characteristics, and insulating thickness shall
conform to the latest IEC 60364, IEC 60228 and SBC 401.
2) The types of insulation used within a building and their maximum operating
temperatures are identified in SBC 401 Table 52-4.
g. Cable glands shall be in accordance with IEC 62444.
h. LSZH, LSOH, LSFH, or OHLS (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) material classification in
accordance with IEC 60754 and IEC 61034 typically used for cable jacketing for
wires which emit limited smoke and no halogen when exposed to a high heat
source. This type of cable is required to be used in confined spaces, poorly
ventilated areas, such as plenums, with a large amount of cables in close proximity
to humans or sensitive electronic equipment. Mass transit and central office facilities
are common applications for LSOH cable.
9. Busways
a. Electrical busways for electrical distribution shall be in accordance with IEC 61439.
b. Busways shall utilize copper bus rated and shall be protected with a metal
enclosure. Steel or aluminum enclosures are acceptable.
c. The busway assembly shall include a separate bus for each phase, neutral and
ground. The busway enclosure shall not be utilized as the ground conductor.
d. Neutral bus shall be increased in capacity over the phase conductors when the
busway supplies loads with high harmonic currents. The A/E and/or EPC contractor
shall complete an assessment of the loads served and provide recommendations to
the Royal Commission for approval.
10. Conduit Fill
a. For a total of 1 conductor inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 53%.
b. For a total of 2 conductors inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 31%.
c. For more than 2 conductors inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 40%
J. Grounding
1. General
a. All facilities shall be provided with grounding systems designed in accordance with
the requirements of the latest SEC Standards and the SBC 401 Chapter 54.
b. Grounding systems shall be designed to achieve the following:
1) Eliminate potential of electrical shock to personnel
2) Enable protection devices to operate correctly to minimize duration of fault
currents
3) Equalize the voltage potential of normally non-current carrying metal work
4) Prevent electrostatic charge of facility elements to avoid potential problems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 57
c. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the design for all related grounding and
protection components including the system grounding, equipment grounding,
lightning protection, surge protection, and electrostatic discharge.
2. System Grounding
a. All low voltage power distribution systems shall have supply transformer secondary
neutrals solidly grounded.
b. The low voltage earthing system shall be of TN-S type unless installations for
special locations are required.
c. Medium voltage distribution systems (e.g. 4160 V, 13800 V, 33000 V and 34500 V)
shall be resistance grounded to minimize ground fault levels.
3. Equipment Grounding
a. The metal frames of all electrical equipment, machinery, lighting fixtures, enclosures,
raceways, cable trays, outlet boxes, appliances and non-electric equipment in close
proximity to electrical equipment shall be grounded for safety. Two grounding
connections shall be provided to the frames of large electrical equipment such as
unit substations, power transformers, motor control centers and switchgear.
4. Grounding System Calculations
a. SBC 401 Chapters 41 and 54 shall be used as a basis of design for the grounding
system. Grounding calculations shall be conducted based on selected calculations
method listed in IEEE 142, IEEE 80, or BS 7430. Soil resistivity values from the
Geotechnical Investigation Report, as detailed in Section 4.4.2.F shall be used for
the determination of the grounding calculations. Grounding calculations shall
demonstrate that the calculated resistance does not exceed the maximum
resistance allowed for the system.
5. Grounding of Various System Installations
a. Substation and Industrial Plant
1) System and equipment grounding in substations and industrial plants is
particularly important because of the multiplicity of electrical equipment and
locations in isolated areas. These shall be provided with a ground loop or grid
consisting of multiple spaced ground rods interconnected by adequately sized
bare or insulated copper cable(s).
b. Commercial, Institutional and Light Industrial Facilities
1) For equipment grounding in commercial, institutional and light industrial
facilities, a ground loop shall be provided outside the building foundation. If this
is not possible, a ground grid shall be provided under the basement or ground
floor. System grounding at the facility transformer(s) shall be interconnected to
this loop. Interconnection cables may be bare or insulated.
c. Residential
1) In residential areas, residences shall be supplied with a single ground rod at
the service entrance. Grounding to incoming water supply pipe alone is not
acceptable. All exposed metallic pipes shall be bonded to the grounding
system.
d. Communication Equipment

Rev. 0 5.5 - 58
1) All communications equipment over voltage protection system devices shall be

directly grounded to the facility ground rod, grid or loop. Ground leads from
power distribution systems or facility metalwork shall not be shared by the
communications equipment over voltage protection device ground lead.
e. Floodlighting
1) All floodlighting, area lighting, sports lighting, roadway and street lighting
fixtures shall be grounded.
f. Backup Power Source
1) It is the preference that backup power sources such as generators are
grounded as a separately derived electrical system.
2) Existing facilities may not utilize a separately derived ground configuration.
A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall evaluate the backup power source grounding
configuration for an existing facility and provide the Royal Commission with
recommendations whether the existing configuration shall remain or be
modified. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall obtain approval of this
recommendation from the Royal Commission prior to proceeding with the
design.
3) Refer to subsection 5.5.1.F Transfer Switches for additional information
regarding equipment requirements for separately derived and combine
grounding for a backup power source.
6. Installation Requirements
a. All grounding systems shall be interconnected below grade for each facility.
b. System grounding and equipment grounding shall use a common ground loop or
grid, wherever possible. Separate grounding conductors shall be run from the
systems (transformers neutrals) and equipment to terminate on the ground loop or
grid via wall mounted ground bus.
7. Grounding to Eliminate Hazards from Static Electricity
a. Various facilities and occupancies have sensitivity toward electrostatic discharge
which may cause damage to equipment or facilities. To address these potential
hazards, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall assess the need for provision of an
electrostatic discharge control program in accordance with IEC Standard 61340.
b. Typical facilities, occupancies or activities that warrant consideration include but are
1) Manufacturing of electronic parts, assemblies or equipment
2) Assemble, install, packaging, servicing, testing of electronic equipment
3) Industrial facilities which involve operations with gas, coal, paper, and grain
processing and handling
4) Commercial facilities such as dry cleaning plants and others
c. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an assessment and submit
recommendations to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
8. Corrosion Protection for Grounding Systems
a. General

Rev. 0 5.5 - 59
1) The environmental conditions may result in undesirable deterioration to the

grounding systems for facilities. To protect against this potential, the following
measures shall be implemented to address exposure to underground and
atmospheric conditions:
2) Underground Conditions
(a) The nature of the soil and high water table with salt water content for the
Jubail area results in soil resistivities which are generally low. These
physical conditions make it easy to obtain good ground resistance values
however these same conditions can also cause severe corrosion of
metals leading to deterioration of ground resistance values with time. Not
only does the grounding copper corrode but buried steel in the vicinity
can also be corroded by galvanic interaction with the copper. To avoid
the adverse effects of the physical conditions, the following features shall
be considered and applied as appropriate:
(1) Interruption of Couple: Where possible, the buried steel shall be
separated from the grounding system. Buried lengths of pipework
shall be fitted with insulated flanges at points of connection to the
general mass of grounded equipment. Electrical equipment
mounted in such runs of buried or part-buried pipework shall be
grounded but insulated from the pipework.
(2) Elimination of Buried Steel: Where possible, when choosing
between burying or not burying a steel structure, pipe or conduit; the
non-buried choice is the Royal Commission’s preference. The
alternative approach shall consider the use of non-ferrous materials.
(3) Reduction of Effect of Buried Copper: At any location where ground
faults can cause large currents to flow between the body of earth
and the grounding system, extensive buried un-insulated grounding
conductor is necessary to control voltage gradients and ensure that
the whole complex remains as one resistance area. It is therefore
not possible to eliminate buried copper but its corrosion effects can
be reduced as follows:
(i) Grounding conductors shall be lead jacketed or tinned where
the corrosion risk is high, otherwise un-tinned conductors shall
be used.
(ii) Where possible, locate grounding conductors at least 7 m away
from buried steel work. This applies particularly to the grid
conductors extending through plant areas.
(iii) Grounding conductors linking equipment and ground grid
conductors shall be PVC insulated where within approximately
7 m of buried steel work. Connections shall be thermite welded
or compression types and coated with bitumen compound
protected by PVC green tape.
3) Atmospheric Conditions
(a) The following relates to corrosion resulting from atmospheric conditions
on non-buried parts of the grounding system, and is unrelated to any
level of soil resistivity. Wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, a risk of
corrosion from electrolytic action exists. The following safeguards shall
be observed:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 60
(1) Where possible, bare grounding conductors shall be spaced from

surfaces of a dissimilar metal. Where contact between surfaces is
unavoidable and especially outdoors, a coating such as bitumastic
No. 50 or equal, shall be introduced between them (except at
electrical joint faces).
(2) Termination hardware such as Servit connectors, etc., may often be
selected for its compatibility with the metals being connected.
Manufacturer's catalogs give details in this respect. Care shall be
taken in selecting such hardware that it is suitable for its application
from a corrosion aspect.
(3) Conductors passing through short lengths of metal conduit, such as
used for kick-pipes shall be coated with bitumastic No. 50 or equal.
The pipes shall be self-draining and the upper ends mastic sealed.
b. Special Materials
1) Ground Rods
(a) Materials and dimensions of the earth electrodes shall be selected to
withstand corrosion and to have adequate mechanical strength.
(b) For commonly used materials, the common minimum sizes from the
point of view of corrosion and mechanical strength for earth electrodes
where embedded in the soil are given in SBC 401 Table 54.1.
(c) All connections between ground rods and conductors shall be coated
with bitumastic and mastic tape as part of the final installation.
9. Additional Grounding Protection by Residual Current Devices (RCD)
a. The use of residual current devices (RCD) is intended only to augment extra
measures of protection against direct contact.
b. The use of such devices is not recognized as a sole means of protection.
c. Application of residual current devices in the system shall conform to the latest SBC.
10. References
a. Refer to the following TCDDs:
1) 260526-001 Typical Ground Rod Connection
2) 260526-002 Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch Grounding
Configuration Detail 4 Pole
3) 260526-003 Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch Grounding
Configuration Detail 3 Pole
4) 260526-004 Main Electrical Room Ground Bar Details
5) 260526-005 Distribution Electrical Room Ground Bar Detail

Rev. 0 5.5 - 61
K. Lightning Protection Systems

1. General
a. Lightning protection shall be considered for all facilities to protect them from damage
and/or disruption caused by a lightning strike. Provision of a lightning protection
system shall include consideration for the following:
1) Impacts to health and safety of the facility occupants
2) Economic impacts associated with damage to facility or equipment
3) Economic impacts associated with facility downtime
4) Impacts or interruption to public services
5) Impacts to commercial or industrial activities
6) Impacts to individuals in residential facilities
7) Impacts to groups in places of assembly
b. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete a lightning risk assessment in
accordance with the latest SBC 401, Chapter 802 Code, and IEC Standard 62305 to
summarize the associated risks and provide a recommendation regarding the need
for this protective means for the facility.
c. Where a lightning protection system is required, the components, features and
installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest SBC 401,
Chapter 802.
d. The design for the lightning protection system shall be closely coordinated with the
grounding and surge protection provisions for each facility.
2. Applications
a. Lightning protection for underground electrical distribution is not anticipated to be
extensive due to the routing of the power network below grade. A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall determine the characteristics of lightning arrestors at all substations
to coordinate with the other surge protective devices for each facility.
b. Lightning protection for ordinary buildings and structures is typically provided for the
following facilities. The final determination shall be the result of the lightning risk
assessment and approval by the Royal Commission.
1) Buildings and structures over 30 m in height.
2) Health safety buildings including hospitals, clinics, etc.
3) Public safety buildings including police stations and fire stations
4) School buildings
5) University buildings
6) Places of assembly
7) Data centers
3. Principal Components for Lightning Protection System
a. Principal components for the lightning protection system include air terminals,
ground rods and down conductors with adequate number of test points.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 62
b. Selection of the appropriate materials will be dependent on the location and

construction materials. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select materials which are
compatible with the building finishes to ensure adequate protection and avoidance of
any corrosion.
c. Materials selections and installation shall be in accordance with the latest SBC 401,
Chapter 802.
4. Minimum Lightning Protection Features
a. The lightning protection system shall be designed in accordance with the latest SBC
401, Chapter 802.
b. Separate ground rods shall be provided for each down conductor. The down
conductor shall be directly connected to the ground rod. Adequate number of test
points shall be installed. The minimum distance to other earth pits has to be
maintained.
c. The lightning protection ground rods shall be interconnected below grade to the
ground loop which provides the system and equipment ground for the facility.
L. Surge Protection Devices
1. General
a. Protection of buildings, equipment, and operations is critical for facilities throughout
the Jubail Industrial City. Provision of the appropriate surge protection devices shall
include consideration for the following:
1) Impacts to health and safety of the facility occupants
2) Economic impacts associated with damage to facility or equipment
3) Economic impacts associated with facility downtime
4) Impacts or interruption to public services
5) Impacts to commercial or industrial activities
6) Impacts to individuals in residential facilities
7) Impacts to groups in places of assembly
8) Extent and location of protection system devices
b. Critical Facilities that warrant special consideration include:
1) Health Safety – Hospitals and Health Clinics
2) Public Safety – Police and Fire Stations
3) Educational – schools and training centers
4) Transportation - Signaling
5) Data Centers
6) Telecommunications
7) Industrial
c. Determination for surge protection shall include an assessment of the facility to

analyze the potential exposure and to develop a recommendation for the level of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 63
protection. Consult IEC standards to complete this assessment and provide a

recommendation to the Royal Commission early in the design phase.
d. Coordinate the surge protection installation with the electrical grounding and
lightning protection system provisions.
e. Sample application levels of surge protection for the various facility types are
summarized in the following Table 5.5.1.F:
TABLE 5.5.1.F: TYPICAL SURGE PROTECTION APPLICATION LEVELS
Facility Type
Telecommunications
Health Safety
Public Safety
Protection Application
Commercial
Data Center
Residential
Industrial
Civic
Service Entrance        
Distribution Panels      
Branch Circuit panels    
Critical Equipment       
Tertiary Devices
 
(Receptacles)
2. Types of surge protection:

a. Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
1) Parallel-connected, non-linear protective devices for limiting surge voltages on
equipment by discharging, bypassing, or diverting surge current.
b. Filtering/Line Conditioning
1) Units designed to provide clean AC power by helping to eliminate or
dramatically reduce high-voltage transients and low-voltage electrical noise
that degrade microprocessor-based equipment.
(a) Active Tracking Filters (ATF)
(b) Harmonic Filters
(c) Line Conditioners
(d) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 64
c. Data/signal Line Devices

1) Devices designed to protect signal lines from harmful surges.
M. Lighting
1. General
a. This RCJ GEM covers the minimum mandatory requirements for lighting
installations.
b. All lighting systems for interior applications shall be designed in accordance with the
latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
Lighting Handbook.
c. In order to optimize the effective utilization of Iighting energy, interior lighting design
requirements for new buildings shall be in accordance with the IESNA Lighting
Ready Reference / Energy Management IESNA RR-96. Design components for
lighting energy management shall be per considerations in IESNA LEM-3.
d. Lighting design for Industrial Lighting shall be in accordance with IESNA RP-7, as
supplemented by this GEM.
e. Lighting design shall be designed for energy efficient operation.
f. Photometric measurements of sports lighting, when required shall be performed as
per the IESNA LM-5, supplemented by this GEM.
g. Lighting system power supplies consisting of 400/230 Volt, three phase, three-wire
or four-wire; and 400 Volt, two-wire shall be acceptable. The choice of voltage and
distribution system for lighting installations shall depend on the area to be supplied
and the required lighting load.
h. Direct-control switches and switching contacts used on lighting circuits other than
fluorescent luminaires shall have a continuous current rating of at least 1.5 times the
steady-state current of the lighting load.
i. Direct-control switches and switching contacts used on fluorescent lighting circuits
shall have a continuous current rating of at least twice the steady-state current of the
lighting load.
j. Mounting method of luminaires shall be based on the best arrangement for
illuminance, as well as easy and safe access during installation and maintenance.
k. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the appropriate lighting solutions
based on the best application of light source, lamp types, required illumination
levels, distribution configuration, and luminaire type for each application associated
with the facility.
l. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the energy efficiency associated with
the recommended lighting solutions and explore opportunities to reduce the energy
consumption by selecting sources and luminaires with high efficiencies and also
capitalize on the use of available daylight.
m. Energy conservation strategies shall conform to latest SBC 601.
n. Luminaires shall be suitable for the environment where they are installed.
Luminaires installed outdoor shall be approved as weather proof and dust tight.
o. Luminaires shall be marked, listed or labeled by an independent third party
laboratory (notified body) the associated certificate shall state either that the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 65
luminaires meet appropriate designated standards or have been tested and found
suitable for use in a specified manner.
p. All public lighting systems for exterior use shall be designed in accordance with the
CEN standards see table in section for full list of applicable standards.
q. All lighting systems for exterior and roadway applications shall be designed in
accordance with CIE 115 and the associated CEN standards.
r. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the appropriate lighting solutions
based on the best application of light source, lamp types, required lighting design
criteria, distribution configuration, and luminaire type for each application associated
with the facility.
2. Light Source
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the light source which is appropriate for
each residential, commercial, institutional, and industrial facility, and shall ensure
that the selected light fixtures are available in the local market at the time of design
and provide cut sheets showing the fixture performance characteristics and
aesthetics to be included in the RFP. Mercury vapor luminaires and incandescent
luminaires shall not be used.
b. Only luminaires with a minimum efficacy of 45 lm/w and lamps with minimum
efficacy of 65 lm/w shall be used.
c. The various light sources have advantages and disadvantages and the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall consider the available sources and provide recommendations
regarding the appropriate light sources to be used throughout a facility.
1) Selection of the light source shall consider the following:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Installation requirements
(c) Color rendition characteristics
(d) Dimming capabilities
(e) Maintenance requirements (and associated health and safety risks)
(f) Availability
(g) Life cycle cost
(h) Internal ambient air temperature (35° C)
(i) Outside ambient air conditions (50° C)
(j) Desired aesthetic result
(k) Correlated Color Temperature
d. The three commonly used light sources along with their characteristics include
fluorescent, high intensity discharge (HID), and light-emitting diode. A relative
comparison of the operational characteristics for these light sources is summarized
in Table 5.5.1.G. Each characteristic is rated from 1 to 4 where 1 = the highest and
4 = the lowest in that category.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 66
TABLE 5.5.1.G: LIGHT SOURCE OPERATION COMPARISON
Starting Characteristics
Color Rendition
Light Source
Initial Cost
Dimmable
Lamp Life
Efficacy
Fluorescent 2 2 2 3 2 2
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Note

2 1/4 2 4 2
Metal Halide 1
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Note

1/2 4 1-2 4 2
HPS 1
Light-emitting Diode (LED) 1/2 1-3 2 1 2 4
Table 5.5.1.G Notes:

1. Source is only dimmable with specialized control gear.
e. Lamps
1) The lamps selected for each facility shall be standardized as much as possible
to minimize the variety of lamps sources used to achieve the desired aesthetic
results. This standardization will facilitate the maintenance of the lighting
throughout a facility.
2) Fluorescent Lamps
(a) Fluorescent lamps are acceptable for use in all residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities. These lamps have typically been the
most common selection due to the color rendition characteristics, source
life, availability of lighting fixtures, energy efficiency, and associated cost
effectiveness
(b) Compact fluorescent lamps are available in various shapes, wattages
and color temperatures and have become a replacement alternative for
applications that previously utilized incandescent lamps. Compact
fluorescent lamps are acceptable for use in RCJ’s facilities and shall be
compared with other source alternatives to determine the most
appropriate applications.
(c) Energy-Efficient type T5 and compatible energy efficient electronic
ballasts having less than l0% THD (voltage total harmonic distortion)
shall be used. Efficacy of Compact fluorescent lights (CFL) shall not be
less than 65-70 Lumen/Watt.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 67
(d) Fluorescent lamps shall be used for the following specific applications:
(1) Electrical substations
(2) Electrical switchyard buildings
(3) Control rooms
(4) Offices
(5) Plant rooms
(6) Store rooms
(7) Large ceiling voids and Maintenance access
(e) Fluorescent lamps are available in different shapes, diameters, wattages,
lumen outputs, and color temperatures. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall utilize standard fluorescent lamps that are commercially available
and minimize the types of lamps used throughout the facility. The
following Table 5.5.1.H. provides a list of the commonly used lamps
types, however other wattage and type shall be discussed and approved
by RCJ
TABLE 5.5.1.H: FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Type Control Initial Life

Watts Gear Lumens CRI
Description Hours
E, DE 380
8 T5, 288mm 85 20,000
E, DE 680
13 T5, 517mm 85 20,000
E, DE 1,350
14 T5/HO,549mm 85 20,000
E, DE 2,000
24 T5/HO, 549mm 85 20,000
E, DE 2900
28 T5, 1149mm 85 20,000
E, DE 3650
35 T5, 1449mm 85 20,000
E, DE 4900
49 T5/HO, 1449mm 85 20,000
E, DE 5000
54 T5/HO, 1149mm 85 20,000

Rev. 0 5.5 - 68
(f) Fluorescent lamps are available with output in a variety of color

temperatures ranging from 3000 to 6500° kelvin.
(1) The lamp color temperature output shall be selected as appropriate
for the application.
(2) The lamp color temperature shall preferably be consistent for all
fluorescent lamps throughout a facility to facilitate maintenance.
3) High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps
(a) HID lamps are used for the following applications:
(1) Indoor Commercial and Institutional facilities
(2) Indoor and outdoor Industrial facilities
(3) Outdoor facilities for public circulation spaces, parks, sporting
venues, street lighting and parking
(4) Security lighting
(b) HID lamps have good efficiencies and lamp life however, their color
rendering index (CRI) is lower than other sources and controllability is
less desirable due to warm up and restrike requirements. Specialized
Hot restrike control gear is available for special situations such as public
venues for instant light.
(c) HID lamps are available in the following options:
(1) Metal halide lamps are available in a wide range of wattages and
have the best CRI but the lowest efficacy of the HID options.
These characteristics lend themselves towards applications where
color rendition is critical to the occupancy. Typical applications
include indoor sports facilities, public circulation spaces, and large
assembly spaces such as auditoriums and convention halls and
decorative external lighting where white light and high color
rendering are important.
(2) High pressure sodium lamps are also available in a wide range of
wattages and shapes. The efficacy is higher than metal halide but
their CRI is lower. These characteristics lend themselves towards
applications where color rendition is less critical to the occupancy.
Typical applications include indoor storage, loading docks, vehicular
circulation and outdoor parking, street lighting and security.
(3) Low pressure sodium lamps are outdated technology and shall not
be used without prior agreement with the RCJ. LED /HPS is the
preferred choice for traditional uses. Low pressure sodium lamps
are the most efficient of the HID options but have the lowest CRI.
The light output is monochromatic and typically used in limited
applications which do not require distinction of color. Typical
application is for outdoor security.
(d) Where HID lamps are used the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize
standard HID lamps that are commercially available and minimize the
types of lamps used throughout the facility. The following Table 5.5.1.I.
provides a list of the commonly used lamps types.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 69
TABLE 5.5.1.I: HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
Type Initial
Watts Life Hours Base
Description Lumens
High Pressure Med,E27,Doule

70 6,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Med,E27, Double

100 9,200 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Med,E27,Double

150 16,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Mogul,E40,Double

250 28,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Mogul,E40,Double

400 51,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure
1000 140,000 24,000 Mogul,E40
Sodium
7,500 Vert. MedE27,Double

70 Metal Halide 5,200
6,000 Hor. ended
7,500 Vert. Med,E27,Double

6,000 Hor. ended
10,000Vert. Med,E27,Double
7,500 Hor ended
10,000 Ver. Mogul,E40,

6,000 Hor. Double ended
20,000 Ver. Mogul,E40,Double

15,000 Hor. ended
15,000 Ver.
1000 Metal Halide 108,000 Mogul,E40
11,000 Hor.
170,000 6,000
1500 Metal Halide Mogul
220,000 9,000
2000 Metal Halide Double ended
4) Light-emitting Diodes (LED) Lamps

(a) LED lamps are acceptable for indoor use in all residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities. where a point source distribution is
required. Where an area source is required, LED is and an option to be

Rev. 0 5.5 - 70
compared with high efficiency linear fluorescent lamp (T5, either HE or

HO). These lamps have not typically been utilized due to the availability
and cost. Recent developments have increased the availability and
reduced the associated costs. These developments have resulted in the
use of this source for more applications.
(b) LED lamps can have good efficacy and long life but need to be obtained
from a reputable manufacturer. Quality of the driver is also an issue.
Luminaire lumens (LLm) and not bare LED lumens should be used in
calculations. The ambient thermal conditions are critical to the
performance of LEDs and Luminaire Manufacturers are required to
design their thermal management systems to allow the LEDs to operate
to the published values in an ambient air temperature of 35 deg C. which
can easily be present in an unventilated ceiling void and 50 deg C
externally LEDs and they are available in a wide range of color
temperatures. This source is becoming more typical for all types of
applications and thus shall be considered for residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities.
(c) LED for external lighting shall be of high quality manufacturer from
recognized major suppliers from the following list:
(1) Cree
(2) Philips Lumileds
(3) Tridonic
(4) Osram
(5) Nicha
(6) LG
(7) Citizen
(8) GE
Other LED suppliers may only be used with the express consent of the
RCJ. ALL LEDs shall be capable of providing a minimum efficacy of
100lm/w at forward design current of less than 500mA with external
ambient air temperature of 50 deg C. all LEDs shall be color consistent
within 5 macadam ellipses. The CRI of LEDs shall be not less than
60Ra. The life expectancy shall be quoted at 80% of initial Lumens and
for a minimum life of 50000hrs. The early life failure of LEDs shall not be
greater than 10% at the quoted life expectancy. All LEDs are to be
warranted by the LED manufacturer operating within the luminaire for a
minimum of half the rated life of the LEDs.
(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an economic analysis to
compare LED lamps to others options to determine the best solution.
This analysis shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and
approval.
(e) Designer is responsible for selecting the LED luminaire system
components. This includes as applicable; LED driver and luminaire
controls, heat-sink, self-ballasted or non-self-ballasted, etc.
(f) The luminaire manufacturer shall provide certificate issued by third
party agency (notified body) verifying the luminaire’s performance

Rev. 0 5.5 - 71
including declared luminaire lifetime and lumen maintenance based on

the operating temperature range specified in this standard.
(g) Reflectors or filters shall be provided to control the glare and harmful
light spectrum to safe level. Guidelines and limits of IEC 62471 and /or
the lES handbook shall be applied.
(h) Additional Requirements for LED
(1) The LED circuitry shall prevent flicker perceptible to the unaided eye
over the voltage range specified as per IEC 61000-3-3 or IEEE
1453.
(2) All LED components to be designed to tolerate between -20°C and
65°C at 100% Relative Humidity (RH) during non-operating/daytime.
(3) Voltage THD induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not
exceed 10%.
(4) Thermal management shall be passive by design .The use of fans
or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed.
5) Control Gear and Drivers
(a) All ballasts and drivers for fluorescent, HID and LED lamps shall be
manufactured to meet the requirements of IEC Standards and Pre-
standard Specifications for lamp controlgear.
(1) Fluorescent ballasts shall be DALI HF electronic type. Dimming
electronic ballasts shall be standard for all areas where daylight is
present..
(2) HID ballasts shall be electronic type up to 150 watts.
(3) LED drivers shall be DALI electronic type constant current.
(4) For external luminaires all ballasts and drivers shall be rated to a
minimum of IP 23 and have Ta 50 deg C and Tc 80 deg C.
(5) All ballasts and drivers shall have a minimum design life of 50,0000
hrs in their prescribed operating conditions.
(6) ALL LED drivers shall operate to protect the LEDs should the
temperature exceed their maximum operating temperature. Firstly
by dimming the output of the LEDs up to 80% of full output and then
by switching off the LEDs should the temperature still be high. An
alarm shall be generated by the ballast in line with the DALI protocol
and communicated to the LMS as high level alarm.
(7) LED drivers should be capable of being mounted in the base of
poles and operating the LEDs remotely for up to 25m distance.
3. Interior Lighting
a. Illumination levels for spaces in all residential, commercial, institutional and industrial
applications shall be selected in accordance with the procedures and
recommendations provided in the latest edition of the IESNA Lighting Handbook.
1) Illumination levels shall consider the following criteria:
(a) The task being performed

Rev. 0 5.5 - 72
(b) The ages of the occupants

(c) The importance of speed and accuracy
(d) Luminaire mounting height
(e) Workplane height
2) The selection of the appropriate light source, lamp and luminaires shall
consider the following criteria:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Lamp lumen output
(c) Lamp operation characteristics including lamp lumen depreciation
(d) Environment characteristics and associated dirt depreciation
(e) Utilization Factor
(f) Room shape and size
(g) Room finish characteristics including reflectances
(h) Availability of natural daylight
(i) Correlated Color Temperature
3) The quality of the lighting solution designed for each space shall include
consideration for the following:
(a) Glare shall be reduced by utilizing the appropriate luminaire features.
The application of direct, direct/indirect, or indirect distribution shall be
evaluated to apply the appropriate system for each space. The light
control mechanism including lens, louver, etc. shall be selected to
minimize the adverse effects of glare.
(b) The lighting shall be distributed evenly over the task to maintain
illuminance uniformity. The following are the average to minimum ratios
which should be considered when designed the lighting system for
interior applications:
(1) Uniformity ratio of 2:1 is considered excellent and should be used
for critical tasks.
(2) Uniformity ratio of 3:1 is considered good and is the typical
uniformity to be used for the majority of applications.
(3) Uniformity ratio of 4:1 is considered fair and is appropriate for used
in applications which are less critical.
(c) Color rendering characteristics of the source is identified as the color
rendering index (CRI) and shall be carefully considered when selecting
the source for each application.
(1) CRI between 75 and 100 is considered excellent.
(2) CRI between 65 and 75 is considered good.
(3) CRI between 55 and 65 is considered fair.
(4) CRI below 55 is considered poor.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 73
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate illumination levels
for all spaces within a facility. The standard illumination levels for various
locations and occupancies are listed in Table 5.5.1.J.
TABLE 5.5.1.J: ILLUMINATION LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS BY OCCUPANCY
Horizontal Vertical Elevation of

Illumination Illumination Working
Location/Occupancy Level in Lux Level in Lux Plane (mm)
CONTROL AND DISPATCH
General 500 800
Vertical Panels 500 1700
Desks 500 800
DINING FACILITIES
Dining Areas (Leisure Service) 300 800
Dining Areas (Quick Service) 500 800
Food Preparation 500 900
Entrance Hall 300 Floor
ELECTRICAL ROOM
Substation (General) 200 Floor
Vertical Face of Switchgear 300 1700
Battery Room 300 Floor
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Telecom Equipment Room 200 Floor
OFFICES
Regular 500 800
Conference Room 500 800
Drafting (Mixed CAD and Paper Tasks) 500 800
Corridors 200 Floor
Stairways 300 Floor
Elevator 200 Floor
Washrooms 300 900
WAREHOUSE
Indoor Bulk Storage 100 Floor
Indoor Barrel Storage 100 Floor
Countertops 300 1200

Rev. 0 5.5 - 74
Parts Storage 300 900
RELIGIOUS PLACES
Mosque 300 Floor
SPORTS AND RECREATION
Volleyball 300 Floor
Basketball 300 Floor
WORK SHOPS
General 300 Floor
Rough Bench or Machine Work 500 900
Medium Bench or Machine Work 500 900
Fine Bench or Machine Work 3000 900
Corridors 200 Floor
Washrooms 100 900
SCHOOLS
Chalkboards 500 Task
Classrooms 500 800
Science Laboratories 500 300 900
Shops 500 900
Art Rooms 500 800
Music Rooms 500 800
Library 300 800
Corridors 200 Floor
HOSPITAL
Examination Rooms 500 800
Patient Rooms 50 900
Procedure Rooms 500 900
Laboratories 500 900
Therapy 300 Floor
Nurse Stations 500 800
Corridors Nursing Areas 100 Floor
Corridors Procedure Areas 500 900
Waiting Room 300 Floor

Rev. 0 5.5 - 75
Table 5.5.1.J Notes:

1. Illumination levels for locations and occupancies not listed in this table
shall be in accordance with IESNA Lighting Handbook.
b. Residential Lighting
1) Residential facilities typically utilize a mixture of LED and fluorescent
lamps/luminaires due to the excellent color rendering capabilities, availability of
lighting fixtures, dimming capability, and cost.
2) Development and availability of compact fluorescent lamps has resulted in the
replacement of incandescent lamps..
3) Recent developments with LED lamps has improved availability and associated
cost and their use is anticipated to increase as the availability of luminaires
improves. The LED sources offer good color rendering, high efficacy and
excellent control capabilities.
4) For decorative purposes, a combination of recessed, pendant, track mounted,
and wall mounted luminaires are utilized to provide adequate illumination and
satisfy aesthetic objectives.
5) The voltages used for residential lighting shall be in accordance with
Table 5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
c. Commercial and Institutional Lighting
1) Commercial and Institutional type facilities typically utilize a mixture of
fluorescent, high intensity discharge and LED lamps/luminaires.
(a) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are the primary source.
(1) Compact fluorescent lamps/luminaires are utilized in applications
where incandescent lamps/fixtures were typically used.
(2) High output fluorescent lamps/luminaires are acceptable for spaces
with high ceilings where instant start characteristic of this source is
advantageous. These occupancies include gymnasiums, highbay
storage spaces and other similar occupancies.
(b) High intensity discharge lamps/luminaires may be used for interior high
ceiling applications, loading docks, storage areas, parking facilities, and
other similar occupancies.
(1) Metal halide lamps/luminaires are the preferred source for interior
applications where color rendition is critical. Examples include
public circulation, indoor sports arenas, gymnasiums, and places of
assembly.
(2) High pressure sodium lamps/luminaires are applicable to interior
occupancies where color rendition is not as critical and include
loading docks, storage areas, and parking garages,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 76
(c) Recent developments with LED lamps has improved availability and
associated cost and their use is anticipated to increase as the availability
of luminaires improves. The LED sources offer good color rendering,
high efficacy and excellent control capabilities. This source shall be
considered for all interior applications in Commercial and Institutional
facilities to determine the cost effectiveness.
2) The voltages used for commercial and institutional lighting shall be in
accordance with Table 5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
d. Industrial Lighting
1) Industrial type facilities typically utilize a mixture of fluorescent, high intensity
discharge and LED lamps/luminaires.
2) Lighting for industrial facilities shall be selected in accordance with the
procedures and recommendations provided in the latest edition of the
American National Standard Practice for Industrial Lighting: ANSI IESNA RP-7.
(a) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are acceptable for use for industrial
facilities.
(1) Availability of high output fluorescent lamps has resulted in the
increased application of fluorescent lamps/luminaires for highbay
spaces. This source is advantageous due to its instant start and
instant restrike characteristics.
(2) Compact fluorescent lamps/luminaires shall be considered for
industrial applications where instant start is required for the
application.
(b) High intensity discharge shall be given preference for use in industrial
facilities.
(1) Metal halide lamps/luminaires have the higher CRI and shall be
applied to occupancies that require this higher color rendering for
performance of the tasks.
(2) High pressure sodium fixtures have a lower CRI and are acceptable
for occupancies where color rendering is not as critical for
performance of tasks.
3) The voltages used for industrial lighting shall be in accordance with Table
5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
e. Emergency Lighting
1) Emergency lighting shall be provided throughout each facility to illuminate the
designated means of egress, including the exit discharge, to allow the
occupants to safely exit in the event of a power outage. Minimum duration of
emergency lighting in the event of normal power failure shall be one-and-one
half hours.
(a) Illumination levels for the means of egress shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the latest SBC 801.
(b) The egress path lighting shall be supplied from the life safety branch of
the backup power system or may be supplied from a self-contained
integral battery power source.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 77
(c) Duration of operation for means of egress lighting shall be in accordance

with the latest SBC 801.
(d) The power source for emergency lighting shall be supplied ahead of the
switch or control device.
2) Supplemental emergency lighting shall also be considered for special
occupancies in critical facilities such as hospitals, important offices,
communications centers, etc. to facilitate normal operation of these critical
facilities during a normal power interruption.
(a) Lighting levels for these special occupancies during normal power
interruptions shall be selected to allow safe operation. The A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall provide recommendations for the special
applications and associated lighting levels to the Royal Commission for
approval.
(b) These supplemental emergency lighting applications shall be supplied
from the standby branch of the backup power system or may be supplied
from a self-contained battery power source.
(c) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the duration of
operation for supplemental emergency lighting with the Royal
Commission to ensure that it is sufficient for the criticality of the
occupancy.
3) Emergency lighting shall be provided in electrical rooms. A minimum
emergency illumination level of 100 lux shall be provided at finished floor level.
4) Luminaires installed in the control room shall provide shadowless illumination.
In addition, lighting for control rooms shall be designed for maximum flexibility
to permit flicker-free variation of illumination levels above each group of
operator workstations. Luminaires shall be installed to minimize reflections and
glare at operating screens.
5) Normal and emergency task lighting of at least 200 lux shall be provided for
the following;
(a) In plant areas to illuminate equipment required for use in emergencies,
such as: emergency telephones, shutdown and emergency isolation
stations, fire water pump areas, central foam concentrate mixing
areas, fire control panels, breathing apparatus & fire extinguisher
station, and stand-by generators.
(b) In evacuation assembly areas and in off-shore platform escape capsule
areas and boat landing.
6) The preferred power supply for emergency lighting is the backup power source.
However, in the event a central backup power source is not provided as part of
the building infrastructure, the emergency lighting may be supplied from a self-
contained battery power source.
7) Illuminated exit signs shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with
NFPA 101 requirements.
f. Exit Signs
1) Exit signs shall be located throughout each facility in accordance with the
requirements of the latest SBC 801.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 78
2) Exits signs shall be internally illuminated in accordance with the latest SBC
801.
3) The preferred power supply for exit signs is the backup power source.
However, in the event a central backup power source is not provided as part of
the building infrastructure, the emergency lighting may be supplied from a self-
contained battery power source. Nickel cadmium batteries are not permitted.
4) Duration of operation for exit signs shall be in accordance with the latest SBC
801.
4. Exterior Lighting
a. General
1) This section covers Building floodlighting, Area lighting, Sports lighting, and
Security lighting.
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.F Site Lighting for additional information
requirements pertaining to exterior lighting associated with Site
Development for Buildings.
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting for additional
information and requirements pertaining to exterior lighting associated
with roadways, parking areas and sidewalk lighting.
2) Illumination levels for exterior spaces in all residential, commercial, institutional
and industrial applications shall be selected in accordance with the procedures
and recommendations provided in the latest edition of the Illuminating
Engineering Society of North America, Lighting Handbook and reference
should be made to CIE 115 and the associated CEN standards and guidance
for road and exterior lighting. All public spaces are to be lit to the CEN
methodology.
3) Illumination levels for exterior applications shall consider the following criteria:
(a) The task being performed
(b) Security and safety of the occupants
4) The selection of the appropriate light source, lamp and luminaires shall
consider the following criteria:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Lamp lumen output
(c) Lamp operation characteristics including lamp lumen depreciation
(d) Luminaire efficiency
(e) Color Rendering Index
(f) Correlated Color Temperature
5) The quality of the lighting solution designed for each exterior application
shall include consideration for the following:
(a) Horizontal illumination
(b) Vertical illumination
(c) Uniformity ratios

Rev. 0 5.5 - 79
(d) Color rendering characteristics of the source is identified as the color

rendering index (CRI) and shall be carefully considered when selecting
the source for each application.
(1) CRI between 75 and 100 is considered excellent.
(2) CRI between 60 and 75 is considered white light.
(3) CRI between 20 and 60 is considered semi-monochromatic.
(4) CRI below 20 is considered monochromatic.
The CIE color groups also give good indication of color rendering and
color appearance.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate illumination
levels for all exterior applications. The standard illumination levels for
exterior locations and occupancies are listed in Table 5.5.1.K.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 80
TABLE 5.5.1.K: ILLUMINATION LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EXTERIOR
Horizontal Vertical Elevation

Illumination Illumination of Working Uniformity
Location/Occupancy Level in Lux Level in Lux Plane Ratio
BUILDING FLOODLIGHTING
Not Vertical 5:1
Façade (Dark Surroundings) 35
Applicable Plane Note 2
Not Vertical 5:1
Facade (Bright Surroundings) 90
Applicable Plane Note 2
AREA LIGHTING
2 1 20:1
Parking - Basic Ground
Minimum Minimum Max:Min
5 2.5 15:1
Parking – Enhanced Security Ground
Minimum Minimum Max:Min
15 20
Public Park Ground 4:1 Avg:Min
Minimum Avg @ 1.5m
Common and/or Sitting Areas 6 6
Ground 4:1 Avg:Min
(CEN EN 13201) Minimum Min @ 1.5m
6 6
Walkways Ground 4:1 Avg:Min
Minimum Min @ 1.5m
SPORTS LIGHTING
Not 4:1 or less
Soccer (Class IV) 500 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Volleyball (Class IV) 200 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Basketball (Class IV) 200 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Tennis (Class IV) 500 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
SECURITY LIGHTING
Not 4:1 or less
Entrance 100 Ground
Applicable Avg:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Perimeter 5 Ground
Applicable Avg:Min
Table 5.5.1.K Notes:

1. All public areas are to be lit in accordance with road lighting section
5.6.3. .
2. Uniformity ratio is lighted surface to immediate surroundings.
3. All external lighting is required to meet the obstructive lighting standard’s
identified within sections 5.6.3, and 5.3.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 81
7) Luminaires
(a) Luminaires shall be heavy-duty, weather-proof type suitable for use in
the Jubail outdoor environment to a minimum of IP 65 IK08.
(b) All components and features shall be suitable to withstand the
environmental conditions and shall be selected to minimize maintenance
requirements.
(c) Luminaires use for decorative applications shall use bollards sparingly.
Bollards shall be used mainly for aesthetic function and not as the prime
illumination source. Bollards can be used as a prime illumination for
walkways, gardens, and like places. Typical bollard applications include
landscaped areas, shopping arcades, walkways at building entrances,
etc.
(d) LED luminaires shall be fully designed by the luminaire manufacturer to
take account of the high ambient air temperature and relative humidity
the light output of the luminaire should be quoted on the basis of a
luminaire operation in an environment of 50 deg C and 95% RH min. The
luminaire manufacturer shall take overall responsibility for the functioning
of the LEDs, drivers and the luminaire body to enable the stated
operating parameter of the system to be maintained through life.
(e) The luminaire body shall be made of high quality diecast aluminum and
shall be coated with a finish which is dust shedding and the body
designed to comply with IEC 60068-2 Part 2 Test L.
(f) The luminaire optics shall be made of borosilicate glass and shall be
treated with a coating to prevent the accumulation of dust. The optic
seals shall be tested to ensure that the thermal effects of heating and
cooling does not damage the seals.
(g) The luminaire shall be designed to accept the RCJs chosen LMS
system.
(h) The luminaire body shall have 2 separate compartments for Lamp/LEDs
and control gear.
8) Poles
(a) Exterior lighting poles shall be fiberglass, stainless steel, hot-dipped
galvanized steel, anodized aluminum or precast concrete. Painted poles
can be used if decorative poles are required but with special treatment
before paint and also special paint type to resist corrosion Painted poles
shall not be used without the express agreement with the RCJ. Typical
pole selections are summarized in Table 5.5.1.L: Exterior Lighting Pole
Applications.
TABLE 5.5.1.L: EXTERIOR LIGHTING POLE APPLICATIONS
Pole Material
Application Galvanized Anodized
Fiberglass Precast Concrete
Steel Aluminum
Walkways
Sports Facilities

Rev. 0 5.5 - 82
Security
Freeways
Expressways
Collectors
Corniche
Interchanges
Local 2 & 4 Lane
Residential Road
Cul-de-sac
Cycleways
(b) Metallic lighting poles shall be provided with slip-base plate and break
away fuses which is designed to slide off a lower plate upon impact,
except where the speed limit for the road is less than 60 km/hr or where
poles are located behind elevated curbs. In these latter cases, the poles
shall be provided with fixed bases.
(c) Poles and associated foundations shall be designed using EN 40 for a
sustained wind speed of 30m/s and intermittent 3 sec gusts in a 30min
period of 45m/s..
(d) Poles shall be positioned at the rear of footpaths ideally.
(e) The use of outreach arms shall be minimized and outreach arms over
2.5m should not be used without the express approval of the RCJ.
(f) Where trees are present outreach arms should bring the luminaire to the
front of the agreed tree canopy. Trees are to be coordinated with
landscape design so the agreed separation distance of 6m can be
maintained.
9) Grounding
(a) Metallic poles, posts, luminaire housings and all non-current carrying
metallic parts shall be grounded.
(b) Individual ground rods shall be provided for each pole of a minimum of
2.5m in depth to achieve a resistivity of 25 ohms .
(c) Where the concentration of poles or bollards is heavy, consideration
shall be given to sharing the ground rods between locations and/or
grounding conductor(s) may be run from the nearest panel i.e. less than
6m.
(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide recommendations
regarding grounding provisions for exterior lighting to the Royal
Commission for approval.
10) The voltages used for all exterior lighting shall be in accordance with
Table 5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
b. Building Floodlighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 83
1) Floodlighting for the exterior of a facility may be considered for security and/or
aesthetic purposes.
(a) Application of building floodlighting for security purposes shall be
discussed and approved by the Royal Commission.
(b) Application of building floodlighting for aesthetic purposes shall only be
allowed if specifically requested and approved by the Royal Commission.
Facade lighting illuminance shall meet the obtrusive light requirement
outlined in sections 5.6.3, and 5.3.
c. Area Lighting
1) Area lighting includes illumination for parking areas, public parks and walkways
which are not adjacent to roadways.
2) Exterior Area lighting may utilize a mixture of fluorescent, HID and LED
lamps/luminaires.
(a) HID sources are the most common with metal halide being used where
color rendition is critical and high pressure sodium used for less critical
applications.
(b) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are utilized for decorative applications and
where instant start is required.
(c) LED lamps/luminaires for exterior applications shall conform to the RCJ
Exterior Lighting specification. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
confirm the acceptability of LED source for exterior application with the
Royal Commission.
3) Installation requirements
(a) Direct buried armored cable shall be used for lighting circuits.
(b) Cables routed under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased
ductbanks.
d. Sports Lighting
1) Sports lighting shall utilize either High Intensity Discharge or LED light sources.
(a) Metal halide, or LED lamps/luminaires shall be used for most
applications to provide good color rendering capabilities of more than
60Ra.
(b) High pressure sodium lamps/luminaires may be used for applications
where color rendition is not critical. Several example applications
include, golf driving range, archery range, and other similar sports
venues.
(a) Underground lighting circuits shall be routed around and not under sports
fields and tracks. This will prevent future disruption to playing surfaces.
(b) Direct buried armored cable or direct buried PVC conduits with
conductors shall be used for lighting circuits.
(c) Cables routed in locations subject to possible mechanical damage or
under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased ductbanks.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 84
3) Sports lighting shall utilize LED light sources.
e. Security Lighting
1) Security lighting shall be provided for selected facilities as determined by the
Royal Commission. Security lighting shall be designed in accordance with the
Directives of the High Commission for Industrial Security (HCIS) Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
2) Security lighting shall utilize high or low pressure sodium light sources.
(a) Security lighting shall be located to be inaccessible to intruders and
protected from vandalism.
(b) Security lighting fixtures shall include vandal resistant features.
(c) Direct buried armored cable shall be used for lighting circuits.
(d) Cables routed under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased
ductbanks.
f. Illumination of Areas Adjacent to Roadway
1) People and objects adjacent to the roadway need to be seen by the driver.
Such locations include unmade verges, footways and cycle paths and the
emergency lanes of motorways.
2) The lighting for these areas should conform to the lighting criteria including
surround ratio as stated in Lighting of Roads for Motor And Pedestrian Traffic -
International Commission on Illumination Technical Report (CIE 115).
g. Lighting Recommendations for Conflict Areas
1) A conflict area is one in which traffic flows merge or cross, e.g. at intersections
or roundabouts, or where vehicles and other road users, are in close proximity,
e.g. on a shopping street or at a pedestrian crossing.
2) The lighting for these areas should conform to the lighting criteria as stated in
Lighting of Roads for Motor And Pedestrian Traffic - International Commission
on Illumination Technical Report (CIE 115) Minimum illumination requirement
for pedestrian crossings shall be as per CIE S 015/E:2005.
5. Lighting Calculations
a. Approved lighting criteria shall be developed for all interior and exterior applications.
1) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare a summary of the recommended
maintained illumination levels for all interior occupancies. Refer to Table
5.5.1.J maintained Illumination Level Recommendations by Occupancy. This
summary shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
This summary shall be part of the 30% design submissions.
2) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare a summary of the recommended
maintained illumination levels for all exterior applications. Refer to Table
5.5.1.K maintained Illumination Level Recommendations Exterior. This
summary shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
This summary shall be part of the 30% design submissions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 85
b. Lighting calculations shall be performed using either the lumen or point-by-point

methods utilizing approved RCJ software package(s). The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall prepare lighting calculations plan and at the 30% design stage for
approval by RCJ. Lighting calculations to be conducted for all differing spaces
associated with the facility.
1) Interior calculations should be carried out using approved computer software.
Approved software packages are DiaLux, ReLux, and AGI32.
2) Point-by-point method is used for more complicated geometric spaces, where
lighting performance is critical, and for exterior applications. These
calculations are typically prepared utilizing commercially available software
such as Dialux or AGi32 which was developed by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
3) Prepared calculations shall identify the performance of the selected
source/fixture with respect to the recommended lighting criteria.
4) The results of these calculations may be presented in tabular or graphic format
to illustrate the lighting performance in a formal calculation submission at the
60% design stage for the Royal Commission for review and approval.. The
results of the calculations shall be summarized in tabular form on the design
drawings.
5) The calculations shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and
approval.
c. Interior Lighting
1) All interior lighting calculations shall be prepared using point-by-point method
and shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for approval.
d. Exterior Lighting
1) All exterior lighting calculations shall be prepared using point-by-point method
and shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for approval.
N. Lighting Control Systems
1. General
a. Controls for lighting systems are intended to provide the occupants with the
capability to manually operate the artificial lighting for convenience and comfort. In
addition, automatic controls are intended to be used to enhance the security for
facilities and reduce the energy use associated with artificial lighting throughout a
facility.
b. Lighting control energy conservation strategies shall conform to the latest SBC 601.
2. Interior
a. Localized Room Controls
1) Manual Switches
(a) Local switches shall be applied in all spaces to provide the occupants
with capability to manually control the lighting fixtures.
(b) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the provision of multiple
switches to facilitate zone control and/or multiple lighting levels to suit the
functional requirements of the space.
2) Occupancy Sensors

Rev. 0 5.5 - 86
(a) Occupancy sensors shall be applied in spaces to allow the artificial

lighting to be automatically turned off when the space is unoccupied.
(b) Occupancy sensors shall be interconnected with the local switching to
facilitate manual operation by the occupants.
(c) Occupancy sensors types and locations shall be carefully selected for
the space controlled.
(d) Occupancy sensor types and common applications include the following:
(1) Ultrasonic sensors are typically applied to corridor applications due
to the increased spacing coverage.
(2) Dual technology (ultrasonic and passive infrared) are typically
applied to most applications
(e) Occupancy sensor mounting shall utilize the following options:
(1) Combination wall switch/occupancy sensor may be used for small
rooms where the location of the sensor in the wall switch adequately
covers the entire room.
(2) Wall or ceiling mounted occupancy sensors separate from the
manual wall switches are typical utilized to optimize the coverage.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate
mounting location to provide the best coverage and the least
opportunity for false activation.
3) Daylighting Sensors
(a) Daylighting sensors shall be applied in spaces with ample natural light to
automatically turn off artificial lighting when the daylight contributions are
sufficient to satisfy the lighting level requirements.
(b) Daylighting control may be applied using a space-by-space or central
system approach.
(1) Space-by-space approach includes provision of photocells to
measure the daylight contribution within the spaces and control the
lighting fixtures within that space. The daylighting control shall be
integrated with the other control means including any manual
switches and/or occupancy sensors.
(2) Central system approach includes provision of photocell(s) in a
space to measure the daylight contribution within the space and
control of the lighting in that space through the central lighting
control system.
(c) Daylighting control may be applied using the following approaches:
(1) On/off control of individual lamps within lighting fixtures.
(2) On/off control of banks of lighting fixtures in zones.
(3) Dimming control of lamps within lighting fixtures.
4) Emergency Transfer Devices
(a) Occupancies which require emergency lighting for safe egress but
require these lights to be turned off for various activities shall utilize an
emergency transfer device for the lighting controls. Emergency transfer

Rev. 0 5.5 - 87
devices sense the status of the normal power source and automatically
energize the emergency lighting in the event of a power interruption
regardless of the on/off status prior to the interruption.
5) Dimmer Switches
(a) Manual dimmer switches shall be applied in spaces where dimming of
the lighting fixtures is required.
(b) Diming switches shall be selected to coordinate with the lighting source
and associated ballast/driver.
6) Digital Timer Switch
(a) Digital timer switches shall be utilized in spaces where occupancy
sensors are not appropriate for automatic control of the lighting. Typical
applications for digital timer switches include Mechanical Equipment
Rooms, Telecom Rooms, and other spaces that are typically only
occupied for short durations.
b. Central Lighting Controls
1) General
(a) A central lighting control system shall be applied where the economics of
a central system are justified.
(b) The extent of a central lighting control system may include all spaces in
the facility or only a portion of the spaces. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations for the extent of a central
system approach to the Royal Commission for approval.
2) Relay Based System
(a) Typical central lighting control systems utilize a network of intelligent
relay panels to control the lighting circuits.
(1) The control panels house multiple relays and the lighting circuits are
routed through the panels to facilitate control of these circuits.
(2) The control panels are interconnected via cable and the system
uses a microprocessor to control the lighting from a time clock
function and/or other external devices such as switches, occupancy
sensors, photocell, etc.
3) Wireless System
(a) Wireless control is available from many manufacturers protocols
including Enocean and ZigBee. The use of wireless control devices shall
be considered by A/E and/or EPC Contractor when selecting the
appropriate central lighting control system.
(b) Use of a wireless lighting control system shall coordinate with other
functions in the facility to ensure that there are no impacts to other
wireless system in the facility. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide
recommendations for application of wireless lighting controls to the Royal
Commission for approval.
4) Integration
(a) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the benefits of integrating the
lighting control system with the direct digital control system for HVAC.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 88
(b) Integration is best done using interposed change over relay contacts or
by manufacturer proven protocol interfaces bespoke software/firmware is
not recommended.
(c) This integration may be desirable to initiate other control function in the
facility. Examples of possible control functions include:
(1) Use of occupancy sensors to initiate HVAC setback sequence when
a space is unoccupied.
(2) Use of photocell for activation of ceiling fans for air circulation.
c. Dimming Controls
1) Architectural Dimming System
(a) Occupancies that warrant a multi-zone, preset lighting control system
with dimming capability shall be provided with an architectural dimming
system.
(1) Architectural dimming system shall be provided with dimming and
control components necessary for the quantity of zones served.
(2) A master control station shall be provided and located to facilitate
the setup of preset scenes appropriate for the occupancy.
(3) Remote control stations shall be located at all entrances and other
appropriate control points such as lectern, demonstration station,
control station, etc.
(4) Common applications for architectural dimming systems include
conference rooms, meeting rooms, seminar rooms, classrooms,
public lobbies, etc.
(5) Interface with audio visual controls may also be desirable to
facilitate a single control point for various applications. A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall coordinate between the lighting control and
audio visual requirements and provide a recommendation for
integration of these systems to the Royal Commission for approval.
(6) A standard protocol is to be utilized. DALI is preferred choice
alternatives may be submitted for approval at the 10% design stage.
2) Theatrical Dimming System
(a) Various occupancies such as auditoriums, mosques and other
performance venues may warrant a more substantial dimming control
system to facilitate the required control for the associated lighting
equipment. For these unique applications, a theatrical dimming system
shall be utilized.
(1) Theatrical dimming system shall be provided with separate
cabinet(s) to house the dimming modules for all required control
channels.
(2) Control stations shall be conveniently located to facilitate setup and
control of lighting fixtures from all required control points.
(3) Interface with audio visual controls may also be desirable to
facilitate a single control point for various applications. A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall coordinate between the lighting control and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 89
audio visual requirements and provide a recommendation for

integration of these systems to the Royal Commission for approval.
(4) DMX512 is the preferred protocol for theatrical systems.
3. Exterior
a. Building floodlighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled
lighting contactor(s).
1) Include manual override (On-Off-Auto Selector Switch) and locate at the
source panel.
2) Photocell shall be located at a tamperproof height.
b. Area lighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled lighting
contactor(s).
source panel.
c. Sports lighting circuits shall be switched on and off by the energizing of master
override control. Secondary controls downstream of the master override shall
include photocell and time clock controlled lighting contactor(s).
source panel.
d. Security lighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled
lighting contactor(s).
source panel.
4. Lighting Control Strategies
a. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate control strategies for each
application. The recommended control strategies for typical applications are
summarized in Table 5.5.1.M for interior and Table 5.5.1.N. for exterior. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall develop recommendations for locations and
occupancies not identified in these tables and submit to the Royal Commission for
approval.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 90
TABLE 5.5.1.M: INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS
Localized Room Control Central Control System
Photocells for Daylighting Control (linked to

Occupancy Sensors (linked to DALI system
Low Voltage Switches or Preset Stations
Architectural Dimming System DALI
Toggle Switches – Multiple Levels
Toggle Switches – Zoned Control
Photocell for Daylighting Control
Theatrical Dimming DMX 512

Toggle Switch – Single Level
Emergency Transfer Device
Emergency Transfer Device

Occupancy Sensor(s)
Central Relay Panels

Digital Timer Switch
Dimmer Switch
DALI system)
Location/Occupancy
Offices     
Conference Rooms      
Classrooms    
Gymnasium   
Assembly Space   1 
Auditorium    1 
Public Lobby   1 
Atrium   1 
Warehouse  
Repair Shop  
Central Plant  
Corridors   1 
Restrooms   1
Electrical Room 
Mechanical Room   
Telecom Room  
Table 5.5.1.M Notes:
1. Manual On/Auto/Off, Absence detection a time delay of 15 minutes.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 91
TABLE 5.5.1.N: EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS
Localized Control Central Control
Contactor with Astronomical Time Clock
Street lighting LMS (DALI wireless)

Architectural lighting control (DALI)
Programmed time clock

Occupancy Sensor(s)
Multi-pole Contactor
Occupancy Sensors
Photocell at Fixture
Common Photocell
Toggle Switch
Location/Occupancy
Building Floodlighting    
Public Park
Walkways (public) 
Parking (public)  
Walkways (private)  
Parking (private) 
Sports Lighting  
Security    

Rev. 0 5.5 - 92
SUBSECTION 5.5.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
5.5.2. TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A. General
1. Scope
a. General
1) The Telecommunication Design Guidelines provide:
(a) The basis to be followed by all parties making calculations and/or
preparing drawings and specifications of telecommunications
networks within RCJ Industrial Cities including the engineering
design phase of Contracts where Engineering, Procurement and
Construction are combined (EPC Contracts).
(b) The framework within which work will be performed by all A/E and/or
EPC Contractors to ensure uniformity throughout the infrastructure
of the Project and compatibility within the Royal Commission
Boundary.
b. This Subsection does not provide design information normally found in
available textbooks, handbooks, codes and standards, nor does it attempt to
duplicate design criteria within the expertise of the A/E and/or Contractor.
Decisions are to be developed for specific applications as design progresses.
c. The purpose of this chapter is to indicate the minimum level of quality required
by the RCJ in order to:
1) Define the role of the Authorized Representatives and the
responsibilities of the A/E and/or Contractors, and
2) Provide a reference basis for Saudi Arabian and International Codes
and standards, and for the Guideline Specifications and Guideline
Details issued by the RCJ.
d. Where works interface with Saudi Telecommunication Company (STC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with STC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the STC.
2. Definitions
a. The following definitions apply to this Subsection :
1) “Address” An identifying name, label, or number for a data terminal,
source, or storage location calculation.
2) “Alarm Notification Appliance” A fire alarm system component such as a
bell, horn, speaker, light, or text display that provides audible, tactile, or
visible outputs, or any combination thereof.
3) “Ampacity” The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry
continuously under the conditions of use without exceeding its
temperature rating.
4) “Analog data” Data represented by scalar values.
5) “Annunciator” A unit containing one or more indicator lamps,
alphanumeric displays, or other equivalent means in which each
indication provides status information about a circuit, condition, or
location.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 93
6) “Application Account” Refers to the account name used to run

applications as either a service or a background process.
7) “Application Software” The software written specifically to perform
functional requirements for an individual plant when standard software
packages cannot be configured to meet the requirements. Application
software works with the standard operating software and access the
SCADA real-time and historical database data.
8) “Assigned Line” Cable pair which is connected to the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF), and currently being used as a subscriber's line.
9) “Attenuation” A measure of the decrease in energy transmission “or loss
of light” expressed in decibel (dB). In optical fibers, attenuation is
primarily due to absorption and scattering losses.
10) “Audible Alarm Notification Appliance” A notification appliance that
alerts by the sense of hearing.
11) “Audio Amplifier or Pre-amplifier” Electronic equipment that increases
the current or voltage, or both, potential of an audio signal intended for
use by another piece of audio equipment.
12) “Availability” The percent of time a system or component remains on
line and performs as specified.
13) “Backup Power System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged
for automatic, delayed, or manual connection to the alternate power
source and that serves all of the loads identified as essential for the
facility.
14) “BACnet” A communications protocol for building automation and
control networks. It is an ASHRAE, ANSI, and ISO standard protocol.
BACnet allows communication of building automation and control
systems for applications such as heating, ventilating and air-
conditioning control, lighting control, access control, and fire detection
systems and their associated equipment. BACnet is addressed in
ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135 - 2012, and became ISO 16484-5 in
2003 - is a communications protocol for building automation and control
networks and provides mechanisms for computerized building
automation devices to exchange information, regardless of the
particular building service they perform.
15) “Bandwidth” In electrical transmission systems, the range between the
highest and lowest frequencies of a transmission channel.
16) “Bidirectional” Providing for information transfer in both directions
between master and remote terminals (of a communication channel).
17) “Binary digit” A character used to represent one of the two digits in the
binary number system and the basic unit of information in a two-state
device. The two states of a binary digit are usually represented by “0”
and “1”. Synonym: bit.
18) “Bonded (Bonding)” Connected to establish electrical continuity and
conductivity.
19) “Bonding Jumper” A reliable conductor to ensure the required electrical
conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 94
20) “Bonding Jumper, Equipment” The connection between two or more

portions of the equipment grounding conductor at the service.
21) “Buffer” A device in which data are stored temporarily in the course of
transmission from one point to another; used to compensate for a
difference in the flow of data, or time of occurrence of events, when
transmitting data from one device to another.
22) “Cabinet” A large, above ground connection point.
23) “Cable, Coaxial” A cable constructed with a wire conductor surrounded
by a concentric outer conductor spaced by a dielectric.
24) “Cable, Distribution” A cable usually connecting the cross connection
point to the subscriber point.
25) “Cable, Feeder” A cable connecting the exchange to a cross-connection
point or directly to a subscriber.
26) “Cable, Lateral Distribution” A cable branching from a main distribution
cable to access subscribers on side streets.
27) “Cable, Main Distribution” An arterial cable, originating at a cross-
connect cabinet, and extending the cabinet pairs to the lateral
distribution cables.
28) “Cable, VF Telephone” A number of insulated conductors arranged in
pairs, each pair capable of voice frequency transmission.
29) “Cable Count (reading)” A method of designating and identifying the
individual pairs in a multi-pair cable.
30) “Call Up Time” The time between when the operator initially enters a
display request and when all objects, lines, values (good or invalid),
trends and other parts of the display have been fully presented to the
operator.
31) “Carrying Plant” That portion of telephone Outside Plant (ducts, jointing
chambers, etc.) that is used to carry and route telephone cable and
terminals.
32) “Central Office (C.O.)” See Exchange.
33) “Central Office Homerun” Type of Centralized FTTH architecture where
splitters are located inside the central office & no splitting beyond.
34) “Centralized Topology FTTH” Type of FTTH architecture where fiber
optic cable from OLT is split only once before reaching customers.
There are two types of Centralized FTTH topology namely: Central
Office Homerun and Local Convergence Point.
35) “Centrex Services” Subscriber group services utilizing the central office
PBX facility, rather than a customer owned EPABX.
36) “Circuit Breaker” A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-
automatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a
predetermined overcurrent without damage to itself when properly
applied within its rating.
37) “Coating” A layer of composite plastic material covering the fiber to
provide mechanical protection.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 95
38) “Color Rendering Index” Quantitative measure of the ability of a light

source to reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison
with an ideal or natural light source.
39) “Community Antenna Television System (CATV)” A cable system
distributing television and radio programs from a central
reception/control point to individual subscribers, normally on a coaxial
cable.
40) “Command” Commands are sent by operators or by applications.
Commands can be binary or analog (set-point). Commands require
reliable, secure, and timely delivery. Command data shall be delivered
to its target as quickly as possible, typically in the order of seconds or
sub-seconds. If a command cannot be delivered or acted upon, the
SCADA system shall report this to the operator.
41) “Communication channel” A facility that permits signaling between two
terminals i.e. a path between master station and an RTU, PLC or a
subsystem.
42) “Communication Equipment Room (CER)” Buildings drop point to house
indoor FDT cabinets, FAT and ONT's.
43) “Communications Subsystem” The hardware and software that
performs the transmitting and receiving of digital information.
44) “Concealed” Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the
building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even
though they may become accessible by withdrawing them.
45) “Conduit” A single duct inside a building.
46) “Configurable” - The capability to select and connect standard hardware
modules to create a system, or the capability to change functionality or
sizing of software functions by changing parameters without having to
modify or regenerate software.
47) “Console” A collection of one or more workstations and associated
equipment such as printers and communications devices used by an
individual to interact with the SCADA and perform other functions.
48) “Continuous Load” A load where the maximum current is expected to
continue for 3 hours or more.
49) “Cross-Connection Point (CCP) or flexibility point” In the local cable
network, equipment which enables an incoming pair in a cabinet to be
connected to any of the outgoing pairs in a separate cable, by use of
jumper wires or their equivalent.
50) “Cross-Connection or Distribution Area” The geographical area served
from a cross-connection cabinet.
51) “Crosstalk” The unwanted transfer of energy from one circuit to another.
52) “Cycle” The scanning of inputs, execution of algorithms and
transmission of output values to devices.
53) “Cyclic Polling (data request)” The process by which a data acquisition
system selectively requests data from one or more of its RTUs. An RTU

Rev. 0 5.5 - 96
may be requested to respond with all, or a selected portion of, the data
available.
54) “Dead Band” The range through which an input signal may be varied
without initiating an action or observable change in output signal.
55) “Dead Pair” - Within a cable, an extension of a pair that has been used,
or a pair that is not terminated at either end.
56) “Demand or Diversity Factor” - The ratio of the maximum demand of a
system, or part of a system, to the total connected load of a system for
the part of the system under consideration.
57) “Device” A unit of an electrical system that carries or controls electric
energy as its principal function.
58) “Direct Exchange Line (DEL)” A telephone pair connected between a
local switch and subscriber, by whatever means.
59) “Direct Service Area” The area in which subscriber pairs are connected
directly to the exchange without passing through a cross-connection
point.
60) “Directional Coupler” A splitter in which the attenuation between any
two output ports exceeds the sum of the attenuations between the input
port and each of those output ports.
61) “Disconnecting Means” or “Isolator” A device, or group of devices, or
other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected
from their source of supply.
62) “Distributed / Cascaded” Type of FTTH architecture where fiber from
OLT is split twice (outside the Exchange/ or one in the Exchange & one
outside the Exchange) before reaching customers location. Splitting
may be located in Exchange, FDT, manholes, handholes or in FAT.
63) “Distribution” In conventional method of FTTH deployment this is
equivalent to the secondary cables in copper network. These are the
fiber cables that connect FDT or Cross Connect Cabinet to the last
distribution point (an FAT or a splice in a handhole) before Drops. In
short, it is the cable in between the Feeder and the Drops.
64) “Distribution Amplifier” - An amplifier designed to feed one or more
branch or spur feeders. Note: This is a general term embracing branch
amplifier and line extender amplifier.
65) “Distribution Points (DP)” The last point in the exchange area cable
network from which pairs are extended to individual subscribers.
66) “Drops” The fiber from the last distribution point up to customer's
location.
67) “Duct” A pipe provided to facilitate the installation of cables and
provides protection for the cables.
68) “Duct Bank” A multiple array of ducts.
69) “Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)” The interference in signal
transmission or reception resulting from the radiation of undesirable
frequency interfering electrical or magnetic and electrical fields.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 97
70) “Emergency Systems” Electrical systems legally required to be installed

and that supply loads essential to safety and life.
71) “Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications” Dedicated manual or
automatic facilities for originating and distributing voice instructions, as
well as alert and evacuation signals pertaining to a fire emergency, to
the occupants of a building.
72) “Enclosed” Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that
prevents persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
73) “Enclosure” The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally
contacting energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical
damage.
74) “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)” Is software that allows the
integration of operations and resources and manages them through one
program. This approach to management is called Integration. Most
large companies in the world use ERP to manage various aspects of
their businesses. These are product planning, parts planning, parts
procurement and inventory management, interacting with suppliers,
providing customer service, and tracking orders. It can also include
applications to manage finance and human resources.
75) “Equipment” A general term, including material, fittings, devices,
appliances, luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like used as a
part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation.
76) “Equipment Side” That side of the MDF that is connected to equipment,
often called Horizontal side.
77) “Equipment System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for
delayed, automatic, or manual connection to the alternate power source
and that serves primarily 3-phase power equipment.
78) “Erlang” A dimensionless unit that is used in telephony as a measure of
offered load or carried load on service-providing elements such as
telephone circuits or telephone switching equipment.
79) “Exchange (central office)” A system of switches enabling individual
telecommunication circuits to be automatically connected.
80) “Exchange Area” An area served by the local exchange.
81) “Faceplate” - A graphic element that mimics the front panel of an analog
controller instrument, hardwired push-button or switch.
82) “Fail-Over” Occurs automatically without user intervention, transparent
to the user.
83) “Feeder (Telecommunications)” Equivalent to the primary cables in the
copper network. The fiber cables that connect the exchange to the FDT
or a splice point in manhole that serve as a cross connect to Distribution
network.
84) “Fiber Access Terminal (FAT)” A distribution point in the distribution end
that distributes the drop fibers to each customer. It can also house
splitters to distribute drops to homes and offices

Rev. 0 5.5 - 98
85) “Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF)” Exchange termination equipment

where fibers from OLT are split and jointed to Feeder cable when there
is mass FTTH deployment.
86) “Fiber Distribution Terminal (FDT)” A hub where all the fiber from the
telecom provider's central office is split and distributed to the end users.
87) “Fiber Termination Box (FTB)” Customer Lead-In Unit, installed at the
customer outer wall for termination of incoming & indoor fibers.
88) “Fiber to the Home (FTTH)” Access technology architecture that brings
fiber optic cable from the exchange direct to customer's location at high
bandwidth delivering triple play (voice, video and data) from a single
fiber.
89) “Fire Alarm” The giving, signaling or transmission to any public fire
station, or company or to any officer or employee thereof, whether by
telephone, spoken word or otherwise, of information to the effect that
there is a fire at or near the place indicated by the person giving,
signaling, or transmitting such information.
90) “Fire Alarm Control Unit” A system component that receives inputs from
automatic and manual fire alarm devices and is capable of supplying
power to detection devices and transponder(s) of off-premises
transmitter(s). The control unit is capable of providing a transfer of
power to the notification appliances and transfer of condition to relays of
devices.
91) “Fire Alarm Signal” A signal initiated by a fire alarm-initiating device
such as a manual fire alarm box, automatic fire detector, water-flow
switch, or other device whose activation is indicative of the presence of
a fire or fire signature.
92) “Fire Alarm System” A system or portion of a combination system
consisting of components and circuits arranged to monitor and
annunciate the status of fire alarm or supervisory signal-initiating
devices and to initiate the appropriate response to those signals.
93) “Fire Command Center” The principal attended or unattended location
where the status of the detection, alarm communications and control
systems is displayed, and from which system(s) can be manually
controlled.
94) “Fire Detector, Automatic” A device designed to detect the presence of
a fire signature and to initiate action.
95) “Fire Protection System” Approved devices, equipment and systems or
combinations of systems used to detect a fire, activate and alarm,
extinguish or control a fire, control or manage smoke and products of a
fire or any combination thereof.
96) “Fire Safety Functions” Building and fire control functions that are
intended to increase the level of life safety for occupants or to control
the spread of the harmful effects of fire.
97) “Flag” A character that signals the occurrence of some event. Usually, a
field of 1 bit.
98) “Footway” An area not normally accessible to vehicular traffic.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 99
99) “Foreign Exchange Line” A telephone connection from one local

exchange which serves a telephone station in the serving area of
another local exchange (out of area working).
100) “Gigabit Passive Optical Network (GPON)” ITU G.984 Recommendation
that describes a flexible optical fiber access network cable of supporting
bandwidth requirements of subscriber and covers system with nominal
line rates of 1.2 Gbps and 2.4 Gbps in downstream direction; and 155
Mbps up to 2.4 Gbps in the upstream direction.
101) “Handhole” A small jointing chamber of the joint box category but
restricted to footway use only.
102) “Heat Detector” A fire detector that senses heat produced by burning
substances.
103) “Initiating Device” A system component that originates transmission of a
change-of-state condition, such as in a smoke detector, manual fire
alarm box, or supervisory switch.
104) “Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)” A circuit to which automatic or manual
initiating devices are connected where the signal received does not
identify the individual device operated.
105) “Insertion Loss” The attenuation at a fixed frequency of a test tone
inserted at one end of a circuit measured at the far end of the same
circuit in a resistive termination, and recorded in dB at 20 °C.
106) “Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)” An intelligent electronic device that
perform specific control and/or data gathering function.
107) “Intercom System” A communication system linking different rooms
within a building or other facilities.
108) “Interrupting rating” The highest current at rated voltage that a device is
intended to interrupt under standard test conditions.
109) “Installed Pair” Cable pair that has been placed and jointed.
110) “Isolator” Refer to “Disconnecting Means”.
111) “Jack” A receptacle used with a plug to make an electrical connection
between communication circuits. Jacks are considered the female
component of a jack/plug connector.
112) “Joint (splice)” The connection of two or more lengths of wire or cable at
a single point.
113) “Joint Box” A jointing chamber the top of which consists of fully
removable covers.
114) “Jointing Chamber” A general term for underground structures in which
cables are placed and jointed.
115) “Labeled” Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label,
symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to
the Royal Commission and concerned with product evaluation, that
maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or
materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates

Rev. 0 5.5 - 100
compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified

manner.
116) “Line Extender Amplifier” An amplifier to compensate for the attenuation
in a spur feeder.
117) “Line Side” That side of the MDF that connects to outside plant cable
and that includes protectors. Often called Vertical side.
118) “Life Safety Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting
of feeders and branch circuits intended to provide adequate power
needs to ensure safety to building occupants and that are automatically
connected to alternate power sources during interruption of the normal
power source.
119) “Listed” Equipment or materials included on a list published by an
approved testing laboratory, inspection agency or other organization
concerned with current product evaluation that maintains periodic
inspection of production of listed equipment or materials, and whose
listing states that equipment or materials comply with approved
nationally recognized standards and have been tested or evaluated and
found suitable for use in a specified manner.
120) “Local Convergence Point (LCP)” Type of Centralized FTTH
architecture where splitters are concentrated in an FDT or a manhole
outside the exchange.
121) “Local Area Network (LAN)” A LAN is a network used for bit serial
communication of information between interconnected, independent
devices and is completely under user jurisdiction and limited to being
within a user’s premises.
122) “Logs” Files or printouts of information in chronological order.
123) “Local Exchange” An exchange which serves subscribers in a defined
and limited geographical area.
124) “Local Exchange Code” A letter designation used to indicate the
exchange. This alpha designation will be used as part of the
designation of each jointing chamber, Interface Cabinet or Cross
Connect Cabinet, and each cable.
125) “Loudspeaker” Equipment that converts an AC electric signal into an
acoustic signal.
126) “Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” Location where copper OSP cables
are terminated inside the exchange for access to Network switch.
127) “Management Information System (MIS)” Provides information which is
needed to manage organizations efficiently and effectively.
Management Information Systems involve three primary resources:
people, technology, and information or decision making. Management
information systems are distinct from other information systems in that
they are used to analyze operational activities in the organization.
128) “Manhole” A jointing chamber, accessed via a restricted opening in the
top.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 101
129) “Manual Fire Alarm Box” A manually operated device used to initiate an
alarm signal.
130) “Main Incomer” Refer to “Service”.
131) “Maintenance Pair” A cable pair terminated on both ends, one end of
which assigns the pair a count and the other end terminated at a
subscriber’s premises, but not connected to subscriber apparatus.
132) “Master Station” Server or servers and software responsible for
communicating with the field equipment (RTUs, PLCs, etc.), and then to
the HMI software running on workstations in the control room, or
elsewhere. Master station may include multiple servers, distributed
software applications, and disaster recovery sites. The Master Station
includes all networks switch and connectivity devices required to
communicate with RTUs and remote sites.
133) “Multimode Fiber (MMF)” A fiber that allows more than one optical
mode to propagate. Used for shorter distances; usually a larger
diameter fiber of plastic or other low-cost material.
134) “Multiple-Station Alarm Device” Two or more single-station alarm
devices that can be interconnected such that activation of one causes
all integral or separate audible alarms to operate. It also can consist of
one single-station alarm device having connections to other detectors or
a manual fire alarm box.
135) “Multiple-Station Smoke Alarm” Two or more single-station alarm
devices that are capable of interconnection such that activation of one
causes all integral or separate audible alarms to operate.
136) “Neutral Conductor” The conductor connected to the neutral point of a
system that is intended to carry current under normal conditions.
137) “Nonlinear Load” A load where the wave shape of the steady-state
current does not follow the wave shape of the applied voltage.
138) “Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC)” A circuit or path directly
connected to a notification appliance.
139) “Nuisance Alarm” An alarm caused by mechanical failure, malfunction,
improper installation, or lack of proper maintenance, or an alarm
activated by a cause that cannot be determined.
140) “Operating System” Software that runs on computers and manages the
computer hardware and provides common services for execution of
application software.
141) “Operating Wavelength” The light wavelength at which a system is
specified, normally expressed in nanometers (nm). Most single mode
fibers can operate at 1300 or 1550 nm.
142) “Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)” Location where fibers from OLT
ports are terminated then interfaced to Feeder cable of FTTH.
143) “Optical Line terminal (OLT)” Located inside the exchange and serve as
the termination point of OSP Feeder fiber cables. This is an FTTH
access platform designed for ITU-T GPON standard to easily deliver RF

Rev. 0 5.5 - 102
video and TDM voice services while providing a smooth migration path
to IP Triple Play services.
144) “Optical Link Loss Budget” Total losses allowed for satisfactory
operation of an optical fiber system.
145) “Optical Network Terminal (ONT)” A media converter that is usually
installed outside/inside the home or buildings designed for delivering
multi line POTS, Data and Video.
146) “Optical Network Unit (ONU)” A unit located outside customer's area to
serve more customers.
147) “Outside Plant” That portion of telephone plant (including carrying plant)
between the telephone exchange building and the subscriber's
premises.
148) “Overcurrent” Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or
the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload, short circuit,
or ground fault.
149) “Paging” Calling out the names of persons (especially by a loudspeaker
system).
150) “Panelboard” Refer to “Main Distribution Board”, “Sub Main Distribution
Board” and “Distribution Board”.
151) “Passive Optical Network (PON)” An architecture using optical
transmission system designed to carry signals via fiber optic cable from
the central office directly to end users such as businesses and multi
dwelling units. Passive means that there is no active or powered
element in between the exchange and the customer's location.
152) “Passive Optical Splitter (POS)” Split the signal bi-directionally from a
single fiber to multi fiber without any power application.
153) “Pay Telephone” A coin/card operated telephone for use by the general
public.
154) “Plug” The male component of a connection providing a method to
connect communication equipment to the communication outlets.
155) “Protocol” A strict procedure required to initiate and maintain
communication with the RTU or a PLC. Open Industry Standard
communication protocol is defined as a protocol that has a published
specification and available for all suppliers to read and implement and
will not lock the customer into a particular vendor or group. The Protocol
may be extended, or offered in subset form and supported by
publication of reference information.
156) “Public Address System” An electronic amplification system used as a
communication system in public areas.
157) “Redundant Configuration” A system and/or subsystem that provides for
a standby module with automatic switchover from the primary unit to the
standby module, in the event of a failure, without loss of a system
function. Both active and standby modules utilize diagnostics to assist
in identifying and locating failures and to permit modules to be removed
for repair and/or replacement.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 103
158) “Registered Jack (RJ)” Registered jack wiring configurations developed

by Bell System for the connection of customer premises equipment to
the public network. Registered jacks serve telephone and data
applications. The most common types are RJ45 and RJ11.
159) “Report-by-Exception” The reporting of data (e.g., from RTU to master
station) only when the data either changes state (e.g., for a status or
digital input point) or exceeds a predefined dead-band (e.g., for an
analog input point).
160) “Right-of-Way (ROW)” A bounded strip of land reserved exclusively for
one utility.
161) “Round Trip Delay (latency)” The time required for a packet of data to
travel from a specific source to a specific destination and back again.
Latency is measured by sending a packet that is returned to the sender
and the round-trip time is considered the latency.
162) “Scan” The process by which a data acquisition system interrogates
remote terminals or points for data.
163) “Security Code” A group of data bits calculated by a transmitting
terminal from the information within its message by use of a
prearranged algorithm, appended to the transmitted message, and
tested by the receiving terminal to determine the validity of the received
message.
164) “Self-Diagnostic” The capability of an electronic device to monitor its
own status and indicate faults that occur within the device.
165) “Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)” A circuit path between any combination of
addressable appliances or devices, circuit interfaces, control units, or
transmitters over which multiple system input signals or output signals
or both are carried.
166) “Single Mode Fiber (SMF)” A fiber that supports the propagation of only
one mode. Used for maximum distances; usually a small, precise
diameter (8 to 9 microns) fiber of monolithic quartz.
167) “Single-Station Smoke Alarm” An Assembly incorporating the detector,
the control equipment, and the alarm-sounding device in one unit,
operated from a power supply either in the unit or obtained at the point
of installation.
168) “Smoke Alarm” A single or multiple-station alarm responsive to smoke
and not connected to a system.
169) “Smoke Detector” A listed device that senses visible or invisible
particles of combustion.
170) “Spare Pair” A cable pair which has been terminated at one end, but is
not in service.
171) “Splice” See Joint.
172) “Splice Loss” The amount of loss of light energy caused by angular
misalignment, fiber end separation or lateral displacement of fiber axis.
173) “Splitter” A device in which the signal power at the input port is divided
equally or unequally between two or more output ports.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 104
174) “Spur Feeder” A feeder to which splitters, subscriber taps or looped

system outlet are connected.
175) “Standby Systems” Include alternate power systems for such
applications where interruption of normal power would cause discomfort
to personnel or damage to product.
176) “Station Equipment” The portion of telephone equipment installed at the
subscriber's premises.
177) “Subscribers' Apparatus” A terminal equipment which may be
connected to the public telephone network, such as telephone
instruments and sets, data terminals, telex machines, and PBX.
178) “Subscriber's Lead-in” That part of the outside plant that includes the
subscriber's line between the distribution point and subscriber's
premises.
179) “Subscriber's Lines” - The circuits connecting the subscriber's
apparatus to the local exchange.
180) “Subscriber's Service Line” - That part of the subscriber's lead-in
between the distribution point and the telephone set.
181) “Subscriber Termination” That portion of telephone plant that includes
the interface between outside plant and station equipment, normally
including the station protector.
182) “Supervisory Control” A telemetry based process control command
initiated from a Master Central Station either manually by operator or
automatically by an application to initiate an action and/or change
analog set point in a remotely located Control Stations over a
bidirectional communications link using specific communication
protocol. Such command is dependent of having quality process related
alarm/event data and follows timely bidirectional confirmation and
acknowledgment executing sequences between the master and the
station known as select/check before Operate (CBO).
183) “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)” Refers to an
industrial computer telemetry based control system that monitors and
controls remotely connected processes.
184) “Supervising Station” A facility that receives signals and at which
personnel are in attendance at all times to respond to these signals.
185) “Supervisory Service” The service required to monitor performance of
guard tours and the operative condition of fixed suppression systems or
other systems for the protection of life and property.
186) “Supervisory Signal” A signal indicating the need of action in connection
with the supervision of guard tours, the fire suppression systems or
equipment, or the maintenance features of related systems.
187) “Supervisory Signal-Initiating Device” An initiating device such as a
valve supervisory switch, water level indicator, or low-air pressure
switch on a dry-pipe sprinkler system whose change of state signals an
off-normal condition and its restoration to normal of a fire protection or
life safety system; or a need for action in connection with guard tours,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 105
fire suppression systems or equipment, or maintenance feature of

related systems.
188) “Switchboard” A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on
which are mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent
and other protective devices, buses, and usually instruments.
Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear as well as from the
front and are not intended to be installed in cabinets.
189) “System Account” Refers to account names used by the operating
system.
190) “Telephone Density (line density or penetration)” Is the number of
telephones (or lines) relative to a characteristic element such as
number of inhabitants (telephones per 100 population), number of
house-holds, business premises, area units, income groups, etc., used
generally for planning purposes.
191) “Telephone Subscriber” An individual or corporation (including
government agencies, municipal authorities) with a current subscription
of one line or more.
192) “Telephone Instrument” Any apparatus equipped with a microphone and
earphone (sender and receiver) which is or may be connected to a
telephone system and which may be used for voice telephone
conversation.
193) “Telephone Station” A telephone instrument installed and connected to
a public telephone system.
194) “Terminal Block” A passive electrical device used to terminate and
cross-connect outside plant and central office equipment.
195) “Termination” The point at which pairs in a cable are terminated.
196) “Toll Cable” The cable that carries toll circuits.
197) “Toll Circuits” Circuits between one toll center and another. (such as Al-
Jubail Industrial City and Dammam).
198) “Transaction” A sequence of messages between cooperating terminals
to perform a specific function. Usually, a minimum of one message in
each direction that is comprised of a command followed by a response.
199) “Trouble Signal” A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device
indicative of a fault in a monitored circuit or component.
200) “Trunk Amplifier” An amplifier to compensate for the attenuation in a
trunk feeder.
201) “Trunk Cable (junction cable)” A cable connecting two local telephone
exchanges.
202) “Trunk Circuit (junction circuit)” A circuit between two local telephone
exchanges.
203) “Trunk Feeder” A feeder used for the transmission of signals between a
head-end station and a distribution point or between distribution points.
204) “Twisted Pair Cable (TP)” A type of communication transmission cable
in which two individually insulated wires are twisted around each other

Rev. 0 5.5 - 106
to reduce induction (thus interference) from one wire to other. The pair
may be surrounded by a shield, insulating jacket, to form Shielded
Twisted Pair (STP) cable, otherwise it is Unshielded Twisted Pair
(UTP).
205) “Unit Cable” A unit shall consist of 25 cable pairs, specifically color
coded. Cables larger than 25 pairs shall be assembled as groups of
units where each unit is separated from all other units by a colored unit
binder as defined in the Guideline Specifications.
206) “Visible Alarm Notification Appliance” - notification appliance that alerts
by sense of sight.
207) “Voltage (of a circuit)” The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit
concerned.
208) “Voltage, Nominal” A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for
the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (such as
400/230 volts). The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary
from the nominal within a range that permits satisfactory operation of
equipment.
209) “Wave Division Multiplexing (WDM)” - Multiplexing of signals by
transmitting them at different wavelengths through the same fiber.
210) “Wireless Protection System” - A system or a part of a system that can
transmit and receive signals without the aid of wire.
211) “Zone” A defined area within the protected premises. A zone can define
an area from which a signal can be received, an area to which a signal
can be sent, or an area in which a form of control can be executed.
3. Abbreviations
a. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection :
1) A: Amperes
2) AAC: Advanced Application Controllers
3) AC: Alternating Current
4) ACD: Automatic Call Distribution
5) ACI: Adjacent Channel Interference
6) ADSL: Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
8) AES: Advanced Encryption Standard
9) AFF: Above Finished Floor
10) AFFL: Above Finished Floor Level
11) AGL: Above Ground Level
12) AIM: Automated Infrastructure Management
13) ALMS: Alarm Management System
14) AND: Access Network Development

Rev. 0 5.5 - 107
15) ANN: Artificial Neural Networks

16) ANPR: Automatic Plate Number Recognition
18) AON: Active Optical Network
19) AOS: Application Object Servers
20) AP: Access Points
21) AP1: Access Service Provider
22) AP2: Application Program Interface
23) APC: Angled Physical Contact Optical Fiber Connection
24) APON: ATM Passive Optical Network
25) ARP: Address Resolution Protocol
26) ASC: Advanced Specific Controllers
27) ASI: Asynchronous Serial Interface
28) ATF: Active Tracking Filters
29) ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode
30) ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch
31) AV: Audiovisual
32) AVC: Advanced Video Coding
33) BACnet: Building Automation & Control Networks
35) BC: Building Controllers
36) BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level
37) BIM: Building Information Modeling
38) BITS: Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
40) BPON: Broadband Passive Optical Network
41) BYOD: Bring Your Own Device
42) CAD: Computer-Aided Design
43) CAN: Customer Access Network
44) CAT: Category
45) CATV: Community Antenna Television System
46) CB: Customer Building
47) CBD: Central Business District
48) CBO: Check Before Operate
49) CCI: Co-Channel Interference

Rev. 0 5.5 - 108
50) CCMP: Counter Mode Cipher Block Chaining Message

Authentication Code Protocol
51) CCP: Cross-Connection Point
52) CCSO: Co-located Cabinet for Shared Operators
53) CCTV: Closed Circuit Television
54) CER: Communication Equipment Room
55) CI: Circuit Integrity
56) CMS: Condition Monitoring System
57) CO: Central Office
58) CoPP: Control Plane Protection
59) COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf
60) CPE: Customer Premises Equipment
61) CR: Critical
62) CRI: Color Rendering Index
63) DAHS: Data Acquisition and Historization System
64) DAI: Dynamic ARP Inspection
65) dB: Decibel
66) dBm: Decibel-milliwatts
67) dBmV: Decibel-millivolts
68) dBµV: Decibel-microvolts
69) DC: Direct Current
70) DCS: Distributed Control System
71) DDC: Direct Digital Control
72) DEL: Direct Exchange Line
73) DFS: Dynamic Frequency Selection
74) DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
75) DID: Direct Inward Dial
76) DMS: Dynamic Message Signs
77) DMW: Digital Microwave Radio
78) DNP: Distributed Network Protocol
79) DNS: Domain Name System
80) DOD: Direct Outward Dial
81) DONCP: Device Object Naming Convention Plan
82) DP: Distribution Point
83) DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point

Rev. 0 5.5 - 109
84) DTMF: Dual-tone Multi-Frequency Signaling

85) DVB-S: Digital Video Broadcasting — Satellite
86) DWDM: Dense Wave Division Multiplexing
87) E2E: End To End
88) EBU: Enterprise Business Unit
89) EDA: Equipment Distribution Area
90) EF: Entrance Facility
91) EIA: Electronic Industries Association
92) EIRP: Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power
93) EKTS: Electronic Key Telephone Service
94) EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility
95) EMC1: Electrical Metallic Tubing
96) EMCS: Energy Management and Control System
97) EMI: Electromagnetic Interference
98) EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing
99) EPABX: Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange
101) EPON: Ethernet Passive Optical Network
102) ER: Entrance Room
103) ER1: Equipment Room
104) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning
105) ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute
106) FAT: Fiber Access Terminal
107) FAT1: Factory Acceptance Test
108) FC: FC Optical Fiber Connector Designation
109) FCC: Federal Communication Commission
110) FDDI: Fiber Distributed Data Interface
111) FDF: Fiber Distribution Frame
112) FDH: Fiber Distribution Hub
113) FDT: Fiber Distribution Terminal
114) FF: Foundation Fieldbus System
115) FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit
116) FNC: Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit
117) FNF: Flexible NetFlow
118) FO: Fiber Optic

Rev. 0 5.5 - 110
119) FOES: Fiber Optic Ethernet Switch

120) FSAN: Full Service Access Network
121) FSD: Functional Specification Document
122) FTB: Fiber Termination Box
123) FTP: File Transfer Protocol
124) FTTB: Fiber To the Building
125) FTTC: Fiber To the Curb (Electronic cabinets)
126) FTTH: Fiber To The Home
127) FTTP: Fiber to the Premises (Home & Business)
128) FTTX: Fiber to the ____ (Refer to FTTB, FTTC, FTTH and FTTP)
129) GB: Gigabyte
130) Gbps: Gigabits Per Second
131) GEM Guiding Engineering Manual
132) GHz: Gigahertz
133) GI: Galvanized Iron
134) GIS: Geographical Information System
135) GPCS Guiding Procurement Construction Specifications
136) GPON: Gigabit Passive Optical Network
137) GPRS: General Practice Radio Service
138) GPS: Global Positioning System
139) GSM: Global System for Mobile
140) GUI: Graphic User Interface
141) HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
142) HBU: Home Business Unit
143) HC: Horizontal Crossconnect
145) HD: High Definition
146) HDA: Horizontal Distribution Area
147) HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface
148) HDPE: High Density Polyethylene
149) HDTV: High Definition Television
150) HFC: Hybrid Fiber Coaxial
151) HH: Handhole
152) HID: High Intensity Discharge
153) HMI: Human Machine Interface

Rev. 0 5.5 - 111
154) HTTP: Hypertext Transfer Protocol

155) HTTPS: HTTP Secure
157) Hz: Hertz
158) I&R: Department of Installation & Repair
159) IAMS: Instrument Asset Monitoring System
160) IC: Intermediate Crossconnect
161) ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
162) ID: Inner Diameter
163) IDC: Initiating Device Circuit
164) IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame
166) IED: Intelligent Electronic Devices
167) IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
170) IGMP: Internet Group Management Protocol
171) IMS: Information Management System
172) IP: Internet Protocol
173) IPxx: International Protection Marking, IP Code
174) IPTV: Internet Protocol Television
175) IPv4: Internet Protocol Version 4
176) IPv6: Internet Protocol Version 6
177) IR: Infrared
178) IRD: Integrated Receiver Decoder
179) ISO: The International Organization for Standardization
180) IT: Information Technology
181) ITS: Intelligent Transportation System
182) ITU: International Telecommunication Union
183) ITU-T: ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector
184) Kbps: Kilobit Per Second
185) KHz: Kilo-hertz
187) KVM: Keyboard/Video/Mouse
188) KW: Kilo-watts

Rev. 0 5.5 - 112

190) LC: Optical Fiber Connector Designation
191) LCD: Liquid Crystal Diode
192) LCP: Local Convergence Point
193) LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
195) LNB: Low-Noise Block Downconverter
196) LS: Life Safety
197) LV: Low Voltage
198) MAC: Media Access Control (Common use is MAC Address)
199) MAN: Metropolitan Area Network
200) Mbps: Megabits Per Second
201) MC: Main Cross-Connect
202) MC1: Media Converter
203) MCIT: Ministry of Communication and Information Technology
204) MDA: Main Distribution Area
205) MDB: Main Distribution Board
206) MDF: Main Distribution Frame
207) MDNS: Multicast Domain Name System
208) MDU: Multi Dwelling Unit
209) MH: Manhole
210) MHz: Megahertz
211) MIMO: Multiple Input/Multiple Output
212) MIS:: Metering Installation Standard
213) MLD: Multicast Listener Discovery
214) MMF: Multimode Fiber
215) MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group
216) MPLS: Multiprotocol Label Switching
217) MPLS-TP: Multiprotocol Label Switching Transport Profile
218) MPTS: Multiple Program Transport Stream
219) MRO: Multicast Rate Optimization
220) MTU: Master Terminal Unit
221) MU-MIMO Multiple User - Multiple Input/Multiple Output
222) MVA: Mega-volt-amperes
223) MW: Mega-watts

Rev. 0 5.5 - 113
224) NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit

225) NAG: Needed Acoustical Gain
226) NAP: Network Access Point
227) NAT: Network Address Translation
228) NC: Noise Criteria
229) Ne: Network Engineer Tool System
231)
233) Nm: Nanometer
234) NTP: Network Time Protocol
235) NVR: Network Video Recorder
236) OCR: Optical Character Recognition
237) ODB: Optical Distribution Box
238) ODF: Optical Distribution Frame
239) ODN: Optical Distribution Network
240) OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer
241) OFNP: Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum
242) OLT: Optical Line Termination
243) OM3: Optical Multimode Fiber Designation
244) ONT: Optical Network Terminal
245) ONU: Optical Network Unit
246) OS: Optional Standby
247) OSP: Outside Plant (Cabling)
248) OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
249) P2MP: Point To Multi Point
250) PAG: Potential Acoustic Gain
251) PAN: Plant Automatic Network
252) PAS: Process Automation System
253) PBX: Private Branch Exchange
254) PC: Personal Computer
255) PCS: Process Control System
256) PD: Powered Device (PoE)
257) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant
258) PDR: Preliminary Design Review

Rev. 0 5.5 - 114
259) PDU: Power Distribution Unit

260) PEC: Polyethylene Corrugated
261) PF: Power Factor
262) PHY: Physical Layer
263) PIP: Picture in Picture
264) PIR: Passive Infrared
265) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
266) PMD: Physical Medium Dependent Layer
267) PoE: Power Over Ethernet
268) PoE+: PoE Plus
269) PON: Passive Optical Network
270) POP: Point Of Presence.
271) POS: Passive Optical Splitter
272) POTS: Plain Old Telephone System
273) PPE: Personal Protective Equipment
274) PSE: Power Sourcing Equipment (PoE)
275) PSK: Pre-Shared Key
276) PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network
277) PTP(P2P): Point To Point
279) QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
280) QoS: Quality of Service
281) R2-MFC: R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling System
282) RA Guard: Router Advertisement Guard
283) RBE: Report by Exception
286) RF: Radio Frequency
287) RFC: Request For Comments
288) RFI: Radio Frequency Interference
289) RMU: Ring Main Unit
290) RJ: Registered Jack
291) RMS: Root Mean Squared
292) RNC: Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
293) ROADM: Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

Rev. 0 5.5 - 115
294) ROW: Right of Way

295) RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit
296) RSSI: Received Signal Strength
297) RTP: Real-time Transport Protocol
298) RTCP: RTP Control Protocol
299) RTSP: Real Time Streaming Protocol
300) RTU: Remote Terminal Unit
301) RU: Rack Unit
302) SA: Smart Actuators
303) SAES: Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
304) SAN: Storage Area Network
305) SAR: Specific Absorption Rate
306) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or Saudi
Standards, Metrology and Quality Organization
307) SATV: Satellite Television
309) SC: SC Optical Fiber Connector Designation
310) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
311) SD: Standard Definition
313) SDMS: SEC Distribution Materials Specification
314) SFP: Small Form-Factor Pluggable
315) SFP+: Enhanced Small Form-Factor Pluggable
316) SLC: Signal Line Circuit
317) SDU: Single Dwelling Unit
318) SDV:: Switched Digital Video
319) SEI: Software Engineering Institute
320) SFU: Single Family Unit
322) SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
323) SMF: Singlemode Fiber
324) SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
325) SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol
326) SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol
327) SOA: Service Oriented Architecture

Rev. 0 5.5 - 116
328) SO/HO: Small Office/Home Office

329) SOIC: Single Operator Independent Cabinet
330) SLC: Signaling Line Circuits
331) SPD: Surge Protection Device
332) SPTS: Single Program Transport Stream
333) SQL: Database Product of Microsoft Corporation
334) SS: Smart Sensors
335) SSDP: Simple Service Discovery Protocol
336) ST: ST Optical Fiber Connector Designation
337) STB: Set Top Box
338) STP: Shielded Twisted Pair
340) TCDD: Typical Construction Drawing Details
341) TCP: Transmission Control Protocol
342) TDM: Time Division Multiplexing in Downstream
343) TDMA: Time Division Multiple Access in Upstream
344) TE: Telecommunications Enclosures
345) TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
346) TKIP: Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
347) TMC: Traffic Management Center
348) TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar
349) TOS: Type of Service
350) TP: Twisted Pair
351) TPC: Transmit Power Control
352) TR: Telecommunications Rooms
353) TSP: Telecommunications Service Provider
354) TV: Television
355) TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
356) UDDI: Universal Description Discovery and Integration
357) UDP: User Datagram Protocol
358) UHF: Ultra High Frequency
360) UPOE: Universal Power over Ethernet
362) uPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

Rev. 0 5.5 - 117
363) UPnP: Universal Plug and Play

364) USB: Universal Serial Bus
365) UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
366) UV: Ultraviolet
367) V: Volts
368) VESDA: Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus
369) VCP: Vendor Control Panel
370) VF: Voice Frequency
371) VID: Video Image Detection
372) VGA: Video Graphics Array
373) VHF: Very High Frequency
374) VHT: Very High Throughput
375) VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network
376) VMS: Vibration Monitoring System
377) VN: Virtual Network Interface
378) VOD: Video on Demand
379) VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol
380) VPN: Virtual Private Network
381) W: Watts
382) WAN: Wide Area Network
383) WAP: Wireless Access Point
384) WDM: Wavelength Division Multiplexing
385) WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy
386) Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi Alliance Trademark for IEEE 802.11 WLAN Products
387) WIPS: Wireless Intrusion Prevention System
388) WLAN: Wireless Local Area Network
389) WMM: Wi-Fi Multimedia
390) WPA2: Wi-Fi Protected Access II
391) WUXGA: Widescreen Ultra Extended Graphics Array
392) XFP: 10 Gigabit Small Form-Factor Pluggable
393) XML: Extensible Markup Language
394) ZDA: Zone Distribution Area
4. Codes
a. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Performance Standards for a list of applicable
Codes.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 118
b. In addition to the aforementioned - All equipment and material and its

installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following
authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code 401 Electrical Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code 201 Architectural Requirements
6) Saudi Building Code Chapter 801 Fire Protection Requirements
5. Standards and References
a. All work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations.
b. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used wherever
applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate the
priority for application with regards to design of the telecommunications
systems. In case of conflict, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose
equipment conforming to one group of Codes and Standards.
1) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute/Steel Product Manual
2) ANSI American National Standards Institute
3) ANSI/ISA American National Standards Institute / The
Instrumentation Society of Automation
4) API American Petroleum Institute
5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
6) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
7) BSI British Standards Institution
8) BICSI Building Industries Consulting Service International
9) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
10) EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
11) ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
12) FCI Fluid Control Institute
13) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
14) IEC International Electro-Technical Commission
16) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
17) INFOCOMM Infocomm International
18) ISA The International Society of Automation

Rev. 0 5.5 - 119
19) ISO International Organization for Standardization

20) MIL-STD Military Standard
21) NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
22) NECA National Exchange Carrier Association
24) ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
25) RCER Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
26) SAEP Saudi Aramco Engineering Procedures
27) SAES Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
28) SAMSS Saudi Aramco Material System Specifications
30) SDMS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials
Specification
33) STES Saudi Electricity Company Transmission Engineering
Standard
34) SEI Software Engineering Institute
35) TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
36) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
37) Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Alliance Trademark for IEEE 802.11 WLAN
Products
c. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Subsection of the GEM include
the following:
1) ANSI/BICSI 001-2009, Information Transport Systems Design Standard
for K-12 Educational Institutions
2) ANSI/BICSI 002-2011, Data Center Design and Implementation Best
Practices
3) ANSI/BICSI 003-2014, Building Information Modeling (BIM) Practices
for Information Technology Systems
4) ANSI/BICSI 004-2012, Information Technology Systems Design and
Implementation Best Practices for Healthcare Institutions and Facilities
5) ANSI/BICSI 005-2013, Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) System
Design and Implementation Best Practices
6) ANSI/IES RP-7, American National Standard Practice for Industrial
Lighting
7) ANSI/INFOCOMM 1M-2009, Audio Coverage Uniformity in Enclosed
Listener Areas

Rev. 0 5.5 - 120
8) ANSI/INFOCOMM 2M-2010, Standard Guide for Audiovisual Systems

Design and Coordination Processes
9) ANSI/INFOCOMM 3M-2011, Projected Image System Contrast Ratio
10) ANSI/INFOCOMM 4:2012, Audiovisual Systems Energy Management
11) ANSI/INFOCOMM 10:2013, Audiovisual Systems Performance
Verification
12) ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial
Building Telecommunications Cabling
13) ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
14) ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
15) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling
and Components
16) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components
17) ANSI/TIA-568-C.4, Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components
18) ANSI/TIA-569-C, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
19) ANSI/TIA-570-C, Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure
Standard
20) ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard Telecommunications
Infrastructure
21) ANSI/TIA-607-B, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and
Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
22) ANSI/TIA-758-A, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Cabling Standard
23) ANSI/TIA-862-A, Building Automation Cabling Standard
24) ANSI/TIA-942-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data
Centers
25) ANSI/TIA-1005-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for
Industrial Premises
26) ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and
Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling
27) ANSI/TIA-1179, Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure
28) ANSI/TIA-1183, Measurement Methods and Test Fixtures for Balun-
Less Measurements of Balanced Components and Systems
29) BICSI Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual, 3rd
Edition
30) BICSI Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual,
6th Edition
31) BICSI Network Systems and Commissioning (NSC) reference, 1st
Edition

Rev. 0 5.5 - 121
32) BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 5th Edition

33) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition
34) ETSI ETS 300 119-X Equipment Engineering
35) IEC 60332 Tests On Electric and Optical Fibre Cables Under Fire
Conditions
36) IEC 60581-7 High Fidelity Audio Equipment and Systems: Minimum
Performance Requirements. Part 7: Loudspeakers
37) IEC 60754 Test On Gases Evolved During Combustion of Electric
Cables
38) IEC 60849 Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes
39) IEEE 802.1, Bridging & Management
40) IEEE 802.2, Logical Link Control
41) IEEE 802.3, Ethernet
42) IEEE 802.11, Wireless LANs
43) IEEE 802.15, Wireless PANs
44) IEEE 802.16, Broadband Wireless MANs
45) IEEE 802.17, Resilient Packet Rings
46) IEEE 802.20, Mobile Broadband Wireless Access
47) IEEE 802.21, Media Independent Handover Services
48) IEEE 802.22, Wireless Regional Area Networks
49) IES/INFOCOMM RP-38-1X, Videoconferencing Lighting
50) INFOCOMM 5M-201X, Display Image Size for 2D Content
51) INFOCOMM 8M-201X, Audio System Spectral Balance
52) ISA/INFOCOMM 111.01, Unified Automation for Buildings - Part 1:
Terminology and Concepts
53) ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2, Customer Premises
54) ISO 11064 Ergonomic Design of Control Centres
55) ISO/IEC 15018 Edition 1.0, Generic Cabling for Homes
56) ISO/IEC 14763-2 Edition 1.0, Planning and Installation
57) ISO/IEC 14763-3 Edition 1.1, Testing of Optical Fiber Cabling
58) ISO/IEC 18598 Draft, Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM)
Systems
59) ISO/IEC 24702 Edition 1.0, Industrial Premises
60) ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0, Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centers
61) ITU-T G.652D, Characteristics of Single Mode Optical fibers
62) ITU-T G.657A, Characteristics of bending loss insensitive single mode
optical fiber and cable for the access network

Rev. 0 5.5 - 122
63) Mobily Design Guidelines, Access Network Development (AND+)

Phase III Revision – 05 (09.09.2013)
64) Mobily Micro Bundled Duct Specification
65) Mobily Standard UPL-2012
66) NECA/BICSI 607-2011, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and
Grounding Planning and Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
67) ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
68) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) Engineering Standards and
Specifications, latest edition
69) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) TS 2111, Cables, Fiber Optic, Single
Mode (SM)
70) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) TS 2116, Cables, Fiber Optic, Single
Mode (SM), Mini Type, (Outdoor)
71) Saudi Telecom Company (STC), Fiber to the Home (MoP & Guidelines)
STC-2005
72) Saudi Telecom Company (STC), FTTH Design Guidelines
73) TIA TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and
Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems
74) TIA TSB-155-A, Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of
Installed Category 6 Cabling to Support 10GBASE-T
75) TIA TSB-162-A, Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless
Access Points
76) TIA TSB-184, Guidelines for Supporting Power Delivery Over Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
77) TIA TSB-190, Guidelines on Shared Pathways and Shared Sheaths
78) TIA/EIA-598A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
B. Commissioning
1. References
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 Startup, Commissioning and Training for
commissioning requirements.
C. Communications Systems
1. Local Area Network
a. System Description
1) Where the works interface with Telecom Service Provider (TSP), such
as Saudi Telecom (STC), the equipment/materials and installation shall
comply with most recent STC regulation and standards.
2) The system provided shall be compatible with existing installed RCJ
network appliances and Network Management System (NMS).

Rev. 0 5.5 - 123
3) Local Area Network (LAN) within each RCJ facility shall be connected
to the RCJ Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) via an uplink from the
LAN core / distribution switch.
4) Internet connectivity for RCJ facilities is generally provided through the
RCJ MAN. Dedicated firewall appliances are generally not provided
within local facilities.
5) All network solutions must be designed to be fault tolerant, with fallback,
diverse routed solution that will allow continued connectivity if single
point failures occur.
6) All components of the Structured Cabling System shall be supplied from
a single manufacturer and be installed by qualified technicians. A
manufacturer’s warranty for the system shall be issued lasting for a
minimum of 10 years commencing from hand over of the building.
7) The projects shall provide and install all necessary cable and related
hardware to connect all existing servers within the Royal Commission
backbone switch that shall ensure dedicated individual communication
speeds up to 10 Gbps within the core/distribution down to the access
layer. Exceptions exist for facilities that do not require 10 Gbps such as
utility equipment buildings and spaces with low bandwidth
requirements.
8) The project shall include remote management tools that, at a minimum,
provide full network management, real time reports of performance, and
alert notifications in graphic format, to support groups or helpdesk.
9) All site tests in accordance with approved test procedures shall be
provided to ensure that the equipment and related accessories comply
with specifications and operational requirements. All tests are subject to
witnessing by the Royal Commission’s representative. Site tests are
listed in the GPCS.
b. Network Equipment
1) The network equipment shall be compatible with existing installed network
appliances and Network Management System (NMS).
2) The cabled LAN components shall be provided in facility Telecom Rooms.
3) The LAN shall be provisioned with 20% spare port capacity on all access
layer switches for future.
4) LAN switches shall have the option of integrated wireless controller
capability with up to 40G of wireless capacity per switch, support for up to 50
access points and 2000 wireless clients on each switching entity (switch or
stack).
5) LAN switches shall be configured with 24 / 48 port 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet copper interfaces or 12 / 24 / 48 SFP ports for optical connections.
6) LAN access switches shall be built to offer stacking throughput architecture,
allowing additions, deletions and redeployment without interruption.
Additionally, power stacking among stack members shall permit power
redundancy.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 124
7) LAN access switches shall be configured with dual redundant, modular

power supplies and modular fans providing redundancy.
8) LAN access switches shall contain full IEEE 802.3 at (PoE+) with 30W
power on all copper ports in 1 rack unit (RU) form factor.
9) Provide software support for IPv4 and IPv6 routing, multicast routing,
modular quality of service (QoS), Flexible NetFlow (FNF), and enhanced
security features.
10) Configure LAN access switches for PoE/PoE+ on all ports.
11) Configure LAN access switches with uplinks as required supporting
singlemode fiber. The LAN shall support uplink modules consisting of
Gigabit Ethernet or 10 Gigabit Ethernet with Small Form-Factor Pluggable
(SFP) and SFP+ receptacles.
12) Enable security features for wired plus wireless users such as IEEE 802.1x,
port security, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Snooping and
Guard, Dynamic ARP Inspection, RA Guard, IP Source Guard, control plane
protection (CoPP), and wireless intrusion prevention systems (WIPSs).
13) The LAN shall be optimized for multicast for wired plus wireless. Implement
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping.
14) Access switches shall support both layer 2 switching and layer 3 routing
protocols.
15) Enable Inter-VLAN IP routing for full Layer 3 routing between 2 or more
VLANs.
16) Provision QoS and VLAN’s per RCJ requirements.
17) Provide network management software for centralized management.
18) A maintenance support contract with next-business day replacement and
free phone technical assistance shall be available from the product
manufacturer directly.
19) In installations where existing switches are in place, PoE injectors may be
required:
(a) PoE injector shall deliver connectivity to 802.3 at-compliant devices.
(b) PoE injector shall provide two 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet ports: 1
data uplink, 1 power+data
(c) PoE injector shall be equipped with LED to indicate power.
20) Proactive Maintenance Program
(a) Program shall provide global 24-hour access to system experts
(b) Self-help support through online communities, resources, and tools
(c) Advanced hardware replacement options, including 2-hour, 4-hour and
next business day
(d) Operating System software updates applicable to licensed feature set
(e) On-site support for remedial hardware maintenance service
(f) Proactive diagnostics and immediate alerts on core network devices

Rev. 0 5.5 - 125
2. Metropolitan Area Network

1) Wide Area Network connectivity shall be provided to sites/nodes as
identified by the RJC using a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN).
(a) The network connectivity shall support site/node connections
including but not limited to:
(1) IP based security cameras
(2) Intelligent Transportation System components such as
information displays
2) The Metropolitan Area Network connects sites/nodes within geographic
proximity in a logical access ring topology using RCJ standard
singlemode optical fiber strands.
3) Access rings are numbered sequentially for administration purposes
and typically may contain up to 10 sites/nodes. Each site/node is
identified by site number and name, as approved by the RCJ.
4) New facilities shall be assigned to a new node on a new or existing
access ring, with optical fiber strands provided as needed for physical
ring connections to adjacent sites/nodes in the ring.
5) Each end of an access ring shall be connected to two different
backbone nodes to provide redundancy.
6) New access rings shall be assigned and connected to a specific node
on the backbone ring, as identified by the RCJ.
7) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be singlemode conforming to
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
b. System Topologies
1) The MAN shall support Carrier Packet Transport as a carrier class
converged and aggregation platform for unified packet transport
architectures.
2) The MAN shall consist of a Packet-Optical Transport System (P-OTS)
built on standards-based MPLS-Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) for
Ethernet aggregation and transport.
3) The MAN shall provide dense hierarchical QoS and support for Layer 2
services and features, using MPLS-TP, MPLS or Layer 2 Ethernet
based technologies.
4) The MAN shall support transport-class network timing, support of
network-synchronized services and applications such as mobile
backhaul and migration of TDM services.
5) Dense wave division multiplexing (DWDM) supporting Gigabit Ethernet
and 10 Gigabit Ethernet packet-optical transport shall be provided
within the core backbone ring.
c. Network Components
1) Backbone Ring Nodes

Rev. 0 5.5 - 126
(a) The backbone node consists of a rack mounted chassis to be

provided in Telecom Room equipment cabinet locations identified by
the RCJ through coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
(b) The backbone node shall support 480 GB total switch capacity.
(c) The backbone node shall support 30 channels of 10 Gigabit
Ethernet in the backbone ring.
(d) The backbone node shall be a modular platform consisting of
transport fabric cards and modules.
(e) The backbone node shall be configured to support access ring
nodes comprising an access ring. Final configuration of the
backbone node cards and modules shall be coordinated with the
RCJ to meet the requirements of the network expansion.
(f) The backbone node shall be connected to the backbone ring
through a provider edge router and a DWDM multiservice transport
platform supporting reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexers
(ROADMs) for management of fiber wavelengths.
2) Access Ring Nodes
(a) The access ring node consists of a rack mounted chassis to be
provided in Telecom Room equipment cabinet locations identified by
the RCJ through coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
Typically in new facilities, this shall be located in the main Telecom
Room or Server Room.
(b) The access node is a satellite shelf that provides remote port
expansion for the backbone node. The access node shall be
managed virtually as part of the backbone node.
(c) The access node is a fixed configuration platform supporting 44
SFP- based Gigabit Ethernet ports and four SFP+ 10 Gigabit
Ethernet uplink ports.
(d) In order to distribute Ethernet network service within a site, the
access node is connected to a 24 port Fiber Optic Ethernet Switch
(FOES) utilizing an SFP Gigabit Ethernet port. The FOES then
distributes Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber SFP connections to
Power over Ethernet edge switches. Ethernet edge switches
provide Gigabit Ethernet utilizing Category 6 UTP copper cables.
d. Intelligent Transportation Systems
1) The Metropolitan Area Network shall be utilized to support network
connectivity to systems and devices used in Intelligent Transportation
Systems (ITS) where new development occurs. Within existing urban
areas, use of other existing communications networks shall be
investigated, including service provider leased lines and wireless
systems.
2) Coordination shall occur with project Civil designs that establish the
requirements for ITS systems. These design requirements include final
locations, quantities, and mounting conditions of devices and equipment
as well as device communications interface requirements.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 127
3) ITS systems require reliable and some redundant connections. Where

practical, redundant and diverse connections shall be available to
critical components of the ITS system to minimize outage downtimes.
Component bandwidth requirements for ITS systems are typically low
with the exception of CCTV video surveillance cameras, which may
require up to 5 Mbps of bandwidth each.
4) ITS systems are designed to facilitate future growth, expansion, and
capabilities. The MAN shall be provisioned to support future needs of
the ITS system as planned by the Civil design of the project.
5) ITS components requiring MAN connections may include the following:
(a) Traffic and transport data gathering
(1) Closed circuit video surveillance
(i) General monitoring of roads and highways
• Where recommended by traffic police, provide red
light intersection ANPR cameras.
• ANPR cameras shall be located on selected DMS
gantries for freeway data collection and enforcement.
• In urban areas, significant junctions shall be provided
with camera coverage down each arm of the junction
providing adequate coverage.
• On freeways where full surveillance is required, a
camera shall ultimately be provided every 1 to 1.5 km.
ANPR cameras shall be provided in order to measure
link speed and journey times.
• On Road Intersections, Hybrid Radar and Video
Vehicle Detection Cameras shall be installed, these
Cameras shall comply at a minimum with the
following: Video and radar sensors sealed in
waterproof and dust tight housing which meet IP65
standards, Operating Temperature of -40°C to 60°C ,
MPEG-4 streaming via Ethernet.
(ii) Bus locations
(iii) Car park occupancy
(2) Traffic counting sensors
(i) Where appropriate, additional sensors used for counting
traffic shall be implemented, in addition to ANPR cameras.
(3) Visibility Sensors
(i) Several visibility sensors shall be provided around the
network to detect fog and sandstorms to provide warnings
and reduce speed limits.
(b) Traffic control
(1) Access control to secure areas
(2) Traffic and pedestrian signaling

Rev. 0 5.5 - 128
(c) Traffic and transport information

(1) Dynamic message signs (DMS)
(i) Typically located at interchanges, entrances, and exits to
provide traffic condition information.
(ii) DMS provide four lines of text, variable speed limits, and
pictographic warnings. In addition, the sign may provide
journey time, date, time, and temperature.
(2) Provision of data to satellite navigation systems
(3) Provision of information to broadcast media for traffic reporting
(4) Provision of bus arrival at bus stops
(d) Payment Systems
(1) Integrating ticketing systems for public transport
(2) Car park payment
(3) Toll collection
6) Traffic Management Center (TMC)
(a) The TMC is a facility that shall contain the central computer systems
running a suite of integrated ITS programs and sub-systems that
allow communication with field equipment, collection of data, and
control.
(b) The TMC shall contain a server room conforming to TIA/EIA 942
which shall be connected to a MAN access ring.
3. FTTH
a. Jubail Community FTTH System Deployment Description
1) Within Jubail Industrial City are two types of FTTH/GPON systems in
use.
(a) The RCJ FTTH/GPON network is owned and operated by the RCJ.
This RCJ system shall consists of a fiber distribution network
utilizing GPON wave division multiplexing to extend services to
residential homes, apartments, and villas within various districts.
This network is implemented primarily for distribution of IPTV
services. The design of the system shall meet the guidelines
described in the GEM.
(b) The TSP (Telecommunication Service Provider) FTTH/GPON is
provided by either STC or Mobily per STC/Mobily standards, not by
the RCJ. Coordinate with the TSP to plan infrastructure
components that may be shared between the RC and TSP
FTTH/GPON as required by each project. This may include
manholes, ductbanks, and FDT cabinets.
2) The RCJ FTTH system design shall be similar to the TSP FTTH design,
but incorporate specific RC requirements outlined in the GEM. The
GEM shall not provide design requirements for TSP FTTH/GPON
System. The following TSP standards may be used for reference only:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 129
(a) Mobily Design Guidelines for Access Network Development

(AND+) Phase III – Revision -05 (09.09.2013)
(b) STC FTTH Design Guidelines, Doc. Number GL 621211-02-03, 23
May, 2010
(c) STC Fiber to the Home 2005
Coordinate with the TSP’s (STC and/or Mobily) to request the most
recent standard revisions governing the TSP FTTH/GPON networks.
b. RCJ FTTH GPON System Description
1) The RCJ FTTH GPON system shall accept IPTV system signals which
are combined, multiplexed, converted to light signals & interfaced to a
single fiber by the Optical Line Terminal (OLT) placed within the
exchange. The signals are transported & distributed to the end users,
directly or through splitters, where the signals are converted through the
Optical Network Terminal (ONT) to electrical signals.
2) The system shall support optical access GPON with a minimum 2.5
Gbps downstream line rate, 1.2 Gbps upstream line rate, and a 20
kilometer reach on an IP platform.
3) The RCJ FTTH GPON system is distributed from central IPTV headend
buildings located within each district served. The central IPTV headend
building contains the IPTV headend equipment racks, Optical Line
Terminator (OLT) system equipment racks, and Optical Distribution
Frame (ODF) equipment racks. For detailed requirements for the RCJ
IPTV headend, refer to GEM Section 5.5.2.C.8 Distributed Television
System.
4) The ODF contains a Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF) consisting of
exchange termination equipment where fibers from the OLT are jointed
to feeder optical fiber cables for mass FTTH deployment.
5) The OLT and ODF serve as the final termination point of feeder optical
fiber cables. The feeder optical fiber cables are distributed directly into
the underground duct systems from inside the IPTV headend building.
6) The GPON system underground distribution is provided in parallel to a
similarly built out, but separate, GPON system provided by the TSP.
Within the underground distribution system, generally the same
manholes are shared between the RCJ GPON network and the TSP
GPON network. Underground conduits within ductbanks shall be
designated for use by the RCJ or the TSP.
7) Optical fiber feeder cables are routed from the OLT through the
underground distribution system to Fiber Distribution Terminals (FDT’s).
FDT’s are located throughout the district area, serving multiple blocks of
residential community area. FDT’s consist of pedestal style outdoor
enclosures that house Optical Distribution Frames (ODF’s). ODF’s are
racked in shelves on a frame within the FDT and provide passive optical
splitting. The FDT’s are typically located in pairs in the same vicinity,
with one designated for the RCJ GPON, and the other provided by the
TSP for the TSP GPON.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 130
8) From each FDT, distribution optical fiber cables are routed through
district blocks to Fiber Access Terminals (FAT’s). FAT’s are located in
pairs, one designated for the RCJ GPON, and the other the TSP
GPON.
9) FAT’s provide a splicing location for distribution optical fiber cables to
interface with drop fiber optic cables. Drop optical fiber optic cables
extend to customer premises for termination in Optical Network
Terminals (ONT’s). The ONT is a media converter that is installed
inside the home or buildings designed for delivering IPTV signals.
10) Splitter attenuation loss should be within the system standards. Each
splitter configuration is assigned a particular maximum split ratio loss,
including connectors, defined by the ITU G.671 standard.
11) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be singlemode conforming to
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
c. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Line Terminator (OLT) Requirements
1) OLT’s shall standardize on line cards with a minimum of 16 PON ports
per card.
2) The OLT’s shall be central office chassis based and mounted in ETSI
standard equipment racks within the central IPTV headend building.
The equipment rack shall meet the recommendations of the OLT
system manufacturer.
3) Each equipment rack shall support two (2) OLT chassis’ and a system -
48V redundant DC power supply located at the top of the rack.
4) The equipment racks shall be arranged in one or more rack lines with
overhead cable tray installed above for optical fiber cable management.
5) The OLT performs aggregation to the IPTV network switch distribution.
The OLT has interface slots for GPON line termination cards and
network termination cards. Services are delivered via GPON interfaces
using a single fiber with two wave lengths (receive and transmit)
multiplexed together. A third wavelength can also be multiplexed for
downstream RF video over the same fiber; however this feature is not
currently used by the RCJ. The line termination cards support a
minimum of 4 ports each, permitting a minimum of 56 PON interfaces in
total. The GPON interfaces comply with Full Service Access Network
(FSAN) recommendations and International Telecommunications Union
Telecom (ITU-T) sector standards for optics, line rates, data transfer
protocol and management interface.
6) IPTV network traffic aggregation and uplink shall be provided by using
network termination cards within the OLT. The network termination card
shall support a 48 Gbps Ethernet switch fabric with integrated Gigabit
Ethernet (1 Gigabit Ethernet) uplink interfaces using small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) optics, as well as a single 10 Gigabit Ethernet uplink
interface using XFP pluggable optics. Two network termination cards
shall be provided for redundancy and load sharing, enabling 96 Gbps
switching capacity. Coordinate with the RCJ IT Department to
determine the IPTV system uplink interfaces required for network
termination cards.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 131
d. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) Requirements

(ISP)
1) Inside plant ODF’s reside within the IPTV headend building and contain
FDF’s accepting optical fibers extending from the OLT’s.
2) The inside plant ODF equipment is mounted in an ETSI standard
equipment rack and can accommodate multiples of rack height 1U (44.4
mm) or 2U (88.8 mm). The ODF equipment rack shall have integral
large capacity vertical managers, full height on each side, for
organization of optical fiber cabling.
3) The ODF equipment rack is located at the end of the rack line of OLT
equipment racks.
4) The ODF serves as the interface/cross connect facility between optical
fibers extending from the OLT and the feeder optical fiber cables from
the outside plant distribution.
5) The ODF optical fiber interconnects and crossconnects shall utilize
LC/APC connectors.
6) A network of 200mm deep, 450mm wide ladder tray with 300mm rung
spacing shall be provided over system rack lines for routing OLT power
feeds and feeder optical fiber cable subducts.
7) Optical fiber cabling from the OLT’s to the indoor ODF shall be routed in
dedicated fiber wireways, minimum 50mm square, located within the
overhead ladder cable tray above the equipment rack lines.
8) Each feeder optical fiber cable shall be routed in a dedicated subduct
from the ODF to the IPTV headend building point of entrance for
distribution outside plant ducts through the underground distribution
system. Refer to GEM Section 5.5.2.E.1 Outside Plant Infrastructure for
detailed outside plant requirements.
e. RCJ FTTH GPON System Feeder Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) Optical fiber cabling for feeder cables shall consist of single mode,
loose tube available from 12F-288F.
2) The feeder optical fiber cable network commences from the exchange
(OLT, ODF/ FDF) and ends at the splitter point, at the outdoor FDT
Cabinet. The feeder portion of the network is provided over long
distances, with the objective of minimizing splice points and splitters in
the network.
3) The location and routing of feeder fiber routes should take into
consideration the overall "link budget" (attenuation) and the position of
easy access facilities like FDT's and FAT's that house splitters and drop
fibers.
4) The minimum feeder optical fiber cables size to each FDT shall be 24F.
5) Feeder optical cable size (round off to nearest cable size) = Ultimate
number of splitters / FDT sizes + Ultimate demand forecast within FDT
serving area to meet multi-tenant buildings + 20 % for maintenance &
unforeseen demand. The number of main feeder cables is then
determined by dividing the number of fibers calculated above by the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 132
size of cable (24F, 36F, 48F, 72F, 96F, 144F or 288F) and the
remainder is rounded off to the nearest cable size to obtain total number
of feeder cables.
f. RCJ FTTH GPON System Outdoor Fiber Distribution Terminal (FDT)
Requirements
1) The outdoor FDT is placed strategically in the FTTH network to facilitate
service connections for fiber serving areas defined by the scope of the
project.
2) The FDT provides environmental and mechanical protection for cables,
splices, connectors and passive optical splitters.
3) The FDT provides the transition point and management for feeder and
distribution optical fiber cables using ODF splitters and point to point
(P2P) connections.
4) ODF Splitters
(a) The FDT typically accommodates ODF splitters with (1:32) splitting
ratio. However, each project may require various splitter ratios to
meet project demands such as 1:X where X=2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and
128. Higher split ratios however reduce the effective cabling
distances and reduce serving area sizes due to additional optical
split ratio loss.
(b) ODF splitter modules are provided with connectorized pigtail
outputs and one pigtail input. The splitter input is spliced to the
feeder cable in the splice shelf using fusion splicing. The splitter
outputs are spliced into the distribution cables in the splice shelves
using fusion splicing. LC/APC optical fiber interconnects shall be
provided for inputs and outputs to splitter units.
5) The FDT outdoor cabinet is sized for the total connections required to
connect FATs & ONTs in the fiber serving area plus the total number of
splitters required per cabinet based on future tenants forecast.
6) Fusion splicing cassettes for feeder and distribution cabling are
organized in a cabinet located in the bottom of the FDT. Color coded
shelves for splitters are racked and include:
(a) Red – Feeder Panel Splitters and Feeder Panel P2P connections
(b) Blue – Optical Splitters
(c) Gray – ODF/Splitters for distribution cabling
7) Fiber managers located on the sides of the FDT organize optical fiber
cabling. Each fiber bundle is labeled per system requirements.
8) Where required by the project, utilize colocation style FDT’s
(a) The colocation FDT contains three compartments; the center
compartment shall be for cable entrance from the manhole. The
two compartments on either side shall be designated for use by the
RCJ IPTV FTTH GPON and the TSP FTTH GPON.
(b) The colocation cabinet shall meet the requirements of the TSP.
The designer shall submit the FDT configuration only for the TSP

Rev. 0 5.5 - 133
compartment for approval by the TSP; explaining the requirement of

ODF and splitters for 100% customer activation.
9) Criteria for locating outdoor FDT’s include:
(a) The cable distance from FDT to the last customer building shall be
within a radius of 500 m; the linear distance from FDT to customer
could be more; but should not exceed 600-700 m.
(b) Accessibility to the cabinet and installations in all times of the day,
especially after work hours for cabinets at subscriber’s premises.
(c) It should be away from pedestrians, traffic, traffic signals, and road
crossings.
(d) Locate away from customers’ walls.
(e) Shall not cause any inconveniences to the public.
(f) Shall be placed on solid grounds, not water and flood runways; or in
wadis.
g. RCJ FTTH GPON System Distribution Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) The distribution optical fiber cables connect FDT Splitters to FAT
closures.
2) The distribution optical cables are laid in P2P/Star topology from
FDT/Splitter location.
3) The cabling shall consist of single mode, loose tube available from 12F-
96F depending upon the grouping of villas and numbers of FAT’s.
4) The distribution cable shall be labeled as per RJC requirements.
h. RCJ FTTH GPON System Fiber Access Terminal (FAT) Requirements
1) Fiber Access Terminals (FAT’s) are located in manholes/handholes and
provide the interface between distribution and drop cables. Based upon
final FTTH distribution layouts, two FAT’s shall be provided in
designated manholes; one for the RCJ FTTH GPON, and one for the
TSP FTTH GPON.
2) The FAT shall contain fusion splice trays or preconnectorized
assemblies where individual fiber strands from distribution cables are
spliced or interconnected into drop cables. Distribution cables may
daisychain through FAT’s with unused loose tube fiber strands left
coiled and uncut, and routed continuous in a distribution cable to the
next FAT.
3) The drop cables are 2F & 4F capacity. The FAT closures are capable to
accommodate 24 drop cables.
4) The drop closures (FATs) are recommended to be installed inside joint
boxes close to group of villas. These have 24 outlets for drop cables.
i. RCJ FTTH GPON System Drop Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) The drop optical fiber cable extends the “last mile” from FAT to the Fiber
Termination Box (FTB).

Rev. 0 5.5 - 134
2) The minimum bending radius of the drop cable, as stipulated on the

manufacturers data sheet, shall not be exceeded.
3) The drop optical fiber cable shall be single mode, center or loose tube
containing 4 cores.
4) Drop cables shall be provided containing 4 cores to each unit, villa, or
building within the project scope. All fibers to be terminated and labeled
to indicate dark fibres.
5) The distribution cable shall be labeled as 04:96F(80) S1+S2:1-10+S17-
S18 and drop cables as 4F(3).
6) In multidwelling units, provide a minimum of 4 core fiber drop cables
from the main telecom room to the ONT location of each
Flat/shop/office etc. No splices are allowed between the Telecom
Room and ONT’s.
j. RCJ FTTH GPON System Fiber Termination Box Requirements
1) The Fiber Termination Box (FTB) is provided at the point of entrance for
each customer building to serve as the termination point between the
drop cable and customer premises cabling extending to the Home
Networking Cabinet.
2) The FTB provides the test point for customer connection without
entering the premises.
3) LC/APC connector interface shall be provided.
k. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Network Terminal Requirements
1) Customer premises equipment which converts the optical signal to
electronic signal.
2) The ONT consists of the following:
(a) Terminal Box – to terminate the drop fiber cable.
(b) Power conversion AC/DC. For IPTV GPON ONT’s, a local UPS is
not required.
(c) Converts the optical signals to electrical
3) The location of the Indoor ONT Distribution Box shall be within the
Home Network Cabinet, where all the internal conduits meet and
provide the structured cabling system in a star topology.
4) The farthest telecom outlet shall not exceed 90 m from the ONT.
l. RCJ FTTH GPON System Design Requirements

1) Fiber Optic cables, splitter cabinet & civil (ducts, joint boxes, etc.) shall
be proposed in the most economical way while meeting project scope
requirements.
2) Optical Link Budget Calculation
(a) Total allowed link budget from OLT to ONT is 28db. All FTTH
design losses from OLT to ONT should not exceed (not more
than) 28db.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 135
(b) The following Parameters should be taken into account while

calculation the dB budget loss of the network.
(1) Exchange
(i) ODF Connector - 0.2 dB
(2) OSP
(i) Splice Loss/splice - 0.1 dB
(ii) Cable Loss/ km - 0.35 dB
(3) FDT
(i) Splitter 1:32 - 17.5 dB
(ii) ODF Connector Loss - 0.2 dB
(4) Sub Premises
(i) Drop cable loss per km - 0.35 dB
(ii) Fiber Termination Box - 0.2 dB
(c) The design shall comply with ITU-T recommendation G.984
Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network (G-PON). The maximum
logical distance from OLT to ONT shall not exceed 60km. The
physical distance shall be limited by the optics used and the
calculated link loss budget.
(d) The budget loss is calculated as follows: Losses = (Fiber cable +
Connectors + Joint + Splitter) Losses.
(e) FTTH System Documentation Requirements
(1) Route Map: The Route Map shows a geographic overview of
cables and conduit routes.
(2) Graphic Access for Feeder & Distribution Network: Graphic
Access shows a graphical overview of the cable/conduit route
including MH/MH distances. These distances depend on type
of cable deployed and the pulling tension of the cable as well
as splice and splitter locations. Distance between HH/HH
depends on the drop fiber distribution, pipe formation, pipe
assignment, cable joints for new cables/conduit systems. The
minimum information required and to be reflected in this type
of drawing is as follows:
(i) Cable size & type
(ii) HDPE duct/subduct assignment.
(iii) Manhole layout
(3) Detailed Conduit Access for Feeder & Distribution Network:
The Detailed Conduit drawing shall show in detail the
geographic location of the conduit system, manholes, hand
holes, FDT cabinet’s, FAT locations, distances from reference
points to center of MH cover and to various parts of the
conduit system. The minimum information required and to be
reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 136
(i) Location of new Manholes/Handholes, e.g. distance from

intersection
(ii) Any “Construction Notes” that may affect implementation
(iii) MH and duct designation
(iv) The distance and number of Ducts between MHs and/or
HHs
(v) FDT Cabinet numbers
(vi) Crossings Method, for road , pipe line (thrust boring or
excavation)
(vii) Labels and legends
(4) Cable Vault Plan: A Cable Vault Plan shall reflect
telecommunication facilities in cable vault room, tunnel vault
as well as location and position of the cables on cable
brackets/ladders and the cable entrance from manhole/tunnel
to cable vault room.
(5) Fiber Cable Schematic for Feeder & Distribution Networks: A
Schematic is to be provided showing the new optical fiber
cable, cable type, size, distances between jointing points and
termination points. The minimum information required and to
be reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:
(i) Tabled calculation of cable pulling tension available and
acceptable
(ii) Location of FDT’s, FAT’s & Terminations
(iii) Labels and legends
(6) Fiber Jointing Schematic for Feeder & Distribution Networks:
(i) A Schematic is to be provided, reflecting an overview of
all new optical fiber cables, fiber termination points,
joints, splitter locations and stumped fibers (dark fibers).
Distances between joints and termination points/MH
shall be noted. The minimum information required and to
be reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:
• Use of fibers (fiber assignment)
• Fiber termination points at ODF / OLT
• Numbering of FO Cabinets and Splitters
• Numbering of FO cables
• Distances between joints (Feeder cable)
• Distance between splitters (Distribution cable)
• Labels and legends
(7) Local IPTV Building: An exchange floor plan is to be provided
reflecting proposed locations of OLT and ODF locations along
with cable routing within the exchange building. Distances of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 137
cable from Cable Vault to ODF / OLT locations should be

provided.
(8) Test Plan
(i) The test plan will describe the acceptance Testing that
will be carried out to ensure the deployment of FTTH in
Royal Commission Jubail has been implemented in
accordance with Guidelines.
(ii) Attenuation per unit length and splice, splitter loss is
measured with an OTDR to verify the integrity of fiber
and splices in the optical transmission path. A Laser
source and an optical power meter is used to test the
attenuation of the fibers from the OLT to the ONT
(customer premises), insuring that the transmission
system loss design requirements are within the
maximum permissible dB loss. These tests will be
recorded on power meter test sheets along with OTDR
graphic printouts as required.
(iii) Before performing any optical test, Instrument
Calibration Certificates of the test equipment to be used
has to be presented to the RCJ for approval. The
equipment serial numbers and calibration dates will be
recorded accordingly.
m. RCJ FTTH GPON System Outside Plant Design Parameters
1) Refer to GEM Section 5.5.2.E.1-Outside Plant Infrastructure, for detailed
requirements for providing FTTH outside plant infrastructure.
4. Data Centers
a. Data Center Design Overview
1) Data Centers shall be designed in accordance with the following
(a) TIA-942-A -Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data
Centers and ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0 “Information Technology –
Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centres”.
(b) BICSI 002-2011, Data Center Design and Implementation Best
Practices, and BICSI International Standards Supplemental
Information 001: Methodology for Selecting Data Center Design
Class Utilizing Performance Criteria
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall implement Best Practices
recommended by the Uptime Institute.
3) Tiering Structure - The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with
the RCJ to determine the appropriate Tiering Structure required on a
project by project basis.
4) When designing a data center, it is essential that all systems be
coordinated as follows:
(a) Provide estimate of anticipated power, space, cooling and required
telecommunications equipment based upon full capacity and with
future needs considered.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 138
(b) Provide required space power, cooling, security, floor loading,

grounding, electrical protection and other requirements to design
team. These requirements shall also include requirements for
operations center, loading dock, storage room, staging areas, and
other support areas.
(c) Work with architect and engineers for the space planning. Revise
design as necessary to accommodate facility needs.
(d) Develop floor plan requirements with placement of major rooms.
This shall indicate entrance rooms, main distribution areas,
horizontal distribution areas, zone distribution areas, and equipment
distribution areas. Power, cooling and floor loading requirement for
equipment shall be provided to the engineering team as well as the
requirements for telecommunications raceways.
(e) Review the updated plan with the requirements for the
telecommunications pathways, electrical equipment and mechanical
equipment (at full capacity).
(f) Design the telecommunications cabling distribution system based
upon the equipment to be housed in the data center.
b. Telecommunications Spaces and Topologies
1) Major Spaces and Organization
(a) Provide authorized access and monitoring
(b) Coordinate floor loading requirements
(c) Coordinate service clearance requirements
(d) Verify airflow requirements
(e) Verify DC power requirements and circuit length restrictions
(f) Telecommunications rooms and other equipment rooms serving
spaces outside the data center shall not be housed within the data
center.
(g) Data Center may be comprised of:
(1) Data Center Support staff offices
(2) Data Center entrance room
(3) Data Center Electrical and Mechanical Rooms
(4) Data Center Operations Center
(5) Telecommunications Room(s) serving data center spaces
(6) Data Center Storage rooms and loading docks
(7) Data Center Computer Room
(h) Where not a dedicated building, other tenant spaces shall be non-
industrial, with use that is non-intrusive to the data center.
(i) Where on an upper floor, adequate shaft space shall be provided for
generator, security, telecommunications and electrical conduits in

Rev. 0 5.5 - 139
addition to HVAC, grounding, antennas and other services as

required.
2) Relationships and Adjacencies
(a) Locate away from EMI sources. Sources of EMI/RFI shall be
located at a distance that reduces the interference to 3.0 volts/meter
throughout the frequency spectrum.
(b) No exterior windows
(c) Unrelated equipment shall not be installed in, pass through, or enter
the area. The Room shall not be located below plumbed areas
such as rest rooms, janitor closets, kitchens, laboratories, or
mechanical spaces.
(d) Telecommunications Design
(1) Building shall be equipped with multiple fiber optic entrance
rooms with services from different local access providers.
(2) Cabling may be distributed overhead or under floor.
3) Entrance Room Requirements
(a) Access Provider Coordination
(1) Coordinate to provide maximum circuit lengths in conformance
with access provider requirements.
(2) Entrance Rooms may be located inside or outside the
computer room.
(3) Where Entrance Rooms are located inside the computer room,
typically separate rooms are not required unless the access
provider leases the space.
(4) Entrance rooms shall have pathways specific for access
provider pathways.
(b) Telecommunications Design
(1) Equipment cabinets or racks shall be provided with minimum of
1m clearance in front of the rack. Where deeper equipment is
anticipated, a minimum clearance of 1.2m shall be provided.
Rear clearance shall be 0.6m. Coordinate final clearance
requirements with equipment provided.
(2) Spaces shall be configured with equipment racks having a
“cold” air aisle in the front of the cabinet and “hot” air aisle in
the back.
(i) Perforated floor tiles shall be utilized along the cold aisles
to improve circulation. No cable trays shall be placed
below the cold aisles.
(3) Placement of racks, cabinets and other equipment shall be
coordinated with the floor grid. Racks supported by the access
floor shall be attached to the slab through threaded rods or
otherwise secured.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 140
(4) Cabinets shall be placed at the same location on each floor tile
to allow standardization of floor tile cuts. Spaces shall be
utilized to ensure each cabinet begins at the edge of a floor tile.
(5) Rack/cabinets shall be 2.1m tall for access to equipment and
interconnection of devices.
(6) Racks shall be powder coated or other scratch-resistant finish.
(7) Power strips shall be provided for all cabinets with active
equipment. Power strip plugs shall have locking mechanisms
to prevent accidental disconnection.
(i) Label power strips with panel number and circuit.
(ii) Provide clearance on racks to accommodate power strips.
4) Distribution Areas
(a) Main Distribution
(1) MDA’s shall be centrally located to minimize cabling lengths.
(b) Horizontal Distribution
(1) HDA’s shall be centrally located to minimize backbone cabling
lengths.
(c) Zone Distribution
(1) Overhead, or under floor Zone Distribution Areas shall serve a
maximum of 288 twisted-pair or coaxial connections.
(2) Active equipment shall not be housed in the zone distribution
area.
(d) Equipment Distribution
(1) Equipment distribution does not include telecom rooms,
entrance rooms, main distribution areas, or horizontal
distribution areas. EDA’s house telecommunications and
headend equipment, typically in floor mounted equipment racks
or cabinets.
(2) Power shall be provided to accommodate equipment housed in
racks and cabinets.
(3) Cabling extending between devices within the EDA shall not
exceed 15m.
5) Cabling Topologies
(a) Entrance room (ER)
(1) Entrance Room houses the interface between the inter-building
cabling (access provider and customer owned) as well as the
structured cabling associated with the data center.
(2) Houses demarcation hardware and access provider equipment
(3) May be located outside the computer room if the data center is
in a building that includes spaces outside of the data center, or
if additional security is required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 141
(4) Multiple entrance rooms may be required for additional

redundancy or due to cabling lengths.
(5) Entrance Room may be adjacent to or combined with the main
distribution area.
(b) Main Distribution Area (MDA)
(1) MDA houses the main cross-connect (MC). This is the central
point of distribution for the data center structured cabling
system. This may also include the horizontal cross-connect
(HC) if the equipment areas are served directly from MDA.
This is typically housed in the computer room, unless it is a
multi-tenant data center, in which case it may be a separate
dedicated room.
(2) Every data center requires at least one MDA. This is the
central point for the data center cabling, housing computer
room core routers, LAN switches, SAN switches, and PBX.
(3) Access provider equipment may be located in this space due to
length restrictions.
(4) MDA’s may serve one or more horizontal distribution areas or
equipment distribution areas.
(c) Horizontal Distribution Area (HDA)
(1) HDA’s serve equipment areas when the HC is not located in
the MDA. HDA may include the HC.
(2) HDA is within the computer room; however it may be within a
dedicated room for security.
(3) HDA includes LAN switches, SAN switches, and
keyboard/video/mouse (KVM) switches for end equipment
located in the equipment distribution areas.
(4) Where data centers extend over multiple floors, each floor may
have its own HC.
(5) Typical data centers have multiple HDA; however, small data
centers may not require HDA as the entire computer room may
be able to be supported from the MDA.
(d) Zone Distribution Area (ZDA)
(1) ZDA is between the HDA and the EDA allowing interconnection
of the horizontal cabling for frequent reconfiguration and
flexibility.
(e) Equipment Distribution Area (EDA)
(1) EDA is space dedicated for end equipment, including computer
systems and telecommunications equipment. This equipment
does not serve ER, MDA, or HDAs.
6) Pathways
(a) Access Floors

Rev. 0 5.5 - 142
(1) Cabling under the access floor shall be provided in ventilated

cable trays permitting airflow. Multiple layers of cable tray may
be required.
(2) Cable tray shall be grounded as required.
(3) Access floors shall use bolted stringer styles (1.2 m long) with
pedestals to improve stability.
(b) Overhead trays
(1) Cable trays may be installed overhead. Tray type may be:
(i) Basket
(ii) Center spine
(iii) Ladder
(2) A separate duct/tray system may be utilized for fiber.
(3) Maximum tray depth shall be 150 mm.
(4) Overhead tray placement shall be coordinated with other
services to prevent obstruction of lighting, sprinklers, and other
devices.
7) Infrastructure Identification
(a) Floor space shall be utilized to organize the identification of data
center components. Data centers shall be designed in a grid format
with every 600 mm x 600 mm floor tile designating a block of the
grid.
(b) Cabinets and racks shall be labeled in front and back with the grid
letter and number.
(c) Where data centers extend to multiple floors, the floors shall be
added as a prefix to the cabinet number:
(1) nx1y1:
(i) Where n = floor that houses data center
(ii) x1y1= one or two alphanumeric characters followed by to
alphanumeric characters designating the location on the
floor space grid where the right front corner of the rack or
cabinet is located
(2) Similarly for patch panel ports, label as x1y1-an, where:
(i) n=one to three characters designating the port on a patch
panel. Where patch panels are for fiber, alpha characters
shall be utilized starting with “A” excluding “I” and “O” with
numeric characters designating a fiber strand.
(3) Patch Panels, label as p1 to p2:
(i) p1 = near end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence and
port number range
(ii) p2 = far end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence and
port number range

Rev. 0 5.5 - 143
(4) Path cord identifiers p1n/p2n:

(i) p1n = near end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence,
and port designator assigned to that cable
(ii) p2n = far end rack, cabinet, patch panel sequence and
port designator assigned to that cable
8) Redundancy and Infrastructure Tiering
(a) Redundancy Overview – Reliability of system depends upon the
redundancy of the infrastructure components. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate with the RCJ to determine the
appropriate level of redundancy required on a project by project
basis.
(1) N+1 Redundancy
(i) This system provides one additional unit or pathway in
addition to the minimum provided as part of the original
system. This allows the failure of one leg or component of
the system to not disrupt operations.
(2) 2N Redundancy
(i) This system provides two complete (N) units or pathways
or systems. This allows the failure of an entire unit, path
or system to not disrupt operations.
(b) Tiering Structure - The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate
with the RCJ to determine the appropriate Tiering Structure required
on a project by project basis. RCJ facilities may use elements of
Tier II and/or Tier III structures in Data Center designs
(1) Tier II Data Center: Redundant Components
(i) Less likely to require disruptions from planned and
unplanned activities.
(ii) Equipped with raised floor, UPS, and generator. These
systems are built with capacity of need plus one (N+1) to
allow maintenance.
(iii) Critical power path and other infrastructure components
may require a shut down for maintenance.
(iv) This system has redundant components but only a single
path.
(2) Tier III Data Center: Concurrently Maintainable
(i) Allows for planned site activity without interruption.
a) Planned activities include: additions, removal, repair,
replacement, and preventative maintenance.
(ii) System must be able to simultaneously carry load of one
path while maintenance or other planned activities are
performed on the other.
(iii) This system has multiple power and cooling distribution
paths.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 144
(iv) This system requires personnel 24/7.

9) Temperature and Humidity Requirements
(a) Temperature: 18-27°c (64-81°f) dry bulb
(b) Maximum Relative Humidity: 60%
(c) Maximum dew point: 15°c (59°f)
(d) Maximum Rate of Temperature Change: 5°c (9°f) per hour
5. Wireless Local Area Network
a. All WLAN hardware including Access Points shall, at minimum, support the
IEEE 802.11ac wireless standard and be backward compatible with IEEE
802.11a/b/g/n standards. Where possible, the design of the wireless local area
network shall support draft recommendations of future upcoming standards
under development by the IEEE. Coordinate with the RCJ for final approval to
implement recommendations. Technologies implemented shall be backward
compatible with existing RCJ installations.
b. WLAN Design Criteria
1) Access Point Ethernet Connections
(a) Provide two or more category 6A or higher rated cables as specified
in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, deployed as part of an overall structured
cabling system, to every 802.11ac access point. These
connections shall properly service link aggregation of two (2)
802.11ac radios supporting 1.3 Gbps data rates as well as future
2.6 Gbps and higher data rate implementations.
(b) Follow the recommendations of TIA TSB-162-A,
“Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access
Points.
(c) Temperature rise resulting from Type 2 PoE used to power
802.11ac access points shall be considered. The use of solid
equipment cords, which exhibit better thermal stability and lower
insertion loss than stranded conductor cords, is recommended for
access point connections for this same reason.
(d) Verify the system authentication server can support the inrush and
outrush of users at fixed times (such as a class start and stop bell).
Ensure that the server can accommodate the expected peak
number of authentications per second.
(e) Ensure sufficient addresses are available to support not only
laptops but also smartphones and other future Wi-Fi compatible
devices that may expect connectivity. Surplus space will be
necessary to support inrush and outrush of users in a transparent
fashion and in concert with the DHCP service lease times in order
to prevent address exhaustion.
(f) The DHCP server for the WLAN must also be able to accommodate
an appropriate inrush peak load of leases per second. Lease times
must be optimized to the length of sessions in the room so that the
address space can be turned over smoothly between classes or
meetings.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 145
2) Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Services

(a) Validate the availability of Power over Ethernet (PoE) Power
Sourcing Equipment (PSE) to support access point and WLAN
equipment.
(b) Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) consisting of powered network
switches (endspan) or power injectors (midspan) shall be properly
planned to support the quantities and power levels of Powered
Devices (PD’s) required in the wireless network.
(c) In new building projects, endspan powered network switch ports
shall be provided. In renovation and upgrade projects where
existing non-powered network switches are used, provide midspan
power injectors.
(d) Power over Ethernet (PoE) equipment shall conform to IEEE
802.3at Type 2 PoE Plus at minimum and be backward compatible
with IEEE 802.3af (IEEE 802.3at Type 1) Powered Devices.
Proprietary Power over Ethernet equipment may be utilized with
approval from the RCJ.
(e) Future PoE equipment shall conform to the forthcoming IEEE
802.3bt standard with Type 3 (≤ 60W at the PSE) and Type 4 (≤
100W at the PSE) utilizing all four pairs of approved Category
6/Class E and Category 6A/Class EA cabling. The cabling shall be
warranted to support IEEE 802.3bt per the structured cabling
system 25 year extended warranty requirements.
3) Wireless Infrastructure Design Criteria
(a) In order to provide seamless interoperability across facilities, all
access points must adhere to the IEEE 802.11ac wireless
specifications at minimum. The WLAN shall operate at 5 GHz as
well as continue to support 2.4 GHz devices.
(b) The WLAN shall support Very High Throughput (VHT) data
specification.
(c) The WLAN shall support 80 MHz wide channels with future
upgrades to support 160 MHz wide channels.
(d) The WLAN shall support 256 QAM.
(e) The WLAN shall provide standard beam forming to focus energy on
a specific client, improving reliability and thus throughput and
capacity.
(f) The WLAN system shall support a minimum of three (3) MIMO
streams with future growth of up to eight (8) MIMO streams and
Multiple User MIMO (MU-MIMO).
(g) Dynamic channel and power selection features shall be provided.
(h) Provide spectrum load balancing to ensure even allocation of clients
across available channels including dynamic client distribution
features to steer 5-GHz-capable clients to that band.
(i) Include airtime fairness for a heterogeneous client environment with
an unpredictable mix of legacy and new wireless adapters. Older

Rev. 0 5.5 - 146
IEEE 802.11a/b/g clients that require more airtime to transmit

frames must not be allowed to limit newer high throughput clients.
(j) There must be adequate address space to accommodate all of the
expected devices, including a reserve capacity for leases that
straddle different meetings in the same room.
(k) To minimize unnecessary rate adaptation due to higher collision
activity, it is a requirement to reduce the number of supported client
device low rates.
(l) Wherever chatty protocols that produce small frames at frequent
intervals are not needed, they should be blocked or firewalled.
These protocols include IPv6 if it is not in production use, netbios-
ns, netbios-dgm, Bonjour, mDNS, UPnP, and SSDP.
(m) Multicast optimization shall be configured to make reliable, high-
quality multicast transmissions over WLAN possible. To ensure that
video data is transmitted reliably, multicast video data is transmitted
as unicast, which can be transmitted at much higher speeds and
has an acknowledgement mechanism to ensure reliability.
Transmission automatically switches back to multicast when the
client count increases high enough that the efficiency of unicast is
lost.
(n) Enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping to
ensure that the wired infrastructure sends video traffic to only those
access points that have subscribers.
(o) Multicast over WLAN, by provision of the IEEE 802.11 standard,
needs to be transmitted at the lowest supported rate so that all
clients can decode it. Provide Multicast Rate Optimization (MRO) to
track the transmit rates sustainable for each associated client to use
the highest possible common rate for multicast transmissions.
(p) Where voice or video clients are expected, enable Quality of
Service (QoS) both in the air as well as on the wire, end-to-end
between the access points and the media distribution infrastructure.
(q) Receive sensitivity tuning shall be used to fine tune the access
points to “ignore” clients that attempt to associate at a signal level
below what is determined to be the minimum acceptable for a client
in the intended coverage zone. This tuning helps to reduce network
degradation to outside interference and/or client associations that
may be attempted below the minimum acceptable signal level
based on the desired performance criteria.
(r) Use very low equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) on the
access point in a high-density deployment. Enable Transmit Power
Control (TPC) to lower client device power to match the APs.
4) WLAN Design Planning Methodology
(a) Unless specifically approved by the RCJ, the WLAN coverage
throughout facilities shall be ubiquitous.
(b) Provide a coverage based wireless design in facilities where the
goal is to provide good quality of service (in terms of RF signal

Rev. 0 5.5 - 147
strength) in as much of the area as possible with a single or multiple

access points. Examples of coverage based deployments include
but are not limited to sites where there is a relatively large area with
few Wi-Fi devices/users such as:
(1) Warehouses
(2) Industrial Sites
(3) Mechanical and Electrical equipment rooms and buildings
(4) Clinics
(5) Hotels with single occupancy rooms
(6) Office Buildings
(7) Retail
(c) Identify and provide a capacity based high density deployment
where the goal is to provide good quality wireless service to a
concentrated set of concurrent users in a confined area. Generally,
this occurs when more than 25 concurrent users are expected within
the coverage area. Examples of capacity based deployments
include but are not limited to sites such as:
(1) Classrooms
(2) Lecture halls and auditoria
(3) Libraries
(4) Stadiums
(5) Offices
(6) Conference Centers
(d) Follow a design process described below that establishes a WLAN
capacity goal, determines the number of usable Wi-Fi channels,
chooses a concurrent device target number, and validates the
capacity goal is achieved.
(e) In coordination with the RCJ, establish a capacity planning goal
defining the application-layer throughput target.
(1) Estimate the quantity of devices (MAC addresses) by
considering the quantity of users and number of devices per
person in areas to be covered.
(2) Establish the minimum bandwidth required per device in
consultation with the RCJ. This is primarily driven by the mix
of data, voice, and video applications that will be used.
Request LAN traffic studies to precisely quantify this value.
Consider the actual duty cycle of each device type.
Incorporate diversity in that it is unlikely that maximum
throughput will be required simultaneously to each device,
unless required by certain applications such as interactive
learning systems. Include forecasted future capacity
requirements.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 148
(3) Differentiate between theoretical and practical access point

throughput by accounting for protocol and packet overhead,
distant clients, uneven distribution of clients on different bands
(2.4 GHz vs 5 GHz), control traffic, and co-channel/adjacent
channel interference.
(f) Determine the usable number of Wi-Fi channels. Establish an
approved channel plan in coordination with the RCJ.
(1) The WLAN design shall ensure that non-overlapping channels
within the 2.4 GHz band are used should it be necessary to
provide service within this frequency. Within the 5 GHz band
the design should not reuse any of the secondary frequencies
should channel bonding be used to increase channel
bandwidth from 20 MHz up to a maximum of 160 MHz. Only
channels approved within the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band by the
CITC (Communications and Information Technology
Commission) shall be used. The design shall take into
consideration channels that are subject to Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC) for
avoidance of interference with RADAR. If a C band (IEEE
defined as 4 to 8 GHz) RADAR source is operating in the area
the design shall take account of this as certain channels may
automatically be disabled.
(2) The WLAN should utilize the 5 GHz band for primary client
service where possible because there is greater channel
capacity in this band.
(3) Identify and discount any reserved channels that are required
for indoor or outdoor mesh backhaul.
(4) Channels may be reused within clusters serving large areas,
where the radios are separated from one another by free
space, walls, or other structures. Typically a minimum of two
cell isolation distance shall be required within large open
spaces.
(5) In high density applications such as very large auditoria,
channel reuse is driven by the number of devices to be served.
Each radio can serve a finite number of devices without either
oversubscribing the access points or reusing the allowed radio
channels. Channel reuse in combination with low gain
antennas, Transmit Power Control (TPC) and correct
positioning shall be considered in order to provide suitable
coverage and performance.
(6) In high density applications, use of 20 MHz channel widths
(HT20) shall be evaluated to accommodate a higher total
quantity of devices than is possible through use of fewer 40
MHz, 80 MHz or 160 MHz channel widths.
(7) Provide 40 MHz, 80 MHz or 160 MHz channel widths in 5 GHz
bands where the ability for individual stations to burst at the
maximum PHY rate is required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 149
(g) Determine a concurrent user device limit for each access point
radio.
(1) Determine the practical limit for the number of client devices
that can transmit simultaneously on each radio while still
achieving the capacity goal.
(2) Follow system manufacturer recommendations. For high
density applications, typical rule of thumb approximations shall
not be used. Where large numbers of heterogeneous users
are to be covered with relatively few radios, adjust for the
expected mix of legacy and high-throughput devices. Per-
client limits are primarily determined by the mix of legacy IEEE
802.11a/b/g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac devices expected in the
high density application. The more legacy devices that are
present, the lower the limit will be.
(h) Determine the number of devices supported in the WLAN
application using the number of non-overlapping channels available
along with the number of concurrent devices planned. Validate that
the WLAN meets the capacity requirements for the application. In
challenging high density applications, follow an iterative process,
balancing between channel count, radio loading, and minimum per-
client throughput to best meet the requirements of the RCJ.
5) Access Point Coverage Strategy
(a) Wherever possible, access points shall be located overhead on
ceilings with cabling concealed in finished construction. Where
ceiling heights, ceiling construction, or aesthetic requirements do
not permit ceiling mounting, use of side wall mounting shall be
provided. Do not mix mounting strategies in the same room. When
planning adjacent WLANs, use the same strategy in all rooms.
(b) Access points with integrated antennae shall typically be provided.
Select mounting locations that have no obstructions between the
front of the integrated antenna access points and the intended
wireless clients. Mount antennas with built-in downtilt parallel to the
ceiling or floor so that the beam is exactly vertical.
(c) Use of external antennae shall be minimized and used to provide
coverage for special case applications and conditions. If external
antennas are being used, plan to mount access points as close to
the antennas as possible. If absolutely necessary, low-loss coaxial
cable shall connect the access point to the antenna when mounting
remotely.
(d) Access points in overhead applications shall be distributed evenly to
optimize system performance. Observe minimum physical
separation distances. Access points using nonoverlapping
channels shall be separated so the interference target is -85 dBm to
ensure that no channel bandwidth degradation occurs and all data
rates are available.
(e) Keep a minimum of 6” of clearance from the integrated antenna
access points and any location where people will be present to
observe Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) requirements.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 150
(f) Design the AP placement in high density areas such that each client
sees two to three access points. If one or two access points are
overloaded at any given time, the client can be load balanced to
another access point without any negative impact to the end user.
(g) Provide and position access points to permit power level settings to
one half at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz to mitigate co-channel and adjacent-
channel interference.
(h) Site Survey Requirements
(1) Predictive Surveys
(i) Use computer-based software applications to model the
facility and RF environment shall be performed.
(ii) Outline the required coverage areas using facility CAD
or BIM files. Define facility structures to aid in estimating
RF signal attenuation.
(iii) Establish thresholds for minimum signal strength and
application throughput that clients must achieve.
(iv) Predict the quantity, location, and type of access points
that should be installed.
(v) Provide channel and power settings that maximize
spectral capacity while minimizing co-channel and
adjacent-channel interference (CCI/ACI).
(2) Pre-deployment Site Survey
(i) A pre-deployment survey shall be performed prior to
WLAN network installation to determine the actual RF
signal propagation characteristics of the environment.
(ii) The preliminary Wi-Fi network design shall be verified by
using a predictive site survey and shall reduce the need
for network adjustments once WLAN equipment is
procured and installed.
(iii) Spectrum analysis shall be performed through a Calibrated
Spectrum Analysis equipment to detect possible interferences
that could cause WLAN performance issues. A copy of the
Calibration Certificate of the equipment shall to be issued to
RC Staff. Remediate sources of interference prior to
deployment.
(iv) Test transmitters’ proposed AP locations with data points taken
to establish the predicted wireless coverage for each location.
The transmitter shall simulate the AP positioning and determine
the actual coverage.
(i) For mobile devices to be tracked properly, a minimum of three
access points (with four or more preferred for better accuracy and
precision) shall be detecting and reporting the received signal
strength (RSSI) of any client station, asset tag, or rogue device
being tracked. It is preferred that this detected signal strength level
be -75dBm or better.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 151
(j) WLAN Controllers shall manage the WLAN.

(1) The controller shall support all modes of access point
operation and will provide scaling up to the quantity of access
points and clients required by the RCJ.
(2) The controller shall offer redundancy offering sub−second
failover of thousands of access points to a standby controller.
(3) The controller shall offer service provider features such as
Wi−Fi Certified Passpoint (HS2.0) for secure public
connectivity and Proxy Mobile IPv6 (PMIPv6) to ensure
seamless mobility between Cellular and Wi−Fi.
(4) The controller shall regulate the power output of each AP to

adjust the coverage zone. Additionally they optimize the
number and placement of access points.
(5) The controller shall detect the status of access points to
determine if any have failed.
(6) The controller shall provide security by denying network
access to improperly configured devices
(7) The controller shall detect and locate the unauthorized access
points.
(8) The controller shall balance the load of network traffic among
the access points in the area.
6) Security
(a) The use of WPA2-CCMP/AES is required. Avoid selecting TKIP or
WEP, which would result in limiting client operation to legacy
(802.11a/b/g) data rates per Wi-Fi Alliance certification
requirements.
(b) Use one of the following network security options: WPA2 802.1X
(Enterprise) or WPA2 PSK (Personal).
(c) When enabling Layer 2 security, ensure WPA2-Enterprise or
WPA2-Personal key management and CCMP/AES encryption is
selected. Avoid selecting Auto (WPA or WPA2) or WPA for the key
management and TKIP for the encryption cipher, which could result
in clients using WPA (TKIP) instead of WPA2 (CCMP/AES) and
being limited to legacy (802.11a/b/g) data rates.
(d) Use Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms through Wi-Fi Multimedia
(WMM) to prioritize latency and jitter-sensitive traffic such as voice
and video.
(e) Require users to provide authentication credentials before they are
allowed to use a wireless network. Provide authentication via
RADIUS (RFC 2865) which can be back-ended an LDAP enabled
directory.
7) Implementation Policies

Rev. 0 5.5 - 152
(a) All departments that wish to deploy wireless networks must work
with and obtain certification for any wireless design from RCJ IT
Department.
(b) To facilitate IP address assignment via DHCP, the wireless network
card's address can be registered in the RCJ central DHCP
database.
(c) Access to the wired campus network from wireless APs must be
controlled via secure authentication where the authentication
credentials (preferably Royal Commission MyID) can be associated
with a unique individual. Departments will be accountable for
activity associated with any credentials that are not Royal
Commission MyID user ids and passwords.
(d) MAC (network card) address authentication can be employed by
pointing access points to a RADIUS server containing the allowed
MAC addresses, but shall be used in conjunction with WPA2-
CCMP/AES.
6. Telephone and Intercom
a. Telephone and intercom systems provided in new and renovation projects shall be
IP based systems only. Refer to additional sections below for descriptions of
existing legacy RCJ telephone systems.
b. IP Telephone System
1) IP Telephone system service shall be provided for RCJ operated facilities only.
2) To support IP telephony, a multi-service network shall be provided on which
voice, video, and data can coexist over a single IP-based infrastructure.
3) The network shall support traffic prioritization mechanisms using Layer 2 (IEEE
802.1p/Q) and Layer 3-IP type of service (TOS), IP precedence, DiffServ Code
Point (DSCP), UDP/TCP Port and/or IP address.
4) The system shall provide voice, signaling, central processing and
communications resources including voice mail, ACD (automatic call
distribution), and systems management.
5) The network shall support open standards that promote interoperability with
VoIP products.
6) Plan for the provisioning of RCJ Metropolitan Network MAN connectivity to
support the IP Telephone system with sufficient bandwidth. Determine the
additional bandwidth and performance that will be required for new voice
services. The link must be provisioned with sufficient bandwidth to
simultaneously support the maximum number of desired voice calls and
business-critical data applications. Each active telephone call shall typically
require 100 Kbps of bandwidth for each uncompressed (G.711) and 40 Kbps
for each compressed (G.729) telephone conversation.
7) In addition the system shall have to ability to support digital trunks to PSTN and
connectivity for analog trunks and telephones (POTS). Provide failover
transfer for direct connection between an analog telephone and loop start trunk
in the event of a system or power failure.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 153
8) Provide a complete management application to control the operation and

management of the IP Telephone system using web based system
management tools.
9) Provide interface permitting building paging and public address capabilities.
10) DHCP service shall be configured for IP phones.
11) Coordinate with the RCJ to configure the dial plan and emergency call
services.
12) The IP telephone network shall have port security, DHCP snooping, DAI, and
other mechanisms to protect Layer 2 enabled.
13) Quality of Service
(a) Provide end to end Quality of Service (QoS) to ensure that voice quality
is protected in the presence of bursty data traffic.
(b) For toll-quality voice, provide packet loss of less than 1%.
(c) For toll-quality voice, ensure jitter of less than 50ms variation in delay of
sequentially transmitted packets.
(d) For toll-quality voice, provide latency less than 150ms end-to-end delay.
For the MAN links, provide a one-way delay of 80ms or less.
(e) To deliver toll-quality voice on an end-to-end basis, voice traffic must be
prioritized higher than bursty data traffic on every link along the data path
between IP telephones.
14) VLAN Implementation
(a) VLAN topologies shall be implemented to fully isolate voice and data
networks with no routing between them. Create end-to-end QoS policies
in a heterogeneous suited to a multi-vendor deployment of switches,
routers and end-hosts.
(b) VLANs shall also ensure that excessive broadcast and multicast packets
present on many data networks will not disrupt IP telephony equipment
or affect voice quality.
(c) Because the VLAN tag is not retained when the frame is forwarding over
WAN links, enable a Layer 3 prioritization method as well.
(d) Assign different subnet addresses to voice and data VLANs for
increased security between voice and data traffic and ensuring that all
call control and voice traffic gets the appropriate level of priority.
15) System Resiliency
(a) Provide redundant IP call manager appliances, voice gateways, core
network devices, and access network devices in a distributed, physically
separated fashion. Configure the IP telephone system such that no
single point of failure will result in a total system outage.
(b) To ensure resiliency in the event of a MAN failure, provide a migration
path with a legacy PBX systems, and allow staged VoIP deployments,
the IP Telephone system shall facilitate a variety of trunks for publicly
switched transmission network (PSTN) or analog connections. The local
PSTN also ensures that local phone service does not need to traverse

Rev. 0 5.5 - 154
the MAN link and provides service to analog devices such as fax,
modem, and emergency services.
(c) UPS power shall eliminate the impact of power glitches and allows for a
graceful system shutdown in the event of an extended outage.
(d) IP Telephone equipment shall be configured with redundant power
supplies.
16) Telephone Units
(a) Develop an equipment list for each project indicating quantities,
locations, and types of handsets to be deployed.
(b) IP Phone must support pass-through to connected PC equipment with
switched 10/100/1000 Base-T with VLAN priority tagging (802.1p/Q).
(c) Support Quality of Service (QoS)
(d) Support programmable station keys and support basic call features such
as hold and speed dial.
(e) Support the IEEE 802.af or 802.at PoE standards.
(f) Built-in compression with G.711, G.729 codecs, and SIP v2 Protocol
(g) 128-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
(h) IP Telephone Handsets
(1) Identify as part of project equipment lists the types, quantities, and
locations for IP telephone handsets.
(2) IP telephones shall have the following properties:
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet.
(ii) Speakerphone
(iii) Message waiting indicator
(iv) Handsfree support
(v) Power over Ethernet, minimum IEEE 802.3af compliant
(vi) IEEE 802.1p/q compliant
(vii) DHCP compliant
(viii) Codecs: G.711a, G.711μ, G.729, G.729a, and G.729b
(3) Basic IP telephones
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100 Ethernet
(ii) Monochrome LED pixel-based display
(iii) Wall Mounted
• Wall mounted telephone mounting heights shall be
proportional to the height of the person of use.
• Provide wall phones in utility spaces
(4) Office

Rev. 0 5.5 - 155
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet.

(ii) 127 mm graphical, 320 x 240, backlit, 16-bit, color display
(iii) Dual-port, multi-line display, IP speakerphone with
programmable keys
(iv) 4 soft keys, 6 line keys for use as lines, speed dials or
programmable keys.
(v) Third party XML support
(vi) These phones also support new modes of collaboration, such
as: integrated high-definition voice, video, and conferencing;
instant messaging and presence; instant access to cloud
services; USB peripherals for extensibility; and Bluetooth.
(5) Conference Room Phones
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet
(ii) Conference phones shall be full duplex audio
(iii) Wired or wireless microphone kit
17) Voicemail Requirements:
(a) System shall provide voicemail for all extensions.
(b) Directory lookup by called party’s last name shall be available.
(c) System shall have the ability to clear out and initialize all mailboxes using
a bulk administration tool for summer time maintenance.
(d) Message Indication – the receipt of a message in a mailbox shall initiate
a message waiting light or a stutter dial tone to indicate a new message
condition.
(e) System must have both Global and per Mailbox settings.
(f) System must allow programmable mailbox features such as, but not
limited to:
(1) Size of mailbox
(2) Length of greeting
(3) Maximum recorded message length
(4) Message full warning indicator
(5) Internal and external greeting
(6) Reporting by mailbox
18) Call Accounting
(a) System shall include built in reporting capabilities.
(b) Call Record fields need to include, but are not limited to the following:
(1) Date
(2) Time
(3) Called Number

Rev. 0 5.5 - 156
(4) Calling Number by Extension

19) Voice Gateways
(a) Voice gateways may be required on per project basis where it is a
requirement for buildings to access local TSP telephony services for
connection to the IP telephone system.
(b) Voice gateway shall convert TDM telephony traffic from the Publicly
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) into digital IP packets for transport
over IP network. It shall also convert digital IP packets into TDM
telephone traffic for transport across the PSTN.
(c) The Gateway shall bring application intelligence into the network and
enable efficient deployment of secure, reliable, and accelerated
Extensible Markup Language (XML) applications and Web services. This
shall enable the intelligent network to support service-oriented
architecture (SOA) implemented using web services technologies and to
accelerate, secure, and scale XML applications.
(d) Gateway shall permit auto-provisioning of web services from Universal
Description Discovery and Integration (UDDI) registry and application
servers, and provide transport and message-level security for XML -
based network traffic.
(e) Gateway shall enable a shared-service environment, reducing end-to-
end latency, and enabling business services to scale to meet capacity
imperatives while improving server utilization.
(f) Gateway shall permit XML messages of all sizes to be processed without
compromising security, interoperability, or system reliability.
c. Existing Telephone Systems: The following is a description of existing systems and
applies only for minor moves, additions, and changes required in renovation
projects, where telephone system upgrades to current technologies are not in the
scope of work.
1) Existing EPABX With Public Switched Network Description
(a) General
(1) In order to conserve manpower resources, to minimize call holding
time and usage, to provide for maximum signaling control on the
public switched network and to be consistent with the Kingdom
Standards, all EPABX applications shall be equipped for the
following:
(i) Outgoing to Public Switched Network
• One-way, 2-wire, direct outward dial (DOD), loop start
PABX to exchange trunks.
• The method of pulsing shall be DTMF as per ITU-T
Recommendations.
• Upon seizure from the PABX (polarity reversal), the public
exchange switch shall transmit 425 Hz continuous dial tone
at a nominal -13 dBm toward the PABX. The public
exchange dial tone shall be transmitted through the PABX
switch matrix to the PABX extension originating the call.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 157
The PABX extension shall then dial (DTMF transmitted to

the public exchange switch) the desired number.
(ii) Incoming from Public Exchange Switch
• All PABX applications shall be equipped for direct inward
dial (DID) directly to PABX extensions from the public
switched network using one-way trunk circuits consisting of
loop start line signaling and R2-MFC inter-register pulse
signaling.
(2) Numbering Scheme
(i) The numbering scheme used in the PABX must be coordinated
with the Royal Commission so that the numbering plan will
match the local public network switch.
(ii) The National Numbering Plan requires 10 digit numbers of
which the first 3 are the public exchange Switch NXX code.
The last 7 digits identify the particular number of the lines
associated with that code. A maximum of 4 digits shall be used
for PABX extensions.
(iii) The number of DlD trunks depends on the volume of inward
traffic to the PABX. Sufficient numbers of trunks must always
be available to provide non-blocking access into the PABX
from the public switched network. A call completion rate from
the public network service exchange to a PABX shall be 95%
or better. If subscriber equipment performance or capacity
limitations degrade the public network standard and adversely
affect other subscriber usage, the Royal Commission will take
any measures deemed necessary to protect the public network.
(iv) DID trunk circuits are comprised of two factors; line signaling
and line pulsing (inter-register).
• Line signaling shall be 2-wire loop start (a and b wire
battery reversal).
• Line pulsing shall be accomplished by means of ITU-T
based, Saudi Telephone modified, R2-MFC inter-register
signaling.
• Upon special request and following review and approval by
the engineering department, a separate PABX attendant 2-
way, 2-wire trunk group may be established using the
PABX main number, if the PABX application is large
enough to require full-time attendant(s) operation.
• In cases when small PABXs up to 120 extensions, are
considered and trunk R2-MFC interface is not yet available
from manufacturers, the system application should be
reconsidered for a large hybrid EKTS or for Special
Business Service. If all desired features cannot be
provided in the EKTS or Centrex mode, then a deviation
request may be submitted to the Royal Commission, as per
Section 8.13 D.3 below for consideration.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 158
(3) Deviation
(i) If any deviation is required from the standard DOD, DID R2-
MFC for any PABX applications, a deviation request must be
submitted to the Royal Commission for review and/or approval
(Royal Commission Telecom Engineering approval required).
(ii) The PABX shall have means to internally test any DOD or DID
trunk appearance.
(iii) The PABX customer shall perform tests to the customer/Royal
Commission interface point before any PABX trunk faults are
reported to the Royal Commission.
(b) PABX
(1) PABX trunk blocking, automatically or manually, shall be
accomplished by disconnecting either the trunk battery negative
polarity, positive polarity, or both, from the battery supply.
(c) Transmission Parameters
(1) The trunk interface for all EPABX's shall be analog/digital.
(2) The following technical criteria shall be required of any PABX
equipment operating within the Royal Commission switched
network:
(i) Signaling Frequencies
• The frequency tolerance shall be ± 4 Hz.
• Power level of each un-modulated signaling frequency
shall have a value of - 14.5 dBm ± 1 dB.
• Signaling frequency power level of any leak current
transmitted to the Royal Commission facilities must be at
least 50 dB below the nominal level of anyone frequency
when no multi-frequency combinations are being sent, and
at least 30 dB below the level of either one of the signaling
frequencies when a multi-frequency combination is being
sent.
• The inter-register receivers may be sensitive to the
transmission characteristics of the unloaded cable plant
with respect to frequency attenuation and balance return
loss. Provision shall be made for field adjustable
compensation options to accommodate mixed or single
gage, (0.4, 0.5, 0.65) non-loaded, 600 ohm outside plant
facilities with a range from 0 to 8 dB.
• The sensitivity range of the multi-frequency signaling
equipment shall be -5 dBm to - 35 dBm.
• The total power level of all frequencies due to harmonic
distortion and inter-modulation between 300 and 3400 Hz
shall be at least 37 dB below the power level of any one
frequency.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 159
• The time interval between the start of sending of each of

the 2 frequencies constituting a multi-frequency
combination shall not exceed 1 ms. The time interval
between the cessation of sending of each of the two
frequencies shall not exceed 1 ms.
• The operate and release times of the receive section of the
multi-frequency signaling shall be (To + Tr) = 70 ms.
• When multi-frequency combination has caused the receive
section of the multi-frequency signaling equipment to
operate, the latter shall not release if the signaling
frequencies are interrupted for less than 7 ms.
• The longest signal to be ignored by the receive section of
the multi-frequency signaling equipment shall be 8 ms.
• The acceptable difference in power level of the 2
frequencies of a multi-frequency pair shall be less than 5
dB for adjacent frequencies and less than 7 dB for non-
adjacent frequencies.
(d) The receiver bandwidth shall accept a variation in frequency of ± 10 Hz
relative to the nominal value for any signaling frequency.
(e) Traffic Parameters
(1) The PABX matrix and processor shall be designed, and the number
of trunk circuits from the public switched network calculated to
provide free access into the PABX, thereby protecting the public
switched network against congestion caused by unnecessary call
attempts.
(2) To ensure an acceptable grade of service for PABX users, the
PABX switch matrix, processor and trunks should be engineered for
the following busy hour parameters:
(i) 0.12 Erlangs per extension (combined originating and
terminating).
(ii) 0.24 Erlangs per PABX - exchange trunk.
(iii) Blocking factors should be 1:200 (0.005) for originating,
terminating and intra-PABX calls.
(iv) Local Call Average Holding Time: 100 s.
(v) Long Distance Call Average Holding Time: 120 s.
(vi) Dial Tone Delay to PABX Extension: No call attempts delayed
over 3 s.
(3) The processor capacity shall be engineered to accommodate non-
blocking during busy hours for switching, special feature processing,
maintenance diagnostics, traffic measuring and message recording.
(4) The switch matrix may be either time- or space-based; however, the
switch cross points must be solid-state.
(f) Signaling Tones and Announcements

Rev. 0 5.5 - 160
(1) The following signaling tones are Ministry of Communication and

Information Technology (MCIT) standard and in order to present the
minimum contrast to the user should be closely approximated:
(i) Dial Tone: 425 Hz, continuous.
(ii) Ringing Tone: 425 Hz, 1.2 s on, 4.65 s off.
(iii) Busy and Congestion Tone: 425Hz 0.5 s on, 0.5 s off.
(iv) Intrusion Tone: 425 Hz, 0.17 s on, 0.17 s off, repeated.
(v) Number Unavailable Tone: 425Hz, 0.2 s on, 0.2 s off, repeated.
(vi) Signaling from a PABX that affect the performance
measurements of the public network or cause confusion to the
public network administration shall not be accepted.
(g) Announcements
(1) No information signals or announcements are allowed from the
PABX before the answer signal except ringing tone.
(2) Announcements provided by the PABX shall convey only PABX
related messages (limited to PABX or business identification).
(h) Additional Requirements
(1) A negative 48V DC power plant shall be supplied with capacity to
provide DC power for the PABX and all peripheral equipment. If
critical peripheral equipment is AC powered such as the
maintenance teletype, and user determined critical message detail
recording equipment, a DC to AC inverter shall be provided. The DC
power plant shall be able to provide power at the required operating
voltage for a minimum of 48 hours.
(2) A rectifier capable of charging the batteries from a fully discharged
state to fully charge in an 8 hour period while maintaining normal
PABX load shall be provided. The rectifier shall be of an automatic
constant voltage and current limited type.
(3) Batteries shall be lead calcium or nickel cadmium type. During
normal operation, the batteries shall be floated across the load.
(4) Remote power alarms shall be provided for:
(i) AC power failure
(ii) Rectifier failure
(iii) Low voltage
(iv) High voltage
(i) PABX System Requirements
(1) The PABX system shall physically consist of free standing
cabinet(s) of modular construction or wall mount.
(2) The stored program control (SPC) operating features and
configurations shall be executed from the attendant console or the
maintenance console.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 161
(3) The generic program must be non-volatile or be protected in the

event of AC power failure.
(4) The system alarm shall be provided with a remote major alarm to
indicate call processing failure or AC power failure.
(5) Generic programs and feature releases shall be easily updated as
released.
(6) The equipment cabinet should be arranged to permit all circuit board
replacement and provide maintenance access points, while
operating from the front. If rear access is required, the installation
shall provide for such access.
(7) The system shall be provided with complete sets of installation and
operations documentation.
(8) All specialized tools, circuit board extenders, backup program tapes
shall be provided for the PABX and DC power systems.
(9) Consumable and component spares shall be provided for a
minimum of 2 years’ service.
(j) Main Distribution Frame
(1) A main distribution frame, using the "quick-connect" termination
technique, shall be provided. All PABX system extension lines,
PABX to exchange trunks, consoles and peripheral equipment shall
be terminated on the MDF.
(2) All outside plant cable pairs shall be terminated on MDF blocks
equipped with protectors. The protection devices shall be 3-element,
fail safe ionizing discharge tubes.
(3) The terminal blocks shall normally be mounted on industry standard
steel framework.
(4) If there is inadequate equipment space, industry standard 1-sided,
wall mounted terminal block arrangements may be provided.
2) Modifications to Existing Tertiary Telephone Cabling for Residential Housing
(a) Refer to TSP standards for most up to date requirements.
(b) The tertiary network is defined as the portion of the telephone networks
from the telecommunications handhole, provided by others and located
at the Subscriber Property Line, to the telephone outlets in the
subscriber's residence. This includes but is not limited to ductwork,
cables, protectors, splitters, amplifiers and jacks. All defined equipment
and fittings must be provided and installed by the Contractor building the
individual house or apartment.
(c) The telecommunications handhole shall be equipped with two 32 mm
(ID) HDPE duct stubs for each individual residence or small apartment
building.
(d) The ducts shall be joined to the duct stubs and extended to the building,
maintaining a minimum of 600 mm of cover from final grade to top of
duct and having the lowest point of the duct run at the handhole
entrance.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 162
(e) At the building, the ducts shall be joined to factory preformed 90 degree
bends.
(f) The telephone cable shall be installed in a 50 mm duct and shall
terminate in separate flush mounted wall boxes.
(g) Wherever practical, handholes shall be placed at the property line
between adjacent residences and subscriber cables installed for each
building. Handholes shall serve a maximum of ten adjacent subscribers.
The only allowable exceptions to serving more than ten residences from
one handhole are as follows:
(1) A subscriber cable duct may be extended from a handhole to serve
the last residence on the street if no future duct extensions will be
required such as at the end of a cul-de-sac or where common
property lines abut a street at one point, again as at the end of a
cul-de-sac or along the inside radius of a sharp curve.
(2) Separate conduit runs shall be provided for telephone and TV
cables within the buildings.
3) Modifications to Existing Telephone Tertiary Network
(a) The Telephone Tertiary Network consists of provision and installation of
an outdoor telephone cable conforming to the requirements stipulated by
the Royal Commission from the telecommunications handhole to the
residence telephone protector access box.
(b) An indoor telephone cable conforming to the requirements stipulated by
the Royal Commission shall be extended from the protector to all
telephone outlets.
(c) Connection to the telephone distribution cable in the handhole will be
done by the Telephone Administration or Site Development Contractor,
as applicable.
(d) Wall outlets shall be installed at 300 mm AFFL, in a standard flush
mounted wall box for desk type telephones and at 1350 mm AFFL for
wall mounted telephones.
(e) The indoor cable may loop from outlet to outlet.
(f) The outdoor telephone cable shall be a paired, 0.9 or 0.65 mm conductor
non-armored polyethylene sheath filled cable containing a minimum of
two 4 pair for each single residence.
(g) The indoor telephone cable to standard telephone sets shall be a
minimum of one 3 pair 0.9 or 0.5 mm copper conductors individually
color coded with polyethylene conductor insulation and enclosed in a
polyvinyl chloride jacket.
(h) Both indoor and outdoor telephone cables shall be free from opens,
shorts, grounds and transpositions on all pairs.
4) Existing Telephone Line Protection
(a) All subscribers’ equipment shall be connected to the outside plant
entrance facilities via a 3 element, 350 V DC ionizing discharge tube,
inserted in every pair entering and/or leaving the building.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 163
(b) These protection devices shall be installed at the common point of entry
to the building and shall be connected to the building grounding system
via an isolated and independent ground lead.
(c) In the event that a building ground is not readily accessible at the
common point of entry, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
establish a ground point that conforms to Guideline Specifications.
(d) The line shall be capable of withstanding the following conditions without
damage to subscriber equipment:
TABLE 5.5.2.A: CONDITIONS TO WITHSTAND
Applied Voltage Period of Application
1000 V 20 microseconds
100 V 1 second
± 20% Normal working conditions
5) Existing Protector Outlet Box

(a) General
(1) The Residence Protector Outlet Box shall be flush mounted,
accessible from the outside and of sufficient size, for the telephone
service to:
(i) Contain two 3 element 350 V Fail-Safe Gas Discharge Tubes.
(ii) Terminate 50 mm duct from telecommunications handhole.
(iii) Terminate conduit runs for telephone outlets.
(iv) Terminate 25 mm conduit nipple from the CATV service box.
(v) Terminate a 25 mm conduit for the ground lead and for the
CATV service to:
• Contain an over voltage protection unit.
• Terminate a 50 mm duct from the telecomm handhole.
• Terminate conduit from internal CATV outlets.
• Terminate a 25 mm conduit nipple from the telephone
service box.
(b) Protector Outlet Box for Apartments

Rev. 0 5.5 - 164
(1) The apartment protector outlet boxes shall be of sufficient size to

house the above items as required for each residence in the
building.
d. Intercom Systems
1) Intercom systems provide building audio or audio and video communication
between designated locations using a two-way connection between a
substation and masterstation.
2) The intercom systems shall utilize building IP network based communications
and be connected through the building telecommunications structured cabling
systems.
3) Intercom systems shall be provided within various RCJ facilities for the
following applications as directed by the RCJ on a per project basis.
(a) Schools
(1) Door/Gate Entry Access Control
(2) Emergency Communications
(b) Residential Facilities
(1) Door Entry/Gate Control
(2) Multi-tenant Entrance Communications
(c) Industrial Facilities
(d) Healthcare
(e) Commercial/Retail
(2) Security Transaction Window
(f) Transportation/Car Parks
(2) Security Transaction Window
4) Door/Gate Entry Access Control Requirements
(a) Door intercom stations shall be located at normally locked building visitor
entrances, after hour entrances, service door locations, gates and other
locations determined through the project planning process.
(b) Door intercom stations shall permit hands free communications with a
masterstation with activation of the call button with LED status indicator.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 165
(c) Door intercom stations shall be of stainless steel construction and rated
for interior or exterior environments. In new construction, doors stations
shall be recess mounted flush with finished construction.
(d) Concealed conduit pathway, minimum of 75 mm diameter shall be
provided to serve the door station backbox.
(e) Indicate mounting height of door stations to permit call button activation
at standard switch height and permit video camera view area to capture
face and torso of visitor.
(f) Locate door intercom stations adjacent to door entrance with clear
approach to unit. Stations serving vehicle entrances shall be bollard
mounted and permit operation through driver side vehicle windows.
Avoid locations where direct sunlight will interfere with system camera.
Provide shrouds around the devices where necessary at exterior
locations to mitigate environmental interference with system operation.
(g) The door station shall be IP addressable and powered by Power over
Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station shall be connected to the
building LAN through structured cabling using one (1) minimum ANSI-
TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet connection. Network
connections shall be provisioned with quality of service, VLAN
separation, and multicast support.
(h) The door substation shall support video surveillance through a fixed
ONVIF compatible integrated IP camera. Constant video streaming from
the door station shall be provided. Digital pan, tilt, and zoom camera
with wide angle lens shall be provided.
(i) The door substation shall permit mounting of an integrated card reader
connected to the building access control system (if available) to unlock
the door for valid credential holders. Access control system cabling shall
be provided into the substation for connection to the card reader.
(j) Form C relay outputs shall be available with a connection to the local
door hardware power supply to permit remote release unlock of the door
for authorized visitors.
(k) Door intercom stations shall be capable of communicating with all
building master station locations.
(l) Master stations shall be located within buildings at reception points,
service desks, security offices, maintenance management offices, or
other monitoring locations deemed required by the project planning
process.
(m) Master stations shall provide hands free communication with handset for
privacy to any substation.
(n) The master station shall be IP addressable and powered by Power over
Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station shall be connected to the
building LAN through structured cabling using one (1) minimum ANSI-
TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet connection. Network
connections shall be provisioned with quality of service, VLAN
separation, and multicast support. Network protocols accepted shall
include: IPv4, IPv6, TCP, UDP, SIP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTSP, RTP, RTCP,
IGMP, MLD, SMTP, DHCP, NTP, and DNS.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 166
(o) The master station shall have an integrated color LCD display to view
substation video surveillance.
(p) The master station shall have programmable Form C dry contact
multipurpose relays to enable remote release of access controlled doors
triggered by the operator.
(q) The master station shall be desk, wall, or rack mounted depending on
project requirements.
5) Security Transaction Window
(a) A window security intercom system shall be provided where determined
on a per project basis to permit secure and environmentally protected
public communications.
(b) The attendant shall utilize a gooseneck microphone and mono type
headset.
(c) Communication shall be voice activated requiring no additional
operations during conversation.
(d) The system may be placed in standby by the operator, muting the
attendant and playing public side audio at a reduced level.
(e) A detection sensor shall be used to signal the system when a customer
is present.
(f) An external speaker and acoustic tube or microphone shall be provided
to communicate with the public side. Lobby or waiting area paging
speakers shall be connected to the attendant’s station to permit queued
pages.
(g) Noise cancellation shall be used in the system to reduce background
noise.
6) Emergency Communications
(a) Emergency communications station locations shall be determined by the
project planning process after review of building and site plans. Propose
locations based upon project security risk assessments. Request
confirmation of locations from project stakeholder’s local protection
personnel.
(b) Typical emergency communications station locations include but are not
limited to:
(1) Elevators
(2) Car parks
(3) Pedestrian walkways
(4) Public building corridors
(5) Parks
(6) Universities
(c) Emergency communications stations shall permit hands free
communications with police or designated security personnel capable of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 167
providing emergency assistance, with activation of the call button with

LED status indicator.
(d) Emergency communications stations shall be labeled with
“EMERGENCY” lettering in English and Arabic.
(e) Each station shall automatically place a call to preprogrammed number
when activated. In the event that the call is not completed, the station
shall rollover to a second and third preprogrammed number until
completion of the call.
(f) Emergency communications stations shall be of stainless steel
construction and rated for interior or exterior environments. In new
construction, stations shall be recess mounted flush with finished
construction. Stations may stanchion mounted where designated as
freestanding in the site.
(g) Concealed conduit pathway, minimum of 75 mm diameter shall be
provided to serve the emergency communications station backbox.
(h) Indicate mounting height of door stations to permit call button activation
at standard switch height and permit video camera view area to capture
face and torso of visitor.
(i) Locate door emergency call stations with clear approach to unit. Provide
shrouds around the devices where necessary at exterior locations to
mitigate environmental interference with system operation.
(j) The emergency communications station shall be IP addressable and
powered by Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station
shall be connected to the building LAN through structured cabling using
one (1) minimum ANSI-TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet
connection. Network connections shall be provisioned with quality of
service, VLAN separation, and multicast support. Where call stations are
located on sites not in direct vicinity of buildings, connection shall occur
through one of the following means:
(1) Underground single mode fiber from RCJ Metropolitan Network.
Final device connection will be supplied through a fiber to copper
media converter.
(2) Cellular Gateway
(3) The station may be powered through utility service drop, solar array
module/battery, or night charge/battery
(k) The emergency station shall support video surveillance through a fixed
ONVIF compatible integrated IP camera. Constant video streaming from
the station shall be provided. Digital pan, tilt, and zoom camera with
wide angle lens shall be provided.
(l) Form C relay outputs shall be available and used to a trigger beacon
strobe light integral to the unit housing. This feature shall be provided in
outdoor areas and car parks.
7) Harsh Environmental Conditions

Rev. 0 5.5 - 168
(a) In industrial or otherwise harsh environments subject to dirt, dust, and

water infiltration, provide IP66 or IP67 rated components to suit location
requirements
(b) Components shall incorporate noise cancellation technologies.
(c) Housings shall be constructed of rugged antistatic plastic or aluminum
and stainless steel housings.
(d) Stations shall permit integration of push to talk microphones.
8) Multi-tenant Entrance Communications
(a) In multi-tenant residential developments, provide a visitor entrance
communications intercom system.
(b) The system shall permit visitors to announce their presence to individual
residences through a video entrance station.
(c) Entrance stations shall be located in the main vestibule or lobby of the
facility and provide the following functionality:
(1) Wide angle camera allows user to view up to 170° of the entry area
(2) Direct digit dialing, alphabetical scrolling, or jump scrolling by letter
to select tenant name
(3) Digital panel stores tenant names/number locations and unique
access codes to activate door release
(4) Built‑in motion sensor to detect presence of a visitor (optional)
(5) PC software for loading resident information, access codes, and
welcome message
(6) Hands‑free communication
9) Tenant intercom stations shall be provided within residences wall mounted
near entrance. Intercom stations shall provide the following functionality:
(a) Color LCD screen with picture memory for recording visitor images
(b) Hands‑free or push‑to‑talk communication
(c) Door release and security guard / concierge call buttons
(d) Security inputs for alerting tenant and guard
7. Structured Cabling
a. General
1) Structured cabling systems shall comply with the following standards:
(a) Structured Cabling Component Standards
(1) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications
Cabling and Components.
(2) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components
(b) Project Type Structured Cabling Standards
(1) Commercial Buildings - ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling

Rev. 0 5.5 - 169
(2) Residential Buildings - ANSI/TIA-570-C Residential

Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, and ISO/IEC 15018
Edition 1.0: Information Technology – Generic Cabling for Homes
(3) Data Centers – ANSI/TIA-942-A Telecommunications Infrastructure
Standard for Data Centers, and ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0:
Information Technology – Generic Cabling Systems For Data
Centres
(4) Industrial Facilities - ANSI/TIA-1005-A Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises, and ISO/IEC 24702
Edition 1.0: Information Technology – Generic Cabling – Industrial
Premises
(5) Educational Facilities - ANSI/BICSI 001-2009, Information Transport
Systems Design Standard for K-12 Educational Institutions
(6) Healthcare Facilities - ANSI/BICSI 004-2012, Information
Technology Systems Design and Implementation Best Practices for
Healthcare Institutions and Facilities
(c) System Level Standards
(1) Implementation of Structured Cabling Systems - ISO/IEC 14763-2
Edition 1.0: Implementation and Operation of Customer Premises
Cabling – Part 2: Planning and Installation
(2) Telecommunications Cabling and Terminations - ANSI/TIA-568-C.0:
Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises,
ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2: Information Technology – Generic
Cabling For Customer Premises, and ISO/IEC 14763-2 Edition 1.0:
Implementation and Operation of Customer Premises Cabling – Part
2: Planning and Installation
(3) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - ANSI/TIA-569-C:
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
(4) Telecommunications Labeling Criteria - ANSI/TIA-606-B
Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure, and
ISO/IEC 18598: Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM)
Systems – Requirements, Data Exchange and Applications
(5) Telecommunications Grounding Requirements - ANSI/TIA-607-B
Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for
Customer Premises, and NECA/BICSI 607-2011 - Standard for
Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
(6) Building Automation Systems - ANSI/TIA-862-A: Building
Automation Systems Cabling
(7) Outside Plant Cabling Systems - ANSI/TIA-758-A Customer-owned
Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
2) Structured cabling for LAN’s within buildings shall be based on a star topology
unless otherwise stated.
3) The structured cable plant shall be installed by a manufacturer certified
contractor using approved components such that the manufacturer provides an

Rev. 0 5.5 - 170
extended applications assurance warranty for a period of 10 years as a

minimum. The structured cabling system performance shall be warrantied to
exceed all relevant global cabling system standards, including Category 6 and
Category 6A as well as ISO/IEC 11801 Class E and Class Ea.
4) Single mode optical fiber shall be provided in the intrabuilding backbone and
conform to the ITU-T G.652 standard.
5) Unless otherwise directed by the RCJ, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs
in cables; positions in patch panels, cross-connects and terminal strips and
space in conduit, pathways, cable trays and wireway to accommodate 20%
future increase in active workstations. Cable pathway fill percentages shall
observe requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, ANSI/TIA-569-C, and ISO/IEC
14763-2 ed1.0.
6) In order to minimize costs over the long term, it is highly desirable to develop a
comprehensive building network design that takes into account the needs of all
of the building occupants. Once that design has been developed, it can be
implemented in phases as funding permits.
7) Building networks that adhere to structured wiring specifications typically have
one central wiring closet called a main distribution frame (MDF) and one or
more distributed wiring closets called intermediate distribution frames (IDFs).
8) Each IDF shall be star wired back to the MDF via fiber optic cabling. Fiber
cabling supports longer distances than twisted pair copper wiring and it is
immune to electrical interference and grounding problems. It also has the
potential for supporting high data transmission capacities (gigabits per second).
Twelve strands of fiber cabling shall be run from MDF to each IDF to provide
for future growth and redundancy.
9) The LAN components of an IDF minimally consist of one or more rack mounted
switches (either modular chassis or stackable, shared and/or switched) with
each hub port connecting to a port on a rack mounted patch panel via a
stranded wire Category 6A UTP patch cable. Each port on the patch panel is
connected to an RJ-45 wall plate in an office through a solid conductor
horizontal Category 6A UTP cable running through the building infrastructure.
The networked device is connected to the wall plate via a stranded wire
Category 6A UTP station cable.
10) The total cable length for CAT 6A UTP wiring is 100 m (90 m for horizontal
cabling and 10 m for both station and patch cables combined). As indicated
above, fixed horizontal cables must use solid copper Category 6A wire,
whereas, patch cables must be stranded copper Category 6A wire. When
designing and installing Category 6A wiring, it is important to stay away from
sources of electrical interference, e.g., 300 mm from light ballasts and 1.2 m
from electrical devices such as high-voltage transformers, electric motors,
microwave ovens and Xerox machines.
11) Cable trays shall be installed above ceilings to provide clearly defined paths for
horizontal Category 6A wiring, and can keep cables from sources of electrical
interference. They also protect cables from damage by other personnel
working above ceilings.
12) Rack mounted patch panels shall provide the direct termination points for
Category 6A wiring in the IDF. Although Category 6A cabling can be
terminated in 110-type punch down blocks, it is not recommended unless that

Rev. 0 5.5 - 171
type of termination block will be installed for both telephone and data services.
Under no circumstances shall 66-type punch down blocks be utilized since they
can adversely affect data signals. One shall also not plan to allow two signals
(either LAN-LAN or LAN-VOICE) within the same four pair of a Category 6A
cable.
13) Cable installations must comply with appropriate building codes. All
penetrations through rated fire walls, ceilings and floors must be fire sealed.
Cabling with required fire rated shall always be utilized, but it is required when
installed in air plenums or traversing floors of the building. SASO and IEC
60754 and 60332 requirements shall be followed.
14) Before attaching networking equipment to the cable infrastructure, each
terminated cable shall be tested with Category 6A certification equipment (level
III or IIIe scanner/tester respectively). Each cabling link shall pass all Category
6A standards and be submitted to the system manufacturer to obtain the
required minimum 10 year structured cabling system warranty.
b. Structured Cabling Components
1) Work Area
(a) Work area is considered telecommunications outlet/connector (including
multi-user outlet assembly, consolidation point, and transition point),
work area cable (patch cord), and work area equipment.
(b) Work area outlet shall house a minimum of two cables per outlet box
location.
(c) A minimum of two outlet box locations shall be designed per space.
(d) Telecommunications outlets shall be located directly adjacent to an
electrical receptacle and shall typically be mounted at the same height.
2) Horizontal Distribution Systems
(a) Horizontal pathways include the raceways utilized for routing
telecommunications cabling such as j-hooks, conduit, and cable trays.
(b) Horizontal Pathway Systems
(1) Raceways shall be designed to accommodate the maximum amount
of work areas. Where pathways include additional cabling
requirements, capacity shall be increased accordingly.
(2) Access to pathways shall be maintained.
(3) Pathways shall be designed for a 40% fill capacity maximum
including space allocated for future, with each work area outlet
allowing for at least three cables.
(4) Cellular floors may be utilized in spaces where:
(i) Increased flexibility is required (large office layouts)
(ii) Large capacity is required
(iii) Increased security is necessary
(iv) Electrical interference is an issue

Rev. 0 5.5 - 172
(5) Conduit pathways shall have bend radii six times the internal
diameter of the conduit for conduit smaller than 50 mm. For conduit
with an internal diameter larger than 50 mm, the bend radius must
be 10 times the diameter.
(6) Conduit runs shall be designed to have no more than two bends.
(i) Where more than two 90 degree bends in a conduit run are
necessary, provide pull boxes between sections with two
bends or less.
(ii) Where a bend between 100 and 180 degrees is required,
provide a pull box at each bend.
(iii) Where conduit runs exceed 30 m, provide a pull box.
(7) Conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings to prevent
cable damage during installation or use.
(8) Access Floors
(i) Raised floors may be utilized in data centers and
telecommunications equipment rooms.
(ii) Cabling in raised floors shall be fire rated to permit usages of
space as air handling plenum.
(iii) Standard height for access floors shall be 150mm or higher,
with 50mm between the top of tray and the bottom of the
underside of the stringer allocated for accessibility.
(iv) Floors shall be designed with aluminum locking pedestals to
support and interlock with lateral bracing.
(9) Ceiling Systems
(i) Maintain 75 mm clear vertical space above conduit and cables.
(ii) Maintain 300 mm clear vertical space above cable trays.
(iii) Cable tray support span shall not be greater than the length of
a section of tray.
(iv) Cable trays shall be utilized to support cabling in areas of
cabling that converge and route to the Telecommunications
Room.
• Cable trays shall be supported by either trapeze supports,
cantilever brackets, individual rod suspensions brackets.
(v) Cable trays accessories shall be provided by manufacturer.
(10) Typical telecommunications outlet backboxes shall be large capacity
to facilitate cable terminations and bends.
(c) Horizontal Cabling Systems
(1) Horizontal cables shall consist of:
(i) 4 pair 100 ohm balanced Category 6/6A or higher cabling
(terminated utilizing either T568A or T568B wiring standards)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 173
(ii) Two or more strands of 50/125micron multimode fiber optic

cable (terminated utilizing Duplex LC connectors)
(2) Service loops at the TR shall be 3m; service loops at the work area
outlet location shall be 1m.
3) Backbone Distribution Systems
(a) Backbone systems shall be comprised of:
(1) Cable pathways
(2) Equipment Rooms
(3) Telecommunications Rooms (typically containing HC)
(4) Telecommunications enclosures (typically containing HC)
(5) Entrance Facility
(6) Transmission media (cables)
(7) Miscellaneous support facilities
(b) Backbone Building Pathways
(1) Distribution shall be in a star topology with no more than two levels
of cross-connects.
(2) Telecommunications Rooms shall be stacked in multilevel facilities.
(3) Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 25 mm above the floor.
(4) Sleeves shall be provided (103mm) to allow four sleeves or
conduits, plus one additional spare for every 4000 m2.
(5) All penetrations shall be firestopped as required.
(6) Coordinate all penetrations with structural team.
(c) Backbone Building Cabling
(1) Backbone cabling shall typically consist of :
(i) Single-mode fiber optic cable
(ii) 100ohm balanced twisted pair cabling
(2) Fiber optic cable may be utilized for:
(i) Interbuilding backbone cabling
(ii) Intrabuilding backbone cabling
(iii) Horizontal cabling
(iv) Patch cords and equipment cables
(3) Tight buffered fiber optic cables
(i) 900micron plastic coating surrounding fiber
(ii) Utilized for:
• Intrabuilding backbone cabling
• Horizontal distribution cabling

Rev. 0 5.5 - 174
• Patch cords and equipment cables

(4) Loose buffered fiber optics
(i) Outside plant cabling
(ii) Select inside plant cabling
(5) Hardware/equipment mounting may be:
(i) Wall mounted:
• When rack mounting of equipment is not a possibility
• Equipment requires wall mounting
(ii) Rack mounted (in 480 mm racks or cabinets) in:
• Telecommunications Rooms
• Equipment Rooms
• Computer Rooms
(iii) Provide splicing, termination and patch panels as required for
cabling being utilized.
4) Campus Cabling
(a) Indoor backbone campus fiber optic cabling shall have minimum bend
radius of 10 times the cables outside diameter installed, and 15 times the
outside diameter during installation.
(b) OSP backbone fiber optic cabling shall have minimum bend radius of 10
times the cables outside diameter installed, and 20 times the outside
diameter during installation.
(c) Install fiber optic cabling in inner duct to allow for sectionalization for
future cable pulls.
(d) Splicing
(1) Fusion
(e) Terminating
(1) Pigtail splicing with duplex LC connectors
(2) Pre-connectorized cables with duplex LC connectors
5) Telecommunications Rooms (TR) and Enclosures (TE)
(a) TR’s may house:
(1) HC (horizontal crossconnect)
(2) IC (intermediate crossconnect)
(3) MC (main crossconnect)
(4) EF (entrance facility)
(5) Passive components
(6) Active components served by backbone cabling
(b) TE’s may house:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 175
(1) HC
(2) IC
(3) MC
(c) Clearances:
(1) Provide 1 m (minimum) in front and rear of each equipment rack or
cabinet.
(2) Reserve minimum of 1m clear working area around cross connects
for accessibility.
6) Equipment Rooms
(a) Equipment Rooms serve a building, campus or tenant, while TR’s serve
portions of a building.
(b) ER’s may house:
(1) EF (entrance facility)
(2) TR
(3) Cross-connect facilities
(4) Active components served by backbone cabling
(5) Building facilities
(c) TR size:
(1) Where usable floor space being served is less than 500 m2:
(2) Interior TR dimensions shall be 3.0 m x 2.4 m.
(d) Where usable floor space being served is greater than 500 m² and less
than or equal to 800 m²:
(e) Where usable floor space being served is greater than 800m² and less
than or equal to 1000m²:
(f) Clearances:
(1) Provide a minimum of 1 m in front and rear of each equipment rack
or cabinet.
(2) Reserve minimum of 1m clear working area around cross connects
for accessibility.
7) Telecommunications Entrance Facilities and Termination
(a) Separate entrance facilities may be required for:
(1) Access Provider
(2) Campus distribution
(3) CATV network
(4) FTTH system

Rev. 0 5.5 - 176
(b) Designer shall work to coordinate right of way easements and permits as
applicable to the project.
(c) In some cases full route diversity may be required. This requires a
completely (physically) separate route for cabling to provide redundancy
in the case that emergency backup is required. This is typical for:
(1) Hospitals
(2) Airports
(3) Police/Fire/Emergency Services
(4) Military
(5) Radio and TV stations
(6) Computer centers
8. Distributed Television System
a. Distributed television systems implemented by the RCJ include various system
types such as IPTV, Hybrid Fiber Coaxial (HFC) and Satellite Master Antenna
(SMATV).
b. The IPTV system, utilizing FTTH GPON networks for distribution, shall be provided
for new projects for commercial or residential buildings. The RCJ has established a
central IPTV Headend Building located within the Buffer Zone. Local IPTV Buildings
are provided throughout Jubail to serve all areas of the city. Each Local IPTV
Building is connected to the IPTV Headend Building utilizing single mode fiber in the
underground distribution system.
c. HFC type systems shall be provided for projects as directed by the RCJ. HFC type
systems are currently in use in existing RCJ facilities, and shall only be maintained
or expanded in renovation type projects. These projects shall be designed to
conform to ANSI/TIA-568-C.4: Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components
standard. New projects shall not provide HFC cable television based systems
without prior approval of the RCJ.
d. SMATV systems shall be used in residential projects for distribution of satellite IF
(Intermediate Frequency) signals to complement the IPTV service or where IPTV
systems are not available. An example of this a group of satellite dishes for an
apartment building being shared through a multi-switch to every apartment
(alongside IPTV / HFC). Additionally, a more complex system could use an optical
LNB to distribute the signals from a satellite dish farm to all the buildings within a
given area (such as in RIC where there is no IPTV or CATV system).
e. IPTV System Description
1) The RCJ provides complimentary television service to Jubail districts utilizing
IPTV signal distribution across dedicated GPON FTTH networks. New
buildings and developments requiring television service shall be provided with
IPTV system service as described here.
2) The RCJ IPTV signal originates within the central IPTV headend building
located in the Buffer Zone. The IPTV system equipment is provided in
equipment racks and is interfaced directly with GPON Optical Line Terminals
(OLT’s) or other IP access networks for transmission across the FTTH network.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 177
3) The location of Local IPTV buildings within districts shall be practically planned
in coordination with community planning to minimize optical fiber distribution
lengths throughout the district served. The GPON FTTH system supports
optical fiber distribution of up to a maximum logical distance between OLT and
ONT of 60km, physical distance is dependent on the optics currently available
and split ratios employed.
4) At customer premises, optical fiber GPON FTTH service extends to the Optical
Network Terminator (ONT) and interfaces with the building network structured
cabling system. IPTV network addressable set top boxes are provided at each
designated television location in the building and connected to the network
structured cabling system.
5) The existing IPTV headend equipment is located in ETSI standard four post
equipment rack, suitable to support system servers.
(a) Feeds into the existing IPTV Headend Building include satellite television
dishes for reception of cable/satellite TV networks as well as
programming transmitted to the headend over single mode optical fiber.
(b) Existing satellite reception shall occur through a modular Integrated
Receiver Decoder (IRD) that accepts DVB-S/S2 sources, provides
descrambling, and outputs IP signals.
(c) The IP streams are then directed to a content processor which shall
perform the following tasks:
(1) Rate shaping of real-time, broadcast‑quality MPEG-4/AVC and
MPEG-2 SD and HD streams.
(2) Grooming, de-jittering, and seamless localized ad insertion
(3) Switched Digital Video, VOD Playlist Advertising, IPTV, and Bulk
Encryption
(d) Existing digital feeds are brought to the central IPTV Headend Building
on singlemode fiber and shall be converted to broadband signals,
demodulated, and IP encoded for distribution through the IPTV headend
content processor.
6) Redundant network switches shall provide connectivity from the FTTH OLT’s in
Local IPTV buildings in each district with the central IPTV Headend Building.
f. Existing IPTV System Components Description
1) Fiber Optic Receiver/ Demodulator/Encoder
(a) The Fiber Optic Receiver accepts digital television signals over
singlemode optical fiber with SC/APC connection from designated RCJ
sources.
(b) The fiber optic receiver module is integrated with a rack mounted
broadband distribution amplifier. System outputs include RF Output and
Test Ports.
(c) The fiber optic receiver shall be connected to a demodulator to extract
designated channels for local insertion into the IPTV system.
(d) The demodulators shall be frequency agile with broadcast quality.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 178
(e) The demodulated signal shall be extended to IP encoders and connected

into the content processor.
(f) The IP encoder can maximally encode four (4) channels video and audio
and multiplex corresponding 4 SPTS into MPTS output. It shall comply
with MPEG-2 standard and has high encoding quality and efficiency.
2) Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD)
(a) The modular Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD) is based on a flexible
platform hosting different modules allowing for a configuration to meet
the requirements of the RCJ. The platform supports signal reception,
descrambling, and Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) outputs through
modules containing multiple inputs such as QAM, ASI, DVB-S/S2. The
received services are descrambled using DVB (common interface) or
AES with virtual smartcards, as required.
(b) The system contains an intuitive web-based user control, Dual redundant
hot-swap power supply, and monitoring of system power and fans.
(c) A switch module in the IRD is used to enable MPEG traffic distribution
within the chassis and provides configuration and management of the
chassis.
(d) Input modules in the IRD analyze incoming transport streams and
extracts selected MPEG services from the DVB-S/S2 physical input
interface. The system shall permit the ability to mix input types freely
within a chassis enables multiple MPEG transport streams originating
from a variety of sources to be received and processed in parallel.
Received signals shall be demodulated, de-multiplexed and distributed to
other modules inside the chassis via the backplane.
(e) ASI output modules with independent ASI outputs shall be provided.
3) ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
(a) The ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge provides ASI to Gigabit Ethernet
bridging for video services. It shall bridge traffic from ASI-output IRDs,
Encoders, video routers, and other video sources to a common Gigabit
Ethernet IP backbone.
(b) The ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge contains twenty-four ASI inputs,
system Ethernet control ports, and an IP payload Gigabit output port.
4) Content Processor
(a) The content processor provides the RCJ IPTV system with optimal rate
shaping, re-multiplexing, and ad insertion capability at the IPTV head
end location.
(b) The content processor provides a software application for rate shaping of
real-time, broadcast-quality MPEG-4/AVC and MPEG-2 SD and HD
streams and handles up to 2Gbps of aggregate video stream throughput.
(c) The content processor possesses additional applications, such as
grooming, dejittering, and seamless localized ad insertion, and has the
performance needed to support mission-critical initiatives like Switched
Digital Video, VOD Playlist Advertising, IPTV, and Bulk Encryption.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 179
(d) The system has carrier-class reliability and high availability needed for
high stream counts with redundant and hot-swappable power supplies,
hot swappable fan trays, with 1:1 and N:1 redundancy, and field-
replaceable input/output cards and processing modules.
5) IPTV and FTTH OLT Network Connections
(a) Gigabit Ethernet connections shall be provided from the central IPTV
Headend Building to each Local IPTV Building network termination card
on the FTTH OLT’s through implementation of network switches.
(b) Network switches shall contain autosensing 10/100/1000 ports (IEEE
802.3 Type 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u Type 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.3ab
Type 1000BASE-T). The network switches shall also contain Layer 4
prioritization to enable prioritization based on TCP/UDP port numbers,
Traffic prioritization (IEEE 802.1p), and managed Layer 2 feature set.
Optical uplinks shall be required.
(c) Size the quantity of network switch ports based upon quantity of OLT
and IPTV system connections required, with a minimum of 20% spare.
48 port network switches shall be provided.
(d) Provide structured cabling systems to support network connections
conforming to ANSI/TIA 568-C and ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2 for TIA
Category 6A/ISO Class Ea/6a. In addition, cabling within the IPTV
headend building shall conform to ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0
“Information Technology – Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centres”.
(e) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be single mode conforming to the
ITU-T G.652 D standard.
6) IPTV Set Top Boxes
(a) IPTV Set Top Boxes (STB’s) are used to accept IPTV streams provided
from the RCJ Local IPTV Buildings in each district. These streams are
transported across the system FTTH GPON network to the building
where it interfaces with the building structured cabling system through an
ONT. Provide IPTV STB’s located adjacent to user television displays,
with video and audio connections from the STB to the display. IPTV
STB’s may also be integrated into audiovisual systems as a media
source in installations where CATV programming is required.
(b) The STB supports all necessary technologies for deployment of the IPTV
services including:
(1) High definition decoding and output
(2) MPEG2 and MPEG4 video formats
(3) AAC audio formats
(4) Hardware supported descrambling of media signals
(c) Ensure building infrastructure to support IPTV Set Top Boxes (STB’s) is
provided locally at each device including an IP network outlet and
building power.
(d) Typically in villas and apartments, IPTV STB’s do not require fixed
mounting. Where required, ensure provisions for mounting the IPTV
STB are provided as needed including brackets, shelves, blocking, and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 180
cable management. Mounting conditions shall accommodate device

passive ventilation requirements through proper device orientation and
clear space required by device manufacturer. Mounting conditions may
include:
(1) Cabinet entertainments centers
(2) Equipment rack mounting
(3) Wall or post shelf mounting adjacent to the television display
(e) Where projects require the television display to be included in the scope
of work, provide audiovisual cable patch cord connections from the IPTV
STB to the display.
g. CATV Tertiary System
1) CATV Tertiary Network
(a) The tertiary network is defined as the portion of the CATV networks from
the telecommunications handhole, provided by others and located at the
Subscriber Property Line, to the telephone and CATV outlets in the
subscriber's residence. This includes but is not limited to raceways,
cables, protectors, splitters, amplifiers and jacks. All defined equipment
and fittings must be provided and installed by the Contractor building the
individual house or apartment.
(b) The CATV Tertiary Network consists of provision and installation of a 75
ohm coaxial cable, suitable for use with CATV frequencies up to 1000
MHz. from the telecommunications handhole to the individual CATV
outlets in the residence.
(c) The CATV cable shall be placed in the duct from the handhole to a wall
mounted apparatus cabinet dimensioned to contain over-voltage
protection, splitters and where applicable amplifier or other equipment
required for system operation. From this point the cable will be extended
to all CATV outlets. No splicing of cable is permitted inside the duct.
(d) The CATV outlets shall be flush mounted jacks with covers that
automatically provide a 75 ohm termination on the cable when a plug is
not inserted into the jack. Splitters or tap-off shall be used at each
branching point in the cable. Any output of a splitter not used at a
branch point shall be terminated in a 75 ohm resistor. Locate CATV
outlets directly adjacent to electrical outlets with a matching faceplate
construction and color.
(e) The intent of all distribution design is to provide a test signal level of 0
dBmV, flat from 52 to 1000 MHz at each subscriber outlet. As a practical
approach to this objective, the signal level provided by the distribution
network at the subscribers connection point will be set between + 18 and
+ 22 dBmV. From this input level, the tertiary network design shall
provide for signals within the range - 3 to + 20 dBmV at the subscribers
outlet. The CATV distribution system is designed for 31 TV channels and
the worst-case receive signal condition (i.e., following 35 trunk amplifiers,
1 bridging amplifier and 2 line extenders) shall be:
(1) Signal to Hum: 41.49 dB.
(2) Signal to Noise: 44.73 dB.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 181
(3) Signal to Cross-Modulation: 51.45 dB.

(4) Signal to 2nd Order Intermode: 59.55 dB.
(f) Each apartment shall be provided with a separate coaxial cable feed
from the main distribution box, located for convenient access in the entry
to the building.
(g) The CATV cable shall terminate first on a lightning protection block
before entering the building distribution system.
(h) Trunk, Distribution and Line Extender Amplifiers
(1) Broadband push-pull amplifier is used for amplification of the signal
in the trunk and spur feeds. Devices shall power powered through a
local power supply and shall be located in the equipment rack.
(2) Trunk and line extender amplifier shall have the main features as
shown in Table 5.5.2.C.
TABLE 5.5.2.C: MAIN FEATURES OF TRUNK AND LINE EXTENDER
AMPLIFIERS
Trunk
Line Extender Amplifier
Amplifier
Nominal Impedance 75 Ω 75 Ω
Frequency Response ± 0.25 dB ± 0.5 dB
Minimum input level 10 dBmV 10 dBmV
Minimum output level 25 dBmV 38 dBmV
Minimum full gain 27dB (forward amplifier)

without equalizers
25 dB
26 dB (reverse modules)
Noise figure 8 dB 7 dB
Test Jack at output - 30 dB - 30 dB
Return loss at input
and output at 40 MHz
20 dB 20 dB
(i) Distribution Amplifier

(1) Distribution amplifier is utilized to raise the output level of the
headend signal for insertion of the lower pilot frequency.
(2) Distribution amplifiers main features
(i) Nominal impedance input and output 75 ohm.
(ii) Frequency range 47 to 870 MHz.
(iii) Input level 78 dBµV and output level 92 dBµV.
(iv) Gain 12 to 14 dB.
(v) Frequency response ± 0.4 dB.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 182
(vi) Isolation of test points, input and outputs - 20 dB.

(vii) Pilot insertion level adjustable over ± 1 dB.
(viii) Maximum admissible spurious emissions 4 x 10–9 W .
(j) Directional Coupler
(1) Directional coupler shall be two-way coupler with cast-aluminum
enclosure, 75 Ohm, and shall be used for connection of cables with
a maximum outer connector diameter of 12.7 mm.
(2) It shall have the features presented in Table 5.5.2.D.
TABLE 5.5.2.D: SPECIFICATION OF 8, 12 AND 16 dB DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
8 dB 12 dB 16 dB
5 - 50 MHz 1.9 (2.4) 1.3 (1.6) 1.1 (2.2)
Through loss 50 - 600 MHz 2.0 (3.2) 1.4 (2.5) 1.2 (2.5)
dB
Nominal
(Maximum) 600 - 862 MHz 2.6 (3.6) 1.4 (2.8) 1.4 (2.8)
862 - 1000 MHz 3.4 (4.1) 1.8 (3.5) 1.8 (2.5)
5 - 50 MHz 8.6 12.2 16.9
Tap loss 50 - 600 MHz 8.8 12.1 16.8
dB
(± 1dB) 600 - 862 MHz 8.2 11.7 16.2
862 - 1000 MHz 8.3 11.7 15.8
5 - 50 MHz ≥ 28 ≥ 28 ≥ 25
Tap-to-output 50 - 600 MHz ≥ 21 ≥ 23 ≥ 24
dB
isolation 600 - 862 MHz ≥ 19 ≥ 19 ≥ 19
862 - 1000 MHz ≥ 18 ≥ 18 ≥ 18
Return loss dB ≥ 15
Power passing between all ports dB Max 12 A, 60 V (AC/DC)
(k) Line Splitter

(1) Line splitter shall have cast-aluminum enclosure with a maximum
outer connector diameter of 12.7mm.
(2) It shall have the features presented in Table 5.5.2.E.
TABLE 5.5.2.E: 2-WAY AND 3-WAY LINE SPLITTER
2-way 3-way
5 - 50 MHz 3.7 (4.3) 3.7/7.1 (4.4/8.0)
50 - 600
Insertion loss 3.9 (5.2) 4.0/7.4 (5.4/8.7)
MHz dB
Nominal 600 - 862
(Maximum) 3.9 (5.4) 4.0/7.6 (5.7/9.0)
MHz
862 - 1000
4.2 (5.7) 4.1/8.5 (6.0/9.2)
MHz
Output Isolation 5 - 50 MHz dB ≥ 23 ≥ 23

Rev. 0 5.5 - 183
50 - 600
≥ 23 ≥ 20
MHz
600 - 862
≥ 22 ≥ 20
MHz
862 - 1000
≥ 18 ≥ 18
MHz
Return loss dB > 16
Power passing between all ports dB Max 12 A, 60 V (AC/DC)
9. Master Clock System

a. The master clock system shall provide synchronized time throughout the facility.
Time source shall be provided through a network connection communicating via
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) and Network Time Protocol (NTP) RFC-1305
to an internet based stratum-1 network time server. This shall be the Royal
Commission NTP server if the facility is connected via the Metropolitan Area
Network (MAN) or an internet based time server otherwise. If no network or internet
source is available time can be sourced via the GPS (Global Positioning System)
time signal.
b. Master Clock System Types
1) Wired Clock Systems
(a) Clock system shall allow for combining data and electrical power signals
over the same cable.
(b) Clocks shall correct themselves upon receipt of digital signal.
2) Wireless Clock Systems
(a) Clocks shall self-synchronize upon receipt of wireless signal.
(b) Diagnostic function shall permit monitoring of last received wireless
signal.
(c) Web interface shall permit monitoring of system status.
3) Wireless Talkback Clock Systems
(a) Masterclock with wireless talkback technology transceiver
(b) Clocks shall self-synchronize upon receipt of wireless signal.
(c) Diagnostic function shall permit monitoring of last received wireless
signal.
(d) System shall not require physical servers or additional hardware or
software to function.
(e) Talkback functionality permits communicating vital information such as
battery life, status updates, clock status, and signal strength to the
master clock. Any changes in this information shall be automatically
reported to the facility’s manager via email.
4) IP Clock Systems
(a) IP clocks shall utilize PoE to IEEE 802.3af/at or bt.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 184
(b) System shall allow for monitoring of clocks through software, including:
(1) Uploading and downloading configuration capabilities
(2) Sending countdown functions to digital clocks
(3) Displaying clocks not receiving signal
(c) Power interruption to clocks shall not cause system failure.
c. Clocks Types
1) Analog Clocks
(a) Clocks shall have round or square 12/24 hour face with shatter-proof
case.
2) Digital Clocks
(a) Clocks display high-efficiency LED numeric values with shatter-proof
case.
d. Locations, Mounting, and Sizes
1) Provide minimum of one clock per occupied space.
2) Approximate mounting height shall be 2.4 m above finished floor. Final
location and mounting height shall be coordinated with other equipment and
furnishings prior to installation.
3) Typical clocks shall be 300 mm in diameter (round clocks) or 230 mm on a side
(square clocks).
4) Large group spaces shall require larger clocks – 410 mm in diameter (round
clocks) or 300 mm on a side (square clocks).
5) Double sided clocks shall be provided in corridors.
e. Accessories
1) GPS
(a) GPS shall be capable of receiving synchronization signal from satellites.
2) Wireless Transmitter
(a) Capable of wirelessly transmitting data for synchronization of clock time.
3) Wireless Repeater
(a) Capable of wirelessly transmitting and receiving data for synchronization
of clock time.
4) Network Repeater
(a) Capable of receiving time signal through TCP/IP from masterclock.
5) Environmental Protection
(a) In gymnasiums and other potentially high impact spaces, provide
wireguards on clocks.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 185
f. Cabling for wired aspects of systems shall meet system manufacturer requirements
for types of communication protocols and cabling distances used.
10. Public Address and General Alarm
a. General
1) The public address system for offices shall be designed for transmission of
general announcements, emergency alarms and music.
2) Public Address systems for Mosques shall be designed for voice only.
3) Public Address and General Alarm (PAGA) for Industrial Areas shall include
Amplifiers, Speakers and Loudspeakers to broadcast general and
emergency announcements and Industrial Intercom Stations to provide
important plant communication functions in operational or emergency events
(according to IEC 60849 standard).
b. Public address system shall consist of the following but not limited to:
1) Network Audio Adapter
(a) The network audio codec shall be IP-addressable and convert analog
audio (mic or line level) to standard IP packets for transport over an IP-
based network including local area, wide area and the Internet. The
device shall be capable of simultaneous transport of audio, serial RS-232
data and contact closures. The device shall have variable sample rate
and audio bandwidth with a minimum latency/delay of 20 ms.
(b) The network interface shall be 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, Auto-
Negotiation and utilize the network protocols TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP and
RTP. The audio input shall be balanced, transformer-isolated, MIC/LINE
switchable with adjustable volume control.
(c) The audio output shall be balanced, transformer-isolated, (0 dBV, 600
ohms), with plug-in screw connector. Specifications shall include
frequency response of 50 to 14k Hz and distortion of under 0.3% (1k Hz,
sampling frequency 32 kHz).
(d) The unit shall be capable of Unicast transmission to up to 4 simultaneous
units/locations over LAN/WAN/Internet, and Multicast transmission to up
to 64 simultaneous units/locations over LAN/WAN.
(e) The device shall include software for configuration, operation and
management with password protected access. The device shall include a
built-in web server for control and monitoring from any network-based
PC with password protected access.
2) Main Amplifiers
(a) The amplifiers shall have the following main features:
(1) Frequency response 60 Hz to 20 kHz ± 2 dB or better
(2) Maximum distortion 100 Hz to 16 kHz - 0.25%
(3) Signal to noise ratio 45 dB or better
(b) Balanced 70/100 V outputs shall be available at a screw terminal strip.
(c) The equipment shall have protection circuits to protect the amplifiers
from damage under all normal and abnormal operating conditions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 186
3) Control Pre-Amplifiers
(a) Control Pre-amplifiers shall be supplied by the Contractor to accept such
inputs as may be required under the terms of the Contract. All inputs
shall be preferably of 600 Ohm balanced or 50M Ohm single ended
configuration.
(b) There shall be at least one spare input in addition to the inputs required
by the Contract Drawings.
(c) Control Pre-amplifiers shall be equipped with mixable inputs, convertible
for various sources with supplementary modules and adapter kits.
Remote controllable priority switching for each input and separate
controls for treble and bass shall be provided.
(d) The output from the pre-amplifier shall be at a level compatible with the
input requirements of the main power amplifier.
(e) All inputs to the pre-amplifier shall be shielded and grounded cables.
4) Low Powered Amplifier (for Mosques Only)
(a) The amplifier provided shall consist of the pre-amplifier, power amplifier,
zone selector and a mixer in a single assembly.
(b) The input signal shall be balanced.
(c) The amplifier shall be equipped with tone control facilities to tailor the
audio response to suit the input signals and the required performance
detailed in this Specification.
5) Tone Signal Generator
(a) This unit shall generate various signals e.g. fire alarm, air raid warning,
air raid imminent and all clear etc. according to requirements of the Civil
Defense Bureau.
(b) External warnings may be initiated from Civil Defense Bureau
installations through dedicated links.
(c) Automatic release through systems such as fire alarm and burglar
detection and manual release must be possible.
6) Loudspeakers
(a) Performance of loudspeakers shall be not less than that specified in IEC
60581-7.
(b) Wall Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be provided with a resonating board and an
aluminum grille for universal application for flush or surface mounted
enclosures.
(2) The speaker shall be a high performance type and shall be provided
with an autotransformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 of output
capacity.
(3) The unit shall incorporate a volume control. Frequency response
shall be ± 2 dB from 60 Hz to 16 kHz.
(c) Ceiling Speakers

Rev. 0 5.5 - 187
(1) These speakers, including their accessories, shall be designed for

recess installation in various suspended ceiling types.
(2) The grille shall be aluminum. The speaker itself shall be the same
type as wall mounted loudspeakers.
(d) Column Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be for interior, or in weatherproof design, for
exterior installation. The enclosure shall be of aluminum and shall
be for wall or pole mounting, with suitable accessories.
(2) A transformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 capacity shall be built in.
Frequency response shall be at least ± 2 dB from 150 Hz to 15 kHz.
(e) Horn Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be for exterior installation in weatherproof
design. The enclosure shall be of impact resistant plastic with swivel
brackets.
(2) The built in autotransformer shall have taps for 1/8, 1/4, 1/2 and 1/1
of output capacity. The frequency response shall be within ±2 dB
from 200 Hz to 10 kHz.
7) Microphones
(a) Microphones shall be selected for the special usage. They shall have a
super re-inform characteristic, and shall be equipped with an adjustment
device for 5 step tone characteristic, and a presence switch.
(b) The frequency response shall be between 30 Hz and 20 kHz and the
feedback damping shall be approximately 20 dB at 130 ohm.
(c) Connection cables and supports shall be provided to suit the special
usage.
(d) All microphones shall be provided with desk mount or floor mount as
suitable for application.
8) Passive Combiner
(a) The passive combiner shall consist of a resistive network to combine the
outputs from the microphones and enable the connection of all three
microphones to a single pre-amplifier channel.
9) Headsets
(a) The headsets shall be of robust design and incorporate lightweight
components and level control.
(b) The frequency response shall be 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
10) Industrial Intercom Station
(a) Handset channel.
(b) Hands-free microphone channel.
(c) Output channel for hadling an external amplified Loudspeaker.
(d) Capacity to activate an emergency call.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 188
11. Audio/Visual Systems

a. System Type Descriptions
1) Auditorium
(a) The auditorium shape and acoustical treatments shall meet project
requirements and be designed by an acoustician or acoustical
consultant.
(1) Provide room calculations for the following:
(i) Reverberation Time
(ii) Noise Criteria (NC)
(iii) Potential Acoustic Gain (PAG)/Needed Acoustic Gain (NAG)
(b) The room shall typically have pendant mounted projectors and motorized
projection screens. The projector can be floor mounted if a projector
room is provided. The projectors shall be native WUXGA resolution,
have a minimum 6000 ANSI lumens, and be a 3-chip LCD.
(c) Each projector shall have the capability to display independent images.
(d) Power, network, and twisted pair audiovisual connections shall be
provided to the projector locations.
(e) Motorized tab tensioned front projection screens with low voltage control
interfaces and wall switches shall be provided. The screens shall be
ceiling recessed.
(f) The screens shall have a 16:10 aspect ratios and be sized to maximize
viewing distances as required.
(g) The screens shall be supplied with black drop and the viewable surface
bottom edges shall be approximately 4’ above finished floor (AFF).
(h) The screen surface is matte white to facilitate general presentations.
(i) A lectern (not mobile) shall be provided for the classroom and connected
into a floor box input/output plate beneath the lectern.
(j) The lectern shall have a goose neck microphone with shock mount.
(k) Laptop video/audio, power, network, and microphone patch cables shall
be stored in a cable cubby in the lectern surface.
(l) A power receptacle with USB charging shall be located in the lectern.
(m) The lectern shall have equipment rack rails and contain the following
major components:
(1) Blu-ray player
(2) Permanent PC with wired mouse and keyboard
(3) Media presentation matrix switcher with amplifier and control
processor
(4) Twisted pair extenders
(n) A ceiling document camera shall be provided over the instruction table.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 189
(o) Signal distribution shall utilize HDBaseT technology or other enhanced

proprietary technology.
(p) A scaling twisted pair receiver shall be mounted with the projectors to
receive the video and control signals. The video signal sent from various
sources shall be scaled to match the native resolutions of the projectors.
(q) Wall mounted front speakers in the room will operate to provide program
audio.
(r) BYOD (Bring Your Own device) collaboration shall be. Up to four (4)
student tablet devices shall be capable of presenting simultaneous on
the projection screen using Campus WiFi.
(s) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system using serial RS-232/485 or network connection interfaces.
(t) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported in the
systems at the discretion of the RCJ.
(u) A system input for a camera shall be provided in the rear of the room.
(v) A wall mounted touch panel/button controller will be used to operate the
system. This panel shall permit control of the following:
(1) Intro screen
(2) System on/off
(3) Source selection
(4) Video mute
(5) Video freeze
(6) Blu- Ray device control
(7) Ceiling document camera controls
(8) Program volume
(9) Audio mute
(10) Help
2) Classrooms
(a) The Classroom audiovisual shall facilitate classroom lecture,
presentation, and collaboration.
(b) The room shall have one (1) ultra or extreme short-throw projector. The
projector shall be native WXGA resolution, have a minimum 3000 ANSI
lumens, capable of displaying 95”, and be a 3-chip LCD.
(c) Power, network, and twisted pair, audiovisual connections (HDMI) shall
be provided to the projector location.
(d) A smart interactive board with integrated sound and wall/floor outlets
shall be provided. The screen shall support multiple simultaneous
touches.
(e) The screen shall have a 16:10 or 16:9 aspect ratio and be sized to
maximize viewing distances as required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 190
(f) The screen surface shall be matte white to facilitate general

presentations.
(g) One (1) HDMI/VGA with 3.5mm stereo audio twisted pair transmitter
plate shall be available as inputs for the system from a designated
presentation location at the front teaching wall. This shall provide a
connection for Instructor laptops. The twisted pair transmitter shall utilize
HDBaseT technology or other enhanced proprietary technology.
(h) A scaling twisted pair receiver shall be mounted with the projector to
receive the video and control signals. The video signal sent from various
sources shall be scaled to match the native resolution of the projector.
(i) BYOD (Bring Your Own device) collaboration shall be supported. Up to
four (4) student tablet devices shall be capable of presenting
simultaneous on the projection screen using building Wi-Fi.
(j) The classroom shall also contain a media presentation switcher with
integrated amplifier, twisted pair extender, and control processor.
(k) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system.
(l) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported in the
systems, however the system shall also support PC based
Webconferencing.
(m) A wall mounted touch panel/button controller may be used to operate the
system. This panel shall permit control of the following:
(1) Intro screen
(2) System on/off
(3) Source selection
(4) Video mute
(5) Video freeze
(6) Blu- Ray device control
(7) Program volume
(8) Audio mute
(9) Help
3) Conference Room
(a) The room shall have one (1) large 2,032 mm nominal flat panel display
wall mounted with a swing arm mount and recessed back box.
(b) The room shall have a table based room collaboration system consisting
of four (4) HDMI connections and two (2) VGA/Stereo connections.
“Show me” selector cables in a cable cubby shall provide source control.
The cables shall be located in retractors mounted under the table.
(c) A presentation switcher shall be secured under the table. An HDMI
output from the switcher shall be connected to a twisted pair transmitter
located in the floor box. A twisted pair receiver, audio de-embedder, and
mini amplifier shall be located behind the flat panel display.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 191
(d) The collaboration system shall control the flat panel display using an RS-
232 based control processor and button panel controller.
(e) Two (2) mono 70V ceiling speakers shall be located in the room to
provide program audio.
(f) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system.
(g) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported at the
discretion of the RCJ.
4) TMC Video Wall
(a) The Traffic Management Center (TMC) shall contain a large and flexible
video wall. The video wall is typically used to provide a real time display
from ITS system servers of road networks, sensor data, and video
surveillance.
(b) The size of the video wall shall be coordinated with the ITS system
design requirements and be proportional to number of operators required
within the control room.
(c) The video wall shall consist of an array of flat panel displays or small
form factor video cubes supported from an engineered framing system.
The displays shall have zero or narrow mullions designed for video wall
applications. The Video Wall should have a maximum Bezel Size of 1.0
mm in order to guarantee the correct operation for the Integrated
Security System which requires detailed visualization of Maps, Road
Routes, etc.
(d) The panel framing system and mounts shall provide rear access or
scissor supports permitting removable or maintenance of single panel in
the array. The framing systems shall accommodate cable management
for power and video distribution.
(e) The video wall shall be provisioned with a hardware based video
processor to collect video source inputs from numerous ITS servers
including video surveillance network video recorders and storage area
networks. Coordinate the quantities of inputs required with the ITS
system design.
(f) Any system input can operate as a Native High Resolution Channel,
Scaled PIP, Scaled Background, or Key Channel – on any display in the
system. The video processor shall provide blending, windowing, mixing
and scaling along with key frame effects. Operators shall control the
video wall from PC workstations.
b. System Components
1) Projection Screens
(a) Types shall include: front projection and rear projection
(b) Gain: Indication of screen's luminance or brightness, measured
perpendicular to screen center and relative to magnesium carbonate
block, which serves as standard for 1.0 gain. Higher numbers indicate
greater brightness.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 192
(c) Viewing Angle: Horizontal angle from perpendicular center of screen at

which gain or brightness decreases by 50%.
(d) Format: Proportion of projection screen viewing area expressed as a
ratio of width/height.
(1) HDTV Format: 1.78:1.
(2) 16:10 Wide: 1.60:1.
(e) Types shall include:
(1) Manual
(i) Screen Operation: Manually operated, retractable projection
screen mounted on ball bearing rigid steel spring roller with
controlled screen return mechanism.
• Form screen bottom into pocket holding tubular metal slat
with attached steel pull bail
• Protect slat ends with heavy-duty end caps
• Pull cord
(ii) Adjustable roller mounting brackets to allow centering or
offsetting the screen within the case.
(iii) Screen Mounting Type: Ceiling Recessed
(iv) Screen Viewing Surface:
• Permanently attached to roller
• Front projection, flame retardant, mildew resistant,
fiberglass fabric, black backed typically with standard black
borders, easily cleaned with mild soap and water solution
(2) Motorized
(i) Screen Operation: Electrically operated, retractable, with rigid
metal roller
• Motor: Housed inside metal roller and including automatic
thermal overload protection, integral gears, capacitor and
electric brake to prevent coasting
• Type: 3-wire with ground with quick connect male plug-in
connector, permanently lubricated, quick reversal type
designed for mounting inside roller
• Include preset, adjustable limit switches to automatically
stop viewing surface in UP or DOWN position
(ii) Electric Controls: Wall-mounted switch
• Switch: 3 position type with cover plate for UP, DOWN and
STOP functions
• Junction Box: attached to screen case

Rev. 0 5.5 - 193
(3) Portable
(i) Free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable, projection
screen with pneumatic spring system allowing screen to be
raised and lowered with minimal effort
(4) Table Top
(i) Compact, free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable,
projection screen suitable for tabletop presentations
(5) Tripod
(i) Free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable, tripod type
projection screen
(ii) Aluminum housing case for screen on shall be on spring roller.
Attach case to tripod support. Provide with built-in lock to
secure screen fabric during transport and use to prevent
shifting.
(iii) Tripod support: Extruded aluminum legs with toe release
mechanism. Legs mounted on self-locking extension support
tube with high and low case adjustment.
2) Flat Panel Displays
(a) Displays shall be professional grade displays capable of operating 24
hrs/day, 7 days a week.
(b) Tamper resistant control locks shall prevent unauthorized adjustments at
standalone locations or non-monitored public locations.
(c) Display shall allow for both vertical and horizontal mounting.
(d) Display shall be of high durability in exposure to moisture, smoke, and
well as dust and temperature changes.
(e) Display shall allow a variety of input terminal cards as well as multiple
inputs.
(f) Viewing angle shall be a wide angle to allow screen to retain color when
viewed at a wide angle.
(g) Displays shall permit RS-232 control.
(h) Screen shall be equipped with rear speakers.
(i) Screen may offer touchscreen capabilities.
(j) Types:
(1) LED
(2) LCD
(3) Monitor
(4) 3D
3) Audiovisual Control Systems
(a) Audiovisual control systems shall be IP network based.
(b) Audiovisual control systems shall have the following capabilities:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 194
(1) Control panel integration

(2) RS-232c control ports
(3) IR control ports
(4) Relay control ports
D. Safety and Security Systems
1. Access Control System
a. The access control system consists of a controller and associated hardware. This
provides for the physical connection to readers, locking hardware, door status
switches, and request to exit devices. Access Control Door Types and Locations
1) Typically access control doors permit free egress at all times.
2) Monitored only – Doors are equipped with door status switches reporting to the
centralized control system.
(a) Passive infrared detectors or request to exits shunt the alarm triggered
by activation of door status switch.
3) Electrified Doors – Doors may be programmed to allow access during
scheduled building hours. Otherwise access may be granted through:
(a) Authorized Access – Authorized credentials shunt the alarm triggered by
activation of door position switch from exterior. Interior passive infrared
detectors, or request to exits shunt alarm triggered by activation of door
status switch from interior.
(1) Access control system keeps log of authorized entry.
b. User Credentials and Access Readers may include:
1) Proximity card
2) SMART card
3) Outdoor card reader.
4) Wireless card reader.
5) Key fob
6) Biometrics
7) Keypad
c. Access Control System Panels
1) Panels shall have sufficient capacity for input and outputs to provide for the
card readers, electric strikes, door monitors and other devices as required.
2) Control system shall have features to reduce false alarms.
3) Controllers shall interface between the central station and remote sensors and
controls.
4) Panels shall include main Controller Cards and have capacity to expand the
doors quantity to be monitored through Expansion Cards.
d. Cabling and Pathways
1) Cabling shall be plenum rated where exposed in environmental air plenums.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 195
2) Cabling shall include low-voltage control cabling, control-circuit conductors,

and identification products.
3) Wiring within Enclosures:
(a) Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and
without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
(b) Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
(c) Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
(d) Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of
enclosure.
(e) Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks.
(f) Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams.
(g) Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
(h) Cabling shall not be spliced.
4) Pathways
(a) Cabling shall be supported in conduit to headend location. Where
conduit is not provided, cabling shall be supported using open top cable
supports or cable tray as required.
(b) Outlet boxes, connection panels, cameras, card readers and other
devices shall be weatherproof gasketed type, IP52 or IP65 in the
following instances:
(1) On surface of exterior face of building, including areas where not
under canopies, cast boxes with threaded hubs must be used and
under canopies steel boxes with gasket connections to devices
(2) In any areas where specifically noted "WP" or required by the local
regulation
(3) Within air conditioning enclosures
(4) In underground splice boxes
(5) On building roof
(6) Within vivarium locations
(7) In unconditioned spaces subject to exterior ambient conditions such
as loading docks and parking garages
(c) Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and
location
(1) Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel
conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated.
(2) PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings
listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints,
nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 196
fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by
manufacturer.
(3) EMT: Use compression, steel fittings.
(4) Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit.
(5) Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with
concrete or earth.
2. Automatic Number Plate Recognition (ANPR)
1) ANPR is a technical method of using closed circuit video surveillance cameras
coupled with processors to determine vehicle license plate numbers. ANPR
shall be used to automatically read and recognize vehicle registration number
plates, which can then be cross-checked against a linked database.
2) The ANPR system will have the following capabilities:
(a) Locate and to isolate the number plate in the image
(b) Correct the brightness and the contrast of the number plate
(c) Separate each character of the number plate
(d) Recognize each character of the number plate through optical character
recognition
3) The ANPR capture unit contains the camera, housing, mounts, and infrared
focusing detectors. The ANPR process unit contains the computer, image
frame grabber, and recognition engine. The process unit can control one or
more capture units simultaneously.
4) Fixed ANPR cameras shall be situated in designated traffic and entrance areas
and be mounted in weatherized enclosures.
5) The ANPR camera shall be served by a local weatherized terminal box
providing easy access to all hardware interfaces and power supplies.
6) The terminal box shall interface through approved wired or wireless
connections to the RCJ network to communicate with database system
software.
7) The database system software shall be the central repository to all number
plate data along with tools to support data analysis, queries, and reporting for
investigative purposes. It shall provide administrative and data analysis
functions for both mobile and fixed deployments of ANPR.
8) Each ANPR system shall be capable of performing at traffic volumes of 1,000
vehicles per hour at a minimum.
b. System Selection and Fixed Locations
1) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall confirm the locations where ANPR Systems
are to be provided with the RCJ. The location and application of the ANPR
system shall determine the components and configurations required for the
system. Examples locations where ANPR systems may be required by RCJ
include:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 197
(a) Car Parks

(1) The ANPR system shall provide automated parking facility
management and security for airports, hospitals, universities,
arenas, stadiums, and other locations as designated.
(2) The system shall record parking ticket number, day, and time which
are linked in a management application.
(3) The system shall permit correct amounts to be charged for lost
tickets.
(4) Ticket interchange shall be blocked where vehicle number plates do
not match with the entrance tickets.
(5) The system shall provide visitor history reports and identify unusual
parking behaviors.
(6) Tabulation of occupancy levels shall be a feature of the system.
(b) Access Control
(1) ANPR shall be used in conjunction with driver personal access
control credentials to permit vehicle access at designated gated
entrances.
(c) Public Safety
(1) Where designated by the RCJ, the ANPR system shall provide
continuous surveillance of high-traffic areas to enables rapid,
efficient, and appropriate deployment of public safety resources.
c. Cameras
1) Cameras types shall be selected based upon application requirements and
include:
(a) Compact ANPR Camera
(1) Compact cameras shall be used in temporary or fixed applications
where visual aesthetics is a project goal, or project budgets require
a cost effective option.
(2) The controller shall be integral to the camera unit with a single point
connecting cable.
(b) Fixed Single Lane ANPR Camera
(1) Single lane cameras shall be used in single lane applications or in
dense areas such as busy intersections where small sized systems
are required.
(2) The camera shall provide a minimum of 1.5m of horizontal traffic
lane coverage.
(c) Fixed Wide Lane ANPR Camera
(1) Wide lane cameras shall be used to capture multiple license plates
in the same field of view across the minimum width of a highway
lane.
(2) The camera shall be used where interfacing with external devices
such as radar, weigh-in-motion, or ticketing systems is required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 198
(d) Fixed High Resolution ANPR Camera

(1) High Resolution cameras shall be used to capture multiple license
plates in the same field of view across a minimum width of 2.8m of
horizontal traffic lane coverage.
(2) The camera shall contain high-power IR pulsed illuminator LEDs to
permit high resolution imaging.
(3) Real time video triggering upon number plate presence shall provide
optimum plate detection. A vehicle presence detector input may also
be provided for capturing vehicle overview images when no license
plate is present.
(4) The camera shall be integrated with third party devices including
Weigh-in motion, radar, lane controllers for tolling, and loop
detectors for parking as required by the application.
2) The camera units shall be fully integrated and rugged incorporating the fixed
ANPR camera, illuminator and processor within a single sealed enclosure.
3) Dual lens cameras shall be provided with channels for integrating infrared and
color images. Infrared capability shall capture the plate number regardless of
sun glare, headlights, darkness, or weather conditions.
4) The system optical character recognition (OCR) engine shall be specific to the
region. The system shall operate under conditions of skewed and off-axis plate
reads, various plate sizes, syntax rules, and designs.
5) The system shall vary the flash, shutter and gain settings of the camera to
capture multiple plate images, ensuring the highest quality photo regardless of
light or weather conditions. The image determined to produce the highest
quality read shall be used for processing.
6) Camera lenses shall be selected based on required depth and field of view.
7) Camera enclosures shall be weatherproof sealed to IP67 Standards
minimum and the Operation Temperature range shall be -20 to 75 °C.
8) The system shall support TCP / IP Ethernet with socket and FTP protocols,
Wireless LAN connectivity, relay output, RS232, or true IP connectivity over
GPRS / GSM.
9) The cameras shall be web-enabled IP-addressable devices.
d. Software and Databases
1) Database
(a) Database system software includes administration utilities permitting for
customization of screens, setup of users, and specification of databases
for comparison purposes.
(b) The software shall permit data mining, allowing users to locate and map
hits based on a wide range of criteria including partial plates, street
address, GPS coordinates, and time and date.
(c) Remote camera health notifications shall be provided via email.
(d) Car Park Monitoring Software
(1) The software shall be web based and track items such as:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 199
(i) Mean stay times

(ii) Total vehicle in/out
(iii) Current occupancy levels
(2) The software shall offer graphing functionality to provide visual
depiction of key trends.
(3) The software shall also identify unusual behaviors, such as repeat
visitors or long stay visitors.
(4) The software shall create hotlists to flag vehicles known for
suspicious activity and alert management when such vehicles are
present.
2) User Portals
(a) User software shall have a web enabled interface permitting remote
mobile users to perform queries and receive hit alerts from local servers
using laptops or PDA’s. The system shall permit efficient allocation of
enforcement resources for fixed camera deployments.
(b) The application software shall be intuitive and configured to permit
individual selection of device(s) and hotlist(s) of interest.
(c) The software shall display reads including license plate number, time &
date, device and location (GPS coordinate).
(d) The software shall be username and password protected requiring pre-
set VPN or firewall recognition.
3. Intrusion Detection Systems
a. General
1) This Subsection applies to the intrusion detection systems inside residential,
commercial, institutional and industrial facilities.
2) Purpose
(a) The primary purpose of the intrusion detection system is to notify public
safety personnel and/or facility occupants upon system alarm, providing
the location and type of secure perimeter breach.
(b) The secondary purpose is to initiate security functions which are building
functions intended to increase the protection of the individuals and
physical property.
3) The intrusion detection system shall be provided in accordance with the
physical security requirements of the facility.
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall collaborate with the RCJ to
determine the following project intrusion detection system requirements
prior to the 10% design submission.
(1) Project site security perimeters
(2) Building security perimeter
(3) Layered security perimeters within buildings
(i) Public Areas

Rev. 0 5.5 - 200
(ii) Employee Areas

(iii) High Value Asset Areas
(4) Intrusion Detection Zones
(5) Alarm Types and Zones
(6) Building Hours of Operation
(7) System Arming/Disarming Positions
(8) System Monitoring Positions
(9) System Reporting Locations and Means
(10) Building Systems Interface Requirements
(i) Fire Alarm System
(ii) CCTV Video Surveillance System
(iii) Access Control System
(iv) Lighting Control System
(v) Building Automation Systems
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare documentation to
summarize the recommended approach for the intrusion detection
system designed for the facility. This documentation shall be submitted
to the RCJ for review and approval and shall include the following:
(1) Floor plans illustrating the locations for all required intrusion
detection system equipment
(2) Description summarizing the detection methods selected for the
various spaces throughout the facility
(3) System operational description
b. System Description and Requirements
1) The intrusion detection systems shall consist of modular architecture,
microprocessor-based controls, intrusion sensors and detection devices, and
communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions.
2) The intrusion detection system shall be a component of an integrated security
management system that performs additional related functions such as access
control, security video surveillance, and emergency communications.
3) System components shall be continuously monitored for normal, alarm, and
trouble conditions.
4) Alarm signals shall display at a master control unit and actuate audible and
visual alarm devices.
5) Trouble signals shall indicate system problems such as battery failure, open or
shorted transmission line conductors, or control-unit failure.
6) A master control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection devices and
connecting wiring in a multiplexed distributed control system or as part of a
network.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 201
7) The system shall interface with computer software with the capability to fully
program the panel by connecting to the panel through a standard phone line
connection, Ethernet network connection, or network connection across the
Internet.
8) The system areas and zones shall be programmable and can be assigned to
time schedules. The system shall store, log, display, and transmit specific
custom designations for system areas, zones, and user names.
9) The system shall support user interaction by way of a keypad, web browser,
system software, key switch, or radio frequency wireless control.
10) System operators shall have the ability to acknowledge alarms, arm/disarm
zones, and conduct system tests.
11) Alarm or supervisory signals from certain intrusion detection devices shall
permit the intrusion detection system to control the following functions in
related systems:
(a) The system shall interface with computer software capable of locking
down all access controlled doors.
(b) The system shall interface with computer software capable of monitoring
and logging all events.
(c) The system shall interface with computer software capable of exporting
reports.
(d) Switch selected lights.
(e) Shift elevator control to a different mode.
(f) Open a signal path between certain intercommunication stations.
(g) Switch signal to selected monitor from CCTV camera in vicinity of sensor
signaling an alarm.
c. Detector Operation and Selection
1) The most common detector sensor devices which are generally used include
motion sensors, photoelectric beams, and glassbreak detectors.
2) Specialty detectors such as shock detectors may be considered for special
applications in appropriate facilities.
3) Motion Sensors
(a) Motion detectors determine if someone is moving in protected rooms or
areas. Ceiling or wall-mounted devices detect movement within the
protected area and analyze the motion to determine if an actual intrusion
occurred.
(b) If the sensor detects motion when the system is armed, an alarm
message is sent to the central monitoring station. While the system is
disarmed, it monitors the motion throughout the day, but does not send
alarm messages. It can, however, send messages if someone tampers
with the detector.
(c) Motion detectors may utilize various technologies to detect motion
including passive infrared (PIR) technology, microwave motion
technology, and dual motion technology.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 202
(1) Passive Infrared Technology

(i) The PIR detector can be made up of one or more elements that
are precisely arranged and aimed so that the sensor can judge
the size and speed of travel related to a moving object within its
view pattern.
(ii) This can help to minimize false activations from rodents or
other small animals, yet trigger accurately when a person walks
within its viewing pattern.
(iii) When the detector senses motion in the protected area, its
relay output changes the state of a zone input on the system.
The control panel responds to this change according to its
program.
(iv) PIR detectors contain optical mirror or lens configured to create
a viewing pattern.
(v) There are three major types of PIR sensor visual patterns
including:
• Wall-mounted long-range curtain or barrier pattern
• Wall-mounted wide angle, volumetric
• Ceiling-mounted 360 degrees wide angle, volumetric
(2) Microwave Motion Technology
(i) The sensor uses the Doppler Effect to sense a change in the
frequency of a low-power microwave signal. As an object
moves toward the sensor, the reflected frequency increases.
As an object moves away from the sensor, the reflected
frequency decreases.
(ii) By comparing these characteristics with the frequency being
transmitted, the detector can accurately sense an object as it
moves through the protected area.
(iii) When the detector senses motion in the protected area, its
relay output changes the state of a zone input on the system.
The control panel responds to this change according to its
program.
(iv) K-Band microwave technology shall allow a precise pattern
wave less likely to activate when objects outside of the
protected room move, such as in the case with store-front
display windows or multi-tenant office complexes.
(3) Dual Technology Motion
(i) Dual technology motion detectors use both PIR and Microwave
technologies to determine if there is motion within a protected
area prior to alarming.
(ii) The major advantage of using dual technology motion
detectors is the built-in validation of motion within the protected
area. Both sensors detect motion, but sense it in different
ways. This helps to minimize false activations caused by

Rev. 0 5.5 - 203
environmental changes, small animals and other unexpected

conditions.
(iii) In some cases, the detectors can conserve power by allowing
the PIR to remain active while allowing the microwave sensor
to sleep. If the PIR senses motion, the microwave sensor
activates and verifies the motion. If there is no motion sensed,
the detector does not change the state of its alarm output.
(iv) When the detector senses motion from the PIR and microwave
sensors in the protected area, its relay output changes the
state of a zone input on the system. The control panel
responds to these changes according to its program.
(d) PIR detectors shall be used only in stable environments with no open
windows and minimal air flow.
(e) Dual technology motion detectors shall be used in harsh environments
such as drafty areas in front of windows, warehouse and storage
environments or in multi-tenant facilities.
(f) Motion detectors may be wall or ceiling mounting. Observe product
guidelines for permissible mounting heights.
(g) Motion detectors located in public areas or otherwise potentially subject
to intentional tampering shall have cover and base tamper supervision
and anti-mask supervision to avoid blockage of view.
(h) Motion detectors shall be connected to the intrusion detection system
using independent zone inputs or be installed as part of an addressable
system.
(i) The pattern diagrams of each motion detector shall be verified to ensure
coverage of area to be protected. Detectors shall have pattern shaping
capabilities to provide coverage in zones as required.
(j) Motion detectors to be installed in areas where animals or pests may be
present shall have animal immunity features.
(k) Motion detectors shall have LED status indicators to permit visual
confirmation of operation.
(l) Motion detectors shall be discrete and low profile where space aesthetics
is a project goal.
(m) The motion detectors used shall resist false alarms.
(n) Where approved by the RCJ, wireless motion detectors may be used for
specific deployments.
(1) Wireless connections shall be fully supervised.
(2) Batteries shall have a minimum 5 year life.
(o) Outdoor rated motion detectors shall be used in the case of secured
outdoor areas, infrastructure sites, building sites, and industrial yards.
4) Photoelectric Beams

Rev. 0 5.5 - 204
(a) Photoelectric beams detectors shall be used in indoor or outdoor

applications to provide a line of sight detection barrier between a
transmitting and receiving unit.
(b) It shall detect an interruption of a pulsed, infrared, light beam that links
transmitter and receiver.
(c) Photoelectric beam detectors may be used for outdoor applications such
as fence lines, parking areas, outdoor stock areas, buildings, driveways,
and roadways.
(d) Photoelectric beam detectors may be used for indoor applications such
stock isle protection and shipping and receiving doors.
(e) The detector shall have adjustable optics and obscuration timing to
calibrate to environmental issues.
(f) The detector shall require two mounting locations that are within an open
line of sight.
(g) The receiving unit shall be mounted closest to the control to minimize
cabling of tamper and alarm outputs.
5) Glassbreak Detectors
(a) Glassbreak detectors shall be used to detect unique airborne acoustic
energy spectrum and high-frequency vibrations caused by breaking
glass associated with unlawful intrusion through windows.
(b) The detector shall sense the characteristics and patterns associated with
a wide variety of common glass types such as plate, tempered,
laminated, coated, wired, double pane, sealed and insulated.
(c) The detector shall be designed to suppress very loud noises associated
with a window break occurring in close proximity to the sensor.
(d) The detector shall permit remote testing using handheld simulator/test
equipment.
6) Shock Detectors
(a) Shock detectors shall detect tampering and movement and be used to
protect high value assets such as safes, vault doors, computer
equipment, electronics, tools, building materials, and pieces of art.
d. Intrusion Detection Control Panel
1) Control panels shall be designed to meet the unique requirements of each
building and occupancy. Control panels shall be located in secured
environmentally conditioned areas within proximity of facility access control and
security video surveillance equipment panels.
2) The control panel shall contain the following features:
(a) Hardwired zones
(b) Support for wireless zones
(c) Power limited bell circuit
(d) Dialer
(e) Accommodation for user codes, authority levels, and keypad macros

Rev. 0 5.5 - 205
(f) Scheduling
(g) Event logging
(h) Pager support
(i) Printer support
(j) Multiplexing loop interface
(k) Programmable auxiliary relays
(l) Partitioning for independent control of areas
3) Zoning:
(a) The building area may be divided into zones as required to allow for
accurate and rapid determination of the intrusion location and the type of
detectors being activated.
4) Control panels shall have spare zone capacity.
5) The control panels shall be a multi-processor based networked system
designed specifically for intrusion detection. The control panels shall include
all required hardware, software, and site specific system programming to
provide a complete and operational system.
6) The control panel shall be diagnostic type and shall be designed such that
interactions between any applications can be configured and modified using
software provided by a single supplier.
e. Keypads
1) Keypads shall be provided for system user interfaces. They shall be located at
designated building access points in coordination with the Royal Commission.
2) The keypads shall have LCD or graphic displays with menu driven prompts for
clear operation without the use of complicated command strings.
3) The keypads shall display current system status and alarm locations.
4) Authorized building users shall be able to arm and disarm the intrusion
detection system through the keypad interface.
f. Intrusion Detection Sounders
1) The intrusion detection system shall be designed with sufficient notification
devices to provide ample notification for the building occupants as required by
the RCJ. Notification shall include both audible and visual devices.
2) Audible
(a) Audible devices consisting of horns, bells and/or speakers shall be
located throughout each facility to provide audible notification of the
intrusion condition. Audible devices shall be specified with multiple tap
settings to facilitate adjustment of the sound intensity to adapt to the final
installed conditions.
(b) The type of audible device shall be determined from the requirements of
the facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop a
recommendation for the type of audible device and submit to the RCJ for
review and approval.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 206
(c) Audible devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof

enclosure.
3) Visual
(a) Strobes shall be located throughout each facility to provide visual
notification. Strobes shall be specified with multiple candela ratings to
facilitate adjustment of the light intensity to adapt to the final installed
conditions.
(b) Visual devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
4) Audible/Visual Combination Devices
(a) The use of combination audible/visual devices is permitted and is the
preferred approach.
g. Power Source(s)
1) Power to the control panel must be fed from a reliable source of supply which
will not be disconnected for maintenance on other electrical systems. The
circuit breaker shall be labeled "Intrusion Detection - Do Not Switch Off" and
shall be capable of being locked.
2) Standby power shall be available to the system in case of failure of the main
power source. Integral backup provision with nickel cadmium batteries shall be
located in the control panel. The backup batteries shall be sufficient to operate
the system for a minimum of 24 hours.
3) Where the building is furnished with a backup power source (generator,
battery, or UPS) the system shall be supplied from the life safety emergency
power branch in addition to the integral batteries.
4) Power supplies shall initially be sized with 20% spare capacity to
accommodate future system modifications.
h. Wiring Requirements
1) General
(a) The wiring network for the intrusion detection system must be designed
in accordance with the applicable codes and must address the criticality
of the facility. The extent of redundancy and survivability must be
determined to properly specify the appropriate wiring system.
2) Installation
(a) The intrusion detection cabling shall be installed in a dedicated raceway
system.
(b) Minimum conduit sizes shall be 20 mm.
(c) All wiring shall enter panels from the bottom to prevent moisture from
entering the panel through the conduit.
(d) All wires shall be numbered and labeled.
(e) Provide separate circuits for audible and visual devices.
4. Vehicle Barriers
a. Bollards

Rev. 0 5.5 - 207
1) Provide bollards for protection of pedestrian areas and buildings as required by

the project.
2) Bollards shall provide protection of areas from accidental or intentional acts.
b. Active Barriers
1) Retractable Vehicle Barriers
(a) Retractable vehicle barriers shall be provided at secured entrances and
checkpoints as required by the project.
(b) The system shall operate in either a normally open or closed state.
2) Active Cable Barriers
(a) Active cable barriers shall be provided at critical check point locations as
required by the project.
3) Drop Arm Crash Beams
(a) Drop arm crash beams shall be provided at critical check point locations
as required by the project.
5. Video Surveillance Systems
a. Description of System
1) Video surveillance systems shall permit real time and recorded video
monitoring of building and site areas as required by the project.
2) The video surveillance systems shall consist of surveillance camera, wired or
wireless connectivity; network based video transport and switching, network
video recorders, and monitoring software and stations.
3) Design of the surveillance system shall be based on Open Network Video
Interface (ONVIF) profile S in order to assure cross vendor compatibility.
b. Camera Selection and Location
1) Interior, Controlled Environment: System components installed in temperature-
controlled interior environments are rated for continuous operation in ambient
temperatures of 0 to 50° C dry bulb and 20 to 90% relative humidity,
noncondensing. Use IP10 rated enclosures.
2) Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-
temperature-controlled interior environments are rated for continuous operation
in ambient temperatures of -17 to 60° C dry bulb and 20 to 95% relative
humidity, noncondensing. Use IP52 rated enclosures.
3) Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to
weather are rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus
34 to plus 75° C dry bulb and 20 to 95% relative humidity, condensing. Rate
for continuous operation as specified in IEC 60529.
4) Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where
surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence, the housing
shall be IK10 Rating.
5) Cameras shall be selected to allow high definition video recording.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 208
6) Dynamic range of the camera shall be selected based on the expected lighting
conditions at the site. Cameras with more than 100dB synamic range shall be
used when facing exterior doors.
7) Panoramic view cameras are to be selected in order to minimize the number of
cameras.
8) Cameras with built-in SFP ports shall be used in order to minimize the need of
media converters, or industrial switches at the edge. However, for those
applications where Outdoor IP Cameras shall be installed at locations with
more than 90 meters from the nearest Telecom Room, the connections shall
be done through Ethernet Media Converters with PoE and Fiber Optic Cables.
9) System shall be designed with no exposed cabling near the cameras. All power
and communication cables shall be secured.
10) Perimeter Fence Cameras in Wide Industrial Areas: In those Wide Industrial
Areas where an important quantity of Industrial Plants and Buildings are
located , Multi-sensor Thermal Cameras with Continuous Zoom Lens shall be
installed along the Perimeter Fence. These Cameras shall comply at a
minimum with the following: Simultaneous analog video outputs (Thermal and
Visible Light), easy integration into IP Networks, Continuous Thermal Zoom
available, P/T with continuous 360° pan, Combined Technology of Infrared and
CCD imagery in real time, Multiple lens combinations for tailor-made range
performance, IP65.
c. Network and Video Transport Requirements
1) Surveillance systems shall be served with IP network connectivity
2) The IP network shall be configured as a dedicated network or subnet.
3) Network ports or power injectors shall be capable of supplying Power over
Ethernet compliant with IEEE 802.3af.
4) IP networks shall be fault tolerant utilizing redundant uplinks, and redundant
power supplies.
d. Network Video Recording Requirements
1) IP Network based network video recorder (NVR) storage appliances or
Network attached storage solution shall be used to record video.
2) Whenever the sites are connected to the RC Metro Network, all recording shall
be done centrally in the RCJ datacenters. Edge storage is only allowed upon
approval from RC.
3) All network recording applicances shall be ONVIF Profile G compliant.
4) For edge storage, storage appliances shall be secured, both physically and
environmentally.
5) Configure devices with storage capacity to meet requirements for number of
cameras to served, recording rates, and archival time periods needed. Provide
spare capacity to meet 5-7 year anticipated future growth of the system.
e. Video Analytics
1) NVR systems shall permit various software based video analytic features.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 209
f. Monitoring Workstation Requirements

1) Monitoring workstations shall be PC based and be connected to the video
surveillance IP network
2) Supplemental flat panel monitors shall provide viewing capability for
additional cameras.
g. Cabling and Pathway Requirements
1) IP network connected devices shall have cabling requirements that meet the
building telecommunications structured network cabling plant requirements.
h. Power Source Requirements
1) Incorporate sufficient Power over Ethernet sources to serve devices. Power
supplies shall be redundant.
6. Security Screening
a. Security screening requirements shall be based upon project risk assessments and
may include the components as required on a per project basis:
1) Divest and Composure Tables
2) Walk Through Metal Detectors
3) Baggage X-ray Machines
4) Explosives Detection and Trace Systems
5) Officer Station
6) High Speed Operational Communications
7) Video Surveillance Coverage
8) Under Vehicle Surveillance
9) Vehicle Recognition
(a) Weight Sensors
(b) Traffic/Flow Control
(c) Explosives Detection
(d) Trunk X-Ray
(e) Undercarriage Scanning
(f) Personnel Credential Access Control
(g) Barricades
E. Utilities
1. Outside Plant Infrastructure
a. The principles and criteria specified in this Section are applicable to the
telecommunications outside plant/buildings provided between the local exchange
and the subscriber's plot boundary, and also applicable to any section of outside
plant/buildings within this area that is determined as the RCJ Contractor
responsibility.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 210
b. Existing RCJ installations have relied upon use of Polyethylene Corrugated (PEC)
110 mm corrugated duct with 5 x 33 mm sub/ducts between handholes or manholes
for optical fiber cable distribution. Current and future projects shall make use of
HDPE duct materials and microduct configurations that provide enhanced densities
and compatibility with air blown fiber installation techniques. PEC ducts shall only
be provided where existing PEC installations are altered or backwards compatibility
is otherwise required. In these cases, final configuration of ducts shall match
existing.
c. In the existing Manholes which belong to third parties (such as STC or Aramco) and
where are installed main Trunk Lines/Backbone Cables connecting Feeders, a
Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Wall is required around the Telecommunication
Manhole and this structure shall be according to Section No 02350.
d. RCJ FTTH GPON and Metropolitan Networks OSP Infrastructure
1) OSP Ductbank Requirements Spanning from the FAT to the FTB.
(a) The OSP ductbank shall be shared between RCJ networks and TSP
networks. OSP design shall conform to the requirements of the TSP.
color coding shall be used to identify the duct use.
(b) The maximum distance between the FAT and FTB shall typically not
exceed 160 m. In special cases where distances are permitted to be
exceeded, additional One Cover Handholes shall be provided for ease of
pulling cabling.
(c) The minimum trench size shall typically be 150 mm wide and 500 mm
deep, but this shall be adjusted as required to facilitate final quantity of
ducts within a segment.
(d) The trench shall be backfilled by concrete up to asphalt level and asphalt
shall be reinstated with milling and paving as per RCJ requirements.
(e) The ductbank shall typically consist of twenty- five (25) x 20 mm HDPE
ducts situated in a5-wide by 5-deep arrangement. Each duct shall have
20 mm outside diameter/16.2 mm inside diameter and nominal wall
thickness of 1.9 mm.
(f) Ducts extend in pairs to a customer location where one shall be used for
RCJ FTTH networks and the second duct shall be used for TSP services
or spare. A maximum of twelve (12) buildings shall be connected from
one handhole including vacant lots, and can go up to fifteen (15)
buildings in special cases only.
(g) HDPE duct material shall conform to the following construction
classifications: PE-100, PN-16, and SDR-11.
(h) Spacers shall be installed with the duct at every 1.5 m to keep the duct
straight and in position.
(i) Pairs of 20 mm HDPE ducts exit the trench to extend to customer
locations. These shall be routed in an offset trench with minimum size of
90 mm wide and 400 mm deep situated in a 2-wide by 1-deep
arrangement.
(j) U-guard shall be installed on customer wall to protect the poke out pipe.
The length of the U-guard shall be of 1.5 m from the finished surface.
There shall be no gap between U-guard and FTB. The duct should

Rev. 0 5.5 - 211
enter/flushed with FTB. The clamps shall be securely placed with

Aluminum screws.
2) OSP Ductbank Requirements Spanning from the FDT to the FAT.
(a) The OSP ductbank shall be shared between RCJ networks and TSP
networks. OSP design shall conform to the requirements of the TSP.
color coding shall be used to identify the duct use.
(b) The distance between the MH to MH or MH to HH shall be within 250 m
to 350 m. The minimum distance requirement shall be 25 m.
(c) The minimum trench size shall typically be 200 mm wide and 650 mm
deep, but this shall be adjusted as required to facilitate final quantity of
ducts within a segment.
(d) The trench shall be backfilled by concrete up to asphalt level and asphalt
shall be reinstated with milling and paving as per RCJ requirements.
(e) The ductbank shall typically consist of twelve (12) HDPE ducts in a 3-
wide by 4-deep arrangement. Each duct shall have 32 mm outside
diameter28.2 mm inside diameter and wall thickness of1.9 mm.
(f) Four (4) of the twelve (12) ducts are to be orange color and are
dedicated for use by the TSP. Likewise four (4) ducts are to be blue in
color and dedicated for use by the RCJ. In addition, four (4) ducts are
black in color and designated for common use applications. Each set of
color coded ducts are arranged adjacently in a 1-wide by 4-high
configuration.
(g) To facilitate efficient use of trenches, this trench is also used for routing
ducts for FTTH drop cabling from each FAT to the FTB at customer
premises. These ducts consist of twenty- five (25) x 20 mm HDPE ducts
grouped in pairs and situated in a 3-wide by 4-deep arrangement. The
ducts are positioned directly above the twelve (12) 50 mm HDPE ducts
within the trench. Each pair of ducts extends to a customer location
where one shall be used for RCJ FTTH networks and the second duct
shall be used for TSP services or spare. Each duct shall have 20 mm
outside diameter/16.2 mm inside diameter and nominal wall thickness of
1.9 mm.
(h) HDPE duct material shall conform to PE-100, PN-16, and SDR-11
construction.
(i) Spacers will be installed with the duct at every 1.5m to keep the duct
straight and in position.
3) Manholes and Handholes
(a) Mini Manhole – Type 1
(1) The precast manhole shall have a single round cover and be
provided at network locations encountering widths of roads 30 m
and more.
(2) This manhole shall also be installed at junctions where a third
ductbank will join the manhole or where determined to be required
by the network layout.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 212
(3) The distance between manholes shall be minimum 50 m and

maximum 300 m with +/- 50 m.
(4) Outer dimension requirements: 1,550(L) x 1,550(W) x 1,990(H) mm
(5) Inner Dimension requirements: 1,200(L) x 1,200(W) x 1,200(H) mm
(6) Circular duct penetration openings shall be provided on two
opposite walls for main duct entrance terminations. In addition, a
rectangular opening shall be provided for poke-out termination to
accommodate a minimum of thirty (30) 20 mm ducts on two
opposite walls.
(7) The cover of the hand-hole shall be rated with a minimum 350 kN
design loading.
(b) Two Cover Handhole
(1) A two cover precast handhole shall be provided at network locations
encountering widths of roads less than 30 m.
(2) A two cover handhole shall be used either at the end of the trench
or in a straight duct for breaking the length.
(3) Outer dimension: 1,550(L) x 1,000(W) x 950(H) mm
(4) Inner Dimension: 1,250(L) x 800(W) x 800(H) mm
(5) Circular duct penetration openings shall be provided on two
opposite walls for main duct entrance terminations. In addition, a
rectangular opening shall be provided for poke-out termination to
accommodate a minimum of thirty (30) 20 mm ducts on two
opposite walls.
design loading.
(c) Manhole – Type A
(1) Type-A manholes shall be provided front of FDTs. The maximum
distance from FDT to manhole shall be 5 m.
(2) The distribution cable shall be extended directly into the FDT
cabinet. Only joint closure shall be installed for the feeder cable to
extending to the RCJ ODF equipment at the local exchange.
(d) Manhole Covers
(1) Manhole covers shall be cast iron construction from a TSP
approved manufacturer where shared manholes are required.
design loading.
(3) The manhole cover shall have lock with unique head.
(4) Where required by the RC for telecom manholes, a clearly visible
inscription shall be provided on each cover. In addition, the
manufacturer name and load rating shall be clearly marked on the
cover.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 213
(e) Manhole Cable Service Loops

(1) Manhole Type-A and Mini Manhole
(i) Cable service loop lengths shall be provided within each
manhole.
• Distribution cable without splice - 5 m
• Distribution cable with splice closure - 8 m, with 4 m for
each side
• Drop cable from customer building - 4 m
(2) Two Cover Hand-Holes
(i) Cable service loop lengths shall be provided within each
manhole.
• Distribution cable with splice closure - 5 m, with 2.5 m for
each side
• Drop cable from customer building - 2.5 m
4) FDT Pedestals
(a) The pedestal of FDT shall be pre-cast and approved by the TSP where
shared colocation cabinets are to be provided.
(b) Protection posts (bollards) shall be installed around the FDT per RCJ
drawing details.
5) Microducts
(a) HDPE microducts are utilized in ductbank trenches by the RCJ to
provide enhanced cabling densities and compatibility with air blown fiber
installation techniques.
(b) Where large numbers of optical fiber cables are required within a
ductbank for backhauling of communities and districts, microducts shall
be implemented in main ductbanks to enhance duct capacity. A
minimum of two ducts within the trench shall consist of microducts with
additional added as required to meet ductbank forecasted capacity
requirements.
(c) Microducts may be implemented in two (2) configurations:
(1) Where service is to be provided through existing ductbank systems,
the microducts shall be provided through existing ducts.
(i) Four (4) microducts with 14 mm outside diameter/11.5 mm
inside diameter shall be installed in an existing duct of 50 mm
outside diameter/40.8 mm inside diameter.
(ii) The four microducts shall be provided either individually or
bundled with a skin jacket and installed by blowing or pulling
techniques.
(iii) To enhance the capacity to existing ducts which are already
occupied by cabling; provide a microduct with microcable
installation. Manufacturers’ recommended procedures and
practices shall be followed.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 214
(2) Where new ductbanks are provided, mini/micro ducts shall be

installed directly in the trench among other ducts.
(i) Four miniducts with 16 mm outside diameter/12 mm inside
diameter bundled with a hard jacket can be installed directly in
the trench and encased in concrete among and in lieu of other
main ducts of 50 mm outside diameter/40.8 mm inside
diameter.
(d) The microduct orientation with adjoined duct segments must be
consistent throughout trenches and entering/exiting
manholes/handholes. This is critical to prevent difficult physical
transitions while joining microducts.
e. Blown Fiber Design
1) Blowing Fiber is a method where the fiber is guided through microducts using
a flow of air that evenly distributes the installation force along the entire
length of the fiber. Blown fiber installations shall be provided for extending
singlemode optical fiber through ductbank systems for implementation of
RCJ FTTH GPON and metropolitan networks.
2) The blown fiber system is an enterprise network system comprised of
interconnecting microducts and distribution hardware to provide reusable
pathways for reusable microcables, bundled fiber optic cabling containing
singlemode fiber strands.
3) Microcable Requirements
(a) Microcables shall be installed in the same color of microduct throughout
the span.
(b) The fibers used for blown fiber cables shall be a single mode, coated
with two layers of acrylic that gives excellent protection to the fibers and
also arrange fibers in bundles for easy identification.
(c) The cable construction has outer diameter of 1.0 to 5.5 mm depending
on the number of fibers and can easily be deployed in empty microducts.
4) Microduct Requirements
(a) Microducts consist of small diameter low friction HDPE tubes providing
the dedicated pathway for the optical fiber microcables.
(b) Microducts may be provided into existing ducts, concrete encased, or
inside buildings (internal). Select the appropriate rating for the
microducts based on the environment in which they are installed.
(c) Provide microduct tubes sizes and quantities to facilitate the quantity and
strand count of the microcables that are to be provided, including
anticipated future growth. Microducts are available in a variety of sizes
and combinations including but not limited to, 5/3.5 mm, 7/5.5 mm, 10/8
mm, and 12/10 mm (outside/inside) diameters, loose, or with protective
layer system.
(d) Microducts may consist of bundled tubes in typical sizes of 1, 2, 4, 7, 12,
19, 24 or more tubes.
5) Microduct Accessories

Rev. 0 5.5 - 215
(a) Microducts shall be connected together sealed from water or gas

ingress, reduced from one tube size to another, or sealed with end caps.
(b) Compact Node Closure: A closure used in manholes where blown fiber
cables are spliced (to traditional or blown fiber cables). It is supplied with
splice trays and sufficient components for installing cabling and enabling
the breakout of fibers to customer drop cables.
(c) Branching Unit (Tube Distribution Center): Used for management and
distribution of fibers to the customers. The unit provides in-line and
diversion connections with the use of "Y" and "T" tube joints.
(d) Entry Kit: Installed at the customer premises for termination of incoming
tube microducts and optical fibers at the Fiber Termination Box (FTB).
2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
1) Uninterruptible Power Supplies shall be provided where sensitive
telecommunications systems shall not experience sudden power failures or
anomalies.
b. UPS Selection and Locations
1) The UPS shall be sized to support equipment required plus spare capacity as
needed by the project.
2) UPS units shall be mounted on equipment racks or floor mounted.
3) Provide battery run time as required by the project to permit orderly shutdown,
or ride through outages of a given duration.
c. Management
1) UPS units shall be SNMP compatible with network connections for
management.
d. PDU Requirements
1) Determine requirements for UPS power outlets including:
(a) Quantity
(b) Amperage
(c) Voltage
(d) Device types
e. References
1) Refer to Electrical GEM Subsection 5.5.1.E Backup Power Systems
3. Earthing and Bonding
a. The grounding shall include all cable and installation hardware required. All
equipment shall be connected to earth ground via internal building wiring according
to ANSI/TIA-607-B, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
b. Standards.
1) This includes:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 216
(a) Coaxial cable shields

(b) Equipment racks and cabinets
(c) Cable ducts and trays
(d) Conduits
c. Earthing materials shall be as follows:
1) Ground Rods
(a) Ground rods shall be solid, of bounded copper or copper-clad steel, not
less than 16 mm in diameter and 3 m long, driven full length into the
earth.
(b) The copper-clad steel ground rod shall be manufactured by a fusion weld
process resulting in an electrolytic copper sheath homogeneously
welded to and inner steel core. The thickness of the copper sheath shall
be approximately 10% of the overall rod diameter. Copper electroplated
steel is not acceptable.
(c) The rod shall be of sufficient strength to be driven through the soil found
at site location. The upper end shall either be equipped with or capable
2
of accepting a clamp that will also be capable of accepting a 16 mm
ground wire.
(d) The clamp shall furnish an electrical connection between the ground wire
and the ground rod so that the electrical resistance is not more than 100
mΩ.
2) Ground Wire
2
(a) The ground wire shall consist of a 16 mm solid, annealed copper wire,
covered with a PVC outer sheath for corrosion protection. The minimum
thickness for the sheath to be 0.76 mm.
3) Grounding System Accessories
(a) Ground system accessories shall include without limitation:
(1) A connector for connecting the ground wire to the ground bus so
that the electrical resistance across the connection will be less than
100 mΩ.
(2) Connectors for connecting the ground conductor of each splice to
the ground bus so that the electrical resistance across the connector
is less than 100 mΩ.
(b) Ground Bus
2
(1) The ground bus shall consist of a tinned copper ribbon of 16 mm
cross-sectional area. This bus shall appear in each bay equally
spaced between the cable racks. It shall begin 300 mm above the
floor and shall be mounted vertically to a height of 100 mm above
the cable rack.
(2) Each vertical bus shall be electrically connected to the other vertical
buses.
(3) Fastening shall be by drive-in anchors of 10 mm diameter, 25 mm
long at a distance of 300 mm apart for both vertical and horizontal

Rev. 0 5.5 - 217
runs, with a drive-in at each termination and each change of

direction. The vertical runs shall have a lapped projection of 15 mm
every 200 mm.
d. Building Telecommunications Grounding Systems
1) Each building shall be equipped with a grounding system.
2) A standard insulated copper lead of 16 mm 2 - 7 strands shall be run from the
ground point of the protection blocks and body of the terminal boxes to ground,
connected by exothermic weld or equivalent means to the ground system.
3) The CATV and telephone boxes shall be joined by a 25 mm conduit nipple to
allow the CATV protector ground to be connected to the telephone ground
lead. The run shall be as direct as possible and contain no kinks or sharp
bends. A separate lead shall be run for each box installed within a building that
contains protector blocks, joining to the ground underground.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 218
SUBSECTION 5.5.3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
5.5.3. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
A. General:
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection includes automation systems (and less complex systems) that
require separate focus, and provides the basis for design and technical criteria for
the following to meet the engineering requirements of the Royal Commission Jubail
(RCJ) and other designated areas.
1) The Integrated Building Automation Systems for commercial buildings,
schools, universities, hospitals etc.
2) Instrumentation, Automation, and Process Control Systems (PCS) for other
industrial and/or treatment facilities to include sea water cooling, potable
water, sanitary waste treatment, industrial waste treatment, Fuel Pipeline
etc.
3) SCADA systems
4) RTU and SCADA system for Automatic Irrigation system
5) Fire Alarm, Gas Detection and Fire Supersession Control System.
2. Scope
a. The scope of these guidelines provide:
1) The basis to be followed by all parties making calculations and/or preparing
drawings and specifications of Integrated Automation Systems within
Industrial Cities including the engineering design phase of Contracts where
Engineering, Procurement and Construction are combined (EPC Contracts).
2) The framework within which work will be performed by all A/E and/or EPC
Contractors to ensure uniformity throughout the infrastructure of the Project
and compatibility within the RCJ Boundary.
3) Mandatory, minimally acceptable requirements for the RCJ new and retrofit
projects.
4) The basis, on which the Integrated Automation Systems and Instrumentation
and Control Systems and services shall be programmed, designed and
installed.
b. This Subsection indicates the minimum level of quality required by the RCJ to:
1) Define the role of the Authorized Representatives and the responsibilities of
the A/E and/or EPC Contractors,
2) Provide a reference basis for Saudi Arabian and International Codes and
standards, and for the Guideline Specifications and Guideline Details issued
by the Royal Commission.
3) Ensure flexibility and adaptability to accommodate future developments and
expansion.
c. This Subsection does not provide information normally found in available textbooks,
handbooks, codes and standards, nor does it attempt to duplicate design criteria
within the expertise of the A/E and/or EPC Contractors.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 219
d. Design decisions are to be developed for specific applications as the design

progresses. Project conditions may dictate the need for design that exceeds these
minimum requirements.
e. If a conflict is found between the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), the Guiding
how to proceed.
f. In the event there is a conflict between the GEM and the requirements of the RCJ
and End Users, the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ. The Royal
Commission shall provide resolution or direction on how to proceed.
g. The design of RCJ Control system requires full coordination and integration with
other disciplines such as, but not limited to telecom, electrical , mechanical , piping,
plumbing , environmental , loss and prevention design.
3. Exclusions
a. While there are a number of similarities, the following standards/guidelines are not in
the scope of this document:
1) Engineering standards and/or procedures associated with Saudi Aramco.
The applicable standard can be located under Saudi Aramco desktop
standards.
2) Telecommunication technology and/or topology is outside the scope of this
Section. The applicable design guide can be found in Subsection 5.5.2
Telecommunications; in keeping with control system architectures and Plant
Automation Network (PAN).
3) Where works interface with Saudi Electrical Company (SEC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with SEC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the SEC.
4) Where works interface with Saudi Telecommunication Company (STC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with STC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the STC.
4. References – Units of Measurement
a. Where applicable, the design, construction, commissioning and operation and
maintenance of Instrumentation and Control systems shall satisfy and comply with
the requirements and standards of the organizations and publications listed in this
Subsection.
b. References:
1) All work shall conform to the applicable industry codes, standards and
associations. Refer to Subsections 5.5.1.A.7 Codes and 5.5.1.A.8
Standards for a listing of the codes and standards.
c. Units of Measurement
1) All new facilities shall be designed for operation in SI units. Refer to NIST
Special Publication 811 2008 Edition “Guide for the Use of the International
System of Units (SI). Section 2.3 SI Units and Conversions of this document
also has reference.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 220
2) Exception: Upgrades or modifications to existing facilities may retain existing

operating units unless otherwise specified in project documentation.
3) The International System of Units (abbreviated SI) is the modern form of the
metric system. It comprises a coherent system of units of measurement built
around seven base units, 22 named and an indeterminate number of
unnamed coherent derived units, and a set of prefixes that act as decimal-
based multipliers. The standards, published in 1960 as the result of an
initiative started in 1948, are based on the meter–kilogram–second (MKS)
system, rather than the centimeter–gram–second (CGS) system, which, in
turn, had several variants. The SI has been declared to be an evolving
system; thus prefixes and units are created and unit definitions are modified
through international agreement as the technology of measurement
progresses, and as the precision of measurements improve.
4) Standard conditions for process flow and gas custody metering is defined in
Aramco Standards.
5) Standard conditions for bulk flow measurement and transfer of Sea Water
Cooling is detailed further in this Section.
TABLE 5.5.3.A: STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR SEA WATER COOLING
TRANSFER METERING
SI Unit
Pressure 101.325 kPa (abs)
Temperature 15.00°C
5. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions, refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
b. The following is a list of definitions for acronyms, abbreviations, words, and terms as
they are used in this document. For definitions not listed, the latest issue of the
“Comprehensive Dictionary of Measurement and Control”, International Society of
Automation (ISA), shall apply.
1) “Address” An identifying name, label, or number for a data terminal, source,
or storage location calculation.
2) “Analog data” Data represented by scalar values.
3) “Annunciator” A unit containing one or more indicator lamps, alphanumeric
displays, or other equivalent means in which each indication provides status
information about a circuit, condition, or location.
4) “Application Software” The software written specifically to perform functional
requirements for an individual plant when standard software packages
cannot be configured to meet the requirements. Application software works
with the standard operating software to control and monitor plant process
and maintenance status through accessing the SCADA/PCS/BAS real-time
and historical database data.
5) “BACnet” A communications protocol for building automation and control
networks. It is an ASHRAE, ANSI, and ISO standard protocol. BACnet
allows communication of building automation and control systems for
applications such as heating, ventilating and air-conditioning control, lighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 221
control, access control, and fire detection systems and their associated
equipment. BACnet is addressed in ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135 - 2012,
and became ISO 16484-5 in 2003 - is a communications protocol for
building automation and control networks and provides mechanisms for
computerized building automation devices to exchange information,
regardless of the particular building service they perform.
6) “Binary digit” A character used to represent one of the two digits in the binary
number system and the basic unit of information in a two-state device. The
two states of a binary digit are usually represented by “0” and “1”. Synonym:
bit.
7) “Call Up Time” The time between when the operator initially enters a display
request and when all objects, lines, values (good or invalid), trends and
other parts of the display have been fully presented to the operator.
8) “Computerized Data Acquisition and Control System (CDACS)” refers to an
industrial computer based control system that monitors and controls a
process. Synonymous to PCS.
9) “Command” Commands are sent by operators or by applications.
Commands can be binary or analog (set-point). Commands require reliable,
secure, and timely delivery. Command data shall be delivered to its target as
quickly as possible, typically in the order of seconds or sub-seconds. If a
command cannot be delivered or acted upon, the SCADA system shall
report this to the operator.
10) “Communication channel” A facility that permits signaling between two
terminals i.e. a path between master station and an RTU, PLC or a
subsystem.
11) “Communications Subsystem” The hardware and software that performs the
transmitting and receiving of digital information.
12) “Configurable” - The capability to select and connect standard hardware
modules to create a system, or the capability to change functionality or sizing
of software functions by changing parameters without having to modify or
regenerate software.
13) “Console” A collection of one or more workstations and associated
equipment such as printers and communications devices used by an
individual to interact with the SCADA and perform other functions.
14) “Cycle” The scanning of inputs, execution of algorithms and transmission of
output values to devices.
15) “Cyclic Polling (data request)” The process by which a data acquisition
system selectively requests data from one or more of its RTUs. An RTU may
be requested to respond with all, or a selected portion of, the data available.
16) “Dead Band” The range through which an input signal may be varied without
initiating an action or observable change in output signal.
17) “Dead Pair” - Within a cable, an extension of a pair that has been used, or a
pair that is not terminated at either end.
18) “Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)” The interference in signal transmission
or reception resulting from the radiation of undesirable frequency interfering
electrical or magnetic and electrical fields.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 222
19) “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)” Is software that allows the integration
of operations and resources and manages them through one program. This
approach to management is called Integration. Most large companies in the
world use ERP to manage various aspects of their businesses. These are
product planning, parts planning, parts procurement and inventory
management, interacting with suppliers, providing customer service, and
tracking orders. It can also include applications to manage finance and
human resources.
20) “Faceplate” - A graphic element that mimics the front panel of an analog
controller instrument, hardwired push-button or switch.
21) “Fail-Over” Occurs automatically without user intervention, transparent to the
user.
22) Failsafe – a concept in process control that in the event of a specific type of
failure, the failsafe devices will automatically response in a way to safety
position, cause no harm, or at least a minimum of harm, to other devices,
environment or to personnel.
23) Foundation Fieldbus H1 (FF) - Fieldbus is a fully digital, serial, two-way, multi-
drop, communication system running at 31.25 Kbits/s which will be used to
connect intelligent field equipment such as sensors, actuators and controllers.
It serves as a Local Area Network (LAN) for the instrumentation used within
process plants and facilities with built-in capability to monitor and distribute
control applications across the network.
24) “Handhole” A small jointing chamber of the joint box category but restricted
to footway use only.
25) HART Communication protocol - Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
is an early implementation of Fieldbus, a digital industrial automation
protocol. Its most notable advantage is that the digital HART signal was
embedded in 4-20 mA analog instrumentation loop. The HART Protocol is
one of the most popular industrial protocols today, most of the smart
instrument will support the HART Communications.
26) “Local Area Network (LAN)” A LAN is a network used for bit serial
communication of information between interconnected, independent devices
and is completely under user jurisdiction and limited to being within a user’s
premises.
27) “Logs” Files or printouts of information in chronological order.
28) “Management Information System (MIS)” Provides information which is
needed to manage organizations efficiently and effectively. Management
Information Systems involve three primary resources: people, technology,
and information or decision making. Management information systems are
distinct from other information systems in that they are used to analyze
operational activities in the organization.
29) “Manhole” A jointing chamber, accessed via a restricted opening in the top.
30) “Master Station” Server or servers and software responsible for
communicating with the field equipment (RTUs, PLCs, etc.), and then to the
HMI software running on workstations in the control room, or elsewhere.
Master station may include multiple servers, distributed software
applications, and disaster recovery sites. The Master Station includes all

Rev. 0 5.5 - 223
networks switch and connectivity devices required to communicate with

RTUs and remote sites.
31) “Multimode Fiber (MMF)” A fiber that allows more than one optical mode to
propagate. Used for shorter distances; usually a larger diameter fiber of
plastic or other low-cost material.
32) “Nuisance Alarm” An alarm caused by mechanical failure, malfunction,
improper installation, or lack of proper maintenance, or an alarm activated by
a cause that cannot be determined.
33) “Operating System” Software that runs on computers and manages the
computer hardware and provides common services for execution of
application software.
34) “Process Control System (PCS)” Refers to an industrial computer based
control system that monitors and controls a process. Synonymous to
CDACS.
35) “Protocol” A strict procedure required to initiate and maintain communication
with the RTU or a PLC. Open Industry Standard communication protocol is
defined as a protocol that has a published specification and available for all
suppliers to read and implement and will not lock the customer into a
particular vendor or group. The Protocol may be extended, or offered in
subset form and supported by publication of reference information.
36) “Redundant Configuration” A system and/or subsystem that provides for a
standby module with automatic switchover from the primary unit to the
standby module, in the event of a failure, without loss of a system function.
Both active and standby modules utilize diagnostics to assist in identifying
and locating failures and to permit modules to be removed for repair and/or
replacement.
37) “Registered Jack (RJ)” Registered jack wiring configurations developed by
Bell System for the connection of customer premises equipment to the public
network. Registered jacks serve telephone and data applications. The most
common types are RJ45 and RJ11.
38) “Report-by-Exception” The reporting of data (e.g., from RTU to master
station) only when the data either changes state (e.g., for a status or digital
input point) or exceeds a predefined dead-band (e.g., for an analog input
point).
39) “Scan” The process by which a data acquisition system interrogates remote
terminals or points for data.
40) “Security Code” A group of data bits calculated by a transmitting terminal
from the information within its message by use of a prearranged algorithm,
appended to the transmitted message, and tested by the receiving terminal
to determine the validity of the received message.
41) “Self-Diagnostic” The capability of an electronic device to monitor its own
status and indicate faults that occur within the device.
42) “Single Mode Fiber (SMF)” A fiber that supports the propagation of only one
mode. Used for maximum distances; usually a small, precise diameter (8 to
9 microns) fiber of monolithic quartz.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 224
43) “Spare Pair” A cable pair which has been terminated at one end, but is not in
service.
44) “Standby Systems” Include alternate power systems for such applications
where interruption of normal power would cause discomfort to personnel or
damage to product.
45) “Supervisory Control” A telemetry based process control command initiated
from a Master Central Station either manually by operator or automatically
by an application to initiate an action and/or change analog set point in a
remotely located Control Stations over a bidirectional communications link
using specific communication protocol. Such command is dependent of
having quality process related alarm/event data and follows timely
bidirectional confirmation and acknowledgment executing sequences
between the master and the station known as select/check before Operate
(CBO).
46) “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)” Refers to an industrial
computer telemetry based control system that monitors and controls
remotely connected processes.
47) “Tag” A collection of attributes that specify either a control loop or a process
variable, or a measured input, or a calculated value, or some combination of
these, and all associated control and output algorithms. Each tag is unique.
48) “Tag ID” The unique alphanumeric code assigned to inputs, outputs,
equipment items, and control blocks. The tag ID might include the plant area
identifier.
49) “Twisted Pair Cable (TP)” A type of communication transmission cable in
which two individually insulated wires are twisted around each other to
reduce induction (thus interference) from one wire to other. The pair may be
surrounded by a shield, insulating jacket, to form Shielded Twisted Pair
(STP) cable, otherwise it is Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP).
6. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Subsection 2.2 Definitions and
Abbreviations.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection:
3) Aramco Saudi Aramco (Saudi Arabian Oil Company); responsible for
KSA oil and gas reserves, exploration and production.
4) ANN: Artificial Neural Networks
6) BACnet: Building Automation & Control Networks
9) CAT: Category
10) CMS: Condition Monitoring System

Rev. 0 5.5 - 225
11) COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf

12) DC: Direct Current
13) DCS: Distributed Control System
14) DDC: Direct Digital Control
15) DNP: Distributed Network Protocol
16) EIA: Electronic Industries Association
17) EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility
18) EMCS: Energy Management and Control System
19) EMI: Electromagnetic Interference
21) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning
22) ESD Emergency Shutdown System
23) FAT: Factory Acceptance Test
24) FF: Foundation Fieldbus
25) FO: Fiber Optic
26) FTP: File Transfer Protocol
27) GUI: Graphic User Interface
28) HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
29) HMI: Human Machine Interface
31) HZ: Hertz
32) IAMS: Instrument Asset Management System
33) ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
35) IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
37) IMS: Information Management System
38) ISO: The International Organization for Standardization
39) IT: Information Technology
40) JIC Jubail Industrial City
41) KSA Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
42) KW: Kilo-watts
45) LCD: Liquid Crystal Diode

Rev. 0 5.5 - 226

47) LV: Low Voltage
48) MAC: Media Access Control (Common use is MAC Address)
49) Mbps: Megabits Per Second
50) MC: Media Converter
51) MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker
52) MCC: Motor Control Center
53) MIS: Management Information System
54) MMF: Multi Mode Fiber
55) MOV Motor Operated Valve
56) MTS: Manual Transfer Switch
57) MTU: Master Terminal Unit
60) OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer
61) OPC: OLE for Process Control
62) PAS: Process Automation System
63) PC: Personal Computer
64) PCS: Process Control System
65) PF: Power Factor
66) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
67) PoE: Power Over Ethernet
68) PTP(P2P): Point To Point
69) RBE: Report by Exception
72) RTU: Remote Terminal Unit
74) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or Saudi Standards,
Metrology and Quality Organization
76) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
78) SDMS SEC Distribution Materials Specification

Rev. 0 5.5 - 227

81) SMF: Single Mode Fiber
82) SMSS: Saudi Electricity Company Material Standard Specification
83) SNMP Single Network Management Protocol
84) SQL: Database Product of Microsoft Corporation
85) STP: Shielded Twisted Pair
87) SWTP: Sanitary Waste Water Treatment Plant
88) TE: Treated Effluent
89) TIE: Treated Industrial Effluent
90) TSE: Treated Sanitary Effluent
91) TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
92) TP: Twisted Pair
95) UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
96) VMS: Vibration Monitoring System
97) VN: Virtual Network Interface
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.4 Abbreviations for a list of additional electrical
abbreviations.
7. Codes And Standards
a. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Performance Standards for a list of applicable Codes.
b. Codes for electrical equipment and material and their installation shall conform to
the current requirements of the following authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code Chapter 401 Electrical Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code Chapter 501 Mechanical Requirements.
4) Saudi Building Code Chapter 210 Architecture Requirements
7) Saudi Building Code Chapter 801 Fire Protection Requirements
c. Standards
For all work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used
wherever applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate
the priority for application with regards to design of the electrical systems. In case of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 228
conflict, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose equipment conforming to one
group of Codes and Standards.
1) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute/Steel Product Manual
3) ANSI/ISA American National Standards Institute/The International
Society of Automation
5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
7) BSI British Standards Institution
8) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
9) EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
10) FCI Fluid Control Institute
11) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
12) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
14) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
15) ISA The International Society of Automation
16) ISO International Organization for Standardization
17) MIL-STD Military Standard
18) NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
20) RCEC Royal Commission Electrical Code
21) RCER Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
22) SAEP Saudi Aramco Engineering Procedures
24) SAMSS Saudi Aramco Material System Specifications
27) SDMS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
30) STES Saudi Electricity Company Transmission Engineering
Standard
31) SEI Software Engineering Institute

Rev. 0 5.5 - 229
32) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

d. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Section of the guidelines include the
following:
1) IEEE 802.3, Ethernet
2) IEEE 802.11, Wireless LANs
3) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) Engineering Standards and Specifications,
latest edition
4) AG 181 – Fieldbus Foundation, System Engineering Guidelines
5) AG 140 – Fieldbus Foundation, Wiring and Installation Application Guidelines
a. The following environmental conditions shall be applied to all components of the
control systems as required.
1) Air-Conditioned Building – General Purpose areas
(a) Equipment located in air-conditioned interior building areas, are subject
to ambient temperatures varying from 10°C to 35°C with ambient relative
humidity levels between 20% and 80%.
2) Unclassified Light Industrial Locations
(a) Field equipment located in unconditioned interior process areas, which
are not classified as corrosive or hazardous locations, are subject to
ambient temperatures varying from 0°C to 40°C with relative humidity
levels of 100%.
(b) There may be incidental quantities of corrosive gas and dust. Therefore,
the equipment shall be designed with materials for use in corrosive
areas.
(c) In exterior areas, ambient temperatures vary from 0°C to +55°C with
strong direct radiation from the sun. The relative humidity in these areas
may range from 85% to 100% with condensation occurring. All areas
may have trace quantities of corrosive gas with windblown dust, sand,
and rain.
(d) Due to the close proximity to the sea, there is a high level of salt in the
air which is detrimental to unfinished metals and copper wiring and
electronics.
(e) Controllers, panels, etc., shall be located in environmentally protected
enclosures or buildings wherever possible – see the following guidelines
below.
(1) Outdoor Sheltered - Maximum 55°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to
Paragraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) below.
(2) Outdoor Unsheltered - Maximum 65°C , Minimum 0°C, refer to
Paragraphs (ii) and (iii) below.
(i) "Sheltered" refers to permanent, ventilated enclosures or
buildings, or permanently fixed sunshades with a top and three
sides.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 230
(ii) For instruments which dissipate internal heat and are installed
in custom engineered enclosures (e.g., enclosures not included
in the original manufacturer's temperature certification), an
additional 15°C shall be added to the above maximum
temperatures. An example, for "indoor air conditioned"
installation, the equipment must perform at 35 + 15 = 50°C.
Similarly, for the "outdoor unsheltered" case, the equipment
shall be designed for a maximum operating temperature of 65
+ 15 = 80°C.
(iii) For the outdoor installations only, the designer can take credit
for forced or passive cooling to eliminate or reduce the 15°C
heat rise. For example, if vortex coolers are used, the heat
removal capacity of the coolers may be subtracted from the
generated heat. No more than 15°C reduction in temperature
will be given as credit. The designer shall substantiate his
claim by providing the support data and calculations.
(iv) All equipment specified for outdoor installation shall be
compliant with the following contaminant levels:
• Dust Concentration - Usual airborne dust concentration is
1 mg/m³. During sandstorms, dust concentrations may
reach 500 mg/m³. Particle sizes are as follows:
o 95% of all particles are less than 20 micrometers
o 50% of all particles are less than 1.5 micrometers
• Elements present in dust include compounds of calcium,
silicon, magnesium, aluminum, potassium, chlorides and
sodium. When wetted (high humidity conditions) these
compounds function as electrolytes and can result in
severe corrosion.
• Other pollutants present in the atmosphere under the most
extreme conditions are:
o H2S 20 ppm (vol/vol)
o Hydrocarbon 150 ppm (vol/vol)
o SO2 10 ppm (vol/vol)
o CO 100 ppm (vol/vol)
o NOx 5 ppm (vol/vol)
o O3 1 ppm (vol/vol)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 231
• Equipment which is not enclosed or hermetically sealed,

but is situated outdoors offshore or outdoors near-shore
shall be protected against corrosion and operational
failure due to wind-borne sea water spray and the
accumulation of wetted salt (sodium chloride).
• Near-shore is defined as within one kilometer from the
shoreline of the Arabian Gulf, or within three kilometers
from the shoreline of the Red Sea.
3) Classified Field Locations
(a) The equipment located in classified areas shall be designed to meet the
classification of the area in accordance with the IEC 60079 series
standards and SBC Chapter 401.
4) Corrosive Locations
(a) The equipment located in areas that are subject to corrosive fumes or
spills shall be selected and erected in accordance with the requirements
of IEC 60364-5-51 and SBC Chapter 51. Corrosive area locations for
PLCs, panels, etc., shall be avoided wherever possible. Equipment
required to be installed in corrosive locations shall be specifically
designed to withstand the conditions.
5) Noise Levels
(a) The noise levels for all equipment shall be less than or equal to:
(1) 55 dBA for equipment installed in continuously manned areas.
(2) 60 dBA for equipment installed in other areas.
6) Equipment Enclosures
(a) All equipment enclosures shall meet the following Ingress Protection
rating as defined by IEC 60529. The object of these standards is to give:
(1) Definitions for degrees of protection provided by enclosures of
electrical equipment as regards:
(i) Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts inside
the enclosure;
(ii) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against
ingress of solid foreign objects;
(iii) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against
harmful effects due to the ingress of water.
(2) Measures to protect both the enclosure and the equipment inside
the enclosure against external influences or conditions such as:
(i) Mechanical impacts
(ii) Corrosion
(iii) Corrosive solvents (for example, cutting liquids)
(iv) Fungus
(v) Vermin

Rev. 0 5.5 - 232
(vi) Solar radiation

(vii) Icing
(viii) Moisture (for example, produced by condensation)
(ix) Explosive atmospheres
(x) And the protection against contact with hazardous moving
parts external to the enclosure
(b) All enclosures located outside which are not sheltered or made from
stainless steel shall have a white finish to lower the internal temperature.
(c) All enclosures with a lens or transparent display cover subject to direct
sunlight shall be glass or as a minimum UV resistant.
7) Sunshields
(a) All field instruments with local LCD or LED displays shall be equipped
with sunshields to allow viewing of the displays and to shield the
instrument enclosures from the heating effects of direct sunlight. In
addition, instrument displays shall be north facing where possible to
prevent direct sun exposure.
b. System Reliability
1) All Field Instruments, Instrument Control Panels, Controllers, Network and
Communication equipment, Servers and Workstations shall be provided with
backup power during power failure transitions with an Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS). The UPS shall provide a reliable source of uninterruptible power
with no break in AC output power during a complete or partial interruption of
incoming line power. The UPS shall include audio/visual alarms. The rating
shall be adequate to provide uninterrupted conditioned power under fully
loaded conditions for at least 30 mins. UPS status shall be monitored by the
control system.
2) Communication links between all controllers and facilities shall be continuously
monitored and safe operating modes assumed whenever a communication
failure has occurred. Normal operation modes will only resume when
communications have been restored, depending on the process, safety issues,
etc. Restart procedures following a communication or power failure shall be
defined for each facility or process during preliminary design.
B. Control System Architectures
1. General
a. A Control System is actually an integration of several sub-systems into a functional
single platform. A Control System will ideally provide the highest level of safety for
the Community, RCJ personnel and operations staff and must incorporate the
principles of environmental safeguards, the protection of the process equipment,
economy of operation in all regards, with high reliability and expansibility.
b. The Control System Architecture shall maximize single window concept, and the
Operation Centre HMI Workstations such as PCS /SCADA/BMS shall integrate with
all sub-systems and provide a single platform to control and monitor all facilities in
the plant.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 233
2. Scope
a. This Subsection describes the design elements and technical criteria for establishing
an appropriate Control System Architecture for each of the following systems:
1) Building Automation System (BAS) is the more recent terminology adopted by
the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) and shall be used in lieu of Building Management Systems (BMS).
BAS is a distributed control system - the computer networking of electronic
devices designed to monitor and control designed to monitor and control or
interface with otherwise standalone systems – typically security (access
control, CCTV, PA), fire and flood safety, fire pumps, fire suppression, lighting
(especially emergency lighting, Energy Efficiency Control system), generators,
HVAC and humidity control, ventilation systems and mechanical packages
such as potable water pumps, lift stations, chiller package etc. in a building.
2) Process Control Systems (PCS) are typically used in industries such as water,
oil, gas, pipeline, chemicals plant. . PCS is the current general term that
encompasses several types of control systems used in industrial production,
including distributed control systems (DCS), Emergency Shutdown System
(ESD) and other third party control systems such as package programmable
logic controllers (PLC), machine conditioning monitor system, pipe leak
detection system, custody metering system, fire and gas alarm system,
analyzer etc., often found in the industrial sectors and critical infrastructures.
3) Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) describes a system
operating with telemetry communications to provide for monitoring and control
of remote processes and equipment. SCADA systems distinguish themselves
from other PCS systems by being processes that can include multiple sites,
and large distances.
(a) SCADA provides the means for the Operators to monitor and control
remote facilities from a central location utilizing various different forms of
data communications. The SCADA system will be either a
Master/Remote Terminal Unit MTU/RTU based system of standard (not
custom) manufacture or a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based
system incorporating PLCs communicating with a central personal
computer (PC) based Human Machine Interface (HMI) software package
of standard (not custom) manufacture.
4) Fire and Gas detection and suppression control systems are critical life safety /
protection equipment in building or process plant. The purpose of a Fire and
Gas Alarm and Suppression Control System is to detect a fire and gas release
and automatically initiate audible and visual alarms in the building or plant and
prompt panel operator for actions and alert personnel in the vicinity of the
hazard area. Fire protection system may be able to be automatically or
manually activated by mechanical or control systems and provide protective
actions to mitigate the accident circumstance. All fire detection and fire
suppression devices shall be networked to a central Fire Workstation to display
alarms, troubleshooting, confirm fire and activate fire suppression devices.
3. Building Automation System (BAS) Architecture

a. Refer to Section 5.4.3 HVAC, specifically:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 234
1) Subsection 5.4.3. A.16 for additional requirements associated with HVAC

Software.
2) Subsection 5.4.3. B.13 for additional requirements associated with Building
Automation (Management) System.
3) Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.c for additional requirements and design details
associated with Direct Digital Control (DDC) System Controls.
b. The following is a brief description of BAS fundamentals:
1) Building automation is the goal that a Building Management System or a (more
recent terminology) Building Automation System (BAS) attempts to achieve.
BAS core functionality keeps building climate within a specified range, lights
rooms based on an occupancy schedule (in the absence of overt switches to
the contrary), monitors performance and device failures in all systems,
provides malfunction alarms (via typically email and/or text notifications) to
building engineering/maintenance staff and contractors. BAS reduce building
energy and maintenance costs compared to a non-controlled building.
2) A building controlled by a BAS is often referred to as an intelligent building,
"smart building", or (if a residence) a "smart home". Commercial and industrial
buildings have historically relied on robust proven protocols like BACnet.
3) BACnet is a network communications protocol for building automation and
control systems that has been adopted worldwide as ISO 16484-5:2003.
4) Almost all multi-story green buildings are designed to accommodate a BAS for
the energy, air and water conservation characteristics. Electrical device
demand response is a typical function of a BAS, as is the more sophisticated
ventilation and humidity monitoring required of "tight" insulated buildings. Most
green buildings also use as many low-power DC devices as possible, typically
integrated with power over Ethernet wiring, so by definition always accessible
to a BAS through the Ethernet connectivity.
5) The building automation server shall be able to support various communication
protocols to be integrated with other standalone systems through networks for
control and monitoring purposes, such as Fire & Gas Detection System status,
Fire Suppression Control status, Elevator and Intercom status, UPS status,
Access Control status, CCTV camera, mechanical packages (pump station
PLC, RTU) etc.
6) The building automation server shall collect data and interface with DDC
controllers, other standalone control system through facilities local area data
network provided by telecom.
4. Process Control System (PCS) Architecture
a. The PCS concept for future projects is to provide the RCJ with a powerful and
integrated control system platform that bundles together the operating, configuration,
documentation, and connectivity tools, to give a truly intuitive and windows
compliant control environment.
b. The term “Process Control System” is synonymous to Process Automation System
(PAS) and any one of these terms take the same meaning. It describes a computer
based control system that provides a means to monitor and control automatic
processes from a central control room.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 235
c. A PCS is typically an integration of various computerized servers and controllers,

smart instrumentation and software applications for data acquisition and control
purposes. Control systems could include any combination of the following basic
components:
1) Distributed Control System (DCS)
2) Programmed Logic Controllers (PLC)
3) Alarm Management System (ALMS)
4) Data Acquisition and Historization System (DAHS)
5) Emergency Shutdown System (ESD)
6) FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus System (FF)
7) Condition Monitoring System (CMS)
8) Packaged – Vendor Control Panels (VCP)
9) Instrument Asset Monitoring System (IAMS)
10) Plant Automation Network (PAN)
11) Plant Information Network (PIN)
12) Gas Leak Detection system
13) Demilitarized Zone and Cyber security
14) Web Terminal and Remote Access Control
d. The Wet Utilities shall be operated and maintained by Marafiq with the exception of
the irrigation system which will be under the control of the Royal Commission.
e. Wet utilities shall be provided with a PCS or SCADA system and a dedicated control
room to monitor and manage the infrastructure controlled by DCS’s, PLC’s, RTU’s
etc. or any combination of these controllers. The wet utilities are as follows:
1) Potable Water System
2) Sea Water Cooling System
3) Industrial Waste Water System
4) Sanitary Waste Water System
5) Irrigation Water System
f. (SCADA) systems associated with light industrial and Wet Utilities is described in
more detail under item Paragraph 5.5.3.B.4.
g. PCS shall use standard Industrial Ethernet communication protocols between
servers or workstations on the network. PCS shall incorporate redundant servers
with client workstations to provide a Graphical User Interface GUI and operator
functionality for complete monitoring and control purposes. Graphics, schedules, set
points, trends and alarms specified as per sequences of operation shall be objects.
h. Availability and Reliability - The PCS architecture including the control system
network design shall provide a 99.50% hardware and software availability and
reliability.
i. PCS shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed controllers
and operator interface terminals.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 236
j. The PCS shall include redundant controller and redundant power supply, be
designed with no single point of failure and shall include the communication modules
and communication links to the distributed controllers and remote I/O equipment.
k. The entire PCS, including hardware and software, must be specified as
manufacturer’s standard project line. System components and subassemblies must
have proven installed base with successful track record.
l. PCS VENDOR shall be responsible for the supply of all aspects of the PCS
including design, engineering, fabrication, procurement, configuration, programming,
integration, inspection, testing, site support and documentation.
m. PCS VENDOR shall have total system responsibility for the Integration, performance
and functionality of all hardware, firmware and software items being furnished for the
PCS.
n. PCS VENDOR shall be responsible for the integrity of the overall control system
design, including the co-ordination of communications interfaces.
5. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA
a. SCADA systems are provided for various utilities within the RCJ. The various
SCADA systems can be described as follows:
1) Wet utilities – including Potable Water Systems, Sea Water Cooling Systems,
Industrial Waste Water Systems, Sanitary Waste Water Systems and Irrigation
Water Systems.
2) Environmental SCADA is provided to a control room with various stations
located inside RIC - operated and managed by RCJ. Data is transferred by the
fiber optic cable network from stations to the SCADA.
3) Gas SCADA - Operational responsibility for the gas supply network is currently
uncertain, although this may come under the control of Saudi Aramco.
4) The Traffic SCADA is to be provided with the traffic signals and cameras
operated from a control room and managed by RCJ. Data is transferred by the
fiber optic cable network from stations to the SCADA.
5) Electrical SCADA - The electrical infrastructure systems will be operated by
SEC and incorporate a SCADA system connected through a control room.
Data is transferred by the fiber optic cable network from the substations to the
SCADA.
b. SCADA systems associated with Environmental, Gas, and Electrical Utilities, and
other heavy industrial facilities are not in the scope of this document.
c. SCADA is provided to a control room with various stations located inside RIC -
operated and managed by RCJ. Although wireless applications are available, data
is usually transferred by the fiber optic cable network from remote stations to the
central SCADA head-end. The SCADA system can support any type of
telecommunication technologies. However, the selection of the telecommunication
technology and/or topology is outside the scope of this document.
d. The following design requirements shall be complied with to provide highly efficient
and reliable SCADA system performance for each application using the provided
technology.
1) General - A detailed Performance Analysis shall be conducted for each
application (Project) to specify the optimum architecture to meet the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 237
performance requirement expected. The analysis shall be based on the

expected data scan frequency and spare capacity, and shall address SCADA
server(s) loading, bandwidth capacity and utilization of each telecommunication
channel.
2) Design Architecture - The SCADA Host station software shall be based on fully
redundant Client/Server architecture. Processing load shall be balanced and
distributed among the system components to achieve the scalability and
highest performance levels.
3) SCADA networks shall be physically and logically isolated from all other non
SCADA network traffic. Voice, CCTV and non-process control traffic shall not
share the SCADA network hardware.
4) The SCADA server(s) shall be dedicated to perform the real time data
acquisition and telecommunication processing functionalities and shall not be
shared and/or used to perform any non-SCADA related data processing
functions.
5) For application requiring redundant RTU communication modules, the design
shall provide dedicated communication path from each communication module
to the telecommunication network.
6) For application where FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus (FF) based RTU is specified,
refer to SAES-J-904 for the specific design requirements.
7) Availability and Reliability - The SCADA System architecture including the
telemetry network design shall provide a 99.50% hardware and software
availability and reliability.
8) The SCADA Host Station including the SCADA LAN shall be designed with no
single point of failure. For application where redundant RTU/PLC is required,
the no single point of failure requirement shall include the communication
modules and communication links to the RTU/PLC.
6. Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System
a. The Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression Control System concept for future
projects is to provide the RCJ complete status indication and controls for fire and
gas detection and protection systems, to form a powerful and integrated control
system platform that bundles together the monitoring, operating, diagnostic,
networking, configuration, documentation, and connectivity tools, to give a truly
intuitive and windows compliant control environment.
b. The Fire and Gas Alarm System and Fire Suppression System typical include any
combination of the following basic components:
1) Microprocessor based intelligent Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) with all necessary
accessories, such as loop isolator, backup batteries.
2) Addressable Fire Alarm Devices, such as smoke detectors, heater detectors,
manual pull stations.
3) Duct Smoke Detectors
4) Fire Alarm Audio and Visual Alarm Devices, such as bell, horn, beacon,
strobes.
5) Gas Detection Devices, such as H2, CO2, Cl2 etc.
6) Gas Detection Control Panels

Rev. 0 5.5 - 238
7) Smoke Control System

8) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)
9) Automatic Sprinkler System and control devices
10) Clean Agent System and Control Panels
11) Electric Fire Water Pump Control Panels
12) Fire Water Jockey Pump Control Panels
13) Diesel Fire Water pump Control Panels
14) Emergency Diesel Generator Control Panel
15) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System centralize supervisory
Server
16) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System supervisory workstation
17) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System network components
18) Integration / Interface with other systems such as HVAC, Elevator, Door
Access Control, CCTV, Public Address system etc.
c. System Availability and Reliability
1) The F&G system shall be subjected to careful component level subsystem and
system testing, The availability of the F&G system shall then be part of the
guarantee of the system.
2) The system availability is usually expressed in terms of two factors:
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF).
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR).
The system availability shall be guaranteed at 99.99%.
(Assuming average MTTR = Four hours).
d. The Fire and Gas Alarm System and Fire Suppression System shall provide fully
autonomous control in the covered area, loss of network connection with fire
supervisory server / operator workstation shall not jeopardize the local control and
monitoring functionalities.
e. All Fire Alarm panels ( FACP), Fire Protection Control Panels and Fire Water Pumps
Control Panels shall be part of the fire network to the central location for supervisory
monitoring and controls.
f. From fire supervisory server workstations, the panel operator shall be able to
monitor, program, diagnose, maintenance and inhibit the individual integrant fire
devices. Value engineering can be taken as per project discretion to determine the
feasibility of combining fire Server / workstation with BAS server / workstations in the
buildings.
C. Control Strategies
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to present the concepts and principles underlying
the design of the Plant Instrumentation and Control System.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 239
b. A PCS is actually an integration of several sub-systems into a functional single

system. This system must provide the highest level of safety for the Community,
RCJ personnel and must incorporate the principles of environmental safeguards, the
protection of the process equipment, economy of operation in all regards, and high
reliability. This Subsection addresses each of these requirements and their
influence on design choices.
2. Principals of Automation
a. Safety in Control
1) The controlled equipment and the control system itself must include “fail-safe”
operation such that upon loss of power or control signal, the equipment will go
to the pre-determined “safe” state.
2) All equipment interlocks which are classified as “life safety” interlocks must be
“hard wired” or “mechanically interlocked” and shall not rely on data
communications or wireless transmission for their operation.
b. A typical Control System hierarchy consist of four (4) levels:
1) Level 1 – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
(a) This level includes all field-mounted instruments and equipment that
directly or indirectly have some effect on the process. This will include
temperature, pressure, flow and level transmitters, control valves, on-off
valves, Motor Operated Valves (MOVs), fans, heaters, pumps, blowers,
etc.
(b) This information is transferred to Level 2 and the control commands
generated at higher levels are carried out. Equipment at this level will
include local manual controls.
2) Level 2 – Controllers
(a) This is the level at which the main body of most of the control system
and the control program, resides. This level represents the gateway
between Level 1 and Level 3. All information, alerts and commands to
and from Level 1 and Level 3 must pass through this level in order for
them to be executed or used.
(b) Level 2 consists of distributed Controllers (DCS Controllers, PLCs, RTU’s
etc.) and/or a number of Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
packaged controllers.
(c) The Controller is the communication hub by which all information is
collected from the control system. The control program that resides in
these controllers is responsible for the automatic operation of the
facilities equipment and ancillary systems.
(d) The Level 2 Controllers in local areas shall be fully autonomous, with the
exception of operator-entered set points, no operator intervention is
required for the facility to operate automatically. Therefore, if there
happens to be an interruption in communication between Level 2 and
Level 3, normal system operation shall not be affected.
(e) Equipment supervision and alarm generation are tasks that are
performed at this level and reported to Level 3.
3) Level 3 – Supervisory Control and Graphical User Interface

Rev. 0 5.5 - 240
(a) This level provides the Human-Machine Interface (HMI) and Information
Management System (IMS). The system would typically consist of
Application Object Servers (AOS) suitably located in equipment or server
rooms. Operator Workstations connect through industrial Ethernet
networks with the Server to provide a graphical representation of the
various field devices.
(b) The HMI features of the system shall enable the operators to alter
equipment set points, start/stop equipment and monitor system
operations. The IMS features of the system shall provide the user with
real-time and historical trending of important process information and
provide user initiated report generation. The system shall generate
alarms and prioritize these based upon overall importance. A Level 1
alarm is considered critical to overall process integrity and is of the
highest importance and shall initiate an alarm dialer during after hour’s
operation. Level 2 alarms, although important, are of lower priority
relative to Level 1 alarms.
(c) The complete HMI system shall operate as one integrated system based
on a single window concept. The Workstations shall provide operator
access to the system for monitoring and control purposes and reporting
programs. Where applicable Historian software shall provide the
collection and archiving of facility historical data for retrieval from the
historian clients for trending analysis and reporting at each operator
workstation or the view-only desktop clients in managers and supervisors
office.
(d) Historical Servers shall function as the primary means of archiving data
within a SQL database. All trends, reports and supporting data shall be
provided in electronic format for special studies and long term strategic
planning. Detailed trend data shall be kept for all important analog
process measurements.
4) Level 4 – MIS/ERP Central Monitoring
(a) The MIS/ERP for the wet systems is located in the Marafiq Enterprise
Facility with the exception of the irrigation system which will be under the
direct control of the Royal Commission.
(b) The PCS/SCADA systems supporting the wet systems infrastructure will
control and record activities within their remits. The MIS/ERP system
provided by others will collect data from the PCS/SCADA collate and
make available for others to interrogate and use.
(c) The system critical alarms must be monitored and annunciate abnormal
events and detrimental conditions for the systems to make the operator/s
aware of the situation and will need to be coordinated.
(d) Access is by an approved secure login. The HMIs required to access the
system will be a normal PC with the appropriate access.
(e) Cyber security technology shall be strictly studied between Level 3 local
area (LAN) PCS /SCADA and level 4 Business wide LAN (WAN)
MIS/EPR system to protect the control system from hackers, intruders,
and malicious code.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 241
(f) The protocol, which has to be used inside the local area network
including the communication between the individual systems, shall
comply with the TCP/IP protocol stack.
3. Advanced Control Systems
a. Advanced or Intelligent Control Systems offer an enhancement to the conventional
loop-based and operator-governed controls which will be fundamental to the Plant’s
operation. Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs) which are a proven component of
existing treatment facilities will be elemental in the PCS.
b. The targets of these Intelligent Systems will be improved output water quality and
production, and cost savings through optimization of process chemicals and
consumed and produced energy.
c. The ANNs require a significant amount of historical operating data, spanning a
period typically from 18 months to 3 years or more in order to “learn” and
“understand” the process. As a result, provision for the ANN requirements will be
made, and following the startup of the Plant the data gathering and learning process
can begin, with the intent of integrating the ANNs into the Plant operation, possibly
in year two or year three.
4. Equipment Operating Modes
a. Typical local selector switch modes are designated as follows:
1) HOA – Hand, Off, and Auto.
2) LOR – Local, Off, and Remote.
3) Duty / Standby
4) Note that additional selector switch designations are used for certain pieces of
equipment, refer to the associated P&ID for details.
b. Local Mode - In LOCAL mode the equipment is capable of operation from the local
start/stop, on/off, or close/stop/open hand switches associated with the equipment.
This mode is applicable to most actuated equipment including valves, gates and
motors.
c. Off Mode - In OFF mode the equipment will not respond to any operator commands.
This mode is applicable to most actuated equipment including valves, gates and
motors.
d. Remote Mode - In REMOTE mode, the equipment is capable of operation from a
location other than at the local station. This is either another hand switch (i.e. Motor
Control Center (MCC) door mounted) or, if all field switches are in remote then by
Central HMI or SCADA.
e. Remote Manual - In the Remote Manual mode the operator may operate the
equipment from the HMI in the control room or an operator interface panel in the
field.
f. Remote Auto - In the AUTOMATIC mode the equipment is either automatically
controlled by programmed logic within the PCS when the selector switch is in the
AUTOMATIC or REMOTE position.
g. The Duty/Standby arrangement allows a set of devices - typically pumps or variable
speed drives - to be operated with an element of sequence of operating duty pumps
and remaining standby pumps as backup. During normal operation, the duty
devices are running capable of matching the plant demand, should the running

Rev. 0 5.5 - 242
device fail or the process demand is higher than the total duty pumps capacity, the
remaining devices are requested to run to fulfill the process demand requirements.
5. Consoles, Workstations and Control Networks
a. General
1) Consoles, including panel and HMI mounting structures shall be equipped with
tabletop work surfaces.
2) Where required, telecommunication equipment (i.e., telephones, plant paging
system, CCTV, PA system) and emergency shutdown pushbuttons shall be
incorporated in separate bay within the same console furniture.
3) Each workstation shall have access to a printer networked within the PCS
network.
4) Printers shall be free standing, or tables shall be provided. Printers that utilize
fanfold paper shall be equipped with pedestal (noise absorption enclosures)
with paper stackers.
5) PCS servers and workstations operating systems shall be configured to
capture all necessary systems related events to detect performance and
availability related information.
(a) System alarms and failures
(b) CPU utilization
(c) Memory utilization
(d) IO rates (i.e., physical and buffer) and device utilization
(e) File store utilization (e.g., disks, partitions, segments)
(f) Applications
(g) Databases (i.e., utilization, record locks, indexing, contention)
(h) Network utilization (i.e., transaction rates, error and retry rates)
(i) Response time for PCS and application transaction
b. Operator Consoles
1) Each station in the operator console shall have access to a networked
printer(s) for alarm logging, reporting and graphical printing.
2) Consoles that are manned on a continuous basis shall have access to a
networked graphics printer for making hard copies of active displays.
3) Each Operator Console shall be equipped with a minimum of two workstations.
4) Operator Workstations shall be equipped with annunciators / buzzers, operator
keyboard and activate in the event of alarms to gain the operator’s attention.
c. Engineering Workstation
1) Engineering consoles shall consist of a minimum of one workstation.
2) Each engineering workstation shall have access to a networked printer.
3) Each engineering workstation shall be capable of performing all operator
workstation's functions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 243
d. HMI Control and Monitoring System Functions will include:

1) Dynamic Authority Handling and Multiple system Access protection levels.
2) HMI views and operator dialogs
3) Dynamic process equipment coloring
4) Analogue Measurement
5) Events /Alarms processing
6) Logging, Printing, and Plotting
7) Historical information system
8) Data Archiving, outputting and Retrieval
9) Data quality attributes
10) Manual data entry and updating
11) Values calculation
12) Real-time and historical process values trending
13) Automatic generation of predefined Daily, Weekly and Monthly water flow and
energy consumption reports
14) Process Equipment Operation Count and maintenance Statistics
6. Redundancy – Fault Tolerance
a. The following equipment shall be supplied in redundant or fault-tolerant configuration
unless otherwise specified in the project specific Functional Specification Document:
1) All Process Controllers
2) All Power supply modules
3) All DCS Control Network Communications Equipment
4) All communications equipment required for communications between
controllers and I/O modules
5) All Input and Output modules used for critical regulatory control
6) All Foundation Fieldbus Host interface modules
7) All Foundation Fieldbus power supply and conditioning modules
8) All data storage devices (e.g., hard-drives) used to store system configuration
information or control strategy configuration information
9) All auxiliary systems communications interface modules, including
communications paths, where either the communications channel is used to
send commands from the PCS to the auxiliary system or data from the auxiliary
system is used within a regulatory control strategy within the PCS.
Commentary Note: Regulatory control refers to control which is implemented
at the PCS layer. This can be either analog (e.g., 4-20 mA to control valves)
or Foundation Fieldbus or discrete (e.g., 24 VDC to Motor starters). Critical
regulatory control refers to control of equipment which does not have an
installed spare or backup or where failure of the equipment would result in a
significant loss of production or an unsafe operating condition. Inputs and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 244
Outputs used for regulatory control in critical applications shall be supplied

with redundant I/O modules.
b. A minimum of two electrically and electronically independent operator workstations
shall be provided for each operator's console.
7. Centralized Enterprise, MIS/ERP System
a. Various systems in RIC are required for the secure operation of the infrastructure
and the companies which will be located in the city. The infrastructure systems will
each have their own independent SCADA systems to operate, monitor and control
the equipment for which they are responsible. These systems are being designed,
installed and commissioned by others.
b. The collection of operational information is required to enable RC to monitor the
operations but also to provide a corporate level system to enable access to the
various systems. This system is independent of the operational SCADA systems but
will collect information from these systems and can be described as a Management
Information System (MIS) or Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP). The proposed
system collects information that can assist with hydro modelling, billing, planning,
operation performance, plant running status and measuring the operation
performance etc. The information can also, with additional work, be used to develop
early warning of breakdown.
c. The information is secure and can be accessed from the Royal Commission building
and from anywhere with interconnection available. The Management information
system provides the monitoring of the following facilities:
1) Wet Utilities
2) Existing SCADA system of Jubail RC
3) Environmental system
4) Gas system
5) Traffic and Transportation system
6) Electrical supply
7) Security
d. Wet utilities are provided with access to the MIS/ERP system/s. The server/s is
installed inside the corporate enterprise control room located in the potable water
premises. The wet utilities shall be operated and maintained by Marafiq with the
exception of the of the irrigation system which will be under the control of the
Royal Commission.
e. The other systems e.g. traffic, security, SEC etc can also be provided with access to
the MIS/ERP system after agreed procedures for secure access and limitations to
what information is accessible to which parties. It might even be the case that to
ensure security of data that there are several MIS/ERP systems supporting the
different activities.
f. The wet utilities shall be provided with a SCADA system and a dedicated control
room to monitor and manage the infrastructure controlled by PLC’S and RTU’S etc.
The wet utilities are as follows:
1) Potable water system - The potable water system consists of a RO Plant,
storage tanks and pumping stations. There are bulk storage tanks as well as
distribution storage and pumping station. The storage tanks and pump stations

Rev. 0 5.5 - 245
shall be provided with PLC’S installed at the plant for the automation to monitor
and control all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are hooked
up to the SCADA system located inside the local control room at the potable
water facility. Data is transferred by a dedicated fiber optic cable network from
PLC to the SCADA. Uplink with Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the
MIS/EPR system shall be established, for Potable Treatment Plant, data is
transferred by the fibre optic cable network from potable water facility local
control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized SCADA
system inside the corporate enterprise control room located in the potable
water premises. For distribution storage and pump station,local SCADA data is
transferred by means of fibre optic or radio communication to the Marafiq
centralized SCADA system.
2) Sea water cooling system - The SWC system consists of a large intake pump
station and a piped network to distribute the sea water to the industrial plots.
There shall be PLC’S installed at the plant for the automation to monitor and
control all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are hooked up to
the SCADA system located inside the control room at the sea water facility.
Data is transferred by a dedicated fibre optic cable network from PLC to the
SCADA,
3) Industrial waste water system - The industrial waste water system consists of
pumping stations, pressurized mains and an Industrial Waste Water Treatment
Plant (IWTP). Each pumping station shall be provided with the PLC located
inside the room to monitor and control of all the activities at the pumping station
automatically. The PLC is hooked up by the field instruments to monitor at the
PLC. There shall be PLC’S installed at the treatment plant for the automation to
monitor and control of all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S
are hooked up to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at
the waste water treatment plant facility. Data is transferred by the fibre optic
cable network from PLC to the SCADA. Uplink from IWTP plant SCADA
system with Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the MIS/EPR system shall
be established, Data is transferred by the fibre optic cable network from IWTP
facility local control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized
SCADA system inside the corporate enterprise control room.
4) Sanitary waste water system - The sanitary waste water system consists of
pumping stations, pressurized mains and a Sewage Treatment Plant (STP).
Each pumping station shall be provided with the PLC located inside the room
to monitor and control of all the activities at the pumping station automatically.
The PLC is hooked up by the field instruments to monitor at the PLC. There
shall be PLC’S installed at the treatment plant for the automation to monitor
and control of all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are
hooked up to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at the
waste water treatment plant facility. Data is transferred by the fibre optic cable
network from PLC to the SCADA. Uplink from SWTP plant SCADA system with
Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the MIS/EPR system shall be
established, Data is transferred via the fibre optic cable network from SWTP
facility local control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized
SCADA system inside the corporate enterprise control room.
Commentary Note: The Industry / Sanitary waste water collection system have
many lift stations geography widely distributed within the Jubail Industry city,
there shall be RTU installed at each lift station for monitoring the lift station

Rev. 0 5.5 - 246
level, pump / odor control status. These RTUs shall hook up with Marafiq
central SCADA system by means of radio communication network. However if
these lift stations are located within the building compound, the RTU shall be
hook up to the compound BAS system for status monitoring
5) Irrigation water system - The irrigation transmission pumping system will be
operated and maintained by Marafiq and will consist of bulk storage tanks
containing Treated Sanitary Effluent (TSE), and transmission pumping station.
There shall be Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and Remote Terminal
Unit (RTU) installed at the transmission pump station for automation,
monitoring and controlling of all the pumping activities and the transmission
mains. A link will be provided from the distribution storage tanks to monitor the
level in these tanks and adjust the transmission supply accordingly. These
PLC’S and RTU’S will be connected to Marafiq’s SCADA system located inside
the control room at the SWTP/IWTP Treatment facility.
The irrigation distribution network will be operated and maintained by the RC,
or an RC appointed third party, and will consist of distribution storage tanks
containing Treated Sanitary Effluent (TSE), distribution pumping stations, Valve
Chambers, pressurized mains and irrigation controllers . There shall be
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) installed at the pump station and
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) at valve chamber for automation, monitoring and
controlling of all the activities of the irrigation network. These PLC’S and RTU’S
are connected to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at
the Irrigation pump station facility. Data is transferred by the fibre optic cable
network and radio communication from PLC / RTU to the SCADA system.
Uplink from irrigation distribution / boost pump station with RC L&I Centralized
Control Center SCADA shall be established, Data is transferred by the fibre
optic cable network and radio communication network from pump station local
SCADA / valve chamber RTU system to the RC L&I centralized SCADA
system.
Irrigation controller shall be used to control the solenoid valve for scheduled
irrigation activities, and shall be control and monitored directly from RC L&I
central SCADA system. Data is transferred from irrigation controller to RC L&I
central SCADA system by means of radio communication network.
The irrigation system control facility shall consolidate data associated with the
irrigation system. A separate central MIS/ERP system will be provided by
others and will collect data from the SCADA from various infrastructure
systems and collate data and make available for the RC (and others) to
interrogate and use.
A telecommunication network from the central facility will link the primary and
secondary irrigation system monitoring and controls data to the separate facility
by others.
The RTU shall be able to store and forward Data. To act as a repeater for
other RTUs in case of obstacles or more covering distances required. The
communication protocol should make the communication system between the
FIU- RTU and the RTU-RTU in Contention Transmission of events upon
change of status by the RTUs to the FIU and central control room without
interrogation of the FIU. And Transmission of the events upon change of status

Rev. 0 5.5 - 247
by the Slave RTUs to the Master RTUs without interrogation of the Master
RTU.
Instrumentation and RTU/FIU components of the Irrigation Water System have
been detailed further in the GPCS and TCDDs.
8. Segregation - Risk Levels – Safety Integrity levels
a. Process Control Systems shall be segregated into risk areas to increase system and
process availability. Risk Areas shall be defined in three levels. Separate
segregation requirements apply to each risk level.
1) Level 1 Risk Area Segregation
(a) Level 1 (L1) segregation provides the greatest degree of segregation. L1
segregation is used to segregate plant operations based on a 50%
production loss rule.
(b) Where a plant is designed with parallel processing trains, control
systems equipment shall be segregated such that a total loss of process
control equipment contained within a single L1 risk areas shall not result
in the loss of more than 50% of the total plant processing capability.
(c) Equipment located in separate L1 Risk Areas require separate:
(1) UPS Power Circuits
(2) Power Supplies, Power Distribution circuits or panels
(3) Operator workstations and alarm panels
(4) Process controllers (DCS), Safety Instrumented Systems (ESD),
Compressor or Turbine Control Systems and associated I/O
subsystems for each.
(5) Process Control Network equipment and cabling
(6) System and marshalling cabinets
(7) Auxiliary systems interfaces.
(d) A double failure of any redundant component in one L1 Risk Area shall
not affect the operations of equipment in any other L1 Risk Area.
(e) Where a single operator console is used to monitor two or more L1 risk
areas, each risk area must have a dedicated Operator Workstation.
Requirements for Operator Workstation redundancy (i.e., the backup
operator workstation) can be a met using a workstation dedicated to
another risk area as long as that workstation has full monitoring and
control capabilities of both risk areas.
(f) Where a single operator console is used to monitor two or more L1 risk
areas, control network communications equipment and cables shall be
segregated between risk areas. Communications cables may terminate
on a common network switch associated with the console provided the
switch is supplied in redundant configuration and both are dedicated for
the operator console.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 248

(a) Level 2 (L2) segregation is used to segregate parallel processing units
within a Level 1 risk area. Level 2 (L2) segregation is also used to
segregate major process equipment installed within Utilities plant areas.
(b) Process Control Equipment shall be segregated into separate Level 2
(L2) risk areas as follows:
(1) Parallel processing trains or parallel processing units within a Level
1 risk area shall be segregated into separate L2 risk areas.
(2) Redundant or parallel processing equipment located within utilities
plant areas shall be segregated into separate L2 risk areas such
that a complete failure in any single L2 risk area will only result in a
loss of no more than 50% throughput of the utilities area.
Commentary Note: In most instances, it is impractical to segregate
equipment located in the Utilities plant area into separate L1 risk
areas. Equipment such as boilers, air compressors, nitrogen
systems, hot-oil systems, etc., feed a common header which is
used plant-wide and therefore feeds two separate L1 risk areas. For
this reason, Level 2 segregation is applied for utilities equipment
using a similar 50% production loss rule as is applied for Level 1.
(c) Equipment located in separate Level 2 (L2) Risk Areas require separate:
(1) Process Controllers and associated IO modules, IO communications
equipment and communications cabling.
(2) Marshalling Cabinets.
(d) Where two or more operator consoles are used to control equipment
within a single L1 risk area, equipment operated by each console shall
be segregated into separate L2 risk areas.
(e) Parallel processing trains within an L1 risk area which have been
segregated into separate Level 2 risk areas require separate Emergency
Shutdown Systems for each L2 risk area.
(f) An exception is allowed for segregation of I/O communications cables
when I/O modules are located remote from the controllers and fiber optic
(g) cables are used for communications. In this case, controllers in two
separate L2 risk areas may share the same fiber optic cable provided
that:
(1) Dedicated fiber strands are used for each controller.
(2) No Fiber optic converters are shared between controllers.
(3) Communications between the controller and I/O is redundant and
the redundant cables are installed in separate routes.
(a) Level 3 segregation is used to segregate parallel process equipment or
equipment installed in redundant configuration in order to increase
process availability. Level 3 segregation requires segregation of
equipment at the IO card level.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 249
(b) Level 3 (L3) Risk Area Segregation shall be applied for parallel process
equipment or any equipment installed in redundant configuration.
(c) Any equipment which serves the same purpose but is provided in
redundant configuration to increase a process
Commentary Note: Redundant or parallel processing equipment are
equipment such as: Booster Pumps, Blowers, Compressors,
filters/separators, etc. which is installed in redundant configuration.
(d) Equipment located in separate L3 risk areas shall not share the same IO
card. Field cables for equipment located in separate L3 risk areas may
be terminated in a common marshalling cabinet and use a common
(redundant) external field power supply if required.
9. Spare and Expansion Capabilities
a. Each system shall be supplied with 5% spare IO points. The spare I/O shall be
licensed, installed, and wired to termination points. Spare IO shall be provided in
approximately the same ratio as that of the installed types and shall be distributed
between risk areas in the approximate ratio as the required IO.
b. Where both redundant and simplex IO models are used for a signal type, the
requirement for spare IO shall apply for both types.
c. Each system shall be installed with 10% spare slots in IO chassis or baseplates to
accommodate addition of IO modules without requiring additional chassis or
baseplates to be added to the system. Power supplies for IO modules shall be sized
to accommodate the additional 10% expansion requirement.
d. Each Foundation Fieldbus installation shall have a 20% spare capacity for
Foundation Fieldbus communication modules and power conditioners
e. Each system shall be capable of expanding the number of controllers by 20% from
that installed in the base system.
Commentary Note: Requirements for expansion capacity and spare IO do not apply
to expansion projects where control and I/O are being added to an existing system.
For expansion projects, the requirements for spare IO and expansion capability may
differ. If none are specified then the requirements above shall apply.
f. The average CPU Loading of any controller during normal operating conditions shall
not exceed 65% overall or 75% of the manufacturers recommended maximum
loading specification, whichever is lower. The spare capacity is required to
accommodate peak loads during upset conditions and to provide additional capacity
required for configuration of spare IO points and associated control algorithms and
to enable the utilization of the spare IO slots.
g. Servers and/or Engineering Workstations shall be configured with additional spare
capacity of 40% minimum for hard-drive space, memory, and CPU. CPU and
memory spare requirements shall be verified on the running system during steady-
state conditions with all applicable software running on the system.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 250
D. Instrumentation – Basic Design Criteria

1. General
a. The following Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards (SAES) have been referenced
in preparation of this Subsection and certain basic information is repeated here for
ease of reference.
1) SAES-J-003 Instrumentation - Basic Design Criteria
2) SAES-J-005 Instrumentation Drawings and Forms
3) SAES-J-801 Control Buildings
4) SAES-J-902 Electrical Systems for Instrumentation
5) SAES-J-904 Foundation Fieldbus (FF) Systems
b. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for instrumentation
selection, and installation.
c. The design requirements for each type of instrument are covered by the individual
standards and specifications.
d. Instrumentation shall be designed consistent with the design pressure and
temperature of the proposed service. All wetted parts shall be 304 stainless steel as
a minimum. Higher corrosion resistant materials may be substituted on an
application specific basis as required.
e. Temperature and/or pressure compensation for flow or level shall be provided as
required to maintain measurement accuracy.
f. Transmitters shall have less than 0.25% shift in output with a 50 DEGC change in
ambient temperature. The accuracy shall be ±0.25% of the calibrated range or
better. Repeatability shall be ±0.1% or better.
g. Flow transmitters shall produce signals which are linear or square root with respect
to flow within ±1% of full scale flow when operating between 25% and 100% of full
scale flow.
h. Pressure transmitters shall produce a signal which is linear with respect to the
measured pressure within ±0.25% of the measured span.
i. Level transmitters shall produce a signal which is linear with respect to the
measured level within ±1% of the measured span based on a specific gravity of
1.00.
j. RTDs shall have resistance characteristic which is linear with respect to temperature
within ±0.5% of the top range value.
k. Electronic signal converters shall have an accuracy of ±0.25% of span. Electronic
signal converters for movable core transformer systems shall have an accuracy of +
0.5% of span.
l. Process measurement instrumentation shall not contain mercury.
m. The design and selection of instrumentation shall include consideration of the
following:
6) Application suitability
7) Reliability and availability

Rev. 0 5.5 - 251
8) Quality
9) Accuracy
10) Repeatability
11) Life cycle cost
12) Previous acceptance as a stock item and compatibility with existing equipment
(i.e., savings on spares)
13) Compatibility with the environment (climatic and electrical classification)
Commentary Note: The priority of the above aspects will depend on the
application and equipment under consideration. Other pertinent factors and
design issues that are not listed above shall also be considered.
n. Instrument Mounting Locations
1) Field instruments shall be mounted as close as possible to the process
connection to minimize the length of instrument impulse lines. Where
practically possible, the length of the impulse line shall not exceed 6 m.
2) Instruments shall not protrude into or obstruct access ways so as to inhibit area
personnel egress.
3) All instrumentation and associated control equipment shall be readily
accessible from grade, platform, fixed walkway, fixed stairway or a fixed ladder.
Local indicating instruments shall be visible from where related equipment is
operated or primary instruments are tested or calibrated.
4) Instruments mounted outside a handrail shall be located to allow maintenance
from the walking/working surface without reaching through or leaning over the
handrail.
5) Instruments shall be located to allow performance of routine services with
unobstructed access.
Commentary Note: Clearances shall be provided for the removal of covers
and cases and the opening of doors and enclosures. Access for appropriate
lifting equipment shall be provided when necessary for control valves or other
large in-line instruments.
6) Pressure and D/P instruments in liquid or condensable vapor service shall be
self-venting (i.e., mounted below the process connections) with all impulse
lines sloping downward approximately 1:12 minimum toward the instrument.
7) Pressure and D/P instruments in gas service shall be self-draining (i.e.,
mounted above the process connections) with all lines sloping downward
approximately 1:12 minimum toward the process connection.
o. Instrument Process Connections
8) A line class root or isolation valve shall be provided at each process
connection. This valve shall be specified and provided by the piping discipline.
9) All process connected instruments shall be equipped with block and bleed
mechanism to allow isolation, drainage and maintenance.
10) Pressure and differential pressure transmitters shall be equipped with manifold
assemblies.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 252
11) Instrument process connections shall conform to the requirements specified in

the relevant instrumentation specifications and standard drawings.
p. Instrument Support
12) Direct-reading instruments such as gauges shall be supported by piping, panel
board or equipment.
13) Except for close-coupled instrument, all field instruments shall be mounted on
instrument supports designed for that purpose.
Commentary Note: Attention shall be paid to process instruments that are
close -coupled (installed directly on the piping). Effects of instrument size and
weight as well as heat or vibration in piping systems shall be carefully
evaluated.
3) When pipe stand is used as an instrument support, it shall be made of a
prefabricated, 50 mm, schedule 40 pipe. The pipe stand shall be hot-dipped
galvanized. The top of the pipe shall be plugged or sealed to prevent water
entry.
4) Pipe stands shall be securely anchored. For typical details, refer to Standard
Detail Drawings # TCDD-407961, Field Instruments Mounting Hardware.
q. Instrumentation Tagging
1) All instruments shall have engraved phenolic/ Bakelite-laminated nameplates
showing instrument tag numbers. The nameplates shall be installed with
stainless steel screws. Using glue to install nameplates is not acceptable.
2) Panel mounted instruments shall be provided with two nameplates, one on
the front and one on the back; rack mounted instruments shall have front
mounted nameplates only.
3) For RTD and thermocouple heads, stainless steel nameplates that are
chained to the head may be used.
4) All field junction boxes, other instrumentation enclosures and process
automation cabinets shall be equipped with nameplates.
r. Instrument Piping and Tubing
1) Instrument Piping
(a) When piping is used for process connection, the piping specification and
installation shall follow the relevant piping standards. From the root valve
to the instrument, the instrument piping specification, material of
construction, pressure rating, fittings, and valves shall meet or exceed
applicable piping specifications for the process service.
2) Instrument Tubing
(a) When tubing is used for process connection, the process sensing tubing
(impulse line), fittings, and instrument valves shall be compatible with the
process medium. The tubing and fittings shall be made of the same
material. As a minimum, the tubing shall be Type 316 seamless,
annealed stainless steel per ASTM A269, 6 mm OD, hardness Rockwell
B80 maximum.
(b) As a minimum, pneumatic signal (10 - 100 kPa signals) tubing shall be
Type 316 seamless, annealed stainless steel per ASTM A269, 6 mm

Rev. 0 5.5 - 253
OD, hardness Rockwell B80 maximum. The minimum design pressure

shall be 2 MPa.
(c) Tube fittings shall be, as a minimum, 316 stainless steel and shall be
compression type.
3) Instrument Piping and Tubing Support
(a) Instrument process piping and tubing shall be supported as necessary to
maintain structural integrity.
(b) All instrument piping and tubing between the instrument and process
equipment or pipeline shall be properly supported to prevent strain on
the instrument, equipment, and piping connections. The supports shall
be designed so that the effect of any equipment vibration is eliminated.
(c) Tubing shall not be routed along or supported from handrails.
(d) Tubing supports shall be spaced not more than 1.2 meters apart.
(e) In locations where mechanical damage is likely, tubing may be installed
in dedicated structural channel, angle, or in trays.
(f) Tubes and tube bundles and their support channels and trays shall not
be supported from process or utility piping.
(g) Tubing channels or trays shall not be supported by bolting to transmitter
brackets or control valves.
(h) Tubing shall be installed in a manner that allows for calibration of
instruments and easy removal of adjacent instruments, equipment, and
tubing.
2. Online Continuous Measurement or Analog Type Instrumentation
a. All continuous measurement electronic field instruments, and control valve
positioners, shall be smart.
1) Signal Ranges and Communications Protocols - Acceptable field
transmission signals are Foundation™ fieldbus, or 4-20 mA with
superimposed HART.
2) Vendor proprietary digital protocols are acceptable for plant expansions
when matching existing instrumentation. In the context of this standard, field
transmission signals are defined as signals from field devices to a control
system, or signals from a control system to field devices.
3) HART communication protocol shall not be used for plant control.
4) Foundation™ fieldbus based instrumentation and control systems shall meet
the requirements detailed further in Paragraph 5.5.3.G.7.
5) Wireless process instrumentation shall not be used.
b. Continuous measurement systems and/or instrumentation includes but is not be
limited to - Flow, Level, Pressure, Temperature, Analytical, Environmental, and
Miscellaneous equipment.
1) Flow – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
2) Level – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
3) Pressure – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment

Rev. 0 5.5 - 254
4) Temperature – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment

5) Analytical – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
6) Environmental – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
7) Miscellaneous – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
c. Specific performance criteria and detailed specifications for each type of instrument
are provided in the standard specifications.
d. Power Monitoring
1) Power monitoring is provided under electrical package requirements under
Subsection 5.5.1.G item 9; however the interface with the control system
shall be based on standard protocols such as Modbus, Profibus, Ethernet
etc.
2) Power monitoring instrumentation shall be included to provide to support the
following minimum monitoring functions:
(a) kW
(b) kVAr
(c) V for all phases P-P and L-P
(d) I for all phases
(e) PF
(f) Circuit breaker and switch status indication for: facility main and feeder
breakers and disconnect switches, generator breakers, Auto Transfer
Switches, and electrically operated low voltage breakers.
e. Offline continuous measurement electronic field instruments shall be provided for
specific analytic sampling systems.
3. Online Discrete Type Instrumentation

a. Fail Safe Design Requirements - Unless otherwise specified in other standards, all
discrete instrumentation such as switches, solenoids, relays, etc., shall be designed
so that they are energized during normal operation and shall de-energize to initiate a
shutdown, an alarm or any other control action
b. On-line Discrete digital switching type measurement systems and/or instrumentation
includes but is not be limited to - Flow, Level, Pressure, Temperature, Analytical,
Environmental, and Miscellaneous equipment.
4. On-line Final Control Elements
a. Control Valves Actuators
1) Notwithstanding the requirements set forth in this Subsection – coordinate
with the following mechanical and civil requirements.
(a) Subsection 5.4.3.B. 6-8 Mechanical Piping Systems
(b) Subsection 5.7.1.B. Potable Water
(c) Subsection 5.7.2. Sanitary Sewer System
(d) Subsection 5.7.3 Recycled Water System ( Irrigation)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 255
(e) Subsection 5.7.4 Recycled Industrial Water System

(f) Subsection 5.7.5 Sea Water Cooling
2) Valve size shall be such that equal percentage valves shall be approximately
75% to 85% open and linear valves shall be approximately 50% open when
operating at normal flow and pressure drop condition.
3) Valve capacity rating (Cv) shall be calculated at maximum and normal flow
rates at their respective pressure drop to be assured that overall operating
range is satisfied. The manufacturers published "Cv’s" shall be used to
determine valve size. Valve sizing calculations shall be based on equations
and data by the manufacturer supplying control valves for the project or ISA
S75-01 "Flow Equations for Sizing Control Valves".
4) Noise-level within 1 M of any noise producing control valve shall not exceed
85 dBA. Control valve sizing shall take into account any noise attenuating
devices, such as special trim and diffusers, which may be considered to
reduce the noise level within specified limits.
5) Valves, in general, shall be globe type. Where low pressure drop or high
recovery is required, butterfly or characterized ball valves may be considered.
Special body types such as angle, "Y" etc., shall be considered when the
process fluid may be erosive, viscous or carrying suspended solids. Flushing
connections shall be provided for slurry service. Flangeless, insert type
valves may be considered for utility service or where material is other than
carbon steel.
6) Where a hand wheel is required, the shaft-mounted declutchable type shall be
furnished. "Fishtail" disc shall be considered on all high torque requirements.
Bronze "oilite" bushings shall be used for outboard bearings. Inboard
bushings shall be manufacturing standard. Roller or needle bearings shall not
be used.
7) Minimum body size for flanged valves shall be 25 mm with reduced ports, as
required. Steel valves shall have at least 150 lb. body and flanges shall have
face to face dimensions in accordance with ANSI B16.10. Valve body
connections shall normally conform to ANSI B31.1. Body material shall
normally be cast or forged carbon steel for non-corrosive process
applications. Chromemoly steel shall be considered for service where
temperature exceeds 343 °C.
8) Packing Glands shall be equipped with flanged bolted-type gland stuffing
boxes. Packing shall be Teflon for liquid and gas service up to an inlet
pressure of 1000 psig, and a temperature not to exceed 177 °C. Grafoil shall
be used for steam service with temperatures above 177 °C. Packing gland
followers shall be the same as body material.
9) Control valve plugs shall normally be cage guided. Unbalanced type shall
preferably be used for tight shut off. Where balanced valves are used, the
valve shall be installed in horizontal lines only with stem vertical.
10) Characteristic and shape of the inner valve shall be determined by each
system characteristic. In general, equal percentage characteristic shall be
used. Linear characteristic may be used for flow control and level.
11) Plug and seat rings shall be stainless steel up to 100 psi drop and up to the
temperature rating of the body. Other conditions may require special trim

Rev. 0 5.5 - 256
consideration and shall be in accordance with good engineering practice.

When severe corrosion is expected, or pressure drop exceeds 100 psi, full-
bore satellite or hardened stainless steel shall be furnished.
12) Special alloys, balanced plugs, soft seats, etc., shall be considered where
warranted by the application. Valves on oxygen service shall be degreased.
When tight shut off is required, soft seat trim or lapped seats shall be used,
provided temperature limits are not exceeded; soft seat trims shall be of fire
safe design.
13) Guide bushings shall normally be hardened stainless steel and preferably
shall be a minimum of 125 Brinnel harder than the trim. Control valve leakage
shall conform to ANSI B106.4 Quality Control Standard for Control Valve Seat
Leakage.
14) Control valves are used for block valves, where leakage is not permitted when
tripped, or for safety requirements, shall be specified for tight shut-off. Tight
shut-off leakage for valves with metal seats shall be Class V; 0.0005 ml/min.
per 25 mm of port diameter per psi pressure drop.
15) Self-contained control valves used pressure or temperature control of air,
water, oil, steam or process fluids in utility piping systems shall be limited to a
maximum regulated pressure of 150 psig and maximum valve size of 50 mm.
16) Self-actuated pressure reducing stations on process fluids shall conform to
the line specification in which the valve is installed. Threaded bodies may be
used if permitted by the piping specification.
17) Self-actuated temperature regulators on steam or water service shall be of the
vapor pressure type with copper bulb and copper capillary with stainless steel
armor and stainless steel thermowell.
18) Accessories such as limit switches, air sets, and solenoid valves shall be
rigidly mounted and bracketed to the valve. Valve position limit switches shall
be of the snap acting type with IP65 weatherproof housing suitable for the
area electrical classification. Switches shall be furnished with DPDT contacts.
19) Control valve data sheets shall be provided for all control valves.
b. Valve Actuators
1) A filter-regulator air set shall be provided for air-operated actuators. Air sets
shall consist of a combination air filter, pressure regulator, and integral relief
valve. Connections shall be 6 mm or more if required for speed of response
of the device being supplied. An output gauge shall be supplied at the outlet
of each air set. Tubing shall be sufficiently large so as not to unduly restrict
air flow or dynamic response. Bug screens shall be installed on all open port
or piping connectors. Where air sets are required for control valves they shall
be directly mounted on the valve positioner.
2) Actuator position shall be clearly indicated.
3) Actuators shall fail-safe upon trip or loss of power and/or loss of power to the
controller, transmitter, and other associated logic elements. Upon restoration
of power, the actuator shall become available for operation without changing
its position.
4) The full stroke time shall not impede or limit the performance or safe
operation of the associated equipment.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 257
5) Positioners or booster relays shall be force balance type with pneumatic

output. Positioners shall be SMART, HART compatible, and shall accept 4-20
mA directly. Separate I/P converters are not allowed.
6) Valve actuators shall be preferably diaphragm type. Piston operators may be
used in severe pressure drop services or on rotary valves.
7) Electrical motor-operated valves shall have a torque limit switch which shall
be used as a back-up switch to stop the motor when the valve is at full limit
travel. Electrical motor operator suppliers’ recommendations shall be used for
stopping the motor. The stopping requirements will differ depending on the
type of valve. Motors and starters shall be in accordance with area electrical
classification and the specified voltage levels. Enclosures shall be weather
proof.
8) Motor actuators are commonly used; however their use as modulating final
control elements is limited due to design limitations.
9) Three-way direct acting solenoid valves shall be used to actuate control
valves when interlocked with fail safe or shutdown circuits. The coil shall be
molded design with weatherproof housing furnished to meet area electrical
code classifications. Outdoor installations shall be weatherproof. Solenoid
vents shall have bug screens. Solenoids with top mounted vents shall be
piped so that moisture does not enter the valve. Universal (reversible ports)
are preferred and shall be selected where air pressure is to be blocked at the
vent port. Pilot operated solenoid valves shall not be used.
5. Custody Metering
a. This Subsection is intended to define the minimum requirements governing the
design of custody transfer metering stations used for the measurement of Seawater
Cooling Liquid.
b. Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards SAES-Y-100; 101; 103 and 501 shall be
referenced for Custody Metering of Hydrocarbon Gases or Liquids and is not in the
scope of this document.
c. Custody Transfer Measurement is a specialized form of measurement that provides
quantity and quality information used for the physical and fiscal documentation of a
change in ownership and/or responsibility of commodities. The following
measurements are custody transfer measurements:
1) Measurement of Seawater Cooling Liquid (deliveries or receipts) between
RCJ and its customers.
d. A Meter Station shall be defined as a facility that is primarily dedicated to the
measurement of the quantity and quality of seawater cooling liquid. The facility may
include, but not be limited to pipelines, piping, regulators, valves, strainers/filters,
flow straightening and conditioning equipment, samplers, measurement elements,
Remote Terminal Units (RTU), pumps, communications (data and SA telephone),
metering shelter, UPS, area fencing, area paving, area lighting, and associated
instrumentation, alarms, computers with software programs, peripheral equipment
and associated control functions.
e. A Metering System shall be defined as a complete assembly of equipment that is
designed to measure the quantity and quality of seawater cooling liquid. The
metering system includes, but is not limited to, the meter skid (meters, filters,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 258
analyzers, flow conditioning sections, valves), samplers, and control system (flow
computers, metering supervisory computers, etc.).
f. Units of Measurement – the metric (SI) system of units shall be used per Table
5.5.3.B:
TABLE 5.5.3.B: PROFESSIONAL UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
ITEM METRIC (SI)
Volume Cubic Meters, Liters, (m3, L)
Temperature Degrees Celsius (°C)
Pressure Kilopascals Gauge, (Kpa (ga))
g. Reference Conditions – Due to the nature and volumes of Seawater Cooling Liquids,
no corrections will be necessary due to liquid pressure or temperature changes as
the impact will be negligible.
h. A typical Seawater Cooling Liquid custody transfer metering station will include the
following measurements:
1) Flow
2) Pressure
3) Temperature
4) Chlorine Residual CL2
5) Dissolved Oxygen
i. The performance specifications for these measuring instruments are detailed in the
standard specifications.
E. Instrumentation and Control System Cabinets
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for instrumentation and
control system cabinet construction, selection, and installation.
b. Outdoor Environmentally Controlled – IP65
1) Typically all outdoor enclosures shall be made of stainless steel materials.
2) In outdoor plant areas, the panel/cabinet shall be IEC 60529, Type IP65.
3) In outdoor plant and other industrial areas located in severe corrosive
environments, enclosures shall be IEC 60529 Type IP66, manufactured of
316L stainless steel. Galvanized and/or painted or coated carbon steel sheet
metal enclosures are not permitted.
4) Door hardware (hinges, latches, handles, bolts and nuts) shall be made of
316 stainless steel.
5) The enclosure size and dimensions shall be appropriate for the application
with a minimum of 20% spare capacity for growth. The enclosure shall include
a full-length front door to provide access to all components mounted inside.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 259
6) Notwithstanding item 3 above - the enclosure shall be sized to ensure

maximum temperature inside the enclosure due to internal heat dissipation
pulse heat rise due to solar radiation will not exceed 55°C for sheltered
cabinets and 65°C for unsheltered cabinets. All electronic components to be
mounted inside the enclosure shall have 75°C temperature rating minimum.
7) The enclosures may be surface mounted or rack mounted depending on the
specific design.
8) The enclosures shall have locking doors. Each enclosure shall be supplied
with at least two (2) keys.
9) Enclosure shall be fitted with sufficient number of conduit entries at the
bottom.
10) Terminal strips shall be provided in the enclosures to terminate instrument
cables from field signals and for power distribution.
11) Each item of equipment and accessory inside the cabinet shall be correctly
tagged, if possible, immediately below the corresponding equipment or
accessory. All nameplates on the exterior surface of the cabinet shall be
attached with stainless steel screws. Internally mounted nameplates may be
attached with two-component epoxy adhesive. Nameplates shall be made
from laminated plastic, white-black-white (information engraved into the black
core with white surface, dull finish).
12) Each cabinet design shall be appropriately laid out with sufficient workspace
to allow for installed equipment field wiring termination and access for future
maintenance and installation.
13) The panel/cabinet and all components within the panel shall be suitable for
the electrical area classification where the panel will be installed.
c. Indoor – General Purpose IP10 and IP52
1) All cabinet equipment and wiring shall be designed for continuous operation
at 50°C, and relative humidity 80% maximum (non-condensing) and 20%
minimum.
Commentary Note: The temperature of 50°C allows for a 35°C room ambient
plus a 15°C rise within the cabinet.
2) The cabinets shall be rigid and self-supporting. By default, all cabinets shall
be free standing, floor mounted type.
3) Indoor cabinets shall be made of metal. When multiple cabinets are provided,
they shall be identical in construction and external appearance.
4) The cabinet shall be IP52 as a minimum prior to fitting of louvers or fans as
per IEC60529.
5) Cabinets requiring heat dissipation shall be convection-ventilated.
6) Convection-ventilated cabinets shall be provided with readily accessible,
removable filter screens inserted behind slotted louver inlets. Depending on
the location of the heat generating components, louvers and filters may be
installed at the top of the cabinet or within cabinet doors. Louvers installed on
the sides or back of the cabinet are not acceptable.
7) Fans may be used within Cabinets to assist in heat removal and cabinet
ventilation. If the fans are required to dissipate heat when the HVAC is

Rev. 0 5.5 - 260
running, redundant fans shall be provided. If the fan(s) are only required to
dissipate heat when the HVAC is not running, a single fan is adequate. In
both cases, fan failure or over-temperature detection and alarm are required
in the PCS.
d. Packaged – Vendor or OEM supplied with environmental rating to suit the intended
application
F. Electrical Systems for Instrumentation
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for electrical systems
for instrumentation and control systems.
b. Electrical distribution panels and motor control centers associated with control
building services and the control system UPS shall be located in the electrical
equipment room.
c. The electrical equipment room shall be sized to permit top, front, side and back
access for operation and maintenance of installed equipment.
d. Where required a separate mechanical equipment room containing air handling
equipment, particle filters and chemical filters, shall be included and shall be fire
separated from all other rooms.
2. Electrical Wiring
a. Electrical and wiring up to but excluding vendors' standard cabinets shall be
designed in accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
b. Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 5.5.1 the following requirements shall
be observed.
1) Analog Signals
(a) Use TPSH cable for all low level analog signals such as 4-20 mA, 1-5 V
DC, 0-10 V DC, pulse type circuits 24 V DC and under, and other signals
of a similar nature.
(b) Use RTD cable for connections between RTD’s and transmitters.
2) Digital Communications Signals
(a) Use TPSH cable for all low level input (24 V and below) and output
signals to the plant control system.
(b) Use Stranded Copper wire for power to instruments, for 120 VAC signals
other than those mentioned above and as otherwise indicated on the
drawings. Use stranded wire and cable to supply power to instruments.
3) Cable Installation
(a) Install instrumentation cables in conduit systems or in cable trays. Use a
maximum of 36” length of liquid tight flexible conduit to connect the field
sensors to the rigid conduit. Refer to Section 5.5.1 for conduit or cable
tray requirements.
(b) Where non-armoured instrumentation cables are installed in cable trays,
provide barriers in the tray to separate instrumentation cables from
power cables.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 261
(c) At each end of the run leave sufficient cable length for termination.
(d) Do not make splices in any of the instrumentation cable runs. Where
splices are required, obtain approval from the RC prior to installing the
cable. Do not splice cables to gas detection heads.
(e) Where splices are necessary in instrumentation cables other than coaxial
cables, perform such splices on terminal blocks in terminal boxes. Keep
splices in instrumentation cable to a minimum and separated physically
from power circuits. Cable shields shall be terminated on insulated
terminals and carried through to the extent of the cable.
(f) Where splices are made to coaxial cables, use standard coaxial cable
connectors.
(g) Ground cable shields at one end only. Unless otherwise specified,
ground the shields at the marshaling / local control panels.
(h) Protect all conductors against moisture during and after installation.
(i) Terminate armoured cables with approved only connector.
3. Power Supply
a. Two separate, independent, electric circuits shall be supplied to power redundant
modules. If a simplex UPS is provided, one of the feed to system redundant power
modules shall be supplied from a raw 230 V power feed.
b. Power Supply circuits shall be clearly labeled. Branch circuits or power cords to
redundant modules shall be clearly labeled identifying the circuit that they are
connected to.
c. Redundant internal power supply modules shall be provided for the following:
14) Process controllers
15) Input and output modules
16) Communication modules
d. Redundant power supply modules shall be provided for critical field instruments.
4. Power Distribution within PCS Cabinets
a. Power supplies which feed multiple chassis' or baseplates shall have their outputs
wired to a power distribution panel within the cabinet.
Commentary Note: The term "power distribution panel" in the above requirement
and subsequent requirements of this Subsection refers to a collection of din-rail
mounted circuit breakers and/or fused terminal blocks, terminal blocks and wiring
used to distribute power to multiple loads from a single source.
c. Branch circuits from power supplies shall be individually fused or protected by a
circuit breaker.
b. Terminal blocks in the power distribution panel shall be segregated by voltage level.
c. Power distribution terminal block wiring shall not be daisy-chained using wires or
crimp connectors. Jumper bars or preformed jumper combs designed for the specific
terminal blocks being used are acceptable methods of distributing power supply
wiring.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 262
d. Wiring, terminal blocks, wire tagging and terminal block coding within the power
distribution panel shall be as per the requirements defined elsewhere in this
document.
5. Power Supply and Distribution to PCS Consoles and Workstations
a. PCS workstations shall be fed from UPS power sources. This requirement applies to
the processor, monitor, and other peripheral devices associated with the
workstation.
b. For redundant workstations within an operator console, it is acceptable to supply
power to the workstations using either of the configurations described below:
1) Each workstation shall be fed from a single UPS power circuit; provided that
each workstation is fed from a separate UPS power source.
2) Each workstation shall be fed from two separate power circuits utilizing a
power switching device to maintain continuous power on loss of a single
circuit. One of these circuits shall be fed from UPS power source and the
other may be fed from utility power.
c. Workstations which are not supplied in a redundant configuration shall be powered
as described above in b.2.
d. Commercially available multiple outlet power strips (i.e., Tripp-Lite model UL 24CB-
15 or similar) may be used to distribute power to multiple components of a
workstation (i.e., processor, monitor, and associated peripheral devices) provided
that each power strip feeds equipment associated with a single workstation. The
power strip must have an integral circuit breaker and switch and must carry a FM or
CE marking.
6. Utility Power
a. One, duplex-type convenience outlet, rated at 230 VAC, 13 amp shall be provided
within each cabinet for utility power. Convenience outlets shall be wired to a
separate terminal strip which in turn is sourced from a non-UPS AC distribution
panel.
b. Two, duplex-type convenience outlets, rated at 230 VAC, 13 amp shall be provided
within each console for utility power. Convenience outlets shall be wired to a
separate terminal strip which in turn is sourced from a non-UPS AC distribution
panel. The outlets shall be placed on opposite sides of the console to enhance
availability.
7. Grounding
a. Grounding design shall be per the provisions of Subsection 5.5.1.J.
b. Notwithstanding the requirements of Subsection 5.5.1.J, PCS workstations,
computers, I/O cabinets and auxiliary equipment shall be grounded in accordance
with PCS vendor's recommendations.
c. PLC based Emergency Shutdown Systems (ESD) shall be grounded in accordance
with electrical Subsection and the ESD Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
manufacturer's recommendations.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 263
G. Process Automation Network (PAN)

1. General
a. Notwithstanding the requirements as set out in Section 5.5.2 Telecommunications -
The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for process
automation network design selection, and installation.
2. Process Automation Network Design
a. The PAN shall be based on IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD (Ethernet) standard or Vendor
proprietary control network standard The backbone shall be based on Layer 3 multi-
protocol switches utilizing 1 Gigabits per second (Gbps) backplane throughput as
minimum. Nodes, such as servers/ workstations, shall be connected to 10/100 Mbps
ports.
3. Physical and Logical Separation
a. The network design shall provide physical and logical separation between PAN and
all other corporate or utility networks through demilitarized zone and firewall.
b. Logical separation, at minimum, is mandatory for network connections above
firewall.
c. Physical separation is mandatory for subsystems such as CCTV, telephone network
connections below firewall.
d. Physical separation utilizing dedicated fiber strands of an existing fiber optics cable
is permitted and shall include a service level agreement defining area of
responsibility for support and maintenance, including agreed response time.
e. A minimum bandwidth of 5 Megabits/s requirements shall always be made available
for any given WAN connection.
f. PAN equipment shall be deployed with the latest stable vendor supported operating
systems.
g. Network traffic through the firewall shall be limited to server-to-server connections
and through selected source/destination IP addresses and TCP/UDP ports and
services.
4. Engineering and Maintenance Network (E&MN)
a. The E&MN shall be connected to the PAN.
b. The E&MN network shall be used to integrate auxiliary systems on a single network
such as Emergency shutdown systems, compressor control systems, vibration
monitoring systems, etc., for the purpose of centralizing the engineering and
maintenance activities for the plant.
5. Wireless Communications
a. Full Duplex wireless radio communications shall be provided for all new RTUs
associated with the Irrigation Control System.
b. Wireless systems will not be utilized for building automation and process automation
projects.
c. The Irrigation Central Control shall communicate in real time 2-way communication
with the field Remote Terminal Units (RTU) on site via radio communication through
a Field Interface Unit (FIU). The RTU shall have the capability to communicate on a
bi-directional real time basis with systems above it (RTU-To-Central), parallel to it

Rev. 0 5.5 - 264
(RTU-To-RTU) and below it (RTU-To-Slave RTU). This shall include full control and
monitoring capabilities.
6. HART
a. The HART Communications Protocol (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Protocol) is an early implementation of Fieldbus, a digital industrial automation
protocol.
b. It’s most notable advantage is that it can communicate over legacy 4-20 mA analog
instrumentation wiring, sharing the pair of wires used by the older system. Due to
the huge installed base of 4-20 mA systems throughout the world, the HART
Protocol is one of the most popular industrial protocols today. HART protocol has
made a good transition protocol for users who were comfortable using the legacy 4-
20 mA signals, but wanted to implement a "smart" protocol.
c. There are two main operational modes of HART instruments: analog/digital mode,
and multidrop mode.
d. In point-to-point mode (analog/digital) the digital signals are overlaid on the 4-20 mA
loop current. Both the 4-20 mA current and the digital signal are valid output values
from the instrument. The polling address of the instrument is set to "0". Only one
instrument can be put on each instrument cable signal pair. One signal, generally
specified by the user, is specified to be the 4-20 mA signal. Other signals are sent
digitally on top of the 4-20 mA signal. For example, pressure can be sent as 4-
20 mA, representing a range of pressures, and temperature can be sent digitally
over the same wires. In point-to-point mode, the digital part of the HART protocol
can be seen as a kind of digital current loop interface.
e. In multidrop mode (digital) only the digital signals are used. The analog loop current
is fixed at 4 mA. In multidrop mode it is possible to have more than one instruments
on one signal cable. HART revisions 3 through 5 allowed polling addresses of the
instruments to be in the range 1-15. HART 6 and later allowed address up to 63.
Each instrument needs to have a unique address.
f. All transmitters shall be high performance type microprocessor based Foundation
Fieldbus or ‘SMART’ type with HART protocol unless stated otherwise.
g. The PCS System shall support communication to HART devices by using Universal
and Common practice command sets using HART I/O module as the interface.
h. The system shall be capable of receiving, displaying and storing diagnostic data and
device alerts from HART devices by using HART I/O module interface. In case the
selected I/O modules are not HART compliance, a multiplexer shall be provided to
obtain the HART information.
i. The PCS system shall be capable of displaying configuration data resident in HART
devices on the IAMS workstations.
j. FOUNDATION Fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way communications system that
serves as the base-level network in a plant or factory automation environment. It is
an open architecture, developed and administered by the Fieldbus Foundation.
k. It is targeted for applications using basic and advanced regulatory control, and for
much of the discrete control associated with those functions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 265
l. Two related implementations of foundation fieldbus have been introduced to meet

different needs within the process automation environment. These two
implementations use different physical media and communication speeds.
1) FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 - Operates at 31.25 kbit/s and is generally used
to connect to field devices and host systems. It provides communication and
power over standard stranded twisted-pair wiring in both conventional and
intrinsic safety applications. H1 is currently the most common
implementation.
2) HSE (High-speed Ethernet) - Operates at 100/1000 Mbit/s and generally
connects input/output subsystems, host systems, linking devices and
gateways. It doesn't currently provide power over the cable, although work is
under way to address this using the IEEE802.3af Power on Ethernet (PoE)
standard.
m. FOUNDATION Fieldbus was originally intended as a replacement for the 4-20 mA
standard.
n. FOUNDATION Fieldbus was developed over a period of many years by the
International Society of Automation, or ISA, as SP50.
o. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard on field bus, including
FOUNDATION Fieldbus, is IEC 61158. Type 1 is FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1, while
Type 5 is FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE.
p. A typical fieldbus segment consists of the following components.
1) H1 card - fieldbus interface card (It is common practice to have redundant
H1 cards, but ultimately this is application specific)
2) PS - Bulk power (Vdc) to Fieldbus Power Supply
3) FPS - Fieldbus Power Supply and Signal Conditioner (Integrated power
supplies and conditioners have become the standard nowadays)
4) T - Terminators (Exactly 2 terminators are used per fieldbus segment. One
at the FPS and one at the furthest point of a segment at the device coupler)
5) LD - Linking Device, alternatively used with HSE networks to terminate 4-8
H1 segments acting as a gateway to an HSE backbone network.
6) And fieldbus devices, (e.g. transmitters, transducers, etc.)
q. The criteria for designing Foundation Fieldbus systems is detailed further in Saudi
Aramco Engineering Specification SAES-J-904.
7. Profibus
a. There are two variations of PROFIBUS in use today; the most commonly used
PROFIBUS DP, and the lesser used, application specific, PROFIBUS PA:
1) PROFIBUS DP (Decentralized Peripherals) is used to operate sensors and
actuators via a centralized controller in production (factory) automation
applications. The many standard diagnostic options, in particular, are focused
on here. Most common application of Profibus DP is in Motor Control Centers
2) PROFIBUS PA (Process Automation) is used to monitor measuring
equipment via a process control system in process automation applications.
This variant is designed for use in explosion/hazardous areas (Ex-zone 0 and
1). The Physical Layer (i.e. the cable) conforms to IEC 61158-2, which allows

Rev. 0 5.5 - 266
power to be delivered over the bus to field instruments, while limiting current
flows so that explosive conditions are not created, even if a malfunction
occurs. The number of devices attached to a PA segment is limited by this
feature. PA has a data transmission rate of 31.25 kbit/s. However, PA uses
the same protocol as DP, and can be linked to a DP network using a coupler
device. The much faster DP acts as a backbone network for transmitting
process signals to the controller. This means that DP and PA can work tightly
together, especially in hybrid applications where process and factory
automation networks operate side by side.
8. BACNET
a. The BACnet protocol defines a number of services that are used to communicate
between building devices. The protocol services include Who-Is, I-Am, Who-Has,
I-Have, which are used for Device and Object discovery. Services such as Read-
Property and Write-Property are used for data sharing. The BACnet protocol defines
a number of Objects that are acted upon by the services. The objects include Analog
Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value,
Multi-State Input, Multi-State Output, Calendar, Event-Enrollment, File, Notification-
Class, Group, Loop, Program, Schedule, Command, and Device.
b. The BACnet protocol defines a number of data link / physical layers, including
ARCNET, Ethernet, BACnet/IP, Point-To-Point over RS-232, Master-Slave/Token-
Passing over RS-485, and LonTalk.
9. Control Network Cabling
a. Process Control Network cabling installed indoors shall be placed in ladder, trough
or solid bottom cable trays.
b. Redundant network cables installed indoors shall not be installed in the same cable
tray.
c. Installation of Fiber Optic process control network cabling shall be in accordance
with Section 5.5.2 Telecommunications and shall observe the following additional
criteria:
3) Composite cable of power and fiber optic shall not be used.
4) Aerial fiber optic cables shall not be used.
5) Multiple fiber optic cables between two locations shall be diversely routed to
provide additional reliability and survivability.
6) There shall not be more than one fiber hub between a destination location
and its originating node.
7) Fiber cables shall be sized with at least 50% additional strands above the
initial strand requirements. The following minimum strand count shall also be
applied:
(a) 24 strand count for cable run to a building or a facility that is not a node
or hub.
(b) 12 strand count for cable run to small or temporary locations.
8) Fiber strand count in all fiber cable shall be an even number.
9) Spare fiber strands shall be spliced and terminated at the Fiber Distribution
Panel (FDP), and marked as spares.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 267
H. Control System Access and Security

1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to detail the requirements for access control and
security of control systems.
b. The ISA99/IEC 62443 standard is the worldwide standard for security of Industrial
Control systems and should be referenced during design.
c. Operators of facilities may want to begin sharing information between business and
automation systems. However, because automation and control systems equipment
connects directly to a process, loss of control and interruption in the flow of
information are not the only consequences of a security breach. The potential loss of
life, environmental damage, regulatory violation, and compromise to operational
safety are far more serious consequences. External threats are not the only
concern; knowledgeable insiders with malicious intent or even an innocent
unintended act can pose a serious security risk. Personnel from outside the control
systems area increasingly perform security testing on the systems, exacerbating the
number and consequence of these effects. Combining all these factors, it is easy to
see that the potential of someone gaining unauthorized or damaging access to an
industrial process is not trivial.
2. Foundational Requirements:
a. There are several basic or foundational requirements that have been identified for
industrial automation security. These are:
1) Access Control (AC) – Control access to selected devices, information or both
to protect against unauthorized interrogation of the device or information.
2) Use Control (UC) – Control use of selected devices, information or both to
protect against unauthorized operation of the device or use of information.
3) Timely Response to Event (TRE) – Respond to security violations by notifying
the proper authority, reporting needed forensic evidence of the violation, and
automatically taking timely corrective action in mission critical or safety critical
situations.
4) Resource Availability (RA) - Ensure the availability of all network resources to
protect against denial of service attacks.
3. Defense in Depth:
a. It is typically not possible to achieve the security objectives through the use of a
single countermeasure or technique. A superior approach is to use the concept of
defense in depth, which involves applying multiple countermeasures in a layered or
stepwise manner. For example, intrusion detection systems can be used to signal
the penetration of a firewall.
b. Physical Security - The network hardware used to provide security from offsite
intrusion and the SCADA servers used to provide internal security shall be located in
a lockable room dedicated to SCADA system. The telephone utility termination point
shall be located outside of the lockable room dedicated to SCADA system. Any
servers installed in the lockable room not associated with the SCADA system shall
be located in a separate rack with their own routers and shall utilize separate
telephone lines from the SCADA system.
c. IP address generation and translation - Automatic IP addressing software in the
router such as (DHCP) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, DNS (Domain Name

Rev. 0 5.5 - 268
System) services BIND (Berkeley Internet Name Domain) shall be turned off and
routing of unknown networks shall be turned off in the routers at the SCADA zone
and process zone. The NAT (Network Address Translators) shall also be disabled in
the routers at the SCADA zone and process zone. This will result in additional effort
when adding or removing devices to the network but it will also reduce the possible
security leaks in the router software and will prevent casual users from gaining
access to the system thought PCs and cell phones.
d. Communications with remote monitoring station along shall be sent with encrypted
conduits equivalent to IPsec tunnels and the master station shall be set to block all
traffic not using the data polling port in the PLC network and not addressed to
SCADA servers.
e. Sites are located outside of the physical security zone of the plant and cannot be
made spoof proof. Data from these sites shall be used only for monitoring and shall
not be used for control.
f. Software Updates: The simplest and most secure way to make updates to the
SCADA software and PLC software is to do so manually on a regular basis. The
updates shall be checked with the software writer for authenticity and only then
implemented on the SCADA servers and PLCs at the site.
4. Countermeasures:
a. There are several countermeasures that can be used to address external threats to
the control system network. These include hardware and software built into the
control system network and include:
1) IP access controls list.
2) Intrusion detection.
3) Data conduits that use Cryptographic algorithm, Cryptographic keys,
encryption, and digital signature of IP packets with IPsec tunnels.
4) Resource isolation or segregation with security zones and conduits within the
network through routers and IP access controls list.
5) Logging commands and passwords to provide Authentication, Authorization,
and Accountability.
b. Countermeasures can also be employed on the workstations and servers and
include:
1) Virus scanning software that scans the host for malicious software.
2) Virus scanning software that will scan the system for unusual activity and log
it.
3) Physical security of the workstations with password protection that times out
and locks inactive workstations from unauthorized visitors.
4) Individual passwords to authenticate the user.
5) Restrict user access by enforcing variable access privileges.
5. Security Zones:
a. A security zone is a logical grouping of physical, informational, and application
assets sharing common security requirements. This concept applies to the electronic
environment where some systems are included in the security zone and all others
are outside the zone. There can also be zones within zones, or subzones, that

Rev. 0 5.5 - 269
provide layered security, giving defense in depth and addressing multiple levels of
security requirements. Defense in depth can also be accomplished by assigning
different properties to security zones.
b. A security zone has a border, which is the boundary between included and excluded
elements. The concept of a zone also implies the need to access the assets in a
zone from both within and without. This defines the communication and access
required to allow information and people to move within and between the security
zones. Zones may be considered to be trusted or untrusted. Security zones can be
defined in either a physical sense such as each pump station or in a logical manner
such as the following:
1) PLCs, ACPs, and Remote IO in a control system zone.
2) Host workstations and servers in a SCADA zone.
3) Historical data base in an Enterprise zone.
c. Email servers and other types of typical business software shall not be included
inside any of the above zones to prevent Phishing attacks.
6. Conduits:
a. Information must flow into, out of, and within a security zone. To cover the security
aspects of communication and to provide a construct to encompass the unique
requirements of communications, this standard is defining a special type of security
zone: a communications conduit.
b. A conduit is a particular type of security zone that groups communications that can
be logically organized into a grouping of information flows within and also external to
a zone. It can be a single service (i.e., a single Ethernet network) or can be made up
of multiple data carriers (multiple network cables and direct physical accesses). As
with zones, it can be made of both physical such as connecting pump stations to
remote monitoring sites and logical constructs as connection between the PLCs and
SCADA servers.
c. Trusted conduits crossing zone boundaries must use an end-to-end secure process.
Due to slow speed of response that is required, several seconds of lag can be
tolerated without notice, and the static nature of the network, simple router based
IPsec tunnels with a key coded into the router, provide an easy way to build conduits
across the a wide area network such as the public telephone networks.
d. The use of IPsec tunnels and IP access control list are mature technologies that
shall see little degradation over time. The protection provided through passwords
and virus scanning software will require constant maintenance.
7. Local and Remote Access
a. Local Access
1) Local access in the form of operator workstations and consoles shall reside
on the PAN and shall be below the plant firewall.
b. Remote Access
1) Remote access through the plant firewall, for control purposes, is not
permitted.
2) Remote engineering by RCJ personnel through the firewall is permitted. The
following conditions shall apply:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 270
(a) The Engineering station must be in a room with controlled physical

access.
(b) Remote access nodes shall be placed on the corporate network for
server to server communication.
(c) A Virtual Private Network shall be used for vendor remote
troubleshooting for communication between remote access nodes.
8. Data Protection and Retention
a. A redundant fixed media storage device shall be provided for the storage of all
system and control configuration, graphics, report forms, programs, etc.
Automatic/manual copying between redundant media shall be a user selectable
parameter. For security, data shall be retained using RAID or equivalent
technology, and be capable of permanent archive via CD or DVD.
b. File manipulation on or between any drive in the system shall not be constrained by
physical device location.
c. Store data to Disk, Tape etc. and retention shall be as approved by the RCJ.
d. Retention and archival of data shall be developed in accordance with the RCJ
Corporate Data Protection and Retention policy. As a minimum, the following
requirement shall be considered:
1) The retention period shall be set for 3 months as a minimum.
2) Minimum storage capacity for shall be 1 Terra Byte.
I. System Integration
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for system integration.
b. Interfaces between the PCS and associated subsystems or auxiliary systems shall
use standard hardware and software devices, which are compliant with industry
standard protocol; or proprietary protocol, which is offered as a standard product by
both the control system vendor and the subsystem vendor.
c. Redundant communication interfaces shall be supplied for:
1) Emergency Shutdown Systems.
2) Subsystems where loss of communication will result in the significant
degradation of control functions.
3) Where redundant communications are specified, no single component failure
shall result in the loss of communication to any subsystem.
d. Time Synchronization
1) Time clocks for all stations which are part of the PCS shall be synchronized to
100 milliseconds or better.
2) Time synchronization using GPS and networked time server which supports
Simple Networked Time Protocol (SNTP) is the preferred method for
synchronization of all servers connected to the PCS.
3) Synchronization shall be performed at a minimum of once every 24 hours.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 271
e. Interface to ESD Systems

1) Emergency Shutdown Systems, interfaces, bypasses, shutdown and reset
functions shall be independent and segregated from the main PCS.
2) The interface to ESD systems shall meet the following:
(a) Communications between PCS and ESD systems for real-time process
data and operator commands shall be via dedicated, redundant
communications paths. The PCS shall NOT communicate real-time
process data or operator commands to more than one ESD system over
the same communications path.
(b) "First out" ESD event status, if available, shall be passed via the
communications link from the ESD logic solver to the PCS.
2. DCS, PLC and SCADA (MTU, RTU)
a. The requirements for Distributed Control Systems (DCS) is provided for in Saudi
Arabia Materials Standard Specifications (SAMSS) 23-SAMSS-010.
b. The requirements for SCADA Systems is provided for in 23-SAMSS-020.
c. The requirements for RTU Systems is provided for in 23-SAMSS-030.
d. The requirements for PLC Systems is provided for in 34-SAMSS-830.
e. Notwithstanding SAMSS documents listed above, additional detailed requirements
for DCS, PLC and SCADA can be referenced in GPCS Division 40.
3. Historian
a. All PCS configuration parameters, including tag data, workstation configurations and
controller module configurations shall be stored on redundant on-line media.
b. On-line historical data shall be stored for access via history trends, displayed
listings, and printed listings.
c. The collection rates, longevity, and scope for historical data are to be specified on a
per project basis. The minimum allowable collection rates and longevity are listed in
the following table:
TABLE 5.5.3.C: MINIMUM ALLOWABLE COLLECTION RATES AND LONGEVITY
Point type Sampling Rate Retention Time
Temperature 10 sec 4 days
Analytical 10 sec 4 days
Level 10 sec 4 days
Flow 4 sec 4 days
Pressure 4 sec 4 days
Discrete 4 sec 1 day

Rev. 0 5.5 - 272
d. Circular files on a FIFO basis shall be implemented such that the latest records are
retained when buffer or list overflow occurs.
4. Instrumentation Asset Management Systems (IAMS)
a. This Subsection deals with the requirements governing the design of IAMS.
b. The Instrument Asset Management System (IAMS) shall automatically and
continuously monitor the status, events and operating conditions of the field-
connected devices to provide an efficient condition-based maintenance solution
without interfering with the plant control system
c. Smart field devices Foundation Fieldbus and HART shall be connected to the IAMS
system through the PCS.
d. The IAMS system shall be installed, commissioned and put into operation before the
pre-commissioning for the field instruments starts.
e. The IAMS database shall be fully populated with the latest device data for every
fieldbus and/or HART device on the project.
f. The criteria for IAMS are detailed further in Saudi Aramco Engineering Specification
SAES-J-905.
5. Condition Monitoring Systems (CMS)
a. This Subsection deals with the requirements governing the design of protective and
condition monitoring equipment for rotating machinery.
b. The CMS shall be a single platform software package, capable of integrating various
condition monitoring technology modules for rotating machinery and fixed asset
condition management. It shall be capable of being configured as either a
centralized or distributed database network installation with adequate provision for
worst-case real time data transfer requirements.
c. The CMS shall be connected to the plant automation network to allow import and
export of data including but not limited to, digital process control servers,
computerized maintenance management systems (CMMS), plant historians, plant
document management systems and automated reliability based maintenance
programs.
d. CMS are independent of electric motor and generator stator temperature monitoring
equipment.
e. A typical CMS will be equipped to monitor various bearing temperature and vibration
sensors to provide the following diagnostic information from each of the machine
sets. The specific requirements will be determined by the mechanical engineer.
4) Motor Free-End Thrust Bearing: Three axis of housing vibration velocity
(Radial X+Y and Axial Thrust position) two temperature and one oil level
measurement.
5) Motor Winding Temperatures: 2 per phase - Phase A, Phase B, & Phase C.
6) Motor Casing Temperature
7) Motor Drive-End Bearing: one temperature and one oil level.
8) Pump pedestal: Two axis of housing vibration velocity (Radial X+Y).
9) Pump Drive-End Bearing: Three axis of housing vibration velocity (Radial X+Y
and Axial Thrust position) and one temperature.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 273
10) Motor Shaft: One proximity probe, or Hall Effect speed sensor (key-phasor).
11) Motor Shaft: reverse rotation detection.
12) Motor Shaft: Tacho RPM measurement.
13) Seal Water Pressure and Flow.
f. The criteria for Protective and Condition Monitoring Equipment for Rotating
Machinery is detailed further in Saudi Aramco Engineering Specification SAES-J-
604.
6. Emergency Shutdown and Isolation Systems (ESD)
a. ESD systems are not normally required for building automation and /or water and
wastewater facilities. However depending on the configuration and the power
requirements for very high volume pumping stations as with seawater cooling pump
stations, it may be necessary to incorporate an ESD system into the design.
b. ESD systems shall be designed in accordance with Saudi Aramco Material Systems
Specification 34-SAMSS-623 Programmable Controller Based ESD Systems;
c. ESD systems shall be configured using redundant architecture, i.e., Dual Modular
Redundant (DMR), 1-out-of-2D (1oo2D) or Triple Modular Redundant (TMR), 2-out-
of-3 (2oo3) voting architecture.
7. Control System Overall Integration
a. For Wet Utility Treatment Plant such as Potable Water RO plant, IWTP treatment,
SWTP treatment and Sea Water Cooling Pump Station, the PCS is the single
window platform for control and monitoring of the process plant operations. The
overall integration shall include following minimum requirements
• The PCS shall include distributed field controllers, I/O modules, system and
marshalling cabinets, communication modules for interface with other third
party control systems, plant automation networks, Data Servers, Operator
Workstations, Engineering Workstation, Printers for process operation and
control
• The PCS shall also include subsystems such as Instrument Asset
Management System (IAMS), Alarm Management System (AMS), Data
historian, Cyber security server, time synchronization server, fire wall, web
terminal, demilitarized Zone etc. as per individual project requirements.
• If ESD system is required, The ESD system shall be fully integrated with
PCS.
• CMS integration with PCS shall be connected through both hardwire and
software. For machine protection trip signals such as vibration, bearing
temperature etc. shall be hardwired to PCS/ESD for interlock. Other alarms,
diagnostics data shall be serial link to PCS through industrial standard
protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
• There will be no BAS system for these plant. The HAVC DDC control panels
in each plant building shall provide common alarm signals to be hardwired
to PCS for alarm.
• FACP from each plant building shall form the dedicated fire alarm ring
network and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the plant fire alarm
status in control room. FACP in each plant building shall also provide

Rev. 0 5.5 - 274
Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be hardwired to PCS to alarm

the process operators. In case no centralized fire alarm workstation is
available, FACP shall be serial link with PCS through industrial standard
protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
b. For Wet Utility distribution piping network, such as Potable Water Distribution Pump
Stations, Valve Chambers, Sea Water Cooling Valve Chambers, lift Stations etc.
the SCADA is the single window platform for control and monitoring of the process
plant operations. The overall integration shall include following minimum
requirements:
• The local SCADA will be located in Pump Station Control Room include
communication gateways, networks, data collection severs, Operator
control.
• The local SCADA system shall uplink with MARAFIQ Data Control Center
by means of FO cable and radio connection for remote monitoring purpose.
• PLC to be used for pump station local control and monitoring, including
controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets, communication
modules for interface with other third party control systems, networks and
gateways for uplink with SCADA system.
• RTU will be used for pump station associated distribution pipeline such as
Valve Chamber Instruments control and monitoring. Instruments such as
MOVs, Flow Meters, Pressure Transmitters, Analyzers etc. inside valve
chamber will be connected to local RTU which is located inside an
instrumentation shelter. All RTUs shall be uplinked to the associated pump
station PLC/ SCADA control network through FO cable, and/OR Radio
Communication for directly uplink with MARAFIQ Data Center for remote
monitoring by MARAFIQ Central SCADA system shall be also provided.
• RTU shall be used for control and monitoring the Sanitary Water Lift Station
and odor control unit. the RTU shall be linked with MARAFIQ Data Control
Center through Radio Communication network.
• There will be no centralized BAS system for distribution pump station plant,
the HAVC DDC control panels in each plant building shall provide common
alarm signals to be hardwired to PLC for alarm in SCADA system.
• FACP from each distribution pump plant building shall form the dedicated
fire alarm ring network and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the
plant fire alarm status in control room. FACP in each plant building shall also
provide Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be hardwired to PLC
to alarm the SCADA process operators. In case no centralized fire alarm
workstation is available, FACP shall be in serial communication link with
PLC through industrial standard protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus
RTU etc.
c. For Wet Utility Irrigation distribution piping network, such as Irrigation Water
Distribution Pump Stations, Valve Chambers etc. the SCADA is the single window
platform for control and monitoring of the process plant operations. The overall
integration shall include following minimum requirements
• The SCADA will be located in irrigation Pump Station Control Room include
communication gateways, networks, data collection severs, Operator

Rev. 0 5.5 - 275

control.
• The SCADA system shall be uplinked with Landscape and Irrigation O&M
Data Control Center by means of FO cable and radio connection for remote
monitoring purpose.
• PLC to be used for irrigation pump station local control and monitoring,
including controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets,
communication modules for interface with other third party control systems,
networks and gateways for uplink with SCADA system.
• RTU will be used for irrigation pump station associated distribution pipeline
such as Valve Chamber Instruments control and monitoring. Instruments
such as MOVs, Flow Meters, Pressure Transmitters, Analyzers etc. inside
valve chamber will be connected to local RTU which is located inside an
instrumentation shelter. All RTUs shall be uplinked to associated pump
station PLC/ SCADA control network through FO cable and Radio
Communication for monitoring by pump station SCADA system.
• There will be no centralize BAS system for irrigation distribution pump
station plant. the HAVC DDC control panels in each plant building shall
provide common alarm signals to be hardwired to PLC for alarm in SCADA
system.
• FACP from each irrigation distribution pump station building shall form the
dedicated fire alarm ring network and provide fire alarm workstation to
monitor the plant fire alarm status in control room. FACP in each plant
building shall also provide Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be
hardwired to PLC to alarm the SCADA process operators. In case no
centralized fire alarm workstation is available, FACP shall be in serial
communication with PLC through industrial standard protocol such as
Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
• RTU shall be used for Irrigation Controller, the RTU shall be linked with
Landscape and Irrigation O&M Data Control Center by means of radio
commination.
d. For Buildings, such as government buildings, schools, colleges, university, hospitals,
commercial center, residential compound etc. the Integrated BAS is the single
window platform for control and monitoring of the entire camp / compound facilities.
The overall integration shall include following minimum requirements
• The centralized BAS shall be provided for entire building / camp /
compound, include communication gateways, networks, data collection
severs, Operator Workstations, Engineering Workstation, Printers for
monitoring the entire camp / compound facilities.
• The BAS shall provide a distributed control system in lieu of Building
Management Systems (BMS) - the computer networking of electronic
devices designed to monitor and control all HAVC status through BACnet
protocol. The BAS shall also provide interface and support all other
communication protocol with other widely standalone systems – typically
security (access control, CCTV, PA), fire and flood safety, fire pumps, fire
suppression, lighting (especially emergency lighting, Energy Efficiency
Control system), generators, and mechanical packages such as potable

Rev. 0 5.5 - 276
water boost pumps, lift stations, chiller package etc. within a building / Camp
/ Compound.
• PLC with local monitoring and control functions to be used for potable water
boost pump, chilled water pump stations, Chlorination Package, including
controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets, communication
modules for interface with other third party control systems, networks and
gateways for uplink with central BAS system. the PLC shall be linked with
BAS through Voice / data network in the camp / compound provided by
telecom.
• When Sanitary Lift Station are located within the Camps / Compound, RTU
will be used for control and monitoring the Sanitary Water Lift Station and
odor control unit. the RTU shall be linked with BAS through Voice / data
network in the camp / compound provided by telecom.
• All electrical power distributions status such as substation, MCC,
switchgear, main distribution Board, transformer status can be monitored
and controlled from BAS
• All Special Gas System within the building shall be monitored by BAS,
including Air Compressor, Vacuum Compressor, Gas handling Unit, Gas
Detector, Cylinder Pressure Control etc.
• FACP from each building shall form the dedicated fire alarm ring network
and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the camp / compound fire
alarm status in central control room. FACP shall also be integrated with BAS
for monitoring and recording from BAS system.
J. Control System Software
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for control system
software.
b. It is the intent to have the Contractor furnish the latest generation, standard, field
proven, fully debugged and supported PCS software package application with a
minimum of additions or changes.
c. Customized or specially written software shall only be furnished if standard software
cannot meet all of the functional requirements required. Any custom applications
software required shall be fully integrated into the basic software and shall not
require unique command structures. No attempt has been made to list all software
or list all characteristics of software required by the Instrumentation Supplier – this
shall be specified for each specific project.
d. The software package shall provide a system capable of controlling system level
activities, and a higher level process control language allowing the operator to
monitor and control the process through an interactive human interface. The
software environment shall support a multi-programming atmosphere allowing
concurrent execution of more than one program in a background/foreground mode
or multi-tasking mode.
e. Throughout the execution of all software modules, the operator shall be presented
with all of the command or operation choices available at that point in the program
using sufficient verbiage or symbols to make the choices self-explanatory and
unambiguous.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 277
2. Standards
a. Standards are changing from time to time and it is the responsibility of the Engineer
to get the latest preferred standards from the RCJ at the time of design.
3. Licensing
a. All software provided shall be installed and used within the terms of the software
manufacturer's license agreement. All software purchased by the Instrumentation
Supplier shall be registered to the Instrumentation Supplier during the construction
phase of this project. During that time, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be
responsible for providing and incorporating minor software package updates and
patches issued by the software manufacturer. For example, if version 3.1 of a
program is purchased, and version 3.2 and 3.3 were released prior to project
completion, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be responsible for incorporating these
later versions into the final project. The Instrumentation Supplier would not be
responsible for incorporating major software revisions such as the release of a
version 4.0 or 4.1.
b. Prior to substantial completion of this project, the Instrumentation Supplier shall re-
register all provided software packages to the RCJ and provide the RCJ with written
confirmation of having done so. At project completion, all software shall be
registered to the RCJ and shall include full development a runtime applications
c. A complete list of supported systems and software shall be obtained from the RCJ at
time of design.
K. Control Buildings and/or Control Rooms
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for design of central
control centers.
1) Local Control Buildings - In close proximity to the process facility for which it is
designed, a Local Control Building is characterized by its relatively small size.
Local Control Buildings are specifically designed to control a single process
unit or plant. Field instrumentation will be connected directly to the control
building process interface room. The building will be used to provide only the
console areas, offices and facilities necessary to support the operation of the
plant or process unit.
2) Central Control Buildings - Central Control Buildings are used to control
several interconnected process modules or plants. They provide a single
focus for plant or multi-plant wide operation and shall be used in conjunction
with Process Interface Buildings and Local Control Buildings located at each
process module or plant. The building shall be located to minimize the risk of
external damage from fires, explosions, or toxic releases per SAES-B-014
and shall provide essential administrative facilities necessary to support the
continuous operation of the plant(s).
3) Process Interface Room (Rack Room) - The Process Interface Room is
typically a section of the Local Control Building, or Central Control Building
(such as in small facilities), used as the termination and internal distribution
point for instrumentation wiring. For Local Control Buildings, this will include
field instrument wiring terminated in marshaling cabinets for inbound
distribution to distributed control system interface modules. For Central
Control Buildings incoming wiring will mainly feature electronic or fiber optic

Rev. 0 5.5 - 278
highways associated with the Process Control System (PCS) and ancillary
control systems.
4) Structural design of these buildings shall follow Chapter 5.2
2. Control Room requirements
a. Local and Central Control Buildings shall be designed to provide administrative and
process control facilities to support safe operations and to provide a suitable
environment for the operation and maintenance of the process unit or plant PCS.
b. Internal Layout - It is not intended to mandate control building layouts. Floor plans
shall be developed on a case by case basis to support local operating practice and
facilitate the installation and maintenance of the plant control system.
c. Access
1) The main entrance to the control building, which shall face away from the
process plant or face the plant considered to have the least risk of fire or
explosion, shall be provided with an air lock to sustain building pressurization.
Locks are not required for emergency exits and service entrances. Certain
emergency exit doors may be restricted from being opened from outside, but
personnel shall be able to open them from inside.
2) The floor plan shall be designed to minimize casual personnel traffic through
the control room. Offices and equipment rooms shall be connected by internal
corridors. For Central Control Buildings, the main entrance shall open onto a
lobby or corridor from which the control room, offices and other facilities are
accessed. For a Local Control Building, the main entrance may open directly
through an air lock to the control room area.
3) The computer room (when specified), engineering room and process interface
room (rack room) shall have their main access through the control room.
4) Emergency exits shall provide easy exit routes from each room and from the
control building in accordance with building program.
5) Double doors shall be installed to provide outside access to the control room,
equipment rooms and rack rooms as required. If the control room is elevated
above grade then loading platforms with stairways shall be provided to
facilitate equipment handling during installation and maintenance. Equipment
access doors shall be kept locked during normal operation and shall meet the
blast resistance requirements of the structural walls of the building.
b. General Requirements
1) The control room shall be designed so that only activities associated with
plant control are performed there.
2) The control room shall be engineered to accommodate future planned
expansion.
3) Spacing between operator workstations and walls and between workstations
must be at least 1.22 m wide to provide adequate access for routine
maintenance.
4) The control room and equipment installed therein shall be designed for lowest
practical background noise level. Maximum allowable noise levels shall be
40 dBA. Equipment that cannot meet this criterion shall be installed in
auxiliary equipment rooms or shall be located in an acoustic cabinet.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 279
3. Server (Rack) Room requirements

a. A computer room shall be provided if there are special computers or servers which
require either a specially controlled environment or a locked secure area.
b. If specified, computer rooms shall incorporate the following features:
1) A computer ID card reader or combination lock shall be fitted to the computer
room door to prevent unauthorized access.
2) Environmental conditioning shall be provided in accordance with the
equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
3) The temperature, relative humidity and environmental corrosion rate shall be
monitored and alarmed in the control room.
c. All field wiring with the exception of control system communication links shall be
terminated inside marshaling cabinets.
d. All incoming cables must be sealed in accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
e. Power, instrument analog and digital signal cables shall be segregated and run in
accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
f. Workstations for machinery condition diagnostic systems and auxiliary
instrumentation systems that do not need to be routinely monitored shall be installed
in the server or rack room unless stated otherwise.
4. Engineering Room requirements
a. Engineering workstations shall be installed in the engineering room.
b. Secure fire resistant storage cabinets shall be provided for storage of computer
software and documentation. This is not for storing back up system software,
manuals and documentation which shall be stored in a secure off-site location.
c. The room shall provide space for desks and filing cabinets.
5. Electrical – Power, Wiring, Lighting, Grounding requirements
a. Electrical – Power, Wiring, and Grounding requirements shall be in accordance with
Subsection 5.5.3 F and SBC 401 and IEC standards.
b. Deep parabolic reflector fluorescent tubes shall be used in combination with
compact fluorescent or LED spots to provide variable illumination, without glare or
shadow, at operator workstations and task lighting for work surfaces. Lighting details
shall be in accordance with Subsection 5.5.1.M.
c. Critical instrument and control systems shall be connected to a UPS system. These
systems include:
1) Gas Detection System
2) Fixed Fire Suppression System
3) Emergency Shutdown System
4) Process Control System
5) Emergency Lighting
6) All local and field instrumentation devices
7) Other auxiliary protection, monitoring or control systems.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 280
d. The UPS system shall be configured and installed in accordance with Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.d.
e. Wiring
1) Under floor power distribution cable systems shall be installed in accordance
with SBC 401 and IEC 60364.
2) Data highways shall be terminated directly to PCS interface equipment.
3) Cables and conduits entering blast resistant control buildings shall be sealed
in accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical. Multi conductor instrument cables
shall be sealed around the outer jacket at the building entry point. Cable end
seals shall be applied as required by the SBC 401 and IEC standards.
4) Signal and power cables installed in air conditioning plenums shall conform to
SCB 401 and IEC standards.
6. UPS and Battery Room requirements
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.d Uninterruptible Power Supply for additional
information and details associated with UPS.
b. Batteries shall be located in separate battery rooms and installed in accordance with
electrical requirements.
c. Battery rooms shall be ventilated in accordance with HVAC mechanical Section.
d. Safety equipment shall be installed in accordance with Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.d.
e. Refer NFPA 111 for additional requirements.
7. Environmental requirements
a. – Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.6 Environmental Conditions.
L. Fire Alarm and Gas Detection Systems and Fire Suppression Control System
1. Fire Alarm System
a. General
1) This Subsection applies to the fire alarm and detection systems inside
residential, commercial, institutional and industrial facilities.
2) Purpose
(a) The primary purpose of a fire alarm and detection system is to notify the
appropriate personnel and to initiate the appropriate response by these
notified personnel.
(b) The secondary purpose is to initiate fire safety functions which are
building functions intended to increase the level of safety for the building
occupants or to control the spread of the harmful effects of fire.
3) An approved fire alarm and detection system shall be installed for all
facilities in accordance with the latest accepted edition of the SBC.
(a) The system and all associated components shall be designed to address
the code requirements for the building and occupancy type assigned to
the facility.
(b) The SBC identifies the minimum requirements for fire alarm and
detection systems. There may be situations which warrant protection

Rev. 0 5.5 - 281
above these minimum requirements. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor

shall assess the criticality of each facility and submit any recommended
system enhancements to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
(1) For fire alarm and detection provisions in excess of the code
requirements to protect special hazards or critical equipment,
features and component selection shall be coordinated and shall
include consideration for the following:
(i) Evaluation of operating characteristics of each detection device
as it applies to the specific application
(ii) Ambient conditions such as temperature, humidity, and
corrosion where the devices are to be installed and operate
(iii) Fuel sources present
(iv) Ignition sources present
(v) Value of the contents of the facility
(c) The fire alarm and detection system shall be dedicated for that purpose
and shall not be combined with other building systems such as building
automation, energy management, or security.
(d) There are requirements for interconnection between the fire alarm and
detection system with other building systems for control functions
associated with response to a fire alarm condition. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate all required interconnections with the
manufacturers of the other systems to ensure that the fire alarm system
remains independent but has the required interface to facilitate the
desired control functions.
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare documentation to summarize
the recommended approach for the fire alarm and detection system
designed for the facility. This documentation shall be submitted to the Royal
Commission for review and approval and shall include the following:
(a) Floor plans illustrating the locations for all required fire alarm system
equipment.
(b) The Fire Alarm System Input/Output Matrix. Refer to Table 5.5.2.G for
sample.
(c) List of fire alarm system enhancements which are recommended above
the minimum code requirements in response to specific occupancies or
facility characteristics. Include a description of the rationale for these
recommendations.
(d) Analysis of Fail-Safe Operation. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.D.3.c.2.
(e) Description summarizing the detection methods selected for the various
spaces throughout the facility.
(f) List of recommendations for the class and survivability characteristics for
the fire alarm and detection system wiring infrastructure.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 282
b. System Description and Requirements

1) The fire alarm and detection system shall be a microprocessor based,
addressable system comprised of the following components:
(a) Fire alarm control panel(s)
(b) Auxiliary fire alarm control cabinet(s) required for accommodation of the
system control devices, power supplies, etc.
(c) Graphic Annunciator(s). Alphanumeric or custom graphic type as
determined to be appropriate for the facility
(d) Communication devices for transmission of alarms to central and/or
remote locations
(e) Initiation devices; manual and automatic
(f) Notification devices; audible, visual and/or combination
(g) Monitoring and control modules
(h) Cabling infrastructure
2) Fire alarm and detection system shall be specified with the following
minimum characteristics and features:
(a) Electrically supervised against short, ground and open wiring faults in
any of the circuits associated with the fire alarm and detection system.
(b) Capable of expansion at any time with no limitations as to the number of
automatic or manual initiation devices.
(c) Capable of supporting multiple automatic detection devices on the same
circuits.
(d) Capable to ensure that manual initiation (fire condition) overrides a
trouble signal (fault condition).
3) Equipment locations for the fire alarm and detection system shall be
coordinated with the facility design. The following list provides guidance for
locating various fire alarm equipment:
(a) Main fire alarm control panel(s):
(1) For small buildings, the fire alarm control panel can be located in a
public space and function as the main control panel and the
annunciation panel.
(2) For larger buildings, the main fire alarm control panels shall be
located in rooms accessible by authorized personnel. These rooms
could be the Main Electrical Room or some other room dedicated for
electrical or communications equipment.
(3) For buildings where a Fire Command Center is required, the main
fire alarm control panel(s) shall be located in the Fire Command
Center.
(b) Auxiliary fire alarm control cabinets:
(1) These cabinets shall be located in electrical or similar utility type
rooms which will limit the access to authorized personnel.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 283
(2) The location of these cabinets shall be coordinated with the design
of the building.
(c) Annunciator panel(s):
(1) Annunciator panel(s) shall be located at the building entrance point
where the fire response team would enter the building.
(2) Additional locations for annunciator panel(s) would be at a
designated 24 hour monitored station or other operation center.
(d) Voice communications cabinet(s):
(1) Cabinets housing the equipment associated with the voice
communications system for the fire alarm and detection system
shall be located at the building entrance point where the fire
response team would enter the building.
(2) For buildings where a Fire Command Center is required, the voice
communications cabinet(s) shall be located in the Fire Command
Center.
(e) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall identify the proposed locations for
all of the fire alarm and detection system equipment on the preliminary
floor plans to solicit review and approval by the Royal Commission.
c. System Operation
1) The operation of any automatic or manual initiation device shall trigger
various alarm and control functions. These functions shall be in accordance
with the applicable codes and shall be summarized as part of the
construction documents. Table 5.5.2.F has been developed to provide a
sample Fire Alarm System Input/Output Matrix which identifies the operation
of the fire alarm and detection system. This matrix will be unique for each
facility and shall be developed and submitted to the RCJ for review and
approval.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 284
TABLE 5.5.2.F: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT MATRIX (SAMPLE)

Annunciation Notification Required Control
Notify the Elevator System of Fire in Respective
Fire Alarm System Shall Interrupt Control Circuit

Activate Strobes and Announce Location of the
Immediately Notify Staff at 24 hour Monitoring

Supervisory Alert (Including Visual Signal and
Open Smoke Ventilation Windows and Doors

Transmit Condition to the Central Monitoring
Transmit all Point Status Information to the
Signal Access Control System to Required

Trouble Alert (Including Visual Signal and
Fire Alarm Shall Activate Atrium Smoke
General Alarm Output Notification to the

Fire Alarm Alert of Location and Type in
Release Smoke / Fire Door Hold Opens

Send Elevator to Alternate Recall Floor
Send Elevator to Primary Recall Floor
Lobby, Hoistway, or Machine Room
OUTPUT
Display / Print Changes of Status
Building Management System
Close Smoke / Fire Dampers
Building Security System

INPUT DEVICE
Alarm on Speakers
to Shut Down Unit

Audible Alarm)
Audible Alarm)
Exhaust Fans
Locations
Initiation
Station
Doors
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R
1 Manual Pullstations - All Locations         
2 All Area Smoke and Heat Detectors         
3 Door Release Smoke Detectors         
4 Duct Smoke Detectors and Smoke Dampers      
5 Duct Smoke Detectors and Any Air Handling Unit       
6 Atrium Area Smoke & Fire Camera Detectors          

F.A. Panel Mounted Manual Test Atrium Smoke Exhaust
7  
Fan Switch
Elevator Lobby Recall Smoke Detector Activated -
8           
Primary Floor
Elevator Lobby Recall Smoke Detector Activated - All But
9           
Primary Floor
10 Sprinkler Control Valve - Tamper - All Locations    
11 Sprinkler Waterflow - All Locations         
12 Atrium Area Sprinkler Waterflow           
13 Fire Pump Waterflow - All Locations      
14 Fire Alarm AC Power Failure   
15 Fire Alarm System Low Battery   
16 Trouble on Communications Link   
17 Trouble on Signal Line Circuit   
18 Trouble on Notification Appliance Circuits   
19 Trouble on Fireman's Communication Circuits   
2) Analysis of Fail-Safe Operation

(a) An analysis shall be performed for the fire alarm and detection system as
well as other interconnected systems including but not limited to building
management system, security system, access control system, lighting
control systems, smoke control systems, audio/visual systems, etc. This
analysis shall evaluate the operation of each system to establish the
operation status and condition for each in the event of fire alarm
activation. The results of the analysis and the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor’s recommendations shall be submitted to the Royal
(b) Relays selection and operation for the interconnected systems shall be
coordinated with the emergency power supply so that undesirable
operations will not occur upon power transfer. For example, in a power
failure, it may be acceptable if doors held open by magnetic devices are

Rev. 0 5.5 - 285
released, but it would be totally unacceptable if a deluge system was

actuated.
d. Detector Operation Principle
1) The three most common detector devices which are generally used include
smoke detectors, heat detectors and flame detectors.
2) In addition to these three common detection devices, there are several other
specialty detection means that may be considered for application in
appropriate facilities. These specialty detection means include optical beam
detection, very early smoke detection apparatus (VESDA), and video smoke
and flame detection.
3) Smoke Detectors
(a) Smoke detectors detect the visible or invisible smoke particles from
combustion. The two main types of detectors are Ionization Detectors
and Photoelectric Detectors.
(1) Ionization Detectors
(i) Ionization detectors contain a small radioactive source that is
used to charge the air inside a small chamber. The charged air
allows a small current to cross through the chamber and
complete an electrical circuit.
(ii) When smoke enters the chamber, it shields the radiation, which
stops the current and triggers an alarm.
(iii) These detectors respond quickly to very small smoke particles
(even those invisible to the naked eye) from flaming or very hot
fires, but may respond very slowly to the dense smoke
associated with smoldering or low-temperature fires.
(2) Photoelectric Detectors
(i) Photoelectric smoke detectors contain a light source and light
sensor which are arranged so that the rays from the light
source do not hit the light sensor. When smoke particles enter
the light path, some of the light is scattered and redirected onto
the sensor, causing the detector to activate an alarm.
(ii) These detectors react quickly to visible smoke particles from
smoldering fires, but are less sensitive to the smaller particles
associated with flaming or very hot fires.
4) Heat Detectors
(a) The most common heat detectors either react to a broad temperature
change or a predetermined fixed temperature.
(b) Heat detectors use a set of temperature-sensitive resistors called
thermistors that decrease in resistance as the temperature raises. One
thermistor is sealed and protected from the surrounding temperature
while the other is exposed. A sharp increase in temperature reduces the
resistance in the exposed thermistor, which allows a large current to
activate the detector's alarm.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 286
5) Flame Detectors
(a) Flame detectors are line-of-sight devices that look for specific types of
light (infrared, visible, ultraviolet) emitted by flames during combustion.
When the detector recognizes this light from a fire, it sends a signal to
activate an alarm.
(b) The optical sensors used in flame detectors works at specific spectral
ranges (usually narrow band) to record the incoming radiation at the
selected wavelengths. 30% to 40% of the energy radiated from a fire is
electromagnetic radiation that can be read at various spectral ranges
(such as UV, IR). The signals are then analyzed using a predetermined
technique for flickering frequency, threshold energy signal comparison,
mathematical correlation between several signals, correlation to
memorized spectral analysis, etc.
(c) Flame detectors are available in a number of sensor types. The most
common sensor types include UV detectors, IR detectors, UV/IR
detectors.
(d) UV only flame detectors (ultraviolet spectral band detection) work with
wavelengths shorter than 300 nm (solar blind spectral band). They detect
flames at high speed (3 to 4 milliseconds) due to the UV high-energy
radiation emitted by fires and explosions at the instant of their ignition.
These devices are quite accurate, although they are subject to
interference (false alarms) from random UV sources such as lightning,
arc welding, radiation, and solar radiation.
(e) IR only detectors work within the infrared spectral band. The mass of hot
gases emits a specific spectral pattern in the infrared spectral region.
They are subject to interference (false alarms) by any other “hot” surface
in the area.
(f) UV and IR spectral band detectors compare the threshold signal in two
spectral ranges and their ratio to each other to confirm the reliability of
the fire signal. This style minimizes false alarms.
6) Specialty Detection Means
(a) Optical Beam Detection
(1) Optical beam detection utilizes a projected beam of light to monitor
for obscuration due to the presence of smoke.
(2) Types of beam detection include the following:
(i) End-to-End type consists of a separate light transmitter and
receiver. The transmitter and receiver are located on either
end of the protected area. They include open-area smoke
imaging detection in which ultraviolet (UV) and infrared (IR)
wavelengths of light are used to detect smoke. The
comparative differences between the UV and IR wavelengths
help to identify real smoke by comparing reflections and seeing
the difference in the profile.
(ii) Reflective type incorporates the transmitter and receiver in the
same enclosure. The light path is created by reflecting light off
of a specially designed reflector mounted at the opposite end of
the protected area.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 287
(b) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)

(1) VESDA consists of a central detection unit which draws air through
a network of purpose built aspirating pipes to detect smoke. The air
is passed through a laser sampling chamber that detects the
presence of smoke particles suspended in air by detecting the light
scattered by them in the chamber.
(2) The VESDA system is an aspirating detection system that detects at
the incipient stage as opposed to the smoke, flame or intense heat
stages.
(3) Continuous air sampling associated with the VESDA approach can
detect smoke before it is visible to the human eye and provides the
earliest possible warning of an impending fire hazard.
(c) Video Smoke and Flame Detection
(1) Video smoke and flame detection utilizes video image detection
(VID) technology to detect flame and smoke. This approach consists
of video-based analytical algorithms that allow integration between
analog cameras and advanced servers to create a complete flame
and smoke detection system.
(2) Video-based analytical algorithms include:
(i) Flaming fires – looks for specific fire pattern consisting of a
bright core of the flame and flickering corona.
(ii) Smoke plumes – identifies the anomalies that are caused by
smoke and analyzes the progression over a period of time to
identify a growing smoke plume.
(iii) Ambient smoke – monitors the light diffusion from light sources
and bright objects in the video images to detect the pattern
consistent with the slow accumulation of smoke.
(3) This approach utilizes a network video recorders and management
software to support multiple detection cameras to:
(i) Record video streams
(ii) Monitor live videos
(iii) Maintain an event log for all alarm conditions
(iv) Dispatch alarms and videos to remote locations
(4) This detection means provides coverage for large areas such as
atriums. The system provides enhancements over conventional
flame and smoke detection, such as:
(i) Quick detection times
(ii) Ability to conduct immediate and remote verification
(iii) Avoids cost associated with regular inspection and
maintenance of conventional devices which may be difficult to
access
(iv) Ease of installation and configuration

Rev. 0 5.5 - 288
(v) Provides convenience for system integrators

e. Detector Selection
1) The type of fire alarm detector must be selected to best suit the
characteristics of the facility. Each of the detector types have unique
capabilities that must be considered when selecting the appropriate device
for a specific application. It is common to utilize several different types of
detectors throughout a facility to provide the most effective means of
protection. The following paragraphs provide a brief overview of the various
detector types along with information regarding appropriate applications.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall assess the specific applications and
provide recommendations regarding detector type selections to the Royal
2) Smoke Detectors
(a) Smoke detectors are usually more sensitive than heat detectors and
usually detect the fire sooner during early flame stages and will meet the
needs of most areas containing primarily wood, paper, fabric, and plastic
materials. During combustion, these materials produce a mixture of
smoke types with detectable levels of both large and small smoke
particles.
(b) Application
(1) Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be used in places where
smoldering fires may be expected.
(2) Ionization type smoke detectors shall be used where flaming fires
would be expected.
(3) If both types of fires are possible, both features are available in a
single detector.
(c) Smoke detectors are suitable for:
(1) Residential occupancies, computer rooms and other locations
having high values
(2) Indoor areas with low ceilings such as offices, closets, and
restrooms
(3) Relatively clean areas with minimal amounts of dust and dirt
(d) Smoke detectors are not suitable for:
(1) Open air applications as the detectors require ceilings to direct the
smoke from the plume by convection
(2) Areas where ceiling heights exceed 10.5 m
(3) Rooms where cooking will take place, such as, kitchens, or similar
areas where steam and condensation are present
(4) Areas where exhaust fumes are present such as, car parks, etc.
3) Heat Detectors
(a) Heat detectors are normally used in dirty environments or where dense
smoke is produced. Heat detectors may be less sensitive, but are more
appropriate than a smoke detector in these environments.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 289
(b) Heat detectors are ideal for areas where flammable gases and liquids
are handled or any area where a fire will quickly cause a large change in
the surrounding temperature.
(c) Heat detectors are also suitable for:
(1) Dirty, dusty or smoky environments
(2) Manufacturing areas where large quantities of vapors, gases, or
fumes may be present
(3) Areas where particles of combustion are normally present, such as
in kitchens, furnace rooms, utility rooms, and garages or where
ovens, burners or vehicle exhaust gases are present
(d) Fixed temperature detectors are suitable for the areas like boiler/plant
room, kitchen and furnace/kiln rooms.
(e) Rate of rise of temperature detectors are suitable for areas such as car
parks, loading bays etc.
4) Flame Detectors
(a) Flame detectors either ultraviolet or infrared offer the fastest response to
a freely burning fire and are well suited for protecting areas involving
flammable liquid fires.
(b) Flame detectors are best for protecting:
(1) Areas with high ceilings and open-spaces, such as warehouses and
auditoriums
(2) Outdoor or semi-enclosed areas, where winds or draughts can
prevent smoke from reaching a heat or smoke detector
(3) Areas where rapidly developing flaming fires can occur, such as
petrochemical production, fuel storage areas, paint shops, and
solvent areas
(c) Flame detectors are quite expensive and may be subject to false alarms
from radiation such as welding, reflected sunlight, electric sparks and
halogen lamps.
(d) Flame detectors performance is affected by thick smokes, vapors,
grease, and oil deposits on the detector windows resulting in blockage of
the line of sight.
5) Optical Beam Detection
(a) Optical beam detectors are used where the application of standard spot
type smoke detectors would be uneconomical or restricted due to the
height of the protected area. Where high ceilings are present, beam
smoke detectors may be more responsive to slow or smoldering fires
than a point smoke detector because they are monitoring the entire
smoke field intersecting the beam.
(b) Optical beam smoke detectors are line-of-sight devices and are subject
to interference from any object or person which may enter the beam
path. This limitation makes them impractical for occupied spaces with
normal ceiling heights.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 290
(c) Several typical applications include:

(1) High ceiling areas such as atriums, lobbies, gymnasiums, sports
arenas, museums and religious sanctuaries
(2) Warehouses
(3) Manufacturing areas in factories
(d) Features to include for beam detection include:
(1) Automatic gain control to compensate for the buildup of dust, dirt
and other debris that may lower the detection threshold for the
detector
(2) Motorized detector which automatically aligns itself to compensate
to changes over time due to building movement or other situations
(3) Remote test stations to facilitate the periodic electronic testing of the
detector
6) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)
(a) VESDA systems incorporate more than one level of alarm which is
configurable and allows very early warning of an event. The detection
and alarm sensitivities can be programmed to levels ranging from more
sensitive to less sensitive than conventional detectors. The detectors
work best in non-volatile environments.
(b) VESDA systems are suitable for environments where highly sensitive
rapid smoke detection capability is required. Typical applications
include:
(1) Cleanrooms
(2) Areas containing goods easily damaged by fire
(3) Telecommunications and Electronic Rooms
(c) VESDA systems are also suitable for spaces with challenging physical
characteristics or aesthetic concerns including:
(1) Large spaces with high ceilings such as atriums, lobbies,
gymnasiums
(2) Mechanical equipment spaces where ductwork, piping and other
infrastructure make the installation of spot detectors challenging or
ineffective
(d) VESDA systems can be used in dusty or dirty environments as long as
appropriate design, installation and maintenance procedures are
followed.
7) Video Image Detection (VID)
(a) VID is ideally suited for environments where spot or other types of
detection would not be efficient including large open or high-volume
areas such as atria, shopping malls, religious assembly spaces, hotels,
office buildings, airports and warehouses.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 291
(b) VID provide monitoring personnel with information regarding the location
and extent of the fire which ultimately provides guidance for the
activation of the appropriate emergency response.
(c) The application of VID must consider the environmental conditions such
as lighting, background, foreground and contaminants present in the
protected areas.
f. Detector Location
1) Detectors shall be located and installed in accordance with the applicable SBC,
NFPA Codes and Standards.
2) Detector spacing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s and the listing
agency’s spacing criteria. The nominal spacing of detectors was developed
using a smooth ceiling at a predetermined height. Detector spacing shall be
adjusted for other than the standard conditions as identified in the NFPA Codes
and Standards.
3) Consideration may also be given to architectural symmetry, provided that this
does not downgrade detector function to an unacceptable level.
4) To be most effective, both smoke and heat detectors must be located on or
near the ceiling of the space to be protected because that is where smoke or
hot gases initially collect.
5) Smoke and heat detectors shall not be located near operable windows, air
supply vents, or other ventilation sources that would interfere with the natural
air currents. The detectors shall not be located in dead air spaces nor near
any obstruction that would prevent smoke or heat from reaching the detector.
6) All detectors shall be located to avoid localized sources of “false” alarms.
7) Heat detectors, though slower to respond to a fire than smoke detectors, are
not as prone to false alarms. They are thus often installed in storage rooms
and service rooms that are normally unoccupied.
8) In case of heating and ventilation system, where smoke detectors are used to
initiate signals to shut down fans or to close dampers, they shall be installed in
the return air ducts of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems, to
prevent the circulation of smoke-contaminated air.
g. Fire Alarm Control Panel
1) Control panels shall be designed to meet the unique requirements of each
building and occupancy.
2) Zoning:
(a) The building area may be divided into zones by floors or as required to
allow for accurate and rapid determination of the fire location and the
type of systems being activated.
(b) Zone configuration shall consider fire zones, means of egress and areas
of risk. Maximum area per zone shall not exceed 2000 m².
(c) The length of any zone shall not exceed 91 m in any direction.
(d) Buildings of 300 m² or less may be considered as a single zone.
3) Control panels shall have spare zone capacity. Panels shall have a minimum of
two zones, even though the building may be a single alarm zone.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 292
4) The control panels shall be a multi-processor based networked system

designed specifically for fire and smoke control. The control panels shall
include all required hardware, software, and site-specific system programming
to provide a complete and operational system.
5) The control panel shall be diagnostic type and shall be designed such that
interactions between any applications can be configured and modified using
software provided by a single supplier.
6) When the panel is used with addressable detectors, the panel shall be capable
of providing a signal which shall indicate Fire/Fault zone along with the detector
which has operated by means of a digital Liquid Crystal Diode (LCD) display.
h. Fire Alarm Annunciators
1) The requirement for fire alarm annunciation panel depends upon the size and
complexity of the system.
(a) In small buildings, with a single fire department response point, a graphic
annunciator panel is unnecessary. The Main Fire Alarm Control Panel
can be strategically located to function as the annunciator at the fire
department response point.
(b) For moderate sized buildings, a remote fire alarm annunciator panel shall
be provided and shall consist of an alphanumeric screen which has the
capability to identify the alarm condition by type and location.
(c) For large and complicated facilities, a custom, graphic fire alarm
annunciator shall be provided to assist the facilities personnel and the
fire department responders to quickly determine the cause and location
of the fire alarm condition. The graphic annunciator panel shall be
provided with the following features:
(1) The panel shall show all floor plans of the building and light the floor
plan (or part of the plan if so zoned) when that area is in alarm.
(2) The annunciator panel shall be graphic type and shall have an
audible alarm and provide visual indication of the zone of the
building in which the alarm initiating detector is located.
(3) The annunciator panel shall be of modular construction, flush
mounted with the required number of LEDs for use on 24 V DC.
Each LED shall indicate one building zone.
(4) The annunciator panel shall have a visible and an audible trouble
indicator with silencing switch. The annunciator LEDs shall be
electronically supervised. Removal of LED or LED failure shall
sound the system trouble signal. LEDs shall be bright enough to be
visible in direct sunlight if the annunciator is so located.
(5) Graphic annunciator panel shall have capability to bypass audible
fire and trouble alarms. These alarms shall be bypassed if
Annunciator Panel is located next to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
i. Notification Appliances
1) The fire alarm and detection system shall be designed with sufficient
notification devices to provide ample notification for the building occupants.
Notification shall include both audible and visual devices spaced in accordance
with all applicable codes.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 293
2) Audible
(a) Audible devices such as horns, bells and/or speakers, shall be located
throughout each facility as required by code to provide audible
notification of the fire alarm condition. Audible devices shall be specified
with multiple tap settings to facilitate adjustment of the sound intensity to
adapt to the final installed conditions.
(b) The type of audible device shall be determined from the requirements of
the facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop a
recommendation for the type of audible device and submit to the RCJ for
(c) Audible devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
3) Visual
(a) Strobes shall be located throughout each facility as required by code to
provide visual notification of the fire alarm condition. Strobes shall be
specified with multiple candela ratings to facilitate adjustment of the light
intensity to adapt to the final installed conditions.
(b) Flashing beacons shall be utilized in place of strobes where insufficient
coverage is available from a strobe.
(c) Flashing beacons may also be used to supplement the fire alarm strobes
where deemed necessary due to the final application.
(d) Visual devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
4) Audible/Visual Combination Devices
(a) The use of combination audible/visual devices is permitted and is the
preferred approach.
j. Signal Modules
1) These devices are addressable and allow interface with the various types of
non-addressable initiating devices such as flow switches, tamper switches,
industrial grade flame detectors, etc.
k. Control Modules
1) These devices are addressable and facilitate integration of control functions
between the fire alarm system and other building systems. Several examples
include; air handling unit shutdown, release of door hold open devices, opening
of automatic doors and gates, and initiation of fire suppression systems.
l. Power Source(s)
1) Power to the control panel must be fed from a reliable source of supply which
will not be disconnected for maintenance on other electrical systems. The
circuit breaker shall be labeled "Fire Alarm - Do Not Switch Off" and shall be
capable of being locked.
2) Standby power shall be available to the system in case of failure of the main
power source. Integral backup provision with nickel cadmium batteries shall be
located in the control panel. The backup batteries shall be sufficient to operate
the fire alarm system for a minimum of 24 hours.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 294
3) Where the building is furnished with a backup power source such as generator,
battery, or UPS the fire alarm and detection system shall be supplied from the
life safety emergency power branch in addition to the integral batteries.
4) Power supplies for the fire alarm and detection system shall initially be sized
with 20% spare capacity to accommodate future system modifications.
m. Wiring Requirements
1) General
(a) The wiring network for the fire alarm and detection system must be
designed in accordance with the applicable codes and must address the
criticality of the facility. The extent of redundancy and survivability must
be determined to properly specify the appropriate wiring system. The
paragraphs below provide an overview of the characteristics for the
wiring systems commonly used for fire alarm systems.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an assessment of the
facility and develop the class and survivability recommendations for the
fire alarm system wiring including but not limited to the following:
(1) Initiating device circuits (IDC)
(2) Signaling line circuits (SLC)
(3) Notification appliance circuits (NAC)
(c) These recommendations shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for
2) Circuit and Pathway Characteristics
(a) Class
(1) Class A: Includes a redundant path and its operational capability
will continue past a single open. Any conditions that affect the
intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(2) Class B: Pathway does not include a redundant path and its
operational capability stops at a single open. Any conditions that
affect the intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(3) Class C: Includes one or more pathways where end-to-end
communications verifies operation integrity. The integrity of
individual paths is not monitored, and loss of end-to-end
communications is annunciated.
(4) Class D: Includes pathways that have a fail-safe operation that
performs the intended function when the connection is lost. The
pathways do not have supervision of their integrity. An example for
Class D is the wiring that provides power to the door holders.
Interruption of the power results in the door closing.
(5) Class E: Includes pathways that do not require monitoring for
integrity or electrical supervision.
(6) Class X: Includes a redundant path and its operational capability
will continue past a single open or short circuit. Any conditions that
affect the intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(b) Levels of Survivability:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 295
(1) Level 0: Pathways have no required level of survivability.

(2) Level 1: Include those pathways installed in buildings which are
fully protected by automatic fire protection systems. Any
interconnecting conductors, cables or other physical pathways are
installed in metal raceways.
(3) Level 2: This level consists of one or more of the following:
(i) 2-hour, fire-rated circuit integrity (CI) cable
(ii) 2-hour, fire-rated cable systems [electrical circuit protective
system(s)]
(iii) 2-hour, fire-rated enclosure or protected area
(iv) 2-hour performance alternatives approved by the authority
having jurisdiction
(4) Level 3: This is identical to Level 2 except the pathways are
installed in buildings which are fully protected by automatic fire
protection systems.
3) Installation
(a) The fire alarm and detection cabling shall be installed in a dedicated
raceway system. Under no circumstances shall cables other than fire
alarm cables be installed in fire alarm raceways.
(b) Minimum size of wire shall be 1.5 mm² stranded copper.
(c) Minimum conduit sizes shall be 20 mm.
(d) All wiring shall enter panels from the bottom to prevent moisture from
entering the panel through the conduit.
(e) All wires shall be numbered and labeled.
(f) Provide separate circuits for audible and visual devices.
n. Fire Alarm System Overall Integration
1) Fire Alarm Network within the Camp / Compound
(a) The primary manned response center for the fire alarm shall be central
control room within the camp / compound. Centralized reporting of the
Fire Alarm shall be via fire alarm network and shall be available at the
Central Control room where a dedicated Fire Alarm Workstation with
Large Screen HMI / Mimic Panel shall be provided.
(b) The secondary manned response center for the fire alarm shall be
available at guard house. Repeat mimic panels are used to supervise the
entire camps/ compound and shall be installed in all guard houses.
(c) The Fire Alarm network shall be a networked system compliant with
NFPA 72, style 7, (Class A) supervised communications network
requirements. It shall be made up of nodes which consist of interfaces to
intelligent Local Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) located in all buildings
within the camp / compound.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 296
(d) Data transfer between locations shall use Highways conforming to NFPA
72, Style 7 wired, (Class A) communications with full network
communications supervision and reporting
(e) All individual fire alarm will be generated from FACP and shall be
graphically displayed at the centralized Fire Alarm Workstation.
(f) The FACP shall also be integrated with BAS. Common Fire Alarm and
Common Fault Alarm shall be available at BAS for alarm and reporting.
2) Confirmed fire alarm in each building shall give following actions:
(a) A visual alarm (red LED) on the FACP display panel in the building
(b) A general audible alarm in the building
(c) An audible and visual alarm at Fire Alarm Workstation in central control
room and Mimic panel at guard house
(d) General audible and visual alarm in BAS
(e) Auto telephone dial with associated Fire Station
(f) Interface with HVAC control panel to auto shutdown HAVC and
ventilation system. FACP will provide shutdown signal to respective
HVAC DDC control panel, but the shutdown logic shall be via DDC
control panel relay logic to directly stop the HVAC package, and shall not
use the DDC software logic. FACP common shutdown signal will be
monitored by BAS, and shall have alarm lamp on HVAC DDC Controller
panel.
(g) Auto shutdown Fire Dampers
(h) Interface with elevator to lock the elevator to safety location. (option)
(i) Interface and monitoring auto sprinkler system - Each sprinkler system
shall at minimum provide following signals to FACP
- Tamper Switch for each Zone Area
- Flow Switch for each Zone Area
- Sprinkler Pressure SW
(j) Interface and monitoring clean Agent system. Each clean agent system
shall at minimum provide following signals to FACP:
- Clean Agent Common Alarm
- Clean Agent Common Fault
- Clean Agent Confirmed Discharge Alarm
M. Documentation
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic requirements for documentation
associated with Instrumentation and Control systems.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 297
2. Required Instrumentation Documents

b. Following is a complete list of instrumentation documents which are to be prepared,
as required, in the design stage of any plant. This list shall be used for the
preparation of the “J” section in the drawing control.
1) Process Flow Diagram (PFD) - Only one circle symbol shall be used for each
control loop, regardless of how many items of equipment eventually are
required for the complete control loop. The identification letters shall be
selected in accordance with Standard Detail Drawing 406000-
001/002/003/004/005.
2) Piping and Instrument Diagram (P&ID) - shall be prepared in accordance with
Standard Detail Drawing 406000-001/002/003/004/005 to cover symbols and
abbreviations. All instruments and accessory items as well as interconnecting
pneumatic and electrical lines shall be shown in accordance with Standard
Detail Drawing 406000-001/002/003/004/005.
3) Control System Design Specifications / Guideless
List of RCJ design guidelines / specifications for instrumentation and control
system design requirements, installation requirements, standards, quality
insurance, assembly stage area, testing procedure, shipment, storage, site
support, start up and commissioning, guarantee etc.
4) Instrument installation Schedules - used as the primary instrument index and
material control sheet. Each instrument shall be listed and all instruments
having the same numerical loop identifier shall be grouped together.
5) I/O List
(a) I/O List is a document containing a list of instrumentation which serves
as an input or output of a control system. Therefore, only the tag number
that physically has a cable which connects to the control system appears
on I/O List.
(b) When there is more than one control system in a plant (e.g. PCS and
BAS, FGS, CMS), the I/O list shall clearly indicate which instrument is
assigned to which control system or may separate them into different
sections of the document.
(c) In I/O lists, the following information should be stated as a minimum but
not limited to:
(1) Tag number

(2) Service description
(3) P&ID Number
(4) Type of Instrument
(5) Location
(6) I/O Type
(7) Control System
(8) Signal level
(9) Power Supply Requirement

Rev. 0 5.5 - 298
(10) Calibration Range

(11) Alarm set points
6) Instrument Specification Sheets (ISS) or Data Sheets - Each instrument item

is to be detailed on a suitable ISS.
Commentary Note: Packaged unit instruments shall also be specified on
standard ISSs.
7) Instrument Calculation Sheets and Details. - These are designed to be used
as work sheets for the calculations of Pitot tube meters, orifice plates, venture
meters, control valves and relief valves. They also serve as a record of the
conditions on which the calculation was based.
Commentary Note: Calculation sheet(s) generated from workstation or vendor
software packages are acceptable.
8) Control System Architecture Drawing
(a) Control system architecture depicts the architecture of the plant control
systems and the interfaces amongst the systems required for overall
operation of process plant.
(b) The required Control System is determined by the level of
functionality, complexity and safety of a plant. This may comprise
of process control system, safety instrumented system, building
automation system, fire alarm system, fire suppression system, SACDA
control system.
(c) Control system architecture drawings shall also show supervisory level
equipment such as operator workstation, engineering workstation, large
screen display, Instrument asset management server, historian server,
cyber security server, control panel type, interface with other third party
systems, fire and gas system and also network equipment.
(d) Control system architecture shall clearly define the locations, i.e. main
locations, remote I/O locations, indoor/outdoor location, control
room/building limit.
(e) The major control, Ethernet and communication cables are to be shown
and specified.
(f) The control system architecture is conceptual in nature and is used for
specifying the requirements of the control system to the PCS/SCADA
Supplier. This drawing is provided as supporting documentation for the
process control system requisition.
9) Layout Drawings.
(a) Control room layout drawings shall show in plan view the location of
consoles, panels, control racks, computer racks and peripherals, logic
racks, termination racks and boxes.
(b) Remote building (Process Interface Buildings, Analyzer House, etc.)
layout drawings shall show the position of each item of major equipment.
(c) Layout of Control Room Console, Panel, Cabinets, and/or Local Panel -
Normally these drawings serve only as a guide for the vendor. Therefore,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 299
neither construction details nor exact dimensions are required on these

drawings. Only the overall dimensions, location of instrument items,
shape, graphic layout and general layout are required.
Commentary Note: In instances where the Local Panel is to be field
fabricated, and the instruments to be field mounted, complete lay-out and
construction details are required.
(d) Front of Control Room Console, Panel and/or Local Panel - Besides the
basic information as specified in (c), the layout of the panelboard front
shall also indicate the cut-out dimensions and mounting details for all
instrument items.
(e) Back of Control Room Console, Panel and/or Local Panel - In addition to
the basic information as specified in (c), the layout of the panelboard
back shall indicate:
(1) Exact location where signal cabling, data highway cabling, and
electrical power wiring enters the console or panelboard. Instrument
air supply and pneumatic tubing must also be shown as applicable
to each installation.
(2) Panel illumination.
(3) Location and designation number of terminal strips or electrical
junction boxes.
(4) Main air supply header, if required.
(5) Schematic layout of pneumatic tubing runs, when applicable.
(f) Front and Back of Cabinet/Rack Layout - As a minimum shall show
dimensions, equipment location, wiring raceway, cable entries and
terminal strips.
(g) The Vendor's final drawings shall be used for record purposes. Drawings
which are likely to be changed later, as front of console or panelboard,
back of console or panelboard and terminal layout drawings, shall
comply with RCJ’s drafting requirements for engineering drawings.
10) Cable Block Diagram
A cable block diagram typically shows all the control equipment and panels
and the interconnection between them. Cable number and the number of
cores or pairs of cores are usually all that is needed to be shown.
11) Cable Schedule
The cable schedule is developed from the cable block diagram, and will show
cable length, core size, construction and type of power/signal as well as the
cable number and number of cores/pairs. It will also show if the cable is to be
provided by the installer, or whether the cable is supplied by an equipment
vendor as well.
12) Instrument Interconnection Wiring Diagrams
(a) Instrument Interconnection Wiring Diagrams shall be prepared for each
of the following enclosures:
(1) Field junction box's and field control panels.
(2) Marshalling cabinets.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 300
(3) All instrument console/panels, cabinet/racks, junction boxes, located

in substations, equipment rooms, server rooms, control rooms, etc.
(b) The purpose of this drawing is to show the individual wiring between
devices (e.g., terminal blocks, indicating lights, switches, I/O modules),
and to identify cable numbers, wire tagging, terminal identification, fuse
sizes, etc. All spare termination points are to be shown on this drawing.
13) Instrument Loop Drawing
(a) Instrument Loop diagram is a detailed drawing showing a connection
from one point to a control system. It is an important engineering
deliverable to be used for checking of a correct installation and
connection when testing during pre-commissioning, commissioning and
also for trouble shooting during operation.
(b) Instrument Loop Drawing shall include connection between:
(1) Field instrument to control system (or vice versa)
(2) Signal from Local Control Panel to control system (or vice versa)
(3) Signal from MCC to control system (or vice versa)
(4) Signal form one control system to another system
(5) FF Segment allocation to Control System
(c) Loop diagram shows instrument (in a symbol) and its terminal numbers
which are to be connected, instrument cable number, junction
box number, terminal number assigned for the specified instrument,
multi-pair cable and pair number , marshaling cabinet number, terminal
number in marshaling cabinet, control system details (rack, slot, I/O
channel). It also clearly indicates location of each equipment by means
of a border line as a limit.
(d) Loop Diagram usually shows a single control loop which means it could
only contains just one input (sensor to control system), just one output
(control system to final element) or combination of both
(e) The following is a list of data required along with its source/reference:
(1) Instrument Terminal number. Most instrument could be assumed to
use (+) and (-). Terminals. Instrument which needs special
arrangement such as smoke detector or instrument which in series
loop, requires manufacturer connection detail to make the cable is
properly connected.
(2) Junction box terminal number, this information could be obtained
from JB wiring connection
(3) Marshaling terminal number, this information could be obtained
from marshaling wiring connection.
(4) I/O point detail information. Obtain this information from I/O
assignment which is produced by system integrator or control
system vendor.
14) Control System Sequence of Operation, Control Narrative, C&E or Logic
Narrative

Rev. 0 5.5 - 301
The control narrative, sequence of operation, C&E or Logic Narrative are

critical components of design deliverables as they interpret the design
intension of control and interlock functional requirements, and provide all
information for the system integration supplier to configure the control system.
15) List of Nameplates for Instruments - List of Nameplates for Instruments -
Separate drawings shall be prepared to cover nameplates required for
instruments as follows:
(a) Control room panel mounted instruments
(b) Rack mounted instruments
(c) Local panel mounted instruments
(d) Local mounted instruments
(e) Annunciator
16) Instruments mounted in Control Room Console, Panel, Rack or Local Panel -
Panel mounted instruments shall be provided with two nameplates, one on
the front and one on the back; rack mounted instruments shall have front
mounted nameplates only. The front nameplate shall show service description
and tag (mark) number including plant and instrument number. In case of
multipoint instruments, this information shall be shown for each point.
17) Instrument Piping Details.
18) Instrument Mounting Details.
19) Field calibration sketches and reports.
c. The following is a list of Instrumentation documents that are to be prepared by the
system integration Supplier, in the design / procurement / Construction stage of any
plant.
1) Specification Compliance Comparison Sheet.
2) Non- Compliance Registration.
3) Scope of work
4) Bill of Quantities
Panel Equipment Schedule (Bill of Quantities) - This schedule shall be
prepared to inform the panel vendor about the types, sources, installation,
etc., of the instruments and other miscellaneous equipment that is shown on
the different panel drawings.
5) Product Catalogues, selection details
6) Product operation and installation manuals
7) Product Certificate
8) PCS Functional Design Specification
9) SCADA system Functional Specification
10) BAS system Functional Specification
11) IAMS Functional Design Specification
12) Control Panel layout Drawing

Rev. 0 5.5 - 302
13) Control Panel Wiring Diagram

14) Control Panel Termination Drawing
15) System Architecture Drawing
16) Overall System Network Schematic
17) I/O Allocation Details
18) Factory Acceptance Test Procedure
19) Serial Link Database ( Mapping Table)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 303
5.5.4 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE

A. General
1. Introduction
a. The Design Guidelines below are intended to be general in nature. The purpose of
these guidelines is to provide the A/E and/or EPC contractors with the requirements
of the RCJ for specific building types. These guidelines are not intended to provide
design knowledge but rather to indicate additional information, provisions and
submissions for each building type.
b. The Building Types are separated into the following categories:
1) Public/Government
2) Commercial
3) Residential
4) Industrial
5) Specialty Applications
c. Each of these categories is broken down further into sub-categories for specific
building types. If the A/E and/or EPC contractor retained to design a building whose
type is not contained in this section, then they must request specific design
guidelines from RCJ prior to commencing the work.
d. The A/E and/or EPC contractors shall submit, in each of the design phase
submissions, how they have addressed each of the provisions for their respective
building type.
e. Refer to Subsection 5.3.5 Guidelines by Building Types for additional information
regarding the occupancy requirements.
2. Definitions and Abbreviations:
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
B. Public/Government
1. Athletic Venues
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) To support the playing and viewing of a sport with all the
necessary infrastructure to support the athletes as well as the
spectators.
(1) The type of Athletic Venues may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Baseball
(ii) Soccer/Football

Rev. 0 5.5 - 304
(iii) Basketball
(iv) Swimming
(v) Gymnastics
(vi) Hockey
(vii) Rugby
(viii) Cricket
(ix) Track and Field
(x) Tennis
(xi) Golf
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(1) Provisions of power to scoreboards
(2) Provision of power to video boards
(3) Provision of power to illuminated signs
(4) Provision of power to out buildings for maintenance and
concessions
(5) Provision of normal power service and equipment with appropriate
redundancy for the hosted events
(6) Provision of backup power source appropriate for the venue
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate and adequate lighting to satisfy the
illumination levels required for the event type in accordance with
governing sports authority
(2) Provision of emergency lighting with instant strike operation to
facilitate egress during a power outage
(3) Provision of security lighting for exterior facilities
(4) Provision of appropriate lighting controls to facilitate manual,
automatic and/or programmed control
(a) Communications
(1) Provisions for video and scoreboards
(2) Provisions for video distribution system infrastructure
(3) Provisions for structured cabling system
(4) Provisions for wireless (WIFI)
(5) Provisions for public address system
(6) Provisions for distributed antennae system
(7) Provisions for digital signage system

Rev. 0 5.5 - 305
(8) Provisions for Network and telephony systems

(b) Safety and Security
(1) Consider layered Access Control approach
(2) Security Command Center
(3) Security gates and turnstiles
(4) CCTV surveillance cameras and systems
(5) Intrusion detection zones
(6) Emergency radio communications
4) Instrumentation and Controls
(a) Irrigation controls
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the assembly occupancy of the facility
(c) Control for fire suppression system
(d) DDC Controller for HAVC / Lighting / Energy Efficiency Control
(e) BAS system
b. Submittals
(a) Special technical requirements or features
(b) Description of features
(c) Description of security measures
c. References
1) Consult the appropriate sport governing body and adhere to all applicable
regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These include but are not
(a) IOC – International Olympic Committee
(b) ITF – International Tennis Federation
(c) FINA – Federation Internationale de Natation
(d) NCAA – National Collegiate Athletic Association
(e) IAAF – International Association of Athletics Federations
(f) FIFA – Federation Internationale de Football Association
(g) FIBA – Federation Internationale de Basketball
(h) IFAF – International Federation of American Football
(i) NABBP – National Association of Base Ball Players
(j) IIHF – International Ice Hockey Federation

Rev. 0 5.5 - 306
2. Aviation
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Provide a safe and secure place for flight
(ii) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities
and function for the facility
(iii) Comply with all requirements of the General Authority of Civil
Aviation of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) The type of Aviation building may include but is not limited to the
following:
(i) Airports
(ii) Heliports/helipads
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility. Consider multiple service feeders and
redundant electrical components
(2) Provision of backup power source to supply the crucial electrical
loads throughout the facility
(3) Provision of power to out buildings for maintenance
(4) Provision of power for monitors throughout the facility
(5) Provision of power to pedestrian movement equipment
(6) Provision of power to illuminated signage
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of lighting systems (fixtures and controls) for public
spaces which maximizes the use of available daylighting to
minimize the energy associated with artificial lighting.
(2) Provision of night/security lighting throughout the facility to ensure
safe passage and security.
(3) Provision of exterior lighting to facilitate movement of aircraft and
support equipment.
(a) Communications
(1) Radio and satellite monitoring equipment
(2) Accessible outlets for personal electronic devices

Rev. 0 5.5 - 307
(3) Provisions for structured cabling system

(4) Provisions for wireless (WIFI)
(5) Provisions for public address and General Alarm system
(6) Provisions for distributed antennae system
(7) Provisions for digital signage system
(8) Provisions for network and telephony systems
(1) Restrict access from unauthorized persons or vehicles to runways
or private areas from both the interior and exterior.
(2) Create controlled access points for entry into terminals for security
checks.
(3) Provide security command centers
(4) Design CCTV surveillance systems
(5) Provide parking control systems
(6) Provide emergency communications systems
(7) Layered access control approach
(8) Security command center
(9) Security gates and turnstiles
(10) CCTV surveillance cameras and systems.
(12) Emergency radio communications
(13) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice
communications to address the code requirements for the facility
(a) Irrigation Controls
(b) Provision of instrumentation and controls associated with bulk fuel off
loading and storage.
b. Submittals
c. References/Standards
1) Federal Aviation Administration
2) UK Civil Aviation Authority

Rev. 0 5.5 - 308
3. Community Center
1) Goals of the facility
the following:
(1) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and
function for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical components where the facility may be utilized
as an emergency shelter during natural disaster
(3) Provision of power for fitness equipment
(4) Provision of power for electrically operated folding partitions to
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities
(5) Provision of power for displays and kiosks associated with
advertising of events
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate lighting and controls for areas for religious
use
(2) Provision of lighting for displays and kiosks associated with
advertising of events
(3) Provision of zoned lighting and associated controls to adapt to
various space configurations
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors.
appropriate.
(3) Distributed antenna systems shall be considered for mobile phone
and emergency responder services.
(4) Voice over IP telephone systems
(5) Digital signage systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 309
(1) Perimeter access control systems

(2) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones
(3) Site CCTV video surveillance
(4) Public area CCTV video surveillance
(6) Security information desk
(8) Emergency communications systems
(9) Parking control systems
communications to address the code requirements for the assembly
occupancies within the facility
(a) Irrigation controls
(b) Provision of instrumentation and controls associated with automatic
water level maintenance, chemical dosing and cleaning of swimming
pools
5) Related Functions/Facilities
(a) For facilities devoted exclusively for religious gathering, refer to
Subsection 5.5.4.B.6 – Mosques. Spaces for religious usage within a
multi-use Community Center shall likewise be designed in accordance
with that Section.
(b) Athletic Functions
(1) Swimming Pools are to be designed according to Subsection
5.5.4.B.1.
(2) Outdoor athletic facilities are to be designed according to
Subsection 5.5.4.B.1.
(c) Libraries
(1) Library areas within Community Centers shall conform to
Subsection 5.5.4.B.5 – Libraries.
b. Submittals
4. Hospital

Rev. 0 5.5 - 310
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Create a safe and healthy environment for the care of patients.
and function for the facility.
(1) The type of Hospital facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) General
a) Nursing Units
b) Diagnostic and Treatment Facilities
c) Freestanding Emergency Departments
d) Critical Access Hospitals
e) Rehabilitation Hospitals and Other Facilities
f) Children’s Hospitals
g) Laboratories
h) Clinics
i) Pharmacy
(ii) Outpatient Facilities
a) Primary Care Facilities
b) Freestanding Outpatient Diagnostic and Treatment
Facilities
c) Freestanding Birth Centers
d) Freestanding Urgent Care Facilities
e) Freestanding Cancer Treatment Facilities
f) Outpatient Surgical Facilities
g) Office-Based Procedure and Operating Rooms
h) Endoscopy Facilities
i) Renal Dialysis Centers
j) Outpatient Psychiatric Centers
k) Outpatient Rehabilitation Therapy Facilities
l) Mobile, Transportable, and Relocatable Units
m) Dental Facilities
2) Electrical
(a) Power

Rev. 0 5.5 - 311

redundant electrical components.
loads throughout the facility. Segregation of the emergency power
distribution into multiple branches.
(3) Provision of power for medical equipment.
(4) Selection of electrical components to maximize reliability.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of energy efficient lighting which will comfort for the
healing environment.
(2) Provision of controls and dimming to enhance patient comfort during
various procedures.
(3) Provision of ample lighting in procedure and operating rooms to
support the needs of healthcare professionals.
(4) Selection of lighting fixtures in specialty areas to avoid interference
due to electrical noise which may be caused by ballasts.
(a) Communications
(1) Nurse call systems
(2) Patient monitoring systems
(3) Imaging network systems and storage
(4) Telemedicine, videoconferencing, and teleconferencing
(5) Patient television and media systems
appropriate.
and facility services

Rev. 0 5.5 - 312

communications to address the code requirements for the facility.
Interface fire alarm with other communications and alarm systems
4) Instrumentation and Control
(a) Potable Water System
(b) Sanitary Water Lift Station
(c) Irrigation System
(d) Wet Chemical Control System
(e) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the facility. Interface fire alarm with
other communications and alarm systems
(f) Fire Suppression Control System
(g) Medical Gas Storage
(h) BAS System
b. Submittals
c. References
1) Facility Guidelines Institute Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health
Care Facilities
2) Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPPA)
5. Libraries
1) Goals and Purpose
the following:
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility

Rev. 0 5.5 - 313

(3) Provision of power for technology equipment and computers
(4) Provision of power for electrically operated book retrieval system
(5) Consideration for provision of controls with motion sensors to power
down equipment and computers when facility is not occupied.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provide appropriate lighting levels and fixture positions in the
lighting design for stacks, reference areas, reading areas, meeting
rooms, and computer banks.
(2) Provision of controls and dimming to facilitate adjustments to
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses
(3) Provision of controls for spaces with ample daylighting to reduce
artificial light when the available natural light is sufficient
(4) Provision of motion sensors to automatically de-energize artificial
lighting when the space is not occupied
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors. Uses may include web-
meetings, teaching, and distance learning.
(2) Public-access computer space
(3) Audio books, and video resources
(4) Special consideration shall be given to the data requirements of
technology and computers including individually owned electronic
devices.
(5) Consider space for literacy training, computer technology training,
appropriate.
(1) Resource check-out stations including RFID or magnetic detection
gates

Rev. 0 5.5 - 314

(b) Irrigation System
(c) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility.
(d) BAS System
b. Submittals
6. Mosque
(a) Provide a safe and spiritual place to practice Islam.
(b) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for audio visual equipment
(4) There shall be no point or “spear” rising above the crescent. The
Hilal shall act as a lightning terminal removing the need for
additional lightning rods.
(b) Lighting
(1) Lighting levels shall be sufficient for reading at near floor level. The
use of chandeliers or special lighting is not needed

Rev. 0 5.5 - 315

lighting levels for the various activities
(a) Communications
(1) The sound system shall be simple in design, installation, operation,
and maintenance.
(2) Clocks shall be provided to show worshippers the proper times for
prayers.
appropriate.
(1) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones as
appropriate
(2) Site CCTV video surveillance where appropriate
(3) Intrusion detection zones for after-hours monitoring
(c) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the facility.
(d) BAS System
b. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 316
7. Museum
1) Goals of the Museum
(a) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for special space conditioning equipment
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate lighting for exhibit spaces. Goals of lighting
design are to enhance the viewing experience. Lighting
considerations include: the amount of illumination; the fixture and
lamp selection; the positioning of fixtures and direction of lighting.
(2) Ambient artificial light can seriously affect paintings and artifacts and
likewise warrants professional consideration for selection of source
and controls.
(3) Lighting and illumination can create accents that draw attention to
areas or exhibits and thereby prompt movement.
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses.
(a) Communications
(1) Technology considerations include but are not limited to visual
computer animations, flat screen presentations, video feeds, and
computer-controlled technical effects, and motion-sensor activated
exhibits.
(2) Sound and acoustic considerations include such things as audio
feeds for the above and acoustical separation from neighboring
exhibits that may be adversely impacted.
(3) For the hearing impaired, portable audio devices can enable access
to exhibit audio feeds or live presentations. Various technologies
exist for text renditions of auditory tracts.
appropriate.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 317

(1) Exhibit security is typically a high priority in museums due to the
value of objects and the irreplaceability of historic treasures.
Security typically revolves around theft prevention and the
prevention of vandalism. Electronic detection devices, camera
systems, motion sensors, physical barriers and observation by
security personnel are among the ways this can be done.
Restricted access, alarmed exits with delayed egress hardware are
among the possibilities.
(2) Many of the same elements are required for storage security as
exhibit security, but the physical barriers and locking arrangements
are necessarily more elaborate.
(3) Consideration shall be given to Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID) asset management of museum collections.
(4) Display case glass break detectors, laser intrusion sensors,
thermal sensors, and shock/motion sensors shall be considered for
high value museum artifacts and collections.
(6) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones.
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility
(e) BAS System

Rev. 0 5.5 - 318

(b) Describe the general systems to be employed for fire safety for
collections and storage, over-and-above code requirements.
(c) Describe entrance security.
8. Ports/Docks
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility.
loads throughout the facility.
(3) Provision of power for dock services and equipment.
(4) Electrical components shall be chosen with environmental durability
and water resistance as primary concerns.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of safety lighting.
(2) Lighting fixtures shall be chosen with environmental durability and
water resistance as primary concerns.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(5) Public address and General Alarm system
(6) Systems shall be chosen with environmental durability and water
resistance as primary concerns.
(7) Radio systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 319
(1) Security gate checkpoints

(5) Site CCTV video surveillance and Multi-sensor Thermal Cameras
with Continuous Zoom Lens
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements assembly occupancies in the facility.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals
9. Schools
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) To create a secure and nurturing environment for the civic,
emotional, cognitive, vocational and social development of
students.
(1) The type of Schools may include but are not limited to the following:
(i) Pre-primary (kindergarten)
(ii) Primary (grade school)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 320
(iii) Intermediate (middle school)

(iv) Secondary (high school)
(v) Technical institutes
(vi) College/university
2) Electrical
(a) Power
as an emergency shelter during natural disaster.
(3) Provision of power for kitchen/food service facilities. Consider
backup power for food storage.
(4) Provision of power for all educational equipment.
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities.
(b) Lighting
(1) Rooms shall be provided with individual lighting controls.
(2) Utilize diffuse, uniform lighting that eliminates glare and reduces
fatigue.
(3) Maximize day lighting while reducing glare and optimizing visual
comfort.
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses.
artificial light when the available natural light is sufficient.
lighting when the space is not occupied.
(7) Provision of theatrical dimming system for auditoriums.
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors. Uses may include web-
meetings, teaching, and distance learning.
(2) Library requirements including student-access computer space,
audio books, and video resources.
devices.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 321
(4) Consider space for literacy training, computer technology training,

appropriate.
(10) Masterclock systems
(11) Bell systems
(1) Safety and security of the students shall be the highest priority in the
design of schools.
(2) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized
individuals and vehicles.
(3) Provide areas for emergency shelter in areas where natural
disasters are more prominent.
(4) Library resource check-out stations including RFID or magnetic
detection gates.
(5) Entrance security gates
(10) Intercom stations
(11) Security office
(14) Vehicular control systems
to address the code requirements assembly occupancies in the facility.
(d) BAS System
b. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 322

c. References
1) Consult all appropriate educational bodies for any additional applicable
regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These include but are not
(a) Ministry of Education.
(b) Ministry of Higher Education.
(c) General Organization for Technical Education and Vocational Training.
C. Commercial
1. Hospitality
(a) Goals
(b) Types of Facilities
(1) Hotel
(2) Timeshare
(3) Resort
(4) Conference Center
(5) Other
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for fitness equipment.
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities.
(5) Provision of sub-metering of electrical services for tenants of the
facility.
(6) Provision of power to equipment for pool and spa facilities.
(7) Provision of power to kitchen facilities. Include backup power as
required for food storage.
(b) Lighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 323

lighting levels to accommodate various space uses. Lighting
controls shall have capability to adapt to various space
configurations.
(a) Communications
(1) Conference Center audio-visual and sound systems shall be
adequate for the expected uses including consideration of speakers,
projection screens, projectors, and flat panel monitors.
devices.
appropriate.
(5) Voice over IP telephone systems.
(6) Digital signage systems.
(1) Room card key access control and management systems
(7) Security office
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system as necessary to address the
code requirements for the various occupancies for the facility.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 324
(e) BAS System

b. Submittals
2. Office
(a) Define whether the building is a single-tenant or multi-tenant building.
(b) Define the building as a low-rise (1-2 stories), mid-rise (3-10 stories), or
high-rise (11 or more stories, typically over 23 m in height). Provide
building and zoning code categorization as well.
(c) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of sub-metering for multi-tenant occupancies.
(4) Provision of normal and backup power for smoke evacuation
systems which may be required in the building.
(5) Provision of normal and backup power for systems associated with
a high rise building.
(b) Lighting
(1) Implementation of task/ambient lighting scheme to provide individual
workstation control and reduced energy consumption.
(2) Provision of zone controls to facilitate operation for various space
configurations.
(3) Provision of daylighting controls for spaces with ample natural light.
(a) Communications

Rev. 0 5.5 - 325

devices.
appropriate.
(1) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized
individuals and vehicles.
(2) Emergency stairwell floor re-entry in high rise buildings where
required.
(4) Security information desks
(5) Perimeter access control systems including elevator floor access
where required
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility. Address special provisions required for high
rise buildings.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 326

3. Retail/Restaurants
(a) Define the development as a:
(1) Single establishment
(2) Multiple service retail development
(3) Mixed-use development
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of power for kitchen/food service equipment. Consider
backup power for walk-in and bulk refrigerators and freezers
(4) Provision of power for illuminated signs, and displays associated
with advertising
(b) Lighting
(1) Ensure appropriate lighting fixtures and illumination levels are
provided for both preparation and eating areas
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses and time of day
activities
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors
devices.
appropriate.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 327

(8) Point of sale systems
(7) Security office
(8) Intrusion detection zone
(9) Parking control systems.
(10) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(c) BAS System
b. Submittals
4. Theaters
(a) Define the goals of the facility in terms of theater type and prospective
audience.
(1) Theater types may include but not be limited to the following:
(i) Motion picture theaters
(ii) Theaters for live performance

Rev. 0 5.5 - 328

2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for audio visual and performance equipment
(4) Provision of power for illuminated signs and displays associated
with advertising of events
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider the theater type when selecting lighting systems.
(2) Provision of the appropriate control and dimming capabilities
appropriate for the theater type
(3) Provision of infrastructure for full theatrical lighting system for
facilities used for live performances
(a) Communications
(1) Sound Systems
(i) Digital sound, “surround sound”, and the character of the audio
portion of motion pictures have advanced rapidly. This
requires appropriate acoustic design within the theater and
appropriate acoustic separation.
(ii) Speaker arrays shall consider the inherent digital distribution of
film audio tracks, such as left, center, right, and multiple station
audio tracks.
(iii) Theater sound systems shall consider the appropriate sound
processor to go with the projection system.
(2) Video
(i) Digital technology: Consider provisions for the necessary digital
input including portable hard drives and encrypted files.
(ii) Older analog formats, DVD, Blu-Ray and other media may
need to be provided for.
(3) Consider the use when selecting sound systems.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 329

(6) Security office
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the assembly occupancies for the
facility. Interconnect the fire alarm notification with other sound and
communications systems.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals
D. Residential
1. Multi-Family Housing
1) Goals
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
loads in public areas of the facility
(3) Provision of power for all residential equipment
(4) Provision of power for fitness equipment
(5) Provision of power for community facilities and activity centers

Rev. 0 5.5 - 330
(6) Penetrations through walls for electrical devices shall be located to

avoid noise transmission between housing units.
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider motion sensors for the lighting for infrequently used
spaces.
(2) Selection of light sources which are appropriate for residential
occupancies.
lighting levels in common spaces to accommodate various space
uses and time of day activities
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(3) IP television systems
(1) Camera system in vestibule tied to occupant television or
computers, to allow observation of entrants
(2) Intercom system to lobby with electronic access triggered by the
building occupant
(3) Emergency call stations, if appropriate
(10) Security office
to address the code requirements for the facility
(d) Address special fire alarm provisions for high rise type buildings.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 331
(e) BAS System

b. Submittals
(b) Description of Features
(c) Description of Security measures
2. Single-Family Housing
1) Goals
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of power for all residential equipment
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider motion sensors for the lighting for infrequently used
spaces
(2) Selection of light sources which are appropriate for residential
occupancies
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(3) IP television systems
(2) Perimeter access control systems as appropriate
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm devices to address the code
requirements for a residence
(c) BAS System

Rev. 0 5.5 - 332
b. Submittals
E. Industrial
1. General Industrial
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Creating an economically optimized facility that ensures the
safety of the environment, personnel, and surrounding
community.
(1) The type of Industrial facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Distribution
(ii) Manufacturing
(iii) Warehouse
(iv) Assembly
(v) Processing
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical component
(3) Provision of power for industrial equipment
(4) Provision of power for automated storage systems
(b) Lighting
(1) Lighting shall be designed appropriately for the process of the
facility and shall consider reducing worker fatigue.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 333

(4) Provision of fixtures with appropriate ratings for the installed
environment
(a) Communications
appropriate.
and emergency responder services
(7) Radio systems
with Continuous Zoom Lens (Depending of the Type of Project)
(a) Measurement and Control Systems
(b) Process Alert and Alarm Systems
(c) Reporting Systems
(d) PLC or DCS Control Systems
(e) SCADA Systems
(f) Systems Integration
(g) Management Information Systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 334
(h) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(i) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be
required for various occupancies
(j) Irrigation System
(k) BAS system
b. Submittals
2. Chemical Processing
(a) Refer to General Industrial Subsection 5.5.4.E.1.a.1) for design
considerations pertaining to goals and purpose of the facility.
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical component.
(b) Lighting
environment.
(a) Communications
appropriate.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 335

(3) Voice over IP telephone systems.
(4) Digital signage systems.
(5) Public address and General Alarm system.
(7) Radio systems
(1) Consideration for the types of chemicals being used and or stored
and their volatility with other materials.
(3) Refer to the General Industrial Subsection 5.5.4.E.1.a.3)(b) for
design considerations pertaining to security for the facility.
(9)
(15) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be
required for various occupancies
(e) SCADA Systems
(g) Safety Integrity Systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 336
(h) Management Information Systems

(i) Industry Waste Water Lift Station
b. Submittals
c. References
(a) Chemical Engineers shall be consulted on all chemical processing
facilities.
F. Specialty Applications
1. Military
the following:
(1) Creating a secured and private environment for the housing and
operation of the military or one of its branches.
(1) The type of Military facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Administrative purposes.
(ii) Storage such as ammunition, vehicles, and/or equipment.
(iii) Base.
(iv) Housing.
(v) Training Facility.
(vi) Weapons and ammunition production.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
as an emergency shelter during natural disaster.
(3) Provision of power for security provisions at entrances to the facility.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 337
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of ample security lighting throughout the facility.
environment.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(7) Radio systems
(4) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones.
with Continuous Zoom Lens.
(a) Irrigation Systems
(c) Potable Water System
b. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 338

2. Water Treatment and/or Power Plants (Desalination)
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Uninterrupted water supply
(ii) Create an effective distribution system
(iii) Optimize supply capacity
(iv) High water quality and protection of supplies
(1) The type of Water Treatment and/or Power Plants may include but
are not limited to:
(i) Water treatment facility
(ii) Wastewater treatment plant
(iii) Captive Power Plant
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(1) Coordinate all incoming or outgoing utilities with the utility
infrastructure.
redundant electrical components
(4) Provision of power for pumping and treatment equipment
(5) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(b) Lighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 339

environment
(5) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(7) Radio systems
(1) Consideration for the types of chemicals being used/stored and their
volatility with other materials.
(2) Materials shall be chosen to prevent chemical corrosion
(e) SCADA Systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 340

(g) Safety Integrity Systems (SIS) / Emergency Shutdown System (ESD)
(h) Management Information Systems
(i) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(j) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be required
for various occupancies
(k) Fire Suppression Control System
(l) Package PLC / Local Control system
(m) Instrument Asset Management System
b. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 341
SECTION 5.6 CIVIL, SITEWORK, AND ROADWAYS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.6.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT DESIGN.................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Grading and Building Elevations ................................................................................... 1
D. Parking and Loading Requirements .............................................................................. 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
E. Setbacks ........................................................................................................................ 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
F. Fences and Walls .......................................................................................................... 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
G. Open Space ................................................................................................................... 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
H. Land Use Compatibility.................................................................................................. 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
I. Pedestrian Accessibility ................................................................................................. 3
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
J. Landscaping .................................................................................................................. 3
1. Landscaping Coordination ............................................................................................. 3
K. Earthwork....................................................................................................................... 3
1. Soil Improvements ......................................................................................................... 3
2. Rock Improvements ....................................................................................................... 3
L. Erosion and Sedimentation Controls ............................................................................. 3
5.6.2 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION ............................................................................ 4

Rev. 0 5.6 - i
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 4
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 4
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 4
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 4
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 5
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 5
8. Related Subsections ...................................................................................................... 5
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 6
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 6
C. Traffic Analysis and Transportation Planning ................................................................ 6
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 6
2. Circulation Plan ............................................................................................................. 8
3. Methodology Report ...................................................................................................... 9
4. Traffic Impact Study (TIS)............................................................................................. 11
5. Transportation Master Plan (TMP) ............................................................................... 19
6. Engineering Software ................................................................................................... 22
7. Environmental Impact ................................................................................................... 23
8. Roadside Safety Audits ................................................................................................ 23
D. Signalization ................................................................................................................. 24
1. Traffic Signal Design .................................................................................................... 24
2. Signalized Intersection Spacing and Driveway Spacing .............................................. 28
3. Traffic Surveillance ....................................................................................................... 28
4. Traffic Calming.............................................................................................................. 28
5. Mobility Measures ......................................................................................................... 28
6. Traffic Optimization ....................................................................................................... 29
7. Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) ...................................................................... 29
5.6.3 STREETS AND ROADWAYS ...................................................................................... 30
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 30
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 30
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 30
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 30
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 30

Rev. 0 5.6 - ii

6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 31
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 31
8. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 32
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 32
C. Roadway Design .......................................................................................................... 32
1. Systems and Classifications ......................................................................................... 32
2. Road Classifications ..................................................................................................... 32
3. Geometrics and Alignment ........................................................................................... 34
4. Roadway Elements ....................................................................................................... 45
5. Interchanges, Intersections and Roundabouts ............................................................. 77
6. Flexible Pavement Design ............................................................................................ 81
7. Rigid Pavement ............................................................................................................ 84
8. Resurfacing, Restoration and Rehabilitation ................................................................ 84
9. Landscape and Irrigation .............................................................................................. 84
10. Street Furniture ............................................................................................................. 84
11. Utilities .......................................................................................................................... 85
D. Maintenance of Traffic .................................................................................................. 85
1. Work Zones .................................................................................................................. 85
5.6.4 STORMWATER DRAINAGE ........................................................................................ 86
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 86
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 86
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 87
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 87
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 88
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 88
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 88
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 88
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 89
1. Not Applicable............................................................................................................... 89
C. Storm Water Management Infrastructure ..................................................................... 89
1. Storm Water Description .............................................................................................. 89

Rev. 0 5.6 - iii
2. Design Criteria: ............................................................................................................. 90

3. Hydraulic Modeling: ...................................................................................................... 98
4. Stormwater Quality ....................................................................................................... 99
5. Overland Relief ............................................................................................................ 100
D. Drainage Systems and Structures ............................................................................... 100
1. Culverts ........................................................................................................................ 100
2. Roadway Drainage ...................................................................................................... 101
3. Drainage Structures (Storm Manholes & Catch Basins) ............................................. 101
4. Open Channels ............................................................................................................ 102
5. Detention Basins/Ponds .............................................................................................. 103
6. Outfall Structures ......................................................................................................... 103
7. Exfiltration Systems ..................................................................................................... 104
5.6.5 LANDSCAPING AND PLANT IRRIGATION ............................................................... 106
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 106
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 106
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 107
3. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 107
4. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 110
6. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 112
8. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 113
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 113
C. Protection of Existing Vegetation: ............................................................................... 113
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 113
2. Guidelines and Requirements ..................................................................................... 113
3. Tree Survey ................................................................................................................. 115
4. Tree Protection Plan .................................................................................................... 115
5. Tree Replacement ....................................................................................................... 116
D. Plant Materials ............................................................................................................. 116
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 116
2. Basic Plant Types / Definitions .................................................................................... 117
3. Selection of Plant Material ........................................................................................... 118

Rev. 0 5.6 - iv
5. Climate / Environmental Considerations ..................................................................... 119

6. Maintenance Requirements......................................................................................... 121
7. Aesthetic Character and Visual Impact ....................................................................... 121
8. Planting Seasons ......................................................................................................... 121
9. Groundwater ................................................................................................................ 121
10. Soil Content ................................................................................................................. 121
11. Erosion and Dust Control, Soil Stabilization ................................................................ 121
12. Plant Installation Requirements ................................................................................... 122
E. Landscape Design Principles ...................................................................................... 126
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 126
2. Roadways, Driveways and Pedestrian Crossings ....................................................... 126
3. Sustainability:............................................................................................................... 126
F. Paving .......................................................................................................................... 127
G. Natural Access Control ................................................................................................ 127
H. Landscaping Next to Buildings .................................................................................... 127
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 127
I. Screening..................................................................................................................... 127
1. General: ....................................................................................................................... 127
2. Screening Requirements: ............................................................................................ 128
3. Minimum Size Requirements:...................................................................................... 128
4. Screening Between Uses: ........................................................................................... 128
5. Vehicular Use Area Screening: ................................................................................... 130
J. Irrigation Systems ........................................................................................................ 132
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 132
2. Location of Irrigation Systems ..................................................................................... 132
3. Irrigation Design Requirements ................................................................................... 133
4. Water Sources for Irrigation Systems .......................................................................... 134
5. Irrigation Drawing Requirements ................................................................................. 134
K. Site Furnishings & Elements ....................................................................................... 135
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 135
3. Selection of Site Furnishings ....................................................................................... 135
4. Location and Installation of Site Furnishings ............................................................... 136
5. Seating......................................................................................................................... 136

Rev. 0 5.6 - v
6. Receptacles ................................................................................................................. 137

7. Drinking Fountains ....................................................................................................... 137
8. Bicycle Racks .............................................................................................................. 137
9. Bollards ........................................................................................................................ 138
L. Gateways, Monuments and Public Art ........................................................................ 138
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 138
3. Installation.................................................................................................................... 139
4. Gateways ..................................................................................................................... 139
5. Public Art ..................................................................................................................... 141
M. Plazas, Squares and Parks ......................................................................................... 142
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 142
3. Plazas .......................................................................................................................... 143
4. Squares ....................................................................................................................... 144
5. Parks............................................................................................................................ 145
N. Hardscape Design ....................................................................................................... 148
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 148
2. Location of Hardscape Material: .................................................................................. 148
3. Types of Hardscape Materials: .................................................................................... 148
4. Design Guidelines for Hardscape Materials: ............................................................... 148
O. Use of Recycled Materials ........................................................................................... 149
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 149

Rev. 0 5.6 - vi
SECTION 5.6.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT DESIGN
5.6.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT DESIGN
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides the basis for the design of project sites. The guidelines
apply to the following planning and design activities:
1) Site Design
2) Traffic Flow Analysis in Parking Areas
3) Grading & Drainage
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection applies to all sites.
3. Definitions
a. See each Subsection for pertinent definitions.
4. Abbreviations
b. See each Subsection for pertinent definitions.
a. This Subsection covers the design criteria for project sites, including commercial and
industrial sites.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional codes
7. Standards
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2 Site Development for Buildings
b. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4 for Site Storm Water Drainage.
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.
e. Refer to Section 5.7 for Water, Sanitary & Irrigation.
9. Approvals
B. Commissioning
Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for commissioning requirements.
C. Grading and Building Elevations

Rev. 0 5.6 - 1
1. All elevations shown must be referenced via text font to the source of the information and
the source and date of survey shall be listed in the Notes section of the drawing. All
existing or referenced elevations shall be in a screened font.
a. All elevations referenced to existing (pre-construction) shall be in an Arial, screened,
italic font. Reference shall be made to the date and source of survey.
b. Elevations from other sources such as As Built Plans shall use a unique, screened
font and reference to the font shall include the date and source of the information. If
more than one source is used, each source shall have a unique screened font.
When referencing designs currently under design, the stage (10%, 30%, etc) of the
referenced design shall be included in the Notes section.
2. Stormwater runoff for site development must be captured in an onsite system and
delivered to the JIC stormwater network through provided connections. Surface runoff
from a site into the adjoining streets is not allowed beyond a minimal amount at the
driveway
3. The Civil Site Plan will dictate the floor elevation of all buildings on all sites.
a. The grades on sites shall be designed from the elevation of surrounding roads into
the sites in order to provide for adequate drainage.
1) Surrounding road designs shall be completed first.
b. The floor elevation of buildings shall be designed from the elevation of open channel
utilities which the site shall connect to, such as sanitary sewers and storm drainage
pipes.
1) Sanitary sewer pipelines shall be designed according the Section 5.7.2,
Sanitary Sewer System.
D. Parking and Loading Requirements
1. General
E. Setbacks
1. General
F. Fences and Walls
1. General
a. Walls are required in residential designs.
b. For details of the design requirements see Subsection 5.6.5, Landscaping.
G. Open Space
1. General
a. Open space shall be included in the design of new sites as directed by the RCJ
when applying for use of the RCJ’s land.
H. Land Use Compatibility
1. General
a. All site uses shall be approved by the RCJ.
b. New sites shall be designed to be compatibility with surrounding developments,
either existing or anticipated by zoning.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 2
I. Pedestrian Accessibility
1. General
b. Accessibility designs shall provide for:
1) Compliance with the 1990 Americans with Disabilities Act
(a) Building Access
(b) Parking Lot Access
2) Pedestrian Paths of Travel
(a) Paths of travel shall be shown on site plans
3) Site Lighting
(a) Site lighting shall be shown on site plans
(b) Site lighting shall be designed to illuminate pedestrian paths of travel
J. Landscaping
1. Landscaping Coordination
a. Landscaping designs shall be designed to coordinate with and supplement site
plans without interfering with site distances for vehicle and pedestrian paths of
travel.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.7.3 for Recycled water/irrigation.
K. Earthwork
1. Soil Improvements
a. Soil improvements may be required prior to construction on the site. A geotechnical
report shall be submitted to the RCJ with the first design submittal.
b. Soil improvement in sabkha areas shall be as directed in the site Geotechnical
Design Report and in accordance with SBC 303 Chapter 11. In no instance shall the
fill material over sabkha be less than one meter thickness.
2. Rock Improvements
a. Improvement to the rock, in Karstic areas where grouting of voids may be required,
shall be as directed in the site Geotechnical Design Report and in determined from
investigation proposals developed in accordance with SBC 303 Chapter 2
L. Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
a. Erosion and sedimentation controls are required for every project site. The
engineering plans shall reference appropriate standard details.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 3
SUBSECTION 5.6.2 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION
5.6.2 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides the evaluation of traffic and transportation prior to
preparing the design of roadway networks. The guidelines apply to the following
planning and design activities:
1) Traffic Analysis and Transportation Planning
2) Signalization
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection applies to development of road network requirements.
b. This Subsection applies to all traffic impact assessment and traffic signal design.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2.A
1) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
2) AASHTO Green Book AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and
Streets
3) FHWA MUTCD Federal Highway Administration Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices
4) FHWA RSA Federal Highway Administration Roadside Safety
Audit Guideline
5) HCM Highway Capacity Manual
6) HDM The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of
Communications Highway Design Manuals
7) ITE DWUT ITE - Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares
8) ITS Intelligent Transportation Systems
9) JIC MPU Volume 6 – Transportation Royal Commission for Jubail &
Yanbu Royal Commission in Jubail
Master Plan Update Volume VI
10) KSA MUTCD The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of
Communications Manual on Uniform Control
Devices
11) LOS Level of Service
12) NACTO National Association of City Transportation Officials
Urban Bikeway Design Guide Second Edition
13) RDG AASHTO Roadside Design Guide

Rev. 0 5.6 - 4
14) RHGCH Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook

15) RCJ Urban Planning Zoning Regulations Zoning Regulations of Madinat
Al-Jubail Al-Sinaiyah – Revised
16) RIC FEED: Volume 6 – Transportation Front End Engineering and
Design of Ras Al-Khair Industrial
City (RIC) Volume 6
Transportation
a. This Subsection covers the design criteria for the road network in Jubail and Ras Al-
Khair Industrial Cities. The road network will be planned, engineered and
constructed over a 10 year period. This design requirements Subsection and the
road classifications, set forth herein, are intended to provide guidance and direction
in the planning and design of roads in both community and industrial areas.
b. The governing Codes and Standards in the RCJ shall be in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding Codes and Standards, refer to Subsection 3.1.
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Subsection, refer to Chapter 3
for a list of additional Standards.
1) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual) Volume 1 – Highway Development
2) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communication Highway Design
Manual Volume 2, Book 1 Design of Roadways
4) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communication Manual on Uniform
Control Devices
5) Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
6) AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (Greenbook)
7) AASHTO Roadside Design Guide (RDG)
8) National Cooperative Highway Research Program - NCHRP report 350
10) Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook
11) ITE - Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares
12) National Association of City Transportation Officials Urban Bikeway Design
Guide
13) FHWA Roadside Safety Audit Guidelines
8. Related Subsections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3 for Streets and Roadways.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 5
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.

9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications,
reference Subsection 1.1.0.
b. To avoid delays, early submission of the assumptions is recommended, in particular
the study area among other assumptions based on the level of the study.
B. Commissioning
C. Traffic Analysis and Transportation Planning

1. General
a. The Transportation Planning and Traffic Analysis must be part of the Planning and
Concept Design stage of a project. Its outcome is prerequisite to detailed design.
b. The Transportation Planning and the Traffic Analysis must be conducted by qualified
consultant approved by RC.
c. There are several guiding documents and models that have been developed for
Jubail Industrial City. It will be the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to
establish the current status of the District Plan prior to commencing work.
1) The existing developed areas have some form of District Plan:
(a) Jubail 1 Industrial Area
(b) Northern Corridor Buffer Zone
(c) Al Deffi Community District
(d) Al Fanateer Community District
(e) Al Khaleej Community District
(f) Al Hulwaylat Community District
(g) Al Lulu Community District
(h) Al Shati Community District
(i) Jalmudah Community District
(j) Jubail City Center
(k) Jubail 2 Industrial Area
(l) Mardumah Community District
(m) Al Mutrafiah Community District
(n) Al Reggah Community District
(o) Eastern Corridor
2) These District Plans have a number of planning documents associated with
them and shall be the source of all data regarding land use, trip generation
and roadway network needs.
3) The existing areas and those with approved plans offer a reliable source of
information for traffic forecasting. Areas without approved plans will continue
to be refined as District Plans are completed.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 6
4) Where there is not a District Plan the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
complete the following tasks.
(a) Establish land use and employment assumptions for the District or for
the Study Area
(b) Update Jubail Industrial City Travel Demand Model (VISUM)
(c) Develop the internal road hierarchy to facilitate safe access and mobility
for the development area
(d) Develop connectivity of the internal roadway network with the external
roadway network and continuity of links to the adjacent Districts
(e) Develop a concept for public transportation network and identify
integration with any planned networks to the adjacent Districts
(f) Prepare a VISSIM Microsimulation Model for the District to assess the
performance of the traffic infrastructure: Internal Intersections, External
Junctions, Roadway links and other travel modes
(g) Prepare recommendations for junction types
(h) Prepare pedestrian circulation plans
(i) Prepare a bicycle circulation plan
(j) Prepare a transit circulation plant
d. The requirements of Transportation Planning and Traffic Analysis are based on the
scale of the development. There are three categories:
1) Circulation Plan
(a) Minimal assessment is required for small developments to assess
parking requirements, internal and external circulation, service and
emergency access, provision and access to/from the development.
(b) Small development typically generates less than 100 trips during any
peak hour (highest total generation during AM, Noon, PM, or Evening
peak)
2) Traffic Impact Study (TIS)
(a) For developments generating more than 100 trips during any peak hour,
usually required TIS to be conducted.
(b) However, if the development is located in sensitive area, or it is part of
larger development, RC may determine that TIS is required to be
conducted, even the generated trips are less than 100 trips.
(c) For development/lot that is located within approved Transportation
Master Plan (TMP), the TIS mainly focuses on consistency with the TMP,
parking requirements, circulation, provision, access/egress, and
development of the surrounding infrastructure.
(d) Methodology Report is required to be submitted and approved by RC
before conducting the study.
3) Transportation Master Plan (TMP)
(a) The TMP focuses on large area impacts, internal network operations,
and integration of all transport modes.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 7
(b) RC will determine whether TIS or Circulation Plan is required to be

conducted for each plot development within the master plan.
(c) Methodology Report is required to be submitted and approved by RC
before conducting the study.
e. The main objectives of this guidelines are to
1) Determine if and when a Circulation Plan, Traffic Impact Study (TIS) and/or
Transportation Master Plan (TMP) is/are needed.
2) Determine the necessary requirements for the proposed development(s) in
terms of the transportation infrastructure.
2. Circulation Plan
a. Circulation Plans must be submitted and approved by RC for all projects that are
generating less than 100 trips during the peak hour.
1) Based on the site nature and location, RC might require full TIS to be
conducted even the development generates less than 100 trips during the
peak hour.
2) RC might require a Circulation Plan to be conducted for small development
that proposing to have two or more access points; depending on the location
of the site and the surrounding roadway network.
b. Components of Circulation Plan
1) Project Description
(a) Include the land use type, unit, and quantity in tabular format
(b) Include the Trip Generation information (in, out, total) in tabular format.
Typically this would include AM peak, Noon, and PM peak periods.
(c) The Trip Generation calculation shall not include any reductions for
public transportation, internal capture or pass-by trips.
(d) Land use class and trip rate must be approved in advance by RC.
2) Service and Emergency Access
(a) Demonstrate delivery and service routes, locations and accesses on
drawing.
(b) Illustrate drop-off and pick-up facilities for taxi and private vehicles on
drawing (as applicable).
(c) Display emergency vehicle access on drawing.
3) Site Access and Exit Provision
(a) Show on drawing the locations and proposed design of all site access
and adjacent roads. Include the road markings and traffic signage on the
drawing.
(b) Show on the drawing the pedestrian and cycling routes (as applicable).
4) Parking Demand and Supply
(a) Provide calculations for parking demand and parking supply in tabular
format.
(b) Show all parking spaces on drawings, and number them sequentially.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 8
(1) Geometric design of the parking spaces and access including

turning radii and dimensions must comply with the RC design
guidelines and must be checked using Swept Path Analysis
software
(c) Show the location and design of disabled parking bays.
(d) Capacity analysis must be conducted for the vehicular access points.
5) Queuing Analysis
(a) Queuing analysis must be conducted for the entrances and exits for the
site, drop-off area as well as for the parking facilities.
(b) Analysis must take into consideration the proposed access control
systems (gates, barriers, ticketing, etc.) and their capacities.
(c) Storage must be accommodating 95 percentile of queue lengths inside
the lot for exiting traffic and on the auxiliary lane for entering traffic.
(d) Pedestrian sidewalk should remain clear and should not be considered in
the queuing length.
(e) Queue assessment is required for access points with v/c ration greater
than 0.5.
(f) Access point with v/c ratio greater than 1.0 is not acceptable.
3. Methodology Report
a. Methodology Report is required for all TIS and TMP studies.
b. The Methodology Report identifies the methods and assumptions to be utilized in
the study.
c. RC approval is required before progressing with the Methodology Report to
establish the following:
1) Use of the Master Plan versus Manual
(a) Previous District Master Plans have been developed that may not
comply with the guidance in the Guiding Engineering Manual. These
discrepancies must be presented to the RCJ before proceeding with the
design.
(b) New District Master Plans shall be in compliance with the General
Engineering Manual. Design exceptions supported by sound
engineering principals and best practice will be considered but all
exceptions must be approved by the RCJ.
2) Utilizing Model or Manual Assignment for trip distribution and assignment
(a) For small developments (<500 trips), manual assignment may be
sufficient. However, consideration should be taken for the location,
access, and characteristics of the development
(b) TMP should be utilized for plot located within Master Plan.
3) Determine whether a surveys and field data collection is required to be
conducted
4) Identify the adjacent developments and assumptions to be included
5) Identify the study area

Rev. 0 5.6 - 9
6) Identify the planned traffic and public transportation infrastructure to be

considered, as applicable
7) Identify the peak hours, horizon years, and phases of the development for the
assessment
d. Methodology Report should include, as a minimum:
1) Project Description
(a) Description of the project should include at least the location of the
proposed development, proposed land uses and their relation to
surrounding area, constrains and issues, phases of the development, if
any.
(b) Specify the trip generators and trip attractors, including special
generators, if any.
2) Study Area
(a) It is the A/E and/or EPC Contractor responsibility to identify and check
the Study Area for completeness and comprehensive study to include all
major facilities that will be impacted by the development.
(b) All links and junctions affected by the development by additional 10% of
traffic due to the development must be included in the assessment.
(c) All links and junctions that are directly impacted by the development
must be included.
(d) If strategic modelling is utilized, the study area might be identified at a
later stage to incorporate most changes in transport demand.
(e) The Study Area must include at least the major junctions and roadways
in the vicinity of the development, even if the increase of traffic volumes
due to the development is minimal.
3) Existing Transport Infrastructure
(a) Roadway network and infrastructure for the existing and future conditions
without the development.
(b) Public transportation facilities in close proximity to the development.
(c) Pedestrian and cycling infrastructure.
4) Baseline Traffic (Existing and Future)
(a) List the traffic surveys conducted and to be utilized in the study.
(b) For future flows implement growth rate that approved by the RCJ or
utilize the modelling output considering all land uses and infrastructure
for the particular horizon year(s).
(c) Comparison of base traffic flow with the forecasted flows should be
highlighted.
5) Trip Generation
(a) The calculations for trip generation shall not include any reductions for
transit, internal capture or pass-by trips.
(1) The calculation of the internal capture and pass-by trips must be

Rev. 0 5.6 - 10
(b) Trip generations rates must be approved by the RCJ.

6) Parking Demand
(a) Parking demand must be calculated for each lot based on its land use
characteristics.
(b) Parking demand should be accommodated within lot boundaries.
7) Proposed Strategic Modelling Approach
(a) RCJ requirements is to submit Modelling Synopsis Report and Model
Development Report
8) Assumptions
(a) List all factors, assumptions, attributes, parameters and default values
used in the studies.
(b) List all trip generation assumptions.
(c) List all variations from standards
4. Traffic Impact Study (TIS)
a. General
1) All criteria and requirements of the Circulation Plan mentioned above must be
met in addition to the following subsections.
2) Traffic impact studies assess the transportation needs and traffic impacts of a
development on the surrounding road network. They assist RCJ and private
developers in making development and transportation decisions. Need for a
traffic impact study is based on several factors: including the type and size of
development, existing network, available network and parking capacity.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete a Traffic Impact Study for
developments generating from 100 trips up to 2500 trips during any one peak
hour (highest total generation during AM, Noon, PM or Evening Peak).
4) Master planning updates shall be required for developments that generate
more than 2500 trips during any one peak hour.
5) For any sized development that generates two or more access points shall
create and submit a circulation plan for review and approval by the RCJ.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall use the existing model data for typical
TIS for any plot within an approved District Plan.
7) All assumptions shall be submitted to the RCJ for review and approval prior to
completing the analysis of the network or intersection requirements.
8) For smaller developments the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit a
circulation plan that addresses all mobility modes (vehicle, pedestrian, cyclist
and transit) as appropriate.
b. Study Area
1) The study area limits shall be based upon the types of land use, size of
development, street system patterns, and the terrain and as otherwise
required by the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 11
2) A frequently used method is to carry the analysis to the locations where site-
generated traffic will represent five percent (5%) or more of the roadway’s
peak hour approach capacity.
c. Traffic Impact of the Development
1) All analysis must be conducted for all peak periods (AM, Noon, PM, and
Evening) that is agreed and approved by RCJ.
2) RCJ must approve the scenarios to be included in the TIS. As minimum, the
following scenarios must be assessed:
(a) Base year. The assessment is based on the existing condition, without
the development.
(b) Opening year.
(c) Interim years. If the development has more than one phase, assessment
must be conducted for each phase of a major development.
(d) Medium Term (5 – 10 years)
(e) Long Term (10+ years) Ultimate Development
3) RCJ developed Strategic Models must be used for studies using the strategic
modelling approach.
d. Trip Generation Rates
1) Trip Generation rate is the average number of trips that are going to be
generated by a particular type of land use. Average trip generation rate
represents weighted average from studies conducted in the real world. The
rates are typically provided for morning and evening peak periods on a
weekday and also the weekend (Friday and Saturday) peak hours of
generators.
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall collect site specific data for the Jubail
Industrial City, if required. Trip rates will be established locally or if acceptable
to the RCJ using RCJ Trip Generation Plan and Riyadh Trip Generation
Manual. If there are no local examples available to establish a suitable trip
generation rate then regional, national or international trip generation
resources may be used but will require RCJ approval.
3) Trip Generation rates for the District Plans are based on the land use
distribution of population and employment. The method to be used for the
analysis must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
4) As the Jubail Industrial City developed and matured, local Trip Generation
rates should be collected.
e. Parking Generation Rates
1) Parking requirements shall be established based on Subsection 3.2.5
2) If additional analysis is required for parking, the following may be used.
(a) Parking generation focuses on data from parking occupancy studies as a
basis for a better understanding of parking demand characteristics. The
effective parking supply that a designer shall use is subject to several
factors unique to individual business, area type, turnover characteristics;
customer service desires and demand variations whether it is hourly,
daily, monthly or seasonal. Refer to the RCJ Zoning Regulations for
required parking rates associated with the site specific zoning.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 12
(b) Mixed Use areas within a District Plan may develop a shared parking
plan that would allow the overall reduction in parking provided. Detailed
parking assumptions must be submitted to the RCJ for review and
approval prior to reducing the parking requirements established in the
RCJ Zoning Regulations
f. Capacity Analysis
1) A principal objective of capacity analysis is the estimation of maximum
number of vehicles that may be accommodated by a given facility in
reasonable safety in a given period of time. However, because facilities
operate poorly at or near capacity, they are rarely planned to operate in this
range. Accordingly, capacity analysis also provides a means of estimating the
maximum amount of traffic that may be accommodated by a facility while
prescribed operational qualities are maintained at a “Level of Service C” LOS
C or greater. The following is the assumed parameters for capacity analysis:
(a) Type of facility and its development environment
(b) Lane widths
(c) Shoulder widths and lateral clearance
(d) Design speed
(e) Horizontal and vertical alignments
(f) Availability of queuing space at the intersection
(g) Presence of pedestrians
(h) Terrain and grades
2) Capacity used for analysis of facilities and intersections
(a) All capacity assumptions shall be submitted for review and approval prior
to analysis of facilities and intersections.
(b) All capacity analysis results for intersections, weaving, merging, and
diverging must be presented in tabular format for all scenarios and all
agreed peak periods.
(c) Intersection capacity analysis results should include Delay, LOS, v/c
ratio, and Queue length, as minimum, for each intersection as well as for
the worst movement in the intersection.
(d) Merging/Diverging analysis results should include the number of lanes,
Speed, Volume, Density and LOS, as minimum, for freeway and ramp
facilities.
(e) Weaving analysis results should include, as minimum, the weave type,
number of weaving lanes, weaving length, freeway speed, and LOS.
(f) Mitigation measures shall be identified for all movement that has LOS D
or worst. Any junction with an overall LOS F is not acceptable.
3) Capacity analysis must be conducted for all scenarios and the mitigation
measures for all peak periods agreed on.
4) Capacity analysis must be conducted based on the Highway Capacity
Methodology.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 13
5) Link performance should be presented in terms of flow, v/c ratio, speed, and
LOS for all scenarios all peak periods analyzed.
6) Intersection performance should be presented in terms of flow, average delay,
stopped delay, queue lengths, and LOS.
7) Intersection performance should be presented for the entire intersection as
well as for the critical movement(s).
8) Analytical tools
(a) There is abundance of tools available for analysis falling into two main
categories:
(1) Those that consider the mass movement of the individual vehicles
(Macroscopic)
(2) Those that consider movement of individual vehicles in a group
(Microscopic)
(b) Macroscopic Tools
(1) Analytical tools that are based on Highway Capacity Manual. These
include: Synchro, SIDRA and HCS software
(c) Microscopic Tools
(1) Analytical tools include VISSIM, CORSIM and Simtraffic
9) After assigning the traffic to the transportation network using the site traffic
analysis software, the level of service is calculated for all major roadways and
intersections.
g. Circulation
1) All site circulation shall be accommodated on-site, in particular, vehicles
circulating looking for parking. Adjacent roadway network shall not be used
as part of the parking circulation activities.
h. Site Access and Exit
1) Conflict of access points with pedestrian movements must be assessed for
safety, as appropriate.
2) Access with v/c ratio greater than 0.5, a queue assessment is required.
3) Access points with v/c ratio greater than 1.0 are not acceptable.
i. Parking
1) Parking requirements shall be established using typical parking requirements
– refer to Subsection 3.2.5
2) For particular circumstances where shared parking capacity is to be
considered, parking inventory is conducted for central and outlaying business
districts and for major activity centers such as universities and medical
centers. The inventory generally collects the following information:
(a) Number of legal and illegal parking space by location and type of facility
(b) Owner of parking spaces (public or private)
(c) Availability of spaces
(d) Time limit and hours of operation

Rev. 0 5.6 - 14
(e) Rates including meter locations

(f) Special curb-use regulations
3) Parking inventory typically is done in total, although in some jurisdictions a
previous study may serve as starting point. Inventory data is preferably
recorded in a computer format for the ease of usage and updating when
conditions change.
4) Provide disabled parking spaces according to standards and codes.
5) Parking access shall be assessed for the highest peak traffic flow.
6) Comply with the RC Standards and Guidelines for the parking design and
dimensions, refer to subsection 5.6.3.
j. Pedestrian and Cycling
1) The need to move vehicles and pedestrians efficiently and safely at the same
locations presents a significant challenge. All site circulation shall comply with
the zoning requirements – Refer to Section 3.2.
2) Assess pedestrian accessibility to the nearest public transportation facilities,
as appropriate.
3) Assess Cycling routes as applicable.
k. Public Transit
1) General
(a) Jubail Industrial City has a planned transit system in the City Center. All
District Master plans may accommodate transit. The roadways that will
ultimately accommodate transit shall be documented in the District Plan.
2) Transit Assumptions
(a) All proposed developments use of transit must be reviewed and
approved by RCJ.
(b) Changes in the modal split must be evaluated, discussed, and approved
by the RCJ.
(c) Changes to the transportation network must be approved by the RCJ.
l. Queue Analysis
1) General
(a) All intersection operations shall be reviewed and queuing analysis
performed to establish if additional queuing distances are required for left
and right turn movements.
(b) All increases in standard bay lengths must be reviewed and approved.
m. Mitigation
1) General
(a) After the initial forecast and level of service are calculated various test
street improvements and signal timing changes for mitigating the impacts
at an intersection may be completed.
(b) All intersection and network operations must be reviewed and approved
by the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 15
(c) For each mitigation measure, the modelling results of the “with”, “without”
and “mitigated” scenarios must be compared and highlight the critical
movement.
(d) Proposed mitigation measures must be feasible and reasonable.
n. Geometric and R.O.W
1) General
(a) The TCDD’s shall be used to establish all typical geometric and right-of-
way (ROW).
(b) Development requiring additions to ROW for site access shall be
submitted for review and approval.
(c) Recommended mitigation measures must be feasible and practical.
(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall check the availability of R.O.W for
the proposed geometric mitigations.
o. Report Contents
1) The A/E and/or the EPC contractor shall be responsible for submitting a table
of contents and report outline for review and approval of the RCJ prior to
commencing the traffic study.
2) TABLE 5.6.2.A illustrates sample report contents. Outline might change
based on the details of the study.
TABLE 5.6.2.A: SAMPLE TRAFFIC STUDY OUTLINE
Sample Outline Sample Figures Sample Tables
1.0 INTRODUCTION Figure 1 - Site Context

1.1 Background Figure 2 - Study Area
1.2 Study Area
1.3 Analysis Scope
2.0 LAND USE Figure 3 - Building Inventory

2.1 Existing
2.2 Future
3.0 EXISTING CONDITIONS Figure 4 - Existing Roadway Table 1 - Traffic Data

3.1 Road Network Network Survey
3.2 Existing Traffic Volumes
Figure 5 - Turning Movement Table 2 – Traffic Volumes
3.2.1 Existing Study
Count Data (Traffic Operations on Study Area Network
Area Traffic
Study Area)
3.3 Parking Table 3 – Area Parking
3.3.1 Data Collection Figure 6 - Turning Movement Supply
3.4 Transit Service Count Data (Parking Inventory
Table 4- Weekend
3.5 Pedestrian Activity Study Area)
3.5.1 On Street Parking Occupancy
3.5.2 On Site Figure 7 - Existing Conditions,
Table 5 - Weekday
Peak Hours Level of Service
Parking Occupancy

Rev. 0 5.6 - 16
Figure 8 - Parking Area Lots /

Blocks
Figure 9 - Weekend Parking
Occupancy
Figure 10 - Weekday Parking
Occupancy
Figure 11 - Weekend Parking
Occupancy: Total Study Area
On-Street vs off-Street
Figure 13 - Pedestrian
Volumes
4.0 METHODOLOGY Figure 14 - Trip Generation Table 6 - Trips Generated

4.1 Trip Generation Regions and Count Locations by Area
4.2 Trip Distribution
Figure 15 – Trip Distribution to Table 7 - Generated Trips
4.3 Parking
the existing network
4.3.2 Parking Table 8 - Trip Rates
Availability Target Figure 16 - Trip Distribution to
4.3.3 Parking Table 9 – Trip Distribution
future network
Occupancy for Phases and Ultimate
Figure 17 – Parking
Table 10- Weekend
Distribution and Occupancy
Parking Occupancy
Table 11 - Weekday
Parking Occupancy
5.0 FUTURE CONDITIONS - Table 12 – Level of

METHODOLOGY Service for At-Grade
5.1 Methodology Intersections (Highway
5.2 Micro Simulation Capacity Manual)
5.2.1 Road Network Table 13 – Level of
5.2.2 Forecasts – Service for Phases and
Horizon Years Ultimate Development
5.3 Transit Service
5.4 Pedestrian Activity
5.5 Parking
5.6 Assessment of Counter
Measures
6.0 FUTURE NETWORK Figure 18 - Future Network, Table 14 - Friday Forecast

CONDITIONS ASSESSMENT Weekday Peak Hours Parking Occupancy
6.1 Road Network - Phases Volumes
Table 15 - Weekday
and Ultimate
Figure 19- Future Network, Forecast Parking

Rev. 0 5.6 - 17
6.2 Parking - Phases and Weekday Peak Hours Level of Occupancy

Ultimate Services
Table 16 - Level of
6.3 Traffic Circulation -
Figure 20 - Friday Forecast Service By Walking -
Phases and Ultimate
Parking Occupancy Distance in Meters Table
6.4 Pedestrian - Phases and
17 - Walking Level of
Ultimate Figure 21 - Future Weekend
Service For Various Site
6.5 Queue Analysis- Phases Parking Occupancy
Users
and Ultimate
Figure 22- Weekday Forecast
Parking Occupancy
Figure 24 – Circulation
Alternatives
7.0 ALTERNATIVES – Figure 25 - Existing Roadway Table 18 - Network

FUTURE CONDITIONS Network Alternatives Level of
ASSESSMENT Service, Weekday Peak
Figure 24 – Alternative
7.1 Road Network Hours
Weekday Peak Hours
7.1.1 Description of
Volumes Table 19 - Alternative
Alternatives
Network Evaluation
7.1.2 Assessment of Figure 25 – Future Weekday
Alternatives Peak Hours Volumes Table 20 - Alternative
7.1.3 Evaluation of Parking Area Evaluation
Alternatives Figure 26 - Proposed Parking
Sites
7.2 Parking
7.2.1 Description of Figure 27 - Future Lot
Alternatives Alternative(s)- Accessibility
7.2.2 Assessment of
Alternatives
7.3 Evaluation of Alternatives
7.3 Preferred Scenario
8.0 IMPROVEMENTS AND Figure 28 – Improvement

MITIGATIONS Locations
8.1 Major Improvements Figure 29 – Proposed
8.2 Minor Improvements Improvements for each
location
9.0 CONCLUSIONS AND

RECOMMENDATIONS
9.1 Existing Conditions
9.1.1 Findings
/Problems/Issues
9.1.2 Opportunities
9.2 Future Conditions
9.2.1 Problems/Issues
9.2.2 Opportunities
9.3 Solutions
9.3.1 Structural

Rev. 0 5.6 - 18
9.3.2 Non-Structural
9.4 Implementation Plan
9.4.1 Short term (0-5
years – Opening
Years)
9.4.2 Medium term (5-
10 years - Phases)
9.4.3 Long Term (10+
years – Ultimate
Development)
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: Field Turning Movement Counts

APPENDIX B: Parking Data
APPENDIX C: TAZ Structures
APPENDIX D: Phased and Ultimate Traffic, Parking, Circulation and Pedestrian
Volumes
APPENDIX E: Level of Service Analysis Details
5. Transportation Master Plan (TMP)

a. General
1) All criteria and requirements for the Circulation Plan and Traffic Impact Study
shall be conducted and included as part of the TMP, unless approved by the
RCJ.
b. Demographic and Socioeconomic Data
1) Existing demographic and economic data is obtained from the census data
collection of the Ministry of Communication.
2) Local data shall be used to augment regional data.
3) Land use is inextricably linked to the distribution of population, household and
employment. These in turn are primary inputs to the regional model set. Once
a land use plan is established a set of demographic shall be submitted for
c. Traffic Analysis Zones
1) General
(a) A traffic analysis zone (TAZ) is a small, homogeneous geographic area
defined to be used in the transportation planning and analysis.
(b) A TAZ may be as small as a city block or as large as a few square miles
in the outlying reaches of transportation network. The boundaries of a
zone are typically defined by geographic barriers or by transportation
features such as rivers and roads.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 19
(c) Zone boundaries shall follow census tract or block group boundaries
where possible to make it easier to correlate the census demographic
data to the zones. Within a zone the land use and spatial distribution
shall be fairly homogeneous.
2) Land Use Characteristics
(a) Define the local amenities (schools, shops, restaurants, mosques) for the
forecasted population.
(b) Define any special generator
(c) Account for visitors parking
d. Highway Network
1) General
(a) The highway network is composed of various nodes and links. Nodes are
typically intersections or may simply be placed to give the network a
proper shape when it is plotted; while links connect various nodes
together. Roads are entered in as links.
(b) Network assumptions and attributes shall be reviewed and approved.
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall present all scenarios and peak periods
to be analyzed for approval from the RCJ before conducting the analysis.
(a) Peak periods are the AM, Noon, PM and Evening. Special events might
be analyzed upon RCJ request.
(b) Minimum scenarios include:
(1) Opening year
(2) Interim year’s corresponding to projects’ phases
(3) Horizon years, to be approved by the RCJ
(4) Full build-out, ultimate development
3) Strategic modelling approach must be utilized
4) Present traffic flows and turning movements for all scenarios and all peak
periods.
5) Present link capacity analysis on links for all scenarios and all peak periods.
6) Link performance should be presented in terms of flow, v/c ratio, speed, and
LOS.
7) Links with v/c ratio of greater than 0.7, further analysis is required.
8) Major Intersections must be assessed and analyzed in details.
9) Intersection performance should be presented in terms of flow, average
delay, stopped delay, queue lengths, and LOS.
10) Intersection performance should be presented for the entire intersection as
well as for the critical movement(s).
11) Proposed mitigation must be presented at conceptual design level.
12) Analysis must include comparisons between without and with mitigations.
e. Transit Network

Rev. 0 5.6 - 20
1) General
(a) A transit network is composed of various nodes and links. Links connect
various nodes together. Transit lines are entered as a sequence of
nodes.
(b) Network assumptions shall be reviewed and approved.
(c) Account for pedestrian and bicycle network.
(d) Identify whether mode share and internal capture targets can be
achieved.
f. Trip Generation
1) General
(a) Trip generation is the total number of person trips that are produced (Trip
Production) by and attracted (Trip Attraction) to each defined zone in a
study area.
(b) The estimation of person trip ends is stratified by the trip purpose. It is
based on the characteristics of both trip maker and the land uses. Trip
maker characteristics are based on the household attributes like
household size, income, number of workers and vehicles owned.
(c) Land use is functionally described in terms of its character, intensity and
location of activities. It may also be described as type and quantity of
employment that it generates. Exclusive models are in use for trip
production and trip attraction.
(d) All Trip Generation assumptions shall be reviewed and approved.
2) Trip Generation Model
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall conduct technical workshop to RCJ
personnel presenting the Trip Generation Modeling methodology,
aspects and development.
(b) Upon RC approval on the Trip Generation Model, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall proceed with the TMP.
g. Trip Distribution
1) General
(a) Trip Distribution is connecting trip ends to one another to create and flow
of trips in each interchange.
(b) A typical trip distribution model is a gravity model as in theory number of
trips from one analysis zone to another is directly related to the
magnitude of the activity within each zone as well as the accessibility
between the zones.
(c) The inter-zonal accessibility is the inverse of the travel impedance which
may be measured by the automobile or the transit time. Or by composite
impedance, which could include times, parking fees and other costs.
(d) All Trip Distribution assumptions shall be reviewed and approved.
2) Trip Distribution Model

Rev. 0 5.6 - 21
personnel presenting the Trip Distribution Modeling methodology,
aspects and development.
(b) Upon RC approval on the Trip Distribution Model, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall proceed with the TMP.
h. Mode Choice
1) General
(a) Mode choice is estimate of the proportions of the travelers travelling by
different modes of transportation, such as public transportation, private
automobile, bicycling or walking.
(b) The primary modes are further subdivided in to sub modes. This could
include various types of transit modes such as commuter rail, light rail.
Express buses, local buses, trolleys and monorails. Even the carpooling
auto modes may be further divided in to a two person car pool, a three
person car pool and a four person car pool.
(c) All Mode Choice splits shall be reviewed and approved.
i. Trip Assignment
1) General
(a) In trip assignment the mode specific trips are assigned to the appropriate
network. The auto vehicle trips are assigned to the roadway network
while the transit person trips are assigned to the transit network. In case
of park-n-ride trips the highway portion of the trip is assigned to the
roadway network and the transit portion to the transit network.
(b) All Trip Assignments shall be reviewed and approved.
j. Freight Modeling
1) General
(a) Jubail Industrial City Master Plan Update addresses the freight model
that has been established for the City. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall review the assumptions used by the Master Plan Update.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit all freight usage information
for the RCJ to review and approve.
2) Freight Model
personnel presenting the Freight Modeling methodology, aspects and
development.
6. Engineering Software
a. General
1) There is a traffic model associated with the Jubail Industrial City Master Plan
Update. This model has been augmented with District Plans. All
Transportation Master planning must use the most updated Jubail
Transportation Model VISUM.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 22
2) For the development of network requirements and intersection controls each

District Plan has a VISSIM model. The VISSIM model shall be augmented as
each plot within the District Plan is developed.
3) For corridor analysis, Synchro shall be used.
4) For isolated intersections, HCM methodology shall be used to evaluate the
traffic control needs. All assumptions shall be reviewed and approved by the
RCJ.
5) For weaving, merging, and diverging analysis, HCM methodology shall be
used.
6) For roundabout analysis, SIDRA INTERSECTION shall be used.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit all assumptions and the original
software data files.
c. All assumptions shall be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
7. Environmental Impact
a. Highway Traffic Noise
1) General
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.9.5 Noise Management.
b. Air
1) General
(a) Refer to Subsection 4.4.3 Environmental Investigation and Studies.
8. Roadside Safety Audits
a. General
1) Majority of the crashes occurring on surface streets occur at intersections.
One of the recommendations to reduce the number of crashes is to perform
Road Safety Assessments as a regional initiative to help identify and address
safety issues at high risk intersections.
2) Roadside Safety Audits are formal examinations of particular intersections or
entire road corridors from a safety performance viewpoint. The concept of
RSAs originated in the UK in the 1990s and has been adopted by many
countries with much success.
3) Roadside Safety Audits (RSA) are performed by an independent multi-
disciplinary team and led by a person trained in performing Roadside Safety
Audits. The Roadside Safety Audits team considers the safety of all road
users, qualitatively estimates and reports on potential road safety issues, and
identifies opportunities for safety improvement. The Roadside Safety Audits
team reviews police crash reports and conducts field observations during
different times of the day, such as day/night and peak/non-peak hours.
4) The purpose of an Roadside Safety Audits is to answer the following
questions:
(a) What elements of the road may present a safety concern: to what extent,
to which road users, and under what circumstances?
(b) What opportunities exist to eliminate or mitigate identified safety
concerns?

Rev. 0 5.6 - 23
5) All Roadside Safety Audit shall follow the approach outlined by FHWA RSA.
D. Signalization
1. Traffic Signal Design
a. Warrant Evaluation and Analysis
1) General
(a) Typical Intersection control has been established in the District Master
Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall review the traffic control
proposed in the existing District Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall analyze the intersection(s) and establishing appropriate traffic
control for existing and future conditions. Any proposed signalized
intersections that do not currently meet signalization warrants must be
constructed with all underground infrastructures. In addition, future pole
locations shall remain clear of utilities that will affect the installation of
pole bases in the future.
(b) Traffic planning and assessment data shall be used to establish if
signalization of an intersection is warranted.
(c) The MUTCD has established criteria for the evaluation of signalization
needs. Signalization shall only be installed if the criterions are met. The
criterions exist in the existing KSA MUTCD may be augmented by the
signal warrants in the current version of the FHWA MUTCD. Refer to
KSA-MUTCD Part 4. Signals and FHWA-MUTCD Part 4 Highway Traffic
Signals.
b. Operational Requirements (Phasing, control, detection, interconnection, etc.)

(a) The intersection phasing and corridor coordination shall be established
by the Traffic Signal Analysis study that must be reviewed and approved
by the RCJ.
(b) All signalized left turn movements shall operate as a protected phase
only.
(c) All arterial networks and the portion of the collector network with future
signalization shall include conduit and the associated fixtures to allow the
installation of future traffic signal fiber.
(d) Refer to the KSA MUTCD Part 4, and the FHWA MUTCD
(e) Follow all requirements in GPCS
(f) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
c. Signal Display and Design Configuration
1) Pole Placement
(a) General
(1) A/E or EPC Contractor shall use AASHTO RDG and the Americans
with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG)ǁ
(2) Poles supports shall be placed as far as practical from the edge of
the traveled way without adversely affecting the visibility of the
signal indications.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 24
(3) Where supports cannot be located based on the recommended

AASHTO clearances, consideration shall be given to the use of
appropriate safety devices.
(4) In order to minimize hindrance to the passage of persons with
physical disabilities, a signal support or controller cabinet shall not
obstruct the sidewalk, or access from the sidewalk to the crosswalk.
(5) Controller cabinets shall be located as far as practical from the edge
of the roadway.
(6) On medians, the minimum clearances provided in above items for
signal poles shall be obtained if practical.
(b) Refer to the KSA MUTCD Part 4
(c) Follow all requirements in GPCS
(d) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
2) Traffic Signal Indications
(a) General
(1) If a signalized through movement exists on an approach, a minimum
of two primary signal faces shall be provided for the through
movement. If a signalized through movement does not exist on an
approach, a minimum of two primary signal faces shall be provided
for the signalized turning movement that is considered to be the
major movement from the approach.
(2) If the number of overhead primary signal faces for through traffic is
equal to the number of through lanes on an approach, one
overhead signal face shall be located approximately over the center
of each through lane.
(3) Except for shared left-turn and right-turn signal faces, any primary
signal face required for an exclusive turn lane shall be located
overhead approximately over the center of each exclusive turn lane.
(4) In addition to the primary signal faces, one or more supplemental
pole-mounted or overhead signal faces shall be considered to
provide added visibility for approaching traffic that is traveling
behind large vehicles.
(5) Refer to the KSA MUTCD Part 4 and augment signal head
requirements with the requirements of the FHWA MUTCD.
(b) Follow all requirements in GPCS
(c) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
3) Mounting Hardware
(a) Refer to the KSA MUTCD
(b) Follow all requirements in GPCS
(c) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
d. Pedestrian Control Features
1) General

Rev. 0 5.6 - 25
(a) Refer to the KSA MUTCD

(b) The existing KSA MUTCD may be augment with pedestrian control
systems approved in the FHWA MUTCD. These include: Pedestrian
Light Control Activation (PELICAN) system, Two Groups CAN cross
(TOUCAN) system and High Intensity Activated Cross Walk (HAWK).
(c) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
e. Lighting Requirements for Traffic Signal Installations
1) General
(a) The intensity and distribution of light from each illuminated signal lens
shall comply with the ITE publications entitled ―Vehicle Traffic Control
Signal Heads and ―Traffic Signal Lamps. Research has resulted in
signal optical units that are not lenses, such as, but not limited to, light
emitting diode (LED) traffic signal modules. Some units are practical for
all signal indications, and some are practical for specific types such as
visibility-limited signal indications. If a signal indication is so bright that it
causes excessive glare during nighttime conditions, some form of
automatic dimming shall be used to reduce the brilliance of the signal
indication.
(b) Refer to the KSA MUTCD
(c) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
f. Traffic Signal Controllers (Controller Cabinet and Electrical Service Pedestal)
1) General
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the Electrical and
Communication requirements based on the requirement listed in
Subsection 5.7.6 and 5.7.7.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall show the connection from the
electrical and communication services pedestal to the controller.
(c) In District Plan areas the controller box must be sized to accommodate
the future installation of fiber. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
submit the controller box racking for review and approval by the RCJ.
(d) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
g. Detectors (vehicle detection: types, guidelines, requirements, loop detection)
1) General
(a) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
(b) The TCDD’s illustrate the loop detector locations. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall mark the loop location in the field prior to installation.
The proposed locations shall be reviewed and approved by the RCJ
before the loop installation occurs.
h. Wiring / Cabling (Conductor Cable Requirements, Conduit and Pull Box
Requirements)

Rev. 0 5.6 - 26
1) General
(a) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.7.7. for Telecommunication requirements.
i. Signal Timing
1) General
(a) All signal timings shall be submitted and approved by the RCJ prior to
implementing them in the field.
j. Communication and Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) related issues
1) General
(a) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing ITS within various District
Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are required to review existing
systems for the District Plan.
(b) Where ITS is being implemented the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is
required to follow all existing ITS protocols. All equipment proposals
must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
(c) Where ITS is not being implemented in the District Plans, the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor will be required to provide and install a conduit and the
associated fixtures in a joint trench along all roadways with future
signalization.
k. Other Traffic Signal Equipment (e.g., pre-empt systems)
1) General
(a) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing pre-empt systems within
various District Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required to
review existing systems for the District Plan.
(b) Where pre-empt systems are being implemented the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor is required to follow all existing pre-empt system protocols.
All equipment proposals must be review and approved by the RCJ.
l. Other Traffic Signals
1) Intersection Control Beacons
(a) General
(1) Refer to the KSA MUTCD
(2) The existing KSA MUTCD may be augment with intersection control
beacons systems approved in the FHWA MUTCD.
2) Warning Beacons
(a) General
(1) If a sign is installed to warn approaching road users of the traffic
control signal, the sign may be supplemented by a Warning
Beacon.
(2) A Warning Beacon used in this manner shall be interconnected with
the traffic signal controller assembly in such a manner as to flash
amber during the period when road users passing this beacon at

Rev. 0 5.6 - 27
the legal speed for the roadway might encounter a red signal
indication (or a queue resulting from the display of the red signal
indication) upon arrival at the signalized location.
(3) If the sight distance to the signal faces for an approach is limited by
horizontal or vertical alignment, supplemental signal faces aimed at
a point on the approach at which the signal indications first become
visible may be used.
(4) Supplemental signal faces shall be used if engineering judgment
has shown that they are needed to achieve intersection visibility
both in advance and immediately before the signalized location
(6) The existing KSA MUTCD may be augment with warning beacons
systems approved in the FHWA MUTCD.
3) Pedestrian Crossing Beacons
(a) General
(2) The existing KSA MUTCD may be augmented with pedestrian
control systems approved in the FHWA MUTCD. These include:
Pedestrian Light Control Activation (PELICAN) system, Two Groups
CAN cross (TOUCAN) system and High Intensity Activated Cross
Walk (HAWK).
2. Signalized Intersection Spacing and Driveway Spacing
a. Reference Subsection 5.6.3. for access criteria and driveway spacing design
guidance.
3. Traffic Surveillance
a. General
1) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing traffic surveillance systems within
various District Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required to review
existing systems for the District Plan.
2) Where traffic surveillance is being implemented the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor is required to follow all existing traffic surveillance protocols. All
equipment proposals must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
4. Traffic Calming
a. General
1) Within Urban areas and for roadway classification with 2-lanes of traffic the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor must apply the principals outlined in the ITE-
DWUT.
2) All Traffic Calming measures must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must accommodate the requirement for
alternate modes of travel based on context sensitive design approaches. This
is outlined in the Jubail Industrial City Master Plan Update as well as the
individual District Master Plans.
5. Mobility Measures

Rev. 0 5.6 - 28
a. General
1) Within Urban areas the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must apply the principals
outlined in the ITE- DWUT.
2) Mobility measures should be relevant to the Jubail Industrial City and must be
reviewed and approved by RCJ.
6. Traffic Optimization
a. General
1) Within Urban areas the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must apply the principals
outlined in the ITE- DWUT as applicable to RCJ.
7. Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS)
a. General
1) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing ITS within various District Plans.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are required to review existing systems for
the District Plan.
2) Where ITS is being implemented the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required to
follow all existing ITS protocols. All equipment proposals must be reviewed
and approved by the RCJ.
3) Where ITS is not being implemented in the District Plans the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor will be required to provide and install a conduit and the associated
fixtures in a joint trench along all roadways with future signalization and
connect to the nearest communication network that feed into the Traffic
Management Center.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 29
SUBSECTION 5.6.3 STREETS AND ROADWAYS
5.6.3 STREETS AND ROADWAYS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides the basis for the design of roadway network. The
guidelines apply to the following planning and design activities:
1) Roadway Design
2) Maintenance of Traffic
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection applies to all roadway construction within road right-of-way (ROW).
b. This Subsection applies to all roadway and parking construction on property.
3. Definitions
a. “Auxiliary lane” The portion of the roadway adjoining the carriageway for parking,
speed changes, or for other purposes supplementary to through traffic movement.
b. “Carriageway” The portion of the roadway for the movement of vehicles, exclusive of
shoulders and auxiliary lanes.
c. “Divided road’ a freeway or road with carriageways traveling in opposite directions
separated by a median.
d. “Freeway or road” General terms denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular
traffic, including the entire area within the right-of-way.
e. “Left-turn lane” An auxiliary lane in the median to accommodate the deceleration
and storage of vehicles making left turn maneuvers.
f. “Median” The inner portion of a divided road separating carriageways traveling in
opposite directions.
g. Parking lane” An auxiliary lane used primarily for vehicle parking.
h. “Roadside” A general term denoting the area adjoining the outer edge of the
roadway. Extensive areas between the roadways of a divided highway may also be
considered roadside.
i. “Roadway” The portion of a road including the carriageway, auxiliary lanes and
shoulders, for vehicular use.
j. “Shoulder” The portion of the roadway contiguous with the carriageway for
accommodation of stopped vehicles and for emergency use.
k. “Traffic lane” The portion of the carriageway for the movement of a single line of
vehicles.
l. “Design speed” A speed determined for design and correlation of the physical
features of a highway that influence vehicle operation. It is the maximum safe speed
that may be maintained over a specified section of highway when conditions are
favorable and the design features of the highway govern. The design speed shall be
20% greater than the posted speed limit.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2.A.4.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 30

1) AASHTO : American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
2) AASHTO Green Book : AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and
Streets, 2011
3) HDM : The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communications
Highway Design Manuals
4) KSA MUTCD : The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of
Communications Manual on Uniform Control Devices
5) FHWA MUTCD : Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices
6) RDG : AASHTO Roadside Design Guide
7) RHGCH : Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook
a. This Subsection covers the design criteria for the road network in Jubail and Ras Al-
Khair Industrial Cities. The road network will be planned, engineered and
constructed over a 10 year period. This design requirements Subsection and the
road classifications, set forth herein, are intended to provide guidance and direction
in the planning and design of roads in both community and industrial areas.
b. The governing Codes and Standards in the RCJ shall be in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Subsection 3.1.0.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Codes
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Subsection, refer to Chapter 3
for a list of additional Standards.
Manual) Volume 1 – Highway Development
2) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communication Highway Design
4) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communication Manual on Uniform
Control Devices
5) AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (Green Book)
6) AASHTO Roadside Design Guide
9) Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook - Revised Second Edition

Rev. 0 5.6 - 31
10) CIE 115 International Commission on Technical Report: Lighting of Roads for
Motor and Pedestrian Traffic
11) CIE 140 International Commission on Illumination Technical Report: Road
Lighting Calculations Related Subsections
12) prCEN/Tr13201-1 road lighting Part 1 Selection of lighting classes
13) EN 13201 Road Lighting (part 2-4)
14) BS 5489-1 Code of Practice for the design of road lighting Part 1 Lighting of
Roads and Public Amenity Lighting
15) EN 12464-2 Lighting for Work Places Part 2 Outdoor work places
16) PD 6547 Guidance on the Use BS EN-40-3-1 and EN-3-3
17) EN 40 Lighting Columns
18) EN 12767 Passive Safety Support structures for road equipment –
Requirements Classification and test methods
b. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4 for Site Storm Water Drainage.
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.
8. Approvals
B. Commissioning
C. Roadway Design
1. Systems and Classifications
a. The roadway network classification is defined in the following paragraphs. There are
a number of elements of the roadway network terms that are used within the
following paragraphs.
2. Road Classifications
a. Freeway
1) A freeway is a high speed multi-lane divided road with grade separation of all
cross roads and complete control of access. At-grade intersections and direct
access to fronting property are prohibited. Access to and from a freeway is
permitted only by way of on/off ramps or grade separated interchanges. In
addition, all freeways shall be fenced to deter the access of pedestrians and
animals.
(a) Freeways shall be designed for speeds of 120 km/h in urbanized areas
and 140 km/h in rural areas.
b. Expressways
1) Expressways are medium speed multi-lane divided roads with at grade
intersections with other roads and interchanges with freeways. Access to

Rev. 0 5.6 - 32
expressways is controlled and direct access connections involving median

openings will only be permitted in the most exceptional circumstances.
2) Intersections shall be controlled by traffic signals with appropriate
coordination to ensure the optimum flow of traffic to the expressway.
Intersections shall be provided with full curbed channelization. Acceleration
and deceleration lanes shall be provided by widening the hard shoulder to
one full lane width and marking it as an auxiliary lane. Left turn lanes shall be
provided with adequate storage capacity to prevent turning traffic from
backing up onto the through lanes.
3) Expressways shall generally be designed for speeds of 100 km/h.
c. Collector/Boulevard Roads
1) Collector roads are medium speed divided roads which link local roads in
industrial or community areas with the freeways and expressways serving
those areas.
2) Collector road intersections shall require curbed channelization. Left-turn
lanes shall be provided with adequate storage length to provide a smooth flow
of traffic through the intersection and to prevent turning traffic backing up onto
the through lanes.
3) At intersections with divided local roads and other four lane local roads,
raised channelization shall be provided for left-turn lanes. Separate right-turn
lanes are not required.
4) Collector roads shall be designed for speeds of 90 km/h although it is
recognized that instances will arise where posted speeds may have to be
significantly lower than this.
d. Corniche
1) Corniche roads may be considered a subset of collector roads which provide
scenic drives along the water frontage. Design criteria must be presented to
the RCJ for approval.
e. Four Lane Local Road
1) Four lane local roads are divided or undivided roads which provide access to
community area or industrial plants. They shall have four lanes but no
shoulder away from intersections. Sidewalks shall be provided on both sides
of four lane local roads where pedestrians may be expected.
2) Design speeds shall be 70 km/h for four lane local roads.
3) At intersections with divided roads and other four lane local roads, raised
channelization shall be provided for left-turn lanes. Separate right-turn lanes
are not required.
f. Two Lane Local Road
1) Two lane local roads are low speed roads which provide access to industrial
plants/community areas. They have two lanes and a hard shoulder away from
intersections. Sidewalk shall be provided on both sides of two lane local roads
where pedestrians may be expected such as in the secondary industry area,
support industry area and Airport Area.
2) Design speed shall be 70 km/h for two lane local road.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 33
3) Raised channelization shall be provided for left-turn lanes at intersections with

divided roads. At intersections with four lane local roads and other two lane
local roads, left-turn lanes shall not be installed unless the intersection
requires signalization.
g. Residential Roads
1) Residential roads are low speed two-lane roads which provide access to
residences. Residential roads intersect other residential roads and local
roads. They shall not intersect collector roads or expressways.
2) The design speed of residential roads shall be 50 km/h although it is
recognized that instances will arise where the driving speed will be
significantly lower than this.
3. Geometrics and Alignment
a. Sight Distance
1) General
(a) The AASHTO GREEN BOOK Chapter 3 shows the Standards for
passing and stopping sight distance related to design speed. These are
the minimum values to be used in design.
b. Horizontal and Vertical Curves
1) Horizontal Curves
(a) Horizontal alignment shall be designed using the following methods to
meet the sight distance requirements set forth in the AASHTO GREEN
BOOK Chapter 3.
S²
M= +N
8*(R - N)
where,
S = Sight Distance in meters, m

Rev. 0 5.6 - 34
R = Radius of center line inside lane in meters, m

M = Distance from center line inside lane in meters, m
N = Driver's eye and road object displacement from center line in meters, m
(may be assumed to be 1.8 m)
(b) Instead of using the foregoing formulas, the designer may scale the sight
distances from the plans by placing a straight edge on the survey center
line and tangent to the obstruction. Then, the sight distance is taken as
the difference in stationing between one point in question and the point
where the straight edge intersects the center line on the opposite side of
the obstruction. For this procedure, high precision is not necessary. The
scaled distance may be measured to 10 m.
2) Vertical Curves
(a) Vertical alignments of roads shall be designed using the following
methods/standards to accommodate for stopping and passing sight
distances related to design speed on crest and sag vertical curves.
Under no circumstance shall the stopping and passing sight distance be
less than shown in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK Chapter 3.
(b) Stopping Sight Distance on Crest Vertical Curves
A*S²
For S < L: L=
200 *(√h1 + √h2)²
200 *(√h1 + √h2)²

For S > L: L= 2S -
A
Where,
L = Length of vertical curve in meters, m
A = Algebraic Difference in Grade Rate in %
S = Sight Distance in meters, m
h1= Driver eye height in meters normally adopted as 1.05 m above the road surface
h2= Object height in meters normally adopted as 0.20 m above the road surface

Rev. 0 5.6 - 35
(c) Passing Sight Distance on Crest Vertical Curves

Rev. 0 5.6 - 36
(d) Stopping Sight Distance on Sag Vertical Curves
3) Decision Sight Distance on Horizontal and Vertical Curves

(a) At certain locations, sight distance greater than stopping sight distance is
desirable to allow drivers time for decisions without making last minute
erratic maneuvers. Because decision sight distance offers drivers
additional margin for error and affords them sufficient length to maneuver
their vehicles at the same or reduced speed, rather than to just stop, its
values are substantially greater than stopping sight distance.
(b) The decision sight distances in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK Chapter 3
provide values for sight distances that may be appropriate at critical
locations and serve as criteria in evaluating the suitability of the available
sight distances at these locations.
c. Grades
1) Maximum Grades – Maximum Grades of about 4 percent are considered
appropriate for the design of roadways. However, this may increase up to 6

Rev. 0 5.6 - 37
percent for interchange ramps due to limited space. Minimum Grades – Flat
grades may typically provide proper surface drainage on uncurbed highways
where the cross slope is adequate to drain the pavement surface laterally.
With curbed streets, longitudinal grades shall be provided to facilitate surface
drainage. An appropriate minimum grade is typically 0.5 percent. Additional
information is presented in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
d. Superelevation
1) Standard Superelevation - Under normal circumstances, the standard
superelevation rates for various curve radii a 6% maximum rate is used to
provide the maximum safety benefit while minimizing the potential low-speed
operational problems. The actual superelevation provided is determined using
the appropriate emax table referenced in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
Exceptions must be approved by the RCJ.
2) Substandard Superelevation - Lower superelevation rates may be necessary
in areas where restricted speed zones or road intersections are controlling
factors. Such conditions may warrant, for example, a reduction in the
superelevation rate, different rates for each half of the roadbed, or both.
Substandard superelevation must be approved by the RCJ.
3) In warping road areas for drainage, adverse superelevation shall be avoided.
Exceptions must be approved by the RCJ.
4) Axis of Rotation
(a) Undivided Highways
(1) In general, for undivided highways, the axis of rotation for
superelevation shall be the centerline of the roadbed. However, in
special cases where curves are preceded by long relatively level
tangents, the plane of superelevation may be rotated about the
inside edge of the pavement to improve perception of the curve.
(2) On flat gradients, drainage pockets caused by superelevation may
be avoided by changing the axis of rotation from the centerline to
the inside edge of the pavement.
(b) Ramps and Freeway to Freeway Connection
(1) The axis of rotation may be about either edge of pavement or
centerline for multi-lane highways. Appearance and drainage
considerations shall always be taken into account for the selection
of the axis of rotation.
(c) Divided Highways
(1) The axis of rotation shall generally be taken at the median edges of
the carriageway. However, the axis of rotation may be moved to the
centerline of the median to meet particular circumstances. The
selection of the axis of rotation shall always be considered in
conjunction with the design of the profile and superelevation
transition.
5) Superelevation Transition
(a) The superelevation transition generally consists of the superelevation
runoff (length of roadway needed to accomplish the change in cross

Rev. 0 5.6 - 38
slope from a horizontal line to a fully superelevated section or vice versa)

and the crown runoff.
(b) A superelevation transition shall be designed to satisfy the requirements
of safety and comfort and be pleasing in appearance. The length of
superelevation transition shall be based upon the combination of
superelevation rate and width of rotated plane.
(c) With respect to the beginning or ending of a curve, two thirds of the
superelevation run-off is on the tangent approach and one third within
the curve. This results in two thirds of the full superelevation rate at the
beginning or ending of a curve. This may be altered to 50% transition to
occur within the curve to adjust for flat spots or unsightly sags and
humps when alignment is tight.
(d) Superelevation transitions shall be designed in accordance with the
AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
(e) In restrictive situations, such as on two lane highways in mountainous
terrain, interchange ramps, collector roads, frontage roads, etc., where
curve radius and length and tangents between curves are short,
standard superelevation rates and/or transitions may not be attainable. In
such situations, the highest possible superelevation rates and transition
length shall be used, but the rate of change of cross slope shall not
exceed 4% per 20 m.
(f) Superelevation transitions for shoulders cannot be indicated properly on
the same superelevation transition diagram with the carriageway for the
type of diagram shown. The shoulder planes rotational axis lies on the
edge of pavement of the adjacent carriageway. Shoulder superelevation
transitions shall be smooth and compatible with the transition of and shall
not have an algebraic difference greater than 3% on the higher end and
equal to the slope on the lower end of the adjacent pavement.
(g) After a superelevation transition is designed, profiles of edges of
pavement and shoulder shall be reviewed and irregularities removed by
introducing smooth curves. Flat areas which are undesirable from a
drainage stand-point shall be avoided.
(h) Pronounced and unsightly sags may develop on the low side of the
superelevation. These may be corrected by adjusting the grades on the
two edges of pavement throughout the curve.
e. Transitions: Widening and Reductions
1) For roadways that transition from an undivided to divided highway or where
the addition of turn lanes requires an alignment deflection of the approach
lanes, the length of these transitions is a function of design speed and the
horizontal deflection where:
L = (2/3) WS for design speed 70 km/h or greater
2
L = WS /150 for design speed less than 70 km/h
Where:
L = transition length -m
S = design speed –km/hr

Rev. 0 5.6 - 39
W = horizontal deflection –m
For Temporary traffic zones, use the criteria* below to calculate the taper
length based on the type of taper:
Type of Taper Taper Length

Merging Taper at least L
Shifting Taper at least 0.5 L
Shoulder Taper at least 0.33 L
* Source: MUTCD 2009 Edition
f. Typical Cross-sections
1) General
(a) The AASHTO GREEN BOOK provides guidance on cross sectional
elements as a function the rural or urban environment and the functional
classification of the roadway.
2) Lane Widths and Number of Lanes
(a) Freeways - Standard lane widths of 3.8 m are to be used.
(b) Expressways, Collectors, Boulevards, Corniches, Local and Residential
Roads- Standard lane widths of 3.65 m are to be used.
(c) The number of lanes is generally determined through a planning study
that considers traffic growth forecasts, design period, and desired level of
service.
3) Shoulders
(a) Freeways, Expressways, Collectors and Boulevards - Hard shoulders on
the outside edge of the carriageway shall be 3.0 m wide. On freeways,
2.0 m paved shoulders shall be provided up to a median barrier.
(b) Corniches Local and Residential Roads- Parking lanes when provided
shall be 2.5 m and separated from the travel way with valley gutter.
TABLE 5.6.3.A: SHOULDER WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Inside Shoulder Outside Shoulder

Width Width
Freeway 2.0 m 3.0 m
Expressway N/A 3.0 m
Collector
Community/Industrial N/A 3.0 m
Local
4 Lane – Industrial N/A 2.5 m parking
2 Lane - Industrial N/A 2.5 m parking
4) Curbs
(a) Curb and gutter shall be used on secondary roads with design speeds of
70 km/h or less in areas of limited right-of-way or urban type land use.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 40
5) Median Types and Uses

(a) In industrial area, freeway medians shall be a minimum of 14 m wide,
and with cross slopes 1:10 or flatter. In the community area, the freeway
medians shall be curbed and 8 m wide.
(b) Unpaved medians up to 20 m wide shall be sloped downward from the
adjoining shoulders to form a shallow valley in the center. Cross slopes
shall be 1:10 or flatter; 1:20 being preferred. Slopes as steep as 1:6 are
acceptable in exceptional case when necessary for drainage, stage
construction, etc. In medians that are 20 m and wider, the cross slopes
shall be treated as separate roadways.
TABLE 5.6.3.B: MEDIAN WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Median Width

Freeway
Industrial 14 m
Community 8m
Expressway 6.0 m
Collector
Community/Industrial 6.0 m
Local
4 Lane – Industrial 0 or 6.0 m
2 Lane - Industrial N/A
6) On-Street Parking
(a) Where used, a parallel parking lane a least 2.5 m wide shall be provided
on one or both sides of the street, as appropriate to the conditions and
intensity of development.
TABLE 5.6.3.C: PARKING WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Parallel parking Width

Freeway N/A N/A
Expressway N/A N/A
Collector
Community N/A N/A
Industrial
Local
4 Lane – Community Yes 2.5 m
2 Lane – Community Yes 2.5 m
Residential Yes/Yes 2.5 m
7) Cross-slopes and Side-Slopes

Rev. 0 5.6 - 41
(a) Normal cross-slope on the carriageway shall be 2%. Except as described

below, hard shoulders may be sloped away from the carriageway up to
5% (carriageway on normal cross-slopes) to provide efficient drainage.
On super elevated sections, the break in cross-slope between the hard
shoulder and carriageway shall never exceed 3%.
(b) For safety, aesthetics and erosion protection, fore slopes shall be 1V:6H
up to 3.0 m fill height. For fore slopes steeper than 1V:4H, consideration
to providing guardrail protection shall be determined based on the
AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
(c) Back slopes shall be 1V:3H or flatter to accommodate maintenance
equipment. Back slopes steeper than 1V:3H shall be evaluated with
regard to soil stability and potential crash severity. Retaining walls or
slope stabilization shall be considered where space restrictions would
otherwise result in slopes steeper than 1V:2H.
(d) Additional guidance regarding pavement cross slopes and side slopes
may be found in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
8) Right-of-Way Widths
(a) Roadway right-of-way is only a single component of the overall right-of-
way required. A/E and/or EPC Contractor must establish the actual
right-of-way required for each roadway segment based on the roadway
classification and configuration; as well as all master-planned utilities in
each corridor. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit these right-
of-way requirements to the RCJ for review and approval.
TABLE 5.6.3.D: MINIMUM RIGHT OF WAY WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Minimum Width Other Considerations

Freeway 80 m Road ROW only
Expressway 80 m Including Utilities
Collector Including Utilities
Community 60 m
Industrial 60 m
Local Including Utilities
4 Lane – Community 60 m
4 Lane - Industrial 60 m
2 Lane – Community 27 m
2 Lane - Industrial 27 m
Residential 20 m Including Utilities
9) Clearances
(a) Horizontal Clearances
(1) The horizontal clearance to bridge piers, abutments and retaining
walls and other obstructions for freeways and expressways shall be
determined on the basis of engineering judgment with the objective
of eliminating fixed objects from near the edge of the shoulder
wherever economically feasible. A horizontal clearance of 9 m or
more from the edge of the carriageway is desirable, with 5 m as a

Rev. 0 5.6 - 42
minimum. Lesser clearances may be used where span length,

median width or other controls make the desired clearance
unreasonable.
(2) The following are absolute minimum horizontal clearance Standards
for bridge piers, abutments, and retaining walls and other
obstructions which, in the case of freeways and expressways, may
be used only under restrictive conditions.
(3) Clearances are measured from the edge of the carriageway.
(4) On the outer edges of all roads the minimum clearance shall be 5
m. On the median edges of multi-lane divided roads the minimum
clearance shall be 3.5 m for freeways and 2 m for other roads.
(5) Greater clearances than the above minimums shall be provided
wherever physically/economically viable and additional clearances
must be provided where dictated by sight lines.
(6) Guardrails shall be considered for all abutments and piers closer
than 6 m to the edge of carriageway.
(b) Vertical Clearances
(1) The minimum vertical clearance shall be 5.5 m over the entire width
of the carriageway including hard shoulders; clearance to overhead
power lines shall conform to Saudi Electric Company (SEC)
Standards.
(2) Lateral Clearance for Elevated Structures
(3) The minimum horizontal clearance between elevated highway
structures, such as freeway viaducts and ramps, and adjoining
buildings, or other structures, shall be 4.5 m for single-deck
structures and 6 m for double-deck structures. Spot encroachments
on this clearance shall be permissible only with approval of the RCJ.
(c) Structures Across or Adjacent to Railroads
(1) Normal Horizontal and Vertical Clearances
(i) A minimum vertical clearance of 7.6 m above tracks, on which
freight cars, not exceeding a height of 4.7 m, are transported, is
to be used in design to allow for re-ballasting and normal
maintenance of track.
(ii) All curbs, including median curbs, shall be designed with 3 m of
clearance from the track centerline measured normal thereto.
(iii) The principal clearances which affect the design of highway
structures and curbs are summarized in Tables 5.6.3.E and
5.6.3.F. It shall be noted that collision walls may be required for
the clearances given in Columns (3) and (4) of TABLE 5.6.3.F.
Normally no collision walls are required if the clearance is 3 m
or more on tangent track, and 3.4 m or more on curved track.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 43
TABLE 5.6.3.E: MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCES ABOVE HIGHEST RAIL
Type of Operation
Type of Structure
Normal Freight Overweight Freight
Highway overhead and other
structures including through 7.3 m 7.7 m
railroad bridges
TABLE 5.6.3.F: MIN HORIZ. CLEARANCES TO CENTERLINE OF NEAREST TRACK

1
1
Curved Track Clearances
Tangent Normal When Space is Limited
Type of Off Track
Track Curved
Structure Maintenance Curves from 0 Curves of
Clearances Track
to 12° 12° or More
Through 2 2
None 2.5 m 2.8 m
railroad bridge
15.5 m clear to
face of pier or (2.6
Highway 2.6 m
abutment on m+1.25 cm)
overhead and 2.6 m 2.9 m minimum
side railroad per degree of
other structures
requires for curve
equipment road
Curbs 3.0 m
1
The minimum, in general is 0.3 m greater than for tangent track.
2
Greater clearance is necessary if walkway is required.
(2) Off-Track Maintenance Clearance
(i) 5.5 m of horizontal clearance is required. This clearance is
intended for sections or railroad where the railroad company is
using or definitely plans to use off-track maintenance
equipment. This clearance is provided on one side of the
railroad ROW. The railroad is required to present a statement
that off-track maintenance equipment is being used, or is
definitely planned to be used, along that section of the railroad
ROW crossed by the overhead structure.
(3) Walkway Clearances Adjacent to Railroads
(i) All plans involving construction adjacent to railroads shall be
such that there is no encroachment on the walkway adjoining
the track. Where excavations encroach into walkway areas, the
Contractor is required to construct a temporary walkway with
handrail.
(d) Approval

Rev. 0 5.6 - 44
(1) All plans involving clearances from a railroad track shall be

submitted to the SRO (Saudi Railways Organization) for approval as
to railroad interests.
(2) To avoid delays, early consideration must be given to railroad
problems when design is started on a project.
(3) Over height freight car clearance shall be provided to allow for the
operation of over height freight cars (more than 4.75 m high). See
Tables 5.6.3 E and 5.6.3 F.
4. Roadway Elements
a. Design Criteria
(a) General
(1) Design Classes shall be established in accordance with subsection
5.6.3.C.2.
2) Design Vehicle
(a) General
(1) Design Vehicle shall be established using the Design Classes and
typical distribution of traffic characteristics.
TABLE 5.6.3.G: MINIMUM DESIGN VEHICLE FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Design Vehicle

Freeway WB-19
Expressway WB-19
Collector
Community WB-19
Industrial WB-19
Local
4 Lane – Community S-BUS 12
4 Lane - Industrial WB-19
2 Lane – Community S-BUS 12
2 Lane - Industrial WB-19
Residential S-BUS 12
3) Driver Performance
(a) General
(1) The Road Safety Audit will evaluate if there is any need for special
design requirements to accommodate driver performance.
4) Traffic Characteristics and Design Volume
(a) General
(1) The traffic analysis completed in Subsection 5.6.2.C shall be used
to establish the design requirements; however these are not allowed

Rev. 0 5.6 - 45
to reduce the requirements required by HDM Volume 2 Section

1.03.
5) Design Speed
(a) General
2.02. Typical design speeds are outlined TABLE 5.6.3.H.
TABLE 5.6.3.H: DESIGN AND POSTED SPEED LIMITS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Design Speed Posted Speed

Freeway
Rural 140 Km/hr 110 Km/hr
Urban 120 Km/hr 100 Km/hr
Expressway
Community 100 Km/hr 80 Km/hr
Industrial 100 Km/hr 80 Km/hr
Collector
Community 90 Km/hr 70 Km/hr
Industrial 90 Km/hr 70 Km/hr
Local
Community 70 Km/hr Divided 60 Km/hr Undivided 50 Km/hr
Industrial 70 Km/hr Divided 60 Km/hr Undivided 50 Km/hr
Residential 50 Km/hr 40 Km/hr
6) Capacity and Level of Service

(a) General
2.02.
7) Access Management
(a) General
(1) The HDM Volume 2 shall be used to establish the level of access
control for each facility.
8) Access Criteria and Driveway Design
(a) General
(1) The HDM Volume 2 shall be used to establish the level of access
control for each facility.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 46
TABLE 5.6.3.I: ACCESS CONTROL FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Type of Access Control

Freeway Full No Direct Access
Expressway Full No Direct Access
Collector
Community Partial Turn
Industrial Restrictions possible
Local
4 Lane – Community None
4 Lane - Industrial
2 Lane – Community
2 Lane - Industrial
Residential None
(2) Access spacing shall be based on the District Master Plan.

Accesses to individual sites must comply with the roadway
classification access control and be approved by the RCJ. Access
Points shall be coordinated with adjacent development and joint
access points shall be used where ever practical.
9) Pedestrian Access
(a) General
(1) The District Master Plans illustrate the primary pedestrian circulation
routes within the Community.
10) Sidewalks
(a) General
(1) The typical sidewalk width requirements are outlined in TABLE
5.6.3.J
TABLE 5.6.3.J: MINIMUM SIDEWALK WIDTH FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Sidewalk Width

Freeway N/A
Expressway N/A
Collector
Community 2.0 m
Industrial N/A
Local
4 Lane – Community 1.5 m
Residential 1.5 m

Rev. 0 5.6 - 47
11) Bicycle Facilities

(a) General
(1) The District Plans have documented the bicycle systems that will be
required. TABLE 5.6.3.K summarize the typical widths.
TABLE 5.6.3.K: MINIMUM BICYCLE WIDTH FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Sidewalk Width

Freeway N/A
Expressway N/A
Collector
Community 1.5 m
Industrial N/A
Local
Residential 1.5 m
12) Safety
(a) General
(1) The HDM and the Roadway Safety Audit shall be used to review
safety for each facility.
13) Environment
(a) Environmental requirements shall be completed in accordance with
Subsection 3.5.3 A.
14) Use of Recyclable Materials
(a) No design requirements.
b. Drainage
1) General Aspects
(a) Concentrations of sheet flow across roadways are to be avoided.
Particular attention shall be given to reversal points of superelevation
where shoulder and gutter slopes may direct flows across the roadway.
(b) Ponding of runoff along roadways is not allowed
(c) Width of Flow/Gutter Spread
(1) The width of flow/gutter spread adjacent to the curb shall not
exceed half a travel lane or the full parking lane or hard shoulders
directly adjacent to the curb. In the case of steep gradients, the
water spread shall not exceed 1 m.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 48
2) Hydrology
(a) Hydrology methodology and modeling shall be completed in accordance
with Subsection 5.6.4.C.
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.C for hydrologic methodologies required.
3) Cross Drainage
(a) Culverts
(1) Refer Subsection 5.6.4.E.
4) Roadside Drainage (Median Drainage, Ditches, Overside Drains, Curb and
Gutters, Inlet Types and Design)
(a) Median Drainage
(1) Drainage Across the Median
(i) When it is necessary for sheet flow to cross flush medians, it
shall be intercepted by the use of slotted drains or other
suitable alternative facilities
(ii) When determining the run-off from median areas, design
calculations must take into account the type of median planting
or surface cover.
(2) Grade
(i) The flattest allowable longitudinal slope or grade is 0.25% for
earthen medians and 0.2% for paved median waterways.
(ii) General Considerations
• Economy in median drainage may be achieved by locating
inlets to utilize available nearby culverts or the collector
system of a roadway drainage installation. The inlet
capacity may be increased by placing it in a local
depression. Use of a slotted pipe at sag points where a
local depression might be necessary may be an
alternative solution to a grated catch basin.
(b) Ditches
(1) Ditches
(i) The flattest longitudinal slope or grade is 0.25% for earthen
ditches and 0.2% for paved ditches
(ii) Ditches shall be designed in accordance with Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design
(c) Overside Drains
(1) Overside drains shall only be utilized when roadway runoff may be
conveyed directly to an open channel.
(i) Design engineer shall provide calculations and details to
ensure that water within the overside drain and open channel
will not impact the roadway, roadway drainage system and the
earthworks.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 49
(d) Curb and Gutters

(1) Design
(i) The water spread adjacent to the curb shall not exceed half a
travel lane or the full parking lane or hard shoulders directly
adjacent to the curb. In the case of steep gradients, the water
spread shall not exceed 1 m.
(ii) Longitudinal Slope
• Shall be no flatter than 0.5%
(iii) Cross Slopes
• The cross slope of 0.60m gutters shall be 8% toward the
curb. Pavement slopes on superelevated roadways
extend the full width of the gutter, except that the gutter on
the low side shall not be less than 8% toward the curb.
Flatter cross slopes on gutters reduce inlet efficiency and
gutter capacity and shall be avoided.
(e) Inlet Types and Design
(1) Inlet Types
(i) There are five (5) main groups of inlets, these are:
• Curb opening inlets: These inlets have openings parallel
to the direction of flow
• Grate inlets: These inlets have a grate opening in the pan
of the gutter or waterway.
• Combination inlets: These inlets have both a curb and
grate opening
• Wall opening inlets: Intake into these inlets is normal to
the direction of flow
• Slotted drain inlets: These inlets have a continuous slot
which is flush with the pavement
(ii) The choice of the type of inlet will be influenced, in general, by
site conditions, hydraulics and safety. Although the hydraulic
capacity of any type of inlet is closely tied to the size and type
of intake opening, the capacity is greatly increased by
depressing the opening below the normal flow line of the
waterway or gutter.
(iii) Local Depressions shall meet the following requirements:
• Valley Medians: In median on a grade, the depression
shall extend a minimum of 3 m upstream, 1.8 m laterally,
measured from the edge of the inlet opening. In grade
sag, the depression shall extend a minimum of 3 m on all
sides. No median local depression, however, shall
encroach on the shoulder area. The depth of depression
normally shall be 0.11 m.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 50
• Paved Gutter Flares: The flow line at entrance shall be

depressed at least 150 mm below the shoulder level for
spillways and minimum of 200 mm for down drains. No
change in shape which results in a depression within the
shoulder shall be made. For spillways, the minimum gutter
flare length is 3 m.
• Roadside Gutter and Ditch Locations: Regardless of the
type of intake, the opening of a drop inlet in a roadside
gutter or ditch shall be depressed from 0.11 to 0.15 m
below the flow line of the waterway and the paved
transition shall extend 3 m upstream.
• Curb and Gutter Depressions: 1) this type of depression is
carefully proportioned in length, width, depth, and shape.
To best preserve the design shape, construction shall
normally be of concrete. No changes other than in width or
depth are permissible. Further requirements for curb and
gutter depressions are: (a) Width (parallel to road):
Normally 1.2 m, but for wide flows or a series of closely
spaced inlets, 1.8 m. (b) Depth: (i) Where traffic
considerations govern, the depth commonly used is 30
mm. Use the maximum of 80 mm wherever feasible at
locations where the resulting curb height would not be
objectionable. (c) Type of Pavement: (i) Local depressions
outside the roadbed are usually surfaced with 50 mm
asphalt concrete.
• General Notes on Design: Except for traffic safety
reasons, a local depression shall be provided at every
inlet even though the waterway is unpaved. Where the
size of intake opening is in question, a depression of
maximum depth shall be considered before adding
additional inlets.
(2) Location of Inlets
(i) Inlets shall be placed according to the width of flow (gutter
spread) on the pavement criteria, and at low points,
superelevation rollovers, flat areas and upstream of
intersections and driveways.
(3) Efficiency of Inlets
(i) The efficiency of inlets shall be assessed after considering the
width of flow, the size and type of inlet grating, the rainfall and
longitudinal gradient of the road. Refer to The Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design
(4) Design Procedure
(i) Inlet Type Design: The efficient spacing of road inlets depends
on several factors. The main consideration is the maximum
tolerable flow of water to the approach inlet during storm
rainfall and the efficiency of the inlet when dealing with this

Rev. 0 5.6 - 51
flow. The following design procedure shall be employed for the

design of inlet spacing
• The water flow at the edge of a curbed road shall be
calculated from the empirical formula due to Manning.
Refer to The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of
Communications Highway Design Manual Section 1.10
Hydraulic Design
• The drainage area contributing the water drained by the
inlet may then be calculated. Refer to The Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway
Design Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design
• Finally, the inlet spacing may be obtained by dividing the
drained area by the width of the road, thereby defining the
areas contributing to each storm inlet. Refer to The
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications
Highway Design Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design
5) Subsurface Drainage
(a) Storm drainage piping, manholes and junction structures shall be
designed in accordance with Subsection 5.6.4.C and 5.6.4.D.
(b) Groundwater
(1) During design, consideration shall be given to effects from
groundwater. The level of groundwater may fluctuate greatly, over a
period of a few months or over a period of many years.
(2) Drainage pipes located within areas where contact with groundwater
within their design life is likely shall have water tight joints. If
groundwater contact is likely and the surrounding soils are highly
erodible, consideration shall be given to wrapping the pipe joint in
filter fabric. The fabric shall cover a length of 1.2 m along the pipe,
centered on the joint. The design of groundwater control measures
must be coordinated with the RCJ.
6) Channel and Shore Protection - Erosion Control
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.D.4
7) Underground Disposal
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.D.8
8) Storm Water Management
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.D
c. Signage
1) All Signage shall conform to the KSA MUTCD and TCDD’s.
d. Roadway Lighting
1) Roadway Lighting
Street and roadway lighting shall be designed in accordance with CIE 115
International Commission on Illumination Technical Report: Lighting of Roads
for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic and the following CEN standards that are

Rev. 0 5.6 - 52
derived from the aforementioned CIE documents. The following tables detail
the associated CEN EN and BS/BS EN standards that implement the
requirements of CIE 115.
Document
Date
Reference Title Publisher Status Remarks
Published
No.
BS5489-1 Code of practice for BS1 Acitve 2013 The general design
the design Road standard for the UK
Lighting Part 1: includes variations for
Lighting of roads white light sources
and public amenity and SSL/LED and
areas control systems
BS EN 12665 Light and Lighting - BSI/CEN Active 2011
Basic terms and
criteria for
specifying lighting
requirements
BS EN Lighting of BSI/CEN Active 2007 Mentions roads but
12464-2 workplaces – Part includes
2: Outdoor work recommedations for
places all other external
workplaces
BS EN Lighting of Sports BSI/CEN Active 2007
13191-2 Facilities
prCEN/TR Road Lighting part CEN Active 2003 Currently being
1301-1 1 Selection of revised
lighting Classes
BS EN13201- Road lighting Part BSI/CEN Active 2013 Includes classification
2 2: Performance of road types and
requirements pedestrian crossings
BS EN13201- Road lighting - Part BSI/CEN Active 2008
3 3: Calculation of
performance
BS EN13201- Road lighting Part BSI/CEN Active 2003 Uses CIE
1 4: Methods of methodology
measuring lighting
performance
BS EN40 Passive safety of BSI/CEN Active 2003
Support
BS EN 12767 structures for road Active
equipment –
requirements,
classification and
test methods

Rev. 0 5.6 - 53
BS EN Luminaires- BSI/CEN Active 2008

60598-1 general
requirements and
tests
BS EN Luminaires- BSI/CEN Active 2011
60598-2- particular
3+A1 requirements-
Luminaires for road
and street Lighting
PD 6547 Guidance on the BSI/CEN Active 2009
use of BS EN 40-3-
1 & BS EN 40-3-3
2) Notes:
(a) It should be noted that the CEN standards are the core standards and
member countries often make amendments to suit their individual
situations and national road traffic policies i.e. Din and BS EN standards.
(b) BS 5489 is particular to the UK but includes additional information not
included in euro-norms.
The following table identifies best practice guidance documents which should be utilized to
ensure the correct interpretation of CIE/CEN methodology.
Document
Date
Reference Title Publisher Status Remarks
Published
No.
LG6 Lighting guide: Society of Revised 2006
The Outdoor Light and version due
environment Lighting for
Publication
- SLL Code for Society of 2013 Has an easy to read
Lighting Light and overview of the deign
Lighting procedures for CEN
methodology for road
lighting (chapter3)
- SLL Code for Society of 2012 Gives background and
Lighting Light and information on the uses
Lighting of lighting, equipment
(both internal and
external) and
recommendations for
wide range of
applications.
PLG02 The Application of Institute of 2013
Conflict Areas on Lighting
the Highways Professionals

Rev. 0 5.6 - 54
PLG03 Lighting for Institute of 2012

Subsidiary Roads Lighting
Professionals
PLG04 Road lighting Part Institute of 2013
4: Methods of Lighting
measuring Professionals
lighting
performance
PLG06 Passive safety of Institute of -
Support Lighting
Professionals
PLG07 High Masts for Institute of 2013
Lighting and CCTV Lighting
Professionals
TR05 Brightness of Institute of 2001
Illuminated Lighting
Advertisements Professionals
TR12 Lighting of Institute of 2007
Pedestrian Lighting
Crossings Professionals
TR22 Lighting Supports Institute of 2007
Lighting
Professionals
- Lighting and Institute of 1999
Crime Lighting
Professionals
- Guide to the Institute of 1999
procurement of Lighting
street lighting Professionals
through PFI
TR23 Lighting of Cycle Institute of 1998
Tracks Lighting
Professionals
TR24 Public Lighting Institute of 2009
Policy Lighting
Professionals
TR25 Lighting for Institute of 2002
Traffic Calming Lighting
Features Professionals
TR26 Painting of Institute of 2003
Lighting Columns Lighting
Professionals

Rev. 0 5.6 - 55
TR27 Variable Lighting Institute of -

Levels for Lighting
Highways Professionals
TR28 Measurement of Institute of 2007
Road Lighting Lighting
Performance on Professionals
Site
- Lamp Institute of - Technology is old but

replacement Lighting gives an interesting
policy in Local Professionals overview to
Authority Street Operational costs
Lighting services
TR29 White Light Institute of 2008 Interesting background
Lighting to lowering lighting
Professionals levels recommended for
white light sources but
does not consider SSL
TR30 Passive Safety Institute of 2011
Lighting
Professionals
(c) The following criteria as presented in this standard shall be utilized:

(1) Lighting applications ( CEN pd/TR 13201-1
(2) Lighting Classes for Roadways (ME S CE and G) EN 13201-2
(3) Roadway Luminance Requirements for Motorways Strategic routes
and main and secondary distributer
(4) Illuminance Requirements for subsidiary and Link Roadways
(5) Lighting Classes for Conflict Areas, Intersections and Town/City
Centres (CE)
(6) Illuminance, Uniformity and Threshold Increment Percentage
Requirements for Conflict Areas
(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop recommendations for
maintained average and/or minimum illuminance/luminance uniformity
threshold increment percentage and surround ratio based on the
processes outlined by CIE 115 and the associated CEN documents.
These recommendations shall be summarized and presented to the RCJ
for review and approval at 10% design stage. This summary shall be
provided with the content and format similar to TABLE 5.6.3.L.
(e) Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information
regarding lighting for exterior applications.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 56
TABLE 5.6.3.L: ROADWAY LIGHTING LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS
Surro Luminous
Maintained Uniformity
Conflict Maintained Threshold und intensity
Lighting Subsidiary Average Overall and
Area minimum Increment % ratio cd/klm
Type of Road Class Road Class Illuminance longitudinal
Class Luminance (%) G class
(ME) (S)
(C) (cd/m2) Ul High Low
qo lx Uo min 70 80 90
min Speed Speed
Motorways -
(Freeways)
Strategic routes -
(Expressways)
Strategic routes -
(major )
Main Distributor -
(Collectors)
(to be assessed) -
Corniche
-
Interchanges
-
Intersections
(Secondary -
Distributor) Local
2 & 4 Lane
Secondary -
Distributor)
Divided Local
Secondary
Secondary -
Distributor) Local
2 Lane Tertiary
Subsidiary
(Residential &
Loop Roads)
Subsidiary
(Cul-de-sac)
Pedestrian
Walkways
Cycleways
(f) Light source and lamp types for roadway lighting shall be high pressure
sodium (HPS), metal halide (MH) or light emitting diode (LED) as
determined from review of existing lighting in the vicinity and as
approved by the RCJ. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop
recommendations on the proposed light source and lamp type and shall
prepare a summary table of these recommendations to submit to the

Rev. 0 5.6 - 57
RCJ for review and approval. This summary shall be provided with the
content and format similar to TABLE 5.6.3.M.
TABLE 5.6.3.M: LIGHT SOURCE AND LAMP TYPE RECOMMENDATIONS
Light Source
Type of Road LED Lamp Type(s)
HPS MH Note
Note 3
Freeways   2
Expressways strategic
routes   2
Major stratejic routes  

Collectors/Boulevard
distributers   2
Corniche distributers   2
Interchange – Cloverleaf
conflict areas   2
Interchange – Trumpet
conflict area   2
Interchange – Diamond
conflict area    1, 2
Local 2 & 4 Lane link
roads  2
Divide Local Secondary
Link roads   2
Local 2 Lane Tertiary link
roads   2
Residential & Loop
Roads subsidiary   2
Cul-de-sac subsidary   2
Pedestrian Walkways   2
Cycleways   2
TABLE 5.6.3.M Notes:

1. Diamond Interchange lighting shall be HPS and transition to MH at the end of the ramp.
2. Refer to paragraph 5.5.1.M.2 Light Source for additional information regarding the characteristics of the
various light sources.
3. LED lighting shall be utilized as first choice only with prior agreement with the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 58
(g) Roadway lighting mounting heights and location shall be determined

from the type of roadway and site conditions. TABLE 5.6.3.N provides
guidance for the typical mounting conditions for the various types of
roads. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize this table to develop
the appropriate design for roadway lighting. It is understood that
variations from this guide may be necessary to adapt to site conditions.
The proposed variations shall be presented to the RCJ for review and
approval.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 59
TABLE 5.6.3.N: ROADWAY LIGHTING MOUNTING HEIGHT & LOCATION GUIDELINES
Mounting Height Mounting Location
Staggered or
Single Side
Type of Road
Opposite
One Side
Median
9-12 m
Notes
Notes
6-9 m
12 m
5m
Freeways   
Expressways stratejic
routes  
Major stratejic routes   
Collectors/Boulevards
distributers  
Corniche distributers  
Interchanges – Cloverleaf
conflict areas 1,2
Interchanges – Trumpet
conflict areas  
Interchanges – Diamond
conflict areas  
Local 2 & 4 Lane link
roads  
Residential & Loop Roads
subsidiary 3   3
Divided Local Secondary
Link roads 3 
Local 2 Lane Tertiary link
roads 3   3
Cul-de-sac subsidary 3   3
TABLE 5.6.3.N Notes:

1. High mast lighting shall be used at cloverleaf and trumpet interchanges but not at diamond interchanges.
2. Diamond interchange ramp lighting shall be mounted on 12 m poles.
3. Luminaire mounting height and location shall be as required. Include pole, wall and bollard lighting as appropriate for the
installation.
4. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information regarding pole selection.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 60
3) Parking Area Lighting

(a) Refer to paragraph 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information.
(b) Car park lighting shall be assessed in accordance with EN 12464-2 2007
4) Sidewalk Lighting
(a) Refer to paragraph 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information.
5) Lighting Controls
(a) General
(1) Roadway lighting shall be Controlled and monitored by the lighting
by the Lighting Management System (LMS) .
(2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate level of
control strategy for roadway and street lighting based upon the
number of street lights to be installed.
(3) 1-50 luminaires Electronic programmable control gear set to stand
alone mode.
(4) Over 50 luminaires- local programmable outstation connected by
either wireless or power line control as defined by the RC chosen
LMS strategy.
(5) Programmed for Remote monitoring and control when central
system is available.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate control
strategy for roadway lighting. The recommended control strategies shall
be summarized and submitted to the RCJ for review and approval. The
summary shall be submitted in a format and content similar to TABLE
5.6.3.O.
(c) Lighting management system (LMS) DALI requirements at luminaire
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the LMS equipment and
design philosophy based upon the design from the RC’s preferred. LMS
supplier (to be confirmed). The LMS system shall provide the following
functionality using the DALI protocol: The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall select the appropriate level of control strategy for roadway and
street lighting the LMS based upon the road classification usage of the
road and the light source technology within the luminaire. The LMS
system shall be designed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to be
comply fully with operational protocol specification for DALI in IEC
62386. The DALI protocol exists between the Light source and the
ballast/driver the DALI 2-way communications are to be converted by
the LMS into the luminaire to Feeder pillar communication protocol either
power-line signaling or wireless telemetry. The Dali Ballast/driver shall
provide the full DALI specification of control and feedback functionality -
(1) Dimming of the lamp within the prescribed dimming range specified
by the lamp and ballast manufacturer.
(2) No more than 10 luminaires per circuit

Rev. 0 5.6 - 61
(3) Each luminaire shall be individually addressable and provide full 2

way communication between.
(4) Each Dali luminaire shall be able to be assigned its address from
area controller and the following
(5) Power ON, Maximum, system failure, fade time and rate groups
assigned to ballast, Light scene values assigned to ballasts.
(6) The Dali ballast communication shall include all 11 Status feedback
messages luminaire On Luminaire Off Energy level> Hours run ,
Lamp condition Ballast condition
(7) Assigning of a group of luminaires from area controller
(d) Lighting management system (LMS) control requirements at the area
controller (Located at street lighting transformer panel)
The area controller shall receive and transmit control/command functions
to and status messages received from all the individual luminaires
programmed on to the area controller. The area controller shall be able
to be pre-programmed and hold luminaire programming within its
memory, The area controller shall have its own integral CPU and non-
volatile memory. The area controller shall be able to operate in stand-
alone function and be incorporated into a city wide sever based LMS with
remote programming capabilities from prescribed terminals connected to
the servers.
(e) Lighting Management system Central Control and Monitoring
The LMS shall be capable of being expanded into a full city wide system
capable of being integrated into a wider city asset management system.
The LMS shall have database management software to allow the
interrogation of the LMS for energy usage, component failures and
maintenance scheduling. The LMS shall allow the reprogramming of
both individual luminaires and groups of Luminaires. The servers are to
be located within KSA and shall be fully accessible to RC staff by
appointment.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 62
TABLE 5.6.3.O: ROADWAY LIGHTING CONTROL

RECOMMENDATIONS
Central Control
Programmed Time Clock

Multi-pole Contactor
Individual Photocell
Common Photocell
Application
Roadway    2
Street    2
Interchanges    2
Parking    2
Sidewalk    2
TABLE 5.6.3.O Notes:

1. Table content is provided as an example for content and format and does not
include all exterior applications or control means that may be used. A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall include all appropriate applications for the facility being
designed.
2. In exceptional cases, where lighting circuits are shared with signal or irrigation
loads, each luminaire shall be equipped with a photocell.
6) Power Distribution
(a) Roadway lighting circuits shall provide power for light poles, freeway
signs, and other such lighting loads required after sunset.
(b) Traffic signals and irrigation systems shall be fed from unswitched bus
(i.e. not controlled by the contactor). In exceptional cases, where lighting
circuits are shared with signal or irrigation loads, each luminaire shall be
equipped with a photocell.
(c) Roadway lighting feeders shall be direct buried armored cable, except
under road crossings where cables shall be installed in PVC conduits.
(1) Feeders shall be fed from panels included with roadway lighting
transformers.
(2) Feeder cables shall be in continuous runs without being cut at the
splices.
(3) Cables shall loop from pole to pole. Cable runs shall be connected
at the fuse block or circuit breaker terminals inside the pole.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 63
(4) Branch circuits to individual poles shall be spliced from the feeder
cables.
(d) Street lighting cables in Community area and corniche, most of which will
be under paved areas, shall be installed in PVC conduit.
(1) Circuits shall be fed from street lighting pedestals or panels.
(2) Minimum size conduit shall be 50 mm.
(e) Voltage drop for feeders and circuits which supply roadway and street
lighting shall be considered. Cables shall be sized to limit the total
(feeder and branch circuit) voltage drop at the farthest fixture to 5% or
below. Cable size shall be uniform throughout the run for each circuit.
(f) Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 Electrical for additional information regarding
power distribution.
7) Design
(a) Luminance, illuminance, lighting uniformity, and disability glare shall be
calculated in accordance with CIE 140 International Commission on
Illumination Technical Report: Road Lighting Calculations and listed CEN
standards. Designs shall be undertaken with RC approved lighting
design software and shall cover all classifications of road within the
project and all conflict areas.
(b) Lighting calculations shall be prepared for all roadway applications and
shall be submitted to the RCJ for review and approval. Refer to
paragraph 5.5.1.M.5 Lighting Calculations for additional information.
8) Environmental Condition
(a) Luminaires, control gear lighting control equipment shall be capable of
operating to the manufacturers published performance criteria in the
following arrangements.
(b) Outdoor Sheltered - Maximum 40°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to Paragraphs
(1), (2) and (3) below.
(c) Outdoor Sheltered - Maximum 40°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to Paragraphs
(1), (2) and (3) below.
(1) "Sheltered" refers to permanent, ventilated enclosures or buildings,
or permanently fixed sunshades with a top and three sides.
(2) For instruments which dissipate internal heat and are installed in
custom engineered enclosures (e.g., enclosures not included in the
original manufacturer's temperature certification), an additional 15°C
shall be added to the above maximum temperatures. An example,
for "indoor air conditioned" installation, the equipment must perform
at 35 + 15 = 50°C.
(3) Similarly, for the "outdoor unsheltered" case, the equipment shall be
designed for a maximum operating temperature of 65 + 15 = 80°C.
9) For the outdoor installations only, the designer can take credit for forced or
passive cooling to eliminate or reduce the 15°C heat rise. For example, if
vortex coolers are used, the heat removal capacity of the coolers may be
subtracted from the generated heat. No more than 15°C reduction in

Rev. 0 5.6 - 64
temperature will be given as credit. The designer shall substantiate his claim
by providing the support data and calculations.
10) Refer to the GPCS Sections
11) Refer to the RC Standard Drawings (TCDDs)
e. Guardrails and Traffic Control Devices
1) Regulatory Measures
(a) General
(1) Highway conditions that are shielded by a roadside barrier may
generally be place into one of two basic categories: (1)
embankments or (2) roadside obstacles (fixed objects).
(2) The reason for installing guardrail on embankments and adjacent to
fixed objects is to reduce the combined effect of accident severity
and frequency of occurrence of "run-off-road" type of accidents. This
is accomplished by deflecting a vehicle away from the embankment
slope or the fixed object and by reducing the deceleration rate.
(3) Guardrails will reduce accident severity only for those conditions
where the overall severity of striking the guardrail is less than the
overall severity of going down the embankment or striking the fixed
object.
(4) Guardrails will also reduce accident frequency only if it provides
increased delineation at "run-off-road" accident locations of high
frequency. Delineation, however, is considered only an incidental
benefit stemming from other uses because delineation may be
effected by other means at less cost. Generally, it would be
expected that installing guardrail adjacent to fixed objects would
increase the frequency of occurrence because the guardrail
presents a larger obstacle.
(5) Guard railing shall generally be metal beam rail as shown on
guideline drawings. In particular circumstances, however, it may be
more desirable to use rigid concrete "safety shape" railing where the
min deflection area behind the guardrail is not free of obstacles.
(b) Guardrail on Embankments
(1) The embankment height and side slope are the basic factors in
determining barrier need. The criteria are based on studies of the
relative severity of encroachments on embankments versus impacts
with roadside barriers. The height and slope criteria determining
need is demonstrated in Figure 5-1 of the AASHTO Roadside
Design Guide (RDG). Additional factors for consideration are also
discussed in the RDG.
(c) Guardrail at Roadside Obstacles
(1) Barrier recommendations for roadside obstacles are a function of
the obstacle itself and the likelihood that it will be hit. Guidelines for
non-traversable terrain and roadside obstacles are provided in
Table 5-2 of the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
(d) Barrier type selection

Rev. 0 5.6 - 65
(1) The type of roadside barrier (i.e. guardrail or concrete barrier) shall
include consideration such as the percentage of heavy trucks and
the probability and consequences of a heavy vehicle penetrating the
barrier. Types of roadside barriers and selection considerations are
discussed in the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
(e) Barrier Placement and End Anchorages
(1) Factors determining the optimum barrier placement location relative
to the roadway and obstacle it is designed to protect include: 1)
clearance from the traveled way and obstacle, 2) lateral slope and
terrain, and 3) angle of departure and length of advance need.
Special anchorages and in particular approach end anchorages are
required for satisfactory performance. Additional discussion and
guidance is provided in the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
2) Operational and Control Measures for Right-Turn Maneuvers
(a) General
(1) Intersection capacity analysis shall be used establish the number of
right turn lanes required.
(2) Intersection signal analysis shall be used to establish if a right turn
phase is warranted.
(3) Traffic control needs shall be reviewed based on roadway
configuration and classification.
(4) Roadway classification shall be used to establish the typical
(5) The radius of the outside edge of the carriageway for right turn
movements shall be in accordance with TABLE 5.6.3.P.
TABLE 5.6.3.P: TURNING RADII
Collector Residential, Park,

Divided Undivided
Expressway 4-Lane or
Local Local
Local Security
20 m with 20 m with
Expressway corner corner N/A N/A N/A
island Island
20 m with
Collector 4-Lane
corner 15 m 10 m 10 m N/A
Local
island
Divided Local N/A 10 m 10 m 8m 8m
Undivided Local N/A 10 m 8m 8m 6m

Residential, Park,
N/A N/A 8m 6m 6m
or Security

Rev. 0 5.6 - 66
(b) Islands
(1) Channelizing islands shall define the traffic channels to drivers and
pedestrians alike in the clearest manner possible. To prevent
confusion, the number of islands shall be kept to a minimum and the
use of small islands be avoided. The approach end of an island
shall be designed to give the driver adequate warning of its
presence and shall never require a sudden change in direction or
speed. Transverse lane shifts shall begin far enough in advance of
the intersection to show gradual transitions. Islands on horizontal or
vertical curves shall be avoided. If the use of islands on curves
cannot be avoided, adequate sight distance, illumination, and
illuminated terminal nosings shall be provided.
(2) The design must provide minimum turning radii for all types of
vehicles moving through the intersection and conform to the angles
of intersection given in Figure 5.6.3.A. Figure 5.6.3.A shows
Standard Island and curb details for a typical channelized
intersection.
FIGURE 5.6.3.A: ISLAND AND CURB DETAILS

Rev. 0 5.6 - 67
(3) Shying Distance

(i) TABLE 5.6.3.Q gives the required shying distance where
barrier-type curbs are used.
TABLE 5.6.3.Q: REQUIRED SHYING DISTANCE
Lane Width On Left On Right
3.8 m 0.3 m 0.9 m
(ii) When mountable curbs are used on ramps, no shying distance

is needed.
(4) Flaring
(i) A 14 m flare shall be used on the left and a 33 m flare on the
right wherever island length permits. Flares of 9 or 4.5 m on the
left and 15 or 7.5 m on the right may be used for shorter
islands. Islands less than 4.5 m on the left and 7.5 m on the
right need not be flared.
(5) Curbing
(i) Raised traffic curbing used for islands shall be cast-in place in
accordance with the applicable Standards.
(6) Size
2
(i) Triangular islands must be at least 4.7 m in size with legs no
less than 2.4 m long out-to-out after rounding of corners.
3) Operational and Control Measures for Left-Turn Movements
(a) General
(1) Intersection capacity analysis shall be used establish the number of
turn lanes required.
(2) Intersection signal analysis shall provide a protected turn phase.
(3) Roadway classification shall be used to establish the typical
requirements for provision of turn lanes.
(4) Median lanes are authorized for any channelization divided roads
where left turns are permitted from the through lane regardless of
whether or not traffic signals are to be installed. Where it is
necessary to store stopped vehicles, additional length of median
lane shall be provided on the basis of 7.6 m per vehicle. For a
maximum storage time of 2 minutes, this yields the storage lengths
shown in TABLE 5.6.3 R.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 68
TABLE 5.6.3.R: STORAGE LENGTHS
Design Hourly Volume

25 - 150 150 - 210 210 - 240 240- 270 270 - 300
of Turning Vehicle
Storage Length (m) 45 53 61 69 76
4) Regulation of Curb Parking

(a) Parking Zones
(1) The RCJ has provided for the establishment of parking zones and
requires that roads and highways are to be marked with white lines
designating parking spaces.
(2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall furnish drawings showing the
definite location of all parking spaces on roadways.
(3) The desirable dimensions of parallel parking spaces are 2.5 by 7.3
m with a minimum length of 6.7 m.
(4) At all intersections, one space length on each side shall have
parking prohibited. Clearance also shall be provided at driveways.
At signalized intersections, parking shall be prohibited for a
minimum of two stall lengths on the near side and one space length
on the far side, refer to Figure 5.6.3.B.
FIGURE 5.6.3.B: TRAFFIC STRIPPING FOR PARKING DETAILS
(b) Stall Arrangement

(1) Figure 5.6.3.C shows the curb and road space required for parking
at various angles. Parking plus maneuvering space may occupy up
to 5.5 m of road width for parallel parking and will range up to 12.2
m for angle parking. The 7 m stall for parallel curb parking
accommodates the longer automobiles and permits entering or
leaving movements with one maneuver.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 69
FIGURE 5.6.3.C: SPACE AND AISLE REQUIREMENTS FOR PARKING AT VARIOUS ANGLE
(c) Parking Space Markings

(1) Parking lines when placed shall be white stripes, 100 mm wide,
painted in accordance with one of the plans shown on
Figures 5.6.3.B and 5.6.3.C
5) Directional Lane Usage
(a) Not allowed.
6) Markers, Markings and Delineations

Rev. 0 5.6 - 70
(a) Roadway signing and marking shall comply with the KSA MUTCD Parts
2 and 3.
f. Noise Barriers
1) General
(a) The HDM Volume 2 Book 2 Section 1.14 B shall be used to determine
need for noise barriers.
(b) The noise analysis shall be used to establish the current or future need
for noise barriers.
(c) If there is a future need for noise barriers, the barrier location and type
shall be established and shown as future on all A/E and/or EPC
contractor drawings to ensure the future installation may be
accommodated.
g. Fencing
1) General
(a) All freeways shall be continuously fenced to control access in
accordance with the Master Plan.
(b) Generally, roads other than freeways will not require fencing.
(c) Facilities such as transformers and load centers shall be provided with
fence enclosures.
(d) All fencing is to be chain link in accordance with the TCDDs.
h. Bus Stops and Taxi Stops, other public transit
1) General
(a) Bus curb-loading zones normally shall have the following distinct
characteristics:
(1) The area in the roadway adjacent to the curb shall be reserved for
use by the stopped bus, plus maneuver space.
(2) Adequate uniform signs to inform pedestrians of the location of bus
stops.
2) Dimensions
(a) TABLE 5.6.3.S gives minimum desirable bus curb-loading zone sizes as
related to these factors based upon data from several sources (but
mainly from tests conducted by or for the American Transit Association in
several cities on all sizes of buses); approach speeds in their tests
ranged from 24 to 32 km/h.
(b) The distances indicated in TABLE 5.6.3.S for near-side stops are the
minimum which will permit the driver to pull into the zone and position the
bus reasonably parallel to the curb and out of the flow of moving traffic.
The dimensions of far-side stops are adequate to provide stopping space
for the bus parallel to the curb with sufficient clearance between the bus
and the end of the zone so that the driver may easily pull back out into
moving traffic.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 71
TABLE 5.6.3.S: MINIMUM DESIRABLE LENGTHS FOR BUS CURB-LOADING ZONES
Length in, m for

Normal
Approximate
Bus
Bus Seating One Bus Stop Two Bus Stop
Length
Capacity
m Near Far Mid- Near Far Mid-
Side Side Block Side Side Block
30 and Less 7.6 27.5 19.8 38.0 36.5 27.5 45.5
35 9.0 29.0 21.3 39.5 39.5 30.5 48.5
40 - 45 10.7 30.5 22.9 41.0 42.5 33.5 51.5
51 12.0 32.0 24.4 42.5 45.5 36.5 55.0
3) Illumination
(a) When bus curb-loading zones are located where the general street
lighting is not sufficient to provide adequate illumination for maximum
safety in passenger boarding or disembarking and for their security
adequate supplemental lighting shall be provided. A conflict area lighting
assessment is required to establish the required illumination level, refer
to Subsection 5.5.1.M.4.
4) Signs and Markings
(a) Adequate uniform signs for prohibiting vehicular parking and for marking
the extreme limits of the zones shall be installed and properly
maintained. Solid yellow curb markings will aid in enforcing regulations
prohibiting use of these spaces by private automobiles taxicabs and
trucks. Painted lines or markings on the pavement designating the limits
of the zone are frequently used; a legend such as "BUS STOP NO
PARKING" is sometimes painted on the pavement.
5) Location
(a) Bus curb-loading stops shall not be located so as to cause hazard and
delay due to obstruction of other vehicular traffic flow. Where curbs are
recessed for bus stops approach and departure tapers shall not be less
than 8:1. It is sometimes desirable to recess the curb sufficiently to
provide a turn-out bay for the entire bus which is completely shielded
from moving lanes of traffic.
(b) Bus curb-loading zones are located on the near-side or far-side of
intersections or at a mid-block location. The selection of the location shall
be based on a consideration of bus routings number of buses the origin
and destination of transit passengers; the transfer of patrons between
bus routes traffic and pedestrian movements and the desired operation
of traffic control devices.
(c) At intersections where buses turn, a far-side or mid-block stop has some
advantages. A far-side stop is particularly advantageous where a left turn

Rev. 0 5.6 - 72
is made. When right turns are made and the curb radius is short a mid-
block stop has definite advantages other conditions being equal.
(d) At complicated intersections where streets meet at other than right
angles, far-side stops often provide better operation and less traffic
interference.
(e) At bus transfer points where there is a considerable volume of
transferring passenger traffic, pedestrian travel across the intersection
may be minimized by having the buses on one route stop at the near
side while buses on the intersecting street stop on the far side.
(f) At intersections where the predominant number of arriving and leaving
passengers come from or are destined for a specific building or industrial
plant, the bus stop shall be located to minimize pedestrian traffic at the
intersection. Far-side stops are seldom found satisfactory where there is
apt to be even an occasional accumulation of buses greater than the
capacity of the bus curb-loading zone.
(g) At intersections where numerous vehicles turn right near-side bus stops
may result in conflicts and traffic accidents and thus be inferior to far-side
stops.
(h) Factors such as sidewalk obstructions inferior alighting surfaces, street
paving or roadway grades frequently may be the key in the final
determination of the proper bus stop location.
(i) Bus stops shall be located so that the maximum walking time to a bus
stop does not exceed 10 minutes.
6) Operation
(a) Where buses make right turns, it is desirable to increase the curb radii to
a degree sufficient to permit buses to make such turns without swinging
out into the adjacent traffic lanes and without climbing or rubbing the
corner curb.
(b) A desirable curve which will provide an easy right-turning movement
consists of a compound curve, the center radius of which is 7.5 m and
the radius of each end is 30 m. The equivalent simple-curve radius is 10
m. The lengthening of the curb radii as suggested above will not
lengthen the pedestrian crosswalk materially, but such action will reduce
sidewalk capacity and therefore may not be feasible at some locations
where sidewalk space cannot be sacrificed.
i. Curb Ramps
1) General
(a) Follow US ADA Design Standards. Refer to Typical Construction Detail
Drawings TCDDs.
j. Rest Areas, Scenic Overlooks, and Information Centers
1) General
(a) Roadside Development shall be consisted with the HDM Volume 2 Book
2 Section 1.14

Rev. 0 5.6 - 73
k. Commuter Lots
1) General
(a) Location
(1) The location of parking facilities will depend upon:
(i) The degree of demand in a specific area;
(ii) Location of traffic generators;
(iii) Adequacy of existing parking facilities;
(iv) Geographical area within which the demand exceeds the
supply;
(v) Land costs; AND
(vi) Location of suitable access roads.
(b) Entrances and Exits
(1) Plans for parking facilities shall be integrated with the road plan,
traffic volumes, and road capacities (vehicular and pedestrian). The
location of entrances and exits on two or more roads will distribute
the traffic load so that there is less interference with road to lot
movement. Lots having an 18.3 m frontage, or multiples of 18.3 m,
or a 7.3 m aisle side, constitute parking units which provide
sufficient maneuvering space and permits access from either
direction.
(2) Figure 5.6.3.C shows the stall and aisle dimensions recommended
for different parking angles. Acute angle parking gives fewer stalls
for a given distance and requires one-way aisles unless cars are
backed into some stalls; but entry is easier for drivers, and narrower
aisles may be used.
(3) Figure 5.6.3.D shows two variations of the herringbone parking
pattern, an efficient method of conserving space.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 74
FIGURE 5.6.3.D: HERRINGBONE PATTERN PARKING LAYOUTS
(4) Figure 5.6.3.E illustrates various methods of laying out parking

patterns in a lot 30.5 by 30.5 m; a larger lot would permit better
development of the area.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 75
FIGURE 5.6.3.E: SELF PARKING LOT
(5) Stall marking lines or curbs are recommended for all types of stalls;
wheel blocks or bumper guards are essential for the protection of
fences and elimination of collisions with parked vehicles. Every lot
shall be enclosed by a curb, guardrail, wall, fence, or hedge for
safety and landscaping. Pedestrian safety may be improved by

Rev. 0 5.6 - 76
providing pedestrian walkways and illumination; it is frequently

difficult to confine the pedestrian to these walkways. Drainage,
grading, and dust-prevention are minimum requirements.
(c) Parking Lots
(1) Most efficient use of land area in larger parking lots is obtained by
placing all vehicles perpendicular to the aisles. A perpendicular
layout is readily adaptable and is desirable, except where one way
street traffic indicates that movement shall be clockwise to reduce
conflicts.
l. Roadside Parking Areas
1) General
(a) Roadside Development shall be consistent with the Volume 2 Book 2
Section 1.14
m. Vehicle Barriers
1) General
(a) Vehicle Barriers shall be consistent with the HDM Volume 2 Book 1
Section 1.15.
5. Interchanges, Intersections and Roundabouts
1) A corridor study shall be completed based on the requirements outlined in the
HDM Volume 1 Section 2.03
b. Types of Intersections
1) The corridor study shall establish the various levels of roadway classification
and the associated intersection requirements.
c. Grade Separations
1) General
(a) Design Criteria
(1) The design criteria to be used for grade separations is given in
these guidelines and shall be used in conjunction with the standard
specifications for highway bridges adopted by the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation officials, AASHTO,
latest edition.
(b) Locations
(1) Bridges are located to conform to the general alignment of the
highway. Ideally, location for a bridge crossing shall be determined
in accordance with the following guidelines:
(i) The crossing may be made at right angles.
(ii) Alignment of the approach pavement is tangent and sufficiently
long to eliminate superelevation on the bridge.
(iii) Soil conditions are adequate for installation.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 77
(2) Structures shall not be placed on vertical and horizontal curvature

when alternate locations are available. The final decision for
location shall be based on a complete analysis of the factors
involved, including those relating to traffic safety, operating
conditions, and economics.
(3) Location and type of bridge requirements shall be recommended by
the A/E and/ EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
d. Capacity Analysis
1) Using the roadway classification,traffic volumes from the corridor study and
the operational requirements of the roadway network, intersection shall be
evaluated and any capacity deficiencies shall be addressed during the
development of corridor study.
e. Alignment and Profile
1) A center line location and preliminary design shall be completed based on the
requirements outlined in the HDM Volume 1 Section 2.05
2) Additional information is required at all intersections to ensure proper
matching between roads and proper drainage is maintained. Intersection
grading details may be required.
f. Islands
1) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.e.2.b for island requirements
g. Medians
1) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.3.f.5 for median requirements
h. Channelization
1) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.3.a.4 for channelization requirements
i. Acceleration and Deceleration Lanes
1) Refer to the RC Construction Details TCDD’s.
j. Auxiliary Lanes
1) In order to insure satisfactory operating conditions, auxiliary lanes may be
added to the basic width of carriageway.
2) Where an entrance ramp of one interchange is closely followed by an exit
ramp of another interchange, the acceleration and deceleration lanes may be
joined with an auxiliary lane. This shall be dependent upon the weaving
segment capacity which varies with configuration, number of lanes, free flow
speed of highway, length, and volume ratio. Refer to Auxiliary lanes, Chapter
10 AASHTO.
3) Where interchanges are more widely spaced and ramp volumes are high, the
need for an auxiliary lane between the interchanges shall be determined by
an across-freeway lane volume check. This check shall include consideration
of freeway grade and volume of trucks.
4) Auxiliary lanes may be used for the orientation of traffic at two-lane ramps or
branch connections. The length and number of auxiliary lanes in advance of
two-lane exits are based on percentages of turning traffic.
k. Frontage Roads

Rev. 0 5.6 - 78
1) The requirement for and design of frontage roads shall be based on the HDM
Volume 2 Book 1 Section 1.05 G.
l. Lighting at Intersections
1) The requirement for and design of roadway lighting shall be based on the
HDM Volume 2 Book 2 Section 1.11.
m. Railroad Grade Crossings
1) General
(a) Railroad Grade Crossing must be controlled in accordance with the
MUTCD Part 7.
n. Interchanges
1) Types
(a) The location of interchanges is largely predetermined by the Work Plan.
In general full clover leaf, partial cloverleaf, or trumpet type interchanges
are used for freeway to freeway connections whilst compact diamond
interchanges are used for connecting freeways to other classes of road.
2) Warrants for Interchanges and Grade Separations
(a) The design criteria to be used for grade separations is given in these
guidelines and shall be used in conjunction with the standard
specifications for highway bridges adopted by the American Association
of State Highway and Transportation officials, AASHTO, latest edition.
(b) Interchange type and layout configuration must satisfy the forecasted
traffic demand. Refer to Subsection 5.6.2.C.
3) Access Management
(a) Access control is to be exercised along interchange ramps to their
junction with the nearest "collector" road. At such a junction, access shall
be controlled to the end of the ramp pavement taper. At locations where
curb returns are used in lieu of tapers, access restrictions may extend 15
m beyond the end of the curb return.
(b) Where traffic leaves a ramp situation and enters a local traffic situation
and the freeway ride is clearly and obviously ended, the access control
shall also end.
4) Grade Separation Structures
(a) Structures shall not be placed on vertical and horizontal curvature when
alternate locations are available. The final decision for location shall be
based on a complete analysis of the factors involved, including those
relating to traffic safety, operating conditions, and economics.
(b) Location and type of bridge requirements shall be recommended by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
5) Design Standards
(a) Location and type of bridge requirements shall be recommended by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
6) Freeway Entrances and Exits

Rev. 0 5.6 - 79
(a) General
(1) All freeway entrances and exits shall connect to the right of through
traffic.
(b) Location on a Curve
(1) Freeway entrances and exits shall be located on tangent Sections
wherever possible in order to provide maximum sight distance and
optimum traffic operation. Where ramps have to be located on
curves the ramp tapers shall also be curved. At freeway exits the
radius of the taper shall be about the same radius as the freeway
edge of pavement in order to develop the same degree of
divergence as the standard design. At freeway entrances on a
curve, the ramp alignment will vary with the radius of curvature of
the freeway.
(2) Where an exit in a cut section must be on a curve, cut widening for
visibility may be needed. If this is not feasible, an auxiliary lane in
advance of the exit may be provided. The length of the auxiliary
lane need not exceed 300 m and may be less if the beginning of
the lane occurs on a tangent section of the freeway.
7) Weaving Movement
(a) Design requirements for weaving sections shall be analyzed in
accordance with an internationally recognized standard
(b) Weaving between closely spaced loop ramps when adjacent to high
speed highways, will be accomplished by using Collector-Distributor
(C-D) roads. Weaving without C-D roads will be allowed on the low
speed crossroad. The following design criteria shall be used in either
case:
(1) The algebraic difference between crown slopes shall not exceed
0.05 m per m.
(2) Edge of pavement profiles shall be plotted to insure smooth
transition and adequate drainage.
(3) Tangent takeoffs for off ramps are to be avoided; therefore the
proper location of the weaving sections shall preferably be on an
approximate tangent section of the collector-distributor road or
crossroad.
8) Other Design Features
(a) Testing
(1) General
(i) When a section of freeway includes a series of closely spaced
exits and entrances, it shall be tested for capacity and ease of
operation from the driver’s point of view, experiencing the
signing, merging, diverging, and weaving movements involved.
This testing shall be completed soon after the preliminary
design. It shall be performed by tracing the paths of drivers
undertaking various origination and destination points, with the
designer visualizing traffic, signage and other features along
each route being traveled.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 80
(b) Ramp Metering

(1) General
(i) Ramp meters are traffic signals placed on freeway entrance
ramps or freeway connectors to control the flow of vehicles
entering the freeway. They are designed to improve the
average speed of all vehicles traveling on a freeway mainline
by decreasing congestion that may result when too many cars
enter at certain points. The traffic signals may be pre-timed or
traffic-actuated to release the entering vehicles in small
platoons. Pre-timed metering releases vehicles at regular
intervals that have been determined by traffic studies and
simulation modeling.
(c) Grading
(1) General
(i) Preliminary alignment and profiles of the intersecting roads are
developed to determine the controls governing bridge design.
Alternative slopes and wall configurations shall be evaluated
before final decisions are made for the bridge and wingwall
designs. Flat slopes shall be used wherever practical to
facilitate economical maintenance and facilitate regaining of
control for vehicles that run off the road.
(d) Models
(1) General
(i) Computer software may be used to provide 3D visualizations
and traffic simulations for the purpose of analyzing and
comparing alternatives for various interchange configurations.
Design models may be easily adjusted, allowing the designer
to experiment with different concepts. They are also useful in
communicating the design team’s ideas to stakeholders and
public officials.
o. Railroad Highway Crossings
1) General
(a) All railroad crossing shall be evaluated using the RHGCH to establish the
necessary crossing treatment.
(b) All signing and marking shall be compliant with MUTCD Part 7.
6. Flexible Pavement Design
Flexible pavements consist of appeared roadbed underlying layers of subbase, base, and
bituminous asphaltic concrete surface courses. The prepared roadbed is a layer of in-situ
soils or select borrow material which has been compacted to a specified density. The
subbase usually consists of a compacted layer of granular material, or of a layer of soil
treated with an admixture, and it shall be of significantly better material than the roadbed
soil. The base course is the portion of the pavement structure located immediately
beneath the surface course. Its major function in the pavement is structural support. It
usually consists of aggregates such as crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel and
sand, or combinations of these materials.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 81
a. Pavement Structure Layers

1) Freeway, Expressway,Collector, Local and Residential Facilities – Layer
thickness design methodology shall be in conformance with in the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communication Highway Design Manual (HDM).
Minimum layer thickness design shall be as shown in table TABLE 5.6.3.T.
TABLE 5.6.3.T: MINIMUM PAVEMENT THICKNESS
Freeway /
Pavement 4-Lane 2-Lane
Interchange Expressway
Type Collector Local
Ramps
AC Surface
70 70 50 50
Course
AC Base
180 180 70 70
Course
Aggregate
200 200 200 200
Road Base
Aggregate
300 300 250 250
Sub Base
2) The roadbed shall be prepared by densifying underlying soils in accordance

with RC specifications (GPCS).
b. Pavement Design Life
1) A pavement design life of 20 years shall be used for flexible pavement design
and 40 years shall be used for rigid pavement design.
2) Pavement design life is defined as from construction completion and opening
of traffic to when the first major maintenance event (resurfacing) is required.
c. Traffic Considerations
1) The primary traffic input needed to design pavement thickness for freeways
and expressways in accordance with the HDM is the number of equivalent
8-tonnes single-axle loads (ESAL) that will travel over the pavement over the
design life.
2) A Traffic Impact Statement shall be included for all roadway designs.
d. Soil Characteristics
1) Soil strength values to be used with the HDM design methodology shall be
(a) the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) based on MRDTM 213 test
procedures. The aforementioned thicknesses for pavement layers are
based on CBR more than or equal to 10. If CBR values for the area are
low, it may be possible to specify replacing or improving the soil in this
area by soil stabilization techniques, excavation and recompaction, dig
out and replace or other approved measures to increase the soil
strength.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 82
(b) Resilient Modulus based on AASHTO Test Method T 274.

MR = 1500 (CBR)
e. Materials
1) Pavement Structure Layer materials shall be in accordance with the General
Construction Specifications.
2) Recycled Materials
f. Maintainability and Constructability
1) General
(a) There are various maintenance operations which are carried out for a
highway. Maintenance of pavement, shoulders, drainage, erosion,
vegetation, and structures, are some of the major categories.
Constructability of pavement is related placement and compaction of
base and sub base, and largely a function of the suitability and stability of
the underlying soils on which the pavement will be constructed.
g. Life-Cycle Cost Analysis
1) General
(a) It is essential when comparing costs of design alternatives that an
economic analysis considers all costs that will occur during the entire life
cycle of the facility. Life-cycle costs include construction costs,
maintenance costs, and rehabilitation costs.
h. Pavement Drainage
1) General
(a) Drainage of water from pavements is an important consideration in road
design. Excess water combined with increased traffic volumes and loads
may lead to early pavement distress. To obtain adequate pavement
drainage, the designer shall consider providing three types of drainage
systems: (1) surface drainage, (2) groundwater drainage, and (3)
structural drainage. Maintenance practices shall recognize the necessity
of sealing joints and cracks in the pavement surface. Removal of
subsurface water can be accomplished by designing the pavement to
drain vertically into the subgrade, or laterally through a drainage layer
into a system of pipe collectors.
i. Base and Subbase
1) General
(a) When roadbed soils are of relatively poor quality and the design
procedure indicates that a substantial thickness of pavement is required,
several alternate designs shall be prepared for structural sections with
and without subbase. The selection of an alternate may then be made on
the basis of availability and relative costs of materials suitable for base
and subbase. Because lower quality materials may be used in the lower
layers of a flexible pavement structure, the use of a subbase course is
often the most economical solution for construction of pavements over
poor road-bed soils.
j. Structure Approach Slabs

Rev. 0 5.6 - 83
1) General
(a) The highway bridge approach slab is a thick, heavily reinforced Portland
cement concrete slab that provides a transition between the roadway
pavement and the bridge. The approach slab acts as an intermediate
bridge to span the portion of embankment directly behind the
abutment/backwall which was excavated to construct the
abutment/backwall. This area is difficult to compact after construction of
the bridge abutment. By being supported on one end by the bridge
abutment, the approach slab bridges the gap between the rigid abutment
and the undisturbed embankment beyond the area excavated.
k. Superpave
1) Superpave, short for "superior performing asphalt pavement" is a pavement
method increasing stone-on-stone contact improving load bearing capacity. It
is a comprehensive method of pavement design mix toailored to the expected
performance requirements dictated by the traffic, environment (climate) and
structural section at a particular pavement site.
2) It relies on performance-based properties to designate the optimum mix
design by selecting and combining asphalt binder, aggregate and necessary
modifiers to achieve the expected pavement performance. The objective of
the superpave mix design is to define an economical blend of asphalt binder
and aggregates which yields the mix having sufficient asphalt binder, sufficient
voids (VMA) in the mineral aggregate, sufficient workability and satisfactory
performance over the service life of the pavement. For specific mix
requirements, refer to RC specifications (GPCS).
7. Rigid Pavement
Rigid pavements consist of a prepared roadbed underlying a layer of sub base and
pavement slab. The sub base may be stabilized or unstabilized. The subbase consists of
one or more compacted layers of granular or stabilized material placed between the
subgrade and the rigid slab. The pavement slab consists of Portland cement concrete,
reinforcing steel, load transfer devices, and joint sealing material. Rigid pavement is
generally associated with higher initial capital costs, but may prove more cost effective
that flexible pavement over the entire life cycle of the facility.
8. Resurfacing, Restoration and Rehabilitation
a. General
1) Resurfacing, restoration and rehabilitation (RRR) work is defined as all work
undertaken to extend the service life of existing pavement, enhance
operations and safety, and return an existing roadway to a condition of
structural and functional adequacy. Typical RRR work will include
rehabilitation of the pavement through slab repair/replacement and/or
installation flexible pavement overlays. RRR also often includes upgrades to
roadside safety that may include relocation of roadside hazards and
installation or upgrades to roadside barrier and hardware.
9. Landscape and Irrigation
a. Reference Subsection 5.6.5
10. Street Furniture
a. Reference Subsection 5.6.5

Rev. 0 5.6 - 84
11. Utilities
a. Reference Section 5.7.
b. All Roadway projects shall incorporate spare sleeves
1) Sleeves shall be included at all intersections
2) On long, straight roads, spare sleeves shall be included at 500m to 1000m
intervals based on engineering requirements
D. Maintenance of Traffic
1. Work Zones
a. General
1) For all freeway and expressway work zones follow the process outlined in the
HDM Volume 2 Sections 1.12 and 1.13.
2) For all other roadway networks use the methodology outlined in the Part 5 of
the KSA MUTCD, these work zone requirements may be augmented with the
FHWA MUTCD for work zones.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 85
SUBSECTION 5.6.4 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
5.6.4 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Hydrologic and hydraulic engineering shall be required for the design of all surface
and subsurface drainage systems for Jubail Industrial City (JIC) and Ras AL-Khair
(RIC). This subsection describes the required data and analysis methods which
provides the basis of design of stormwater management facilities.
b. Hydrology is a science of the interrelationship between surface water runoff, water
below grade, and in the atmosphere. For this manual, hydrology will deal with
predicting the maginitude of storm water generation and flow caused by a certain
design storm criteria.
c. Hydrologic Methods:
1) There are two basic approaches discussed in this manual used to evaluate
stormwater. These are:
(a) Rational Method: This method is used for small watersheads (< 80
Hectares) This method calculates peak discharge only (Quick and Easy)!
If used on large watersheds will result in oversizing of the storm water
facilities.
(b) SCS Method: This method is used for large watersheads (> 80
Hectares) This method is more sophisticated than the rational approach
This method considers the time distribution of the rainfall, the initial
rainfall losses to interception and depression storage.
(c) A discharge hydrograph (hydrographs are considered terms of
discharge verses time will be needed for the design of structures that are
used to control the volume of runoff, such as detention storage and
retention seepage facilities or drainage routed through culverts.
(d) The SCS method produces both a peak discharge and a hydrograph,
which can be used to estimate runoff volume and be used in routing
procedures.
2) Classical Hydrologic Methods background information. Some of Classical
Hydrologic Methods and their application, are as follows:
CLASSICAL HYDROLOGIC METHODS AND THEIR APPLICATION

Method Author Typical Application
 Urban Watersheads
 Considers the effect of
EPA SWMM
U.S. - Environmental storage in channels,
(Stormwater
Protection Agency pipes, and basins
Management Model)
 Surcharged storm
drainage systems
 Urban or rural
U.S.- Natural Resources
watersheds
TR-20/TR-55 Conservation Service
(formerly SCS)  Considers effect of
storage in channels and

Rev. 0 5.6 - 86
basins
 Urban or rural
watersheds
U.S. - Army Corps of
HEC-1/HEC-HMS
Engineers  Considers the effect of
storage in channels and
basins.
These methods are favored and promulgated by U.S. government agencies
because of familiarity. These methods are not necessarily the current best practice
or easy to use and understand. These methods have been mentioned to aid in
understanding of the hydrology concepts and historical background. The RC
prefers the use of of computer software packages that are simple to use,
comprehend, and understand.
d. Stormwater Computer Aided Design & Analysis Modeling: The Royal Commission
(RC) uses the following software for computer aided design and analysis: Civil
Storm, Storm Cad, and Culvert Master. The Royal Commission prefers that
Consultants involved with RC projects use the same or similar-compatible software.
e. Consultants Note: The experienced engineer or designer knows that hydrologic
analysis is at best an approximation. Reasonable judgements and assumptions are
needed. Errors in the analysis will result in either undersized facilities causing
flooding and drainage problems or oversized systems that cost more than needed.
f. This Manual is intended to be a basic guide and not a regulation that must be strictly
followed. Please use sound engineering judgement in the preparation of your
designs and propose alternate methods or approaches that will improve the way we
do our work.
2. Applicability
a. This subsection applies to stormwater management facilities located in Jubail
Industrial City (JIC) and Ras AL-Khair (RIC).
3. Definitions
a. The following definitions apply to this Section (Refer to Section 2.2.0 for other
general definitions.
1) “Primary Drainage System”: The overall drainage network, generally
servicing an entire district. This system generally consists of large concrete
lined open channels.
2) “Secondary Drainage System”: The drainage network that services each
sector, this system generally consists of underground drainage pipes, catch
basins, and curb and gutter to handle overflow. Secondary drainage systems
generally discharge into primary drainage channels.
3) Detention Basins: Basins that reduce peak stormwater discharges from
individual sites by temporarily storing stormwater and metering the outflow
off-site.
4) Industrial Retention Facilities: Generally, these storm water management
facilities that contain stormwater with subsurface discharge. These facilities
do not discharge to the RC drainage system. Retention facilities are generally
required in industrial area Jubail 2 as there is no discharge to the sea.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 87
5) Rational Method: The classical or easy method for calculating the peak
runoff rates for watershed areas less than 80 hectares. This analysis method
uses rainfall intensity, runoff coefficients, and time of concentration.
6) Soil Conservation Service (SCS) Unit Hydrograph
7) Method: An empirical model for computing runoff hydrographs developed by
the US Soil Conservation Service in 1972. This technique is often used for
detailed hydrologic modeling for watershed areas larger than 80 hectares.
8) Time of Concentration, Tc: The travel time of water from the most distant
point hydraulically to reach a discharge point.
4. Abbreviations
a. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection (refer to Subsection 2.2.0 for
other general abbreviations):
1) CN: Curve Number, an empirical parameter used in hydrology for predicting
direct runoff or infiltration from rainfall excess.
2) D50: 50th-percentile rip-rap diameter, which is a specification typically
provided for rip-rap channel linings.
3) EGL: Energy Grade Line
4) HGL: Hydraulic Grade Line
5) PIA: Percent impervious area
a. Follow the design methodologies as follows:
1) Rational Method: Spreadsheets are acceptable
2) Rational Method: Civil Storm; SewerGEM
3) SCS Method: Civil Storm; SewerGEM
b. For any method used provide documentation, graphical information so that the
analysis method used can be followed and understood by RC Engineering Staff to
verify compliance with this manual.
6. Codes
b. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu,
Environmental Control Department, Royal Commission Environmental Regulations,
2004, Volume I.
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards and references which apply to this Subsection,
refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Standards.
1) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual
8. Related Sections
a. Not applicable .
9. Approvals

Rev. 0 5.6 - 88
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable
C. Storm Water Management Infrastructure
1. Storm Water Description
a. The following are common stormwater management drainage features:
1) Overland Flow Facilities (Curb and Gutter)
2) Closed Conduits, Underground Facilities (Pipes)
3) Open Conduits, Drainage Channels
4) See FIGURE 5.6.4.A for a sketch of typical storm drain facilities in Jubail,
Industrial City.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 89
FIGURE 5.6.4.A TYPICAL STORM DRAIN FACILITIES
2. Design Criteria:
a. Hydrologic Modeling Requirements: Hydrologic modeling for any project in Jubail
Industrial City shall consist of the following steps:
1) Drainage Area Delineation: all contributing drainage areas shall be delineated
including off-site drainage. Drainage area boundaries shall be realistic and
based on topographic conditions, grading, fill material, and other drainage
structures in the area.
2) Time of Concentration Calculation: the time of concentration of each drainage
basin shall be determined for sheet flow and shallow concentrated flow.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 90
Alternate metods to calculate Tc are acceptable providing reference and

document the procedure that used.
3) Runoff Loss Coefficient Determination: runoff loss coefficients (or Curve
Numbers) shall be determined based on soil type and land-use. Refer to the
appropriate tables and TABLE 5.6.4.F for curve numbers and runoff
coefficients based on the soil-types and land-uses found in the Jubail
Industrial City.
4) Design Rainstorm Determination: design rainstorm and return intervals shall
be determined based on drainage basin size and modeling application. Refer
to TABLE 5.6.4.A for design rainstorm applications.
TABLE 5.6.4.A HYDROLOGIC DESIGN STORM & CRITERIA
Drainage System Criteria
Capacity for a 50-year event within the
channel with no freeboard.
Primary Drainage - Open
Channels Floodplain storage up to a 100-year event
with 0.3 m of freeboard up the adjacent
property lines.
Assume that the pipe is flowing full
Capacity for a 100-year & assume a
Primary Drainage Culverts tailwater elevation of ¾ of Culvert Height
Provide emergency spillway or overland
relief
Assume that the pipe is flowing full
Capacity for 25-year event with no
Secondary Drainage – Closed surcharge.
Conduit
Provide emergency spillway or overland
relief
Secondary Drainage - 100-year overflow capacity with adequate
Roadway curb and gutter freeboard and no excessive gutter spread.
Onsite - upstream of Detention
10-year storm storage capacity
Basins
100-year event with 0.3 m of freeboard up
to the top of the impoundment and an
Onsite - Detention Basins emergency overflow structure to handle
the peak 100-year 24-hour inflow
discharge.
Industrial Water Quality Collect the first 30 mm of rainfall and

maintain at least 0.3 m of freeboard up to
(First Flush Basins) the top of the impoundment.
b. Hydrologic Modeling and Routing: build the hydrologic model and determine design
discharges. The appropriate modeling technique must be determined based on

Rev. 0 5.6 - 91
drainage basin size and design application. Refer to for appropriate modeling
methodologies below:
1) Rating Method: The rational method may be used for designing small sites
(less or equalt to 80 hectares). For areas larger than 80 hectares use the
SCS method, instead. This method dates back to 1889 and is still used in
many engineering offices. The Rational Method provides peak discharges
and is not intended for the computation of runoff volumes. This method
requires the following considerations:
(a) Drainage surface basin area offsite and onsite: Obtain a good topographic
information that defines the surface drainage basin area that includes both
onsite and offsite drainage areas to be evaluated. A field site inspection
needs to be made to understand the current natural drainage divides.
Restrictions to natural flow such as highway crossings and dams that exist in
the drainage area need to be considered.
(b) Runoff coefficient “C”: Thought should be given to future changes in land use
20 years into the future.
(c) Rainfall Intensity associated with the time of concentration, Tc: The charts,
graphs, and tables included in this section are not intended to replace
prudent and reasonable engineering judgement.
2) Rational Equation for Calculating Peak Discharge
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝑄𝑄 =
360
𝑚𝑚3
𝑄𝑄 = 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓,
𝑠𝑠
𝑖𝑖 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖, 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚/ℎ𝑟𝑟
𝐶𝐶 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝐴𝐴 = 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎, ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
Tc = Time of Concentration for sheet flow, shallow concentrated flow, and
channel flow as follows:
(a) Sheet Flow: Sheet flow is generally found in the upper reaches of a
watershed during the rainfall event and is usually 50 to 150 m in length.
0.0912(𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛)0.8
𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 =
(𝑃𝑃2 )0.5 𝑆𝑆𝑓𝑓0.4
𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐, (ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠)
𝑛𝑛 = Surface roughness coefficient from Table 5.6.4C Overland
Discharge
𝐿𝐿 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙ℎ, 𝑚𝑚
𝑃𝑃2 = 2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦, 24 − ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟, 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑆𝑓𝑓 = 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠, 𝑚𝑚/𝑚𝑚

Rev. 0 5.6 - 92
TABLE 5.6.4.C OVERLAND DISCHARGE

Surface Description n
Smooth Surfaces (concrete, asphalt, gravel, or bare soil) 0.011
Short Grass or Landscaping 0.15
Native Desert 0.13
(b) Shallow Concentrated Flow: Shallow concentrated flow generally consists of

concentrated drainage in gutters, channels, waterways or rills (rills are fairly
easily visible when first incised, so they are often the first indication of an
ongoing problem). There are two different equations:
Unpaved Surfaces:
𝐿𝐿𝑓𝑓 1ℎ𝑟𝑟
𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = � ��
4.907 ∗ 𝑆𝑆𝑓𝑓0.5 3600 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
Paved Surfaces:
𝐿𝐿𝑓𝑓 1ℎ𝑟𝑟
Shallow 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = � ��
6.1961∗𝑆𝑆𝑓𝑓0.5 3600 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐, ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜

𝐿𝐿𝑓𝑓 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙ℎ, 𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑆𝑓𝑓 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆, 𝑚𝑚/𝑚𝑚
(c) Channel Flow: The travel time within channels is calculated using Manning’s
equation for open channel discharge:
2
1
1A 3
i. Velocity is calculated using: V = � � � � (S)2
n P
𝑛𝑛 = 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟ℎ𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝐴𝐴 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (𝑚𝑚2 )
𝑃𝑃 = 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (𝑚𝑚)
𝑆𝑆 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐶𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑚𝑚/𝑚𝑚)
𝑉𝑉 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠)
ii. Channel Travel Time is calculated using:

𝐋𝐋 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏
𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂𝐂 𝐓𝐓𝐓𝐓 = � � � �
𝐕𝐕 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑 𝐬𝐬𝐬𝐬𝐬𝐬
𝐿𝐿 = 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿ℎ 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐶𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑚𝑚)
𝑉𝑉 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠)
𝑇𝑇 = 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (𝑚𝑚)
𝑆𝑆 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐶𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑚𝑚/𝑚𝑚)
iii. Total Time of Concentration:

𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 = 𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 + 𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺𝑺 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 + 𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻

Rev. 0 5.6 - 93
3) Rational Runoff Coefficients: Refer to Table 5.6.4.D (below) for appropriate

runoff coefficients based on land-use, soil type, and return interval.
TABLE 5.6.4.D RATIONAL METHOD RUNOFF COEFFICIENTS
CLASSIFICATION OF STORM RETURN PERIOD

DEVELOPED AREAS 5 YEAR 100 YEAR
Residential Areas 0.60 0.65

District Centers 0.65 0.70
Flood Plains (Landscaped) 0.50 0.55
Flood Plains (Graded) 0.45 0.50
CLASSIFICATION OF
PARTICULAR SURFACES
Asphalt Pavement 0.85 0.95
Concrete Pavement 0.80 0.90
Impervious Soil (Marl) 0.60 0.65

Rev. 0 5.6 - 94
(a) Rainfall Intensity for Rational Calculations: Obtain rainfall intensity based on
time of concentration
(i) JIC - Refer to FIGURE 5.6.4.B
FIGURE 5.6.4.B INTENSITY DURATION FREQUENCY CURVE -

JIC

Rev. 0 5.6 - 95
4) SCS Method: The SCS method shall be used for designing watershed areas
larger than (> 80 hectares). In general this will mean that most primary
drainage channels and some secondary systems will be designed using the
SCS method. For modeling watersheds using the SCS curve number method,
use a software package such as Civil Storm to generate hydrographs. This
method requires the following considerations:
(a) Rainfall depth and rainfall distribution.
(b) Temporal Distribution (Drainage basin curve number).
(c) Runoff Curves
(d) Time of concentration (lag time)
SCS Equation for Calculating Runoff Volumes:

(𝑃𝑃 − 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼)2
𝑄𝑄 =
(𝑃𝑃 − 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼) + 𝑆𝑆
𝑄𝑄 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅(𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚)
𝑃𝑃 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚)
𝑆𝑆 = 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚)
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚)
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 0.2 ∗ 𝑆𝑆
1000
𝑆𝑆 = -10
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 )

Rainfall Depth: The average annual rainfall at Jubail is 91 mm, generally
falling in short, high intensity winter storms. Design rainfall depths for the
entire site may be taken to be the same table. Refer to TABLE 5.6.4E below:
TABLE 5.6.4.E DESIGN RAINFALL DEPTHS - JIC
Duration 10-Year mm 25-Year mm 100-Year mm
1-Hour 32.6 37.6 43.8

2-Hour 33.6 38.8 45.1
3-Hour 34.5 39.8 46.2
6-Hour 43.2 50.0 58.5
12-Hour 55.4 64.9 76.7
24-Hour 77.8 92.6 110.9
Temporal Distribution: The SCS Type II design storm temporal distribution is

characteristic of the high intensity rainfall events typical of Jubail Industrial
City. Refer to Figure 5.6.4.D for the storm distribution:

Rev. 0 5.6 - 96
FIGURE 5.6. 4.D SCS TYPE II STORM DISTRIBUTION
SCS Type II Storm Distribution
1.00
Fraction of Total Precipitation

0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
0.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Tim e (hrs)

Rev. 0 5.6 - 97
Curve Numbers: Refer to TABLE 5.6.4.F below for appropriate curve numbers
based on land-use and soil type.
TABLE 5.6.4.F RUNOFF CURVE NUMBERS
1
Cover Description PIA Curve Numbers for Soil Types
Dense Loose
Sand Sand
Marl Sabkhah
(Compac (Natural
ted) State)
Open Space (Lawns,

79 49 49 79
Parks, etc…)
Impervious Areas:
Paved Parking Lots, 98 98 98 98
roofs, driveways
Commercial and
85 94 89 89 94
Business
Industrial 72 91 81 81 91
High Density Residential 65 90 77 77 90
Low Density Residential 20 79 51 51 79
Newly Graded Areas

(Pervious Areas, no 91 77 77 91
vegetation)
1
Curve number values are adapted from the USDA Urban Hydrology for
Small Watersheds, TR-55 manual.
Lag Time - Refer to (Subsection 5.6.4.D.1.a.2 for the time of concentration
calculation requirements. The SCS method requires the input of Lag Time and
not Time of Concentration. Lag Time is calculated using the following equation:
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 0.6 ∗ 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇; 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
3. Hydraulic Modeling:
a. Refer to TABLE 5.6.4A (Above) for freeboard requirements and hydraulic design
criteria.
b. Manning’s Modified Equation for Gravity Flow
1) Manning’s equation for gravity flow may be used to design site storm drain
lines and open channels for small drainage areas.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 98
1
𝑄𝑄 = �𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴2/3 𝑆𝑆 1/2 �
𝑛𝑛
𝑄𝑄 = 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓, 𝑚𝑚3 /𝑠𝑠

𝐴𝐴 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟ℎ𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑2𝑛𝑛 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓, 𝑚𝑚2
𝑅𝑅 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟, 𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑆 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔, 𝑚𝑚/𝑚𝑚
𝑛𝑛 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟ℎ𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛, 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑀𝑀Error! Reference source not found. 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
2) Manning’s Roughness Coefficients TABLE 5.6.4.I below:
TABLE 5.6.4.I HYDRAULIC ROUGHNESS COEFFICIENT
TYPE LINING MANNING’S “n”
Concrete – Pipes 0.013
Concrete - Cast-in-place 0.015
Sulphur A/C Pavement 0.018
Rip Rap, Large-Hand Placed 0.030
Rip Rap, Small-Dumped 0.035
Earthen – Marl 0.040
Earthen - Grass Covered 0.050
c. Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

1) For designing large primary drainage channels more detailed modeling
methods are required. Computer software models utilizing gradually varied
flow are needed for the analysis.
d. Dynamic Storm Drain Network Modeling
1) For designing large storm drain networks, dynamic flow routing models may
be used.
4. Stormwater Quality
a. First Flush Basins
1) Water quality control ponds known as first flush ponds are required for all
industrial drainage areas.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 99
2) Ponds shall collect the first 30 mm of rainfall from each event. After the
collection of the first flush, any additional rain falling on industrial process
areas may be diverted directly into the storm drainage system.
3) First flush ponds shall be lined so that they are completely impervious.
4) Industrial areas must meet all Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
regarding drainage and stormwater retention.
5. Overland Relief
a. Overland Relief for Storm Drain Overflows
1) All storm drain structures shall be designed to accommodate storm drainage
overflows which could result from an obstructed storm drain line for a 10-year
storm event.
2) Storm drainage overflows shall be routed via overland flow, drainage swales,
or roadway drainage conveyance that eventually connect to a primary
drainage channel.
3) All storm drain designs shall show the flow routes and eventual discharge
point of all drainage overflows. These flow routes must accommodate all
locations where a storm drain obstruction could occur.
4) Finished grading shall be such that any storm drain overflows are routed
away from buildings or structures.
5) Storm drain overflows which use overland flow as a conveyance shall be lined
with grass, pavement or other erosion protection measures, see TABLE
5.6.4.J for acceptable lining materials for secondary channels and overland
discharges.
D. Drainage Systems and Structures
1. Culverts
a. General Design Requirements
1) Minimize storm drain pipelines size is 300 mm.
2) Minimum burial depth to top of pipe shall be 1.0 m. Maximum burial depth
shall be 6.0 m, unless project specific approval for deeper depths is granted.
3) Buoyancy of storm drain shall be considered and flotation of the pipe shall be
prevented with appropriate means where high groundwater conditions are
anticipated.
4) All storm drain shall be designed to prevent damage from superimposed live
and dead loads. Proper allowance for loads on the storm drain shall be made
for soil and potential groundwater conditions, as well as the width and depth
of trench. Where necessary, special bedding, haunching and initial backfill,
concrete cradle, or other special construction shall be used to withstand
anticipated potential superimposed loading or loss of trench wall stability.
5) Slopes
(a) For calculations which assume that the pipe is flowing full and a tailwater
height of 3/5 the culvert diameter,

Rev. 0 5.6 - 100
(1) A flow velocity of 1.0 m/s minimum and 4.5 m/s maximumis
required.
(i) 1.0 m/s results in a 0.6 m/s velocity when the flow depth is 25%
of the pipe diameter,
(b) Storm drains shall be laid with uniform slope between manholes.
6) Alignment
(a) Storm drains shall be laid with straight alignment between manholes.
Curvilinear storm drains are not allowed.
7) Location
(a) Shall be located within roadways where possible.
8) Proximity to other utilities
(a) Refer to requirements in Subsection 5.7.1
2. Roadway Drainage
a. Highway drainage structures, road surface flow are usually evaluated in terms of
peak runoff or discharge (Rational Method).
3. Drainage Structures (Storm Manholes & Catch Basins)
1) Location
(a) Drainage structures shall be installed at:
(1) The end of each line
(2) All changes in grade, size, or alignment
(3) All intersections.
(b) Drainage structures maximum spacing:
(1) Storm pipe diameter Φ: < or = 375 mm – 120 m
(2) Storm pipe diameter Φ: 450 mm to 750 mm – 150 m
(3) Storm pipe diameter Φ: > 750 mm – 180 m
(c) Drainage structure minimum diameter:
(1) Minimum access diameter of 750 mm
(2) Storm pipe diameter Φ: < or = 450 mm – 1200 mm
(3) Storm pipe diameter Φ: 550 mm to 750 mm – 1500 m
(4) Storm pipe diameter Φ: 850 mm to 1050 mm – 1800 mm
(5) Pipes clash when penetrating manhole wall: Size the manhole
diameter to provide at least 6” of solid manhole wall between
manhole penetration openings.
b. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) Reinforced Plastic Mortar (RPM) Sewer Pipe

Rev. 0 5.6 - 101
(a) Sizes 300 mm to 1200 mm

(b) ASTM D3754-14
(c) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
(d) ASTM D3567-11
c. Acceptable Catchbasin and Manhole Material
1) Reinforced Concrete
4. Open Channels
1) Open channels shall be used for the primary drainage system.
2) Open channels that outfall to the Gulf shall be tide-locked.
3) Primary drainage open channels shall be designed to convey a 50-year event
and the 100-year event. Refer to FIGURE 5.6.4.E for a typical cross-section
of a primary drainage channel.
FIGURE 5.6.4.E PRIMARY OPEN CHANNEL CROSS-SECTION
b. Acceptable Channel Lining Materials

1) Normally it will be sufficient to prevent erosion by extending aggregate
erosion protection material on embankment side slopes across the full width
of the ditch. In addition, rip-rap shall be provided adjacent to the wing walls at
the inlet and outlet ends of drainage box culverts to prevent local scour.
(a) TABLE 5.6.4.J indicates the channel lining materials for various
situations.
2) Concrete lined channels shall be required in the following situations:
(a) Where this is the only method of providing required capacity.
(b) At connections with lined primary channels. In this case the concrete
lining shall extend back from the primary channel for a length equal to
3 times the width of the primary channel.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 102
TABLE 5.6.4.J CHANNEL LINING CRITERIA
Rip Rap
Sulphur Sides, Marl and
Acceptable Lining Gravel or
Concrete Asphalt Covered
System Grass
(Plain) Concrete Swales
Bottom
Primary – Standing
Water Permitted for Yes No No No
Storage Purposes
Primary – No Standing
Yes Yes No No
Water Permitted
Secondary – Channel
Yes Yes Yes No
or Overland Discharge
Detention/Retention
No No Yes Yes
Ponds
5. Detention Basins/Ponds
a. Surface Basins
1) Shall have side slopes of 3H:1V
2) Access must be provided for maintenance vehicles.
3) Depth of ponding for the 100-year 24-hour rainfall event shall not exceed
1000 mm.
4) The pond must maintain at least 300 mm of freeboard during the 100-year 24-
hour event.
5) The pond must have an overflow structure with the capacity to handle the
peak inflow during the 100-year 24-hour storm event.
6) Pond must be sized to reduce peak runoff discharge to 0.14 m3/s per hectare
during a 100-year 24-hour rainfall event.
b. Underground Detention Storage
1) Underground detention chambers shall not be allowed.
6. Outfall Structures
a. All outfall structures shall be protected by rip-rap aprons or concrete lined aprons.
b. Outfall structures are required where pipes are discharged into the ocean, channels,
or basins.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 103
c. Rip-Rap shall be sized using the Isbash method based on the maximum outfall
velocity during a 100-year storm event:
692(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)2
𝐷𝐷50 =
�2𝑔𝑔(𝑆𝑆𝑠𝑠 − 1)�
𝐷𝐷50 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠, 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

𝑉𝑉 = 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉, 𝑚𝑚/𝑠𝑠
𝑆𝑆𝑠𝑠 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 (𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 2.65)
𝐾𝐾 = 1.0
1) The minimum D50 riprap size shall be 100 mm.
2) Rip-rap thickness shall be 1.5 times the D50 of the rip-rap.
d. All outfalls shall be evaluated for the potential for hydraulic jump and the need for an
outfall energy dissipater.
e. Refer to The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design for the methodology on energy dissipater
design.
7. Exfiltration Systems
a. Exfiltration systems (subsurface drainage) shall be provided for foundation walls, cut
areas, roadways, parking lots, and landscape areas etc., where it becomes
necessary to control perched water or high groundwater.
b. Exfiltration systems may tie into secondary storm drain structures or primary
c. Design Requirements
1) Requirements for hydraulic designs shall be based on the following:
(a) Soil permeability, as determined from the percolation rates in TABLE
5.6.3.K. below:
TABLE 5.6.4.K
Material mm/hr
Marl 0
Dense Sand (Compacted) 150
Loose Sand (Natural State) 300
Sabkhah 25*
*- To be determined by site specific permeability testing
(b) Area to be drained, as based on site specific evaluation and exploration
data, including in-situ permeability and laboratory test results.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 104
(c) Anticipated head and head difference relative to the prevailing

groundwater level.
(d) Underdrain to be sized for open channel flow, using criteria defined in
Subsection 5.6.4.D.2.c.
(e) No underdrain shall have a diameter of less than 100 mm for circular
sections or any dimension of less than 200 mm for any other section.
d. System Design
1) System design shall be combined with practical considerations to assure
satisfactory performance under actual field conditions, including the following:
(a) Joints shall be soil tight. Constructed in such a manner by utilization of
opening size, gaskets and/or filter media so that the surrounding soil will
not enter the system.
(b) The maximum length between cleanouts or access holes shall be 100 m.
All subsurface drains shall have a free-flowing positive outlet. Use of blind
drains, French drains or any other configuration which does not have a
positive conduit will not be permitted due to potential for sediment buildup.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 105
SUBSECTION 5.6.5 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION
5.6.5 LANDSCAPING AND PLANT IRRIGATION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The purpose of this Subsection is to provide guidelines for preserving existing
vegetation and to provide Standards for the installation and maintenance of
proposed vegetation and other included landscape features for development or
redevelopment of Commercial, Industrial, Institutional, and Residential
Developments and any other areas listed within this General Engineering Manual
(GEM) under the RCJ Jurisdiction.
b. The general design and construction of the landscape shall be in accordance with
the Standards set forth by this Section. Specific projects may warrant amendments
to the Standards herein, but those amendments must be approved in writing by the
RCJ prior to construction / implementation.
c. The landscape and site element Standards of this Subsection are intended to be
used as basic design guidelines during the site design process for the preparation of
final construction documents. They are also intended to be used as tools to aid the
Architect/Engineer in their planning and design decisions. Design criteria are
provided herein shall generate consistent and orderly coordination among all
professional disciplines involved with the development project.
d. The guidelines as defined in this Subsection are not representative of all
possibilities. Architects/Engineers shall recognize and respond to the uniqueness of
each individual situation and project. The guidelines describe minimal acceptable
Standards for site development.
e. Landscaping and other site related elements are recognized as being an essential
component to any project, and contribute to the long term value of a development.
The RCJ seeks to achieve excellence in the design and implementation of such
landscapes.
f. Successful landscapes:
1) Improve property and community land values and appearances by enhancing
the beauty of the built environment which adds to the quality of life for users;
2) Ensure visual harmony along cityscapes, streetscapes, and other
developments;
3) Improve the safety of pedestrians, vehicular users, bicyclists, etc. by
minimizing conflicts between the user groups;
4) Protect existing landscape features and natural habitats and minimize the
disturbance of land;
5) Prevent environmental hazards such as erosion and mitigation of stormwater
runoff as well as pollution hazards to wildlife;
6) Add to and protect wildlife habitats;
7) Reduce the heat island effect leading, to a more comfortable, cost effective,
and sustainable project;

Rev. 0 5.6 - 106
8) Enhance the privacy of users by visually separating incompatible land uses

by reducing the visibility of paved areas and other unsightly views;
9) Minimize noise and glare;
10) Eliminate highly invasive and allergenic plants.
2. Applicability
a. The Standards provided in this Subsection shall be applied to all proposed
development or redevelopment within the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. This includes but is not limited to all landscape areas within the right-of-way (ROW)
of roadways in the RCJ of Jubail administered areas including but not limited to
medians, soft landscape areas between curbs and the ROW lines and within urban
plaza and sidewalk areas.
3. Definitions
a. General definitions are referenced in Subsection 2.2.0.
b. “Accessible” A site, building, facility or portion thereof that accommodates the needs
of the disabled.
c. “Aeration” The process by which air is circulated through, mixed with or dissolved in
a liquid or substance.
d. “Anti-drain” Valve or check valve: a valve located under a sprinkler head, or in a
lateral supply line to hold water in the system so it minimizes drainage from the
lower elevation sprinkler heads.
e. “Artist” A person who creates and/or performs works of art in any artistic discipline,
f. “Backfill” The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
g. “Balled and burlap stock” Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they
were grown, with ball size no less than diameter and depth recommended by
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly
supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the
ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
h. “Balled and potted stock” Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they
are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is no less than diameter
and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
i. “Bare root stock” Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by
transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with no less
than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant
required.
j. “Buffer” A portion of a property designated to mitigate/screen impacts between
different land uses or transportation routes, or to protect natural features from
varying types of pollutants.
k. “Caliper” The diameter of plant material, measured at 0.15 m above grade for caliper
of up to 100 mm, and 0.30 m above grade for larger calipers.
l. “Clear-cut” To remove all trees within a given area.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 107
m. “Commission” An opportunity for the selection and purchase of a work of art through
an open or invitational competition and tendering process.
n. “EPC Contractor(s)” Individual(s) or firm(s) engaged in the construction of buildings,
either residences or commercial structures, as well as construction activities such as
paving, highway construction, utility construction and landscape installation.
o. “Crop” Cultivated plants or agricultural produce.
p. “Cultivation” To promote or improve the growth of a plant, crop, etc. by labor and
attention.
q. “Diameter breast height” The diameter of a tree measured 0.30 m above the ground.
r. “Easement” A grant by a property owner for use by the public, a corporation or
persons of an area of land for specific purposes.
s. “Erosion” The wearing away of land surface by the action of wind, water, gravity or
any combination thereof.
t. “Evapotranspiration” The quantity of water evaporated from adjacent soil surfaces
and transpired by plants during a specific time.
u. “Fertilizer” Any substance used to enrich the soil, especially a commercial or
chemical manure
v. “Finished grade” Smooth finished surface within three centimeters above or below
specified elevation, compact and with uniform levels or slopes between points where
elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.
w. “Flood / flooding” A general and temporary condition of a partial or complete
inundation of a normally dry areas from:
1) The overflow of inland waters;
2) The unusual and rapid accumulation of runoff of surface waters from any
source.
x. “Forestry” The act of growing trees, harvesting timber or replanting trees.
y. “Gift” (also referred to as Donation) A voluntary offer of property from any source
without consideration of its value, and involves the legal transfer of title and physical
possession.
z. “Green roof” A vegetated roof treatment that has a layer of soil and a drainage
system and is planted with vegetation.
aa. “Groundcover” Any natural vegetative growth or other material which renders the soil
surface stable against accelerated erosion.
bb. “Guy wire” A wire supporting structure consisting of a single truss assembly
composed of sections with bracing incorporated used to secure and brace
vegetation, usually trees.
cc. “Hydrozone” A portion of the landscaped area having plants with similar water needs
that are served by a valve or set of valves with the same schedule. A hydrozone
may be irrigated or non-irrigated. For example, a naturalized area planted with
native vegetation that shall not need supplemental irrigation once established is a
non-irrigated hydrozone.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 108
dd. “Impervious surface” A surface composed of any material that impedes or prevents
natural infiltration of water into the soil.
ee. “Irrigation” The artificial application of water to the land or soil to assist in the
maintenance of landscapes and re-vegetation of disturbed soils in dry areas and
during periods of inadequate rainfall.
ff. Landscaped area” The entire parcel less the building footprint, driveways, non-
irrigated portions of parking lots, hardscapes such as decks and patios, and other
non-porous areas. Water features are included in the calculation of the landscaped
area. Areas dedicated to edible plants, such as orchards or vegetable gardens are
not included.
gg. “Lawns” Areas of sod/turf usually closely mowed.
hh. “Lot” A parcel of land that is to be used, developed or built upon.
ii. “Monument” Is any permanent or semi-permanent object installed specifically to
commemorate or memorialize and event, place, or person.
jj. “Mulch” Dressing for weed control, moisture retention, dust and erosion control and
to build soil organics.
kk. “Opacity” The surface area of a fence, wall or buffer that is impenetrable to light
when viewed perpendicularly to the plane of the fence, wall or buffer.
ll. “Open space” Areas of development that allow for light, air, wildlife habitat, and for
scenic and recreational use.
mm. “Pervious pavement” Surface improvements such as interlocking concrete paving
blocks, brick pavers, grid pavers, or other similar improvements which permit the
infiltration of water through the improved surface.
nn. “Public Art” Is art that is displayed in a shared community space open to the general
public and may include but is not limited to items like sculptures, memorials, murals,
etc.
oo. “Public park or playground” A park or playground available to the general public.
pp. “Recreational area” Areas of active play or recreation such as sports fields, school
yards, picnic grounds, or other areas with intense foot traffic.
qq. “Recycled water, reclaimed water, or treated sewage effluent water”, treated or
recycled waste water of a quality suitable for non-potable uses such as landscape
irrigation; not intended for human consumption.
rr. “Rootball” A roughly spherical aggregate of roots and soil that is transplanted with a
plant, especially a tree or shrub.
ss. “Root protection zone” The permeable land area around the base of a tree in which
disturbances are prohibited in order to protect the roots of a tree and aid the trees
survival. Root protection zones are measured as the greater of:
1) 2 m radius around the tree; or
2) 5/16 m for every 0.25 m of DBH.
3) Tree protection fencing is to be placed along the perimeter of this zone.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 109
tt. “Screen / screening” The use of plant materials and other landscape or architectural
elements used separately or in combination to obscure views.
uu. “Sedimentation” The process by which sediment resulting from accelerated erosion
has been, or is being, transported by water, air, gravity, etc. from its site of origin.
vv. “Staking” To secure a stick or post pointed at one end for driving into the ground to
support a plant or vegetation.
ww. “Street trees” Trees bordering roadway ROWs, and parking areas.
xx. “Topsoil” The fertile, upper part of the soil.
yy. “Transplanting” The act or process of moving an object to another location, usually a
plant.
zz. “Trunk” The main stem of a tree, as distinct from the branches and roots.
aaa. “Turf” A layer of matted earth formed by grass and plant roots.
bbb. “Weed” Any undesirable or invasive plant, especially one that grows where it is not
desired.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2.0.
1) DBH: Diameter Breast Height
2) GEM: General Engineering Manual
3) GIS: Geographic Information System
4) PUA: Pedestrian Use Area
6) ROW: Right of Way
7) VUA: Vehicular Use Area
a. Adhere to all requirements in the following design manuals and regulations:
1) ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
2) ASIC: American Society of Irrigation Consultants
4) ANLA: American Nursery & Landscape Association
5) AOAC: Association of Official Analytical Chemist International
6) AOSA: Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.
9) NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
10) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standard Organization
Rev. 0 5.6 - 110
11) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

b. Landscape Plans: The detailed Landscape Plan for any project shall be presented to
the RCJ for review and comment prior to construction. The plans must be signed
and sealed by a Registered Architect/Engineer.
c. The Landscape Plans shall at minimum include the following items:
1) Site Survey: The landscape plan must contain base information derived from
a surveyor. The survey is to be signed and sealed. See Subsection 4.4.1 for
the requirements of a survey.
2) Site Plan: The proposed site plan shall be shown on the landscape plan so
that conflicts with hardscape/utilities/architecture may be mitigated.
3) North Arrow: The landscape plan must contain a north arrow properly
oriented.
4) Drawing Scale: The landscape plan must be submitted with metric
measurements and contain a drawing scale and scale bar.
5) Planting Plan: The proposed plantings shall be shown on the landscape:
(a) The location and labeling of existing vegetation to be retained and /or
removed.
(b) All proposed plants properly labeled on the plans.
(c) Plants shall be shown at approximately two-thirds of their mature size to
allow for correct spacing.
(d) A plant schedule shall be included that details the proposed plant
species (Latin names), size at planting, spacing for installation for shrubs
the number per square meter, the quantity and any special comments.
(e) All applicable notes detailing industry Standards for installation. Refer to
TABLE 5.6.5.D.
(f) Include RCJ details for installation.
(g) Distance between the plants.
(h) Sign drawing shall include full details, type, color, material, and loctions.
6) Sight Distance Triangles: The landscape plan shall identify a visibility triangle
at all intersections including parking lot access aisles and roads. The
following are requirements for site distance triangle and shall be shown on the
plans where applicable:
7) Sight distance criteria for planting at roadway intersections and in roadway
medians shall be followed. These Codes are listed in AASHTO 324.09 – Sight
Distance for Intersections at Grade.
(a) Do not obstruct the line of vision at intersections within the triangular
area bounded by the intersection of lot lines and a line joining each lot
line 7 m from their intersection.
(b) No trees, shrubs or other material shall be placed where this will impede
visibility above 750 mm within the visibility triangle.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 111
(c) The maximum mature maintained height for plant materials located
within sight distance triangles at intersections shall be 300 mm above
finish grade.
(d) Specify trees near approaches to right turn slots, driveways or pedestrian
crosswalks which may be pruned up from the base to a minimum height
of 1.5 m. Shrubs in these areas shall not exceed 300 mm in mature
height.
(e) Tree branch clearances requirements are 5 m over the traveled portion
of road and 2 m over the sidewalk.
d. Cultural Considerations
1) All projects within the jurisdiction of the RCJ shall be designed keeping in
mind the heritage, culture and lifestyle of Saudi Arabia. Wherever possible,
site planning and layout and landscape design shall reflect traditional Saudi
and Islamic needs, values, motifs, and influences.
2) For detailed discussion of agricultural considerations in urban design and
landscaping, see Volume 7 of the “Jubail Industrial City Community Plan 1978
(1398),” Sections 3, 4 and 5. While much of the community program
information in Section 2 of this document has been superseded by
subsequent Master Plan Updates, the concepts and principles outlined in it
remain valid and may be referred to for urban design and landscape design
guidance.
6. Codes
b. The following is a list of Codes which apply to this Subsection, refer to Chapter 3 for
a list of additional Codes.
1) ADA: American with Disabilities Act
3) ICBN: International Code of Botanical Nomenclature
4) ICNCP: International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated
plants
5) MPWH: Ministry of Public Works and Housing–Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia
6) NFPC: National Fire Protection Code
8) TPI: Turf Producers International
9) USDA: United States Department of Agriculture Standards
c. It is the intent of the RCJ that highest quality be achieved on all projects. Therefore,
all design work shall adhere to the most current professional Standards with care
and diligence.
1) ASTM Standards ASTM International Standards
7. Related Sections

Rev. 0 5.6 - 112
a. For information related to this Subsection refer to the list below:

1) Refer to Chapter 1 for General Information
2) Refer to Chapter 2 for Definitions and References
3) Refer to Chapter 3 for Additional Codes and Performance Standards
4) Refer to Chapter 4 for Project Submission Standards and Requirements
5) Refer to Chapter 5 for Irrigation Water Instrumentation Systems
6) Refer to Chapter 5 for Architectural and Civil Engineering Design
Requirements
8. Approvals
B. Commissioning
C. Protection of Existing Vegetation:

1. General
a. Inappropriate development often threatens natural resources. All too often the
natural resources that are retained such as vegetation are damaged during
construction such that they will never recover. Preservation of these resources is
vital to providing quality design projects.
b. The RCJ encourages that as many of the exiting trees as possible on a site are
retained and protected and are allowed to grow to maturity.
c. The preservation of vegetation serves many purposes some of which are listed
below and are:
1) To reduce glare
2) To reduce and screen noise through buffering
3) To reduce and filter air pollution
4) To aid in preventing soil erosion
5) To moderate temperatures by reducing the heat island affect through a
reduction in impervious surfaces
6) To aid in reducing stormwater runoff and to protect land and watercourses
from pollutants
7) To preserve the area’s native ecology and to provide habitat for native plants
and wildlife
8) Provide a healthy and attractive living environment that attracts new
businesses and residents
d. The guidelines outlined in this Subsection are designed to protect and mitigate
damage to those natural resources.
2. Guidelines and Requirements

Rev. 0 5.6 - 113
a. Any trees or vegetation for the proposed development that meet the requirements of
this Subsection shall be preserved and the following protection Standards be utilized
and shown on plan submittals on the TCDDs.
b. Root Protection Zones and Tree Protection Fencing
1) Protection measures that are to be used during grading and construction and
shall include details of the tree protection fence(s) and its proposed
location(s).
2) As a general rule, the majority of a tree’s roots lies within an area just greater
than the spread of its crown and are at a depth of approximately 600 mm.
This may be less on heavy soils and greater on drier soils. The minimum
radius of root protection zone shall be delineated 1 m beyond the drip line of
the tree. This protection area shall be certified by an Arborist due to the many
varying factors involved with different tree species, root systems, tree
maturity, and tree vigor.
3) At the start of grading that involves the lowering of the existing grade around
a tree, or involves the stripping of topsoil; a clean, sharp, vertical cut shall be
made at the edge of the root protection zone at the time as other erosion
control measures are installed. This cut allows for the installation of tree
protection fencing to be installed. This fence shall be installed on the side of
the cut farthest away from the tree trunk. This fence shall be installed prior to
the commencement of construction and shall remain until construction is
complete.
4) The tree protection fence shall be constructed of a material resistant to the
effects of sun, wind and moisture. It shall also be high visibility fencing and/or
chain link fencing 1 m high. See details and specifications for fence material
and installation requirements.
5) The tree protection fence must also contain posted signs spaced at a
maximum of 30 m on center thereafter. Each sign shall read “no trespassing/
tree protection area.”
6) In order to preserve and protect vegetation, the following are prohibited within
the root protection zones and tree protection fence:
(a) No cutting or trimming of branches or roots is allowed without written
authorization by the RCJ. Where cutting of branches or roots has been
authorized, this shall only be carried out under the supervision of an
officer from the RCJ. Regular inspections are undertaken by the RCJ to
make sure that the conditions adhere to and the precautions maintained
as outlined in this Subsection.
(b) No fires shall be lit below the branches or on roots of trees. No petrol, oil
or caustic substances are to be stored near protected trees.
(c) No trees shall be used for anchoring or winching purposes or for the
display of signs of any kind.
(d) No storage of materials, dumping of waste materials, fill, or parking of
any equipment shall be allowed within the root protection zone.
(e) No vehicle traffic allowed within the root protection zone.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 114
7) If work is required closer than the construction fence, all work shall be done
by hand or with small equipment with special care being given to minimizing
disturbance to tree roots, and protecting the tree trunk from damage.
Boundary trees, including root systems, on abutting lands shall be protected
during construction.
c. Before starting work on the development site, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must
clearly mark all trees which are to be protected or are scheduled for retention in the
development. Refer to the TCDDs for the protection area and method of protection
for retained trees. Trees, hedges and large bushes which are proposed to be
removed or retained must be clearly marked on the layout plan and on site prior to
the commencement of development works, preferably by printed numbers relating to
the site survey, and in agreement with the RCJ.
d. Prior to construction, the protective measures to be taken shall be documented and
an agreement signed to replace the trees shall any removal or death occur during
and/or after construction.
e. Any vegetation removed before, during, or after construction shall be replaced with
newly planted vegetation which meets the minimum requirements outlined in these
guidelines.
3. Tree Survey
a. Purpose: The primary purpose of a tree survey is to provide better information about
the presence and location of significant trees on sites proposed for development.
This information allows the RCJ to evaluate possible modification to proposed plans
that would allow for the protection of vegetation that would improve the appearance
of the proposed development. No permits will be issued for the removal of trees
without a tree survey.
b. The tree survey shall show the specific location, species, size and root protection
zone of any tree(s) 0.20 m DBH or greater that is within 10 m of any proposed area
of disturbance or development.
c. The tree survey shall be shown on a Tree Protection Plan.
4. Tree Protection Plan
a. Depending on the nature of existing site conditions the RCJ may require a Tree
Protection Plan. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9, for commissioning requirements.
b. The Tree Protection Plan shall include the following information in a clear and easily
readable format:
1) All required information as outlined in the paragraph above, Tree Survey.
2) The location and type of existing vegetation to be retained and protected.
Tree protection fencing along root protection zones shall be shown.
3) The location of type existing vegetation to be removed.
4) The location of all existing natural and topographic features.
5) The layout of the proposed site development including all above and below
ground utilities.
6) A complete plant list showing the quantity, species, size (DBH) of all trees to
be removed and to remain. The DBH is measured at 1 meter from grade.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 115
c. Minimum Protected Tree Size: Trees shall not be less than 1 m in height as noted in
the TCDDs.
5. Tree Replacement
a. Any vegetation removed before, during or after construction shall be replaced with
newly planted vegetation which meets the minimum requirements outlined in these
guidelines.
b. For public roads, when existing trees are to be removed for reasons other than
public interest, the trees must be replaced by the proponent to the satisfaction of the
RCJ.
c. Tree Replacement Requirements
1) All new and existing vegetation applied to tree canopy requirements shall
comply with the outlines set forth by this General Construction Manual.
2) To satisfy the tree replacement requirements, new trees or existing trees that
count for credit must have a combined canopy that will cover a minimum of
10% of the total site area, ten years from the time of development.
3) Existing plant material that exceeds 1 m in height may be applied towards the
Tree Coverage requirements.
4) The following land areas shall be exempt from the area calculated to satisfy
tree replacement requirements:
(a) Areas devoid of plant material exceeding 1 m in height.
(b) Dedicated school sites or other lands publically dedicated that serve the
public.
(c) Athletic fields and any other non-wooded sporting fields.
(d) Consideration should be given to the mature size of the tree canopy and
root ball and its adjacency to Street lighting installations. The separation
requirements should be based on typical mature sizes of the species of
trees with a minimum distance of 3m radius from the outside of the
expected mature canopy and or root ball whichever is greater.
D. Plant Materials
1. General
a. Unless specified elsewhere in this Guiding Engineering Manual, plant material shall
meet the minimum requirements listed below in addition to the RCJ Standard
Specifications and all other Codes and restrictions referenced previously in this
Subsection.
b. When determining the quantity of plant material required, the quantity shall always
be rounded up to the whole numbers.
c. All plant material shall meet or exceed size and shape relationships specified in the
latest edition of The American Standard for Nursery Stock published by the
American Association of Nurserymen and any other Standards and Codes
referenced earlier in this Subsection.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 116
d. The plants listed in the tables at the end of this Subsection shall provide the basis
for landscape design. Plant materials and their installation and maintenance shall be
in conformance with provisions of the RCJ’s Standard Specifications and any further
amendments.
2. Basic Plant Types / Definitions
a. “Annuals” A plant living only one year or one season.
b. “Deciduous canopy trees” Large, shade trees that lose their leaves seasonally, with
a mature height of 10 m or greater and a mature spread of 10 m or that are used in
open areas, along street ROW, to surround buildings and for buffering.
1) Size at Installation: Deciduous canopy trees shall have a minimum size of 50
mm at the time of planting.
2) Spacing at Installation:
(a) Deciduous canopy trees shall be planted at a minimum of 5.5 m apart on
center.
(b) The spacing between canopy trees and understory trees shall be at a
minimum of 2 m apart on center.
c. “Evergreen canopy tree” Large, shade trees that usually have green foliage
throughout all seasons of the year, with a mature height of 9 m or greater and a
mature spread of 6 m or that are used in open areas, along street ROW, to surround
buildings and for buffering.
1) Size at Installation: Evergreen canopy trees shall have a minimum height of
2.5 m at the time of planting.
(a) Evergreen canopy trees shall be planted at a minimum of 5.5 m apart on
center.
minimum of two meters apart on center.
d. “Deciduous understory trees” Small trees or large shrubs that lose their leaves
seasonally, with a mature height of 3 m to 10 m, except under overhead utilities,
where lower heights at maturity may be required.
1) Size at Installation:
(a) Deciduous understory trees with single stems shall have at a minimum
size of 25 mm and a minimum height of 2.5 m at the time of planting.
(b) Deciduous understory trees with multiple stems shall have a minimum
height of 2.5 m at the time of planting.
(a) Deciduous understory trees shall be planted at a minimum of 3.5 m apart
on center.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 117
e. “Evergreen understory trees” Trees or large shrubs at least 3 m tall at maturity that
usually has green foliage throughout all seasons of the year.
1) Size at Installation: Evergreen understory trees shall have a minimum height
of 2 m at the time of planting.
(a) Evergreen understory trees shall be planted at a minimum of 3.5 m apart
on center.
f. “Shrubs (deciduous and evergreen)” Prostrate or upright woody plants, either
evergreen or deciduous, with a mature height usually less than 3 m. Evergreen
shrubs usually have green foliage throughout all seasons of the year.
1) Size at Installation: Shrubs shall be a minimum of 0.40 m in height at the time
of planting.
(a) Shrubs shall not be planted closer than 1 m on center.
(b) Shrubs shall not be planted closer than 1 m to planted trees, nor within 2
m of existing trees.
(c) When planting shrubs as a hedge; the maximum spacing shall be 1 m on
center. Smaller shrubs shall require less spacing between them.
g. “Grass seed” Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA’s “Journal of
Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds” for purity and germination tolerances.
h. “Groundcovers” Used for planters and low growing accents in landscape
beds/islands.
i. “Palm” An unbranched evergreen tree with a crown of long feathered or fan-shaped
leaves, and typically having old leaf scars forming a regular pattern on the trunk.
j. “Perennials” A plant having a life cycle lasting more than two years.
k. “Vine” Any plant having a long, slender stem that trails or creeps on the ground or cli
mbs by winding itselfabout a support or holding fast with tendrils or claspers.
1) Installation: vines shall be restricted to fences, trellises and structures other
than buildings.
3. Selection of Plant Material
a. Conditions of the RCJ
1) The RCJ directed in May, 1984 that all landscape costs be decreased. This is
to be accomplished by decreasing the number of shrubs and area of
groundcover and grass, but retain the ratio of trees. Decreasing the numbers
and square m of planting area decreases the costs of irrigation in water
consumption, installations and maintenance.
2) A “model” planting to be followed in the Community is Haii Al-Huwaylat
(Camp 11), as recommended by a Landscape Task Force Study in June,

Rev. 0 5.6 - 118
1984. The ratio of planting as recommended by the Landscape Task Force

for one gross hectare of land is as follows:
2 2
(a) 52 trees, 182 shrubs, 70 m of groundcover and 294 m of grass, and the
remaining landscape area is to be covered with gravel mulch 75 mm
thick.
(b) The design characteristics or ratio of trees, shrubs, ground cover and
grass as specified in Volume 5, Section 6 of the Community Plan 1978,
under Intensive and Extensive Landscape Areas, may be altered if the
result satisfies the desires of the RCJ. An increase in water requirements
from such changes must meet the approval of the RCJ.
3) Reference Tables listed below are provided at the end of this Subsection to
aid designers in selecting plant material:
(a) Sand Stabilization: TABLE 5.6.5.F lists possible species for sand
stabilization projects.
(b) Soil temperatures: The approximate subgrade soil temperatures are
listed in
(c)
(d)
(e) TABLE 5.6.5.G.
(f) Water consumption: The average amount of water a plant consumes
throughout various times of the year is listed in TABLE 5.6.5.H.
(g) Irrigation: For irrigation requirements and averages, see TABLE 5.6.5.I
and TABLE 5.6.5.I.
a. The selection of plant materials shall be suitable for the existing and proposed site
conditions of the project.
5. Climate / Environmental Considerations
a. Plants shall have the ability to withstand adverse conditions such as airborne
pollutants, maximum sun exposure and reflected heat from pavements, high winds
and abrasive forces, exposure to salt, road clearing operations and limited root zone
soil volumes. Plants shall also demonstrate the ability to withstand pruning for
pedestrian, vehicle and/or building clearance without compromise to tree health or
form.
(a) Drought tolerant plants are preferred whenever and wherever possible. These
plants shall be capable of reduced water demand following a one year
establishment period.
(b) Plants with similar water requirements shall be group together in distinct
hydro zones.
(c) The landscape design shall reflect the need to utilize shade and natural
ventilation from prevailing winds to minimize the effects of heat, radiation and
glare.
(d) Wind:

Rev. 0 5.6 - 119
(1) Northerly winds prevail. Hot, dry summer winds, called Shamal winds,
come out of the North. Diurnal variations are distinct - the breezes are
onshore during the day and offshore at night. The air near the ground
often carries substantial quantities of dust and sand.
(2) Wind is a climatic factor that can be either pleasant or unpleasant
depending on air temperatures, relative humidity and air velocities.
Plants may be used to break, guide, deflect or filter the wind and thereby
alter its effects. To properly design for wind control using plant materials,
a basic knowledge of air dynamics and information about the directions
of prevailing winds and average speeds for different seasons is
necessary.
FIGURE 5.6.5.A WIND BARRIERS
(3) Plants tend to be better windbreaks than fences or walls because they
permit some degree of wind penetration. When plants are used as a
wind barrier, wind can generally be affected for a lateral distance of 2 to
5 times the height of the barrier on the windward side and a lateral
distance of 10 to 15 times the height of the barrier on the leeward side,
see Error! Reference source not found.A.
(4) Irregular forms and spacing tend to provide a more effective windbreak
than evenly spaced, uniform plants. A variety of plant types and sizes
shall be included to improve the efficiency of a windbreak.
(5) Evergreen plants that branch to the ground are the most effective year-
round windbreaks. Deciduous trees and shrubs are effective only in the
summer.
(6) The characteristics of the national dress and consideration for modesty
requires that special attention be given to screening winds from
walkways, especially at entrances to buildings. The possibility of
venturesome effects and of air turbulence created by building

Rev. 0 5.6 - 120
arrangement shall be studied and a solution provided utilizing

architectural elements, planting or a combination of both, where
appropriate. Ideally, building masses, heights and openings relative to air
currents shall be arranged to minimize this problem.
6. Maintenance Requirements
a. Low maintenance plants are preferred.
b. Groundcovers or shrubs or a combination of both, shall be considered for use in
areas that are small and difficult to mow.
7. Aesthetic Character and Visual Impact
a. Plants shall be compatible with building architecture.
b. Colorful, flowering plants shall be used at focal points.
8. Planting Seasons
a. Unless otherwise specified by the RCJ or upon request of the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor, at his own responsibility, no planting shall be performed during the
months of June, July and August.
b. Palms shall not be planted during the cold winter months. Planting palms in the hot
summer months especially July and August is not suitable for Jubail because of high
dehydrating Shamal winds.
9. Groundwater
a. The salinity content of groundwater has a profound effect on the health and survival
of plant material. In some cases, the effects of salinity can be reduced or mitigated
by raising the rootball zones above the groundwater table, while adding additional fill
and raising the planting areas.
b. The salinity content of water used for irrigation purposes shall also be considered.
c. It is recommended that the saline level of the water used to irrigate or that in the
water table on site be tested prior to planting.
10. Soil Content
a. It is recommended that a Geotechnical Report be obtained for all development. Soil
content and makeup will be included in this report and shall guide the designer in
selecting the most appropriate plant material for the particular project site.
11. Erosion and Dust Control, Soil Stabilization
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.1 for additional detail.
b. All areas having slopes of 2:1 or greater or areas prone to erosion shall be either
planted with low maintenance plant materials or ground covers; or have erosion
control mats; or treated with soil stabilization process to maintain smooth slopes and
prevent erosion.
c. Erosion can be controlled by ground covers and leafy deciduous or evergreen
plants, grasses and other plants with very fibrous root systems.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 121
d. Plants may be used to control dust by providing wind barriers or stabilization for bare
soil. Twiggy, dense-branching plants are effective as wind barriers. Ground covers,
grasses and plants with fibrous root systems are most effective as soil stabilizers.
e. The seeding of large areas with native and introduced species of shrubs and
grasses may be considered. Irrigation or watering shall be required for seed
germination. The frequency of watering, quantity and quality of water required after
germination shall depend on the plant species selected. Listed in TABLE 5.6.5.E are
some plant species which may be considered for seeding.
f. Within the Community environs all ground areas shall be covered with some
material to reduce the problem of blowing sand. In places where the ground is not
covered with paving, shrubs, ground cover or grass, it shall be covered with a 75
mm layer of crushed gravel mulch. However soil surface beneath low growing
closely spaced shrubs and ground cover shall not be treated with gravel mulch.
Graded sand of a size which does not blow easily, or other suitable material, shall
be used in tot lots and play lots. The playing surface of kick-abouts and other large
playfields not covered with grass shall be stabilized with approved materials.
12. Plant Installation Requirements
a. General
1) Plants installed must adhere to all Standards set forth by this Subsection.
2) Plant material shall meet or exceed size and shape relationships specified in
the latest edition of the American Standard for Nursery Stock published by the
American Association of Nurserymen.
3) The RCJ has the right to certify that landscape plantings have been installed
in conformance with the approved landscaping plan including planting sizes,
species an, and installation techniques.
b. Trees:
1) Deciduous trees offer a wide variety of effects because of seasonal changes,
flowers, berries, fruit, and color and texture of bark. Evergreen trees and
shrubs provide green color during seasons when deciduous plants are
leafless and add permanent structural value to the landscape. Deciduous
trees may be used for a greater part of the planting, with evergreens used
only at focal points in conjunction with important features and structures.
2) Trees shall be planted so that at maturity they do not interfere with service
lines, Site Distance Triangles and the basic property rights of adjacent
property owners.
3) Trees planted near public curbs shall have a limited root structure and shall
be installed in such a manner as to prevent physical damage to sidewalks,
curbs, gutters and other public improvements. Trees with deep narrow root
systems shall be used. Trees with aggressive, shallow or wide spreading
roots shall be avoided.
4) Where trees are planted in paved areas, they shall have a protective tree
grate. When used, tree grates shall be sized and maintained to ensure
continued health of any required tree and installed so as not to create any
pedestrian hazards.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 122
5) Trees shall be long-lived (minimum life expectancy of 60 years), clean,

require little maintenance, be structurally strong, insect and disease resistant,
and require little pruning.
6) Trees shall be planted in according to the minimum setbacks as outlined in
TABLE 5.6.5.A TREE SETBACK DISTANCES.
TABLE 5.6.5.A TREE SETBACK DISTANCES
SETBACK TREES FROM DISTANCE
Underground street light conduit or irrigation main 0.6 m
Other underground utilities 1.2 m
Street Lighting Poles 6m
Steel utility poles 3m
Driveways 2m
Manholes, valve boxes, services 1.2 m
Sewer service boxes 1.5 m
Fire hydrants 2m
Road Intersection(s) 7m
Curb face 0.8 m
Sidewalk 0.85 m
Buildings - fastigiate (columnar) tree 2m
Buildings - regular crown tree 3-5m
c. Street Trees
1) Select and site urban trees in pavement to eliminate long term above-ground
and below ground conflicts with utilities, buildings and structures, and
pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
2) Trees within the public ROW are an imperative aspect in the landscape
design of projects. These types of trees are called Street Trees. They are
intended to soften infrastructure and architectural features in a built
environment.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 123
3) One tree shall be planted for each 10 m along roadway frontage. For the
purpose of continuity of design, the planting of trees shall be limited to one
tree species along each individual roadway.
4) Planting of street trees closer than 6 m on center shall require the written
5) The concept of utilizing naturalistic plantings along the primary roadways shall
be augmented with planting at consistent, repetitive intervals to unify the
motorist's perceived image and ultimately provide a shaded street canopy.
6) The selection, location and spacing of street trees must accommodate the
safety requirement of vehicles and pedestrians. Adequate sight distances
must be maintained at intersections, driveways, cross-walks or other locations
where clear vision is important. Criteria for safety must include an analysis of
road size and alignment, speed, volume and the nature of passing traffic.
7) Street trees shall be of a single specie/cultivar on either side of the street
within a given block. Median tree species may vary.
8) Street trees shall be placed between the side-walk and the building, leaving
the strip between the sidewalk and the curb free for underground utilities and
traffic and street lights. If there are no sidewalks, the distance between the
curb and the trees shall be at least 1.2 m to prevent damage to trees from
vehicles.
9) The selection of tree species, spacing and location along roads shall bear a
relationship to the class of roadways, i.e., arterial, secondary or collector, or
local. Psychological impact of tree plantings is of very real value in
establishing a hierarchy of traffic flow. A clearly structured and consistent
planting Plan can provide overall visual coherence.
10) Minimum number of street trees shall be calculated as defined in TABLE
5.6.5.B MINIMUM NUMBER OF STREET TREES.
TABLE 5.6.5.B MINIMUM NUMBER OF STREET TREES
Tree Size Single Family
Medium Trees (10 - 20 m ht.) Greater of 1 per lot or 10 m
Small Trees (Under 10 m ht.) Greater of 1 per lot or 7 m
d. Shrubs:
1) Streetscape shrubs shall be container grown and shall not be less than 0.60
m in height at time of planting and shall not be pruned to less than 0.60 m in
height.
2) Screening shrubs shall not be less than 0.75 m at time of planting and shall
not be pruned to less than 1.5 m in height.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 124
3) Large shrubs shall have a pit size of 0.6 x 0.6 x 0.6 m. Medium and small
shrubs shall have a pit size of 0.5 x 0.5 x 0.5 m.
(a) Shrubs shall generally have 2 to 3 stems per plant.
4) The size of the shrub planting bed shall reflect the ultimate height and spread
of the shrubs to be used. A shrub planting design shall aim to establish a
dense canopy of foliage to shade out weed growth and reduce long term
maintenance costs.
5) The minimum planting distance from building walls shall be 0.70 m for small
shrubs and 1.20 m for large shrubs.
6) The minimum planting distance from free standing walls shall be 0.30 m for
small shrubs and 0.50 m for large shrubs.
e. Groundcover:
1) Groundcover shall be planted and spaced so that it covers 100% of the area
where it is planted within 1 year.
2) Groundcover shall have a depth of planting of 0.3 m.
3) The minimum planting distance from building walls shall be 0.50 m, and from
free standing walls shall be 0.30 m.
f. Vines:
1) Vines shall be allowed adjacent to building walls only in special positions,
such as building entrances, private garden areas in limited quantity and at
columns supporting unenclosed shade structures.
2) Vines may be used on large concrete walls if the wall is not to be painted or
finished with other material requiring maintenance.
3) Vines shall be permitted on an average maximum of 30% of free standing
wall surfaces.
g. Grasses:
1) Lawns/Fine Grass, Rough Grass and Wildflowers
(a) Sod shall be used on all lawn/fine grass areas. Irrigation is required.
Seeding shall require approval of the RCJ.
(b) Rough grass and wildflowers areas shall be seeded. Seeding method
shall be noted on drawings.
2) Areas to be seeded with grades greater than 3:1 and/or highly erosion-prone
soils shall be hydro seeded with a nurse crop seed mix, a hydraulically
applied erosion control mulch, or erosion control blanket. Erosion control
method to be noted on drawings.
(a) Grass shall have a depth of planting of 0.3 m.
3) Steep slopes shall either be shrub or whip planted or sown with a wild flower
conservation mix rather than grassed, and very small areas shall be either
shrubbed or hard surfaced.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 125
4) Grass shall be separated a minimum of 0.20 m from the face of building walls
and free standing walls by a concrete mowing strip, to allow for mowing
adjacent to walls.
5) A concrete strip shall also be provided between grass areas and crushed rock
mulch or shrub and ground cover beds for reduced maintenance. The mowing
strip shall be a minimum thickness of 0.15 m and shall be set on compacted
gravel base a minimum of 0.30 m in depth to discourage the spread of
rhizomes.
E. Landscape Design Principles
1. General
a. The plants listed in Table 5.6.5.E shall provide the basis for landscape design. Plant
materials and their installation and maintenance shall be in conformance with
provisions of the RCJ’s General Procurement and Construction Specifications
(GPCS) and any further amendments.
b. Landscape plans shall be prepared by experienced Landscape
Architects/Engineers or other professionals with a proficiency in preparing landscape
plans.
c. It is imperative that the landscaping of a site be considered from the onset as an
integral part of the design process for a project/development.
d. The size and scale of a development, its impact on, and relationship with, the
surrounding site context and the proposed use shall determine the nature of
landscaping for that particular development.
e. Prior to commencing design work, consideration shall be given to other existing and
proposed structures (design, materials and general character), existing site
conditions (topography, drainage and vistas), and vehicle and pedestrian circulation.
f. It is essential to consider and plan for the future maintenance of the vegetation and
site elements are shown on the landscape Plan at the design stage.
g. Landscaping designs shall provide visual interest and add variety.
h. Landscaping designs shall not be designed so as to invent a safety hazard.
i. Landscaping designs shall not conflict with any site utilities, drainage, and/or
lighting.
j. Landscaping designs shall consider how to divide and screen impervious surfaces.
2. Roadways, Driveways and Pedestrian Crossings
a. Roadways:
1) Roadways and streets shall be planted.
b. Driveways: Entry drives in vehicular use areas shall be landscaped with approved
trees and shrubs in a manner that visually emphasize the areas and offer the driver
and pedestrian an attractive appearance from the street.
c. Pedestrian crossings refer to section 5.5.1 for lighting requirements.
3. Sustainability:

Rev. 0 5.6 - 126
a. Landscaping designs shall be designed to balance local environment and require

minimal resource inputs. The landscape shall be visually pleasing, cost effective,
functional, and maintainable and environmentally sound.
b. Refer to Subsection 3.4.0 for more information on Sustainability.
F. Paving
a. Refer to the TCDD for general information on paving.
b. Refer to the TCDD for direction on landscaping along and in roadways.
G. Natural Access Control

a. Refer to Subsection 3.3.2.
H. Landscaping Next to Buildings

1. General
a. Vegetation planted in strategic groups around buildings can often improve their
overall appearance by softening structural lines. This planting technique integrates
the building and into its site and enhance the building’s design features.
b. The minimum planting distance from building wall is 2 m. For trees with a crown
expected to be over 4 m in diameter at maturity, the minimum planting distance from
building walls is ½ the diameter of the crown, plus 0.5 m.
c. The minimum planting distance from free standing walls not exceeding 2.5 m in
height is 1 m.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2 Site Development for Buildings.
I. Screening
1. General:
a. Every development shall provide sufficient screening so that neighboring properties
are effectively shielded from any adverse impacts of that development or so that the
new development is screened from impacts of an adjacent existing use.
b. Vegetative screens shall be established along vehicular routes to promote an
attractive corridor and shall include both, canopy trees and under-story trees and
shrubs which help to provide noise reduction.
c. Plants with dense, abundant foliage may be used as screens to conceal objects or
views.
d. Where limited area prohibits use of plant screens, a fence or wall softened in
appearance with vines or shrubs may be used.
e. It is recognized that because of the wide variety of types of developments and the
relationships between them, it is neither possible nor prudent to establish inflexible
screening requirements. Therefore, minor deviations may be granted to allow less
intensive screening, or requirements for more intensive screening may be imposed,
whenever such deviations are more likely to satisfy the intent of this Subsection.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 127
2. Screening Requirements:
a. Screening with vegetation or a fence or wall (where approved) shall be required in
the following situations:
1) Office, Business, or Industrial Districts abutting Residential Districts shall be
screened.
2) Incongruent residential districts shall be screened.
3) Developments containing or considered to be a “Superstore.”
4) Sports Facilities shall require screening.
5) Trash collection points serving any office, business, industrial development or
a residential development of three users or more shall be screened from other
properties.
6) Outdoor storage and/or merchandising service area, loading area, storage
yard, detention pond, or other use which, in the opinion of the RCJ, is
considered objectionable.
7) Outdoor toilets.
3. Minimum Size Requirements:
a. The minimum required screen landscaping strip shall be 3 m in depth, at minimum,
exclusive of utility easements. The screen landscaping strip shall not be located in
areas identified for road projects, drainage areas or other public improvement
projects.
b. Berms shall be a minimum of 0.9 m in height, with a maximum of 2:1 slope.
c. For screening of mechanical equipment and trash collection facilities, the screen
heights shall be a minimum of the equipment or facility/enclosure plus 150 mm.
d. For all other screening purposes, the screen height shall be a minimum of 2.4
meters.
4. Screening Between Uses:
a. Between Office and Residential Uses:
b. Between Residential Districts:
1) Landscaping shall consist of a 4.5 m screening strip of either a single row of
evergreen trees spaced 6 m on center or a single row of evergreen shrubs
spaced 3 m on center.
c. Superstores:
1) Property Boundary
(a) A 9 m wide vegetated screen shall be provided along the front property
line as well as along all abutting arterial roadways.
(b) This boundary screen may be broken for approved access points,
driveways, and service aisles
(c) A minimum of 4.5 m wide landscape screen shall be planted along all
other property lines and along all internal roadways to the
property/development.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 128
(d) No parking or parking lots are permitted within the required screening
area.
2) Building Façade
(a) Where the building façade faces adjacent Residential uses, evergreen
trees shall be planted at intervals of 7 m on center, or in clusters or
clumps and additional evergreen shrubs shall be provided.
3) Building Façade
(a) Where the building façade faces adjacent Residential uses, evergreen
trees shall be planted at intervals of 7 m on center, or in clusters or
clumps and additional evergreen shrubs shall be provided.
4) Parking Lot(s)
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.3.1 for Screening Requirements for Parking Lot(s)
d. Sports Facilities:
1) When necessary to enclose and screen sports facilities from public view,
special attention shall be paid to designing a system that allows air circulation
while still meeting the screening requirements.
2) Facilities including tennis courts and swimming pools are to be screened to
reduce wind, block sand and to provide privacy for users.
3) Swim facilities must be screened from public view in all surroundings,
including any upper stories from surrounding buildings.
4) Tennis courts for use by women shall be enclosed and screened from public
view. Refer to Jubail Industrial City Zoning Regulations.
5) Female schools and the ancillary exterior grounds band recreation facilities
must also be screened from public view by walls/screens of adequate height.
Refer to Jubail Industrial City Zoning Regulations.
6) Modesty is a compelling consideration in the host culture and users and these
facilities listed above must be screened.
e. Trash Collection Facilities:
1) Refuse collection stations are prohibited by the RCJ. Existing refuse
containers shall be located in or adjacent to landscaped areas and screened
with vegetation.
2) Enclosures shall be of an opaque material, sufficiently durable so as to
withstand the abuse resulting from periodic servicing of the container. Refer
to Subsection 5.3.2 Site Development for Buildings for Architectural
Standards.
3) The enclosure shall then be screened with dense landscaping.
4) Both the enclosure and the landscape screen, together, shall be of sufficient
height and width to shield the trash container from view.
5) Walls utilized for screening solid waste receptacles and other services shall
be coordinated to match the aesthetics of other architectural materials on site.
f. Service Areas:

Rev. 0 5.6 - 129
1) Service areas and service entrances shall be adequately screened with

appropriate plant materials so as to present a totally buffered appearance to
people entering or leaving buildings through all public entrances or exits and
to vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
g. Utility Structures/Appurtenances
1) Landscaping shall be used where possible to screen structures associated
with utilities.
2) Landscaping shall be placed above ground level utilities or around utility
structures in a manner agreeable to the utility company. The developer must
gain consent of the utility company prior to the installation of such screens.
h. Electrical transformers, vents and other utilities shall be sufficiently screened with
berms, trees, shrubs and landscape materials to minimize their adverse visual
impact. Where feasible, these plants shall be incorporated with the overall site
planting Plan.
5. Vehicular Use Area Screening:
a. Definition: For the purposes of this Subsection, areas used for vehicle service,
parking (included structured parking), parking lot drive aisles, and busies
transactions such as areas adjacent to gasoline pumps (even if under a canopy) and
areas for drive-up services, shall be considered Vehicular Use Areas (VUA).
Driveways that are perpendicular or nearly perpendicular to the street and serve as
an entrance to the site shall not be considered VUAs for the purposes of this
Subsection.
b. The following areas shall meet the requirements of this Subsection:
1) New or renovated parking lots that contain 5 or more parking spaces, or a
VUA of 140 square m or more (except for parking associated with single-
family or two-family development on single lots).
2) Any expansion of any VUAs that meet the criteria listed above.
3) Sites where a building or buildings is demolished and reconstructed
(regardless of whether or not the new building is larger or smaller than the
original building) if the VUAs meet the criteria listed above.
c. The following planting Standards shall be used for all Vehicular Use Areas:
1) No Canopy Tree (deciduous or evergreen) shall be planted farther than 3 m
from the edge of the VUA.
2) No Understory Trees or Shrubs (deciduous or evergreen) shall be planted
farther than 4.5 m from the edge of the VUA.
3) When existing utilities or easements prohibit the placement of trees or shrubs
as required in this Subsection, the placement of the plant material shall be set
back the minimum amount necessary to be clear of the utility or easement
and must allow the minimum required growing area, per industry Standards
for that plant material.
4) Where feasible, VUAs shall be designed to retain existing specimen
vegetation. When new materials are introduced for screening of parking
areas, these plantings shall match the native (existing) plant associations of

Rev. 0 5.6 - 130
trees and under story materials. Refer to paragraph C. for Protection of

Existing Vegetation.
5) All landscaping within VUAs is subject to the Sight Distance Triangle
requirements. Refer to Subsection 5.6.5.A.5.c.6.
6) Perimeter Parking Lot Landscaping/Screening Requirements:
(a) All visible parking lot(s) that has exposure to a public or private street
(except an alley) and is located within 15 m of a ROW shall provide a
landscape screen. Landscaped berms, walls, fences, plants, planters,
hedges, or any combination thereof shall be used to screen parking lots.
(b) Parking lots shall be designed such that no more than 20% of the light
from headlights of automobiles and small trucks shall be visible from
outside the parking lot when measured in mid-winter.
(c) Canopy Trees, deciduous or evergreen, shall be planted at a rate of one
tree per 15 m on center less driveway widths.
(d) Shrubs, deciduous or evergreen, shall be planted at the rate of one
shrub per 1 m les driveway widths.
7) Interior Parking Lot Landscaping/Screening Requirements:
(a) Landscape parking islands shall be created to mitigate the effects of the
harsh microclimate of expansive parking areas. Canopy trees, deciduous
or evergreen, shall be planted throughout and along the edges of parking
areas to provide shade, windbreaks, spatial enclosures and screening to
adjacent properties.
(b) A minimum of 10% of the parking area shall be landscaped.
(c) Parking lot landscape islands shall be created at a rate of 1 island for
every 15 parking spaces.
(d) Islands shall be a minimum of 2.4 m in width and 12 square m in area
and protected by raised curbs.
(e) All parking aisle shall be landscaped at each end.
(f) At least on Canopy Tree, deciduous or evergreen, is required for each
landscape island. These trees must be a minimum caliper of five
centimeters.
(g) The use of turf/grass in islands is discouraged.
(h) Plant material shall allow for adequate room for opening of car doors in
adjacent spaces.
(i) No plant material that grows to a mature height of over 0.6 m shall be
permitted within 1.2 m of the ends of parking lot landscape islands.
(j) Lighting and communication conduits shall extend along the backside of
the island curb and not through the middle of landscaped islands.
(k) These islands shall be designed to have 100% coverage of living plant
material within 3 years from the time of planting.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 131
(l) Landscaped parking lot islands must be delineated by a clear physical

barrier such as a curb to protect the plants from vehicular damage.
(m) All Canopy trees located within parking lots must be limbed up to a
height of 1.8 m to allow for clear views under them.
(n) All landscape islands must be irrigated. See paragraph J for irrigation
requirements.
8) Pedestrian Use Area Screening:
(a) Separation of motorized vehicle and pedestrian circulation shall be
incorporated into the landscape development plan. Pedestrian/vehicular
conflicts shall be minimized but, when unavoidable, signs and crosswalk
delineations shall be used to ensure safety.
(b) For Commercial Developments, a pedestrian area in front of building
entrances shall be provided which shall be clear of obstruction.
(c) Major arterial walks shall be reinforced and enhanced with landscaping,
seating, if required and appropriate lighting to create a pleasurable and
visibly aesthetic experience for pedestrians.
(d) Pedestrian plazas may be articulated with special paving materials and
patterns and with such amenities as seating, raised landscaped planters,
lighting and other special features.
(e) Pedestrian path plantings shall consist of a combination of trees and
landscape plantings. Intermediate evergreen trees shall be planted along
arterial walkways to reinforce desired lines, axis and to frame vistas and
to help moderate extreme environmental conditions by reducing glare
from paved surfaces and offering shade from summer heat. Landscape
planting shall be used to assist in controlling traffic patterns through route
definition. Plants used for traffic control or barriers shall be chosen
according to such characteristics as number of stems, presence of
thorns, flexibility of branches and density.
J. Irrigation Systems
1. General
a. All irrigation shall meet or exceed the minimum industry Standards outlined in this
Subsection.
b. The design of irrigation systems shall promote standardization of materials,
equipment and hardware so as to minimize service and maintenance.
c. A complete automatic irrigation system shall be fully specified and detailed for any
proposed projects. It shall serve all plantings. The planting schedule shall be
coordinated with water availability dates. No planting shall be done until the irrigation
system is installed, tested, approved and fully operational unless otherwise specified
by the RCJ.
d. Prior to installation, irrigation drawings and details shall be submitted for approval to
the RCJ
2. Location of Irrigation Systems

Rev. 0 5.6 - 132
a. All landscaped areas shall be irrigated.

b. In grassed boulevards fronting institutional, commercial and residential uses with
potential for heavy pedestrian traffic between the curb and sidewalk, grass areas
shall be irrigated. Boulevard trees, shrubs and ground covers shall be watered from
an automatic irrigation system.
c. Landscaped medians in roadways shall be irrigated with subsurface systems.
d. Urban trees in pavement shall be irrigated with multiple outlet emitter drip irrigation
devices.
3. Irrigation Design Requirements
a. Systems shall be installed underground. All components shall be designed and
installed to minimize public access and contact. Locked lids and doors shall be used
whenever necessary. Under no circumstances shall water containing effluent be
sprayed in areas normally occupied by the public. For irrigation and misting of indoor
planting, only potable water shall be used.
b. The design of the irrigations systems shall be as such so that water shall not come
into contact with vehicular and pedestrian hardscape surfaces and buildings.
c. Irrigation systems shall install a flow meter with an electronic signal to be sent to the
main irrigation system meter.
1) The flow meter shall be a low flow sensor style of meter connected to the
central control unit.
d. All irrigation systems shall be metered (normally at point of connection to main
supply).
e. Design service connections from water main to water meter chamber and up to the
emitters.
f. For potable water systems only: install backflow prevention.
g. Measure static water pressure at or near the point of connection and include with
irrigation system design.
h. Maximum design flow velocity to be 1.5 meters per second.
i. Size pipes and valves for minimum friction loss.
j. Design head-to-head coverage for turf and shrub areas.
k. Design sprinkler circuits with matched precipitation heads. Do not mix heads with
varied precipitation rates on the same circuit.
l. Specify low flow heads for sloping areas.
m. Where surface sprinklers are used, ensure unobstructed sprinkler coverage to tree
bases from at least two sides.
n. Every drip circuit shall be designed with a filter, pressure regulator, flush valve and
air relief valve. The drip component manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
maintenance shall be included in the project specifications.
o. Minimize overspray on paved surfaces.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 133
p. Irrigation systems shall be designed to supply water on a demand basis by

employing a soil moisture probe to override the controller during periods of adequate
soil moisture.
q. All valve covers and other access points be tagged with the inscription
"Contaminated Water - Do not Drink" in Arabic and English. Similar tags are
required on any potable-sourced lines whenever fertilizer is injected.
r. All effluent-sourced systems require filters and/or strainers downstream of solenoid
valves serving drip emitters.
s. Algae-resistant hose is required on all emitter lines. High temperatures promote
algae growth.
For the above reasons, deep burial of all lines is advantageous. TABLE 5.6.4.F
summarizes diurnal soil temperatures for August at the noted depths. A minimum
mainline burial depth of 900 mm is suggested.
t. HDPE and PVC piping are the approved materials for irrigation systems. Refer to
the TCDDs.
u. Irrigation of dissolved fertilizer in the irrigation system is an efficient method of
application and is appropriate to the large scale facilities proposed for Jubail
Industrial City. Small mobile injection units may be used. Where economies of scale
warrant, larger injection units are appropriate. Computer assisted control centers;
similar to those used on large golf courses, may be appropriate where air-
conditioned space is available.
v. In many cases, drip emitter systems which are effluent-sourced are subject to
phosphate accumulation (scaling) and resultant emitter clogging. Injection of sulfuric
acid, in sufficient quantities to prevent scaling, is often suggested in these cases and
may be accomplished by designing injection equipment to utilize fertilizers, acids
and systemic insecticides.
4. Water Sources for Irrigation Systems
a. The main source of irrigation shall be treated effluent water.
b. Potable irrigation shall be used in Kindergarten areas only.
c. Potable lines shall be protected from contamination by use of reduced pressure
principle backflow preventers.
1) This only applies to kindergartens.
d. The system layout shall provide adequate separation between potable lines and the
effluent and sewage lines. A parallel duplication of potable and effluent irrigation
lines shall be avoided.
5. Irrigation Drawing Requirements
a. Each segment of the project requires a complete workable irrigation system.
Documents shall be prepared by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for each system.
This includes:
b. Power
1) Locating and noting the electrical service and supply main points of
connection.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 134
c. Layout and Size

1) Scale layout and sizing of all pipes, mains, laterals and emitter hoses.
d. Drip Detail
1) Typical drip emitter installation details showing relationship to rootballs.
e. Sections
1) Typical Sections showing burial depths for all components.
f. Valves
1) Solenoid valve pressure setting schedules.
g. Specifications
1) Specifications for all components; preference shall be given to locally
produced materials.
h. Calculations
1) Calculations for water demand and duration of irrigation (controller schedule).
i. Pressure
1) Sprinkle operating pressure, radius (in meters), rate of application and rate of
flow.
j. Flow
1) Emitter operating pressure, number of outlets, rate of flow.
K. Site Furnishings & Elements

1. General
a. The intent of this Subsection is to provide directives that shall guide the selection,
design, placement, and application of site furnishings in all planning projects.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.A for all applicable Codes and guidelines related to site
furnishings.
3. Selection of Site Furnishings
a. The following guidelines shall assist in the selection of site furnishings:
1) Site furnishings shall be compatible with the environment into which they are
placed.
2) Textures, colors, materials, form, and aesthetics of the site furnishing shall
compliment the adjacent architecture and/or site.
3) Maintain and improve the visual quality of the project.
4) Minimize and standardize maintenance requirements.
5) Consider the limitations and needs of persons with disabilities to minimize any
potential obstructions and hazards.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 135
6) Minimize life-cycle costs by utilizing high quality products that are durable,
backed by a solid warranty and vendor reputations.
4. Location and Installation of Site Furnishings
1) Site furnishings shall be clustered to maximize effective use and minimize the
negative visual impact within the landscape and to create comfortable and
multifunctional spaces.
2) A clear pedestrian path shall be maintained at a minimum of 1.5 m and site
furnishings shall not obstruct this path.
3) Environmental and climatic elements shall be considered when placing site
furnishings (i.e. wind, sun)
4) Site furnishings shall be safely separated from motorized vehicular, bicycle
and any other potentially hazardous traffic.
5) Site furnishings shall be located in plazas, courtyards, roadway rights-of-way
and medians and along pedestrian pathways.
6) Site furnishings shall be located so as not to interfere with irrigation spray and
encourage foot traffic which would be detrimental to grass or other
landscaped areas.
7) Seating and drinking fountains shall be located in shaded areas.
8) Receptacles shall be located at convenient points to, and within, public
gathering areas; mostly at the intersections of pedestrian walkways.
9) Locate site furnishings on paved areas.
10) Bicycle racks shall be placed close to building entrances and under
overhangs and be sheltered where possible.
11) Site furnishings shall be located with a minimum setback of 0.30 m from edge
of lawn or vegetation.
b. Methods of Installation of Site Furnishings:
1) Refer to the TCDDs for construction details and installation information
concerning site furnishings.
5. Seating
a. The following Subsection outlines design consideration for:
1) Benches
2) Chairs
3) Tables
4) Umbrellas
b. Select bench locations in potential gathering areas to create a comfortable setting
that is conducive to conversation and interaction as well as to security.
c. Backless benches may be used in places where two-sided access and use are
expected.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 136
d. The height above finished grade or specified surface for benches and chairs shall be
between 450-500 mm.
e. Free standing (non-secured) chairs, tables and umbrellas shall be considered in
courtyards, atriums and places that can be secured. They shall not be considered in
public or unsecured areas.
f. All tables must be located on a clear, paved pathway to allow for users with
disabilities to access them.
g. Standard height for a table shall be 1 m.
h. Benches shall be placed together with other street furnishings such as bus shelters,
newsstands, telephones, etc.
i. Provide umbrellas at locations determined by the RCJ.
6. Receptacles
a. Provide receptacles in close proximity to tables, chairs and benches and areas of
high pedestrian traffic such as seating areas, building entries, patios, etc.
b. Receptacles shall be between 0.8 – 1 m above the surrounding grade.
c. Ensure that receptacles are simple and unobtrusive in their design.
d. Receptacles shall be easy to service.
e. Receptacles shall have a minimum capacity of 120 liters.
7. Drinking Fountains
a. Drinking fountains shall be placed in locations with afternoon shade.
b. Drinking fountains shall be located so as not to encroach into pedestrian walkways.
c. Drinking fountains shall meet accessibility requirements for persons with disabilities.
d. Drinking fountains shall be located on well-drained ground.
e. They shall be constructed so that the drinking fountain is easily cleaned and
disinfected.
f. The water system by which the drinking fountain operates shall operate under
sanitary conditions and shall meet all health Codes.
8. Bicycle Racks
a. The Bicycle Rack shall be simple in design, space efficient and serviceable.
b. Racks shall be placed in a manner so as to avoid conflicts with pedestrians.
c. Bicycle Racks shall be spaced at 1 m on center and on a sidewalk with 2.5 meters
or more of clear sidewalk space remaining.
d. To determine the number of Bicycle Racks needed, see TABLE 5.6.5.I below.
TABLE 5.6.5.C MINIMUM BICYCLE RACKS
Use Category Minimum Bicycle Parking

Rev. 0 5.6 - 137
Household Living Multifamily: 1 per 10 units
Community Service 1 per 465 m2 floor area minimum
Educational Facilities 1 per classroom

2
1 per 280 m floor area + 1 per 30
Government Facilities
employees, minimum 4 spaces
2
Medical Facilities 1 per 465 m floor area, minimum 2 spaces
20% of provided motor vehicle parking,

Parks and Open Areas
minimum 4 spaces
Passenger Terminals 10% of provided parking

2
Retail Sales and Service, and Restaurants 1 per 465 m floor area, minimum 4 spaces
2
Office 1 per 465 m floor area, minimum 2 spaces
9. Bollards
a. Bollards shall be used to restrict vehicular movement while allowing for pedestrian
circulations.
b. Bollard installations shall be located away from a site’s natural pinch points and
without forcing pedestrians to walk close to road edges.
c. Removable bollards shall be used where occasional vehicular access is required.
d. Bollards shall be placed no closer than 1 m on center.
e. Consider height and visibility of bollards, particularly in low light conditions or during
peak hours where they can be obscured by a crowd to prevent safety hazards.
f. Bollards if lit shall follow the general specifications for luminaires, see section 5.6.3
(roadway lighting) for lighting performance, material specification and obtrusive light
guidance i.e. upward and waste light shall be minimized.
g. Bollards shall not be a hazard to people with disabilities.
h. When possible, position bollards in lines that run perpendicular to pedestrian desire
L. Gateways, Monuments and Public Art

1. General
a. Gateways, monuments and public art are all vital components in the cultural fabric of
creative cities.
b. The purpose of these guidelines is to ensure that gateways, monuments and public
art are sited in appropriate locations, relate to their surroundings and are of the
highest quality and design.
c. Gateways, monuments and public art can:
Rev. 0 5.6 - 138
1) Build a visually rich environment that enriches public spaces for the
enjoyment of all;
2) Showcase a city or space’s image and identity;
3) Engage the local community and visitors;
4) Can yield economic benefits by attracting creative industry, businesses and
workforce;
5) Reflect the cultural character of an environment and celebrate its heritage by
commemorating these events, people and principles;
6) Encourage the growth of a culturally informed public.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.A for all applicable Codes and guidelines related
gateways, monuments and art.
b. The following steps must be undertaken in the planning for the
installation/construction of gateways, monuments and public art:
1) Technical review / construction drawings for the requirements of the work;
2) Technical review / construction drawings of the existing and proposed
conditions of the site at which the gateway, monument, or public art will be
located;
3) Analysis of the design of the gateway, monument, or public art and any social
issues;
4) Verify that all Codes set forth by the RCJ are met;
5) Consideration of the safety of the public;
6) Analysis of all associated cost factors;
7) Choose materials suitable for the environment in which it will be placed.
3. Installation
a. Gateways, monuments and public art may not be installed or removed on public
land without prior approval from the RCJ.
4. Gateways
a. Gateways are hard and soft elements or a combination of both that serve to highlight
an entrance or means of access.
b. Successful gateways can:
1) Serve as landmarks signifying arrival to a unique place;
2) Provide a transition from one space into another;
3) Reflect and visually express the character of the adjacent area;
4) Serve as traffic calming devices signifying entrance to a special place.
c. Design Guidelines

Rev. 0 5.6 - 139
1) The designs of gateways are subject to the function and width of the road or
public space within the right-of-way. To create imaginative and interesting
gateways some of the following elements shall be considered:
(a) Vegetation such as trees, shrubs and groundcover plantings shall be
used to create visual interest.
(b) Plants used for gateway features shall be hardy, tolerant of the climatic
conditions and low maintenance. Irrigation and ongoing maintenance
shall be considered when designing planting areas that are associated
with gateways;
(c) Sightline requirements for vehicular and pedestrian traffic shall be
considered at all gateways.
(d) Pavement treatments can provide a contrast in color and material at
gateways.
(e) Materials like masonry, natural stone, or other approved materials may
be used construct an architectural component of the gateway.
(f) Hard and soft materials chosen for the gateway shall emphasize the
overall design of the gateway and the character of the area where it is
located.
(g) Medians that are a part of gateways shall be designed to be accessible
as refuges for pedestrians crossing the roadway.
(h) Lighting may be used to create special effects or to accentuate the
gateway feature or components of it.
(i) When lighting is used at a gateway, careful attention must be given to
the selection and the location of the lights so as not to interfere with the
vision of motorists and pedestrians.
(j) Lighting should comply with the general specifications for external
lighting including component specifications, energy performance, life
expectancy and obtrusive light guidelines.
(k) Signage and graphics may be used to identify the name of the area that
the gateway is featuring. Colors and materials of signage and graphics
shall not contradict with the gateway or the character of the area where it
is located. Graphics and signs if lit must not affect driver vision ( see ILP
PLG05 for Guidance).
(l) Monuments and Public Art may be used in the design of a gateway.
d. Monuments
1) Monuments are any permanent or semi-permanent object installed
specifically to commemorate or memorialize an event, place, or person.
2) Monuments may include but are not limited to statues, fountains, sculptures
or significant plantings.
3) Site Selection for monuments shall consider the following:
(a) The monument shall be erected on sites to which the theme of the
monument has relevance.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 140
(b) The proposed site shall be the most relevant location available to the
monument theme.
(c) The context of the proposed site shall be a major consideration in the
mass and scale of the propose object.
5. Public Art
1) Public art is art that is displayed in a shared community space open to the
general public and may include, but is not limited to:
(a) Sculptures
(b) Memorials
(c) Artifacts
(d) Murals
(e) Fountains or water features that contribute to the surround aesthetics of
a space
(f) In some cases, components of the landscape, both soft and hard
(g) In some cases, components of engineering and architectural features
may contribute to the surrounding aesthetics
2) Public art may be integrated into the design of a site, buildings, landscape
and any other publically accessible open spaces including plazas, squares,
parks, courtyard and colonnades.
3) Acquiring Public Art
(a) Public art, to be used in space under the jurisdiction of the RCJ, may be
acquired through:
(1) Purchase
(2) Commission
(3) Donations
(4) Creation of Community Art Projects
4) Site Selection
(a) The RCJ will coordinate the site selection of appropriate locations for the
installation of public art on publically-owned space.
5) Implementation of Public Art
(a) The RCJ will oversee the implementation of public art on municipally-
owned public space.
(b) Implementation will include overseeing process, contract negotiations
where applicable, site planning and maintenance of the art on land
overseen by the RCJ.
(c) The installation/implementation of public art must be conducted in a
manner approved by the RCJ and shall have regard for:
(1) Visibility

Rev. 0 5.6 - 141
(2) Public safety

(3) Interior and exterior circulation
(4) Suitability to location/site (form, content, materials)
(5) Function of existing facility and/or site
(6) Users and their interactions with the public art
(7) Environmental impacts
(8) Reductions of obtrusive light (see ILP GN01 and PLG04).
(9) Public accessibility
(10) Effects on lit environment of adjacent roads
6) Maintenance of Public Art
(a) The physical management of public art comprises its care and handling,
maintenance, monitoring its condition and the recognition for
conservation treatment when required.
(b) Appropriate measures shall be developed to maintain public art
including:
(1) Provisions for proper upkeep, maintenance and security;
(2) Immediate reporting when damage occurs or is noticed;
(3) Establishing a regular maintenance schedule based on the nature
and needs of the art work;
(4) The handling of all art in a manner conducive to ensuring its safety,
the safety of patrons around it and using proper handling
techniques;
(5) Arranging for restoration treatment as required by a professional
Conservator when needed.
M. Plazas, Squares and Parks

1. General
a. The purpose of this Subsection is to provide design guidance for how plazas,
squares and parks shall be developed.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.A for all applicable Codes and guidelines related to site
plazas, squares and parks.
b. All Plaza, Squares and Parks shall provide easy and direct access, particularly for
the elderly, disabled and young children.
c. Lighting and Safety shall be a priority, refer to section 5.6 for standards and design
guidance documentation.
d. Lighting should comply with the general specifications for external lighting including
component specifications, energy performance, life expectancy and obtrusive light
guidelines

Rev. 0 5.6 - 142
e. Occupancy patterns shall be analyzed and the appropriateness of electric lighting

considered. White light sources should be used with a minimum Ra of 80. General
lighting specifications shall apply see section 5.6
3. Plazas
a. Plazas are open spaces available for civic purposes and commercial activities.
b. Plazas are usually defined by buildings, structures or streets surrounding it.
c. When designing a plaza, careful thought shall be given to its eventual use and
surroundings.
d. A plaza shall be linked to other surrounding open spaces as well as to interior
building spaces to create a pedestrian network.
e. Plazas are mostly constructed of pavement with little landscaping.
f. Wind could be an issue and cause user discomfort in a plaza. Wind reduction may
be achieved by the following measures:
1) Avoid large, open, unprotected areas;
2) Avoid wind funnels: narrow opening between buildings aligned with prevailing
winds
3) Utilize planting, low walls and canopies for wind deflection.
g. Seating in Plazas shall be an important consideration throughout design. Consider
the following when programing seating:
1) Plentiful Seating
2) Choice of Sitting Location
3) Variety of Seating Types
4) Comfortable Seating
2
h. Size: The minimum size of a plaza shall be 2020 square m and the maximum shall
2
be 8090 m .
i. Occupancy patterns shall be analyzed and the appropriateness of electric lighting
considered. White light sources should be used with a minimum Ra of 80. General
lighting specifications shall apply (see section 5.6.3 D Roadway Lighting).
j. Lighting and Safety shall be a priority, see section 5.6.3 D Roadway Lighting, for
standards and design guidance documentation.
k. Lighting should comply with the general specifications for external lighting including
component specifications, energy performance, life expectancy and obtrusive light
guidelines refer to section5.5.1.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 143
FIGURE 5.6.5.A REPRESENTATION OF A PLAZA
Building
Street
Street
Building Plaza
Building
4. Squares
a. Squares are used for unstructured recreation and civic purposes.
b. Squares are spatially defined by buildings or structures that are adjacent to it.
c. Squares are more formal in their design.
d. These types of spaces shall be designed to be open to the public and accessible at
all times, without physical barrier or gates.
e. Off-street parking shall not be located between the building (if applicable) and the
square.
2
f. Size: The minimum size of a square shall be 2020 m and the maximum shall be 2
hectares acres.
g. Occupancy patterns shall be considered and lighting provided to extend usage into
darkness.
h. Lighting and Safety shall be a priority refer to section 5.5.1 for standards and design
guidance documentation.
i. Lighting should comply with the general specifications for external lighting
including component specifications, energy performance, life expectancy and
obtrusive light guidelines refer to section 5,5.1.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 144
FIGURE 5.6.5.B REPRESENTATION OF A SQUARE
Building
Street
Street
Square
Building
5. Parks
a. Types of parks may include:
1) Recreational or Natural Park (recreation/natural)
(a) Overall Design Considerations:
(1) In designing a park, consideration needs to be given to the
following:
(i) The needs of the park’s plant and wildlife communities
(ii) The park’s landscape character and identity
(iii) Availability of space for visitor facilities
(iv) The needs of visitors including use during darkness hour
(v) Climate and microclimate
(vi) Natural Drainage
(vii) Soils
(viii) Archeological and heritage values
(ix) Human and cultural elements
(b) Parking Areas: Parking within parks shall take the following into
consideration:
(1) Aim to avoid visitor parking areas being dead-end spaces. Instead,
make them part of a wider pedestrian and vehicular circulation
system.
Rev. 0 5.6 - 145
(2) Visitor parking areas shall be large enough to accommodate the

amount of park users, but small enough to prevent anonymity of
users.
(3) Locate any trail heads in vehicular parking areas.
(4) Occupancy patterns shall be considered and lighting provided to
extend usage into darkness.
(5) Lighting and Safety shall be a priority refer to section 5.5.1 for
standards and design guidance documentation.
(6) Lighting should comply with the general specifications for external
lighting including component specifications, energy performance, life
expectancy and obtrusive light guidelines refer to section 5.5.1.
FIGURE 5.6.5.C – REPRESENTATION OF A PARK
Building
Street
Park
2) Pocket Park
(a) Pocket parks are usually located within primarily residential areas and
may be placed within a block.
(b) These parks are used for passive recreation unless they include a
playground or play structure.
2
(c) Size: The maximum size of this type of park shall be 2020 m .

Rev. 0 5.6 - 146
FIGURE 5.6.5.D – REPRESENTATION OF A POCKET PARK
Building
Park Building
Street
Street
Building Park
Building
3) Linear Park
(a) These types of parks are longer than they are wide and are usually
adjacent and are more passive in nature.
(b) It is less formal than a square and may be irregularly shaped.
2
(c) Size: The maximum size for this type of park shall 4046 m .
FIGURE 5.6.5.E – REPRESENTATION OF A LINEAR PARK
Building
Street
Street
Building
Building

Rev. 0 5.6 - 147
N. Hardscape Design
1. General
a. Hardscape is to be used to provide a durable, all-weather surface to accommodate
both pedestrian and vehicular travel.
2. Location of Hardscape Material:
a. Hardscape is intended generally for the following locations:
1) Sidewalks and Pedestrian Paths
2) Plazas and Squares
3) Transit Stops
4) Gathering Spaces
5) Vehicular Use Areas
(a) Driveway approaches
(b) Maintenance driveways
3. Types of Hardscape Materials:
a. The following list are hardscape materials available for use within RCJ projects:
1) Tiles, Bricks and Pavers:
(a) Interlocking Bricks
(b) Cement Tile
(c) Terrazzo Tile
(d) Ceramic Tile
(e) Limestone Tile
(f) Stamped Concrete
(g) Exposed Aggregate Concrete
(h) Cut Stone (Flag Stone)
(i) Clay Stone
(j) Granite Stone
(k) Stone Blocks
(l) Crystal
2) Mulch
(a) River Rocks
(b) Gravel
(c) Tumbled Glass
4. Design Guidelines for Hardscape Materials:

Rev. 0 5.6 - 148
a. Material chosen for a hardscape design shall be durable and suitable for the
environment, aesthetic environment, and intended use of the area in which it is
installed.
b. Material shall be readily available to the project site.
c. Hardscape Design shall provide a quality of paving materials and patterns consistent
with the quality of the surrounding architecture and open spaces.
d. Hardscape materials shall create interest and variation with paved services through
color, material and texture.
e. The type of hardscape materials, or a combination thereof, shall be used to separate
vehicular and pedestrian uses, or any other conflicting user groups of an outdoor
space by reducing pedestrian-vehicular conflicts.
f. Boundary lines shall include linear and curvilinear designs.
g. Vehicular Use in Pedestrian Areas
1) This Subsection addresses design principles for hardscaping in areas whose
primary user group are vehicles, including:
(a) Driveway approaches for commercial and residential development
(b) Maintenances vehicles
2) The vehicular paving shall be used for areas in which vehicular traffic is
anticipated.
h. Hardscape in Pedestrian Areas
1) This Subsection addresses design principles for hardscaping in areas who’s
primary user group are pedestrians.
(a) All hardscaped areas shall adhere to the most current Handicap
Accessibility Codes.
(b) Hardscape design and patterns shall encourage safe pedestrian
movement and create links to other areas designated primarily for
pedestrians.
(c) Hardscape materials shall be used to emphasize important building
entries and proved interest and variation between sidewalks, plazas,
medians and crosswalks.
(d) The design of the hardscaped area shall direct pedestrians to designated
crossings and pedestrian linkages, where a conflict of users occurs.
2) The vehicular paving shall be used for areas in which only pedestrian traffic is
anticipated.
O. Use of Recycled Materials

1. General
a. There are many benefits to incorporating recycled material into a project. Some of
them include but are not limited to:
1) Reduce material and waste disposal costs.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 149
2) Reduce carbon dioxide emissions

3) Reduce of environmental impacts
4) Reduce energy consumption
5) Reduce project costs
b. Types of recycled materials that may be incorporated into a construction project
include but are not limited to: glass, plasterboard, plastics, wood, aggregates, paper,
rubber, compost and other organics, cement replacement.
c. Many site furnishings are made of recycled materials. Use such site furnishings
where possible.
d. Common building applications listed below are opportunities to incorporate recycled
materials:
1) Landscaping
2) Site Furnishings
(a) Site furnishings may be made from recycled plastics and metals.
3) Building Face Materials
4) Exterior Hardscape Material
a) Pavers
a. Bricks
b. Aggregate
c. Tile
d. Stone
b) Mulches
a. Rock
b. Gravel
c. Tumbled Glass
5) Masonry Blocks
(a) Masonry blocks may be crushed and repurposed as granular fill in
driveways and sidewalks.
6) Mortars, Grouts, Stucco
7) Base Material
(a) Recycled concrete may be used as base fill material.
8) Architectural Elements:
(a) Ceiling Tile
(b) Flooring
(c) Insulation
(d) Drywall
Rev. 0 5.6 - 150
(1) May be ground and used as mulch.

9) Foundation Elements:
(a) Backfill
(b) Foundation Structural Fill
(c) Poured Concrete Foundations
10) Refer to applicable Sections of the GEM for more information on the
aforementioned building applications.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.A for all applicable Codes and guidelines related to the
use of recycled materials.
TABLE 5.6.5.D STANDARD LANDSCAPE AND PLANTING NOTES
The Following Notes Are To Be Included On All Submitted Landscape Plans When
Applicable To The Project.
The EPC Contractor, shall visit site, inspect existing conditions, and review proposed
plantings and related work. The EPC Contractor shall verify all utility locations on
1.
property with the general EPC Contractor and by calling utility company prior to staking
plant locations.
In case of discrepancy between plan and plant list, plan shall govern quantities, contact
2.
the RCJ with any concerns.
EPC Contractor to coordinate the phases of construction and planting installations with
3.
other EPC Contractors working on site.
Where existing trees and/or significant shrub massings are found on site, whether
shown on the drawing or not, they shall be protected and saved unless noted to be
4.
removed and/or are in an area to be graded. Any questions regarding whether plant
material shall remain or not shall be brought to the attention of RCJ prior to removal.
All existing trees to remain to be fertilized and pruned to remove dead wood and
5.
damaged or rubbing branches.
No plant material substitutions will be accepted unless approval is requested of the RCJ
6.
by the EPC Contractor prior to installation.
All plant material shall comply with the latest edition of the American Standard for
7.
Nursery stock, American Association of Nurserymen.
8. The EPC Contractor is responsible for on-going maintenance of all newly installed

Rev. 0 5.6 - 151
materials unit time of RCJ acceptance. Any acts of vandalism or damage which may
occur prior to owner acceptance shall be the responsibility of the EPC Contractor.
Warranty for landscape materials shall begin on the date of acceptance by the RCJ after
the completion of planting of all landscape materials. No partial acceptance will be
considered. The EPC Contractor shall provide a written request for the owner's
9. acceptance inspection. Remove and replace dead plant material (25% + dead)
immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. A limit of one
replacement of each tree and shrub will be required, except for losses caused by the
EPC Contractor's errors.
The EPC Contractor will supply finished grade and excavate as necessary to supply 100
mm topsoil depth in all planting beds and 100 mm topsoil depth in all lawn areas.
10.
Backfill and crown parking lot islands 150 mm above adjacent curbs with topsoil.
Backfill directly behind all curbs and along sidewalks and compact
Acceptance of grading and sod shall be by RCJ. The EPC Contractor shall assume
maintenance responsibility until final acceptance has been received. Maintenance shall
11. include watering, weeding, replacement of wash-outs and other operations necessary to
keep sod in a thriving condition. Upon final acceptance by the RCJ, the owner will
assume all maintenance responsibilities.
The EPC Contractor shall guarantee new plant material through one calendar year from
12. the date of the RCJ’s acceptance with all replacements to be provided at no additional
cost to the RCJ.
Plant material locations shown are diagrammatic and may be subject to change in the
13.
field as required.
14. Repair all damage to property from planting operations at no cost to the RCJ.
RCJ shall inspect landscape Installation and have the right to reject and withhold
15. payment on any plant material(s) of damaged or poor quality or not meeting
specifications.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for soil, erosion, and dust control measures
prior to and during construction. The EPC Contractor shall prevent erosion of soil and
16.
entry of soil-bearing water and airborne dust onto adjacent properties and into the public
storm water facilities.
No planting to be installed until grading and construction has been completed in the
17.
immediate area.
If the EPC Contractor perceives any deficiencies in the plant selections, soil conditions,
18. or any other site condition which might negatively affect plant material establishment,
survival, or guarantee, they shall bring these deficiencies to the attention of the RCJ

Rev. 0 5.6 - 152
prior to installation.
Prior to any land clearing or construction, tree protection fencing is to be installed by the
EPC Contractor. This fencing shall be installed at the drip line of all trees and shrubs (to
19. be protected) according to the tree protection detail and must be maintained for the
duration of the project. No cutting, filling or trespassing shall occur inside the fenced
areas without approval.
All plants to be installed as per planting details. Plant materials are to be planted in the
same relationship to grade as was grown in nursery conditions. If wet, clay soils or poor
20.
draining soils are evident, plant higher. Remove all twine, wire and burlap from top 1/3
of root ball and from tree trunks.
One shrub per type and size in each planting bed and every tree shall be clearly
21. identified (Latin nomenclature) with a plastic tag which shall not be removed prior to
Owner acceptance.
22. Seed and/or sod all areas disturbed due to grading and construction activities.
All tree pits must be tested for proper drainage prior to planting trees. A drainage
23.
system must be installed if planting pit does not drain sufficiently.
All landscape areas shall have proper drainage that prevents excess water from
24.
standing around trees and shrubs.
TABLE 5.6.5.E APPROVED PLANTS FOR RCJ
BOTANICAL ARABIC HEIGHT * CALIPER *

ABBREVIATION COMMON NAME REMARKS
NAME NAME (mm) (mm)
APPROVED TREES FOR RCJ
AI AZADIRACHITA INDICA INDIAN LILAC 1.8 m 4 cm Strong Leader
MOTHERS TUNG
AL ALBIZIA LEBBECK LABAKH 1.8 m 4 cm Strong Leader
(ALBIZIA)
PURPLE ORCHID Symmetrical
BP BAUHINIA PURPUREA 1.8 m 4 cm
TREE Shape
CASUARINA Symmetrical
CE SHE OAK KAZWARINAH 1.8 m 3 cm
EQUISETIFOLIA Shape
INDIAN
CF CASSIA FISTULA 1.8 m 3 cm Bushy
LABURNUM
CI CANTHIUM INERME TURKEY BERRY
BUTTON Symmetrical
CL CONOCARPUS ERECTUS KONOKARBUS 1.8 m 3 cm
MONGROVE Shape
CLE CITRUS X LEMON LEMON LYMONE
CP CARICA PAPAYA PAPAYA 75 m -

Rev. 0 5.6 - 153

NAME NAME (mm) (mm)
CUPPRESSUS
CS ITALIAN CYPRESS SARRO 2m 2 cm
SEMPERVIRENS
DR DELONIX REGIA FLAME TREE BONSIYANAH 1.8 m 3 cm Strong Leader
FB FICUS BENJAMINA WEEPING FIG 1.5 m 3 cm
FG FICUS BENGHALENSIS BANYAN TIN BANGHALI
FN FICUS NITIDA FICUS 1.8 m 3 cm Strong Leader
FR FICUS RELIGIOSA BO TREE 1.8 m 4 cm Strong Leader
MI MANGIFERA INDICA MANGO MANGA 1.8 m 3 cm
MP MUSA X PARADISIACA BANANA 0.8 m 10 g Big Leaves
PARKINSONIA JERUSALEM
PA 1.8 m 3 cm Multi-trunk
ACULEATA THORN
PITHECELLOBIUM
PD MADRAS THORN LAWZ HINDI 1.5 m 3 cm
DULCE
PG PSIDIUM GUAJAVA GUAVA
PJ PROSOPIS JULIFLORA PROSOPIS 1.8 m 4 cm Multi-trunk
PLATICLADUS
PL AUREUS NANUS 1.0 m 2 cm
ORIENTALIS
PO PLUMERIA OBTUSA FRANGPANI 1.8 m 3 cm Multi-trunk
PELTOPHORUM RUSTY
PP 1.8 m 4 cm Strong Leader
INERME SHIELDBEARER
RAVENALA
RM MUSACENE
MADAGASCANENSIS
Symmetrical
TCA TERMINALIA CATAPPA INDIAN ALMOND 1.8 m 3 cm
Shape
TP THESPESIA POPULNEA HIBISCUS 1.8 m 3 cm Multi-trunk
CROWN OF
ZJ ZIZYPHUS JUJUBA SIDDR, NABQ 1.8 m 3 cm Bushy
THORNS
APPROVED PALM TREES FOR RCJ

CR CYCAS REVOLUTA SAGO PALM 60 cm 15 g SHADE
PD PHOENIX DACTYLIFERA DATE PALM NAKHEEL 3m 50 cm
RR ROYSTONEA REGIA ROYAL PALM
WR WASHINGTONIA CALIFORNIA FAN WASHINGTONIA 2.0 m -

Rev. 0 5.6 - 154

NAME NAME (mm) (mm)
ROBUSTA PALM
INITIAL
CO COCOS NUCIFERA COCONUT PALM 1.8 m Box PROTECTION
NECESSARY
APPROVED SHRUBS FOR RCJ

SHRUBBY
AH ATRIPLEX HALIMUS QATAF 40 cm 1 cm
ORACHE
ACALYPHA ACALYPHA
AW 60-80 cm 5g Bushy
WILKESIANA (WHITE)
BOUGAINVILLEA
BG
GLABRA
BOUGAINVILLEA Pink and
BS BOUGAINVILLEA JUHANNAMIYAH 80 cm 5g
SPECTABILIS white
CA CASSIA ALATA
CD CANNA INDICA CANNA 50 cm 1g Big Leaves
Min. 3-
CG CARISSA GRANDIFLORA NATAL PLUM KARISAH 40-60 cm 1g
Branches
CLERODENDRUM
CLI
INERME
CESTRUM QUEEN OF THE Min. 3-
CN MALIKA TALEEL 60-80 cm 5g
NOCTURNUM NIGHT Branches
CAESALPINIA PRIDE OF Min. 5-
CPU 80-100cm 10 g
PULCHERRIMA BARBADOS Branches
CRA CRINUM ASIATICUM
CYPERUS UMBRELLA
CY
ALTERNITALIA PLANT
DR DURANTA REPENS
PIDGEON
DURANTA REPENS Min. 5-
DU BERRY,WHITE 80-100cm 5g
VARIEGATA Branches
LEAVE
DV DODONEA VISCOSA HOPSEED SHETH 80-100cm 5g Bushy
EF ENCELIA FARINOSA
HIBISCUS ROSA- HIBISCUS,
HS HIBISKES 40 cm 1 cm
SINENSIS SHOWFLORA

Rev. 0 5.6 - 155

NAME NAME (mm) (mm)
IXORA, SALMON
IC IXORA CHINENSIS 60-80 cm 5g Bushy
PINK FLOWERS
IS IXORA SUNKIST
JASMINUM SAMBAK
JSF
FULLY
MYRTUS COMMUNIS
MC
COMPACTA
PA PSEUDERANTHEMUM FOUNTAIN GRASS
PENNISETUM
PS DEWARF HALFAH
SETACEUM
PANDANUS CAPE
PU KADDI
UTILISBORY HONEYSUCKLE
Min. 5-
RE RUSSELIA EQUISTI MARJAN 80-100cm 10 g
Branches
YELLOW
TC TECOMARIA CAPENSIS
OLEANDER
Min. 3-
TH THEVETIA PERUVIANA CORAL PLANT 60-80 cm 5g
Branches
APPROVED SUCCULENTS FOR RCJ

AM AGAVE MARGINATA AGAVE VIVIPARA
AV ALOE VERA
ET EUPHORBIA TIRUCALLI PENCIL CACTUS
SH SANSEVERIA HAHNII BIRD’S NEST 20 cm 1g Shade
SANSEVIERIA MONTHER-IN-
ST 30 cm 1g Shade
TRIFASCIATA LAWS TONGUE
YA YUCCA ALOIFOLIA YUCCA 60-80 cm 10 g
YE YUCCA ELEPHANTIPES STICK YUCCA 60-80 cm
APPROVED GROUND COVER FOR RCJ

ALTERNANTHERA YELLOW
ARY ALMATIRAH,SHAHEE 10-15 cm 4” Yellow only
VERSICOLOR JOYWEED
ARR ALTERNANTHERA V. RED JOYWEED 10-15 cm 4” Red only
AS ASPARAGUS ASPARAGUS 20-30 cm 1g

Rev. 0 5.6 - 156

NAME NAME (mm) (mm)
SPRENGERI
CPR CARISSA PROSTRATA NATAL PLUM 30-40 cm 1g
GU GAZANIA UNIFLORA
HYMENOCALLIS
HN SPIDER LILY 20-30 cm 1g
NARCISSIFLORA
IP IPOMOEA PES-CAPRAE MORNING GLORY 10-15 cm 4”
LANTANA TRAILING
LM
MONTIVIDENSIS LANTANA
LS LOMPRANTHUS SPP ICE PLANT 10 cm 4”
LP LIMONIUM PEREZII STATICE 20-30 cm 1g
MOSES IN THE
RD RHEO DISCOLOR 30-40 cm 1g
CRADLE
RJ RUSSELIA JUNCEA RUSSELIA 30-40 cm 1g
SANTOLINA
SC
CHAMAECYPARISSUS
SP SETCREASEA PURPUREA PURPLE HEART 10-15 cm 4”
JO JASMINUM OFFICINALE
WT WEDELIA TRILOBATA YELLOW DOTS 10-15 cm 4”
APPROVED GRASSES FOR RCJ

EMERALD GREEN
CD CYNODON DACTYLON ZUMMURRD - - Turf/Sods
BERMUDA
ZG ZOYSIA MATRELLA JAPANESE GRASS

Rev. 0 5.6 - 157
TABLE 5.6.5.F PLANTS FOR SOIL/SAND STABILIZATION PROJECTS
Scientific Name Remarks
Acacia cyanophylla Small tree tolerates Shamal wind.
Acacia Arabica Drought and wind resistant.
Agropinum junceum Resists drifting sand.
Ammophila spp. Resists drifting sand.
Calligonum comosum Frost tolerant
Eleagnus augustifolia Excellent as wind break.
Eucalyptus spp. Excellent as wind break.
Haloxylon persicum Excellent as wind break
Parkinsonia aculeate Successful in Jubail.
Prosopis juliflora Successful in Jubail
P. specigera Successful in Jubail.
Retama raetam Has extensive root system
Salvadora oleoides Highly salt tolerant
Tamarix aphylla Excellent in Jubail climate.
Tamarix spp. Excellent in Jubail climate.
Zizyphus spina-christi Has deep root system.
*Specific requirements for planting for sand stabilization:

1. Quality of plants, regarding size of plant and roots, shall be suitable for deep planting.
2. Cuttings shall be long enough (over one meter) for deep planting.
3. Planting shall be deep enough to reach the moisture of deeper sand layers.
4. Time of planting shall be set after the sand receives adequate moisture.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 158
TABLE 5.6.5.G APPROXIMATE SUBGRADE SOIL TEMPERATURES
(August) SOIL DEPTH IN METERS
Hour -0.5 -1 -2
100 33 32 30
600 31 32 30
1200 36 32 30
1800 38 32 30
TABLE 5.6.5.H AVERAGE WATER CONSUMPTION PER SEASON
Amount
(mm/day)
August (daily average for entire month) 1.9
October 1 (equinox) 1
January (daily average for entire
0.4
month)
TABLE 5.6.5.I IRRIGATION WATER REQUIREMENTS – BY LANDSCAPE MATERIAL
LANDSCAPE Community Plan Based on FAO Proj. Recommended**

UNIT
MATERIAL Water req/ unit/day Water req/ unit/day Water req/Unit/day
2 2 2 2
Grass m 42.5 L/m /d 11 L/m /d 20 L/m /d
2 2 2 2
Shrubs m 13.4 L/m /d * 7 L/m /d 11 L/m /d
Succulent * * * *
2 2 2 2
Ground cover m 6.6 L/m /d * 4 L/m /d 6 L/m /d
60 L/T/d 90 L/T/d
Trees No. 77 L/T/d
(3 m dia.) 3 - 4 m dia.)
* The quantity for shrubs and succulent ground cover has been extrapolated from the per meter requirement for
trees
** Figures indicate water requirements for mature plants. New plantings will require only a percentage of the
above volumes with incremental increase as the plant grows to maturity.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 159
3
TABLE 5.6.5.J IRRIGATION WATER REQUIREMENTS – (m /ha/yr)
Extensive* Intensive**
Yearly Average (Community Plan) 7,100 60,000
Yearly Average (Revised) 40,000
Maximum (Community Plan) 9,100 75,000
Maximum (Revised) 50,000
Minimum (Community Plan) 4,200 35,000
Minimum (Revised) 25,000
* Extensive planting (not under drained) 250 trees per hectare planted in sand.
** Intensive planting (under drained) is approximately 20% grass, 50% succulents, 30% shrubs and 50 trees per
hectare.

Rev. 0 5.6 - 160
SECTION 5.7 UTILITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.7.0 UTILITIES ..................................................................................................................... 11

A. General ......................................................................................................................... 11
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 11
2. Location of Utilities ....................................................................................................... 11
3. Conflicting Utilities ........................................................................................................ 11
4. Utilities Shown on Civil Site Plans ................................................................................ 11
5. Roadways Shall Not Be Cut. ........................................................................................ 11
6. Instrumentation ............................................................................................................. 12
7. Masterplanning of Utilities ............................................................................................ 12
5.7.1 POTABLE WATER ....................................................................................................... 13
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 13
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 13
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 13
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 13
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 13
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 14
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 14
8. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 15
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 15
C. Potable Water Transmission System ........................................................................... 15
1. Potable Water Transmission System: .......................................................................... 15
D. Potable Water Distribution Systems ............................................................................. 15
1. The Potable Water Distribution System ....................................................................... 15
E. Water Quality ................................................................................................................ 18
1. Maintaining Water Quality ............................................................................................ 18
F. Projecting Water Demands........................................................................................... 18
1. Outdoor Recycled Water Demands .............................................................................. 18
2. Potable Water Demands .............................................................................................. 19
E. Fire Flow Requirements ............................................................................................... 21
1. Calculating Fire Flow Demands.................................................................................... 21
F. Hydraulic Modeling ....................................................................................................... 22
1. Purpose ........................................................................................................................ 22

Rev. 0 5.7 - i
2. Modeling Software ........................................................................................................ 22

3. Required Modeling Scenarios ...................................................................................... 22
4. Peak Use factors .......................................................................................................... 22
5. Model Setup.................................................................................................................. 23
6. Hydraulic Model Reporting ........................................................................................... 24
G. Water System Design Criteria ...................................................................................... 25
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 25
2. System Pressure .......................................................................................................... 26
3. Water Lines (Water Pipes) ........................................................................................... 27
4. Storage ......................................................................................................................... 27
H. Water Distribution System Piping and Valves .............................................................. 27
1. Water Distribution Pipelines ......................................................................................... 27
2. Isolation Valves ............................................................................................................ 28
3. Air Valves ...................................................................................................................... 29
4. Joint Restraint ............................................................................................................... 30
5. Bends and Fittings ........................................................................................................ 31
6. Fire Hydrants ................................................................................................................ 31
7. Flow Meters and Services ............................................................................................ 32
8. Cross Connection Control ............................................................................................ 33
9. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape .............................................................. 33
10. Blow-off Assemblies ..................................................................................................... 34
I. Water Distribution Pumping Equipment ....................................................................... 34
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 34
2. Booster Pumps ............................................................................................................. 34
3. Mechanical Requirements ............................................................................................ 35
4. Chlorination................................................................................................................... 36
5. Building ......................................................................................................................... 36
J. Water Storage Tanks .................................................................................................... 37
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 37
2. Sizing ............................................................................................................................ 38
3. Piping ............................................................................................................................ 38
4. Stored Water Age ......................................................................................................... 39
5. Access .......................................................................................................................... 39
6. Vents ............................................................................................................................. 39
7. Roof and Sidewall ......................................................................................................... 40

Rev. 0 5.7 - ii
8. Safety............................................................................................................................ 40
9. Painting and/or Cathodic Protection ............................................................................. 40
5.7.2 SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL SEWER SYSTEM ...................................................... 42
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 42
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 42
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 42
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 42
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 42
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 42
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 42
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 42
B. Sewer Collection System .............................................................................................. 42
C. Sanitary Sewer Design Flow Criteria ............................................................................ 43
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 43
2. Sewage Production ...................................................................................................... 43
D. Hydraulic Modeling ....................................................................................................... 44
1. Modeling Software ........................................................................................................ 44
2. Hydraulic Model Reporting ........................................................................................... 44
E. Gravity Sewer Collection System Piping ...................................................................... 44
1. Gravity Sewer Lines ..................................................................................................... 44
2. Manholes ...................................................................................................................... 46
3. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape .............................................................. 47
F. Sewage Lift Stations and Pumping Stations ................................................................ 47
1. Site Selection ................................................................................................................ 47
2. Wet Wells...................................................................................................................... 48
3. Pumps........................................................................................................................... 48
4. Electrical ....................................................................................................................... 48
5. Pump Station Piping, Valves and Flow Meters ............................................................ 49
6. Ventilation ..................................................................................................................... 49
7. Emergency Operation ................................................................................................... 50
8. Odor Control ................................................................................................................. 50
9. Force Mains .................................................................................................................. 50
G. Industrial Wastewater ................................................................................................... 51

Rev. 0 5.7 - iii
1. Design Flows ................................................................................................................ 51

2. RCER Requirements .................................................................................................... 51
3. Design Requirements ................................................................................................... 51
5.7.3 RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM (IRRIGATION)............................................................ 52
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 52
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 52
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 52
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 52
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 52
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 52
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 52
B. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission Systems ..................................................... 53
1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission System (Primary System): ......................... 53
2. The Recycled Water Transmission Systems includes the following components: ...... 53
3. Acceptable Pipe Materials ............................................................................................ 53
C. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Distribution Systems ......................................................... 53
1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Pipelines ........................................................................... 53
(1) 300 mm for lateral lines serving emitters, bubblers and sprinkler heads. .................... 54
2. Isolation Valves ............................................................................................................ 55
3. Storage Tanks .............................................................................................................. 56
4. Pumping Stations ......................................................................................................... 56
5.7.4 SEA WATER COOLING ............................................................................................... 57
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 57
1. Design Criteria Background.......................................................................................... 57
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 59
C. Design Criteria .............................................................................................................. 59
1. Temperatures ............................................................................................................... 59
2. Salts in Cooling Water .................................................................................................. 59
3. Heat Exchangers .......................................................................................................... 59
4. Seawater Cooling Towers (SCT) .................................................................................. 59
D. Water Quality and Treatment ....................................................................................... 60
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 60
2. Design and Approval Sequence ................................................................................... 60

Rev. 0 5.7 - iv
E. Hydraulic Modeling ....................................................................................................... 62

1. General ......................................................................................................................... 62
2. Hydraulic and Thermal Loads....................................................................................... 62
3. Modeling Report ........................................................................................................... 62
F. Distribution Piping and Valve Chambers ...................................................................... 63
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 63
2. Design and Approval .................................................................................................... 63
G. Pumping Stations ......................................................................................................... 65
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 65
2. Design and Approval Sequence ................................................................................... 65
5.7.5 FUEL GAS .................................................................................................................... 69
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 69
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 69
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 69
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 70
5. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 71
6. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 71
8. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 73
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 73
C. Natural Gas Distribution: .............................................................................................. 73
2. Underground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................... 73
3. Aboveground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................... 76
D. Liquid Fuel Distribution: ................................................................................................ 79
2. Underground Liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................ 80
3. Aboveground liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................. 83
E. Storage Tanks: ............................................................................................................. 86
2. Underground Gas Storage Tanks ................................................................................ 86
3. Aboveground Gas Storage Tanks ................................................................................ 87
4. Underground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks ..................................................................... 87
5. Aboveground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks ..................................................................... 88

Rev. 0 5.7 - v
6. Tank Appurtenances .................................................................................................... 88

7. Under Tank Leak Detection and Sub-Grade Protection. .............................................. 89
8. Painting and Coating. ................................................................................................... 89
9. Insulation. ..................................................................................................................... 89
10. Lighting. ........................................................................................................................ 89
11. Grounding. .................................................................................................................... 89
12. Cathodic Protection. ..................................................................................................... 89
13. Foundations. ................................................................................................................. 89
F. Pumps:.......................................................................................................................... 89
1. Transfer Pumps ............................................................................................................ 89
2. Submersible Fuel Pumps ............................................................................................. 89
5.7.6 ELECTRICAL................................................................................................................ 90
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 90
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 90
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 90
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 90
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 90
6. Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................. 90
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 90
8. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 90
10. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 90
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 91
1. References ................................................................................................................... 91
C. Primary Electrical Distribution....................................................................................... 91
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 91
2. Community Area Primary Distribution System ............................................................. 91
3. Industrial Area Primary Distribution System ................................................................. 91
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface ............................................................. 91
D. Secondary Electrical Utility ........................................................................................... 92
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 92
2. Community Area Secondary Distribution System ........................................................ 92
3. Industrial Area Secondary Distribution System ............................................................ 94
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface ............................................................. 95

Rev. 0 5.7 - vi
E. Design Criteria .............................................................................................................. 95

1. General ......................................................................................................................... 95
F. Manholes and Handholes ............................................................................................. 96
1. Application .................................................................................................................... 96
2. Construction.................................................................................................................. 96
G. Ductbanks and Sleeves ................................................................................................ 96
1. Application .................................................................................................................... 96
2. Construction and Installation ........................................................................................ 96
3. Sleeves for Road Crossing via Horizontal Directional Drilling ...................................... 97
H. Direct Buried Installations ............................................................................................. 97
1. Application .................................................................................................................... 97
2. Routing and Clearances ............................................................................................... 97
3. Trenching ...................................................................................................................... 97
4. Cable Markers .............................................................................................................. 98
5. Cable Spacing .............................................................................................................. 98
6. Trenching ...................................................................................................................... 98
5.7.7 COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................................... 99
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 99
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 99
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 99
3. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 100
4. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 100
5. Standards .................................................................................................................... 100
7. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 100
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 100
1. References .................................................................................................................. 100
C. Communications Utility ................................................................................................ 100
1. Fiber Optic Cables ....................................................................................................... 100
D. Design Criteria ............................................................................................................. 102
1. Link Loss Budget Requirements.................................................................................. 102
E. Manholes and Handholes ............................................................................................ 103
1. Racking ........................................................................................................................ 103
5.7.8 HYDRONIC COOLING ................................................................................................ 104
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 104
1. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 104

Rev. 0 5.7 - vii
2. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 104

3. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 104
4. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 104
5. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 104
6. Codes and Standards .................................................................................................. 105
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 105
1. Refer to GPCS. ............................................................................................................ 105
C. Materials ...................................................................................................................... 105
1. Materials Selection ...................................................................................................... 105
2. Equipment Selection .................................................................................................... 105
3. Materials and Equipment Engineering ........................................................................ 106
D. System Design............................................................................................................. 107
1. Redundancy................................................................................................................. 107
2. Space Requirements ................................................................................................... 108
E. Piping ........................................................................................................................... 111
1. Water Velocities in Piping ............................................................................................ 111
2. Piping Design............................................................................................................... 111
F. Equipment and Components ....................................................................................... 113
1. Valves and Accessories .............................................................................................. 113
2. Pumps.......................................................................................................................... 114
3. Mechanical Equipment Rooms .................................................................................... 114
4. Steam Systems ........................................................................................................... 115
5. High Temperature Water Systems .............................................................................. 116
6. Vibration Control .......................................................................................................... 117
5.7.9 PIPELINE CORRIDORS ............................................................................................. 120
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 120
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 120
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 120
3. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 120
4. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 122
5. Codes and Standards .................................................................................................. 123
6. RCJ Guideline Specifications ...................................................................................... 127
7. Related RCJ Documents: ............................................................................................ 127
B. Regulatory Requirements ............................................................................................ 127
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 127

Rev. 0 5.7 - viii
2. General Stakeholders Responsibilities ........................................................................ 128

C. Design Requirements .................................................................................................. 130
1. Design & Operating Philosophy................................................................................... 130
2. Pipeline Design Criteria ............................................................................................... 130
3. Design of Valves .......................................................................................................... 132
D. Design and Testing Factors......................................................................................... 133
1. Design and Testing Criteria ......................................................................................... 133
E. Structural Supports ...................................................................................................... 133
1. Structural Supports ...................................................................................................... 133
2. Symbols and Notations ................................................................................................ 134
3. Load Combinations for Factored Loads Using Strength Design ................................. 134
4. Load Combinations for Nominal Loads Using Allowable Stress Design ..................... 134
5. Exceptions to Factored and Nominal Load Combinations .......................................... 135
6. Stability against Overturning, Uplift, Sliding, and Buoyancy ....................................... 135
F. Construction and Construction Inspection ................................................................... 137
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 137
2. Material Inspection ...................................................................................................... 138
3. Qualification of Inspectors ........................................................................................... 138
4. Type and Extent of Examination Required .................................................................. 138
5. Welding: General ......................................................................................................... 138
6. Construction and As-built records ............................................................................... 141
7. Excavation Safety – Minimum Safety Requirements .................................................. 142
G. Pressure Testing of Pipelines, Components and Vessels .......................................... 143
1. Pressure Testing of Pipelines. ..................................................................................... 143
H. Pipeline Labeling ......................................................................................................... 149
1. Pipeline Labeling. ........................................................................................................ 149
2. Component B -Industry Identification Numbers........................................................... 152
3. Component C – Line Serial Number ........................................................................... 153
B. Operations, Inspection & Maintenance ....................................................................... 155
1. Industries Requirements .............................................................................................. 155
C. Criteria for Cathodic Protection and Determination of Measurements ........................ 156
1. Criteria for Performance of Cathodic Protection.......................................................... 156
D. Integrity Management .................................................................................................. 156
1. Different Factors Contributing to Pipeline Failures ...................................................... 156
2. Integrity Management Plan (IMP) ................................................................................ 156

Rev. 0 5.7 - ix
3. The Relative Risk of a Pipeline.................................................................................... 157

Rev. 0 5.7 - x
SUBSECTION 5.7.0 UTILITIES
5.7.0 UTILITIES
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This subsection provides the design guidelines for the design of all utilities within the
Jubail Industrial City and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City. These guidelines apply to the
following utilities:
1) Potable Water
2) Sanitary and Industrial Sewer Systems
3) Recycled Water ( Irrigation )
4) Sea Water Cooling
5) Fuel Gas
6) Electrical
7) Communications
8) Hydronic Cooling
2. Location of Utilities
a. Utilities within the Jubail Industrial City are located within utilities corridor rights of
way exclusive of the roadway rights of way. Utilities should not be located under the
asphalt travel lanes. See Table 5.6.3.D
b. Specific utilities can be located outside of travel lanes, after RCJ approval, within the
following areas:
1) Parking (under pavement)
2) Shoulder (under pavement)
3) Sidewalk/park strip (under block pavers)
c. Locating utilities in these areas allow for installation, maintenance, repair and
replacement without disrupting vehicle travel.
3. Conflicting Utilities
a. Where the location of utilities conflict the following requirements shall be followed:
1) Horizontal separation shall be a minimum of 1.0 meters measured from edge
of utility to edge of utility.
2) Vertical separation shall be a minimum of 0.5 meters measured from edge of
utility to edge of utility.
3) When potable water pipelines are crossed by other utilities the potable water
pipeline shall be on the top.
4. Utilities Shown on Civil Site Plans
a. All utilities in this section 5.7 are required to be shown on civil site plans.
5. Roadways Shall Not Be Cut.
a. Roadways shall not be cut for crossing of existing roadways with new utilities

Rev. 0 5.7 - 11
SUBSECTION 5.7.0 UTILITIES
b. Utilities shall not be installed in existing roadways using open cut methods.
c. Directional drilling or other trenchless construction methods may be utilized to cross
existing roadways.
d. The following installation shall be presented to the RCJ for review and approval:
1) Trenchless construction methods
2) Open cut exceptions
3) Utilities installation outside of the Utilities Corridor, within Roadway Right-of-
way
6. Instrumentation
a. There are several systems within this section which use automated instrumentation
and control systems, including potable water, recycled water, sewer,
telecommunication, electrical, etc. The instrumentation and control for these utilities
are addressed in another section of the GEM
b. Refer to Section 5.5.3 for guidance on the instrumentation and control design
requirements.
7. Masterplanning of Utilities
a. As the developed area within the Royal Commission expands, the infrastructures
and utilities requires uograding to the requirements of the newly developed areas.
The industrial area requies potable water, sanitary wastewater collection, industrial
wastewater collection,drainage, seawater cooling, electrical and telecommunication
distribution network where as the the residential area requires potable water,
sanitary wastewater collection, drainage, irrigation water and power and
telecommunication distribution network.
b. For the industrial area, therequirements would be determined by the type of
industries determined by the industrial masterplan. Thre residential area’s
requirements will be dependent upon population growth and landuse for the area
involved. The population projection information is available from Strategic Planning
Investment Department.
c. The sources of utilities will have to be evaluated for availability. The infrastructure to
transmit and distribute the utilities will be planned and located in the Masterplan.
The Right-of-way will be set aside.
d. However, there are considerations in planning for the utilities. In order to avoid
potential conflicts, it is important to have a basemap of the existing utilities in the
Masterplan area. It is important to provide redundancies in the electrical power and
potable water network. There may be a need to demolish existing utilities that are
no longer in use or inadequately sized and replaced with the required utilities. In
order to have a effective Masterplan, good as-builts are necessary. As builts are
available from the Document Control Section.
e. The proposed utilities are then input into the overall Jubail Industrial Citywide
Models and analyze the impact of these utilities to the overall scheme. These
analyses can then be used by the Royal Commission to plan the infrastructures
required to support the new development.
f. Masterplans for utilities are very essential to ensure the growth of Jubail Industrial
City is supported by the required infrastructures and utilities.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 12
SUBSECTION 5.7.1 POTABLE WATER
5.7.1 POTABLE WATER
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides the design guide for the design of potable water utilities. The
potable water utilities include the transmission and distribution network piping
systems.
b. The RCJ is responsible for design and construction of new potable water utility
systems.
c. Marafiq is responsible for operation, maintenance, and replacement of the potable
water utility system.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to potable water facilities downstream of water treatment
plants, including but not limited to storage tanks, pump stations, pipelines, valves,
and flow meters.
b. This Section applies to potable water utilities outside of buildings and structures.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.0.
1) ADD : Average Day Demand
3) CAD : Computer Aided Drafting
4) DIP: Ductile Iron Pipe
5) FM: Factory Mutual (see UL)
6) GIS: Geographic Information Systems
8) IFC: International Fire Code
10) IPC: International Plumbing Code
12) ISO: International Organization for Standardization
13) kVA: Kilovolt Amps
14) kW: Kilowatt
15) L: Liters
16) LPS: Liters Per Second

Rev. 0 5.7 - 13
17) Lpcd: Liters per Capita per Day

2
18) L/m : Liters per Square Meter
19) m: Meter
20) mm: Millimeter
21) m/s: Meters per Second
22) O & M: Operation and Maintenance
24) NSF: NSF International
25) PDD : Peak Day Demand
26) PHD: Peak Hour Demand
28) RCJ: Royal Commission
30) UL: Underwriters Laboratory (also known as FM – Factory Mutual)
31) USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
32) UV: Ultraviolet
a. Follow the design requirements in the following publications:
1) AWWA Design Manuals - American Water Works Association Design
Manuals
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.0.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Codes.
c. US EPA National Drinking Water Regulations
1) http://water.epa.gov/drink/contaminants/
2) EPA – Environmental Protection Agency
7. Standards
1) AWWA Standards - American Water Works Association Standards
(a) http://www.awwa.org/
2) Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board (GLUMRB) - 10 States Standards
(a) http://10statesstandards.com/
(b) NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and
Their Appurtances

Rev. 0 5.7 - 14
8. Approvals
a. The RCJ shall review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications, per
reference Section 1.1.0.
B. Commissioning
Refer to Section 4.5.9 for commissioning requirements.
C. Potable Water Transmission System
1. Potable Water Transmission System:
a. The potable water transmission system conveys water from the source of supply to
the Distribution System.
1) The Transmission System includes the following components:
(a) Suction water storage tanks (at water treatment plants)
(b) Chlorination injection facilities
(c) Pumping stations with multiple large pumps with constant speed drives
(d) Transmission pipelines
(e) Discharge (District) water storage tanks (provides suction for the
distribution booster pump stations)
2) Operational Objective
(a) The operational objective of the potable water transmission system is to
convey water from the water sources to the Distribution System.
3) Service Connections
(a) There are no direct service connections to the Transmission System.
4) Flow Rate
(a) Typical operation of transmission system pumping stations is to operate
in constant speed conditions.
(b) The flow rate shall vary to meet demand by turning pumps on and off.
5) Pressure Range
(a) Typical operating pressure ranges from 1.0 bar to 2.0 bars at the pump
station point of discharge.
6) A typical potable water transmission system is shown in Figure 5.7.1.A.
D. Potable Water Distribution Systems
1. The Potable Water Distribution System
a. The Potable Water Distribution System conveys water from district water storage
tanks to the water users within the respective district, such as residences, schools,
restaurants, commercial businesses and industrial areas.
1) The Distribution Systems includes the following components:
(a) Chlorine injection facilities
(b) Large, multiple pumps, variable speed pumping station(s)
(c) Distribution pipelines

Rev. 0 5.7 - 15
(d) Water storage tanks

2) Service Connections
(a) The Distribution System has service connections to its pipelines.
3) Operational Objective
(a) The operational objective of the potable water distribution system is to
deliver water to the end users such as homes, schools, commercial
businesses and industrial areas.
4) Flow Rate
(a) Typical operation of distribution system pumping stations is to operate
with variable speed pumps to meet potable demands at a constant
discharge pressure.
(b) The flow rate shall vary to meet variable demand by varying pump
speeds of multiple pumps and turning pumps on and off as demand
dictates to maintain a relatively constant discharge pressure.
5) Pressure Range
The distribution system shall be designed to provide minimum pressures
during various scenarios. Refer to Design Criteria below. A typical potable
water distribution system is shown in Figure 5.7.1.A.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 16
FIGURE 5.7.1.A POTABLE WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
Arabian Gulf

Rev. 0 5.7 - 17
E. Water Quality
1. Maintaining Water Quality
a. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall provide for the following design issues:
1) Storage Tank Pre-chlorination
(a) Depending on the size of the pressure zone infrastructure and the initial
water demand when water deliveries begin, a pre-chlorination system
may be required in front of water storage tanks. These systems will likely
to be temporary in nature and abandoned after adequate water use has
developed within the pressure zone.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall review the growth projections of
the water pressure zone with the RCJ and Marafiq.
(c) The RCJ, in consultation with Marafiq, will determine if pre-chlorination is
required.
2) Reduced Water Tank Storage Level During Early Years
(d) (a) During the early stages of development of new distribution pressure
zones RCJ shall work with Marafiq to prevent the loss of chlorine
residual by decreasing the level of water stored in water storage tanks.
(e) (b) Storing less water shall decrease the detention time in the water
storage tanks resulting in a decreased loss of chlorine residual.
(f) The minimum water storage volume shall be fire storage plus the two
days of average day demand (ADD) storage.
6) 3) Storage Tank Post-chlorination:
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractors are required to design a post-
chlorination dose downstream of transmission discharge storage tanks,
IE for Distribution System Booster Pump Stations.
(b) The dosage will be designed to insure an adequate chlorine residual
level is in the distribution system to protect against any possible
subsequent contamination during distribution.
(1) Dosages will depend on the chlorine concentration leaving the
water storage tank upstream of the Distribution Booster Station.
(2) The chlorine residual leaving the Distribution Booster Stations shall
be 0.5 – 0.8 mg/L (ppm).
F. Projecting Water Demands
1. Outdoor Recycled Water Demands
a. Outdoor water use (irrigation of plants) in public spaces outside of private residential
or commercial sites of is typical accomplished with irrigation water (recycled water –
refer to 5.7.3).
(1)This applies to open spaces maintained by the RCJ.
b. Kindergartens shall use potable water for outdoor irrigation of plants. Recycled water
is not allowed.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 18
(1) Reference GEM Subsection 5.6.5 Landscaping – Irrigation Systems.

c. Refer to Subsection 5.7.3 Irrigation for design guidelines of the irrigation utility
systems.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.6.5.J for design guidelines for Plant Irrigation.
e. The following discusses the calculation of irrigation demands for areas required to
be served by the potable system:
7) Evaluate the irrigated area with the consumption rate of the landscaping
based on the irrigation application type such as spray, drip, and flood.
(a) For spray irrigation of lawn areas, the average weekly demand is in the
range of 50 mm per week.
(b) Drip irrigation rates shall be evaluated on a case by case basis that
considers the plant species and irrigation methods.
(1) Recycled water is allowed for drip-irrigation system in areas of
public use.
(2) With the RCJ’s approval, spray irrigation may be allowed in non-
public areas.
2. Potable Water Demands
a. Projecting Potable Water Demands
1) In order to effectively size key infrastructure associated with transmission and
distribution water systems, water demands shall be calculated for all new
projects. This includes areas where land use may have changed from a
previously approved Urban Development Plan.
2) Water demands shall be projected by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and
submitted to the RCJ for review and approval before sizing any water or
sewer infrastructure.
b. Residential Water Demands, measured in Lpcd.
1) The following offers typical unit consumptions based on typical land uses.
Project specific figures shall be determined for each project based on
available data and engineering judgment.
(a) Residential
(1) Average Day Demand = 545 Lpcd
(2) The per capita amount may be multiplied by the typical number of
residents per unit type to determine unit flow rates for a wide
variety of residential development types.
(b) Apartments
(1) Average Day Demand = 400 Lpcd
(c) For information only the basis for the average day residential demand is
outlined below:
(1) Indoor Uses: 400 Lpcd
(2) Outdoor Uses: 145 Lpcd
(3) Total: 545 Lpcd

Rev. 0 5.7 - 19
c. Commercial.
1) The specific water use in the different categories of institutional, recreational
and commercial areas may be calculated using the values in Table 5.7.1-A.
TABLE 5.7.1 - A SPECIFIC DAILY WATER USE IN DIFFERENT
CATEGORIES
Average Day Demand

Land Use
(in Liters per unit)
Mosque 10 L/worshipper
2
Small Business 7 L/m
2
Shopping Center 37 L/m
Restaurant 32 L/patron + 57 L/employee
Coffee House 22 L/patron + 57 L/employee
Hotel 200L/bed
Kindergarten 76 L/pupil + 50 L/employee
Elementary School 76 L/pupil + 50L/employee
Intermediate School 95 L/pupil + 50 L/employee
Secondary School 95 L/pupil + 50 L/employee
Offices 9 L/ per employee
Hospital 1230 L/bed + 57 L/employee
Clinic 378 L/patient + 57 L/employee
Sports Stadium 20 L/seat
2) For early stages of design, it may be difficult to complete a detailed

calculation using the values listed above to determine the water consumption
for commercial land uses. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate
demand assumptions with the RCJ.
d. Light and Heavy Industries
1) It is not feasible to set-up guidelines for the water consumption in areas with
light and heavy industries (being industries with an extensive consumption for
the industrial production). The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall interview the
potential industrial user then make an assessment of the expected
consumption.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 20
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall look at historic uses of similar industries.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide potable water, and treated
industrial wastewater consumption projections for new light and heavy
industries for RCJ’s review and approval.
e. Physical Losses (Leakage)
1) The physical losses from pipes in the water supply system shall depend on
the age of the pipes, pipe material and joints, pressure in the system, and
construction conditions.
2) For new pipelines constructed according the materials specified in this GEM
no water loss factor shall be added.
3) For older pipelines a twenty percent (20%) increase factor for the total daily
water consumption shall be added to account for unknown water losses.
(a) Some studies of water distribution system have shown losses less than
10%. Therefore, the A/E may make an individual assessment of the
expected unaccounted water losses to substantiate the use of less than
10% for unknown losses. The minimum factor allowed by the RCJ for
unaccounted water loss is five percent (5%).
E. Fire Flow Requirements
1. Calculating Fire Flow Demands
a. The water system shall be capable of meeting the Fire Flow Demand when added to
the Peak Day Demand of the system. Fire Flow includes the required hydrant flow
as well as fire sprinkler flow.
1) Hydrant Flow – quantity and duration shall be calculated in accordance with
the International Fire Code (IFC) in conjunction with the Saudi Building Code
801 Fire Protection Requirements.
(a) Hydrant flow shall vary between residential and nonresidential areas.
(1) It shall be noted that the IFC does allow a reduction in hydrant flow
based on buildings equipped with fire sprinklers.
(2) A corresponding reduction of duration is not allowed.
(b) Coordination with other disciplines shall be required to determine the fire
flow based on the buildings planned and the type of construction.
(c) The minimum required hydrant flow is 2000 L/min at required pressures
per 5.7.1.H.
2) Fire Sprinkler Flow – The fire sprinkler flow shall be calculated by the A/E
and/or EPC’s mechanical engineer; refer to Subsection 5.4.1.D.1.
(a) The mechanical engineer shall determine appropriate sprinkler flows for
inclusion in the water system evaluation.
3) In industrial areas, each industry shall in principle be responsible for making
their own arrangements for firefighting within their boundaries, i.e. the RCJ
shall not provide firefighting services in the Industrial Areas.
(a) Each industrial facility that requires fire protection system shall provide
its own dedicated fire water storage tank and fire water pump system. As
such the primary fire water supply is via dedicated fire water storage and

Rev. 0 5.7 - 21
pumping within the industry. Fire water via the external hydrant system is
for use by RC/Civil Defense for supplementary firefighting.
(b) The hydraulic calculations of the network system shall evaluate to what
extent a major prolonged fire may be fought with water outside the
industry's boundary.
F. Hydraulic Modeling
1. Purpose
a. Hydraulic modeling shall be used as a design tool to evaluate new development as it
relates to the design of water system improvements.
1) Effects on existing systems shall be evaluated.
2) Hydraulic modeling shall illustrate that proposed improvements meet required
pressure and flow requirements of this Section.
3) See AWWA M 32 for full procedures associated with Computer Modeling of
Water Distribution Systems.
b. Urban Development Plans
1) Hydraulic modeling shall be completed based on the approved Urban
Development Plan and shall be included in the "Utility Load Requirement."
2. Modeling Software
a. Modeling may be completed in standalone, CAD integrated, or GIS integrated
modeling platforms. Acceptable modeling software include:
1) WaterCAD (Bentley)
2) Other software platforms may be allowed with prior approval from the RCJ.
3. Required Modeling Scenarios
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.F for required pressures and maximum water line
velocities. Model Scenarios shall be prepared for the following scenarios:
1) Average Day Demand
2) Peak Day Demand
3) Peak Hourly Demand
4) Peak Day + Fire Flow
4. Peak Use factors
a. To complete the design of the water system, water lines, pump stations, storage and
other key facilities shall be sized based on appropriate peak demand scenarios and
required minimum and maximum pressures. Peak use factors shall be multiplied by
the average daily demand (ADD) to determine the peak flow. The minimum allowed
peaking factors are as follows:
1) Peak Day –1.8 times ADD
2) Peak Hour –2.4 times ADD
(a) Consideration shall be given to the period of use when applying peaking
factors. For example, peaking factors shall be increased based on the

Rev. 0 5.7 - 22
actual period of use in a given day. For example, some commercial and
industrial uses shall likely not use water at night.
5. Model Setup
a. Hydraulic distribution models shall consist of pipes, nodes (including fire hydrants),
tanks, and pump stations. The following discusses the required inputs and provides
guidance for the requirements and preferences of the RCJ.
b. Pipes
1) Diameter
(a) Diameter shall be input for every pipe, refer to Subsection 5.7.1.J for
allowable sizes.
(1) Input of nominal diameters is allowable for most water line
materials including PVC.
(2) True inside diameters shall be used for evaluation of HDPE PE
100 water lines.
2) Friction Coefficient
(a) Hydraulic models shall be configured to evaluate the water system using
the Hazen-Williams formula. Use the following CH-W for model inputs:
(1) PVC, CH-W = 140
(2) HDPE, CH-W = 150
3) Minor Losses
(a) Minor losses for fittings and valves may be included in the model by
adding local minor losses to each pipe. Alternatively, a reduction of the
CH-W used in the model may provide an allowance for minor losses.
The typical reduction value is 10% of the above listed industry accepted
coefficient.
(b) If applicable, minor losses for master flow meters and backflow
protection shall be considered with the modeling scenarios.
4) Length
(a) Models shall be created to scale to ensure accurate length of water lines.
c. Nodes
1) Elevation shall be assigned to nodes at ground elevation within 0.5 m.
2) Demands shall be spatially allocated based on demand calculations for each
given land use and density.
(a) Demands shall be entered for each of the above mentioned modeling
scenarios listed above.
3) Required Fire Flow shall also be included for hydrants within the distribution
system.
d. Tanks
1) Volume: Though volume is not required for Steady State Simulations, it is
good practice to include accurate tank information for diameter, wall height,

Rev. 0 5.7 - 23
floor elevation, etc. in the event that an extended period simulation is required
in the future. It also provides a means to document required tank volumes.
2) Water Surface Elevation, the following are the required tank stage settings for
each required model scenario:
(a) Average Day Demand – Tank Full
(b) Peak Day Demand – Top of Fire Storage Elevation
(c) Peak Hour Demand – Top of Fire Storage Elevation
(d) Peak Day + Fire Flow – Bottom of Tank
e. Pump Stations
1) Floor Elevation within 0.5 m
2) Pump Curves – if using the distribution model to confirm pump selection,
actual pump curves shall be entered into the model.
6. Hydraulic Model Reporting
a. The following Table of Contents shall be used when submitting a hydraulic Modeling
Report to the RCJ:
1) Introduction – Include a project description, existing system discussion, and
proposed additions of the project.
(a) Include a system map to illustrate proposed expansion area and land
uses.
2) Water Demand Criteria & Summary
(a) Summarize demand calculations for average day demand, including
system loss, by land use for both indoor demands and outdoor demands
on the potable system; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.F. Include detailed
calculations in an Appendix.
(1) Confirm applicability of peaking factors based on specific project
requirements.
(b) Fire Flow Demands – Summarize needed fire flow for each land use
area. Document hydrant flow and sprinkler flow requirements.
3) Methodology and Analysis – Document the modeling software used, the type
of model (steady state or extended period), and field calibration, if any.
4) Results and Conclusions
(a) Document that results for scenarios meet the requirements of this
manual for pressure and velocity for each scenario.
(1) Document node or nodes with lowest pressure for each scenario
(2) Document pipe or pipes with highest velocity for each scenario
(3) Include a system map illustrating final pipe sizes based on the
model.
(i) Map shall include labels for all model elements such as
nodes, pipes, and pump stations.
(ii) Map shall be color coded based on pipe diameter.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 24
(b) Document available fire flow for each land use area while meeting
minimum pressure requirements.
G. Water System Design Criteria
1. General
a. Typical Soil and Ground Water Conditions
1) For projects along the coastal zone in Saudi Arabia, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall be aware that the coastal soils have unusual properties, and
a thorough study of those properties by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is
essential before any designs are undertaken. In general, the soil is highly
saline.
2) In conjunction with natural sulfides and sulfites, the saline conditions could
cause serious deterioration even in Type V Portland Cement Concrete.
3) In addition, weak and unstable soils may cause uneven support for pipes,
which are then subject to unequal settlements even under light loadings
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of the likelihood for high
groundwater. Buoyancy conditions shall be accounted for with the design to
prevent flotation of pipes, buried tanks, vaults, etc.
b. Concrete External Tanking
1) External tanking membranes for concrete foundations is a common practice
on the Arabian Gulf coast. The RCJ does not always require tanking; in some
cases suitable designs in quality concrete are considered adequate, Refer to
Section 5.2.
c. Pipes, Valves and Fittings
1) The saline conditions are very corrosive to all ferrous piping, valves and
fittings. Non-metallic materials are used for pipelines.
2) In addition to the aggressive soil conditions, the presence of saline ground
water seriously intensifies electrolytic action, particularly on long metal pipe
runs and even on reinforcement in concrete structures. Further, the presence
of several independent cathodically protected facilities in the near vicinity of
each other may create interference problems.
d. Design Service Life
1) Before the design processes are commenced and the design parameters and
the design conditions are established, it is necessary to estimate the design
service lives for the key design elements in the water supply system, as the
elements shall be designed for the conditions encountered during the
expected design service life time.
2) TABLE 5.7.1 - indicates the expected design service lives for different design
elements.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 25
TABLE 5.7.1 - B DESIGN SERVICE LIFE FOR KEY ELEMENTS IN THE WATER
SUPPLY SYSTEM
Design Element Design Service Life in Years
Transmission System Pipelines 50*
Distribution Pipelines 50
Buildings and main concrete structures 60
Mechanical pumping equipment 20
Electrical equipment and monitoring systems 10
*Although the lowest net present cost alternative is the 50 year design life, at the
discrepancy of the RCJ, the design life for transmission pipelines may be reduced to
25 years by the RCJ for the purpose of calculating capacity. This reduction shall
assume a second parallel pipeline shall be constructed after 25 years to increase
capacity.
2. System Pressure
a. Transmission System Pressures
1) Minimum Pressure – To prevent intrusion of the groundwater into the
transmission main, positive pressure (2.0 bars) shall be maintained within the
transmission main. This may be accomplished through effective design of the
distribution storage tanks; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.L.
b. Distribution System Pressures
1) Typical operating pressure ranges from 1.5 bars to 3.0 bars.
2) Minimum Pressure – System pressures shall be evaluated during design by
completing a hydraulic model for the project; refer to Subsection 5.7.H. The
following pressure criteria shall be applied to the modeling scenarios during
design:
(a) Average Day Demand (ADD) = The minimum system pressure shall be
3.0 bars
(b) Peak Day Demand (PDD) = the minimum system pressure shall be 2.5
bars
(c) Peak Hour Demand (PHD) = the minimum system pressure shall be 1.5
bars
(d) Peak Day Demand + Fire Flow Demand = the minimum system pressure
shall be 1.5 bars. The minimum residual pressure at the flowing hydrant
shall be 1.5 bars.
(e) 1.5 bars is the minimum required system pressure at any point within the
distribution system under fire flow and PDD conditions.
(f) The minimum required pressures of 1 bar at fixtures with flush valves
inside buildings pursuant to the National Plumbing Code. A/E’s and/or

Rev. 0 5.7 - 26
EPC contractor’s civil engineer shall coordinate the minimum connection

pressure with A/E’s building mechanical engineer during design.
3) Maximum Pressure
(a) The maximum pressure in the distribution system shall be 6.5 bars.
(1) Moderately higher pressures may be allowed with prior approval
from the RCJ.
(2) To maintain workable maximum pressures, it may be necessary to
divide the distribution service area into multiple districts.
3. Water Lines (Water Pipes)
a. Minimum pipe size (Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.J)
b. Materials (Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.J)
c. Water line maximum velocities
1) Normal Operations – Water line velocities shall be below 1.5 m/s for all
normal operating scenarios.
2) Peak Day + Fire Flow - Water line velocities shall be below 2.0 m/s for fire
flow scenarios.
3) For systems without elevated storage, consideration shall be given for slower
maximum velocities to reduce required pumping horsepower.
4. Storage
a. Two days of ADD + fire flow is required for ground level distribution storage.
H. Water Distribution System Piping and Valves
1. Water Distribution Pipelines
b. Pipe, joints, fittings, valves and fire hydrants shall conform to applicable sections of
ANSI/AWWA Standards, and all materials which may contact drinking water shall be
ANSI-certified as meeting the requirements of NSF Standard 61
c. In order to provide increased reliability of service and reduce head loss, dead ends
shall be minimized by making appropriate looped tie-ins whenever practical.
d. All dead ends shall have a fire hydrant.
1) Fire hydrants are used for flushing water pipelines.
e. The character of the soil and water table depth through which water mains are to be
laid shall be considered. The design engineer shall also consider the materials to be
used when corrosive soils or waters shall be encountered (coastal soils are highly
saline and corrosive, a thorough study of the conditions is essential before beginning
design).
1) All water mains shall be sized based on flow demands and minimum pressure
requirements; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.E.
2) The pressure rating for all components such as valves and fittings shall be
equal to or greater than the required pipeline pressure rating (see Subsection
5.7.1.E

Rev. 0 5.7 - 27
3) The minimum water main size to be installed shall be 200 mm in diameter.

The minimum water lateral size to a fire hydrant shall be 150 mm in diameter.
4) Longitudinal bending of PVC pipe is not allowed.
5) Longitudinal bending of HDPE pipe shall be limited to 80% of the
manufacturer's installation recommendations.
6) PVC pipe joint deflection shall be limited to 80% of the manufacturer's
installation recommendations.
7) Pipeline Location:
(a) Vertical: minimum burial depth is 1.2 m, measured from finished grade to
top of pipe. .
(b) Horizontal: 2.0 m beyond edge of pavement or back of curb, unless
otherwise approved.
(c) Pipelines shall be located at a distance of no less than 1.5 meter
horizontally from property line or fence. Refer to the Standard Details for
Roadway Cross Sections for standard utility locations.
8) Proximity to other utilities:
(a) The use of joint (combined) utility trenches is not permitted.
(b) Potable water lines shall be located at a distance no less than 3.0 m
horizontally (outside to outside) and 500 mm vertically above any non-
potable (reclaimed) water line, sewer line, or storm drain line.
(c) Potable water lines shall be located a distance of no less than 1.0 meter
horizontally from other potable water mains, gas mains, or other dry
utilities.
9) Transition of Disciplines
(a) Civil Disciplines begin at 1.5 meters from the edge of buildings and goes
away from the building.
(b) Mechanical disciplines begin at 1.5 meters from the edge of buildings
and goes into the building.
f. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
(a) Sizes 160 mm to 1400 mm:
2) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC)
(b) Sizes 350 mm to 900 mm:
3) Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipe (GRP)
2. Isolation Valves
1) Valve Locations: a sufficient number of isolation valves shall be provided on
water pipelines to minimize inconvenience, sanitary hazards, and degradation

Rev. 0 5.7 - 28
of fire protection during maintenance and repairs. Valves shall be generally

located as follows, unless otherwise approved:
(a) At intervals to isolate no more than two fire hydrants at any time.
(b) In residential areas to isolate a maximum of 30 services.
(c) A maximum of five valves shall be required to isolate any location.
(d) Isolation valves are required on all sides of tees, 3 valves and crosses, 4
valves, unless project specific approval is requested and approved by
the RCJ to reduce the number of valves at a specific location.
(e) For straight pipe runs in commercial and industrial areas, the maximum
spacing between isolation valves shall be 200 m.
(f) For straight pipe runs in other areas, the maximum spacing between
isolation valves shall be 400 m.
(g) A valve immediately adjacent to the water main shall be provided for all
laterals greater than 50 mm in diameter, and for all fire hydrant laterals.
2) Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried isolation valves. Valve stem
extensions are required within 500 mm of finished grade where the distance
from the top of the valve box to the top of the operating nut exceeds 1500
mm.
3) Valve boxes and lids shall be cast iron, three sectional, and screw-type
adjustable; designed for highway traffic loads.
4) Refer to the GPCS:
b. Acceptable Valve Types
1) Gate Valves
(a) Valve sizes up to 400 mm
2) Butterfly Valves
(a) Valve sizes above 400 mm
3. Air Valves
1) Locate and size air valves per AWWA and valve manufacturer requirements.
2) Three types of air valves shall be used as appropriate:
(a) Air release valve
(b) Air/Vacuum valve
(c) CAV: Combination air valve (combines the functions of both an air
release valve and an air/vacuum valve)
3) The following types of air valves are required at the following points along a
pipeline (to exhaust air and admit air to prevent vacuum conditions and air
related surges):
(a) High Point: Combination Air Valve
(b) Long Horizontal Run: Air Release Valve or Combination Air Valve at
1000 m maximum intervals.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 29
(c) Long Descent: Combination Air Valve at 600 m maximum intervals.

(d) Long Ascent: Air/Vacuum Valve at 600 m maximum intervals.
(e) Decrease in an Up Slope: Air/Vacuum Valve.
(f) Increase in a Down Slope: Combination Air Valve.
4) Pipeline grades shall be smooth and constant, and the required number of air
valves limited to the extent practical. Pipeline grade changes shall be noted
on the construction drawings.
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.J.1 for minimum pipeline slope requirement.
5) High points and grade changes that are less than one half of the pipeline
diameter typically shall not require an air valve, because the water flow shall
flush accumulated air downstream, except as required in Subsection 5.7.1.J.
6) Sizing
(a) Air valve sizing shall be project specific, and per AWWA and valve
manufacturer requirements and recommendations.
(b) Air/Vacuum Valve and Combination Air Valve: sizing shall generally be
one tenth of the pipeline diameter.
(c) Air Release Valve sizing varies depending on the potential for entrained
air in the water source. As a minimum the Air Release Valve inlet
connection shall be as large as the air valve size.
(d) Valves 76 mm and smaller shall have threaded inlets and outlets. Valves
larger than 76 mm shall have a flanged inlet.
7) The open end of the air relief vent pipe from the air valves shall be extended
with to at least 0.5 m above grade and provided with a downward elbow which
is screened using 1.4 mm stainless steel mesh. The vent pipe shall be the
same diameter as the air valve being vented.
8) Alternately, the open end of the pipe may be extended to 0.5 m above the top
of the pipe if the air valve manhole is not subject to flooding and provided with
a drain-to-daylight. Air valves shall not be connected directly to any sewer.
9) Connection of air valves to water mains
(a) Wrap-around type bod. When installed the body shall wrap around the
main for a minimum of 160 degrees.
(b) On HDPE mains: sidewall fusion tap
(c) On PVC mains: stainless steel double strap saddle
(d) All components shall be corrosion resistant
4. Joint Restraint
1) Joint restraint shall be used at all bends and fittings
2) HDPE Pipelines:
• All bends and fittings shall be butt fusion welded or
flanged using flange adapters.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 30
3) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipelines:

(a) Joint restraint shall be with a mechanical joint restraining gland system
designed for mechanical joint restraint of PVC pipes, per ASTM F1674.
(b) Field solvent welded joints are not allowed.
4) Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipelines (RTRP):
(a) All bends and fittings shall be mechanically restrained with one of the
following options:
1. Mechanical restrained joints. Supplier shall provide stress analysis
to prove mechanical restraint system will be adequate without the
need of thrust block. This will be the preferred method of restraining
the bends and fittings.
2. If mechanically restrained joints are not suitable, concrete thrust
blocks will be considered.
5. Bends and Fittings
1) For HDPE Pipelines:
(a) Injection molded HDPE or fabricated HDPE (for the specific application).
(b) Butt fusion welded, side fusion welded, or flange adapter.
(c) Electrofusion couplings are not allowed.
2) For PVC Pipelines:
(a) Mechanical joint ductile iron. Supplier shall provide stress analysis to
prove mechanical restraint system will be adequate without the need
of thrust block.
3) All exposed components shall have corrosion protection.
6. Fire Hydrants
a. Hydrant Location Requirements
1) The locations of fire hydrants shall be included on civil site plans.
2) Hydrant spacing and locations shall be per Saudi Building Code 801.
Maximum hydrant spacing shall not exceed 150 m in residential areas and
100 m in commercial/industrial areas. The maximum hose length from the
apparatus is 46m on the lay of the hose to any fire.
3) Fire hydrants shall be located relative to buildings so fire trucks may easily
locate the hydrants and connect to them.
4) Hydrants shall not be hidden within or behind landscaping.
5) Hydrants shall be a minimum of 15 m away from the building or structure
6) Hydrants shall not be located more than 10 m away from the edge of the curb
or roadway

Rev. 0 5.7 - 31
7) Any portion of a building extending beyond 100 m from an accessible access

road to the nearest fire hydrant requires installation of an additional fire
hydrant.
8) The hydrant lateral which interconnects the pipeline and the hydrant shall be
not less than 150 mm in diameter and the maximum lateral length shall be
50 m.
b. Hydrant Design Requirements
1) Three steel bollards shall around all fire hydrants that are not protected by a
curb, and in all industrial areas whether or not a curb is present.
(a) A larger size lateral shall be required for greater distances.
2) An isolation valve shall be installed on all hydrant laterals, adjacent to the
main.
3) Water service or fire service connections are not allowed on fire hydrant
laterals.
4) All joints and fittings between the main and the hydrant shall be restrained.
7. Flow Meters and Services

1) Service Lines:
(a) All water service lines 100 mm in diameter and smaller shall be
constructed of HDPE tubing. For larger diameters, refer to the
requirements in 5.7.1.J.1.
(b) Polyethylene tubing shall be blue and have UV color stabilizers so that
the pipe is not affected in color or flexibility for a minimum of four years.
(c) Service connections and service lines shall be installed at a 90 degree
angle from the main.
(d) Each separate building supplied with water shall have its own separate
service connection and meter.
2) Service Line Fittings such as corporation stops, curb stops, saddles
(a) All stops shall be full port and have a flow passage area equivalent to the
fitting outlet flow area.
(b) The inlet connection shall be AWWA Taper thread. The outlet connection
shall be a pack-joint outlet for HDPE tubing.
(c) Curb stops shall be ball valve, roundway, with check, and lock wing cast
on stop body and operating tee cap to provide for locking the stop in
closed position. Curb stops for use with HDPE service shall have an inlet
connection with a compression joint and an outlet connection with female
iron pipe thread.
(d) Service saddles:
(1) Wrap-around type body. When installed, the body shall wrap
around the main for a minimum of 160 degrees.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 32
(2) On HDPE mains: sidewall fusion taps.

(3) On PVC mains: stainless steel double strap saddle.
(4) All components shall be corrosion resistant.
(e) All service saddles shall have corporation tap threads.
3) Flow Meters
(a) To be installed at the property line, in a HDPE or PVC meter box
(b) Size flow meters per AWWA M22 and IPC. Consultant must provide flow
meter sizing calculations for RC approval.
(c) Flow meters 100 mm or larger shall be installed in a vault (chamber)
8. Cross Connection Control

1) No physical connection shall be allowed between potable and non-potable
sources without an approved backflow prevention device.
2) Follow the requirements of the Saudi Building Code 701, Chapter 3.8.
3) An approved backflow prevention device is required on all buildings which
have fire suppression sprinklers. These devices are typically installed inside
the buildings on the ground floor.
4) Backflow prevention devices shall be installed above grade.
5) An approved backflow prevention assembly (appropriate to the degree of
hazard) shall be installed on each service line wherever one of the following
conditions exist:
(a) A building or property having an auxiliary water supply which is not or
may not be of safe bacteriological or chemical quality.
(b) A building or property on which industrial fluids or other objectionable
substances are handled in such a fashion as to create an actual or
potential hazard to the potable water system.
(c) A building or property having an internal cross-connection that cannot be
permanently corrected or controlled, intricate plumbing and/or piping
arrangements, or where entry to all portions of the premises is not readily
accessible for inspection purposes, making it impracticable or impossible
to ascertain whether or not dangerous cross-connections exist.
9. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape

1) Tracer Wire:
(a) Shall be installed on all non-metallic pipe main installations.
(b) The wires shall be attached to the pipeline using minimum 50 mm wide
duct tape, applied on each side of a joint and spaced every 1.5 m.
(c) Locating wires shall terminate at each valve box, manhole, and vault.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 33
(d) Continuity tests shall be conducted on the installed tracer wire to

substantiate continuity for the tracer wire loop.
2) Underground Warning Tape:
(a) Tape shall be a minimum of 75 mm wide.
(b) Lettering shall be a minimum of 25 mm high.
(c) Color to conform to APWA color Code, and be permanently printed.
(d) Install tape at least 200mm above the pipe otherwise unless directed.
10. Blow-off Assemblies
1) Blow-off valves are required on all permanent dead-end pipe runs, major in-
line low points, and may be required at stub-out locations.
2) Fire hydrants shall be used as blow-offs and for flushing. A minimum velocity
of 0.75 m/sec in the water main being flushed is required to provide adequate
flushing.
3) Temporary blow-offs shall be provided as necessary to pressure test and
chlorinate the water mains. Temporary blow-offs shall be removed upon
acceptance of the water line.
4) Blow-off outlets and drains shall terminate in a location with an acceptable air
gap for backflow protection.
5) No blow-off assembly shall be located in roadways, or connected directly to
any sewer.
I. Water Distribution Pumping Equipment
1. General
a. Pumping facilities shall be designed by an A/E and/or EPC Contractor with specific
related experience in design and construction of pumping facilities.
b. Pumping facilities shall be located so that the proposed site shall meet the
requirements for sanitary protection of water quality, hydraulics of the system and
protection against interruption of service by fire, flood or any other hazard.
c. Closed loop pumping systems are not allowed.
d. Facility designs shall consider and make provisions for long-term demands including
space for future expansion if needed, and operation and maintenance requirements.
e. All equipment and components shall be AWWA and NSF approved.
2. Booster Pumps
a. Booster pumps shall be centrifugal or vertical turbine type.
b. At least two pumps shall be provided in all potable booster pump stations. With any
pump out of service, the remaining pump or pumps shall be capable of providing the
maximum pumping demand of the system. Where two or more pumps are installed,
provisions shall be made for alternating operation.
c. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit and obtain approval of the following
operating conditions and performance criteria during preliminary design:

Rev. 0 5.7 - 34
1) Required Pump Discharge

2) Total Dynamic Head at Required Discharge
3) Minimum Suction Pressure and Net Positive Suction Head Required and
Available (if applicable)
4) Maximum Pump Speed
5) Minimum Motor Horsepower
6) Minimum Efficiency
7) Proposed Pump and Motor Selection
d. Suction lift shall be avoided if possible. If required it shall be less than 4 m and
provisions shall be made for priming the pump(s).
e. Transmission Booster Pumps
1) Generally operate at a constant flow rate – pump speed, and take suction
from the transmission suction storage tanks and convey to the transmission
pipeline to the transmission discharge storage tanks. These pump motors
may typically utilize a reduced voltage soft starter (RVSS); however, see
Subsection 5.5.1 for specific electrical requirements.
2) The pumping facility shall have the capacity to provide the peak day demand
of the system or the specific portion of the system serviced.
3) The operation of the pumps shall be controlled by the level in the transmission
discharge storage tanks, via a level transducer, with sufficient tank volume
between pump start and pump stop tank levels to prevent excessive cycling.
4) A provision to maintain a minimum level in the transmission discharge storage
tanks for distribution pump station suction shall also be included in the control
logic.
f. Distribution Booster Pump Stations
1) Generally operate at a constant flow rate and pump speed, and take suction
from the transmission discharge storage tanks and discharge to the
distribution system pipelines and distribution elevated storage tank. These
pump motors may typically utilize a reduced voltage soft starter (RVSS),
although the use of variable frequency drives (VFD) may be preferred in some
cases to meet demand requirements. See Subsection 5.5.1 for specific
electrical requirements.
2) Capacity shall be provided such that the pumping facility shall be capable of
providing the peak day demand of the system or the specific portion of the
system serviced.
3) The operation of the pumps shall be controlled by the level in the distribution
elevated storage tank (via a level transducer, with sufficient volume between
pump start and pump stop tank levels to prevent excessive cycling.
4) A provision to maintain a minimum level in the transmission storage tanks for
the pump station suction shall also be included in the control logic.
3. Mechanical Requirements

Rev. 0 5.7 - 35
a. Pump station piping shall be designed such that each pump has an individual
suction line, or that the lines are manifold so that they shall insure similar hydraulic
and operating conditions.
b. Piping shall be welded epoxy-lined and coated steel piping with flanged joints.
c. All pumping facilities shall have sufficient surge control with surge anticipator valves
and/or surge tanks to protect piping and other equipment. Pressure fluctuations shall
be maintained within 15 percent of normal operating pressures during pump starting
and stopping. Adequate provisions shall also be made for pressure surges caused
by power outages.
d. All pumping facilities shall be equipped with pressure relief valve(s).
e. Pumps motors larger than 15 kW shall be equipped with a booster pump control
valve on the pump discharge.
f. The pump discharge line shall be equipped with a magnetic flow meter which
indicates total flow volume (liters) and rate of flow (liters/minute) with a 4-20 milli-
amp output.
g. An air vacuum valve shall be installed directly downstream of the pump discharge.
h. A pressure gauge, pressure transducer (with a 4-20 milli-amp output), and pressure
switch shall be installed downstream of the air vacuum valve and pump control valve
(if present).
i. A bypass line shall be included in the pump station, to allow the connection of
emergency pumps.
j. Sufficient isolation valves which are typically butterfly valves and restrained
dismantling couplings shall be provided.
k. Equipment shall be labeled/tagged to correspond to the maintenance record and for
proper identification.
l. Adequate clear space for access, maintenance and removal and replacement shall
be provided around all piping and equipment. At a minimum there shall be 0.75 m
clear between all piping and equipment and all obstructions.
4. Chlorination
a. All pumping facilities shall be equipped with a chlorine dosing system using Cl2 gas
cylinders, located in a separate room with an exhaust fan and isolated from the rest
of the pumping facility. The design of the room shall comply with the applicable
requirements of the IBC, IFC and IMC..
b. Hypochlorite generators with a dosing pump may also be used.
c. Minimum onsite chlorine storage shall be seven days.
d. All of the system components shall be according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations to insure efficient chlorination system operation.
e. Chlorine analyzers, and sample taps shall be provided both upstream and
downstream of the injection point.
f. An emergency eye wash station, shower, and appropriate signs shall also be
provided.
5. Building

Rev. 0 5.7 - 36
a. All booster pumps, mechanical equipment, chlorination facilities, control equipment,

electrical equipment and telemetry equipment shall be enclosed in a building. See
Section 5.2 and Subsections 5.3.4 and 5.4.2 for specific building requirements.
b. All booster pumps stations shall be equipped with a manual transfer switch and
provisions for connecting a roll-up generator to operate the pump station in the event
of a prolonged power outage. Refer to Subsection 5.3.4 for specific building
requirements.
c. Pumping stations finished floor elevations shall be graded around the station so as
to lead surface drainage away from the station. The finished floor elevation of the
pump station shall be a minimum of 150 mm above finished grade.
d. Adequate provisions shall be made for removal and replacement of the motor,
discharge column, pump, and other equipment. Provisions include roof hatches,
crane-ways, hoist beams, eyebolts, or other acceptable means.
e. Suitable HVAC shall be required. Refer to Subsection 5.4.3 for HVAC requirements.
Interior temperatures shall be maintained at no more than 40°C.
f. Emergency/back-up power shall be provided for all critical pumping facilities (life
safety services). Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E for specific back-up power
requirements.
g. Floor drains shall be provided, except in the chlorine room. The building floor shall
slope to the drains.
h. All pumping facilities shall be fenced with a minimum 2.0 m high fence. The site
access, size and layout shall provide adequate room for maintenance of the facility,
including removal of pumps; including adequate room for the removal and
replacement of all mechanical and electrical equipment.
J. Water Storage Tanks
1. General
a. Ground Surface Water Storage Tanks
1) Water storage tank design shall comply with the following AWWA Standards:
Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage AWWA Standard D100-11
and design manual M42
2) Factory Coated bolted steel tanks for water storage - AWWA D103-09
3) Wire and Strand-wound circular pre-stressed concrete water tanks -AWWA
D110-95
4) Tendon- pre-stressed concrete water tanks - AWWA D115-95
b. Elevated Water Storage Tanks
1) Composite welded steel elevated tanks for water storage – AWWA D107-10
(a) The materials and designs used for finished water storage structures
shall provide stability and durability as well as protect the quality of the
stored water. Steel structures shall follow the current AWWA standards
concerning steel tanks, standpipes, reservoirs, and elevated tanks
wherever they are applicable.
(b) The lowest elevation of the floor of ground level reservoirs shall be
placed at least 0.5 m above the surrounding grade, and at least 2 m
above the groundwater table.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 37
(c) A geotechnical investigation and foundation design shall be prepared for

all tank sites.
(d) Sewers, drains, standing water, and similar sources of possible
contamination shall be kept at least 15 m from the reservoir.
(e) All finished water storage structures shall have suitable watertight roofs
which exclude birds, animals, insects, and dust. The installation of
appurtenances, such as antenna, shall be done in a manner that ensures
no damage to the tank, coatings or water quality.
(f) Fencing, locks on access manholes, and other necessary precautions
shall be provided to prevent trespassing, vandalism, and sabotage.
2. Sizing
a. Storage facilities shall have sufficient capacity, as determined during preliminary
design, to meet domestic demands; and where fire protection is provided, fire flow
demands.
1) Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.F for system demand information.
2) Fire flow and storage requirements shall be established by the IFC in
conjunction with Saudi Building Code 801, Chapter 5.
3) Excessive storage capacity shall be avoided to prevent potential water quality
deterioration problems.
4) Transmission Ground Level Storage Tank(s) capacity: five days of average
daily demand.
5) District Distribution Ground Level Storage Tank(s) capacity: two days of
average daily demand and fire storage.
6) District Distribution Elevated Storage Tank(s): one day of average daily
demand and fire storage.
3. Piping
a. Inlet: a dedicated supply line from the distribution booster pump station to the district
distribution elevated storage tank(s) is required.
b. Outlet: the discharge pipe(s) from water storage structures shall be located in a
manner that shall prevent the flow of sediment into the system. Removable silt stops
shall be provided.
c. Overflow: all water storage structures shall be provided with an overflow which is
brought down to an elevation of 0.5 m above the ground surface, and discharges
over a drainage inlet structure or a splash plate. No overflow may be connected
directly to a sewer or a storm drain. All overflow pipes shall be located so that any
discharge is visible.
1) When an internal overflow pipe is used on elevated tanks, it shall be located
in the access tube. For vertical drops on other types of storage facilities, the
overflow pipe shall be located on the outside of the structure.
2) The overflow shall open downward and be screened with 5 mm and 2 mm
stainless steel non-corrodible screens. The screen shall be installed within the
overflow pipe at a location least susceptible to damage by vandalism.
3) The overflow pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to permit waste of water in
excess of the filling rate.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 38
d. Drains: the design shall allow draining the storage facility for cleaning or
maintenance without causing loss of pressure in the transmission and/or distribution
system. No drain on a water storage structure shall have a direct connection to a
sewer or storm drain.
e. Sampling: smooth-nosed sampling tap(s) shall be provided in the tank valve vault to
facilitate collection of water samples for both bacteriological and chemical analyses.
The sample tap(s) shall be easily accessible.
4. Stored Water Age
a. Finished water storage shall be designed with an inlet mixing and distribution
manifold to facilitate turnover of water in the finished water storage to minimize
stagnation and/or stored water age.
b. The inlet and outlet pipes shall be separated, to promote mixing. Poor water
circulation and long detention times may lead to loss of disinfectant residual,
microbial growth, formation of disinfectant byproducts, taste and odor problems, and
other water quality problems.
c. The tank design engineer shall provide a computational fluid dynamics (CFD) model
of the tank’s inlet mixing system and outlet positioning.
5. Access
a. Storage structures shall be designed with reasonably convenient access to the
interior for cleaning and maintenance. At least two access hatches or man ways
shall be provided above the high waterline for each tank compartment
b. Elevated Storage or Dome Roof Structures
1) At least one access hatch or man way shall be framed a minimum of 100 mm
above the surface of the roof at the opening. The access shall be fitted with a
solid, water tight cover which overlaps the framed opening and extends down
around the frame at least 50 mm (“shoebox style lid”), be hinged on one side,
and have a locking device.
2) All other man ways or access ports shall be water tight using bolted and
gasketed means, or shall meet the requirements above.
c. Ground Level or Flat Roof Structures
1) Each access hatch or man way shall be elevated at least 0.75 m above the
top of the tank or covering, whichever is higher.
2) The accesses shall be fitted with a solid, water tight cover which overlaps the
framed opening and extends down around the frame at least 50 mm, with a
minimum 100 mm frame height (“shoebox style lid”). Each cover shall be
hinged on one side and have a locking device.
6. Vents
a. Finished water storage structures shall be vented. The overflow pipe shall not be
considered a vent. Open construction between the sidewall and roof is not
permissible. Vents:
1) A minimum of two shall be provided for each tank compartment.
2) Shall prevent the entrance of surface water and rainwater.
3) Shall exclude birds and animals; and shall exclude insects and dust, as much
as this function may be made compatible with effective venting.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 39
4) Shall, on ground-level structures, open downward with the opening at least

0.75 m above the roof and covered with a 5 mm and 2 mm stainless steel
mesh screens. The screen shall be installed within the pipe at a location least
susceptible to vandalism.
5) Shall, on elevated tanks and standpipes, open downward, and be fitted with a
4.76 mm and 1.410 mm screens.
7. Roof and Sidewall
a. The roof and sidewalls of all water storage structures shall be watertight with no
openings except properly constructed vents, man ways, overflows, risers, drains,
pump mountings, control ports, or piping for inflow and outflow. Particular attention
shall be given to the sealing of roof structures which are not integral to the tank
body.
1) Any pipes running through the roof or sidewall of a metal storage structure
shall be welded, or properly gasketed.
2) Openings in the roof of a storage structure designed to accommodate control
apparatus or pump columns, shall be curbed and sleeved with proper
additional shielding to prevent contamination from surface or floor drainage.
3) The roof of the storage structure shall be well drained. Drainage downspout
pipes shall not enter or pass through the reservoir. Parapets, or similar
construction which would tend to hold water on the roof, are not allowed.
8. Safety
a. Safety shall be considered in the design of the water storage structure. The design
shall conform to pertinent laws and regulations of the area where the water storage
structure is constructed.
1) Ladders, ladder guards, balcony railings, and safely located entrance hatches
shall be provided where applicable.
2) Elevated tanks with riser pipes over 200 mm in diameter shall have protective
bars over the riser openings inside the tank.
3) Railings or handholds shall be provided on elevated tanks where persons
shall transfer from the access tube to the water compartment.
4) Confined space entry requirements shall be considered.
9. Painting and/or Cathodic Protection
a. Proper protection shall be given to metal surfaces by cathodic protective devices
and by paints or other protective coatings, or by both.
1) Paint systems shall meet ANSI/NSF standard 61. Interior paint shall be
applied, cured, and used in a manner consistent with the ANSI/NSF approval.
After curing, the coating shall not transfer any substance to the water which
shall be toxic or cause taste or odor problems. Prior to placing into service, an
analysis for volatile organic compounds is required to establish that the
coating is properly cured. All paint systems shall be 100 % solids coatings.
2) Wax coatings for the tank interior are not allowed.
3) A corrosion specialist shall evaluate the water chemistry and provide a written
report and recommendations for a cathodic protection system. Cathodic

Rev. 0 5.7 - 40
protection, if required, shall be designed and installed by competent technical

personnel (per AWWA), and a maintenance contract shall be provided.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 41
SUBSECTION 5.7.2 SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL SEWER SYSTEM
5.7.2 SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL SEWER SYSTEM
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This GEM Section provides the basis for the design of sewer utilities. The sewer
utilities include the collection and conveyance systems.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to sewage collection facilities downstream of residential and
commercial users including but not limited to sewer lines manholes, laterals, waste
water pumping stations and force mains, valves, and flow meters.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Section 2.2.0.
1) ADF: Average Daily Flows
2) GIS: Geographic Information Systems
4) ISO: International Organization for Standardization
6) NSF: NSF International
8) RCJ: Royal Commission Jubail
10) UV: Ultraviolet
1) See each utility Section for general requirements.
6. Codes
7. Standards
a. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of Standards.
8. Related Sections
9. Approvals
B. Sewer Collection System
a. The Sewer Collection Systems collect sewage from residences and businesses and
convey it to the sewage lift stations.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 42
b. The Sewer Collection Systems use gravity flow and pumped systems. Gravity
systems operate in open channel flow conditions.
c. The Sewer Collection Systems include:
1) Gravity flow sewage collection pipelines
2) Sewage lift stations
3) Sewage force mains.
C. Sanitary Sewer Design Flow Criteria

1. General
a. This Section provides the general design criteria for calculation of Average Daily
Flow (ADF) rate.
1) Peaking factors shall be applied to the ADF to size key infrastructure
associated with the sewage collection system.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of the likelihood for high
groundwater. This shall be accounted for with design to prevent floatation of pipes
and manholes.
2. Sewage Production
a. Determination of Average Daily Sewer Flow (ADF)
1) ADF is to be equal to 80% of indoor Average Day Water Demand (see
Subsection 5.7.1.F).
(a) There is no infiltration factor.
(b) This applies to residential, commercial, and industrial per capita flows.
(c) Do not include industrial process flows as the industrial waste water is
collected by a separate system
(d) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider infiltration from the ground into
the collection system
(1) Infiltration calculations shall follow EPA guidelines, and shall be
based on depth of pipe, location of groundwater table (if any), pipe
type and number of joints, and soil and other external load
conditions.
b. Peak Design Flow
1) Sanitary Sewer Line Sizing Peaking Factors (PFs)
(a) For gravity line sizing calculations, the peaking factors in TABLE 5.7.2.A
shall be used.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 43
TABLE 5.7.2.A
SEWER MODELING PEAK FACTORS
Population of
Peak Factor
Modeled Area
100 4.00
500 3.90
1,000 3.75
5,000 3.25
10,000 2.90
50,000 2.75
100,000 2.50
500,000 2.00
D. Hydraulic Modeling
1. Modeling Software
a. Acceptable modeling software include:
1) SewerCAD or SewerGEMS (Bentley)
2. Hydraulic Model Reporting
a. Provide a copy of the native file for Sewer GEMS and a base map in AutoCAD in
Royal Commission Jubail Coordinates.
E. Gravity Sewer Collection System Piping
1. Gravity Sewer Lines
1) Gravity sewer line shall not be less than 200 mm in diameter for primary trunk
lines. Lateral lines may be 160mm.
2) In general, sewers shall be sufficiently deep to receive sewage from the
lowest floor level of adjacent development. Minimum burial depth to top of
pipe shall be 1.2 m for uPVC pipes and 1.0m for other pipes. Maximum burial
depth shall not exceed 6 m.
3) The depth of flow in the sanitary sewer pipes shall be designed to equal 0.5D
where D is the nominal diameter of the pipe. The depth of flow in a sanitary
sewer greater than 200 mm in diameter shall not exceed 0.75D. Sewage
collection systems for a given area shall be sized to carry the peak design
flow from the entire tributary area at build-out, even if the tributary area is not
within the project boundaries.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 44
4) Buoyancy of sewers shall be considered and flotation of the pipe shall be

prevented with appropriate means where high groundwater conditions are
anticipated.
5) Slopes
(a) All sewers shall be designed and constructed to give mean velocities,
when flowing half full, of not less than 0.6 m/sec, based on Manning's
formula using an "n" value of 0.013.
Table 5.7.2 - B MINIMUM SLOPES FOR GRAVITY SEWER LINES (RIGID PIPES)
Nominal Sewer Size Minimum Slope in Percent
150 mm 0.60
200 mm 0.40
250 mm 0.30
300 mm 0.22
350 mm 0.17
375 mm 0.15
400 mm 0.14
450 mm 0.12
525 mm 0.10
600 mm 0.08
675 mm 0.067
750 mm 0.058
825 mm 0.052
900 mm 0.046
975 mm 0.041
(b) The pipe diameter and slope shall be selected to obtain the greatest
practical velocities to minimize settling problems. Oversize sewers shall
not be approved to justify using flatter slopes. If the proposed slope is
less than the minimum slope of the smallest pipe which may
accommodate the design peak flow, the actual depths and velocities at
minimum, average, and design (peak) maximum daily flow for each
design section of the sewer shall be calculated by the design engineer
and submitted for review.
(c) Sewers shall be laid with uniform slope between manholes.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 45
6) Alignment
(a) Sewers shall be laid with straight alignment between manholes.
(b) Curvilinear sewers are not permitted.
7) Proximity to other utilities
(a) See requirements in Subsection 5.7.0.A.3
8) Changes in Pipe Size
(a) When a smaller sewer joins a larger one in a manhole, the invert of the
larger sewer shall be placed at 0.8 depth point of both sewers at the
same elevation.
b. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) (gravity and pressure pipe)
2) Sizes 200 mm to 315 mm
3) Reinforced Plastic Mortar (RPM) Sewer Pipe
5) High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Sewer Liner (for Sliplining)
2. Manholes
1) Location
(a) Manholes shall be installed: at the end of each line; at all changes in
grade, size, or alignment; and at all intersections.
(b) Manholes shall be installed: at distances not greater than 150 m for
sewers.
(c) Cleanouts may be used only for special conditions and shall not be
substituted for manholes nor installed at the end of laterals greater than
45 m in length.
2) Drop Type
(a) A drop pipe shall be provided for a sewer entering a manhole at an
elevation of 600 mm or more above the manhole invert. Where the
difference in elevation between the incoming sewer and the manhole
invert is less than 600 mm, the invert shall be filleted to prevent solids
deposition.
(b) Drop manholes shall only be allowed with RCJ approval.
(c) Drop manholes shall be the “outside drop” style..
3) Diameter
(a) For sewer lines up to 450 mm, the minimum diameter of manholes shall
be 1200 mm.
(b) For sewer lines between 525 mm and up to 750 mm, the minimum
diameter of manholes shall be 1500 mm.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 46
(c) For sewer lines between 825 mm and up to 1050 mm, the minimum
diameter of manholes shall be 1800 mm.
(d) A minimum access diameter of 750 mm shall be provided.
4) Water Tightness
(a) Inlet and outlet pipes shall be joined to the manhole with a gasketed
flexible watertight connection that allows differential settlement of the
pipe and manhole wall to take place.
(b) Watertight manhole covers are to be used wherever the manhole tops
may be flooded by street runoff or high water.
(c) Locked manhole covers may be desirable in isolated easement locations
or where vandalism may be a problem.
b. Acceptable Manhole Materials
1) Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Manholes
(a) Per ASTM D3753-12
(b) AASHTO H-20 wheel load rating.
2) Precast Concrete Manholes
(a) Per ASTM C478
(b) AASHTO H-20 wheel load rating
3. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.J.
F. Sewage Lift Stations and Pumping Stations
1. Site Selection
a. The pumping station shall be readily accessible by maintenance vehicles during all
weather conditions. The facility shall be located off the traffic way of streets and
alleys. Security fencing and access hatches with locks shall be provided.
b. Sewage pumping station structures and electrical and mechanical equipment shall
be protected from physical damage by the 100 year flood. Sewage pumping stations
shall remain fully operational and accessible during the 25 year flood.
c. Where high groundwater conditions are anticipated, buoyancy of the wastewater
pumping station structures shall be considered and, if necessary, adequate
provisions shall be made for protection.
d. Lift Station or Pump Station Configuration: Submersible pump with only wet wells
are for Lift Stations having average daily flows less than 400 liters per second. The
wet well/dry well type shall be used for Lift Station having average daily flows
exceeding 400 liters per second.
e. The layout of the lift station or pump stations shall ensure that there will be available
space for maintenance purposes. Provision shall be made to facilitate removing
pumps, motors, and other mechanical and electrical equipment. Individual pump and
motor removal shall not interfere with the continued operation of remaining pumps.
f. Mechanical and electrical rooms shall be completely separated from the wet well.
Common walls shall be gas tight.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 47
2. Wet Wells
a. Wet well shall be divided into two sections for larger pump stations to facilitate
repairs and cleaning.
b. The design fill time and minimum pump cycle time shall be considered in sizing the
wet well. The effective volume (EV) in cubic meters of the wet well shall be based on
design average flow (Qin) in cubic meters per minute and a filling time not to exceed
30 minutes. The pump(s) shall cycle between 2 and 6 times per hour. Qout is the
design pump discharge in cubic meter per minute.
Cycle time T= EV/Qin + EV/(Qout-Qin)
c. The “pump off” level shall be high enough to keep the pumps submerged per
Hydraulic Institute and manufacturer’s recommendation. The “pump on” level shall
be set no higher than 0.3 meters below the invert of the lowest influent pipe
d. The wet well floor shall have a minimum slope of 1 to 1 to the hopper bottom. The
horizontal area of the hopper bottom shall be no greater than necessary for proper
installation and function of the inlet.
e. Wet wells shall be lined with a material that is completely resistant to hydrogen
sulfide and sulfuric acid.
f. Wet wells shall also have a corrosion resistance and waterproofing system installed
on the exterior of the wet well.
g. Provide an access hatch with safety chains above the pumps in the top of the wet
well. Hatch shall be of aluminum at least a two leaf design with enough area to
safely and easily remove the pumps
h. Covered wet wells shall have provisions for air displacement to the atmosphere,
such as an inverted "j" tube or other means.
i. Check for flotation of the wet well when it is empty
3. Pumps
a. All pumps shall be radial flow centrifugal pumps.
b. The design engineer shall use Hazen William's equation to calculate system-head
and curves.
c. Pumps shall be capable of passing spheres of at least 80 mm in diameter. Pump
suction and discharge openings shall be at least 100 mm in diameter.
d. The pump shall be so placed that under normal operating conditions it shall operate
under a positive suction head.
e. Pumps shall be readily removable and replaceable (with a dedicated, permanently
mounted motorized crane) without personnel entering or dewatering the wet well, or
disconnecting any piping in the wet well. In the mechanical room/dry well, allow for
sufficient headroom and space surrounding the equipment to allow for easy removal.
f. The minimum flow capacity of a lift station pump shall be 8.2 L/s. This is based on a
minimum pipe size of 100mm and a minimum velocity of 1 m/s. Refer to paragraph
F.9.
4. Electrical
a. Electrical systems and components (e.g., motors, lights, cables, conduits, switch
boxes, control circuits, etc.) in sewage wet wells, or in enclosed or partially enclosed

Rev. 0 5.7 - 48
spaces where hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may be

present, shall be specified to be in rated for Zone 0 in the Saudi Building Code,
401Chapter 720, Electrical Installations in Hazardous Locations and NFPA 820,
Chapter 7.
b. Equipment located in the wet well shall be specified to be suitable for use under
corrosive conditions.
c. Electrical supply, control, and alarm circuits shall be designed to provide separate
strain relief and to allow disconnection from outside the wet well. Terminals and
connectors shall be protected from corrosion by location outside the wet well or
through use of watertight seals.
d. A fused disconnect switch located above ground shall be provided for the main
power feed for all pumping stations.
e. The motor control center shall be located outside the wet well, be readily accessible,
and be protected by a conduit seal or other appropriate measures meeting the
requirements of the Saudi Buidling Code 401to prevent the atmosphere of the wet
well from gaining access to the control center. The seal shall be so located that the
motor may be removed and electrically disconnected without disturbing the seal.
When such equipment is exposed to weather, it shall meet the requirements of
weatherproof equipment. IP 65 is the preferred rating, but shall not be less than IP
55.
f. Lightning and surge protection systems shall be provided as required.
g. Phase protection and phase loss warning shall be provided for 3 phase power.
Phase protection shall prevent automatic equipment restarting attempts upon power
restoration until all three phases are restored.
h. The design electrical engineer shall provide a written description of the type of
power needed (voltage, amperage, phase, etc.)and has performed his investigation
of whether the proper power is available and when it is available for each site.
i. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for additional electrical requirements.
5. Pump Station Piping, Valves and Flow Meters
a. Piping within the pump stations shall be fusion-bonded epoxy-lined and coated steel
piping with flanged joints. All fasteners used for joining pipes shall be stainless
steel.
b. Water level control sensing devices shall be so located as not to be unduly affected
by turbulent flows entering the well or by the turbulent suction of the pumps.
c. Provision shall be made to automatically alternate the pumps in use.
6. Ventilation
a. Adequate ventilation shall be provided for all pump stations. If screens or
mechanical equipment requiring maintenance or inspection are located in the wet
well, permanently installed ventilation is required. There shall be no interconnection
between the wet well and other ventilation systems. Refer to NFPA 820, Chapters 4
and 9.
b. All intermittently operated ventilation equipment shall be interconnected with the
respective pit lighting system.
c. The fan wheel shall be fabricated from non-sparking material. Automatic heating and
dehumidification equipment shall be provided in all dry wells.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 49
d. Ventilation may be either continuous or intermittent. Refer to NFPA 820, Chapters 4

and 9. Ventilation, if continuous, shall provide at least 12 complete air changes per
hour; if intermittent, at least 30 complete air changes per hour. Air shall be forced in
by mechanical means rather than solely exhausted. The air change requirements
shall be based on 100 percent fresh air.
7. Emergency Operation
a. Emergency pumping capability is required unless on-system overflow prevention is
provided by adequate storage capacity. Emergency pumping capability shall be
accomplished by connection of the station to at least two independent utility
substations, or by provision of portable or in-place generator that has sufficient
capacity to start up and maintain the total rated running capacity of the station.
Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E for back-up power requirements.
b. Regardless of the type of emergency standby system provided, a portable pump
connection to the force main with rapid connection capabilities and appropriate
valves shall be provided outside the dry well and wet well.
c. A satisfactory plan shall be provided to prevent or minimize overflows in the event of
pump station failure.
8. Odor Control
a. Odor control unit is required to remove odors by passing through the activated
carbon bed neutralization or scrubber before being discharged to the outside air.
The system shall have a minimum 12 air changes per hour.
9. Force Mains
a. At design pumping rates, a minimum velocity of at least 1.0 m/s shall be maintained.
Maximum velocity shall not exceed 2.1 m/s.
b. The minimum force main diameter shall not be less than 100 mm.
c. Force mains shall maintain a positive uphill slope from the pump output to the
manhole receiving the force main discharge. Changes in force main slope and
direction shall be minimized.
d. Force mains shall be designed with a minimum depth of 1 m cover over the top of
the pipe.
e. The force main shall enter the receiving manhole with a smooth flow transition to the
gravity sewer system at a point not more than 0.3 m above the flow line.
f. Acceptable Pipe Materials:
1) Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe
(b) ASTM D3754-14
(c) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
(d) ASTM D3567-11
2) Heat Fusion Joint High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) (pressure pipe
only)
(b) ASTM F714-13

Rev. 0 5.7 - 50
(c) ASTM F2620-13

(d) ASTM D3035-15
3) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) (gravity and pressure pipe)
G. Industrial Wastewater
1. Design Flows
a. Industrial Projects have project specific wastewater flows.
b. This Subsection does not address the design flows for industrial applications
because each industrial application is anticipated to be project specific.
2. RCER Requirements
a. Industrial Wastewater Pre-treatment Requirements
1) Industrial wastewater dischargers shall meet pre-treatment requirements as
prescribed in the RCJ Environmental Regulations.
3. Design Requirements
a. All of the design requirements for sanitary wastewater infrastructure design in this
Sanitary Sewer Subsection 5.7.2 shall apply to the design of Industrial Wastewater
utility systems.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 51
SUBSECTION 5.7.3 RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM (IRRIGATION)
5.7.3 RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM (IRRIGATION)
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides the basis for the design of Recycled Water System (Irrigation).
The Recycled Water Systems include transmission and distribution systems.
b. Treated wastewater is recycled from both sanitary wastewater and industrial
wastewater. The treated industrial wastewater is blended with the treated sanitary
wastewater to provide irrigation water for open space landscape, roadside and park
landscaping.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to recycled water facilities downstream of sewage treatment
plants, including but not limited to storage tanks, pump stations, pipelines, valves,
and flow meters.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
2) RCJ: Royal Commission
3) RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations (2010)
a. Follow the design requirements in the following publications:
1) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations 2015
2) Presidency of the Meteorology and Environment Regulations
6. Codes
7. Standards
1) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations 2015
2) Presidency of the Meteorology and Environment Regulations
8. Related Sections
a. NA

Rev. 0 5.7 - 52
B. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission Systems

1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission System (Primary System):
The irrigation water transmission system conveys water from the Sanitary Wastewater
Treatment Plants to the transmission discharge water storage tanks.
2. The Recycled Water Transmission Systems includes the following components:
a. Suction water storage tanks,
b. Chlorine booster pumping system,
c. Large, multiple pump, constant speed pumping station(s),
d. Transmission pipeline
e. Discharge water storage tanks
3. Acceptable Pipe Materials
a. Heat Fusion Joint High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
1) Sizes 200 mm to 1050 mm:
2) ASTM F714-13
3) ASTM F2620-13
4) ASTM D3035-15
b. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Purple
2) AWWA C900-07
3) ASTM D1784-11 Cell Class 12454
4) ASTM F477-14
5) ASTM D3139-11
c. Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe
1) Sizes 300 mm to 1200 mm:
2) ASTM D3754-14
3) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
4) ASTM D3567-11
C. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Distribution Systems
1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Pipelines
a. The Recycled Water (Irrigation) Distribution System conveys water from district
water storage tanks to the water users within the respective district.
b. The character of the soil and water table depth through which irrigation water mains
are to be laid shall be considered. The design engineer shall also consider the
materials to be used when corrosive soils or waters shall be encountered (coastal
soils are highly saline and corrosive, a thorough study of the conditions is essential
before beginning design).

Rev. 0 5.7 - 53
1) All open space landscape, roadside landscape and parks shall be irrigated by
reclaimed water irrigation.
2) All trees and palms shall be irrigated by bubbler system or root watering
system.
3) Ground covers and climber plants shall be irrigated by drip emitter system
and grass areas shall be irrigated by sprinkler system.
4) All recycled water mains shall be sized based on irrigation demands and
minimum pressure requirements; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.E.
5) Minimum pipeline slope shall be 0.10%. Maximum pipeline slope shall be
10%, unless project specific approval is requested and approved.
6) Longitudinal bending of PVC pipe is not allowed.
7) Longitudinal bending of HDPE pipe shall be limited to 80% of the
manufacturer's installation recommendations.
8) PVC pipe joint deflection shall be limited to 80% of the manufacturer's
installation recommendations.
9) Pipeline Location:
(a) Vertical: minimum burial depth of recycled water (irrigation) distribution
main lines not less than 110 mm is 1.0 m, measured from finished grade
to top of pipe. Maximum burial depth is 6.0 m.
(b) Irrigation piping from the solenoid valve boxes to the irrigation terminal
equipment shall have the following minimum burial depth
(1) 300 mm for lateral lines serving emitters, bubblers and sprinkler
heads.
(2) 600 mm for lines 50 mm and larger
(3) 900 mm for line 75 mm and larger.
(c) Horizontal: 2.0 m beyond edge of pavement or back of curb, unless
otherwise approved.
(d) The use of joint (combined) utility trenches is not permitted.
(e) Potable water lines shall be located at a distance no less than 3.0 m
horizontally (outside to outside) and 500 mm vertically above any non-
potable (reclaimed) water line, sewer line, or storm drain line.
c. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) Flexible Tubing for Drip Lines
(b) Non-rigid vinyl chloride polymer and copolymer compounds.
(c) ASTM D2287
2) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Purple

Rev. 0 5.7 - 54
(b) AWWA C900-07

(c) ASTM D1784-11 Cell Class 12454
(d) ASTM F477-14
(e) ASTM D3139-11
3) Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe
(b) ASTM D3754-14
(c) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
(d) ASTM D3567-11
2. Isolation Valves
1) Valve Locations: a sufficient number of isolation valves shall be provided on
irrigation water pipelines to minimize inconvenience, sanitary hazards, and
degradation of fire protection during maintenance and repairs. Valves shall be
generally located as follows, unless otherwise approved:
(a) Isolation valves are required on all sides of tees, 3 valves and crosses, 4
valves, unless project specific approval is requested and approved by
the RCJ to reduce the number of valves at a specific location.
(b) For straight pipe runs, the maximum spacing between isolation valves
shall be 400 m.
2) Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried isolation valves. Valve stem
extensions are required within 500 mm of finished grade where the distance
from the top of the valve box to the top of the operating nut exceeds 1500
mm.
3) Valve boxes and lids shall be cast iron, three sectional, and screw-type
adjustable; designed for highway traffic loads.
b. Acceptable Valve Types
1) Gate Valves
(a) Valve sizes 110 mm to 300mm
2) Butterfly Valves
(a) Valve sizes from 350 mm to 900 mm
3) Bubbler Solenoid Valve
4) Drip Solenoid Valve
5) Sprinkler Solenoid Valve

Rev. 0 5.7 - 55
3. Storage Tanks
a. Welded Steel Tanks

1) Steel Plate and Structural Shapes
(a) AWWA D100 Section 2
(b) API 650
2) Steel pipe and pipe fittings
(a) ASTM A-120
3) Exterior ladders, guard rails
(a) ASTM A123/153
4. Pumping Stations
a. Distribution Pump Stations
1) Generally operate at a constant flow rate and pump speed, and take suction
from the transmission discharge storage tanks and discharge to the
distribution system pipelines and distribution elevated storage tank. These
pump motors may typically utilize a reduced voltage soft starter (RVSS),
although the use of variable frequency drives (VFD) may be preferred in some
cases to meet demand requirements.
2) Capacity shall be provided such that the pumping facility shall be capable of
providing the peak day demand of the system or the specific portion of the
system serviced.
3) The operation of the pumps shall be controlled by the level in the distribution
elevated storage tank (via a level transducer, with sufficient volume between
pump start and pump stop tank levels to prevent excessive cycling.
4) A provision to maintain a minimum level in the transmission storage tanks for
the pump station suction shall also be included in the control logic.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 56
SUBSECTION 5.7.4 SEA WATER COOLING
5.7.4 SEA WATER COOLING
A. General
1. Design Criteria Background
a. Seawater cooling is provided as a utility for the industrial cities.
1) Jubail 1 has a system of seawater cooling canals divided into supply and
return channels. Seawater is pumped into the canal and flows by gravity
through the city. The return channel flows by gravity back to the sea for
dissipation. The system is designed as a once through cooling with off-take
structures and lateral pipes connected to non-contact heat exchangers of the
various industries in the City.
2) Jubail 2 seawater cooling is designed to supply make up water to industry
cooling towers and receive cooling tower blowdown.
3) Those facilities which require or are located with direct access to the sea and
plan to develop an independent seawater cooling water system, shall consult
with the RCJ for further direction and guidance.
b. Applicability
1) This Subsection applies to all projects within the cities under jurisdiction of the
RCJ.
c. Definitions
1) Refer to Section 2.2.0 for General Definitions of terms
2) “Blowdown” The discharge of accumulated dissolved minerals to control the
buildup of these minerals in recirculating cooling water systems. Also known
as draw-off and purge.
3) “Confined Space” A restricted area that has one of more of the following
characteristics: contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous
atmosphere; contains a material that has the potential to engulf an entrant;
has walls that converge inward, and/or floors that slope downward and taper
into a smaller area which could trap an entrant; or contains any other
recognized safety or health hazard, such as unguarded machinery, exposed
live wires, etc.
4) “Cooling Water” The water removing heat from a machine or system.
5) “Corrosion” The process of corroding metal, stone, or other materials.
6) “Distribution Canal” Canal used to convey cooling water to and from the sea
into the cities and to the customers.
7) “Distribution/lateral Piping” Piping used to transfer seawater from a distribution
canal / pipeline to a customer’s heat exchanger for the purpose of providing
cooling water for an industrial process. A different set of piping returns the
heated water back to the distribution canal / pipeline.
8) “Drift” The amount of total cooling tower water flow that is evaporated into the
atmosphere, dependent on whether the tower uses natural or induced draft
cooling and additional drift eliminators. Also known as windage.
9) “Non-Contact Cooling System” A cooling system that includes a heat
exchanger which separates the seawater from the process water.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 57
10) “Pump Station(s)” Facilities that lift seawater up to the distribution canal
through the use of vertical turbine or other pump types. This lift in water
elevation creates the hydraulic head necessary for the seawater to flow in the
distribution canal to the users.
11) “Valve Chambers” Sluice gates or valves used to control the rate of seawater
being transferred to and from individual customer laterals.
d. Abbreviations
1) Refer to Section 2.2 for General Abbreviations
(a) FRP: Fiber-Reinforced Plastic
(b) P&ID: Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
(c) PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
(d) RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
(e) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(f) SCT: Seawater Cooing Tower
e. General requirements
1) Projects shall comply with all applicable requirements and regulations of the
RCJ.
2) System users are responsible for complying with RCJ requirements and
environmental regulations.
f. Codes and Standards
1) Projects with coastal/marine discharges are required to comply with the
following RCER water quality regulations and Standards.
(a) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.1, Coastal Water Quality Criteria
(b) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.2, Water Quality Discharge Standards
(c) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.3, General Water Quality Regulations
(d) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.5, Seawater Cooling Regulations
(e) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.6, Seawater Cooling Tower Regulations
(f) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.10, Marine-Related Discharge Regulations
(g) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.13, Water Quality Monitoring Requirements
(h) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.14, Table 3A Ambient Water Quality Criteria
for Coastal Waters
(i) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.10
(j) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.1.4, Table 3C Water Quality Standards for
Direct Discharge to Coastal Waters
g. Related Sections
1) Section 5.9, Environmental
h. Approvals
1) The RCJ has approval authority through the Environmental Permit Program.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 58
B. Commissioning
b. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for the RCJ’s commissioning requirements.
c. The drift rate shall be confirmed as part of the acceptance testing, and shall be
tested according to the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) test codes ATC-I4O, “Drift
Testing of Wet, Wet/Dry, and Closed Circuit Cooling Towers.”
C. Design Criteria
1. Temperatures
a. Designs shall account for the seasonal variations in the seawater temperatures as
well as seasonal ambient conditions. August is generally the month of peak
temperatures.
b. Heat exchange systems shall be designed to not exceed the maximum temperature
differential between the seawater cooling intake and discharge per the regulations in
RCER Volume 1 Table 3C, Water Quality Standards for Direct Discharge to Coastal
Waters.
2. Salts in Cooling Water
a. Designs shall take into account the reduced thermal performance as well as other
physical and chemical properties of seawater.
b. Salts emissions from cooling tower drift shall be controlled with drift eliminators.
c. Corrosion resistant materials shall be used in any equipment and structures related
to the seawater cooling processes.
d. Scaling and bio-fouling shall be considered and controlled. The use of acids and
biocides shall comply with environmental regulations of the RCER.
3. Heat Exchangers
a. Connections to the seawater cooling utility shall be made only via non-contact heat
exchangers.
b. Flow and temperature sensors, indicators, and SCADA monitoring shall be provided
on all connections between heat exchanger(s) and seawater cooling utilities. Water
quality sampling ports shall also be provided on both withdrawal and discharge
connections.
c. Appropriate isolation valves, bypasses, provisions for cleaning, and related
appurtenances shall be provided on heat exchangers and their related connection
piping.
4. Seawater Cooling Towers (SCT)
a. Type, design and operation of cooling towers shall be in compliance with RCER
Volume 1 Section 3.6.0.
b. Siting of SCT shall not cause impact to downwind receptors.
c. SCT drift shall be controlled with double layer drift eliminators to keep drift loss to
<0.0005%.
d. Materials of construction shall be of corrosion resistant materials such as FRP, PVC
etc.
e. Blowdown (purge) from SCT is designated as a variance stream and shall be
managed in accordance with the RCER regulations.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 59
f. SCT shall include a plan to control and monitor biological water quality for Legionella
bacteria.
D. Water Quality and Treatment
1. General
a. Refer to Subsection 5.9.3, General, for relevant definitions, abbreviations, Codes
and Standards, and more.
2. Design and Approval Sequence
a. Establish Ambient Receiving Waters and Aquatic Environments
b. Environmental Design Criteria
1) System Layout and Configuration
(a) Proposed Discharge
(1) Type
(i) The type of discharge (submerged, deep sea, etc.) shall be
described and compared to other options not chosen.
(2) Location
(i) The proposed discharge location shall be shown on a survey
map with bathymetry. The map shall include the location of
other outfalls and intakes within potential influence of the
proposed discharge.
(b) Frequency
(1) Once Through
(i) This type of system configuration involves a single pass of
seawater through a heat exchanger to transfer the heat
energy.
(2) Recirculating
(i) This type of system configuration involves multiple passes
through a heat exchanger and is not preferred due to the
larger temperature increase in the seawater.
(c) Heat Exchanger Type
(1) Contact
(i) This type of system is not allowed since it mixes seawater with
the industrial process and materials being cooled.
(2) Noncontact System
(i) This system has a barrier between the seawater and the
industrial liquid being cooled.
2) Model Types
(a) For modeling types refer to Subsection 5.7.5.E. The type of model to
meet RCJ requirements and will need to be compatible with the regional
model for the area.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 60
3) Importance to the Environment

(a) The model shall incorporate temperature and other parameters that
provide assurance that any impacts to the environment will be identified.
c. Proposed Impacts
1) Water Flow
(a) Volume / Flow rate of Seawater Needed
(1) The Applicant shall list the flow rate and volume of water that will be
needed for the proposed facility. Any variations (diurnal or
seasonal) shall be identified.
2) Thermal Load
(a) Anticipated Rise of Discharge
(1) The anticipated temperature rise in the cooling seawater shall be
calculated and supported by calculations meeting the requirements
of RCJ. The anticipated temperature rise shall not exceed the
limitations in the RCER Volume 1 Section 3.6.0, Seawater Cooling
Tower Regulations, and the associated table(s).
3) Chemical Additives
(a) Biocides
(1) Any proposed biocides shall be listed in the application in addition
to the proposed amount to be used and frequency of usage.
Proposed biocide use shall comply with RCER water quality
requirements to the satisfaction of the RCJ, and shall be
demonstrated as such to the RCJ prior to biocide use.
(b) Phosphorus and Chromium
(1) Chromium or phosphorous based water treatment chemicals are
not permitted. Sulfuric acid for scale control is also not permitted.
Refer to RCER Volume 1 Section 3.6.0 Seawater Cooling Tower
Regulations.
(c) Oxygen
(1) The dissolved oxygen level shall not be reduced in the returned
seawater.
(d) Other
(1) All additives must meet the approval requirements of the RCJ.
Records shall be kept of all chemical use and shall be supplied to
RCJ as required.
4) Submittal to and Review by RCJ
(a) Based on the application and information received, the RCJ will
determine acceptance of the proposed facility through issuance of the
Permit to Construct.
5) Long Term Monitoring
(a) Thermal

Rev. 0 5.7 - 61
(1) Thermal rise in the cooling seawater shall be monitored and

recorded in a permanent log submitted periodically to the RCJ.
(b) Biocide Concentration
(1) All Biocide use shall be monitored with a permanent log submitted
periodically to the RCJ.
(c) Aquatic Environmental Quality
(1) Species Prevalence
(i) The local aquatic species shall be inventoried with a listing of
all species and endangered species present.
(2) Reef Health and Assessment
(i) The reef (and local aquatic area) shall be monitored according
to internationally accepted criteria for the life of the project.
Reports shall be submitted to RCJ and any degradation shall
be noted.
(3) pH
(i) The pH of the local marine environment shall be monitored
and included in the reports discussed above.
E. Hydraulic Modeling
1. General
a. Hydraulic modeling is required for the design of connections to the seawater cooling
systems.
b. The model type shall be compatible with the seawater cooling system model. Model
format shall be approved by the RCJ prior to completion.
c. RCJ modeling results shall be included in the design basis report.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.A.1, General, for relevant definitions, abbreviations,
Codes and Standards, and more.
2. Hydraulic and Thermal Loads
a. The hydraulic flow rates/conditions and thermal loads shall be estimated and
projected based on the process design. Justification and future loading
considerations shall be included in the modeling report.
b. The model shall also include thermal loading at point of discharge as well as a total
aggregate for the entire City system.
c. Jubail 1 Canal System: all withdrawals and returns shall be documented and
modeled.
d. Jubail 2 Seawater Cooling: All makeup water supply requirements as well blowdown
returns, including concentration cycle calculations, shall be documented and
modeled.
3. Modeling Report
a. A complete modeling report demonstrating compliance with RCER water quality
requirements shall be submitted to the RCJ for review and approval as part of the
permit to construct and operate.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 62
F. Distribution Piping and Valve Chambers

1. General
a. This Subsection covers the design and construction of distribution piping and valve
chambers that connect to the seawater cooling utility.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.A General for relevant definitions, abbreviations, Codes
2. Design and Approval
a. Submit Overall Proposed System Description
b. Design Criteria
1) Distribution Piping and Valve Chamber Layout and Configuration
(a) Proposed Seawater Withdrawal System
(1) Piping Size and Capacity
(i) The proposed pipe sizes and flow rate capacity shall be
depicted on a drawing and described in a narrative.
(2) Location of withdrawal
(i) The proposed seawater withdrawal location shall be depicted
on a map along with the relationships to other industrial
seawater withdrawal points.
c. Pipe Material
1) Pipe Material
(a) The proposed pipe material and wall thickness shall be noted.
2) Corrosion Protection
(a) The provisions to be taken to prevent corrosion to the piping, fittings and
other components shall be described.
3) Joining type / process
(a) The proposed joint type shall be described along with the process
involved with successfully joining the pipe.
4) Pressure / Strength
(a) The pressure rating, strength and durability shall be described. It shall
meet the requirements for the associated seawater cooling utility system.
5) Pipe Bedding and thrust restraint
(a) The pipe placement bedding and the locations and types of thrust
blocking shall also be described.
d. Valve Chamber
1) Valve / Sluice Gate Type And Sizes
(a) The proposed valves / sluice gates shall be depicted and described
along with the proposed locations.
2) Corrosion protection
(a) Methods proposed to eliminate corrosion shall be described in detail.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 63
3) Operator safety
(a) Railing / Access Safety
(1) The locations of railings, ladder / stair protections shall be depicted
and discussed. Current safety regulations shall be met.
(b) Access procedure / confined space permits
(1) The number of confined spaces shall be reduced. Any spaces
shall have clear designation of required safety procedures for
entering and the necessity to have air quality monitored by others
along with other procedures such as supplemental air.
(c) Lock out procedures during maintenance
(1) Procedures to notify all others involved with the operation that a
valve / sluice gate is being inspected shall be implemented and
described.
e. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
1) Valve / sluice gate status and control
(a) Automated control valves shall be provided to control the flow through
connections to the utility. A Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)
shall be prepared and included with the design submittal.
2) Lateral Flow rate monitoring
(a) Flow rate meters shall be provided in the laterals to monitor flow rates of
seawater from and back to the seawater distribution canals and
distribution pipes.
3) Connection to RCJ Monitoring Network
(a) The SCADA system shall provide for real time monitoring by RCJ of the
applicant’s seawater cooling process (including but not limited to those
components discussed above).
f. Submittal to and Review by RCJ
1) Decision by RCJ
(a) RCJ may require more information / data to allow them to make the
decisions regarding the proposed project.
g. Long Term Monitoring
1) Flow Rate and Seawater Volume Used and Returned
(a) The seawater flow rate and volume shall be monitored, recorded and
provided periodically to the RCJ.
2) Temperature Rise Monitoring in Return Water
(a) The seawater intake temperature vs the seawater temperature leaving
the facility shall be monitored, recorded and provided to the RCJ.
3) Valve / Gate Status
(a) The valve / gate status (open / closed) shall be monitored real time and
shall be included in the reports supplied to RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 64
G. Pumping Stations
1. General
a. This Subsection covers pumping stations that supply and convey seawater cooling
water, including those pumping systems for the off-take and the return to the utility
system.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.9.3. General, for relevant definitions, abbreviations, Codes
2. Design and Approval Sequence
a. Submit Overall Pump Station Design Report to RCJ for Review
b. Pump Station Location and Configuration
1) System Layout and Configuration
(a) Proximity to Other Facilities, Jetties and Channels
(1) Type
(i) The proposed pump station type shall be described in a design
report.
(2) Location
(i) The proposed location of the pump station shall be depicted on
a map which shall also locate other seawater users in that
system.
(3) Hydraulic Lift and Relationship to Extreme Tides
(i) The proposed hydraulic lift of the pump station and the
variations with tides, seasonal changes and during storm
events shall be included in the design report.
(b) Protection of Navigation
(1) Lighting and Signage
(i) Provisions to provide navigational lighting and signage to
protect vessels and pedestrians shall be included.
(2) Floating Barriers
(i) Floating barriers to prevent vessels from approaching the
pump intakes shall be included.
(c) Proposed Pumping System
(1) Number of Pumps
(i) The number of pumps to be operated and the flow capacity at
that time shall be described in the Design Basis Report.
Redundancy and backup pumps shall be provided.
(2) Total Capacity of Station
(i) The total pump station capacity (in cubic meters per second)
shall also be included in the Design Basis Report
(3) Intake Screen Type and Maintenance

Rev. 0 5.7 - 65
(i) Methods of cleaning the intake screens and intake piping shall
be described. The process for disposal of any material
removed from the screens shall be included. A design concept
shall be proposed to the RCJ for review. Design shall not
begin until RCJ approval is obtained.
(4) Biofouling Protection
(i) Techniques of removing biofouling from the pump station
intakes, piping or other components shall be included. The
methods shall not allow for the discharge of biocide agents
directly back to the seawater. Provisions to take portions of
the pump station out of service and to treat that section with
biocides shall be included. The biocide laden water shall then
be removed and treated at a wastewater treatment plant.
(5) Fish Protection Plan
(6) Provisions to minimize the mortality to fish at the intake to the
pumps shall be included. A design concept shall be proposed to
the RCJ for review. Design shall not begin until RCJ approval is
obtained.
(7) Corrosion Protection
(i) Materials of construction shall be corrosion resistant and
designed for seawater applications.
c. Pump Station Design
1) Hydraulic design and pump equipment selection shall take into account the
physical and chemical properties of seawater. Designs should consider the
use of variable frequency drives for the sea water cooling pumps to
accommodate varying flow conditions.
2) Railing / Access Safety
(a) Provisions to meet recognized occupational safety and health codes
shall be included in the design of all railings, elevation drops, access
locations, stairways, ladders and the entire facility.
3) Access procedure / confined space permits
(a) Minimize the number of confined spaces. Spaces which are considered
“confined” shall be noted as requiring permits prior to entry. Specific
requirements include but are not limited to air monitoring, extraction
protocols and the supplying on supplemental air. All areas requiring
confined space permits shall be identified and marked.
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.7.5.A for the definition of a confined space.
4) Lock out procedures during maintenance
(a) Maintenance near any motorized or electrical equipment will likely
require a specific “Lock Out” procedure. All equipment requiring this
procedure shall be identified and marked.
5) Separation of Public and Operational Areas
(a) To prevent the public from entering dangerous areas, a clear delineation
of public versus operational area shall be made. Sufficient signage and
barriers shall be provided.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 66
d. Electrical / Power System Design

1) Power Requirements
(a) The design report shall identify the pump station power type and required
power requirements.
(b) Independent power feeds and/or backup power systems shall be
provided.
2) Confirmation of Local Capacity and Service Type
(a) The ability of the local power grid to handle the proposed power load
shall be confirmed with the local power purveyor and RCJ.
3) Anticipated Energy Use / Conservation Plan
(a) The anticipated energy use amount shall be predicted and included in
the design report. The use of energy conserving equipment such as
variable speed pumps shall be reviewed for feasibility.
e. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
1) Pump on / off / status monitoring
(a) The pumps shall each provide a Pump on /off SCADA signal to a local
and regional (RCJ) monitoring system.
2) Pump Flow Rate / Meter Monitoring
(a) The pumps shall also provide a flow rate / meter signal SCADA signal to
a local and regional (RCJ) monitoring system.
3) Emergency / Pump Alarm Signals
(a) The pumps and the pump station fire alarm system shall provide
emergency / alarm signals to a local and regional (RCJ) monitoring
system.
4) Connection to RCJ Monitoring Network
(a) Connections to the regional RCJ system shall be made in an
electronically compatible method with the applicable analog or digital
signals as requested by RCJ. The method to transfer the signals shall
be by fiber optics or other method as approved by RCJ.
f. Operation and Maintenance
1) Maintenance Schedule
(a) The proposed maintenance schedule for the pumps, impellers, valve and
gates shall be identified for review by the RCJ. The goal is to provide a
reliable pump station for the community.
2) Spare Part Inventory
(a) An inventory of parts for the pumps, motors, valves and gates shall be
provided in the amount of 10% of the installed capacity for use in an
emergency.
3) Corrosion
(a) Materials for the pumps shall be corrosion resistant due to the salt water
environment they are to be placed.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 67
4) Provide overhead crane systems and supporting repair facilities/space

needed to maintain systems on long term basis.
g. Submittal of Detailed Design To and Review by RCJ
1) RCJ may request additional information to assist with their review of the
application.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 68
SUBSECTION 5.7.5 FUEL GAS
5.7.5 FUEL GAS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The intent of this Subsection is to provide the basis of design for storage and
transportation of liquid and gaseous fuels within the utility distribution system. The
Subsection requires adherence to the RCJ Environmental Regulations – Current
Edition, by reference, for the construction and operation of liquid and gas pipelines
and storage tanks.
b. The primary system is made up of a grid of mains and booster pumping
stations for the liquid fuels; gate stations for the gas fuels; a n d necessary storage
facilities. Further distribution to the consumers is accomplished through
secondary and tertiary systems. Pumping stations located at the storage tanks
that provide the hydraulic head for the secondary and tertiary systems are
included as part of the primary system.
c. The design criteria for a unique liquid fuel or gas system may differ from the
guidelines contained herein. However, all designs shall be approved by the RCJ
prior to construction.
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection provides the basis for the design of fuel gas utilities defined in
Subsection 5.7.6. The guidelines apply to the following:
1) This Subsection provides general guidelines and prescribes the requirements
for selection, furnishing, installing, testing and bringing into full satisfactory
operational conditions of the Fuel Gas Utility piping and storage tank systems.
2) These criteria provide mandatory, minimally acceptable requirements for the
RCJ new and retrofit projects for RCJ.
3) This document contains policy and designer requirements to be used in the
design and documentation of the RCJ projects.
4) The provisions of this document are not intended to prohibit the use of
alternative systems, methods or devices not specifically prescribed by this
document, provided the RCJ has approved such alternatives.
5) Project conditions may dictate the need for design that exceeds these
minimum requirements.
6) Existing and proposed fuel gas utilities shall be included on civil site plans
b. Definitions
c. Gas and Fuel Piping:
1) Refer to the RCJ Engineering Manual specific to discipline.
2) Refer to ASME B31.1, Chapter 1, Code for Power Piping.
3) Refer to ASME B31.3, Chapter 1, Code for Process Piping.
4) Refer to ASME B31.4, Chapter 1, Code for Pipeline Transportation Systems.
5) Refer to ASME B31.8, Chapter 1, Code for Gas Transmission and Distribution
Piping Systems.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 69
6) Refer to CFR 195, Subpart A, Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by

Pipeline.
7) Refer to CFR 192, Subpart A, Transportation of Natural And Other Gas by
Pipeline.
8) Refer to NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code for Pressures up to 125 psig.
9) Refer to International Fuel Gas Code, Section 3.1.6, UMC Fuel Gas Piping
Chapter and IPC Fuel Piping Chapter
d. Gas and Fuel Tanks:
1) For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.0.
2) Refer to Engineering Standard SAES-D-001, Section 4, and Design Criteria
for Pressure Vessels.
3) Refer to Engineering Standard SAES-D-100, Section 4, and Design Criteria
for Atmospheric and Low Pressure Tanks. API 620/650/651.
4) Refer to Engineering Standard SAES-D-109, Section 4, and Design of Small
Tanks.
c. Pumps
1) For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.0.
3. Abbreviations
4) ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
5) AWS American Welding Society
6) GPCS General Procurement Construction Specifications
7) IMC International Mechanical Code
8) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valves & Fittings Ind.
9) NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
11) OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
12) RCJDC RCJ Design Criteria
13) RCJ RC Jubail
15) UL Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
16) UMC Uniform Mechanical Code

Rev. 0 5.7 - 70
a. Not used at this time.

5. Codes
b. Applicable Codes
1) SBC SAUDI BUILDING CODE
2) IBC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE
3) IFC INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE
4) IFGC INTERNATIONAL FUEL AND GAS CODE
5) IMC INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE
6) SBC SAUDI BUILDING CODES 201, 501 and 801
6. Standards
1) ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
2) API AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE
3) ASME AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
4) ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
5) AWS AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY
6) NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARDS,
specifically NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1), National Fuel Gas Code
7) SAES SAUDI ARAMCO ENGINEERING STANDARDS
b. Pumps
1) SAES-G-007 - Submersible Pumps and Motors for water Well and Offshore
Service
2) ANSI/API 610 – Centrifugal Pumps for General Refinery Service.
3) DIN EN ISO 5199 – Technical specifications for Centrifugal Pumps.
4) ASME B73.1 – Specification for Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pumps.
5) ASME B73.2 – Specifications for Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps.
c. Tanks and Vessels
1) API 650 - Welded Tanks for Oil Storage
2) API 653 - Tank Inspection, Repair, Alteration and Reconstruction
3) API 651 - Cathodic Protection of Aboveground Storage Tanks
4) API 620 - Design and Construction of Large Welded Low Pressure Storage
Tanks
5) AES-A-005 - Safety Instruction Sheet
6) SAES-A-102 - Air Pollutant Emission Source Control
7) SAES-A-112 - Meteorological and Seismic Design Data

Rev. 0 5.7 - 71
8) SAES-B-005 - Spacing and Diking for Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Tanks

9) SAES-B-017 - Fire Water System Design
10) SAES-B-018 - Air Foam Systems for Storage Tanks
11) SAES-B-054 - Access, Egress, and Materials Handling for Plant Facilities
12) SAES-B-055 - Plant Layout
13) SAES-B-057 - Safety Requirements: Refrigerated and Pressure Storage
Vessels
14) SAES-H-001 - Selection Requirements for Industrial Coatings
15) SAES-H-101 - Approved Protective Coating Systems
16) SAES-J-300 - Level
17) SAES-J-600 - Pressure Relief Devices
18) SAES-M-001 - Structural Design Criteria for Non-Building Structures
19) SAES-N-001 - Basic Criteria, Industrial Insulation
20) SAES-P-111 - Grounding
21) SAES-P-123 - Lighting
22) SAES-Q-005 - Concrete Foundations
23) SAES-X-500 - Cathodic Protection of Vessels and Tank Internals
24) SAES-X-600 - Cathodic Protection of Plant Facilities
25) SAES-D-100 - Design Criteria of Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Tanks. API
651, API 650 and API 620.
26) SAES-D-001 - Design Criteria for Pressure Vessels
27) SAES-D-108 - Repair, Alteration and Reconstruction of Storage Tanks
28) SAES-D-109 - Design of Small Tanks
29) SAER-5800 - Use of Aluminum Geodesic Dome Roofs on External Floating
Roof Tanks
30) 32-SAMSS-005 - Manufacture of Atmospheric Tanks
31) 32-SAMSS-006 - Manufacture of Low-Pressure Tanks
32) 32-SAMSS-017 - Side-Entry Mixers
d. Pumps For Infrastructure Utilities Systems
1) SAES-G-007 - Submersible Pumps and Motors for water Well and Offshore
Service.
2) ANSI/API 610 – Centrifugal Pumps for General Refinery Service.
3) DIN EN ISO 5199 – Technical specifications for Centrifugal Pumps.
4) ASME B73.1 – Specification for Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pumps.
5) ASME B73.2 – Specifications for Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps.
7. Related Sections
a. Underground and Aboveground Liquid Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings:

Rev. 0 5.7 - 72
1) Section 3.2 Zoning Regulations

2) Section 3.5 Environmental Protection And Preservation
3) Section 3.6 Safety Standards
4) Chapter 4 Project Submission Standards And Requirements
5) Chapter 5 Design Guidelines
8. Approvals
a. The RCJ shall review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications.
B. Commissioning
a. Refer to GPCS.
C. Natural Gas Distribution:
a. All materials used shall meet the requirements of the Contract.
b. All materials used shall be selected to meet applicable system requirements such as
exposure, temperature and pressure.
1) Refer to Chapter 5.1 – Design Guidelines
c. All material shall be selected in consideration of the environmental conditions.
d. In selecting material, special attention shall be given to corrosion resistance.
Corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or painting on
ordinary material shall be as specified.
e. All material shall also be selected in consideration of the ease of shipment,
installation and maintenance.
f. All pipes aboveground and placed underground shall have external protection by
using suitable coating, or tape wrap. In addition, an impressed current or galvanic
cathodic protection system shall be considered in the design of underground piping.
g. Materials shall be selected using mechanical properties and other specifications in
the latest issue of ASTM Standards Specifications.
h. Pipe diameter shall be selected to meet the following design criteria:
1) Gas velocity.
2) Pressure drop providing required downstream gas pressure as specified by
the end use.
2. Underground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings
a. Piping shall be fabricated to transport gas fuels under a pressurized system.
b. Design criteria shall take into consideration various materials, coatings, fittings,
flanges, Valves and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the design the
manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular production
components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106 or A53M, black, Grade B, seamless
or electric resistance welded (ERW), Schedule 80 or 40 as a minimum.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 73
(b) Establish maximum load ratings with consideration for allowable stresses
prescribed by ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.8.
2) Fittings
(a) Conform to ASTM A234M, wrought carbon steel or alloy steel or ASME
B16.11, forged steel, butt-welded joints.
(b) Conform to ASME B16.11 forged steel, socket welded joints.
(c) Joints shall be welded in conformance to ASME B31.1.
3) Flanges
(a) Flat Face Weld Neck
(b) Raised Face Weld Neck
4) Valves
(a) Ball Valve
(b) Gate Valve
5) Specialties – Refer to GPCS Section – Underground Gas Fuel Specialties.
(a) This Subsection covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping
specialties shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required
to complete the Work.
(1) Pressure Indicators and Gauges
(2) Temperature Indicators and Sensors
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(5) Pipeline Markers
(6) Cathodic Protection System
(i) Impressed Current with Rectifiers
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing.
1) Refer to GPCS Section Regulatory Requirements
d. Railroad Crossing.
1) This Specification shall apply to the design and construction of pipelines
carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances and casings containing
wires, cables and carrier pipes across and along railroad property and
facilities.
(a) General Requirements
(1) Use of Casing Pipe
(i) A casing pipe Shall be required for all pipeline crossings
carrying liquid or gaseous substances
(ii) Pressure pipelines that are located within 8 m of the centerline
of any track shall be cased.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 74
(2) Location of Pipeline on Railroad Right-of-Way

(i) Pipelines laid longitudinally along railroad right-of-way shall be
located as far as practicable from any tracks or other important
structures and as close to the railroad property line as
possible. Longitudinal pipelines shall not be located in earth
embankments or within ditches located on the right-of-way.
(ii) Pipelines shall be located, where practicable, to cross tracks at
approximate right angles to the track, but preferably at not less
than 45 degrees.
(iii) Pipelines shall not be placed within a culvert, under railroad
bridges, nor closer than 14 m to any portion of any railroad
bridge, buildings, or other important structure, except as
(iv) Pipelines shall not be located within the limits of a turnout
(switch) when crossing the track. The limits of the turnout
extend from the point of the switch to 5 m beyond the last
timber.
(3) Depth of Installation
(i) Casing pipes under railroad tracks shall be not less than 2 m
from base of rail to top of pipe at its closest point. On other
portions of the right-of-way, where the pipe is not directly
beneath the track, the depth from ground surface or from
bottom of ditch to top of pipe shall not be less than 1 meter.
Where 1 meter cannot be provided from bottom of ditch, a 15
centimeter thick reinforced concrete slab shall be provided
over the pipeline for protection.
(ii) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way, 15 meter
or less from centerline track shall be buried not less than 2 m
from ground surface to top of pipe. Where the pipeline is laid
more than 15 m from centerline of track, the minimum cover
shall be at least 1.5 m.
(4) Modification of Existing Facilities
(i) Any replacement or modifications of an existing carrier pipe
and/or casing shall be considered as a new installation,
subject to the requirements for new installations.
(5) Abandoned Facilities
(i) Abandoned pipelines shall be removed or completely filled with
cement grout, compacted sand, or other methods as approved
by the RCJ.
(ii) Abandoned manholes and other structures shall be removed
to a minimum depth of 1.6 m below finished grade and
completely filled with cement grout, compacted sand, or other
methods approved by the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 75
(6) Insulation
(i) Pipelines and casings shall be suitably insulated from
underground conduits carrying electrical wires on the railroad
right-of-way.
(7) Corrosion Protection and Petroleum Leak Protection
(i) Pipelines on the railroad right-of-way that carry petroleum
products or hazardous liquids shall be designed in accordance
with current RCJ or industry regulations that mandate leak
detection automatic shutoff, leak monitoring, sacrificial anodes,
impressed current rectifiers, and/or exterior coatings to
minimize corrosion and prevent petroleum releases.
(8) Plastic Carrier Pipe Materials
(i) Plastic carrier pipelines shall be encased.
(ii) Plastic pipe material shall not be used to convey liquid
flammable substances.
(iii) Plastic carrier pipe may be utilized to convey flammable gas
products provided the pipe material is compatible with the type
of product conveyed and the maximum allowable operating
pressure is less than 7 kilogram/centimeter².
e. Water Crossing.
1) Refer to GPCS Section – Regulatory Requirements and Environmental
Protection and Preservation
f. Foreign Utility Crossing
1) Refer to GPCS Section – Regulatory Requirements
g. Miscellaneous foreign Structure Crossing
3. Aboveground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings
a. Piping shall be fabricated to transport gas fuels under a pressurized system. Refer
to GPCS Sections:
1) High Pressure Piping.
2) Low Pressure Piping.
flanges, Valves, pipe supports, hangers and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the
design the manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular
production components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106, black, Grade B, seamless or electric
resistance welded (ERW), Schedule 80 or 40 as a minimum.
prescribed by ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.8.
2) Fittings

Rev. 0 5.7 - 76
3) Flanges
4) Valves
(a) Ball Valve
(b) Gate Valve
5) Specialties – Refer to GPCS.
(a) This GPCS covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(6) Pipe Supports and Hangers
(7) Expansion Joints
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing.
1) Under the road crossing
2) Over the road crossing
1) This specification shall apply to the design and construction of pipelines
carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances and casings containing
wires, cables and carrier pipes across and along railroad property and
facilities.
(1) Use of Pipe Bridge
(i) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipeline crossings

Rev. 0 5.7 - 77
(ii) Pressure pipelines that are located within 8 m of the

centerline of any track shall be cased.
(i) (i) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way shall
be located as far as practicable from any tracks or other
important structures and as close to the railroad property line
as possible. Longitudinal pipelines shall not be located in
earth embankments or within ditches located on the right-of-
way.
(ii) (ii) Pipelines shall be located, where practicable, to cross
tracks at approximate right angles to the track, but preferably
at not less than 45 degrees.
(iii) (iii) Pipelines shall not be placed within a culvert, under
railroad bridges, nor closer than 14 m to any portion of any
railroad bridge, buildings, or other important structure, except
in special cases, and then by special design, as approved by
the Chief Engineer of the RCJ.
(iv) (iv) Pipelines shall not be located within the limits of a
turnout (switch) when crossing the track. The limits of the
turnout extend from the point of the switch to 5 m beyond the
last timber.
(ii) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way, 15 m or
less from centerline track shall be buried not less than 2 m
shall be at least 1.5m
subject to the requirements of this specification.
(i) Abandoned pipelines shall be removed or completely filled
with cement grout, compacted sand, or other methods as

Rev. 0 5.7 - 78
(7) Insulation
right-of-way.
products or hazardous liquids shall be designed in
accordance with RCJ or industry standards that mandate leak
detection automatic shutoff, leak monitoring, sacrificial
anodes, impressed current rectifiers, and/or exterior coatings
to minimize corrosion and prevent petroleum releases.
products provided the pipe material is compatible with the
type of product conveyed and the maximum allowable
operating pressure is less than 7 kilogram/centimeter².
e. Water Crossing.
1) Refer to GPCS – Regulatory Requirements and Environmental Protection and
Preservation
D. Liquid Fuel Distribution:
exposure, temperature and pressure.
1) Refer to Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines
Corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or painting on
ordinary material shall be specified.
1) Refer to GPCS Section – Underground Piping Materials

Rev. 0 5.7 - 79
f. All pipes aboveground and placed underground shall have external protection by
using epoxy coating, or tape wrap. In addition, an impressed current or galvanic
cathodic protection system shall be considered in the design of underground piping.
1) Refer to GPCS Section – High Performance Coatings
2) Refer to GPCS Section – Cathodic Process Corrosion Protection.
the latest issue of ASTM Standards Specifications
h. Pipe diameter selection. Pipe diameter shall be selected to meet the following
design criteria.
1) Gas velocity.
2) Pressure drop providing required downstream gas pressure as specified by
the end use.
2. Underground Liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings
to GPCS Sections:
flanges, Valves and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the design the
manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular production
components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106, black, Grade B, seamless or electric
prescribed by ASME B31.1 B31.4/.31.8 or MSS SP58
2) Fittings
3) Flanges
4) Valves
(a) Ball Valve
(b) Gate Valve

Rev. 0 5.7 - 80
5) Specialties – Refer to GPCS:

(a) This Section covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing.
1) Refer to GPCS – Regulatory Requirements
1) This specification shall apply to the design and construction of pipelines
carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances and along railroad
property and facilities.
(i) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipeline crossings
(ii) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipelines within 8 m of
the centerline of any track crossings carrying liquid or gaseous
substances
(i) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way shall be
located as far as practicable from any tracks or other important
structures and as close to the railroad property line as
possible. Longitudinal pipelines shall not be located in earth
embankments or within ditches located on the right-of-way.
(ii) Pipelines shall be located, where practicable, to cross tracks at
approximate right angles to the track, but preferably at not less
than 45 degrees.
bridge, buildings, or other important structure, except in special
cases, and then by special design, as approved by the Chief
Engineer of the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 81

timber.
(i) Abandoned pipelines shall be removed or completely filled with
cement grout, compacted sand, or other methods as approved
by the RCJ.
(6) Insulation
right-of-way.
products or hazardous liquids shall be designed in accordance
with current federal or state regulations that mandate leak
detection automatic shutoff, leak monitoring, sacrificial anodes,
impressed current rectifiers, and/or exterior coatings to
minimize corrosion and prevent petroleum releases.
products provided the pipe material is compatible with the type

Rev. 0 5.7 - 82
of product conveyed and the maximum allowable operating

pressure is less than 7 kilogram/centimeter².
e. Water Crossing.
Preservation
1) Refer to GPCS – Regulatory Requirements.
1) Refer to GPCS – Regulatory Requirements.
3. Aboveground liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings

to GPCS sections:
flanges, Valves, pipe supports, hangers and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the
design the manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular
production components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106, Grade B, seamless or electric
prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS SP58
2) Fittings
3) Flanges
4) Valves
(a) Ball Valve
(b) Gate Valve
5) Specialties – Refer to Section 3352xx
(a) This Section covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping

Rev. 0 5.7 - 83
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(6) Hangers and Supports
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing
1) Refer to Section 01 4 00 – Regulatory Requirements.
1) This engineering design guideline shall apply to the design and construction
of pipelines carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances, liquid or
gaseous substances across and along railroad property and facilities.
(1) Use of Pipe Bridge
(i) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipeline crossings.
(ii) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipelines within 8 m of
the centerline of any track crossings.
(i) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way shall be
located as far as practicable from any tracks or other
important structures and as close to the railroad property line
as possible. Longitudinal pipelines shall not be located in
earth embankments or within ditches located on the right-of-
way.
(ii) Pipelines shall be located, where practicable, to cross tracks
at approximate right angles to the track, but preferably at not
less than 45 degrees.
bridge, buildings, or other important structure, except in
special cases, and then by special design, as approved by
the Director of Engineering of the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 84

timber.
(i) Abandoned pipelines shall be removed or completely filled
with cement grout, compacted sand, or other methods as
to a minimum depth of 2 feet below finished grade and
(7) Insulation
right-of-way.
products or hazardous liquids shall be designed in
accordance with US CFR 49t Transportation of Hazardous
Liquids by Pipeline which mandates leak detection automatic
shutoff, leak monitoring, sacrificial anodes, impressed current
rectifiers, and/or exterior coatings to minimize corrosion and
prevent petroleum releases.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 85
(10) Structural design of the crossing need to follow chapter 5.2 of the
GEM
e. Water Crossing.
Preservation
Preservation
Preservation and Section 5.2 of the GEM
E. Storage Tanks:
a. This Subsection defines the minimum mandatory requirements governing the
selection and mechanical design of atmospheric and low-pressure storage tanks in
accordance with API STD 650, Latest Edition or API STD 620, Latest Edition. This
standard also defines the requirements for horizontal storage tanks in low-pressure
service. All materials used shall meet the requirements of the Contract.
1) Design Criteria for pressure vessels refer to SAES-D-001
2) Design Criteria for atmospheric and low pressure tanks refer to SAES-D-100
3) Design Criteria for small tanks refer to SAES-D-001 and API 620 and 650.
compatibility, exposure, temperature and pressure.
1) The materials of construction for pressure and non-pressure components
shall be based on the design temperature, minimum design metal
temperature and service in accordance with 32-SAMSS-004, Table 1,
Acceptable Materials for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steels.
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor may propose alternative materials to those
specified in 32-SAMSS-004, Table 1, at time of proposal, with prior approval
of RCJ. Alternative materials shall comply with all the requirements of the
applicable Code and this Subsection.
1) Refer to Section 3.5.0 – Environmental Protection and Preservation
1) Either corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or
painting on ordinary material shall be as specified in accordance with GPCS –
Painting and Coatings
e. All material shall also be selected in consideration of safety, the ease of shipment,
2. Underground Gas Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store gas fuels under a pressurized system.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 86
b. Design criteria shall take into consideration various materials and coatings.
Incorporate in the design foundations, ring walls, etc.
c. Wind and earthquake loads shall be determined by the vessel manufacturer.
d. Utilize foundations and supports to support systems under all conditions of
operation.
f. All tanks placed underground shall have external corrosion protection by using an
approved coating system.
the latest issue of ASTM Standards Specifications
3. Aboveground Gas Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store gas fuels under a pressurized or atmospheric
system
Incorporate in the design foundations, and ring walls.
c. Establish maximum wind and earthquake load ratings with consideration for
allowable stresses prescribed by API 650.
operation.
f. All tanks placed aboveground shall have external protection by using an approved
coating system.
h. Refer to CPCS Section 33 56 53 Compressed Gas Storage Aboveground
4. Underground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store liquid fuels under a pressurized or atmospheric
system
Incorporate in the design foundations and ring walls.
allowable stresses prescribed by API 650.
operation.
f. All tanks placed underground shall have external protection by using an approved
coating system.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 87
h. Refer to GPCS - Liquid Fuel Tanks Aboveground

5. Aboveground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store gas fuels under a pressurized or atmospheric
system
Incorporate in the design foundations, ring walls, etc.
allowable stresses prescribed by API 650...
operation.
f. All tanks placed aboveground shall have external protection by using an approved
coating system.
h. Refer to GPCS - Liquid Fuel Tanks Aboveground.
6. Tank Appurtenances
a. Refer to SAES-D-100, Section 9
b. Internal Floating Roof
1) Primary and secondary seals shall be included in the design. Seals shall also
apply to column supports, gauge poles, ladders and all penetrations of the
roof.
c. External Floating Roof
1) Primary and secondary seals shall be included in the design. Seals shall also
apply to gauge poles and all penetrations of the roof
d. Fixed Roofs
e. Floating Suction Lines
f. Clips and Attachments
1) Ladders
2) Platforms
3) Stairs
g. Nozzles, Man ways and Gaskets
1) Pump Suction Nozzle
2) Fill Nozzle
3) Water Draw Off Connections
4) Cleanout Fittings
h. Vents
i. Mixers

Rev. 0 5.7 - 88
j. Level Instrumentation
k. Roof Drain
l. Lighting
m. Grounding
n. Fire Protection System
o. Vessel Supports
1) Support for Vertical Vessels
2) Support for Horizontal Vessels
7. Under Tank Leak Detection and Sub-Grade Protection.
8. Painting and Coating.
9. Insulation.
10. Lighting.
11. Grounding.
12. Cathodic Protection.
a. Refer to SAES-D-100, Section 14 and API 651
13. Foundations.
F. Pumps:
1. Transfer Pumps
2. Submersible Fuel Pumps
a. This Section specifies common requirements for the system design and installation
of Submersible Liquid Fuel Pumps.
b. All material shall be selected in consideration of the environmental conditions.
c. Basis of Design Product: To satisfy demands to meet temperature and viscosity of
all well environments during the delivery of fuel from a storage vessel to a receiving
vessel.
d. Basis of Design Product: To satisfy demands to meet temperature and viscosity of
all well environments during the delivery of fuel from a storage vessel to a receiving
vessel.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 89
SUBSECTION 5.7.7 COMMUNICATIONS
5.7.6 ELECTRICAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section covers the RCJ’s Distribution System, which includes distribution to,
but not limited to the following: Residential, Commercial and Institutional, Healthcare
Facilities, Light Industrial Facilities large and Heavy Industrial Plants. Large and
heavy industrial plants in Jubail Industrial City and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City shall
be supplied directly by the utility high voltage substations and interface/coordination
requirements with the Saudi Electric Company – Eastern Operating Area (SEC-
EOA).
b. It is essential to follow certain safe procedures for installation of electrical wiring
system throughout the project.
2. Applicability
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.2 for electrical applicability.
b. All buried and aboveground electrical infrastructure shall be shown on civil site
plans.
1) Refer to 5.7.0 Utilities.
2) This requirement includes electrical lines, transformers, generators, etc.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.3 for electrical definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.4 for electrical abbreviations.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.5 for electrical general requirements.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.6 for environmental conditions which shall be utilized for
design of electrical systems.
7. Codes
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.7 for a listing of the applicable Codes.
8. Standards
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.8 for a listing of the applicable standards.
9. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.
10. Approvals
a. The RCJ shall review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications,
reference Section 1.1.0 Introduction.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 90
B. Commissioning
1. References
C. Primary Electrical Distribution
1. General
a. For the purposes of this Guiding Engineering Manual, the primary power distribution
shall include all medium voltage components.
2. Community Area Primary Distribution System
a. The distribution voltage to power the community area shall be determined by Saudi
Electric Company (SEC-EOA) substations in Jubail Industrial City.
3. Industrial Area Primary Distribution System
a. Primary Industries Power Sources
1) The distribution voltage to power the industrial area shall be determined by
Saudi Electric Company (SEC-EOA) substations in Jubail Industrial City.
2) Such industries provide their own local substations to supply the loads
throughout the industrial development in their boundary lot.
3) Primary industries are not within the scope of this chapter. This chapter
applies only to secondary industries, support industries and infrastructure
loads in the industrial area such as Sewage Plants, Materials Handling,
Maintenance Facilities, Street Lighting, etc.
b. Secondary Industries, Support Industries and Infrastructure Power Sources
1) Power to secondary industries, support industries, and infrastructure loads
are supplied at 115 kV, 34.5 kV, or 33 kV from strategically located RCJ
substations fed from SEC-EOA substation.
2) The principal loads shall be supplied from loop feeders extending from the
switching stations or substations. These feeders are connected to a pair of
buses at each switching station. The user receiving these feeders has the
option of using either manual or automatic load transfer.
3) General utility loads such as Street Lighting, Traffic Signals, Lift stations, and
power Service shall be supplied from loop feeders or substation.
(a) This service consists of two 34.5 kV, 33 kV, or 13.8 kV 3-phase, 4-
wire, 60Hz feeders.
c. Electrical Interface
1) The electrical interfaces at the various infrastructure loads shall be at the
kWHR metering.
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface
a. General
1) This Section classifies power services, metering and interface to consumers
according to types of consumers and their supply requirements.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 91
2) The classification of power services and associated metering configuration

are determined by SEC-EOA Standards.
(a) Revenue metering for installations with voltages up to 34.5 kV shall be in
accordance SEC-EOA Metering and Installation Standard (MIS) SDS-5.
All electrical services shall be designed in accordance with this and other
applicable SEC-EOA Standards.
(b) Revenue metering for installations at transmission voltages (69 kV and
above) shall be coordinated with SEC-EOA Transmission Department.
3) Metering for services with voltages up to and including 34.5 kV are classified
into one of three designations which include:
(a) Whole current metering – 150 A and below.
(b) Low voltage CT metering – above 150 A.
(c) Medium voltage - bulk metering.
4) Provision for fiber optic for digital review kWHR Meters shall be provided in
accordance with SEC-EOA requirements.
5) These service classifications shall apply to all new services. Certain existing
services and metering installations do not conform to these Standards. Such
existing installations shall be permitted to continue, but all new installations
shall be required to meet these Standards.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall obtain the approval and stamping of the
drawings from the SEC-EOA before submission of the IFC drawings.
7) Arrangements, other than those described in this Section and in SEC SDS-5,
shall be approved by the Supplier in advance.
D. Secondary Electrical Utility
1. General
a. The secondary electrical utility is identified as the electrical distribution downstream
of the high voltage distribution system. For the purposes of the Guiding Engineering
Manual, the secondary electrical utility covers the systems 34.5 kV and below.
2. Community Area Secondary Distribution System
a. The District and distribution substations step down the voltage from 115 kV to 13.8
kV, which is distributed throughout the various zones and sectors of the district.
b. 13.8 kV Distribution Network
1) All 13.8 kV distribution feeders are routed underground. The feeders are
direct buried or reinforced concrete encased PVC or in accordance with SEC-
EOA Standard SDCS-02 under road crossings.
2) There are 3 types of 13.8 kV circuits as follows:
(a) Radial feeders.
(b) Loop feeders.
(c) Lateral feeders.
3) Radial feeders originate at a 13.8 kV bus and distribute radially to the load
served.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 92
4) Loop feeders are fed from two different 13.8 kV buses at the substation and
distribute to form a primary loop arrangement. This loop is opened at a
midpoint of the feeder to prevent interconnection between the two 13.8 kV
buses but provides redundancy of supply shall there be a problem with one of
the substation buses.
5) Lateral feeders are tapped from the loop feeders through pad mounted
switches which include the Ring Main Units (RMU) for the loop feeder and
vacuum interrupter switches to supply the electrical loads. The pad mounted
switchgear is installed at strategic locations to serve discrete Residential,
Commercial and Institutional loads.
6) Distribution feeders shall be installed in accordance with the latest SEC-EOA
Standard SDPS.
c. Residential Loads
1) The low voltage supply to residential unit is supplied from 13.8 kV to 400/230
V substations located throughout the housing scheme. Each substation is
supplied by lateral feeders connected to the primary loop arrangement. The
lateral feeders in combination with the primary loops ensure that each
transformer in the substation has at least two independent electrical paths
back to the district substation.
2) Four sizes of residential pad mounted transformers are used in the
community area. Those are 300 kVA, 500 kVA, 1000 kVA, and 1500 kVA.
3) The size and number of transformers is dependent on the number of
residential units served. Load calculations shall be completed in accordance
with the latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS to determine the size of each
transformer used.
d. Commercial, Government, Institutional, and other Facility Loads
1) Commercial, Government and Institutional facilities shall receive low voltage
or medium voltage services as required to support the loads. Small facilities
may be provided with low voltage supply while larger facilities may accept a
medium voltage service to accommodate the associated loads and desired
level of reliability.
2) Low Voltage Supply
(a) The low voltage supply to smaller commercial, government and
institutional buildings are supplied from 13.8 kV to 400/230 V substations
located adjacent to the building. Each substation is supplied by lateral
feeders connected to the primary loop arrangement. The lateral feeders
in combination with the primary loops ensure that each transformer in the
substation has at least two independent electrical paths back to the
district substation.
(b) Four sizes of commercial, government and institutional pad mounted
transformers are used in the community area. Those are 300 kVA, 500
kVA, 1000 kVA and 1500 kVA.
(c) The size and number of transformers is dependent on the loads
associated with each building. Load calculations shall be completed in
accordance with the latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS to determine the
size of each transformer used.
3) Medium Voltage Supply

Rev. 0 5.7 - 93
(a) Larger commercial, government and institutional facilities have loads

which justify the use of dedicated 13.8 kV voltage feeders for the district
substation to the facility.
(b) Where all of the service equipment (medium voltage switchgear and
transformers) is located in public areas and is accessible to the utility
company, all of the service equipment shall be operated and maintained
by SEC-EOA. With this situation, multiple 13.8 kV feeders shall supply
the larger commercial, government and institutional facilities and may be
connected in a loop feeder arrangement inside the facility.
(c) Where the service equipment is not accessible to the local utility
company, the service equipment shall be furnished and installed by the
developer of the facility. With this situation, multiple 13.8 kV feeders
shall supply the larger commercial and institutional facilities and shall
terminate at SEC-EOA Inset located at the property line. From this
interface point, the developer of the facility shall provide distribution
switchgear to allow the 13.8 kV feeders to be extended throughout the
complex to supply the various electrical loads. These feeders shall be
installed in a loop arrangement and shall supply the low voltage service
equipment as described for the smaller commercial, government and
institutional buildings described above.
(d) The size and number of feeders and transformers is dependent on the
loads associated with each building. Load calculations shall be
completed in accordance with the latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS to
determine the quantity of feeders and the sizes of each transformer
used.
(e) Infrastructure Loads
(1) Smaller, general loads such as Street Lighting, Traffic Signals,
Emergency Phones, Bus Stops, Utility Pumping Stations, and
Service Stations shall be supplied from a loop feeder.
(2) This service consists of two 13.8 kV, 3-phase, 3-wire feeders,
extending from each switching station, and routed in ducts or direct
burial throughout the Community and Industrial Areas.
(3) Street lighting transformers shall supply lighting distribution panels
either directly or via low voltage distribution pillars or main
distribution panel as per SEC-EOA.
(4) Street lighting pillars are comprised of lighting distribution
panelboards with switched and un-switched buses.
3. Industrial Area Secondary Distribution System
a. Primary Industries Power Sources
1) The distribution voltage to power the primary industries area shall be
determined by Saudi Electric Company (SEC-EOA) substations in Jubail
Industrial City.
b. Secondary Industries, Support Industries and Infrastructure Power Sources
1) Power to secondary industries, support industries, and infrastructure loads
are typically supplied at 115 kV, 34.5 kV, or 33 kV from strategically located
RCJ substations fed from SEC-EOA. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7.C.3.b. above.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 94
2) Where the most convenient power source to the secondary and support
facilities in the industrial area is the 13.8 kV electrical distribution system, it
may be permissible to supply these loads from the 13.8 kV system. The use
of the 13.8 kV source shall be discussed with the RCJ to obtain approval prior
to proceeding with this option.
3) The principal loads shall be supplied from loop feeders extending from the
switching stations or substations. These feeders are connected to a pair of
buses at each switching station. The user receiving these feeders has the
option of using either manual or automatic load transfer.
4) Smaller, general loads such as Street Lighting, Traffic Signals, Emergency
Phones, Bus Stops, Utility Pumping Stations, and Service Stations shall be
supplied from a loop feeder.
(a) With the RCJ’s approval, this service consists of two 13.8 kV, 3-
phase, 3-wire feeders, extending from each switching station, and
routed in ducts or direct burial throughout the Industrial Area.
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7.C.4 Service Classification, Metering and Interface.
E. Design Criteria
1. General
a. The electrical source for a facility is dependent on the type of facility, estimated
electrical loads, and proximity of the available electric source.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with the RCJ and SEC-EOA to
review the characteristics of the facility to determine the appropriate electrical source
for each facility.
c. The electrical service for each facility shall consider the following criteria in
establishing the appropriate source and configuration:
1) The voltage source selection is determined by the RCJ in concert with SEC-
EOA and is dependent on the magnitude of the load and availability in the
region of the development.
2) The transformer size and location is determined from the load calculations
and the size shall be selected in accordance with all applicable SEC-EOA
Standards.
3) Feeder size shall be determined from calculations in accordance with the
latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS and the routing shall be determined from the
physical conditions at the site for the new facility. The feeders shall be routed
underground and either direct buried or encased in a ductbank depending on
the final coordinated routing. Refer to Subsections 5.7.7.G Ductbanks and
5.7.7.H Direct Buried Installations for additional guidance on the installation
requirements for service feeders.
4) Metering configuration and location is dictated by the SEC-EOA Distribution
Planning Standards and is determined by the source voltage and magnitude
of the electrical load. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7.C.4 Service Classification,
Metering and Interface for additional guidance on the metering for a facility.
5) Design criteria and calculations shall be referred to Subsection 5.5.1 Electrical
for the proper selection of electrical items.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 95
F. Manholes and Handholes

1. Application
a. Concrete manholes and handholes shall be provided for underground electrical
cables to facilitate distribution throughout the city. Manholes shall be configured to
facilitate the routing of the cables. Manholes and handholes for medium voltage and
low voltage systems shall conform to the latest SEC-EOA Standards and their
structural design shall follow recommendation from chapter 5.2 of the GEM.
b. Manholes shall be provided at the following locations:
1) At each change in direction which exceeds 45 degrees.
2) At each service tap location.
3) At 90 m intervals along the route of the electrical cables.
2. Construction
a. Manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the standard details and
specifications.
b. Handholes shall be constructed in accordance with the standard details and
specifications.
G. Ductbanks and Sleeves
1. Application
a. The majority of the electrical distribution cables shall be direct buried except where
cables cross under main roads, roads under construction, concrete slabs or paved
areas that would require extensive or impractical excavation to replace; they shall be
run in a concrete encased ductbank. Before installation of cables, the raceways
and/or concrete encased ductbank shall be cleaned by mandrel of slightly smaller
diameter than the raceway followed by brush of slightly larger diameter than
raceway to remove sand, pebbles etc. A spare capacity of 50% shall be provided for
cable entry in the building. Concrete encased ductbanks for medium voltage and low
voltage systems shall conform to the latest SEC-EOA Standards.
2. Construction and Installation
a. Ductbanks shall be concrete encased with steel reinforcement or in accordance with
SEC-EOA Standard for medium voltage and low voltage cables based on the
interface point.
b. Ductbank routed under paved areas which are not subjected to traffic shall be
concrete encased without steel reinforcing.
c. End bells or protective bushing shall be provided at the end of the raceways in the
ductbank to protect the cables from physical damages. These end bells shall be
sealed by proper sealant to prevent foreign material from entering the raceways.
d. Where cables are run in conduits or ductbanks, the following procedures shall apply:
1) DC and telecommunications wires and cables shall always be run in separate
conduits from AC wires and cables to prevent AC induction in the DC circuits.
2) When installing cables in multiple ductbanks, the design shall be such as to
facilitate installing cables of a different voltage level on opposite walls of
manholes. Where it is necessary to install cables of different voltage levels on
the same wall of a manhole, the lower voltage cables shall be on top.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 96
3) Power and telecommunication cables shall be run in separate ductbanks, with

separate manholes/handholes. Separation shall be adequate to prevent
interference on communication circuits.
3. Sleeves for Road Crossing via Horizontal Directional Drilling
H. Direct Buried Installations
1. Application
a. Electrical cables installed outside of buildings shall be direct buried to the extent
possible. The cable shall be routed preferably in unpaved areas.
2. Routing and Clearances
a. The routing selected for installation of underground cable shall be such that it shall
avoid all obstructions above as well as below the ground for easy access to the
cables for future maintenance.
b. Cables shall be installed to maintain minimum clearance of 500 mm vertically and
1000 mm horizontally from other underground utilities such as sewer lines and gas
or telephone lines.
3. Trenching
a. Before digging trenches for laying of electrical cables, investigation shall be
completed with manual excavation to ensure that no underground utilities exist in the
path of cable trench.
b. Trenches for medium voltage and low voltage cable installation shall be in
accordance with the RCJ and/or SEC-EOA Standards depending on the interface
point.
1) Trenches on the utility side of the interface point shall be in accordance with
SEC-EOA Standard SDCS-02.
2) Trenches on the customer side of the interface point shall be in accordance
with the RCJ standard details as referenced in Subsection 5.7.7.H.7.
c. Trenches shall be dug up to the depth of 900 to 1200 mm below the grade level as
required for the specific installations. The wall of the trenches shall be vertical so
that minimum of shoulder surface is disturbed.
d. Trenches for low voltage cables shall be filled with a 75 mm thick bedding of smooth
sand containing no mineral. The bedding thickness for medium voltage cables shall
be 150 mm. This sand shall be compacted approximately to the density of
surrounding soil.
e. After laying the low voltage cables, they shall be covered with 100 mm thick layer of
smooth sand compacted approximately to the density of surrounding soil. For
medium voltage cables, the thickness of layer shall be 150 mm. This layer of sand
shall be covered by concrete tiles to protect the cables from damage.
f. The tiles shall be covered by 200 mm thick layer of sand above which a PVC coated
wire mesh and/or warning tape made of PVC shall be placed as follows:
1) 69 kV or 115 kV direct buried power cable: The wire mesh shall be placed
above the first layer of sand and then the warning tape shall be placed above
the second layer of sand.
2) 0.6/1 kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV, or 34.5 kV direct buried power cable: The warning
tape shall be placed above the first layer of sand.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 97
3) A caution warning such as “CAUTION BURIED CABLE BELOW” shall be

written on tape both in English and Arabic.
g. Remaining portion of the trench shall be filled with excavated soil and grade shall be
finished properly to obtain smooth surface same as what it was before excavation.
4. Cable Markers
a. The routing of the cables shall be marked by cable markers made of 400 x 300 mm
and 100 mm thick concrete slabs or in accordance with SEC-EOA Standard
extending approximately 25 mm above the finished surface. These cable markers
shall be placed approximately at a distance of 60 m along the route of the cable,
with additional markers at each change of direction of cable run and at each splice.
b. Cable markers shall be installed immediately above the cable. Specify that the
Contractor impress the appropriate word indicating the type of the cable and
directional arrows on each cable marking slabs.
5. Cable Spacing
a. Cables for 600 V and lower shall have horizontal center to center spacing of 150 mm
plus the diameter of the largest cable adjacent to each space. Where, 150 mm
spacing is not economical or possible, the minimum center-to-center spacing
between adjacent load carrying cables shall not be less than 75 mm plus the
diameter of the larger cable. Control and other cables intended to carry little or no
continuous load may have less than this 75 mm spacing in congested areas, if
greater spacing is not economically justified.
b. Cables to be operated above 600 V shall be spaced 300 mm center to center plus
the diameter of the largest cable. Where the 300 mm spacing is not economical or
possible, the minimum center to center spacing between adjacent load carrying
cables shall not be less than 150 mm plus the diameter of the larger cable.
6. Trenching
a. The minimum cover requirements for underground installation of cables and
conduits are given in Table 5.7.6.A. These are more restrictive than the IEC
recommendations.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 98
TABLE 5.7.6.A: TRENCHING REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL CABLES
Minimum Burial Depth (mm)

Voltage Type of Construction
IEC Recommended
Direct Buried Cables 1000 1200
Direct Buried with Mechanical

0 – 1 kV 600 750
Cover
Rigid Steel or Non-Metallic

450 600
Conduit Approved for Direct Burial
Over 1 kV Direct Buried with Mechanical

450 600
to 22 kV Cover

450 600
Over 22 kV Direct Buried with Mechanical

750 1000
to 66 kV Cover

750 1000
5.7.7 COMMUNICATIONS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection covers the RCJ’s Distribution System, which includes distribution to
Residential, Commercial and Institutional, Light Industrial Facilities large and Heavy
Industrial Plants.
b. It is essential to follow certain safe procedures for installation of wiring system
throughout the project to maintain uniformity for all the projects of the RCJ. This
helps in preparing uniform operating and maintenance procedures for staff of the
RCJ involved in maintenance and construction.
2. Applicability

Rev. 0 5.7 - 99
a. This Section applies to communication facilities including but not limited to:
1) Communications Underground Ductbank
2) Joint Boxes (Manholes and Handholes)
3) Exterior Above Ground Communication Pedestals
b. Existing and proposed communications utilities shall be included on civil site plans.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.A.2 for electrical definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.A.3 for electrical abbreviations.
5. Standards
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.A.4 for a listing of the applicable Standards.
6. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.
7. Approvals
reference Subsection 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. References
b. Inspection of the Contractor’s work shall be carried out and signed records of test
shall be prepared and submitted for review by the Royal Commission.
c. After a cable splice is completed and before the splice closure is filled, each pair of
the cable shall be checked for opens, shorts, crosses, reversals, transpositions,
splits and grounds. Continuity of both pairs and shield shall be confirmed. If any
faults are found, that are not listed as manufacturing defects, the cable joint shall be
checked and the fault shall be corrected.
d. On completion of the installation of an entire length of cable, as shown on the
Contractor Drawings, the appropriate tests shall be conducted and recorded. The
test record shall form part of the cable hand-over information.
e. Random sample tests may be carried out by the Royal Commission.
f. The tensile strength and elongation shall be tested as described in ISO 527.
g. The test results shall be recorded and signed by the testing technician and
forwarded to the Royal Commission with the request for Initial Acceptance.
h. Initial Acceptance shall only be granted following a satisfactory inspection of the
works by the Royal Commission and correction of any defects noted during both the
testing and inspection of the final works.
C. Communications Utility
1. Fiber Optic Cables
a. General

Rev. 0 5.7 - 100
1) As a part of each telecommunications work order or project, detail schematic

drawings shall be prepared for each fiber optic span or cable route, showing
the following information:
(a) Cable manufacturer
(b) Vendor number
(c) Cable size (number of fibers)
(d) Cable type (filled or air core)
(e) Cable make-up (dielectric or non-dielectric)
(f) Type of fiber (multimode or single-mode)
(g) Dispersion shifted or non-dispersion shifted
(h) Transmission characteristics (dB loss/km at given wavelength and for
multimode bandwidth/km)
(i) Dispersion specification in ps/(nm.km)
(j) Fiber packaging (single fiber/loose buffer; multiple fiber/loose buffer; tight
buffer, channel/groove or ribbon type, and color code)
(k) Splice-to-splice cable lengths
(l) Location of marker posts and signs
(m) Location of splice positions in manholes
(n) Duct/subduct allocations
(o) Outdoor/indoor cable terminating points
(p) Optical fiber distribution frame allocation
2) For an individual link, the cable shall be the same type to ensure the same
performance characteristics. This is to ensure compatibility in terms of the
fiber geometrical parameters, attenuation and dispersion.
b. Exterior Fiber Optic Cables
1) Basic Design Requirements
(a) The maximum attenuation of each fiber within a cable, when normalized
to a length of 1 km, shall be:
(1) 0.5 dB/km or less at wavelength = 1,300 nm.
(2) 0.3 dB/km or less at wavelength = 1,550 nm.
(b) Fiber optic cables may include an integral metallic armor if required for
direct buried applications.
(c) Underground fiber optic cables shall be all dielectric (non-metallic).
(d) The minimum bending radius for fiber optic cable is: 1) Ten times the
cable diameter when the cable is not under tension. 2) Twenty times the
cable diameter when the cable is under tension.
(e) The pulling tension on fiber optic cables shall not exceed 2.57 kN unless
greater pulling tensions are specifically approved by the cable
manufacturer. When fiber optic cable is pulled, it shall be pulled in a
straight line. The cable shall never be bent or wrapped around the hand

Rev. 0 5.7 - 101
or any other object as it is pulled. Only vendor approved equipment or

methods shall be used.
(f) Fiber optic cable design and construction lengths shall allow sufficient
length for:
(1) Racking in pull-through manholes.
(2) Slack at splice points minimum of 3 m.
(3) Central office and other building cabling.
(4) Slack for future splice or drop points minimum of 3 m.
(g) To keep future new cable openings to a minimum, underground fiber
optic cable splices shall be located at points where future branch
splices will be required, in so far as it is practical to do so.
Underground fiber optic cables shall not be cut for splicing
convenience.
(h) CAUTION: All fusion splices shall be made outside manholes and at
least 3 m away from the manhole opening. Mechanical splices may
be made either in or out of manholes.
2) Subduct Engineering
(a) A 100 mm diameter underground conduit that is being set up for fiber
optic cable placement shall contain:
(1) Three subducts, two nos. 37.5 mm - inside diameter - and one no.
25 mm - inside diameter, OR
(2) Four nos. 25 mm - inside diameter - subducts.
(3) Subducts shall have pull rope or pulling tape inside.
(b) If a subduct is to be direct buried, it shall be rigid PVC or heavy-walled
polyethylene.
(c) The 3 subducts, which are placed inside a 100 mm (4 in.) conduit, shall
be different colors. The colors shall be orange, green, and white.
D. Design Criteria
1. Link Loss Budget Requirements
a. During the design stage a link loss budget shall be prepared and included with the
project proposal and design packages. The link loss budget shall include:
1) Total fiber attenuation (loss)
2) Splice loss (including pigtail splices, if pigtails are used)
3) Connector loss
4) Wave Division Multiplex (WDM) losses, if used
5) A margin for light source aging as per manufacturer's specification
6) Link loss margin of 3 dB minimum for restoration splices
b. The calculated dB loss cannot exceed the operating range of the terminal equipment
that will be installed. Measured end-to-end loss shall measure less than the
calculated loss. Fibers that measure a higher loss than the link loss budget will not
be accepted.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 102
E. Manholes and Handholes

1. Racking
a. On completion of pulling-in, the cables shall be properly set on bearers around the
jointing chamber walls, in all jointing chambers. Proper racking is defined as leaving
sufficient cable in a jointing chamber so that a new splice may be made without
adding additional cable.
b. Cables to be jointed shall be placed on bearers of the minimum length to adequately
support the cable as delineated below:
1) The bearer closest to the duct at both ends shall be slotted to accept a
restrainer strap.
2) The cable shall be restrained on the bearers so that when the splice case is
placed either:
(a) The cable is no more than 5 mm from the vertical rack; OR
(b) The splice case is at least 25 mm but not more than 75 mm from the wall
of the jointing chamber.
(c) Sufficient length of the cable shall be placed such that after restraining,
the jointing may be done in the bay between the vertical racks.
c. Restraining of the cable shall be accomplished in such a manner as to avoid
possible injury to the cable sheath.
d. Prior to commissioning tests, the Contractor shall securely attach a tag, composed
of either lead or durable plastic, to each cable entering or leaving the jointing
chamber:
1) The proper code letter, designating the exchange from which the cable
serves.
2) The cable number.
3) The complete pair count contained within the sheath. At junction or taper
points a tag bearing the above information shall be affixed to each cable
entering and leaving the splice closure.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 103
SUBSECTION 5.7.8 HYDRONIC COOLING
5.7.8 HYDRONIC COOLING
A. General
1. Scope
a. This subsection criteria addresses design of systems and equipment utilized for
hydronic cooling utility systems.
b. These criteria provide mandatory, minimally acceptable requirements for the Royal
Commission new and retrofit projects.
c. These criteria provide the basis on which the hydronic cooling and heating utility
systems and services shall be programmed, designed and installed.
d. These criteria provide planning, design, construction, sustainment, restoration, and
modernization criteria for hydronic heating and cooling utility systems.
e. This document contains policy and technical criteria to be used in the programming,
design and documentation of the RCJ projects.
f. The provisions of this document are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative
systems, methods or devices not specifically prescribed by this document, provided
the RCJ has approved such alternatives.
g. Project conditions may dictate the need for design that exceeds these minimum
requirements.
h. Any conflict between these criteria and other Division 230000 Specifications shall be
resolved at the discretion of the RCJ.
2. Introduction
a. This Section addresses hydronic heating and cooling.
3. Applicability
a. Existing and proposed hydronic heating and cooling utilities shall be included on civil
site plans.
4. Definitions
a. For General definitions refer to Section 2.2.
5. Abbreviations
a. Abbreviations
Engineers
5) IEC : International Electric Code
7) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings
Industry
8) NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau

Rev. 0 5.7 - 104

11) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
12) UMC: Uniform Mechanical Code
a. Code Authority
2) SBC Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements
b. Associations
Engineers
c. Standards
Engineers
B. Commissioning
1. Refer to GPCS.
C. Materials
1. Materials Selection
b. All materials used shall be selected to meet applicable system requirements
(temperature, pressure, etc.).
d. In selecting material, special attention shall be given to corrosion resistance. Either
corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or painting on
ordinary material shall be as specified in accordance with Subsection 5.2.1.H,
Corrosion Control.
f. Due to high ground water aggressiveness, all pipes placed underground shall have
external protection by using epoxy coating, or tape wrap.
2. Equipment Selection

Rev. 0 5.7 - 105
a. Energy Efficiency
1) The Royal Commission is committed to energy efficient design within the limit
of budget constraints and within the bounds of good practice.
2) Energy efficiency can be achieved through use of efficient equipment and
effective computer-based control.
3) All equipment shall be selected to meet the requirements of ASHRAE
Std. 90.1.
b. Life-Cycle Cost Analysis
1) Equipment shall not be selected with the lowest first cost, but based on Life-
cycle cost analysis, an analytical method that calculates costs over the
“useful” or anticipated life of equipment.
2) Equipment shall be selected to meet environmental conditions requirements.
Special provisions shall be included for equipment installed outdoors.
3) Due to high ground water table, special consideration shall be given to the
physical location of electric motor drives for pumps and valves, in order to
protect them from possible flooding. Consideration shall be given to using
vertical assemblies with drive motors mounted on top.
3. Materials and Equipment Engineering
a. Material and Equipment Qualifications
1) All materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar
material, design and workmanship.
2) Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial
use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications
of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
3) Products having less than a 2-year field service record shall be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours,
exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.
b. Service Support
1) All equipment items shall be supported by service organizations.
2) Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support
of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications.
3) These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the Contract.
4) The spare parts shall be guaranteed after the warranty period.
c. Certification of Compliance
1) The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for all materials and
equipment that shall be permanently incorporated into the work.
2) Certificates shall also be required for all safety related items. No payment
shall be made for any item until the required certificates have been received.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 106
3) The certificate shall show the following:

(a) Date of certification.
(b) Description of material supplied.
(c) Product trade name.
(d) Name of manufacturer and supplier.
(e) Name of the Contractor to whom the material is supplied.
(f) Project name and number to which the material is consigned.
(g) Contract item number and Contract item name.
(h) A statement that the material or assemblies provided fully meets the
requirements of the pertinent Contract Specification.
(i) Stamp and signature of a person having legal authority to bind the
originator of the certificate.
4) Storage and Handling of Materials and Equipment
(a) Materials and equipment shall be stored, handled and transported to
preserve their quality and fitness for the work.
(b) Materials and equipment shall be stored to facilitate prompt inspection
and shall be subject to inspection and retesting before incorporation in
the work.
5) Unacceptable Materials and Equipment
(a) Materials and equipment not meeting the requirements of the Contract
shall be considered unacceptable and shall be rejected and removed
immediately from the project.
(b) If the Contractor fails to remove defective materials or equipment within
the time indicated by the RCJ in writing, the RCJ will remove the
materials at the Contractor's expense.
D. System Design
1. Redundancy
a. General
1) Because of cost control, redundancy is mandated only in the case of critical
systems and/or equipment.
2) When a system failure would result in unusually high repair costs or
replacement of process equipment, or when activities are disrupted that is
vital to an application, redundant systems or units are recommended.
b. Redundancy Requirements
1) Regardless of the system redundancy requirements of the program
document, the design shall provide for redundancy in the following items of
mechanical equipment. There is nothing in this document that prevents any
equipment redundancy dictated by particular system requirements.
(a) Chillers and Boilers
(1) For critical applications, N+1 redundancy shall be provided for
chillers and boilers in central utility plants. Critical applications

Rev. 0 5.7 - 107
shall be defined as hospitals, laboratories and other facilities where

loss of cooling could threaten the health of humans, research or
irreplaceable work or materials.
(i) If the utility plant serves critical and non-critical applications, the
chillers and boilers shall be arranged so that in the event of a
loss of a single boiler of chiller, service to no-critical application
may be curtailed to prevent a loss of capacity for the critical
applications. If this is not possible, the N+1 redundancy shall
be provided for chillers and boilers.
(2) For non-critical applications, chillers and boilers shall be sized so
that 67% capacity may be maintained in the event of a loss of a
single chiller or boiler.
(b) Chilled Water Pumps
(1) In single chiller applications, a second, full sized pump/motor
(c) Primary Chilled Water Pumps
(1) In multiple chiller/dedicated pump applications, one spare primary
chilled water pump motor shall be specified.
(d) Secondary Chilled Water Pumps
(1) Unless 2 pumps are needed to handle design flow, a second,
standby secondary pump is required, with a dedicated VFD.
(2) In any case, loss of a single pump shall not result in more than a
25% reduction on flow.
(e) Condenser Water Pumps
(1) In single chiller/tower applications, a second condenser water
pump, full size shall be designed.
(f) Condensate Steam Return Units
(1) Duplex pumps with automatic alternators are required. Pumps shall
be size so that a single pump with can meet the flow requirement
with 33% run time. Condensate pumps shall be powered from a
normal/emergency source, if emergency power is provided as part
of the project.
(g) Primary Hot Water Pumps
(1) In single boiler applications, a second, full sized pump/motor
2. Space Requirements
a. General
1) The mechanical design shall be cognizant of the necessity to provide for the
replacement of major equipment over the life of the building and shall insure
that provisions are made to remove and replace, without damage to the
structure, the largest and heaviest component that cannot be further broken
down.
2) Mechanical equipment rooms shall be designed with maintenance
requirements in mind.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 108
3) All mechanical equipment rooms shall be a minimum of 3.7 m in height.

b. Accessibility
1) Equipment must be fully accessible to allow for proper servicing, including
adequate space to disassemble all pumps, motors and chillers.
2) Chillers shall be placed to permit pulling of tubes without interrupting the
operation of or moving other equipment.
3) The mechanical rooms shall have adequate doorways or areaways and
staging areas to permit the replacement and removal of equipment without
the need to demolish walls or relocate other equipment.
4) Sufficient service access space areas as noted by outlining manufacturer’s
recommendations and in compliance with applicable code requirements for
routine maintenance and removal of mechanical system components shall be
provided.
5) In multi-stories building and to facilitate equipment access, maintenance,
removal and replacement, a freight elevator stop can be provided to serve
floors housing heavy equipment.
6) Where stairs are required, they must allow for safe transport of equipment
and components. Ship’s ladders are not permitted for access and
maintenance of any equipment.
7) Catwalks, complete with railings, toe stops and stairways, shall be provided
for all equipment that cannot be maintained from floor level.
8) Where maintenance requires the lifting of heavy parts 45 kg or more, hoists
and hatchways shall be installed.
9) The arrangement shall consider the future removal and replacement of all
equipment.
c. Clearance
1) Horizontal Clearances
(a) Mechanical rooms shall be configured with clear circulation aisles and
adequate access to all equipment. Required clearance shall be in
accordance to manufacturer written instructions.
2) Vertical Clearances
(a) Mechanical equipment rooms shall have clear ceiling heights of not less
than 3.7 m or as per manufacturer recommendation, whichever is
greater.
3) Ceiling Clearances
(a) Provide adequate clearance and access for building systems installed
between ceiling and structure above.
d. Location
1) General
(a) Mechanical rooms shall be normally located at or above grade level
because of high ground water. Special provisions for water proofing and
water removal must be provided for below grade mechanical rooms, and
approval must be obtained from the RCJ.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 109
(b) Large central equipment shall be situated to facilitate its replacement.

2) Roof Mounted Equipment
(a) When roof mounted equipment is specified, they shall be considered and
coordinated in the roof structural early design phase.
(b) Provide clearance and access as per manufacturer recommendation.
(c) Access to roof-mounted equipment shall be by permanent stairs, not by
ship’s ladders.
(d) If a door is provided, it shall be of enough size to allow equipment
replacement.
(e) Air conditioning condensate lines shall be discharged to roof drains.
Dumping of water on roofs shall be avoided.
(f) Penetrations in the roof shall be per the roof’s manufacturer’s
recommendation.
3) Below Grade Equipment
(a) Below grade equipment shall be generally avoided.
(b) Below grade equipment requires vehicular ramp, special provision to
prevent rain flooding and additional ventilations, which have adverse
impact on cost control.
(c) Exception of submersible pumps installations.
e. Drain Provision
1) Mechanical rooms shall have floor drains in proximity to the equipment they
serve to reduce water streaks or drain lines extending into aisles.
2) Provide at least 1 floor drain for every 13 m² of each equipment room.
3) Locate drains away from walking areas, but not beneath equipment.
4) Slope floor to drain.
5) Provide vent.
6) Air handling units shall be drained considering air gap above the floor/area
drain.
7) Provide trap primer at floor drain.
8) Provide access for all required trap primers.
f. Ventilation
1) Provide mechanical ventilation and exhaust in all equipment rooms in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15, ASHRAE Standard 62 and NFPA
90A.
g. Housekeeping Pads
1) Housekeeping pads shall be at least 152 mm wider on all sides than the
equipment they support and shall be 152 mm thick minimum.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 110
E. Piping
1. Water Velocities in Piping
a. Water velocity in HVAC piping shall not exceed the values shown in TABLE 5.7.8.A
in order to limit noise levels.
TABLE 5.7.8.A: RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM WATER VELOCITY IN HVAC

PIPING
SERVICE MAXIMUM VELOCITY IN M/SEC
Hot Water
Cold Water
Pump Suction without Head 1.2
Drain Line 1.2
2. Piping Design
a. Piping design shall be in accordance with the following:
1) Water flow, especially through heat transfer equipment, shall be in direction to
permit natural air venting. Typically, the water outlet shall be higher than the
water inlet to promote air elimination.
2) Pipe friction loss for general applications shall not be more than 30 kPa per
30 m length of pipe.
3) Reverse return piping arrangements shall be avoided. Provide adequate
means for manual balancing and flow measurement.
b. Systems Components
1) Components for piping systems shall be as follows:
(a) Long radius elbows shall be used wherever possible. For offsets, 45°
elbows instead of 90° elbows shall be used.
(b) Unions shall be provided for screwed pipes where equipment and piping
(c) Flanges shall be provided for welded pipes, where equipment and piping
(d) Ball, globe or butterfly valves shall be used for throttling services. 10 mm
globe valves shall be provided as bypass valves for all globe valves
above 200 mm.
(e) Recommended piping and fitting materials shall be as shown in
TABLE 5.7.8. B.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 111

Rev. 0 5.7 - 112
TABLE 5.7.8.B: RECOMMENDED PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR

VARIOUS SERVICES
SERVICE PIPE FITTINGS
Welding, cast, malleable or

Black steel pipe
black iron
Chilled Water
Cast brass, wrought copper or
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Welding, galvanized, cast or

Galvanized steel pipe
malleable iron.
Condenser or
Make-Up Water
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Galvanized, cast or malleable

Galvanized steel pipe
Drain or iron
Condensate
Lines Cast brass, wrought copper or
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Black steel pipe Wrought or cast iron

Steam
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Steam
Schedule 80 Black Steel Wrought or cast iron
Condensate
Black steel pipe Welding or cast iron
Hot Water
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
F. Equipment and Components

1. Valves and Accessories
a. Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet of each item of HVAC equipment, including
but not limited to pumps, coils, fin-tube convectors, cabinet heaters, unit heaters,
heat exchangers, and other similar equipment.
b. Provide valves at the top and bottom of all risers.
c. Provide valves at all branch take-offs from piping mains.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 113
d. Provide non-slam check valves as indicated at pump discharges.

e. Locate valves so that the tops of the valve stems are above the horizontal.
f. Valves for equipment, coils, specialties, etc., shall meet the component's pressure
rating listed, and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
g. Valves shall be same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
h. In general and unless otherwise noted, shut-off valves 50 mm size and smaller shall
be ball valves. Shut-off valves larger than 50 mm size and larger shall be butterfly
valves.
2. Pumps
a. Pumps shall have variable speed drives and shall be arranged so that flow is
matched to the demand.
b. Pumps shall be selected so that that flow can be increased by 15% with a
corresponding increase in pump head by simply changing the impeller. Neither a
change in the pump body size or pump a motor replacement shall be required.
c. Pumps shall be selected for operation within a range of 66% to 115% of the flow at
the point of highest efficiency
d. Motors shall be selected to prevent overloading at the highest possible flow rate for
the given impeller, and motor sizes shall be one size larger than the minimum size
required for the design.
e. For pumps operating in series or parallel, the series of parallel curves shall be
plotted to confirm proper flow with multiple pumps operating.
f. The following general guidelines shall be used for selecting the pumps seal material:
1) Standard seal for open or closed system with clear water
2) Single flushed seal for closed, clear water systems operating at high
temperature or pressure
3) Double flushed seal for open or closed systems with high concentrations of
abrasives
4) Packing gland seal for open or closed systems with large volumes of make-up
water or solids build-up
3. Mechanical Equipment Rooms
a. Water Coils
1) All hydronic water coils shall have 2 – way valves. Bypass valves shall be
provided at the end of circulation circuits to provide minimum flow when all 2 –
way valves are closed.
2) A shutoff valve shall be installed on each supply and return pipe at each coil
to allow for servicing of the coil without tampering with water balance.
3) Coils shall have means for independent balancing for each coil.
4) A strainer shall be provided for each coil bank to protect the 2 – way valve.
b. Chillers
1) Wherever practical, chillers shall be arranged for variable primary flow.
Chillers shall be installed in parallel to allow for ease in maintenance.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 114
2) Chiller controls shall interface with the Building Automation Systems.

c. Hydronic Water Circulating Pumps
1) The water circulating pumps shall have a pressure gage and shut-off valve at
the pump suction. Base mounted pumps shall have a suction diffuser.
2) The discharge side shall have a strainer, a check valve and a shut-off valve.
Pressure gages shall be provided at the strainer inlet and outlet.
d. Chemical Feed and Water Make-Up
1) The system shall also have at the suction side of the pump an air separator
and closed type compression tank.
2) The make-up line to the system shall have a double check valve to prevent
cross-connection.
3) A pot feeder having a capacity of no less than 0.1% of system water volume
with two shutoff valves shall be installed between the pump suction and
discharge lines, in parallel with the pump.
e. Air Elimination
1) All hydronic systems shall have provisions for air elimination. A central air
eliminator shall be provided near the inlet of main circulating pumps. Means
for air elimination shall be provided at all high points as well. Wherever
practical, manual air vents shall be provided. If automatic air vents must be
used, they shall be accessible and shall have a manual shut-off valve
upstream to facilitate maintenance of the air vent.
f. Expansion
1) All hydronic systems shall have hydro-pneumatic tanks for addressing thermal
expansion. Tanks shall be sized to address the maximum anticipated
expansion at normal operating conditions. Tanks shall be bladder-type, and
the bladder material shall be compatible with the hydronic fluid.
g. Equipment Access
1) Where equipment or valves are situated in a high location, all necessary
operating chains, service platforms and ladders with railings and toe stops
shall be provided.
4. Steam Systems
a. Steam systems are used for heating turbine and boiler leads, and various industrial
processes.
b. Carbon steel or alloy steels shall be used for piping material.
c. Sizing of pipes shall be such as to allow reasonable velocities and friction losses.
The steam velocity shall not create objectionable noise especially for heating
systems in office buildings and dwellings.
d. Sizing of pipes for the exhaust lines from auxiliary turbines and similar services shall
be such as not to produce objectionable noise.
e. Either globe or gate valves shall be used wherever possible. In general gate valves
shall be used in locations where pressure drop through the valve is a consideration
and where the valve will be either wide open or entirely closed. Globe valves shall
be used in water, steam, and air lines for throttling purposes, as the globe valve

Rev. 0 5.7 - 115
permits closer regulation of the flow. A gate valve shall always be installed
preceding a globe valve used for throttling purposes.
f. Check valves shall be used in feed lines close to a boiler to prevent water or steam
blowing back from the boiler, if the feed line ruptures or its pressure falls. Check
valves shall also be used in individual pump or trap discharges before they join a
common header, and where different lines are joined together to discharge into a
common header. In pump discharges where the header remains under pressure
after the pump is shut down, a gate valve shall be installed in addition to the check
valve.
g. Each boiler shall have at least one safety valve and two or more safety valves, if it
has more than 46.5 m2 of heating surface or if the steam generating capacity
exceeds 1000 kg/h. The safety valve capacity for each boiler shall be such that all
the steam that can be generated shall be discharged without allowing the pressure
to rise more than 3%. The complete range of pressure settings of all the saturated
steam safety valves on a boiler shall not exceed 10% of the highest pressure to
which any valve is set.
h. All safety valves shall be of direct spring-loaded pop type. They shall operate without
chattering.
i. Except in the case of small, low-pressure boilers, vents from safety valves shall be
terminated outside of the building at least 1.8 m above the roof. To reduce the high
noise level caused by the discharge, the vent pipe end shall be fitted with a baffled
silencer, or the pipe end shall be cut on a bias to increase the discharge area and
reduce exit velocity.
j. Steam systems piping shall be insulated to reduce heat losses.
5. High Temperature Water Systems
a. High temperature water (HTW) systems are those that supply water at temperatures
above 120°C and at pressures from 4 to 25 bars.
b. The pressure in any part of a high temperature water system shall always be above
the pressure corresponding to the temperature at saturation in the system, in order
to prevent flashing of the water into steam. Pressurization to prevent the water in
system from flashing into steam shall be accomplished by steam or an inert gas
such as nitrogen.
c. This pressure shall be maintained by employing either of the following schemes:
1) An automatic pressure pump.
2) Compression tank with inert gas.
3) A steam cushion in the steam arum, the steam space of the boiler, or in a
separate expansion tank.
d. Based on load and design pressures, either water-tube, fire-tube, or scotch-marine
type boiler shall be used.
e. Water-tube boilers usually require external tanks for pressurization, while fire-tube
boilers, if pressurized by steam, have expansion space within the boiler, but require
a separate tank if pressurized by inert gas.
f. When pressurizing with pump, the pressure control shall be set to operate the boiler
feed pump, which causes feedwater to flow from the makeup tank to the boiler
whenever the pressure falls.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 116
g. Proper distribution of return water and of water flow shall be maintained in all types
of boilers, to prevent tube or tube-sheet failures due to overheating or unequal
expansion of the boiler.
h. Either iron pipe or copper tubing shall be used for high temperature water systems.
i. Sizing of piping shall take economic considerations of smaller pipe versus higher
pressure drops through the system, and therefore, higher pump requirements.
j. Control valves shall be sized for 70 to 80% stem travel at full flow. The pressure
drop across the valve shall not result in a downstream pressure below the saturation
pressure at the temperature existing at any point, or flashing into stream will result.
k. Control valves shall be located in the return lines of heating units, in order to reduce
valve operating temperature.
6. Vibration Control
a. Design Objective
1) All vibrating, reciprocating, or rotating equipment shall be mounted such that it
does not transmit significant levels of vibration into the surrounding or
supporting structure.
2) Provide vibration isolation for all attachments to a vibrating machine, including
structural mounts, cooling or drainage pipe connections, exhaust air ductwork,
and electrical connections, etc.
3) It is very important that equipment operating frequencies be isolated from
natural frequencies of the building.
4) Ensure that the supporting structure has sufficient stiffness and mass.
5) Where it might be impractical or too expensive to meet the design criteria,
then sound engineering judgment shall be applied to limit noise and vibration
effect on building occupants and to protect the equipment.
b. Vibration Criteria
1) Design Criteria shall be as per ASHRAE Fundamentals and Applications
Handbook, recommended acceptable vibration criteria for vibration in a
building structure.
2) Vibration Isolators Selection
(a) Vibration isolators must be selected not only to provide required isolation
efficiency but also to compensate for floor stiffness.
c. Vibration Control
1) General
(a) Provisions shall be made to control equipment induced vibration.
(b) Refer to and incorporate the basic design techniques as described in
ASHRAE Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control.
(c) The use of vibration isolators between equipment and foundations and/or
building structures shall be required to minimize transmitted vibration.
d. Vibration Isolators
1) Vibration isolation mounts shall be used for the support of mechanical or
vibrating equipment.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 117
2) Isolators shall be specified by type and by deflection, not by isolation

efficiency.
3) See ASHRAE Fundamentals for Selection of Vibration Isolators and ASHRAE
Application Handbook for types and minimum deflections.
4) All vibration isolators shall be selected according to ASHRAE and
5) Isolation performance shall be within the responsibility of the equipment
supplier.
e. Piping Hangers and Isolation
1) Isolation hangers shall be used for all piping in mechanical rooms and
adjacent spaces, up to a 15.2 m distance from vibrating equipment.
2) The pipe hangers closest to the equipment shall have the same deflection
characteristics as the equipment isolators.
3) Other hangers shall be spring hangers with 19 mm deflection. Positioning
hangers shall be specified for all piping 200 mm and larger throughout the
building.
4) Spring and rubber isolators are recommended for piping 50 mm and larger
hung below noise sensitive spaces.
5) Floor supports for piping may be designed with spring mounts or rubber pad
mounts.
6) For pipes subject to large amounts of thermal movement, plates of Teflon or
graphite shall be installed above the isolator to permit horizontal sliding.
7) Anchors and guides for vertical pipe risers usually must be attached rigidly to
the structure to control pipe movement.
8) Flexible pipe connectors shall be designed into the piping before it reaches
the riser.
f. Piping Supports
1) Provide channel supports for multiple pipes and heavy duty steel trapezes to
support multiple pipes.
2) Hanger and support schedule shall have manufacturer’s number, type and
location.
3) Comply with MSS SP69 for pipe hanger selections.
4) Spring hangers and supports shall be provided in all the mechanical rooms.
g. Mechanical Equipment Isolation
1) Floating isolation bases shall be considered for major mechanical equipment
located in critical areas.
h. Concrete Inertia Bases
1) Inertia bases shall be provided for all pumps.
i. Mechanical Shafts and Chases
1) Mechanical shafts and chases shall be continuous and closed at the top and
bottom.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 118
2) Any piping and ductwork shall be isolated as it enters the shaft to prevent
propagation of vibration to the building structure.
3) All openings for piping must be sealed.
j. Pipe Insulation
1) All hydronic piping shall be insulated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
90.1 – 2010.
2) Where exposed insulation in mechanical equipment rooms is subject to
damage, provide aluminum or PVC plastic covers on all insulation.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 119
SUBSECTION 5.7.9 PIPELINE CORRIDORS
5.7.9 PIPELINE CORRIDORS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Guideline Engineering Manual (GEM) establishes minimum safety
requirements for existing and new pipeline facilities under the jurisdiction of the
Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ). This manual provides:
1) The minimum safety criteria for locating, designing, construction, inspection,
testing, operation, maintenance, repair or replacement of the pipeline corridor
systems.
2) The policies and technical information required for review of submittals by
Industries to ensure that they are consistent with minimum pipeline safety
requirements satisfactory to the RCJ.
b. The provisions of GEM are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative design
parameters and systems, methods, or devices not specifically described. However
the use of alternative design, construction and testing systems, methods, or devices
must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
c. If a conflict is discovered between the Guideline Engineering Manual (GEM), the
Guideline Procurement and Construction Specification (GPCS), and the Typical
Construction Details or Drawings (TCDD) and any of the Attachments, the conflict
shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ Engineering Department who will
provide resolution or direction.
d. The review of submittals for design and installation of pipeline systems in the
pipeline corridors requires coordination and integration with other disciplines such
as, but not limited to, civil, mechanical, structural design, electrical design, and other
disciplines.
2. Applicability
a. This Guideline Manual is applicable to the following:
1) Pipeline assets operated by Industries in the pipeline corridors in Jubail.
2) Pipeline systems that transport hazardous liquids, petrochemicals and gases
b. This Guideline Manual does not apply to any of the following pipeline facilities:
1) In-plant piping systems as defined in the Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and Utility
Corridors (UC) Regulations
2) Pipelines outside the limits of the RCJ Pipelines and Utility Corridors
3) Pipelines that have been exempted by the Royal Commission
a. Existing and proposed communications utilities shall be included on civil site plans
3. Definitions
a. “Cathodic Protection” A technique to prevent the corrosion of a metal surface by
making that surface the cathode of an electrochemical cell.
b. “Civil Defense” The entity that has the responsibility to respond to fire and pipeline
leaks in PLC and UC; it also conducts evacuation and drills in PLC and UC.
c. “Clearance” An unobstructed horizontal or vertical space.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 120
d. “Coast Guard” The military entity that issues access permits and performs security
patrol in KFIP; also, reports all incidents that occur within KFIP
e. “Component” Any part of a pipeline system which may be subjected to pump
pressure including, but not limited to pipe, valves, elbows, tees, flanges, launchers,
receivers and closures
f. “Contractors” The entity that performs activities in PLC and UC as authorized by the
industries or RCJ.
g. “FSF” The entity that has the responsibility for patrolling and enforcing security in the
industrial areas of RCJ.
h. “HCIS” The entity that has the overall responsibility of enforcing security in the
industrial areas of RCJ.
i. “Hydrostatic test” A pressure or tightness test where a liquid, typically water, is the
test medium.
j. “Hot tap” The process of making branch piping connections to operating pipelines,
mains, or other facilities while in operation. The connection of the branch piping to
the operating line and the tapping of the operating line is done while it is under
pressure.
k. “Industries” The entity that owns and operates pipeline facilities in the Corridors
l. “In-plant piping” Piping that is located on the grounds of and inside the fence line or
battery limit of a plant that is used to transfer petrochemicals, feed stocks and gases
between plant facilities. In-plant pipelines are located totally outside the pipeline
corridors.
m. “Method Statement” A document detailing the sequence of steps taken to complete
a work task. A Method Statement shall contain information concerning the order and
method of construction with reference to work procedures and safety constraints.
n. “Maximum (Allowable) Operating Pressure (MOP/MAOP)” The maximum pressure
at which the pipeline can be operated in accordance with these guidelines and the
Regulations.
o. “Non-Destructive Testing (NDT)” Testing in which the part being tested is not
rendered unusable. In pipeline related NDT testing, the pipe, its welds, or even steel
components and tanks may need to be evaluated to verify their integrity. Pipeline
NDT typically consists of Radiography, RT (X-rays), Ultrasonic (UT), Magnetic
particle (MT), Dye penetrant (PT), Ammonium persulfate.
p. “Operating stress” The stress imposed on a pipe or structural member under
operating conditions. This term normally refers to the internal forces due to the
pressure of the gas or liquid in the pipeline; however, any other forces such as
thermal growth, expansion, or contraction may need to be considered as well.
q. “Patrol” The activity that is performed visually for observing any abnormalities in PLC
and UC. Patrolling can be performed by walking or driving.
r. “PCCG” The team members representing the RCJ Engineering department who
perform the compliance inspections in PLC.
s. “PLC” The Pipeline Corridors are used for routing the feedstock, utilities, and
interconnected pipeline for transferring of products to and from industries and
marine ports.
t. “UC” The term “Utility Corridors” applies to all utility ROW’s for handling transporting
utilities such as power, telecommunication, and water utility systems.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 121
u. “Pipe Racks” A framed structure with two or more columns supporting one or more
levels of piping. Pipe racks are also referred to as Expansion Loops (EL), Cross
Accesses, pipe-tracks and Intersection Support Structures (ISS).
v. “Pipeline or Pipeline System” All parts of new or existing pipe and ancillary
equipment through which petrochemicals, feed stocks, gases and hazardous liquids
move in transportation including but not limited to line pipe, valves and
appurtenances connected to line pipe.
w. “Pipe Supports” A general term used to refer to all types of structures and
foundations supporting, anchoring, and guiding one or more pipes or pipelines.
x. “Pipe Sleepers” A concrete foundation with embedded steel plates supporting one or
more pipes near finished grade.
y. “Pneumatic test” A pressure or tightness test where a gas, generally nitrogen or air,
is the test medium.
z. “RCJ/ RCJ” The Royal Commission (in Jubail) - The entity that constructs, maintains
and owns the infrastructure and pipe supports facilities in PLC. The Royal
Commission regulates pipeline facilities in corridors.
aa. “Safe distance” The minimum distance between all personnel and the equipment
being tested.
bb. “Stored Energy” Power that has not been used or dissipated. It is the potential
energy reserved in a body. It can be converted into many forms of energy
sometimes with disastrous consequences.
cc. “Volunteer Organizations” The entity that performs volunteer services in PLC and
UC, such as JAMA’A (Jubail Area Mutual Aid Association).
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of abbreviations refer to Section 2.2 of the following abbreviations apply to
this section.
7) IMP: Integrity Management Plan
8) ISSD: Industrial Security and Safety Department
9) JAMA’A: Jubail Area Mutual Aid Association
10) JMP: Jubail Management Procedures
11) KFIP: King Fahd Industrial Port
12) LSS: Logistic Services Section
13) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society
14) NACE: National Association of Corrosion Engineers
15) NDT: Non-Destructive Testing

Rev. 0 5.7 - 122

17) O&M: Operation and Maintenance
18) PCCG: Pipeline Corridors Compliance Group
19) P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram
20) PL and UC: Pipeline and Utility Corridors
21) PLC and UC: Pipeline Corridors and Utility Corridors
23) RCJY: Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu
24) RCY: Royal Commission for Yanbu
25) ROW: Right-of-Way
26) SABIC: Saudi Arabian Basic Industries Standards
28) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standard Organization
29) SIS: Safety Instruction Sheets
30) YAMA: Yanbu Area Mutual Aid Association
31) YMP: Yanbu Management Procedures
32) YIC: Yanbu Industrial City
33) JIC: Jubail Industrial City
a. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional codes.
b. The following Codes and Standards are approved for use under this guideline. Other
codes and Standards proposed by Industries may be acceptable provided they can
be shown to be equal to the Standards in this guideline.
1) American Petroleum Institute (API) :
(a) API 1104 Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities
(b) API 1110 Pressure Testing of Steel Pipelines for the
Transportation of Gas, Petroleum Gas, Hazardous
Liquids, Highly Volatile Liquids or Carbon Dioxide
(c) API 1130 Computational Pipeline Monitoring for Liquid Pipelines
(d) API 570 Piping Inspection Code: In-service Inspection, Rating,
Repair, and Alteration of Piping Systems
(e) API RP 574 Inspection practices for piping systems
(f) API RP 580 Risk-based inspection
(g) API RP 750 Management of Process Hazards
(h) API RP 1102 Steel pipelines crossing railroads and highways
(i) API RP 2201 Safe hot tapping practices in the petroleum and
petrochemical industries
(j) API SPEC 5L Specification for line pipe

Rev. 0 5.7 - 123
(k) API SPEC 6D Specification for pipeline valves

2) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
(a) ASME B16.5 Pipe flanges and fittings
(b) ASME B16.33 Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas
Piping Systems
(c) ASME B16.34 Valves – Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
(d) ASME B31G Manual for Determining the Remaining Strength of
Corroded Pipelines
(e) ASME B31.3 Process Piping
(f) ASME B31.4 Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid Hydrocarbons
and Other Liquids
(g) ASME B31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
(h) ASME B31.8S Managing System Integrity of Gas Pipelines
(i) ASME BPV Code, Section VIII Rules for the Construction of Pressure
Vessels and Section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding
and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding
and Brazing Operators
(j) ASME BPV Code, Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and
Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers and Welding and
Brazing Operators
(k) ASME PCC-2, Part 5 Article 5.1 Mandatory Appendix II Stored
Energy Calculations for Pneumatic Pressure Test
(l) Article 5.1 Mandatory Appendix III Safe Distance Calculations for
Pneumatic Pressure Test
(m) ASME SI-1 ASME Orientation and Guide for Use of SI (Metric) Units
3) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
(a) ASTM A 53/ A 53M SPEC Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
(b) ASTM A 105/ A105M SPEC Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings
for Piping Applications
(c) ASTM A 106 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
(d) ASTM A 134 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (ARC)-
Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over)
(e) ASTM A 135 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
(f) ASTM A 139 Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe
(Sizes NPS 16 and Over)
(g) ASTM A 193/ A193M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel
Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service
(h) ASTM A 194/ A194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for
Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or
Both

Rev. 0 5.7 - 124
(i) ASTM A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength
(j) ASTM A 320/ A320M Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting
Materials for Low- Temperature service
(k) ASTM A 333/ A333M Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel
Pipe for Low-Temperature Service
(l) ASTM A 354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Allow Steel
Bolts, Studs and other Externally Threaded Fasteners.
(m) ASTM A 372/ A372M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels
(n) ASTM A 381 Specification for Metal-Arc-Welded Steel Pipe
(o) ASTM A 395/ A395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-
Retaining Castings
(p) ASTM A 449 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and
Studs
(q) ASTM A 671 Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for
Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures
(r) ASTM A 672 Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for
High-Pressure Service at Moderate Temperatures
(s) ASTM A 691 Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion Welded for
High-Pressure Service at High Temperatures
(t) ASTM A 984/ A984M Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain-End Electric-
Resistance-Welded
(u) ASTM A 1005/ A1005M Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain-End Double
Submerged-Arc Welded, Longitudinal and Helical Seam
(v) ASTM A 1006/ A1006M Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain-End, Laser Beam
Welded
(w) ASTM B 88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
(x) ASTM D 696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal
Expansion of Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C with a
Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
(y) ASTM D 1599 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time
Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
(z) ASTM D 2513 Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe,
Tubing, and Fittings
(aa) ASTM D 2517 Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure
Pipe and Fittings
(bb) ASTM D 2837 Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design
Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design
Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
(cc) ASTM F 1041 Standard Guide for Squeeze-Off of Polyolefin Gas
Pressure Pipe and Tubing

Rev. 0 5.7 - 125
(dd) ASTM F 1563 Specification for Tools to Squeeze-Off Polyethylene (PE)

Gas Pipe or Tubing
(ee) American Welding Society (AWS):
(ff) AWS A3.0 Standard Welding Terms and Definitions, Including Terms
of Adhesive Bonding, Brazing, Soldering Thermal Cutting,
and Thermal Spraying
4) High Commission for Industrial security
(a) Safety and Fire Protection Directives for Industrial facilities
(b) Security Directives for Industrial facilities
5) Manufacturers Standard Society (MSS)
(a) MSS SP-6 Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges and
Connecting-End Flanges of Valves and Fittings
(b) MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges,
and Unions
(c) MSS SP-44 Steel Pipeline Flanges
6) National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE):
(a) NACE MR0175/ ISO 15156 Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries –
Materials for Use in H2S-Containing Environments in Oil
and Gas Production.
(b) NACE SP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or
Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
(c) NACE SP0177 Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning Effects on
Metallic Structures and Corrosion Control Systems
This standard was withdrawn in 1994.
http://www.nace.org/uploadedFiles/Committees/WITHDRAWN%20STANDARD
S.pdf
(d) NACE SP0204 Stress Corrosion Cracking (SCC) Direct Assessment
Methodology
(e) NACE SP0102 In-Line Inspection of Pipelines
(f) NACE RP0105 Liquid-Epoxy Coatings for External Repair, Rehabilitation
and Weld Joints on Buried Steel Pipelines
(g) NACE SP0106 Control of Internal Corrosion in Steel Pipelines and Piping
Systems
(h) NACE SP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or
Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
(i) NACE SP0200 Steel Cased Pipeline Practices
(j) NACE SP0206 Internal Corrosion Direct Assessment Methodology for
Pipelines Carrying Normally Dry Natural Gas
(k) NACE SP0502 Pipeline External Corrosion Direct Assessment
Methodology
7) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

Rev. 0 5.7 - 126
(a) NFPA 58 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code

(b) NFPA 59 Utility LP-Gas Plant Code
(c) NFPA 59A Standard for the Production, Storage, and Handling of
Liquefied Natural Gas (LNS)
(d) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
(e) NFPA 220 Standard on Types of Building Construction.
(f) NFPA 704 Standard for the identification of the fire hazards of
materials for emergency response
6. RCJ Guideline Specifications
a. The latest editions of the prevailing design guidelines, procedural guidelines, JMP’s,
applicable Codes and standards, Engineering Manuals, design criteria, and standard
drawings, and other documents as are applicable for implementing these guidelines.
7. Related RCJ Documents:
a. RCJ JMP 020142 Compliance inspection of Industries Projects in the Pipeline
Corridors.
b. RCJ JMP 030203 Damage, Repair, and Cost recovery.
c. RCJ JMP 040101 Encroachment Permits.
d. RCJ JMP 090102 Pipeline Corridors Work Permits.
e. RCJ Guidelines for Color Scheme and Labeling of Pipeline in the Industrial Area, the
Causeway, and the Port Area.
f. Guidelines for Compliance audit for Inspection of Industries Piping Systems in the
Pipeline Corridors.
g. Guidelines for Inspection of In-Service Industries Piping Systems in the Pipeline
Corridors.
h. RCJ Environmental Regulations.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. General
a. The Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and Utility Corridors (UC), collectively referred to as
the Pipeline Corridors (PC) consist mainly of above-ground pipelines that are utilized
in the exchange, supply, transfer, import or export of petrochemicals, feed stocks,
petroleum products and fuel gases between the Industries in Jubail 1, Jubail 2 and
the King Fahad Industrial Port (KFIP). The corridors extend from the King Fahad
Industrial Port (KFIP) through Jubail 1 to Jubail 2. These pipelines serve 30 (thirty)
Industries and consist of approximately 320 pipelines of total length 2300 kilometers,
transporting 90 (ninety) different products and occupying 210 kilometers of pipe
tracks. Some pipeline segments are buried when crossing roads or at the transition
between the battery limits of the plants and the pipeline corridors
b. The Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and Utility Corridors (UC) Regulations (the
Regulations) were approved by the Chairman of the Royal Commission on 28
January 2013. They regulate pipeline facilities in the pipeline corridors in Jubail and
Yanbu Industrial Cities. Other utilities and systems, such as power,
telecommunication, and water utility systems which are located within the
boundaries of the Corridors are also regulated.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 127
c. The Royal Commission Engineering Departments in Jubail and Yanbu are

custodians of the regulations and are responsible for recommending future revisions
and updates. Future revisions and updates shall be coordinated and approved by
both departments.
d. The pipeline corridors and associated infrastructure facilities are constructed by RCJ
for use by the industries.
e. Refer to FIGURE 5.7.9.D - An Overview of the Pipeline Corridors for a reference
map of the pipeline corridors.
2. General Stakeholders Responsibilities
a. The roles and responsibilities of the stakeholders of pipeline and utility corridor
facilities and systems shall be in accordance with the prevailing practices, policies,
and procedures established in RCJY, and all related governmental policies and
regulations, as applicable by RCJY.
b. Responsibilities of Stakeholders in JIC
c. The Royal Commission is also responsible for the following:
1) Review the industries design documents for all work that is planned for
construction in the pipeline and utility corridors.
2) Perform safety inspections to ensure all industries, Contractors, and other
stakeholders comply with the safety requirements.
3) Conduct monitoring inspections and audits for regulating the stakeholder’s
works in the corridors.
4) Monitor industries violations in the PL and UC and levying penalties and fines
in accordance with the established RCJ procedures.
5) Issue and close encroachment and work permits, and vehicle and work
personnel access permits to industries and Contractors.
6) Maintain the as-built plans for the infrastructure facilities and share the same
with other stakeholders as needed.
7) Participate with the Facility Security Force in manning access gates to PLC.
8) Record all safety and security incidents that occur in PLC and notify HCIS of
the same.
9) Provide maintenance to the grounds located with ROW of PLC
d. High Commission for Industrial security (HCIS) and Industrial Security Force (ISF)
e. HCIS and ISF have the responsibility of enforcing the safety and security
requirements set forth by HCIS on all users of the pipeline corridors.
f. Civil Defense
The Civil Defense has the following responsibilities:
1) Respond to all safety incidents related to leakage and fire in PLC.
2) Carry out fire-fighting, evacuation, rescue, and emergency response in PLC.
3) Maintain the PLC emergency and evacuation plans.
4) Develop and conduct emergency drills in coordination with RCJ, industries,
and volunteer organizations

Rev. 0 5.7 - 128
g. Coast Guard
The Coast Guard has the following responsibilities:
1) Issue and close access permits to KFIP and the portions of PLC located within
the jurisdiction of KFIP.
2) Control access gates to KFIP.
3) Patrol the areas located within their jurisdiction.
4) Report all safety and security incidents in KFIP.
5) Provide assistance and facilitate operations during emergency situations
h. King Fahd Industrial Port (KFIP)
KFIP has the following responsibilities:
1) Issue and close work permits, and conduct safety inspections in the KFIP and
the portions of PLC located within the jurisdiction of KFIP.
2) Inspect work site before and after work completion.
3) Report all safety and security incidents to HCIS.
4) Provide assistance and facilitate operations during emergency situations
i. Industries
Below is a synopsis of the responsibilities of Facility Owners or Industries
1) Industries are responsible for the design, construction, inspection, testing,
operation, maintenance, repair and upgrading of their pipeline facilities.
2) Industries are also responsible for complying with all procedures, policies,
regulations and Standards that are applicable to all works located in the
pipeline corridors.
3) Industries shall prepare an Operations & Maintenance Plan of written
procedures for conducting routine activities and handling abnormal
operations. This plan shall be reviewed annually.
4) Any segment of the installed systems that becomes unsafe must be replaced,
repaired or removed from service. Hazardous conditions must be repaired
promptly or as required by RCJ.
5) Industries shall conduct surveillance of their systems by weekly patrols.
6) Leakage surveys shall be conducted every 3 months. Records of leakage
surveys shall be retained for 3 years.
7) Pipelines must be designed to acceptable Industry Standards to withstand
anticipated internal and external pressures and loads.
8) Pipelines must be tested to acceptable Industry Standards. A work permit
must be obtained from RCJ prior to performing the pressure testing.
9) Pipelines must be labeled in accordance with the RCJ guidelines.
10) Direct buried pipelines must be protected against external corrosion.
11) Pipelines must be designed and constructed to minimize internal corrosion.
12) Industries shall conduct risk assessments of their pipelines and establish an
Integrity Management Plan to address and mitigate the risks

Rev. 0 5.7 - 129
j. Volunteer Agencies
1) Volunteer Agencies such as Jubail Area Mutual aid Association (JAMA’A)
provide support to the Civil Defense in updating the emergency plans for PLC
and extend assistance as requested in accordance with the regulations of
JAMA’A.
k. Contractors
1) Contractors are responsible for meeting all safety and security requirements
set forth in their contracts and in this guideline manual.
2) The design, inspection and maintenance requirements of the regulations can
be summarized as follows:
(a) Industries are responsible for the design, construction, inspection,
operation and maintenance of their pipeline facilities in the corridors.
(b) Design, construction, inspection, installation, operation and maintenance
of facilities are to be conducted in accordance with approved
International and Industry Standards.
(c) The Royal Commission allocates space in the pipeline corridors and is
responsible for approval of facilities installed in the corridors.
C. Design Requirements
1. Design & Operating Philosophy
a. Pipelines shall be designed for specified limit states to achieve the objectives of
constructability safety, safe operations, serviceability and maintenance. They are
designed to operate within specified temperature and pressure limits and
parameters.
b. Pipelines shall be designed to sustain operating pressures and other external loads
that result in stresses below the Specified Minimum Yield Strength (SMYS) of the
pipe at maximum load conditions. Therefore the important criteria for pipelines are:
Operating Pressure, Operating Temperature, Compatibility of the material
transported with the chemical properties of the pipe, Ductility and resistance to
cracking, external and internal corrosion.
2. Pipeline Design Criteria
a. Pipelines and components shall be designed with sufficient wall thickness and shall
be installed with adequate protection, to withstand anticipated internal and external
pressures and loads that will be imposed on the pipe during its lifetime without
impairment to its serviceability.
b. Internal Design Pressure
1) The Design Pressure of steel pipe is determined in accordance with the
following formula:
(a) P = (2St/D) x F x E x T ------------Eq. 1
Where
P = Internal Design pressure in KPa (psi) gauge
S = the Specified Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe in KPa (psi)
determined in accordance with the manufacturing standard or
specification of the pipe
D = Nominal outside diameter of the pipe in millimeters (inches)

Rev. 0 5.7 - 130
T = Nominal wall thickness of the pipe in millimeters (inches)

F = Design factor
F = 0.72 for liquid pipelines
F = 0.60 for gas pipelines
E = Longitudinal joint factor, determined in accordance with the pipe
manufacturing standard or specification (not greater than 1.0)
T = Temperature derating factor (not greater than 1.0)
For pipe of unknown specification,
S = 165 MPa (24,000 psi)
E = 0.50
The Specified Minimum Yield Strength of various grades of pipe is shown in
Table 5.7.9.A.
TABLE 5.7.9.A Pipe Grades and Specified Minimum Yield Strength
Pipe Grade SMYS psi SMYS MPa

API 5L Grades
A25 25000 172
A 30000 207
B 35000 240
X42 42000 290
X52 52000 360
X60 60000 415
X70 70000 485
A333 / A333M
Grade 1 30000 205
Grade 3/4/6/7 35000 240
Grade 8 75000 515
Grade 9 45000 315
Grade 10 65000 450
ASTM Grades
A105/ A105N 36000 250
304L/316L 25000 170
A106/A53 Gr. B 35000 240
304/316/ 30000 205
c. Design temperature.
1) Pipe and system components must be compatible with the temperature
environment in which the components will be used so that the pipeline will
maintain its structural integrity.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 131
2) Pipelines in low temperature service must be made of materials that are

suitable for those low temperatures.
d. Variations in pressure.
1) If, within a pipeline system, two or more components are to be connected at a
place where one will operate at a higher pressure than another, the system
must be designed so that any component operating at the lower pressure will
not be overstressed
e. Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP/MAOP)
1) Pipelines shall be designed and tested such that the Maximum Operating
Pressure (MOP) of the pipeline is the minimum of the following:
(a) The Internal Design Pressure of the pipe determined in accordance with
Eq. 1 above.
(b) The Design Pressure of any other component of the pipeline.
(c) 80% of the test pressure for a Liquid pipeline or Gas pipeline which has
been pressure tested, or
(d) 80% of the factory test pressure or of the prototype test pressure for any
individually installed component.
f. Pressure during Surges
1) The pressure in a pipeline during surges or other variations from normal
operations shall not exceed 110 percent of the maximum operating pressure
limit established under paragraph (d) of this Section. Each Facility Owner
must provide adequate controls and protective equipment to control the
pressure within this limit.
g. Pipe Clearances on pipe tracks and supports
1) The minimum horizontal and vertical clearances between the pipeline and
other structures or between adjacent pipelines shall be in accordance with
Table 4.
3. Design of Valves
a. The installation of valves is discouraged in the pipeline corridors. However, where
valves are approved for use by the RCJ, each valve installed in a pipeline system
must comply with the following:
1) The valve must be of a sound engineering design.
(a) Materials subject to the internal pressure of the pipeline system,
including welded and flanged ends, must be compatible with the pipe or
fittings to which the valve is attached.
(b) Each part of the valve that will be in contact with the petrochemicals,
gases or hazardous liquid stream must be made of materials that are
compatible with materials or each hazardous liquid that is anticipated will
flow through the pipeline system.
2) Each valve must be both hydrostatically shell tested and hydrostatically seat
tested without leakage to at least the requirements set forth in Section 5 of
API Standard 6D.
3) Each valve other than a check valve must be equipped with a means for
clearly indicating the position of the valve (open, closed, etc.).

Rev. 0 5.7 - 132
4) Each valve must be marked on the body or nameplate, with at least the
following:
(a) Manufacturer’s name and trademark
(b) Class designation or the maximum working pressure to which the valve
may be subjected
(c) Body material designation (the end connection material, if more than one
type is used)
(d) Nominal valve size.
5) Manufacturer’s data and material test records must be maintained as long as
the valve is in service.
D. Design and Testing Factors

1. Design and Testing Criteria
a. RCJ Corridor Pipelines are classified as “Location Class 2” Pipelines as defined in
ASME B31.8, 840.3, Tables 841.114B, 841.322(f) and 841.33. Therefore the
following factors are applicable for calculating the design, test and maximum
operating pressures.
TABLE 5.7.9.B TABLE OF FACTORS FOR DESIGN AND TESTING
Pipeline of Unknown
Factor Liquid Pipeline Gas Pipeline
specifications
Design Factor, F 0.72 0.6 0.5
Joint Factor, E Pipe Specs Pipe Specs 0.6
Specified Minimum Yield strength
165 MPa
SMYS Pipe Specs Pipe Specs
24000 psi
(Table 3.1)
Hydrostatic Test Factor 1.25 1.25 1.25
Pneumatic Test Factor 1.25 1.25 1.25
Test Duration 4 hours 2 hours 4 hours
Max Stress during testing, % SMYS 90% 75% 90%
Maximum Allowable Operating Minimum of: Minimum of: Minimum of :
Pressure MAOP
a. Design a. Design a. Design Pressure
Pressure Pressure
b. Component
b. Component
b. Component working pressure
Working
working
pressure c. 80% of Test
pressure
c. 80% of Test Pressure
c. 80% of Pressure
Test
Pressure
E. Structural Supports
1. Structural Supports

Rev. 0 5.7 - 133
a. Industries shall always remain responsible for ensuring that their designs and
construction conform to their contract obligations and all applicable regulations,
Codes, and Standards. The design of pipe supports, pipe racks, pipe sleepers, cross
access structures, expansion loops, intersection support structures, foundations,
and other related supports carrying, anchoring, and guiding pipes shall be made to
acceptable industry Standards and follow chapter 5.2 from the GEM.
b. Horizontal expansion loops may be used in the areas where such loops currently
exist and where there is sufficient space in accordance with the applicable
standards to allow their use without harming future expansion; otherwise, vertical
expansion loop systems shall be adopted by all projects throughout PLC and UC.
c. The industry is responsible for providing its own anchors that are required based on
their own analysis of load conditions on the pipeline. Anchors are not allowed to be
added to any RCJ structure.
d. All Pipe Supports shall be designed and constructed to resist stresses produced by
load combinations in accordance with ASCE 7 and the following. Note that Load
Cases Di, Fa, Lr, R, S, and Wi are not enumerated as they are typically not relevant
for this climate nor for Pipe Supports in general.
e. Any new structure or extension of an existing structure (except for a cantilevered
member that can accommodate only one pipe) must be designed for full pipe load of
5KN/m2 in accordance with Section 3.1.3 of the RCJ Structural Design Bases
Guidelines for Pipeline Corridors – Final Structural version Sept 2014
(Attachment 5)
2. Symbols and Notations
a. D = Dead load, including load of empty piping and equipment
b. E = Seismic load effect, which shall include both Eh and Ev with ρ = 1.0 for
SDC = B
c. F = Load due to fluids in piping and equipment at hydro-test conditions
d. H = Load due to lateral earth and groundwater pressures
e. L = Live load due to occupancy; uniform, concentrated, impact, and vibratory
f. T = Self-restraining force; thermal expansion and contraction; and friction
g. W = Wind load
3. Load Combinations for Factored Loads Using Strength Design
a. 1.4(D + F)
b. 1.2(D + F + T) + 1.6(L + H)
c. 1.2(D + F) + 1.6W + 0.5L
d. (1.2 + 0.2SDS)(D + F) + 1.0E + .05L
e. 0.9D + 1.6W + 1.6H
f. (0.9 – 0.2SDS)D + 1.0E + 1.6H
4. Load Combinations for Nominal Loads Using Allowable Stress Design
a. D+F
b. D+H+F+L+T
c. D+H+F+W

Rev. 0 5.7 - 134
d. (1.0 + 0.14SDS)(D + F) + H + 0.7E

e. D + H + F + 0.75W + 0.75L
f. (1.0 + 0.105SDS)(D + F) + H + 0.75(0.7)E + 0.75L
g. 0.6D + W + H
h. (0.6 – 0.14SDS)D + 0.7E + H
5. Exceptions to Factored and Nominal Load Combinations
a. Where lateral earth pressure provides resistance to structural actions from other
forces, it shall not be included in H but shall be included in the design resistance H
shall be set to zero if the structural action due to H counteracts that due to the other
load cases.
b. Effects of one or more loads not acting in whole or in part shall be investigated. This
includes patterning transient loads in continuous and cantilever framing.
c. Increases in allowable stress shall not be used with the load combinations given for
Allowable Stress Design.
d. E and W are permitted to be applied independently in each of two orthogonal
directions and orthogonal interaction effects are permitted to be neglected.
e. Minus E and minus W directions shall be investigated.
6. Stability against Overturning, Uplift, Sliding, and Buoyancy
a. Stability analyses shall demonstrate the ability of the structures to resist overturning,
uplift, sliding, and buoyancy, and that the allowable soil bearing values are not
exceeded. Stability shall be provided solely by dead load plus permanent
mechanical anchorages. In determining the safety factors, allowance shall be made
for the potential removal of resisting dead loads (i.e., excavation, erosion, etc.).
Foundation stability shall be based on the following minimum factors of safety (FS)
for non-building structures as per Royal Commission Engineering Manual, Section
5.2
b. Retaining wall sliding resistance shall be developed by friction (and passive soil
pressure where necessary) utilizing particularly detailed shear keys to engage the
friction-resistance plane below the plane of the waterproofing and protection.
c. Deflections
1) The maximum allowable vertical deflection of Pipe Supports determined from
ASD Load Combinations shall be L/400 (where L is the beam length), except
L/600 shall be used for pipe supports for fixed service equipment and high
temperature or pressure piping.
2) Acceptable deflection shall also consider the parameters used in the design of
the piping and the pipe supports. Coordination between the structure design
and piping design is critical
d. Materials
1) All materials shall conform to the Specifications and Serial Designations
herein. All steel materials shall be new and un-spliced.
2) Structural design and material selection shall conform to the requirements of
the latest Industry Standards, Royal Commission (Royal Commission)
Engineering Manual – Chapters 3, 5.2, and 12, Royal Commission Guideline

Rev. 0 5.7 - 135
Specifications, Standards published by the Saudi Arabian Standards

Organization (SASO), and the documents listed in Section 2.0 herein.
3) Calculations shall conform to Royal Commission Engineering Manual,
Chapter 5.2 without exception.
e. Civil; Reference datum for all elevations shall be based on the Royal Commission
Datum.
f. Concrete Design
1) All concrete Pipe Support elements shall be designed in accordance with ACI
318 with load factors and combinations given in this Guideline.
2) Concrete formwork, constituents, proportions, and maximum water-cement
ratios shall be in accordance with Royal Commission Guideline Specification
Sections 03105, 03310, and 03310-1.
3) Reinforcing steel shall be fusion bonded epoxy-coated (FBEC) in accordance
with ASTM A775M and Royal Commission Guideline Specification Section
03205.
4) The classes of concrete for Pipe Support foundations shall be as follows:
TABLE 5.7.9.C PIPE SUPPORT FOUNDATIONS
Minimum Cylinder
Structure Class of Concrete Compressive Strength
at 28 Days
Structural concrete in C35 minimum with Type I 35 MPa

contact with soil or Portland cement and silica fume
exposed to weather, pozzolanic replacement as per
salt, salt water, brackish GS 03310, Table 1C
water, seawater, or
spray from these
sources
All other structural C30a or C30b minimum with 30 MPa

concrete Type I Portland cement and
pozzolanic replacement as per
GS 03310, Table 1C
Blinding Slabs, Mud C20 with Type V Portland 20 MPa

Mats, and Lean cement as per GS 03310,
Concrete Table 1C
5) The concrete cover for reinforcing bars shall be 75 mm.

6) The height of Pipe Support foundations above adjacent, finished grade shall
be 300 mm minimum.
7) The Pipe Support Drawings shall explicitly show and specify the foundation
sheet waterproofing and protection, blinding slab, sand-cement screed,
chamfers, fillets, reglets, counterflashing, coal tar epoxy coating, concrete
class, concrete mix design, cementitious material, and FBEC reinforcing
requirements

Rev. 0 5.7 - 136
Table 5.7.9.D Material Designations
Structural Steel Shapes,

ASTM A36 or A992
Plates, Bars, and Fittings
Hollow structural shapes

(HSS) square, rectangular,
and round
Pipes ASTM A500 Grade B
High-strength Bolts, Nuts, and

ASTM A53 Type E, Grade B
Washers for Joints
Anchor Rods (headed-type or ASTM A325, Type 1; Nuts – ASTM A563, Grade
threaded/netted with double DH; Washers – ASTM F436, Type 1; all hot-dip
nuts and plate washers) galvanized
ASTM A36 or F1554 Grade 36; Double nuts – ASTM

Welding Processes and
A563, Grade DH; Plate washers – ASTM A36; all
Electrodes
hot-dip galvanized
AWS D1.1, D1.4, and D1.6. Low hydrogen

Cementitious Materials electrodes with a minimum tensile strength of 480
MPa, (e.g., “E7018” for SMAW)
Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic ASTM C150 Type I and V Cements; ASTM C618,

Grout C989, and C1240 Pozzolanic replacements
Standard Specification for

ASTM C1107 with minimum 7 day compressive
Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- strength at least twice the base concrete strength
Cement Grout
ASTM A615, Grade 60 (414 MPa); ASTM A775M
Chemical Anchors
fusion bonded epoxy-coated reinforcing (FBECR)
Epoxy adhesives with hot-dip galvanized or stainless

steel high-strength bolt assemblies as manufacturer
by Hilti Corp. or approved equivalent
F. Construction and Construction Inspection

1. General
a. Each pipeline system must be constructed in accordance with comprehensive
written specifications or Standards that are consistent with internationally recognized
and Industry Standards.
b. Construction inspection provisions for pipelines and related facilities shall be
adequate to ensure compliance with the material, construction, welding, assembly,
and testing requirements of this Guideline
c. Inspection must be provided to ensure the installation of pipe or pipeline systems in
accordance with the requirements of this guideline. Only persons qualified by
training and experience in the phase of construction shall be permitted to perform
inspections.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 137
2. Material Inspection
a. Pipe
1) No pipe or other component may be installed in a pipeline system unless it
has been visually inspected at the site of installation to ensure that it is not
damaged in a manner that could impair its strength or reduce its serviceability.
2) All piping components shall be visually inspected to insure that no mechanical
damage has occurred during shipment and handling prior to being connected
into the piping system.
3) On systems where pipe is telescoped by grade, wall thickness, or both,
particular care shall be taken to ensure proper placement of pipe. Permanent
records shall be kept showing the location as installed of each grade, wall
thickness, type, specification, and manufacturer of the pipe.
b. External coating
1) Pipelines shall be protected against external and atmospheric corrosion by
coating that is compatible with the environment.
c. Buried Piping
1) Buried piping shall be protected by a cathodic protection system that has been
designed and is maintained to the requirements of NACE SP 0169.
3. Qualification of Inspectors
a. Inspection personnel shall be qualified by training and experience. Such personnel
shall be capable of performing the following inspection services:
1) right-of-way and grading
2) line up and pipe surface inspection
3) welding
4) coating
5) tie-in and lowering
6) pressure testing
7) special services for testing and inspection of facilities, such as station
construction, electrical installation, radiography, corrosion control, etc., as may
be required
4. Type and Extent of Examination Required
a. Visual inspection for detection of surface defects in the pipe shall be provided for
each job just ahead of any coating operation and during the final placement.
b. The pipe swabbing operation shall be inspected for thoroughness to provide a clean
surface inside the pipe.
5. Welding: General
a. Welding
1) Welding of all piping shall be performed by qualified, certified welders using a
qualified welding procedure in accordance with API Standard 1104 or Section
IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel Code, as applicable to piping
system and material.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 138
2) Welding must be performed by a qualified welder in accordance with welding

procedures qualified to produce welds meeting the requirements of this
guideline. The quality of the test welds used to qualify the procedure shall be
determined by destructive testing.
3) Welding must be protected from weather conditions that would impair the
quality of the completed weld.
b. Welder and Welding Procedure Qualifications
1) Prior to any welding, a welding procedure specification shall be established
and qualified by testing to demonstrate that welds having suitable mechanical
properties and soundness can be produced. Welding Procedure
Specifications shall be qualified as required by API 1104, or Section IX of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
2) Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs) published by the
American Welding Society and listed in Appendix E ASME B31.4-2009 ASME
Section IX are permitted for construction within the limitations established by
Article V of ASME Section IX. In order to avoid duplication of effort and
subject to the approval of the owner, WPSs qualified by a technically
competent group or agency may be used.
3) The welding procedure specifications shall at a minimum include the
information required by API 1104 or Section IX of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Guideline. When materials, welding consumables,
mechanical restraint, service conditions and/or weather conditions make more
details necessary to produce a sound weld, such as preheat, inter-pass
temperature, and post weld heat treatment, such details shall be provided.
4) API 1104 and Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
contain sections entitled “Essential Variables” applicable to welding procedure
specifications, procedure qualification records, and welder qualifications.
Welding procedure qualification tests shall be conducted with the highest
strength base metal to be welded in the essential variable groups identified in
the procedure specification.
5) Industry or Facility Owner shall be responsible for qualifications of procedures
and welders. The preparation of welding procedure specifications and/or
performance of welding qualification tests may be delegated to others;
however, each company that performs welding activities is responsible for the
welding activities performed by its employees and Contractors.
6) Qualification Records. The welding procedure followed during the qualifying
tests shall be recorded in detail. Records of the tests that establish the
qualification of a welding procedure specification shall be retained as long as
that procedure is in use. A record of the welders qualified, showing the date
and results of the tests, shall be retained during the construction involved and
for six months thereafter. These records shall be available to the owner or the
owner’s agent and the inspector at the location where the welding is being
done.
c. Required Inspection and Acceptance Criteria
1) Required Inspection
(a) The quality of welding shall be checked by visual inspection and
supplemental nondestructive methods or by removing completed welds
as selected and designated by the inspector for destructive testing.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 139
(b) Each weld and welding must be inspected to insure compliance with the
requirements of this guideline or by removing completed welds as
selected and designated by the Inspector for destructive testing.
(c) A minimum of 15% of the girth welds; 100% of the welds at roads,
culverts, expansion loops and tie-in welds not hydrostatically tested shall
be nondestructively inspected according to TABLE 5.7.9.E.
(d) The inspection of girth welds shall be by radiographic or other accepted
volumetric methods. Non-volumetric methods, such as dye penetrant or
magnetic particle, may be used for other welds such as fillet welds and
structures.
(e) Each weld inspected shall be inspected completely with the selected
method
d. Welds and welding inspection:
1) Standards of acceptability.
(a) Each weld and welding must be inspected to insure compliance with the
requirements of this subpart. Visual inspection must be supplemented by
nondestructive testing.
e. Welds: Repair or removal of defects.
1) Each weld that is unacceptable under F.5.c must be removed or repaired. A
weld must be removed if it has a crack that is more than 8 percent of the weld
length.
2) Each weld that is repaired must have the defect removed down to sound
metal and the segment to be repaired must be preheated if conditions exist
which would adversely affect the quality of the weld repair. After repair, the
segment of the weld that was repaired must be inspected to ensure its
acceptability.
3) Repair of a crack, or of any defect in a previously repaired area must be in
accordance with written weld repair procedures that have been qualified
under F.5.b
4) Repair procedures must provide that the minimum mechanical properties
specified for the welding procedure used to make the original weld are met
upon completion of the final weld repair.
f. Welds: Nondestructive testing.
1) A weld may be nondestructively tested by a process that will clearly indicate
any defects that may affect the integrity of the weld.
2) Any nondestructive testing of welds must be performed–
(a) In accordance with a written set of procedures for nondestructive testing;
and
(b) With personnel that have been trained in the established procedures and
in the use of the equipment employed in the testing.
3) Procedures for the proper interpretation of each weld inspection must be
established to ensure the acceptability of the weld.
4) During construction, at least 15 percent of the girth welds made by each
welder during each welding day must be nondestructively tested over the
entire circumference of the weld.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 140
5) All girth welds installed each day in the following locations must be
nondestructively tested over their entire circumference, except that when
nondestructive testing is impracticable for a girth weld, it need not be tested if
the number of girth welds for which testing is impracticable does not exceed
15 percent of the girth welds installed that day:
(a) Within railroad or public road rights-of-way;
(b) At overhead road crossings and within tunnels or culverts;
(c) When installing used pipe, 100 percent of the old girth welds must be
nondestructively tested.
6) At pipeline tie-ins, including tie-ins of replacement sections, 100 percent of the
girth welds must be nondestructively tested.
g. Required Inspection and Acceptance Criteria
1) The quality of welding shall be checked by visual inspection and supplemental
nondestructive methods or by removing completed welds as selected and
designated by the inspector for destructive testing.
2) All welds shall be visually inspected.
3) A minimum of 15% of the girth welds; 100% of the welds at roads, culverts,
expansion loops and tie-in welds not hydrostatically tested shall be
nondestructively inspected according to TABLE 5.7.9.E.
4) The inspection of girth welds shall be by radiographic or other accepted
volumetric methods. Non-volumetric methods, such as dye penetrant or
magnetic particle, may be used for other welds such as fillet welds and
structures.
5) Each weld inspected shall be inspected completely with the selected method.
TABLE 5.7.9.E –SUMMARY OF WELDING STANDARDS OF ACCEPTABILITY FOR RCJ

CORRIDOR PIPELINES
Visual Inspection NDT (RT)

Welds in Normal fluid Service 100% 15%
Piping under severe cyclic conditions 100% 100%
Piping in elevated temperature fluid service 100% 100%
Tie-in welds not hydrostatically tested 100% 100%
Road-railroad ROW/tunnels/bridges 100% 100%
Used pipe 100% 100%
Expansion Loops 100% 100%
6. Construction and As-built records

a. A complete record that shows the following must be maintained by each Facility
Owner for the life of each pipeline facility:
b. Pipeline attributes consisting of:

Rev. 0 5.7 - 141
1) Pipeline ID#, Commissioning date, Nominal size, Wall thickness, Pipe Grade,
Longitudinal seam type, Pressure Test Date, Test Pressure, Type of test,
Normal Operating Pressure, Maximum Operating Pressure, Product
transported, Pipe manufacturing standard, Pipeline design standard, Northing
and Easting coordinates (in the RCJ coordinate system) of each point of
intersection.
2) In addition the NFPA 704 classification for Health and Flammability as well as
MSDS data shall be provided for each material transported.
c. The total number of girth welds and the number nondestructively tested, including
the number rejected and the disposition of each rejected weld.
d. The length and coordinates of each buried section of pipe.
e. The location of each valve and corrosion control equipment.
7. Excavation Safety – Minimum Safety Requirements
a. Although the majority of pipelines are located above ground, there are instances
such as at road crossings or at transitions between the battery limits and pipeline
corridors where segments are buried or in casings that have become filled with sand
or soil. These sections are particularly susceptible to corrosion damage and
eventual leakage.
b. Response to leakages at road crossings entailed excavating the pipelines at these
locations. In these instances a hazard assessment is required prior to any work
being performed. The minimum safety requirements are as follows:
1) Industries shall use appropriate protective systems and measures to protect
pipelines and other structures in the vicinity of the excavations.
2) Protective systems (such as sloping or shoring) shall be used whenever there
is a potential of cave-in regardless of the depth of the excavation. These
systems shall be designed by a Competent Engineer.
3) Personnel working around excavations must be protected from cave-ins or
other hazards.
4) Identify underground utilities and pipelines located in the proposed excavation
areas prior to the start of excavation and take measures to protect them from
damage.
5) Edges of excavations shall be protected with substantial barriers where
people are liable to fall into them. Shoring shall extend at least 610 mm above
the top of the excavation to prevent cave-in and protect personnel working at
the bottom of the excavation.
6) Keep heavy equipment and surcharge loads at least 610 mm (2 feet) from
trench edges.
7) To assure that the atmosphere in excavations is safe for entry and hot work,
atmospheric monitoring shall be conducted for oxygen, flammable vapors and
toxic substances.
8) A Competent person who is capable of identifying potential hazards in and
around the excavation and has the authority to take prompt corrective actions
to eliminate them shall inspect the excavation at the start of every shift.
9) Co-ordinate construction activities with other industries, property owners and
utilities immediately adjacent to the proposed work areas.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 142
10) Performance of this activity may require the individual to work in confined
spaces and under conditions requiring respiratory protection.
11) Handle and dispose of the excavated material properly in accordance with
RCJ environmental requirements.
12) Industries shall submit the chemical analysis of any dewatering fluid before
discharging into the RCJ drainage system.
G. Pressure Testing of Pipelines, Components and Vessels
1. Pressure Testing of Pipelines.
a. Every pipeline, after construction and prior to initial operation, shall successfully
pass a hydrostatic test. In addition every existing pipeline that has been replaced,
repaired, relocated or otherwise changed must successfully pass a hydrostatic test.
The test manifold and ancillary piping and components attached to pipe being tested
shall be designed and constructed to meet the minimum system requirements of the
pipe being tested. Water must be used as the test medium.
b. Piping shall be pressure tested by following acceptable industry Standards. All
testing of piping shall be done with due regard for the safety of employees and the
public during the test. A work permit shall be obtained from RCJ prior to conducting
the pressure testing. In order to obtain a work permit and RCJ approval, a Facility
Owner must submit a test methodology and procedure for testing the pipeline.
1) The following pipelines are to be pressure tested:
(a) Every pipeline, after construction and prior to initial operation
(b) Every existing pipeline that has been replaced, repaired, or relocated
(c) Every pipeline that is returned to service from inactive status or
otherwise changed.
2) The test manifold and ancillary piping and components attached to pipe being
tested shall be designed and constructed to meet the minimum system
requirements of the pipe being tested... Water must be used as the test
medium.
3) The test pressure and test duration shall be determined as follows:
(a) For liquid pipelines, the test pressure shall equal 125% of the maximum
operating pressure for at least 4 continuous hours without leakage.
(b) For gas pipelines, the test pressure shall equal 125% of the maximum
operating pressure for at least 2 continuous hours without leakage.
(c) The maximum hoop stress during a hydrostatic test must not exceed
90% of the specified minimum yield strength of the pipe.
(d) The maximum hoop stress during a pneumatic test must not exceed 75%
of the specified minimum yield strength of the pipe.
4) All testing of pipelines and utility systems after construction shall be done with
due regards to the safety of the public and pipeline infrastructure.
b. Definitions
1) “Hydrostatic test” A pressure test conducted using water or other approved
liquid as the test medium.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 143
2) “Leak test” A pressure test to ensure tightness of flanged and threaded joints
at the test pressure. It is normally conducted before initial start-up and after
Tests and Inspections (T & I’s).
3) “Non-destructive testing” Non-destructive testing (NDT) includes those test
methods used to examine an object, material or system without impairing its
future usefulness.
4) “Pneumatic test” A pressure test conducted using air or other approved gas as
the test medium or in conjunction with liquid.
5) “Pressure test” A test conducted to piping or equipment by subjecting it to an
internal pressure using liquid or gas to ensure strength or tightness of the
system at the test pressure.
6) “Revalidation test” A pressure test performed to prove the integrity of existing
piping or equipment. This test is administered by the proponent organization.
7) “Service test” A leak test conducted at operating pressure using the service
fluid.
8) “Smoke test” Smoke testing involves forcing smoke-filled air through a sewer
line. The smoke under pressure will fill the main line plus any connections;
then follow the path of the leak to the ground surface, quickly revealing the
source of the problem.
9) “System test” An in-situ pressure test applied to a group of piping and
equipment tested as a system.
10) “Pressure testing” is undertaken to verify system integrity and for leak
tightness.
c. Submittals
1) The Contractor shall submit to the Royal Commission, the following items for
review and approval before commencing Work.
(a) A complete methodology or description of its proposed testing
procedures.
(b) Test data and certification of completion of testing.
(c) Calibration data for all equipment that will be included in the test.
(d) A test diagram showing all items that will be subjected to test pressure
d. Quality Control
1) The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall develop
and propose programs and methods of construction and testing such as to
achieve the specified quality to the approval of the Royal Commission.
2) The Contractor shall maintain a qualified representative on-site during all
operations.
e. Health and Safety Considerations
1) All works undertaken in relation to this Guideline Specification are to be
completed in full accordance with the respective health and safety
requirements established by the following:
(a) Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) Legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 144
(b) Royal Commission Regulations

(2) Standards, Contractual Conditions, and Health & Safety systems.
(c) Contractor
(3) Health and Safety Standards and Systems as accepted by the
Royal Commission.
2) In the absence of any of the above, best accepted industry practice consistent
with this shall be employed throughout.
f. General Requirements
1) Pneumatic testing is not permitted without written approval of the Royal
Commission. This test when conducted shall be in accordance with section for
additional safety requirements.
2) Pneumatic testing with air of piping systems or equipment, which has been in
flammable service, shall be concurred with the Royal Commission. The test
procedures shall include cleaning/purging procedures to avoid explosive
flammable air mixtures.
3) The effect of the static head of the testing liquid shall be considered when
determining the effective test pressure of any elements within a tested
system.
4) Except where noted here or in the specific referenced Standards, the test
pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient time to determine that there are
no leaks based on the criteria specified in Table 6.1
5) All systems (piping and equipment), while being hydrostatically tested, shall
be protected from being over-pressured by the following means:
(a) Relief valves of adequate capacity set to relieve at 5% above the
hydrostatic test pressure shall be installed. Sizing of these relief valves
used for testing shall follow the requirements of API RP 520, Part 1. The
relief valves shall be tested, dated and tagged within 1 week prior to the
hydrostatic test for new construction projects and within 1 month for
maintenance operations.
(b) In addition to the pressure relieving device, a bleed valve shall be
provided to protect the piping and equipment from overpressure. The
bleed valve shall be readily accessible in case immediate
depressurization is required.
(c) An isolation valve shall be provided between the pressure testing
manifold and the system being tested. The isolation valve shall be rated
for the manifold test pressure when in the closed position.
(d) Before employing the pressure testing manifold in the actual system
pressure test, it shall be separately pressure tested to at least 1.25 times
the system test pressure but not less than the discharge pressure of the
pump used for the pressure testing.
(e) Every reasonable precaution shall be taken to protect employees and the
general public during the testing. Persons not working on the testing
operation shall be kept outside of the testing area.
(f) The piping must be kept under surveillance by patrol during the test and
continuous communication must be maintained along the test section.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 145
(g) Hydrostatic test diagrams and test procedures shall be prepared by the
responsible engineering group and made available to the Royal
Commission for approval. The test diagrams and procedures shall
include the limits of piping (including test manifold) and equipment
included in each hydrostatic test, test pressures, test temperature, test
fluid, line flushing requirements and safety precautions.
(h) A request of NDT (Non-Destructive Testing) in lieu of pressure testing
shall not be entertained unless under special circumstances as approved
by the Royal Commission and submitted for approval as permitted in the
specific listed Standards.
(i) All pressure tests must be conducted using the hydrostatic method. The
Royal Commission may accept, for a specific pressure piping system,
alternative test methods that are allowed in a code or standard that is
declared in force.
(j) A pressure piping system shall not be tested at a temperature that is
colder than its minimum design temperature.
(k) When conducting pressure tests, the ductile-to-brittle transition
temperature and the possibility of brittle fracture must be considered by
the Contractor.
g. Hydrostatic Testing
1) Pressure Testing For Pipelines
(a) This Section defines specific requirements related to pressure testing of
plant piping such as test pressures, duration, etc.
(b) Unless limited by flanges, valves or other component in the line, the
hydrostatic strength test pressure for every section of the line shall
produce a hoop stress in the pipe of not greater than 90% of the
specified minimum yield strength (SMYS) at the test temperature. The
test pressure shall be calculated based on the pipe nominal wall
thickness less the mill tolerance (manufacturer’s minus tolerance). The
test pressure shall not be less than the minimum test pressure specified
in Table 6.1
(c) The pipeline to be tested is to be filled with the testing liquid in a manner
that will insure that no air remains in the pipe. It is preferable that the
pipeline be filled from the lower end of the segment that is being tested
and that a scraper or sphere be run ahead of the liquid column to purge
air from the pipeline.
(d) After the pipeline has been filled, the pressure shall be raised to 20% of
the prescribed test pressure and the test segment let to stand for a
period of time to allow the pressure to stabilize and check for leaks.
Testing to full test pressure may resume after the stabilization period.
(e) The test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient time as shown in
Table 6.1, but shall not be less than 30 minutes, to determine that there
are no leaks.
(f) The test pressure at the lowest point of the pipeline, considering the
hydrostatic head, shall not result in a hoop stress greater than the
SMYS. The strength test pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 146
(g) The strength test temperature shall not result in a combined longitudinal
stress (calculated based on 70% hoop stress at the test pressure plus
temperature stress plus bending stress) exceeding the SMYS.
(h) All joints, including welded, shall be left exposed for visual leak detection
during the strength test. Coating and priming of such joints are not
allowed unless approved by the Royal Commission. The pipe itself can
be primed and coated to a final coat.
(i) Underground process piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. The test
pressure shall be maintained for a minimum time specified for the type of
test while the joints are inspected for leakage.
(j) Existing piping if subjected to revalidation hydrostatic test, the test
pressure shall be minimum of the pressure and duration as specified in
Table 7.1 for the type of service. The actual wall thickness of the piping
and flange rating shall be taken into consideration when calculating the
test pressure.
(k) If a new tie-in spool to the existing plant piping cannot be hydrostatically
tested prior to installation (welding ends instead of flanged ends), it can
be tested to the revalidation test pressure along with the existing piping
system after installation. This does not apply to fire water systems.
(l) Immediately after the completion of the strength test, a tightness test
shall be conducted.
(m) For FBE (Fusion-bonded Epoxy) internally coated pipelines, the test
pressure shall not exceed 1.25 times the Maximum Allowable Operating
Pressure (MAOP) or a pressure which produces a hoop stress of 90% of
SMYS whichever is lower.
(n) Existing pipelines if subjected to revalidation pressure testing, the test
pressure shall be minimum of 1.25 times the MAOP for pipelines with 0.6
and 0.72 design factors in accordance with Table 5.7.9.F. The actual
pipe wall thickness and flange rating shall be taken into consideration
when calculating the test pressure. The latest successful test pressure
shall be documented in the “Safety Instruction Sheet.”
2) Pressure Testing for Minor Repairs
(a) This Section defines testing requirements for existing facilities, which are
subjected to minor repairs.
(b) In the case of small diameter threaded piping without pressure
containing welds (all services and pressures), the hydrostatic pressure
testing is not required when thread engagement and seal welding
requirements are met. However, a service test shall be conducted for
these welds.
(c) In case of socket welding piping and when it is determined that
hydrostatic testing is not practical, , the piping may be pressure tested
with its own product at its operating pressure when the following
requirements are met:
(1) A request for NDT in lieu of pressure testing is processed.
(2) Qualified welders and welding procedures are used.
(3) The weld gap verified and welding witnessed by the responsible
Operation Inspection Unit.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 147
(4) Welds to be either magnetic particle (MT) or dye penetrant (PT)

tested
(d) Low pressure steel piping in water, instrument air, plant air, inert gas
(Nitrogen, Argon, etc.) and steam systems operating at 1210 kPa
(175 psi) or lower, may be strength tested with its own product at its
operating press.
h. Special Requirements for Pneumatic Testing
1) Pneumatic test is widely used to achieve minimum down time and economy
and convenience of testing as compared to hydrostatic tests. It is also useful
to detect very fine leak paths which may not be found in Hydrostatic Test.
However it is not as safe as hydrostatic tests for reasons enumerated below.
2) Issues to consider when analyzing Pneumatic Testing Method Statement
(a) The acceptance of pneumatic testing is done on a case-by-case basis.
Pneumatic testing is inherently more hazardous than a hydrostatic test
for the same conditions of volume, pressure and temperature. It is
recommended that pneumatic testing be used only when one of the
following condition exists:
(2) When piping systems are so designed that they cannot be filled with
water.
(3) When piping systems are to be used in services where traces of the
liquid testing medium cannot be tolerated.
(4) The piping system will be used in gas service or for other reasons
cannot be filled with water.
(5) Traces of test liquid would be detrimental to the intended use of the
piping.
(6) When the system will be used for medical gas application.
3) Stored Energy limitations and Safe Distance Analysis must be undertaken in
conjunction with robust procedures and safety measures. The analysis must
consider the following as a minimum:
(a) Consider the rationale for using pneumatic testing instead of hydrostatic
testing.
(b) Ensure that the test procedure and method statement fully addresses the
technical safety considerations to ensure the safety and protection of
personnel and equipment.
(c) Define System volume and Test fluid
(d) Calculate Test Pressure
(e) Calculate Stored Energy
(f) Calculate / Define Equivalent amount of TNT
(g) Calculate the Safe Distance
(h) Ensure that test boundaries are consistent with the Stored Energy and
Safe distance considerations
(i) If stored energy exceeds limits established in ASME PCC-2, consider
segmenting line or reducing the operating pressure of the pipeline

Rev. 0 5.7 - 148
(j) Air / gas used for pneumatic test is compressible to large extent and has
very high potential energy stored when compressed. Any minor leak path
can lead to a rupture and blast within no time releasing total energy with
an impact of sudden explosion.
(k) Time gap between identifying a leakage and failure is very small making
it almost impossible to take remedial action. Damages associated with
failure are uncontrollable and huge.
i. Pressure Testing Records.
1) A record must be made of each pressure test and the record of the latest test
must be retained as long as the facility tested is in service.
2) The records that must be retained include:
(a) The pressure recording charts;
(b) Test instrument calibration data;
(c) The name of the Facility Owner , the name of the person responsible for
making the test, and the name of the test company used, if any;
(d) The date and time of the test;
(e) The minimum test pressure;
(f) The test medium;
(g) A description of the facility tested and the test apparatus;
(h) An explanation of any pressure discontinuities, including test failures that
appear on the pressure recording charts.
The table below lists all factors for liquid and gas pipelines.
TABLE 5.7.9.F MINIMUM SAFETY FACTORS

Pipeline of Unknown
Factor Liquid Pipeline Gas Pipeline
specifications
Design Factor, F 0.72 0.6 0.5
Joint Factor, E Pipe Specs Pipe Specs 0.6
Specified Minimum Yield 165 MPa

Pipe Specs Pipe Specs
strength SMYS 24000 psi
Hydrostatic Test Factor 1.25 1.25 1.25
Pneumatic Test Factor 1.25 1.25 1.25
Test Duration 4 hours 2 hours 4 hours
Max Stress during testing, %

90% 75% 90%
SMYS
H. Pipeline Labeling
1. Pipeline Labeling.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 149
a. Pipelines shall be labeled in accordance with the “Guidelines for Color Scheme and
labeling of Pipelines in the Industrial Area, The Causeway and the Port Area”. A
typical pipeline label is shown below based on the standard.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 150
FIGURE 5.7.9.A Sample Pipeline Label

Rev. 0 5.7 - 151
2. Component B -Industry Identification Numbers

a. Petromin Industries 01-09
01 Saudi Aramco
02 SASREF
03 SATORP
04 SADARA
b. SABIC Industries
10 SADAF
11 PETROKEMYA
12 KEMYA
13 SHARQ
14 IBN SINA
15 AR RAZI
16 IBN AL-BAYTAR
17 AL-BAYRONI
18 HADEED
19 SAFCO
20 IBN ZAHR
21 GAS (NATIONAL INDUSTRIAL GASES CO)
22 UNITED
23 SAUDI KAYAN
c. Other Primary Industries 30-49
31 S-CHEM (Saudi Chevron Phillips)
33 TASNEE
34 SIPCHEM
35 FARABI
36 PMD
37 ADVANCED (APC)
38 SAHARA ( AL-WAHA)
39 AMINAT (ARABIAN AMINES/AAC)
40 JESCO
41 CHEMANOL
d. Secondary Industries 50-99
50 SFCL (Chemanol)
51 NAMA / JANA
52 SODA

Rev. 0 5.7 - 152
53 ARABIAN CHEMICAL (LATEX) (ACCL)

54 UGSMC
55 GULFGUARD
56 TAYF
57 ALHAMRANI
58 INDIPCO
59 EDCO
60 ARCELOMITTAL
61 POLYSILICON
62 MODECOR
63 AL-BILAD
64 UNICOIL
e. Other Industries 100-150
100 MARAFIQ
3. Component C – Line Serial Number
a. Pipeline Serial Numbers are allocated by each Industry
b. Typical Pipeline Label
c. Location of Pipeline Labels
Labels are displayed to be visible clearly from various positions around the pipe
tracks especially close to valves, flanges,, product transfer points, adjacent to
changing directions, branches, where pipes cross over or through walls, fences,
roads, culverts (both sides), risers, expansion loops, intersection support structures
or straight runs of pipes at distances not more than 330 meters.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 153
FIGURE 5.7.9.B EXAMPLE OF A PIPELINE LABEL
FIGURE 5.7.9.C Hazardous Materials Warning Label Types

Rev. 0 5.7 - 154
B. Operations, Inspection & Maintenance

1. Industries Requirements
a. Industries operating pipelines in the corridors are required to prepare a manual of
written operating procedures. The O&M procedures may be a comprehensive set of
cross-referenced volumes set up according to functional subjects or a single manual.
They are not just for the field personnel.
b. Procedures are required for tasks normally performed at the engineering, the
operations control center, and other headquarters-type functions as applicable to
O&M tasks
c. The procedures shall be clear, straight forward, and applicable to the company’s
system.
d. Abnormal operations procedures must be included for liquid pipeline operations.
e. Personnel conducting pipeline operations need direct access (either on paper or
electronically) to procedures, without delay when emergencies arise.
f. It is acceptable to use the manufacturer’s recommended practices (engine books or
other related literature) regarding the maintenance of the specific equipment at each
location (these documents must be available at each location). It is also acceptable to
post the specific start-up and shut-down instructions for each pump unit at or near the
local control panel used for starting the equipment and having generic procedures in
their O&M Plan.
g. Fail Safe systems if installed shall automatically respond without exceeding the MOP
plus the 10% prescribed allowance for hydraulic surges.
h. The Inspection and Maintenance Plans shall include the following as a minimum:
1) Plan for making a prompt and effective response to a notice of an emergency,
fire, explosion, accidental release, operational failure or natural disaster
affecting the pipelines
2) Process for analyzing pipeline accidents to determine the immediate and root
cause and provide for a post-accident review
3) Procedure for starting up and shutting down any part of the pipeline system in
a manner designed to assure safe operation
4) Process for determining the Maximum Operating Pressure of the pipeline
system
5) Procedure for ensuring that repairs are made in a safe manner so as to prevent
damage to persons and property
6) Provide for training of employees/Contractors to ensure that they are qualified
to perform the tasks they are assigned
7) Maintain equipment in good working order including mainline and isolation
valves
8) Process for preparing and maintaining As-built construction records and maps
9) Procedures for selection of and application and maintenance of pipe line
coatings and insulation
10) Design and Maintenance of a Corrosion Protection System to protect pipes
from external, internal and atmospheric corrosion

Rev. 0 5.7 - 155
11) Process for establishing the requirements for repairing pipeline features
identified through scheduled inspections or field investigations and the criteria
for maintaining or reducing the operating pressure of a pipeline.
12) Maintain maps and records of Condition Monitoring Locations (CMLs) in
accordance with API 570 or other code requirements.
13) Maintaining Inspection and Maintenance Records for the life of the facility.
14) A Process for updating procedure
i. Examples of an inadequate procedure:
1) The procedure is of a general nature and would provide little guidance when
needed.
2) The procedure parrots the regulation.
3) There is no procedure.
4) The procedures for taking adequate precautions in excavated trenches or hot
work areas does not include the use of appropriate instruments to test the
atmosphere.
C. Criteria for Cathodic Protection and Determination of Measurements
1. Criteria for Performance of Cathodic Protection
Criteria for performance of Cathodic Protection of buried metallic pipes shall be as
follows:-
a. Protection shall be deemed to be achieved if one of the following criteria are met:
1) The instant off pipe-to-soil potential shall be -850 mV or more negative than
this value with respect to copper-copper sulfate electrode. The instant off
potential shall be measured between 0.1 and 1 second of switching off the
power supply.
2) The potential decay shall be no more than 100 mV in 4 hours after switching off
the power supply. Potential decay shall be measured as difference between
the instant off potential and depolarized potential after switching off the power
supply.
D. Integrity Management
1. Different Factors Contributing to Pipeline Failures
a. Many different factors contribute to pipeline failures. In general, factors such as
external and internal corrosion, third party mechanical damage, design and operation
error, construction and material defects and inadequate inspection pose a risk to the
pipeline. It is therefore necessary to consider all factors that could possibly affect the
integrity of the pipeline and attempt to fit these in a model that will assist in predicting
the probability of failure and the consequence or impact of failure.
2. Integrity Management Plan (IMP)
a. An Integrity Management Plan (IMP) provides a means for Industries to improve the
safety of its pipeline systems by allocating resources effectively to:
1) Identify and analyze actual and precursor events that could result in a pipeline
incident.
2) Examine the likelihood and potential severity of incidents.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 156
3) Provide a structured and comprehensive means to examine the risks and risk
reduction activities available.
4) Provide a means for selecting and implementing risk reduction activities.
5) Establish measures and track performance with the goal of improving that
performance.
b. In developing and maintaining an effective IMP, the following are some guiding
principles and actions:
15) System Integrity is built on qualified personnel, defined processes and
operational excellence.
16) An effective IMP must be flexible.
17) Availability and Integration of information is a key component of an IMP.
c. Identifying risks, conducting assessments and taking mitigate actions are the
foundation of an effective IMP.
d. Regular evaluation of system integrity and the IMP are key requirements.
3. The Relative Risk of a Pipeline
a. The relative risk of a pipeline is derived from two components, namely, Probability of
Failure (POF) and Consequence of Failure (COF). The numeric risk value is
calculated as the POF multiplied by the COF. The methodology calculates the
relative risk numbers of each pipeline segment and ranks them from highest to
lowest... It also attempts to identify the type of failure modes that are prevalent in a
segment.
b. There are many kinds of risk assessments and the resulting mix matrices differ
according to data availability.
c. Results from risk assessments can be used for many purposes including but not
limited to:
1) Doing more frequent inspections such as inline inspections and corrosion
monitoring
2) Performing Spike hydrostatic testing (SHT) to remove cracks that may fail
prematurely during operations
3) Focusing on the predictive failure modes
4) Developing engineering remedies in design, construction, inspection or
operation to reduce risk
d. The RCJ Engineering Department has identified a risk matrix that may be applicable
to the pipeline corridors per TABLE 5.7.9.G below.

Rev. 0 5.7 - 157
TABLE 5.7.9.G RISK MATRIX FOR

RC Gem

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

RC Gem

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ttt

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu.

Royal Commission in Jubail

1.2 Manual Organization

CHAPTER 2 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES

CHAPTER 3 CODES AND PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

3.1 Building Codes

3.2 Zoning Regulations

3.5 Environmental Protection and Preservation

3.6 Safety Standards

CHAPTER 4 Project Submission Standards and Requirements

4.1 Standards and Requirements

4.2 Submission Requirements

4.3 Design Phase Requirements

4.4 Field Investigations and Existing Conditions

4.5 Construction Phase Requirements

CHAPTER 5 DESIGN GUIDELINES

5.1 Design Guidelines

5.6 Civil, Sitework and Roads

5.8 Coastal Marine

Section Title Page No.

1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND .......................................................................................... 1

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

A. Responsibilities and Coordination

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

4) Exercise any health and safety management function over Contractors or

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL GUIDING PROCUREMENT AND

A. Guideline Procurement Construction Specifications

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

FIGURE 1.1.A: JUBAIL INDUSTRIAL CITY DISTRICT MAP

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

FIGURE 1.1.B: RAS AL-KHAIR DISTRICT MAP

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Section Title Page No.

1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 2

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS) and Typical Construction Detail

A. Definitions and References

A. Codes and Performance Standards

A. Project Submission Standards and Requirements

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Section Title Page No.

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Section Title Page No.